Top Banner
From: PitchforkPrimer To: TradersZone Subject: Course Information Date: Sonntag, 30. Januar 2000 01:47:24 Hello TradersZone, Glad to hear you are going to join us. Here's some more information for you. The course was designed to fill in the details of Dr. Andrew's Action/Reaction trading methods. The "Pitchfork" is his best known method. It became his namesake, and a lot of traders know what it is. What isn't generally known, however, are the rules and techniques he taught for it's use. Those rules are covered in detail in the course. Dr. Andrews also taught several other Action/Reaction trading methods. He used them in conjunction with the Pitchfork. When used together, they are a powerful combination. Those methods are also taught in the course. The course consists of six lessons; each has several parts, or teaching points. Charts, instruction, and comments are exchanged by e-mail. Each lesson costs $35.00, payable by check or money order. To enroll, simply let me know that you want to begin the course. The first segment of lesson one will be e-mailed to you shortly after you let me know your payment is in the mail. Mailing address is: Gordon DeRoos, PO Box 3555, Princeville, HI. 96722 Thanks again for your interest, and please let me know if you need more information. Sincerely, Gordon >
110

Pitchfork primer

Feb 14, 2017

Download

Economy & Finance

iamn900
Welcome message from author
This document is posted to help you gain knowledge. Please leave a comment to let me know what you think about it! Share it to your friends and learn new things together.
Transcript
Page 1: Pitchfork primer

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Course InformationDate Sonntag 30 Januar 2000 014724

Hello TradersZone Glad to hear you are going to join us Heres some more information for you The course was designed to fill in the details of Dr Andrews ActionReaction trading methods ThePitchfork is his best known method It became his namesake and a lot of traders know what it isWhat isnt generally known however are the rules and techniques he taught for its use Thoserules are covered in detail in the course Dr Andrews also taught several other ActionReaction trading methods He used them inconjunction with the Pitchfork When used together they are a powerful combination Thosemethods are also taught in the course The course consists of six lessons each has several parts or teaching points Charts instructionand comments are exchanged by e-mail Each lesson costs $3500 payable by check or money order To enroll simply let me know that youwant to begin the course The first segment of lesson one will be e-mailed to you shortly after youlet me know your payment is in the mail Mailing address is Gordon DeRoos PO Box 3555 Princeville HI 96722 Thanks again for your interest and please let me know if you need more information Sincerely Gordon gt

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Course enrollmentDate Mittwoch 2 Februar 2000 010230

At 13000 123300 PM you wrotegtI would like to begin the course I sent a money order with the paymentgtfor the first lesson todaygt gtThanksgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Glad to hear you are joining us Thank You I hope you find the course interesting and worthwhile Heres the first part of lesson 1 Regards Gordon __________________________________________________________ WELCOME TO THE PITCHFORK PRIMER STUDY COURSE THIS IS THE FIRST PARTOF LESSON ONE__________________________________________________________ Each lesson of your Pitchfork Primer Study Course is made up ofseveral parts or teaching points Each point will be introduced inseparate e-mail correspondence and will be supported by chartexamples You are encouraged to send questions and comments at anytime Also youll be asked to e-mail samples of your chart workfrom time to time Thats done to see whether clarification of ateaching point is needed Lets begin Lesson one has two main teaching points 1 Identifying Andrews pivots 2 Drawing the pitchfork Well start with a definition of the terms and abbreviations usedin this lesson ANDREWS PITCHFORK The nickname given to the unique configurationof Dr Alan H Andrews Median Line and Parallel Line formationSo named because it resembles a farmers pitchfork

PIVOT A turning pointThe extreme price on a bar or line chartwhere a change of direction takes place ML Median Line The middle line of the pitchfork MLH Median Line Parallel The outer line(s) of the Andrewspitchfork__________________________________________________________ THE PIVOT COUNTPivot counting the Andrews way is not cluttered up with a lot ofsubjective rules Once you become familiar with the count youllfind its possible to eyeball the charts and quickly findpotential buy or sell candidates By using Dr Andrews counts inyour preliminary selection checklist a considerable amount of timeand energy can be saved The pivot count quickly shows you the bestplace to draw a pitchfork as well as other Andrews linesTo begin look at any stock or commodity chart in order to spot themajor legs or waves Theyre usually pretty obvious as on theattached Network Associates chart Youll note in the definition ofcourse terms that the extreme prices of these legs or waves arecalled pivots They are numbered P1 P2 P3 and so on Dr Andrews labeled the pivot from whichhe began his count as P0 Looking at the attached Network Associates chart youll notice that prices started a move to thedownside beginning in mid to late July The move which bottomed out in early October wascomposed of 5 distinct price waves 3 in the direction of the move and 2 correction waves Thepivot count for that move was 5 as shown on the chart A point to remember is Dr Andrewsfound that most long-term and intermediate-term price moves will end with a 5 pivot count Thoseterms are relative but for our purposes the move down on the Network Associates chart will beconsidered an intermediate-term move Please study the attached chart of LSI Logic Locate and label the intermediate-term pivots as yousee them Keep Dr Andrews 5P observation in mind When ready please return your chart to meWell continue from that point__________________________________________________________

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Course enrollmentDate Mittwoch 2 Februar 2000 015929

Hello Gordon I was not sure where to put P1 so I chose the bar with the highest close gtPlease study the attached chart of LSI LogicgtLocate and label the intermediate-term pivots as you see themgtWhen ready please return your chart to me Well continue from that point

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Good callDate Mittwoch 2 Februar 2000 064819

At 2200 15900 AM you wrotegtI was not sure where to put P1 so I chose the bar with the highest close Hello TradersZone Your pivot count was by the booknice job Also your use of the highest close for pivot 1 wasexcellent logic It doesnt appear as if the count will be giving you any trouble Well be workingwith pivots throughout the course since much of Dr Andrews work was based on the oftenoverlooked importance of the interaction of various pivots on a price chart Its good to see thatyou have an early grasp of the procedure Heres the next part of the lesson Regards Gordon _________________________________________________________ Lesson One continued_________________________________________________________ Well continue to work with the NETA chart focusing on prices beginning the latter part of July98Well use our earlier pivot count to draw a pitchfork Three pivots are used when drawing the pitchfork They must be either a high low high or a lowhigh low configuration In this example we will use the P0-34 pivots as shown on the attachedchart With a ruler we locate the mid-point between the low at P3 and the high at P4 We markthat point with a small dot Then from the high at P0 we draw a line that extends through andbeyond the P34 mid-point that we marked This line is called the median line (ML) A second lineis drawn beginning at P3 and is drawn parallel to the median line A third line is drawn beginning atP4 and is also drawn parallel to the median line These lines are called parallel lines (H) Aconnecting line is then drawn from pivot 3 to pivot 4 And thats the pitchfork Its shown on theNETA chart At this point please send me a chart of your choice showing several intermediate-term pivots thatyouve marked Include at least two pitchforks Well go on from there

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Good callDate Mittwoch 2 Februar 2000 202415

Hello Gordon I have attached a chart of AET I hope its a good example RegardsTradersZone gtAt this point please send me a chart of your choice showing severalgtintermediate-term pivots that youve marked Include at least twogtpitchforks Well go on from there

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Pivots and pitchforksDate Donnerstag 3 Februar 2000 071228

At 2200 82400 PM you wrotegtI have attached a chart of AET I hope its a good examplegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone The chartwork you sent was excellentgood grasp of the count and your pitchfork procedure wascorrect Later on in the course well go over Dr Andrews techniques which will help you decidewhich pivots to use for the pitchfork that offers the best probability of staying in tune with themarkets Heres the next segment of lesson 1 Regards Gordon ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Well continue our pitchfork and pivot study using the NETA chart from the previous segment Dr Andrews noted that most sizeable price moves form 5 significant or easily recognizeable pivotsbefore reversing Some moves end with 3 pivots and occasionally youll find 7 or 9 But most hesaid will end with 5 pivots before reversing the trend under study Whenever he observed that aP4 was formed on a chart he used what he termed the 0-34 ML method to project the likely pricelevel where the P5 would form Large price reversals Dr Andrews observed often occur after a P5has formed This method is an excellent early warning signal for anticipating price reversals at a P5 The pitchfork is drawn using the P0-34 ML method as illustrated on the attached chart of NETANotice that prices reversed at the ML forming a P5 Also attached is a chart of Conseco Inc Please label the significant pivots starting at the July highand then draw one pitchfork using the 0-34 pivots and one using the 3-45 pivots Please returnyour chart along with any questions or comments

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Pivots and pitchforksDate Donnerstag 3 Februar 2000 154548

I have attached the CNC chartWhen the price moves below the P0-34 ML before making a P5 low is the lower parallel line thenext likely level where the P5 should occurOn the CNC chart the price closes above the P0-34 ML the day after breaking the ML Is that aconfirmation that the P5 low has been made

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Good QuestionsDate Freitag 4 Februar 2000 063320

At 2300 34500 PM you wrotegtI have attached the CNC chart gtWhen the price moves below the P0-34 ML before making a P5 low is thegtlower parallel line the next likely level where the P5 should occur (Thats right TradersZone The function of parallel lines is to provide the next level of support orresistance for those times when prices do not stop or reverse at the ML Dr Andrews by the waylooked for prices to reverse at any ML and form a new pivot in the process)gtOn the CNC chart the price closes above the P0-34 ML the day aftergtbreaking the ML Is that a confirmation that the P5 low has been made (That was a good sign but too close to call (imho) Please see chart for TL use as a confirmationsignal) Dr Andrews used several techniques to help him deal with probable reversalsSome are special situation type methods and others are used in conjunction with the pivot countpitchfork lines or ActionReaction lines Well be covering those rules in the last part of the course Im sending another chart for you to study and work on Please identify the main pivots in thedown move that started in April and also draw at least 2 pitchforksWhen ready please return to me Regards Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Good QuestionsDate Freitag 4 Februar 2000 191043

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Median Line TechniqueDate Sonntag 6 Februar 2000 010735

Hello TradersZone Nice work on the charts you returned Everything was by the book It appears that you have theprocedures well in hand Heres the final portion of lesson 1 The concept is basic but it does the important job of helping atrader stay on the right side of the market Will you be continuing the course Regards Gordon The first lines Dr Andrews drew on a new chart were the long-term and intermediate-term medianlines After identifying the significant pivots he drew his first median line beginning with P0-12and worked forward on the chart using each subsequent set of 3 pivots Each ML served to vectorpricesacting as a magnet if you will that drew prices towards it He said that prices will head forthe new ML over 80 of the time Parallel lines are not drawn when using this procedure Its prime function is to determine thedirection and price level of the new ML Recall that Dr Andrews anticipated a price reversal at eachnew ML The attached chart of LPX illustrates this technique Try this on some of your own charts and thenplease send me an example

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Median Line TechniqueDate Montag 7 Februar 2000 192718

I found a chart with 9 pivots I hope it doesnt matterIs it necessary that the move is made of swings with higher highs and higher lows in an uptrend (lower highs and lower lows in adowntrend)For example in the attached chart the point P6 is lower than P4 and P7 is lower than P5Another question For how long are median lines validI noticed that the P2-34 ML from my chart served as support and resistance two years later in 1998 (see attached chartLOW2GIF) but on the other hand I dont want to clutter my charts with too many lines from the past I would like to continue the course to the end I will send the money for the remaining 5 lessons tomorrow Did you receive myfirst payment yet RegardsTradersZone

LOW2GIF

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneDate Mittwoch 9 Februar 2000 054710

At 2700 72700 PM you wrotegtI found a chart with 9 pivots I hope it doesnt mattergtIs it necessary that the move is made of swings with higher highs andgthigher lows in an uptrend (lower highs and lower lows in a downtrend)gtFor example in the attached chart the point P6 is lower than P4 and P7gtis lower than P5 ( When using this ML technique TradersZone the main object is to note the price level of the newML for that is the next probable reversal area The pivots need not be in Elliott formation havingswings as you noted above Your ML procedure by the way was correct I noticed how oftenprices headed for each new ML and then reversedLater in the course well see how Dr Andrews handled those times when prices reversed beforereaching the ML area)gtAnother question For how long are median lines validgtI noticed that the P2-34 ML from my chart served as support andgtresistance two years later in 1998 (see attached chart LOW2GIF) butgton the other hand I dont want to clutter my charts with too many lines from the past (One of the interesting things about Dr Andrews lines is that no matter how far out his lines areprojected they will continue to cause prices to stall-out or reverse when reached Also wheneverseveral of his lines intersect there is a very high probability of a price reversal whether pricesconverge at the intersection or are some distancegtfrom it The probability is higher though when prices are at thegtintersecting lines A linethat has in the past provided frequent support or resistance is probably a pretty good line tokeep on your chart Youre right though charts seem to get cluttered up veryquickly)gt gtI would like to continue the course to the end I will send the moneygtfor the remaining 5 lessons tomorrow Did you receive my first payment yet (Glad to hear youre going to continue to the end Thank you for the prepayment Your first checkhasnt arrived yet will let you know when it does) Meanwhile heres the first segment of the next lesson Regards Gordon

In this lesson youll be introduced to Dr Andrews sideways count The sideways count was hisold reliable a tool that worked so well so often that it was one of the very first studies heperformed on his charts The sideways count gave him a reliable gauge that told him ahead of timehow far a stock or commodity was likely to move Sounds too good to be true perhaps but as youwork with the sideways count youll discover for yourself how often the projected price targetsare reachedoften within tics Markets frequently spend a lot of time in congestion Heres Dr Andrews way to use thatcongestion to our advantage Looking at the Brightpoint attachment please note the channel lines starting in January Youll seethat most of the pivots from Jan-May were within this channel Now look at where Ive placedcircles At each point where prices touched a channel line and then reversed direction and went allthe way back to touch the opposite channel line a circle was drawn Put another way if pricestouch one channel line but then dont go all the way back to touch the opposite channel line acircle is not drawn At first glance this technique can often be unclear so well pause here for some chart work Pleasee-mail me a chart that shows where youve drawn channel lines to identify sideways price actionand also where youve placed the channel line circles

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject ReDate Mittwoch 9 Februar 2000 184837

gtAt each point where prices touched a channel line and then reversedgtdirection and went all the way back to touch the opposite channel linegta circle was drawn Put another way if prices touch one channel linegtbut then dont go all the way back to touch the opposite channel linegta circle is not drawn Shouldnt the last circle on your Brightpoint chart be left outThe price didnt return to the opposite channel line after that day This is my chart

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Thanks for the questionDate Mittwoch 9 Februar 2000 231437

At 2900 64800 PM you wrotegtShouldnt the last circle on your Brightpoint chart be left outgtThe price didnt return to the opposite channel line after that day Hello TradersZone The last circle is appropriate but I can see where the wording in the explanation is confusing Ihave changed that paragraph to read Looking at the Brightpoint attachment please note the channel lines starting in January Youll seethat most of the pivots from Jan- May were within this channel Now look at where the circles wereplaced on the channel lines They are in alternate sequenceNote that each circle was drawn only after prices had first been at the opposite channel lineTheBrightpoint chart illustrates this procedure Thanks for pointing this out TradersZone If the wording is still unclear to you Id appreciate yourinput Meanwhile heres the next segment of this lessonRegards Gordon Well continue to use the Brightpoint chart for this portion of the sideways count study To reviewthe pattern were looking for should be a recent rectangular shaped sideways trading range thatcontains most if not all of the congestion price action Take a look at the attached chart and notehow well defined the price channel for Brightpoint is Youll probably notice that it is deeper thanthe channel you studied on the chart in the preceding segment This comparison is made toillustrate that while the first channel example covers a longer period of time the second includesall of the price ranges and is the preferred method Please look at where the circles were placed on the channel lines To review a new circle is drawnonly after prices have first been at the opposite channel line Recall that circles must be inalternate sequence eg upper linelower lineupper linelower line etc one circle at a time Note that the price range within the channel is $4 34 (High 21 12 Low 16 34) There were twocircles drawn on the lower line of our sideways channel before prices broke down Using thatinformation our next step will be to use some simple arithmetic in order to come up with twodownside price targets Well cover that procedure in the next segment Please let me know whenyou are ready to continue

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Sideways countDate Mittwoch 9 Februar 2000 232315Attachments image001png

Hi TradersZone Im returning your chartplease note comments GordonRegards Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Thanks for the questionDate Donnerstag 10 Februar 2000 233059

Hello Gordonthank you Im ready for the next lesson

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next partDate Donnerstag 10 Februar 2000 235613

At 21000 113000 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongtthank you Im ready for the next lessongt gt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt gt gt TradersZoneI sent this yesterday but will re-send It was part of my reply to your questionregarding the circle I dont have a record of your return chartwork for this part If its a duplicatesend sorry Regards Gordon Well continue to use the Brightpoint chart for this portion of the sideways count study To reviewthe pattern were looking for should be a recent rectangular shaped sideways trading range thatcontains most if not all of the congestion price action Take a look at the attached chart and notehow well defined the price channel for Brightpoint is Youll probably notice that it is deeper thanthe channel you studied on the chart in the preceding segment This comparison is made toillustrate that while the first channel example covers a longer period of time the second includesall of the price ranges and is the preferred method Please look at where the circles were placed on the channel lines To review a new circle is drawnonly after prices have first been at the opposite channel line Recall that circles must be inalternate sequence eg upper linelower lineupper linelower line etc one circle at a time Note that the price range within the channel is $4 34 (High 21 12 Low 16 34) There were twocircles drawn on the lower line of our sideways channel before prices broke down Using thatinformation our next step will be to use some simple arithmetic in order to come up with twodownside price targets Well cover that procedure in the next segment Please let me know whenyou are ready to continue

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next partDate Freitag 11 Februar 2000 234113

I think the placement of the circles is clear to me nowI have attached another chart with a sideways count RegardsTradersZone gtTradersZoneI sent this yesterday but will re-send It was part ofgtmy reply to your question regarding the circle I dont have a recordgtof your return chartwork for this part If its a duplicate send sorry

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject SidewaysDate Montag 14 Februar 2000 054227

At 21100 114100 PM you wrotegtI think the placement of the circles is clear to me nowgtI have attached another chart with a sideways countgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone Your chart was on target Looks like youre ready for the next part Here it is Regards Gordon During this segment youll learn how to arrive at two price targets using Dr Andrews sidewayscount Simple arithmetic is all thats required once the sideways channel and circles are in place Well continue to use the Brightpoint chart which is attached Note that Brightpoint fell throughthe bottom channel line at the point where we placed our second circle so figuring out possibledownside targets would have been in order at that time Heres how thats done 1 Determine the price range of the channel In this case the range is $4 34 (21 12 - 16 34) 2 Count the number of circles on the lower channel line The lower line is used in this casebecause thats the line that didnt hold Prices went through it returned to check it out and thencontinued lower 3 Multiply the price range of the channel times the number of circles drawn on the lower channelline (4 34 x 2 = 9 12) 4 Subtract that figure from the upper channel line priceThe result becomes downside price target 1 (21 12 - 9 12 = 12) 5 Next subtract that same figure from the price at the lower channel line Thats price target 2(16 34 - 9 12 = 7 14)

In the case of an upside channel breakout the procedure is reversed Please draw a few channelsand figure out some downside targets on your own charts When youre ready send me two orthree examples of your work As always send your questions as they arise

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re SidewaysDate Montag 14 Februar 2000 134314

Here are my examples I couldnt find enough charts with downside targets so I included some charts with upside targets Do the channel lines always have to be horizontal When I look at my charts I find more channels with an upward slope or adownward slope RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Sideways channelsDate Freitag 18 Februar 2000 005531

At 21400 14300 PM you wrotegtHere are my examples I couldnt find enough charts with downsidegttargets so I included some charts with upside targetsgt gtDo the channel lines always have to be horizontal When I look at mygtcharts I find more channels with an upward slope or a downward slopegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone The sideways method can be used with either up or down Sorry didnt mean to imply that only downsidetargets should be found Ill reword that portion of the lesson Thanks for mentioning it Dr Andrews sideways method works only on horizontal channels Others have mentioned the slopingchannels also and have wondered if there is some method to use with them I know of none Ive askedother course members for their ideas on how to approach this problem but so far no one has come up with amethod I would think that there should be a solution but have not personally taken the time to research itIf some method could be found that works as often as the Andrews sideways count it would be a significantfind The Andrews sideways count doesnt always hit the targets as you saw on your chart of Bausch amp Lomb Itworks more often than not though and it still amazes me at how often prices reach the targets Heres an observation to keep in mind Quite often after the first target is reached prices will reverse andhead back towards the channel At times youll note that they return inside the channel They will thenreverse again and head back towards the second price target These reversals happen frequently and presenttrading opportunities Im including the final segment of this lesson Regards Gordon So far in the course youve learned about Dr Andrews pivot counting procedure pitchfork and sidewayscount Youve noticed by now how often prices change trend at a P5 Youve seen how the 0-34 ML methodcan help locate the probable P5 area Youve seen how often price targets are met using the sideways countmethod The tendency for prices to reverse at a median line should be recognized as a high probability eventas well In coming lessons youll be shown how Dr Andrews used these and other high probability events totrade the stock and commodity markets The tools and techniques he used will help you put the finishingtouches on your market analysis using Andrews lines

Before continuing on to the next lesson lets briefly review what has so far been covered The attached chartprovides an opportunity to illustrate the methods referred to above Please draw these methods on thechart and return to me

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Sideways channelsDate Montag 21 Februar 2000 193743

gtBefore continuing on to the next lesson lets briefly review what hasgtso far been covered The attached chart provides an opportunity togtillustrate the methods referred to above Please draw these methods ongtthe chart and return to me Hello Gordonhere is my chart RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next lesson attachedDate Mittwoch 23 Februar 2000 014539

At 22100 73700 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongthere is my chartgt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Good job on the pivots sideways count and pitchforkLooks like youre ready to move on to the next part It wont be long and things will begin to fall inplace Regards Gordon Lesson 4 continued In one of his course letters Dr Andrews wrote The Law of Physics stated by Newton that Actionand Reaction are equal and opposite was first applied to prices by your Course Directors friendthe late Roger Babson who attributed his earnings of several million dollars to this law Beginning with this segment of lesson four and continuing in lesson five youll learn how to drawand apply the ActionReaction trading method as taught by Dr Andrews in his trading course The AR method requires a centerline or CL from which to start The CL can be any of thefollowing - MPL - ML - MLH - 2P line - 2 Gap line - Peak to low line - Low to peak lineThese are the primary lines that Dr Andrews used He stressed that some pencil work and a goodeyeball was needed in order to find the best fitting CL As with most other chart lines somework better than others The task is to find the best fit as he put it You will be shown examples of

each of the above CLs in this lesson and the next Determining which of the above listed lines to use as the CL is the first step in the ActionReactionmethod The solution often presents itself With a little practice a quick scan of the chart understudy will be all thats needed to spot the most likely CL Well begin with the attached chart Notethe CL drawn In this example a MPL (multi-pivot line) was used as the CL A MPL is a straightline that connects three or more consecutive pivots without passing through prices Theconnecting line is then extended Ive circled the three pivots that form the MPL on the chartThere are several other places on our chart where a MPL CL can be drawn Please bear in mindthat this is just the first step of the process Identification of likely CLs is all were after here Seeif you can locate two more then draw them in and send the chart back to me Well take up fromthere

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next lesson attachedDate Mittwoch 23 Februar 2000 212304

gtLesson 4 continuedgt gtIn one of his course letters Dr Andrews wrote The Law of Physicsgtstated by Newton that Action and Reaction are equal and opposite wasgtfirst applied to prices by your Course Directors friend the lategtRoger Babson who attributed his earnings of several million dollars to this lawgt gtBeginning with this segment of lesson four and continuing in lessongtfive youll learn how to draw and apply the ActionReaction tradinggtmethod as taught by Dr Andrews in his trading coursegt gtThe AR method requires a centerline or CL from which to startgtThe CL can be any of the followinggt - MPLgt - MLgt - MLHgt - 2P linegt - 2 Gap linegt - Peak to low linegt - Low to peak line Hello Gordon2P line 2 Gap line Peak to low line Low to peak line ndash actually I dont know what these lines areAre they discussed in Lesson 3 I believe you havenrsquot sent me this lesson yetAnyway I found two more MPLs on the Novellus Chart and drew them in RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Lesson 3Date Mittwoch 23 Februar 2000 235958

At 22300 92300 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt2P line 2 Gap line Peak to low line Low to peak line - actually I dont knowgtwhat these lines are Are they discussed in Lesson 3 I believe you didntgtsent me this lesson yetgtAnyway I found two more MPLs on the Novellus Chart and drew them ingt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone My apologiesI sent you an outdated version of the lesson Thanks for letting me know Musthave been my bedtime Heres the correct version Regards Gordon Lesson 3 In one of his course letters Dr Andrews wrote The Law of Physics stated by Newton that Actionand Reaction are equal and opposite was first applied to prices by your Course Directors friendthe late Roger Babson who attributed his earnings of several million dollars to this law In this lesson youll be introduced to the ActionReaction trading method as taught by Dr Andrewsin his trading course The AR method requires a centerline or CL from which to start The CL can be any of thefollowing - MPL Multi-pivot line A line drawn across 3 or more pivots - ML Median line The middle line of the pitchfork - MLH Median line parallel Either parallel line of the pitchfork - 2P line A line drawn across 2 pivots - 2 Gap line A line drawn connecting 2 gaps without touching prices in between - Peak to low line A line drawn connecting the high and low of a price leg

- Low to peak line A line drawn connecting the low and high of a price leg These are the primary lines that Dr Andrews used He stressed that some pencil work and a goodeyeball was needed in order to find the best fitting CL As with most other chart lines somework better than others The task is to find the best fit as he put it You will be shown examples ofeach of the above CLs Determining which of the above listed lines to use as the CL is the first step in the ActionReactionmethod With practice a quick view of the chart under study will be all thats needed to spot themost likely CL Youll be shown later how to experiment with possible combinations in order tofind the centerline that is most in tune with the market under study Well begin with the attached chart Note the CL drawn In this example a MPL (multi-pivot line)was used as the CL A MPL is a straight line that connects three or more consecutive pivotswithout passing through prices The connecting line is then extended Ive circled the three pivotsthat form the MPL on the chart There are several other places on our chart where a MPL CL canbe drawn Please bear in mind that this is just the first step of the process Identification of likelyCLs is all were after here See if you can locate two more then draw them in and send the chartback to me

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Donnerstag 24 Februar 2000 025105

At 22300 92300 PM you wroteI found two more MPLs on the Novellus Chart and drew them ingt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your mpls were correct This next segment shows the purpose of the centerline and how it isused Your payment in full arrived today TradersZone Thank you Regards Gordon Lesson 3 continued Please refer to the attached chart of Novellus The line drawn connecting the 3 circled pivots is amulti-pivot line (MPL) and represents the centerline (CL) well be using in this example Recall inthe previous segment that several types of centerlines are possible The choice is determined byexperimenting with the potential combinations on the chart under study Its best to try to locate acenterline somewhere close to the middle of the price chart in order to have sufficient past andforward data to use with the study This will become clear as you work with the method Once the centerline is drawn the next step is to locate a previous low or high pivot point to use fordrawing an action line Dr Andrews observed that the low pivot points often seem to work bestbut that either could be used In our example a line starting at the previous significant low wasdrawn parallel to the CL It is labeled A-1 (Action line 1) because it represents the first actionline Dr Andrews called it an action line because it was drawn as a result of a previous pivot (pricereversal) that had taken place Next a parallel line was drawn to the right of the CL and labeled R-1 Notice that it is the same distance from the CL as the corresponding A-1 line It is labeled R-1because it represents the first reaction line a line where prices are likely to stop or reverseNotice how prices reacted at the R-1 line in early 98 That serves as an indication that thecenterline chosen for this study should be a good one to use Not all reaction lines cause such aclear reversal as the R1 on this chart but many do Thats why its important to experiment withvarious centerline possibilities in order to find action lines that produce reaction lines which createthe greatest number of pivots or price stall-outs This experimentation is often quite time

consuming but experience has shown that it is time well spent When a centerline is found that isin tune with the price action of the issue under study it can be a highly effective tool for use inlocating probable reversal areas When combined with pitchfork lines the AR method can pinpointpotential reversal areas that are generally not recognized as such by others Dr Andrewstechniques for using the pitchfork and AR lines together are covered in later lessons In coming segments well study other lines that Dr Andrews used for his centerlines In themeantime experiment with the multi-pivot centerline on your own charts Then please send mean example of your work along with any questions you may have

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Freitag 25 Februar 2000 211356

gtIn the meantime experiment with the multi-pivot centerline on your owngtcharts Then please send me an example of your work along with anygtquestions you may have Hello Gordon I was wondering how many ActionReaction lines could be drawn on a chart On my attached chart I found at least 6 parallellines which had a significant meaning for the price RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject AR linesDate Montag 28 Februar 2000 080128

gtHello Gordongt gtI was wondering how many ActionReaction lines could be drawn on agtchart On my attached chart I found at least 6 parallel lines which hadgta significant meaning for the pricegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hi TradersZone Theres no set number of lines that can be drawnactually the more you can find the betterFinding a good centerline is the key And once you find lines that work such as you did anynumber of parallel lines can be drawn You are doing exactly what Dr Andrews didtaking thetime and effort to find the best fitting sets of lines Each chart has them and each chart is differentas Im sure youve found Nice work Heres the next part Regards Gordon Lesson 3 continued One of Dr Andrews favorite techniques dealt with gapsan often times perplexing price event formany traders His observations over the years suggested to him that while gaps show upfrequently on many price charts few traders have a method for including them as an integral partof their chart analysis Thats not surprising since not much has been published about how toapproach the use of gaps in a trading method Dr Andrews however found several ways to putprice gaps to good use An ActionReaction centerline which uses gaps as its basis is one suchmethod Please refer to the attached chart of Cendant Youll see that a centerline was drawn which passedthrough the July gap Note that it also came in contact with several pivots thereby qualifying as agapmulti-pivot centerline It is drawn by starting at the April low pivot and extending a line acrossand through the gap in mid-July It subsequently touches two additional high pivots Dr Andrews counted each gap as two pivots He noted that the more pivots a line touched the

stronger the line tended to be in the future Good reason then for using the July gap as the basisfor an ActionReaction study Our CL is labelled a gap-mpl-CL The May 98 high was used for the Action Line starting point A line was then drawn parallel to theCenterline as per ActionReaction procedure The corresponding Reaction Line was then drawn inIf this particular study had been drawn on Cendants chart right after the July gap was put in thepotential for prices to go all the way down to the Reaction Line might have seemed very slim at thetime Notice however that prices reached the Reaction Line in early September Youll see thishappen time and again as you work with the AR method The core of its effectiveness is a strongCL Please send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts of your choice

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re AR linesDate Montag 28 Februar 2000 155937

gtPlease send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts of yourgtchoice Hello Gordonhere are my examples RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject More on the ARDate Donnerstag 2 Maumlrz 2000 071158

At 22800 35900 PM you wrotegtgtPlease send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts ofgtgtyour choicegt gtHello Gordongthere are my examplesgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone You picked some good examples to use for your AR study Both showed the potential power of thismethod Takes time and lots of chart study sometimes to find the best set of lines but the rewardscan be many Heres something else to look at Regards Gordon The ActionReaction technique requires a strong centerline from which to begin The key todeciding which set of pivots to use for the centerline is found through experimenting with thevarious configurations visible on the chart under study The centerline might be a series of gapspivots an existing median line or any of Dr Andrews lines The task is to search for that centerlinewhich shows the greatest potential for projecting price reversal areas Dr Andrews did that byfinding a likely centerline near the middle of his price chart That allowed him to use any of theprevious pivots for his action lines By experimenting he found reaction lines that did the best jobof pegging reversal areas at data points located forward of the centerline Reaction lines are equal and opposite of the action lines and serve to project price levels at whicha reversal can be expected That is why the task of seeking out the best centerline is so importantDr Andrews reasoned that a series of reaction lines which have pegged price reversals in the pastis likely to continue to be in tune with current and future market price action Having severalprevious pivots to use as anchors for drawing action lines is thus essential The attached chart of Lattice illustrates this concept Please bear in mind that the gapmplcenterline is not the only centerline one could use on this chart You might want to study the chartfor other AR possibilities Try a peak-to-peak CL or a multi-pivot CL Send me your studies along

with any questions

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re More on the ARDate Samstag 4 Maumlrz 2000 002521

gtThe attached chart of Lattice illustrates this conceptgtPlease bear in mind that the gapmpl centerline is not the onlygtcenterline one could use on this chartgtYou might want to study the chart for other AR possibilitiesgtTry a peak-to-peak CL or a multi-pivot CL Send me your studiesgtalong with any questions Hello Gordonhere is my chart RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Peak to peak clDate Sonntag 5 Maumlrz 2000 064107

At 3400 122500 AM you wrotegtHello Gordongthere is my chartgt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Looks like you have the concept down Takes time and a lot of chart work to find the bestcenterline When the reaction lines dont seem to peg reversal areas chances are the centerline isnot the one that is best in tune with the price action of the issue under studyDespite the time required for this method it was one of Dr Andrews stand-bysAR lines could befound on most of his charts Im sending a chart with an example of a peak-to-peak CL Regards Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Peak to peak clDate Sonntag 5 Maumlrz 2000 171232

Hello Gordon I think the peak-to-peak CL on the last chart I sent to you was not really drawn from peak to peakIm sending another example RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next LessonDate Mittwoch 8 Maumlrz 2000 072526

At 3500 51200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtI think the peak-to-peak CL on the last chart I sent to you was notgtreally drawn from peak to peakgtIm sending another examplegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your peak to peak cl example was correctly drawn Thats a fairly simple approach but quite oftenthe peak to peak yields better reaction lines Heres the first part of the next lesson Regards Gordon Youll find times when prices dont quite reach the ML but instead drift alongside or away from itThe Schiff ML was designed to be used in place of the regular ML whenever that happens Suchprice action can be found at any place on a chart but most frequently occurs after a sharp sell-offor run-up of prices Dr Andrews also used the Schiff ML whenever his regular ML sloped at an unusually steep angleHe said it helped smooth out irregular price action such as that caused by unexpected earningsnews crop planting delays or poor growing conditions crop production reports etc Youll findnearly vertical price moves over a short period of time on many charts The Schiff ML method helpsput things back in perspective when that happens Well use the chart of Sterling Bancorp as an example of prices drifting away from the regular MLThat ML is drawn in black Prices didnt quite reach the ML but drifted alongside and eventuallyaway from it The Schiff ML and parallel lines are drawn in red Notice how prices were containedwithin the Schiff pitchfork until they finally broke down at the upper parallel line The procedure for drawing the Schiff ML is the same as for the regular ML except the startingpoint is located midway between the first 2 pivots youll be using The Sterling Bancorp chart

illustrates how this is done Dr Andrews also suggested using the Schiff ML whenever the regular ML method doesnt seem tobe in sync with price action Practice this procedure on your own charts and send a couple examples when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next LessonDate Donnerstag 9 Maumlrz 2000 001143

Hello Gordon in my charting software (Dynamic Trader) the Schiff ML is drawn by finding the midpoint of the line between pivot A and pivot Bmoving this point horizontally to directly above or below (depending on whether A is a low or high pivot) the A pivot anddrawing a line from his point through the midpoint of the BC swingAre there different methods of drawing a Schiff MLI was too lazy to draw Schiff MLs by hand with the method you described so Im sending my examples with the Dynamic TraderSchiff MLs -) RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject SchiffDate Samstag 11 Maumlrz 2000 070226

At 3900 121100 AM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtin my charting software (Dynamic Trader) the Schiff ML is drawn bygtfinding the midpoint of the line between pivot A and pivot B movinggtthis point horizontally to directly above or below (depending ongtwhether A is a low or high pivot) the A pivot and drawing a linegtgtfrom his point through the midpoint of the BC swinggtAre there different methods of drawing a Schiff MLgtI was too lazy to draw Schiff MLs by hand with the method yougtdescribed so Im sending my examples with the Dynamic Trader Schiff MLs -)gt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your program Schiff line procedure is fineits actually what Dr Andrews called a modified schiff ml and is onlyslightly different than the one I sent you initially The one you used is preferred by most course members Im sendingthe modified Schiff lesson and a chart along with this email The chart example shows how to use it with 0-34 pivots Regards Gordon

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Sliding Parallel LineDate Montag 13 Maumlrz 2000 005252

Hello TradersZone Heres one of the tools Dr Andrews used most often when entering exiting or reversing marketpositions Not many people know about this technique Regards Gordon The Sliding Parallel (SH) is drawn whenever prices cross an Andrews line and then move along itFor example if the bottom of a daily price bar range drops through a lower parallel line of apitchfork a new parallel line is then drawn from that low and extended to the right If the nextdays price bar drops through that sliding parallel line a sell signal is generated Whenever price action dictates a sliding parallel the next step is to draw a Warning Line Thewarning line is an additional parallel line that is an image extension of the original pitchforkchannels It serves as a warning that if prices penetrate the sliding parallel the next likely target isthe WL The attached chart of Avis illustrates these procedures Please try these on your own charts andsend me an example

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Sliding Parallel LineDate Dienstag 14 Maumlrz 2000 225737

Hello Gordon this is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning line RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 065606

At 31400 105700 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtthis is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning linegt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone Your chart of circuit city was a good example for this study I may have mentioned it earlier but DrAndrews used this technique on a regular basis The next part of this lesson covers another of hisfavorite tools the mini-median line pitchfork Here it is Regards Gordon The Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry and exit tools Though mostoften drawn using alternate closing prices alternate highs and lows can also be usedin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days is usually the maximumbetween pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or more back from P2 Dr Andrews used Mini-Median Line pitchforks for buy and sell signals whenever he expected areversal Some examples include a probable P5 or when prices are at a Warning Line ML MLHmajor ML extension or a sideways channel price target When prices cross the Mini-Median LineParallel (MMLH) a sliding parallel (SH) is used for order entry

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 231537

gtThe Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry andgtexit tools Though most often drawn using alternate closing pricesgtalternate highs and lows can also be usedgtin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days isgtusually the maximum between pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or moregtback from P2

Hello Gordon

wouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timingCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available whenDr Andrews was alive

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject intraday chartsDate Samstag 18 Maumlrz 2000 012400

At 31600 111500 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongtgtwouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsgtinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timinggtCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available when DrgtAndrews was alivegtgtRegardsgtTradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Youre absolutely correctintraday charts were not available when DrAndrews was a trader

Im reading between the lines here but if you plan to day-trade using the course techniques ie thepitchfork then I agree that the regular pitchfork would be more useful on intraday charts Otherwisewhipsaw would be a significant problem Please get back to me if I didnt address your questionbecause this is a very important technique The mini-median line pitchfork and sliding parallel showedup on most of Dr Andrews charts

Regards

Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re intraday chartsDate Dienstag 21 Maumlrz 2000 220322

Hello Gordon

You are right Im planning to daytrade SampP futures using the course techniques among other things

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 003408

Hi TradersZone Here are a couple Andrews techniques that will help anticipate the breakout direction of asideways channelThey work often enough to warrant keep handy Regards Gordon In an earlier lesson you were introduced to Dr Andrews sideways count You saw how frequentlythe sideways count method provided high probability price objectives after the breakout from theestablished channel took place In this segment of lesson 4 youll be shown 2 congestion area techniques that can help youdetermine the probable sideways channel price breakout direction Both rely on the use of pivots The first uses the pivot points that are circled on a sideways channel Dr Andrews observed thatwhenever a sideways channel results in at least 5 circle contacts the eventual price breakoutwould very often be in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle If circle 5 is at thetop of the channel for example the eventual price breakout would likely be to the upside If circle5 is at the bottom of the channel look for a downside breakout Dr Andrews noted that thistechnique can be subject to false breakouts but that such breakouts are usually followed shortlyafter with a confirmed breakout in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle Heemphasized that this study is best considered as a rule of thumb observation He viewed it as asupporting indicator for use with a short-term pitchfork as prices approached a channel line There are 2 charts attached that show how this works

The second technique in this part of lesson 4 deals with a sideways channelthat is building shortly after a P3 has been formed Dr Andrews noted thatwhenever that happened the probabilities were high that prices wouldbreakout in the same direction they were moving prior to the formation ofthe sideways channel The attached P3 to sideways example chart shows thisprocedure

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 205235

Hello Gordon here is my example for the 5 circle sideways count RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Lesson 5Date Montag 27 Maumlrz 2000 060731

At 32400 85200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my example for the 5 circle sideways countgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt gt Hi TradersZone Good example of the 5th circle tendency to predict the direction of a sideways breakout Any luckfinding a chart showing the P3 to sideways rule Im sending the first part of the next lesson This trendline method is a useful tool with all of DrAndrews course lines He used it all the time but especially when looking for confirmation of othercourse method trading signals Regards Gordon The Course Trendline__________________________________________________________ Next well discuss the trendline Seasoned traders agree that the trendline is one of their mostimportant tools No matter what kind of trading program or technique they use the trendline on achart is a must But one of the biggest mistakes made by amateurs and professionals alike isinconsistently drawing or defining the trendline Dr Andrews trendline procedure is simpleconsistent and accurate It works extremely well with the pivot count and with the pitchfork For an uptrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the lowest low up and to thehighest minor low point preceding the highest high The line must not pass through prices inbetween the two low points Extend the line(Attached chart of Brightpoint) For a downtrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the highest high point to thelowest minor high point preceding the lowest low so that it does not pass through prices inbetween the two high points Extend the line (Brightpoint chart) Thats all theres to it Its simple consistent and it works well with other Andrews lines It also

helps eliminate personal bias and haphazard analysis Practice drawing these trendlines on your own charts Send me any questions you might have andthen e-mail a chart of your choosing which shows at least two uptrend and two downtrend linesthat youve drawn_______________________________________________________________________

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Lesson 5Date Dienstag 28 Maumlrz 2000 120224

Hello Gordon here is my chart with trendlinesWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going above the trendline again should I draw a new trendline anddelete the old one Attached is another chart with the P3 to sideways rule I finally found an example for it RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Price failure techniqueDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081412

At 32800 120200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my chart with trendlinesgtWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going abovegtthe trendline again should I draw a new trendline and delete the oldgtone Hi TradersZone Take a look at the chart Im returningI added some lines for you to considerWith the course trendline once its broken a new one should be started Theres a technique thatties in with this coming up soon Meanwhile heres an important technique to work on It deals with those times when prices dontreach the ML Regards Gordon Dr Andrews Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P ofreversaland the ML the probability is that this price reversal will go further thanitdid on its approach toward the ML (Extract of original course material) A price failure very often indicates a sizeable reversal will take placeThepitchforks drawn on the chart of Home Depot illustrate the concept of pricefailure Dr Andrews routinely drew a new pitchfork on his chart after a newsignificant pivot had formed He knew that prices had a high probability ofreaching the new ML before stalling out or reversing If prices reversedbeforereaching the ML thereby forming a new pivot he termed it a price failureTheunderlying idea here is that Dr Andrews fully anticipated his median linewouldact as a price magnet To conclude that a price reversal resulted in a price failure Dr Andrewsused

these primary signalsa subsequent price penetration of a short-termmulti-pivotline andor a return of prices to and penetration of the parallel lineformed atpivot 3 of the pitchfork (The circles on the Home Depot chart denote theparallelline penetration signal To avoid clutter the mpl lines were not drawn) One possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart of ConsecoIncLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me a copy

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject ChartDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081800Attachments image002png

Hi TradersZone Forgot the chart Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Price failure techniqueDate Samstag 1 April 2000 201000

gtOne possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart ofgtConseco IncgtLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me agtcopy Hi Gordon here are my charts with price failures RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Mittwoch 5 April 2000 235624

Hi TradersZone Good price failure examples you sentany comments or questions about it Heres the next partanother old standby Dr Andrews kept handy Regards Gordon In this segment youll learn how to use the Fan line Technique To draw the fan lines youll apply the coursetrendline method which was introduced in an earlier lesson It might be well to emphasize that the practicalapplication of the course trendline method requires practice and experience both of which will serve youwell in this technique Dr Andrews used fan lines as an adjunct to his pitchfork sideways channel andactionreaction methods In the fan line study three trendlines are drawn from the original reversal pivot of the price correction understudy typically a P0 or a P5 Youll notice on the charts included with this study that each fan line is at aflatter angle than its predecessor When the third fan line is broken the rule is that the correction has endedand a new trend is under way Try this technique on some of your own charts and then please send me asample

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Donnerstag 6 April 2000 234315

Hi Gordon No I dont have any specific question about the price failure technique I guess the next likely target after a price failure wouldbe the warning line I have attached two charts with fan linesIs it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the third fan line is broken RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Next segmentDate Freitag 7 April 2000 003312

Hello TradersZone

Tuesday April 06 2000 114315 AM you wrote

TZgt Hi Gordon

TZgt No I dont have any specific question about the price failureTZgt technique I guess the next likely target after a price failureTZgt would be the warning line

TZgt I have attached two charts with fan linesTZgt Is it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the thirdTZgt fan line is broken

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Thats right the warning line is the next price target Additionalwarning lines can be drawn if needed but usually one will do it Ifprices go through the first warning line another can be drawn butmost likely a new pitchfork could be drawn instead which would bepreferable Helps stay current with recently formed pivots

When prices break through the third fan line a buy or sell signal isgiven Not sure what you mean by fourth target fan line Im a littledense today

Your chart work was goodthis is another handy tool for spotting thehigh probability of a price reversal or trend change

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject The Gap TradeDate Freitag 7 April 2000 004858

Hello TradersZone This trading signal doesnt show up very often but past observations have shown that its well worth watching for Dr Andrews placed a lot of emphasis on the importance of price gaps something many traders overlook This is one of his gap uses Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom The Gap Trading Technique Price gaps can be a dilemma for many traders The general rule denoting market strength or weakness after ahigh volume gap often comes up short after the initial reaction is over Many gappers simply run out ofsteam A high volume gap in itself seems to offer precious little evidence that a profitable move is about toget under way Dr Andrews used price gaps somewhat differently than others He counted a gap as 2 pivots Youll see howthat works in the following technique which uses a gap to arrive at a price level for a buy or sell order Using short-term daily price pivots label the pivot immediately preceding the gap as p0 Count the gap as 2pivots labeling it p1 amp p2 After p3 has formed and prices reverse towards a short-term p4 draw a horizontalline 2 price tics or more (individual preference)to the right of p3 Enter the market only if prices reach orpenetrate that line within a few days after reversing from p4 Please look over your own charts to see if you can find places where the gap trade technique could have beenused Send me a sample when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 001925

Hello Gordon this is my chart with a gap trade RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 065538

Hello TradersZone Thursday April 08 2000 121925 PM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt this is my chart with a gap trade TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Good examplethe gap trade technique shines when an issue in at or near a P5 Similar to the one on thechart you sent Heres another trading signal tool Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Dr Andrews used several techniques which helped him determine whether a P5 was near at hand Youllrecall that he observed most price moves ended or had a significant reversal at a P5 This technique uses alternate closing prices after a P4 has been formed As with many of his studies thenumber 5 is used The chart accompanying this segment shows that there were 5 alternate closes to thedownside after P4 was put in Dr Andrews noted that whenever 5 or more alternate closes followed a P4 theprobabilities were high that a P5 was near at hand An added feature to this chart study is the sideways channel Notice how the 2nd target price and the 5thalternate close nearly coincide

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 12 April 2000 200730

Hello Gordon This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 13 April 2000 082418

Monday April 12 2000 80730 AM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hello TradersZone Good chart example of this Andrews toolanother of his very unusual observations that workmore often than not Heres the final part of this lesson Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom In this trendline method Dr Andrews once again used the number 5 as the basis for locating aprobable reversal area He found this technique to be especially useful whenever a clear orobvious pivot count didnt show up onthe price move under study Trendlines are drawn using the course trendline method When the 5th trendline is broken theprobability is high that the trend under study has ended A mini-median line pitchfork andorsliding parallel could be used for pricing a trading order The accompanying chart of Compaq Computer is an example of how the trendline study could beused The pivot count beginning at the October low is difficult to nail down There were severalsmall areas of congestion but no sizeable corrections while prices advanced The count wasunclear By following the price action using the course trendline technique however the traderwould have been alerted to the possibility of a change of trend when the 5th trendline was brokenin early February Try this technique on your own charts When youre ready please send me an example of yourstudy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 19 April 2000 124108

Hello Gordon this is my example with 5 trendlines RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[6] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 20 April 2000 012726

Monday April 19 2000 124108 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt this is my example with 5 trendlines

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Good example of the 5 TL technique Always reminds me of how the fairly simple tools often do a better job than manyof the sophisticated studies out there

That was the last part of lesson 5 Lesson 6 attached is made in one mailing Youll find Dr Andrews trading rules alongwith a wrap-up review which uses several of his rules You might have questions about some of the rules so feel free tosend them as they arise

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Dr Andrews had an abbreviated set of trading rules on several index cards that he carried around with him in his shirtpocket He said every trading day turned up something new on his charts and by having his rules in his pocket he wasreminded of the need for a methodical approach to his analysis Quite a comment coming from the man who wrote therule book

In this the final lesson of the course Dr Andrews original trading rules and observations are presented Lets work witha few of them at this point

Using charts of issues you follow please send me an example that illustrates your interpretation of each of the followingrules

Rule 4 Anticipating major Ps

Rule 7 Penetration rule

Rule 8 Price failure rule

Rule 11 1-ML23 AR Centerline

Rule 12 Sliding Parallel rule

Rule 15 Mini-median line parallel to buy or sell

Feel free to include any other course techniques you choose to apply but please include examples of the above as aminimum Use more than one technique on a chart if your analysis supports it Send as many charts as you like alongwith your questionscomments

Lesson 6 - Dr Andrews Trading Rules

This lesson covers course rules and significant observations as taught by Dr Andrews in his original trading course Therules are those that he used in his own trading and are provided to serve as a checklist for use with the course tradingmethods youve learned

Rule 1 Where prices are always headed Rule You course members are among the fortunate few to be able to draw astraight line and know that prices are headed toward that ML Very few investors have ever applied this ML principle ofstatistics to price fluctuations and weve never seen this in any books on investment You are among the very few who

know that prices are always headed toward the newest ML

Rule 2 The Rule of coming opposites applies all through life In the bible we find Blessed at they that mourn for theyshall be comforted As investors we know that any losses can be recovered by using course methods

Rule 3 Turn your mind about or Rethink for all good is at hand We should mentally prepare ourselves for thecoming reversal in prices and other affairs Heres one way for example that you course members who know the MLrules can use When prices are skyrocketing upward we do this preparation by thinking If prices pivoted here today atthis price Id draw a new ML bisecting the distance between todays price and the price from which the rise started Andwe know now that if this is a Major Pivot prices will fall rapidly to this new ML Profits from such drops are big and quick

Rule 4 Rule for anticipating major Ps If during congestion or after a rally or decline you can count four previous Psthe fifth one is highly probable to be the one from which a new trend starts

Rule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can make a quick big profit is to watch for the EPformations

Rule 6 The other reversal rule is that prices tend to reverse at or near any ML as well as at any extension of each MLAnd also at any MLH or extensions of MLH

Rule 7 The Penetration Rule is that whenever prices gap past or plunge through any ML there is a high probability thatthey will quickly return to it temporarily and then resume the trend they had before they gapped or plunged through

Rule 8 Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P of reversal and the MLthe probability is that this price reversal will go further than it did on its approach toward the ML

Rule 9 The price failure rule is negated when the next price trend is also a failure in reaching the ML This is almostinvariably a signal of a big fast move in the direction indicated by this last space Rule 10 When alternate median lines of comparable length slope in the same direction the trend is firm and rapidprice changes take place

Rule 11 When 1-ML23 is exactly reached at P4 it can be used as a highly reliable centerline for the AR method

Rule 12 Frequently after crossing a lower MLH prices continue to rise along the MLH Since the crossing of the MLHsignals a further drop is likely use a sliding parallel along the bottom of the most recent crossing If prices drop past thatsliding parallel line a sell signal is generated

Rule 13 MLs between P2 and P3 can start from a nearby or a remote P1 since prices tend to reverse at each of theseMLs Try several such P2-P3 MLs to discover the best fit

Rule 14 The distance of each MLH from its ML is the distance of the next warning line Use these warning lineswhenever a SH has signalled a buy or sell

Rule 15 Use the MMLH as a buy or sell signal when you expect a reversal because of a P5 Also when prices are at aWL ML extension line or where course lines converge or intersect

Rule 16 Converging lines that meet prices have shown the highest probability of a trend reversal

Rule 17 Two to four days is usually the maximum between P2 and P3 for a MML P1 can be a day or so back from P2and 3

Rule 18 The most reliable ActionReaction centerlines seem to be MPL 2P line 2 Gap line peak to low or low to peak

Rule 19 When prices pass through R lines look for a pull back and then a continuing move in the direction of the passthrough

Rule 20 Use gaps as Action lines from the centerline

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 003755

Hello Gordonhere is my example for Rule 4 And I have a question What are EP formations gtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 021242

Tuesday May 04 2000 123755 PM you wrote TZgt Hello GordonTZgt here is my example for Rule 4 TZgt And I have a question What are EP formations gtgtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegtgta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hi TradersZone Good use of the warning linesalso the EP material is part of lesson 4 Rather than go backthrough the files to see when (or if) it was sent Im sending it along with this reply Glad youbrought it up Best RegardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Tuesday May 04 2000208 PM Dr Andrews used a fairly common price chart formation that he found useful at probable P5market tops and bottoms The formation generally called a wedge or pennant by chartists isreferred to in Dr Andrews trading course as the Expanding Pivot (EP) One of the few chartformations used in the course he regarded it as among the most dependable indications that amarket top was forming Closely related to the EP is his Inverted Expanding Pivot (IEP) which henoted could often be observed at market bottoms Both are regarded as intermediate and long-term reversal indicators Dr Andrews found that both formations were most reliable when they occurred after a sharprapid price move coinciding with the formation of a probable P5 He said it wasnt unusual for theformation to take several weeks to complete and that conservative traders could best avoid thewhipsaw associated with congestion patterns by trading only in the direction of the probable price

break out of the EP or IEP formation The attached charts illustrate these formations Please look over your own charts for an example ofthe EP and IEP and send me a copy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 232127

Hello Gordon Thank you for the lesson with the EP material I couldnt find it in any previous emailHere is my example for Rule 7 RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Rule 4Date Samstag 6 Mai 2000 080827

Wednesday May 05 2000 112127 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt Thank you for the lesson with the EP materialTZgt I couldnt find it in any previous emailTZgt Here is my example for Rule 7

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hi TradersZone

Glad you mentioned it earlierexcept for the EP IEP and hissideways channel Dr Andrews didnt have much to say about chartpatterns and formations These are good ones to use though

Your study of the penetration rule was good Later

Best Regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Wednesday May 05 2000801 PM

Page 2: Pitchfork primer

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Course enrollmentDate Mittwoch 2 Februar 2000 010230

At 13000 123300 PM you wrotegtI would like to begin the course I sent a money order with the paymentgtfor the first lesson todaygt gtThanksgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Glad to hear you are joining us Thank You I hope you find the course interesting and worthwhile Heres the first part of lesson 1 Regards Gordon __________________________________________________________ WELCOME TO THE PITCHFORK PRIMER STUDY COURSE THIS IS THE FIRST PARTOF LESSON ONE__________________________________________________________ Each lesson of your Pitchfork Primer Study Course is made up ofseveral parts or teaching points Each point will be introduced inseparate e-mail correspondence and will be supported by chartexamples You are encouraged to send questions and comments at anytime Also youll be asked to e-mail samples of your chart workfrom time to time Thats done to see whether clarification of ateaching point is needed Lets begin Lesson one has two main teaching points 1 Identifying Andrews pivots 2 Drawing the pitchfork Well start with a definition of the terms and abbreviations usedin this lesson ANDREWS PITCHFORK The nickname given to the unique configurationof Dr Alan H Andrews Median Line and Parallel Line formationSo named because it resembles a farmers pitchfork

PIVOT A turning pointThe extreme price on a bar or line chartwhere a change of direction takes place ML Median Line The middle line of the pitchfork MLH Median Line Parallel The outer line(s) of the Andrewspitchfork__________________________________________________________ THE PIVOT COUNTPivot counting the Andrews way is not cluttered up with a lot ofsubjective rules Once you become familiar with the count youllfind its possible to eyeball the charts and quickly findpotential buy or sell candidates By using Dr Andrews counts inyour preliminary selection checklist a considerable amount of timeand energy can be saved The pivot count quickly shows you the bestplace to draw a pitchfork as well as other Andrews linesTo begin look at any stock or commodity chart in order to spot themajor legs or waves Theyre usually pretty obvious as on theattached Network Associates chart Youll note in the definition ofcourse terms that the extreme prices of these legs or waves arecalled pivots They are numbered P1 P2 P3 and so on Dr Andrews labeled the pivot from whichhe began his count as P0 Looking at the attached Network Associates chart youll notice that prices started a move to thedownside beginning in mid to late July The move which bottomed out in early October wascomposed of 5 distinct price waves 3 in the direction of the move and 2 correction waves Thepivot count for that move was 5 as shown on the chart A point to remember is Dr Andrewsfound that most long-term and intermediate-term price moves will end with a 5 pivot count Thoseterms are relative but for our purposes the move down on the Network Associates chart will beconsidered an intermediate-term move Please study the attached chart of LSI Logic Locate and label the intermediate-term pivots as yousee them Keep Dr Andrews 5P observation in mind When ready please return your chart to meWell continue from that point__________________________________________________________

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Course enrollmentDate Mittwoch 2 Februar 2000 015929

Hello Gordon I was not sure where to put P1 so I chose the bar with the highest close gtPlease study the attached chart of LSI LogicgtLocate and label the intermediate-term pivots as you see themgtWhen ready please return your chart to me Well continue from that point

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Good callDate Mittwoch 2 Februar 2000 064819

At 2200 15900 AM you wrotegtI was not sure where to put P1 so I chose the bar with the highest close Hello TradersZone Your pivot count was by the booknice job Also your use of the highest close for pivot 1 wasexcellent logic It doesnt appear as if the count will be giving you any trouble Well be workingwith pivots throughout the course since much of Dr Andrews work was based on the oftenoverlooked importance of the interaction of various pivots on a price chart Its good to see thatyou have an early grasp of the procedure Heres the next part of the lesson Regards Gordon _________________________________________________________ Lesson One continued_________________________________________________________ Well continue to work with the NETA chart focusing on prices beginning the latter part of July98Well use our earlier pivot count to draw a pitchfork Three pivots are used when drawing the pitchfork They must be either a high low high or a lowhigh low configuration In this example we will use the P0-34 pivots as shown on the attachedchart With a ruler we locate the mid-point between the low at P3 and the high at P4 We markthat point with a small dot Then from the high at P0 we draw a line that extends through andbeyond the P34 mid-point that we marked This line is called the median line (ML) A second lineis drawn beginning at P3 and is drawn parallel to the median line A third line is drawn beginning atP4 and is also drawn parallel to the median line These lines are called parallel lines (H) Aconnecting line is then drawn from pivot 3 to pivot 4 And thats the pitchfork Its shown on theNETA chart At this point please send me a chart of your choice showing several intermediate-term pivots thatyouve marked Include at least two pitchforks Well go on from there

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Good callDate Mittwoch 2 Februar 2000 202415

Hello Gordon I have attached a chart of AET I hope its a good example RegardsTradersZone gtAt this point please send me a chart of your choice showing severalgtintermediate-term pivots that youve marked Include at least twogtpitchforks Well go on from there

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Pivots and pitchforksDate Donnerstag 3 Februar 2000 071228

At 2200 82400 PM you wrotegtI have attached a chart of AET I hope its a good examplegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone The chartwork you sent was excellentgood grasp of the count and your pitchfork procedure wascorrect Later on in the course well go over Dr Andrews techniques which will help you decidewhich pivots to use for the pitchfork that offers the best probability of staying in tune with themarkets Heres the next segment of lesson 1 Regards Gordon ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Well continue our pitchfork and pivot study using the NETA chart from the previous segment Dr Andrews noted that most sizeable price moves form 5 significant or easily recognizeable pivotsbefore reversing Some moves end with 3 pivots and occasionally youll find 7 or 9 But most hesaid will end with 5 pivots before reversing the trend under study Whenever he observed that aP4 was formed on a chart he used what he termed the 0-34 ML method to project the likely pricelevel where the P5 would form Large price reversals Dr Andrews observed often occur after a P5has formed This method is an excellent early warning signal for anticipating price reversals at a P5 The pitchfork is drawn using the P0-34 ML method as illustrated on the attached chart of NETANotice that prices reversed at the ML forming a P5 Also attached is a chart of Conseco Inc Please label the significant pivots starting at the July highand then draw one pitchfork using the 0-34 pivots and one using the 3-45 pivots Please returnyour chart along with any questions or comments

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Pivots and pitchforksDate Donnerstag 3 Februar 2000 154548

I have attached the CNC chartWhen the price moves below the P0-34 ML before making a P5 low is the lower parallel line thenext likely level where the P5 should occurOn the CNC chart the price closes above the P0-34 ML the day after breaking the ML Is that aconfirmation that the P5 low has been made

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Good QuestionsDate Freitag 4 Februar 2000 063320

At 2300 34500 PM you wrotegtI have attached the CNC chart gtWhen the price moves below the P0-34 ML before making a P5 low is thegtlower parallel line the next likely level where the P5 should occur (Thats right TradersZone The function of parallel lines is to provide the next level of support orresistance for those times when prices do not stop or reverse at the ML Dr Andrews by the waylooked for prices to reverse at any ML and form a new pivot in the process)gtOn the CNC chart the price closes above the P0-34 ML the day aftergtbreaking the ML Is that a confirmation that the P5 low has been made (That was a good sign but too close to call (imho) Please see chart for TL use as a confirmationsignal) Dr Andrews used several techniques to help him deal with probable reversalsSome are special situation type methods and others are used in conjunction with the pivot countpitchfork lines or ActionReaction lines Well be covering those rules in the last part of the course Im sending another chart for you to study and work on Please identify the main pivots in thedown move that started in April and also draw at least 2 pitchforksWhen ready please return to me Regards Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Good QuestionsDate Freitag 4 Februar 2000 191043

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Median Line TechniqueDate Sonntag 6 Februar 2000 010735

Hello TradersZone Nice work on the charts you returned Everything was by the book It appears that you have theprocedures well in hand Heres the final portion of lesson 1 The concept is basic but it does the important job of helping atrader stay on the right side of the market Will you be continuing the course Regards Gordon The first lines Dr Andrews drew on a new chart were the long-term and intermediate-term medianlines After identifying the significant pivots he drew his first median line beginning with P0-12and worked forward on the chart using each subsequent set of 3 pivots Each ML served to vectorpricesacting as a magnet if you will that drew prices towards it He said that prices will head forthe new ML over 80 of the time Parallel lines are not drawn when using this procedure Its prime function is to determine thedirection and price level of the new ML Recall that Dr Andrews anticipated a price reversal at eachnew ML The attached chart of LPX illustrates this technique Try this on some of your own charts and thenplease send me an example

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Median Line TechniqueDate Montag 7 Februar 2000 192718

I found a chart with 9 pivots I hope it doesnt matterIs it necessary that the move is made of swings with higher highs and higher lows in an uptrend (lower highs and lower lows in adowntrend)For example in the attached chart the point P6 is lower than P4 and P7 is lower than P5Another question For how long are median lines validI noticed that the P2-34 ML from my chart served as support and resistance two years later in 1998 (see attached chartLOW2GIF) but on the other hand I dont want to clutter my charts with too many lines from the past I would like to continue the course to the end I will send the money for the remaining 5 lessons tomorrow Did you receive myfirst payment yet RegardsTradersZone

LOW2GIF

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneDate Mittwoch 9 Februar 2000 054710

At 2700 72700 PM you wrotegtI found a chart with 9 pivots I hope it doesnt mattergtIs it necessary that the move is made of swings with higher highs andgthigher lows in an uptrend (lower highs and lower lows in a downtrend)gtFor example in the attached chart the point P6 is lower than P4 and P7gtis lower than P5 ( When using this ML technique TradersZone the main object is to note the price level of the newML for that is the next probable reversal area The pivots need not be in Elliott formation havingswings as you noted above Your ML procedure by the way was correct I noticed how oftenprices headed for each new ML and then reversedLater in the course well see how Dr Andrews handled those times when prices reversed beforereaching the ML area)gtAnother question For how long are median lines validgtI noticed that the P2-34 ML from my chart served as support andgtresistance two years later in 1998 (see attached chart LOW2GIF) butgton the other hand I dont want to clutter my charts with too many lines from the past (One of the interesting things about Dr Andrews lines is that no matter how far out his lines areprojected they will continue to cause prices to stall-out or reverse when reached Also wheneverseveral of his lines intersect there is a very high probability of a price reversal whether pricesconverge at the intersection or are some distancegtfrom it The probability is higher though when prices are at thegtintersecting lines A linethat has in the past provided frequent support or resistance is probably a pretty good line tokeep on your chart Youre right though charts seem to get cluttered up veryquickly)gt gtI would like to continue the course to the end I will send the moneygtfor the remaining 5 lessons tomorrow Did you receive my first payment yet (Glad to hear youre going to continue to the end Thank you for the prepayment Your first checkhasnt arrived yet will let you know when it does) Meanwhile heres the first segment of the next lesson Regards Gordon

In this lesson youll be introduced to Dr Andrews sideways count The sideways count was hisold reliable a tool that worked so well so often that it was one of the very first studies heperformed on his charts The sideways count gave him a reliable gauge that told him ahead of timehow far a stock or commodity was likely to move Sounds too good to be true perhaps but as youwork with the sideways count youll discover for yourself how often the projected price targetsare reachedoften within tics Markets frequently spend a lot of time in congestion Heres Dr Andrews way to use thatcongestion to our advantage Looking at the Brightpoint attachment please note the channel lines starting in January Youll seethat most of the pivots from Jan-May were within this channel Now look at where Ive placedcircles At each point where prices touched a channel line and then reversed direction and went allthe way back to touch the opposite channel line a circle was drawn Put another way if pricestouch one channel line but then dont go all the way back to touch the opposite channel line acircle is not drawn At first glance this technique can often be unclear so well pause here for some chart work Pleasee-mail me a chart that shows where youve drawn channel lines to identify sideways price actionand also where youve placed the channel line circles

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject ReDate Mittwoch 9 Februar 2000 184837

gtAt each point where prices touched a channel line and then reversedgtdirection and went all the way back to touch the opposite channel linegta circle was drawn Put another way if prices touch one channel linegtbut then dont go all the way back to touch the opposite channel linegta circle is not drawn Shouldnt the last circle on your Brightpoint chart be left outThe price didnt return to the opposite channel line after that day This is my chart

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Thanks for the questionDate Mittwoch 9 Februar 2000 231437

At 2900 64800 PM you wrotegtShouldnt the last circle on your Brightpoint chart be left outgtThe price didnt return to the opposite channel line after that day Hello TradersZone The last circle is appropriate but I can see where the wording in the explanation is confusing Ihave changed that paragraph to read Looking at the Brightpoint attachment please note the channel lines starting in January Youll seethat most of the pivots from Jan- May were within this channel Now look at where the circles wereplaced on the channel lines They are in alternate sequenceNote that each circle was drawn only after prices had first been at the opposite channel lineTheBrightpoint chart illustrates this procedure Thanks for pointing this out TradersZone If the wording is still unclear to you Id appreciate yourinput Meanwhile heres the next segment of this lessonRegards Gordon Well continue to use the Brightpoint chart for this portion of the sideways count study To reviewthe pattern were looking for should be a recent rectangular shaped sideways trading range thatcontains most if not all of the congestion price action Take a look at the attached chart and notehow well defined the price channel for Brightpoint is Youll probably notice that it is deeper thanthe channel you studied on the chart in the preceding segment This comparison is made toillustrate that while the first channel example covers a longer period of time the second includesall of the price ranges and is the preferred method Please look at where the circles were placed on the channel lines To review a new circle is drawnonly after prices have first been at the opposite channel line Recall that circles must be inalternate sequence eg upper linelower lineupper linelower line etc one circle at a time Note that the price range within the channel is $4 34 (High 21 12 Low 16 34) There were twocircles drawn on the lower line of our sideways channel before prices broke down Using thatinformation our next step will be to use some simple arithmetic in order to come up with twodownside price targets Well cover that procedure in the next segment Please let me know whenyou are ready to continue

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Sideways countDate Mittwoch 9 Februar 2000 232315Attachments image001png

Hi TradersZone Im returning your chartplease note comments GordonRegards Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Thanks for the questionDate Donnerstag 10 Februar 2000 233059

Hello Gordonthank you Im ready for the next lesson

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next partDate Donnerstag 10 Februar 2000 235613

At 21000 113000 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongtthank you Im ready for the next lessongt gt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt gt gt TradersZoneI sent this yesterday but will re-send It was part of my reply to your questionregarding the circle I dont have a record of your return chartwork for this part If its a duplicatesend sorry Regards Gordon Well continue to use the Brightpoint chart for this portion of the sideways count study To reviewthe pattern were looking for should be a recent rectangular shaped sideways trading range thatcontains most if not all of the congestion price action Take a look at the attached chart and notehow well defined the price channel for Brightpoint is Youll probably notice that it is deeper thanthe channel you studied on the chart in the preceding segment This comparison is made toillustrate that while the first channel example covers a longer period of time the second includesall of the price ranges and is the preferred method Please look at where the circles were placed on the channel lines To review a new circle is drawnonly after prices have first been at the opposite channel line Recall that circles must be inalternate sequence eg upper linelower lineupper linelower line etc one circle at a time Note that the price range within the channel is $4 34 (High 21 12 Low 16 34) There were twocircles drawn on the lower line of our sideways channel before prices broke down Using thatinformation our next step will be to use some simple arithmetic in order to come up with twodownside price targets Well cover that procedure in the next segment Please let me know whenyou are ready to continue

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next partDate Freitag 11 Februar 2000 234113

I think the placement of the circles is clear to me nowI have attached another chart with a sideways count RegardsTradersZone gtTradersZoneI sent this yesterday but will re-send It was part ofgtmy reply to your question regarding the circle I dont have a recordgtof your return chartwork for this part If its a duplicate send sorry

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject SidewaysDate Montag 14 Februar 2000 054227

At 21100 114100 PM you wrotegtI think the placement of the circles is clear to me nowgtI have attached another chart with a sideways countgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone Your chart was on target Looks like youre ready for the next part Here it is Regards Gordon During this segment youll learn how to arrive at two price targets using Dr Andrews sidewayscount Simple arithmetic is all thats required once the sideways channel and circles are in place Well continue to use the Brightpoint chart which is attached Note that Brightpoint fell throughthe bottom channel line at the point where we placed our second circle so figuring out possibledownside targets would have been in order at that time Heres how thats done 1 Determine the price range of the channel In this case the range is $4 34 (21 12 - 16 34) 2 Count the number of circles on the lower channel line The lower line is used in this casebecause thats the line that didnt hold Prices went through it returned to check it out and thencontinued lower 3 Multiply the price range of the channel times the number of circles drawn on the lower channelline (4 34 x 2 = 9 12) 4 Subtract that figure from the upper channel line priceThe result becomes downside price target 1 (21 12 - 9 12 = 12) 5 Next subtract that same figure from the price at the lower channel line Thats price target 2(16 34 - 9 12 = 7 14)

In the case of an upside channel breakout the procedure is reversed Please draw a few channelsand figure out some downside targets on your own charts When youre ready send me two orthree examples of your work As always send your questions as they arise

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re SidewaysDate Montag 14 Februar 2000 134314

Here are my examples I couldnt find enough charts with downside targets so I included some charts with upside targets Do the channel lines always have to be horizontal When I look at my charts I find more channels with an upward slope or adownward slope RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Sideways channelsDate Freitag 18 Februar 2000 005531

At 21400 14300 PM you wrotegtHere are my examples I couldnt find enough charts with downsidegttargets so I included some charts with upside targetsgt gtDo the channel lines always have to be horizontal When I look at mygtcharts I find more channels with an upward slope or a downward slopegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone The sideways method can be used with either up or down Sorry didnt mean to imply that only downsidetargets should be found Ill reword that portion of the lesson Thanks for mentioning it Dr Andrews sideways method works only on horizontal channels Others have mentioned the slopingchannels also and have wondered if there is some method to use with them I know of none Ive askedother course members for their ideas on how to approach this problem but so far no one has come up with amethod I would think that there should be a solution but have not personally taken the time to research itIf some method could be found that works as often as the Andrews sideways count it would be a significantfind The Andrews sideways count doesnt always hit the targets as you saw on your chart of Bausch amp Lomb Itworks more often than not though and it still amazes me at how often prices reach the targets Heres an observation to keep in mind Quite often after the first target is reached prices will reverse andhead back towards the channel At times youll note that they return inside the channel They will thenreverse again and head back towards the second price target These reversals happen frequently and presenttrading opportunities Im including the final segment of this lesson Regards Gordon So far in the course youve learned about Dr Andrews pivot counting procedure pitchfork and sidewayscount Youve noticed by now how often prices change trend at a P5 Youve seen how the 0-34 ML methodcan help locate the probable P5 area Youve seen how often price targets are met using the sideways countmethod The tendency for prices to reverse at a median line should be recognized as a high probability eventas well In coming lessons youll be shown how Dr Andrews used these and other high probability events totrade the stock and commodity markets The tools and techniques he used will help you put the finishingtouches on your market analysis using Andrews lines

Before continuing on to the next lesson lets briefly review what has so far been covered The attached chartprovides an opportunity to illustrate the methods referred to above Please draw these methods on thechart and return to me

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Sideways channelsDate Montag 21 Februar 2000 193743

gtBefore continuing on to the next lesson lets briefly review what hasgtso far been covered The attached chart provides an opportunity togtillustrate the methods referred to above Please draw these methods ongtthe chart and return to me Hello Gordonhere is my chart RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next lesson attachedDate Mittwoch 23 Februar 2000 014539

At 22100 73700 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongthere is my chartgt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Good job on the pivots sideways count and pitchforkLooks like youre ready to move on to the next part It wont be long and things will begin to fall inplace Regards Gordon Lesson 4 continued In one of his course letters Dr Andrews wrote The Law of Physics stated by Newton that Actionand Reaction are equal and opposite was first applied to prices by your Course Directors friendthe late Roger Babson who attributed his earnings of several million dollars to this law Beginning with this segment of lesson four and continuing in lesson five youll learn how to drawand apply the ActionReaction trading method as taught by Dr Andrews in his trading course The AR method requires a centerline or CL from which to start The CL can be any of thefollowing - MPL - ML - MLH - 2P line - 2 Gap line - Peak to low line - Low to peak lineThese are the primary lines that Dr Andrews used He stressed that some pencil work and a goodeyeball was needed in order to find the best fitting CL As with most other chart lines somework better than others The task is to find the best fit as he put it You will be shown examples of

each of the above CLs in this lesson and the next Determining which of the above listed lines to use as the CL is the first step in the ActionReactionmethod The solution often presents itself With a little practice a quick scan of the chart understudy will be all thats needed to spot the most likely CL Well begin with the attached chart Notethe CL drawn In this example a MPL (multi-pivot line) was used as the CL A MPL is a straightline that connects three or more consecutive pivots without passing through prices Theconnecting line is then extended Ive circled the three pivots that form the MPL on the chartThere are several other places on our chart where a MPL CL can be drawn Please bear in mindthat this is just the first step of the process Identification of likely CLs is all were after here Seeif you can locate two more then draw them in and send the chart back to me Well take up fromthere

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next lesson attachedDate Mittwoch 23 Februar 2000 212304

gtLesson 4 continuedgt gtIn one of his course letters Dr Andrews wrote The Law of Physicsgtstated by Newton that Action and Reaction are equal and opposite wasgtfirst applied to prices by your Course Directors friend the lategtRoger Babson who attributed his earnings of several million dollars to this lawgt gtBeginning with this segment of lesson four and continuing in lessongtfive youll learn how to draw and apply the ActionReaction tradinggtmethod as taught by Dr Andrews in his trading coursegt gtThe AR method requires a centerline or CL from which to startgtThe CL can be any of the followinggt - MPLgt - MLgt - MLHgt - 2P linegt - 2 Gap linegt - Peak to low linegt - Low to peak line Hello Gordon2P line 2 Gap line Peak to low line Low to peak line ndash actually I dont know what these lines areAre they discussed in Lesson 3 I believe you havenrsquot sent me this lesson yetAnyway I found two more MPLs on the Novellus Chart and drew them in RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Lesson 3Date Mittwoch 23 Februar 2000 235958

At 22300 92300 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt2P line 2 Gap line Peak to low line Low to peak line - actually I dont knowgtwhat these lines are Are they discussed in Lesson 3 I believe you didntgtsent me this lesson yetgtAnyway I found two more MPLs on the Novellus Chart and drew them ingt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone My apologiesI sent you an outdated version of the lesson Thanks for letting me know Musthave been my bedtime Heres the correct version Regards Gordon Lesson 3 In one of his course letters Dr Andrews wrote The Law of Physics stated by Newton that Actionand Reaction are equal and opposite was first applied to prices by your Course Directors friendthe late Roger Babson who attributed his earnings of several million dollars to this law In this lesson youll be introduced to the ActionReaction trading method as taught by Dr Andrewsin his trading course The AR method requires a centerline or CL from which to start The CL can be any of thefollowing - MPL Multi-pivot line A line drawn across 3 or more pivots - ML Median line The middle line of the pitchfork - MLH Median line parallel Either parallel line of the pitchfork - 2P line A line drawn across 2 pivots - 2 Gap line A line drawn connecting 2 gaps without touching prices in between - Peak to low line A line drawn connecting the high and low of a price leg

- Low to peak line A line drawn connecting the low and high of a price leg These are the primary lines that Dr Andrews used He stressed that some pencil work and a goodeyeball was needed in order to find the best fitting CL As with most other chart lines somework better than others The task is to find the best fit as he put it You will be shown examples ofeach of the above CLs Determining which of the above listed lines to use as the CL is the first step in the ActionReactionmethod With practice a quick view of the chart under study will be all thats needed to spot themost likely CL Youll be shown later how to experiment with possible combinations in order tofind the centerline that is most in tune with the market under study Well begin with the attached chart Note the CL drawn In this example a MPL (multi-pivot line)was used as the CL A MPL is a straight line that connects three or more consecutive pivotswithout passing through prices The connecting line is then extended Ive circled the three pivotsthat form the MPL on the chart There are several other places on our chart where a MPL CL canbe drawn Please bear in mind that this is just the first step of the process Identification of likelyCLs is all were after here See if you can locate two more then draw them in and send the chartback to me

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Donnerstag 24 Februar 2000 025105

At 22300 92300 PM you wroteI found two more MPLs on the Novellus Chart and drew them ingt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your mpls were correct This next segment shows the purpose of the centerline and how it isused Your payment in full arrived today TradersZone Thank you Regards Gordon Lesson 3 continued Please refer to the attached chart of Novellus The line drawn connecting the 3 circled pivots is amulti-pivot line (MPL) and represents the centerline (CL) well be using in this example Recall inthe previous segment that several types of centerlines are possible The choice is determined byexperimenting with the potential combinations on the chart under study Its best to try to locate acenterline somewhere close to the middle of the price chart in order to have sufficient past andforward data to use with the study This will become clear as you work with the method Once the centerline is drawn the next step is to locate a previous low or high pivot point to use fordrawing an action line Dr Andrews observed that the low pivot points often seem to work bestbut that either could be used In our example a line starting at the previous significant low wasdrawn parallel to the CL It is labeled A-1 (Action line 1) because it represents the first actionline Dr Andrews called it an action line because it was drawn as a result of a previous pivot (pricereversal) that had taken place Next a parallel line was drawn to the right of the CL and labeled R-1 Notice that it is the same distance from the CL as the corresponding A-1 line It is labeled R-1because it represents the first reaction line a line where prices are likely to stop or reverseNotice how prices reacted at the R-1 line in early 98 That serves as an indication that thecenterline chosen for this study should be a good one to use Not all reaction lines cause such aclear reversal as the R1 on this chart but many do Thats why its important to experiment withvarious centerline possibilities in order to find action lines that produce reaction lines which createthe greatest number of pivots or price stall-outs This experimentation is often quite time

consuming but experience has shown that it is time well spent When a centerline is found that isin tune with the price action of the issue under study it can be a highly effective tool for use inlocating probable reversal areas When combined with pitchfork lines the AR method can pinpointpotential reversal areas that are generally not recognized as such by others Dr Andrewstechniques for using the pitchfork and AR lines together are covered in later lessons In coming segments well study other lines that Dr Andrews used for his centerlines In themeantime experiment with the multi-pivot centerline on your own charts Then please send mean example of your work along with any questions you may have

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Freitag 25 Februar 2000 211356

gtIn the meantime experiment with the multi-pivot centerline on your owngtcharts Then please send me an example of your work along with anygtquestions you may have Hello Gordon I was wondering how many ActionReaction lines could be drawn on a chart On my attached chart I found at least 6 parallellines which had a significant meaning for the price RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject AR linesDate Montag 28 Februar 2000 080128

gtHello Gordongt gtI was wondering how many ActionReaction lines could be drawn on agtchart On my attached chart I found at least 6 parallel lines which hadgta significant meaning for the pricegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hi TradersZone Theres no set number of lines that can be drawnactually the more you can find the betterFinding a good centerline is the key And once you find lines that work such as you did anynumber of parallel lines can be drawn You are doing exactly what Dr Andrews didtaking thetime and effort to find the best fitting sets of lines Each chart has them and each chart is differentas Im sure youve found Nice work Heres the next part Regards Gordon Lesson 3 continued One of Dr Andrews favorite techniques dealt with gapsan often times perplexing price event formany traders His observations over the years suggested to him that while gaps show upfrequently on many price charts few traders have a method for including them as an integral partof their chart analysis Thats not surprising since not much has been published about how toapproach the use of gaps in a trading method Dr Andrews however found several ways to putprice gaps to good use An ActionReaction centerline which uses gaps as its basis is one suchmethod Please refer to the attached chart of Cendant Youll see that a centerline was drawn which passedthrough the July gap Note that it also came in contact with several pivots thereby qualifying as agapmulti-pivot centerline It is drawn by starting at the April low pivot and extending a line acrossand through the gap in mid-July It subsequently touches two additional high pivots Dr Andrews counted each gap as two pivots He noted that the more pivots a line touched the

stronger the line tended to be in the future Good reason then for using the July gap as the basisfor an ActionReaction study Our CL is labelled a gap-mpl-CL The May 98 high was used for the Action Line starting point A line was then drawn parallel to theCenterline as per ActionReaction procedure The corresponding Reaction Line was then drawn inIf this particular study had been drawn on Cendants chart right after the July gap was put in thepotential for prices to go all the way down to the Reaction Line might have seemed very slim at thetime Notice however that prices reached the Reaction Line in early September Youll see thishappen time and again as you work with the AR method The core of its effectiveness is a strongCL Please send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts of your choice

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re AR linesDate Montag 28 Februar 2000 155937

gtPlease send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts of yourgtchoice Hello Gordonhere are my examples RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject More on the ARDate Donnerstag 2 Maumlrz 2000 071158

At 22800 35900 PM you wrotegtgtPlease send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts ofgtgtyour choicegt gtHello Gordongthere are my examplesgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone You picked some good examples to use for your AR study Both showed the potential power of thismethod Takes time and lots of chart study sometimes to find the best set of lines but the rewardscan be many Heres something else to look at Regards Gordon The ActionReaction technique requires a strong centerline from which to begin The key todeciding which set of pivots to use for the centerline is found through experimenting with thevarious configurations visible on the chart under study The centerline might be a series of gapspivots an existing median line or any of Dr Andrews lines The task is to search for that centerlinewhich shows the greatest potential for projecting price reversal areas Dr Andrews did that byfinding a likely centerline near the middle of his price chart That allowed him to use any of theprevious pivots for his action lines By experimenting he found reaction lines that did the best jobof pegging reversal areas at data points located forward of the centerline Reaction lines are equal and opposite of the action lines and serve to project price levels at whicha reversal can be expected That is why the task of seeking out the best centerline is so importantDr Andrews reasoned that a series of reaction lines which have pegged price reversals in the pastis likely to continue to be in tune with current and future market price action Having severalprevious pivots to use as anchors for drawing action lines is thus essential The attached chart of Lattice illustrates this concept Please bear in mind that the gapmplcenterline is not the only centerline one could use on this chart You might want to study the chartfor other AR possibilities Try a peak-to-peak CL or a multi-pivot CL Send me your studies along

with any questions

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re More on the ARDate Samstag 4 Maumlrz 2000 002521

gtThe attached chart of Lattice illustrates this conceptgtPlease bear in mind that the gapmpl centerline is not the onlygtcenterline one could use on this chartgtYou might want to study the chart for other AR possibilitiesgtTry a peak-to-peak CL or a multi-pivot CL Send me your studiesgtalong with any questions Hello Gordonhere is my chart RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Peak to peak clDate Sonntag 5 Maumlrz 2000 064107

At 3400 122500 AM you wrotegtHello Gordongthere is my chartgt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Looks like you have the concept down Takes time and a lot of chart work to find the bestcenterline When the reaction lines dont seem to peg reversal areas chances are the centerline isnot the one that is best in tune with the price action of the issue under studyDespite the time required for this method it was one of Dr Andrews stand-bysAR lines could befound on most of his charts Im sending a chart with an example of a peak-to-peak CL Regards Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Peak to peak clDate Sonntag 5 Maumlrz 2000 171232

Hello Gordon I think the peak-to-peak CL on the last chart I sent to you was not really drawn from peak to peakIm sending another example RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next LessonDate Mittwoch 8 Maumlrz 2000 072526

At 3500 51200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtI think the peak-to-peak CL on the last chart I sent to you was notgtreally drawn from peak to peakgtIm sending another examplegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your peak to peak cl example was correctly drawn Thats a fairly simple approach but quite oftenthe peak to peak yields better reaction lines Heres the first part of the next lesson Regards Gordon Youll find times when prices dont quite reach the ML but instead drift alongside or away from itThe Schiff ML was designed to be used in place of the regular ML whenever that happens Suchprice action can be found at any place on a chart but most frequently occurs after a sharp sell-offor run-up of prices Dr Andrews also used the Schiff ML whenever his regular ML sloped at an unusually steep angleHe said it helped smooth out irregular price action such as that caused by unexpected earningsnews crop planting delays or poor growing conditions crop production reports etc Youll findnearly vertical price moves over a short period of time on many charts The Schiff ML method helpsput things back in perspective when that happens Well use the chart of Sterling Bancorp as an example of prices drifting away from the regular MLThat ML is drawn in black Prices didnt quite reach the ML but drifted alongside and eventuallyaway from it The Schiff ML and parallel lines are drawn in red Notice how prices were containedwithin the Schiff pitchfork until they finally broke down at the upper parallel line The procedure for drawing the Schiff ML is the same as for the regular ML except the startingpoint is located midway between the first 2 pivots youll be using The Sterling Bancorp chart

illustrates how this is done Dr Andrews also suggested using the Schiff ML whenever the regular ML method doesnt seem tobe in sync with price action Practice this procedure on your own charts and send a couple examples when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next LessonDate Donnerstag 9 Maumlrz 2000 001143

Hello Gordon in my charting software (Dynamic Trader) the Schiff ML is drawn by finding the midpoint of the line between pivot A and pivot Bmoving this point horizontally to directly above or below (depending on whether A is a low or high pivot) the A pivot anddrawing a line from his point through the midpoint of the BC swingAre there different methods of drawing a Schiff MLI was too lazy to draw Schiff MLs by hand with the method you described so Im sending my examples with the Dynamic TraderSchiff MLs -) RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject SchiffDate Samstag 11 Maumlrz 2000 070226

At 3900 121100 AM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtin my charting software (Dynamic Trader) the Schiff ML is drawn bygtfinding the midpoint of the line between pivot A and pivot B movinggtthis point horizontally to directly above or below (depending ongtwhether A is a low or high pivot) the A pivot and drawing a linegtgtfrom his point through the midpoint of the BC swinggtAre there different methods of drawing a Schiff MLgtI was too lazy to draw Schiff MLs by hand with the method yougtdescribed so Im sending my examples with the Dynamic Trader Schiff MLs -)gt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your program Schiff line procedure is fineits actually what Dr Andrews called a modified schiff ml and is onlyslightly different than the one I sent you initially The one you used is preferred by most course members Im sendingthe modified Schiff lesson and a chart along with this email The chart example shows how to use it with 0-34 pivots Regards Gordon

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Sliding Parallel LineDate Montag 13 Maumlrz 2000 005252

Hello TradersZone Heres one of the tools Dr Andrews used most often when entering exiting or reversing marketpositions Not many people know about this technique Regards Gordon The Sliding Parallel (SH) is drawn whenever prices cross an Andrews line and then move along itFor example if the bottom of a daily price bar range drops through a lower parallel line of apitchfork a new parallel line is then drawn from that low and extended to the right If the nextdays price bar drops through that sliding parallel line a sell signal is generated Whenever price action dictates a sliding parallel the next step is to draw a Warning Line Thewarning line is an additional parallel line that is an image extension of the original pitchforkchannels It serves as a warning that if prices penetrate the sliding parallel the next likely target isthe WL The attached chart of Avis illustrates these procedures Please try these on your own charts andsend me an example

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Sliding Parallel LineDate Dienstag 14 Maumlrz 2000 225737

Hello Gordon this is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning line RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 065606

At 31400 105700 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtthis is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning linegt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone Your chart of circuit city was a good example for this study I may have mentioned it earlier but DrAndrews used this technique on a regular basis The next part of this lesson covers another of hisfavorite tools the mini-median line pitchfork Here it is Regards Gordon The Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry and exit tools Though mostoften drawn using alternate closing prices alternate highs and lows can also be usedin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days is usually the maximumbetween pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or more back from P2 Dr Andrews used Mini-Median Line pitchforks for buy and sell signals whenever he expected areversal Some examples include a probable P5 or when prices are at a Warning Line ML MLHmajor ML extension or a sideways channel price target When prices cross the Mini-Median LineParallel (MMLH) a sliding parallel (SH) is used for order entry

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 231537

gtThe Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry andgtexit tools Though most often drawn using alternate closing pricesgtalternate highs and lows can also be usedgtin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days isgtusually the maximum between pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or moregtback from P2

Hello Gordon

wouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timingCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available whenDr Andrews was alive

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject intraday chartsDate Samstag 18 Maumlrz 2000 012400

At 31600 111500 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongtgtwouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsgtinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timinggtCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available when DrgtAndrews was alivegtgtRegardsgtTradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Youre absolutely correctintraday charts were not available when DrAndrews was a trader

Im reading between the lines here but if you plan to day-trade using the course techniques ie thepitchfork then I agree that the regular pitchfork would be more useful on intraday charts Otherwisewhipsaw would be a significant problem Please get back to me if I didnt address your questionbecause this is a very important technique The mini-median line pitchfork and sliding parallel showedup on most of Dr Andrews charts

Regards

Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re intraday chartsDate Dienstag 21 Maumlrz 2000 220322

Hello Gordon

You are right Im planning to daytrade SampP futures using the course techniques among other things

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 003408

Hi TradersZone Here are a couple Andrews techniques that will help anticipate the breakout direction of asideways channelThey work often enough to warrant keep handy Regards Gordon In an earlier lesson you were introduced to Dr Andrews sideways count You saw how frequentlythe sideways count method provided high probability price objectives after the breakout from theestablished channel took place In this segment of lesson 4 youll be shown 2 congestion area techniques that can help youdetermine the probable sideways channel price breakout direction Both rely on the use of pivots The first uses the pivot points that are circled on a sideways channel Dr Andrews observed thatwhenever a sideways channel results in at least 5 circle contacts the eventual price breakoutwould very often be in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle If circle 5 is at thetop of the channel for example the eventual price breakout would likely be to the upside If circle5 is at the bottom of the channel look for a downside breakout Dr Andrews noted that thistechnique can be subject to false breakouts but that such breakouts are usually followed shortlyafter with a confirmed breakout in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle Heemphasized that this study is best considered as a rule of thumb observation He viewed it as asupporting indicator for use with a short-term pitchfork as prices approached a channel line There are 2 charts attached that show how this works

The second technique in this part of lesson 4 deals with a sideways channelthat is building shortly after a P3 has been formed Dr Andrews noted thatwhenever that happened the probabilities were high that prices wouldbreakout in the same direction they were moving prior to the formation ofthe sideways channel The attached P3 to sideways example chart shows thisprocedure

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 205235

Hello Gordon here is my example for the 5 circle sideways count RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Lesson 5Date Montag 27 Maumlrz 2000 060731

At 32400 85200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my example for the 5 circle sideways countgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt gt Hi TradersZone Good example of the 5th circle tendency to predict the direction of a sideways breakout Any luckfinding a chart showing the P3 to sideways rule Im sending the first part of the next lesson This trendline method is a useful tool with all of DrAndrews course lines He used it all the time but especially when looking for confirmation of othercourse method trading signals Regards Gordon The Course Trendline__________________________________________________________ Next well discuss the trendline Seasoned traders agree that the trendline is one of their mostimportant tools No matter what kind of trading program or technique they use the trendline on achart is a must But one of the biggest mistakes made by amateurs and professionals alike isinconsistently drawing or defining the trendline Dr Andrews trendline procedure is simpleconsistent and accurate It works extremely well with the pivot count and with the pitchfork For an uptrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the lowest low up and to thehighest minor low point preceding the highest high The line must not pass through prices inbetween the two low points Extend the line(Attached chart of Brightpoint) For a downtrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the highest high point to thelowest minor high point preceding the lowest low so that it does not pass through prices inbetween the two high points Extend the line (Brightpoint chart) Thats all theres to it Its simple consistent and it works well with other Andrews lines It also

helps eliminate personal bias and haphazard analysis Practice drawing these trendlines on your own charts Send me any questions you might have andthen e-mail a chart of your choosing which shows at least two uptrend and two downtrend linesthat youve drawn_______________________________________________________________________

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Lesson 5Date Dienstag 28 Maumlrz 2000 120224

Hello Gordon here is my chart with trendlinesWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going above the trendline again should I draw a new trendline anddelete the old one Attached is another chart with the P3 to sideways rule I finally found an example for it RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Price failure techniqueDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081412

At 32800 120200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my chart with trendlinesgtWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going abovegtthe trendline again should I draw a new trendline and delete the oldgtone Hi TradersZone Take a look at the chart Im returningI added some lines for you to considerWith the course trendline once its broken a new one should be started Theres a technique thatties in with this coming up soon Meanwhile heres an important technique to work on It deals with those times when prices dontreach the ML Regards Gordon Dr Andrews Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P ofreversaland the ML the probability is that this price reversal will go further thanitdid on its approach toward the ML (Extract of original course material) A price failure very often indicates a sizeable reversal will take placeThepitchforks drawn on the chart of Home Depot illustrate the concept of pricefailure Dr Andrews routinely drew a new pitchfork on his chart after a newsignificant pivot had formed He knew that prices had a high probability ofreaching the new ML before stalling out or reversing If prices reversedbeforereaching the ML thereby forming a new pivot he termed it a price failureTheunderlying idea here is that Dr Andrews fully anticipated his median linewouldact as a price magnet To conclude that a price reversal resulted in a price failure Dr Andrewsused

these primary signalsa subsequent price penetration of a short-termmulti-pivotline andor a return of prices to and penetration of the parallel lineformed atpivot 3 of the pitchfork (The circles on the Home Depot chart denote theparallelline penetration signal To avoid clutter the mpl lines were not drawn) One possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart of ConsecoIncLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me a copy

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject ChartDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081800Attachments image002png

Hi TradersZone Forgot the chart Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Price failure techniqueDate Samstag 1 April 2000 201000

gtOne possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart ofgtConseco IncgtLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me agtcopy Hi Gordon here are my charts with price failures RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Mittwoch 5 April 2000 235624

Hi TradersZone Good price failure examples you sentany comments or questions about it Heres the next partanother old standby Dr Andrews kept handy Regards Gordon In this segment youll learn how to use the Fan line Technique To draw the fan lines youll apply the coursetrendline method which was introduced in an earlier lesson It might be well to emphasize that the practicalapplication of the course trendline method requires practice and experience both of which will serve youwell in this technique Dr Andrews used fan lines as an adjunct to his pitchfork sideways channel andactionreaction methods In the fan line study three trendlines are drawn from the original reversal pivot of the price correction understudy typically a P0 or a P5 Youll notice on the charts included with this study that each fan line is at aflatter angle than its predecessor When the third fan line is broken the rule is that the correction has endedand a new trend is under way Try this technique on some of your own charts and then please send me asample

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Donnerstag 6 April 2000 234315

Hi Gordon No I dont have any specific question about the price failure technique I guess the next likely target after a price failure wouldbe the warning line I have attached two charts with fan linesIs it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the third fan line is broken RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Next segmentDate Freitag 7 April 2000 003312

Hello TradersZone

Tuesday April 06 2000 114315 AM you wrote

TZgt Hi Gordon

TZgt No I dont have any specific question about the price failureTZgt technique I guess the next likely target after a price failureTZgt would be the warning line

TZgt I have attached two charts with fan linesTZgt Is it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the thirdTZgt fan line is broken

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Thats right the warning line is the next price target Additionalwarning lines can be drawn if needed but usually one will do it Ifprices go through the first warning line another can be drawn butmost likely a new pitchfork could be drawn instead which would bepreferable Helps stay current with recently formed pivots

When prices break through the third fan line a buy or sell signal isgiven Not sure what you mean by fourth target fan line Im a littledense today

Your chart work was goodthis is another handy tool for spotting thehigh probability of a price reversal or trend change

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject The Gap TradeDate Freitag 7 April 2000 004858

Hello TradersZone This trading signal doesnt show up very often but past observations have shown that its well worth watching for Dr Andrews placed a lot of emphasis on the importance of price gaps something many traders overlook This is one of his gap uses Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom The Gap Trading Technique Price gaps can be a dilemma for many traders The general rule denoting market strength or weakness after ahigh volume gap often comes up short after the initial reaction is over Many gappers simply run out ofsteam A high volume gap in itself seems to offer precious little evidence that a profitable move is about toget under way Dr Andrews used price gaps somewhat differently than others He counted a gap as 2 pivots Youll see howthat works in the following technique which uses a gap to arrive at a price level for a buy or sell order Using short-term daily price pivots label the pivot immediately preceding the gap as p0 Count the gap as 2pivots labeling it p1 amp p2 After p3 has formed and prices reverse towards a short-term p4 draw a horizontalline 2 price tics or more (individual preference)to the right of p3 Enter the market only if prices reach orpenetrate that line within a few days after reversing from p4 Please look over your own charts to see if you can find places where the gap trade technique could have beenused Send me a sample when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 001925

Hello Gordon this is my chart with a gap trade RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 065538

Hello TradersZone Thursday April 08 2000 121925 PM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt this is my chart with a gap trade TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Good examplethe gap trade technique shines when an issue in at or near a P5 Similar to the one on thechart you sent Heres another trading signal tool Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Dr Andrews used several techniques which helped him determine whether a P5 was near at hand Youllrecall that he observed most price moves ended or had a significant reversal at a P5 This technique uses alternate closing prices after a P4 has been formed As with many of his studies thenumber 5 is used The chart accompanying this segment shows that there were 5 alternate closes to thedownside after P4 was put in Dr Andrews noted that whenever 5 or more alternate closes followed a P4 theprobabilities were high that a P5 was near at hand An added feature to this chart study is the sideways channel Notice how the 2nd target price and the 5thalternate close nearly coincide

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 12 April 2000 200730

Hello Gordon This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 13 April 2000 082418

Monday April 12 2000 80730 AM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hello TradersZone Good chart example of this Andrews toolanother of his very unusual observations that workmore often than not Heres the final part of this lesson Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom In this trendline method Dr Andrews once again used the number 5 as the basis for locating aprobable reversal area He found this technique to be especially useful whenever a clear orobvious pivot count didnt show up onthe price move under study Trendlines are drawn using the course trendline method When the 5th trendline is broken theprobability is high that the trend under study has ended A mini-median line pitchfork andorsliding parallel could be used for pricing a trading order The accompanying chart of Compaq Computer is an example of how the trendline study could beused The pivot count beginning at the October low is difficult to nail down There were severalsmall areas of congestion but no sizeable corrections while prices advanced The count wasunclear By following the price action using the course trendline technique however the traderwould have been alerted to the possibility of a change of trend when the 5th trendline was brokenin early February Try this technique on your own charts When youre ready please send me an example of yourstudy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 19 April 2000 124108

Hello Gordon this is my example with 5 trendlines RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[6] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 20 April 2000 012726

Monday April 19 2000 124108 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt this is my example with 5 trendlines

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Good example of the 5 TL technique Always reminds me of how the fairly simple tools often do a better job than manyof the sophisticated studies out there

That was the last part of lesson 5 Lesson 6 attached is made in one mailing Youll find Dr Andrews trading rules alongwith a wrap-up review which uses several of his rules You might have questions about some of the rules so feel free tosend them as they arise

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Dr Andrews had an abbreviated set of trading rules on several index cards that he carried around with him in his shirtpocket He said every trading day turned up something new on his charts and by having his rules in his pocket he wasreminded of the need for a methodical approach to his analysis Quite a comment coming from the man who wrote therule book

In this the final lesson of the course Dr Andrews original trading rules and observations are presented Lets work witha few of them at this point

Using charts of issues you follow please send me an example that illustrates your interpretation of each of the followingrules

Rule 4 Anticipating major Ps

Rule 7 Penetration rule

Rule 8 Price failure rule

Rule 11 1-ML23 AR Centerline

Rule 12 Sliding Parallel rule

Rule 15 Mini-median line parallel to buy or sell

Feel free to include any other course techniques you choose to apply but please include examples of the above as aminimum Use more than one technique on a chart if your analysis supports it Send as many charts as you like alongwith your questionscomments

Lesson 6 - Dr Andrews Trading Rules

This lesson covers course rules and significant observations as taught by Dr Andrews in his original trading course Therules are those that he used in his own trading and are provided to serve as a checklist for use with the course tradingmethods youve learned

Rule 1 Where prices are always headed Rule You course members are among the fortunate few to be able to draw astraight line and know that prices are headed toward that ML Very few investors have ever applied this ML principle ofstatistics to price fluctuations and weve never seen this in any books on investment You are among the very few who

know that prices are always headed toward the newest ML

Rule 2 The Rule of coming opposites applies all through life In the bible we find Blessed at they that mourn for theyshall be comforted As investors we know that any losses can be recovered by using course methods

Rule 3 Turn your mind about or Rethink for all good is at hand We should mentally prepare ourselves for thecoming reversal in prices and other affairs Heres one way for example that you course members who know the MLrules can use When prices are skyrocketing upward we do this preparation by thinking If prices pivoted here today atthis price Id draw a new ML bisecting the distance between todays price and the price from which the rise started Andwe know now that if this is a Major Pivot prices will fall rapidly to this new ML Profits from such drops are big and quick

Rule 4 Rule for anticipating major Ps If during congestion or after a rally or decline you can count four previous Psthe fifth one is highly probable to be the one from which a new trend starts

Rule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can make a quick big profit is to watch for the EPformations

Rule 6 The other reversal rule is that prices tend to reverse at or near any ML as well as at any extension of each MLAnd also at any MLH or extensions of MLH

Rule 7 The Penetration Rule is that whenever prices gap past or plunge through any ML there is a high probability thatthey will quickly return to it temporarily and then resume the trend they had before they gapped or plunged through

Rule 8 Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P of reversal and the MLthe probability is that this price reversal will go further than it did on its approach toward the ML

Rule 9 The price failure rule is negated when the next price trend is also a failure in reaching the ML This is almostinvariably a signal of a big fast move in the direction indicated by this last space Rule 10 When alternate median lines of comparable length slope in the same direction the trend is firm and rapidprice changes take place

Rule 11 When 1-ML23 is exactly reached at P4 it can be used as a highly reliable centerline for the AR method

Rule 12 Frequently after crossing a lower MLH prices continue to rise along the MLH Since the crossing of the MLHsignals a further drop is likely use a sliding parallel along the bottom of the most recent crossing If prices drop past thatsliding parallel line a sell signal is generated

Rule 13 MLs between P2 and P3 can start from a nearby or a remote P1 since prices tend to reverse at each of theseMLs Try several such P2-P3 MLs to discover the best fit

Rule 14 The distance of each MLH from its ML is the distance of the next warning line Use these warning lineswhenever a SH has signalled a buy or sell

Rule 15 Use the MMLH as a buy or sell signal when you expect a reversal because of a P5 Also when prices are at aWL ML extension line or where course lines converge or intersect

Rule 16 Converging lines that meet prices have shown the highest probability of a trend reversal

Rule 17 Two to four days is usually the maximum between P2 and P3 for a MML P1 can be a day or so back from P2and 3

Rule 18 The most reliable ActionReaction centerlines seem to be MPL 2P line 2 Gap line peak to low or low to peak

Rule 19 When prices pass through R lines look for a pull back and then a continuing move in the direction of the passthrough

Rule 20 Use gaps as Action lines from the centerline

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 003755

Hello Gordonhere is my example for Rule 4 And I have a question What are EP formations gtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 021242

Tuesday May 04 2000 123755 PM you wrote TZgt Hello GordonTZgt here is my example for Rule 4 TZgt And I have a question What are EP formations gtgtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegtgta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hi TradersZone Good use of the warning linesalso the EP material is part of lesson 4 Rather than go backthrough the files to see when (or if) it was sent Im sending it along with this reply Glad youbrought it up Best RegardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Tuesday May 04 2000208 PM Dr Andrews used a fairly common price chart formation that he found useful at probable P5market tops and bottoms The formation generally called a wedge or pennant by chartists isreferred to in Dr Andrews trading course as the Expanding Pivot (EP) One of the few chartformations used in the course he regarded it as among the most dependable indications that amarket top was forming Closely related to the EP is his Inverted Expanding Pivot (IEP) which henoted could often be observed at market bottoms Both are regarded as intermediate and long-term reversal indicators Dr Andrews found that both formations were most reliable when they occurred after a sharprapid price move coinciding with the formation of a probable P5 He said it wasnt unusual for theformation to take several weeks to complete and that conservative traders could best avoid thewhipsaw associated with congestion patterns by trading only in the direction of the probable price

break out of the EP or IEP formation The attached charts illustrate these formations Please look over your own charts for an example ofthe EP and IEP and send me a copy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 232127

Hello Gordon Thank you for the lesson with the EP material I couldnt find it in any previous emailHere is my example for Rule 7 RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Rule 4Date Samstag 6 Mai 2000 080827

Wednesday May 05 2000 112127 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt Thank you for the lesson with the EP materialTZgt I couldnt find it in any previous emailTZgt Here is my example for Rule 7

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hi TradersZone

Glad you mentioned it earlierexcept for the EP IEP and hissideways channel Dr Andrews didnt have much to say about chartpatterns and formations These are good ones to use though

Your study of the penetration rule was good Later

Best Regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Wednesday May 05 2000801 PM

Page 3: Pitchfork primer

PIVOT A turning pointThe extreme price on a bar or line chartwhere a change of direction takes place ML Median Line The middle line of the pitchfork MLH Median Line Parallel The outer line(s) of the Andrewspitchfork__________________________________________________________ THE PIVOT COUNTPivot counting the Andrews way is not cluttered up with a lot ofsubjective rules Once you become familiar with the count youllfind its possible to eyeball the charts and quickly findpotential buy or sell candidates By using Dr Andrews counts inyour preliminary selection checklist a considerable amount of timeand energy can be saved The pivot count quickly shows you the bestplace to draw a pitchfork as well as other Andrews linesTo begin look at any stock or commodity chart in order to spot themajor legs or waves Theyre usually pretty obvious as on theattached Network Associates chart Youll note in the definition ofcourse terms that the extreme prices of these legs or waves arecalled pivots They are numbered P1 P2 P3 and so on Dr Andrews labeled the pivot from whichhe began his count as P0 Looking at the attached Network Associates chart youll notice that prices started a move to thedownside beginning in mid to late July The move which bottomed out in early October wascomposed of 5 distinct price waves 3 in the direction of the move and 2 correction waves Thepivot count for that move was 5 as shown on the chart A point to remember is Dr Andrewsfound that most long-term and intermediate-term price moves will end with a 5 pivot count Thoseterms are relative but for our purposes the move down on the Network Associates chart will beconsidered an intermediate-term move Please study the attached chart of LSI Logic Locate and label the intermediate-term pivots as yousee them Keep Dr Andrews 5P observation in mind When ready please return your chart to meWell continue from that point__________________________________________________________

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Course enrollmentDate Mittwoch 2 Februar 2000 015929

Hello Gordon I was not sure where to put P1 so I chose the bar with the highest close gtPlease study the attached chart of LSI LogicgtLocate and label the intermediate-term pivots as you see themgtWhen ready please return your chart to me Well continue from that point

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Good callDate Mittwoch 2 Februar 2000 064819

At 2200 15900 AM you wrotegtI was not sure where to put P1 so I chose the bar with the highest close Hello TradersZone Your pivot count was by the booknice job Also your use of the highest close for pivot 1 wasexcellent logic It doesnt appear as if the count will be giving you any trouble Well be workingwith pivots throughout the course since much of Dr Andrews work was based on the oftenoverlooked importance of the interaction of various pivots on a price chart Its good to see thatyou have an early grasp of the procedure Heres the next part of the lesson Regards Gordon _________________________________________________________ Lesson One continued_________________________________________________________ Well continue to work with the NETA chart focusing on prices beginning the latter part of July98Well use our earlier pivot count to draw a pitchfork Three pivots are used when drawing the pitchfork They must be either a high low high or a lowhigh low configuration In this example we will use the P0-34 pivots as shown on the attachedchart With a ruler we locate the mid-point between the low at P3 and the high at P4 We markthat point with a small dot Then from the high at P0 we draw a line that extends through andbeyond the P34 mid-point that we marked This line is called the median line (ML) A second lineis drawn beginning at P3 and is drawn parallel to the median line A third line is drawn beginning atP4 and is also drawn parallel to the median line These lines are called parallel lines (H) Aconnecting line is then drawn from pivot 3 to pivot 4 And thats the pitchfork Its shown on theNETA chart At this point please send me a chart of your choice showing several intermediate-term pivots thatyouve marked Include at least two pitchforks Well go on from there

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Good callDate Mittwoch 2 Februar 2000 202415

Hello Gordon I have attached a chart of AET I hope its a good example RegardsTradersZone gtAt this point please send me a chart of your choice showing severalgtintermediate-term pivots that youve marked Include at least twogtpitchforks Well go on from there

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Pivots and pitchforksDate Donnerstag 3 Februar 2000 071228

At 2200 82400 PM you wrotegtI have attached a chart of AET I hope its a good examplegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone The chartwork you sent was excellentgood grasp of the count and your pitchfork procedure wascorrect Later on in the course well go over Dr Andrews techniques which will help you decidewhich pivots to use for the pitchfork that offers the best probability of staying in tune with themarkets Heres the next segment of lesson 1 Regards Gordon ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Well continue our pitchfork and pivot study using the NETA chart from the previous segment Dr Andrews noted that most sizeable price moves form 5 significant or easily recognizeable pivotsbefore reversing Some moves end with 3 pivots and occasionally youll find 7 or 9 But most hesaid will end with 5 pivots before reversing the trend under study Whenever he observed that aP4 was formed on a chart he used what he termed the 0-34 ML method to project the likely pricelevel where the P5 would form Large price reversals Dr Andrews observed often occur after a P5has formed This method is an excellent early warning signal for anticipating price reversals at a P5 The pitchfork is drawn using the P0-34 ML method as illustrated on the attached chart of NETANotice that prices reversed at the ML forming a P5 Also attached is a chart of Conseco Inc Please label the significant pivots starting at the July highand then draw one pitchfork using the 0-34 pivots and one using the 3-45 pivots Please returnyour chart along with any questions or comments

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Pivots and pitchforksDate Donnerstag 3 Februar 2000 154548

I have attached the CNC chartWhen the price moves below the P0-34 ML before making a P5 low is the lower parallel line thenext likely level where the P5 should occurOn the CNC chart the price closes above the P0-34 ML the day after breaking the ML Is that aconfirmation that the P5 low has been made

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Good QuestionsDate Freitag 4 Februar 2000 063320

At 2300 34500 PM you wrotegtI have attached the CNC chart gtWhen the price moves below the P0-34 ML before making a P5 low is thegtlower parallel line the next likely level where the P5 should occur (Thats right TradersZone The function of parallel lines is to provide the next level of support orresistance for those times when prices do not stop or reverse at the ML Dr Andrews by the waylooked for prices to reverse at any ML and form a new pivot in the process)gtOn the CNC chart the price closes above the P0-34 ML the day aftergtbreaking the ML Is that a confirmation that the P5 low has been made (That was a good sign but too close to call (imho) Please see chart for TL use as a confirmationsignal) Dr Andrews used several techniques to help him deal with probable reversalsSome are special situation type methods and others are used in conjunction with the pivot countpitchfork lines or ActionReaction lines Well be covering those rules in the last part of the course Im sending another chart for you to study and work on Please identify the main pivots in thedown move that started in April and also draw at least 2 pitchforksWhen ready please return to me Regards Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Good QuestionsDate Freitag 4 Februar 2000 191043

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Median Line TechniqueDate Sonntag 6 Februar 2000 010735

Hello TradersZone Nice work on the charts you returned Everything was by the book It appears that you have theprocedures well in hand Heres the final portion of lesson 1 The concept is basic but it does the important job of helping atrader stay on the right side of the market Will you be continuing the course Regards Gordon The first lines Dr Andrews drew on a new chart were the long-term and intermediate-term medianlines After identifying the significant pivots he drew his first median line beginning with P0-12and worked forward on the chart using each subsequent set of 3 pivots Each ML served to vectorpricesacting as a magnet if you will that drew prices towards it He said that prices will head forthe new ML over 80 of the time Parallel lines are not drawn when using this procedure Its prime function is to determine thedirection and price level of the new ML Recall that Dr Andrews anticipated a price reversal at eachnew ML The attached chart of LPX illustrates this technique Try this on some of your own charts and thenplease send me an example

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Median Line TechniqueDate Montag 7 Februar 2000 192718

I found a chart with 9 pivots I hope it doesnt matterIs it necessary that the move is made of swings with higher highs and higher lows in an uptrend (lower highs and lower lows in adowntrend)For example in the attached chart the point P6 is lower than P4 and P7 is lower than P5Another question For how long are median lines validI noticed that the P2-34 ML from my chart served as support and resistance two years later in 1998 (see attached chartLOW2GIF) but on the other hand I dont want to clutter my charts with too many lines from the past I would like to continue the course to the end I will send the money for the remaining 5 lessons tomorrow Did you receive myfirst payment yet RegardsTradersZone

LOW2GIF

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneDate Mittwoch 9 Februar 2000 054710

At 2700 72700 PM you wrotegtI found a chart with 9 pivots I hope it doesnt mattergtIs it necessary that the move is made of swings with higher highs andgthigher lows in an uptrend (lower highs and lower lows in a downtrend)gtFor example in the attached chart the point P6 is lower than P4 and P7gtis lower than P5 ( When using this ML technique TradersZone the main object is to note the price level of the newML for that is the next probable reversal area The pivots need not be in Elliott formation havingswings as you noted above Your ML procedure by the way was correct I noticed how oftenprices headed for each new ML and then reversedLater in the course well see how Dr Andrews handled those times when prices reversed beforereaching the ML area)gtAnother question For how long are median lines validgtI noticed that the P2-34 ML from my chart served as support andgtresistance two years later in 1998 (see attached chart LOW2GIF) butgton the other hand I dont want to clutter my charts with too many lines from the past (One of the interesting things about Dr Andrews lines is that no matter how far out his lines areprojected they will continue to cause prices to stall-out or reverse when reached Also wheneverseveral of his lines intersect there is a very high probability of a price reversal whether pricesconverge at the intersection or are some distancegtfrom it The probability is higher though when prices are at thegtintersecting lines A linethat has in the past provided frequent support or resistance is probably a pretty good line tokeep on your chart Youre right though charts seem to get cluttered up veryquickly)gt gtI would like to continue the course to the end I will send the moneygtfor the remaining 5 lessons tomorrow Did you receive my first payment yet (Glad to hear youre going to continue to the end Thank you for the prepayment Your first checkhasnt arrived yet will let you know when it does) Meanwhile heres the first segment of the next lesson Regards Gordon

In this lesson youll be introduced to Dr Andrews sideways count The sideways count was hisold reliable a tool that worked so well so often that it was one of the very first studies heperformed on his charts The sideways count gave him a reliable gauge that told him ahead of timehow far a stock or commodity was likely to move Sounds too good to be true perhaps but as youwork with the sideways count youll discover for yourself how often the projected price targetsare reachedoften within tics Markets frequently spend a lot of time in congestion Heres Dr Andrews way to use thatcongestion to our advantage Looking at the Brightpoint attachment please note the channel lines starting in January Youll seethat most of the pivots from Jan-May were within this channel Now look at where Ive placedcircles At each point where prices touched a channel line and then reversed direction and went allthe way back to touch the opposite channel line a circle was drawn Put another way if pricestouch one channel line but then dont go all the way back to touch the opposite channel line acircle is not drawn At first glance this technique can often be unclear so well pause here for some chart work Pleasee-mail me a chart that shows where youve drawn channel lines to identify sideways price actionand also where youve placed the channel line circles

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject ReDate Mittwoch 9 Februar 2000 184837

gtAt each point where prices touched a channel line and then reversedgtdirection and went all the way back to touch the opposite channel linegta circle was drawn Put another way if prices touch one channel linegtbut then dont go all the way back to touch the opposite channel linegta circle is not drawn Shouldnt the last circle on your Brightpoint chart be left outThe price didnt return to the opposite channel line after that day This is my chart

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Thanks for the questionDate Mittwoch 9 Februar 2000 231437

At 2900 64800 PM you wrotegtShouldnt the last circle on your Brightpoint chart be left outgtThe price didnt return to the opposite channel line after that day Hello TradersZone The last circle is appropriate but I can see where the wording in the explanation is confusing Ihave changed that paragraph to read Looking at the Brightpoint attachment please note the channel lines starting in January Youll seethat most of the pivots from Jan- May were within this channel Now look at where the circles wereplaced on the channel lines They are in alternate sequenceNote that each circle was drawn only after prices had first been at the opposite channel lineTheBrightpoint chart illustrates this procedure Thanks for pointing this out TradersZone If the wording is still unclear to you Id appreciate yourinput Meanwhile heres the next segment of this lessonRegards Gordon Well continue to use the Brightpoint chart for this portion of the sideways count study To reviewthe pattern were looking for should be a recent rectangular shaped sideways trading range thatcontains most if not all of the congestion price action Take a look at the attached chart and notehow well defined the price channel for Brightpoint is Youll probably notice that it is deeper thanthe channel you studied on the chart in the preceding segment This comparison is made toillustrate that while the first channel example covers a longer period of time the second includesall of the price ranges and is the preferred method Please look at where the circles were placed on the channel lines To review a new circle is drawnonly after prices have first been at the opposite channel line Recall that circles must be inalternate sequence eg upper linelower lineupper linelower line etc one circle at a time Note that the price range within the channel is $4 34 (High 21 12 Low 16 34) There were twocircles drawn on the lower line of our sideways channel before prices broke down Using thatinformation our next step will be to use some simple arithmetic in order to come up with twodownside price targets Well cover that procedure in the next segment Please let me know whenyou are ready to continue

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Sideways countDate Mittwoch 9 Februar 2000 232315Attachments image001png

Hi TradersZone Im returning your chartplease note comments GordonRegards Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Thanks for the questionDate Donnerstag 10 Februar 2000 233059

Hello Gordonthank you Im ready for the next lesson

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next partDate Donnerstag 10 Februar 2000 235613

At 21000 113000 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongtthank you Im ready for the next lessongt gt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt gt gt TradersZoneI sent this yesterday but will re-send It was part of my reply to your questionregarding the circle I dont have a record of your return chartwork for this part If its a duplicatesend sorry Regards Gordon Well continue to use the Brightpoint chart for this portion of the sideways count study To reviewthe pattern were looking for should be a recent rectangular shaped sideways trading range thatcontains most if not all of the congestion price action Take a look at the attached chart and notehow well defined the price channel for Brightpoint is Youll probably notice that it is deeper thanthe channel you studied on the chart in the preceding segment This comparison is made toillustrate that while the first channel example covers a longer period of time the second includesall of the price ranges and is the preferred method Please look at where the circles were placed on the channel lines To review a new circle is drawnonly after prices have first been at the opposite channel line Recall that circles must be inalternate sequence eg upper linelower lineupper linelower line etc one circle at a time Note that the price range within the channel is $4 34 (High 21 12 Low 16 34) There were twocircles drawn on the lower line of our sideways channel before prices broke down Using thatinformation our next step will be to use some simple arithmetic in order to come up with twodownside price targets Well cover that procedure in the next segment Please let me know whenyou are ready to continue

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next partDate Freitag 11 Februar 2000 234113

I think the placement of the circles is clear to me nowI have attached another chart with a sideways count RegardsTradersZone gtTradersZoneI sent this yesterday but will re-send It was part ofgtmy reply to your question regarding the circle I dont have a recordgtof your return chartwork for this part If its a duplicate send sorry

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject SidewaysDate Montag 14 Februar 2000 054227

At 21100 114100 PM you wrotegtI think the placement of the circles is clear to me nowgtI have attached another chart with a sideways countgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone Your chart was on target Looks like youre ready for the next part Here it is Regards Gordon During this segment youll learn how to arrive at two price targets using Dr Andrews sidewayscount Simple arithmetic is all thats required once the sideways channel and circles are in place Well continue to use the Brightpoint chart which is attached Note that Brightpoint fell throughthe bottom channel line at the point where we placed our second circle so figuring out possibledownside targets would have been in order at that time Heres how thats done 1 Determine the price range of the channel In this case the range is $4 34 (21 12 - 16 34) 2 Count the number of circles on the lower channel line The lower line is used in this casebecause thats the line that didnt hold Prices went through it returned to check it out and thencontinued lower 3 Multiply the price range of the channel times the number of circles drawn on the lower channelline (4 34 x 2 = 9 12) 4 Subtract that figure from the upper channel line priceThe result becomes downside price target 1 (21 12 - 9 12 = 12) 5 Next subtract that same figure from the price at the lower channel line Thats price target 2(16 34 - 9 12 = 7 14)

In the case of an upside channel breakout the procedure is reversed Please draw a few channelsand figure out some downside targets on your own charts When youre ready send me two orthree examples of your work As always send your questions as they arise

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re SidewaysDate Montag 14 Februar 2000 134314

Here are my examples I couldnt find enough charts with downside targets so I included some charts with upside targets Do the channel lines always have to be horizontal When I look at my charts I find more channels with an upward slope or adownward slope RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Sideways channelsDate Freitag 18 Februar 2000 005531

At 21400 14300 PM you wrotegtHere are my examples I couldnt find enough charts with downsidegttargets so I included some charts with upside targetsgt gtDo the channel lines always have to be horizontal When I look at mygtcharts I find more channels with an upward slope or a downward slopegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone The sideways method can be used with either up or down Sorry didnt mean to imply that only downsidetargets should be found Ill reword that portion of the lesson Thanks for mentioning it Dr Andrews sideways method works only on horizontal channels Others have mentioned the slopingchannels also and have wondered if there is some method to use with them I know of none Ive askedother course members for their ideas on how to approach this problem but so far no one has come up with amethod I would think that there should be a solution but have not personally taken the time to research itIf some method could be found that works as often as the Andrews sideways count it would be a significantfind The Andrews sideways count doesnt always hit the targets as you saw on your chart of Bausch amp Lomb Itworks more often than not though and it still amazes me at how often prices reach the targets Heres an observation to keep in mind Quite often after the first target is reached prices will reverse andhead back towards the channel At times youll note that they return inside the channel They will thenreverse again and head back towards the second price target These reversals happen frequently and presenttrading opportunities Im including the final segment of this lesson Regards Gordon So far in the course youve learned about Dr Andrews pivot counting procedure pitchfork and sidewayscount Youve noticed by now how often prices change trend at a P5 Youve seen how the 0-34 ML methodcan help locate the probable P5 area Youve seen how often price targets are met using the sideways countmethod The tendency for prices to reverse at a median line should be recognized as a high probability eventas well In coming lessons youll be shown how Dr Andrews used these and other high probability events totrade the stock and commodity markets The tools and techniques he used will help you put the finishingtouches on your market analysis using Andrews lines

Before continuing on to the next lesson lets briefly review what has so far been covered The attached chartprovides an opportunity to illustrate the methods referred to above Please draw these methods on thechart and return to me

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Sideways channelsDate Montag 21 Februar 2000 193743

gtBefore continuing on to the next lesson lets briefly review what hasgtso far been covered The attached chart provides an opportunity togtillustrate the methods referred to above Please draw these methods ongtthe chart and return to me Hello Gordonhere is my chart RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next lesson attachedDate Mittwoch 23 Februar 2000 014539

At 22100 73700 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongthere is my chartgt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Good job on the pivots sideways count and pitchforkLooks like youre ready to move on to the next part It wont be long and things will begin to fall inplace Regards Gordon Lesson 4 continued In one of his course letters Dr Andrews wrote The Law of Physics stated by Newton that Actionand Reaction are equal and opposite was first applied to prices by your Course Directors friendthe late Roger Babson who attributed his earnings of several million dollars to this law Beginning with this segment of lesson four and continuing in lesson five youll learn how to drawand apply the ActionReaction trading method as taught by Dr Andrews in his trading course The AR method requires a centerline or CL from which to start The CL can be any of thefollowing - MPL - ML - MLH - 2P line - 2 Gap line - Peak to low line - Low to peak lineThese are the primary lines that Dr Andrews used He stressed that some pencil work and a goodeyeball was needed in order to find the best fitting CL As with most other chart lines somework better than others The task is to find the best fit as he put it You will be shown examples of

each of the above CLs in this lesson and the next Determining which of the above listed lines to use as the CL is the first step in the ActionReactionmethod The solution often presents itself With a little practice a quick scan of the chart understudy will be all thats needed to spot the most likely CL Well begin with the attached chart Notethe CL drawn In this example a MPL (multi-pivot line) was used as the CL A MPL is a straightline that connects three or more consecutive pivots without passing through prices Theconnecting line is then extended Ive circled the three pivots that form the MPL on the chartThere are several other places on our chart where a MPL CL can be drawn Please bear in mindthat this is just the first step of the process Identification of likely CLs is all were after here Seeif you can locate two more then draw them in and send the chart back to me Well take up fromthere

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next lesson attachedDate Mittwoch 23 Februar 2000 212304

gtLesson 4 continuedgt gtIn one of his course letters Dr Andrews wrote The Law of Physicsgtstated by Newton that Action and Reaction are equal and opposite wasgtfirst applied to prices by your Course Directors friend the lategtRoger Babson who attributed his earnings of several million dollars to this lawgt gtBeginning with this segment of lesson four and continuing in lessongtfive youll learn how to draw and apply the ActionReaction tradinggtmethod as taught by Dr Andrews in his trading coursegt gtThe AR method requires a centerline or CL from which to startgtThe CL can be any of the followinggt - MPLgt - MLgt - MLHgt - 2P linegt - 2 Gap linegt - Peak to low linegt - Low to peak line Hello Gordon2P line 2 Gap line Peak to low line Low to peak line ndash actually I dont know what these lines areAre they discussed in Lesson 3 I believe you havenrsquot sent me this lesson yetAnyway I found two more MPLs on the Novellus Chart and drew them in RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Lesson 3Date Mittwoch 23 Februar 2000 235958

At 22300 92300 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt2P line 2 Gap line Peak to low line Low to peak line - actually I dont knowgtwhat these lines are Are they discussed in Lesson 3 I believe you didntgtsent me this lesson yetgtAnyway I found two more MPLs on the Novellus Chart and drew them ingt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone My apologiesI sent you an outdated version of the lesson Thanks for letting me know Musthave been my bedtime Heres the correct version Regards Gordon Lesson 3 In one of his course letters Dr Andrews wrote The Law of Physics stated by Newton that Actionand Reaction are equal and opposite was first applied to prices by your Course Directors friendthe late Roger Babson who attributed his earnings of several million dollars to this law In this lesson youll be introduced to the ActionReaction trading method as taught by Dr Andrewsin his trading course The AR method requires a centerline or CL from which to start The CL can be any of thefollowing - MPL Multi-pivot line A line drawn across 3 or more pivots - ML Median line The middle line of the pitchfork - MLH Median line parallel Either parallel line of the pitchfork - 2P line A line drawn across 2 pivots - 2 Gap line A line drawn connecting 2 gaps without touching prices in between - Peak to low line A line drawn connecting the high and low of a price leg

- Low to peak line A line drawn connecting the low and high of a price leg These are the primary lines that Dr Andrews used He stressed that some pencil work and a goodeyeball was needed in order to find the best fitting CL As with most other chart lines somework better than others The task is to find the best fit as he put it You will be shown examples ofeach of the above CLs Determining which of the above listed lines to use as the CL is the first step in the ActionReactionmethod With practice a quick view of the chart under study will be all thats needed to spot themost likely CL Youll be shown later how to experiment with possible combinations in order tofind the centerline that is most in tune with the market under study Well begin with the attached chart Note the CL drawn In this example a MPL (multi-pivot line)was used as the CL A MPL is a straight line that connects three or more consecutive pivotswithout passing through prices The connecting line is then extended Ive circled the three pivotsthat form the MPL on the chart There are several other places on our chart where a MPL CL canbe drawn Please bear in mind that this is just the first step of the process Identification of likelyCLs is all were after here See if you can locate two more then draw them in and send the chartback to me

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Donnerstag 24 Februar 2000 025105

At 22300 92300 PM you wroteI found two more MPLs on the Novellus Chart and drew them ingt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your mpls were correct This next segment shows the purpose of the centerline and how it isused Your payment in full arrived today TradersZone Thank you Regards Gordon Lesson 3 continued Please refer to the attached chart of Novellus The line drawn connecting the 3 circled pivots is amulti-pivot line (MPL) and represents the centerline (CL) well be using in this example Recall inthe previous segment that several types of centerlines are possible The choice is determined byexperimenting with the potential combinations on the chart under study Its best to try to locate acenterline somewhere close to the middle of the price chart in order to have sufficient past andforward data to use with the study This will become clear as you work with the method Once the centerline is drawn the next step is to locate a previous low or high pivot point to use fordrawing an action line Dr Andrews observed that the low pivot points often seem to work bestbut that either could be used In our example a line starting at the previous significant low wasdrawn parallel to the CL It is labeled A-1 (Action line 1) because it represents the first actionline Dr Andrews called it an action line because it was drawn as a result of a previous pivot (pricereversal) that had taken place Next a parallel line was drawn to the right of the CL and labeled R-1 Notice that it is the same distance from the CL as the corresponding A-1 line It is labeled R-1because it represents the first reaction line a line where prices are likely to stop or reverseNotice how prices reacted at the R-1 line in early 98 That serves as an indication that thecenterline chosen for this study should be a good one to use Not all reaction lines cause such aclear reversal as the R1 on this chart but many do Thats why its important to experiment withvarious centerline possibilities in order to find action lines that produce reaction lines which createthe greatest number of pivots or price stall-outs This experimentation is often quite time

consuming but experience has shown that it is time well spent When a centerline is found that isin tune with the price action of the issue under study it can be a highly effective tool for use inlocating probable reversal areas When combined with pitchfork lines the AR method can pinpointpotential reversal areas that are generally not recognized as such by others Dr Andrewstechniques for using the pitchfork and AR lines together are covered in later lessons In coming segments well study other lines that Dr Andrews used for his centerlines In themeantime experiment with the multi-pivot centerline on your own charts Then please send mean example of your work along with any questions you may have

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Freitag 25 Februar 2000 211356

gtIn the meantime experiment with the multi-pivot centerline on your owngtcharts Then please send me an example of your work along with anygtquestions you may have Hello Gordon I was wondering how many ActionReaction lines could be drawn on a chart On my attached chart I found at least 6 parallellines which had a significant meaning for the price RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject AR linesDate Montag 28 Februar 2000 080128

gtHello Gordongt gtI was wondering how many ActionReaction lines could be drawn on agtchart On my attached chart I found at least 6 parallel lines which hadgta significant meaning for the pricegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hi TradersZone Theres no set number of lines that can be drawnactually the more you can find the betterFinding a good centerline is the key And once you find lines that work such as you did anynumber of parallel lines can be drawn You are doing exactly what Dr Andrews didtaking thetime and effort to find the best fitting sets of lines Each chart has them and each chart is differentas Im sure youve found Nice work Heres the next part Regards Gordon Lesson 3 continued One of Dr Andrews favorite techniques dealt with gapsan often times perplexing price event formany traders His observations over the years suggested to him that while gaps show upfrequently on many price charts few traders have a method for including them as an integral partof their chart analysis Thats not surprising since not much has been published about how toapproach the use of gaps in a trading method Dr Andrews however found several ways to putprice gaps to good use An ActionReaction centerline which uses gaps as its basis is one suchmethod Please refer to the attached chart of Cendant Youll see that a centerline was drawn which passedthrough the July gap Note that it also came in contact with several pivots thereby qualifying as agapmulti-pivot centerline It is drawn by starting at the April low pivot and extending a line acrossand through the gap in mid-July It subsequently touches two additional high pivots Dr Andrews counted each gap as two pivots He noted that the more pivots a line touched the

stronger the line tended to be in the future Good reason then for using the July gap as the basisfor an ActionReaction study Our CL is labelled a gap-mpl-CL The May 98 high was used for the Action Line starting point A line was then drawn parallel to theCenterline as per ActionReaction procedure The corresponding Reaction Line was then drawn inIf this particular study had been drawn on Cendants chart right after the July gap was put in thepotential for prices to go all the way down to the Reaction Line might have seemed very slim at thetime Notice however that prices reached the Reaction Line in early September Youll see thishappen time and again as you work with the AR method The core of its effectiveness is a strongCL Please send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts of your choice

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re AR linesDate Montag 28 Februar 2000 155937

gtPlease send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts of yourgtchoice Hello Gordonhere are my examples RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject More on the ARDate Donnerstag 2 Maumlrz 2000 071158

At 22800 35900 PM you wrotegtgtPlease send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts ofgtgtyour choicegt gtHello Gordongthere are my examplesgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone You picked some good examples to use for your AR study Both showed the potential power of thismethod Takes time and lots of chart study sometimes to find the best set of lines but the rewardscan be many Heres something else to look at Regards Gordon The ActionReaction technique requires a strong centerline from which to begin The key todeciding which set of pivots to use for the centerline is found through experimenting with thevarious configurations visible on the chart under study The centerline might be a series of gapspivots an existing median line or any of Dr Andrews lines The task is to search for that centerlinewhich shows the greatest potential for projecting price reversal areas Dr Andrews did that byfinding a likely centerline near the middle of his price chart That allowed him to use any of theprevious pivots for his action lines By experimenting he found reaction lines that did the best jobof pegging reversal areas at data points located forward of the centerline Reaction lines are equal and opposite of the action lines and serve to project price levels at whicha reversal can be expected That is why the task of seeking out the best centerline is so importantDr Andrews reasoned that a series of reaction lines which have pegged price reversals in the pastis likely to continue to be in tune with current and future market price action Having severalprevious pivots to use as anchors for drawing action lines is thus essential The attached chart of Lattice illustrates this concept Please bear in mind that the gapmplcenterline is not the only centerline one could use on this chart You might want to study the chartfor other AR possibilities Try a peak-to-peak CL or a multi-pivot CL Send me your studies along

with any questions

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re More on the ARDate Samstag 4 Maumlrz 2000 002521

gtThe attached chart of Lattice illustrates this conceptgtPlease bear in mind that the gapmpl centerline is not the onlygtcenterline one could use on this chartgtYou might want to study the chart for other AR possibilitiesgtTry a peak-to-peak CL or a multi-pivot CL Send me your studiesgtalong with any questions Hello Gordonhere is my chart RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Peak to peak clDate Sonntag 5 Maumlrz 2000 064107

At 3400 122500 AM you wrotegtHello Gordongthere is my chartgt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Looks like you have the concept down Takes time and a lot of chart work to find the bestcenterline When the reaction lines dont seem to peg reversal areas chances are the centerline isnot the one that is best in tune with the price action of the issue under studyDespite the time required for this method it was one of Dr Andrews stand-bysAR lines could befound on most of his charts Im sending a chart with an example of a peak-to-peak CL Regards Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Peak to peak clDate Sonntag 5 Maumlrz 2000 171232

Hello Gordon I think the peak-to-peak CL on the last chart I sent to you was not really drawn from peak to peakIm sending another example RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next LessonDate Mittwoch 8 Maumlrz 2000 072526

At 3500 51200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtI think the peak-to-peak CL on the last chart I sent to you was notgtreally drawn from peak to peakgtIm sending another examplegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your peak to peak cl example was correctly drawn Thats a fairly simple approach but quite oftenthe peak to peak yields better reaction lines Heres the first part of the next lesson Regards Gordon Youll find times when prices dont quite reach the ML but instead drift alongside or away from itThe Schiff ML was designed to be used in place of the regular ML whenever that happens Suchprice action can be found at any place on a chart but most frequently occurs after a sharp sell-offor run-up of prices Dr Andrews also used the Schiff ML whenever his regular ML sloped at an unusually steep angleHe said it helped smooth out irregular price action such as that caused by unexpected earningsnews crop planting delays or poor growing conditions crop production reports etc Youll findnearly vertical price moves over a short period of time on many charts The Schiff ML method helpsput things back in perspective when that happens Well use the chart of Sterling Bancorp as an example of prices drifting away from the regular MLThat ML is drawn in black Prices didnt quite reach the ML but drifted alongside and eventuallyaway from it The Schiff ML and parallel lines are drawn in red Notice how prices were containedwithin the Schiff pitchfork until they finally broke down at the upper parallel line The procedure for drawing the Schiff ML is the same as for the regular ML except the startingpoint is located midway between the first 2 pivots youll be using The Sterling Bancorp chart

illustrates how this is done Dr Andrews also suggested using the Schiff ML whenever the regular ML method doesnt seem tobe in sync with price action Practice this procedure on your own charts and send a couple examples when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next LessonDate Donnerstag 9 Maumlrz 2000 001143

Hello Gordon in my charting software (Dynamic Trader) the Schiff ML is drawn by finding the midpoint of the line between pivot A and pivot Bmoving this point horizontally to directly above or below (depending on whether A is a low or high pivot) the A pivot anddrawing a line from his point through the midpoint of the BC swingAre there different methods of drawing a Schiff MLI was too lazy to draw Schiff MLs by hand with the method you described so Im sending my examples with the Dynamic TraderSchiff MLs -) RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject SchiffDate Samstag 11 Maumlrz 2000 070226

At 3900 121100 AM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtin my charting software (Dynamic Trader) the Schiff ML is drawn bygtfinding the midpoint of the line between pivot A and pivot B movinggtthis point horizontally to directly above or below (depending ongtwhether A is a low or high pivot) the A pivot and drawing a linegtgtfrom his point through the midpoint of the BC swinggtAre there different methods of drawing a Schiff MLgtI was too lazy to draw Schiff MLs by hand with the method yougtdescribed so Im sending my examples with the Dynamic Trader Schiff MLs -)gt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your program Schiff line procedure is fineits actually what Dr Andrews called a modified schiff ml and is onlyslightly different than the one I sent you initially The one you used is preferred by most course members Im sendingthe modified Schiff lesson and a chart along with this email The chart example shows how to use it with 0-34 pivots Regards Gordon

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Sliding Parallel LineDate Montag 13 Maumlrz 2000 005252

Hello TradersZone Heres one of the tools Dr Andrews used most often when entering exiting or reversing marketpositions Not many people know about this technique Regards Gordon The Sliding Parallel (SH) is drawn whenever prices cross an Andrews line and then move along itFor example if the bottom of a daily price bar range drops through a lower parallel line of apitchfork a new parallel line is then drawn from that low and extended to the right If the nextdays price bar drops through that sliding parallel line a sell signal is generated Whenever price action dictates a sliding parallel the next step is to draw a Warning Line Thewarning line is an additional parallel line that is an image extension of the original pitchforkchannels It serves as a warning that if prices penetrate the sliding parallel the next likely target isthe WL The attached chart of Avis illustrates these procedures Please try these on your own charts andsend me an example

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Sliding Parallel LineDate Dienstag 14 Maumlrz 2000 225737

Hello Gordon this is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning line RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 065606

At 31400 105700 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtthis is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning linegt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone Your chart of circuit city was a good example for this study I may have mentioned it earlier but DrAndrews used this technique on a regular basis The next part of this lesson covers another of hisfavorite tools the mini-median line pitchfork Here it is Regards Gordon The Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry and exit tools Though mostoften drawn using alternate closing prices alternate highs and lows can also be usedin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days is usually the maximumbetween pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or more back from P2 Dr Andrews used Mini-Median Line pitchforks for buy and sell signals whenever he expected areversal Some examples include a probable P5 or when prices are at a Warning Line ML MLHmajor ML extension or a sideways channel price target When prices cross the Mini-Median LineParallel (MMLH) a sliding parallel (SH) is used for order entry

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 231537

gtThe Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry andgtexit tools Though most often drawn using alternate closing pricesgtalternate highs and lows can also be usedgtin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days isgtusually the maximum between pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or moregtback from P2

Hello Gordon

wouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timingCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available whenDr Andrews was alive

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject intraday chartsDate Samstag 18 Maumlrz 2000 012400

At 31600 111500 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongtgtwouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsgtinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timinggtCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available when DrgtAndrews was alivegtgtRegardsgtTradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Youre absolutely correctintraday charts were not available when DrAndrews was a trader

Im reading between the lines here but if you plan to day-trade using the course techniques ie thepitchfork then I agree that the regular pitchfork would be more useful on intraday charts Otherwisewhipsaw would be a significant problem Please get back to me if I didnt address your questionbecause this is a very important technique The mini-median line pitchfork and sliding parallel showedup on most of Dr Andrews charts

Regards

Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re intraday chartsDate Dienstag 21 Maumlrz 2000 220322

Hello Gordon

You are right Im planning to daytrade SampP futures using the course techniques among other things

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 003408

Hi TradersZone Here are a couple Andrews techniques that will help anticipate the breakout direction of asideways channelThey work often enough to warrant keep handy Regards Gordon In an earlier lesson you were introduced to Dr Andrews sideways count You saw how frequentlythe sideways count method provided high probability price objectives after the breakout from theestablished channel took place In this segment of lesson 4 youll be shown 2 congestion area techniques that can help youdetermine the probable sideways channel price breakout direction Both rely on the use of pivots The first uses the pivot points that are circled on a sideways channel Dr Andrews observed thatwhenever a sideways channel results in at least 5 circle contacts the eventual price breakoutwould very often be in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle If circle 5 is at thetop of the channel for example the eventual price breakout would likely be to the upside If circle5 is at the bottom of the channel look for a downside breakout Dr Andrews noted that thistechnique can be subject to false breakouts but that such breakouts are usually followed shortlyafter with a confirmed breakout in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle Heemphasized that this study is best considered as a rule of thumb observation He viewed it as asupporting indicator for use with a short-term pitchfork as prices approached a channel line There are 2 charts attached that show how this works

The second technique in this part of lesson 4 deals with a sideways channelthat is building shortly after a P3 has been formed Dr Andrews noted thatwhenever that happened the probabilities were high that prices wouldbreakout in the same direction they were moving prior to the formation ofthe sideways channel The attached P3 to sideways example chart shows thisprocedure

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 205235

Hello Gordon here is my example for the 5 circle sideways count RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Lesson 5Date Montag 27 Maumlrz 2000 060731

At 32400 85200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my example for the 5 circle sideways countgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt gt Hi TradersZone Good example of the 5th circle tendency to predict the direction of a sideways breakout Any luckfinding a chart showing the P3 to sideways rule Im sending the first part of the next lesson This trendline method is a useful tool with all of DrAndrews course lines He used it all the time but especially when looking for confirmation of othercourse method trading signals Regards Gordon The Course Trendline__________________________________________________________ Next well discuss the trendline Seasoned traders agree that the trendline is one of their mostimportant tools No matter what kind of trading program or technique they use the trendline on achart is a must But one of the biggest mistakes made by amateurs and professionals alike isinconsistently drawing or defining the trendline Dr Andrews trendline procedure is simpleconsistent and accurate It works extremely well with the pivot count and with the pitchfork For an uptrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the lowest low up and to thehighest minor low point preceding the highest high The line must not pass through prices inbetween the two low points Extend the line(Attached chart of Brightpoint) For a downtrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the highest high point to thelowest minor high point preceding the lowest low so that it does not pass through prices inbetween the two high points Extend the line (Brightpoint chart) Thats all theres to it Its simple consistent and it works well with other Andrews lines It also

helps eliminate personal bias and haphazard analysis Practice drawing these trendlines on your own charts Send me any questions you might have andthen e-mail a chart of your choosing which shows at least two uptrend and two downtrend linesthat youve drawn_______________________________________________________________________

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Lesson 5Date Dienstag 28 Maumlrz 2000 120224

Hello Gordon here is my chart with trendlinesWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going above the trendline again should I draw a new trendline anddelete the old one Attached is another chart with the P3 to sideways rule I finally found an example for it RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Price failure techniqueDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081412

At 32800 120200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my chart with trendlinesgtWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going abovegtthe trendline again should I draw a new trendline and delete the oldgtone Hi TradersZone Take a look at the chart Im returningI added some lines for you to considerWith the course trendline once its broken a new one should be started Theres a technique thatties in with this coming up soon Meanwhile heres an important technique to work on It deals with those times when prices dontreach the ML Regards Gordon Dr Andrews Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P ofreversaland the ML the probability is that this price reversal will go further thanitdid on its approach toward the ML (Extract of original course material) A price failure very often indicates a sizeable reversal will take placeThepitchforks drawn on the chart of Home Depot illustrate the concept of pricefailure Dr Andrews routinely drew a new pitchfork on his chart after a newsignificant pivot had formed He knew that prices had a high probability ofreaching the new ML before stalling out or reversing If prices reversedbeforereaching the ML thereby forming a new pivot he termed it a price failureTheunderlying idea here is that Dr Andrews fully anticipated his median linewouldact as a price magnet To conclude that a price reversal resulted in a price failure Dr Andrewsused

these primary signalsa subsequent price penetration of a short-termmulti-pivotline andor a return of prices to and penetration of the parallel lineformed atpivot 3 of the pitchfork (The circles on the Home Depot chart denote theparallelline penetration signal To avoid clutter the mpl lines were not drawn) One possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart of ConsecoIncLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me a copy

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject ChartDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081800Attachments image002png

Hi TradersZone Forgot the chart Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Price failure techniqueDate Samstag 1 April 2000 201000

gtOne possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart ofgtConseco IncgtLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me agtcopy Hi Gordon here are my charts with price failures RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Mittwoch 5 April 2000 235624

Hi TradersZone Good price failure examples you sentany comments or questions about it Heres the next partanother old standby Dr Andrews kept handy Regards Gordon In this segment youll learn how to use the Fan line Technique To draw the fan lines youll apply the coursetrendline method which was introduced in an earlier lesson It might be well to emphasize that the practicalapplication of the course trendline method requires practice and experience both of which will serve youwell in this technique Dr Andrews used fan lines as an adjunct to his pitchfork sideways channel andactionreaction methods In the fan line study three trendlines are drawn from the original reversal pivot of the price correction understudy typically a P0 or a P5 Youll notice on the charts included with this study that each fan line is at aflatter angle than its predecessor When the third fan line is broken the rule is that the correction has endedand a new trend is under way Try this technique on some of your own charts and then please send me asample

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Donnerstag 6 April 2000 234315

Hi Gordon No I dont have any specific question about the price failure technique I guess the next likely target after a price failure wouldbe the warning line I have attached two charts with fan linesIs it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the third fan line is broken RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Next segmentDate Freitag 7 April 2000 003312

Hello TradersZone

Tuesday April 06 2000 114315 AM you wrote

TZgt Hi Gordon

TZgt No I dont have any specific question about the price failureTZgt technique I guess the next likely target after a price failureTZgt would be the warning line

TZgt I have attached two charts with fan linesTZgt Is it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the thirdTZgt fan line is broken

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Thats right the warning line is the next price target Additionalwarning lines can be drawn if needed but usually one will do it Ifprices go through the first warning line another can be drawn butmost likely a new pitchfork could be drawn instead which would bepreferable Helps stay current with recently formed pivots

When prices break through the third fan line a buy or sell signal isgiven Not sure what you mean by fourth target fan line Im a littledense today

Your chart work was goodthis is another handy tool for spotting thehigh probability of a price reversal or trend change

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject The Gap TradeDate Freitag 7 April 2000 004858

Hello TradersZone This trading signal doesnt show up very often but past observations have shown that its well worth watching for Dr Andrews placed a lot of emphasis on the importance of price gaps something many traders overlook This is one of his gap uses Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom The Gap Trading Technique Price gaps can be a dilemma for many traders The general rule denoting market strength or weakness after ahigh volume gap often comes up short after the initial reaction is over Many gappers simply run out ofsteam A high volume gap in itself seems to offer precious little evidence that a profitable move is about toget under way Dr Andrews used price gaps somewhat differently than others He counted a gap as 2 pivots Youll see howthat works in the following technique which uses a gap to arrive at a price level for a buy or sell order Using short-term daily price pivots label the pivot immediately preceding the gap as p0 Count the gap as 2pivots labeling it p1 amp p2 After p3 has formed and prices reverse towards a short-term p4 draw a horizontalline 2 price tics or more (individual preference)to the right of p3 Enter the market only if prices reach orpenetrate that line within a few days after reversing from p4 Please look over your own charts to see if you can find places where the gap trade technique could have beenused Send me a sample when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 001925

Hello Gordon this is my chart with a gap trade RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 065538

Hello TradersZone Thursday April 08 2000 121925 PM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt this is my chart with a gap trade TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Good examplethe gap trade technique shines when an issue in at or near a P5 Similar to the one on thechart you sent Heres another trading signal tool Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Dr Andrews used several techniques which helped him determine whether a P5 was near at hand Youllrecall that he observed most price moves ended or had a significant reversal at a P5 This technique uses alternate closing prices after a P4 has been formed As with many of his studies thenumber 5 is used The chart accompanying this segment shows that there were 5 alternate closes to thedownside after P4 was put in Dr Andrews noted that whenever 5 or more alternate closes followed a P4 theprobabilities were high that a P5 was near at hand An added feature to this chart study is the sideways channel Notice how the 2nd target price and the 5thalternate close nearly coincide

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 12 April 2000 200730

Hello Gordon This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 13 April 2000 082418

Monday April 12 2000 80730 AM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hello TradersZone Good chart example of this Andrews toolanother of his very unusual observations that workmore often than not Heres the final part of this lesson Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom In this trendline method Dr Andrews once again used the number 5 as the basis for locating aprobable reversal area He found this technique to be especially useful whenever a clear orobvious pivot count didnt show up onthe price move under study Trendlines are drawn using the course trendline method When the 5th trendline is broken theprobability is high that the trend under study has ended A mini-median line pitchfork andorsliding parallel could be used for pricing a trading order The accompanying chart of Compaq Computer is an example of how the trendline study could beused The pivot count beginning at the October low is difficult to nail down There were severalsmall areas of congestion but no sizeable corrections while prices advanced The count wasunclear By following the price action using the course trendline technique however the traderwould have been alerted to the possibility of a change of trend when the 5th trendline was brokenin early February Try this technique on your own charts When youre ready please send me an example of yourstudy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 19 April 2000 124108

Hello Gordon this is my example with 5 trendlines RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[6] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 20 April 2000 012726

Monday April 19 2000 124108 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt this is my example with 5 trendlines

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Good example of the 5 TL technique Always reminds me of how the fairly simple tools often do a better job than manyof the sophisticated studies out there

That was the last part of lesson 5 Lesson 6 attached is made in one mailing Youll find Dr Andrews trading rules alongwith a wrap-up review which uses several of his rules You might have questions about some of the rules so feel free tosend them as they arise

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Dr Andrews had an abbreviated set of trading rules on several index cards that he carried around with him in his shirtpocket He said every trading day turned up something new on his charts and by having his rules in his pocket he wasreminded of the need for a methodical approach to his analysis Quite a comment coming from the man who wrote therule book

In this the final lesson of the course Dr Andrews original trading rules and observations are presented Lets work witha few of them at this point

Using charts of issues you follow please send me an example that illustrates your interpretation of each of the followingrules

Rule 4 Anticipating major Ps

Rule 7 Penetration rule

Rule 8 Price failure rule

Rule 11 1-ML23 AR Centerline

Rule 12 Sliding Parallel rule

Rule 15 Mini-median line parallel to buy or sell

Feel free to include any other course techniques you choose to apply but please include examples of the above as aminimum Use more than one technique on a chart if your analysis supports it Send as many charts as you like alongwith your questionscomments

Lesson 6 - Dr Andrews Trading Rules

This lesson covers course rules and significant observations as taught by Dr Andrews in his original trading course Therules are those that he used in his own trading and are provided to serve as a checklist for use with the course tradingmethods youve learned

Rule 1 Where prices are always headed Rule You course members are among the fortunate few to be able to draw astraight line and know that prices are headed toward that ML Very few investors have ever applied this ML principle ofstatistics to price fluctuations and weve never seen this in any books on investment You are among the very few who

know that prices are always headed toward the newest ML

Rule 2 The Rule of coming opposites applies all through life In the bible we find Blessed at they that mourn for theyshall be comforted As investors we know that any losses can be recovered by using course methods

Rule 3 Turn your mind about or Rethink for all good is at hand We should mentally prepare ourselves for thecoming reversal in prices and other affairs Heres one way for example that you course members who know the MLrules can use When prices are skyrocketing upward we do this preparation by thinking If prices pivoted here today atthis price Id draw a new ML bisecting the distance between todays price and the price from which the rise started Andwe know now that if this is a Major Pivot prices will fall rapidly to this new ML Profits from such drops are big and quick

Rule 4 Rule for anticipating major Ps If during congestion or after a rally or decline you can count four previous Psthe fifth one is highly probable to be the one from which a new trend starts

Rule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can make a quick big profit is to watch for the EPformations

Rule 6 The other reversal rule is that prices tend to reverse at or near any ML as well as at any extension of each MLAnd also at any MLH or extensions of MLH

Rule 7 The Penetration Rule is that whenever prices gap past or plunge through any ML there is a high probability thatthey will quickly return to it temporarily and then resume the trend they had before they gapped or plunged through

Rule 8 Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P of reversal and the MLthe probability is that this price reversal will go further than it did on its approach toward the ML

Rule 9 The price failure rule is negated when the next price trend is also a failure in reaching the ML This is almostinvariably a signal of a big fast move in the direction indicated by this last space Rule 10 When alternate median lines of comparable length slope in the same direction the trend is firm and rapidprice changes take place

Rule 11 When 1-ML23 is exactly reached at P4 it can be used as a highly reliable centerline for the AR method

Rule 12 Frequently after crossing a lower MLH prices continue to rise along the MLH Since the crossing of the MLHsignals a further drop is likely use a sliding parallel along the bottom of the most recent crossing If prices drop past thatsliding parallel line a sell signal is generated

Rule 13 MLs between P2 and P3 can start from a nearby or a remote P1 since prices tend to reverse at each of theseMLs Try several such P2-P3 MLs to discover the best fit

Rule 14 The distance of each MLH from its ML is the distance of the next warning line Use these warning lineswhenever a SH has signalled a buy or sell

Rule 15 Use the MMLH as a buy or sell signal when you expect a reversal because of a P5 Also when prices are at aWL ML extension line or where course lines converge or intersect

Rule 16 Converging lines that meet prices have shown the highest probability of a trend reversal

Rule 17 Two to four days is usually the maximum between P2 and P3 for a MML P1 can be a day or so back from P2and 3

Rule 18 The most reliable ActionReaction centerlines seem to be MPL 2P line 2 Gap line peak to low or low to peak

Rule 19 When prices pass through R lines look for a pull back and then a continuing move in the direction of the passthrough

Rule 20 Use gaps as Action lines from the centerline

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 003755

Hello Gordonhere is my example for Rule 4 And I have a question What are EP formations gtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 021242

Tuesday May 04 2000 123755 PM you wrote TZgt Hello GordonTZgt here is my example for Rule 4 TZgt And I have a question What are EP formations gtgtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegtgta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hi TradersZone Good use of the warning linesalso the EP material is part of lesson 4 Rather than go backthrough the files to see when (or if) it was sent Im sending it along with this reply Glad youbrought it up Best RegardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Tuesday May 04 2000208 PM Dr Andrews used a fairly common price chart formation that he found useful at probable P5market tops and bottoms The formation generally called a wedge or pennant by chartists isreferred to in Dr Andrews trading course as the Expanding Pivot (EP) One of the few chartformations used in the course he regarded it as among the most dependable indications that amarket top was forming Closely related to the EP is his Inverted Expanding Pivot (IEP) which henoted could often be observed at market bottoms Both are regarded as intermediate and long-term reversal indicators Dr Andrews found that both formations were most reliable when they occurred after a sharprapid price move coinciding with the formation of a probable P5 He said it wasnt unusual for theformation to take several weeks to complete and that conservative traders could best avoid thewhipsaw associated with congestion patterns by trading only in the direction of the probable price

break out of the EP or IEP formation The attached charts illustrate these formations Please look over your own charts for an example ofthe EP and IEP and send me a copy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 232127

Hello Gordon Thank you for the lesson with the EP material I couldnt find it in any previous emailHere is my example for Rule 7 RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Rule 4Date Samstag 6 Mai 2000 080827

Wednesday May 05 2000 112127 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt Thank you for the lesson with the EP materialTZgt I couldnt find it in any previous emailTZgt Here is my example for Rule 7

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hi TradersZone

Glad you mentioned it earlierexcept for the EP IEP and hissideways channel Dr Andrews didnt have much to say about chartpatterns and formations These are good ones to use though

Your study of the penetration rule was good Later

Best Regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Wednesday May 05 2000801 PM

Page 4: Pitchfork primer

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Course enrollmentDate Mittwoch 2 Februar 2000 015929

Hello Gordon I was not sure where to put P1 so I chose the bar with the highest close gtPlease study the attached chart of LSI LogicgtLocate and label the intermediate-term pivots as you see themgtWhen ready please return your chart to me Well continue from that point

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Good callDate Mittwoch 2 Februar 2000 064819

At 2200 15900 AM you wrotegtI was not sure where to put P1 so I chose the bar with the highest close Hello TradersZone Your pivot count was by the booknice job Also your use of the highest close for pivot 1 wasexcellent logic It doesnt appear as if the count will be giving you any trouble Well be workingwith pivots throughout the course since much of Dr Andrews work was based on the oftenoverlooked importance of the interaction of various pivots on a price chart Its good to see thatyou have an early grasp of the procedure Heres the next part of the lesson Regards Gordon _________________________________________________________ Lesson One continued_________________________________________________________ Well continue to work with the NETA chart focusing on prices beginning the latter part of July98Well use our earlier pivot count to draw a pitchfork Three pivots are used when drawing the pitchfork They must be either a high low high or a lowhigh low configuration In this example we will use the P0-34 pivots as shown on the attachedchart With a ruler we locate the mid-point between the low at P3 and the high at P4 We markthat point with a small dot Then from the high at P0 we draw a line that extends through andbeyond the P34 mid-point that we marked This line is called the median line (ML) A second lineis drawn beginning at P3 and is drawn parallel to the median line A third line is drawn beginning atP4 and is also drawn parallel to the median line These lines are called parallel lines (H) Aconnecting line is then drawn from pivot 3 to pivot 4 And thats the pitchfork Its shown on theNETA chart At this point please send me a chart of your choice showing several intermediate-term pivots thatyouve marked Include at least two pitchforks Well go on from there

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Good callDate Mittwoch 2 Februar 2000 202415

Hello Gordon I have attached a chart of AET I hope its a good example RegardsTradersZone gtAt this point please send me a chart of your choice showing severalgtintermediate-term pivots that youve marked Include at least twogtpitchforks Well go on from there

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Pivots and pitchforksDate Donnerstag 3 Februar 2000 071228

At 2200 82400 PM you wrotegtI have attached a chart of AET I hope its a good examplegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone The chartwork you sent was excellentgood grasp of the count and your pitchfork procedure wascorrect Later on in the course well go over Dr Andrews techniques which will help you decidewhich pivots to use for the pitchfork that offers the best probability of staying in tune with themarkets Heres the next segment of lesson 1 Regards Gordon ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Well continue our pitchfork and pivot study using the NETA chart from the previous segment Dr Andrews noted that most sizeable price moves form 5 significant or easily recognizeable pivotsbefore reversing Some moves end with 3 pivots and occasionally youll find 7 or 9 But most hesaid will end with 5 pivots before reversing the trend under study Whenever he observed that aP4 was formed on a chart he used what he termed the 0-34 ML method to project the likely pricelevel where the P5 would form Large price reversals Dr Andrews observed often occur after a P5has formed This method is an excellent early warning signal for anticipating price reversals at a P5 The pitchfork is drawn using the P0-34 ML method as illustrated on the attached chart of NETANotice that prices reversed at the ML forming a P5 Also attached is a chart of Conseco Inc Please label the significant pivots starting at the July highand then draw one pitchfork using the 0-34 pivots and one using the 3-45 pivots Please returnyour chart along with any questions or comments

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Pivots and pitchforksDate Donnerstag 3 Februar 2000 154548

I have attached the CNC chartWhen the price moves below the P0-34 ML before making a P5 low is the lower parallel line thenext likely level where the P5 should occurOn the CNC chart the price closes above the P0-34 ML the day after breaking the ML Is that aconfirmation that the P5 low has been made

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Good QuestionsDate Freitag 4 Februar 2000 063320

At 2300 34500 PM you wrotegtI have attached the CNC chart gtWhen the price moves below the P0-34 ML before making a P5 low is thegtlower parallel line the next likely level where the P5 should occur (Thats right TradersZone The function of parallel lines is to provide the next level of support orresistance for those times when prices do not stop or reverse at the ML Dr Andrews by the waylooked for prices to reverse at any ML and form a new pivot in the process)gtOn the CNC chart the price closes above the P0-34 ML the day aftergtbreaking the ML Is that a confirmation that the P5 low has been made (That was a good sign but too close to call (imho) Please see chart for TL use as a confirmationsignal) Dr Andrews used several techniques to help him deal with probable reversalsSome are special situation type methods and others are used in conjunction with the pivot countpitchfork lines or ActionReaction lines Well be covering those rules in the last part of the course Im sending another chart for you to study and work on Please identify the main pivots in thedown move that started in April and also draw at least 2 pitchforksWhen ready please return to me Regards Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Good QuestionsDate Freitag 4 Februar 2000 191043

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Median Line TechniqueDate Sonntag 6 Februar 2000 010735

Hello TradersZone Nice work on the charts you returned Everything was by the book It appears that you have theprocedures well in hand Heres the final portion of lesson 1 The concept is basic but it does the important job of helping atrader stay on the right side of the market Will you be continuing the course Regards Gordon The first lines Dr Andrews drew on a new chart were the long-term and intermediate-term medianlines After identifying the significant pivots he drew his first median line beginning with P0-12and worked forward on the chart using each subsequent set of 3 pivots Each ML served to vectorpricesacting as a magnet if you will that drew prices towards it He said that prices will head forthe new ML over 80 of the time Parallel lines are not drawn when using this procedure Its prime function is to determine thedirection and price level of the new ML Recall that Dr Andrews anticipated a price reversal at eachnew ML The attached chart of LPX illustrates this technique Try this on some of your own charts and thenplease send me an example

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Median Line TechniqueDate Montag 7 Februar 2000 192718

I found a chart with 9 pivots I hope it doesnt matterIs it necessary that the move is made of swings with higher highs and higher lows in an uptrend (lower highs and lower lows in adowntrend)For example in the attached chart the point P6 is lower than P4 and P7 is lower than P5Another question For how long are median lines validI noticed that the P2-34 ML from my chart served as support and resistance two years later in 1998 (see attached chartLOW2GIF) but on the other hand I dont want to clutter my charts with too many lines from the past I would like to continue the course to the end I will send the money for the remaining 5 lessons tomorrow Did you receive myfirst payment yet RegardsTradersZone

LOW2GIF

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneDate Mittwoch 9 Februar 2000 054710

At 2700 72700 PM you wrotegtI found a chart with 9 pivots I hope it doesnt mattergtIs it necessary that the move is made of swings with higher highs andgthigher lows in an uptrend (lower highs and lower lows in a downtrend)gtFor example in the attached chart the point P6 is lower than P4 and P7gtis lower than P5 ( When using this ML technique TradersZone the main object is to note the price level of the newML for that is the next probable reversal area The pivots need not be in Elliott formation havingswings as you noted above Your ML procedure by the way was correct I noticed how oftenprices headed for each new ML and then reversedLater in the course well see how Dr Andrews handled those times when prices reversed beforereaching the ML area)gtAnother question For how long are median lines validgtI noticed that the P2-34 ML from my chart served as support andgtresistance two years later in 1998 (see attached chart LOW2GIF) butgton the other hand I dont want to clutter my charts with too many lines from the past (One of the interesting things about Dr Andrews lines is that no matter how far out his lines areprojected they will continue to cause prices to stall-out or reverse when reached Also wheneverseveral of his lines intersect there is a very high probability of a price reversal whether pricesconverge at the intersection or are some distancegtfrom it The probability is higher though when prices are at thegtintersecting lines A linethat has in the past provided frequent support or resistance is probably a pretty good line tokeep on your chart Youre right though charts seem to get cluttered up veryquickly)gt gtI would like to continue the course to the end I will send the moneygtfor the remaining 5 lessons tomorrow Did you receive my first payment yet (Glad to hear youre going to continue to the end Thank you for the prepayment Your first checkhasnt arrived yet will let you know when it does) Meanwhile heres the first segment of the next lesson Regards Gordon

In this lesson youll be introduced to Dr Andrews sideways count The sideways count was hisold reliable a tool that worked so well so often that it was one of the very first studies heperformed on his charts The sideways count gave him a reliable gauge that told him ahead of timehow far a stock or commodity was likely to move Sounds too good to be true perhaps but as youwork with the sideways count youll discover for yourself how often the projected price targetsare reachedoften within tics Markets frequently spend a lot of time in congestion Heres Dr Andrews way to use thatcongestion to our advantage Looking at the Brightpoint attachment please note the channel lines starting in January Youll seethat most of the pivots from Jan-May were within this channel Now look at where Ive placedcircles At each point where prices touched a channel line and then reversed direction and went allthe way back to touch the opposite channel line a circle was drawn Put another way if pricestouch one channel line but then dont go all the way back to touch the opposite channel line acircle is not drawn At first glance this technique can often be unclear so well pause here for some chart work Pleasee-mail me a chart that shows where youve drawn channel lines to identify sideways price actionand also where youve placed the channel line circles

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject ReDate Mittwoch 9 Februar 2000 184837

gtAt each point where prices touched a channel line and then reversedgtdirection and went all the way back to touch the opposite channel linegta circle was drawn Put another way if prices touch one channel linegtbut then dont go all the way back to touch the opposite channel linegta circle is not drawn Shouldnt the last circle on your Brightpoint chart be left outThe price didnt return to the opposite channel line after that day This is my chart

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Thanks for the questionDate Mittwoch 9 Februar 2000 231437

At 2900 64800 PM you wrotegtShouldnt the last circle on your Brightpoint chart be left outgtThe price didnt return to the opposite channel line after that day Hello TradersZone The last circle is appropriate but I can see where the wording in the explanation is confusing Ihave changed that paragraph to read Looking at the Brightpoint attachment please note the channel lines starting in January Youll seethat most of the pivots from Jan- May were within this channel Now look at where the circles wereplaced on the channel lines They are in alternate sequenceNote that each circle was drawn only after prices had first been at the opposite channel lineTheBrightpoint chart illustrates this procedure Thanks for pointing this out TradersZone If the wording is still unclear to you Id appreciate yourinput Meanwhile heres the next segment of this lessonRegards Gordon Well continue to use the Brightpoint chart for this portion of the sideways count study To reviewthe pattern were looking for should be a recent rectangular shaped sideways trading range thatcontains most if not all of the congestion price action Take a look at the attached chart and notehow well defined the price channel for Brightpoint is Youll probably notice that it is deeper thanthe channel you studied on the chart in the preceding segment This comparison is made toillustrate that while the first channel example covers a longer period of time the second includesall of the price ranges and is the preferred method Please look at where the circles were placed on the channel lines To review a new circle is drawnonly after prices have first been at the opposite channel line Recall that circles must be inalternate sequence eg upper linelower lineupper linelower line etc one circle at a time Note that the price range within the channel is $4 34 (High 21 12 Low 16 34) There were twocircles drawn on the lower line of our sideways channel before prices broke down Using thatinformation our next step will be to use some simple arithmetic in order to come up with twodownside price targets Well cover that procedure in the next segment Please let me know whenyou are ready to continue

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Sideways countDate Mittwoch 9 Februar 2000 232315Attachments image001png

Hi TradersZone Im returning your chartplease note comments GordonRegards Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Thanks for the questionDate Donnerstag 10 Februar 2000 233059

Hello Gordonthank you Im ready for the next lesson

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next partDate Donnerstag 10 Februar 2000 235613

At 21000 113000 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongtthank you Im ready for the next lessongt gt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt gt gt TradersZoneI sent this yesterday but will re-send It was part of my reply to your questionregarding the circle I dont have a record of your return chartwork for this part If its a duplicatesend sorry Regards Gordon Well continue to use the Brightpoint chart for this portion of the sideways count study To reviewthe pattern were looking for should be a recent rectangular shaped sideways trading range thatcontains most if not all of the congestion price action Take a look at the attached chart and notehow well defined the price channel for Brightpoint is Youll probably notice that it is deeper thanthe channel you studied on the chart in the preceding segment This comparison is made toillustrate that while the first channel example covers a longer period of time the second includesall of the price ranges and is the preferred method Please look at where the circles were placed on the channel lines To review a new circle is drawnonly after prices have first been at the opposite channel line Recall that circles must be inalternate sequence eg upper linelower lineupper linelower line etc one circle at a time Note that the price range within the channel is $4 34 (High 21 12 Low 16 34) There were twocircles drawn on the lower line of our sideways channel before prices broke down Using thatinformation our next step will be to use some simple arithmetic in order to come up with twodownside price targets Well cover that procedure in the next segment Please let me know whenyou are ready to continue

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next partDate Freitag 11 Februar 2000 234113

I think the placement of the circles is clear to me nowI have attached another chart with a sideways count RegardsTradersZone gtTradersZoneI sent this yesterday but will re-send It was part ofgtmy reply to your question regarding the circle I dont have a recordgtof your return chartwork for this part If its a duplicate send sorry

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject SidewaysDate Montag 14 Februar 2000 054227

At 21100 114100 PM you wrotegtI think the placement of the circles is clear to me nowgtI have attached another chart with a sideways countgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone Your chart was on target Looks like youre ready for the next part Here it is Regards Gordon During this segment youll learn how to arrive at two price targets using Dr Andrews sidewayscount Simple arithmetic is all thats required once the sideways channel and circles are in place Well continue to use the Brightpoint chart which is attached Note that Brightpoint fell throughthe bottom channel line at the point where we placed our second circle so figuring out possibledownside targets would have been in order at that time Heres how thats done 1 Determine the price range of the channel In this case the range is $4 34 (21 12 - 16 34) 2 Count the number of circles on the lower channel line The lower line is used in this casebecause thats the line that didnt hold Prices went through it returned to check it out and thencontinued lower 3 Multiply the price range of the channel times the number of circles drawn on the lower channelline (4 34 x 2 = 9 12) 4 Subtract that figure from the upper channel line priceThe result becomes downside price target 1 (21 12 - 9 12 = 12) 5 Next subtract that same figure from the price at the lower channel line Thats price target 2(16 34 - 9 12 = 7 14)

In the case of an upside channel breakout the procedure is reversed Please draw a few channelsand figure out some downside targets on your own charts When youre ready send me two orthree examples of your work As always send your questions as they arise

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re SidewaysDate Montag 14 Februar 2000 134314

Here are my examples I couldnt find enough charts with downside targets so I included some charts with upside targets Do the channel lines always have to be horizontal When I look at my charts I find more channels with an upward slope or adownward slope RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Sideways channelsDate Freitag 18 Februar 2000 005531

At 21400 14300 PM you wrotegtHere are my examples I couldnt find enough charts with downsidegttargets so I included some charts with upside targetsgt gtDo the channel lines always have to be horizontal When I look at mygtcharts I find more channels with an upward slope or a downward slopegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone The sideways method can be used with either up or down Sorry didnt mean to imply that only downsidetargets should be found Ill reword that portion of the lesson Thanks for mentioning it Dr Andrews sideways method works only on horizontal channels Others have mentioned the slopingchannels also and have wondered if there is some method to use with them I know of none Ive askedother course members for their ideas on how to approach this problem but so far no one has come up with amethod I would think that there should be a solution but have not personally taken the time to research itIf some method could be found that works as often as the Andrews sideways count it would be a significantfind The Andrews sideways count doesnt always hit the targets as you saw on your chart of Bausch amp Lomb Itworks more often than not though and it still amazes me at how often prices reach the targets Heres an observation to keep in mind Quite often after the first target is reached prices will reverse andhead back towards the channel At times youll note that they return inside the channel They will thenreverse again and head back towards the second price target These reversals happen frequently and presenttrading opportunities Im including the final segment of this lesson Regards Gordon So far in the course youve learned about Dr Andrews pivot counting procedure pitchfork and sidewayscount Youve noticed by now how often prices change trend at a P5 Youve seen how the 0-34 ML methodcan help locate the probable P5 area Youve seen how often price targets are met using the sideways countmethod The tendency for prices to reverse at a median line should be recognized as a high probability eventas well In coming lessons youll be shown how Dr Andrews used these and other high probability events totrade the stock and commodity markets The tools and techniques he used will help you put the finishingtouches on your market analysis using Andrews lines

Before continuing on to the next lesson lets briefly review what has so far been covered The attached chartprovides an opportunity to illustrate the methods referred to above Please draw these methods on thechart and return to me

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Sideways channelsDate Montag 21 Februar 2000 193743

gtBefore continuing on to the next lesson lets briefly review what hasgtso far been covered The attached chart provides an opportunity togtillustrate the methods referred to above Please draw these methods ongtthe chart and return to me Hello Gordonhere is my chart RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next lesson attachedDate Mittwoch 23 Februar 2000 014539

At 22100 73700 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongthere is my chartgt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Good job on the pivots sideways count and pitchforkLooks like youre ready to move on to the next part It wont be long and things will begin to fall inplace Regards Gordon Lesson 4 continued In one of his course letters Dr Andrews wrote The Law of Physics stated by Newton that Actionand Reaction are equal and opposite was first applied to prices by your Course Directors friendthe late Roger Babson who attributed his earnings of several million dollars to this law Beginning with this segment of lesson four and continuing in lesson five youll learn how to drawand apply the ActionReaction trading method as taught by Dr Andrews in his trading course The AR method requires a centerline or CL from which to start The CL can be any of thefollowing - MPL - ML - MLH - 2P line - 2 Gap line - Peak to low line - Low to peak lineThese are the primary lines that Dr Andrews used He stressed that some pencil work and a goodeyeball was needed in order to find the best fitting CL As with most other chart lines somework better than others The task is to find the best fit as he put it You will be shown examples of

each of the above CLs in this lesson and the next Determining which of the above listed lines to use as the CL is the first step in the ActionReactionmethod The solution often presents itself With a little practice a quick scan of the chart understudy will be all thats needed to spot the most likely CL Well begin with the attached chart Notethe CL drawn In this example a MPL (multi-pivot line) was used as the CL A MPL is a straightline that connects three or more consecutive pivots without passing through prices Theconnecting line is then extended Ive circled the three pivots that form the MPL on the chartThere are several other places on our chart where a MPL CL can be drawn Please bear in mindthat this is just the first step of the process Identification of likely CLs is all were after here Seeif you can locate two more then draw them in and send the chart back to me Well take up fromthere

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next lesson attachedDate Mittwoch 23 Februar 2000 212304

gtLesson 4 continuedgt gtIn one of his course letters Dr Andrews wrote The Law of Physicsgtstated by Newton that Action and Reaction are equal and opposite wasgtfirst applied to prices by your Course Directors friend the lategtRoger Babson who attributed his earnings of several million dollars to this lawgt gtBeginning with this segment of lesson four and continuing in lessongtfive youll learn how to draw and apply the ActionReaction tradinggtmethod as taught by Dr Andrews in his trading coursegt gtThe AR method requires a centerline or CL from which to startgtThe CL can be any of the followinggt - MPLgt - MLgt - MLHgt - 2P linegt - 2 Gap linegt - Peak to low linegt - Low to peak line Hello Gordon2P line 2 Gap line Peak to low line Low to peak line ndash actually I dont know what these lines areAre they discussed in Lesson 3 I believe you havenrsquot sent me this lesson yetAnyway I found two more MPLs on the Novellus Chart and drew them in RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Lesson 3Date Mittwoch 23 Februar 2000 235958

At 22300 92300 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt2P line 2 Gap line Peak to low line Low to peak line - actually I dont knowgtwhat these lines are Are they discussed in Lesson 3 I believe you didntgtsent me this lesson yetgtAnyway I found two more MPLs on the Novellus Chart and drew them ingt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone My apologiesI sent you an outdated version of the lesson Thanks for letting me know Musthave been my bedtime Heres the correct version Regards Gordon Lesson 3 In one of his course letters Dr Andrews wrote The Law of Physics stated by Newton that Actionand Reaction are equal and opposite was first applied to prices by your Course Directors friendthe late Roger Babson who attributed his earnings of several million dollars to this law In this lesson youll be introduced to the ActionReaction trading method as taught by Dr Andrewsin his trading course The AR method requires a centerline or CL from which to start The CL can be any of thefollowing - MPL Multi-pivot line A line drawn across 3 or more pivots - ML Median line The middle line of the pitchfork - MLH Median line parallel Either parallel line of the pitchfork - 2P line A line drawn across 2 pivots - 2 Gap line A line drawn connecting 2 gaps without touching prices in between - Peak to low line A line drawn connecting the high and low of a price leg

- Low to peak line A line drawn connecting the low and high of a price leg These are the primary lines that Dr Andrews used He stressed that some pencil work and a goodeyeball was needed in order to find the best fitting CL As with most other chart lines somework better than others The task is to find the best fit as he put it You will be shown examples ofeach of the above CLs Determining which of the above listed lines to use as the CL is the first step in the ActionReactionmethod With practice a quick view of the chart under study will be all thats needed to spot themost likely CL Youll be shown later how to experiment with possible combinations in order tofind the centerline that is most in tune with the market under study Well begin with the attached chart Note the CL drawn In this example a MPL (multi-pivot line)was used as the CL A MPL is a straight line that connects three or more consecutive pivotswithout passing through prices The connecting line is then extended Ive circled the three pivotsthat form the MPL on the chart There are several other places on our chart where a MPL CL canbe drawn Please bear in mind that this is just the first step of the process Identification of likelyCLs is all were after here See if you can locate two more then draw them in and send the chartback to me

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Donnerstag 24 Februar 2000 025105

At 22300 92300 PM you wroteI found two more MPLs on the Novellus Chart and drew them ingt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your mpls were correct This next segment shows the purpose of the centerline and how it isused Your payment in full arrived today TradersZone Thank you Regards Gordon Lesson 3 continued Please refer to the attached chart of Novellus The line drawn connecting the 3 circled pivots is amulti-pivot line (MPL) and represents the centerline (CL) well be using in this example Recall inthe previous segment that several types of centerlines are possible The choice is determined byexperimenting with the potential combinations on the chart under study Its best to try to locate acenterline somewhere close to the middle of the price chart in order to have sufficient past andforward data to use with the study This will become clear as you work with the method Once the centerline is drawn the next step is to locate a previous low or high pivot point to use fordrawing an action line Dr Andrews observed that the low pivot points often seem to work bestbut that either could be used In our example a line starting at the previous significant low wasdrawn parallel to the CL It is labeled A-1 (Action line 1) because it represents the first actionline Dr Andrews called it an action line because it was drawn as a result of a previous pivot (pricereversal) that had taken place Next a parallel line was drawn to the right of the CL and labeled R-1 Notice that it is the same distance from the CL as the corresponding A-1 line It is labeled R-1because it represents the first reaction line a line where prices are likely to stop or reverseNotice how prices reacted at the R-1 line in early 98 That serves as an indication that thecenterline chosen for this study should be a good one to use Not all reaction lines cause such aclear reversal as the R1 on this chart but many do Thats why its important to experiment withvarious centerline possibilities in order to find action lines that produce reaction lines which createthe greatest number of pivots or price stall-outs This experimentation is often quite time

consuming but experience has shown that it is time well spent When a centerline is found that isin tune with the price action of the issue under study it can be a highly effective tool for use inlocating probable reversal areas When combined with pitchfork lines the AR method can pinpointpotential reversal areas that are generally not recognized as such by others Dr Andrewstechniques for using the pitchfork and AR lines together are covered in later lessons In coming segments well study other lines that Dr Andrews used for his centerlines In themeantime experiment with the multi-pivot centerline on your own charts Then please send mean example of your work along with any questions you may have

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Freitag 25 Februar 2000 211356

gtIn the meantime experiment with the multi-pivot centerline on your owngtcharts Then please send me an example of your work along with anygtquestions you may have Hello Gordon I was wondering how many ActionReaction lines could be drawn on a chart On my attached chart I found at least 6 parallellines which had a significant meaning for the price RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject AR linesDate Montag 28 Februar 2000 080128

gtHello Gordongt gtI was wondering how many ActionReaction lines could be drawn on agtchart On my attached chart I found at least 6 parallel lines which hadgta significant meaning for the pricegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hi TradersZone Theres no set number of lines that can be drawnactually the more you can find the betterFinding a good centerline is the key And once you find lines that work such as you did anynumber of parallel lines can be drawn You are doing exactly what Dr Andrews didtaking thetime and effort to find the best fitting sets of lines Each chart has them and each chart is differentas Im sure youve found Nice work Heres the next part Regards Gordon Lesson 3 continued One of Dr Andrews favorite techniques dealt with gapsan often times perplexing price event formany traders His observations over the years suggested to him that while gaps show upfrequently on many price charts few traders have a method for including them as an integral partof their chart analysis Thats not surprising since not much has been published about how toapproach the use of gaps in a trading method Dr Andrews however found several ways to putprice gaps to good use An ActionReaction centerline which uses gaps as its basis is one suchmethod Please refer to the attached chart of Cendant Youll see that a centerline was drawn which passedthrough the July gap Note that it also came in contact with several pivots thereby qualifying as agapmulti-pivot centerline It is drawn by starting at the April low pivot and extending a line acrossand through the gap in mid-July It subsequently touches two additional high pivots Dr Andrews counted each gap as two pivots He noted that the more pivots a line touched the

stronger the line tended to be in the future Good reason then for using the July gap as the basisfor an ActionReaction study Our CL is labelled a gap-mpl-CL The May 98 high was used for the Action Line starting point A line was then drawn parallel to theCenterline as per ActionReaction procedure The corresponding Reaction Line was then drawn inIf this particular study had been drawn on Cendants chart right after the July gap was put in thepotential for prices to go all the way down to the Reaction Line might have seemed very slim at thetime Notice however that prices reached the Reaction Line in early September Youll see thishappen time and again as you work with the AR method The core of its effectiveness is a strongCL Please send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts of your choice

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re AR linesDate Montag 28 Februar 2000 155937

gtPlease send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts of yourgtchoice Hello Gordonhere are my examples RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject More on the ARDate Donnerstag 2 Maumlrz 2000 071158

At 22800 35900 PM you wrotegtgtPlease send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts ofgtgtyour choicegt gtHello Gordongthere are my examplesgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone You picked some good examples to use for your AR study Both showed the potential power of thismethod Takes time and lots of chart study sometimes to find the best set of lines but the rewardscan be many Heres something else to look at Regards Gordon The ActionReaction technique requires a strong centerline from which to begin The key todeciding which set of pivots to use for the centerline is found through experimenting with thevarious configurations visible on the chart under study The centerline might be a series of gapspivots an existing median line or any of Dr Andrews lines The task is to search for that centerlinewhich shows the greatest potential for projecting price reversal areas Dr Andrews did that byfinding a likely centerline near the middle of his price chart That allowed him to use any of theprevious pivots for his action lines By experimenting he found reaction lines that did the best jobof pegging reversal areas at data points located forward of the centerline Reaction lines are equal and opposite of the action lines and serve to project price levels at whicha reversal can be expected That is why the task of seeking out the best centerline is so importantDr Andrews reasoned that a series of reaction lines which have pegged price reversals in the pastis likely to continue to be in tune with current and future market price action Having severalprevious pivots to use as anchors for drawing action lines is thus essential The attached chart of Lattice illustrates this concept Please bear in mind that the gapmplcenterline is not the only centerline one could use on this chart You might want to study the chartfor other AR possibilities Try a peak-to-peak CL or a multi-pivot CL Send me your studies along

with any questions

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re More on the ARDate Samstag 4 Maumlrz 2000 002521

gtThe attached chart of Lattice illustrates this conceptgtPlease bear in mind that the gapmpl centerline is not the onlygtcenterline one could use on this chartgtYou might want to study the chart for other AR possibilitiesgtTry a peak-to-peak CL or a multi-pivot CL Send me your studiesgtalong with any questions Hello Gordonhere is my chart RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Peak to peak clDate Sonntag 5 Maumlrz 2000 064107

At 3400 122500 AM you wrotegtHello Gordongthere is my chartgt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Looks like you have the concept down Takes time and a lot of chart work to find the bestcenterline When the reaction lines dont seem to peg reversal areas chances are the centerline isnot the one that is best in tune with the price action of the issue under studyDespite the time required for this method it was one of Dr Andrews stand-bysAR lines could befound on most of his charts Im sending a chart with an example of a peak-to-peak CL Regards Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Peak to peak clDate Sonntag 5 Maumlrz 2000 171232

Hello Gordon I think the peak-to-peak CL on the last chart I sent to you was not really drawn from peak to peakIm sending another example RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next LessonDate Mittwoch 8 Maumlrz 2000 072526

At 3500 51200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtI think the peak-to-peak CL on the last chart I sent to you was notgtreally drawn from peak to peakgtIm sending another examplegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your peak to peak cl example was correctly drawn Thats a fairly simple approach but quite oftenthe peak to peak yields better reaction lines Heres the first part of the next lesson Regards Gordon Youll find times when prices dont quite reach the ML but instead drift alongside or away from itThe Schiff ML was designed to be used in place of the regular ML whenever that happens Suchprice action can be found at any place on a chart but most frequently occurs after a sharp sell-offor run-up of prices Dr Andrews also used the Schiff ML whenever his regular ML sloped at an unusually steep angleHe said it helped smooth out irregular price action such as that caused by unexpected earningsnews crop planting delays or poor growing conditions crop production reports etc Youll findnearly vertical price moves over a short period of time on many charts The Schiff ML method helpsput things back in perspective when that happens Well use the chart of Sterling Bancorp as an example of prices drifting away from the regular MLThat ML is drawn in black Prices didnt quite reach the ML but drifted alongside and eventuallyaway from it The Schiff ML and parallel lines are drawn in red Notice how prices were containedwithin the Schiff pitchfork until they finally broke down at the upper parallel line The procedure for drawing the Schiff ML is the same as for the regular ML except the startingpoint is located midway between the first 2 pivots youll be using The Sterling Bancorp chart

illustrates how this is done Dr Andrews also suggested using the Schiff ML whenever the regular ML method doesnt seem tobe in sync with price action Practice this procedure on your own charts and send a couple examples when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next LessonDate Donnerstag 9 Maumlrz 2000 001143

Hello Gordon in my charting software (Dynamic Trader) the Schiff ML is drawn by finding the midpoint of the line between pivot A and pivot Bmoving this point horizontally to directly above or below (depending on whether A is a low or high pivot) the A pivot anddrawing a line from his point through the midpoint of the BC swingAre there different methods of drawing a Schiff MLI was too lazy to draw Schiff MLs by hand with the method you described so Im sending my examples with the Dynamic TraderSchiff MLs -) RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject SchiffDate Samstag 11 Maumlrz 2000 070226

At 3900 121100 AM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtin my charting software (Dynamic Trader) the Schiff ML is drawn bygtfinding the midpoint of the line between pivot A and pivot B movinggtthis point horizontally to directly above or below (depending ongtwhether A is a low or high pivot) the A pivot and drawing a linegtgtfrom his point through the midpoint of the BC swinggtAre there different methods of drawing a Schiff MLgtI was too lazy to draw Schiff MLs by hand with the method yougtdescribed so Im sending my examples with the Dynamic Trader Schiff MLs -)gt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your program Schiff line procedure is fineits actually what Dr Andrews called a modified schiff ml and is onlyslightly different than the one I sent you initially The one you used is preferred by most course members Im sendingthe modified Schiff lesson and a chart along with this email The chart example shows how to use it with 0-34 pivots Regards Gordon

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Sliding Parallel LineDate Montag 13 Maumlrz 2000 005252

Hello TradersZone Heres one of the tools Dr Andrews used most often when entering exiting or reversing marketpositions Not many people know about this technique Regards Gordon The Sliding Parallel (SH) is drawn whenever prices cross an Andrews line and then move along itFor example if the bottom of a daily price bar range drops through a lower parallel line of apitchfork a new parallel line is then drawn from that low and extended to the right If the nextdays price bar drops through that sliding parallel line a sell signal is generated Whenever price action dictates a sliding parallel the next step is to draw a Warning Line Thewarning line is an additional parallel line that is an image extension of the original pitchforkchannels It serves as a warning that if prices penetrate the sliding parallel the next likely target isthe WL The attached chart of Avis illustrates these procedures Please try these on your own charts andsend me an example

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Sliding Parallel LineDate Dienstag 14 Maumlrz 2000 225737

Hello Gordon this is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning line RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 065606

At 31400 105700 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtthis is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning linegt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone Your chart of circuit city was a good example for this study I may have mentioned it earlier but DrAndrews used this technique on a regular basis The next part of this lesson covers another of hisfavorite tools the mini-median line pitchfork Here it is Regards Gordon The Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry and exit tools Though mostoften drawn using alternate closing prices alternate highs and lows can also be usedin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days is usually the maximumbetween pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or more back from P2 Dr Andrews used Mini-Median Line pitchforks for buy and sell signals whenever he expected areversal Some examples include a probable P5 or when prices are at a Warning Line ML MLHmajor ML extension or a sideways channel price target When prices cross the Mini-Median LineParallel (MMLH) a sliding parallel (SH) is used for order entry

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 231537

gtThe Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry andgtexit tools Though most often drawn using alternate closing pricesgtalternate highs and lows can also be usedgtin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days isgtusually the maximum between pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or moregtback from P2

Hello Gordon

wouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timingCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available whenDr Andrews was alive

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject intraday chartsDate Samstag 18 Maumlrz 2000 012400

At 31600 111500 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongtgtwouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsgtinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timinggtCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available when DrgtAndrews was alivegtgtRegardsgtTradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Youre absolutely correctintraday charts were not available when DrAndrews was a trader

Im reading between the lines here but if you plan to day-trade using the course techniques ie thepitchfork then I agree that the regular pitchfork would be more useful on intraday charts Otherwisewhipsaw would be a significant problem Please get back to me if I didnt address your questionbecause this is a very important technique The mini-median line pitchfork and sliding parallel showedup on most of Dr Andrews charts

Regards

Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re intraday chartsDate Dienstag 21 Maumlrz 2000 220322

Hello Gordon

You are right Im planning to daytrade SampP futures using the course techniques among other things

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 003408

Hi TradersZone Here are a couple Andrews techniques that will help anticipate the breakout direction of asideways channelThey work often enough to warrant keep handy Regards Gordon In an earlier lesson you were introduced to Dr Andrews sideways count You saw how frequentlythe sideways count method provided high probability price objectives after the breakout from theestablished channel took place In this segment of lesson 4 youll be shown 2 congestion area techniques that can help youdetermine the probable sideways channel price breakout direction Both rely on the use of pivots The first uses the pivot points that are circled on a sideways channel Dr Andrews observed thatwhenever a sideways channel results in at least 5 circle contacts the eventual price breakoutwould very often be in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle If circle 5 is at thetop of the channel for example the eventual price breakout would likely be to the upside If circle5 is at the bottom of the channel look for a downside breakout Dr Andrews noted that thistechnique can be subject to false breakouts but that such breakouts are usually followed shortlyafter with a confirmed breakout in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle Heemphasized that this study is best considered as a rule of thumb observation He viewed it as asupporting indicator for use with a short-term pitchfork as prices approached a channel line There are 2 charts attached that show how this works

The second technique in this part of lesson 4 deals with a sideways channelthat is building shortly after a P3 has been formed Dr Andrews noted thatwhenever that happened the probabilities were high that prices wouldbreakout in the same direction they were moving prior to the formation ofthe sideways channel The attached P3 to sideways example chart shows thisprocedure

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 205235

Hello Gordon here is my example for the 5 circle sideways count RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Lesson 5Date Montag 27 Maumlrz 2000 060731

At 32400 85200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my example for the 5 circle sideways countgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt gt Hi TradersZone Good example of the 5th circle tendency to predict the direction of a sideways breakout Any luckfinding a chart showing the P3 to sideways rule Im sending the first part of the next lesson This trendline method is a useful tool with all of DrAndrews course lines He used it all the time but especially when looking for confirmation of othercourse method trading signals Regards Gordon The Course Trendline__________________________________________________________ Next well discuss the trendline Seasoned traders agree that the trendline is one of their mostimportant tools No matter what kind of trading program or technique they use the trendline on achart is a must But one of the biggest mistakes made by amateurs and professionals alike isinconsistently drawing or defining the trendline Dr Andrews trendline procedure is simpleconsistent and accurate It works extremely well with the pivot count and with the pitchfork For an uptrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the lowest low up and to thehighest minor low point preceding the highest high The line must not pass through prices inbetween the two low points Extend the line(Attached chart of Brightpoint) For a downtrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the highest high point to thelowest minor high point preceding the lowest low so that it does not pass through prices inbetween the two high points Extend the line (Brightpoint chart) Thats all theres to it Its simple consistent and it works well with other Andrews lines It also

helps eliminate personal bias and haphazard analysis Practice drawing these trendlines on your own charts Send me any questions you might have andthen e-mail a chart of your choosing which shows at least two uptrend and two downtrend linesthat youve drawn_______________________________________________________________________

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Lesson 5Date Dienstag 28 Maumlrz 2000 120224

Hello Gordon here is my chart with trendlinesWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going above the trendline again should I draw a new trendline anddelete the old one Attached is another chart with the P3 to sideways rule I finally found an example for it RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Price failure techniqueDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081412

At 32800 120200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my chart with trendlinesgtWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going abovegtthe trendline again should I draw a new trendline and delete the oldgtone Hi TradersZone Take a look at the chart Im returningI added some lines for you to considerWith the course trendline once its broken a new one should be started Theres a technique thatties in with this coming up soon Meanwhile heres an important technique to work on It deals with those times when prices dontreach the ML Regards Gordon Dr Andrews Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P ofreversaland the ML the probability is that this price reversal will go further thanitdid on its approach toward the ML (Extract of original course material) A price failure very often indicates a sizeable reversal will take placeThepitchforks drawn on the chart of Home Depot illustrate the concept of pricefailure Dr Andrews routinely drew a new pitchfork on his chart after a newsignificant pivot had formed He knew that prices had a high probability ofreaching the new ML before stalling out or reversing If prices reversedbeforereaching the ML thereby forming a new pivot he termed it a price failureTheunderlying idea here is that Dr Andrews fully anticipated his median linewouldact as a price magnet To conclude that a price reversal resulted in a price failure Dr Andrewsused

these primary signalsa subsequent price penetration of a short-termmulti-pivotline andor a return of prices to and penetration of the parallel lineformed atpivot 3 of the pitchfork (The circles on the Home Depot chart denote theparallelline penetration signal To avoid clutter the mpl lines were not drawn) One possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart of ConsecoIncLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me a copy

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject ChartDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081800Attachments image002png

Hi TradersZone Forgot the chart Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Price failure techniqueDate Samstag 1 April 2000 201000

gtOne possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart ofgtConseco IncgtLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me agtcopy Hi Gordon here are my charts with price failures RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Mittwoch 5 April 2000 235624

Hi TradersZone Good price failure examples you sentany comments or questions about it Heres the next partanother old standby Dr Andrews kept handy Regards Gordon In this segment youll learn how to use the Fan line Technique To draw the fan lines youll apply the coursetrendline method which was introduced in an earlier lesson It might be well to emphasize that the practicalapplication of the course trendline method requires practice and experience both of which will serve youwell in this technique Dr Andrews used fan lines as an adjunct to his pitchfork sideways channel andactionreaction methods In the fan line study three trendlines are drawn from the original reversal pivot of the price correction understudy typically a P0 or a P5 Youll notice on the charts included with this study that each fan line is at aflatter angle than its predecessor When the third fan line is broken the rule is that the correction has endedand a new trend is under way Try this technique on some of your own charts and then please send me asample

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Donnerstag 6 April 2000 234315

Hi Gordon No I dont have any specific question about the price failure technique I guess the next likely target after a price failure wouldbe the warning line I have attached two charts with fan linesIs it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the third fan line is broken RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Next segmentDate Freitag 7 April 2000 003312

Hello TradersZone

Tuesday April 06 2000 114315 AM you wrote

TZgt Hi Gordon

TZgt No I dont have any specific question about the price failureTZgt technique I guess the next likely target after a price failureTZgt would be the warning line

TZgt I have attached two charts with fan linesTZgt Is it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the thirdTZgt fan line is broken

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Thats right the warning line is the next price target Additionalwarning lines can be drawn if needed but usually one will do it Ifprices go through the first warning line another can be drawn butmost likely a new pitchfork could be drawn instead which would bepreferable Helps stay current with recently formed pivots

When prices break through the third fan line a buy or sell signal isgiven Not sure what you mean by fourth target fan line Im a littledense today

Your chart work was goodthis is another handy tool for spotting thehigh probability of a price reversal or trend change

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject The Gap TradeDate Freitag 7 April 2000 004858

Hello TradersZone This trading signal doesnt show up very often but past observations have shown that its well worth watching for Dr Andrews placed a lot of emphasis on the importance of price gaps something many traders overlook This is one of his gap uses Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom The Gap Trading Technique Price gaps can be a dilemma for many traders The general rule denoting market strength or weakness after ahigh volume gap often comes up short after the initial reaction is over Many gappers simply run out ofsteam A high volume gap in itself seems to offer precious little evidence that a profitable move is about toget under way Dr Andrews used price gaps somewhat differently than others He counted a gap as 2 pivots Youll see howthat works in the following technique which uses a gap to arrive at a price level for a buy or sell order Using short-term daily price pivots label the pivot immediately preceding the gap as p0 Count the gap as 2pivots labeling it p1 amp p2 After p3 has formed and prices reverse towards a short-term p4 draw a horizontalline 2 price tics or more (individual preference)to the right of p3 Enter the market only if prices reach orpenetrate that line within a few days after reversing from p4 Please look over your own charts to see if you can find places where the gap trade technique could have beenused Send me a sample when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 001925

Hello Gordon this is my chart with a gap trade RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 065538

Hello TradersZone Thursday April 08 2000 121925 PM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt this is my chart with a gap trade TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Good examplethe gap trade technique shines when an issue in at or near a P5 Similar to the one on thechart you sent Heres another trading signal tool Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Dr Andrews used several techniques which helped him determine whether a P5 was near at hand Youllrecall that he observed most price moves ended or had a significant reversal at a P5 This technique uses alternate closing prices after a P4 has been formed As with many of his studies thenumber 5 is used The chart accompanying this segment shows that there were 5 alternate closes to thedownside after P4 was put in Dr Andrews noted that whenever 5 or more alternate closes followed a P4 theprobabilities were high that a P5 was near at hand An added feature to this chart study is the sideways channel Notice how the 2nd target price and the 5thalternate close nearly coincide

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 12 April 2000 200730

Hello Gordon This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 13 April 2000 082418

Monday April 12 2000 80730 AM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hello TradersZone Good chart example of this Andrews toolanother of his very unusual observations that workmore often than not Heres the final part of this lesson Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom In this trendline method Dr Andrews once again used the number 5 as the basis for locating aprobable reversal area He found this technique to be especially useful whenever a clear orobvious pivot count didnt show up onthe price move under study Trendlines are drawn using the course trendline method When the 5th trendline is broken theprobability is high that the trend under study has ended A mini-median line pitchfork andorsliding parallel could be used for pricing a trading order The accompanying chart of Compaq Computer is an example of how the trendline study could beused The pivot count beginning at the October low is difficult to nail down There were severalsmall areas of congestion but no sizeable corrections while prices advanced The count wasunclear By following the price action using the course trendline technique however the traderwould have been alerted to the possibility of a change of trend when the 5th trendline was brokenin early February Try this technique on your own charts When youre ready please send me an example of yourstudy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 19 April 2000 124108

Hello Gordon this is my example with 5 trendlines RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[6] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 20 April 2000 012726

Monday April 19 2000 124108 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt this is my example with 5 trendlines

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Good example of the 5 TL technique Always reminds me of how the fairly simple tools often do a better job than manyof the sophisticated studies out there

That was the last part of lesson 5 Lesson 6 attached is made in one mailing Youll find Dr Andrews trading rules alongwith a wrap-up review which uses several of his rules You might have questions about some of the rules so feel free tosend them as they arise

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Dr Andrews had an abbreviated set of trading rules on several index cards that he carried around with him in his shirtpocket He said every trading day turned up something new on his charts and by having his rules in his pocket he wasreminded of the need for a methodical approach to his analysis Quite a comment coming from the man who wrote therule book

In this the final lesson of the course Dr Andrews original trading rules and observations are presented Lets work witha few of them at this point

Using charts of issues you follow please send me an example that illustrates your interpretation of each of the followingrules

Rule 4 Anticipating major Ps

Rule 7 Penetration rule

Rule 8 Price failure rule

Rule 11 1-ML23 AR Centerline

Rule 12 Sliding Parallel rule

Rule 15 Mini-median line parallel to buy or sell

Feel free to include any other course techniques you choose to apply but please include examples of the above as aminimum Use more than one technique on a chart if your analysis supports it Send as many charts as you like alongwith your questionscomments

Lesson 6 - Dr Andrews Trading Rules

This lesson covers course rules and significant observations as taught by Dr Andrews in his original trading course Therules are those that he used in his own trading and are provided to serve as a checklist for use with the course tradingmethods youve learned

Rule 1 Where prices are always headed Rule You course members are among the fortunate few to be able to draw astraight line and know that prices are headed toward that ML Very few investors have ever applied this ML principle ofstatistics to price fluctuations and weve never seen this in any books on investment You are among the very few who

know that prices are always headed toward the newest ML

Rule 2 The Rule of coming opposites applies all through life In the bible we find Blessed at they that mourn for theyshall be comforted As investors we know that any losses can be recovered by using course methods

Rule 3 Turn your mind about or Rethink for all good is at hand We should mentally prepare ourselves for thecoming reversal in prices and other affairs Heres one way for example that you course members who know the MLrules can use When prices are skyrocketing upward we do this preparation by thinking If prices pivoted here today atthis price Id draw a new ML bisecting the distance between todays price and the price from which the rise started Andwe know now that if this is a Major Pivot prices will fall rapidly to this new ML Profits from such drops are big and quick

Rule 4 Rule for anticipating major Ps If during congestion or after a rally or decline you can count four previous Psthe fifth one is highly probable to be the one from which a new trend starts

Rule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can make a quick big profit is to watch for the EPformations

Rule 6 The other reversal rule is that prices tend to reverse at or near any ML as well as at any extension of each MLAnd also at any MLH or extensions of MLH

Rule 7 The Penetration Rule is that whenever prices gap past or plunge through any ML there is a high probability thatthey will quickly return to it temporarily and then resume the trend they had before they gapped or plunged through

Rule 8 Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P of reversal and the MLthe probability is that this price reversal will go further than it did on its approach toward the ML

Rule 9 The price failure rule is negated when the next price trend is also a failure in reaching the ML This is almostinvariably a signal of a big fast move in the direction indicated by this last space Rule 10 When alternate median lines of comparable length slope in the same direction the trend is firm and rapidprice changes take place

Rule 11 When 1-ML23 is exactly reached at P4 it can be used as a highly reliable centerline for the AR method

Rule 12 Frequently after crossing a lower MLH prices continue to rise along the MLH Since the crossing of the MLHsignals a further drop is likely use a sliding parallel along the bottom of the most recent crossing If prices drop past thatsliding parallel line a sell signal is generated

Rule 13 MLs between P2 and P3 can start from a nearby or a remote P1 since prices tend to reverse at each of theseMLs Try several such P2-P3 MLs to discover the best fit

Rule 14 The distance of each MLH from its ML is the distance of the next warning line Use these warning lineswhenever a SH has signalled a buy or sell

Rule 15 Use the MMLH as a buy or sell signal when you expect a reversal because of a P5 Also when prices are at aWL ML extension line or where course lines converge or intersect

Rule 16 Converging lines that meet prices have shown the highest probability of a trend reversal

Rule 17 Two to four days is usually the maximum between P2 and P3 for a MML P1 can be a day or so back from P2and 3

Rule 18 The most reliable ActionReaction centerlines seem to be MPL 2P line 2 Gap line peak to low or low to peak

Rule 19 When prices pass through R lines look for a pull back and then a continuing move in the direction of the passthrough

Rule 20 Use gaps as Action lines from the centerline

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 003755

Hello Gordonhere is my example for Rule 4 And I have a question What are EP formations gtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 021242

Tuesday May 04 2000 123755 PM you wrote TZgt Hello GordonTZgt here is my example for Rule 4 TZgt And I have a question What are EP formations gtgtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegtgta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hi TradersZone Good use of the warning linesalso the EP material is part of lesson 4 Rather than go backthrough the files to see when (or if) it was sent Im sending it along with this reply Glad youbrought it up Best RegardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Tuesday May 04 2000208 PM Dr Andrews used a fairly common price chart formation that he found useful at probable P5market tops and bottoms The formation generally called a wedge or pennant by chartists isreferred to in Dr Andrews trading course as the Expanding Pivot (EP) One of the few chartformations used in the course he regarded it as among the most dependable indications that amarket top was forming Closely related to the EP is his Inverted Expanding Pivot (IEP) which henoted could often be observed at market bottoms Both are regarded as intermediate and long-term reversal indicators Dr Andrews found that both formations were most reliable when they occurred after a sharprapid price move coinciding with the formation of a probable P5 He said it wasnt unusual for theformation to take several weeks to complete and that conservative traders could best avoid thewhipsaw associated with congestion patterns by trading only in the direction of the probable price

break out of the EP or IEP formation The attached charts illustrate these formations Please look over your own charts for an example ofthe EP and IEP and send me a copy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 232127

Hello Gordon Thank you for the lesson with the EP material I couldnt find it in any previous emailHere is my example for Rule 7 RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Rule 4Date Samstag 6 Mai 2000 080827

Wednesday May 05 2000 112127 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt Thank you for the lesson with the EP materialTZgt I couldnt find it in any previous emailTZgt Here is my example for Rule 7

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hi TradersZone

Glad you mentioned it earlierexcept for the EP IEP and hissideways channel Dr Andrews didnt have much to say about chartpatterns and formations These are good ones to use though

Your study of the penetration rule was good Later

Best Regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Wednesday May 05 2000801 PM

Page 5: Pitchfork primer

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Good callDate Mittwoch 2 Februar 2000 064819

At 2200 15900 AM you wrotegtI was not sure where to put P1 so I chose the bar with the highest close Hello TradersZone Your pivot count was by the booknice job Also your use of the highest close for pivot 1 wasexcellent logic It doesnt appear as if the count will be giving you any trouble Well be workingwith pivots throughout the course since much of Dr Andrews work was based on the oftenoverlooked importance of the interaction of various pivots on a price chart Its good to see thatyou have an early grasp of the procedure Heres the next part of the lesson Regards Gordon _________________________________________________________ Lesson One continued_________________________________________________________ Well continue to work with the NETA chart focusing on prices beginning the latter part of July98Well use our earlier pivot count to draw a pitchfork Three pivots are used when drawing the pitchfork They must be either a high low high or a lowhigh low configuration In this example we will use the P0-34 pivots as shown on the attachedchart With a ruler we locate the mid-point between the low at P3 and the high at P4 We markthat point with a small dot Then from the high at P0 we draw a line that extends through andbeyond the P34 mid-point that we marked This line is called the median line (ML) A second lineis drawn beginning at P3 and is drawn parallel to the median line A third line is drawn beginning atP4 and is also drawn parallel to the median line These lines are called parallel lines (H) Aconnecting line is then drawn from pivot 3 to pivot 4 And thats the pitchfork Its shown on theNETA chart At this point please send me a chart of your choice showing several intermediate-term pivots thatyouve marked Include at least two pitchforks Well go on from there

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Good callDate Mittwoch 2 Februar 2000 202415

Hello Gordon I have attached a chart of AET I hope its a good example RegardsTradersZone gtAt this point please send me a chart of your choice showing severalgtintermediate-term pivots that youve marked Include at least twogtpitchforks Well go on from there

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Pivots and pitchforksDate Donnerstag 3 Februar 2000 071228

At 2200 82400 PM you wrotegtI have attached a chart of AET I hope its a good examplegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone The chartwork you sent was excellentgood grasp of the count and your pitchfork procedure wascorrect Later on in the course well go over Dr Andrews techniques which will help you decidewhich pivots to use for the pitchfork that offers the best probability of staying in tune with themarkets Heres the next segment of lesson 1 Regards Gordon ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Well continue our pitchfork and pivot study using the NETA chart from the previous segment Dr Andrews noted that most sizeable price moves form 5 significant or easily recognizeable pivotsbefore reversing Some moves end with 3 pivots and occasionally youll find 7 or 9 But most hesaid will end with 5 pivots before reversing the trend under study Whenever he observed that aP4 was formed on a chart he used what he termed the 0-34 ML method to project the likely pricelevel where the P5 would form Large price reversals Dr Andrews observed often occur after a P5has formed This method is an excellent early warning signal for anticipating price reversals at a P5 The pitchfork is drawn using the P0-34 ML method as illustrated on the attached chart of NETANotice that prices reversed at the ML forming a P5 Also attached is a chart of Conseco Inc Please label the significant pivots starting at the July highand then draw one pitchfork using the 0-34 pivots and one using the 3-45 pivots Please returnyour chart along with any questions or comments

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Pivots and pitchforksDate Donnerstag 3 Februar 2000 154548

I have attached the CNC chartWhen the price moves below the P0-34 ML before making a P5 low is the lower parallel line thenext likely level where the P5 should occurOn the CNC chart the price closes above the P0-34 ML the day after breaking the ML Is that aconfirmation that the P5 low has been made

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Good QuestionsDate Freitag 4 Februar 2000 063320

At 2300 34500 PM you wrotegtI have attached the CNC chart gtWhen the price moves below the P0-34 ML before making a P5 low is thegtlower parallel line the next likely level where the P5 should occur (Thats right TradersZone The function of parallel lines is to provide the next level of support orresistance for those times when prices do not stop or reverse at the ML Dr Andrews by the waylooked for prices to reverse at any ML and form a new pivot in the process)gtOn the CNC chart the price closes above the P0-34 ML the day aftergtbreaking the ML Is that a confirmation that the P5 low has been made (That was a good sign but too close to call (imho) Please see chart for TL use as a confirmationsignal) Dr Andrews used several techniques to help him deal with probable reversalsSome are special situation type methods and others are used in conjunction with the pivot countpitchfork lines or ActionReaction lines Well be covering those rules in the last part of the course Im sending another chart for you to study and work on Please identify the main pivots in thedown move that started in April and also draw at least 2 pitchforksWhen ready please return to me Regards Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Good QuestionsDate Freitag 4 Februar 2000 191043

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Median Line TechniqueDate Sonntag 6 Februar 2000 010735

Hello TradersZone Nice work on the charts you returned Everything was by the book It appears that you have theprocedures well in hand Heres the final portion of lesson 1 The concept is basic but it does the important job of helping atrader stay on the right side of the market Will you be continuing the course Regards Gordon The first lines Dr Andrews drew on a new chart were the long-term and intermediate-term medianlines After identifying the significant pivots he drew his first median line beginning with P0-12and worked forward on the chart using each subsequent set of 3 pivots Each ML served to vectorpricesacting as a magnet if you will that drew prices towards it He said that prices will head forthe new ML over 80 of the time Parallel lines are not drawn when using this procedure Its prime function is to determine thedirection and price level of the new ML Recall that Dr Andrews anticipated a price reversal at eachnew ML The attached chart of LPX illustrates this technique Try this on some of your own charts and thenplease send me an example

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Median Line TechniqueDate Montag 7 Februar 2000 192718

I found a chart with 9 pivots I hope it doesnt matterIs it necessary that the move is made of swings with higher highs and higher lows in an uptrend (lower highs and lower lows in adowntrend)For example in the attached chart the point P6 is lower than P4 and P7 is lower than P5Another question For how long are median lines validI noticed that the P2-34 ML from my chart served as support and resistance two years later in 1998 (see attached chartLOW2GIF) but on the other hand I dont want to clutter my charts with too many lines from the past I would like to continue the course to the end I will send the money for the remaining 5 lessons tomorrow Did you receive myfirst payment yet RegardsTradersZone

LOW2GIF

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneDate Mittwoch 9 Februar 2000 054710

At 2700 72700 PM you wrotegtI found a chart with 9 pivots I hope it doesnt mattergtIs it necessary that the move is made of swings with higher highs andgthigher lows in an uptrend (lower highs and lower lows in a downtrend)gtFor example in the attached chart the point P6 is lower than P4 and P7gtis lower than P5 ( When using this ML technique TradersZone the main object is to note the price level of the newML for that is the next probable reversal area The pivots need not be in Elliott formation havingswings as you noted above Your ML procedure by the way was correct I noticed how oftenprices headed for each new ML and then reversedLater in the course well see how Dr Andrews handled those times when prices reversed beforereaching the ML area)gtAnother question For how long are median lines validgtI noticed that the P2-34 ML from my chart served as support andgtresistance two years later in 1998 (see attached chart LOW2GIF) butgton the other hand I dont want to clutter my charts with too many lines from the past (One of the interesting things about Dr Andrews lines is that no matter how far out his lines areprojected they will continue to cause prices to stall-out or reverse when reached Also wheneverseveral of his lines intersect there is a very high probability of a price reversal whether pricesconverge at the intersection or are some distancegtfrom it The probability is higher though when prices are at thegtintersecting lines A linethat has in the past provided frequent support or resistance is probably a pretty good line tokeep on your chart Youre right though charts seem to get cluttered up veryquickly)gt gtI would like to continue the course to the end I will send the moneygtfor the remaining 5 lessons tomorrow Did you receive my first payment yet (Glad to hear youre going to continue to the end Thank you for the prepayment Your first checkhasnt arrived yet will let you know when it does) Meanwhile heres the first segment of the next lesson Regards Gordon

In this lesson youll be introduced to Dr Andrews sideways count The sideways count was hisold reliable a tool that worked so well so often that it was one of the very first studies heperformed on his charts The sideways count gave him a reliable gauge that told him ahead of timehow far a stock or commodity was likely to move Sounds too good to be true perhaps but as youwork with the sideways count youll discover for yourself how often the projected price targetsare reachedoften within tics Markets frequently spend a lot of time in congestion Heres Dr Andrews way to use thatcongestion to our advantage Looking at the Brightpoint attachment please note the channel lines starting in January Youll seethat most of the pivots from Jan-May were within this channel Now look at where Ive placedcircles At each point where prices touched a channel line and then reversed direction and went allthe way back to touch the opposite channel line a circle was drawn Put another way if pricestouch one channel line but then dont go all the way back to touch the opposite channel line acircle is not drawn At first glance this technique can often be unclear so well pause here for some chart work Pleasee-mail me a chart that shows where youve drawn channel lines to identify sideways price actionand also where youve placed the channel line circles

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject ReDate Mittwoch 9 Februar 2000 184837

gtAt each point where prices touched a channel line and then reversedgtdirection and went all the way back to touch the opposite channel linegta circle was drawn Put another way if prices touch one channel linegtbut then dont go all the way back to touch the opposite channel linegta circle is not drawn Shouldnt the last circle on your Brightpoint chart be left outThe price didnt return to the opposite channel line after that day This is my chart

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Thanks for the questionDate Mittwoch 9 Februar 2000 231437

At 2900 64800 PM you wrotegtShouldnt the last circle on your Brightpoint chart be left outgtThe price didnt return to the opposite channel line after that day Hello TradersZone The last circle is appropriate but I can see where the wording in the explanation is confusing Ihave changed that paragraph to read Looking at the Brightpoint attachment please note the channel lines starting in January Youll seethat most of the pivots from Jan- May were within this channel Now look at where the circles wereplaced on the channel lines They are in alternate sequenceNote that each circle was drawn only after prices had first been at the opposite channel lineTheBrightpoint chart illustrates this procedure Thanks for pointing this out TradersZone If the wording is still unclear to you Id appreciate yourinput Meanwhile heres the next segment of this lessonRegards Gordon Well continue to use the Brightpoint chart for this portion of the sideways count study To reviewthe pattern were looking for should be a recent rectangular shaped sideways trading range thatcontains most if not all of the congestion price action Take a look at the attached chart and notehow well defined the price channel for Brightpoint is Youll probably notice that it is deeper thanthe channel you studied on the chart in the preceding segment This comparison is made toillustrate that while the first channel example covers a longer period of time the second includesall of the price ranges and is the preferred method Please look at where the circles were placed on the channel lines To review a new circle is drawnonly after prices have first been at the opposite channel line Recall that circles must be inalternate sequence eg upper linelower lineupper linelower line etc one circle at a time Note that the price range within the channel is $4 34 (High 21 12 Low 16 34) There were twocircles drawn on the lower line of our sideways channel before prices broke down Using thatinformation our next step will be to use some simple arithmetic in order to come up with twodownside price targets Well cover that procedure in the next segment Please let me know whenyou are ready to continue

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Sideways countDate Mittwoch 9 Februar 2000 232315Attachments image001png

Hi TradersZone Im returning your chartplease note comments GordonRegards Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Thanks for the questionDate Donnerstag 10 Februar 2000 233059

Hello Gordonthank you Im ready for the next lesson

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next partDate Donnerstag 10 Februar 2000 235613

At 21000 113000 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongtthank you Im ready for the next lessongt gt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt gt gt TradersZoneI sent this yesterday but will re-send It was part of my reply to your questionregarding the circle I dont have a record of your return chartwork for this part If its a duplicatesend sorry Regards Gordon Well continue to use the Brightpoint chart for this portion of the sideways count study To reviewthe pattern were looking for should be a recent rectangular shaped sideways trading range thatcontains most if not all of the congestion price action Take a look at the attached chart and notehow well defined the price channel for Brightpoint is Youll probably notice that it is deeper thanthe channel you studied on the chart in the preceding segment This comparison is made toillustrate that while the first channel example covers a longer period of time the second includesall of the price ranges and is the preferred method Please look at where the circles were placed on the channel lines To review a new circle is drawnonly after prices have first been at the opposite channel line Recall that circles must be inalternate sequence eg upper linelower lineupper linelower line etc one circle at a time Note that the price range within the channel is $4 34 (High 21 12 Low 16 34) There were twocircles drawn on the lower line of our sideways channel before prices broke down Using thatinformation our next step will be to use some simple arithmetic in order to come up with twodownside price targets Well cover that procedure in the next segment Please let me know whenyou are ready to continue

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next partDate Freitag 11 Februar 2000 234113

I think the placement of the circles is clear to me nowI have attached another chart with a sideways count RegardsTradersZone gtTradersZoneI sent this yesterday but will re-send It was part ofgtmy reply to your question regarding the circle I dont have a recordgtof your return chartwork for this part If its a duplicate send sorry

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject SidewaysDate Montag 14 Februar 2000 054227

At 21100 114100 PM you wrotegtI think the placement of the circles is clear to me nowgtI have attached another chart with a sideways countgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone Your chart was on target Looks like youre ready for the next part Here it is Regards Gordon During this segment youll learn how to arrive at two price targets using Dr Andrews sidewayscount Simple arithmetic is all thats required once the sideways channel and circles are in place Well continue to use the Brightpoint chart which is attached Note that Brightpoint fell throughthe bottom channel line at the point where we placed our second circle so figuring out possibledownside targets would have been in order at that time Heres how thats done 1 Determine the price range of the channel In this case the range is $4 34 (21 12 - 16 34) 2 Count the number of circles on the lower channel line The lower line is used in this casebecause thats the line that didnt hold Prices went through it returned to check it out and thencontinued lower 3 Multiply the price range of the channel times the number of circles drawn on the lower channelline (4 34 x 2 = 9 12) 4 Subtract that figure from the upper channel line priceThe result becomes downside price target 1 (21 12 - 9 12 = 12) 5 Next subtract that same figure from the price at the lower channel line Thats price target 2(16 34 - 9 12 = 7 14)

In the case of an upside channel breakout the procedure is reversed Please draw a few channelsand figure out some downside targets on your own charts When youre ready send me two orthree examples of your work As always send your questions as they arise

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re SidewaysDate Montag 14 Februar 2000 134314

Here are my examples I couldnt find enough charts with downside targets so I included some charts with upside targets Do the channel lines always have to be horizontal When I look at my charts I find more channels with an upward slope or adownward slope RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Sideways channelsDate Freitag 18 Februar 2000 005531

At 21400 14300 PM you wrotegtHere are my examples I couldnt find enough charts with downsidegttargets so I included some charts with upside targetsgt gtDo the channel lines always have to be horizontal When I look at mygtcharts I find more channels with an upward slope or a downward slopegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone The sideways method can be used with either up or down Sorry didnt mean to imply that only downsidetargets should be found Ill reword that portion of the lesson Thanks for mentioning it Dr Andrews sideways method works only on horizontal channels Others have mentioned the slopingchannels also and have wondered if there is some method to use with them I know of none Ive askedother course members for their ideas on how to approach this problem but so far no one has come up with amethod I would think that there should be a solution but have not personally taken the time to research itIf some method could be found that works as often as the Andrews sideways count it would be a significantfind The Andrews sideways count doesnt always hit the targets as you saw on your chart of Bausch amp Lomb Itworks more often than not though and it still amazes me at how often prices reach the targets Heres an observation to keep in mind Quite often after the first target is reached prices will reverse andhead back towards the channel At times youll note that they return inside the channel They will thenreverse again and head back towards the second price target These reversals happen frequently and presenttrading opportunities Im including the final segment of this lesson Regards Gordon So far in the course youve learned about Dr Andrews pivot counting procedure pitchfork and sidewayscount Youve noticed by now how often prices change trend at a P5 Youve seen how the 0-34 ML methodcan help locate the probable P5 area Youve seen how often price targets are met using the sideways countmethod The tendency for prices to reverse at a median line should be recognized as a high probability eventas well In coming lessons youll be shown how Dr Andrews used these and other high probability events totrade the stock and commodity markets The tools and techniques he used will help you put the finishingtouches on your market analysis using Andrews lines

Before continuing on to the next lesson lets briefly review what has so far been covered The attached chartprovides an opportunity to illustrate the methods referred to above Please draw these methods on thechart and return to me

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Sideways channelsDate Montag 21 Februar 2000 193743

gtBefore continuing on to the next lesson lets briefly review what hasgtso far been covered The attached chart provides an opportunity togtillustrate the methods referred to above Please draw these methods ongtthe chart and return to me Hello Gordonhere is my chart RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next lesson attachedDate Mittwoch 23 Februar 2000 014539

At 22100 73700 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongthere is my chartgt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Good job on the pivots sideways count and pitchforkLooks like youre ready to move on to the next part It wont be long and things will begin to fall inplace Regards Gordon Lesson 4 continued In one of his course letters Dr Andrews wrote The Law of Physics stated by Newton that Actionand Reaction are equal and opposite was first applied to prices by your Course Directors friendthe late Roger Babson who attributed his earnings of several million dollars to this law Beginning with this segment of lesson four and continuing in lesson five youll learn how to drawand apply the ActionReaction trading method as taught by Dr Andrews in his trading course The AR method requires a centerline or CL from which to start The CL can be any of thefollowing - MPL - ML - MLH - 2P line - 2 Gap line - Peak to low line - Low to peak lineThese are the primary lines that Dr Andrews used He stressed that some pencil work and a goodeyeball was needed in order to find the best fitting CL As with most other chart lines somework better than others The task is to find the best fit as he put it You will be shown examples of

each of the above CLs in this lesson and the next Determining which of the above listed lines to use as the CL is the first step in the ActionReactionmethod The solution often presents itself With a little practice a quick scan of the chart understudy will be all thats needed to spot the most likely CL Well begin with the attached chart Notethe CL drawn In this example a MPL (multi-pivot line) was used as the CL A MPL is a straightline that connects three or more consecutive pivots without passing through prices Theconnecting line is then extended Ive circled the three pivots that form the MPL on the chartThere are several other places on our chart where a MPL CL can be drawn Please bear in mindthat this is just the first step of the process Identification of likely CLs is all were after here Seeif you can locate two more then draw them in and send the chart back to me Well take up fromthere

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next lesson attachedDate Mittwoch 23 Februar 2000 212304

gtLesson 4 continuedgt gtIn one of his course letters Dr Andrews wrote The Law of Physicsgtstated by Newton that Action and Reaction are equal and opposite wasgtfirst applied to prices by your Course Directors friend the lategtRoger Babson who attributed his earnings of several million dollars to this lawgt gtBeginning with this segment of lesson four and continuing in lessongtfive youll learn how to draw and apply the ActionReaction tradinggtmethod as taught by Dr Andrews in his trading coursegt gtThe AR method requires a centerline or CL from which to startgtThe CL can be any of the followinggt - MPLgt - MLgt - MLHgt - 2P linegt - 2 Gap linegt - Peak to low linegt - Low to peak line Hello Gordon2P line 2 Gap line Peak to low line Low to peak line ndash actually I dont know what these lines areAre they discussed in Lesson 3 I believe you havenrsquot sent me this lesson yetAnyway I found two more MPLs on the Novellus Chart and drew them in RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Lesson 3Date Mittwoch 23 Februar 2000 235958

At 22300 92300 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt2P line 2 Gap line Peak to low line Low to peak line - actually I dont knowgtwhat these lines are Are they discussed in Lesson 3 I believe you didntgtsent me this lesson yetgtAnyway I found two more MPLs on the Novellus Chart and drew them ingt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone My apologiesI sent you an outdated version of the lesson Thanks for letting me know Musthave been my bedtime Heres the correct version Regards Gordon Lesson 3 In one of his course letters Dr Andrews wrote The Law of Physics stated by Newton that Actionand Reaction are equal and opposite was first applied to prices by your Course Directors friendthe late Roger Babson who attributed his earnings of several million dollars to this law In this lesson youll be introduced to the ActionReaction trading method as taught by Dr Andrewsin his trading course The AR method requires a centerline or CL from which to start The CL can be any of thefollowing - MPL Multi-pivot line A line drawn across 3 or more pivots - ML Median line The middle line of the pitchfork - MLH Median line parallel Either parallel line of the pitchfork - 2P line A line drawn across 2 pivots - 2 Gap line A line drawn connecting 2 gaps without touching prices in between - Peak to low line A line drawn connecting the high and low of a price leg

- Low to peak line A line drawn connecting the low and high of a price leg These are the primary lines that Dr Andrews used He stressed that some pencil work and a goodeyeball was needed in order to find the best fitting CL As with most other chart lines somework better than others The task is to find the best fit as he put it You will be shown examples ofeach of the above CLs Determining which of the above listed lines to use as the CL is the first step in the ActionReactionmethod With practice a quick view of the chart under study will be all thats needed to spot themost likely CL Youll be shown later how to experiment with possible combinations in order tofind the centerline that is most in tune with the market under study Well begin with the attached chart Note the CL drawn In this example a MPL (multi-pivot line)was used as the CL A MPL is a straight line that connects three or more consecutive pivotswithout passing through prices The connecting line is then extended Ive circled the three pivotsthat form the MPL on the chart There are several other places on our chart where a MPL CL canbe drawn Please bear in mind that this is just the first step of the process Identification of likelyCLs is all were after here See if you can locate two more then draw them in and send the chartback to me

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Donnerstag 24 Februar 2000 025105

At 22300 92300 PM you wroteI found two more MPLs on the Novellus Chart and drew them ingt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your mpls were correct This next segment shows the purpose of the centerline and how it isused Your payment in full arrived today TradersZone Thank you Regards Gordon Lesson 3 continued Please refer to the attached chart of Novellus The line drawn connecting the 3 circled pivots is amulti-pivot line (MPL) and represents the centerline (CL) well be using in this example Recall inthe previous segment that several types of centerlines are possible The choice is determined byexperimenting with the potential combinations on the chart under study Its best to try to locate acenterline somewhere close to the middle of the price chart in order to have sufficient past andforward data to use with the study This will become clear as you work with the method Once the centerline is drawn the next step is to locate a previous low or high pivot point to use fordrawing an action line Dr Andrews observed that the low pivot points often seem to work bestbut that either could be used In our example a line starting at the previous significant low wasdrawn parallel to the CL It is labeled A-1 (Action line 1) because it represents the first actionline Dr Andrews called it an action line because it was drawn as a result of a previous pivot (pricereversal) that had taken place Next a parallel line was drawn to the right of the CL and labeled R-1 Notice that it is the same distance from the CL as the corresponding A-1 line It is labeled R-1because it represents the first reaction line a line where prices are likely to stop or reverseNotice how prices reacted at the R-1 line in early 98 That serves as an indication that thecenterline chosen for this study should be a good one to use Not all reaction lines cause such aclear reversal as the R1 on this chart but many do Thats why its important to experiment withvarious centerline possibilities in order to find action lines that produce reaction lines which createthe greatest number of pivots or price stall-outs This experimentation is often quite time

consuming but experience has shown that it is time well spent When a centerline is found that isin tune with the price action of the issue under study it can be a highly effective tool for use inlocating probable reversal areas When combined with pitchfork lines the AR method can pinpointpotential reversal areas that are generally not recognized as such by others Dr Andrewstechniques for using the pitchfork and AR lines together are covered in later lessons In coming segments well study other lines that Dr Andrews used for his centerlines In themeantime experiment with the multi-pivot centerline on your own charts Then please send mean example of your work along with any questions you may have

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Freitag 25 Februar 2000 211356

gtIn the meantime experiment with the multi-pivot centerline on your owngtcharts Then please send me an example of your work along with anygtquestions you may have Hello Gordon I was wondering how many ActionReaction lines could be drawn on a chart On my attached chart I found at least 6 parallellines which had a significant meaning for the price RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject AR linesDate Montag 28 Februar 2000 080128

gtHello Gordongt gtI was wondering how many ActionReaction lines could be drawn on agtchart On my attached chart I found at least 6 parallel lines which hadgta significant meaning for the pricegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hi TradersZone Theres no set number of lines that can be drawnactually the more you can find the betterFinding a good centerline is the key And once you find lines that work such as you did anynumber of parallel lines can be drawn You are doing exactly what Dr Andrews didtaking thetime and effort to find the best fitting sets of lines Each chart has them and each chart is differentas Im sure youve found Nice work Heres the next part Regards Gordon Lesson 3 continued One of Dr Andrews favorite techniques dealt with gapsan often times perplexing price event formany traders His observations over the years suggested to him that while gaps show upfrequently on many price charts few traders have a method for including them as an integral partof their chart analysis Thats not surprising since not much has been published about how toapproach the use of gaps in a trading method Dr Andrews however found several ways to putprice gaps to good use An ActionReaction centerline which uses gaps as its basis is one suchmethod Please refer to the attached chart of Cendant Youll see that a centerline was drawn which passedthrough the July gap Note that it also came in contact with several pivots thereby qualifying as agapmulti-pivot centerline It is drawn by starting at the April low pivot and extending a line acrossand through the gap in mid-July It subsequently touches two additional high pivots Dr Andrews counted each gap as two pivots He noted that the more pivots a line touched the

stronger the line tended to be in the future Good reason then for using the July gap as the basisfor an ActionReaction study Our CL is labelled a gap-mpl-CL The May 98 high was used for the Action Line starting point A line was then drawn parallel to theCenterline as per ActionReaction procedure The corresponding Reaction Line was then drawn inIf this particular study had been drawn on Cendants chart right after the July gap was put in thepotential for prices to go all the way down to the Reaction Line might have seemed very slim at thetime Notice however that prices reached the Reaction Line in early September Youll see thishappen time and again as you work with the AR method The core of its effectiveness is a strongCL Please send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts of your choice

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re AR linesDate Montag 28 Februar 2000 155937

gtPlease send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts of yourgtchoice Hello Gordonhere are my examples RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject More on the ARDate Donnerstag 2 Maumlrz 2000 071158

At 22800 35900 PM you wrotegtgtPlease send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts ofgtgtyour choicegt gtHello Gordongthere are my examplesgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone You picked some good examples to use for your AR study Both showed the potential power of thismethod Takes time and lots of chart study sometimes to find the best set of lines but the rewardscan be many Heres something else to look at Regards Gordon The ActionReaction technique requires a strong centerline from which to begin The key todeciding which set of pivots to use for the centerline is found through experimenting with thevarious configurations visible on the chart under study The centerline might be a series of gapspivots an existing median line or any of Dr Andrews lines The task is to search for that centerlinewhich shows the greatest potential for projecting price reversal areas Dr Andrews did that byfinding a likely centerline near the middle of his price chart That allowed him to use any of theprevious pivots for his action lines By experimenting he found reaction lines that did the best jobof pegging reversal areas at data points located forward of the centerline Reaction lines are equal and opposite of the action lines and serve to project price levels at whicha reversal can be expected That is why the task of seeking out the best centerline is so importantDr Andrews reasoned that a series of reaction lines which have pegged price reversals in the pastis likely to continue to be in tune with current and future market price action Having severalprevious pivots to use as anchors for drawing action lines is thus essential The attached chart of Lattice illustrates this concept Please bear in mind that the gapmplcenterline is not the only centerline one could use on this chart You might want to study the chartfor other AR possibilities Try a peak-to-peak CL or a multi-pivot CL Send me your studies along

with any questions

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re More on the ARDate Samstag 4 Maumlrz 2000 002521

gtThe attached chart of Lattice illustrates this conceptgtPlease bear in mind that the gapmpl centerline is not the onlygtcenterline one could use on this chartgtYou might want to study the chart for other AR possibilitiesgtTry a peak-to-peak CL or a multi-pivot CL Send me your studiesgtalong with any questions Hello Gordonhere is my chart RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Peak to peak clDate Sonntag 5 Maumlrz 2000 064107

At 3400 122500 AM you wrotegtHello Gordongthere is my chartgt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Looks like you have the concept down Takes time and a lot of chart work to find the bestcenterline When the reaction lines dont seem to peg reversal areas chances are the centerline isnot the one that is best in tune with the price action of the issue under studyDespite the time required for this method it was one of Dr Andrews stand-bysAR lines could befound on most of his charts Im sending a chart with an example of a peak-to-peak CL Regards Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Peak to peak clDate Sonntag 5 Maumlrz 2000 171232

Hello Gordon I think the peak-to-peak CL on the last chart I sent to you was not really drawn from peak to peakIm sending another example RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next LessonDate Mittwoch 8 Maumlrz 2000 072526

At 3500 51200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtI think the peak-to-peak CL on the last chart I sent to you was notgtreally drawn from peak to peakgtIm sending another examplegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your peak to peak cl example was correctly drawn Thats a fairly simple approach but quite oftenthe peak to peak yields better reaction lines Heres the first part of the next lesson Regards Gordon Youll find times when prices dont quite reach the ML but instead drift alongside or away from itThe Schiff ML was designed to be used in place of the regular ML whenever that happens Suchprice action can be found at any place on a chart but most frequently occurs after a sharp sell-offor run-up of prices Dr Andrews also used the Schiff ML whenever his regular ML sloped at an unusually steep angleHe said it helped smooth out irregular price action such as that caused by unexpected earningsnews crop planting delays or poor growing conditions crop production reports etc Youll findnearly vertical price moves over a short period of time on many charts The Schiff ML method helpsput things back in perspective when that happens Well use the chart of Sterling Bancorp as an example of prices drifting away from the regular MLThat ML is drawn in black Prices didnt quite reach the ML but drifted alongside and eventuallyaway from it The Schiff ML and parallel lines are drawn in red Notice how prices were containedwithin the Schiff pitchfork until they finally broke down at the upper parallel line The procedure for drawing the Schiff ML is the same as for the regular ML except the startingpoint is located midway between the first 2 pivots youll be using The Sterling Bancorp chart

illustrates how this is done Dr Andrews also suggested using the Schiff ML whenever the regular ML method doesnt seem tobe in sync with price action Practice this procedure on your own charts and send a couple examples when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next LessonDate Donnerstag 9 Maumlrz 2000 001143

Hello Gordon in my charting software (Dynamic Trader) the Schiff ML is drawn by finding the midpoint of the line between pivot A and pivot Bmoving this point horizontally to directly above or below (depending on whether A is a low or high pivot) the A pivot anddrawing a line from his point through the midpoint of the BC swingAre there different methods of drawing a Schiff MLI was too lazy to draw Schiff MLs by hand with the method you described so Im sending my examples with the Dynamic TraderSchiff MLs -) RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject SchiffDate Samstag 11 Maumlrz 2000 070226

At 3900 121100 AM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtin my charting software (Dynamic Trader) the Schiff ML is drawn bygtfinding the midpoint of the line between pivot A and pivot B movinggtthis point horizontally to directly above or below (depending ongtwhether A is a low or high pivot) the A pivot and drawing a linegtgtfrom his point through the midpoint of the BC swinggtAre there different methods of drawing a Schiff MLgtI was too lazy to draw Schiff MLs by hand with the method yougtdescribed so Im sending my examples with the Dynamic Trader Schiff MLs -)gt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your program Schiff line procedure is fineits actually what Dr Andrews called a modified schiff ml and is onlyslightly different than the one I sent you initially The one you used is preferred by most course members Im sendingthe modified Schiff lesson and a chart along with this email The chart example shows how to use it with 0-34 pivots Regards Gordon

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Sliding Parallel LineDate Montag 13 Maumlrz 2000 005252

Hello TradersZone Heres one of the tools Dr Andrews used most often when entering exiting or reversing marketpositions Not many people know about this technique Regards Gordon The Sliding Parallel (SH) is drawn whenever prices cross an Andrews line and then move along itFor example if the bottom of a daily price bar range drops through a lower parallel line of apitchfork a new parallel line is then drawn from that low and extended to the right If the nextdays price bar drops through that sliding parallel line a sell signal is generated Whenever price action dictates a sliding parallel the next step is to draw a Warning Line Thewarning line is an additional parallel line that is an image extension of the original pitchforkchannels It serves as a warning that if prices penetrate the sliding parallel the next likely target isthe WL The attached chart of Avis illustrates these procedures Please try these on your own charts andsend me an example

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Sliding Parallel LineDate Dienstag 14 Maumlrz 2000 225737

Hello Gordon this is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning line RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 065606

At 31400 105700 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtthis is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning linegt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone Your chart of circuit city was a good example for this study I may have mentioned it earlier but DrAndrews used this technique on a regular basis The next part of this lesson covers another of hisfavorite tools the mini-median line pitchfork Here it is Regards Gordon The Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry and exit tools Though mostoften drawn using alternate closing prices alternate highs and lows can also be usedin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days is usually the maximumbetween pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or more back from P2 Dr Andrews used Mini-Median Line pitchforks for buy and sell signals whenever he expected areversal Some examples include a probable P5 or when prices are at a Warning Line ML MLHmajor ML extension or a sideways channel price target When prices cross the Mini-Median LineParallel (MMLH) a sliding parallel (SH) is used for order entry

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 231537

gtThe Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry andgtexit tools Though most often drawn using alternate closing pricesgtalternate highs and lows can also be usedgtin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days isgtusually the maximum between pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or moregtback from P2

Hello Gordon

wouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timingCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available whenDr Andrews was alive

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject intraday chartsDate Samstag 18 Maumlrz 2000 012400

At 31600 111500 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongtgtwouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsgtinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timinggtCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available when DrgtAndrews was alivegtgtRegardsgtTradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Youre absolutely correctintraday charts were not available when DrAndrews was a trader

Im reading between the lines here but if you plan to day-trade using the course techniques ie thepitchfork then I agree that the regular pitchfork would be more useful on intraday charts Otherwisewhipsaw would be a significant problem Please get back to me if I didnt address your questionbecause this is a very important technique The mini-median line pitchfork and sliding parallel showedup on most of Dr Andrews charts

Regards

Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re intraday chartsDate Dienstag 21 Maumlrz 2000 220322

Hello Gordon

You are right Im planning to daytrade SampP futures using the course techniques among other things

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 003408

Hi TradersZone Here are a couple Andrews techniques that will help anticipate the breakout direction of asideways channelThey work often enough to warrant keep handy Regards Gordon In an earlier lesson you were introduced to Dr Andrews sideways count You saw how frequentlythe sideways count method provided high probability price objectives after the breakout from theestablished channel took place In this segment of lesson 4 youll be shown 2 congestion area techniques that can help youdetermine the probable sideways channel price breakout direction Both rely on the use of pivots The first uses the pivot points that are circled on a sideways channel Dr Andrews observed thatwhenever a sideways channel results in at least 5 circle contacts the eventual price breakoutwould very often be in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle If circle 5 is at thetop of the channel for example the eventual price breakout would likely be to the upside If circle5 is at the bottom of the channel look for a downside breakout Dr Andrews noted that thistechnique can be subject to false breakouts but that such breakouts are usually followed shortlyafter with a confirmed breakout in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle Heemphasized that this study is best considered as a rule of thumb observation He viewed it as asupporting indicator for use with a short-term pitchfork as prices approached a channel line There are 2 charts attached that show how this works

The second technique in this part of lesson 4 deals with a sideways channelthat is building shortly after a P3 has been formed Dr Andrews noted thatwhenever that happened the probabilities were high that prices wouldbreakout in the same direction they were moving prior to the formation ofthe sideways channel The attached P3 to sideways example chart shows thisprocedure

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 205235

Hello Gordon here is my example for the 5 circle sideways count RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Lesson 5Date Montag 27 Maumlrz 2000 060731

At 32400 85200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my example for the 5 circle sideways countgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt gt Hi TradersZone Good example of the 5th circle tendency to predict the direction of a sideways breakout Any luckfinding a chart showing the P3 to sideways rule Im sending the first part of the next lesson This trendline method is a useful tool with all of DrAndrews course lines He used it all the time but especially when looking for confirmation of othercourse method trading signals Regards Gordon The Course Trendline__________________________________________________________ Next well discuss the trendline Seasoned traders agree that the trendline is one of their mostimportant tools No matter what kind of trading program or technique they use the trendline on achart is a must But one of the biggest mistakes made by amateurs and professionals alike isinconsistently drawing or defining the trendline Dr Andrews trendline procedure is simpleconsistent and accurate It works extremely well with the pivot count and with the pitchfork For an uptrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the lowest low up and to thehighest minor low point preceding the highest high The line must not pass through prices inbetween the two low points Extend the line(Attached chart of Brightpoint) For a downtrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the highest high point to thelowest minor high point preceding the lowest low so that it does not pass through prices inbetween the two high points Extend the line (Brightpoint chart) Thats all theres to it Its simple consistent and it works well with other Andrews lines It also

helps eliminate personal bias and haphazard analysis Practice drawing these trendlines on your own charts Send me any questions you might have andthen e-mail a chart of your choosing which shows at least two uptrend and two downtrend linesthat youve drawn_______________________________________________________________________

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Lesson 5Date Dienstag 28 Maumlrz 2000 120224

Hello Gordon here is my chart with trendlinesWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going above the trendline again should I draw a new trendline anddelete the old one Attached is another chart with the P3 to sideways rule I finally found an example for it RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Price failure techniqueDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081412

At 32800 120200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my chart with trendlinesgtWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going abovegtthe trendline again should I draw a new trendline and delete the oldgtone Hi TradersZone Take a look at the chart Im returningI added some lines for you to considerWith the course trendline once its broken a new one should be started Theres a technique thatties in with this coming up soon Meanwhile heres an important technique to work on It deals with those times when prices dontreach the ML Regards Gordon Dr Andrews Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P ofreversaland the ML the probability is that this price reversal will go further thanitdid on its approach toward the ML (Extract of original course material) A price failure very often indicates a sizeable reversal will take placeThepitchforks drawn on the chart of Home Depot illustrate the concept of pricefailure Dr Andrews routinely drew a new pitchfork on his chart after a newsignificant pivot had formed He knew that prices had a high probability ofreaching the new ML before stalling out or reversing If prices reversedbeforereaching the ML thereby forming a new pivot he termed it a price failureTheunderlying idea here is that Dr Andrews fully anticipated his median linewouldact as a price magnet To conclude that a price reversal resulted in a price failure Dr Andrewsused

these primary signalsa subsequent price penetration of a short-termmulti-pivotline andor a return of prices to and penetration of the parallel lineformed atpivot 3 of the pitchfork (The circles on the Home Depot chart denote theparallelline penetration signal To avoid clutter the mpl lines were not drawn) One possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart of ConsecoIncLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me a copy

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject ChartDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081800Attachments image002png

Hi TradersZone Forgot the chart Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Price failure techniqueDate Samstag 1 April 2000 201000

gtOne possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart ofgtConseco IncgtLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me agtcopy Hi Gordon here are my charts with price failures RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Mittwoch 5 April 2000 235624

Hi TradersZone Good price failure examples you sentany comments or questions about it Heres the next partanother old standby Dr Andrews kept handy Regards Gordon In this segment youll learn how to use the Fan line Technique To draw the fan lines youll apply the coursetrendline method which was introduced in an earlier lesson It might be well to emphasize that the practicalapplication of the course trendline method requires practice and experience both of which will serve youwell in this technique Dr Andrews used fan lines as an adjunct to his pitchfork sideways channel andactionreaction methods In the fan line study three trendlines are drawn from the original reversal pivot of the price correction understudy typically a P0 or a P5 Youll notice on the charts included with this study that each fan line is at aflatter angle than its predecessor When the third fan line is broken the rule is that the correction has endedand a new trend is under way Try this technique on some of your own charts and then please send me asample

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Donnerstag 6 April 2000 234315

Hi Gordon No I dont have any specific question about the price failure technique I guess the next likely target after a price failure wouldbe the warning line I have attached two charts with fan linesIs it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the third fan line is broken RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Next segmentDate Freitag 7 April 2000 003312

Hello TradersZone

Tuesday April 06 2000 114315 AM you wrote

TZgt Hi Gordon

TZgt No I dont have any specific question about the price failureTZgt technique I guess the next likely target after a price failureTZgt would be the warning line

TZgt I have attached two charts with fan linesTZgt Is it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the thirdTZgt fan line is broken

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Thats right the warning line is the next price target Additionalwarning lines can be drawn if needed but usually one will do it Ifprices go through the first warning line another can be drawn butmost likely a new pitchfork could be drawn instead which would bepreferable Helps stay current with recently formed pivots

When prices break through the third fan line a buy or sell signal isgiven Not sure what you mean by fourth target fan line Im a littledense today

Your chart work was goodthis is another handy tool for spotting thehigh probability of a price reversal or trend change

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject The Gap TradeDate Freitag 7 April 2000 004858

Hello TradersZone This trading signal doesnt show up very often but past observations have shown that its well worth watching for Dr Andrews placed a lot of emphasis on the importance of price gaps something many traders overlook This is one of his gap uses Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom The Gap Trading Technique Price gaps can be a dilemma for many traders The general rule denoting market strength or weakness after ahigh volume gap often comes up short after the initial reaction is over Many gappers simply run out ofsteam A high volume gap in itself seems to offer precious little evidence that a profitable move is about toget under way Dr Andrews used price gaps somewhat differently than others He counted a gap as 2 pivots Youll see howthat works in the following technique which uses a gap to arrive at a price level for a buy or sell order Using short-term daily price pivots label the pivot immediately preceding the gap as p0 Count the gap as 2pivots labeling it p1 amp p2 After p3 has formed and prices reverse towards a short-term p4 draw a horizontalline 2 price tics or more (individual preference)to the right of p3 Enter the market only if prices reach orpenetrate that line within a few days after reversing from p4 Please look over your own charts to see if you can find places where the gap trade technique could have beenused Send me a sample when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 001925

Hello Gordon this is my chart with a gap trade RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 065538

Hello TradersZone Thursday April 08 2000 121925 PM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt this is my chart with a gap trade TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Good examplethe gap trade technique shines when an issue in at or near a P5 Similar to the one on thechart you sent Heres another trading signal tool Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Dr Andrews used several techniques which helped him determine whether a P5 was near at hand Youllrecall that he observed most price moves ended or had a significant reversal at a P5 This technique uses alternate closing prices after a P4 has been formed As with many of his studies thenumber 5 is used The chart accompanying this segment shows that there were 5 alternate closes to thedownside after P4 was put in Dr Andrews noted that whenever 5 or more alternate closes followed a P4 theprobabilities were high that a P5 was near at hand An added feature to this chart study is the sideways channel Notice how the 2nd target price and the 5thalternate close nearly coincide

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 12 April 2000 200730

Hello Gordon This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 13 April 2000 082418

Monday April 12 2000 80730 AM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hello TradersZone Good chart example of this Andrews toolanother of his very unusual observations that workmore often than not Heres the final part of this lesson Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom In this trendline method Dr Andrews once again used the number 5 as the basis for locating aprobable reversal area He found this technique to be especially useful whenever a clear orobvious pivot count didnt show up onthe price move under study Trendlines are drawn using the course trendline method When the 5th trendline is broken theprobability is high that the trend under study has ended A mini-median line pitchfork andorsliding parallel could be used for pricing a trading order The accompanying chart of Compaq Computer is an example of how the trendline study could beused The pivot count beginning at the October low is difficult to nail down There were severalsmall areas of congestion but no sizeable corrections while prices advanced The count wasunclear By following the price action using the course trendline technique however the traderwould have been alerted to the possibility of a change of trend when the 5th trendline was brokenin early February Try this technique on your own charts When youre ready please send me an example of yourstudy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 19 April 2000 124108

Hello Gordon this is my example with 5 trendlines RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[6] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 20 April 2000 012726

Monday April 19 2000 124108 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt this is my example with 5 trendlines

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Good example of the 5 TL technique Always reminds me of how the fairly simple tools often do a better job than manyof the sophisticated studies out there

That was the last part of lesson 5 Lesson 6 attached is made in one mailing Youll find Dr Andrews trading rules alongwith a wrap-up review which uses several of his rules You might have questions about some of the rules so feel free tosend them as they arise

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Dr Andrews had an abbreviated set of trading rules on several index cards that he carried around with him in his shirtpocket He said every trading day turned up something new on his charts and by having his rules in his pocket he wasreminded of the need for a methodical approach to his analysis Quite a comment coming from the man who wrote therule book

In this the final lesson of the course Dr Andrews original trading rules and observations are presented Lets work witha few of them at this point

Using charts of issues you follow please send me an example that illustrates your interpretation of each of the followingrules

Rule 4 Anticipating major Ps

Rule 7 Penetration rule

Rule 8 Price failure rule

Rule 11 1-ML23 AR Centerline

Rule 12 Sliding Parallel rule

Rule 15 Mini-median line parallel to buy or sell

Feel free to include any other course techniques you choose to apply but please include examples of the above as aminimum Use more than one technique on a chart if your analysis supports it Send as many charts as you like alongwith your questionscomments

Lesson 6 - Dr Andrews Trading Rules

This lesson covers course rules and significant observations as taught by Dr Andrews in his original trading course Therules are those that he used in his own trading and are provided to serve as a checklist for use with the course tradingmethods youve learned

Rule 1 Where prices are always headed Rule You course members are among the fortunate few to be able to draw astraight line and know that prices are headed toward that ML Very few investors have ever applied this ML principle ofstatistics to price fluctuations and weve never seen this in any books on investment You are among the very few who

know that prices are always headed toward the newest ML

Rule 2 The Rule of coming opposites applies all through life In the bible we find Blessed at they that mourn for theyshall be comforted As investors we know that any losses can be recovered by using course methods

Rule 3 Turn your mind about or Rethink for all good is at hand We should mentally prepare ourselves for thecoming reversal in prices and other affairs Heres one way for example that you course members who know the MLrules can use When prices are skyrocketing upward we do this preparation by thinking If prices pivoted here today atthis price Id draw a new ML bisecting the distance between todays price and the price from which the rise started Andwe know now that if this is a Major Pivot prices will fall rapidly to this new ML Profits from such drops are big and quick

Rule 4 Rule for anticipating major Ps If during congestion or after a rally or decline you can count four previous Psthe fifth one is highly probable to be the one from which a new trend starts

Rule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can make a quick big profit is to watch for the EPformations

Rule 6 The other reversal rule is that prices tend to reverse at or near any ML as well as at any extension of each MLAnd also at any MLH or extensions of MLH

Rule 7 The Penetration Rule is that whenever prices gap past or plunge through any ML there is a high probability thatthey will quickly return to it temporarily and then resume the trend they had before they gapped or plunged through

Rule 8 Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P of reversal and the MLthe probability is that this price reversal will go further than it did on its approach toward the ML

Rule 9 The price failure rule is negated when the next price trend is also a failure in reaching the ML This is almostinvariably a signal of a big fast move in the direction indicated by this last space Rule 10 When alternate median lines of comparable length slope in the same direction the trend is firm and rapidprice changes take place

Rule 11 When 1-ML23 is exactly reached at P4 it can be used as a highly reliable centerline for the AR method

Rule 12 Frequently after crossing a lower MLH prices continue to rise along the MLH Since the crossing of the MLHsignals a further drop is likely use a sliding parallel along the bottom of the most recent crossing If prices drop past thatsliding parallel line a sell signal is generated

Rule 13 MLs between P2 and P3 can start from a nearby or a remote P1 since prices tend to reverse at each of theseMLs Try several such P2-P3 MLs to discover the best fit

Rule 14 The distance of each MLH from its ML is the distance of the next warning line Use these warning lineswhenever a SH has signalled a buy or sell

Rule 15 Use the MMLH as a buy or sell signal when you expect a reversal because of a P5 Also when prices are at aWL ML extension line or where course lines converge or intersect

Rule 16 Converging lines that meet prices have shown the highest probability of a trend reversal

Rule 17 Two to four days is usually the maximum between P2 and P3 for a MML P1 can be a day or so back from P2and 3

Rule 18 The most reliable ActionReaction centerlines seem to be MPL 2P line 2 Gap line peak to low or low to peak

Rule 19 When prices pass through R lines look for a pull back and then a continuing move in the direction of the passthrough

Rule 20 Use gaps as Action lines from the centerline

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 003755

Hello Gordonhere is my example for Rule 4 And I have a question What are EP formations gtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 021242

Tuesday May 04 2000 123755 PM you wrote TZgt Hello GordonTZgt here is my example for Rule 4 TZgt And I have a question What are EP formations gtgtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegtgta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hi TradersZone Good use of the warning linesalso the EP material is part of lesson 4 Rather than go backthrough the files to see when (or if) it was sent Im sending it along with this reply Glad youbrought it up Best RegardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Tuesday May 04 2000208 PM Dr Andrews used a fairly common price chart formation that he found useful at probable P5market tops and bottoms The formation generally called a wedge or pennant by chartists isreferred to in Dr Andrews trading course as the Expanding Pivot (EP) One of the few chartformations used in the course he regarded it as among the most dependable indications that amarket top was forming Closely related to the EP is his Inverted Expanding Pivot (IEP) which henoted could often be observed at market bottoms Both are regarded as intermediate and long-term reversal indicators Dr Andrews found that both formations were most reliable when they occurred after a sharprapid price move coinciding with the formation of a probable P5 He said it wasnt unusual for theformation to take several weeks to complete and that conservative traders could best avoid thewhipsaw associated with congestion patterns by trading only in the direction of the probable price

break out of the EP or IEP formation The attached charts illustrate these formations Please look over your own charts for an example ofthe EP and IEP and send me a copy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 232127

Hello Gordon Thank you for the lesson with the EP material I couldnt find it in any previous emailHere is my example for Rule 7 RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Rule 4Date Samstag 6 Mai 2000 080827

Wednesday May 05 2000 112127 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt Thank you for the lesson with the EP materialTZgt I couldnt find it in any previous emailTZgt Here is my example for Rule 7

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hi TradersZone

Glad you mentioned it earlierexcept for the EP IEP and hissideways channel Dr Andrews didnt have much to say about chartpatterns and formations These are good ones to use though

Your study of the penetration rule was good Later

Best Regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Wednesday May 05 2000801 PM

Page 6: Pitchfork primer

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Good callDate Mittwoch 2 Februar 2000 202415

Hello Gordon I have attached a chart of AET I hope its a good example RegardsTradersZone gtAt this point please send me a chart of your choice showing severalgtintermediate-term pivots that youve marked Include at least twogtpitchforks Well go on from there

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Pivots and pitchforksDate Donnerstag 3 Februar 2000 071228

At 2200 82400 PM you wrotegtI have attached a chart of AET I hope its a good examplegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone The chartwork you sent was excellentgood grasp of the count and your pitchfork procedure wascorrect Later on in the course well go over Dr Andrews techniques which will help you decidewhich pivots to use for the pitchfork that offers the best probability of staying in tune with themarkets Heres the next segment of lesson 1 Regards Gordon ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Well continue our pitchfork and pivot study using the NETA chart from the previous segment Dr Andrews noted that most sizeable price moves form 5 significant or easily recognizeable pivotsbefore reversing Some moves end with 3 pivots and occasionally youll find 7 or 9 But most hesaid will end with 5 pivots before reversing the trend under study Whenever he observed that aP4 was formed on a chart he used what he termed the 0-34 ML method to project the likely pricelevel where the P5 would form Large price reversals Dr Andrews observed often occur after a P5has formed This method is an excellent early warning signal for anticipating price reversals at a P5 The pitchfork is drawn using the P0-34 ML method as illustrated on the attached chart of NETANotice that prices reversed at the ML forming a P5 Also attached is a chart of Conseco Inc Please label the significant pivots starting at the July highand then draw one pitchfork using the 0-34 pivots and one using the 3-45 pivots Please returnyour chart along with any questions or comments

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Pivots and pitchforksDate Donnerstag 3 Februar 2000 154548

I have attached the CNC chartWhen the price moves below the P0-34 ML before making a P5 low is the lower parallel line thenext likely level where the P5 should occurOn the CNC chart the price closes above the P0-34 ML the day after breaking the ML Is that aconfirmation that the P5 low has been made

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Good QuestionsDate Freitag 4 Februar 2000 063320

At 2300 34500 PM you wrotegtI have attached the CNC chart gtWhen the price moves below the P0-34 ML before making a P5 low is thegtlower parallel line the next likely level where the P5 should occur (Thats right TradersZone The function of parallel lines is to provide the next level of support orresistance for those times when prices do not stop or reverse at the ML Dr Andrews by the waylooked for prices to reverse at any ML and form a new pivot in the process)gtOn the CNC chart the price closes above the P0-34 ML the day aftergtbreaking the ML Is that a confirmation that the P5 low has been made (That was a good sign but too close to call (imho) Please see chart for TL use as a confirmationsignal) Dr Andrews used several techniques to help him deal with probable reversalsSome are special situation type methods and others are used in conjunction with the pivot countpitchfork lines or ActionReaction lines Well be covering those rules in the last part of the course Im sending another chart for you to study and work on Please identify the main pivots in thedown move that started in April and also draw at least 2 pitchforksWhen ready please return to me Regards Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Good QuestionsDate Freitag 4 Februar 2000 191043

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Median Line TechniqueDate Sonntag 6 Februar 2000 010735

Hello TradersZone Nice work on the charts you returned Everything was by the book It appears that you have theprocedures well in hand Heres the final portion of lesson 1 The concept is basic but it does the important job of helping atrader stay on the right side of the market Will you be continuing the course Regards Gordon The first lines Dr Andrews drew on a new chart were the long-term and intermediate-term medianlines After identifying the significant pivots he drew his first median line beginning with P0-12and worked forward on the chart using each subsequent set of 3 pivots Each ML served to vectorpricesacting as a magnet if you will that drew prices towards it He said that prices will head forthe new ML over 80 of the time Parallel lines are not drawn when using this procedure Its prime function is to determine thedirection and price level of the new ML Recall that Dr Andrews anticipated a price reversal at eachnew ML The attached chart of LPX illustrates this technique Try this on some of your own charts and thenplease send me an example

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Median Line TechniqueDate Montag 7 Februar 2000 192718

I found a chart with 9 pivots I hope it doesnt matterIs it necessary that the move is made of swings with higher highs and higher lows in an uptrend (lower highs and lower lows in adowntrend)For example in the attached chart the point P6 is lower than P4 and P7 is lower than P5Another question For how long are median lines validI noticed that the P2-34 ML from my chart served as support and resistance two years later in 1998 (see attached chartLOW2GIF) but on the other hand I dont want to clutter my charts with too many lines from the past I would like to continue the course to the end I will send the money for the remaining 5 lessons tomorrow Did you receive myfirst payment yet RegardsTradersZone

LOW2GIF

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneDate Mittwoch 9 Februar 2000 054710

At 2700 72700 PM you wrotegtI found a chart with 9 pivots I hope it doesnt mattergtIs it necessary that the move is made of swings with higher highs andgthigher lows in an uptrend (lower highs and lower lows in a downtrend)gtFor example in the attached chart the point P6 is lower than P4 and P7gtis lower than P5 ( When using this ML technique TradersZone the main object is to note the price level of the newML for that is the next probable reversal area The pivots need not be in Elliott formation havingswings as you noted above Your ML procedure by the way was correct I noticed how oftenprices headed for each new ML and then reversedLater in the course well see how Dr Andrews handled those times when prices reversed beforereaching the ML area)gtAnother question For how long are median lines validgtI noticed that the P2-34 ML from my chart served as support andgtresistance two years later in 1998 (see attached chart LOW2GIF) butgton the other hand I dont want to clutter my charts with too many lines from the past (One of the interesting things about Dr Andrews lines is that no matter how far out his lines areprojected they will continue to cause prices to stall-out or reverse when reached Also wheneverseveral of his lines intersect there is a very high probability of a price reversal whether pricesconverge at the intersection or are some distancegtfrom it The probability is higher though when prices are at thegtintersecting lines A linethat has in the past provided frequent support or resistance is probably a pretty good line tokeep on your chart Youre right though charts seem to get cluttered up veryquickly)gt gtI would like to continue the course to the end I will send the moneygtfor the remaining 5 lessons tomorrow Did you receive my first payment yet (Glad to hear youre going to continue to the end Thank you for the prepayment Your first checkhasnt arrived yet will let you know when it does) Meanwhile heres the first segment of the next lesson Regards Gordon

In this lesson youll be introduced to Dr Andrews sideways count The sideways count was hisold reliable a tool that worked so well so often that it was one of the very first studies heperformed on his charts The sideways count gave him a reliable gauge that told him ahead of timehow far a stock or commodity was likely to move Sounds too good to be true perhaps but as youwork with the sideways count youll discover for yourself how often the projected price targetsare reachedoften within tics Markets frequently spend a lot of time in congestion Heres Dr Andrews way to use thatcongestion to our advantage Looking at the Brightpoint attachment please note the channel lines starting in January Youll seethat most of the pivots from Jan-May were within this channel Now look at where Ive placedcircles At each point where prices touched a channel line and then reversed direction and went allthe way back to touch the opposite channel line a circle was drawn Put another way if pricestouch one channel line but then dont go all the way back to touch the opposite channel line acircle is not drawn At first glance this technique can often be unclear so well pause here for some chart work Pleasee-mail me a chart that shows where youve drawn channel lines to identify sideways price actionand also where youve placed the channel line circles

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject ReDate Mittwoch 9 Februar 2000 184837

gtAt each point where prices touched a channel line and then reversedgtdirection and went all the way back to touch the opposite channel linegta circle was drawn Put another way if prices touch one channel linegtbut then dont go all the way back to touch the opposite channel linegta circle is not drawn Shouldnt the last circle on your Brightpoint chart be left outThe price didnt return to the opposite channel line after that day This is my chart

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Thanks for the questionDate Mittwoch 9 Februar 2000 231437

At 2900 64800 PM you wrotegtShouldnt the last circle on your Brightpoint chart be left outgtThe price didnt return to the opposite channel line after that day Hello TradersZone The last circle is appropriate but I can see where the wording in the explanation is confusing Ihave changed that paragraph to read Looking at the Brightpoint attachment please note the channel lines starting in January Youll seethat most of the pivots from Jan- May were within this channel Now look at where the circles wereplaced on the channel lines They are in alternate sequenceNote that each circle was drawn only after prices had first been at the opposite channel lineTheBrightpoint chart illustrates this procedure Thanks for pointing this out TradersZone If the wording is still unclear to you Id appreciate yourinput Meanwhile heres the next segment of this lessonRegards Gordon Well continue to use the Brightpoint chart for this portion of the sideways count study To reviewthe pattern were looking for should be a recent rectangular shaped sideways trading range thatcontains most if not all of the congestion price action Take a look at the attached chart and notehow well defined the price channel for Brightpoint is Youll probably notice that it is deeper thanthe channel you studied on the chart in the preceding segment This comparison is made toillustrate that while the first channel example covers a longer period of time the second includesall of the price ranges and is the preferred method Please look at where the circles were placed on the channel lines To review a new circle is drawnonly after prices have first been at the opposite channel line Recall that circles must be inalternate sequence eg upper linelower lineupper linelower line etc one circle at a time Note that the price range within the channel is $4 34 (High 21 12 Low 16 34) There were twocircles drawn on the lower line of our sideways channel before prices broke down Using thatinformation our next step will be to use some simple arithmetic in order to come up with twodownside price targets Well cover that procedure in the next segment Please let me know whenyou are ready to continue

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Sideways countDate Mittwoch 9 Februar 2000 232315Attachments image001png

Hi TradersZone Im returning your chartplease note comments GordonRegards Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Thanks for the questionDate Donnerstag 10 Februar 2000 233059

Hello Gordonthank you Im ready for the next lesson

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next partDate Donnerstag 10 Februar 2000 235613

At 21000 113000 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongtthank you Im ready for the next lessongt gt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt gt gt TradersZoneI sent this yesterday but will re-send It was part of my reply to your questionregarding the circle I dont have a record of your return chartwork for this part If its a duplicatesend sorry Regards Gordon Well continue to use the Brightpoint chart for this portion of the sideways count study To reviewthe pattern were looking for should be a recent rectangular shaped sideways trading range thatcontains most if not all of the congestion price action Take a look at the attached chart and notehow well defined the price channel for Brightpoint is Youll probably notice that it is deeper thanthe channel you studied on the chart in the preceding segment This comparison is made toillustrate that while the first channel example covers a longer period of time the second includesall of the price ranges and is the preferred method Please look at where the circles were placed on the channel lines To review a new circle is drawnonly after prices have first been at the opposite channel line Recall that circles must be inalternate sequence eg upper linelower lineupper linelower line etc one circle at a time Note that the price range within the channel is $4 34 (High 21 12 Low 16 34) There were twocircles drawn on the lower line of our sideways channel before prices broke down Using thatinformation our next step will be to use some simple arithmetic in order to come up with twodownside price targets Well cover that procedure in the next segment Please let me know whenyou are ready to continue

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next partDate Freitag 11 Februar 2000 234113

I think the placement of the circles is clear to me nowI have attached another chart with a sideways count RegardsTradersZone gtTradersZoneI sent this yesterday but will re-send It was part ofgtmy reply to your question regarding the circle I dont have a recordgtof your return chartwork for this part If its a duplicate send sorry

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject SidewaysDate Montag 14 Februar 2000 054227

At 21100 114100 PM you wrotegtI think the placement of the circles is clear to me nowgtI have attached another chart with a sideways countgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone Your chart was on target Looks like youre ready for the next part Here it is Regards Gordon During this segment youll learn how to arrive at two price targets using Dr Andrews sidewayscount Simple arithmetic is all thats required once the sideways channel and circles are in place Well continue to use the Brightpoint chart which is attached Note that Brightpoint fell throughthe bottom channel line at the point where we placed our second circle so figuring out possibledownside targets would have been in order at that time Heres how thats done 1 Determine the price range of the channel In this case the range is $4 34 (21 12 - 16 34) 2 Count the number of circles on the lower channel line The lower line is used in this casebecause thats the line that didnt hold Prices went through it returned to check it out and thencontinued lower 3 Multiply the price range of the channel times the number of circles drawn on the lower channelline (4 34 x 2 = 9 12) 4 Subtract that figure from the upper channel line priceThe result becomes downside price target 1 (21 12 - 9 12 = 12) 5 Next subtract that same figure from the price at the lower channel line Thats price target 2(16 34 - 9 12 = 7 14)

In the case of an upside channel breakout the procedure is reversed Please draw a few channelsand figure out some downside targets on your own charts When youre ready send me two orthree examples of your work As always send your questions as they arise

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re SidewaysDate Montag 14 Februar 2000 134314

Here are my examples I couldnt find enough charts with downside targets so I included some charts with upside targets Do the channel lines always have to be horizontal When I look at my charts I find more channels with an upward slope or adownward slope RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Sideways channelsDate Freitag 18 Februar 2000 005531

At 21400 14300 PM you wrotegtHere are my examples I couldnt find enough charts with downsidegttargets so I included some charts with upside targetsgt gtDo the channel lines always have to be horizontal When I look at mygtcharts I find more channels with an upward slope or a downward slopegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone The sideways method can be used with either up or down Sorry didnt mean to imply that only downsidetargets should be found Ill reword that portion of the lesson Thanks for mentioning it Dr Andrews sideways method works only on horizontal channels Others have mentioned the slopingchannels also and have wondered if there is some method to use with them I know of none Ive askedother course members for their ideas on how to approach this problem but so far no one has come up with amethod I would think that there should be a solution but have not personally taken the time to research itIf some method could be found that works as often as the Andrews sideways count it would be a significantfind The Andrews sideways count doesnt always hit the targets as you saw on your chart of Bausch amp Lomb Itworks more often than not though and it still amazes me at how often prices reach the targets Heres an observation to keep in mind Quite often after the first target is reached prices will reverse andhead back towards the channel At times youll note that they return inside the channel They will thenreverse again and head back towards the second price target These reversals happen frequently and presenttrading opportunities Im including the final segment of this lesson Regards Gordon So far in the course youve learned about Dr Andrews pivot counting procedure pitchfork and sidewayscount Youve noticed by now how often prices change trend at a P5 Youve seen how the 0-34 ML methodcan help locate the probable P5 area Youve seen how often price targets are met using the sideways countmethod The tendency for prices to reverse at a median line should be recognized as a high probability eventas well In coming lessons youll be shown how Dr Andrews used these and other high probability events totrade the stock and commodity markets The tools and techniques he used will help you put the finishingtouches on your market analysis using Andrews lines

Before continuing on to the next lesson lets briefly review what has so far been covered The attached chartprovides an opportunity to illustrate the methods referred to above Please draw these methods on thechart and return to me

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Sideways channelsDate Montag 21 Februar 2000 193743

gtBefore continuing on to the next lesson lets briefly review what hasgtso far been covered The attached chart provides an opportunity togtillustrate the methods referred to above Please draw these methods ongtthe chart and return to me Hello Gordonhere is my chart RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next lesson attachedDate Mittwoch 23 Februar 2000 014539

At 22100 73700 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongthere is my chartgt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Good job on the pivots sideways count and pitchforkLooks like youre ready to move on to the next part It wont be long and things will begin to fall inplace Regards Gordon Lesson 4 continued In one of his course letters Dr Andrews wrote The Law of Physics stated by Newton that Actionand Reaction are equal and opposite was first applied to prices by your Course Directors friendthe late Roger Babson who attributed his earnings of several million dollars to this law Beginning with this segment of lesson four and continuing in lesson five youll learn how to drawand apply the ActionReaction trading method as taught by Dr Andrews in his trading course The AR method requires a centerline or CL from which to start The CL can be any of thefollowing - MPL - ML - MLH - 2P line - 2 Gap line - Peak to low line - Low to peak lineThese are the primary lines that Dr Andrews used He stressed that some pencil work and a goodeyeball was needed in order to find the best fitting CL As with most other chart lines somework better than others The task is to find the best fit as he put it You will be shown examples of

each of the above CLs in this lesson and the next Determining which of the above listed lines to use as the CL is the first step in the ActionReactionmethod The solution often presents itself With a little practice a quick scan of the chart understudy will be all thats needed to spot the most likely CL Well begin with the attached chart Notethe CL drawn In this example a MPL (multi-pivot line) was used as the CL A MPL is a straightline that connects three or more consecutive pivots without passing through prices Theconnecting line is then extended Ive circled the three pivots that form the MPL on the chartThere are several other places on our chart where a MPL CL can be drawn Please bear in mindthat this is just the first step of the process Identification of likely CLs is all were after here Seeif you can locate two more then draw them in and send the chart back to me Well take up fromthere

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next lesson attachedDate Mittwoch 23 Februar 2000 212304

gtLesson 4 continuedgt gtIn one of his course letters Dr Andrews wrote The Law of Physicsgtstated by Newton that Action and Reaction are equal and opposite wasgtfirst applied to prices by your Course Directors friend the lategtRoger Babson who attributed his earnings of several million dollars to this lawgt gtBeginning with this segment of lesson four and continuing in lessongtfive youll learn how to draw and apply the ActionReaction tradinggtmethod as taught by Dr Andrews in his trading coursegt gtThe AR method requires a centerline or CL from which to startgtThe CL can be any of the followinggt - MPLgt - MLgt - MLHgt - 2P linegt - 2 Gap linegt - Peak to low linegt - Low to peak line Hello Gordon2P line 2 Gap line Peak to low line Low to peak line ndash actually I dont know what these lines areAre they discussed in Lesson 3 I believe you havenrsquot sent me this lesson yetAnyway I found two more MPLs on the Novellus Chart and drew them in RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Lesson 3Date Mittwoch 23 Februar 2000 235958

At 22300 92300 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt2P line 2 Gap line Peak to low line Low to peak line - actually I dont knowgtwhat these lines are Are they discussed in Lesson 3 I believe you didntgtsent me this lesson yetgtAnyway I found two more MPLs on the Novellus Chart and drew them ingt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone My apologiesI sent you an outdated version of the lesson Thanks for letting me know Musthave been my bedtime Heres the correct version Regards Gordon Lesson 3 In one of his course letters Dr Andrews wrote The Law of Physics stated by Newton that Actionand Reaction are equal and opposite was first applied to prices by your Course Directors friendthe late Roger Babson who attributed his earnings of several million dollars to this law In this lesson youll be introduced to the ActionReaction trading method as taught by Dr Andrewsin his trading course The AR method requires a centerline or CL from which to start The CL can be any of thefollowing - MPL Multi-pivot line A line drawn across 3 or more pivots - ML Median line The middle line of the pitchfork - MLH Median line parallel Either parallel line of the pitchfork - 2P line A line drawn across 2 pivots - 2 Gap line A line drawn connecting 2 gaps without touching prices in between - Peak to low line A line drawn connecting the high and low of a price leg

- Low to peak line A line drawn connecting the low and high of a price leg These are the primary lines that Dr Andrews used He stressed that some pencil work and a goodeyeball was needed in order to find the best fitting CL As with most other chart lines somework better than others The task is to find the best fit as he put it You will be shown examples ofeach of the above CLs Determining which of the above listed lines to use as the CL is the first step in the ActionReactionmethod With practice a quick view of the chart under study will be all thats needed to spot themost likely CL Youll be shown later how to experiment with possible combinations in order tofind the centerline that is most in tune with the market under study Well begin with the attached chart Note the CL drawn In this example a MPL (multi-pivot line)was used as the CL A MPL is a straight line that connects three or more consecutive pivotswithout passing through prices The connecting line is then extended Ive circled the three pivotsthat form the MPL on the chart There are several other places on our chart where a MPL CL canbe drawn Please bear in mind that this is just the first step of the process Identification of likelyCLs is all were after here See if you can locate two more then draw them in and send the chartback to me

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Donnerstag 24 Februar 2000 025105

At 22300 92300 PM you wroteI found two more MPLs on the Novellus Chart and drew them ingt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your mpls were correct This next segment shows the purpose of the centerline and how it isused Your payment in full arrived today TradersZone Thank you Regards Gordon Lesson 3 continued Please refer to the attached chart of Novellus The line drawn connecting the 3 circled pivots is amulti-pivot line (MPL) and represents the centerline (CL) well be using in this example Recall inthe previous segment that several types of centerlines are possible The choice is determined byexperimenting with the potential combinations on the chart under study Its best to try to locate acenterline somewhere close to the middle of the price chart in order to have sufficient past andforward data to use with the study This will become clear as you work with the method Once the centerline is drawn the next step is to locate a previous low or high pivot point to use fordrawing an action line Dr Andrews observed that the low pivot points often seem to work bestbut that either could be used In our example a line starting at the previous significant low wasdrawn parallel to the CL It is labeled A-1 (Action line 1) because it represents the first actionline Dr Andrews called it an action line because it was drawn as a result of a previous pivot (pricereversal) that had taken place Next a parallel line was drawn to the right of the CL and labeled R-1 Notice that it is the same distance from the CL as the corresponding A-1 line It is labeled R-1because it represents the first reaction line a line where prices are likely to stop or reverseNotice how prices reacted at the R-1 line in early 98 That serves as an indication that thecenterline chosen for this study should be a good one to use Not all reaction lines cause such aclear reversal as the R1 on this chart but many do Thats why its important to experiment withvarious centerline possibilities in order to find action lines that produce reaction lines which createthe greatest number of pivots or price stall-outs This experimentation is often quite time

consuming but experience has shown that it is time well spent When a centerline is found that isin tune with the price action of the issue under study it can be a highly effective tool for use inlocating probable reversal areas When combined with pitchfork lines the AR method can pinpointpotential reversal areas that are generally not recognized as such by others Dr Andrewstechniques for using the pitchfork and AR lines together are covered in later lessons In coming segments well study other lines that Dr Andrews used for his centerlines In themeantime experiment with the multi-pivot centerline on your own charts Then please send mean example of your work along with any questions you may have

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Freitag 25 Februar 2000 211356

gtIn the meantime experiment with the multi-pivot centerline on your owngtcharts Then please send me an example of your work along with anygtquestions you may have Hello Gordon I was wondering how many ActionReaction lines could be drawn on a chart On my attached chart I found at least 6 parallellines which had a significant meaning for the price RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject AR linesDate Montag 28 Februar 2000 080128

gtHello Gordongt gtI was wondering how many ActionReaction lines could be drawn on agtchart On my attached chart I found at least 6 parallel lines which hadgta significant meaning for the pricegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hi TradersZone Theres no set number of lines that can be drawnactually the more you can find the betterFinding a good centerline is the key And once you find lines that work such as you did anynumber of parallel lines can be drawn You are doing exactly what Dr Andrews didtaking thetime and effort to find the best fitting sets of lines Each chart has them and each chart is differentas Im sure youve found Nice work Heres the next part Regards Gordon Lesson 3 continued One of Dr Andrews favorite techniques dealt with gapsan often times perplexing price event formany traders His observations over the years suggested to him that while gaps show upfrequently on many price charts few traders have a method for including them as an integral partof their chart analysis Thats not surprising since not much has been published about how toapproach the use of gaps in a trading method Dr Andrews however found several ways to putprice gaps to good use An ActionReaction centerline which uses gaps as its basis is one suchmethod Please refer to the attached chart of Cendant Youll see that a centerline was drawn which passedthrough the July gap Note that it also came in contact with several pivots thereby qualifying as agapmulti-pivot centerline It is drawn by starting at the April low pivot and extending a line acrossand through the gap in mid-July It subsequently touches two additional high pivots Dr Andrews counted each gap as two pivots He noted that the more pivots a line touched the

stronger the line tended to be in the future Good reason then for using the July gap as the basisfor an ActionReaction study Our CL is labelled a gap-mpl-CL The May 98 high was used for the Action Line starting point A line was then drawn parallel to theCenterline as per ActionReaction procedure The corresponding Reaction Line was then drawn inIf this particular study had been drawn on Cendants chart right after the July gap was put in thepotential for prices to go all the way down to the Reaction Line might have seemed very slim at thetime Notice however that prices reached the Reaction Line in early September Youll see thishappen time and again as you work with the AR method The core of its effectiveness is a strongCL Please send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts of your choice

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re AR linesDate Montag 28 Februar 2000 155937

gtPlease send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts of yourgtchoice Hello Gordonhere are my examples RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject More on the ARDate Donnerstag 2 Maumlrz 2000 071158

At 22800 35900 PM you wrotegtgtPlease send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts ofgtgtyour choicegt gtHello Gordongthere are my examplesgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone You picked some good examples to use for your AR study Both showed the potential power of thismethod Takes time and lots of chart study sometimes to find the best set of lines but the rewardscan be many Heres something else to look at Regards Gordon The ActionReaction technique requires a strong centerline from which to begin The key todeciding which set of pivots to use for the centerline is found through experimenting with thevarious configurations visible on the chart under study The centerline might be a series of gapspivots an existing median line or any of Dr Andrews lines The task is to search for that centerlinewhich shows the greatest potential for projecting price reversal areas Dr Andrews did that byfinding a likely centerline near the middle of his price chart That allowed him to use any of theprevious pivots for his action lines By experimenting he found reaction lines that did the best jobof pegging reversal areas at data points located forward of the centerline Reaction lines are equal and opposite of the action lines and serve to project price levels at whicha reversal can be expected That is why the task of seeking out the best centerline is so importantDr Andrews reasoned that a series of reaction lines which have pegged price reversals in the pastis likely to continue to be in tune with current and future market price action Having severalprevious pivots to use as anchors for drawing action lines is thus essential The attached chart of Lattice illustrates this concept Please bear in mind that the gapmplcenterline is not the only centerline one could use on this chart You might want to study the chartfor other AR possibilities Try a peak-to-peak CL or a multi-pivot CL Send me your studies along

with any questions

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re More on the ARDate Samstag 4 Maumlrz 2000 002521

gtThe attached chart of Lattice illustrates this conceptgtPlease bear in mind that the gapmpl centerline is not the onlygtcenterline one could use on this chartgtYou might want to study the chart for other AR possibilitiesgtTry a peak-to-peak CL or a multi-pivot CL Send me your studiesgtalong with any questions Hello Gordonhere is my chart RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Peak to peak clDate Sonntag 5 Maumlrz 2000 064107

At 3400 122500 AM you wrotegtHello Gordongthere is my chartgt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Looks like you have the concept down Takes time and a lot of chart work to find the bestcenterline When the reaction lines dont seem to peg reversal areas chances are the centerline isnot the one that is best in tune with the price action of the issue under studyDespite the time required for this method it was one of Dr Andrews stand-bysAR lines could befound on most of his charts Im sending a chart with an example of a peak-to-peak CL Regards Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Peak to peak clDate Sonntag 5 Maumlrz 2000 171232

Hello Gordon I think the peak-to-peak CL on the last chart I sent to you was not really drawn from peak to peakIm sending another example RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next LessonDate Mittwoch 8 Maumlrz 2000 072526

At 3500 51200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtI think the peak-to-peak CL on the last chart I sent to you was notgtreally drawn from peak to peakgtIm sending another examplegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your peak to peak cl example was correctly drawn Thats a fairly simple approach but quite oftenthe peak to peak yields better reaction lines Heres the first part of the next lesson Regards Gordon Youll find times when prices dont quite reach the ML but instead drift alongside or away from itThe Schiff ML was designed to be used in place of the regular ML whenever that happens Suchprice action can be found at any place on a chart but most frequently occurs after a sharp sell-offor run-up of prices Dr Andrews also used the Schiff ML whenever his regular ML sloped at an unusually steep angleHe said it helped smooth out irregular price action such as that caused by unexpected earningsnews crop planting delays or poor growing conditions crop production reports etc Youll findnearly vertical price moves over a short period of time on many charts The Schiff ML method helpsput things back in perspective when that happens Well use the chart of Sterling Bancorp as an example of prices drifting away from the regular MLThat ML is drawn in black Prices didnt quite reach the ML but drifted alongside and eventuallyaway from it The Schiff ML and parallel lines are drawn in red Notice how prices were containedwithin the Schiff pitchfork until they finally broke down at the upper parallel line The procedure for drawing the Schiff ML is the same as for the regular ML except the startingpoint is located midway between the first 2 pivots youll be using The Sterling Bancorp chart

illustrates how this is done Dr Andrews also suggested using the Schiff ML whenever the regular ML method doesnt seem tobe in sync with price action Practice this procedure on your own charts and send a couple examples when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next LessonDate Donnerstag 9 Maumlrz 2000 001143

Hello Gordon in my charting software (Dynamic Trader) the Schiff ML is drawn by finding the midpoint of the line between pivot A and pivot Bmoving this point horizontally to directly above or below (depending on whether A is a low or high pivot) the A pivot anddrawing a line from his point through the midpoint of the BC swingAre there different methods of drawing a Schiff MLI was too lazy to draw Schiff MLs by hand with the method you described so Im sending my examples with the Dynamic TraderSchiff MLs -) RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject SchiffDate Samstag 11 Maumlrz 2000 070226

At 3900 121100 AM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtin my charting software (Dynamic Trader) the Schiff ML is drawn bygtfinding the midpoint of the line between pivot A and pivot B movinggtthis point horizontally to directly above or below (depending ongtwhether A is a low or high pivot) the A pivot and drawing a linegtgtfrom his point through the midpoint of the BC swinggtAre there different methods of drawing a Schiff MLgtI was too lazy to draw Schiff MLs by hand with the method yougtdescribed so Im sending my examples with the Dynamic Trader Schiff MLs -)gt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your program Schiff line procedure is fineits actually what Dr Andrews called a modified schiff ml and is onlyslightly different than the one I sent you initially The one you used is preferred by most course members Im sendingthe modified Schiff lesson and a chart along with this email The chart example shows how to use it with 0-34 pivots Regards Gordon

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Sliding Parallel LineDate Montag 13 Maumlrz 2000 005252

Hello TradersZone Heres one of the tools Dr Andrews used most often when entering exiting or reversing marketpositions Not many people know about this technique Regards Gordon The Sliding Parallel (SH) is drawn whenever prices cross an Andrews line and then move along itFor example if the bottom of a daily price bar range drops through a lower parallel line of apitchfork a new parallel line is then drawn from that low and extended to the right If the nextdays price bar drops through that sliding parallel line a sell signal is generated Whenever price action dictates a sliding parallel the next step is to draw a Warning Line Thewarning line is an additional parallel line that is an image extension of the original pitchforkchannels It serves as a warning that if prices penetrate the sliding parallel the next likely target isthe WL The attached chart of Avis illustrates these procedures Please try these on your own charts andsend me an example

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Sliding Parallel LineDate Dienstag 14 Maumlrz 2000 225737

Hello Gordon this is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning line RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 065606

At 31400 105700 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtthis is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning linegt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone Your chart of circuit city was a good example for this study I may have mentioned it earlier but DrAndrews used this technique on a regular basis The next part of this lesson covers another of hisfavorite tools the mini-median line pitchfork Here it is Regards Gordon The Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry and exit tools Though mostoften drawn using alternate closing prices alternate highs and lows can also be usedin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days is usually the maximumbetween pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or more back from P2 Dr Andrews used Mini-Median Line pitchforks for buy and sell signals whenever he expected areversal Some examples include a probable P5 or when prices are at a Warning Line ML MLHmajor ML extension or a sideways channel price target When prices cross the Mini-Median LineParallel (MMLH) a sliding parallel (SH) is used for order entry

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 231537

gtThe Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry andgtexit tools Though most often drawn using alternate closing pricesgtalternate highs and lows can also be usedgtin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days isgtusually the maximum between pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or moregtback from P2

Hello Gordon

wouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timingCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available whenDr Andrews was alive

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject intraday chartsDate Samstag 18 Maumlrz 2000 012400

At 31600 111500 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongtgtwouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsgtinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timinggtCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available when DrgtAndrews was alivegtgtRegardsgtTradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Youre absolutely correctintraday charts were not available when DrAndrews was a trader

Im reading between the lines here but if you plan to day-trade using the course techniques ie thepitchfork then I agree that the regular pitchfork would be more useful on intraday charts Otherwisewhipsaw would be a significant problem Please get back to me if I didnt address your questionbecause this is a very important technique The mini-median line pitchfork and sliding parallel showedup on most of Dr Andrews charts

Regards

Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re intraday chartsDate Dienstag 21 Maumlrz 2000 220322

Hello Gordon

You are right Im planning to daytrade SampP futures using the course techniques among other things

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 003408

Hi TradersZone Here are a couple Andrews techniques that will help anticipate the breakout direction of asideways channelThey work often enough to warrant keep handy Regards Gordon In an earlier lesson you were introduced to Dr Andrews sideways count You saw how frequentlythe sideways count method provided high probability price objectives after the breakout from theestablished channel took place In this segment of lesson 4 youll be shown 2 congestion area techniques that can help youdetermine the probable sideways channel price breakout direction Both rely on the use of pivots The first uses the pivot points that are circled on a sideways channel Dr Andrews observed thatwhenever a sideways channel results in at least 5 circle contacts the eventual price breakoutwould very often be in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle If circle 5 is at thetop of the channel for example the eventual price breakout would likely be to the upside If circle5 is at the bottom of the channel look for a downside breakout Dr Andrews noted that thistechnique can be subject to false breakouts but that such breakouts are usually followed shortlyafter with a confirmed breakout in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle Heemphasized that this study is best considered as a rule of thumb observation He viewed it as asupporting indicator for use with a short-term pitchfork as prices approached a channel line There are 2 charts attached that show how this works

The second technique in this part of lesson 4 deals with a sideways channelthat is building shortly after a P3 has been formed Dr Andrews noted thatwhenever that happened the probabilities were high that prices wouldbreakout in the same direction they were moving prior to the formation ofthe sideways channel The attached P3 to sideways example chart shows thisprocedure

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 205235

Hello Gordon here is my example for the 5 circle sideways count RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Lesson 5Date Montag 27 Maumlrz 2000 060731

At 32400 85200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my example for the 5 circle sideways countgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt gt Hi TradersZone Good example of the 5th circle tendency to predict the direction of a sideways breakout Any luckfinding a chart showing the P3 to sideways rule Im sending the first part of the next lesson This trendline method is a useful tool with all of DrAndrews course lines He used it all the time but especially when looking for confirmation of othercourse method trading signals Regards Gordon The Course Trendline__________________________________________________________ Next well discuss the trendline Seasoned traders agree that the trendline is one of their mostimportant tools No matter what kind of trading program or technique they use the trendline on achart is a must But one of the biggest mistakes made by amateurs and professionals alike isinconsistently drawing or defining the trendline Dr Andrews trendline procedure is simpleconsistent and accurate It works extremely well with the pivot count and with the pitchfork For an uptrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the lowest low up and to thehighest minor low point preceding the highest high The line must not pass through prices inbetween the two low points Extend the line(Attached chart of Brightpoint) For a downtrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the highest high point to thelowest minor high point preceding the lowest low so that it does not pass through prices inbetween the two high points Extend the line (Brightpoint chart) Thats all theres to it Its simple consistent and it works well with other Andrews lines It also

helps eliminate personal bias and haphazard analysis Practice drawing these trendlines on your own charts Send me any questions you might have andthen e-mail a chart of your choosing which shows at least two uptrend and two downtrend linesthat youve drawn_______________________________________________________________________

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Lesson 5Date Dienstag 28 Maumlrz 2000 120224

Hello Gordon here is my chart with trendlinesWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going above the trendline again should I draw a new trendline anddelete the old one Attached is another chart with the P3 to sideways rule I finally found an example for it RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Price failure techniqueDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081412

At 32800 120200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my chart with trendlinesgtWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going abovegtthe trendline again should I draw a new trendline and delete the oldgtone Hi TradersZone Take a look at the chart Im returningI added some lines for you to considerWith the course trendline once its broken a new one should be started Theres a technique thatties in with this coming up soon Meanwhile heres an important technique to work on It deals with those times when prices dontreach the ML Regards Gordon Dr Andrews Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P ofreversaland the ML the probability is that this price reversal will go further thanitdid on its approach toward the ML (Extract of original course material) A price failure very often indicates a sizeable reversal will take placeThepitchforks drawn on the chart of Home Depot illustrate the concept of pricefailure Dr Andrews routinely drew a new pitchfork on his chart after a newsignificant pivot had formed He knew that prices had a high probability ofreaching the new ML before stalling out or reversing If prices reversedbeforereaching the ML thereby forming a new pivot he termed it a price failureTheunderlying idea here is that Dr Andrews fully anticipated his median linewouldact as a price magnet To conclude that a price reversal resulted in a price failure Dr Andrewsused

these primary signalsa subsequent price penetration of a short-termmulti-pivotline andor a return of prices to and penetration of the parallel lineformed atpivot 3 of the pitchfork (The circles on the Home Depot chart denote theparallelline penetration signal To avoid clutter the mpl lines were not drawn) One possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart of ConsecoIncLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me a copy

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject ChartDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081800Attachments image002png

Hi TradersZone Forgot the chart Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Price failure techniqueDate Samstag 1 April 2000 201000

gtOne possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart ofgtConseco IncgtLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me agtcopy Hi Gordon here are my charts with price failures RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Mittwoch 5 April 2000 235624

Hi TradersZone Good price failure examples you sentany comments or questions about it Heres the next partanother old standby Dr Andrews kept handy Regards Gordon In this segment youll learn how to use the Fan line Technique To draw the fan lines youll apply the coursetrendline method which was introduced in an earlier lesson It might be well to emphasize that the practicalapplication of the course trendline method requires practice and experience both of which will serve youwell in this technique Dr Andrews used fan lines as an adjunct to his pitchfork sideways channel andactionreaction methods In the fan line study three trendlines are drawn from the original reversal pivot of the price correction understudy typically a P0 or a P5 Youll notice on the charts included with this study that each fan line is at aflatter angle than its predecessor When the third fan line is broken the rule is that the correction has endedand a new trend is under way Try this technique on some of your own charts and then please send me asample

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Donnerstag 6 April 2000 234315

Hi Gordon No I dont have any specific question about the price failure technique I guess the next likely target after a price failure wouldbe the warning line I have attached two charts with fan linesIs it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the third fan line is broken RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Next segmentDate Freitag 7 April 2000 003312

Hello TradersZone

Tuesday April 06 2000 114315 AM you wrote

TZgt Hi Gordon

TZgt No I dont have any specific question about the price failureTZgt technique I guess the next likely target after a price failureTZgt would be the warning line

TZgt I have attached two charts with fan linesTZgt Is it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the thirdTZgt fan line is broken

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Thats right the warning line is the next price target Additionalwarning lines can be drawn if needed but usually one will do it Ifprices go through the first warning line another can be drawn butmost likely a new pitchfork could be drawn instead which would bepreferable Helps stay current with recently formed pivots

When prices break through the third fan line a buy or sell signal isgiven Not sure what you mean by fourth target fan line Im a littledense today

Your chart work was goodthis is another handy tool for spotting thehigh probability of a price reversal or trend change

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject The Gap TradeDate Freitag 7 April 2000 004858

Hello TradersZone This trading signal doesnt show up very often but past observations have shown that its well worth watching for Dr Andrews placed a lot of emphasis on the importance of price gaps something many traders overlook This is one of his gap uses Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom The Gap Trading Technique Price gaps can be a dilemma for many traders The general rule denoting market strength or weakness after ahigh volume gap often comes up short after the initial reaction is over Many gappers simply run out ofsteam A high volume gap in itself seems to offer precious little evidence that a profitable move is about toget under way Dr Andrews used price gaps somewhat differently than others He counted a gap as 2 pivots Youll see howthat works in the following technique which uses a gap to arrive at a price level for a buy or sell order Using short-term daily price pivots label the pivot immediately preceding the gap as p0 Count the gap as 2pivots labeling it p1 amp p2 After p3 has formed and prices reverse towards a short-term p4 draw a horizontalline 2 price tics or more (individual preference)to the right of p3 Enter the market only if prices reach orpenetrate that line within a few days after reversing from p4 Please look over your own charts to see if you can find places where the gap trade technique could have beenused Send me a sample when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 001925

Hello Gordon this is my chart with a gap trade RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 065538

Hello TradersZone Thursday April 08 2000 121925 PM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt this is my chart with a gap trade TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Good examplethe gap trade technique shines when an issue in at or near a P5 Similar to the one on thechart you sent Heres another trading signal tool Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Dr Andrews used several techniques which helped him determine whether a P5 was near at hand Youllrecall that he observed most price moves ended or had a significant reversal at a P5 This technique uses alternate closing prices after a P4 has been formed As with many of his studies thenumber 5 is used The chart accompanying this segment shows that there were 5 alternate closes to thedownside after P4 was put in Dr Andrews noted that whenever 5 or more alternate closes followed a P4 theprobabilities were high that a P5 was near at hand An added feature to this chart study is the sideways channel Notice how the 2nd target price and the 5thalternate close nearly coincide

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 12 April 2000 200730

Hello Gordon This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 13 April 2000 082418

Monday April 12 2000 80730 AM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hello TradersZone Good chart example of this Andrews toolanother of his very unusual observations that workmore often than not Heres the final part of this lesson Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom In this trendline method Dr Andrews once again used the number 5 as the basis for locating aprobable reversal area He found this technique to be especially useful whenever a clear orobvious pivot count didnt show up onthe price move under study Trendlines are drawn using the course trendline method When the 5th trendline is broken theprobability is high that the trend under study has ended A mini-median line pitchfork andorsliding parallel could be used for pricing a trading order The accompanying chart of Compaq Computer is an example of how the trendline study could beused The pivot count beginning at the October low is difficult to nail down There were severalsmall areas of congestion but no sizeable corrections while prices advanced The count wasunclear By following the price action using the course trendline technique however the traderwould have been alerted to the possibility of a change of trend when the 5th trendline was brokenin early February Try this technique on your own charts When youre ready please send me an example of yourstudy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 19 April 2000 124108

Hello Gordon this is my example with 5 trendlines RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[6] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 20 April 2000 012726

Monday April 19 2000 124108 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt this is my example with 5 trendlines

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Good example of the 5 TL technique Always reminds me of how the fairly simple tools often do a better job than manyof the sophisticated studies out there

That was the last part of lesson 5 Lesson 6 attached is made in one mailing Youll find Dr Andrews trading rules alongwith a wrap-up review which uses several of his rules You might have questions about some of the rules so feel free tosend them as they arise

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Dr Andrews had an abbreviated set of trading rules on several index cards that he carried around with him in his shirtpocket He said every trading day turned up something new on his charts and by having his rules in his pocket he wasreminded of the need for a methodical approach to his analysis Quite a comment coming from the man who wrote therule book

In this the final lesson of the course Dr Andrews original trading rules and observations are presented Lets work witha few of them at this point

Using charts of issues you follow please send me an example that illustrates your interpretation of each of the followingrules

Rule 4 Anticipating major Ps

Rule 7 Penetration rule

Rule 8 Price failure rule

Rule 11 1-ML23 AR Centerline

Rule 12 Sliding Parallel rule

Rule 15 Mini-median line parallel to buy or sell

Feel free to include any other course techniques you choose to apply but please include examples of the above as aminimum Use more than one technique on a chart if your analysis supports it Send as many charts as you like alongwith your questionscomments

Lesson 6 - Dr Andrews Trading Rules

This lesson covers course rules and significant observations as taught by Dr Andrews in his original trading course Therules are those that he used in his own trading and are provided to serve as a checklist for use with the course tradingmethods youve learned

Rule 1 Where prices are always headed Rule You course members are among the fortunate few to be able to draw astraight line and know that prices are headed toward that ML Very few investors have ever applied this ML principle ofstatistics to price fluctuations and weve never seen this in any books on investment You are among the very few who

know that prices are always headed toward the newest ML

Rule 2 The Rule of coming opposites applies all through life In the bible we find Blessed at they that mourn for theyshall be comforted As investors we know that any losses can be recovered by using course methods

Rule 3 Turn your mind about or Rethink for all good is at hand We should mentally prepare ourselves for thecoming reversal in prices and other affairs Heres one way for example that you course members who know the MLrules can use When prices are skyrocketing upward we do this preparation by thinking If prices pivoted here today atthis price Id draw a new ML bisecting the distance between todays price and the price from which the rise started Andwe know now that if this is a Major Pivot prices will fall rapidly to this new ML Profits from such drops are big and quick

Rule 4 Rule for anticipating major Ps If during congestion or after a rally or decline you can count four previous Psthe fifth one is highly probable to be the one from which a new trend starts

Rule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can make a quick big profit is to watch for the EPformations

Rule 6 The other reversal rule is that prices tend to reverse at or near any ML as well as at any extension of each MLAnd also at any MLH or extensions of MLH

Rule 7 The Penetration Rule is that whenever prices gap past or plunge through any ML there is a high probability thatthey will quickly return to it temporarily and then resume the trend they had before they gapped or plunged through

Rule 8 Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P of reversal and the MLthe probability is that this price reversal will go further than it did on its approach toward the ML

Rule 9 The price failure rule is negated when the next price trend is also a failure in reaching the ML This is almostinvariably a signal of a big fast move in the direction indicated by this last space Rule 10 When alternate median lines of comparable length slope in the same direction the trend is firm and rapidprice changes take place

Rule 11 When 1-ML23 is exactly reached at P4 it can be used as a highly reliable centerline for the AR method

Rule 12 Frequently after crossing a lower MLH prices continue to rise along the MLH Since the crossing of the MLHsignals a further drop is likely use a sliding parallel along the bottom of the most recent crossing If prices drop past thatsliding parallel line a sell signal is generated

Rule 13 MLs between P2 and P3 can start from a nearby or a remote P1 since prices tend to reverse at each of theseMLs Try several such P2-P3 MLs to discover the best fit

Rule 14 The distance of each MLH from its ML is the distance of the next warning line Use these warning lineswhenever a SH has signalled a buy or sell

Rule 15 Use the MMLH as a buy or sell signal when you expect a reversal because of a P5 Also when prices are at aWL ML extension line or where course lines converge or intersect

Rule 16 Converging lines that meet prices have shown the highest probability of a trend reversal

Rule 17 Two to four days is usually the maximum between P2 and P3 for a MML P1 can be a day or so back from P2and 3

Rule 18 The most reliable ActionReaction centerlines seem to be MPL 2P line 2 Gap line peak to low or low to peak

Rule 19 When prices pass through R lines look for a pull back and then a continuing move in the direction of the passthrough

Rule 20 Use gaps as Action lines from the centerline

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 003755

Hello Gordonhere is my example for Rule 4 And I have a question What are EP formations gtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 021242

Tuesday May 04 2000 123755 PM you wrote TZgt Hello GordonTZgt here is my example for Rule 4 TZgt And I have a question What are EP formations gtgtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegtgta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hi TradersZone Good use of the warning linesalso the EP material is part of lesson 4 Rather than go backthrough the files to see when (or if) it was sent Im sending it along with this reply Glad youbrought it up Best RegardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Tuesday May 04 2000208 PM Dr Andrews used a fairly common price chart formation that he found useful at probable P5market tops and bottoms The formation generally called a wedge or pennant by chartists isreferred to in Dr Andrews trading course as the Expanding Pivot (EP) One of the few chartformations used in the course he regarded it as among the most dependable indications that amarket top was forming Closely related to the EP is his Inverted Expanding Pivot (IEP) which henoted could often be observed at market bottoms Both are regarded as intermediate and long-term reversal indicators Dr Andrews found that both formations were most reliable when they occurred after a sharprapid price move coinciding with the formation of a probable P5 He said it wasnt unusual for theformation to take several weeks to complete and that conservative traders could best avoid thewhipsaw associated with congestion patterns by trading only in the direction of the probable price

break out of the EP or IEP formation The attached charts illustrate these formations Please look over your own charts for an example ofthe EP and IEP and send me a copy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 232127

Hello Gordon Thank you for the lesson with the EP material I couldnt find it in any previous emailHere is my example for Rule 7 RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Rule 4Date Samstag 6 Mai 2000 080827

Wednesday May 05 2000 112127 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt Thank you for the lesson with the EP materialTZgt I couldnt find it in any previous emailTZgt Here is my example for Rule 7

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hi TradersZone

Glad you mentioned it earlierexcept for the EP IEP and hissideways channel Dr Andrews didnt have much to say about chartpatterns and formations These are good ones to use though

Your study of the penetration rule was good Later

Best Regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Wednesday May 05 2000801 PM

Page 7: Pitchfork primer

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Pivots and pitchforksDate Donnerstag 3 Februar 2000 071228

At 2200 82400 PM you wrotegtI have attached a chart of AET I hope its a good examplegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone The chartwork you sent was excellentgood grasp of the count and your pitchfork procedure wascorrect Later on in the course well go over Dr Andrews techniques which will help you decidewhich pivots to use for the pitchfork that offers the best probability of staying in tune with themarkets Heres the next segment of lesson 1 Regards Gordon ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Well continue our pitchfork and pivot study using the NETA chart from the previous segment Dr Andrews noted that most sizeable price moves form 5 significant or easily recognizeable pivotsbefore reversing Some moves end with 3 pivots and occasionally youll find 7 or 9 But most hesaid will end with 5 pivots before reversing the trend under study Whenever he observed that aP4 was formed on a chart he used what he termed the 0-34 ML method to project the likely pricelevel where the P5 would form Large price reversals Dr Andrews observed often occur after a P5has formed This method is an excellent early warning signal for anticipating price reversals at a P5 The pitchfork is drawn using the P0-34 ML method as illustrated on the attached chart of NETANotice that prices reversed at the ML forming a P5 Also attached is a chart of Conseco Inc Please label the significant pivots starting at the July highand then draw one pitchfork using the 0-34 pivots and one using the 3-45 pivots Please returnyour chart along with any questions or comments

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Pivots and pitchforksDate Donnerstag 3 Februar 2000 154548

I have attached the CNC chartWhen the price moves below the P0-34 ML before making a P5 low is the lower parallel line thenext likely level where the P5 should occurOn the CNC chart the price closes above the P0-34 ML the day after breaking the ML Is that aconfirmation that the P5 low has been made

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Good QuestionsDate Freitag 4 Februar 2000 063320

At 2300 34500 PM you wrotegtI have attached the CNC chart gtWhen the price moves below the P0-34 ML before making a P5 low is thegtlower parallel line the next likely level where the P5 should occur (Thats right TradersZone The function of parallel lines is to provide the next level of support orresistance for those times when prices do not stop or reverse at the ML Dr Andrews by the waylooked for prices to reverse at any ML and form a new pivot in the process)gtOn the CNC chart the price closes above the P0-34 ML the day aftergtbreaking the ML Is that a confirmation that the P5 low has been made (That was a good sign but too close to call (imho) Please see chart for TL use as a confirmationsignal) Dr Andrews used several techniques to help him deal with probable reversalsSome are special situation type methods and others are used in conjunction with the pivot countpitchfork lines or ActionReaction lines Well be covering those rules in the last part of the course Im sending another chart for you to study and work on Please identify the main pivots in thedown move that started in April and also draw at least 2 pitchforksWhen ready please return to me Regards Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Good QuestionsDate Freitag 4 Februar 2000 191043

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Median Line TechniqueDate Sonntag 6 Februar 2000 010735

Hello TradersZone Nice work on the charts you returned Everything was by the book It appears that you have theprocedures well in hand Heres the final portion of lesson 1 The concept is basic but it does the important job of helping atrader stay on the right side of the market Will you be continuing the course Regards Gordon The first lines Dr Andrews drew on a new chart were the long-term and intermediate-term medianlines After identifying the significant pivots he drew his first median line beginning with P0-12and worked forward on the chart using each subsequent set of 3 pivots Each ML served to vectorpricesacting as a magnet if you will that drew prices towards it He said that prices will head forthe new ML over 80 of the time Parallel lines are not drawn when using this procedure Its prime function is to determine thedirection and price level of the new ML Recall that Dr Andrews anticipated a price reversal at eachnew ML The attached chart of LPX illustrates this technique Try this on some of your own charts and thenplease send me an example

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Median Line TechniqueDate Montag 7 Februar 2000 192718

I found a chart with 9 pivots I hope it doesnt matterIs it necessary that the move is made of swings with higher highs and higher lows in an uptrend (lower highs and lower lows in adowntrend)For example in the attached chart the point P6 is lower than P4 and P7 is lower than P5Another question For how long are median lines validI noticed that the P2-34 ML from my chart served as support and resistance two years later in 1998 (see attached chartLOW2GIF) but on the other hand I dont want to clutter my charts with too many lines from the past I would like to continue the course to the end I will send the money for the remaining 5 lessons tomorrow Did you receive myfirst payment yet RegardsTradersZone

LOW2GIF

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneDate Mittwoch 9 Februar 2000 054710

At 2700 72700 PM you wrotegtI found a chart with 9 pivots I hope it doesnt mattergtIs it necessary that the move is made of swings with higher highs andgthigher lows in an uptrend (lower highs and lower lows in a downtrend)gtFor example in the attached chart the point P6 is lower than P4 and P7gtis lower than P5 ( When using this ML technique TradersZone the main object is to note the price level of the newML for that is the next probable reversal area The pivots need not be in Elliott formation havingswings as you noted above Your ML procedure by the way was correct I noticed how oftenprices headed for each new ML and then reversedLater in the course well see how Dr Andrews handled those times when prices reversed beforereaching the ML area)gtAnother question For how long are median lines validgtI noticed that the P2-34 ML from my chart served as support andgtresistance two years later in 1998 (see attached chart LOW2GIF) butgton the other hand I dont want to clutter my charts with too many lines from the past (One of the interesting things about Dr Andrews lines is that no matter how far out his lines areprojected they will continue to cause prices to stall-out or reverse when reached Also wheneverseveral of his lines intersect there is a very high probability of a price reversal whether pricesconverge at the intersection or are some distancegtfrom it The probability is higher though when prices are at thegtintersecting lines A linethat has in the past provided frequent support or resistance is probably a pretty good line tokeep on your chart Youre right though charts seem to get cluttered up veryquickly)gt gtI would like to continue the course to the end I will send the moneygtfor the remaining 5 lessons tomorrow Did you receive my first payment yet (Glad to hear youre going to continue to the end Thank you for the prepayment Your first checkhasnt arrived yet will let you know when it does) Meanwhile heres the first segment of the next lesson Regards Gordon

In this lesson youll be introduced to Dr Andrews sideways count The sideways count was hisold reliable a tool that worked so well so often that it was one of the very first studies heperformed on his charts The sideways count gave him a reliable gauge that told him ahead of timehow far a stock or commodity was likely to move Sounds too good to be true perhaps but as youwork with the sideways count youll discover for yourself how often the projected price targetsare reachedoften within tics Markets frequently spend a lot of time in congestion Heres Dr Andrews way to use thatcongestion to our advantage Looking at the Brightpoint attachment please note the channel lines starting in January Youll seethat most of the pivots from Jan-May were within this channel Now look at where Ive placedcircles At each point where prices touched a channel line and then reversed direction and went allthe way back to touch the opposite channel line a circle was drawn Put another way if pricestouch one channel line but then dont go all the way back to touch the opposite channel line acircle is not drawn At first glance this technique can often be unclear so well pause here for some chart work Pleasee-mail me a chart that shows where youve drawn channel lines to identify sideways price actionand also where youve placed the channel line circles

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject ReDate Mittwoch 9 Februar 2000 184837

gtAt each point where prices touched a channel line and then reversedgtdirection and went all the way back to touch the opposite channel linegta circle was drawn Put another way if prices touch one channel linegtbut then dont go all the way back to touch the opposite channel linegta circle is not drawn Shouldnt the last circle on your Brightpoint chart be left outThe price didnt return to the opposite channel line after that day This is my chart

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Thanks for the questionDate Mittwoch 9 Februar 2000 231437

At 2900 64800 PM you wrotegtShouldnt the last circle on your Brightpoint chart be left outgtThe price didnt return to the opposite channel line after that day Hello TradersZone The last circle is appropriate but I can see where the wording in the explanation is confusing Ihave changed that paragraph to read Looking at the Brightpoint attachment please note the channel lines starting in January Youll seethat most of the pivots from Jan- May were within this channel Now look at where the circles wereplaced on the channel lines They are in alternate sequenceNote that each circle was drawn only after prices had first been at the opposite channel lineTheBrightpoint chart illustrates this procedure Thanks for pointing this out TradersZone If the wording is still unclear to you Id appreciate yourinput Meanwhile heres the next segment of this lessonRegards Gordon Well continue to use the Brightpoint chart for this portion of the sideways count study To reviewthe pattern were looking for should be a recent rectangular shaped sideways trading range thatcontains most if not all of the congestion price action Take a look at the attached chart and notehow well defined the price channel for Brightpoint is Youll probably notice that it is deeper thanthe channel you studied on the chart in the preceding segment This comparison is made toillustrate that while the first channel example covers a longer period of time the second includesall of the price ranges and is the preferred method Please look at where the circles were placed on the channel lines To review a new circle is drawnonly after prices have first been at the opposite channel line Recall that circles must be inalternate sequence eg upper linelower lineupper linelower line etc one circle at a time Note that the price range within the channel is $4 34 (High 21 12 Low 16 34) There were twocircles drawn on the lower line of our sideways channel before prices broke down Using thatinformation our next step will be to use some simple arithmetic in order to come up with twodownside price targets Well cover that procedure in the next segment Please let me know whenyou are ready to continue

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Sideways countDate Mittwoch 9 Februar 2000 232315Attachments image001png

Hi TradersZone Im returning your chartplease note comments GordonRegards Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Thanks for the questionDate Donnerstag 10 Februar 2000 233059

Hello Gordonthank you Im ready for the next lesson

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next partDate Donnerstag 10 Februar 2000 235613

At 21000 113000 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongtthank you Im ready for the next lessongt gt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt gt gt TradersZoneI sent this yesterday but will re-send It was part of my reply to your questionregarding the circle I dont have a record of your return chartwork for this part If its a duplicatesend sorry Regards Gordon Well continue to use the Brightpoint chart for this portion of the sideways count study To reviewthe pattern were looking for should be a recent rectangular shaped sideways trading range thatcontains most if not all of the congestion price action Take a look at the attached chart and notehow well defined the price channel for Brightpoint is Youll probably notice that it is deeper thanthe channel you studied on the chart in the preceding segment This comparison is made toillustrate that while the first channel example covers a longer period of time the second includesall of the price ranges and is the preferred method Please look at where the circles were placed on the channel lines To review a new circle is drawnonly after prices have first been at the opposite channel line Recall that circles must be inalternate sequence eg upper linelower lineupper linelower line etc one circle at a time Note that the price range within the channel is $4 34 (High 21 12 Low 16 34) There were twocircles drawn on the lower line of our sideways channel before prices broke down Using thatinformation our next step will be to use some simple arithmetic in order to come up with twodownside price targets Well cover that procedure in the next segment Please let me know whenyou are ready to continue

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next partDate Freitag 11 Februar 2000 234113

I think the placement of the circles is clear to me nowI have attached another chart with a sideways count RegardsTradersZone gtTradersZoneI sent this yesterday but will re-send It was part ofgtmy reply to your question regarding the circle I dont have a recordgtof your return chartwork for this part If its a duplicate send sorry

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject SidewaysDate Montag 14 Februar 2000 054227

At 21100 114100 PM you wrotegtI think the placement of the circles is clear to me nowgtI have attached another chart with a sideways countgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone Your chart was on target Looks like youre ready for the next part Here it is Regards Gordon During this segment youll learn how to arrive at two price targets using Dr Andrews sidewayscount Simple arithmetic is all thats required once the sideways channel and circles are in place Well continue to use the Brightpoint chart which is attached Note that Brightpoint fell throughthe bottom channel line at the point where we placed our second circle so figuring out possibledownside targets would have been in order at that time Heres how thats done 1 Determine the price range of the channel In this case the range is $4 34 (21 12 - 16 34) 2 Count the number of circles on the lower channel line The lower line is used in this casebecause thats the line that didnt hold Prices went through it returned to check it out and thencontinued lower 3 Multiply the price range of the channel times the number of circles drawn on the lower channelline (4 34 x 2 = 9 12) 4 Subtract that figure from the upper channel line priceThe result becomes downside price target 1 (21 12 - 9 12 = 12) 5 Next subtract that same figure from the price at the lower channel line Thats price target 2(16 34 - 9 12 = 7 14)

In the case of an upside channel breakout the procedure is reversed Please draw a few channelsand figure out some downside targets on your own charts When youre ready send me two orthree examples of your work As always send your questions as they arise

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re SidewaysDate Montag 14 Februar 2000 134314

Here are my examples I couldnt find enough charts with downside targets so I included some charts with upside targets Do the channel lines always have to be horizontal When I look at my charts I find more channels with an upward slope or adownward slope RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Sideways channelsDate Freitag 18 Februar 2000 005531

At 21400 14300 PM you wrotegtHere are my examples I couldnt find enough charts with downsidegttargets so I included some charts with upside targetsgt gtDo the channel lines always have to be horizontal When I look at mygtcharts I find more channels with an upward slope or a downward slopegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone The sideways method can be used with either up or down Sorry didnt mean to imply that only downsidetargets should be found Ill reword that portion of the lesson Thanks for mentioning it Dr Andrews sideways method works only on horizontal channels Others have mentioned the slopingchannels also and have wondered if there is some method to use with them I know of none Ive askedother course members for their ideas on how to approach this problem but so far no one has come up with amethod I would think that there should be a solution but have not personally taken the time to research itIf some method could be found that works as often as the Andrews sideways count it would be a significantfind The Andrews sideways count doesnt always hit the targets as you saw on your chart of Bausch amp Lomb Itworks more often than not though and it still amazes me at how often prices reach the targets Heres an observation to keep in mind Quite often after the first target is reached prices will reverse andhead back towards the channel At times youll note that they return inside the channel They will thenreverse again and head back towards the second price target These reversals happen frequently and presenttrading opportunities Im including the final segment of this lesson Regards Gordon So far in the course youve learned about Dr Andrews pivot counting procedure pitchfork and sidewayscount Youve noticed by now how often prices change trend at a P5 Youve seen how the 0-34 ML methodcan help locate the probable P5 area Youve seen how often price targets are met using the sideways countmethod The tendency for prices to reverse at a median line should be recognized as a high probability eventas well In coming lessons youll be shown how Dr Andrews used these and other high probability events totrade the stock and commodity markets The tools and techniques he used will help you put the finishingtouches on your market analysis using Andrews lines

Before continuing on to the next lesson lets briefly review what has so far been covered The attached chartprovides an opportunity to illustrate the methods referred to above Please draw these methods on thechart and return to me

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Sideways channelsDate Montag 21 Februar 2000 193743

gtBefore continuing on to the next lesson lets briefly review what hasgtso far been covered The attached chart provides an opportunity togtillustrate the methods referred to above Please draw these methods ongtthe chart and return to me Hello Gordonhere is my chart RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next lesson attachedDate Mittwoch 23 Februar 2000 014539

At 22100 73700 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongthere is my chartgt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Good job on the pivots sideways count and pitchforkLooks like youre ready to move on to the next part It wont be long and things will begin to fall inplace Regards Gordon Lesson 4 continued In one of his course letters Dr Andrews wrote The Law of Physics stated by Newton that Actionand Reaction are equal and opposite was first applied to prices by your Course Directors friendthe late Roger Babson who attributed his earnings of several million dollars to this law Beginning with this segment of lesson four and continuing in lesson five youll learn how to drawand apply the ActionReaction trading method as taught by Dr Andrews in his trading course The AR method requires a centerline or CL from which to start The CL can be any of thefollowing - MPL - ML - MLH - 2P line - 2 Gap line - Peak to low line - Low to peak lineThese are the primary lines that Dr Andrews used He stressed that some pencil work and a goodeyeball was needed in order to find the best fitting CL As with most other chart lines somework better than others The task is to find the best fit as he put it You will be shown examples of

each of the above CLs in this lesson and the next Determining which of the above listed lines to use as the CL is the first step in the ActionReactionmethod The solution often presents itself With a little practice a quick scan of the chart understudy will be all thats needed to spot the most likely CL Well begin with the attached chart Notethe CL drawn In this example a MPL (multi-pivot line) was used as the CL A MPL is a straightline that connects three or more consecutive pivots without passing through prices Theconnecting line is then extended Ive circled the three pivots that form the MPL on the chartThere are several other places on our chart where a MPL CL can be drawn Please bear in mindthat this is just the first step of the process Identification of likely CLs is all were after here Seeif you can locate two more then draw them in and send the chart back to me Well take up fromthere

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next lesson attachedDate Mittwoch 23 Februar 2000 212304

gtLesson 4 continuedgt gtIn one of his course letters Dr Andrews wrote The Law of Physicsgtstated by Newton that Action and Reaction are equal and opposite wasgtfirst applied to prices by your Course Directors friend the lategtRoger Babson who attributed his earnings of several million dollars to this lawgt gtBeginning with this segment of lesson four and continuing in lessongtfive youll learn how to draw and apply the ActionReaction tradinggtmethod as taught by Dr Andrews in his trading coursegt gtThe AR method requires a centerline or CL from which to startgtThe CL can be any of the followinggt - MPLgt - MLgt - MLHgt - 2P linegt - 2 Gap linegt - Peak to low linegt - Low to peak line Hello Gordon2P line 2 Gap line Peak to low line Low to peak line ndash actually I dont know what these lines areAre they discussed in Lesson 3 I believe you havenrsquot sent me this lesson yetAnyway I found two more MPLs on the Novellus Chart and drew them in RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Lesson 3Date Mittwoch 23 Februar 2000 235958

At 22300 92300 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt2P line 2 Gap line Peak to low line Low to peak line - actually I dont knowgtwhat these lines are Are they discussed in Lesson 3 I believe you didntgtsent me this lesson yetgtAnyway I found two more MPLs on the Novellus Chart and drew them ingt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone My apologiesI sent you an outdated version of the lesson Thanks for letting me know Musthave been my bedtime Heres the correct version Regards Gordon Lesson 3 In one of his course letters Dr Andrews wrote The Law of Physics stated by Newton that Actionand Reaction are equal and opposite was first applied to prices by your Course Directors friendthe late Roger Babson who attributed his earnings of several million dollars to this law In this lesson youll be introduced to the ActionReaction trading method as taught by Dr Andrewsin his trading course The AR method requires a centerline or CL from which to start The CL can be any of thefollowing - MPL Multi-pivot line A line drawn across 3 or more pivots - ML Median line The middle line of the pitchfork - MLH Median line parallel Either parallel line of the pitchfork - 2P line A line drawn across 2 pivots - 2 Gap line A line drawn connecting 2 gaps without touching prices in between - Peak to low line A line drawn connecting the high and low of a price leg

- Low to peak line A line drawn connecting the low and high of a price leg These are the primary lines that Dr Andrews used He stressed that some pencil work and a goodeyeball was needed in order to find the best fitting CL As with most other chart lines somework better than others The task is to find the best fit as he put it You will be shown examples ofeach of the above CLs Determining which of the above listed lines to use as the CL is the first step in the ActionReactionmethod With practice a quick view of the chart under study will be all thats needed to spot themost likely CL Youll be shown later how to experiment with possible combinations in order tofind the centerline that is most in tune with the market under study Well begin with the attached chart Note the CL drawn In this example a MPL (multi-pivot line)was used as the CL A MPL is a straight line that connects three or more consecutive pivotswithout passing through prices The connecting line is then extended Ive circled the three pivotsthat form the MPL on the chart There are several other places on our chart where a MPL CL canbe drawn Please bear in mind that this is just the first step of the process Identification of likelyCLs is all were after here See if you can locate two more then draw them in and send the chartback to me

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Donnerstag 24 Februar 2000 025105

At 22300 92300 PM you wroteI found two more MPLs on the Novellus Chart and drew them ingt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your mpls were correct This next segment shows the purpose of the centerline and how it isused Your payment in full arrived today TradersZone Thank you Regards Gordon Lesson 3 continued Please refer to the attached chart of Novellus The line drawn connecting the 3 circled pivots is amulti-pivot line (MPL) and represents the centerline (CL) well be using in this example Recall inthe previous segment that several types of centerlines are possible The choice is determined byexperimenting with the potential combinations on the chart under study Its best to try to locate acenterline somewhere close to the middle of the price chart in order to have sufficient past andforward data to use with the study This will become clear as you work with the method Once the centerline is drawn the next step is to locate a previous low or high pivot point to use fordrawing an action line Dr Andrews observed that the low pivot points often seem to work bestbut that either could be used In our example a line starting at the previous significant low wasdrawn parallel to the CL It is labeled A-1 (Action line 1) because it represents the first actionline Dr Andrews called it an action line because it was drawn as a result of a previous pivot (pricereversal) that had taken place Next a parallel line was drawn to the right of the CL and labeled R-1 Notice that it is the same distance from the CL as the corresponding A-1 line It is labeled R-1because it represents the first reaction line a line where prices are likely to stop or reverseNotice how prices reacted at the R-1 line in early 98 That serves as an indication that thecenterline chosen for this study should be a good one to use Not all reaction lines cause such aclear reversal as the R1 on this chart but many do Thats why its important to experiment withvarious centerline possibilities in order to find action lines that produce reaction lines which createthe greatest number of pivots or price stall-outs This experimentation is often quite time

consuming but experience has shown that it is time well spent When a centerline is found that isin tune with the price action of the issue under study it can be a highly effective tool for use inlocating probable reversal areas When combined with pitchfork lines the AR method can pinpointpotential reversal areas that are generally not recognized as such by others Dr Andrewstechniques for using the pitchfork and AR lines together are covered in later lessons In coming segments well study other lines that Dr Andrews used for his centerlines In themeantime experiment with the multi-pivot centerline on your own charts Then please send mean example of your work along with any questions you may have

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Freitag 25 Februar 2000 211356

gtIn the meantime experiment with the multi-pivot centerline on your owngtcharts Then please send me an example of your work along with anygtquestions you may have Hello Gordon I was wondering how many ActionReaction lines could be drawn on a chart On my attached chart I found at least 6 parallellines which had a significant meaning for the price RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject AR linesDate Montag 28 Februar 2000 080128

gtHello Gordongt gtI was wondering how many ActionReaction lines could be drawn on agtchart On my attached chart I found at least 6 parallel lines which hadgta significant meaning for the pricegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hi TradersZone Theres no set number of lines that can be drawnactually the more you can find the betterFinding a good centerline is the key And once you find lines that work such as you did anynumber of parallel lines can be drawn You are doing exactly what Dr Andrews didtaking thetime and effort to find the best fitting sets of lines Each chart has them and each chart is differentas Im sure youve found Nice work Heres the next part Regards Gordon Lesson 3 continued One of Dr Andrews favorite techniques dealt with gapsan often times perplexing price event formany traders His observations over the years suggested to him that while gaps show upfrequently on many price charts few traders have a method for including them as an integral partof their chart analysis Thats not surprising since not much has been published about how toapproach the use of gaps in a trading method Dr Andrews however found several ways to putprice gaps to good use An ActionReaction centerline which uses gaps as its basis is one suchmethod Please refer to the attached chart of Cendant Youll see that a centerline was drawn which passedthrough the July gap Note that it also came in contact with several pivots thereby qualifying as agapmulti-pivot centerline It is drawn by starting at the April low pivot and extending a line acrossand through the gap in mid-July It subsequently touches two additional high pivots Dr Andrews counted each gap as two pivots He noted that the more pivots a line touched the

stronger the line tended to be in the future Good reason then for using the July gap as the basisfor an ActionReaction study Our CL is labelled a gap-mpl-CL The May 98 high was used for the Action Line starting point A line was then drawn parallel to theCenterline as per ActionReaction procedure The corresponding Reaction Line was then drawn inIf this particular study had been drawn on Cendants chart right after the July gap was put in thepotential for prices to go all the way down to the Reaction Line might have seemed very slim at thetime Notice however that prices reached the Reaction Line in early September Youll see thishappen time and again as you work with the AR method The core of its effectiveness is a strongCL Please send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts of your choice

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re AR linesDate Montag 28 Februar 2000 155937

gtPlease send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts of yourgtchoice Hello Gordonhere are my examples RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject More on the ARDate Donnerstag 2 Maumlrz 2000 071158

At 22800 35900 PM you wrotegtgtPlease send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts ofgtgtyour choicegt gtHello Gordongthere are my examplesgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone You picked some good examples to use for your AR study Both showed the potential power of thismethod Takes time and lots of chart study sometimes to find the best set of lines but the rewardscan be many Heres something else to look at Regards Gordon The ActionReaction technique requires a strong centerline from which to begin The key todeciding which set of pivots to use for the centerline is found through experimenting with thevarious configurations visible on the chart under study The centerline might be a series of gapspivots an existing median line or any of Dr Andrews lines The task is to search for that centerlinewhich shows the greatest potential for projecting price reversal areas Dr Andrews did that byfinding a likely centerline near the middle of his price chart That allowed him to use any of theprevious pivots for his action lines By experimenting he found reaction lines that did the best jobof pegging reversal areas at data points located forward of the centerline Reaction lines are equal and opposite of the action lines and serve to project price levels at whicha reversal can be expected That is why the task of seeking out the best centerline is so importantDr Andrews reasoned that a series of reaction lines which have pegged price reversals in the pastis likely to continue to be in tune with current and future market price action Having severalprevious pivots to use as anchors for drawing action lines is thus essential The attached chart of Lattice illustrates this concept Please bear in mind that the gapmplcenterline is not the only centerline one could use on this chart You might want to study the chartfor other AR possibilities Try a peak-to-peak CL or a multi-pivot CL Send me your studies along

with any questions

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re More on the ARDate Samstag 4 Maumlrz 2000 002521

gtThe attached chart of Lattice illustrates this conceptgtPlease bear in mind that the gapmpl centerline is not the onlygtcenterline one could use on this chartgtYou might want to study the chart for other AR possibilitiesgtTry a peak-to-peak CL or a multi-pivot CL Send me your studiesgtalong with any questions Hello Gordonhere is my chart RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Peak to peak clDate Sonntag 5 Maumlrz 2000 064107

At 3400 122500 AM you wrotegtHello Gordongthere is my chartgt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Looks like you have the concept down Takes time and a lot of chart work to find the bestcenterline When the reaction lines dont seem to peg reversal areas chances are the centerline isnot the one that is best in tune with the price action of the issue under studyDespite the time required for this method it was one of Dr Andrews stand-bysAR lines could befound on most of his charts Im sending a chart with an example of a peak-to-peak CL Regards Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Peak to peak clDate Sonntag 5 Maumlrz 2000 171232

Hello Gordon I think the peak-to-peak CL on the last chart I sent to you was not really drawn from peak to peakIm sending another example RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next LessonDate Mittwoch 8 Maumlrz 2000 072526

At 3500 51200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtI think the peak-to-peak CL on the last chart I sent to you was notgtreally drawn from peak to peakgtIm sending another examplegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your peak to peak cl example was correctly drawn Thats a fairly simple approach but quite oftenthe peak to peak yields better reaction lines Heres the first part of the next lesson Regards Gordon Youll find times when prices dont quite reach the ML but instead drift alongside or away from itThe Schiff ML was designed to be used in place of the regular ML whenever that happens Suchprice action can be found at any place on a chart but most frequently occurs after a sharp sell-offor run-up of prices Dr Andrews also used the Schiff ML whenever his regular ML sloped at an unusually steep angleHe said it helped smooth out irregular price action such as that caused by unexpected earningsnews crop planting delays or poor growing conditions crop production reports etc Youll findnearly vertical price moves over a short period of time on many charts The Schiff ML method helpsput things back in perspective when that happens Well use the chart of Sterling Bancorp as an example of prices drifting away from the regular MLThat ML is drawn in black Prices didnt quite reach the ML but drifted alongside and eventuallyaway from it The Schiff ML and parallel lines are drawn in red Notice how prices were containedwithin the Schiff pitchfork until they finally broke down at the upper parallel line The procedure for drawing the Schiff ML is the same as for the regular ML except the startingpoint is located midway between the first 2 pivots youll be using The Sterling Bancorp chart

illustrates how this is done Dr Andrews also suggested using the Schiff ML whenever the regular ML method doesnt seem tobe in sync with price action Practice this procedure on your own charts and send a couple examples when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next LessonDate Donnerstag 9 Maumlrz 2000 001143

Hello Gordon in my charting software (Dynamic Trader) the Schiff ML is drawn by finding the midpoint of the line between pivot A and pivot Bmoving this point horizontally to directly above or below (depending on whether A is a low or high pivot) the A pivot anddrawing a line from his point through the midpoint of the BC swingAre there different methods of drawing a Schiff MLI was too lazy to draw Schiff MLs by hand with the method you described so Im sending my examples with the Dynamic TraderSchiff MLs -) RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject SchiffDate Samstag 11 Maumlrz 2000 070226

At 3900 121100 AM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtin my charting software (Dynamic Trader) the Schiff ML is drawn bygtfinding the midpoint of the line between pivot A and pivot B movinggtthis point horizontally to directly above or below (depending ongtwhether A is a low or high pivot) the A pivot and drawing a linegtgtfrom his point through the midpoint of the BC swinggtAre there different methods of drawing a Schiff MLgtI was too lazy to draw Schiff MLs by hand with the method yougtdescribed so Im sending my examples with the Dynamic Trader Schiff MLs -)gt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your program Schiff line procedure is fineits actually what Dr Andrews called a modified schiff ml and is onlyslightly different than the one I sent you initially The one you used is preferred by most course members Im sendingthe modified Schiff lesson and a chart along with this email The chart example shows how to use it with 0-34 pivots Regards Gordon

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Sliding Parallel LineDate Montag 13 Maumlrz 2000 005252

Hello TradersZone Heres one of the tools Dr Andrews used most often when entering exiting or reversing marketpositions Not many people know about this technique Regards Gordon The Sliding Parallel (SH) is drawn whenever prices cross an Andrews line and then move along itFor example if the bottom of a daily price bar range drops through a lower parallel line of apitchfork a new parallel line is then drawn from that low and extended to the right If the nextdays price bar drops through that sliding parallel line a sell signal is generated Whenever price action dictates a sliding parallel the next step is to draw a Warning Line Thewarning line is an additional parallel line that is an image extension of the original pitchforkchannels It serves as a warning that if prices penetrate the sliding parallel the next likely target isthe WL The attached chart of Avis illustrates these procedures Please try these on your own charts andsend me an example

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Sliding Parallel LineDate Dienstag 14 Maumlrz 2000 225737

Hello Gordon this is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning line RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 065606

At 31400 105700 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtthis is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning linegt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone Your chart of circuit city was a good example for this study I may have mentioned it earlier but DrAndrews used this technique on a regular basis The next part of this lesson covers another of hisfavorite tools the mini-median line pitchfork Here it is Regards Gordon The Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry and exit tools Though mostoften drawn using alternate closing prices alternate highs and lows can also be usedin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days is usually the maximumbetween pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or more back from P2 Dr Andrews used Mini-Median Line pitchforks for buy and sell signals whenever he expected areversal Some examples include a probable P5 or when prices are at a Warning Line ML MLHmajor ML extension or a sideways channel price target When prices cross the Mini-Median LineParallel (MMLH) a sliding parallel (SH) is used for order entry

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 231537

gtThe Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry andgtexit tools Though most often drawn using alternate closing pricesgtalternate highs and lows can also be usedgtin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days isgtusually the maximum between pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or moregtback from P2

Hello Gordon

wouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timingCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available whenDr Andrews was alive

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject intraday chartsDate Samstag 18 Maumlrz 2000 012400

At 31600 111500 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongtgtwouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsgtinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timinggtCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available when DrgtAndrews was alivegtgtRegardsgtTradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Youre absolutely correctintraday charts were not available when DrAndrews was a trader

Im reading between the lines here but if you plan to day-trade using the course techniques ie thepitchfork then I agree that the regular pitchfork would be more useful on intraday charts Otherwisewhipsaw would be a significant problem Please get back to me if I didnt address your questionbecause this is a very important technique The mini-median line pitchfork and sliding parallel showedup on most of Dr Andrews charts

Regards

Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re intraday chartsDate Dienstag 21 Maumlrz 2000 220322

Hello Gordon

You are right Im planning to daytrade SampP futures using the course techniques among other things

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 003408

Hi TradersZone Here are a couple Andrews techniques that will help anticipate the breakout direction of asideways channelThey work often enough to warrant keep handy Regards Gordon In an earlier lesson you were introduced to Dr Andrews sideways count You saw how frequentlythe sideways count method provided high probability price objectives after the breakout from theestablished channel took place In this segment of lesson 4 youll be shown 2 congestion area techniques that can help youdetermine the probable sideways channel price breakout direction Both rely on the use of pivots The first uses the pivot points that are circled on a sideways channel Dr Andrews observed thatwhenever a sideways channel results in at least 5 circle contacts the eventual price breakoutwould very often be in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle If circle 5 is at thetop of the channel for example the eventual price breakout would likely be to the upside If circle5 is at the bottom of the channel look for a downside breakout Dr Andrews noted that thistechnique can be subject to false breakouts but that such breakouts are usually followed shortlyafter with a confirmed breakout in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle Heemphasized that this study is best considered as a rule of thumb observation He viewed it as asupporting indicator for use with a short-term pitchfork as prices approached a channel line There are 2 charts attached that show how this works

The second technique in this part of lesson 4 deals with a sideways channelthat is building shortly after a P3 has been formed Dr Andrews noted thatwhenever that happened the probabilities were high that prices wouldbreakout in the same direction they were moving prior to the formation ofthe sideways channel The attached P3 to sideways example chart shows thisprocedure

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 205235

Hello Gordon here is my example for the 5 circle sideways count RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Lesson 5Date Montag 27 Maumlrz 2000 060731

At 32400 85200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my example for the 5 circle sideways countgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt gt Hi TradersZone Good example of the 5th circle tendency to predict the direction of a sideways breakout Any luckfinding a chart showing the P3 to sideways rule Im sending the first part of the next lesson This trendline method is a useful tool with all of DrAndrews course lines He used it all the time but especially when looking for confirmation of othercourse method trading signals Regards Gordon The Course Trendline__________________________________________________________ Next well discuss the trendline Seasoned traders agree that the trendline is one of their mostimportant tools No matter what kind of trading program or technique they use the trendline on achart is a must But one of the biggest mistakes made by amateurs and professionals alike isinconsistently drawing or defining the trendline Dr Andrews trendline procedure is simpleconsistent and accurate It works extremely well with the pivot count and with the pitchfork For an uptrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the lowest low up and to thehighest minor low point preceding the highest high The line must not pass through prices inbetween the two low points Extend the line(Attached chart of Brightpoint) For a downtrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the highest high point to thelowest minor high point preceding the lowest low so that it does not pass through prices inbetween the two high points Extend the line (Brightpoint chart) Thats all theres to it Its simple consistent and it works well with other Andrews lines It also

helps eliminate personal bias and haphazard analysis Practice drawing these trendlines on your own charts Send me any questions you might have andthen e-mail a chart of your choosing which shows at least two uptrend and two downtrend linesthat youve drawn_______________________________________________________________________

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Lesson 5Date Dienstag 28 Maumlrz 2000 120224

Hello Gordon here is my chart with trendlinesWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going above the trendline again should I draw a new trendline anddelete the old one Attached is another chart with the P3 to sideways rule I finally found an example for it RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Price failure techniqueDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081412

At 32800 120200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my chart with trendlinesgtWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going abovegtthe trendline again should I draw a new trendline and delete the oldgtone Hi TradersZone Take a look at the chart Im returningI added some lines for you to considerWith the course trendline once its broken a new one should be started Theres a technique thatties in with this coming up soon Meanwhile heres an important technique to work on It deals with those times when prices dontreach the ML Regards Gordon Dr Andrews Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P ofreversaland the ML the probability is that this price reversal will go further thanitdid on its approach toward the ML (Extract of original course material) A price failure very often indicates a sizeable reversal will take placeThepitchforks drawn on the chart of Home Depot illustrate the concept of pricefailure Dr Andrews routinely drew a new pitchfork on his chart after a newsignificant pivot had formed He knew that prices had a high probability ofreaching the new ML before stalling out or reversing If prices reversedbeforereaching the ML thereby forming a new pivot he termed it a price failureTheunderlying idea here is that Dr Andrews fully anticipated his median linewouldact as a price magnet To conclude that a price reversal resulted in a price failure Dr Andrewsused

these primary signalsa subsequent price penetration of a short-termmulti-pivotline andor a return of prices to and penetration of the parallel lineformed atpivot 3 of the pitchfork (The circles on the Home Depot chart denote theparallelline penetration signal To avoid clutter the mpl lines were not drawn) One possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart of ConsecoIncLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me a copy

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject ChartDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081800Attachments image002png

Hi TradersZone Forgot the chart Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Price failure techniqueDate Samstag 1 April 2000 201000

gtOne possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart ofgtConseco IncgtLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me agtcopy Hi Gordon here are my charts with price failures RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Mittwoch 5 April 2000 235624

Hi TradersZone Good price failure examples you sentany comments or questions about it Heres the next partanother old standby Dr Andrews kept handy Regards Gordon In this segment youll learn how to use the Fan line Technique To draw the fan lines youll apply the coursetrendline method which was introduced in an earlier lesson It might be well to emphasize that the practicalapplication of the course trendline method requires practice and experience both of which will serve youwell in this technique Dr Andrews used fan lines as an adjunct to his pitchfork sideways channel andactionreaction methods In the fan line study three trendlines are drawn from the original reversal pivot of the price correction understudy typically a P0 or a P5 Youll notice on the charts included with this study that each fan line is at aflatter angle than its predecessor When the third fan line is broken the rule is that the correction has endedand a new trend is under way Try this technique on some of your own charts and then please send me asample

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Donnerstag 6 April 2000 234315

Hi Gordon No I dont have any specific question about the price failure technique I guess the next likely target after a price failure wouldbe the warning line I have attached two charts with fan linesIs it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the third fan line is broken RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Next segmentDate Freitag 7 April 2000 003312

Hello TradersZone

Tuesday April 06 2000 114315 AM you wrote

TZgt Hi Gordon

TZgt No I dont have any specific question about the price failureTZgt technique I guess the next likely target after a price failureTZgt would be the warning line

TZgt I have attached two charts with fan linesTZgt Is it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the thirdTZgt fan line is broken

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Thats right the warning line is the next price target Additionalwarning lines can be drawn if needed but usually one will do it Ifprices go through the first warning line another can be drawn butmost likely a new pitchfork could be drawn instead which would bepreferable Helps stay current with recently formed pivots

When prices break through the third fan line a buy or sell signal isgiven Not sure what you mean by fourth target fan line Im a littledense today

Your chart work was goodthis is another handy tool for spotting thehigh probability of a price reversal or trend change

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject The Gap TradeDate Freitag 7 April 2000 004858

Hello TradersZone This trading signal doesnt show up very often but past observations have shown that its well worth watching for Dr Andrews placed a lot of emphasis on the importance of price gaps something many traders overlook This is one of his gap uses Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom The Gap Trading Technique Price gaps can be a dilemma for many traders The general rule denoting market strength or weakness after ahigh volume gap often comes up short after the initial reaction is over Many gappers simply run out ofsteam A high volume gap in itself seems to offer precious little evidence that a profitable move is about toget under way Dr Andrews used price gaps somewhat differently than others He counted a gap as 2 pivots Youll see howthat works in the following technique which uses a gap to arrive at a price level for a buy or sell order Using short-term daily price pivots label the pivot immediately preceding the gap as p0 Count the gap as 2pivots labeling it p1 amp p2 After p3 has formed and prices reverse towards a short-term p4 draw a horizontalline 2 price tics or more (individual preference)to the right of p3 Enter the market only if prices reach orpenetrate that line within a few days after reversing from p4 Please look over your own charts to see if you can find places where the gap trade technique could have beenused Send me a sample when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 001925

Hello Gordon this is my chart with a gap trade RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 065538

Hello TradersZone Thursday April 08 2000 121925 PM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt this is my chart with a gap trade TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Good examplethe gap trade technique shines when an issue in at or near a P5 Similar to the one on thechart you sent Heres another trading signal tool Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Dr Andrews used several techniques which helped him determine whether a P5 was near at hand Youllrecall that he observed most price moves ended or had a significant reversal at a P5 This technique uses alternate closing prices after a P4 has been formed As with many of his studies thenumber 5 is used The chart accompanying this segment shows that there were 5 alternate closes to thedownside after P4 was put in Dr Andrews noted that whenever 5 or more alternate closes followed a P4 theprobabilities were high that a P5 was near at hand An added feature to this chart study is the sideways channel Notice how the 2nd target price and the 5thalternate close nearly coincide

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 12 April 2000 200730

Hello Gordon This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 13 April 2000 082418

Monday April 12 2000 80730 AM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hello TradersZone Good chart example of this Andrews toolanother of his very unusual observations that workmore often than not Heres the final part of this lesson Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom In this trendline method Dr Andrews once again used the number 5 as the basis for locating aprobable reversal area He found this technique to be especially useful whenever a clear orobvious pivot count didnt show up onthe price move under study Trendlines are drawn using the course trendline method When the 5th trendline is broken theprobability is high that the trend under study has ended A mini-median line pitchfork andorsliding parallel could be used for pricing a trading order The accompanying chart of Compaq Computer is an example of how the trendline study could beused The pivot count beginning at the October low is difficult to nail down There were severalsmall areas of congestion but no sizeable corrections while prices advanced The count wasunclear By following the price action using the course trendline technique however the traderwould have been alerted to the possibility of a change of trend when the 5th trendline was brokenin early February Try this technique on your own charts When youre ready please send me an example of yourstudy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 19 April 2000 124108

Hello Gordon this is my example with 5 trendlines RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[6] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 20 April 2000 012726

Monday April 19 2000 124108 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt this is my example with 5 trendlines

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Good example of the 5 TL technique Always reminds me of how the fairly simple tools often do a better job than manyof the sophisticated studies out there

That was the last part of lesson 5 Lesson 6 attached is made in one mailing Youll find Dr Andrews trading rules alongwith a wrap-up review which uses several of his rules You might have questions about some of the rules so feel free tosend them as they arise

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Dr Andrews had an abbreviated set of trading rules on several index cards that he carried around with him in his shirtpocket He said every trading day turned up something new on his charts and by having his rules in his pocket he wasreminded of the need for a methodical approach to his analysis Quite a comment coming from the man who wrote therule book

In this the final lesson of the course Dr Andrews original trading rules and observations are presented Lets work witha few of them at this point

Using charts of issues you follow please send me an example that illustrates your interpretation of each of the followingrules

Rule 4 Anticipating major Ps

Rule 7 Penetration rule

Rule 8 Price failure rule

Rule 11 1-ML23 AR Centerline

Rule 12 Sliding Parallel rule

Rule 15 Mini-median line parallel to buy or sell

Feel free to include any other course techniques you choose to apply but please include examples of the above as aminimum Use more than one technique on a chart if your analysis supports it Send as many charts as you like alongwith your questionscomments

Lesson 6 - Dr Andrews Trading Rules

This lesson covers course rules and significant observations as taught by Dr Andrews in his original trading course Therules are those that he used in his own trading and are provided to serve as a checklist for use with the course tradingmethods youve learned

Rule 1 Where prices are always headed Rule You course members are among the fortunate few to be able to draw astraight line and know that prices are headed toward that ML Very few investors have ever applied this ML principle ofstatistics to price fluctuations and weve never seen this in any books on investment You are among the very few who

know that prices are always headed toward the newest ML

Rule 2 The Rule of coming opposites applies all through life In the bible we find Blessed at they that mourn for theyshall be comforted As investors we know that any losses can be recovered by using course methods

Rule 3 Turn your mind about or Rethink for all good is at hand We should mentally prepare ourselves for thecoming reversal in prices and other affairs Heres one way for example that you course members who know the MLrules can use When prices are skyrocketing upward we do this preparation by thinking If prices pivoted here today atthis price Id draw a new ML bisecting the distance between todays price and the price from which the rise started Andwe know now that if this is a Major Pivot prices will fall rapidly to this new ML Profits from such drops are big and quick

Rule 4 Rule for anticipating major Ps If during congestion or after a rally or decline you can count four previous Psthe fifth one is highly probable to be the one from which a new trend starts

Rule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can make a quick big profit is to watch for the EPformations

Rule 6 The other reversal rule is that prices tend to reverse at or near any ML as well as at any extension of each MLAnd also at any MLH or extensions of MLH

Rule 7 The Penetration Rule is that whenever prices gap past or plunge through any ML there is a high probability thatthey will quickly return to it temporarily and then resume the trend they had before they gapped or plunged through

Rule 8 Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P of reversal and the MLthe probability is that this price reversal will go further than it did on its approach toward the ML

Rule 9 The price failure rule is negated when the next price trend is also a failure in reaching the ML This is almostinvariably a signal of a big fast move in the direction indicated by this last space Rule 10 When alternate median lines of comparable length slope in the same direction the trend is firm and rapidprice changes take place

Rule 11 When 1-ML23 is exactly reached at P4 it can be used as a highly reliable centerline for the AR method

Rule 12 Frequently after crossing a lower MLH prices continue to rise along the MLH Since the crossing of the MLHsignals a further drop is likely use a sliding parallel along the bottom of the most recent crossing If prices drop past thatsliding parallel line a sell signal is generated

Rule 13 MLs between P2 and P3 can start from a nearby or a remote P1 since prices tend to reverse at each of theseMLs Try several such P2-P3 MLs to discover the best fit

Rule 14 The distance of each MLH from its ML is the distance of the next warning line Use these warning lineswhenever a SH has signalled a buy or sell

Rule 15 Use the MMLH as a buy or sell signal when you expect a reversal because of a P5 Also when prices are at aWL ML extension line or where course lines converge or intersect

Rule 16 Converging lines that meet prices have shown the highest probability of a trend reversal

Rule 17 Two to four days is usually the maximum between P2 and P3 for a MML P1 can be a day or so back from P2and 3

Rule 18 The most reliable ActionReaction centerlines seem to be MPL 2P line 2 Gap line peak to low or low to peak

Rule 19 When prices pass through R lines look for a pull back and then a continuing move in the direction of the passthrough

Rule 20 Use gaps as Action lines from the centerline

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 003755

Hello Gordonhere is my example for Rule 4 And I have a question What are EP formations gtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 021242

Tuesday May 04 2000 123755 PM you wrote TZgt Hello GordonTZgt here is my example for Rule 4 TZgt And I have a question What are EP formations gtgtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegtgta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hi TradersZone Good use of the warning linesalso the EP material is part of lesson 4 Rather than go backthrough the files to see when (or if) it was sent Im sending it along with this reply Glad youbrought it up Best RegardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Tuesday May 04 2000208 PM Dr Andrews used a fairly common price chart formation that he found useful at probable P5market tops and bottoms The formation generally called a wedge or pennant by chartists isreferred to in Dr Andrews trading course as the Expanding Pivot (EP) One of the few chartformations used in the course he regarded it as among the most dependable indications that amarket top was forming Closely related to the EP is his Inverted Expanding Pivot (IEP) which henoted could often be observed at market bottoms Both are regarded as intermediate and long-term reversal indicators Dr Andrews found that both formations were most reliable when they occurred after a sharprapid price move coinciding with the formation of a probable P5 He said it wasnt unusual for theformation to take several weeks to complete and that conservative traders could best avoid thewhipsaw associated with congestion patterns by trading only in the direction of the probable price

break out of the EP or IEP formation The attached charts illustrate these formations Please look over your own charts for an example ofthe EP and IEP and send me a copy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 232127

Hello Gordon Thank you for the lesson with the EP material I couldnt find it in any previous emailHere is my example for Rule 7 RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Rule 4Date Samstag 6 Mai 2000 080827

Wednesday May 05 2000 112127 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt Thank you for the lesson with the EP materialTZgt I couldnt find it in any previous emailTZgt Here is my example for Rule 7

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hi TradersZone

Glad you mentioned it earlierexcept for the EP IEP and hissideways channel Dr Andrews didnt have much to say about chartpatterns and formations These are good ones to use though

Your study of the penetration rule was good Later

Best Regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Wednesday May 05 2000801 PM

Page 8: Pitchfork primer

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Pivots and pitchforksDate Donnerstag 3 Februar 2000 154548

I have attached the CNC chartWhen the price moves below the P0-34 ML before making a P5 low is the lower parallel line thenext likely level where the P5 should occurOn the CNC chart the price closes above the P0-34 ML the day after breaking the ML Is that aconfirmation that the P5 low has been made

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Good QuestionsDate Freitag 4 Februar 2000 063320

At 2300 34500 PM you wrotegtI have attached the CNC chart gtWhen the price moves below the P0-34 ML before making a P5 low is thegtlower parallel line the next likely level where the P5 should occur (Thats right TradersZone The function of parallel lines is to provide the next level of support orresistance for those times when prices do not stop or reverse at the ML Dr Andrews by the waylooked for prices to reverse at any ML and form a new pivot in the process)gtOn the CNC chart the price closes above the P0-34 ML the day aftergtbreaking the ML Is that a confirmation that the P5 low has been made (That was a good sign but too close to call (imho) Please see chart for TL use as a confirmationsignal) Dr Andrews used several techniques to help him deal with probable reversalsSome are special situation type methods and others are used in conjunction with the pivot countpitchfork lines or ActionReaction lines Well be covering those rules in the last part of the course Im sending another chart for you to study and work on Please identify the main pivots in thedown move that started in April and also draw at least 2 pitchforksWhen ready please return to me Regards Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Good QuestionsDate Freitag 4 Februar 2000 191043

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Median Line TechniqueDate Sonntag 6 Februar 2000 010735

Hello TradersZone Nice work on the charts you returned Everything was by the book It appears that you have theprocedures well in hand Heres the final portion of lesson 1 The concept is basic but it does the important job of helping atrader stay on the right side of the market Will you be continuing the course Regards Gordon The first lines Dr Andrews drew on a new chart were the long-term and intermediate-term medianlines After identifying the significant pivots he drew his first median line beginning with P0-12and worked forward on the chart using each subsequent set of 3 pivots Each ML served to vectorpricesacting as a magnet if you will that drew prices towards it He said that prices will head forthe new ML over 80 of the time Parallel lines are not drawn when using this procedure Its prime function is to determine thedirection and price level of the new ML Recall that Dr Andrews anticipated a price reversal at eachnew ML The attached chart of LPX illustrates this technique Try this on some of your own charts and thenplease send me an example

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Median Line TechniqueDate Montag 7 Februar 2000 192718

I found a chart with 9 pivots I hope it doesnt matterIs it necessary that the move is made of swings with higher highs and higher lows in an uptrend (lower highs and lower lows in adowntrend)For example in the attached chart the point P6 is lower than P4 and P7 is lower than P5Another question For how long are median lines validI noticed that the P2-34 ML from my chart served as support and resistance two years later in 1998 (see attached chartLOW2GIF) but on the other hand I dont want to clutter my charts with too many lines from the past I would like to continue the course to the end I will send the money for the remaining 5 lessons tomorrow Did you receive myfirst payment yet RegardsTradersZone

LOW2GIF

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneDate Mittwoch 9 Februar 2000 054710

At 2700 72700 PM you wrotegtI found a chart with 9 pivots I hope it doesnt mattergtIs it necessary that the move is made of swings with higher highs andgthigher lows in an uptrend (lower highs and lower lows in a downtrend)gtFor example in the attached chart the point P6 is lower than P4 and P7gtis lower than P5 ( When using this ML technique TradersZone the main object is to note the price level of the newML for that is the next probable reversal area The pivots need not be in Elliott formation havingswings as you noted above Your ML procedure by the way was correct I noticed how oftenprices headed for each new ML and then reversedLater in the course well see how Dr Andrews handled those times when prices reversed beforereaching the ML area)gtAnother question For how long are median lines validgtI noticed that the P2-34 ML from my chart served as support andgtresistance two years later in 1998 (see attached chart LOW2GIF) butgton the other hand I dont want to clutter my charts with too many lines from the past (One of the interesting things about Dr Andrews lines is that no matter how far out his lines areprojected they will continue to cause prices to stall-out or reverse when reached Also wheneverseveral of his lines intersect there is a very high probability of a price reversal whether pricesconverge at the intersection or are some distancegtfrom it The probability is higher though when prices are at thegtintersecting lines A linethat has in the past provided frequent support or resistance is probably a pretty good line tokeep on your chart Youre right though charts seem to get cluttered up veryquickly)gt gtI would like to continue the course to the end I will send the moneygtfor the remaining 5 lessons tomorrow Did you receive my first payment yet (Glad to hear youre going to continue to the end Thank you for the prepayment Your first checkhasnt arrived yet will let you know when it does) Meanwhile heres the first segment of the next lesson Regards Gordon

In this lesson youll be introduced to Dr Andrews sideways count The sideways count was hisold reliable a tool that worked so well so often that it was one of the very first studies heperformed on his charts The sideways count gave him a reliable gauge that told him ahead of timehow far a stock or commodity was likely to move Sounds too good to be true perhaps but as youwork with the sideways count youll discover for yourself how often the projected price targetsare reachedoften within tics Markets frequently spend a lot of time in congestion Heres Dr Andrews way to use thatcongestion to our advantage Looking at the Brightpoint attachment please note the channel lines starting in January Youll seethat most of the pivots from Jan-May were within this channel Now look at where Ive placedcircles At each point where prices touched a channel line and then reversed direction and went allthe way back to touch the opposite channel line a circle was drawn Put another way if pricestouch one channel line but then dont go all the way back to touch the opposite channel line acircle is not drawn At first glance this technique can often be unclear so well pause here for some chart work Pleasee-mail me a chart that shows where youve drawn channel lines to identify sideways price actionand also where youve placed the channel line circles

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject ReDate Mittwoch 9 Februar 2000 184837

gtAt each point where prices touched a channel line and then reversedgtdirection and went all the way back to touch the opposite channel linegta circle was drawn Put another way if prices touch one channel linegtbut then dont go all the way back to touch the opposite channel linegta circle is not drawn Shouldnt the last circle on your Brightpoint chart be left outThe price didnt return to the opposite channel line after that day This is my chart

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Thanks for the questionDate Mittwoch 9 Februar 2000 231437

At 2900 64800 PM you wrotegtShouldnt the last circle on your Brightpoint chart be left outgtThe price didnt return to the opposite channel line after that day Hello TradersZone The last circle is appropriate but I can see where the wording in the explanation is confusing Ihave changed that paragraph to read Looking at the Brightpoint attachment please note the channel lines starting in January Youll seethat most of the pivots from Jan- May were within this channel Now look at where the circles wereplaced on the channel lines They are in alternate sequenceNote that each circle was drawn only after prices had first been at the opposite channel lineTheBrightpoint chart illustrates this procedure Thanks for pointing this out TradersZone If the wording is still unclear to you Id appreciate yourinput Meanwhile heres the next segment of this lessonRegards Gordon Well continue to use the Brightpoint chart for this portion of the sideways count study To reviewthe pattern were looking for should be a recent rectangular shaped sideways trading range thatcontains most if not all of the congestion price action Take a look at the attached chart and notehow well defined the price channel for Brightpoint is Youll probably notice that it is deeper thanthe channel you studied on the chart in the preceding segment This comparison is made toillustrate that while the first channel example covers a longer period of time the second includesall of the price ranges and is the preferred method Please look at where the circles were placed on the channel lines To review a new circle is drawnonly after prices have first been at the opposite channel line Recall that circles must be inalternate sequence eg upper linelower lineupper linelower line etc one circle at a time Note that the price range within the channel is $4 34 (High 21 12 Low 16 34) There were twocircles drawn on the lower line of our sideways channel before prices broke down Using thatinformation our next step will be to use some simple arithmetic in order to come up with twodownside price targets Well cover that procedure in the next segment Please let me know whenyou are ready to continue

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Sideways countDate Mittwoch 9 Februar 2000 232315Attachments image001png

Hi TradersZone Im returning your chartplease note comments GordonRegards Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Thanks for the questionDate Donnerstag 10 Februar 2000 233059

Hello Gordonthank you Im ready for the next lesson

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next partDate Donnerstag 10 Februar 2000 235613

At 21000 113000 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongtthank you Im ready for the next lessongt gt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt gt gt TradersZoneI sent this yesterday but will re-send It was part of my reply to your questionregarding the circle I dont have a record of your return chartwork for this part If its a duplicatesend sorry Regards Gordon Well continue to use the Brightpoint chart for this portion of the sideways count study To reviewthe pattern were looking for should be a recent rectangular shaped sideways trading range thatcontains most if not all of the congestion price action Take a look at the attached chart and notehow well defined the price channel for Brightpoint is Youll probably notice that it is deeper thanthe channel you studied on the chart in the preceding segment This comparison is made toillustrate that while the first channel example covers a longer period of time the second includesall of the price ranges and is the preferred method Please look at where the circles were placed on the channel lines To review a new circle is drawnonly after prices have first been at the opposite channel line Recall that circles must be inalternate sequence eg upper linelower lineupper linelower line etc one circle at a time Note that the price range within the channel is $4 34 (High 21 12 Low 16 34) There were twocircles drawn on the lower line of our sideways channel before prices broke down Using thatinformation our next step will be to use some simple arithmetic in order to come up with twodownside price targets Well cover that procedure in the next segment Please let me know whenyou are ready to continue

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next partDate Freitag 11 Februar 2000 234113

I think the placement of the circles is clear to me nowI have attached another chart with a sideways count RegardsTradersZone gtTradersZoneI sent this yesterday but will re-send It was part ofgtmy reply to your question regarding the circle I dont have a recordgtof your return chartwork for this part If its a duplicate send sorry

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject SidewaysDate Montag 14 Februar 2000 054227

At 21100 114100 PM you wrotegtI think the placement of the circles is clear to me nowgtI have attached another chart with a sideways countgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone Your chart was on target Looks like youre ready for the next part Here it is Regards Gordon During this segment youll learn how to arrive at two price targets using Dr Andrews sidewayscount Simple arithmetic is all thats required once the sideways channel and circles are in place Well continue to use the Brightpoint chart which is attached Note that Brightpoint fell throughthe bottom channel line at the point where we placed our second circle so figuring out possibledownside targets would have been in order at that time Heres how thats done 1 Determine the price range of the channel In this case the range is $4 34 (21 12 - 16 34) 2 Count the number of circles on the lower channel line The lower line is used in this casebecause thats the line that didnt hold Prices went through it returned to check it out and thencontinued lower 3 Multiply the price range of the channel times the number of circles drawn on the lower channelline (4 34 x 2 = 9 12) 4 Subtract that figure from the upper channel line priceThe result becomes downside price target 1 (21 12 - 9 12 = 12) 5 Next subtract that same figure from the price at the lower channel line Thats price target 2(16 34 - 9 12 = 7 14)

In the case of an upside channel breakout the procedure is reversed Please draw a few channelsand figure out some downside targets on your own charts When youre ready send me two orthree examples of your work As always send your questions as they arise

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re SidewaysDate Montag 14 Februar 2000 134314

Here are my examples I couldnt find enough charts with downside targets so I included some charts with upside targets Do the channel lines always have to be horizontal When I look at my charts I find more channels with an upward slope or adownward slope RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Sideways channelsDate Freitag 18 Februar 2000 005531

At 21400 14300 PM you wrotegtHere are my examples I couldnt find enough charts with downsidegttargets so I included some charts with upside targetsgt gtDo the channel lines always have to be horizontal When I look at mygtcharts I find more channels with an upward slope or a downward slopegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone The sideways method can be used with either up or down Sorry didnt mean to imply that only downsidetargets should be found Ill reword that portion of the lesson Thanks for mentioning it Dr Andrews sideways method works only on horizontal channels Others have mentioned the slopingchannels also and have wondered if there is some method to use with them I know of none Ive askedother course members for their ideas on how to approach this problem but so far no one has come up with amethod I would think that there should be a solution but have not personally taken the time to research itIf some method could be found that works as often as the Andrews sideways count it would be a significantfind The Andrews sideways count doesnt always hit the targets as you saw on your chart of Bausch amp Lomb Itworks more often than not though and it still amazes me at how often prices reach the targets Heres an observation to keep in mind Quite often after the first target is reached prices will reverse andhead back towards the channel At times youll note that they return inside the channel They will thenreverse again and head back towards the second price target These reversals happen frequently and presenttrading opportunities Im including the final segment of this lesson Regards Gordon So far in the course youve learned about Dr Andrews pivot counting procedure pitchfork and sidewayscount Youve noticed by now how often prices change trend at a P5 Youve seen how the 0-34 ML methodcan help locate the probable P5 area Youve seen how often price targets are met using the sideways countmethod The tendency for prices to reverse at a median line should be recognized as a high probability eventas well In coming lessons youll be shown how Dr Andrews used these and other high probability events totrade the stock and commodity markets The tools and techniques he used will help you put the finishingtouches on your market analysis using Andrews lines

Before continuing on to the next lesson lets briefly review what has so far been covered The attached chartprovides an opportunity to illustrate the methods referred to above Please draw these methods on thechart and return to me

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Sideways channelsDate Montag 21 Februar 2000 193743

gtBefore continuing on to the next lesson lets briefly review what hasgtso far been covered The attached chart provides an opportunity togtillustrate the methods referred to above Please draw these methods ongtthe chart and return to me Hello Gordonhere is my chart RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next lesson attachedDate Mittwoch 23 Februar 2000 014539

At 22100 73700 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongthere is my chartgt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Good job on the pivots sideways count and pitchforkLooks like youre ready to move on to the next part It wont be long and things will begin to fall inplace Regards Gordon Lesson 4 continued In one of his course letters Dr Andrews wrote The Law of Physics stated by Newton that Actionand Reaction are equal and opposite was first applied to prices by your Course Directors friendthe late Roger Babson who attributed his earnings of several million dollars to this law Beginning with this segment of lesson four and continuing in lesson five youll learn how to drawand apply the ActionReaction trading method as taught by Dr Andrews in his trading course The AR method requires a centerline or CL from which to start The CL can be any of thefollowing - MPL - ML - MLH - 2P line - 2 Gap line - Peak to low line - Low to peak lineThese are the primary lines that Dr Andrews used He stressed that some pencil work and a goodeyeball was needed in order to find the best fitting CL As with most other chart lines somework better than others The task is to find the best fit as he put it You will be shown examples of

each of the above CLs in this lesson and the next Determining which of the above listed lines to use as the CL is the first step in the ActionReactionmethod The solution often presents itself With a little practice a quick scan of the chart understudy will be all thats needed to spot the most likely CL Well begin with the attached chart Notethe CL drawn In this example a MPL (multi-pivot line) was used as the CL A MPL is a straightline that connects three or more consecutive pivots without passing through prices Theconnecting line is then extended Ive circled the three pivots that form the MPL on the chartThere are several other places on our chart where a MPL CL can be drawn Please bear in mindthat this is just the first step of the process Identification of likely CLs is all were after here Seeif you can locate two more then draw them in and send the chart back to me Well take up fromthere

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next lesson attachedDate Mittwoch 23 Februar 2000 212304

gtLesson 4 continuedgt gtIn one of his course letters Dr Andrews wrote The Law of Physicsgtstated by Newton that Action and Reaction are equal and opposite wasgtfirst applied to prices by your Course Directors friend the lategtRoger Babson who attributed his earnings of several million dollars to this lawgt gtBeginning with this segment of lesson four and continuing in lessongtfive youll learn how to draw and apply the ActionReaction tradinggtmethod as taught by Dr Andrews in his trading coursegt gtThe AR method requires a centerline or CL from which to startgtThe CL can be any of the followinggt - MPLgt - MLgt - MLHgt - 2P linegt - 2 Gap linegt - Peak to low linegt - Low to peak line Hello Gordon2P line 2 Gap line Peak to low line Low to peak line ndash actually I dont know what these lines areAre they discussed in Lesson 3 I believe you havenrsquot sent me this lesson yetAnyway I found two more MPLs on the Novellus Chart and drew them in RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Lesson 3Date Mittwoch 23 Februar 2000 235958

At 22300 92300 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt2P line 2 Gap line Peak to low line Low to peak line - actually I dont knowgtwhat these lines are Are they discussed in Lesson 3 I believe you didntgtsent me this lesson yetgtAnyway I found two more MPLs on the Novellus Chart and drew them ingt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone My apologiesI sent you an outdated version of the lesson Thanks for letting me know Musthave been my bedtime Heres the correct version Regards Gordon Lesson 3 In one of his course letters Dr Andrews wrote The Law of Physics stated by Newton that Actionand Reaction are equal and opposite was first applied to prices by your Course Directors friendthe late Roger Babson who attributed his earnings of several million dollars to this law In this lesson youll be introduced to the ActionReaction trading method as taught by Dr Andrewsin his trading course The AR method requires a centerline or CL from which to start The CL can be any of thefollowing - MPL Multi-pivot line A line drawn across 3 or more pivots - ML Median line The middle line of the pitchfork - MLH Median line parallel Either parallel line of the pitchfork - 2P line A line drawn across 2 pivots - 2 Gap line A line drawn connecting 2 gaps without touching prices in between - Peak to low line A line drawn connecting the high and low of a price leg

- Low to peak line A line drawn connecting the low and high of a price leg These are the primary lines that Dr Andrews used He stressed that some pencil work and a goodeyeball was needed in order to find the best fitting CL As with most other chart lines somework better than others The task is to find the best fit as he put it You will be shown examples ofeach of the above CLs Determining which of the above listed lines to use as the CL is the first step in the ActionReactionmethod With practice a quick view of the chart under study will be all thats needed to spot themost likely CL Youll be shown later how to experiment with possible combinations in order tofind the centerline that is most in tune with the market under study Well begin with the attached chart Note the CL drawn In this example a MPL (multi-pivot line)was used as the CL A MPL is a straight line that connects three or more consecutive pivotswithout passing through prices The connecting line is then extended Ive circled the three pivotsthat form the MPL on the chart There are several other places on our chart where a MPL CL canbe drawn Please bear in mind that this is just the first step of the process Identification of likelyCLs is all were after here See if you can locate two more then draw them in and send the chartback to me

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Donnerstag 24 Februar 2000 025105

At 22300 92300 PM you wroteI found two more MPLs on the Novellus Chart and drew them ingt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your mpls were correct This next segment shows the purpose of the centerline and how it isused Your payment in full arrived today TradersZone Thank you Regards Gordon Lesson 3 continued Please refer to the attached chart of Novellus The line drawn connecting the 3 circled pivots is amulti-pivot line (MPL) and represents the centerline (CL) well be using in this example Recall inthe previous segment that several types of centerlines are possible The choice is determined byexperimenting with the potential combinations on the chart under study Its best to try to locate acenterline somewhere close to the middle of the price chart in order to have sufficient past andforward data to use with the study This will become clear as you work with the method Once the centerline is drawn the next step is to locate a previous low or high pivot point to use fordrawing an action line Dr Andrews observed that the low pivot points often seem to work bestbut that either could be used In our example a line starting at the previous significant low wasdrawn parallel to the CL It is labeled A-1 (Action line 1) because it represents the first actionline Dr Andrews called it an action line because it was drawn as a result of a previous pivot (pricereversal) that had taken place Next a parallel line was drawn to the right of the CL and labeled R-1 Notice that it is the same distance from the CL as the corresponding A-1 line It is labeled R-1because it represents the first reaction line a line where prices are likely to stop or reverseNotice how prices reacted at the R-1 line in early 98 That serves as an indication that thecenterline chosen for this study should be a good one to use Not all reaction lines cause such aclear reversal as the R1 on this chart but many do Thats why its important to experiment withvarious centerline possibilities in order to find action lines that produce reaction lines which createthe greatest number of pivots or price stall-outs This experimentation is often quite time

consuming but experience has shown that it is time well spent When a centerline is found that isin tune with the price action of the issue under study it can be a highly effective tool for use inlocating probable reversal areas When combined with pitchfork lines the AR method can pinpointpotential reversal areas that are generally not recognized as such by others Dr Andrewstechniques for using the pitchfork and AR lines together are covered in later lessons In coming segments well study other lines that Dr Andrews used for his centerlines In themeantime experiment with the multi-pivot centerline on your own charts Then please send mean example of your work along with any questions you may have

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Freitag 25 Februar 2000 211356

gtIn the meantime experiment with the multi-pivot centerline on your owngtcharts Then please send me an example of your work along with anygtquestions you may have Hello Gordon I was wondering how many ActionReaction lines could be drawn on a chart On my attached chart I found at least 6 parallellines which had a significant meaning for the price RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject AR linesDate Montag 28 Februar 2000 080128

gtHello Gordongt gtI was wondering how many ActionReaction lines could be drawn on agtchart On my attached chart I found at least 6 parallel lines which hadgta significant meaning for the pricegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hi TradersZone Theres no set number of lines that can be drawnactually the more you can find the betterFinding a good centerline is the key And once you find lines that work such as you did anynumber of parallel lines can be drawn You are doing exactly what Dr Andrews didtaking thetime and effort to find the best fitting sets of lines Each chart has them and each chart is differentas Im sure youve found Nice work Heres the next part Regards Gordon Lesson 3 continued One of Dr Andrews favorite techniques dealt with gapsan often times perplexing price event formany traders His observations over the years suggested to him that while gaps show upfrequently on many price charts few traders have a method for including them as an integral partof their chart analysis Thats not surprising since not much has been published about how toapproach the use of gaps in a trading method Dr Andrews however found several ways to putprice gaps to good use An ActionReaction centerline which uses gaps as its basis is one suchmethod Please refer to the attached chart of Cendant Youll see that a centerline was drawn which passedthrough the July gap Note that it also came in contact with several pivots thereby qualifying as agapmulti-pivot centerline It is drawn by starting at the April low pivot and extending a line acrossand through the gap in mid-July It subsequently touches two additional high pivots Dr Andrews counted each gap as two pivots He noted that the more pivots a line touched the

stronger the line tended to be in the future Good reason then for using the July gap as the basisfor an ActionReaction study Our CL is labelled a gap-mpl-CL The May 98 high was used for the Action Line starting point A line was then drawn parallel to theCenterline as per ActionReaction procedure The corresponding Reaction Line was then drawn inIf this particular study had been drawn on Cendants chart right after the July gap was put in thepotential for prices to go all the way down to the Reaction Line might have seemed very slim at thetime Notice however that prices reached the Reaction Line in early September Youll see thishappen time and again as you work with the AR method The core of its effectiveness is a strongCL Please send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts of your choice

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re AR linesDate Montag 28 Februar 2000 155937

gtPlease send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts of yourgtchoice Hello Gordonhere are my examples RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject More on the ARDate Donnerstag 2 Maumlrz 2000 071158

At 22800 35900 PM you wrotegtgtPlease send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts ofgtgtyour choicegt gtHello Gordongthere are my examplesgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone You picked some good examples to use for your AR study Both showed the potential power of thismethod Takes time and lots of chart study sometimes to find the best set of lines but the rewardscan be many Heres something else to look at Regards Gordon The ActionReaction technique requires a strong centerline from which to begin The key todeciding which set of pivots to use for the centerline is found through experimenting with thevarious configurations visible on the chart under study The centerline might be a series of gapspivots an existing median line or any of Dr Andrews lines The task is to search for that centerlinewhich shows the greatest potential for projecting price reversal areas Dr Andrews did that byfinding a likely centerline near the middle of his price chart That allowed him to use any of theprevious pivots for his action lines By experimenting he found reaction lines that did the best jobof pegging reversal areas at data points located forward of the centerline Reaction lines are equal and opposite of the action lines and serve to project price levels at whicha reversal can be expected That is why the task of seeking out the best centerline is so importantDr Andrews reasoned that a series of reaction lines which have pegged price reversals in the pastis likely to continue to be in tune with current and future market price action Having severalprevious pivots to use as anchors for drawing action lines is thus essential The attached chart of Lattice illustrates this concept Please bear in mind that the gapmplcenterline is not the only centerline one could use on this chart You might want to study the chartfor other AR possibilities Try a peak-to-peak CL or a multi-pivot CL Send me your studies along

with any questions

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re More on the ARDate Samstag 4 Maumlrz 2000 002521

gtThe attached chart of Lattice illustrates this conceptgtPlease bear in mind that the gapmpl centerline is not the onlygtcenterline one could use on this chartgtYou might want to study the chart for other AR possibilitiesgtTry a peak-to-peak CL or a multi-pivot CL Send me your studiesgtalong with any questions Hello Gordonhere is my chart RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Peak to peak clDate Sonntag 5 Maumlrz 2000 064107

At 3400 122500 AM you wrotegtHello Gordongthere is my chartgt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Looks like you have the concept down Takes time and a lot of chart work to find the bestcenterline When the reaction lines dont seem to peg reversal areas chances are the centerline isnot the one that is best in tune with the price action of the issue under studyDespite the time required for this method it was one of Dr Andrews stand-bysAR lines could befound on most of his charts Im sending a chart with an example of a peak-to-peak CL Regards Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Peak to peak clDate Sonntag 5 Maumlrz 2000 171232

Hello Gordon I think the peak-to-peak CL on the last chart I sent to you was not really drawn from peak to peakIm sending another example RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next LessonDate Mittwoch 8 Maumlrz 2000 072526

At 3500 51200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtI think the peak-to-peak CL on the last chart I sent to you was notgtreally drawn from peak to peakgtIm sending another examplegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your peak to peak cl example was correctly drawn Thats a fairly simple approach but quite oftenthe peak to peak yields better reaction lines Heres the first part of the next lesson Regards Gordon Youll find times when prices dont quite reach the ML but instead drift alongside or away from itThe Schiff ML was designed to be used in place of the regular ML whenever that happens Suchprice action can be found at any place on a chart but most frequently occurs after a sharp sell-offor run-up of prices Dr Andrews also used the Schiff ML whenever his regular ML sloped at an unusually steep angleHe said it helped smooth out irregular price action such as that caused by unexpected earningsnews crop planting delays or poor growing conditions crop production reports etc Youll findnearly vertical price moves over a short period of time on many charts The Schiff ML method helpsput things back in perspective when that happens Well use the chart of Sterling Bancorp as an example of prices drifting away from the regular MLThat ML is drawn in black Prices didnt quite reach the ML but drifted alongside and eventuallyaway from it The Schiff ML and parallel lines are drawn in red Notice how prices were containedwithin the Schiff pitchfork until they finally broke down at the upper parallel line The procedure for drawing the Schiff ML is the same as for the regular ML except the startingpoint is located midway between the first 2 pivots youll be using The Sterling Bancorp chart

illustrates how this is done Dr Andrews also suggested using the Schiff ML whenever the regular ML method doesnt seem tobe in sync with price action Practice this procedure on your own charts and send a couple examples when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next LessonDate Donnerstag 9 Maumlrz 2000 001143

Hello Gordon in my charting software (Dynamic Trader) the Schiff ML is drawn by finding the midpoint of the line between pivot A and pivot Bmoving this point horizontally to directly above or below (depending on whether A is a low or high pivot) the A pivot anddrawing a line from his point through the midpoint of the BC swingAre there different methods of drawing a Schiff MLI was too lazy to draw Schiff MLs by hand with the method you described so Im sending my examples with the Dynamic TraderSchiff MLs -) RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject SchiffDate Samstag 11 Maumlrz 2000 070226

At 3900 121100 AM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtin my charting software (Dynamic Trader) the Schiff ML is drawn bygtfinding the midpoint of the line between pivot A and pivot B movinggtthis point horizontally to directly above or below (depending ongtwhether A is a low or high pivot) the A pivot and drawing a linegtgtfrom his point through the midpoint of the BC swinggtAre there different methods of drawing a Schiff MLgtI was too lazy to draw Schiff MLs by hand with the method yougtdescribed so Im sending my examples with the Dynamic Trader Schiff MLs -)gt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your program Schiff line procedure is fineits actually what Dr Andrews called a modified schiff ml and is onlyslightly different than the one I sent you initially The one you used is preferred by most course members Im sendingthe modified Schiff lesson and a chart along with this email The chart example shows how to use it with 0-34 pivots Regards Gordon

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Sliding Parallel LineDate Montag 13 Maumlrz 2000 005252

Hello TradersZone Heres one of the tools Dr Andrews used most often when entering exiting or reversing marketpositions Not many people know about this technique Regards Gordon The Sliding Parallel (SH) is drawn whenever prices cross an Andrews line and then move along itFor example if the bottom of a daily price bar range drops through a lower parallel line of apitchfork a new parallel line is then drawn from that low and extended to the right If the nextdays price bar drops through that sliding parallel line a sell signal is generated Whenever price action dictates a sliding parallel the next step is to draw a Warning Line Thewarning line is an additional parallel line that is an image extension of the original pitchforkchannels It serves as a warning that if prices penetrate the sliding parallel the next likely target isthe WL The attached chart of Avis illustrates these procedures Please try these on your own charts andsend me an example

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Sliding Parallel LineDate Dienstag 14 Maumlrz 2000 225737

Hello Gordon this is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning line RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 065606

At 31400 105700 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtthis is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning linegt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone Your chart of circuit city was a good example for this study I may have mentioned it earlier but DrAndrews used this technique on a regular basis The next part of this lesson covers another of hisfavorite tools the mini-median line pitchfork Here it is Regards Gordon The Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry and exit tools Though mostoften drawn using alternate closing prices alternate highs and lows can also be usedin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days is usually the maximumbetween pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or more back from P2 Dr Andrews used Mini-Median Line pitchforks for buy and sell signals whenever he expected areversal Some examples include a probable P5 or when prices are at a Warning Line ML MLHmajor ML extension or a sideways channel price target When prices cross the Mini-Median LineParallel (MMLH) a sliding parallel (SH) is used for order entry

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 231537

gtThe Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry andgtexit tools Though most often drawn using alternate closing pricesgtalternate highs and lows can also be usedgtin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days isgtusually the maximum between pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or moregtback from P2

Hello Gordon

wouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timingCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available whenDr Andrews was alive

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject intraday chartsDate Samstag 18 Maumlrz 2000 012400

At 31600 111500 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongtgtwouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsgtinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timinggtCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available when DrgtAndrews was alivegtgtRegardsgtTradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Youre absolutely correctintraday charts were not available when DrAndrews was a trader

Im reading between the lines here but if you plan to day-trade using the course techniques ie thepitchfork then I agree that the regular pitchfork would be more useful on intraday charts Otherwisewhipsaw would be a significant problem Please get back to me if I didnt address your questionbecause this is a very important technique The mini-median line pitchfork and sliding parallel showedup on most of Dr Andrews charts

Regards

Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re intraday chartsDate Dienstag 21 Maumlrz 2000 220322

Hello Gordon

You are right Im planning to daytrade SampP futures using the course techniques among other things

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 003408

Hi TradersZone Here are a couple Andrews techniques that will help anticipate the breakout direction of asideways channelThey work often enough to warrant keep handy Regards Gordon In an earlier lesson you were introduced to Dr Andrews sideways count You saw how frequentlythe sideways count method provided high probability price objectives after the breakout from theestablished channel took place In this segment of lesson 4 youll be shown 2 congestion area techniques that can help youdetermine the probable sideways channel price breakout direction Both rely on the use of pivots The first uses the pivot points that are circled on a sideways channel Dr Andrews observed thatwhenever a sideways channel results in at least 5 circle contacts the eventual price breakoutwould very often be in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle If circle 5 is at thetop of the channel for example the eventual price breakout would likely be to the upside If circle5 is at the bottom of the channel look for a downside breakout Dr Andrews noted that thistechnique can be subject to false breakouts but that such breakouts are usually followed shortlyafter with a confirmed breakout in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle Heemphasized that this study is best considered as a rule of thumb observation He viewed it as asupporting indicator for use with a short-term pitchfork as prices approached a channel line There are 2 charts attached that show how this works

The second technique in this part of lesson 4 deals with a sideways channelthat is building shortly after a P3 has been formed Dr Andrews noted thatwhenever that happened the probabilities were high that prices wouldbreakout in the same direction they were moving prior to the formation ofthe sideways channel The attached P3 to sideways example chart shows thisprocedure

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 205235

Hello Gordon here is my example for the 5 circle sideways count RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Lesson 5Date Montag 27 Maumlrz 2000 060731

At 32400 85200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my example for the 5 circle sideways countgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt gt Hi TradersZone Good example of the 5th circle tendency to predict the direction of a sideways breakout Any luckfinding a chart showing the P3 to sideways rule Im sending the first part of the next lesson This trendline method is a useful tool with all of DrAndrews course lines He used it all the time but especially when looking for confirmation of othercourse method trading signals Regards Gordon The Course Trendline__________________________________________________________ Next well discuss the trendline Seasoned traders agree that the trendline is one of their mostimportant tools No matter what kind of trading program or technique they use the trendline on achart is a must But one of the biggest mistakes made by amateurs and professionals alike isinconsistently drawing or defining the trendline Dr Andrews trendline procedure is simpleconsistent and accurate It works extremely well with the pivot count and with the pitchfork For an uptrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the lowest low up and to thehighest minor low point preceding the highest high The line must not pass through prices inbetween the two low points Extend the line(Attached chart of Brightpoint) For a downtrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the highest high point to thelowest minor high point preceding the lowest low so that it does not pass through prices inbetween the two high points Extend the line (Brightpoint chart) Thats all theres to it Its simple consistent and it works well with other Andrews lines It also

helps eliminate personal bias and haphazard analysis Practice drawing these trendlines on your own charts Send me any questions you might have andthen e-mail a chart of your choosing which shows at least two uptrend and two downtrend linesthat youve drawn_______________________________________________________________________

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Lesson 5Date Dienstag 28 Maumlrz 2000 120224

Hello Gordon here is my chart with trendlinesWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going above the trendline again should I draw a new trendline anddelete the old one Attached is another chart with the P3 to sideways rule I finally found an example for it RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Price failure techniqueDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081412

At 32800 120200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my chart with trendlinesgtWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going abovegtthe trendline again should I draw a new trendline and delete the oldgtone Hi TradersZone Take a look at the chart Im returningI added some lines for you to considerWith the course trendline once its broken a new one should be started Theres a technique thatties in with this coming up soon Meanwhile heres an important technique to work on It deals with those times when prices dontreach the ML Regards Gordon Dr Andrews Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P ofreversaland the ML the probability is that this price reversal will go further thanitdid on its approach toward the ML (Extract of original course material) A price failure very often indicates a sizeable reversal will take placeThepitchforks drawn on the chart of Home Depot illustrate the concept of pricefailure Dr Andrews routinely drew a new pitchfork on his chart after a newsignificant pivot had formed He knew that prices had a high probability ofreaching the new ML before stalling out or reversing If prices reversedbeforereaching the ML thereby forming a new pivot he termed it a price failureTheunderlying idea here is that Dr Andrews fully anticipated his median linewouldact as a price magnet To conclude that a price reversal resulted in a price failure Dr Andrewsused

these primary signalsa subsequent price penetration of a short-termmulti-pivotline andor a return of prices to and penetration of the parallel lineformed atpivot 3 of the pitchfork (The circles on the Home Depot chart denote theparallelline penetration signal To avoid clutter the mpl lines were not drawn) One possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart of ConsecoIncLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me a copy

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject ChartDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081800Attachments image002png

Hi TradersZone Forgot the chart Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Price failure techniqueDate Samstag 1 April 2000 201000

gtOne possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart ofgtConseco IncgtLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me agtcopy Hi Gordon here are my charts with price failures RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Mittwoch 5 April 2000 235624

Hi TradersZone Good price failure examples you sentany comments or questions about it Heres the next partanother old standby Dr Andrews kept handy Regards Gordon In this segment youll learn how to use the Fan line Technique To draw the fan lines youll apply the coursetrendline method which was introduced in an earlier lesson It might be well to emphasize that the practicalapplication of the course trendline method requires practice and experience both of which will serve youwell in this technique Dr Andrews used fan lines as an adjunct to his pitchfork sideways channel andactionreaction methods In the fan line study three trendlines are drawn from the original reversal pivot of the price correction understudy typically a P0 or a P5 Youll notice on the charts included with this study that each fan line is at aflatter angle than its predecessor When the third fan line is broken the rule is that the correction has endedand a new trend is under way Try this technique on some of your own charts and then please send me asample

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Donnerstag 6 April 2000 234315

Hi Gordon No I dont have any specific question about the price failure technique I guess the next likely target after a price failure wouldbe the warning line I have attached two charts with fan linesIs it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the third fan line is broken RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Next segmentDate Freitag 7 April 2000 003312

Hello TradersZone

Tuesday April 06 2000 114315 AM you wrote

TZgt Hi Gordon

TZgt No I dont have any specific question about the price failureTZgt technique I guess the next likely target after a price failureTZgt would be the warning line

TZgt I have attached two charts with fan linesTZgt Is it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the thirdTZgt fan line is broken

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Thats right the warning line is the next price target Additionalwarning lines can be drawn if needed but usually one will do it Ifprices go through the first warning line another can be drawn butmost likely a new pitchfork could be drawn instead which would bepreferable Helps stay current with recently formed pivots

When prices break through the third fan line a buy or sell signal isgiven Not sure what you mean by fourth target fan line Im a littledense today

Your chart work was goodthis is another handy tool for spotting thehigh probability of a price reversal or trend change

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject The Gap TradeDate Freitag 7 April 2000 004858

Hello TradersZone This trading signal doesnt show up very often but past observations have shown that its well worth watching for Dr Andrews placed a lot of emphasis on the importance of price gaps something many traders overlook This is one of his gap uses Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom The Gap Trading Technique Price gaps can be a dilemma for many traders The general rule denoting market strength or weakness after ahigh volume gap often comes up short after the initial reaction is over Many gappers simply run out ofsteam A high volume gap in itself seems to offer precious little evidence that a profitable move is about toget under way Dr Andrews used price gaps somewhat differently than others He counted a gap as 2 pivots Youll see howthat works in the following technique which uses a gap to arrive at a price level for a buy or sell order Using short-term daily price pivots label the pivot immediately preceding the gap as p0 Count the gap as 2pivots labeling it p1 amp p2 After p3 has formed and prices reverse towards a short-term p4 draw a horizontalline 2 price tics or more (individual preference)to the right of p3 Enter the market only if prices reach orpenetrate that line within a few days after reversing from p4 Please look over your own charts to see if you can find places where the gap trade technique could have beenused Send me a sample when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 001925

Hello Gordon this is my chart with a gap trade RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 065538

Hello TradersZone Thursday April 08 2000 121925 PM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt this is my chart with a gap trade TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Good examplethe gap trade technique shines when an issue in at or near a P5 Similar to the one on thechart you sent Heres another trading signal tool Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Dr Andrews used several techniques which helped him determine whether a P5 was near at hand Youllrecall that he observed most price moves ended or had a significant reversal at a P5 This technique uses alternate closing prices after a P4 has been formed As with many of his studies thenumber 5 is used The chart accompanying this segment shows that there were 5 alternate closes to thedownside after P4 was put in Dr Andrews noted that whenever 5 or more alternate closes followed a P4 theprobabilities were high that a P5 was near at hand An added feature to this chart study is the sideways channel Notice how the 2nd target price and the 5thalternate close nearly coincide

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 12 April 2000 200730

Hello Gordon This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 13 April 2000 082418

Monday April 12 2000 80730 AM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hello TradersZone Good chart example of this Andrews toolanother of his very unusual observations that workmore often than not Heres the final part of this lesson Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom In this trendline method Dr Andrews once again used the number 5 as the basis for locating aprobable reversal area He found this technique to be especially useful whenever a clear orobvious pivot count didnt show up onthe price move under study Trendlines are drawn using the course trendline method When the 5th trendline is broken theprobability is high that the trend under study has ended A mini-median line pitchfork andorsliding parallel could be used for pricing a trading order The accompanying chart of Compaq Computer is an example of how the trendline study could beused The pivot count beginning at the October low is difficult to nail down There were severalsmall areas of congestion but no sizeable corrections while prices advanced The count wasunclear By following the price action using the course trendline technique however the traderwould have been alerted to the possibility of a change of trend when the 5th trendline was brokenin early February Try this technique on your own charts When youre ready please send me an example of yourstudy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 19 April 2000 124108

Hello Gordon this is my example with 5 trendlines RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[6] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 20 April 2000 012726

Monday April 19 2000 124108 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt this is my example with 5 trendlines

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Good example of the 5 TL technique Always reminds me of how the fairly simple tools often do a better job than manyof the sophisticated studies out there

That was the last part of lesson 5 Lesson 6 attached is made in one mailing Youll find Dr Andrews trading rules alongwith a wrap-up review which uses several of his rules You might have questions about some of the rules so feel free tosend them as they arise

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Dr Andrews had an abbreviated set of trading rules on several index cards that he carried around with him in his shirtpocket He said every trading day turned up something new on his charts and by having his rules in his pocket he wasreminded of the need for a methodical approach to his analysis Quite a comment coming from the man who wrote therule book

In this the final lesson of the course Dr Andrews original trading rules and observations are presented Lets work witha few of them at this point

Using charts of issues you follow please send me an example that illustrates your interpretation of each of the followingrules

Rule 4 Anticipating major Ps

Rule 7 Penetration rule

Rule 8 Price failure rule

Rule 11 1-ML23 AR Centerline

Rule 12 Sliding Parallel rule

Rule 15 Mini-median line parallel to buy or sell

Feel free to include any other course techniques you choose to apply but please include examples of the above as aminimum Use more than one technique on a chart if your analysis supports it Send as many charts as you like alongwith your questionscomments

Lesson 6 - Dr Andrews Trading Rules

This lesson covers course rules and significant observations as taught by Dr Andrews in his original trading course Therules are those that he used in his own trading and are provided to serve as a checklist for use with the course tradingmethods youve learned

Rule 1 Where prices are always headed Rule You course members are among the fortunate few to be able to draw astraight line and know that prices are headed toward that ML Very few investors have ever applied this ML principle ofstatistics to price fluctuations and weve never seen this in any books on investment You are among the very few who

know that prices are always headed toward the newest ML

Rule 2 The Rule of coming opposites applies all through life In the bible we find Blessed at they that mourn for theyshall be comforted As investors we know that any losses can be recovered by using course methods

Rule 3 Turn your mind about or Rethink for all good is at hand We should mentally prepare ourselves for thecoming reversal in prices and other affairs Heres one way for example that you course members who know the MLrules can use When prices are skyrocketing upward we do this preparation by thinking If prices pivoted here today atthis price Id draw a new ML bisecting the distance between todays price and the price from which the rise started Andwe know now that if this is a Major Pivot prices will fall rapidly to this new ML Profits from such drops are big and quick

Rule 4 Rule for anticipating major Ps If during congestion or after a rally or decline you can count four previous Psthe fifth one is highly probable to be the one from which a new trend starts

Rule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can make a quick big profit is to watch for the EPformations

Rule 6 The other reversal rule is that prices tend to reverse at or near any ML as well as at any extension of each MLAnd also at any MLH or extensions of MLH

Rule 7 The Penetration Rule is that whenever prices gap past or plunge through any ML there is a high probability thatthey will quickly return to it temporarily and then resume the trend they had before they gapped or plunged through

Rule 8 Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P of reversal and the MLthe probability is that this price reversal will go further than it did on its approach toward the ML

Rule 9 The price failure rule is negated when the next price trend is also a failure in reaching the ML This is almostinvariably a signal of a big fast move in the direction indicated by this last space Rule 10 When alternate median lines of comparable length slope in the same direction the trend is firm and rapidprice changes take place

Rule 11 When 1-ML23 is exactly reached at P4 it can be used as a highly reliable centerline for the AR method

Rule 12 Frequently after crossing a lower MLH prices continue to rise along the MLH Since the crossing of the MLHsignals a further drop is likely use a sliding parallel along the bottom of the most recent crossing If prices drop past thatsliding parallel line a sell signal is generated

Rule 13 MLs between P2 and P3 can start from a nearby or a remote P1 since prices tend to reverse at each of theseMLs Try several such P2-P3 MLs to discover the best fit

Rule 14 The distance of each MLH from its ML is the distance of the next warning line Use these warning lineswhenever a SH has signalled a buy or sell

Rule 15 Use the MMLH as a buy or sell signal when you expect a reversal because of a P5 Also when prices are at aWL ML extension line or where course lines converge or intersect

Rule 16 Converging lines that meet prices have shown the highest probability of a trend reversal

Rule 17 Two to four days is usually the maximum between P2 and P3 for a MML P1 can be a day or so back from P2and 3

Rule 18 The most reliable ActionReaction centerlines seem to be MPL 2P line 2 Gap line peak to low or low to peak

Rule 19 When prices pass through R lines look for a pull back and then a continuing move in the direction of the passthrough

Rule 20 Use gaps as Action lines from the centerline

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 003755

Hello Gordonhere is my example for Rule 4 And I have a question What are EP formations gtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 021242

Tuesday May 04 2000 123755 PM you wrote TZgt Hello GordonTZgt here is my example for Rule 4 TZgt And I have a question What are EP formations gtgtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegtgta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hi TradersZone Good use of the warning linesalso the EP material is part of lesson 4 Rather than go backthrough the files to see when (or if) it was sent Im sending it along with this reply Glad youbrought it up Best RegardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Tuesday May 04 2000208 PM Dr Andrews used a fairly common price chart formation that he found useful at probable P5market tops and bottoms The formation generally called a wedge or pennant by chartists isreferred to in Dr Andrews trading course as the Expanding Pivot (EP) One of the few chartformations used in the course he regarded it as among the most dependable indications that amarket top was forming Closely related to the EP is his Inverted Expanding Pivot (IEP) which henoted could often be observed at market bottoms Both are regarded as intermediate and long-term reversal indicators Dr Andrews found that both formations were most reliable when they occurred after a sharprapid price move coinciding with the formation of a probable P5 He said it wasnt unusual for theformation to take several weeks to complete and that conservative traders could best avoid thewhipsaw associated with congestion patterns by trading only in the direction of the probable price

break out of the EP or IEP formation The attached charts illustrate these formations Please look over your own charts for an example ofthe EP and IEP and send me a copy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 232127

Hello Gordon Thank you for the lesson with the EP material I couldnt find it in any previous emailHere is my example for Rule 7 RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Rule 4Date Samstag 6 Mai 2000 080827

Wednesday May 05 2000 112127 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt Thank you for the lesson with the EP materialTZgt I couldnt find it in any previous emailTZgt Here is my example for Rule 7

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hi TradersZone

Glad you mentioned it earlierexcept for the EP IEP and hissideways channel Dr Andrews didnt have much to say about chartpatterns and formations These are good ones to use though

Your study of the penetration rule was good Later

Best Regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Wednesday May 05 2000801 PM

Page 9: Pitchfork primer

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Good QuestionsDate Freitag 4 Februar 2000 063320

At 2300 34500 PM you wrotegtI have attached the CNC chart gtWhen the price moves below the P0-34 ML before making a P5 low is thegtlower parallel line the next likely level where the P5 should occur (Thats right TradersZone The function of parallel lines is to provide the next level of support orresistance for those times when prices do not stop or reverse at the ML Dr Andrews by the waylooked for prices to reverse at any ML and form a new pivot in the process)gtOn the CNC chart the price closes above the P0-34 ML the day aftergtbreaking the ML Is that a confirmation that the P5 low has been made (That was a good sign but too close to call (imho) Please see chart for TL use as a confirmationsignal) Dr Andrews used several techniques to help him deal with probable reversalsSome are special situation type methods and others are used in conjunction with the pivot countpitchfork lines or ActionReaction lines Well be covering those rules in the last part of the course Im sending another chart for you to study and work on Please identify the main pivots in thedown move that started in April and also draw at least 2 pitchforksWhen ready please return to me Regards Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Good QuestionsDate Freitag 4 Februar 2000 191043

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Median Line TechniqueDate Sonntag 6 Februar 2000 010735

Hello TradersZone Nice work on the charts you returned Everything was by the book It appears that you have theprocedures well in hand Heres the final portion of lesson 1 The concept is basic but it does the important job of helping atrader stay on the right side of the market Will you be continuing the course Regards Gordon The first lines Dr Andrews drew on a new chart were the long-term and intermediate-term medianlines After identifying the significant pivots he drew his first median line beginning with P0-12and worked forward on the chart using each subsequent set of 3 pivots Each ML served to vectorpricesacting as a magnet if you will that drew prices towards it He said that prices will head forthe new ML over 80 of the time Parallel lines are not drawn when using this procedure Its prime function is to determine thedirection and price level of the new ML Recall that Dr Andrews anticipated a price reversal at eachnew ML The attached chart of LPX illustrates this technique Try this on some of your own charts and thenplease send me an example

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Median Line TechniqueDate Montag 7 Februar 2000 192718

I found a chart with 9 pivots I hope it doesnt matterIs it necessary that the move is made of swings with higher highs and higher lows in an uptrend (lower highs and lower lows in adowntrend)For example in the attached chart the point P6 is lower than P4 and P7 is lower than P5Another question For how long are median lines validI noticed that the P2-34 ML from my chart served as support and resistance two years later in 1998 (see attached chartLOW2GIF) but on the other hand I dont want to clutter my charts with too many lines from the past I would like to continue the course to the end I will send the money for the remaining 5 lessons tomorrow Did you receive myfirst payment yet RegardsTradersZone

LOW2GIF

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneDate Mittwoch 9 Februar 2000 054710

At 2700 72700 PM you wrotegtI found a chart with 9 pivots I hope it doesnt mattergtIs it necessary that the move is made of swings with higher highs andgthigher lows in an uptrend (lower highs and lower lows in a downtrend)gtFor example in the attached chart the point P6 is lower than P4 and P7gtis lower than P5 ( When using this ML technique TradersZone the main object is to note the price level of the newML for that is the next probable reversal area The pivots need not be in Elliott formation havingswings as you noted above Your ML procedure by the way was correct I noticed how oftenprices headed for each new ML and then reversedLater in the course well see how Dr Andrews handled those times when prices reversed beforereaching the ML area)gtAnother question For how long are median lines validgtI noticed that the P2-34 ML from my chart served as support andgtresistance two years later in 1998 (see attached chart LOW2GIF) butgton the other hand I dont want to clutter my charts with too many lines from the past (One of the interesting things about Dr Andrews lines is that no matter how far out his lines areprojected they will continue to cause prices to stall-out or reverse when reached Also wheneverseveral of his lines intersect there is a very high probability of a price reversal whether pricesconverge at the intersection or are some distancegtfrom it The probability is higher though when prices are at thegtintersecting lines A linethat has in the past provided frequent support or resistance is probably a pretty good line tokeep on your chart Youre right though charts seem to get cluttered up veryquickly)gt gtI would like to continue the course to the end I will send the moneygtfor the remaining 5 lessons tomorrow Did you receive my first payment yet (Glad to hear youre going to continue to the end Thank you for the prepayment Your first checkhasnt arrived yet will let you know when it does) Meanwhile heres the first segment of the next lesson Regards Gordon

In this lesson youll be introduced to Dr Andrews sideways count The sideways count was hisold reliable a tool that worked so well so often that it was one of the very first studies heperformed on his charts The sideways count gave him a reliable gauge that told him ahead of timehow far a stock or commodity was likely to move Sounds too good to be true perhaps but as youwork with the sideways count youll discover for yourself how often the projected price targetsare reachedoften within tics Markets frequently spend a lot of time in congestion Heres Dr Andrews way to use thatcongestion to our advantage Looking at the Brightpoint attachment please note the channel lines starting in January Youll seethat most of the pivots from Jan-May were within this channel Now look at where Ive placedcircles At each point where prices touched a channel line and then reversed direction and went allthe way back to touch the opposite channel line a circle was drawn Put another way if pricestouch one channel line but then dont go all the way back to touch the opposite channel line acircle is not drawn At first glance this technique can often be unclear so well pause here for some chart work Pleasee-mail me a chart that shows where youve drawn channel lines to identify sideways price actionand also where youve placed the channel line circles

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject ReDate Mittwoch 9 Februar 2000 184837

gtAt each point where prices touched a channel line and then reversedgtdirection and went all the way back to touch the opposite channel linegta circle was drawn Put another way if prices touch one channel linegtbut then dont go all the way back to touch the opposite channel linegta circle is not drawn Shouldnt the last circle on your Brightpoint chart be left outThe price didnt return to the opposite channel line after that day This is my chart

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Thanks for the questionDate Mittwoch 9 Februar 2000 231437

At 2900 64800 PM you wrotegtShouldnt the last circle on your Brightpoint chart be left outgtThe price didnt return to the opposite channel line after that day Hello TradersZone The last circle is appropriate but I can see where the wording in the explanation is confusing Ihave changed that paragraph to read Looking at the Brightpoint attachment please note the channel lines starting in January Youll seethat most of the pivots from Jan- May were within this channel Now look at where the circles wereplaced on the channel lines They are in alternate sequenceNote that each circle was drawn only after prices had first been at the opposite channel lineTheBrightpoint chart illustrates this procedure Thanks for pointing this out TradersZone If the wording is still unclear to you Id appreciate yourinput Meanwhile heres the next segment of this lessonRegards Gordon Well continue to use the Brightpoint chart for this portion of the sideways count study To reviewthe pattern were looking for should be a recent rectangular shaped sideways trading range thatcontains most if not all of the congestion price action Take a look at the attached chart and notehow well defined the price channel for Brightpoint is Youll probably notice that it is deeper thanthe channel you studied on the chart in the preceding segment This comparison is made toillustrate that while the first channel example covers a longer period of time the second includesall of the price ranges and is the preferred method Please look at where the circles were placed on the channel lines To review a new circle is drawnonly after prices have first been at the opposite channel line Recall that circles must be inalternate sequence eg upper linelower lineupper linelower line etc one circle at a time Note that the price range within the channel is $4 34 (High 21 12 Low 16 34) There were twocircles drawn on the lower line of our sideways channel before prices broke down Using thatinformation our next step will be to use some simple arithmetic in order to come up with twodownside price targets Well cover that procedure in the next segment Please let me know whenyou are ready to continue

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Sideways countDate Mittwoch 9 Februar 2000 232315Attachments image001png

Hi TradersZone Im returning your chartplease note comments GordonRegards Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Thanks for the questionDate Donnerstag 10 Februar 2000 233059

Hello Gordonthank you Im ready for the next lesson

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next partDate Donnerstag 10 Februar 2000 235613

At 21000 113000 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongtthank you Im ready for the next lessongt gt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt gt gt TradersZoneI sent this yesterday but will re-send It was part of my reply to your questionregarding the circle I dont have a record of your return chartwork for this part If its a duplicatesend sorry Regards Gordon Well continue to use the Brightpoint chart for this portion of the sideways count study To reviewthe pattern were looking for should be a recent rectangular shaped sideways trading range thatcontains most if not all of the congestion price action Take a look at the attached chart and notehow well defined the price channel for Brightpoint is Youll probably notice that it is deeper thanthe channel you studied on the chart in the preceding segment This comparison is made toillustrate that while the first channel example covers a longer period of time the second includesall of the price ranges and is the preferred method Please look at where the circles were placed on the channel lines To review a new circle is drawnonly after prices have first been at the opposite channel line Recall that circles must be inalternate sequence eg upper linelower lineupper linelower line etc one circle at a time Note that the price range within the channel is $4 34 (High 21 12 Low 16 34) There were twocircles drawn on the lower line of our sideways channel before prices broke down Using thatinformation our next step will be to use some simple arithmetic in order to come up with twodownside price targets Well cover that procedure in the next segment Please let me know whenyou are ready to continue

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next partDate Freitag 11 Februar 2000 234113

I think the placement of the circles is clear to me nowI have attached another chart with a sideways count RegardsTradersZone gtTradersZoneI sent this yesterday but will re-send It was part ofgtmy reply to your question regarding the circle I dont have a recordgtof your return chartwork for this part If its a duplicate send sorry

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject SidewaysDate Montag 14 Februar 2000 054227

At 21100 114100 PM you wrotegtI think the placement of the circles is clear to me nowgtI have attached another chart with a sideways countgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone Your chart was on target Looks like youre ready for the next part Here it is Regards Gordon During this segment youll learn how to arrive at two price targets using Dr Andrews sidewayscount Simple arithmetic is all thats required once the sideways channel and circles are in place Well continue to use the Brightpoint chart which is attached Note that Brightpoint fell throughthe bottom channel line at the point where we placed our second circle so figuring out possibledownside targets would have been in order at that time Heres how thats done 1 Determine the price range of the channel In this case the range is $4 34 (21 12 - 16 34) 2 Count the number of circles on the lower channel line The lower line is used in this casebecause thats the line that didnt hold Prices went through it returned to check it out and thencontinued lower 3 Multiply the price range of the channel times the number of circles drawn on the lower channelline (4 34 x 2 = 9 12) 4 Subtract that figure from the upper channel line priceThe result becomes downside price target 1 (21 12 - 9 12 = 12) 5 Next subtract that same figure from the price at the lower channel line Thats price target 2(16 34 - 9 12 = 7 14)

In the case of an upside channel breakout the procedure is reversed Please draw a few channelsand figure out some downside targets on your own charts When youre ready send me two orthree examples of your work As always send your questions as they arise

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re SidewaysDate Montag 14 Februar 2000 134314

Here are my examples I couldnt find enough charts with downside targets so I included some charts with upside targets Do the channel lines always have to be horizontal When I look at my charts I find more channels with an upward slope or adownward slope RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Sideways channelsDate Freitag 18 Februar 2000 005531

At 21400 14300 PM you wrotegtHere are my examples I couldnt find enough charts with downsidegttargets so I included some charts with upside targetsgt gtDo the channel lines always have to be horizontal When I look at mygtcharts I find more channels with an upward slope or a downward slopegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone The sideways method can be used with either up or down Sorry didnt mean to imply that only downsidetargets should be found Ill reword that portion of the lesson Thanks for mentioning it Dr Andrews sideways method works only on horizontal channels Others have mentioned the slopingchannels also and have wondered if there is some method to use with them I know of none Ive askedother course members for their ideas on how to approach this problem but so far no one has come up with amethod I would think that there should be a solution but have not personally taken the time to research itIf some method could be found that works as often as the Andrews sideways count it would be a significantfind The Andrews sideways count doesnt always hit the targets as you saw on your chart of Bausch amp Lomb Itworks more often than not though and it still amazes me at how often prices reach the targets Heres an observation to keep in mind Quite often after the first target is reached prices will reverse andhead back towards the channel At times youll note that they return inside the channel They will thenreverse again and head back towards the second price target These reversals happen frequently and presenttrading opportunities Im including the final segment of this lesson Regards Gordon So far in the course youve learned about Dr Andrews pivot counting procedure pitchfork and sidewayscount Youve noticed by now how often prices change trend at a P5 Youve seen how the 0-34 ML methodcan help locate the probable P5 area Youve seen how often price targets are met using the sideways countmethod The tendency for prices to reverse at a median line should be recognized as a high probability eventas well In coming lessons youll be shown how Dr Andrews used these and other high probability events totrade the stock and commodity markets The tools and techniques he used will help you put the finishingtouches on your market analysis using Andrews lines

Before continuing on to the next lesson lets briefly review what has so far been covered The attached chartprovides an opportunity to illustrate the methods referred to above Please draw these methods on thechart and return to me

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Sideways channelsDate Montag 21 Februar 2000 193743

gtBefore continuing on to the next lesson lets briefly review what hasgtso far been covered The attached chart provides an opportunity togtillustrate the methods referred to above Please draw these methods ongtthe chart and return to me Hello Gordonhere is my chart RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next lesson attachedDate Mittwoch 23 Februar 2000 014539

At 22100 73700 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongthere is my chartgt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Good job on the pivots sideways count and pitchforkLooks like youre ready to move on to the next part It wont be long and things will begin to fall inplace Regards Gordon Lesson 4 continued In one of his course letters Dr Andrews wrote The Law of Physics stated by Newton that Actionand Reaction are equal and opposite was first applied to prices by your Course Directors friendthe late Roger Babson who attributed his earnings of several million dollars to this law Beginning with this segment of lesson four and continuing in lesson five youll learn how to drawand apply the ActionReaction trading method as taught by Dr Andrews in his trading course The AR method requires a centerline or CL from which to start The CL can be any of thefollowing - MPL - ML - MLH - 2P line - 2 Gap line - Peak to low line - Low to peak lineThese are the primary lines that Dr Andrews used He stressed that some pencil work and a goodeyeball was needed in order to find the best fitting CL As with most other chart lines somework better than others The task is to find the best fit as he put it You will be shown examples of

each of the above CLs in this lesson and the next Determining which of the above listed lines to use as the CL is the first step in the ActionReactionmethod The solution often presents itself With a little practice a quick scan of the chart understudy will be all thats needed to spot the most likely CL Well begin with the attached chart Notethe CL drawn In this example a MPL (multi-pivot line) was used as the CL A MPL is a straightline that connects three or more consecutive pivots without passing through prices Theconnecting line is then extended Ive circled the three pivots that form the MPL on the chartThere are several other places on our chart where a MPL CL can be drawn Please bear in mindthat this is just the first step of the process Identification of likely CLs is all were after here Seeif you can locate two more then draw them in and send the chart back to me Well take up fromthere

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next lesson attachedDate Mittwoch 23 Februar 2000 212304

gtLesson 4 continuedgt gtIn one of his course letters Dr Andrews wrote The Law of Physicsgtstated by Newton that Action and Reaction are equal and opposite wasgtfirst applied to prices by your Course Directors friend the lategtRoger Babson who attributed his earnings of several million dollars to this lawgt gtBeginning with this segment of lesson four and continuing in lessongtfive youll learn how to draw and apply the ActionReaction tradinggtmethod as taught by Dr Andrews in his trading coursegt gtThe AR method requires a centerline or CL from which to startgtThe CL can be any of the followinggt - MPLgt - MLgt - MLHgt - 2P linegt - 2 Gap linegt - Peak to low linegt - Low to peak line Hello Gordon2P line 2 Gap line Peak to low line Low to peak line ndash actually I dont know what these lines areAre they discussed in Lesson 3 I believe you havenrsquot sent me this lesson yetAnyway I found two more MPLs on the Novellus Chart and drew them in RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Lesson 3Date Mittwoch 23 Februar 2000 235958

At 22300 92300 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt2P line 2 Gap line Peak to low line Low to peak line - actually I dont knowgtwhat these lines are Are they discussed in Lesson 3 I believe you didntgtsent me this lesson yetgtAnyway I found two more MPLs on the Novellus Chart and drew them ingt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone My apologiesI sent you an outdated version of the lesson Thanks for letting me know Musthave been my bedtime Heres the correct version Regards Gordon Lesson 3 In one of his course letters Dr Andrews wrote The Law of Physics stated by Newton that Actionand Reaction are equal and opposite was first applied to prices by your Course Directors friendthe late Roger Babson who attributed his earnings of several million dollars to this law In this lesson youll be introduced to the ActionReaction trading method as taught by Dr Andrewsin his trading course The AR method requires a centerline or CL from which to start The CL can be any of thefollowing - MPL Multi-pivot line A line drawn across 3 or more pivots - ML Median line The middle line of the pitchfork - MLH Median line parallel Either parallel line of the pitchfork - 2P line A line drawn across 2 pivots - 2 Gap line A line drawn connecting 2 gaps without touching prices in between - Peak to low line A line drawn connecting the high and low of a price leg

- Low to peak line A line drawn connecting the low and high of a price leg These are the primary lines that Dr Andrews used He stressed that some pencil work and a goodeyeball was needed in order to find the best fitting CL As with most other chart lines somework better than others The task is to find the best fit as he put it You will be shown examples ofeach of the above CLs Determining which of the above listed lines to use as the CL is the first step in the ActionReactionmethod With practice a quick view of the chart under study will be all thats needed to spot themost likely CL Youll be shown later how to experiment with possible combinations in order tofind the centerline that is most in tune with the market under study Well begin with the attached chart Note the CL drawn In this example a MPL (multi-pivot line)was used as the CL A MPL is a straight line that connects three or more consecutive pivotswithout passing through prices The connecting line is then extended Ive circled the three pivotsthat form the MPL on the chart There are several other places on our chart where a MPL CL canbe drawn Please bear in mind that this is just the first step of the process Identification of likelyCLs is all were after here See if you can locate two more then draw them in and send the chartback to me

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Donnerstag 24 Februar 2000 025105

At 22300 92300 PM you wroteI found two more MPLs on the Novellus Chart and drew them ingt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your mpls were correct This next segment shows the purpose of the centerline and how it isused Your payment in full arrived today TradersZone Thank you Regards Gordon Lesson 3 continued Please refer to the attached chart of Novellus The line drawn connecting the 3 circled pivots is amulti-pivot line (MPL) and represents the centerline (CL) well be using in this example Recall inthe previous segment that several types of centerlines are possible The choice is determined byexperimenting with the potential combinations on the chart under study Its best to try to locate acenterline somewhere close to the middle of the price chart in order to have sufficient past andforward data to use with the study This will become clear as you work with the method Once the centerline is drawn the next step is to locate a previous low or high pivot point to use fordrawing an action line Dr Andrews observed that the low pivot points often seem to work bestbut that either could be used In our example a line starting at the previous significant low wasdrawn parallel to the CL It is labeled A-1 (Action line 1) because it represents the first actionline Dr Andrews called it an action line because it was drawn as a result of a previous pivot (pricereversal) that had taken place Next a parallel line was drawn to the right of the CL and labeled R-1 Notice that it is the same distance from the CL as the corresponding A-1 line It is labeled R-1because it represents the first reaction line a line where prices are likely to stop or reverseNotice how prices reacted at the R-1 line in early 98 That serves as an indication that thecenterline chosen for this study should be a good one to use Not all reaction lines cause such aclear reversal as the R1 on this chart but many do Thats why its important to experiment withvarious centerline possibilities in order to find action lines that produce reaction lines which createthe greatest number of pivots or price stall-outs This experimentation is often quite time

consuming but experience has shown that it is time well spent When a centerline is found that isin tune with the price action of the issue under study it can be a highly effective tool for use inlocating probable reversal areas When combined with pitchfork lines the AR method can pinpointpotential reversal areas that are generally not recognized as such by others Dr Andrewstechniques for using the pitchfork and AR lines together are covered in later lessons In coming segments well study other lines that Dr Andrews used for his centerlines In themeantime experiment with the multi-pivot centerline on your own charts Then please send mean example of your work along with any questions you may have

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Freitag 25 Februar 2000 211356

gtIn the meantime experiment with the multi-pivot centerline on your owngtcharts Then please send me an example of your work along with anygtquestions you may have Hello Gordon I was wondering how many ActionReaction lines could be drawn on a chart On my attached chart I found at least 6 parallellines which had a significant meaning for the price RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject AR linesDate Montag 28 Februar 2000 080128

gtHello Gordongt gtI was wondering how many ActionReaction lines could be drawn on agtchart On my attached chart I found at least 6 parallel lines which hadgta significant meaning for the pricegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hi TradersZone Theres no set number of lines that can be drawnactually the more you can find the betterFinding a good centerline is the key And once you find lines that work such as you did anynumber of parallel lines can be drawn You are doing exactly what Dr Andrews didtaking thetime and effort to find the best fitting sets of lines Each chart has them and each chart is differentas Im sure youve found Nice work Heres the next part Regards Gordon Lesson 3 continued One of Dr Andrews favorite techniques dealt with gapsan often times perplexing price event formany traders His observations over the years suggested to him that while gaps show upfrequently on many price charts few traders have a method for including them as an integral partof their chart analysis Thats not surprising since not much has been published about how toapproach the use of gaps in a trading method Dr Andrews however found several ways to putprice gaps to good use An ActionReaction centerline which uses gaps as its basis is one suchmethod Please refer to the attached chart of Cendant Youll see that a centerline was drawn which passedthrough the July gap Note that it also came in contact with several pivots thereby qualifying as agapmulti-pivot centerline It is drawn by starting at the April low pivot and extending a line acrossand through the gap in mid-July It subsequently touches two additional high pivots Dr Andrews counted each gap as two pivots He noted that the more pivots a line touched the

stronger the line tended to be in the future Good reason then for using the July gap as the basisfor an ActionReaction study Our CL is labelled a gap-mpl-CL The May 98 high was used for the Action Line starting point A line was then drawn parallel to theCenterline as per ActionReaction procedure The corresponding Reaction Line was then drawn inIf this particular study had been drawn on Cendants chart right after the July gap was put in thepotential for prices to go all the way down to the Reaction Line might have seemed very slim at thetime Notice however that prices reached the Reaction Line in early September Youll see thishappen time and again as you work with the AR method The core of its effectiveness is a strongCL Please send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts of your choice

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re AR linesDate Montag 28 Februar 2000 155937

gtPlease send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts of yourgtchoice Hello Gordonhere are my examples RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject More on the ARDate Donnerstag 2 Maumlrz 2000 071158

At 22800 35900 PM you wrotegtgtPlease send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts ofgtgtyour choicegt gtHello Gordongthere are my examplesgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone You picked some good examples to use for your AR study Both showed the potential power of thismethod Takes time and lots of chart study sometimes to find the best set of lines but the rewardscan be many Heres something else to look at Regards Gordon The ActionReaction technique requires a strong centerline from which to begin The key todeciding which set of pivots to use for the centerline is found through experimenting with thevarious configurations visible on the chart under study The centerline might be a series of gapspivots an existing median line or any of Dr Andrews lines The task is to search for that centerlinewhich shows the greatest potential for projecting price reversal areas Dr Andrews did that byfinding a likely centerline near the middle of his price chart That allowed him to use any of theprevious pivots for his action lines By experimenting he found reaction lines that did the best jobof pegging reversal areas at data points located forward of the centerline Reaction lines are equal and opposite of the action lines and serve to project price levels at whicha reversal can be expected That is why the task of seeking out the best centerline is so importantDr Andrews reasoned that a series of reaction lines which have pegged price reversals in the pastis likely to continue to be in tune with current and future market price action Having severalprevious pivots to use as anchors for drawing action lines is thus essential The attached chart of Lattice illustrates this concept Please bear in mind that the gapmplcenterline is not the only centerline one could use on this chart You might want to study the chartfor other AR possibilities Try a peak-to-peak CL or a multi-pivot CL Send me your studies along

with any questions

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re More on the ARDate Samstag 4 Maumlrz 2000 002521

gtThe attached chart of Lattice illustrates this conceptgtPlease bear in mind that the gapmpl centerline is not the onlygtcenterline one could use on this chartgtYou might want to study the chart for other AR possibilitiesgtTry a peak-to-peak CL or a multi-pivot CL Send me your studiesgtalong with any questions Hello Gordonhere is my chart RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Peak to peak clDate Sonntag 5 Maumlrz 2000 064107

At 3400 122500 AM you wrotegtHello Gordongthere is my chartgt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Looks like you have the concept down Takes time and a lot of chart work to find the bestcenterline When the reaction lines dont seem to peg reversal areas chances are the centerline isnot the one that is best in tune with the price action of the issue under studyDespite the time required for this method it was one of Dr Andrews stand-bysAR lines could befound on most of his charts Im sending a chart with an example of a peak-to-peak CL Regards Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Peak to peak clDate Sonntag 5 Maumlrz 2000 171232

Hello Gordon I think the peak-to-peak CL on the last chart I sent to you was not really drawn from peak to peakIm sending another example RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next LessonDate Mittwoch 8 Maumlrz 2000 072526

At 3500 51200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtI think the peak-to-peak CL on the last chart I sent to you was notgtreally drawn from peak to peakgtIm sending another examplegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your peak to peak cl example was correctly drawn Thats a fairly simple approach but quite oftenthe peak to peak yields better reaction lines Heres the first part of the next lesson Regards Gordon Youll find times when prices dont quite reach the ML but instead drift alongside or away from itThe Schiff ML was designed to be used in place of the regular ML whenever that happens Suchprice action can be found at any place on a chart but most frequently occurs after a sharp sell-offor run-up of prices Dr Andrews also used the Schiff ML whenever his regular ML sloped at an unusually steep angleHe said it helped smooth out irregular price action such as that caused by unexpected earningsnews crop planting delays or poor growing conditions crop production reports etc Youll findnearly vertical price moves over a short period of time on many charts The Schiff ML method helpsput things back in perspective when that happens Well use the chart of Sterling Bancorp as an example of prices drifting away from the regular MLThat ML is drawn in black Prices didnt quite reach the ML but drifted alongside and eventuallyaway from it The Schiff ML and parallel lines are drawn in red Notice how prices were containedwithin the Schiff pitchfork until they finally broke down at the upper parallel line The procedure for drawing the Schiff ML is the same as for the regular ML except the startingpoint is located midway between the first 2 pivots youll be using The Sterling Bancorp chart

illustrates how this is done Dr Andrews also suggested using the Schiff ML whenever the regular ML method doesnt seem tobe in sync with price action Practice this procedure on your own charts and send a couple examples when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next LessonDate Donnerstag 9 Maumlrz 2000 001143

Hello Gordon in my charting software (Dynamic Trader) the Schiff ML is drawn by finding the midpoint of the line between pivot A and pivot Bmoving this point horizontally to directly above or below (depending on whether A is a low or high pivot) the A pivot anddrawing a line from his point through the midpoint of the BC swingAre there different methods of drawing a Schiff MLI was too lazy to draw Schiff MLs by hand with the method you described so Im sending my examples with the Dynamic TraderSchiff MLs -) RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject SchiffDate Samstag 11 Maumlrz 2000 070226

At 3900 121100 AM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtin my charting software (Dynamic Trader) the Schiff ML is drawn bygtfinding the midpoint of the line between pivot A and pivot B movinggtthis point horizontally to directly above or below (depending ongtwhether A is a low or high pivot) the A pivot and drawing a linegtgtfrom his point through the midpoint of the BC swinggtAre there different methods of drawing a Schiff MLgtI was too lazy to draw Schiff MLs by hand with the method yougtdescribed so Im sending my examples with the Dynamic Trader Schiff MLs -)gt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your program Schiff line procedure is fineits actually what Dr Andrews called a modified schiff ml and is onlyslightly different than the one I sent you initially The one you used is preferred by most course members Im sendingthe modified Schiff lesson and a chart along with this email The chart example shows how to use it with 0-34 pivots Regards Gordon

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Sliding Parallel LineDate Montag 13 Maumlrz 2000 005252

Hello TradersZone Heres one of the tools Dr Andrews used most often when entering exiting or reversing marketpositions Not many people know about this technique Regards Gordon The Sliding Parallel (SH) is drawn whenever prices cross an Andrews line and then move along itFor example if the bottom of a daily price bar range drops through a lower parallel line of apitchfork a new parallel line is then drawn from that low and extended to the right If the nextdays price bar drops through that sliding parallel line a sell signal is generated Whenever price action dictates a sliding parallel the next step is to draw a Warning Line Thewarning line is an additional parallel line that is an image extension of the original pitchforkchannels It serves as a warning that if prices penetrate the sliding parallel the next likely target isthe WL The attached chart of Avis illustrates these procedures Please try these on your own charts andsend me an example

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Sliding Parallel LineDate Dienstag 14 Maumlrz 2000 225737

Hello Gordon this is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning line RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 065606

At 31400 105700 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtthis is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning linegt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone Your chart of circuit city was a good example for this study I may have mentioned it earlier but DrAndrews used this technique on a regular basis The next part of this lesson covers another of hisfavorite tools the mini-median line pitchfork Here it is Regards Gordon The Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry and exit tools Though mostoften drawn using alternate closing prices alternate highs and lows can also be usedin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days is usually the maximumbetween pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or more back from P2 Dr Andrews used Mini-Median Line pitchforks for buy and sell signals whenever he expected areversal Some examples include a probable P5 or when prices are at a Warning Line ML MLHmajor ML extension or a sideways channel price target When prices cross the Mini-Median LineParallel (MMLH) a sliding parallel (SH) is used for order entry

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 231537

gtThe Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry andgtexit tools Though most often drawn using alternate closing pricesgtalternate highs and lows can also be usedgtin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days isgtusually the maximum between pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or moregtback from P2

Hello Gordon

wouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timingCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available whenDr Andrews was alive

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject intraday chartsDate Samstag 18 Maumlrz 2000 012400

At 31600 111500 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongtgtwouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsgtinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timinggtCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available when DrgtAndrews was alivegtgtRegardsgtTradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Youre absolutely correctintraday charts were not available when DrAndrews was a trader

Im reading between the lines here but if you plan to day-trade using the course techniques ie thepitchfork then I agree that the regular pitchfork would be more useful on intraday charts Otherwisewhipsaw would be a significant problem Please get back to me if I didnt address your questionbecause this is a very important technique The mini-median line pitchfork and sliding parallel showedup on most of Dr Andrews charts

Regards

Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re intraday chartsDate Dienstag 21 Maumlrz 2000 220322

Hello Gordon

You are right Im planning to daytrade SampP futures using the course techniques among other things

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 003408

Hi TradersZone Here are a couple Andrews techniques that will help anticipate the breakout direction of asideways channelThey work often enough to warrant keep handy Regards Gordon In an earlier lesson you were introduced to Dr Andrews sideways count You saw how frequentlythe sideways count method provided high probability price objectives after the breakout from theestablished channel took place In this segment of lesson 4 youll be shown 2 congestion area techniques that can help youdetermine the probable sideways channel price breakout direction Both rely on the use of pivots The first uses the pivot points that are circled on a sideways channel Dr Andrews observed thatwhenever a sideways channel results in at least 5 circle contacts the eventual price breakoutwould very often be in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle If circle 5 is at thetop of the channel for example the eventual price breakout would likely be to the upside If circle5 is at the bottom of the channel look for a downside breakout Dr Andrews noted that thistechnique can be subject to false breakouts but that such breakouts are usually followed shortlyafter with a confirmed breakout in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle Heemphasized that this study is best considered as a rule of thumb observation He viewed it as asupporting indicator for use with a short-term pitchfork as prices approached a channel line There are 2 charts attached that show how this works

The second technique in this part of lesson 4 deals with a sideways channelthat is building shortly after a P3 has been formed Dr Andrews noted thatwhenever that happened the probabilities were high that prices wouldbreakout in the same direction they were moving prior to the formation ofthe sideways channel The attached P3 to sideways example chart shows thisprocedure

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 205235

Hello Gordon here is my example for the 5 circle sideways count RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Lesson 5Date Montag 27 Maumlrz 2000 060731

At 32400 85200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my example for the 5 circle sideways countgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt gt Hi TradersZone Good example of the 5th circle tendency to predict the direction of a sideways breakout Any luckfinding a chart showing the P3 to sideways rule Im sending the first part of the next lesson This trendline method is a useful tool with all of DrAndrews course lines He used it all the time but especially when looking for confirmation of othercourse method trading signals Regards Gordon The Course Trendline__________________________________________________________ Next well discuss the trendline Seasoned traders agree that the trendline is one of their mostimportant tools No matter what kind of trading program or technique they use the trendline on achart is a must But one of the biggest mistakes made by amateurs and professionals alike isinconsistently drawing or defining the trendline Dr Andrews trendline procedure is simpleconsistent and accurate It works extremely well with the pivot count and with the pitchfork For an uptrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the lowest low up and to thehighest minor low point preceding the highest high The line must not pass through prices inbetween the two low points Extend the line(Attached chart of Brightpoint) For a downtrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the highest high point to thelowest minor high point preceding the lowest low so that it does not pass through prices inbetween the two high points Extend the line (Brightpoint chart) Thats all theres to it Its simple consistent and it works well with other Andrews lines It also

helps eliminate personal bias and haphazard analysis Practice drawing these trendlines on your own charts Send me any questions you might have andthen e-mail a chart of your choosing which shows at least two uptrend and two downtrend linesthat youve drawn_______________________________________________________________________

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Lesson 5Date Dienstag 28 Maumlrz 2000 120224

Hello Gordon here is my chart with trendlinesWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going above the trendline again should I draw a new trendline anddelete the old one Attached is another chart with the P3 to sideways rule I finally found an example for it RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Price failure techniqueDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081412

At 32800 120200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my chart with trendlinesgtWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going abovegtthe trendline again should I draw a new trendline and delete the oldgtone Hi TradersZone Take a look at the chart Im returningI added some lines for you to considerWith the course trendline once its broken a new one should be started Theres a technique thatties in with this coming up soon Meanwhile heres an important technique to work on It deals with those times when prices dontreach the ML Regards Gordon Dr Andrews Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P ofreversaland the ML the probability is that this price reversal will go further thanitdid on its approach toward the ML (Extract of original course material) A price failure very often indicates a sizeable reversal will take placeThepitchforks drawn on the chart of Home Depot illustrate the concept of pricefailure Dr Andrews routinely drew a new pitchfork on his chart after a newsignificant pivot had formed He knew that prices had a high probability ofreaching the new ML before stalling out or reversing If prices reversedbeforereaching the ML thereby forming a new pivot he termed it a price failureTheunderlying idea here is that Dr Andrews fully anticipated his median linewouldact as a price magnet To conclude that a price reversal resulted in a price failure Dr Andrewsused

these primary signalsa subsequent price penetration of a short-termmulti-pivotline andor a return of prices to and penetration of the parallel lineformed atpivot 3 of the pitchfork (The circles on the Home Depot chart denote theparallelline penetration signal To avoid clutter the mpl lines were not drawn) One possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart of ConsecoIncLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me a copy

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject ChartDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081800Attachments image002png

Hi TradersZone Forgot the chart Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Price failure techniqueDate Samstag 1 April 2000 201000

gtOne possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart ofgtConseco IncgtLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me agtcopy Hi Gordon here are my charts with price failures RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Mittwoch 5 April 2000 235624

Hi TradersZone Good price failure examples you sentany comments or questions about it Heres the next partanother old standby Dr Andrews kept handy Regards Gordon In this segment youll learn how to use the Fan line Technique To draw the fan lines youll apply the coursetrendline method which was introduced in an earlier lesson It might be well to emphasize that the practicalapplication of the course trendline method requires practice and experience both of which will serve youwell in this technique Dr Andrews used fan lines as an adjunct to his pitchfork sideways channel andactionreaction methods In the fan line study three trendlines are drawn from the original reversal pivot of the price correction understudy typically a P0 or a P5 Youll notice on the charts included with this study that each fan line is at aflatter angle than its predecessor When the third fan line is broken the rule is that the correction has endedand a new trend is under way Try this technique on some of your own charts and then please send me asample

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Donnerstag 6 April 2000 234315

Hi Gordon No I dont have any specific question about the price failure technique I guess the next likely target after a price failure wouldbe the warning line I have attached two charts with fan linesIs it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the third fan line is broken RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Next segmentDate Freitag 7 April 2000 003312

Hello TradersZone

Tuesday April 06 2000 114315 AM you wrote

TZgt Hi Gordon

TZgt No I dont have any specific question about the price failureTZgt technique I guess the next likely target after a price failureTZgt would be the warning line

TZgt I have attached two charts with fan linesTZgt Is it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the thirdTZgt fan line is broken

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Thats right the warning line is the next price target Additionalwarning lines can be drawn if needed but usually one will do it Ifprices go through the first warning line another can be drawn butmost likely a new pitchfork could be drawn instead which would bepreferable Helps stay current with recently formed pivots

When prices break through the third fan line a buy or sell signal isgiven Not sure what you mean by fourth target fan line Im a littledense today

Your chart work was goodthis is another handy tool for spotting thehigh probability of a price reversal or trend change

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject The Gap TradeDate Freitag 7 April 2000 004858

Hello TradersZone This trading signal doesnt show up very often but past observations have shown that its well worth watching for Dr Andrews placed a lot of emphasis on the importance of price gaps something many traders overlook This is one of his gap uses Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom The Gap Trading Technique Price gaps can be a dilemma for many traders The general rule denoting market strength or weakness after ahigh volume gap often comes up short after the initial reaction is over Many gappers simply run out ofsteam A high volume gap in itself seems to offer precious little evidence that a profitable move is about toget under way Dr Andrews used price gaps somewhat differently than others He counted a gap as 2 pivots Youll see howthat works in the following technique which uses a gap to arrive at a price level for a buy or sell order Using short-term daily price pivots label the pivot immediately preceding the gap as p0 Count the gap as 2pivots labeling it p1 amp p2 After p3 has formed and prices reverse towards a short-term p4 draw a horizontalline 2 price tics or more (individual preference)to the right of p3 Enter the market only if prices reach orpenetrate that line within a few days after reversing from p4 Please look over your own charts to see if you can find places where the gap trade technique could have beenused Send me a sample when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 001925

Hello Gordon this is my chart with a gap trade RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 065538

Hello TradersZone Thursday April 08 2000 121925 PM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt this is my chart with a gap trade TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Good examplethe gap trade technique shines when an issue in at or near a P5 Similar to the one on thechart you sent Heres another trading signal tool Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Dr Andrews used several techniques which helped him determine whether a P5 was near at hand Youllrecall that he observed most price moves ended or had a significant reversal at a P5 This technique uses alternate closing prices after a P4 has been formed As with many of his studies thenumber 5 is used The chart accompanying this segment shows that there were 5 alternate closes to thedownside after P4 was put in Dr Andrews noted that whenever 5 or more alternate closes followed a P4 theprobabilities were high that a P5 was near at hand An added feature to this chart study is the sideways channel Notice how the 2nd target price and the 5thalternate close nearly coincide

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 12 April 2000 200730

Hello Gordon This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 13 April 2000 082418

Monday April 12 2000 80730 AM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hello TradersZone Good chart example of this Andrews toolanother of his very unusual observations that workmore often than not Heres the final part of this lesson Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom In this trendline method Dr Andrews once again used the number 5 as the basis for locating aprobable reversal area He found this technique to be especially useful whenever a clear orobvious pivot count didnt show up onthe price move under study Trendlines are drawn using the course trendline method When the 5th trendline is broken theprobability is high that the trend under study has ended A mini-median line pitchfork andorsliding parallel could be used for pricing a trading order The accompanying chart of Compaq Computer is an example of how the trendline study could beused The pivot count beginning at the October low is difficult to nail down There were severalsmall areas of congestion but no sizeable corrections while prices advanced The count wasunclear By following the price action using the course trendline technique however the traderwould have been alerted to the possibility of a change of trend when the 5th trendline was brokenin early February Try this technique on your own charts When youre ready please send me an example of yourstudy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 19 April 2000 124108

Hello Gordon this is my example with 5 trendlines RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[6] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 20 April 2000 012726

Monday April 19 2000 124108 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt this is my example with 5 trendlines

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Good example of the 5 TL technique Always reminds me of how the fairly simple tools often do a better job than manyof the sophisticated studies out there

That was the last part of lesson 5 Lesson 6 attached is made in one mailing Youll find Dr Andrews trading rules alongwith a wrap-up review which uses several of his rules You might have questions about some of the rules so feel free tosend them as they arise

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Dr Andrews had an abbreviated set of trading rules on several index cards that he carried around with him in his shirtpocket He said every trading day turned up something new on his charts and by having his rules in his pocket he wasreminded of the need for a methodical approach to his analysis Quite a comment coming from the man who wrote therule book

In this the final lesson of the course Dr Andrews original trading rules and observations are presented Lets work witha few of them at this point

Using charts of issues you follow please send me an example that illustrates your interpretation of each of the followingrules

Rule 4 Anticipating major Ps

Rule 7 Penetration rule

Rule 8 Price failure rule

Rule 11 1-ML23 AR Centerline

Rule 12 Sliding Parallel rule

Rule 15 Mini-median line parallel to buy or sell

Feel free to include any other course techniques you choose to apply but please include examples of the above as aminimum Use more than one technique on a chart if your analysis supports it Send as many charts as you like alongwith your questionscomments

Lesson 6 - Dr Andrews Trading Rules

This lesson covers course rules and significant observations as taught by Dr Andrews in his original trading course Therules are those that he used in his own trading and are provided to serve as a checklist for use with the course tradingmethods youve learned

Rule 1 Where prices are always headed Rule You course members are among the fortunate few to be able to draw astraight line and know that prices are headed toward that ML Very few investors have ever applied this ML principle ofstatistics to price fluctuations and weve never seen this in any books on investment You are among the very few who

know that prices are always headed toward the newest ML

Rule 2 The Rule of coming opposites applies all through life In the bible we find Blessed at they that mourn for theyshall be comforted As investors we know that any losses can be recovered by using course methods

Rule 3 Turn your mind about or Rethink for all good is at hand We should mentally prepare ourselves for thecoming reversal in prices and other affairs Heres one way for example that you course members who know the MLrules can use When prices are skyrocketing upward we do this preparation by thinking If prices pivoted here today atthis price Id draw a new ML bisecting the distance between todays price and the price from which the rise started Andwe know now that if this is a Major Pivot prices will fall rapidly to this new ML Profits from such drops are big and quick

Rule 4 Rule for anticipating major Ps If during congestion or after a rally or decline you can count four previous Psthe fifth one is highly probable to be the one from which a new trend starts

Rule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can make a quick big profit is to watch for the EPformations

Rule 6 The other reversal rule is that prices tend to reverse at or near any ML as well as at any extension of each MLAnd also at any MLH or extensions of MLH

Rule 7 The Penetration Rule is that whenever prices gap past or plunge through any ML there is a high probability thatthey will quickly return to it temporarily and then resume the trend they had before they gapped or plunged through

Rule 8 Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P of reversal and the MLthe probability is that this price reversal will go further than it did on its approach toward the ML

Rule 9 The price failure rule is negated when the next price trend is also a failure in reaching the ML This is almostinvariably a signal of a big fast move in the direction indicated by this last space Rule 10 When alternate median lines of comparable length slope in the same direction the trend is firm and rapidprice changes take place

Rule 11 When 1-ML23 is exactly reached at P4 it can be used as a highly reliable centerline for the AR method

Rule 12 Frequently after crossing a lower MLH prices continue to rise along the MLH Since the crossing of the MLHsignals a further drop is likely use a sliding parallel along the bottom of the most recent crossing If prices drop past thatsliding parallel line a sell signal is generated

Rule 13 MLs between P2 and P3 can start from a nearby or a remote P1 since prices tend to reverse at each of theseMLs Try several such P2-P3 MLs to discover the best fit

Rule 14 The distance of each MLH from its ML is the distance of the next warning line Use these warning lineswhenever a SH has signalled a buy or sell

Rule 15 Use the MMLH as a buy or sell signal when you expect a reversal because of a P5 Also when prices are at aWL ML extension line or where course lines converge or intersect

Rule 16 Converging lines that meet prices have shown the highest probability of a trend reversal

Rule 17 Two to four days is usually the maximum between P2 and P3 for a MML P1 can be a day or so back from P2and 3

Rule 18 The most reliable ActionReaction centerlines seem to be MPL 2P line 2 Gap line peak to low or low to peak

Rule 19 When prices pass through R lines look for a pull back and then a continuing move in the direction of the passthrough

Rule 20 Use gaps as Action lines from the centerline

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 003755

Hello Gordonhere is my example for Rule 4 And I have a question What are EP formations gtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 021242

Tuesday May 04 2000 123755 PM you wrote TZgt Hello GordonTZgt here is my example for Rule 4 TZgt And I have a question What are EP formations gtgtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegtgta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hi TradersZone Good use of the warning linesalso the EP material is part of lesson 4 Rather than go backthrough the files to see when (or if) it was sent Im sending it along with this reply Glad youbrought it up Best RegardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Tuesday May 04 2000208 PM Dr Andrews used a fairly common price chart formation that he found useful at probable P5market tops and bottoms The formation generally called a wedge or pennant by chartists isreferred to in Dr Andrews trading course as the Expanding Pivot (EP) One of the few chartformations used in the course he regarded it as among the most dependable indications that amarket top was forming Closely related to the EP is his Inverted Expanding Pivot (IEP) which henoted could often be observed at market bottoms Both are regarded as intermediate and long-term reversal indicators Dr Andrews found that both formations were most reliable when they occurred after a sharprapid price move coinciding with the formation of a probable P5 He said it wasnt unusual for theformation to take several weeks to complete and that conservative traders could best avoid thewhipsaw associated with congestion patterns by trading only in the direction of the probable price

break out of the EP or IEP formation The attached charts illustrate these formations Please look over your own charts for an example ofthe EP and IEP and send me a copy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 232127

Hello Gordon Thank you for the lesson with the EP material I couldnt find it in any previous emailHere is my example for Rule 7 RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Rule 4Date Samstag 6 Mai 2000 080827

Wednesday May 05 2000 112127 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt Thank you for the lesson with the EP materialTZgt I couldnt find it in any previous emailTZgt Here is my example for Rule 7

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hi TradersZone

Glad you mentioned it earlierexcept for the EP IEP and hissideways channel Dr Andrews didnt have much to say about chartpatterns and formations These are good ones to use though

Your study of the penetration rule was good Later

Best Regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Wednesday May 05 2000801 PM

Page 10: Pitchfork primer

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Good QuestionsDate Freitag 4 Februar 2000 191043

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Median Line TechniqueDate Sonntag 6 Februar 2000 010735

Hello TradersZone Nice work on the charts you returned Everything was by the book It appears that you have theprocedures well in hand Heres the final portion of lesson 1 The concept is basic but it does the important job of helping atrader stay on the right side of the market Will you be continuing the course Regards Gordon The first lines Dr Andrews drew on a new chart were the long-term and intermediate-term medianlines After identifying the significant pivots he drew his first median line beginning with P0-12and worked forward on the chart using each subsequent set of 3 pivots Each ML served to vectorpricesacting as a magnet if you will that drew prices towards it He said that prices will head forthe new ML over 80 of the time Parallel lines are not drawn when using this procedure Its prime function is to determine thedirection and price level of the new ML Recall that Dr Andrews anticipated a price reversal at eachnew ML The attached chart of LPX illustrates this technique Try this on some of your own charts and thenplease send me an example

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Median Line TechniqueDate Montag 7 Februar 2000 192718

I found a chart with 9 pivots I hope it doesnt matterIs it necessary that the move is made of swings with higher highs and higher lows in an uptrend (lower highs and lower lows in adowntrend)For example in the attached chart the point P6 is lower than P4 and P7 is lower than P5Another question For how long are median lines validI noticed that the P2-34 ML from my chart served as support and resistance two years later in 1998 (see attached chartLOW2GIF) but on the other hand I dont want to clutter my charts with too many lines from the past I would like to continue the course to the end I will send the money for the remaining 5 lessons tomorrow Did you receive myfirst payment yet RegardsTradersZone

LOW2GIF

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneDate Mittwoch 9 Februar 2000 054710

At 2700 72700 PM you wrotegtI found a chart with 9 pivots I hope it doesnt mattergtIs it necessary that the move is made of swings with higher highs andgthigher lows in an uptrend (lower highs and lower lows in a downtrend)gtFor example in the attached chart the point P6 is lower than P4 and P7gtis lower than P5 ( When using this ML technique TradersZone the main object is to note the price level of the newML for that is the next probable reversal area The pivots need not be in Elliott formation havingswings as you noted above Your ML procedure by the way was correct I noticed how oftenprices headed for each new ML and then reversedLater in the course well see how Dr Andrews handled those times when prices reversed beforereaching the ML area)gtAnother question For how long are median lines validgtI noticed that the P2-34 ML from my chart served as support andgtresistance two years later in 1998 (see attached chart LOW2GIF) butgton the other hand I dont want to clutter my charts with too many lines from the past (One of the interesting things about Dr Andrews lines is that no matter how far out his lines areprojected they will continue to cause prices to stall-out or reverse when reached Also wheneverseveral of his lines intersect there is a very high probability of a price reversal whether pricesconverge at the intersection or are some distancegtfrom it The probability is higher though when prices are at thegtintersecting lines A linethat has in the past provided frequent support or resistance is probably a pretty good line tokeep on your chart Youre right though charts seem to get cluttered up veryquickly)gt gtI would like to continue the course to the end I will send the moneygtfor the remaining 5 lessons tomorrow Did you receive my first payment yet (Glad to hear youre going to continue to the end Thank you for the prepayment Your first checkhasnt arrived yet will let you know when it does) Meanwhile heres the first segment of the next lesson Regards Gordon

In this lesson youll be introduced to Dr Andrews sideways count The sideways count was hisold reliable a tool that worked so well so often that it was one of the very first studies heperformed on his charts The sideways count gave him a reliable gauge that told him ahead of timehow far a stock or commodity was likely to move Sounds too good to be true perhaps but as youwork with the sideways count youll discover for yourself how often the projected price targetsare reachedoften within tics Markets frequently spend a lot of time in congestion Heres Dr Andrews way to use thatcongestion to our advantage Looking at the Brightpoint attachment please note the channel lines starting in January Youll seethat most of the pivots from Jan-May were within this channel Now look at where Ive placedcircles At each point where prices touched a channel line and then reversed direction and went allthe way back to touch the opposite channel line a circle was drawn Put another way if pricestouch one channel line but then dont go all the way back to touch the opposite channel line acircle is not drawn At first glance this technique can often be unclear so well pause here for some chart work Pleasee-mail me a chart that shows where youve drawn channel lines to identify sideways price actionand also where youve placed the channel line circles

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject ReDate Mittwoch 9 Februar 2000 184837

gtAt each point where prices touched a channel line and then reversedgtdirection and went all the way back to touch the opposite channel linegta circle was drawn Put another way if prices touch one channel linegtbut then dont go all the way back to touch the opposite channel linegta circle is not drawn Shouldnt the last circle on your Brightpoint chart be left outThe price didnt return to the opposite channel line after that day This is my chart

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Thanks for the questionDate Mittwoch 9 Februar 2000 231437

At 2900 64800 PM you wrotegtShouldnt the last circle on your Brightpoint chart be left outgtThe price didnt return to the opposite channel line after that day Hello TradersZone The last circle is appropriate but I can see where the wording in the explanation is confusing Ihave changed that paragraph to read Looking at the Brightpoint attachment please note the channel lines starting in January Youll seethat most of the pivots from Jan- May were within this channel Now look at where the circles wereplaced on the channel lines They are in alternate sequenceNote that each circle was drawn only after prices had first been at the opposite channel lineTheBrightpoint chart illustrates this procedure Thanks for pointing this out TradersZone If the wording is still unclear to you Id appreciate yourinput Meanwhile heres the next segment of this lessonRegards Gordon Well continue to use the Brightpoint chart for this portion of the sideways count study To reviewthe pattern were looking for should be a recent rectangular shaped sideways trading range thatcontains most if not all of the congestion price action Take a look at the attached chart and notehow well defined the price channel for Brightpoint is Youll probably notice that it is deeper thanthe channel you studied on the chart in the preceding segment This comparison is made toillustrate that while the first channel example covers a longer period of time the second includesall of the price ranges and is the preferred method Please look at where the circles were placed on the channel lines To review a new circle is drawnonly after prices have first been at the opposite channel line Recall that circles must be inalternate sequence eg upper linelower lineupper linelower line etc one circle at a time Note that the price range within the channel is $4 34 (High 21 12 Low 16 34) There were twocircles drawn on the lower line of our sideways channel before prices broke down Using thatinformation our next step will be to use some simple arithmetic in order to come up with twodownside price targets Well cover that procedure in the next segment Please let me know whenyou are ready to continue

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Sideways countDate Mittwoch 9 Februar 2000 232315Attachments image001png

Hi TradersZone Im returning your chartplease note comments GordonRegards Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Thanks for the questionDate Donnerstag 10 Februar 2000 233059

Hello Gordonthank you Im ready for the next lesson

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next partDate Donnerstag 10 Februar 2000 235613

At 21000 113000 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongtthank you Im ready for the next lessongt gt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt gt gt TradersZoneI sent this yesterday but will re-send It was part of my reply to your questionregarding the circle I dont have a record of your return chartwork for this part If its a duplicatesend sorry Regards Gordon Well continue to use the Brightpoint chart for this portion of the sideways count study To reviewthe pattern were looking for should be a recent rectangular shaped sideways trading range thatcontains most if not all of the congestion price action Take a look at the attached chart and notehow well defined the price channel for Brightpoint is Youll probably notice that it is deeper thanthe channel you studied on the chart in the preceding segment This comparison is made toillustrate that while the first channel example covers a longer period of time the second includesall of the price ranges and is the preferred method Please look at where the circles were placed on the channel lines To review a new circle is drawnonly after prices have first been at the opposite channel line Recall that circles must be inalternate sequence eg upper linelower lineupper linelower line etc one circle at a time Note that the price range within the channel is $4 34 (High 21 12 Low 16 34) There were twocircles drawn on the lower line of our sideways channel before prices broke down Using thatinformation our next step will be to use some simple arithmetic in order to come up with twodownside price targets Well cover that procedure in the next segment Please let me know whenyou are ready to continue

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next partDate Freitag 11 Februar 2000 234113

I think the placement of the circles is clear to me nowI have attached another chart with a sideways count RegardsTradersZone gtTradersZoneI sent this yesterday but will re-send It was part ofgtmy reply to your question regarding the circle I dont have a recordgtof your return chartwork for this part If its a duplicate send sorry

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject SidewaysDate Montag 14 Februar 2000 054227

At 21100 114100 PM you wrotegtI think the placement of the circles is clear to me nowgtI have attached another chart with a sideways countgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone Your chart was on target Looks like youre ready for the next part Here it is Regards Gordon During this segment youll learn how to arrive at two price targets using Dr Andrews sidewayscount Simple arithmetic is all thats required once the sideways channel and circles are in place Well continue to use the Brightpoint chart which is attached Note that Brightpoint fell throughthe bottom channel line at the point where we placed our second circle so figuring out possibledownside targets would have been in order at that time Heres how thats done 1 Determine the price range of the channel In this case the range is $4 34 (21 12 - 16 34) 2 Count the number of circles on the lower channel line The lower line is used in this casebecause thats the line that didnt hold Prices went through it returned to check it out and thencontinued lower 3 Multiply the price range of the channel times the number of circles drawn on the lower channelline (4 34 x 2 = 9 12) 4 Subtract that figure from the upper channel line priceThe result becomes downside price target 1 (21 12 - 9 12 = 12) 5 Next subtract that same figure from the price at the lower channel line Thats price target 2(16 34 - 9 12 = 7 14)

In the case of an upside channel breakout the procedure is reversed Please draw a few channelsand figure out some downside targets on your own charts When youre ready send me two orthree examples of your work As always send your questions as they arise

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re SidewaysDate Montag 14 Februar 2000 134314

Here are my examples I couldnt find enough charts with downside targets so I included some charts with upside targets Do the channel lines always have to be horizontal When I look at my charts I find more channels with an upward slope or adownward slope RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Sideways channelsDate Freitag 18 Februar 2000 005531

At 21400 14300 PM you wrotegtHere are my examples I couldnt find enough charts with downsidegttargets so I included some charts with upside targetsgt gtDo the channel lines always have to be horizontal When I look at mygtcharts I find more channels with an upward slope or a downward slopegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone The sideways method can be used with either up or down Sorry didnt mean to imply that only downsidetargets should be found Ill reword that portion of the lesson Thanks for mentioning it Dr Andrews sideways method works only on horizontal channels Others have mentioned the slopingchannels also and have wondered if there is some method to use with them I know of none Ive askedother course members for their ideas on how to approach this problem but so far no one has come up with amethod I would think that there should be a solution but have not personally taken the time to research itIf some method could be found that works as often as the Andrews sideways count it would be a significantfind The Andrews sideways count doesnt always hit the targets as you saw on your chart of Bausch amp Lomb Itworks more often than not though and it still amazes me at how often prices reach the targets Heres an observation to keep in mind Quite often after the first target is reached prices will reverse andhead back towards the channel At times youll note that they return inside the channel They will thenreverse again and head back towards the second price target These reversals happen frequently and presenttrading opportunities Im including the final segment of this lesson Regards Gordon So far in the course youve learned about Dr Andrews pivot counting procedure pitchfork and sidewayscount Youve noticed by now how often prices change trend at a P5 Youve seen how the 0-34 ML methodcan help locate the probable P5 area Youve seen how often price targets are met using the sideways countmethod The tendency for prices to reverse at a median line should be recognized as a high probability eventas well In coming lessons youll be shown how Dr Andrews used these and other high probability events totrade the stock and commodity markets The tools and techniques he used will help you put the finishingtouches on your market analysis using Andrews lines

Before continuing on to the next lesson lets briefly review what has so far been covered The attached chartprovides an opportunity to illustrate the methods referred to above Please draw these methods on thechart and return to me

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Sideways channelsDate Montag 21 Februar 2000 193743

gtBefore continuing on to the next lesson lets briefly review what hasgtso far been covered The attached chart provides an opportunity togtillustrate the methods referred to above Please draw these methods ongtthe chart and return to me Hello Gordonhere is my chart RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next lesson attachedDate Mittwoch 23 Februar 2000 014539

At 22100 73700 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongthere is my chartgt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Good job on the pivots sideways count and pitchforkLooks like youre ready to move on to the next part It wont be long and things will begin to fall inplace Regards Gordon Lesson 4 continued In one of his course letters Dr Andrews wrote The Law of Physics stated by Newton that Actionand Reaction are equal and opposite was first applied to prices by your Course Directors friendthe late Roger Babson who attributed his earnings of several million dollars to this law Beginning with this segment of lesson four and continuing in lesson five youll learn how to drawand apply the ActionReaction trading method as taught by Dr Andrews in his trading course The AR method requires a centerline or CL from which to start The CL can be any of thefollowing - MPL - ML - MLH - 2P line - 2 Gap line - Peak to low line - Low to peak lineThese are the primary lines that Dr Andrews used He stressed that some pencil work and a goodeyeball was needed in order to find the best fitting CL As with most other chart lines somework better than others The task is to find the best fit as he put it You will be shown examples of

each of the above CLs in this lesson and the next Determining which of the above listed lines to use as the CL is the first step in the ActionReactionmethod The solution often presents itself With a little practice a quick scan of the chart understudy will be all thats needed to spot the most likely CL Well begin with the attached chart Notethe CL drawn In this example a MPL (multi-pivot line) was used as the CL A MPL is a straightline that connects three or more consecutive pivots without passing through prices Theconnecting line is then extended Ive circled the three pivots that form the MPL on the chartThere are several other places on our chart where a MPL CL can be drawn Please bear in mindthat this is just the first step of the process Identification of likely CLs is all were after here Seeif you can locate two more then draw them in and send the chart back to me Well take up fromthere

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next lesson attachedDate Mittwoch 23 Februar 2000 212304

gtLesson 4 continuedgt gtIn one of his course letters Dr Andrews wrote The Law of Physicsgtstated by Newton that Action and Reaction are equal and opposite wasgtfirst applied to prices by your Course Directors friend the lategtRoger Babson who attributed his earnings of several million dollars to this lawgt gtBeginning with this segment of lesson four and continuing in lessongtfive youll learn how to draw and apply the ActionReaction tradinggtmethod as taught by Dr Andrews in his trading coursegt gtThe AR method requires a centerline or CL from which to startgtThe CL can be any of the followinggt - MPLgt - MLgt - MLHgt - 2P linegt - 2 Gap linegt - Peak to low linegt - Low to peak line Hello Gordon2P line 2 Gap line Peak to low line Low to peak line ndash actually I dont know what these lines areAre they discussed in Lesson 3 I believe you havenrsquot sent me this lesson yetAnyway I found two more MPLs on the Novellus Chart and drew them in RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Lesson 3Date Mittwoch 23 Februar 2000 235958

At 22300 92300 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt2P line 2 Gap line Peak to low line Low to peak line - actually I dont knowgtwhat these lines are Are they discussed in Lesson 3 I believe you didntgtsent me this lesson yetgtAnyway I found two more MPLs on the Novellus Chart and drew them ingt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone My apologiesI sent you an outdated version of the lesson Thanks for letting me know Musthave been my bedtime Heres the correct version Regards Gordon Lesson 3 In one of his course letters Dr Andrews wrote The Law of Physics stated by Newton that Actionand Reaction are equal and opposite was first applied to prices by your Course Directors friendthe late Roger Babson who attributed his earnings of several million dollars to this law In this lesson youll be introduced to the ActionReaction trading method as taught by Dr Andrewsin his trading course The AR method requires a centerline or CL from which to start The CL can be any of thefollowing - MPL Multi-pivot line A line drawn across 3 or more pivots - ML Median line The middle line of the pitchfork - MLH Median line parallel Either parallel line of the pitchfork - 2P line A line drawn across 2 pivots - 2 Gap line A line drawn connecting 2 gaps without touching prices in between - Peak to low line A line drawn connecting the high and low of a price leg

- Low to peak line A line drawn connecting the low and high of a price leg These are the primary lines that Dr Andrews used He stressed that some pencil work and a goodeyeball was needed in order to find the best fitting CL As with most other chart lines somework better than others The task is to find the best fit as he put it You will be shown examples ofeach of the above CLs Determining which of the above listed lines to use as the CL is the first step in the ActionReactionmethod With practice a quick view of the chart under study will be all thats needed to spot themost likely CL Youll be shown later how to experiment with possible combinations in order tofind the centerline that is most in tune with the market under study Well begin with the attached chart Note the CL drawn In this example a MPL (multi-pivot line)was used as the CL A MPL is a straight line that connects three or more consecutive pivotswithout passing through prices The connecting line is then extended Ive circled the three pivotsthat form the MPL on the chart There are several other places on our chart where a MPL CL canbe drawn Please bear in mind that this is just the first step of the process Identification of likelyCLs is all were after here See if you can locate two more then draw them in and send the chartback to me

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Donnerstag 24 Februar 2000 025105

At 22300 92300 PM you wroteI found two more MPLs on the Novellus Chart and drew them ingt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your mpls were correct This next segment shows the purpose of the centerline and how it isused Your payment in full arrived today TradersZone Thank you Regards Gordon Lesson 3 continued Please refer to the attached chart of Novellus The line drawn connecting the 3 circled pivots is amulti-pivot line (MPL) and represents the centerline (CL) well be using in this example Recall inthe previous segment that several types of centerlines are possible The choice is determined byexperimenting with the potential combinations on the chart under study Its best to try to locate acenterline somewhere close to the middle of the price chart in order to have sufficient past andforward data to use with the study This will become clear as you work with the method Once the centerline is drawn the next step is to locate a previous low or high pivot point to use fordrawing an action line Dr Andrews observed that the low pivot points often seem to work bestbut that either could be used In our example a line starting at the previous significant low wasdrawn parallel to the CL It is labeled A-1 (Action line 1) because it represents the first actionline Dr Andrews called it an action line because it was drawn as a result of a previous pivot (pricereversal) that had taken place Next a parallel line was drawn to the right of the CL and labeled R-1 Notice that it is the same distance from the CL as the corresponding A-1 line It is labeled R-1because it represents the first reaction line a line where prices are likely to stop or reverseNotice how prices reacted at the R-1 line in early 98 That serves as an indication that thecenterline chosen for this study should be a good one to use Not all reaction lines cause such aclear reversal as the R1 on this chart but many do Thats why its important to experiment withvarious centerline possibilities in order to find action lines that produce reaction lines which createthe greatest number of pivots or price stall-outs This experimentation is often quite time

consuming but experience has shown that it is time well spent When a centerline is found that isin tune with the price action of the issue under study it can be a highly effective tool for use inlocating probable reversal areas When combined with pitchfork lines the AR method can pinpointpotential reversal areas that are generally not recognized as such by others Dr Andrewstechniques for using the pitchfork and AR lines together are covered in later lessons In coming segments well study other lines that Dr Andrews used for his centerlines In themeantime experiment with the multi-pivot centerline on your own charts Then please send mean example of your work along with any questions you may have

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Freitag 25 Februar 2000 211356

gtIn the meantime experiment with the multi-pivot centerline on your owngtcharts Then please send me an example of your work along with anygtquestions you may have Hello Gordon I was wondering how many ActionReaction lines could be drawn on a chart On my attached chart I found at least 6 parallellines which had a significant meaning for the price RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject AR linesDate Montag 28 Februar 2000 080128

gtHello Gordongt gtI was wondering how many ActionReaction lines could be drawn on agtchart On my attached chart I found at least 6 parallel lines which hadgta significant meaning for the pricegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hi TradersZone Theres no set number of lines that can be drawnactually the more you can find the betterFinding a good centerline is the key And once you find lines that work such as you did anynumber of parallel lines can be drawn You are doing exactly what Dr Andrews didtaking thetime and effort to find the best fitting sets of lines Each chart has them and each chart is differentas Im sure youve found Nice work Heres the next part Regards Gordon Lesson 3 continued One of Dr Andrews favorite techniques dealt with gapsan often times perplexing price event formany traders His observations over the years suggested to him that while gaps show upfrequently on many price charts few traders have a method for including them as an integral partof their chart analysis Thats not surprising since not much has been published about how toapproach the use of gaps in a trading method Dr Andrews however found several ways to putprice gaps to good use An ActionReaction centerline which uses gaps as its basis is one suchmethod Please refer to the attached chart of Cendant Youll see that a centerline was drawn which passedthrough the July gap Note that it also came in contact with several pivots thereby qualifying as agapmulti-pivot centerline It is drawn by starting at the April low pivot and extending a line acrossand through the gap in mid-July It subsequently touches two additional high pivots Dr Andrews counted each gap as two pivots He noted that the more pivots a line touched the

stronger the line tended to be in the future Good reason then for using the July gap as the basisfor an ActionReaction study Our CL is labelled a gap-mpl-CL The May 98 high was used for the Action Line starting point A line was then drawn parallel to theCenterline as per ActionReaction procedure The corresponding Reaction Line was then drawn inIf this particular study had been drawn on Cendants chart right after the July gap was put in thepotential for prices to go all the way down to the Reaction Line might have seemed very slim at thetime Notice however that prices reached the Reaction Line in early September Youll see thishappen time and again as you work with the AR method The core of its effectiveness is a strongCL Please send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts of your choice

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re AR linesDate Montag 28 Februar 2000 155937

gtPlease send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts of yourgtchoice Hello Gordonhere are my examples RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject More on the ARDate Donnerstag 2 Maumlrz 2000 071158

At 22800 35900 PM you wrotegtgtPlease send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts ofgtgtyour choicegt gtHello Gordongthere are my examplesgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone You picked some good examples to use for your AR study Both showed the potential power of thismethod Takes time and lots of chart study sometimes to find the best set of lines but the rewardscan be many Heres something else to look at Regards Gordon The ActionReaction technique requires a strong centerline from which to begin The key todeciding which set of pivots to use for the centerline is found through experimenting with thevarious configurations visible on the chart under study The centerline might be a series of gapspivots an existing median line or any of Dr Andrews lines The task is to search for that centerlinewhich shows the greatest potential for projecting price reversal areas Dr Andrews did that byfinding a likely centerline near the middle of his price chart That allowed him to use any of theprevious pivots for his action lines By experimenting he found reaction lines that did the best jobof pegging reversal areas at data points located forward of the centerline Reaction lines are equal and opposite of the action lines and serve to project price levels at whicha reversal can be expected That is why the task of seeking out the best centerline is so importantDr Andrews reasoned that a series of reaction lines which have pegged price reversals in the pastis likely to continue to be in tune with current and future market price action Having severalprevious pivots to use as anchors for drawing action lines is thus essential The attached chart of Lattice illustrates this concept Please bear in mind that the gapmplcenterline is not the only centerline one could use on this chart You might want to study the chartfor other AR possibilities Try a peak-to-peak CL or a multi-pivot CL Send me your studies along

with any questions

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re More on the ARDate Samstag 4 Maumlrz 2000 002521

gtThe attached chart of Lattice illustrates this conceptgtPlease bear in mind that the gapmpl centerline is not the onlygtcenterline one could use on this chartgtYou might want to study the chart for other AR possibilitiesgtTry a peak-to-peak CL or a multi-pivot CL Send me your studiesgtalong with any questions Hello Gordonhere is my chart RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Peak to peak clDate Sonntag 5 Maumlrz 2000 064107

At 3400 122500 AM you wrotegtHello Gordongthere is my chartgt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Looks like you have the concept down Takes time and a lot of chart work to find the bestcenterline When the reaction lines dont seem to peg reversal areas chances are the centerline isnot the one that is best in tune with the price action of the issue under studyDespite the time required for this method it was one of Dr Andrews stand-bysAR lines could befound on most of his charts Im sending a chart with an example of a peak-to-peak CL Regards Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Peak to peak clDate Sonntag 5 Maumlrz 2000 171232

Hello Gordon I think the peak-to-peak CL on the last chart I sent to you was not really drawn from peak to peakIm sending another example RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next LessonDate Mittwoch 8 Maumlrz 2000 072526

At 3500 51200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtI think the peak-to-peak CL on the last chart I sent to you was notgtreally drawn from peak to peakgtIm sending another examplegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your peak to peak cl example was correctly drawn Thats a fairly simple approach but quite oftenthe peak to peak yields better reaction lines Heres the first part of the next lesson Regards Gordon Youll find times when prices dont quite reach the ML but instead drift alongside or away from itThe Schiff ML was designed to be used in place of the regular ML whenever that happens Suchprice action can be found at any place on a chart but most frequently occurs after a sharp sell-offor run-up of prices Dr Andrews also used the Schiff ML whenever his regular ML sloped at an unusually steep angleHe said it helped smooth out irregular price action such as that caused by unexpected earningsnews crop planting delays or poor growing conditions crop production reports etc Youll findnearly vertical price moves over a short period of time on many charts The Schiff ML method helpsput things back in perspective when that happens Well use the chart of Sterling Bancorp as an example of prices drifting away from the regular MLThat ML is drawn in black Prices didnt quite reach the ML but drifted alongside and eventuallyaway from it The Schiff ML and parallel lines are drawn in red Notice how prices were containedwithin the Schiff pitchfork until they finally broke down at the upper parallel line The procedure for drawing the Schiff ML is the same as for the regular ML except the startingpoint is located midway between the first 2 pivots youll be using The Sterling Bancorp chart

illustrates how this is done Dr Andrews also suggested using the Schiff ML whenever the regular ML method doesnt seem tobe in sync with price action Practice this procedure on your own charts and send a couple examples when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next LessonDate Donnerstag 9 Maumlrz 2000 001143

Hello Gordon in my charting software (Dynamic Trader) the Schiff ML is drawn by finding the midpoint of the line between pivot A and pivot Bmoving this point horizontally to directly above or below (depending on whether A is a low or high pivot) the A pivot anddrawing a line from his point through the midpoint of the BC swingAre there different methods of drawing a Schiff MLI was too lazy to draw Schiff MLs by hand with the method you described so Im sending my examples with the Dynamic TraderSchiff MLs -) RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject SchiffDate Samstag 11 Maumlrz 2000 070226

At 3900 121100 AM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtin my charting software (Dynamic Trader) the Schiff ML is drawn bygtfinding the midpoint of the line between pivot A and pivot B movinggtthis point horizontally to directly above or below (depending ongtwhether A is a low or high pivot) the A pivot and drawing a linegtgtfrom his point through the midpoint of the BC swinggtAre there different methods of drawing a Schiff MLgtI was too lazy to draw Schiff MLs by hand with the method yougtdescribed so Im sending my examples with the Dynamic Trader Schiff MLs -)gt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your program Schiff line procedure is fineits actually what Dr Andrews called a modified schiff ml and is onlyslightly different than the one I sent you initially The one you used is preferred by most course members Im sendingthe modified Schiff lesson and a chart along with this email The chart example shows how to use it with 0-34 pivots Regards Gordon

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Sliding Parallel LineDate Montag 13 Maumlrz 2000 005252

Hello TradersZone Heres one of the tools Dr Andrews used most often when entering exiting or reversing marketpositions Not many people know about this technique Regards Gordon The Sliding Parallel (SH) is drawn whenever prices cross an Andrews line and then move along itFor example if the bottom of a daily price bar range drops through a lower parallel line of apitchfork a new parallel line is then drawn from that low and extended to the right If the nextdays price bar drops through that sliding parallel line a sell signal is generated Whenever price action dictates a sliding parallel the next step is to draw a Warning Line Thewarning line is an additional parallel line that is an image extension of the original pitchforkchannels It serves as a warning that if prices penetrate the sliding parallel the next likely target isthe WL The attached chart of Avis illustrates these procedures Please try these on your own charts andsend me an example

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Sliding Parallel LineDate Dienstag 14 Maumlrz 2000 225737

Hello Gordon this is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning line RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 065606

At 31400 105700 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtthis is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning linegt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone Your chart of circuit city was a good example for this study I may have mentioned it earlier but DrAndrews used this technique on a regular basis The next part of this lesson covers another of hisfavorite tools the mini-median line pitchfork Here it is Regards Gordon The Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry and exit tools Though mostoften drawn using alternate closing prices alternate highs and lows can also be usedin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days is usually the maximumbetween pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or more back from P2 Dr Andrews used Mini-Median Line pitchforks for buy and sell signals whenever he expected areversal Some examples include a probable P5 or when prices are at a Warning Line ML MLHmajor ML extension or a sideways channel price target When prices cross the Mini-Median LineParallel (MMLH) a sliding parallel (SH) is used for order entry

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 231537

gtThe Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry andgtexit tools Though most often drawn using alternate closing pricesgtalternate highs and lows can also be usedgtin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days isgtusually the maximum between pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or moregtback from P2

Hello Gordon

wouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timingCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available whenDr Andrews was alive

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject intraday chartsDate Samstag 18 Maumlrz 2000 012400

At 31600 111500 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongtgtwouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsgtinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timinggtCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available when DrgtAndrews was alivegtgtRegardsgtTradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Youre absolutely correctintraday charts were not available when DrAndrews was a trader

Im reading between the lines here but if you plan to day-trade using the course techniques ie thepitchfork then I agree that the regular pitchfork would be more useful on intraday charts Otherwisewhipsaw would be a significant problem Please get back to me if I didnt address your questionbecause this is a very important technique The mini-median line pitchfork and sliding parallel showedup on most of Dr Andrews charts

Regards

Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re intraday chartsDate Dienstag 21 Maumlrz 2000 220322

Hello Gordon

You are right Im planning to daytrade SampP futures using the course techniques among other things

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 003408

Hi TradersZone Here are a couple Andrews techniques that will help anticipate the breakout direction of asideways channelThey work often enough to warrant keep handy Regards Gordon In an earlier lesson you were introduced to Dr Andrews sideways count You saw how frequentlythe sideways count method provided high probability price objectives after the breakout from theestablished channel took place In this segment of lesson 4 youll be shown 2 congestion area techniques that can help youdetermine the probable sideways channel price breakout direction Both rely on the use of pivots The first uses the pivot points that are circled on a sideways channel Dr Andrews observed thatwhenever a sideways channel results in at least 5 circle contacts the eventual price breakoutwould very often be in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle If circle 5 is at thetop of the channel for example the eventual price breakout would likely be to the upside If circle5 is at the bottom of the channel look for a downside breakout Dr Andrews noted that thistechnique can be subject to false breakouts but that such breakouts are usually followed shortlyafter with a confirmed breakout in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle Heemphasized that this study is best considered as a rule of thumb observation He viewed it as asupporting indicator for use with a short-term pitchfork as prices approached a channel line There are 2 charts attached that show how this works

The second technique in this part of lesson 4 deals with a sideways channelthat is building shortly after a P3 has been formed Dr Andrews noted thatwhenever that happened the probabilities were high that prices wouldbreakout in the same direction they were moving prior to the formation ofthe sideways channel The attached P3 to sideways example chart shows thisprocedure

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 205235

Hello Gordon here is my example for the 5 circle sideways count RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Lesson 5Date Montag 27 Maumlrz 2000 060731

At 32400 85200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my example for the 5 circle sideways countgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt gt Hi TradersZone Good example of the 5th circle tendency to predict the direction of a sideways breakout Any luckfinding a chart showing the P3 to sideways rule Im sending the first part of the next lesson This trendline method is a useful tool with all of DrAndrews course lines He used it all the time but especially when looking for confirmation of othercourse method trading signals Regards Gordon The Course Trendline__________________________________________________________ Next well discuss the trendline Seasoned traders agree that the trendline is one of their mostimportant tools No matter what kind of trading program or technique they use the trendline on achart is a must But one of the biggest mistakes made by amateurs and professionals alike isinconsistently drawing or defining the trendline Dr Andrews trendline procedure is simpleconsistent and accurate It works extremely well with the pivot count and with the pitchfork For an uptrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the lowest low up and to thehighest minor low point preceding the highest high The line must not pass through prices inbetween the two low points Extend the line(Attached chart of Brightpoint) For a downtrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the highest high point to thelowest minor high point preceding the lowest low so that it does not pass through prices inbetween the two high points Extend the line (Brightpoint chart) Thats all theres to it Its simple consistent and it works well with other Andrews lines It also

helps eliminate personal bias and haphazard analysis Practice drawing these trendlines on your own charts Send me any questions you might have andthen e-mail a chart of your choosing which shows at least two uptrend and two downtrend linesthat youve drawn_______________________________________________________________________

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Lesson 5Date Dienstag 28 Maumlrz 2000 120224

Hello Gordon here is my chart with trendlinesWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going above the trendline again should I draw a new trendline anddelete the old one Attached is another chart with the P3 to sideways rule I finally found an example for it RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Price failure techniqueDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081412

At 32800 120200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my chart with trendlinesgtWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going abovegtthe trendline again should I draw a new trendline and delete the oldgtone Hi TradersZone Take a look at the chart Im returningI added some lines for you to considerWith the course trendline once its broken a new one should be started Theres a technique thatties in with this coming up soon Meanwhile heres an important technique to work on It deals with those times when prices dontreach the ML Regards Gordon Dr Andrews Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P ofreversaland the ML the probability is that this price reversal will go further thanitdid on its approach toward the ML (Extract of original course material) A price failure very often indicates a sizeable reversal will take placeThepitchforks drawn on the chart of Home Depot illustrate the concept of pricefailure Dr Andrews routinely drew a new pitchfork on his chart after a newsignificant pivot had formed He knew that prices had a high probability ofreaching the new ML before stalling out or reversing If prices reversedbeforereaching the ML thereby forming a new pivot he termed it a price failureTheunderlying idea here is that Dr Andrews fully anticipated his median linewouldact as a price magnet To conclude that a price reversal resulted in a price failure Dr Andrewsused

these primary signalsa subsequent price penetration of a short-termmulti-pivotline andor a return of prices to and penetration of the parallel lineformed atpivot 3 of the pitchfork (The circles on the Home Depot chart denote theparallelline penetration signal To avoid clutter the mpl lines were not drawn) One possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart of ConsecoIncLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me a copy

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject ChartDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081800Attachments image002png

Hi TradersZone Forgot the chart Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Price failure techniqueDate Samstag 1 April 2000 201000

gtOne possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart ofgtConseco IncgtLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me agtcopy Hi Gordon here are my charts with price failures RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Mittwoch 5 April 2000 235624

Hi TradersZone Good price failure examples you sentany comments or questions about it Heres the next partanother old standby Dr Andrews kept handy Regards Gordon In this segment youll learn how to use the Fan line Technique To draw the fan lines youll apply the coursetrendline method which was introduced in an earlier lesson It might be well to emphasize that the practicalapplication of the course trendline method requires practice and experience both of which will serve youwell in this technique Dr Andrews used fan lines as an adjunct to his pitchfork sideways channel andactionreaction methods In the fan line study three trendlines are drawn from the original reversal pivot of the price correction understudy typically a P0 or a P5 Youll notice on the charts included with this study that each fan line is at aflatter angle than its predecessor When the third fan line is broken the rule is that the correction has endedand a new trend is under way Try this technique on some of your own charts and then please send me asample

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Donnerstag 6 April 2000 234315

Hi Gordon No I dont have any specific question about the price failure technique I guess the next likely target after a price failure wouldbe the warning line I have attached two charts with fan linesIs it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the third fan line is broken RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Next segmentDate Freitag 7 April 2000 003312

Hello TradersZone

Tuesday April 06 2000 114315 AM you wrote

TZgt Hi Gordon

TZgt No I dont have any specific question about the price failureTZgt technique I guess the next likely target after a price failureTZgt would be the warning line

TZgt I have attached two charts with fan linesTZgt Is it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the thirdTZgt fan line is broken

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Thats right the warning line is the next price target Additionalwarning lines can be drawn if needed but usually one will do it Ifprices go through the first warning line another can be drawn butmost likely a new pitchfork could be drawn instead which would bepreferable Helps stay current with recently formed pivots

When prices break through the third fan line a buy or sell signal isgiven Not sure what you mean by fourth target fan line Im a littledense today

Your chart work was goodthis is another handy tool for spotting thehigh probability of a price reversal or trend change

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject The Gap TradeDate Freitag 7 April 2000 004858

Hello TradersZone This trading signal doesnt show up very often but past observations have shown that its well worth watching for Dr Andrews placed a lot of emphasis on the importance of price gaps something many traders overlook This is one of his gap uses Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom The Gap Trading Technique Price gaps can be a dilemma for many traders The general rule denoting market strength or weakness after ahigh volume gap often comes up short after the initial reaction is over Many gappers simply run out ofsteam A high volume gap in itself seems to offer precious little evidence that a profitable move is about toget under way Dr Andrews used price gaps somewhat differently than others He counted a gap as 2 pivots Youll see howthat works in the following technique which uses a gap to arrive at a price level for a buy or sell order Using short-term daily price pivots label the pivot immediately preceding the gap as p0 Count the gap as 2pivots labeling it p1 amp p2 After p3 has formed and prices reverse towards a short-term p4 draw a horizontalline 2 price tics or more (individual preference)to the right of p3 Enter the market only if prices reach orpenetrate that line within a few days after reversing from p4 Please look over your own charts to see if you can find places where the gap trade technique could have beenused Send me a sample when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 001925

Hello Gordon this is my chart with a gap trade RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 065538

Hello TradersZone Thursday April 08 2000 121925 PM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt this is my chart with a gap trade TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Good examplethe gap trade technique shines when an issue in at or near a P5 Similar to the one on thechart you sent Heres another trading signal tool Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Dr Andrews used several techniques which helped him determine whether a P5 was near at hand Youllrecall that he observed most price moves ended or had a significant reversal at a P5 This technique uses alternate closing prices after a P4 has been formed As with many of his studies thenumber 5 is used The chart accompanying this segment shows that there were 5 alternate closes to thedownside after P4 was put in Dr Andrews noted that whenever 5 or more alternate closes followed a P4 theprobabilities were high that a P5 was near at hand An added feature to this chart study is the sideways channel Notice how the 2nd target price and the 5thalternate close nearly coincide

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 12 April 2000 200730

Hello Gordon This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 13 April 2000 082418

Monday April 12 2000 80730 AM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hello TradersZone Good chart example of this Andrews toolanother of his very unusual observations that workmore often than not Heres the final part of this lesson Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom In this trendline method Dr Andrews once again used the number 5 as the basis for locating aprobable reversal area He found this technique to be especially useful whenever a clear orobvious pivot count didnt show up onthe price move under study Trendlines are drawn using the course trendline method When the 5th trendline is broken theprobability is high that the trend under study has ended A mini-median line pitchfork andorsliding parallel could be used for pricing a trading order The accompanying chart of Compaq Computer is an example of how the trendline study could beused The pivot count beginning at the October low is difficult to nail down There were severalsmall areas of congestion but no sizeable corrections while prices advanced The count wasunclear By following the price action using the course trendline technique however the traderwould have been alerted to the possibility of a change of trend when the 5th trendline was brokenin early February Try this technique on your own charts When youre ready please send me an example of yourstudy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 19 April 2000 124108

Hello Gordon this is my example with 5 trendlines RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[6] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 20 April 2000 012726

Monday April 19 2000 124108 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt this is my example with 5 trendlines

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Good example of the 5 TL technique Always reminds me of how the fairly simple tools often do a better job than manyof the sophisticated studies out there

That was the last part of lesson 5 Lesson 6 attached is made in one mailing Youll find Dr Andrews trading rules alongwith a wrap-up review which uses several of his rules You might have questions about some of the rules so feel free tosend them as they arise

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Dr Andrews had an abbreviated set of trading rules on several index cards that he carried around with him in his shirtpocket He said every trading day turned up something new on his charts and by having his rules in his pocket he wasreminded of the need for a methodical approach to his analysis Quite a comment coming from the man who wrote therule book

In this the final lesson of the course Dr Andrews original trading rules and observations are presented Lets work witha few of them at this point

Using charts of issues you follow please send me an example that illustrates your interpretation of each of the followingrules

Rule 4 Anticipating major Ps

Rule 7 Penetration rule

Rule 8 Price failure rule

Rule 11 1-ML23 AR Centerline

Rule 12 Sliding Parallel rule

Rule 15 Mini-median line parallel to buy or sell

Feel free to include any other course techniques you choose to apply but please include examples of the above as aminimum Use more than one technique on a chart if your analysis supports it Send as many charts as you like alongwith your questionscomments

Lesson 6 - Dr Andrews Trading Rules

This lesson covers course rules and significant observations as taught by Dr Andrews in his original trading course Therules are those that he used in his own trading and are provided to serve as a checklist for use with the course tradingmethods youve learned

Rule 1 Where prices are always headed Rule You course members are among the fortunate few to be able to draw astraight line and know that prices are headed toward that ML Very few investors have ever applied this ML principle ofstatistics to price fluctuations and weve never seen this in any books on investment You are among the very few who

know that prices are always headed toward the newest ML

Rule 2 The Rule of coming opposites applies all through life In the bible we find Blessed at they that mourn for theyshall be comforted As investors we know that any losses can be recovered by using course methods

Rule 3 Turn your mind about or Rethink for all good is at hand We should mentally prepare ourselves for thecoming reversal in prices and other affairs Heres one way for example that you course members who know the MLrules can use When prices are skyrocketing upward we do this preparation by thinking If prices pivoted here today atthis price Id draw a new ML bisecting the distance between todays price and the price from which the rise started Andwe know now that if this is a Major Pivot prices will fall rapidly to this new ML Profits from such drops are big and quick

Rule 4 Rule for anticipating major Ps If during congestion or after a rally or decline you can count four previous Psthe fifth one is highly probable to be the one from which a new trend starts

Rule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can make a quick big profit is to watch for the EPformations

Rule 6 The other reversal rule is that prices tend to reverse at or near any ML as well as at any extension of each MLAnd also at any MLH or extensions of MLH

Rule 7 The Penetration Rule is that whenever prices gap past or plunge through any ML there is a high probability thatthey will quickly return to it temporarily and then resume the trend they had before they gapped or plunged through

Rule 8 Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P of reversal and the MLthe probability is that this price reversal will go further than it did on its approach toward the ML

Rule 9 The price failure rule is negated when the next price trend is also a failure in reaching the ML This is almostinvariably a signal of a big fast move in the direction indicated by this last space Rule 10 When alternate median lines of comparable length slope in the same direction the trend is firm and rapidprice changes take place

Rule 11 When 1-ML23 is exactly reached at P4 it can be used as a highly reliable centerline for the AR method

Rule 12 Frequently after crossing a lower MLH prices continue to rise along the MLH Since the crossing of the MLHsignals a further drop is likely use a sliding parallel along the bottom of the most recent crossing If prices drop past thatsliding parallel line a sell signal is generated

Rule 13 MLs between P2 and P3 can start from a nearby or a remote P1 since prices tend to reverse at each of theseMLs Try several such P2-P3 MLs to discover the best fit

Rule 14 The distance of each MLH from its ML is the distance of the next warning line Use these warning lineswhenever a SH has signalled a buy or sell

Rule 15 Use the MMLH as a buy or sell signal when you expect a reversal because of a P5 Also when prices are at aWL ML extension line or where course lines converge or intersect

Rule 16 Converging lines that meet prices have shown the highest probability of a trend reversal

Rule 17 Two to four days is usually the maximum between P2 and P3 for a MML P1 can be a day or so back from P2and 3

Rule 18 The most reliable ActionReaction centerlines seem to be MPL 2P line 2 Gap line peak to low or low to peak

Rule 19 When prices pass through R lines look for a pull back and then a continuing move in the direction of the passthrough

Rule 20 Use gaps as Action lines from the centerline

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 003755

Hello Gordonhere is my example for Rule 4 And I have a question What are EP formations gtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 021242

Tuesday May 04 2000 123755 PM you wrote TZgt Hello GordonTZgt here is my example for Rule 4 TZgt And I have a question What are EP formations gtgtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegtgta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hi TradersZone Good use of the warning linesalso the EP material is part of lesson 4 Rather than go backthrough the files to see when (or if) it was sent Im sending it along with this reply Glad youbrought it up Best RegardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Tuesday May 04 2000208 PM Dr Andrews used a fairly common price chart formation that he found useful at probable P5market tops and bottoms The formation generally called a wedge or pennant by chartists isreferred to in Dr Andrews trading course as the Expanding Pivot (EP) One of the few chartformations used in the course he regarded it as among the most dependable indications that amarket top was forming Closely related to the EP is his Inverted Expanding Pivot (IEP) which henoted could often be observed at market bottoms Both are regarded as intermediate and long-term reversal indicators Dr Andrews found that both formations were most reliable when they occurred after a sharprapid price move coinciding with the formation of a probable P5 He said it wasnt unusual for theformation to take several weeks to complete and that conservative traders could best avoid thewhipsaw associated with congestion patterns by trading only in the direction of the probable price

break out of the EP or IEP formation The attached charts illustrate these formations Please look over your own charts for an example ofthe EP and IEP and send me a copy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 232127

Hello Gordon Thank you for the lesson with the EP material I couldnt find it in any previous emailHere is my example for Rule 7 RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Rule 4Date Samstag 6 Mai 2000 080827

Wednesday May 05 2000 112127 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt Thank you for the lesson with the EP materialTZgt I couldnt find it in any previous emailTZgt Here is my example for Rule 7

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hi TradersZone

Glad you mentioned it earlierexcept for the EP IEP and hissideways channel Dr Andrews didnt have much to say about chartpatterns and formations These are good ones to use though

Your study of the penetration rule was good Later

Best Regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Wednesday May 05 2000801 PM

Page 11: Pitchfork primer

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Median Line TechniqueDate Sonntag 6 Februar 2000 010735

Hello TradersZone Nice work on the charts you returned Everything was by the book It appears that you have theprocedures well in hand Heres the final portion of lesson 1 The concept is basic but it does the important job of helping atrader stay on the right side of the market Will you be continuing the course Regards Gordon The first lines Dr Andrews drew on a new chart were the long-term and intermediate-term medianlines After identifying the significant pivots he drew his first median line beginning with P0-12and worked forward on the chart using each subsequent set of 3 pivots Each ML served to vectorpricesacting as a magnet if you will that drew prices towards it He said that prices will head forthe new ML over 80 of the time Parallel lines are not drawn when using this procedure Its prime function is to determine thedirection and price level of the new ML Recall that Dr Andrews anticipated a price reversal at eachnew ML The attached chart of LPX illustrates this technique Try this on some of your own charts and thenplease send me an example

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Median Line TechniqueDate Montag 7 Februar 2000 192718

I found a chart with 9 pivots I hope it doesnt matterIs it necessary that the move is made of swings with higher highs and higher lows in an uptrend (lower highs and lower lows in adowntrend)For example in the attached chart the point P6 is lower than P4 and P7 is lower than P5Another question For how long are median lines validI noticed that the P2-34 ML from my chart served as support and resistance two years later in 1998 (see attached chartLOW2GIF) but on the other hand I dont want to clutter my charts with too many lines from the past I would like to continue the course to the end I will send the money for the remaining 5 lessons tomorrow Did you receive myfirst payment yet RegardsTradersZone

LOW2GIF

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneDate Mittwoch 9 Februar 2000 054710

At 2700 72700 PM you wrotegtI found a chart with 9 pivots I hope it doesnt mattergtIs it necessary that the move is made of swings with higher highs andgthigher lows in an uptrend (lower highs and lower lows in a downtrend)gtFor example in the attached chart the point P6 is lower than P4 and P7gtis lower than P5 ( When using this ML technique TradersZone the main object is to note the price level of the newML for that is the next probable reversal area The pivots need not be in Elliott formation havingswings as you noted above Your ML procedure by the way was correct I noticed how oftenprices headed for each new ML and then reversedLater in the course well see how Dr Andrews handled those times when prices reversed beforereaching the ML area)gtAnother question For how long are median lines validgtI noticed that the P2-34 ML from my chart served as support andgtresistance two years later in 1998 (see attached chart LOW2GIF) butgton the other hand I dont want to clutter my charts with too many lines from the past (One of the interesting things about Dr Andrews lines is that no matter how far out his lines areprojected they will continue to cause prices to stall-out or reverse when reached Also wheneverseveral of his lines intersect there is a very high probability of a price reversal whether pricesconverge at the intersection or are some distancegtfrom it The probability is higher though when prices are at thegtintersecting lines A linethat has in the past provided frequent support or resistance is probably a pretty good line tokeep on your chart Youre right though charts seem to get cluttered up veryquickly)gt gtI would like to continue the course to the end I will send the moneygtfor the remaining 5 lessons tomorrow Did you receive my first payment yet (Glad to hear youre going to continue to the end Thank you for the prepayment Your first checkhasnt arrived yet will let you know when it does) Meanwhile heres the first segment of the next lesson Regards Gordon

In this lesson youll be introduced to Dr Andrews sideways count The sideways count was hisold reliable a tool that worked so well so often that it was one of the very first studies heperformed on his charts The sideways count gave him a reliable gauge that told him ahead of timehow far a stock or commodity was likely to move Sounds too good to be true perhaps but as youwork with the sideways count youll discover for yourself how often the projected price targetsare reachedoften within tics Markets frequently spend a lot of time in congestion Heres Dr Andrews way to use thatcongestion to our advantage Looking at the Brightpoint attachment please note the channel lines starting in January Youll seethat most of the pivots from Jan-May were within this channel Now look at where Ive placedcircles At each point where prices touched a channel line and then reversed direction and went allthe way back to touch the opposite channel line a circle was drawn Put another way if pricestouch one channel line but then dont go all the way back to touch the opposite channel line acircle is not drawn At first glance this technique can often be unclear so well pause here for some chart work Pleasee-mail me a chart that shows where youve drawn channel lines to identify sideways price actionand also where youve placed the channel line circles

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject ReDate Mittwoch 9 Februar 2000 184837

gtAt each point where prices touched a channel line and then reversedgtdirection and went all the way back to touch the opposite channel linegta circle was drawn Put another way if prices touch one channel linegtbut then dont go all the way back to touch the opposite channel linegta circle is not drawn Shouldnt the last circle on your Brightpoint chart be left outThe price didnt return to the opposite channel line after that day This is my chart

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Thanks for the questionDate Mittwoch 9 Februar 2000 231437

At 2900 64800 PM you wrotegtShouldnt the last circle on your Brightpoint chart be left outgtThe price didnt return to the opposite channel line after that day Hello TradersZone The last circle is appropriate but I can see where the wording in the explanation is confusing Ihave changed that paragraph to read Looking at the Brightpoint attachment please note the channel lines starting in January Youll seethat most of the pivots from Jan- May were within this channel Now look at where the circles wereplaced on the channel lines They are in alternate sequenceNote that each circle was drawn only after prices had first been at the opposite channel lineTheBrightpoint chart illustrates this procedure Thanks for pointing this out TradersZone If the wording is still unclear to you Id appreciate yourinput Meanwhile heres the next segment of this lessonRegards Gordon Well continue to use the Brightpoint chart for this portion of the sideways count study To reviewthe pattern were looking for should be a recent rectangular shaped sideways trading range thatcontains most if not all of the congestion price action Take a look at the attached chart and notehow well defined the price channel for Brightpoint is Youll probably notice that it is deeper thanthe channel you studied on the chart in the preceding segment This comparison is made toillustrate that while the first channel example covers a longer period of time the second includesall of the price ranges and is the preferred method Please look at where the circles were placed on the channel lines To review a new circle is drawnonly after prices have first been at the opposite channel line Recall that circles must be inalternate sequence eg upper linelower lineupper linelower line etc one circle at a time Note that the price range within the channel is $4 34 (High 21 12 Low 16 34) There were twocircles drawn on the lower line of our sideways channel before prices broke down Using thatinformation our next step will be to use some simple arithmetic in order to come up with twodownside price targets Well cover that procedure in the next segment Please let me know whenyou are ready to continue

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Sideways countDate Mittwoch 9 Februar 2000 232315Attachments image001png

Hi TradersZone Im returning your chartplease note comments GordonRegards Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Thanks for the questionDate Donnerstag 10 Februar 2000 233059

Hello Gordonthank you Im ready for the next lesson

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next partDate Donnerstag 10 Februar 2000 235613

At 21000 113000 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongtthank you Im ready for the next lessongt gt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt gt gt TradersZoneI sent this yesterday but will re-send It was part of my reply to your questionregarding the circle I dont have a record of your return chartwork for this part If its a duplicatesend sorry Regards Gordon Well continue to use the Brightpoint chart for this portion of the sideways count study To reviewthe pattern were looking for should be a recent rectangular shaped sideways trading range thatcontains most if not all of the congestion price action Take a look at the attached chart and notehow well defined the price channel for Brightpoint is Youll probably notice that it is deeper thanthe channel you studied on the chart in the preceding segment This comparison is made toillustrate that while the first channel example covers a longer period of time the second includesall of the price ranges and is the preferred method Please look at where the circles were placed on the channel lines To review a new circle is drawnonly after prices have first been at the opposite channel line Recall that circles must be inalternate sequence eg upper linelower lineupper linelower line etc one circle at a time Note that the price range within the channel is $4 34 (High 21 12 Low 16 34) There were twocircles drawn on the lower line of our sideways channel before prices broke down Using thatinformation our next step will be to use some simple arithmetic in order to come up with twodownside price targets Well cover that procedure in the next segment Please let me know whenyou are ready to continue

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next partDate Freitag 11 Februar 2000 234113

I think the placement of the circles is clear to me nowI have attached another chart with a sideways count RegardsTradersZone gtTradersZoneI sent this yesterday but will re-send It was part ofgtmy reply to your question regarding the circle I dont have a recordgtof your return chartwork for this part If its a duplicate send sorry

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject SidewaysDate Montag 14 Februar 2000 054227

At 21100 114100 PM you wrotegtI think the placement of the circles is clear to me nowgtI have attached another chart with a sideways countgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone Your chart was on target Looks like youre ready for the next part Here it is Regards Gordon During this segment youll learn how to arrive at two price targets using Dr Andrews sidewayscount Simple arithmetic is all thats required once the sideways channel and circles are in place Well continue to use the Brightpoint chart which is attached Note that Brightpoint fell throughthe bottom channel line at the point where we placed our second circle so figuring out possibledownside targets would have been in order at that time Heres how thats done 1 Determine the price range of the channel In this case the range is $4 34 (21 12 - 16 34) 2 Count the number of circles on the lower channel line The lower line is used in this casebecause thats the line that didnt hold Prices went through it returned to check it out and thencontinued lower 3 Multiply the price range of the channel times the number of circles drawn on the lower channelline (4 34 x 2 = 9 12) 4 Subtract that figure from the upper channel line priceThe result becomes downside price target 1 (21 12 - 9 12 = 12) 5 Next subtract that same figure from the price at the lower channel line Thats price target 2(16 34 - 9 12 = 7 14)

In the case of an upside channel breakout the procedure is reversed Please draw a few channelsand figure out some downside targets on your own charts When youre ready send me two orthree examples of your work As always send your questions as they arise

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re SidewaysDate Montag 14 Februar 2000 134314

Here are my examples I couldnt find enough charts with downside targets so I included some charts with upside targets Do the channel lines always have to be horizontal When I look at my charts I find more channels with an upward slope or adownward slope RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Sideways channelsDate Freitag 18 Februar 2000 005531

At 21400 14300 PM you wrotegtHere are my examples I couldnt find enough charts with downsidegttargets so I included some charts with upside targetsgt gtDo the channel lines always have to be horizontal When I look at mygtcharts I find more channels with an upward slope or a downward slopegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone The sideways method can be used with either up or down Sorry didnt mean to imply that only downsidetargets should be found Ill reword that portion of the lesson Thanks for mentioning it Dr Andrews sideways method works only on horizontal channels Others have mentioned the slopingchannels also and have wondered if there is some method to use with them I know of none Ive askedother course members for their ideas on how to approach this problem but so far no one has come up with amethod I would think that there should be a solution but have not personally taken the time to research itIf some method could be found that works as often as the Andrews sideways count it would be a significantfind The Andrews sideways count doesnt always hit the targets as you saw on your chart of Bausch amp Lomb Itworks more often than not though and it still amazes me at how often prices reach the targets Heres an observation to keep in mind Quite often after the first target is reached prices will reverse andhead back towards the channel At times youll note that they return inside the channel They will thenreverse again and head back towards the second price target These reversals happen frequently and presenttrading opportunities Im including the final segment of this lesson Regards Gordon So far in the course youve learned about Dr Andrews pivot counting procedure pitchfork and sidewayscount Youve noticed by now how often prices change trend at a P5 Youve seen how the 0-34 ML methodcan help locate the probable P5 area Youve seen how often price targets are met using the sideways countmethod The tendency for prices to reverse at a median line should be recognized as a high probability eventas well In coming lessons youll be shown how Dr Andrews used these and other high probability events totrade the stock and commodity markets The tools and techniques he used will help you put the finishingtouches on your market analysis using Andrews lines

Before continuing on to the next lesson lets briefly review what has so far been covered The attached chartprovides an opportunity to illustrate the methods referred to above Please draw these methods on thechart and return to me

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Sideways channelsDate Montag 21 Februar 2000 193743

gtBefore continuing on to the next lesson lets briefly review what hasgtso far been covered The attached chart provides an opportunity togtillustrate the methods referred to above Please draw these methods ongtthe chart and return to me Hello Gordonhere is my chart RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next lesson attachedDate Mittwoch 23 Februar 2000 014539

At 22100 73700 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongthere is my chartgt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Good job on the pivots sideways count and pitchforkLooks like youre ready to move on to the next part It wont be long and things will begin to fall inplace Regards Gordon Lesson 4 continued In one of his course letters Dr Andrews wrote The Law of Physics stated by Newton that Actionand Reaction are equal and opposite was first applied to prices by your Course Directors friendthe late Roger Babson who attributed his earnings of several million dollars to this law Beginning with this segment of lesson four and continuing in lesson five youll learn how to drawand apply the ActionReaction trading method as taught by Dr Andrews in his trading course The AR method requires a centerline or CL from which to start The CL can be any of thefollowing - MPL - ML - MLH - 2P line - 2 Gap line - Peak to low line - Low to peak lineThese are the primary lines that Dr Andrews used He stressed that some pencil work and a goodeyeball was needed in order to find the best fitting CL As with most other chart lines somework better than others The task is to find the best fit as he put it You will be shown examples of

each of the above CLs in this lesson and the next Determining which of the above listed lines to use as the CL is the first step in the ActionReactionmethod The solution often presents itself With a little practice a quick scan of the chart understudy will be all thats needed to spot the most likely CL Well begin with the attached chart Notethe CL drawn In this example a MPL (multi-pivot line) was used as the CL A MPL is a straightline that connects three or more consecutive pivots without passing through prices Theconnecting line is then extended Ive circled the three pivots that form the MPL on the chartThere are several other places on our chart where a MPL CL can be drawn Please bear in mindthat this is just the first step of the process Identification of likely CLs is all were after here Seeif you can locate two more then draw them in and send the chart back to me Well take up fromthere

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next lesson attachedDate Mittwoch 23 Februar 2000 212304

gtLesson 4 continuedgt gtIn one of his course letters Dr Andrews wrote The Law of Physicsgtstated by Newton that Action and Reaction are equal and opposite wasgtfirst applied to prices by your Course Directors friend the lategtRoger Babson who attributed his earnings of several million dollars to this lawgt gtBeginning with this segment of lesson four and continuing in lessongtfive youll learn how to draw and apply the ActionReaction tradinggtmethod as taught by Dr Andrews in his trading coursegt gtThe AR method requires a centerline or CL from which to startgtThe CL can be any of the followinggt - MPLgt - MLgt - MLHgt - 2P linegt - 2 Gap linegt - Peak to low linegt - Low to peak line Hello Gordon2P line 2 Gap line Peak to low line Low to peak line ndash actually I dont know what these lines areAre they discussed in Lesson 3 I believe you havenrsquot sent me this lesson yetAnyway I found two more MPLs on the Novellus Chart and drew them in RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Lesson 3Date Mittwoch 23 Februar 2000 235958

At 22300 92300 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt2P line 2 Gap line Peak to low line Low to peak line - actually I dont knowgtwhat these lines are Are they discussed in Lesson 3 I believe you didntgtsent me this lesson yetgtAnyway I found two more MPLs on the Novellus Chart and drew them ingt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone My apologiesI sent you an outdated version of the lesson Thanks for letting me know Musthave been my bedtime Heres the correct version Regards Gordon Lesson 3 In one of his course letters Dr Andrews wrote The Law of Physics stated by Newton that Actionand Reaction are equal and opposite was first applied to prices by your Course Directors friendthe late Roger Babson who attributed his earnings of several million dollars to this law In this lesson youll be introduced to the ActionReaction trading method as taught by Dr Andrewsin his trading course The AR method requires a centerline or CL from which to start The CL can be any of thefollowing - MPL Multi-pivot line A line drawn across 3 or more pivots - ML Median line The middle line of the pitchfork - MLH Median line parallel Either parallel line of the pitchfork - 2P line A line drawn across 2 pivots - 2 Gap line A line drawn connecting 2 gaps without touching prices in between - Peak to low line A line drawn connecting the high and low of a price leg

- Low to peak line A line drawn connecting the low and high of a price leg These are the primary lines that Dr Andrews used He stressed that some pencil work and a goodeyeball was needed in order to find the best fitting CL As with most other chart lines somework better than others The task is to find the best fit as he put it You will be shown examples ofeach of the above CLs Determining which of the above listed lines to use as the CL is the first step in the ActionReactionmethod With practice a quick view of the chart under study will be all thats needed to spot themost likely CL Youll be shown later how to experiment with possible combinations in order tofind the centerline that is most in tune with the market under study Well begin with the attached chart Note the CL drawn In this example a MPL (multi-pivot line)was used as the CL A MPL is a straight line that connects three or more consecutive pivotswithout passing through prices The connecting line is then extended Ive circled the three pivotsthat form the MPL on the chart There are several other places on our chart where a MPL CL canbe drawn Please bear in mind that this is just the first step of the process Identification of likelyCLs is all were after here See if you can locate two more then draw them in and send the chartback to me

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Donnerstag 24 Februar 2000 025105

At 22300 92300 PM you wroteI found two more MPLs on the Novellus Chart and drew them ingt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your mpls were correct This next segment shows the purpose of the centerline and how it isused Your payment in full arrived today TradersZone Thank you Regards Gordon Lesson 3 continued Please refer to the attached chart of Novellus The line drawn connecting the 3 circled pivots is amulti-pivot line (MPL) and represents the centerline (CL) well be using in this example Recall inthe previous segment that several types of centerlines are possible The choice is determined byexperimenting with the potential combinations on the chart under study Its best to try to locate acenterline somewhere close to the middle of the price chart in order to have sufficient past andforward data to use with the study This will become clear as you work with the method Once the centerline is drawn the next step is to locate a previous low or high pivot point to use fordrawing an action line Dr Andrews observed that the low pivot points often seem to work bestbut that either could be used In our example a line starting at the previous significant low wasdrawn parallel to the CL It is labeled A-1 (Action line 1) because it represents the first actionline Dr Andrews called it an action line because it was drawn as a result of a previous pivot (pricereversal) that had taken place Next a parallel line was drawn to the right of the CL and labeled R-1 Notice that it is the same distance from the CL as the corresponding A-1 line It is labeled R-1because it represents the first reaction line a line where prices are likely to stop or reverseNotice how prices reacted at the R-1 line in early 98 That serves as an indication that thecenterline chosen for this study should be a good one to use Not all reaction lines cause such aclear reversal as the R1 on this chart but many do Thats why its important to experiment withvarious centerline possibilities in order to find action lines that produce reaction lines which createthe greatest number of pivots or price stall-outs This experimentation is often quite time

consuming but experience has shown that it is time well spent When a centerline is found that isin tune with the price action of the issue under study it can be a highly effective tool for use inlocating probable reversal areas When combined with pitchfork lines the AR method can pinpointpotential reversal areas that are generally not recognized as such by others Dr Andrewstechniques for using the pitchfork and AR lines together are covered in later lessons In coming segments well study other lines that Dr Andrews used for his centerlines In themeantime experiment with the multi-pivot centerline on your own charts Then please send mean example of your work along with any questions you may have

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Freitag 25 Februar 2000 211356

gtIn the meantime experiment with the multi-pivot centerline on your owngtcharts Then please send me an example of your work along with anygtquestions you may have Hello Gordon I was wondering how many ActionReaction lines could be drawn on a chart On my attached chart I found at least 6 parallellines which had a significant meaning for the price RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject AR linesDate Montag 28 Februar 2000 080128

gtHello Gordongt gtI was wondering how many ActionReaction lines could be drawn on agtchart On my attached chart I found at least 6 parallel lines which hadgta significant meaning for the pricegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hi TradersZone Theres no set number of lines that can be drawnactually the more you can find the betterFinding a good centerline is the key And once you find lines that work such as you did anynumber of parallel lines can be drawn You are doing exactly what Dr Andrews didtaking thetime and effort to find the best fitting sets of lines Each chart has them and each chart is differentas Im sure youve found Nice work Heres the next part Regards Gordon Lesson 3 continued One of Dr Andrews favorite techniques dealt with gapsan often times perplexing price event formany traders His observations over the years suggested to him that while gaps show upfrequently on many price charts few traders have a method for including them as an integral partof their chart analysis Thats not surprising since not much has been published about how toapproach the use of gaps in a trading method Dr Andrews however found several ways to putprice gaps to good use An ActionReaction centerline which uses gaps as its basis is one suchmethod Please refer to the attached chart of Cendant Youll see that a centerline was drawn which passedthrough the July gap Note that it also came in contact with several pivots thereby qualifying as agapmulti-pivot centerline It is drawn by starting at the April low pivot and extending a line acrossand through the gap in mid-July It subsequently touches two additional high pivots Dr Andrews counted each gap as two pivots He noted that the more pivots a line touched the

stronger the line tended to be in the future Good reason then for using the July gap as the basisfor an ActionReaction study Our CL is labelled a gap-mpl-CL The May 98 high was used for the Action Line starting point A line was then drawn parallel to theCenterline as per ActionReaction procedure The corresponding Reaction Line was then drawn inIf this particular study had been drawn on Cendants chart right after the July gap was put in thepotential for prices to go all the way down to the Reaction Line might have seemed very slim at thetime Notice however that prices reached the Reaction Line in early September Youll see thishappen time and again as you work with the AR method The core of its effectiveness is a strongCL Please send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts of your choice

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re AR linesDate Montag 28 Februar 2000 155937

gtPlease send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts of yourgtchoice Hello Gordonhere are my examples RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject More on the ARDate Donnerstag 2 Maumlrz 2000 071158

At 22800 35900 PM you wrotegtgtPlease send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts ofgtgtyour choicegt gtHello Gordongthere are my examplesgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone You picked some good examples to use for your AR study Both showed the potential power of thismethod Takes time and lots of chart study sometimes to find the best set of lines but the rewardscan be many Heres something else to look at Regards Gordon The ActionReaction technique requires a strong centerline from which to begin The key todeciding which set of pivots to use for the centerline is found through experimenting with thevarious configurations visible on the chart under study The centerline might be a series of gapspivots an existing median line or any of Dr Andrews lines The task is to search for that centerlinewhich shows the greatest potential for projecting price reversal areas Dr Andrews did that byfinding a likely centerline near the middle of his price chart That allowed him to use any of theprevious pivots for his action lines By experimenting he found reaction lines that did the best jobof pegging reversal areas at data points located forward of the centerline Reaction lines are equal and opposite of the action lines and serve to project price levels at whicha reversal can be expected That is why the task of seeking out the best centerline is so importantDr Andrews reasoned that a series of reaction lines which have pegged price reversals in the pastis likely to continue to be in tune with current and future market price action Having severalprevious pivots to use as anchors for drawing action lines is thus essential The attached chart of Lattice illustrates this concept Please bear in mind that the gapmplcenterline is not the only centerline one could use on this chart You might want to study the chartfor other AR possibilities Try a peak-to-peak CL or a multi-pivot CL Send me your studies along

with any questions

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re More on the ARDate Samstag 4 Maumlrz 2000 002521

gtThe attached chart of Lattice illustrates this conceptgtPlease bear in mind that the gapmpl centerline is not the onlygtcenterline one could use on this chartgtYou might want to study the chart for other AR possibilitiesgtTry a peak-to-peak CL or a multi-pivot CL Send me your studiesgtalong with any questions Hello Gordonhere is my chart RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Peak to peak clDate Sonntag 5 Maumlrz 2000 064107

At 3400 122500 AM you wrotegtHello Gordongthere is my chartgt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Looks like you have the concept down Takes time and a lot of chart work to find the bestcenterline When the reaction lines dont seem to peg reversal areas chances are the centerline isnot the one that is best in tune with the price action of the issue under studyDespite the time required for this method it was one of Dr Andrews stand-bysAR lines could befound on most of his charts Im sending a chart with an example of a peak-to-peak CL Regards Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Peak to peak clDate Sonntag 5 Maumlrz 2000 171232

Hello Gordon I think the peak-to-peak CL on the last chart I sent to you was not really drawn from peak to peakIm sending another example RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next LessonDate Mittwoch 8 Maumlrz 2000 072526

At 3500 51200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtI think the peak-to-peak CL on the last chart I sent to you was notgtreally drawn from peak to peakgtIm sending another examplegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your peak to peak cl example was correctly drawn Thats a fairly simple approach but quite oftenthe peak to peak yields better reaction lines Heres the first part of the next lesson Regards Gordon Youll find times when prices dont quite reach the ML but instead drift alongside or away from itThe Schiff ML was designed to be used in place of the regular ML whenever that happens Suchprice action can be found at any place on a chart but most frequently occurs after a sharp sell-offor run-up of prices Dr Andrews also used the Schiff ML whenever his regular ML sloped at an unusually steep angleHe said it helped smooth out irregular price action such as that caused by unexpected earningsnews crop planting delays or poor growing conditions crop production reports etc Youll findnearly vertical price moves over a short period of time on many charts The Schiff ML method helpsput things back in perspective when that happens Well use the chart of Sterling Bancorp as an example of prices drifting away from the regular MLThat ML is drawn in black Prices didnt quite reach the ML but drifted alongside and eventuallyaway from it The Schiff ML and parallel lines are drawn in red Notice how prices were containedwithin the Schiff pitchfork until they finally broke down at the upper parallel line The procedure for drawing the Schiff ML is the same as for the regular ML except the startingpoint is located midway between the first 2 pivots youll be using The Sterling Bancorp chart

illustrates how this is done Dr Andrews also suggested using the Schiff ML whenever the regular ML method doesnt seem tobe in sync with price action Practice this procedure on your own charts and send a couple examples when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next LessonDate Donnerstag 9 Maumlrz 2000 001143

Hello Gordon in my charting software (Dynamic Trader) the Schiff ML is drawn by finding the midpoint of the line between pivot A and pivot Bmoving this point horizontally to directly above or below (depending on whether A is a low or high pivot) the A pivot anddrawing a line from his point through the midpoint of the BC swingAre there different methods of drawing a Schiff MLI was too lazy to draw Schiff MLs by hand with the method you described so Im sending my examples with the Dynamic TraderSchiff MLs -) RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject SchiffDate Samstag 11 Maumlrz 2000 070226

At 3900 121100 AM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtin my charting software (Dynamic Trader) the Schiff ML is drawn bygtfinding the midpoint of the line between pivot A and pivot B movinggtthis point horizontally to directly above or below (depending ongtwhether A is a low or high pivot) the A pivot and drawing a linegtgtfrom his point through the midpoint of the BC swinggtAre there different methods of drawing a Schiff MLgtI was too lazy to draw Schiff MLs by hand with the method yougtdescribed so Im sending my examples with the Dynamic Trader Schiff MLs -)gt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your program Schiff line procedure is fineits actually what Dr Andrews called a modified schiff ml and is onlyslightly different than the one I sent you initially The one you used is preferred by most course members Im sendingthe modified Schiff lesson and a chart along with this email The chart example shows how to use it with 0-34 pivots Regards Gordon

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Sliding Parallel LineDate Montag 13 Maumlrz 2000 005252

Hello TradersZone Heres one of the tools Dr Andrews used most often when entering exiting or reversing marketpositions Not many people know about this technique Regards Gordon The Sliding Parallel (SH) is drawn whenever prices cross an Andrews line and then move along itFor example if the bottom of a daily price bar range drops through a lower parallel line of apitchfork a new parallel line is then drawn from that low and extended to the right If the nextdays price bar drops through that sliding parallel line a sell signal is generated Whenever price action dictates a sliding parallel the next step is to draw a Warning Line Thewarning line is an additional parallel line that is an image extension of the original pitchforkchannels It serves as a warning that if prices penetrate the sliding parallel the next likely target isthe WL The attached chart of Avis illustrates these procedures Please try these on your own charts andsend me an example

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Sliding Parallel LineDate Dienstag 14 Maumlrz 2000 225737

Hello Gordon this is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning line RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 065606

At 31400 105700 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtthis is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning linegt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone Your chart of circuit city was a good example for this study I may have mentioned it earlier but DrAndrews used this technique on a regular basis The next part of this lesson covers another of hisfavorite tools the mini-median line pitchfork Here it is Regards Gordon The Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry and exit tools Though mostoften drawn using alternate closing prices alternate highs and lows can also be usedin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days is usually the maximumbetween pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or more back from P2 Dr Andrews used Mini-Median Line pitchforks for buy and sell signals whenever he expected areversal Some examples include a probable P5 or when prices are at a Warning Line ML MLHmajor ML extension or a sideways channel price target When prices cross the Mini-Median LineParallel (MMLH) a sliding parallel (SH) is used for order entry

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 231537

gtThe Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry andgtexit tools Though most often drawn using alternate closing pricesgtalternate highs and lows can also be usedgtin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days isgtusually the maximum between pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or moregtback from P2

Hello Gordon

wouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timingCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available whenDr Andrews was alive

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject intraday chartsDate Samstag 18 Maumlrz 2000 012400

At 31600 111500 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongtgtwouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsgtinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timinggtCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available when DrgtAndrews was alivegtgtRegardsgtTradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Youre absolutely correctintraday charts were not available when DrAndrews was a trader

Im reading between the lines here but if you plan to day-trade using the course techniques ie thepitchfork then I agree that the regular pitchfork would be more useful on intraday charts Otherwisewhipsaw would be a significant problem Please get back to me if I didnt address your questionbecause this is a very important technique The mini-median line pitchfork and sliding parallel showedup on most of Dr Andrews charts

Regards

Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re intraday chartsDate Dienstag 21 Maumlrz 2000 220322

Hello Gordon

You are right Im planning to daytrade SampP futures using the course techniques among other things

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 003408

Hi TradersZone Here are a couple Andrews techniques that will help anticipate the breakout direction of asideways channelThey work often enough to warrant keep handy Regards Gordon In an earlier lesson you were introduced to Dr Andrews sideways count You saw how frequentlythe sideways count method provided high probability price objectives after the breakout from theestablished channel took place In this segment of lesson 4 youll be shown 2 congestion area techniques that can help youdetermine the probable sideways channel price breakout direction Both rely on the use of pivots The first uses the pivot points that are circled on a sideways channel Dr Andrews observed thatwhenever a sideways channel results in at least 5 circle contacts the eventual price breakoutwould very often be in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle If circle 5 is at thetop of the channel for example the eventual price breakout would likely be to the upside If circle5 is at the bottom of the channel look for a downside breakout Dr Andrews noted that thistechnique can be subject to false breakouts but that such breakouts are usually followed shortlyafter with a confirmed breakout in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle Heemphasized that this study is best considered as a rule of thumb observation He viewed it as asupporting indicator for use with a short-term pitchfork as prices approached a channel line There are 2 charts attached that show how this works

The second technique in this part of lesson 4 deals with a sideways channelthat is building shortly after a P3 has been formed Dr Andrews noted thatwhenever that happened the probabilities were high that prices wouldbreakout in the same direction they were moving prior to the formation ofthe sideways channel The attached P3 to sideways example chart shows thisprocedure

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 205235

Hello Gordon here is my example for the 5 circle sideways count RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Lesson 5Date Montag 27 Maumlrz 2000 060731

At 32400 85200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my example for the 5 circle sideways countgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt gt Hi TradersZone Good example of the 5th circle tendency to predict the direction of a sideways breakout Any luckfinding a chart showing the P3 to sideways rule Im sending the first part of the next lesson This trendline method is a useful tool with all of DrAndrews course lines He used it all the time but especially when looking for confirmation of othercourse method trading signals Regards Gordon The Course Trendline__________________________________________________________ Next well discuss the trendline Seasoned traders agree that the trendline is one of their mostimportant tools No matter what kind of trading program or technique they use the trendline on achart is a must But one of the biggest mistakes made by amateurs and professionals alike isinconsistently drawing or defining the trendline Dr Andrews trendline procedure is simpleconsistent and accurate It works extremely well with the pivot count and with the pitchfork For an uptrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the lowest low up and to thehighest minor low point preceding the highest high The line must not pass through prices inbetween the two low points Extend the line(Attached chart of Brightpoint) For a downtrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the highest high point to thelowest minor high point preceding the lowest low so that it does not pass through prices inbetween the two high points Extend the line (Brightpoint chart) Thats all theres to it Its simple consistent and it works well with other Andrews lines It also

helps eliminate personal bias and haphazard analysis Practice drawing these trendlines on your own charts Send me any questions you might have andthen e-mail a chart of your choosing which shows at least two uptrend and two downtrend linesthat youve drawn_______________________________________________________________________

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Lesson 5Date Dienstag 28 Maumlrz 2000 120224

Hello Gordon here is my chart with trendlinesWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going above the trendline again should I draw a new trendline anddelete the old one Attached is another chart with the P3 to sideways rule I finally found an example for it RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Price failure techniqueDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081412

At 32800 120200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my chart with trendlinesgtWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going abovegtthe trendline again should I draw a new trendline and delete the oldgtone Hi TradersZone Take a look at the chart Im returningI added some lines for you to considerWith the course trendline once its broken a new one should be started Theres a technique thatties in with this coming up soon Meanwhile heres an important technique to work on It deals with those times when prices dontreach the ML Regards Gordon Dr Andrews Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P ofreversaland the ML the probability is that this price reversal will go further thanitdid on its approach toward the ML (Extract of original course material) A price failure very often indicates a sizeable reversal will take placeThepitchforks drawn on the chart of Home Depot illustrate the concept of pricefailure Dr Andrews routinely drew a new pitchfork on his chart after a newsignificant pivot had formed He knew that prices had a high probability ofreaching the new ML before stalling out or reversing If prices reversedbeforereaching the ML thereby forming a new pivot he termed it a price failureTheunderlying idea here is that Dr Andrews fully anticipated his median linewouldact as a price magnet To conclude that a price reversal resulted in a price failure Dr Andrewsused

these primary signalsa subsequent price penetration of a short-termmulti-pivotline andor a return of prices to and penetration of the parallel lineformed atpivot 3 of the pitchfork (The circles on the Home Depot chart denote theparallelline penetration signal To avoid clutter the mpl lines were not drawn) One possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart of ConsecoIncLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me a copy

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject ChartDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081800Attachments image002png

Hi TradersZone Forgot the chart Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Price failure techniqueDate Samstag 1 April 2000 201000

gtOne possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart ofgtConseco IncgtLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me agtcopy Hi Gordon here are my charts with price failures RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Mittwoch 5 April 2000 235624

Hi TradersZone Good price failure examples you sentany comments or questions about it Heres the next partanother old standby Dr Andrews kept handy Regards Gordon In this segment youll learn how to use the Fan line Technique To draw the fan lines youll apply the coursetrendline method which was introduced in an earlier lesson It might be well to emphasize that the practicalapplication of the course trendline method requires practice and experience both of which will serve youwell in this technique Dr Andrews used fan lines as an adjunct to his pitchfork sideways channel andactionreaction methods In the fan line study three trendlines are drawn from the original reversal pivot of the price correction understudy typically a P0 or a P5 Youll notice on the charts included with this study that each fan line is at aflatter angle than its predecessor When the third fan line is broken the rule is that the correction has endedand a new trend is under way Try this technique on some of your own charts and then please send me asample

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Donnerstag 6 April 2000 234315

Hi Gordon No I dont have any specific question about the price failure technique I guess the next likely target after a price failure wouldbe the warning line I have attached two charts with fan linesIs it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the third fan line is broken RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Next segmentDate Freitag 7 April 2000 003312

Hello TradersZone

Tuesday April 06 2000 114315 AM you wrote

TZgt Hi Gordon

TZgt No I dont have any specific question about the price failureTZgt technique I guess the next likely target after a price failureTZgt would be the warning line

TZgt I have attached two charts with fan linesTZgt Is it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the thirdTZgt fan line is broken

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Thats right the warning line is the next price target Additionalwarning lines can be drawn if needed but usually one will do it Ifprices go through the first warning line another can be drawn butmost likely a new pitchfork could be drawn instead which would bepreferable Helps stay current with recently formed pivots

When prices break through the third fan line a buy or sell signal isgiven Not sure what you mean by fourth target fan line Im a littledense today

Your chart work was goodthis is another handy tool for spotting thehigh probability of a price reversal or trend change

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject The Gap TradeDate Freitag 7 April 2000 004858

Hello TradersZone This trading signal doesnt show up very often but past observations have shown that its well worth watching for Dr Andrews placed a lot of emphasis on the importance of price gaps something many traders overlook This is one of his gap uses Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom The Gap Trading Technique Price gaps can be a dilemma for many traders The general rule denoting market strength or weakness after ahigh volume gap often comes up short after the initial reaction is over Many gappers simply run out ofsteam A high volume gap in itself seems to offer precious little evidence that a profitable move is about toget under way Dr Andrews used price gaps somewhat differently than others He counted a gap as 2 pivots Youll see howthat works in the following technique which uses a gap to arrive at a price level for a buy or sell order Using short-term daily price pivots label the pivot immediately preceding the gap as p0 Count the gap as 2pivots labeling it p1 amp p2 After p3 has formed and prices reverse towards a short-term p4 draw a horizontalline 2 price tics or more (individual preference)to the right of p3 Enter the market only if prices reach orpenetrate that line within a few days after reversing from p4 Please look over your own charts to see if you can find places where the gap trade technique could have beenused Send me a sample when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 001925

Hello Gordon this is my chart with a gap trade RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 065538

Hello TradersZone Thursday April 08 2000 121925 PM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt this is my chart with a gap trade TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Good examplethe gap trade technique shines when an issue in at or near a P5 Similar to the one on thechart you sent Heres another trading signal tool Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Dr Andrews used several techniques which helped him determine whether a P5 was near at hand Youllrecall that he observed most price moves ended or had a significant reversal at a P5 This technique uses alternate closing prices after a P4 has been formed As with many of his studies thenumber 5 is used The chart accompanying this segment shows that there were 5 alternate closes to thedownside after P4 was put in Dr Andrews noted that whenever 5 or more alternate closes followed a P4 theprobabilities were high that a P5 was near at hand An added feature to this chart study is the sideways channel Notice how the 2nd target price and the 5thalternate close nearly coincide

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 12 April 2000 200730

Hello Gordon This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 13 April 2000 082418

Monday April 12 2000 80730 AM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hello TradersZone Good chart example of this Andrews toolanother of his very unusual observations that workmore often than not Heres the final part of this lesson Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom In this trendline method Dr Andrews once again used the number 5 as the basis for locating aprobable reversal area He found this technique to be especially useful whenever a clear orobvious pivot count didnt show up onthe price move under study Trendlines are drawn using the course trendline method When the 5th trendline is broken theprobability is high that the trend under study has ended A mini-median line pitchfork andorsliding parallel could be used for pricing a trading order The accompanying chart of Compaq Computer is an example of how the trendline study could beused The pivot count beginning at the October low is difficult to nail down There were severalsmall areas of congestion but no sizeable corrections while prices advanced The count wasunclear By following the price action using the course trendline technique however the traderwould have been alerted to the possibility of a change of trend when the 5th trendline was brokenin early February Try this technique on your own charts When youre ready please send me an example of yourstudy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 19 April 2000 124108

Hello Gordon this is my example with 5 trendlines RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[6] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 20 April 2000 012726

Monday April 19 2000 124108 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt this is my example with 5 trendlines

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Good example of the 5 TL technique Always reminds me of how the fairly simple tools often do a better job than manyof the sophisticated studies out there

That was the last part of lesson 5 Lesson 6 attached is made in one mailing Youll find Dr Andrews trading rules alongwith a wrap-up review which uses several of his rules You might have questions about some of the rules so feel free tosend them as they arise

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Dr Andrews had an abbreviated set of trading rules on several index cards that he carried around with him in his shirtpocket He said every trading day turned up something new on his charts and by having his rules in his pocket he wasreminded of the need for a methodical approach to his analysis Quite a comment coming from the man who wrote therule book

In this the final lesson of the course Dr Andrews original trading rules and observations are presented Lets work witha few of them at this point

Using charts of issues you follow please send me an example that illustrates your interpretation of each of the followingrules

Rule 4 Anticipating major Ps

Rule 7 Penetration rule

Rule 8 Price failure rule

Rule 11 1-ML23 AR Centerline

Rule 12 Sliding Parallel rule

Rule 15 Mini-median line parallel to buy or sell

Feel free to include any other course techniques you choose to apply but please include examples of the above as aminimum Use more than one technique on a chart if your analysis supports it Send as many charts as you like alongwith your questionscomments

Lesson 6 - Dr Andrews Trading Rules

This lesson covers course rules and significant observations as taught by Dr Andrews in his original trading course Therules are those that he used in his own trading and are provided to serve as a checklist for use with the course tradingmethods youve learned

Rule 1 Where prices are always headed Rule You course members are among the fortunate few to be able to draw astraight line and know that prices are headed toward that ML Very few investors have ever applied this ML principle ofstatistics to price fluctuations and weve never seen this in any books on investment You are among the very few who

know that prices are always headed toward the newest ML

Rule 2 The Rule of coming opposites applies all through life In the bible we find Blessed at they that mourn for theyshall be comforted As investors we know that any losses can be recovered by using course methods

Rule 3 Turn your mind about or Rethink for all good is at hand We should mentally prepare ourselves for thecoming reversal in prices and other affairs Heres one way for example that you course members who know the MLrules can use When prices are skyrocketing upward we do this preparation by thinking If prices pivoted here today atthis price Id draw a new ML bisecting the distance between todays price and the price from which the rise started Andwe know now that if this is a Major Pivot prices will fall rapidly to this new ML Profits from such drops are big and quick

Rule 4 Rule for anticipating major Ps If during congestion or after a rally or decline you can count four previous Psthe fifth one is highly probable to be the one from which a new trend starts

Rule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can make a quick big profit is to watch for the EPformations

Rule 6 The other reversal rule is that prices tend to reverse at or near any ML as well as at any extension of each MLAnd also at any MLH or extensions of MLH

Rule 7 The Penetration Rule is that whenever prices gap past or plunge through any ML there is a high probability thatthey will quickly return to it temporarily and then resume the trend they had before they gapped or plunged through

Rule 8 Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P of reversal and the MLthe probability is that this price reversal will go further than it did on its approach toward the ML

Rule 9 The price failure rule is negated when the next price trend is also a failure in reaching the ML This is almostinvariably a signal of a big fast move in the direction indicated by this last space Rule 10 When alternate median lines of comparable length slope in the same direction the trend is firm and rapidprice changes take place

Rule 11 When 1-ML23 is exactly reached at P4 it can be used as a highly reliable centerline for the AR method

Rule 12 Frequently after crossing a lower MLH prices continue to rise along the MLH Since the crossing of the MLHsignals a further drop is likely use a sliding parallel along the bottom of the most recent crossing If prices drop past thatsliding parallel line a sell signal is generated

Rule 13 MLs between P2 and P3 can start from a nearby or a remote P1 since prices tend to reverse at each of theseMLs Try several such P2-P3 MLs to discover the best fit

Rule 14 The distance of each MLH from its ML is the distance of the next warning line Use these warning lineswhenever a SH has signalled a buy or sell

Rule 15 Use the MMLH as a buy or sell signal when you expect a reversal because of a P5 Also when prices are at aWL ML extension line or where course lines converge or intersect

Rule 16 Converging lines that meet prices have shown the highest probability of a trend reversal

Rule 17 Two to four days is usually the maximum between P2 and P3 for a MML P1 can be a day or so back from P2and 3

Rule 18 The most reliable ActionReaction centerlines seem to be MPL 2P line 2 Gap line peak to low or low to peak

Rule 19 When prices pass through R lines look for a pull back and then a continuing move in the direction of the passthrough

Rule 20 Use gaps as Action lines from the centerline

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 003755

Hello Gordonhere is my example for Rule 4 And I have a question What are EP formations gtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 021242

Tuesday May 04 2000 123755 PM you wrote TZgt Hello GordonTZgt here is my example for Rule 4 TZgt And I have a question What are EP formations gtgtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegtgta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hi TradersZone Good use of the warning linesalso the EP material is part of lesson 4 Rather than go backthrough the files to see when (or if) it was sent Im sending it along with this reply Glad youbrought it up Best RegardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Tuesday May 04 2000208 PM Dr Andrews used a fairly common price chart formation that he found useful at probable P5market tops and bottoms The formation generally called a wedge or pennant by chartists isreferred to in Dr Andrews trading course as the Expanding Pivot (EP) One of the few chartformations used in the course he regarded it as among the most dependable indications that amarket top was forming Closely related to the EP is his Inverted Expanding Pivot (IEP) which henoted could often be observed at market bottoms Both are regarded as intermediate and long-term reversal indicators Dr Andrews found that both formations were most reliable when they occurred after a sharprapid price move coinciding with the formation of a probable P5 He said it wasnt unusual for theformation to take several weeks to complete and that conservative traders could best avoid thewhipsaw associated with congestion patterns by trading only in the direction of the probable price

break out of the EP or IEP formation The attached charts illustrate these formations Please look over your own charts for an example ofthe EP and IEP and send me a copy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 232127

Hello Gordon Thank you for the lesson with the EP material I couldnt find it in any previous emailHere is my example for Rule 7 RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Rule 4Date Samstag 6 Mai 2000 080827

Wednesday May 05 2000 112127 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt Thank you for the lesson with the EP materialTZgt I couldnt find it in any previous emailTZgt Here is my example for Rule 7

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hi TradersZone

Glad you mentioned it earlierexcept for the EP IEP and hissideways channel Dr Andrews didnt have much to say about chartpatterns and formations These are good ones to use though

Your study of the penetration rule was good Later

Best Regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Wednesday May 05 2000801 PM

Page 12: Pitchfork primer

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Median Line TechniqueDate Montag 7 Februar 2000 192718

I found a chart with 9 pivots I hope it doesnt matterIs it necessary that the move is made of swings with higher highs and higher lows in an uptrend (lower highs and lower lows in adowntrend)For example in the attached chart the point P6 is lower than P4 and P7 is lower than P5Another question For how long are median lines validI noticed that the P2-34 ML from my chart served as support and resistance two years later in 1998 (see attached chartLOW2GIF) but on the other hand I dont want to clutter my charts with too many lines from the past I would like to continue the course to the end I will send the money for the remaining 5 lessons tomorrow Did you receive myfirst payment yet RegardsTradersZone

LOW2GIF

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneDate Mittwoch 9 Februar 2000 054710

At 2700 72700 PM you wrotegtI found a chart with 9 pivots I hope it doesnt mattergtIs it necessary that the move is made of swings with higher highs andgthigher lows in an uptrend (lower highs and lower lows in a downtrend)gtFor example in the attached chart the point P6 is lower than P4 and P7gtis lower than P5 ( When using this ML technique TradersZone the main object is to note the price level of the newML for that is the next probable reversal area The pivots need not be in Elliott formation havingswings as you noted above Your ML procedure by the way was correct I noticed how oftenprices headed for each new ML and then reversedLater in the course well see how Dr Andrews handled those times when prices reversed beforereaching the ML area)gtAnother question For how long are median lines validgtI noticed that the P2-34 ML from my chart served as support andgtresistance two years later in 1998 (see attached chart LOW2GIF) butgton the other hand I dont want to clutter my charts with too many lines from the past (One of the interesting things about Dr Andrews lines is that no matter how far out his lines areprojected they will continue to cause prices to stall-out or reverse when reached Also wheneverseveral of his lines intersect there is a very high probability of a price reversal whether pricesconverge at the intersection or are some distancegtfrom it The probability is higher though when prices are at thegtintersecting lines A linethat has in the past provided frequent support or resistance is probably a pretty good line tokeep on your chart Youre right though charts seem to get cluttered up veryquickly)gt gtI would like to continue the course to the end I will send the moneygtfor the remaining 5 lessons tomorrow Did you receive my first payment yet (Glad to hear youre going to continue to the end Thank you for the prepayment Your first checkhasnt arrived yet will let you know when it does) Meanwhile heres the first segment of the next lesson Regards Gordon

In this lesson youll be introduced to Dr Andrews sideways count The sideways count was hisold reliable a tool that worked so well so often that it was one of the very first studies heperformed on his charts The sideways count gave him a reliable gauge that told him ahead of timehow far a stock or commodity was likely to move Sounds too good to be true perhaps but as youwork with the sideways count youll discover for yourself how often the projected price targetsare reachedoften within tics Markets frequently spend a lot of time in congestion Heres Dr Andrews way to use thatcongestion to our advantage Looking at the Brightpoint attachment please note the channel lines starting in January Youll seethat most of the pivots from Jan-May were within this channel Now look at where Ive placedcircles At each point where prices touched a channel line and then reversed direction and went allthe way back to touch the opposite channel line a circle was drawn Put another way if pricestouch one channel line but then dont go all the way back to touch the opposite channel line acircle is not drawn At first glance this technique can often be unclear so well pause here for some chart work Pleasee-mail me a chart that shows where youve drawn channel lines to identify sideways price actionand also where youve placed the channel line circles

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject ReDate Mittwoch 9 Februar 2000 184837

gtAt each point where prices touched a channel line and then reversedgtdirection and went all the way back to touch the opposite channel linegta circle was drawn Put another way if prices touch one channel linegtbut then dont go all the way back to touch the opposite channel linegta circle is not drawn Shouldnt the last circle on your Brightpoint chart be left outThe price didnt return to the opposite channel line after that day This is my chart

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Thanks for the questionDate Mittwoch 9 Februar 2000 231437

At 2900 64800 PM you wrotegtShouldnt the last circle on your Brightpoint chart be left outgtThe price didnt return to the opposite channel line after that day Hello TradersZone The last circle is appropriate but I can see where the wording in the explanation is confusing Ihave changed that paragraph to read Looking at the Brightpoint attachment please note the channel lines starting in January Youll seethat most of the pivots from Jan- May were within this channel Now look at where the circles wereplaced on the channel lines They are in alternate sequenceNote that each circle was drawn only after prices had first been at the opposite channel lineTheBrightpoint chart illustrates this procedure Thanks for pointing this out TradersZone If the wording is still unclear to you Id appreciate yourinput Meanwhile heres the next segment of this lessonRegards Gordon Well continue to use the Brightpoint chart for this portion of the sideways count study To reviewthe pattern were looking for should be a recent rectangular shaped sideways trading range thatcontains most if not all of the congestion price action Take a look at the attached chart and notehow well defined the price channel for Brightpoint is Youll probably notice that it is deeper thanthe channel you studied on the chart in the preceding segment This comparison is made toillustrate that while the first channel example covers a longer period of time the second includesall of the price ranges and is the preferred method Please look at where the circles were placed on the channel lines To review a new circle is drawnonly after prices have first been at the opposite channel line Recall that circles must be inalternate sequence eg upper linelower lineupper linelower line etc one circle at a time Note that the price range within the channel is $4 34 (High 21 12 Low 16 34) There were twocircles drawn on the lower line of our sideways channel before prices broke down Using thatinformation our next step will be to use some simple arithmetic in order to come up with twodownside price targets Well cover that procedure in the next segment Please let me know whenyou are ready to continue

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Sideways countDate Mittwoch 9 Februar 2000 232315Attachments image001png

Hi TradersZone Im returning your chartplease note comments GordonRegards Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Thanks for the questionDate Donnerstag 10 Februar 2000 233059

Hello Gordonthank you Im ready for the next lesson

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next partDate Donnerstag 10 Februar 2000 235613

At 21000 113000 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongtthank you Im ready for the next lessongt gt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt gt gt TradersZoneI sent this yesterday but will re-send It was part of my reply to your questionregarding the circle I dont have a record of your return chartwork for this part If its a duplicatesend sorry Regards Gordon Well continue to use the Brightpoint chart for this portion of the sideways count study To reviewthe pattern were looking for should be a recent rectangular shaped sideways trading range thatcontains most if not all of the congestion price action Take a look at the attached chart and notehow well defined the price channel for Brightpoint is Youll probably notice that it is deeper thanthe channel you studied on the chart in the preceding segment This comparison is made toillustrate that while the first channel example covers a longer period of time the second includesall of the price ranges and is the preferred method Please look at where the circles were placed on the channel lines To review a new circle is drawnonly after prices have first been at the opposite channel line Recall that circles must be inalternate sequence eg upper linelower lineupper linelower line etc one circle at a time Note that the price range within the channel is $4 34 (High 21 12 Low 16 34) There were twocircles drawn on the lower line of our sideways channel before prices broke down Using thatinformation our next step will be to use some simple arithmetic in order to come up with twodownside price targets Well cover that procedure in the next segment Please let me know whenyou are ready to continue

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next partDate Freitag 11 Februar 2000 234113

I think the placement of the circles is clear to me nowI have attached another chart with a sideways count RegardsTradersZone gtTradersZoneI sent this yesterday but will re-send It was part ofgtmy reply to your question regarding the circle I dont have a recordgtof your return chartwork for this part If its a duplicate send sorry

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject SidewaysDate Montag 14 Februar 2000 054227

At 21100 114100 PM you wrotegtI think the placement of the circles is clear to me nowgtI have attached another chart with a sideways countgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone Your chart was on target Looks like youre ready for the next part Here it is Regards Gordon During this segment youll learn how to arrive at two price targets using Dr Andrews sidewayscount Simple arithmetic is all thats required once the sideways channel and circles are in place Well continue to use the Brightpoint chart which is attached Note that Brightpoint fell throughthe bottom channel line at the point where we placed our second circle so figuring out possibledownside targets would have been in order at that time Heres how thats done 1 Determine the price range of the channel In this case the range is $4 34 (21 12 - 16 34) 2 Count the number of circles on the lower channel line The lower line is used in this casebecause thats the line that didnt hold Prices went through it returned to check it out and thencontinued lower 3 Multiply the price range of the channel times the number of circles drawn on the lower channelline (4 34 x 2 = 9 12) 4 Subtract that figure from the upper channel line priceThe result becomes downside price target 1 (21 12 - 9 12 = 12) 5 Next subtract that same figure from the price at the lower channel line Thats price target 2(16 34 - 9 12 = 7 14)

In the case of an upside channel breakout the procedure is reversed Please draw a few channelsand figure out some downside targets on your own charts When youre ready send me two orthree examples of your work As always send your questions as they arise

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re SidewaysDate Montag 14 Februar 2000 134314

Here are my examples I couldnt find enough charts with downside targets so I included some charts with upside targets Do the channel lines always have to be horizontal When I look at my charts I find more channels with an upward slope or adownward slope RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Sideways channelsDate Freitag 18 Februar 2000 005531

At 21400 14300 PM you wrotegtHere are my examples I couldnt find enough charts with downsidegttargets so I included some charts with upside targetsgt gtDo the channel lines always have to be horizontal When I look at mygtcharts I find more channels with an upward slope or a downward slopegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone The sideways method can be used with either up or down Sorry didnt mean to imply that only downsidetargets should be found Ill reword that portion of the lesson Thanks for mentioning it Dr Andrews sideways method works only on horizontal channels Others have mentioned the slopingchannels also and have wondered if there is some method to use with them I know of none Ive askedother course members for their ideas on how to approach this problem but so far no one has come up with amethod I would think that there should be a solution but have not personally taken the time to research itIf some method could be found that works as often as the Andrews sideways count it would be a significantfind The Andrews sideways count doesnt always hit the targets as you saw on your chart of Bausch amp Lomb Itworks more often than not though and it still amazes me at how often prices reach the targets Heres an observation to keep in mind Quite often after the first target is reached prices will reverse andhead back towards the channel At times youll note that they return inside the channel They will thenreverse again and head back towards the second price target These reversals happen frequently and presenttrading opportunities Im including the final segment of this lesson Regards Gordon So far in the course youve learned about Dr Andrews pivot counting procedure pitchfork and sidewayscount Youve noticed by now how often prices change trend at a P5 Youve seen how the 0-34 ML methodcan help locate the probable P5 area Youve seen how often price targets are met using the sideways countmethod The tendency for prices to reverse at a median line should be recognized as a high probability eventas well In coming lessons youll be shown how Dr Andrews used these and other high probability events totrade the stock and commodity markets The tools and techniques he used will help you put the finishingtouches on your market analysis using Andrews lines

Before continuing on to the next lesson lets briefly review what has so far been covered The attached chartprovides an opportunity to illustrate the methods referred to above Please draw these methods on thechart and return to me

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Sideways channelsDate Montag 21 Februar 2000 193743

gtBefore continuing on to the next lesson lets briefly review what hasgtso far been covered The attached chart provides an opportunity togtillustrate the methods referred to above Please draw these methods ongtthe chart and return to me Hello Gordonhere is my chart RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next lesson attachedDate Mittwoch 23 Februar 2000 014539

At 22100 73700 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongthere is my chartgt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Good job on the pivots sideways count and pitchforkLooks like youre ready to move on to the next part It wont be long and things will begin to fall inplace Regards Gordon Lesson 4 continued In one of his course letters Dr Andrews wrote The Law of Physics stated by Newton that Actionand Reaction are equal and opposite was first applied to prices by your Course Directors friendthe late Roger Babson who attributed his earnings of several million dollars to this law Beginning with this segment of lesson four and continuing in lesson five youll learn how to drawand apply the ActionReaction trading method as taught by Dr Andrews in his trading course The AR method requires a centerline or CL from which to start The CL can be any of thefollowing - MPL - ML - MLH - 2P line - 2 Gap line - Peak to low line - Low to peak lineThese are the primary lines that Dr Andrews used He stressed that some pencil work and a goodeyeball was needed in order to find the best fitting CL As with most other chart lines somework better than others The task is to find the best fit as he put it You will be shown examples of

each of the above CLs in this lesson and the next Determining which of the above listed lines to use as the CL is the first step in the ActionReactionmethod The solution often presents itself With a little practice a quick scan of the chart understudy will be all thats needed to spot the most likely CL Well begin with the attached chart Notethe CL drawn In this example a MPL (multi-pivot line) was used as the CL A MPL is a straightline that connects three or more consecutive pivots without passing through prices Theconnecting line is then extended Ive circled the three pivots that form the MPL on the chartThere are several other places on our chart where a MPL CL can be drawn Please bear in mindthat this is just the first step of the process Identification of likely CLs is all were after here Seeif you can locate two more then draw them in and send the chart back to me Well take up fromthere

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next lesson attachedDate Mittwoch 23 Februar 2000 212304

gtLesson 4 continuedgt gtIn one of his course letters Dr Andrews wrote The Law of Physicsgtstated by Newton that Action and Reaction are equal and opposite wasgtfirst applied to prices by your Course Directors friend the lategtRoger Babson who attributed his earnings of several million dollars to this lawgt gtBeginning with this segment of lesson four and continuing in lessongtfive youll learn how to draw and apply the ActionReaction tradinggtmethod as taught by Dr Andrews in his trading coursegt gtThe AR method requires a centerline or CL from which to startgtThe CL can be any of the followinggt - MPLgt - MLgt - MLHgt - 2P linegt - 2 Gap linegt - Peak to low linegt - Low to peak line Hello Gordon2P line 2 Gap line Peak to low line Low to peak line ndash actually I dont know what these lines areAre they discussed in Lesson 3 I believe you havenrsquot sent me this lesson yetAnyway I found two more MPLs on the Novellus Chart and drew them in RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Lesson 3Date Mittwoch 23 Februar 2000 235958

At 22300 92300 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt2P line 2 Gap line Peak to low line Low to peak line - actually I dont knowgtwhat these lines are Are they discussed in Lesson 3 I believe you didntgtsent me this lesson yetgtAnyway I found two more MPLs on the Novellus Chart and drew them ingt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone My apologiesI sent you an outdated version of the lesson Thanks for letting me know Musthave been my bedtime Heres the correct version Regards Gordon Lesson 3 In one of his course letters Dr Andrews wrote The Law of Physics stated by Newton that Actionand Reaction are equal and opposite was first applied to prices by your Course Directors friendthe late Roger Babson who attributed his earnings of several million dollars to this law In this lesson youll be introduced to the ActionReaction trading method as taught by Dr Andrewsin his trading course The AR method requires a centerline or CL from which to start The CL can be any of thefollowing - MPL Multi-pivot line A line drawn across 3 or more pivots - ML Median line The middle line of the pitchfork - MLH Median line parallel Either parallel line of the pitchfork - 2P line A line drawn across 2 pivots - 2 Gap line A line drawn connecting 2 gaps without touching prices in between - Peak to low line A line drawn connecting the high and low of a price leg

- Low to peak line A line drawn connecting the low and high of a price leg These are the primary lines that Dr Andrews used He stressed that some pencil work and a goodeyeball was needed in order to find the best fitting CL As with most other chart lines somework better than others The task is to find the best fit as he put it You will be shown examples ofeach of the above CLs Determining which of the above listed lines to use as the CL is the first step in the ActionReactionmethod With practice a quick view of the chart under study will be all thats needed to spot themost likely CL Youll be shown later how to experiment with possible combinations in order tofind the centerline that is most in tune with the market under study Well begin with the attached chart Note the CL drawn In this example a MPL (multi-pivot line)was used as the CL A MPL is a straight line that connects three or more consecutive pivotswithout passing through prices The connecting line is then extended Ive circled the three pivotsthat form the MPL on the chart There are several other places on our chart where a MPL CL canbe drawn Please bear in mind that this is just the first step of the process Identification of likelyCLs is all were after here See if you can locate two more then draw them in and send the chartback to me

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Donnerstag 24 Februar 2000 025105

At 22300 92300 PM you wroteI found two more MPLs on the Novellus Chart and drew them ingt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your mpls were correct This next segment shows the purpose of the centerline and how it isused Your payment in full arrived today TradersZone Thank you Regards Gordon Lesson 3 continued Please refer to the attached chart of Novellus The line drawn connecting the 3 circled pivots is amulti-pivot line (MPL) and represents the centerline (CL) well be using in this example Recall inthe previous segment that several types of centerlines are possible The choice is determined byexperimenting with the potential combinations on the chart under study Its best to try to locate acenterline somewhere close to the middle of the price chart in order to have sufficient past andforward data to use with the study This will become clear as you work with the method Once the centerline is drawn the next step is to locate a previous low or high pivot point to use fordrawing an action line Dr Andrews observed that the low pivot points often seem to work bestbut that either could be used In our example a line starting at the previous significant low wasdrawn parallel to the CL It is labeled A-1 (Action line 1) because it represents the first actionline Dr Andrews called it an action line because it was drawn as a result of a previous pivot (pricereversal) that had taken place Next a parallel line was drawn to the right of the CL and labeled R-1 Notice that it is the same distance from the CL as the corresponding A-1 line It is labeled R-1because it represents the first reaction line a line where prices are likely to stop or reverseNotice how prices reacted at the R-1 line in early 98 That serves as an indication that thecenterline chosen for this study should be a good one to use Not all reaction lines cause such aclear reversal as the R1 on this chart but many do Thats why its important to experiment withvarious centerline possibilities in order to find action lines that produce reaction lines which createthe greatest number of pivots or price stall-outs This experimentation is often quite time

consuming but experience has shown that it is time well spent When a centerline is found that isin tune with the price action of the issue under study it can be a highly effective tool for use inlocating probable reversal areas When combined with pitchfork lines the AR method can pinpointpotential reversal areas that are generally not recognized as such by others Dr Andrewstechniques for using the pitchfork and AR lines together are covered in later lessons In coming segments well study other lines that Dr Andrews used for his centerlines In themeantime experiment with the multi-pivot centerline on your own charts Then please send mean example of your work along with any questions you may have

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Freitag 25 Februar 2000 211356

gtIn the meantime experiment with the multi-pivot centerline on your owngtcharts Then please send me an example of your work along with anygtquestions you may have Hello Gordon I was wondering how many ActionReaction lines could be drawn on a chart On my attached chart I found at least 6 parallellines which had a significant meaning for the price RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject AR linesDate Montag 28 Februar 2000 080128

gtHello Gordongt gtI was wondering how many ActionReaction lines could be drawn on agtchart On my attached chart I found at least 6 parallel lines which hadgta significant meaning for the pricegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hi TradersZone Theres no set number of lines that can be drawnactually the more you can find the betterFinding a good centerline is the key And once you find lines that work such as you did anynumber of parallel lines can be drawn You are doing exactly what Dr Andrews didtaking thetime and effort to find the best fitting sets of lines Each chart has them and each chart is differentas Im sure youve found Nice work Heres the next part Regards Gordon Lesson 3 continued One of Dr Andrews favorite techniques dealt with gapsan often times perplexing price event formany traders His observations over the years suggested to him that while gaps show upfrequently on many price charts few traders have a method for including them as an integral partof their chart analysis Thats not surprising since not much has been published about how toapproach the use of gaps in a trading method Dr Andrews however found several ways to putprice gaps to good use An ActionReaction centerline which uses gaps as its basis is one suchmethod Please refer to the attached chart of Cendant Youll see that a centerline was drawn which passedthrough the July gap Note that it also came in contact with several pivots thereby qualifying as agapmulti-pivot centerline It is drawn by starting at the April low pivot and extending a line acrossand through the gap in mid-July It subsequently touches two additional high pivots Dr Andrews counted each gap as two pivots He noted that the more pivots a line touched the

stronger the line tended to be in the future Good reason then for using the July gap as the basisfor an ActionReaction study Our CL is labelled a gap-mpl-CL The May 98 high was used for the Action Line starting point A line was then drawn parallel to theCenterline as per ActionReaction procedure The corresponding Reaction Line was then drawn inIf this particular study had been drawn on Cendants chart right after the July gap was put in thepotential for prices to go all the way down to the Reaction Line might have seemed very slim at thetime Notice however that prices reached the Reaction Line in early September Youll see thishappen time and again as you work with the AR method The core of its effectiveness is a strongCL Please send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts of your choice

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re AR linesDate Montag 28 Februar 2000 155937

gtPlease send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts of yourgtchoice Hello Gordonhere are my examples RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject More on the ARDate Donnerstag 2 Maumlrz 2000 071158

At 22800 35900 PM you wrotegtgtPlease send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts ofgtgtyour choicegt gtHello Gordongthere are my examplesgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone You picked some good examples to use for your AR study Both showed the potential power of thismethod Takes time and lots of chart study sometimes to find the best set of lines but the rewardscan be many Heres something else to look at Regards Gordon The ActionReaction technique requires a strong centerline from which to begin The key todeciding which set of pivots to use for the centerline is found through experimenting with thevarious configurations visible on the chart under study The centerline might be a series of gapspivots an existing median line or any of Dr Andrews lines The task is to search for that centerlinewhich shows the greatest potential for projecting price reversal areas Dr Andrews did that byfinding a likely centerline near the middle of his price chart That allowed him to use any of theprevious pivots for his action lines By experimenting he found reaction lines that did the best jobof pegging reversal areas at data points located forward of the centerline Reaction lines are equal and opposite of the action lines and serve to project price levels at whicha reversal can be expected That is why the task of seeking out the best centerline is so importantDr Andrews reasoned that a series of reaction lines which have pegged price reversals in the pastis likely to continue to be in tune with current and future market price action Having severalprevious pivots to use as anchors for drawing action lines is thus essential The attached chart of Lattice illustrates this concept Please bear in mind that the gapmplcenterline is not the only centerline one could use on this chart You might want to study the chartfor other AR possibilities Try a peak-to-peak CL or a multi-pivot CL Send me your studies along

with any questions

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re More on the ARDate Samstag 4 Maumlrz 2000 002521

gtThe attached chart of Lattice illustrates this conceptgtPlease bear in mind that the gapmpl centerline is not the onlygtcenterline one could use on this chartgtYou might want to study the chart for other AR possibilitiesgtTry a peak-to-peak CL or a multi-pivot CL Send me your studiesgtalong with any questions Hello Gordonhere is my chart RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Peak to peak clDate Sonntag 5 Maumlrz 2000 064107

At 3400 122500 AM you wrotegtHello Gordongthere is my chartgt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Looks like you have the concept down Takes time and a lot of chart work to find the bestcenterline When the reaction lines dont seem to peg reversal areas chances are the centerline isnot the one that is best in tune with the price action of the issue under studyDespite the time required for this method it was one of Dr Andrews stand-bysAR lines could befound on most of his charts Im sending a chart with an example of a peak-to-peak CL Regards Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Peak to peak clDate Sonntag 5 Maumlrz 2000 171232

Hello Gordon I think the peak-to-peak CL on the last chart I sent to you was not really drawn from peak to peakIm sending another example RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next LessonDate Mittwoch 8 Maumlrz 2000 072526

At 3500 51200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtI think the peak-to-peak CL on the last chart I sent to you was notgtreally drawn from peak to peakgtIm sending another examplegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your peak to peak cl example was correctly drawn Thats a fairly simple approach but quite oftenthe peak to peak yields better reaction lines Heres the first part of the next lesson Regards Gordon Youll find times when prices dont quite reach the ML but instead drift alongside or away from itThe Schiff ML was designed to be used in place of the regular ML whenever that happens Suchprice action can be found at any place on a chart but most frequently occurs after a sharp sell-offor run-up of prices Dr Andrews also used the Schiff ML whenever his regular ML sloped at an unusually steep angleHe said it helped smooth out irregular price action such as that caused by unexpected earningsnews crop planting delays or poor growing conditions crop production reports etc Youll findnearly vertical price moves over a short period of time on many charts The Schiff ML method helpsput things back in perspective when that happens Well use the chart of Sterling Bancorp as an example of prices drifting away from the regular MLThat ML is drawn in black Prices didnt quite reach the ML but drifted alongside and eventuallyaway from it The Schiff ML and parallel lines are drawn in red Notice how prices were containedwithin the Schiff pitchfork until they finally broke down at the upper parallel line The procedure for drawing the Schiff ML is the same as for the regular ML except the startingpoint is located midway between the first 2 pivots youll be using The Sterling Bancorp chart

illustrates how this is done Dr Andrews also suggested using the Schiff ML whenever the regular ML method doesnt seem tobe in sync with price action Practice this procedure on your own charts and send a couple examples when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next LessonDate Donnerstag 9 Maumlrz 2000 001143

Hello Gordon in my charting software (Dynamic Trader) the Schiff ML is drawn by finding the midpoint of the line between pivot A and pivot Bmoving this point horizontally to directly above or below (depending on whether A is a low or high pivot) the A pivot anddrawing a line from his point through the midpoint of the BC swingAre there different methods of drawing a Schiff MLI was too lazy to draw Schiff MLs by hand with the method you described so Im sending my examples with the Dynamic TraderSchiff MLs -) RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject SchiffDate Samstag 11 Maumlrz 2000 070226

At 3900 121100 AM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtin my charting software (Dynamic Trader) the Schiff ML is drawn bygtfinding the midpoint of the line between pivot A and pivot B movinggtthis point horizontally to directly above or below (depending ongtwhether A is a low or high pivot) the A pivot and drawing a linegtgtfrom his point through the midpoint of the BC swinggtAre there different methods of drawing a Schiff MLgtI was too lazy to draw Schiff MLs by hand with the method yougtdescribed so Im sending my examples with the Dynamic Trader Schiff MLs -)gt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your program Schiff line procedure is fineits actually what Dr Andrews called a modified schiff ml and is onlyslightly different than the one I sent you initially The one you used is preferred by most course members Im sendingthe modified Schiff lesson and a chart along with this email The chart example shows how to use it with 0-34 pivots Regards Gordon

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Sliding Parallel LineDate Montag 13 Maumlrz 2000 005252

Hello TradersZone Heres one of the tools Dr Andrews used most often when entering exiting or reversing marketpositions Not many people know about this technique Regards Gordon The Sliding Parallel (SH) is drawn whenever prices cross an Andrews line and then move along itFor example if the bottom of a daily price bar range drops through a lower parallel line of apitchfork a new parallel line is then drawn from that low and extended to the right If the nextdays price bar drops through that sliding parallel line a sell signal is generated Whenever price action dictates a sliding parallel the next step is to draw a Warning Line Thewarning line is an additional parallel line that is an image extension of the original pitchforkchannels It serves as a warning that if prices penetrate the sliding parallel the next likely target isthe WL The attached chart of Avis illustrates these procedures Please try these on your own charts andsend me an example

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Sliding Parallel LineDate Dienstag 14 Maumlrz 2000 225737

Hello Gordon this is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning line RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 065606

At 31400 105700 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtthis is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning linegt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone Your chart of circuit city was a good example for this study I may have mentioned it earlier but DrAndrews used this technique on a regular basis The next part of this lesson covers another of hisfavorite tools the mini-median line pitchfork Here it is Regards Gordon The Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry and exit tools Though mostoften drawn using alternate closing prices alternate highs and lows can also be usedin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days is usually the maximumbetween pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or more back from P2 Dr Andrews used Mini-Median Line pitchforks for buy and sell signals whenever he expected areversal Some examples include a probable P5 or when prices are at a Warning Line ML MLHmajor ML extension or a sideways channel price target When prices cross the Mini-Median LineParallel (MMLH) a sliding parallel (SH) is used for order entry

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 231537

gtThe Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry andgtexit tools Though most often drawn using alternate closing pricesgtalternate highs and lows can also be usedgtin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days isgtusually the maximum between pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or moregtback from P2

Hello Gordon

wouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timingCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available whenDr Andrews was alive

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject intraday chartsDate Samstag 18 Maumlrz 2000 012400

At 31600 111500 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongtgtwouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsgtinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timinggtCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available when DrgtAndrews was alivegtgtRegardsgtTradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Youre absolutely correctintraday charts were not available when DrAndrews was a trader

Im reading between the lines here but if you plan to day-trade using the course techniques ie thepitchfork then I agree that the regular pitchfork would be more useful on intraday charts Otherwisewhipsaw would be a significant problem Please get back to me if I didnt address your questionbecause this is a very important technique The mini-median line pitchfork and sliding parallel showedup on most of Dr Andrews charts

Regards

Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re intraday chartsDate Dienstag 21 Maumlrz 2000 220322

Hello Gordon

You are right Im planning to daytrade SampP futures using the course techniques among other things

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 003408

Hi TradersZone Here are a couple Andrews techniques that will help anticipate the breakout direction of asideways channelThey work often enough to warrant keep handy Regards Gordon In an earlier lesson you were introduced to Dr Andrews sideways count You saw how frequentlythe sideways count method provided high probability price objectives after the breakout from theestablished channel took place In this segment of lesson 4 youll be shown 2 congestion area techniques that can help youdetermine the probable sideways channel price breakout direction Both rely on the use of pivots The first uses the pivot points that are circled on a sideways channel Dr Andrews observed thatwhenever a sideways channel results in at least 5 circle contacts the eventual price breakoutwould very often be in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle If circle 5 is at thetop of the channel for example the eventual price breakout would likely be to the upside If circle5 is at the bottom of the channel look for a downside breakout Dr Andrews noted that thistechnique can be subject to false breakouts but that such breakouts are usually followed shortlyafter with a confirmed breakout in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle Heemphasized that this study is best considered as a rule of thumb observation He viewed it as asupporting indicator for use with a short-term pitchfork as prices approached a channel line There are 2 charts attached that show how this works

The second technique in this part of lesson 4 deals with a sideways channelthat is building shortly after a P3 has been formed Dr Andrews noted thatwhenever that happened the probabilities were high that prices wouldbreakout in the same direction they were moving prior to the formation ofthe sideways channel The attached P3 to sideways example chart shows thisprocedure

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 205235

Hello Gordon here is my example for the 5 circle sideways count RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Lesson 5Date Montag 27 Maumlrz 2000 060731

At 32400 85200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my example for the 5 circle sideways countgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt gt Hi TradersZone Good example of the 5th circle tendency to predict the direction of a sideways breakout Any luckfinding a chart showing the P3 to sideways rule Im sending the first part of the next lesson This trendline method is a useful tool with all of DrAndrews course lines He used it all the time but especially when looking for confirmation of othercourse method trading signals Regards Gordon The Course Trendline__________________________________________________________ Next well discuss the trendline Seasoned traders agree that the trendline is one of their mostimportant tools No matter what kind of trading program or technique they use the trendline on achart is a must But one of the biggest mistakes made by amateurs and professionals alike isinconsistently drawing or defining the trendline Dr Andrews trendline procedure is simpleconsistent and accurate It works extremely well with the pivot count and with the pitchfork For an uptrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the lowest low up and to thehighest minor low point preceding the highest high The line must not pass through prices inbetween the two low points Extend the line(Attached chart of Brightpoint) For a downtrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the highest high point to thelowest minor high point preceding the lowest low so that it does not pass through prices inbetween the two high points Extend the line (Brightpoint chart) Thats all theres to it Its simple consistent and it works well with other Andrews lines It also

helps eliminate personal bias and haphazard analysis Practice drawing these trendlines on your own charts Send me any questions you might have andthen e-mail a chart of your choosing which shows at least two uptrend and two downtrend linesthat youve drawn_______________________________________________________________________

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Lesson 5Date Dienstag 28 Maumlrz 2000 120224

Hello Gordon here is my chart with trendlinesWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going above the trendline again should I draw a new trendline anddelete the old one Attached is another chart with the P3 to sideways rule I finally found an example for it RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Price failure techniqueDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081412

At 32800 120200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my chart with trendlinesgtWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going abovegtthe trendline again should I draw a new trendline and delete the oldgtone Hi TradersZone Take a look at the chart Im returningI added some lines for you to considerWith the course trendline once its broken a new one should be started Theres a technique thatties in with this coming up soon Meanwhile heres an important technique to work on It deals with those times when prices dontreach the ML Regards Gordon Dr Andrews Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P ofreversaland the ML the probability is that this price reversal will go further thanitdid on its approach toward the ML (Extract of original course material) A price failure very often indicates a sizeable reversal will take placeThepitchforks drawn on the chart of Home Depot illustrate the concept of pricefailure Dr Andrews routinely drew a new pitchfork on his chart after a newsignificant pivot had formed He knew that prices had a high probability ofreaching the new ML before stalling out or reversing If prices reversedbeforereaching the ML thereby forming a new pivot he termed it a price failureTheunderlying idea here is that Dr Andrews fully anticipated his median linewouldact as a price magnet To conclude that a price reversal resulted in a price failure Dr Andrewsused

these primary signalsa subsequent price penetration of a short-termmulti-pivotline andor a return of prices to and penetration of the parallel lineformed atpivot 3 of the pitchfork (The circles on the Home Depot chart denote theparallelline penetration signal To avoid clutter the mpl lines were not drawn) One possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart of ConsecoIncLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me a copy

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject ChartDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081800Attachments image002png

Hi TradersZone Forgot the chart Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Price failure techniqueDate Samstag 1 April 2000 201000

gtOne possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart ofgtConseco IncgtLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me agtcopy Hi Gordon here are my charts with price failures RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Mittwoch 5 April 2000 235624

Hi TradersZone Good price failure examples you sentany comments or questions about it Heres the next partanother old standby Dr Andrews kept handy Regards Gordon In this segment youll learn how to use the Fan line Technique To draw the fan lines youll apply the coursetrendline method which was introduced in an earlier lesson It might be well to emphasize that the practicalapplication of the course trendline method requires practice and experience both of which will serve youwell in this technique Dr Andrews used fan lines as an adjunct to his pitchfork sideways channel andactionreaction methods In the fan line study three trendlines are drawn from the original reversal pivot of the price correction understudy typically a P0 or a P5 Youll notice on the charts included with this study that each fan line is at aflatter angle than its predecessor When the third fan line is broken the rule is that the correction has endedand a new trend is under way Try this technique on some of your own charts and then please send me asample

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Donnerstag 6 April 2000 234315

Hi Gordon No I dont have any specific question about the price failure technique I guess the next likely target after a price failure wouldbe the warning line I have attached two charts with fan linesIs it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the third fan line is broken RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Next segmentDate Freitag 7 April 2000 003312

Hello TradersZone

Tuesday April 06 2000 114315 AM you wrote

TZgt Hi Gordon

TZgt No I dont have any specific question about the price failureTZgt technique I guess the next likely target after a price failureTZgt would be the warning line

TZgt I have attached two charts with fan linesTZgt Is it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the thirdTZgt fan line is broken

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Thats right the warning line is the next price target Additionalwarning lines can be drawn if needed but usually one will do it Ifprices go through the first warning line another can be drawn butmost likely a new pitchfork could be drawn instead which would bepreferable Helps stay current with recently formed pivots

When prices break through the third fan line a buy or sell signal isgiven Not sure what you mean by fourth target fan line Im a littledense today

Your chart work was goodthis is another handy tool for spotting thehigh probability of a price reversal or trend change

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject The Gap TradeDate Freitag 7 April 2000 004858

Hello TradersZone This trading signal doesnt show up very often but past observations have shown that its well worth watching for Dr Andrews placed a lot of emphasis on the importance of price gaps something many traders overlook This is one of his gap uses Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom The Gap Trading Technique Price gaps can be a dilemma for many traders The general rule denoting market strength or weakness after ahigh volume gap often comes up short after the initial reaction is over Many gappers simply run out ofsteam A high volume gap in itself seems to offer precious little evidence that a profitable move is about toget under way Dr Andrews used price gaps somewhat differently than others He counted a gap as 2 pivots Youll see howthat works in the following technique which uses a gap to arrive at a price level for a buy or sell order Using short-term daily price pivots label the pivot immediately preceding the gap as p0 Count the gap as 2pivots labeling it p1 amp p2 After p3 has formed and prices reverse towards a short-term p4 draw a horizontalline 2 price tics or more (individual preference)to the right of p3 Enter the market only if prices reach orpenetrate that line within a few days after reversing from p4 Please look over your own charts to see if you can find places where the gap trade technique could have beenused Send me a sample when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 001925

Hello Gordon this is my chart with a gap trade RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 065538

Hello TradersZone Thursday April 08 2000 121925 PM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt this is my chart with a gap trade TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Good examplethe gap trade technique shines when an issue in at or near a P5 Similar to the one on thechart you sent Heres another trading signal tool Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Dr Andrews used several techniques which helped him determine whether a P5 was near at hand Youllrecall that he observed most price moves ended or had a significant reversal at a P5 This technique uses alternate closing prices after a P4 has been formed As with many of his studies thenumber 5 is used The chart accompanying this segment shows that there were 5 alternate closes to thedownside after P4 was put in Dr Andrews noted that whenever 5 or more alternate closes followed a P4 theprobabilities were high that a P5 was near at hand An added feature to this chart study is the sideways channel Notice how the 2nd target price and the 5thalternate close nearly coincide

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 12 April 2000 200730

Hello Gordon This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 13 April 2000 082418

Monday April 12 2000 80730 AM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hello TradersZone Good chart example of this Andrews toolanother of his very unusual observations that workmore often than not Heres the final part of this lesson Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom In this trendline method Dr Andrews once again used the number 5 as the basis for locating aprobable reversal area He found this technique to be especially useful whenever a clear orobvious pivot count didnt show up onthe price move under study Trendlines are drawn using the course trendline method When the 5th trendline is broken theprobability is high that the trend under study has ended A mini-median line pitchfork andorsliding parallel could be used for pricing a trading order The accompanying chart of Compaq Computer is an example of how the trendline study could beused The pivot count beginning at the October low is difficult to nail down There were severalsmall areas of congestion but no sizeable corrections while prices advanced The count wasunclear By following the price action using the course trendline technique however the traderwould have been alerted to the possibility of a change of trend when the 5th trendline was brokenin early February Try this technique on your own charts When youre ready please send me an example of yourstudy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 19 April 2000 124108

Hello Gordon this is my example with 5 trendlines RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[6] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 20 April 2000 012726

Monday April 19 2000 124108 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt this is my example with 5 trendlines

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Good example of the 5 TL technique Always reminds me of how the fairly simple tools often do a better job than manyof the sophisticated studies out there

That was the last part of lesson 5 Lesson 6 attached is made in one mailing Youll find Dr Andrews trading rules alongwith a wrap-up review which uses several of his rules You might have questions about some of the rules so feel free tosend them as they arise

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Dr Andrews had an abbreviated set of trading rules on several index cards that he carried around with him in his shirtpocket He said every trading day turned up something new on his charts and by having his rules in his pocket he wasreminded of the need for a methodical approach to his analysis Quite a comment coming from the man who wrote therule book

In this the final lesson of the course Dr Andrews original trading rules and observations are presented Lets work witha few of them at this point

Using charts of issues you follow please send me an example that illustrates your interpretation of each of the followingrules

Rule 4 Anticipating major Ps

Rule 7 Penetration rule

Rule 8 Price failure rule

Rule 11 1-ML23 AR Centerline

Rule 12 Sliding Parallel rule

Rule 15 Mini-median line parallel to buy or sell

Feel free to include any other course techniques you choose to apply but please include examples of the above as aminimum Use more than one technique on a chart if your analysis supports it Send as many charts as you like alongwith your questionscomments

Lesson 6 - Dr Andrews Trading Rules

This lesson covers course rules and significant observations as taught by Dr Andrews in his original trading course Therules are those that he used in his own trading and are provided to serve as a checklist for use with the course tradingmethods youve learned

Rule 1 Where prices are always headed Rule You course members are among the fortunate few to be able to draw astraight line and know that prices are headed toward that ML Very few investors have ever applied this ML principle ofstatistics to price fluctuations and weve never seen this in any books on investment You are among the very few who

know that prices are always headed toward the newest ML

Rule 2 The Rule of coming opposites applies all through life In the bible we find Blessed at they that mourn for theyshall be comforted As investors we know that any losses can be recovered by using course methods

Rule 3 Turn your mind about or Rethink for all good is at hand We should mentally prepare ourselves for thecoming reversal in prices and other affairs Heres one way for example that you course members who know the MLrules can use When prices are skyrocketing upward we do this preparation by thinking If prices pivoted here today atthis price Id draw a new ML bisecting the distance between todays price and the price from which the rise started Andwe know now that if this is a Major Pivot prices will fall rapidly to this new ML Profits from such drops are big and quick

Rule 4 Rule for anticipating major Ps If during congestion or after a rally or decline you can count four previous Psthe fifth one is highly probable to be the one from which a new trend starts

Rule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can make a quick big profit is to watch for the EPformations

Rule 6 The other reversal rule is that prices tend to reverse at or near any ML as well as at any extension of each MLAnd also at any MLH or extensions of MLH

Rule 7 The Penetration Rule is that whenever prices gap past or plunge through any ML there is a high probability thatthey will quickly return to it temporarily and then resume the trend they had before they gapped or plunged through

Rule 8 Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P of reversal and the MLthe probability is that this price reversal will go further than it did on its approach toward the ML

Rule 9 The price failure rule is negated when the next price trend is also a failure in reaching the ML This is almostinvariably a signal of a big fast move in the direction indicated by this last space Rule 10 When alternate median lines of comparable length slope in the same direction the trend is firm and rapidprice changes take place

Rule 11 When 1-ML23 is exactly reached at P4 it can be used as a highly reliable centerline for the AR method

Rule 12 Frequently after crossing a lower MLH prices continue to rise along the MLH Since the crossing of the MLHsignals a further drop is likely use a sliding parallel along the bottom of the most recent crossing If prices drop past thatsliding parallel line a sell signal is generated

Rule 13 MLs between P2 and P3 can start from a nearby or a remote P1 since prices tend to reverse at each of theseMLs Try several such P2-P3 MLs to discover the best fit

Rule 14 The distance of each MLH from its ML is the distance of the next warning line Use these warning lineswhenever a SH has signalled a buy or sell

Rule 15 Use the MMLH as a buy or sell signal when you expect a reversal because of a P5 Also when prices are at aWL ML extension line or where course lines converge or intersect

Rule 16 Converging lines that meet prices have shown the highest probability of a trend reversal

Rule 17 Two to four days is usually the maximum between P2 and P3 for a MML P1 can be a day or so back from P2and 3

Rule 18 The most reliable ActionReaction centerlines seem to be MPL 2P line 2 Gap line peak to low or low to peak

Rule 19 When prices pass through R lines look for a pull back and then a continuing move in the direction of the passthrough

Rule 20 Use gaps as Action lines from the centerline

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 003755

Hello Gordonhere is my example for Rule 4 And I have a question What are EP formations gtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 021242

Tuesday May 04 2000 123755 PM you wrote TZgt Hello GordonTZgt here is my example for Rule 4 TZgt And I have a question What are EP formations gtgtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegtgta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hi TradersZone Good use of the warning linesalso the EP material is part of lesson 4 Rather than go backthrough the files to see when (or if) it was sent Im sending it along with this reply Glad youbrought it up Best RegardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Tuesday May 04 2000208 PM Dr Andrews used a fairly common price chart formation that he found useful at probable P5market tops and bottoms The formation generally called a wedge or pennant by chartists isreferred to in Dr Andrews trading course as the Expanding Pivot (EP) One of the few chartformations used in the course he regarded it as among the most dependable indications that amarket top was forming Closely related to the EP is his Inverted Expanding Pivot (IEP) which henoted could often be observed at market bottoms Both are regarded as intermediate and long-term reversal indicators Dr Andrews found that both formations were most reliable when they occurred after a sharprapid price move coinciding with the formation of a probable P5 He said it wasnt unusual for theformation to take several weeks to complete and that conservative traders could best avoid thewhipsaw associated with congestion patterns by trading only in the direction of the probable price

break out of the EP or IEP formation The attached charts illustrate these formations Please look over your own charts for an example ofthe EP and IEP and send me a copy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 232127

Hello Gordon Thank you for the lesson with the EP material I couldnt find it in any previous emailHere is my example for Rule 7 RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Rule 4Date Samstag 6 Mai 2000 080827

Wednesday May 05 2000 112127 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt Thank you for the lesson with the EP materialTZgt I couldnt find it in any previous emailTZgt Here is my example for Rule 7

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hi TradersZone

Glad you mentioned it earlierexcept for the EP IEP and hissideways channel Dr Andrews didnt have much to say about chartpatterns and formations These are good ones to use though

Your study of the penetration rule was good Later

Best Regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Wednesday May 05 2000801 PM

Page 13: Pitchfork primer

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneDate Mittwoch 9 Februar 2000 054710

At 2700 72700 PM you wrotegtI found a chart with 9 pivots I hope it doesnt mattergtIs it necessary that the move is made of swings with higher highs andgthigher lows in an uptrend (lower highs and lower lows in a downtrend)gtFor example in the attached chart the point P6 is lower than P4 and P7gtis lower than P5 ( When using this ML technique TradersZone the main object is to note the price level of the newML for that is the next probable reversal area The pivots need not be in Elliott formation havingswings as you noted above Your ML procedure by the way was correct I noticed how oftenprices headed for each new ML and then reversedLater in the course well see how Dr Andrews handled those times when prices reversed beforereaching the ML area)gtAnother question For how long are median lines validgtI noticed that the P2-34 ML from my chart served as support andgtresistance two years later in 1998 (see attached chart LOW2GIF) butgton the other hand I dont want to clutter my charts with too many lines from the past (One of the interesting things about Dr Andrews lines is that no matter how far out his lines areprojected they will continue to cause prices to stall-out or reverse when reached Also wheneverseveral of his lines intersect there is a very high probability of a price reversal whether pricesconverge at the intersection or are some distancegtfrom it The probability is higher though when prices are at thegtintersecting lines A linethat has in the past provided frequent support or resistance is probably a pretty good line tokeep on your chart Youre right though charts seem to get cluttered up veryquickly)gt gtI would like to continue the course to the end I will send the moneygtfor the remaining 5 lessons tomorrow Did you receive my first payment yet (Glad to hear youre going to continue to the end Thank you for the prepayment Your first checkhasnt arrived yet will let you know when it does) Meanwhile heres the first segment of the next lesson Regards Gordon

In this lesson youll be introduced to Dr Andrews sideways count The sideways count was hisold reliable a tool that worked so well so often that it was one of the very first studies heperformed on his charts The sideways count gave him a reliable gauge that told him ahead of timehow far a stock or commodity was likely to move Sounds too good to be true perhaps but as youwork with the sideways count youll discover for yourself how often the projected price targetsare reachedoften within tics Markets frequently spend a lot of time in congestion Heres Dr Andrews way to use thatcongestion to our advantage Looking at the Brightpoint attachment please note the channel lines starting in January Youll seethat most of the pivots from Jan-May were within this channel Now look at where Ive placedcircles At each point where prices touched a channel line and then reversed direction and went allthe way back to touch the opposite channel line a circle was drawn Put another way if pricestouch one channel line but then dont go all the way back to touch the opposite channel line acircle is not drawn At first glance this technique can often be unclear so well pause here for some chart work Pleasee-mail me a chart that shows where youve drawn channel lines to identify sideways price actionand also where youve placed the channel line circles

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject ReDate Mittwoch 9 Februar 2000 184837

gtAt each point where prices touched a channel line and then reversedgtdirection and went all the way back to touch the opposite channel linegta circle was drawn Put another way if prices touch one channel linegtbut then dont go all the way back to touch the opposite channel linegta circle is not drawn Shouldnt the last circle on your Brightpoint chart be left outThe price didnt return to the opposite channel line after that day This is my chart

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Thanks for the questionDate Mittwoch 9 Februar 2000 231437

At 2900 64800 PM you wrotegtShouldnt the last circle on your Brightpoint chart be left outgtThe price didnt return to the opposite channel line after that day Hello TradersZone The last circle is appropriate but I can see where the wording in the explanation is confusing Ihave changed that paragraph to read Looking at the Brightpoint attachment please note the channel lines starting in January Youll seethat most of the pivots from Jan- May were within this channel Now look at where the circles wereplaced on the channel lines They are in alternate sequenceNote that each circle was drawn only after prices had first been at the opposite channel lineTheBrightpoint chart illustrates this procedure Thanks for pointing this out TradersZone If the wording is still unclear to you Id appreciate yourinput Meanwhile heres the next segment of this lessonRegards Gordon Well continue to use the Brightpoint chart for this portion of the sideways count study To reviewthe pattern were looking for should be a recent rectangular shaped sideways trading range thatcontains most if not all of the congestion price action Take a look at the attached chart and notehow well defined the price channel for Brightpoint is Youll probably notice that it is deeper thanthe channel you studied on the chart in the preceding segment This comparison is made toillustrate that while the first channel example covers a longer period of time the second includesall of the price ranges and is the preferred method Please look at where the circles were placed on the channel lines To review a new circle is drawnonly after prices have first been at the opposite channel line Recall that circles must be inalternate sequence eg upper linelower lineupper linelower line etc one circle at a time Note that the price range within the channel is $4 34 (High 21 12 Low 16 34) There were twocircles drawn on the lower line of our sideways channel before prices broke down Using thatinformation our next step will be to use some simple arithmetic in order to come up with twodownside price targets Well cover that procedure in the next segment Please let me know whenyou are ready to continue

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Sideways countDate Mittwoch 9 Februar 2000 232315Attachments image001png

Hi TradersZone Im returning your chartplease note comments GordonRegards Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Thanks for the questionDate Donnerstag 10 Februar 2000 233059

Hello Gordonthank you Im ready for the next lesson

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next partDate Donnerstag 10 Februar 2000 235613

At 21000 113000 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongtthank you Im ready for the next lessongt gt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt gt gt TradersZoneI sent this yesterday but will re-send It was part of my reply to your questionregarding the circle I dont have a record of your return chartwork for this part If its a duplicatesend sorry Regards Gordon Well continue to use the Brightpoint chart for this portion of the sideways count study To reviewthe pattern were looking for should be a recent rectangular shaped sideways trading range thatcontains most if not all of the congestion price action Take a look at the attached chart and notehow well defined the price channel for Brightpoint is Youll probably notice that it is deeper thanthe channel you studied on the chart in the preceding segment This comparison is made toillustrate that while the first channel example covers a longer period of time the second includesall of the price ranges and is the preferred method Please look at where the circles were placed on the channel lines To review a new circle is drawnonly after prices have first been at the opposite channel line Recall that circles must be inalternate sequence eg upper linelower lineupper linelower line etc one circle at a time Note that the price range within the channel is $4 34 (High 21 12 Low 16 34) There were twocircles drawn on the lower line of our sideways channel before prices broke down Using thatinformation our next step will be to use some simple arithmetic in order to come up with twodownside price targets Well cover that procedure in the next segment Please let me know whenyou are ready to continue

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next partDate Freitag 11 Februar 2000 234113

I think the placement of the circles is clear to me nowI have attached another chart with a sideways count RegardsTradersZone gtTradersZoneI sent this yesterday but will re-send It was part ofgtmy reply to your question regarding the circle I dont have a recordgtof your return chartwork for this part If its a duplicate send sorry

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject SidewaysDate Montag 14 Februar 2000 054227

At 21100 114100 PM you wrotegtI think the placement of the circles is clear to me nowgtI have attached another chart with a sideways countgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone Your chart was on target Looks like youre ready for the next part Here it is Regards Gordon During this segment youll learn how to arrive at two price targets using Dr Andrews sidewayscount Simple arithmetic is all thats required once the sideways channel and circles are in place Well continue to use the Brightpoint chart which is attached Note that Brightpoint fell throughthe bottom channel line at the point where we placed our second circle so figuring out possibledownside targets would have been in order at that time Heres how thats done 1 Determine the price range of the channel In this case the range is $4 34 (21 12 - 16 34) 2 Count the number of circles on the lower channel line The lower line is used in this casebecause thats the line that didnt hold Prices went through it returned to check it out and thencontinued lower 3 Multiply the price range of the channel times the number of circles drawn on the lower channelline (4 34 x 2 = 9 12) 4 Subtract that figure from the upper channel line priceThe result becomes downside price target 1 (21 12 - 9 12 = 12) 5 Next subtract that same figure from the price at the lower channel line Thats price target 2(16 34 - 9 12 = 7 14)

In the case of an upside channel breakout the procedure is reversed Please draw a few channelsand figure out some downside targets on your own charts When youre ready send me two orthree examples of your work As always send your questions as they arise

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re SidewaysDate Montag 14 Februar 2000 134314

Here are my examples I couldnt find enough charts with downside targets so I included some charts with upside targets Do the channel lines always have to be horizontal When I look at my charts I find more channels with an upward slope or adownward slope RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Sideways channelsDate Freitag 18 Februar 2000 005531

At 21400 14300 PM you wrotegtHere are my examples I couldnt find enough charts with downsidegttargets so I included some charts with upside targetsgt gtDo the channel lines always have to be horizontal When I look at mygtcharts I find more channels with an upward slope or a downward slopegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone The sideways method can be used with either up or down Sorry didnt mean to imply that only downsidetargets should be found Ill reword that portion of the lesson Thanks for mentioning it Dr Andrews sideways method works only on horizontal channels Others have mentioned the slopingchannels also and have wondered if there is some method to use with them I know of none Ive askedother course members for their ideas on how to approach this problem but so far no one has come up with amethod I would think that there should be a solution but have not personally taken the time to research itIf some method could be found that works as often as the Andrews sideways count it would be a significantfind The Andrews sideways count doesnt always hit the targets as you saw on your chart of Bausch amp Lomb Itworks more often than not though and it still amazes me at how often prices reach the targets Heres an observation to keep in mind Quite often after the first target is reached prices will reverse andhead back towards the channel At times youll note that they return inside the channel They will thenreverse again and head back towards the second price target These reversals happen frequently and presenttrading opportunities Im including the final segment of this lesson Regards Gordon So far in the course youve learned about Dr Andrews pivot counting procedure pitchfork and sidewayscount Youve noticed by now how often prices change trend at a P5 Youve seen how the 0-34 ML methodcan help locate the probable P5 area Youve seen how often price targets are met using the sideways countmethod The tendency for prices to reverse at a median line should be recognized as a high probability eventas well In coming lessons youll be shown how Dr Andrews used these and other high probability events totrade the stock and commodity markets The tools and techniques he used will help you put the finishingtouches on your market analysis using Andrews lines

Before continuing on to the next lesson lets briefly review what has so far been covered The attached chartprovides an opportunity to illustrate the methods referred to above Please draw these methods on thechart and return to me

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Sideways channelsDate Montag 21 Februar 2000 193743

gtBefore continuing on to the next lesson lets briefly review what hasgtso far been covered The attached chart provides an opportunity togtillustrate the methods referred to above Please draw these methods ongtthe chart and return to me Hello Gordonhere is my chart RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next lesson attachedDate Mittwoch 23 Februar 2000 014539

At 22100 73700 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongthere is my chartgt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Good job on the pivots sideways count and pitchforkLooks like youre ready to move on to the next part It wont be long and things will begin to fall inplace Regards Gordon Lesson 4 continued In one of his course letters Dr Andrews wrote The Law of Physics stated by Newton that Actionand Reaction are equal and opposite was first applied to prices by your Course Directors friendthe late Roger Babson who attributed his earnings of several million dollars to this law Beginning with this segment of lesson four and continuing in lesson five youll learn how to drawand apply the ActionReaction trading method as taught by Dr Andrews in his trading course The AR method requires a centerline or CL from which to start The CL can be any of thefollowing - MPL - ML - MLH - 2P line - 2 Gap line - Peak to low line - Low to peak lineThese are the primary lines that Dr Andrews used He stressed that some pencil work and a goodeyeball was needed in order to find the best fitting CL As with most other chart lines somework better than others The task is to find the best fit as he put it You will be shown examples of

each of the above CLs in this lesson and the next Determining which of the above listed lines to use as the CL is the first step in the ActionReactionmethod The solution often presents itself With a little practice a quick scan of the chart understudy will be all thats needed to spot the most likely CL Well begin with the attached chart Notethe CL drawn In this example a MPL (multi-pivot line) was used as the CL A MPL is a straightline that connects three or more consecutive pivots without passing through prices Theconnecting line is then extended Ive circled the three pivots that form the MPL on the chartThere are several other places on our chart where a MPL CL can be drawn Please bear in mindthat this is just the first step of the process Identification of likely CLs is all were after here Seeif you can locate two more then draw them in and send the chart back to me Well take up fromthere

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next lesson attachedDate Mittwoch 23 Februar 2000 212304

gtLesson 4 continuedgt gtIn one of his course letters Dr Andrews wrote The Law of Physicsgtstated by Newton that Action and Reaction are equal and opposite wasgtfirst applied to prices by your Course Directors friend the lategtRoger Babson who attributed his earnings of several million dollars to this lawgt gtBeginning with this segment of lesson four and continuing in lessongtfive youll learn how to draw and apply the ActionReaction tradinggtmethod as taught by Dr Andrews in his trading coursegt gtThe AR method requires a centerline or CL from which to startgtThe CL can be any of the followinggt - MPLgt - MLgt - MLHgt - 2P linegt - 2 Gap linegt - Peak to low linegt - Low to peak line Hello Gordon2P line 2 Gap line Peak to low line Low to peak line ndash actually I dont know what these lines areAre they discussed in Lesson 3 I believe you havenrsquot sent me this lesson yetAnyway I found two more MPLs on the Novellus Chart and drew them in RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Lesson 3Date Mittwoch 23 Februar 2000 235958

At 22300 92300 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt2P line 2 Gap line Peak to low line Low to peak line - actually I dont knowgtwhat these lines are Are they discussed in Lesson 3 I believe you didntgtsent me this lesson yetgtAnyway I found two more MPLs on the Novellus Chart and drew them ingt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone My apologiesI sent you an outdated version of the lesson Thanks for letting me know Musthave been my bedtime Heres the correct version Regards Gordon Lesson 3 In one of his course letters Dr Andrews wrote The Law of Physics stated by Newton that Actionand Reaction are equal and opposite was first applied to prices by your Course Directors friendthe late Roger Babson who attributed his earnings of several million dollars to this law In this lesson youll be introduced to the ActionReaction trading method as taught by Dr Andrewsin his trading course The AR method requires a centerline or CL from which to start The CL can be any of thefollowing - MPL Multi-pivot line A line drawn across 3 or more pivots - ML Median line The middle line of the pitchfork - MLH Median line parallel Either parallel line of the pitchfork - 2P line A line drawn across 2 pivots - 2 Gap line A line drawn connecting 2 gaps without touching prices in between - Peak to low line A line drawn connecting the high and low of a price leg

- Low to peak line A line drawn connecting the low and high of a price leg These are the primary lines that Dr Andrews used He stressed that some pencil work and a goodeyeball was needed in order to find the best fitting CL As with most other chart lines somework better than others The task is to find the best fit as he put it You will be shown examples ofeach of the above CLs Determining which of the above listed lines to use as the CL is the first step in the ActionReactionmethod With practice a quick view of the chart under study will be all thats needed to spot themost likely CL Youll be shown later how to experiment with possible combinations in order tofind the centerline that is most in tune with the market under study Well begin with the attached chart Note the CL drawn In this example a MPL (multi-pivot line)was used as the CL A MPL is a straight line that connects three or more consecutive pivotswithout passing through prices The connecting line is then extended Ive circled the three pivotsthat form the MPL on the chart There are several other places on our chart where a MPL CL canbe drawn Please bear in mind that this is just the first step of the process Identification of likelyCLs is all were after here See if you can locate two more then draw them in and send the chartback to me

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Donnerstag 24 Februar 2000 025105

At 22300 92300 PM you wroteI found two more MPLs on the Novellus Chart and drew them ingt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your mpls were correct This next segment shows the purpose of the centerline and how it isused Your payment in full arrived today TradersZone Thank you Regards Gordon Lesson 3 continued Please refer to the attached chart of Novellus The line drawn connecting the 3 circled pivots is amulti-pivot line (MPL) and represents the centerline (CL) well be using in this example Recall inthe previous segment that several types of centerlines are possible The choice is determined byexperimenting with the potential combinations on the chart under study Its best to try to locate acenterline somewhere close to the middle of the price chart in order to have sufficient past andforward data to use with the study This will become clear as you work with the method Once the centerline is drawn the next step is to locate a previous low or high pivot point to use fordrawing an action line Dr Andrews observed that the low pivot points often seem to work bestbut that either could be used In our example a line starting at the previous significant low wasdrawn parallel to the CL It is labeled A-1 (Action line 1) because it represents the first actionline Dr Andrews called it an action line because it was drawn as a result of a previous pivot (pricereversal) that had taken place Next a parallel line was drawn to the right of the CL and labeled R-1 Notice that it is the same distance from the CL as the corresponding A-1 line It is labeled R-1because it represents the first reaction line a line where prices are likely to stop or reverseNotice how prices reacted at the R-1 line in early 98 That serves as an indication that thecenterline chosen for this study should be a good one to use Not all reaction lines cause such aclear reversal as the R1 on this chart but many do Thats why its important to experiment withvarious centerline possibilities in order to find action lines that produce reaction lines which createthe greatest number of pivots or price stall-outs This experimentation is often quite time

consuming but experience has shown that it is time well spent When a centerline is found that isin tune with the price action of the issue under study it can be a highly effective tool for use inlocating probable reversal areas When combined with pitchfork lines the AR method can pinpointpotential reversal areas that are generally not recognized as such by others Dr Andrewstechniques for using the pitchfork and AR lines together are covered in later lessons In coming segments well study other lines that Dr Andrews used for his centerlines In themeantime experiment with the multi-pivot centerline on your own charts Then please send mean example of your work along with any questions you may have

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Freitag 25 Februar 2000 211356

gtIn the meantime experiment with the multi-pivot centerline on your owngtcharts Then please send me an example of your work along with anygtquestions you may have Hello Gordon I was wondering how many ActionReaction lines could be drawn on a chart On my attached chart I found at least 6 parallellines which had a significant meaning for the price RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject AR linesDate Montag 28 Februar 2000 080128

gtHello Gordongt gtI was wondering how many ActionReaction lines could be drawn on agtchart On my attached chart I found at least 6 parallel lines which hadgta significant meaning for the pricegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hi TradersZone Theres no set number of lines that can be drawnactually the more you can find the betterFinding a good centerline is the key And once you find lines that work such as you did anynumber of parallel lines can be drawn You are doing exactly what Dr Andrews didtaking thetime and effort to find the best fitting sets of lines Each chart has them and each chart is differentas Im sure youve found Nice work Heres the next part Regards Gordon Lesson 3 continued One of Dr Andrews favorite techniques dealt with gapsan often times perplexing price event formany traders His observations over the years suggested to him that while gaps show upfrequently on many price charts few traders have a method for including them as an integral partof their chart analysis Thats not surprising since not much has been published about how toapproach the use of gaps in a trading method Dr Andrews however found several ways to putprice gaps to good use An ActionReaction centerline which uses gaps as its basis is one suchmethod Please refer to the attached chart of Cendant Youll see that a centerline was drawn which passedthrough the July gap Note that it also came in contact with several pivots thereby qualifying as agapmulti-pivot centerline It is drawn by starting at the April low pivot and extending a line acrossand through the gap in mid-July It subsequently touches two additional high pivots Dr Andrews counted each gap as two pivots He noted that the more pivots a line touched the

stronger the line tended to be in the future Good reason then for using the July gap as the basisfor an ActionReaction study Our CL is labelled a gap-mpl-CL The May 98 high was used for the Action Line starting point A line was then drawn parallel to theCenterline as per ActionReaction procedure The corresponding Reaction Line was then drawn inIf this particular study had been drawn on Cendants chart right after the July gap was put in thepotential for prices to go all the way down to the Reaction Line might have seemed very slim at thetime Notice however that prices reached the Reaction Line in early September Youll see thishappen time and again as you work with the AR method The core of its effectiveness is a strongCL Please send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts of your choice

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re AR linesDate Montag 28 Februar 2000 155937

gtPlease send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts of yourgtchoice Hello Gordonhere are my examples RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject More on the ARDate Donnerstag 2 Maumlrz 2000 071158

At 22800 35900 PM you wrotegtgtPlease send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts ofgtgtyour choicegt gtHello Gordongthere are my examplesgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone You picked some good examples to use for your AR study Both showed the potential power of thismethod Takes time and lots of chart study sometimes to find the best set of lines but the rewardscan be many Heres something else to look at Regards Gordon The ActionReaction technique requires a strong centerline from which to begin The key todeciding which set of pivots to use for the centerline is found through experimenting with thevarious configurations visible on the chart under study The centerline might be a series of gapspivots an existing median line or any of Dr Andrews lines The task is to search for that centerlinewhich shows the greatest potential for projecting price reversal areas Dr Andrews did that byfinding a likely centerline near the middle of his price chart That allowed him to use any of theprevious pivots for his action lines By experimenting he found reaction lines that did the best jobof pegging reversal areas at data points located forward of the centerline Reaction lines are equal and opposite of the action lines and serve to project price levels at whicha reversal can be expected That is why the task of seeking out the best centerline is so importantDr Andrews reasoned that a series of reaction lines which have pegged price reversals in the pastis likely to continue to be in tune with current and future market price action Having severalprevious pivots to use as anchors for drawing action lines is thus essential The attached chart of Lattice illustrates this concept Please bear in mind that the gapmplcenterline is not the only centerline one could use on this chart You might want to study the chartfor other AR possibilities Try a peak-to-peak CL or a multi-pivot CL Send me your studies along

with any questions

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re More on the ARDate Samstag 4 Maumlrz 2000 002521

gtThe attached chart of Lattice illustrates this conceptgtPlease bear in mind that the gapmpl centerline is not the onlygtcenterline one could use on this chartgtYou might want to study the chart for other AR possibilitiesgtTry a peak-to-peak CL or a multi-pivot CL Send me your studiesgtalong with any questions Hello Gordonhere is my chart RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Peak to peak clDate Sonntag 5 Maumlrz 2000 064107

At 3400 122500 AM you wrotegtHello Gordongthere is my chartgt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Looks like you have the concept down Takes time and a lot of chart work to find the bestcenterline When the reaction lines dont seem to peg reversal areas chances are the centerline isnot the one that is best in tune with the price action of the issue under studyDespite the time required for this method it was one of Dr Andrews stand-bysAR lines could befound on most of his charts Im sending a chart with an example of a peak-to-peak CL Regards Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Peak to peak clDate Sonntag 5 Maumlrz 2000 171232

Hello Gordon I think the peak-to-peak CL on the last chart I sent to you was not really drawn from peak to peakIm sending another example RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next LessonDate Mittwoch 8 Maumlrz 2000 072526

At 3500 51200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtI think the peak-to-peak CL on the last chart I sent to you was notgtreally drawn from peak to peakgtIm sending another examplegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your peak to peak cl example was correctly drawn Thats a fairly simple approach but quite oftenthe peak to peak yields better reaction lines Heres the first part of the next lesson Regards Gordon Youll find times when prices dont quite reach the ML but instead drift alongside or away from itThe Schiff ML was designed to be used in place of the regular ML whenever that happens Suchprice action can be found at any place on a chart but most frequently occurs after a sharp sell-offor run-up of prices Dr Andrews also used the Schiff ML whenever his regular ML sloped at an unusually steep angleHe said it helped smooth out irregular price action such as that caused by unexpected earningsnews crop planting delays or poor growing conditions crop production reports etc Youll findnearly vertical price moves over a short period of time on many charts The Schiff ML method helpsput things back in perspective when that happens Well use the chart of Sterling Bancorp as an example of prices drifting away from the regular MLThat ML is drawn in black Prices didnt quite reach the ML but drifted alongside and eventuallyaway from it The Schiff ML and parallel lines are drawn in red Notice how prices were containedwithin the Schiff pitchfork until they finally broke down at the upper parallel line The procedure for drawing the Schiff ML is the same as for the regular ML except the startingpoint is located midway between the first 2 pivots youll be using The Sterling Bancorp chart

illustrates how this is done Dr Andrews also suggested using the Schiff ML whenever the regular ML method doesnt seem tobe in sync with price action Practice this procedure on your own charts and send a couple examples when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next LessonDate Donnerstag 9 Maumlrz 2000 001143

Hello Gordon in my charting software (Dynamic Trader) the Schiff ML is drawn by finding the midpoint of the line between pivot A and pivot Bmoving this point horizontally to directly above or below (depending on whether A is a low or high pivot) the A pivot anddrawing a line from his point through the midpoint of the BC swingAre there different methods of drawing a Schiff MLI was too lazy to draw Schiff MLs by hand with the method you described so Im sending my examples with the Dynamic TraderSchiff MLs -) RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject SchiffDate Samstag 11 Maumlrz 2000 070226

At 3900 121100 AM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtin my charting software (Dynamic Trader) the Schiff ML is drawn bygtfinding the midpoint of the line between pivot A and pivot B movinggtthis point horizontally to directly above or below (depending ongtwhether A is a low or high pivot) the A pivot and drawing a linegtgtfrom his point through the midpoint of the BC swinggtAre there different methods of drawing a Schiff MLgtI was too lazy to draw Schiff MLs by hand with the method yougtdescribed so Im sending my examples with the Dynamic Trader Schiff MLs -)gt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your program Schiff line procedure is fineits actually what Dr Andrews called a modified schiff ml and is onlyslightly different than the one I sent you initially The one you used is preferred by most course members Im sendingthe modified Schiff lesson and a chart along with this email The chart example shows how to use it with 0-34 pivots Regards Gordon

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Sliding Parallel LineDate Montag 13 Maumlrz 2000 005252

Hello TradersZone Heres one of the tools Dr Andrews used most often when entering exiting or reversing marketpositions Not many people know about this technique Regards Gordon The Sliding Parallel (SH) is drawn whenever prices cross an Andrews line and then move along itFor example if the bottom of a daily price bar range drops through a lower parallel line of apitchfork a new parallel line is then drawn from that low and extended to the right If the nextdays price bar drops through that sliding parallel line a sell signal is generated Whenever price action dictates a sliding parallel the next step is to draw a Warning Line Thewarning line is an additional parallel line that is an image extension of the original pitchforkchannels It serves as a warning that if prices penetrate the sliding parallel the next likely target isthe WL The attached chart of Avis illustrates these procedures Please try these on your own charts andsend me an example

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Sliding Parallel LineDate Dienstag 14 Maumlrz 2000 225737

Hello Gordon this is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning line RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 065606

At 31400 105700 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtthis is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning linegt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone Your chart of circuit city was a good example for this study I may have mentioned it earlier but DrAndrews used this technique on a regular basis The next part of this lesson covers another of hisfavorite tools the mini-median line pitchfork Here it is Regards Gordon The Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry and exit tools Though mostoften drawn using alternate closing prices alternate highs and lows can also be usedin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days is usually the maximumbetween pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or more back from P2 Dr Andrews used Mini-Median Line pitchforks for buy and sell signals whenever he expected areversal Some examples include a probable P5 or when prices are at a Warning Line ML MLHmajor ML extension or a sideways channel price target When prices cross the Mini-Median LineParallel (MMLH) a sliding parallel (SH) is used for order entry

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 231537

gtThe Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry andgtexit tools Though most often drawn using alternate closing pricesgtalternate highs and lows can also be usedgtin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days isgtusually the maximum between pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or moregtback from P2

Hello Gordon

wouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timingCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available whenDr Andrews was alive

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject intraday chartsDate Samstag 18 Maumlrz 2000 012400

At 31600 111500 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongtgtwouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsgtinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timinggtCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available when DrgtAndrews was alivegtgtRegardsgtTradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Youre absolutely correctintraday charts were not available when DrAndrews was a trader

Im reading between the lines here but if you plan to day-trade using the course techniques ie thepitchfork then I agree that the regular pitchfork would be more useful on intraday charts Otherwisewhipsaw would be a significant problem Please get back to me if I didnt address your questionbecause this is a very important technique The mini-median line pitchfork and sliding parallel showedup on most of Dr Andrews charts

Regards

Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re intraday chartsDate Dienstag 21 Maumlrz 2000 220322

Hello Gordon

You are right Im planning to daytrade SampP futures using the course techniques among other things

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 003408

Hi TradersZone Here are a couple Andrews techniques that will help anticipate the breakout direction of asideways channelThey work often enough to warrant keep handy Regards Gordon In an earlier lesson you were introduced to Dr Andrews sideways count You saw how frequentlythe sideways count method provided high probability price objectives after the breakout from theestablished channel took place In this segment of lesson 4 youll be shown 2 congestion area techniques that can help youdetermine the probable sideways channel price breakout direction Both rely on the use of pivots The first uses the pivot points that are circled on a sideways channel Dr Andrews observed thatwhenever a sideways channel results in at least 5 circle contacts the eventual price breakoutwould very often be in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle If circle 5 is at thetop of the channel for example the eventual price breakout would likely be to the upside If circle5 is at the bottom of the channel look for a downside breakout Dr Andrews noted that thistechnique can be subject to false breakouts but that such breakouts are usually followed shortlyafter with a confirmed breakout in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle Heemphasized that this study is best considered as a rule of thumb observation He viewed it as asupporting indicator for use with a short-term pitchfork as prices approached a channel line There are 2 charts attached that show how this works

The second technique in this part of lesson 4 deals with a sideways channelthat is building shortly after a P3 has been formed Dr Andrews noted thatwhenever that happened the probabilities were high that prices wouldbreakout in the same direction they were moving prior to the formation ofthe sideways channel The attached P3 to sideways example chart shows thisprocedure

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 205235

Hello Gordon here is my example for the 5 circle sideways count RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Lesson 5Date Montag 27 Maumlrz 2000 060731

At 32400 85200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my example for the 5 circle sideways countgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt gt Hi TradersZone Good example of the 5th circle tendency to predict the direction of a sideways breakout Any luckfinding a chart showing the P3 to sideways rule Im sending the first part of the next lesson This trendline method is a useful tool with all of DrAndrews course lines He used it all the time but especially when looking for confirmation of othercourse method trading signals Regards Gordon The Course Trendline__________________________________________________________ Next well discuss the trendline Seasoned traders agree that the trendline is one of their mostimportant tools No matter what kind of trading program or technique they use the trendline on achart is a must But one of the biggest mistakes made by amateurs and professionals alike isinconsistently drawing or defining the trendline Dr Andrews trendline procedure is simpleconsistent and accurate It works extremely well with the pivot count and with the pitchfork For an uptrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the lowest low up and to thehighest minor low point preceding the highest high The line must not pass through prices inbetween the two low points Extend the line(Attached chart of Brightpoint) For a downtrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the highest high point to thelowest minor high point preceding the lowest low so that it does not pass through prices inbetween the two high points Extend the line (Brightpoint chart) Thats all theres to it Its simple consistent and it works well with other Andrews lines It also

helps eliminate personal bias and haphazard analysis Practice drawing these trendlines on your own charts Send me any questions you might have andthen e-mail a chart of your choosing which shows at least two uptrend and two downtrend linesthat youve drawn_______________________________________________________________________

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Lesson 5Date Dienstag 28 Maumlrz 2000 120224

Hello Gordon here is my chart with trendlinesWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going above the trendline again should I draw a new trendline anddelete the old one Attached is another chart with the P3 to sideways rule I finally found an example for it RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Price failure techniqueDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081412

At 32800 120200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my chart with trendlinesgtWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going abovegtthe trendline again should I draw a new trendline and delete the oldgtone Hi TradersZone Take a look at the chart Im returningI added some lines for you to considerWith the course trendline once its broken a new one should be started Theres a technique thatties in with this coming up soon Meanwhile heres an important technique to work on It deals with those times when prices dontreach the ML Regards Gordon Dr Andrews Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P ofreversaland the ML the probability is that this price reversal will go further thanitdid on its approach toward the ML (Extract of original course material) A price failure very often indicates a sizeable reversal will take placeThepitchforks drawn on the chart of Home Depot illustrate the concept of pricefailure Dr Andrews routinely drew a new pitchfork on his chart after a newsignificant pivot had formed He knew that prices had a high probability ofreaching the new ML before stalling out or reversing If prices reversedbeforereaching the ML thereby forming a new pivot he termed it a price failureTheunderlying idea here is that Dr Andrews fully anticipated his median linewouldact as a price magnet To conclude that a price reversal resulted in a price failure Dr Andrewsused

these primary signalsa subsequent price penetration of a short-termmulti-pivotline andor a return of prices to and penetration of the parallel lineformed atpivot 3 of the pitchfork (The circles on the Home Depot chart denote theparallelline penetration signal To avoid clutter the mpl lines were not drawn) One possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart of ConsecoIncLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me a copy

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject ChartDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081800Attachments image002png

Hi TradersZone Forgot the chart Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Price failure techniqueDate Samstag 1 April 2000 201000

gtOne possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart ofgtConseco IncgtLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me agtcopy Hi Gordon here are my charts with price failures RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Mittwoch 5 April 2000 235624

Hi TradersZone Good price failure examples you sentany comments or questions about it Heres the next partanother old standby Dr Andrews kept handy Regards Gordon In this segment youll learn how to use the Fan line Technique To draw the fan lines youll apply the coursetrendline method which was introduced in an earlier lesson It might be well to emphasize that the practicalapplication of the course trendline method requires practice and experience both of which will serve youwell in this technique Dr Andrews used fan lines as an adjunct to his pitchfork sideways channel andactionreaction methods In the fan line study three trendlines are drawn from the original reversal pivot of the price correction understudy typically a P0 or a P5 Youll notice on the charts included with this study that each fan line is at aflatter angle than its predecessor When the third fan line is broken the rule is that the correction has endedand a new trend is under way Try this technique on some of your own charts and then please send me asample

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Donnerstag 6 April 2000 234315

Hi Gordon No I dont have any specific question about the price failure technique I guess the next likely target after a price failure wouldbe the warning line I have attached two charts with fan linesIs it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the third fan line is broken RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Next segmentDate Freitag 7 April 2000 003312

Hello TradersZone

Tuesday April 06 2000 114315 AM you wrote

TZgt Hi Gordon

TZgt No I dont have any specific question about the price failureTZgt technique I guess the next likely target after a price failureTZgt would be the warning line

TZgt I have attached two charts with fan linesTZgt Is it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the thirdTZgt fan line is broken

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Thats right the warning line is the next price target Additionalwarning lines can be drawn if needed but usually one will do it Ifprices go through the first warning line another can be drawn butmost likely a new pitchfork could be drawn instead which would bepreferable Helps stay current with recently formed pivots

When prices break through the third fan line a buy or sell signal isgiven Not sure what you mean by fourth target fan line Im a littledense today

Your chart work was goodthis is another handy tool for spotting thehigh probability of a price reversal or trend change

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject The Gap TradeDate Freitag 7 April 2000 004858

Hello TradersZone This trading signal doesnt show up very often but past observations have shown that its well worth watching for Dr Andrews placed a lot of emphasis on the importance of price gaps something many traders overlook This is one of his gap uses Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom The Gap Trading Technique Price gaps can be a dilemma for many traders The general rule denoting market strength or weakness after ahigh volume gap often comes up short after the initial reaction is over Many gappers simply run out ofsteam A high volume gap in itself seems to offer precious little evidence that a profitable move is about toget under way Dr Andrews used price gaps somewhat differently than others He counted a gap as 2 pivots Youll see howthat works in the following technique which uses a gap to arrive at a price level for a buy or sell order Using short-term daily price pivots label the pivot immediately preceding the gap as p0 Count the gap as 2pivots labeling it p1 amp p2 After p3 has formed and prices reverse towards a short-term p4 draw a horizontalline 2 price tics or more (individual preference)to the right of p3 Enter the market only if prices reach orpenetrate that line within a few days after reversing from p4 Please look over your own charts to see if you can find places where the gap trade technique could have beenused Send me a sample when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 001925

Hello Gordon this is my chart with a gap trade RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 065538

Hello TradersZone Thursday April 08 2000 121925 PM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt this is my chart with a gap trade TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Good examplethe gap trade technique shines when an issue in at or near a P5 Similar to the one on thechart you sent Heres another trading signal tool Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Dr Andrews used several techniques which helped him determine whether a P5 was near at hand Youllrecall that he observed most price moves ended or had a significant reversal at a P5 This technique uses alternate closing prices after a P4 has been formed As with many of his studies thenumber 5 is used The chart accompanying this segment shows that there were 5 alternate closes to thedownside after P4 was put in Dr Andrews noted that whenever 5 or more alternate closes followed a P4 theprobabilities were high that a P5 was near at hand An added feature to this chart study is the sideways channel Notice how the 2nd target price and the 5thalternate close nearly coincide

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 12 April 2000 200730

Hello Gordon This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 13 April 2000 082418

Monday April 12 2000 80730 AM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hello TradersZone Good chart example of this Andrews toolanother of his very unusual observations that workmore often than not Heres the final part of this lesson Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom In this trendline method Dr Andrews once again used the number 5 as the basis for locating aprobable reversal area He found this technique to be especially useful whenever a clear orobvious pivot count didnt show up onthe price move under study Trendlines are drawn using the course trendline method When the 5th trendline is broken theprobability is high that the trend under study has ended A mini-median line pitchfork andorsliding parallel could be used for pricing a trading order The accompanying chart of Compaq Computer is an example of how the trendline study could beused The pivot count beginning at the October low is difficult to nail down There were severalsmall areas of congestion but no sizeable corrections while prices advanced The count wasunclear By following the price action using the course trendline technique however the traderwould have been alerted to the possibility of a change of trend when the 5th trendline was brokenin early February Try this technique on your own charts When youre ready please send me an example of yourstudy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 19 April 2000 124108

Hello Gordon this is my example with 5 trendlines RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[6] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 20 April 2000 012726

Monday April 19 2000 124108 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt this is my example with 5 trendlines

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Good example of the 5 TL technique Always reminds me of how the fairly simple tools often do a better job than manyof the sophisticated studies out there

That was the last part of lesson 5 Lesson 6 attached is made in one mailing Youll find Dr Andrews trading rules alongwith a wrap-up review which uses several of his rules You might have questions about some of the rules so feel free tosend them as they arise

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Dr Andrews had an abbreviated set of trading rules on several index cards that he carried around with him in his shirtpocket He said every trading day turned up something new on his charts and by having his rules in his pocket he wasreminded of the need for a methodical approach to his analysis Quite a comment coming from the man who wrote therule book

In this the final lesson of the course Dr Andrews original trading rules and observations are presented Lets work witha few of them at this point

Using charts of issues you follow please send me an example that illustrates your interpretation of each of the followingrules

Rule 4 Anticipating major Ps

Rule 7 Penetration rule

Rule 8 Price failure rule

Rule 11 1-ML23 AR Centerline

Rule 12 Sliding Parallel rule

Rule 15 Mini-median line parallel to buy or sell

Feel free to include any other course techniques you choose to apply but please include examples of the above as aminimum Use more than one technique on a chart if your analysis supports it Send as many charts as you like alongwith your questionscomments

Lesson 6 - Dr Andrews Trading Rules

This lesson covers course rules and significant observations as taught by Dr Andrews in his original trading course Therules are those that he used in his own trading and are provided to serve as a checklist for use with the course tradingmethods youve learned

Rule 1 Where prices are always headed Rule You course members are among the fortunate few to be able to draw astraight line and know that prices are headed toward that ML Very few investors have ever applied this ML principle ofstatistics to price fluctuations and weve never seen this in any books on investment You are among the very few who

know that prices are always headed toward the newest ML

Rule 2 The Rule of coming opposites applies all through life In the bible we find Blessed at they that mourn for theyshall be comforted As investors we know that any losses can be recovered by using course methods

Rule 3 Turn your mind about or Rethink for all good is at hand We should mentally prepare ourselves for thecoming reversal in prices and other affairs Heres one way for example that you course members who know the MLrules can use When prices are skyrocketing upward we do this preparation by thinking If prices pivoted here today atthis price Id draw a new ML bisecting the distance between todays price and the price from which the rise started Andwe know now that if this is a Major Pivot prices will fall rapidly to this new ML Profits from such drops are big and quick

Rule 4 Rule for anticipating major Ps If during congestion or after a rally or decline you can count four previous Psthe fifth one is highly probable to be the one from which a new trend starts

Rule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can make a quick big profit is to watch for the EPformations

Rule 6 The other reversal rule is that prices tend to reverse at or near any ML as well as at any extension of each MLAnd also at any MLH or extensions of MLH

Rule 7 The Penetration Rule is that whenever prices gap past or plunge through any ML there is a high probability thatthey will quickly return to it temporarily and then resume the trend they had before they gapped or plunged through

Rule 8 Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P of reversal and the MLthe probability is that this price reversal will go further than it did on its approach toward the ML

Rule 9 The price failure rule is negated when the next price trend is also a failure in reaching the ML This is almostinvariably a signal of a big fast move in the direction indicated by this last space Rule 10 When alternate median lines of comparable length slope in the same direction the trend is firm and rapidprice changes take place

Rule 11 When 1-ML23 is exactly reached at P4 it can be used as a highly reliable centerline for the AR method

Rule 12 Frequently after crossing a lower MLH prices continue to rise along the MLH Since the crossing of the MLHsignals a further drop is likely use a sliding parallel along the bottom of the most recent crossing If prices drop past thatsliding parallel line a sell signal is generated

Rule 13 MLs between P2 and P3 can start from a nearby or a remote P1 since prices tend to reverse at each of theseMLs Try several such P2-P3 MLs to discover the best fit

Rule 14 The distance of each MLH from its ML is the distance of the next warning line Use these warning lineswhenever a SH has signalled a buy or sell

Rule 15 Use the MMLH as a buy or sell signal when you expect a reversal because of a P5 Also when prices are at aWL ML extension line or where course lines converge or intersect

Rule 16 Converging lines that meet prices have shown the highest probability of a trend reversal

Rule 17 Two to four days is usually the maximum between P2 and P3 for a MML P1 can be a day or so back from P2and 3

Rule 18 The most reliable ActionReaction centerlines seem to be MPL 2P line 2 Gap line peak to low or low to peak

Rule 19 When prices pass through R lines look for a pull back and then a continuing move in the direction of the passthrough

Rule 20 Use gaps as Action lines from the centerline

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 003755

Hello Gordonhere is my example for Rule 4 And I have a question What are EP formations gtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 021242

Tuesday May 04 2000 123755 PM you wrote TZgt Hello GordonTZgt here is my example for Rule 4 TZgt And I have a question What are EP formations gtgtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegtgta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hi TradersZone Good use of the warning linesalso the EP material is part of lesson 4 Rather than go backthrough the files to see when (or if) it was sent Im sending it along with this reply Glad youbrought it up Best RegardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Tuesday May 04 2000208 PM Dr Andrews used a fairly common price chart formation that he found useful at probable P5market tops and bottoms The formation generally called a wedge or pennant by chartists isreferred to in Dr Andrews trading course as the Expanding Pivot (EP) One of the few chartformations used in the course he regarded it as among the most dependable indications that amarket top was forming Closely related to the EP is his Inverted Expanding Pivot (IEP) which henoted could often be observed at market bottoms Both are regarded as intermediate and long-term reversal indicators Dr Andrews found that both formations were most reliable when they occurred after a sharprapid price move coinciding with the formation of a probable P5 He said it wasnt unusual for theformation to take several weeks to complete and that conservative traders could best avoid thewhipsaw associated with congestion patterns by trading only in the direction of the probable price

break out of the EP or IEP formation The attached charts illustrate these formations Please look over your own charts for an example ofthe EP and IEP and send me a copy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 232127

Hello Gordon Thank you for the lesson with the EP material I couldnt find it in any previous emailHere is my example for Rule 7 RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Rule 4Date Samstag 6 Mai 2000 080827

Wednesday May 05 2000 112127 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt Thank you for the lesson with the EP materialTZgt I couldnt find it in any previous emailTZgt Here is my example for Rule 7

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hi TradersZone

Glad you mentioned it earlierexcept for the EP IEP and hissideways channel Dr Andrews didnt have much to say about chartpatterns and formations These are good ones to use though

Your study of the penetration rule was good Later

Best Regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Wednesday May 05 2000801 PM

Page 14: Pitchfork primer

In this lesson youll be introduced to Dr Andrews sideways count The sideways count was hisold reliable a tool that worked so well so often that it was one of the very first studies heperformed on his charts The sideways count gave him a reliable gauge that told him ahead of timehow far a stock or commodity was likely to move Sounds too good to be true perhaps but as youwork with the sideways count youll discover for yourself how often the projected price targetsare reachedoften within tics Markets frequently spend a lot of time in congestion Heres Dr Andrews way to use thatcongestion to our advantage Looking at the Brightpoint attachment please note the channel lines starting in January Youll seethat most of the pivots from Jan-May were within this channel Now look at where Ive placedcircles At each point where prices touched a channel line and then reversed direction and went allthe way back to touch the opposite channel line a circle was drawn Put another way if pricestouch one channel line but then dont go all the way back to touch the opposite channel line acircle is not drawn At first glance this technique can often be unclear so well pause here for some chart work Pleasee-mail me a chart that shows where youve drawn channel lines to identify sideways price actionand also where youve placed the channel line circles

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject ReDate Mittwoch 9 Februar 2000 184837

gtAt each point where prices touched a channel line and then reversedgtdirection and went all the way back to touch the opposite channel linegta circle was drawn Put another way if prices touch one channel linegtbut then dont go all the way back to touch the opposite channel linegta circle is not drawn Shouldnt the last circle on your Brightpoint chart be left outThe price didnt return to the opposite channel line after that day This is my chart

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Thanks for the questionDate Mittwoch 9 Februar 2000 231437

At 2900 64800 PM you wrotegtShouldnt the last circle on your Brightpoint chart be left outgtThe price didnt return to the opposite channel line after that day Hello TradersZone The last circle is appropriate but I can see where the wording in the explanation is confusing Ihave changed that paragraph to read Looking at the Brightpoint attachment please note the channel lines starting in January Youll seethat most of the pivots from Jan- May were within this channel Now look at where the circles wereplaced on the channel lines They are in alternate sequenceNote that each circle was drawn only after prices had first been at the opposite channel lineTheBrightpoint chart illustrates this procedure Thanks for pointing this out TradersZone If the wording is still unclear to you Id appreciate yourinput Meanwhile heres the next segment of this lessonRegards Gordon Well continue to use the Brightpoint chart for this portion of the sideways count study To reviewthe pattern were looking for should be a recent rectangular shaped sideways trading range thatcontains most if not all of the congestion price action Take a look at the attached chart and notehow well defined the price channel for Brightpoint is Youll probably notice that it is deeper thanthe channel you studied on the chart in the preceding segment This comparison is made toillustrate that while the first channel example covers a longer period of time the second includesall of the price ranges and is the preferred method Please look at where the circles were placed on the channel lines To review a new circle is drawnonly after prices have first been at the opposite channel line Recall that circles must be inalternate sequence eg upper linelower lineupper linelower line etc one circle at a time Note that the price range within the channel is $4 34 (High 21 12 Low 16 34) There were twocircles drawn on the lower line of our sideways channel before prices broke down Using thatinformation our next step will be to use some simple arithmetic in order to come up with twodownside price targets Well cover that procedure in the next segment Please let me know whenyou are ready to continue

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Sideways countDate Mittwoch 9 Februar 2000 232315Attachments image001png

Hi TradersZone Im returning your chartplease note comments GordonRegards Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Thanks for the questionDate Donnerstag 10 Februar 2000 233059

Hello Gordonthank you Im ready for the next lesson

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next partDate Donnerstag 10 Februar 2000 235613

At 21000 113000 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongtthank you Im ready for the next lessongt gt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt gt gt TradersZoneI sent this yesterday but will re-send It was part of my reply to your questionregarding the circle I dont have a record of your return chartwork for this part If its a duplicatesend sorry Regards Gordon Well continue to use the Brightpoint chart for this portion of the sideways count study To reviewthe pattern were looking for should be a recent rectangular shaped sideways trading range thatcontains most if not all of the congestion price action Take a look at the attached chart and notehow well defined the price channel for Brightpoint is Youll probably notice that it is deeper thanthe channel you studied on the chart in the preceding segment This comparison is made toillustrate that while the first channel example covers a longer period of time the second includesall of the price ranges and is the preferred method Please look at where the circles were placed on the channel lines To review a new circle is drawnonly after prices have first been at the opposite channel line Recall that circles must be inalternate sequence eg upper linelower lineupper linelower line etc one circle at a time Note that the price range within the channel is $4 34 (High 21 12 Low 16 34) There were twocircles drawn on the lower line of our sideways channel before prices broke down Using thatinformation our next step will be to use some simple arithmetic in order to come up with twodownside price targets Well cover that procedure in the next segment Please let me know whenyou are ready to continue

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next partDate Freitag 11 Februar 2000 234113

I think the placement of the circles is clear to me nowI have attached another chart with a sideways count RegardsTradersZone gtTradersZoneI sent this yesterday but will re-send It was part ofgtmy reply to your question regarding the circle I dont have a recordgtof your return chartwork for this part If its a duplicate send sorry

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject SidewaysDate Montag 14 Februar 2000 054227

At 21100 114100 PM you wrotegtI think the placement of the circles is clear to me nowgtI have attached another chart with a sideways countgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone Your chart was on target Looks like youre ready for the next part Here it is Regards Gordon During this segment youll learn how to arrive at two price targets using Dr Andrews sidewayscount Simple arithmetic is all thats required once the sideways channel and circles are in place Well continue to use the Brightpoint chart which is attached Note that Brightpoint fell throughthe bottom channel line at the point where we placed our second circle so figuring out possibledownside targets would have been in order at that time Heres how thats done 1 Determine the price range of the channel In this case the range is $4 34 (21 12 - 16 34) 2 Count the number of circles on the lower channel line The lower line is used in this casebecause thats the line that didnt hold Prices went through it returned to check it out and thencontinued lower 3 Multiply the price range of the channel times the number of circles drawn on the lower channelline (4 34 x 2 = 9 12) 4 Subtract that figure from the upper channel line priceThe result becomes downside price target 1 (21 12 - 9 12 = 12) 5 Next subtract that same figure from the price at the lower channel line Thats price target 2(16 34 - 9 12 = 7 14)

In the case of an upside channel breakout the procedure is reversed Please draw a few channelsand figure out some downside targets on your own charts When youre ready send me two orthree examples of your work As always send your questions as they arise

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re SidewaysDate Montag 14 Februar 2000 134314

Here are my examples I couldnt find enough charts with downside targets so I included some charts with upside targets Do the channel lines always have to be horizontal When I look at my charts I find more channels with an upward slope or adownward slope RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Sideways channelsDate Freitag 18 Februar 2000 005531

At 21400 14300 PM you wrotegtHere are my examples I couldnt find enough charts with downsidegttargets so I included some charts with upside targetsgt gtDo the channel lines always have to be horizontal When I look at mygtcharts I find more channels with an upward slope or a downward slopegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone The sideways method can be used with either up or down Sorry didnt mean to imply that only downsidetargets should be found Ill reword that portion of the lesson Thanks for mentioning it Dr Andrews sideways method works only on horizontal channels Others have mentioned the slopingchannels also and have wondered if there is some method to use with them I know of none Ive askedother course members for their ideas on how to approach this problem but so far no one has come up with amethod I would think that there should be a solution but have not personally taken the time to research itIf some method could be found that works as often as the Andrews sideways count it would be a significantfind The Andrews sideways count doesnt always hit the targets as you saw on your chart of Bausch amp Lomb Itworks more often than not though and it still amazes me at how often prices reach the targets Heres an observation to keep in mind Quite often after the first target is reached prices will reverse andhead back towards the channel At times youll note that they return inside the channel They will thenreverse again and head back towards the second price target These reversals happen frequently and presenttrading opportunities Im including the final segment of this lesson Regards Gordon So far in the course youve learned about Dr Andrews pivot counting procedure pitchfork and sidewayscount Youve noticed by now how often prices change trend at a P5 Youve seen how the 0-34 ML methodcan help locate the probable P5 area Youve seen how often price targets are met using the sideways countmethod The tendency for prices to reverse at a median line should be recognized as a high probability eventas well In coming lessons youll be shown how Dr Andrews used these and other high probability events totrade the stock and commodity markets The tools and techniques he used will help you put the finishingtouches on your market analysis using Andrews lines

Before continuing on to the next lesson lets briefly review what has so far been covered The attached chartprovides an opportunity to illustrate the methods referred to above Please draw these methods on thechart and return to me

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Sideways channelsDate Montag 21 Februar 2000 193743

gtBefore continuing on to the next lesson lets briefly review what hasgtso far been covered The attached chart provides an opportunity togtillustrate the methods referred to above Please draw these methods ongtthe chart and return to me Hello Gordonhere is my chart RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next lesson attachedDate Mittwoch 23 Februar 2000 014539

At 22100 73700 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongthere is my chartgt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Good job on the pivots sideways count and pitchforkLooks like youre ready to move on to the next part It wont be long and things will begin to fall inplace Regards Gordon Lesson 4 continued In one of his course letters Dr Andrews wrote The Law of Physics stated by Newton that Actionand Reaction are equal and opposite was first applied to prices by your Course Directors friendthe late Roger Babson who attributed his earnings of several million dollars to this law Beginning with this segment of lesson four and continuing in lesson five youll learn how to drawand apply the ActionReaction trading method as taught by Dr Andrews in his trading course The AR method requires a centerline or CL from which to start The CL can be any of thefollowing - MPL - ML - MLH - 2P line - 2 Gap line - Peak to low line - Low to peak lineThese are the primary lines that Dr Andrews used He stressed that some pencil work and a goodeyeball was needed in order to find the best fitting CL As with most other chart lines somework better than others The task is to find the best fit as he put it You will be shown examples of

each of the above CLs in this lesson and the next Determining which of the above listed lines to use as the CL is the first step in the ActionReactionmethod The solution often presents itself With a little practice a quick scan of the chart understudy will be all thats needed to spot the most likely CL Well begin with the attached chart Notethe CL drawn In this example a MPL (multi-pivot line) was used as the CL A MPL is a straightline that connects three or more consecutive pivots without passing through prices Theconnecting line is then extended Ive circled the three pivots that form the MPL on the chartThere are several other places on our chart where a MPL CL can be drawn Please bear in mindthat this is just the first step of the process Identification of likely CLs is all were after here Seeif you can locate two more then draw them in and send the chart back to me Well take up fromthere

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next lesson attachedDate Mittwoch 23 Februar 2000 212304

gtLesson 4 continuedgt gtIn one of his course letters Dr Andrews wrote The Law of Physicsgtstated by Newton that Action and Reaction are equal and opposite wasgtfirst applied to prices by your Course Directors friend the lategtRoger Babson who attributed his earnings of several million dollars to this lawgt gtBeginning with this segment of lesson four and continuing in lessongtfive youll learn how to draw and apply the ActionReaction tradinggtmethod as taught by Dr Andrews in his trading coursegt gtThe AR method requires a centerline or CL from which to startgtThe CL can be any of the followinggt - MPLgt - MLgt - MLHgt - 2P linegt - 2 Gap linegt - Peak to low linegt - Low to peak line Hello Gordon2P line 2 Gap line Peak to low line Low to peak line ndash actually I dont know what these lines areAre they discussed in Lesson 3 I believe you havenrsquot sent me this lesson yetAnyway I found two more MPLs on the Novellus Chart and drew them in RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Lesson 3Date Mittwoch 23 Februar 2000 235958

At 22300 92300 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt2P line 2 Gap line Peak to low line Low to peak line - actually I dont knowgtwhat these lines are Are they discussed in Lesson 3 I believe you didntgtsent me this lesson yetgtAnyway I found two more MPLs on the Novellus Chart and drew them ingt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone My apologiesI sent you an outdated version of the lesson Thanks for letting me know Musthave been my bedtime Heres the correct version Regards Gordon Lesson 3 In one of his course letters Dr Andrews wrote The Law of Physics stated by Newton that Actionand Reaction are equal and opposite was first applied to prices by your Course Directors friendthe late Roger Babson who attributed his earnings of several million dollars to this law In this lesson youll be introduced to the ActionReaction trading method as taught by Dr Andrewsin his trading course The AR method requires a centerline or CL from which to start The CL can be any of thefollowing - MPL Multi-pivot line A line drawn across 3 or more pivots - ML Median line The middle line of the pitchfork - MLH Median line parallel Either parallel line of the pitchfork - 2P line A line drawn across 2 pivots - 2 Gap line A line drawn connecting 2 gaps without touching prices in between - Peak to low line A line drawn connecting the high and low of a price leg

- Low to peak line A line drawn connecting the low and high of a price leg These are the primary lines that Dr Andrews used He stressed that some pencil work and a goodeyeball was needed in order to find the best fitting CL As with most other chart lines somework better than others The task is to find the best fit as he put it You will be shown examples ofeach of the above CLs Determining which of the above listed lines to use as the CL is the first step in the ActionReactionmethod With practice a quick view of the chart under study will be all thats needed to spot themost likely CL Youll be shown later how to experiment with possible combinations in order tofind the centerline that is most in tune with the market under study Well begin with the attached chart Note the CL drawn In this example a MPL (multi-pivot line)was used as the CL A MPL is a straight line that connects three or more consecutive pivotswithout passing through prices The connecting line is then extended Ive circled the three pivotsthat form the MPL on the chart There are several other places on our chart where a MPL CL canbe drawn Please bear in mind that this is just the first step of the process Identification of likelyCLs is all were after here See if you can locate two more then draw them in and send the chartback to me

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Donnerstag 24 Februar 2000 025105

At 22300 92300 PM you wroteI found two more MPLs on the Novellus Chart and drew them ingt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your mpls were correct This next segment shows the purpose of the centerline and how it isused Your payment in full arrived today TradersZone Thank you Regards Gordon Lesson 3 continued Please refer to the attached chart of Novellus The line drawn connecting the 3 circled pivots is amulti-pivot line (MPL) and represents the centerline (CL) well be using in this example Recall inthe previous segment that several types of centerlines are possible The choice is determined byexperimenting with the potential combinations on the chart under study Its best to try to locate acenterline somewhere close to the middle of the price chart in order to have sufficient past andforward data to use with the study This will become clear as you work with the method Once the centerline is drawn the next step is to locate a previous low or high pivot point to use fordrawing an action line Dr Andrews observed that the low pivot points often seem to work bestbut that either could be used In our example a line starting at the previous significant low wasdrawn parallel to the CL It is labeled A-1 (Action line 1) because it represents the first actionline Dr Andrews called it an action line because it was drawn as a result of a previous pivot (pricereversal) that had taken place Next a parallel line was drawn to the right of the CL and labeled R-1 Notice that it is the same distance from the CL as the corresponding A-1 line It is labeled R-1because it represents the first reaction line a line where prices are likely to stop or reverseNotice how prices reacted at the R-1 line in early 98 That serves as an indication that thecenterline chosen for this study should be a good one to use Not all reaction lines cause such aclear reversal as the R1 on this chart but many do Thats why its important to experiment withvarious centerline possibilities in order to find action lines that produce reaction lines which createthe greatest number of pivots or price stall-outs This experimentation is often quite time

consuming but experience has shown that it is time well spent When a centerline is found that isin tune with the price action of the issue under study it can be a highly effective tool for use inlocating probable reversal areas When combined with pitchfork lines the AR method can pinpointpotential reversal areas that are generally not recognized as such by others Dr Andrewstechniques for using the pitchfork and AR lines together are covered in later lessons In coming segments well study other lines that Dr Andrews used for his centerlines In themeantime experiment with the multi-pivot centerline on your own charts Then please send mean example of your work along with any questions you may have

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Freitag 25 Februar 2000 211356

gtIn the meantime experiment with the multi-pivot centerline on your owngtcharts Then please send me an example of your work along with anygtquestions you may have Hello Gordon I was wondering how many ActionReaction lines could be drawn on a chart On my attached chart I found at least 6 parallellines which had a significant meaning for the price RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject AR linesDate Montag 28 Februar 2000 080128

gtHello Gordongt gtI was wondering how many ActionReaction lines could be drawn on agtchart On my attached chart I found at least 6 parallel lines which hadgta significant meaning for the pricegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hi TradersZone Theres no set number of lines that can be drawnactually the more you can find the betterFinding a good centerline is the key And once you find lines that work such as you did anynumber of parallel lines can be drawn You are doing exactly what Dr Andrews didtaking thetime and effort to find the best fitting sets of lines Each chart has them and each chart is differentas Im sure youve found Nice work Heres the next part Regards Gordon Lesson 3 continued One of Dr Andrews favorite techniques dealt with gapsan often times perplexing price event formany traders His observations over the years suggested to him that while gaps show upfrequently on many price charts few traders have a method for including them as an integral partof their chart analysis Thats not surprising since not much has been published about how toapproach the use of gaps in a trading method Dr Andrews however found several ways to putprice gaps to good use An ActionReaction centerline which uses gaps as its basis is one suchmethod Please refer to the attached chart of Cendant Youll see that a centerline was drawn which passedthrough the July gap Note that it also came in contact with several pivots thereby qualifying as agapmulti-pivot centerline It is drawn by starting at the April low pivot and extending a line acrossand through the gap in mid-July It subsequently touches two additional high pivots Dr Andrews counted each gap as two pivots He noted that the more pivots a line touched the

stronger the line tended to be in the future Good reason then for using the July gap as the basisfor an ActionReaction study Our CL is labelled a gap-mpl-CL The May 98 high was used for the Action Line starting point A line was then drawn parallel to theCenterline as per ActionReaction procedure The corresponding Reaction Line was then drawn inIf this particular study had been drawn on Cendants chart right after the July gap was put in thepotential for prices to go all the way down to the Reaction Line might have seemed very slim at thetime Notice however that prices reached the Reaction Line in early September Youll see thishappen time and again as you work with the AR method The core of its effectiveness is a strongCL Please send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts of your choice

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re AR linesDate Montag 28 Februar 2000 155937

gtPlease send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts of yourgtchoice Hello Gordonhere are my examples RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject More on the ARDate Donnerstag 2 Maumlrz 2000 071158

At 22800 35900 PM you wrotegtgtPlease send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts ofgtgtyour choicegt gtHello Gordongthere are my examplesgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone You picked some good examples to use for your AR study Both showed the potential power of thismethod Takes time and lots of chart study sometimes to find the best set of lines but the rewardscan be many Heres something else to look at Regards Gordon The ActionReaction technique requires a strong centerline from which to begin The key todeciding which set of pivots to use for the centerline is found through experimenting with thevarious configurations visible on the chart under study The centerline might be a series of gapspivots an existing median line or any of Dr Andrews lines The task is to search for that centerlinewhich shows the greatest potential for projecting price reversal areas Dr Andrews did that byfinding a likely centerline near the middle of his price chart That allowed him to use any of theprevious pivots for his action lines By experimenting he found reaction lines that did the best jobof pegging reversal areas at data points located forward of the centerline Reaction lines are equal and opposite of the action lines and serve to project price levels at whicha reversal can be expected That is why the task of seeking out the best centerline is so importantDr Andrews reasoned that a series of reaction lines which have pegged price reversals in the pastis likely to continue to be in tune with current and future market price action Having severalprevious pivots to use as anchors for drawing action lines is thus essential The attached chart of Lattice illustrates this concept Please bear in mind that the gapmplcenterline is not the only centerline one could use on this chart You might want to study the chartfor other AR possibilities Try a peak-to-peak CL or a multi-pivot CL Send me your studies along

with any questions

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re More on the ARDate Samstag 4 Maumlrz 2000 002521

gtThe attached chart of Lattice illustrates this conceptgtPlease bear in mind that the gapmpl centerline is not the onlygtcenterline one could use on this chartgtYou might want to study the chart for other AR possibilitiesgtTry a peak-to-peak CL or a multi-pivot CL Send me your studiesgtalong with any questions Hello Gordonhere is my chart RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Peak to peak clDate Sonntag 5 Maumlrz 2000 064107

At 3400 122500 AM you wrotegtHello Gordongthere is my chartgt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Looks like you have the concept down Takes time and a lot of chart work to find the bestcenterline When the reaction lines dont seem to peg reversal areas chances are the centerline isnot the one that is best in tune with the price action of the issue under studyDespite the time required for this method it was one of Dr Andrews stand-bysAR lines could befound on most of his charts Im sending a chart with an example of a peak-to-peak CL Regards Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Peak to peak clDate Sonntag 5 Maumlrz 2000 171232

Hello Gordon I think the peak-to-peak CL on the last chart I sent to you was not really drawn from peak to peakIm sending another example RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next LessonDate Mittwoch 8 Maumlrz 2000 072526

At 3500 51200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtI think the peak-to-peak CL on the last chart I sent to you was notgtreally drawn from peak to peakgtIm sending another examplegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your peak to peak cl example was correctly drawn Thats a fairly simple approach but quite oftenthe peak to peak yields better reaction lines Heres the first part of the next lesson Regards Gordon Youll find times when prices dont quite reach the ML but instead drift alongside or away from itThe Schiff ML was designed to be used in place of the regular ML whenever that happens Suchprice action can be found at any place on a chart but most frequently occurs after a sharp sell-offor run-up of prices Dr Andrews also used the Schiff ML whenever his regular ML sloped at an unusually steep angleHe said it helped smooth out irregular price action such as that caused by unexpected earningsnews crop planting delays or poor growing conditions crop production reports etc Youll findnearly vertical price moves over a short period of time on many charts The Schiff ML method helpsput things back in perspective when that happens Well use the chart of Sterling Bancorp as an example of prices drifting away from the regular MLThat ML is drawn in black Prices didnt quite reach the ML but drifted alongside and eventuallyaway from it The Schiff ML and parallel lines are drawn in red Notice how prices were containedwithin the Schiff pitchfork until they finally broke down at the upper parallel line The procedure for drawing the Schiff ML is the same as for the regular ML except the startingpoint is located midway between the first 2 pivots youll be using The Sterling Bancorp chart

illustrates how this is done Dr Andrews also suggested using the Schiff ML whenever the regular ML method doesnt seem tobe in sync with price action Practice this procedure on your own charts and send a couple examples when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next LessonDate Donnerstag 9 Maumlrz 2000 001143

Hello Gordon in my charting software (Dynamic Trader) the Schiff ML is drawn by finding the midpoint of the line between pivot A and pivot Bmoving this point horizontally to directly above or below (depending on whether A is a low or high pivot) the A pivot anddrawing a line from his point through the midpoint of the BC swingAre there different methods of drawing a Schiff MLI was too lazy to draw Schiff MLs by hand with the method you described so Im sending my examples with the Dynamic TraderSchiff MLs -) RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject SchiffDate Samstag 11 Maumlrz 2000 070226

At 3900 121100 AM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtin my charting software (Dynamic Trader) the Schiff ML is drawn bygtfinding the midpoint of the line between pivot A and pivot B movinggtthis point horizontally to directly above or below (depending ongtwhether A is a low or high pivot) the A pivot and drawing a linegtgtfrom his point through the midpoint of the BC swinggtAre there different methods of drawing a Schiff MLgtI was too lazy to draw Schiff MLs by hand with the method yougtdescribed so Im sending my examples with the Dynamic Trader Schiff MLs -)gt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your program Schiff line procedure is fineits actually what Dr Andrews called a modified schiff ml and is onlyslightly different than the one I sent you initially The one you used is preferred by most course members Im sendingthe modified Schiff lesson and a chart along with this email The chart example shows how to use it with 0-34 pivots Regards Gordon

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Sliding Parallel LineDate Montag 13 Maumlrz 2000 005252

Hello TradersZone Heres one of the tools Dr Andrews used most often when entering exiting or reversing marketpositions Not many people know about this technique Regards Gordon The Sliding Parallel (SH) is drawn whenever prices cross an Andrews line and then move along itFor example if the bottom of a daily price bar range drops through a lower parallel line of apitchfork a new parallel line is then drawn from that low and extended to the right If the nextdays price bar drops through that sliding parallel line a sell signal is generated Whenever price action dictates a sliding parallel the next step is to draw a Warning Line Thewarning line is an additional parallel line that is an image extension of the original pitchforkchannels It serves as a warning that if prices penetrate the sliding parallel the next likely target isthe WL The attached chart of Avis illustrates these procedures Please try these on your own charts andsend me an example

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Sliding Parallel LineDate Dienstag 14 Maumlrz 2000 225737

Hello Gordon this is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning line RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 065606

At 31400 105700 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtthis is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning linegt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone Your chart of circuit city was a good example for this study I may have mentioned it earlier but DrAndrews used this technique on a regular basis The next part of this lesson covers another of hisfavorite tools the mini-median line pitchfork Here it is Regards Gordon The Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry and exit tools Though mostoften drawn using alternate closing prices alternate highs and lows can also be usedin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days is usually the maximumbetween pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or more back from P2 Dr Andrews used Mini-Median Line pitchforks for buy and sell signals whenever he expected areversal Some examples include a probable P5 or when prices are at a Warning Line ML MLHmajor ML extension or a sideways channel price target When prices cross the Mini-Median LineParallel (MMLH) a sliding parallel (SH) is used for order entry

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 231537

gtThe Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry andgtexit tools Though most often drawn using alternate closing pricesgtalternate highs and lows can also be usedgtin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days isgtusually the maximum between pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or moregtback from P2

Hello Gordon

wouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timingCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available whenDr Andrews was alive

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject intraday chartsDate Samstag 18 Maumlrz 2000 012400

At 31600 111500 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongtgtwouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsgtinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timinggtCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available when DrgtAndrews was alivegtgtRegardsgtTradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Youre absolutely correctintraday charts were not available when DrAndrews was a trader

Im reading between the lines here but if you plan to day-trade using the course techniques ie thepitchfork then I agree that the regular pitchfork would be more useful on intraday charts Otherwisewhipsaw would be a significant problem Please get back to me if I didnt address your questionbecause this is a very important technique The mini-median line pitchfork and sliding parallel showedup on most of Dr Andrews charts

Regards

Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re intraday chartsDate Dienstag 21 Maumlrz 2000 220322

Hello Gordon

You are right Im planning to daytrade SampP futures using the course techniques among other things

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 003408

Hi TradersZone Here are a couple Andrews techniques that will help anticipate the breakout direction of asideways channelThey work often enough to warrant keep handy Regards Gordon In an earlier lesson you were introduced to Dr Andrews sideways count You saw how frequentlythe sideways count method provided high probability price objectives after the breakout from theestablished channel took place In this segment of lesson 4 youll be shown 2 congestion area techniques that can help youdetermine the probable sideways channel price breakout direction Both rely on the use of pivots The first uses the pivot points that are circled on a sideways channel Dr Andrews observed thatwhenever a sideways channel results in at least 5 circle contacts the eventual price breakoutwould very often be in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle If circle 5 is at thetop of the channel for example the eventual price breakout would likely be to the upside If circle5 is at the bottom of the channel look for a downside breakout Dr Andrews noted that thistechnique can be subject to false breakouts but that such breakouts are usually followed shortlyafter with a confirmed breakout in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle Heemphasized that this study is best considered as a rule of thumb observation He viewed it as asupporting indicator for use with a short-term pitchfork as prices approached a channel line There are 2 charts attached that show how this works

The second technique in this part of lesson 4 deals with a sideways channelthat is building shortly after a P3 has been formed Dr Andrews noted thatwhenever that happened the probabilities were high that prices wouldbreakout in the same direction they were moving prior to the formation ofthe sideways channel The attached P3 to sideways example chart shows thisprocedure

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 205235

Hello Gordon here is my example for the 5 circle sideways count RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Lesson 5Date Montag 27 Maumlrz 2000 060731

At 32400 85200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my example for the 5 circle sideways countgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt gt Hi TradersZone Good example of the 5th circle tendency to predict the direction of a sideways breakout Any luckfinding a chart showing the P3 to sideways rule Im sending the first part of the next lesson This trendline method is a useful tool with all of DrAndrews course lines He used it all the time but especially when looking for confirmation of othercourse method trading signals Regards Gordon The Course Trendline__________________________________________________________ Next well discuss the trendline Seasoned traders agree that the trendline is one of their mostimportant tools No matter what kind of trading program or technique they use the trendline on achart is a must But one of the biggest mistakes made by amateurs and professionals alike isinconsistently drawing or defining the trendline Dr Andrews trendline procedure is simpleconsistent and accurate It works extremely well with the pivot count and with the pitchfork For an uptrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the lowest low up and to thehighest minor low point preceding the highest high The line must not pass through prices inbetween the two low points Extend the line(Attached chart of Brightpoint) For a downtrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the highest high point to thelowest minor high point preceding the lowest low so that it does not pass through prices inbetween the two high points Extend the line (Brightpoint chart) Thats all theres to it Its simple consistent and it works well with other Andrews lines It also

helps eliminate personal bias and haphazard analysis Practice drawing these trendlines on your own charts Send me any questions you might have andthen e-mail a chart of your choosing which shows at least two uptrend and two downtrend linesthat youve drawn_______________________________________________________________________

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Lesson 5Date Dienstag 28 Maumlrz 2000 120224

Hello Gordon here is my chart with trendlinesWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going above the trendline again should I draw a new trendline anddelete the old one Attached is another chart with the P3 to sideways rule I finally found an example for it RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Price failure techniqueDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081412

At 32800 120200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my chart with trendlinesgtWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going abovegtthe trendline again should I draw a new trendline and delete the oldgtone Hi TradersZone Take a look at the chart Im returningI added some lines for you to considerWith the course trendline once its broken a new one should be started Theres a technique thatties in with this coming up soon Meanwhile heres an important technique to work on It deals with those times when prices dontreach the ML Regards Gordon Dr Andrews Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P ofreversaland the ML the probability is that this price reversal will go further thanitdid on its approach toward the ML (Extract of original course material) A price failure very often indicates a sizeable reversal will take placeThepitchforks drawn on the chart of Home Depot illustrate the concept of pricefailure Dr Andrews routinely drew a new pitchfork on his chart after a newsignificant pivot had formed He knew that prices had a high probability ofreaching the new ML before stalling out or reversing If prices reversedbeforereaching the ML thereby forming a new pivot he termed it a price failureTheunderlying idea here is that Dr Andrews fully anticipated his median linewouldact as a price magnet To conclude that a price reversal resulted in a price failure Dr Andrewsused

these primary signalsa subsequent price penetration of a short-termmulti-pivotline andor a return of prices to and penetration of the parallel lineformed atpivot 3 of the pitchfork (The circles on the Home Depot chart denote theparallelline penetration signal To avoid clutter the mpl lines were not drawn) One possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart of ConsecoIncLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me a copy

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject ChartDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081800Attachments image002png

Hi TradersZone Forgot the chart Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Price failure techniqueDate Samstag 1 April 2000 201000

gtOne possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart ofgtConseco IncgtLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me agtcopy Hi Gordon here are my charts with price failures RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Mittwoch 5 April 2000 235624

Hi TradersZone Good price failure examples you sentany comments or questions about it Heres the next partanother old standby Dr Andrews kept handy Regards Gordon In this segment youll learn how to use the Fan line Technique To draw the fan lines youll apply the coursetrendline method which was introduced in an earlier lesson It might be well to emphasize that the practicalapplication of the course trendline method requires practice and experience both of which will serve youwell in this technique Dr Andrews used fan lines as an adjunct to his pitchfork sideways channel andactionreaction methods In the fan line study three trendlines are drawn from the original reversal pivot of the price correction understudy typically a P0 or a P5 Youll notice on the charts included with this study that each fan line is at aflatter angle than its predecessor When the third fan line is broken the rule is that the correction has endedand a new trend is under way Try this technique on some of your own charts and then please send me asample

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Donnerstag 6 April 2000 234315

Hi Gordon No I dont have any specific question about the price failure technique I guess the next likely target after a price failure wouldbe the warning line I have attached two charts with fan linesIs it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the third fan line is broken RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Next segmentDate Freitag 7 April 2000 003312

Hello TradersZone

Tuesday April 06 2000 114315 AM you wrote

TZgt Hi Gordon

TZgt No I dont have any specific question about the price failureTZgt technique I guess the next likely target after a price failureTZgt would be the warning line

TZgt I have attached two charts with fan linesTZgt Is it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the thirdTZgt fan line is broken

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Thats right the warning line is the next price target Additionalwarning lines can be drawn if needed but usually one will do it Ifprices go through the first warning line another can be drawn butmost likely a new pitchfork could be drawn instead which would bepreferable Helps stay current with recently formed pivots

When prices break through the third fan line a buy or sell signal isgiven Not sure what you mean by fourth target fan line Im a littledense today

Your chart work was goodthis is another handy tool for spotting thehigh probability of a price reversal or trend change

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject The Gap TradeDate Freitag 7 April 2000 004858

Hello TradersZone This trading signal doesnt show up very often but past observations have shown that its well worth watching for Dr Andrews placed a lot of emphasis on the importance of price gaps something many traders overlook This is one of his gap uses Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom The Gap Trading Technique Price gaps can be a dilemma for many traders The general rule denoting market strength or weakness after ahigh volume gap often comes up short after the initial reaction is over Many gappers simply run out ofsteam A high volume gap in itself seems to offer precious little evidence that a profitable move is about toget under way Dr Andrews used price gaps somewhat differently than others He counted a gap as 2 pivots Youll see howthat works in the following technique which uses a gap to arrive at a price level for a buy or sell order Using short-term daily price pivots label the pivot immediately preceding the gap as p0 Count the gap as 2pivots labeling it p1 amp p2 After p3 has formed and prices reverse towards a short-term p4 draw a horizontalline 2 price tics or more (individual preference)to the right of p3 Enter the market only if prices reach orpenetrate that line within a few days after reversing from p4 Please look over your own charts to see if you can find places where the gap trade technique could have beenused Send me a sample when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 001925

Hello Gordon this is my chart with a gap trade RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 065538

Hello TradersZone Thursday April 08 2000 121925 PM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt this is my chart with a gap trade TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Good examplethe gap trade technique shines when an issue in at or near a P5 Similar to the one on thechart you sent Heres another trading signal tool Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Dr Andrews used several techniques which helped him determine whether a P5 was near at hand Youllrecall that he observed most price moves ended or had a significant reversal at a P5 This technique uses alternate closing prices after a P4 has been formed As with many of his studies thenumber 5 is used The chart accompanying this segment shows that there were 5 alternate closes to thedownside after P4 was put in Dr Andrews noted that whenever 5 or more alternate closes followed a P4 theprobabilities were high that a P5 was near at hand An added feature to this chart study is the sideways channel Notice how the 2nd target price and the 5thalternate close nearly coincide

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 12 April 2000 200730

Hello Gordon This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 13 April 2000 082418

Monday April 12 2000 80730 AM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hello TradersZone Good chart example of this Andrews toolanother of his very unusual observations that workmore often than not Heres the final part of this lesson Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom In this trendline method Dr Andrews once again used the number 5 as the basis for locating aprobable reversal area He found this technique to be especially useful whenever a clear orobvious pivot count didnt show up onthe price move under study Trendlines are drawn using the course trendline method When the 5th trendline is broken theprobability is high that the trend under study has ended A mini-median line pitchfork andorsliding parallel could be used for pricing a trading order The accompanying chart of Compaq Computer is an example of how the trendline study could beused The pivot count beginning at the October low is difficult to nail down There were severalsmall areas of congestion but no sizeable corrections while prices advanced The count wasunclear By following the price action using the course trendline technique however the traderwould have been alerted to the possibility of a change of trend when the 5th trendline was brokenin early February Try this technique on your own charts When youre ready please send me an example of yourstudy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 19 April 2000 124108

Hello Gordon this is my example with 5 trendlines RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[6] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 20 April 2000 012726

Monday April 19 2000 124108 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt this is my example with 5 trendlines

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Good example of the 5 TL technique Always reminds me of how the fairly simple tools often do a better job than manyof the sophisticated studies out there

That was the last part of lesson 5 Lesson 6 attached is made in one mailing Youll find Dr Andrews trading rules alongwith a wrap-up review which uses several of his rules You might have questions about some of the rules so feel free tosend them as they arise

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Dr Andrews had an abbreviated set of trading rules on several index cards that he carried around with him in his shirtpocket He said every trading day turned up something new on his charts and by having his rules in his pocket he wasreminded of the need for a methodical approach to his analysis Quite a comment coming from the man who wrote therule book

In this the final lesson of the course Dr Andrews original trading rules and observations are presented Lets work witha few of them at this point

Using charts of issues you follow please send me an example that illustrates your interpretation of each of the followingrules

Rule 4 Anticipating major Ps

Rule 7 Penetration rule

Rule 8 Price failure rule

Rule 11 1-ML23 AR Centerline

Rule 12 Sliding Parallel rule

Rule 15 Mini-median line parallel to buy or sell

Feel free to include any other course techniques you choose to apply but please include examples of the above as aminimum Use more than one technique on a chart if your analysis supports it Send as many charts as you like alongwith your questionscomments

Lesson 6 - Dr Andrews Trading Rules

This lesson covers course rules and significant observations as taught by Dr Andrews in his original trading course Therules are those that he used in his own trading and are provided to serve as a checklist for use with the course tradingmethods youve learned

Rule 1 Where prices are always headed Rule You course members are among the fortunate few to be able to draw astraight line and know that prices are headed toward that ML Very few investors have ever applied this ML principle ofstatistics to price fluctuations and weve never seen this in any books on investment You are among the very few who

know that prices are always headed toward the newest ML

Rule 2 The Rule of coming opposites applies all through life In the bible we find Blessed at they that mourn for theyshall be comforted As investors we know that any losses can be recovered by using course methods

Rule 3 Turn your mind about or Rethink for all good is at hand We should mentally prepare ourselves for thecoming reversal in prices and other affairs Heres one way for example that you course members who know the MLrules can use When prices are skyrocketing upward we do this preparation by thinking If prices pivoted here today atthis price Id draw a new ML bisecting the distance between todays price and the price from which the rise started Andwe know now that if this is a Major Pivot prices will fall rapidly to this new ML Profits from such drops are big and quick

Rule 4 Rule for anticipating major Ps If during congestion or after a rally or decline you can count four previous Psthe fifth one is highly probable to be the one from which a new trend starts

Rule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can make a quick big profit is to watch for the EPformations

Rule 6 The other reversal rule is that prices tend to reverse at or near any ML as well as at any extension of each MLAnd also at any MLH or extensions of MLH

Rule 7 The Penetration Rule is that whenever prices gap past or plunge through any ML there is a high probability thatthey will quickly return to it temporarily and then resume the trend they had before they gapped or plunged through

Rule 8 Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P of reversal and the MLthe probability is that this price reversal will go further than it did on its approach toward the ML

Rule 9 The price failure rule is negated when the next price trend is also a failure in reaching the ML This is almostinvariably a signal of a big fast move in the direction indicated by this last space Rule 10 When alternate median lines of comparable length slope in the same direction the trend is firm and rapidprice changes take place

Rule 11 When 1-ML23 is exactly reached at P4 it can be used as a highly reliable centerline for the AR method

Rule 12 Frequently after crossing a lower MLH prices continue to rise along the MLH Since the crossing of the MLHsignals a further drop is likely use a sliding parallel along the bottom of the most recent crossing If prices drop past thatsliding parallel line a sell signal is generated

Rule 13 MLs between P2 and P3 can start from a nearby or a remote P1 since prices tend to reverse at each of theseMLs Try several such P2-P3 MLs to discover the best fit

Rule 14 The distance of each MLH from its ML is the distance of the next warning line Use these warning lineswhenever a SH has signalled a buy or sell

Rule 15 Use the MMLH as a buy or sell signal when you expect a reversal because of a P5 Also when prices are at aWL ML extension line or where course lines converge or intersect

Rule 16 Converging lines that meet prices have shown the highest probability of a trend reversal

Rule 17 Two to four days is usually the maximum between P2 and P3 for a MML P1 can be a day or so back from P2and 3

Rule 18 The most reliable ActionReaction centerlines seem to be MPL 2P line 2 Gap line peak to low or low to peak

Rule 19 When prices pass through R lines look for a pull back and then a continuing move in the direction of the passthrough

Rule 20 Use gaps as Action lines from the centerline

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 003755

Hello Gordonhere is my example for Rule 4 And I have a question What are EP formations gtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 021242

Tuesday May 04 2000 123755 PM you wrote TZgt Hello GordonTZgt here is my example for Rule 4 TZgt And I have a question What are EP formations gtgtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegtgta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hi TradersZone Good use of the warning linesalso the EP material is part of lesson 4 Rather than go backthrough the files to see when (or if) it was sent Im sending it along with this reply Glad youbrought it up Best RegardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Tuesday May 04 2000208 PM Dr Andrews used a fairly common price chart formation that he found useful at probable P5market tops and bottoms The formation generally called a wedge or pennant by chartists isreferred to in Dr Andrews trading course as the Expanding Pivot (EP) One of the few chartformations used in the course he regarded it as among the most dependable indications that amarket top was forming Closely related to the EP is his Inverted Expanding Pivot (IEP) which henoted could often be observed at market bottoms Both are regarded as intermediate and long-term reversal indicators Dr Andrews found that both formations were most reliable when they occurred after a sharprapid price move coinciding with the formation of a probable P5 He said it wasnt unusual for theformation to take several weeks to complete and that conservative traders could best avoid thewhipsaw associated with congestion patterns by trading only in the direction of the probable price

break out of the EP or IEP formation The attached charts illustrate these formations Please look over your own charts for an example ofthe EP and IEP and send me a copy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 232127

Hello Gordon Thank you for the lesson with the EP material I couldnt find it in any previous emailHere is my example for Rule 7 RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Rule 4Date Samstag 6 Mai 2000 080827

Wednesday May 05 2000 112127 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt Thank you for the lesson with the EP materialTZgt I couldnt find it in any previous emailTZgt Here is my example for Rule 7

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hi TradersZone

Glad you mentioned it earlierexcept for the EP IEP and hissideways channel Dr Andrews didnt have much to say about chartpatterns and formations These are good ones to use though

Your study of the penetration rule was good Later

Best Regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Wednesday May 05 2000801 PM

Page 15: Pitchfork primer

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject ReDate Mittwoch 9 Februar 2000 184837

gtAt each point where prices touched a channel line and then reversedgtdirection and went all the way back to touch the opposite channel linegta circle was drawn Put another way if prices touch one channel linegtbut then dont go all the way back to touch the opposite channel linegta circle is not drawn Shouldnt the last circle on your Brightpoint chart be left outThe price didnt return to the opposite channel line after that day This is my chart

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Thanks for the questionDate Mittwoch 9 Februar 2000 231437

At 2900 64800 PM you wrotegtShouldnt the last circle on your Brightpoint chart be left outgtThe price didnt return to the opposite channel line after that day Hello TradersZone The last circle is appropriate but I can see where the wording in the explanation is confusing Ihave changed that paragraph to read Looking at the Brightpoint attachment please note the channel lines starting in January Youll seethat most of the pivots from Jan- May were within this channel Now look at where the circles wereplaced on the channel lines They are in alternate sequenceNote that each circle was drawn only after prices had first been at the opposite channel lineTheBrightpoint chart illustrates this procedure Thanks for pointing this out TradersZone If the wording is still unclear to you Id appreciate yourinput Meanwhile heres the next segment of this lessonRegards Gordon Well continue to use the Brightpoint chart for this portion of the sideways count study To reviewthe pattern were looking for should be a recent rectangular shaped sideways trading range thatcontains most if not all of the congestion price action Take a look at the attached chart and notehow well defined the price channel for Brightpoint is Youll probably notice that it is deeper thanthe channel you studied on the chart in the preceding segment This comparison is made toillustrate that while the first channel example covers a longer period of time the second includesall of the price ranges and is the preferred method Please look at where the circles were placed on the channel lines To review a new circle is drawnonly after prices have first been at the opposite channel line Recall that circles must be inalternate sequence eg upper linelower lineupper linelower line etc one circle at a time Note that the price range within the channel is $4 34 (High 21 12 Low 16 34) There were twocircles drawn on the lower line of our sideways channel before prices broke down Using thatinformation our next step will be to use some simple arithmetic in order to come up with twodownside price targets Well cover that procedure in the next segment Please let me know whenyou are ready to continue

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Sideways countDate Mittwoch 9 Februar 2000 232315Attachments image001png

Hi TradersZone Im returning your chartplease note comments GordonRegards Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Thanks for the questionDate Donnerstag 10 Februar 2000 233059

Hello Gordonthank you Im ready for the next lesson

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next partDate Donnerstag 10 Februar 2000 235613

At 21000 113000 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongtthank you Im ready for the next lessongt gt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt gt gt TradersZoneI sent this yesterday but will re-send It was part of my reply to your questionregarding the circle I dont have a record of your return chartwork for this part If its a duplicatesend sorry Regards Gordon Well continue to use the Brightpoint chart for this portion of the sideways count study To reviewthe pattern were looking for should be a recent rectangular shaped sideways trading range thatcontains most if not all of the congestion price action Take a look at the attached chart and notehow well defined the price channel for Brightpoint is Youll probably notice that it is deeper thanthe channel you studied on the chart in the preceding segment This comparison is made toillustrate that while the first channel example covers a longer period of time the second includesall of the price ranges and is the preferred method Please look at where the circles were placed on the channel lines To review a new circle is drawnonly after prices have first been at the opposite channel line Recall that circles must be inalternate sequence eg upper linelower lineupper linelower line etc one circle at a time Note that the price range within the channel is $4 34 (High 21 12 Low 16 34) There were twocircles drawn on the lower line of our sideways channel before prices broke down Using thatinformation our next step will be to use some simple arithmetic in order to come up with twodownside price targets Well cover that procedure in the next segment Please let me know whenyou are ready to continue

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next partDate Freitag 11 Februar 2000 234113

I think the placement of the circles is clear to me nowI have attached another chart with a sideways count RegardsTradersZone gtTradersZoneI sent this yesterday but will re-send It was part ofgtmy reply to your question regarding the circle I dont have a recordgtof your return chartwork for this part If its a duplicate send sorry

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject SidewaysDate Montag 14 Februar 2000 054227

At 21100 114100 PM you wrotegtI think the placement of the circles is clear to me nowgtI have attached another chart with a sideways countgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone Your chart was on target Looks like youre ready for the next part Here it is Regards Gordon During this segment youll learn how to arrive at two price targets using Dr Andrews sidewayscount Simple arithmetic is all thats required once the sideways channel and circles are in place Well continue to use the Brightpoint chart which is attached Note that Brightpoint fell throughthe bottom channel line at the point where we placed our second circle so figuring out possibledownside targets would have been in order at that time Heres how thats done 1 Determine the price range of the channel In this case the range is $4 34 (21 12 - 16 34) 2 Count the number of circles on the lower channel line The lower line is used in this casebecause thats the line that didnt hold Prices went through it returned to check it out and thencontinued lower 3 Multiply the price range of the channel times the number of circles drawn on the lower channelline (4 34 x 2 = 9 12) 4 Subtract that figure from the upper channel line priceThe result becomes downside price target 1 (21 12 - 9 12 = 12) 5 Next subtract that same figure from the price at the lower channel line Thats price target 2(16 34 - 9 12 = 7 14)

In the case of an upside channel breakout the procedure is reversed Please draw a few channelsand figure out some downside targets on your own charts When youre ready send me two orthree examples of your work As always send your questions as they arise

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re SidewaysDate Montag 14 Februar 2000 134314

Here are my examples I couldnt find enough charts with downside targets so I included some charts with upside targets Do the channel lines always have to be horizontal When I look at my charts I find more channels with an upward slope or adownward slope RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Sideways channelsDate Freitag 18 Februar 2000 005531

At 21400 14300 PM you wrotegtHere are my examples I couldnt find enough charts with downsidegttargets so I included some charts with upside targetsgt gtDo the channel lines always have to be horizontal When I look at mygtcharts I find more channels with an upward slope or a downward slopegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone The sideways method can be used with either up or down Sorry didnt mean to imply that only downsidetargets should be found Ill reword that portion of the lesson Thanks for mentioning it Dr Andrews sideways method works only on horizontal channels Others have mentioned the slopingchannels also and have wondered if there is some method to use with them I know of none Ive askedother course members for their ideas on how to approach this problem but so far no one has come up with amethod I would think that there should be a solution but have not personally taken the time to research itIf some method could be found that works as often as the Andrews sideways count it would be a significantfind The Andrews sideways count doesnt always hit the targets as you saw on your chart of Bausch amp Lomb Itworks more often than not though and it still amazes me at how often prices reach the targets Heres an observation to keep in mind Quite often after the first target is reached prices will reverse andhead back towards the channel At times youll note that they return inside the channel They will thenreverse again and head back towards the second price target These reversals happen frequently and presenttrading opportunities Im including the final segment of this lesson Regards Gordon So far in the course youve learned about Dr Andrews pivot counting procedure pitchfork and sidewayscount Youve noticed by now how often prices change trend at a P5 Youve seen how the 0-34 ML methodcan help locate the probable P5 area Youve seen how often price targets are met using the sideways countmethod The tendency for prices to reverse at a median line should be recognized as a high probability eventas well In coming lessons youll be shown how Dr Andrews used these and other high probability events totrade the stock and commodity markets The tools and techniques he used will help you put the finishingtouches on your market analysis using Andrews lines

Before continuing on to the next lesson lets briefly review what has so far been covered The attached chartprovides an opportunity to illustrate the methods referred to above Please draw these methods on thechart and return to me

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Sideways channelsDate Montag 21 Februar 2000 193743

gtBefore continuing on to the next lesson lets briefly review what hasgtso far been covered The attached chart provides an opportunity togtillustrate the methods referred to above Please draw these methods ongtthe chart and return to me Hello Gordonhere is my chart RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next lesson attachedDate Mittwoch 23 Februar 2000 014539

At 22100 73700 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongthere is my chartgt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Good job on the pivots sideways count and pitchforkLooks like youre ready to move on to the next part It wont be long and things will begin to fall inplace Regards Gordon Lesson 4 continued In one of his course letters Dr Andrews wrote The Law of Physics stated by Newton that Actionand Reaction are equal and opposite was first applied to prices by your Course Directors friendthe late Roger Babson who attributed his earnings of several million dollars to this law Beginning with this segment of lesson four and continuing in lesson five youll learn how to drawand apply the ActionReaction trading method as taught by Dr Andrews in his trading course The AR method requires a centerline or CL from which to start The CL can be any of thefollowing - MPL - ML - MLH - 2P line - 2 Gap line - Peak to low line - Low to peak lineThese are the primary lines that Dr Andrews used He stressed that some pencil work and a goodeyeball was needed in order to find the best fitting CL As with most other chart lines somework better than others The task is to find the best fit as he put it You will be shown examples of

each of the above CLs in this lesson and the next Determining which of the above listed lines to use as the CL is the first step in the ActionReactionmethod The solution often presents itself With a little practice a quick scan of the chart understudy will be all thats needed to spot the most likely CL Well begin with the attached chart Notethe CL drawn In this example a MPL (multi-pivot line) was used as the CL A MPL is a straightline that connects three or more consecutive pivots without passing through prices Theconnecting line is then extended Ive circled the three pivots that form the MPL on the chartThere are several other places on our chart where a MPL CL can be drawn Please bear in mindthat this is just the first step of the process Identification of likely CLs is all were after here Seeif you can locate two more then draw them in and send the chart back to me Well take up fromthere

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next lesson attachedDate Mittwoch 23 Februar 2000 212304

gtLesson 4 continuedgt gtIn one of his course letters Dr Andrews wrote The Law of Physicsgtstated by Newton that Action and Reaction are equal and opposite wasgtfirst applied to prices by your Course Directors friend the lategtRoger Babson who attributed his earnings of several million dollars to this lawgt gtBeginning with this segment of lesson four and continuing in lessongtfive youll learn how to draw and apply the ActionReaction tradinggtmethod as taught by Dr Andrews in his trading coursegt gtThe AR method requires a centerline or CL from which to startgtThe CL can be any of the followinggt - MPLgt - MLgt - MLHgt - 2P linegt - 2 Gap linegt - Peak to low linegt - Low to peak line Hello Gordon2P line 2 Gap line Peak to low line Low to peak line ndash actually I dont know what these lines areAre they discussed in Lesson 3 I believe you havenrsquot sent me this lesson yetAnyway I found two more MPLs on the Novellus Chart and drew them in RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Lesson 3Date Mittwoch 23 Februar 2000 235958

At 22300 92300 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt2P line 2 Gap line Peak to low line Low to peak line - actually I dont knowgtwhat these lines are Are they discussed in Lesson 3 I believe you didntgtsent me this lesson yetgtAnyway I found two more MPLs on the Novellus Chart and drew them ingt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone My apologiesI sent you an outdated version of the lesson Thanks for letting me know Musthave been my bedtime Heres the correct version Regards Gordon Lesson 3 In one of his course letters Dr Andrews wrote The Law of Physics stated by Newton that Actionand Reaction are equal and opposite was first applied to prices by your Course Directors friendthe late Roger Babson who attributed his earnings of several million dollars to this law In this lesson youll be introduced to the ActionReaction trading method as taught by Dr Andrewsin his trading course The AR method requires a centerline or CL from which to start The CL can be any of thefollowing - MPL Multi-pivot line A line drawn across 3 or more pivots - ML Median line The middle line of the pitchfork - MLH Median line parallel Either parallel line of the pitchfork - 2P line A line drawn across 2 pivots - 2 Gap line A line drawn connecting 2 gaps without touching prices in between - Peak to low line A line drawn connecting the high and low of a price leg

- Low to peak line A line drawn connecting the low and high of a price leg These are the primary lines that Dr Andrews used He stressed that some pencil work and a goodeyeball was needed in order to find the best fitting CL As with most other chart lines somework better than others The task is to find the best fit as he put it You will be shown examples ofeach of the above CLs Determining which of the above listed lines to use as the CL is the first step in the ActionReactionmethod With practice a quick view of the chart under study will be all thats needed to spot themost likely CL Youll be shown later how to experiment with possible combinations in order tofind the centerline that is most in tune with the market under study Well begin with the attached chart Note the CL drawn In this example a MPL (multi-pivot line)was used as the CL A MPL is a straight line that connects three or more consecutive pivotswithout passing through prices The connecting line is then extended Ive circled the three pivotsthat form the MPL on the chart There are several other places on our chart where a MPL CL canbe drawn Please bear in mind that this is just the first step of the process Identification of likelyCLs is all were after here See if you can locate two more then draw them in and send the chartback to me

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Donnerstag 24 Februar 2000 025105

At 22300 92300 PM you wroteI found two more MPLs on the Novellus Chart and drew them ingt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your mpls were correct This next segment shows the purpose of the centerline and how it isused Your payment in full arrived today TradersZone Thank you Regards Gordon Lesson 3 continued Please refer to the attached chart of Novellus The line drawn connecting the 3 circled pivots is amulti-pivot line (MPL) and represents the centerline (CL) well be using in this example Recall inthe previous segment that several types of centerlines are possible The choice is determined byexperimenting with the potential combinations on the chart under study Its best to try to locate acenterline somewhere close to the middle of the price chart in order to have sufficient past andforward data to use with the study This will become clear as you work with the method Once the centerline is drawn the next step is to locate a previous low or high pivot point to use fordrawing an action line Dr Andrews observed that the low pivot points often seem to work bestbut that either could be used In our example a line starting at the previous significant low wasdrawn parallel to the CL It is labeled A-1 (Action line 1) because it represents the first actionline Dr Andrews called it an action line because it was drawn as a result of a previous pivot (pricereversal) that had taken place Next a parallel line was drawn to the right of the CL and labeled R-1 Notice that it is the same distance from the CL as the corresponding A-1 line It is labeled R-1because it represents the first reaction line a line where prices are likely to stop or reverseNotice how prices reacted at the R-1 line in early 98 That serves as an indication that thecenterline chosen for this study should be a good one to use Not all reaction lines cause such aclear reversal as the R1 on this chart but many do Thats why its important to experiment withvarious centerline possibilities in order to find action lines that produce reaction lines which createthe greatest number of pivots or price stall-outs This experimentation is often quite time

consuming but experience has shown that it is time well spent When a centerline is found that isin tune with the price action of the issue under study it can be a highly effective tool for use inlocating probable reversal areas When combined with pitchfork lines the AR method can pinpointpotential reversal areas that are generally not recognized as such by others Dr Andrewstechniques for using the pitchfork and AR lines together are covered in later lessons In coming segments well study other lines that Dr Andrews used for his centerlines In themeantime experiment with the multi-pivot centerline on your own charts Then please send mean example of your work along with any questions you may have

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Freitag 25 Februar 2000 211356

gtIn the meantime experiment with the multi-pivot centerline on your owngtcharts Then please send me an example of your work along with anygtquestions you may have Hello Gordon I was wondering how many ActionReaction lines could be drawn on a chart On my attached chart I found at least 6 parallellines which had a significant meaning for the price RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject AR linesDate Montag 28 Februar 2000 080128

gtHello Gordongt gtI was wondering how many ActionReaction lines could be drawn on agtchart On my attached chart I found at least 6 parallel lines which hadgta significant meaning for the pricegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hi TradersZone Theres no set number of lines that can be drawnactually the more you can find the betterFinding a good centerline is the key And once you find lines that work such as you did anynumber of parallel lines can be drawn You are doing exactly what Dr Andrews didtaking thetime and effort to find the best fitting sets of lines Each chart has them and each chart is differentas Im sure youve found Nice work Heres the next part Regards Gordon Lesson 3 continued One of Dr Andrews favorite techniques dealt with gapsan often times perplexing price event formany traders His observations over the years suggested to him that while gaps show upfrequently on many price charts few traders have a method for including them as an integral partof their chart analysis Thats not surprising since not much has been published about how toapproach the use of gaps in a trading method Dr Andrews however found several ways to putprice gaps to good use An ActionReaction centerline which uses gaps as its basis is one suchmethod Please refer to the attached chart of Cendant Youll see that a centerline was drawn which passedthrough the July gap Note that it also came in contact with several pivots thereby qualifying as agapmulti-pivot centerline It is drawn by starting at the April low pivot and extending a line acrossand through the gap in mid-July It subsequently touches two additional high pivots Dr Andrews counted each gap as two pivots He noted that the more pivots a line touched the

stronger the line tended to be in the future Good reason then for using the July gap as the basisfor an ActionReaction study Our CL is labelled a gap-mpl-CL The May 98 high was used for the Action Line starting point A line was then drawn parallel to theCenterline as per ActionReaction procedure The corresponding Reaction Line was then drawn inIf this particular study had been drawn on Cendants chart right after the July gap was put in thepotential for prices to go all the way down to the Reaction Line might have seemed very slim at thetime Notice however that prices reached the Reaction Line in early September Youll see thishappen time and again as you work with the AR method The core of its effectiveness is a strongCL Please send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts of your choice

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re AR linesDate Montag 28 Februar 2000 155937

gtPlease send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts of yourgtchoice Hello Gordonhere are my examples RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject More on the ARDate Donnerstag 2 Maumlrz 2000 071158

At 22800 35900 PM you wrotegtgtPlease send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts ofgtgtyour choicegt gtHello Gordongthere are my examplesgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone You picked some good examples to use for your AR study Both showed the potential power of thismethod Takes time and lots of chart study sometimes to find the best set of lines but the rewardscan be many Heres something else to look at Regards Gordon The ActionReaction technique requires a strong centerline from which to begin The key todeciding which set of pivots to use for the centerline is found through experimenting with thevarious configurations visible on the chart under study The centerline might be a series of gapspivots an existing median line or any of Dr Andrews lines The task is to search for that centerlinewhich shows the greatest potential for projecting price reversal areas Dr Andrews did that byfinding a likely centerline near the middle of his price chart That allowed him to use any of theprevious pivots for his action lines By experimenting he found reaction lines that did the best jobof pegging reversal areas at data points located forward of the centerline Reaction lines are equal and opposite of the action lines and serve to project price levels at whicha reversal can be expected That is why the task of seeking out the best centerline is so importantDr Andrews reasoned that a series of reaction lines which have pegged price reversals in the pastis likely to continue to be in tune with current and future market price action Having severalprevious pivots to use as anchors for drawing action lines is thus essential The attached chart of Lattice illustrates this concept Please bear in mind that the gapmplcenterline is not the only centerline one could use on this chart You might want to study the chartfor other AR possibilities Try a peak-to-peak CL or a multi-pivot CL Send me your studies along

with any questions

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re More on the ARDate Samstag 4 Maumlrz 2000 002521

gtThe attached chart of Lattice illustrates this conceptgtPlease bear in mind that the gapmpl centerline is not the onlygtcenterline one could use on this chartgtYou might want to study the chart for other AR possibilitiesgtTry a peak-to-peak CL or a multi-pivot CL Send me your studiesgtalong with any questions Hello Gordonhere is my chart RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Peak to peak clDate Sonntag 5 Maumlrz 2000 064107

At 3400 122500 AM you wrotegtHello Gordongthere is my chartgt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Looks like you have the concept down Takes time and a lot of chart work to find the bestcenterline When the reaction lines dont seem to peg reversal areas chances are the centerline isnot the one that is best in tune with the price action of the issue under studyDespite the time required for this method it was one of Dr Andrews stand-bysAR lines could befound on most of his charts Im sending a chart with an example of a peak-to-peak CL Regards Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Peak to peak clDate Sonntag 5 Maumlrz 2000 171232

Hello Gordon I think the peak-to-peak CL on the last chart I sent to you was not really drawn from peak to peakIm sending another example RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next LessonDate Mittwoch 8 Maumlrz 2000 072526

At 3500 51200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtI think the peak-to-peak CL on the last chart I sent to you was notgtreally drawn from peak to peakgtIm sending another examplegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your peak to peak cl example was correctly drawn Thats a fairly simple approach but quite oftenthe peak to peak yields better reaction lines Heres the first part of the next lesson Regards Gordon Youll find times when prices dont quite reach the ML but instead drift alongside or away from itThe Schiff ML was designed to be used in place of the regular ML whenever that happens Suchprice action can be found at any place on a chart but most frequently occurs after a sharp sell-offor run-up of prices Dr Andrews also used the Schiff ML whenever his regular ML sloped at an unusually steep angleHe said it helped smooth out irregular price action such as that caused by unexpected earningsnews crop planting delays or poor growing conditions crop production reports etc Youll findnearly vertical price moves over a short period of time on many charts The Schiff ML method helpsput things back in perspective when that happens Well use the chart of Sterling Bancorp as an example of prices drifting away from the regular MLThat ML is drawn in black Prices didnt quite reach the ML but drifted alongside and eventuallyaway from it The Schiff ML and parallel lines are drawn in red Notice how prices were containedwithin the Schiff pitchfork until they finally broke down at the upper parallel line The procedure for drawing the Schiff ML is the same as for the regular ML except the startingpoint is located midway between the first 2 pivots youll be using The Sterling Bancorp chart

illustrates how this is done Dr Andrews also suggested using the Schiff ML whenever the regular ML method doesnt seem tobe in sync with price action Practice this procedure on your own charts and send a couple examples when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next LessonDate Donnerstag 9 Maumlrz 2000 001143

Hello Gordon in my charting software (Dynamic Trader) the Schiff ML is drawn by finding the midpoint of the line between pivot A and pivot Bmoving this point horizontally to directly above or below (depending on whether A is a low or high pivot) the A pivot anddrawing a line from his point through the midpoint of the BC swingAre there different methods of drawing a Schiff MLI was too lazy to draw Schiff MLs by hand with the method you described so Im sending my examples with the Dynamic TraderSchiff MLs -) RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject SchiffDate Samstag 11 Maumlrz 2000 070226

At 3900 121100 AM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtin my charting software (Dynamic Trader) the Schiff ML is drawn bygtfinding the midpoint of the line between pivot A and pivot B movinggtthis point horizontally to directly above or below (depending ongtwhether A is a low or high pivot) the A pivot and drawing a linegtgtfrom his point through the midpoint of the BC swinggtAre there different methods of drawing a Schiff MLgtI was too lazy to draw Schiff MLs by hand with the method yougtdescribed so Im sending my examples with the Dynamic Trader Schiff MLs -)gt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your program Schiff line procedure is fineits actually what Dr Andrews called a modified schiff ml and is onlyslightly different than the one I sent you initially The one you used is preferred by most course members Im sendingthe modified Schiff lesson and a chart along with this email The chart example shows how to use it with 0-34 pivots Regards Gordon

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Sliding Parallel LineDate Montag 13 Maumlrz 2000 005252

Hello TradersZone Heres one of the tools Dr Andrews used most often when entering exiting or reversing marketpositions Not many people know about this technique Regards Gordon The Sliding Parallel (SH) is drawn whenever prices cross an Andrews line and then move along itFor example if the bottom of a daily price bar range drops through a lower parallel line of apitchfork a new parallel line is then drawn from that low and extended to the right If the nextdays price bar drops through that sliding parallel line a sell signal is generated Whenever price action dictates a sliding parallel the next step is to draw a Warning Line Thewarning line is an additional parallel line that is an image extension of the original pitchforkchannels It serves as a warning that if prices penetrate the sliding parallel the next likely target isthe WL The attached chart of Avis illustrates these procedures Please try these on your own charts andsend me an example

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Sliding Parallel LineDate Dienstag 14 Maumlrz 2000 225737

Hello Gordon this is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning line RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 065606

At 31400 105700 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtthis is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning linegt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone Your chart of circuit city was a good example for this study I may have mentioned it earlier but DrAndrews used this technique on a regular basis The next part of this lesson covers another of hisfavorite tools the mini-median line pitchfork Here it is Regards Gordon The Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry and exit tools Though mostoften drawn using alternate closing prices alternate highs and lows can also be usedin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days is usually the maximumbetween pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or more back from P2 Dr Andrews used Mini-Median Line pitchforks for buy and sell signals whenever he expected areversal Some examples include a probable P5 or when prices are at a Warning Line ML MLHmajor ML extension or a sideways channel price target When prices cross the Mini-Median LineParallel (MMLH) a sliding parallel (SH) is used for order entry

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 231537

gtThe Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry andgtexit tools Though most often drawn using alternate closing pricesgtalternate highs and lows can also be usedgtin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days isgtusually the maximum between pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or moregtback from P2

Hello Gordon

wouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timingCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available whenDr Andrews was alive

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject intraday chartsDate Samstag 18 Maumlrz 2000 012400

At 31600 111500 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongtgtwouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsgtinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timinggtCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available when DrgtAndrews was alivegtgtRegardsgtTradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Youre absolutely correctintraday charts were not available when DrAndrews was a trader

Im reading between the lines here but if you plan to day-trade using the course techniques ie thepitchfork then I agree that the regular pitchfork would be more useful on intraday charts Otherwisewhipsaw would be a significant problem Please get back to me if I didnt address your questionbecause this is a very important technique The mini-median line pitchfork and sliding parallel showedup on most of Dr Andrews charts

Regards

Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re intraday chartsDate Dienstag 21 Maumlrz 2000 220322

Hello Gordon

You are right Im planning to daytrade SampP futures using the course techniques among other things

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 003408

Hi TradersZone Here are a couple Andrews techniques that will help anticipate the breakout direction of asideways channelThey work often enough to warrant keep handy Regards Gordon In an earlier lesson you were introduced to Dr Andrews sideways count You saw how frequentlythe sideways count method provided high probability price objectives after the breakout from theestablished channel took place In this segment of lesson 4 youll be shown 2 congestion area techniques that can help youdetermine the probable sideways channel price breakout direction Both rely on the use of pivots The first uses the pivot points that are circled on a sideways channel Dr Andrews observed thatwhenever a sideways channel results in at least 5 circle contacts the eventual price breakoutwould very often be in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle If circle 5 is at thetop of the channel for example the eventual price breakout would likely be to the upside If circle5 is at the bottom of the channel look for a downside breakout Dr Andrews noted that thistechnique can be subject to false breakouts but that such breakouts are usually followed shortlyafter with a confirmed breakout in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle Heemphasized that this study is best considered as a rule of thumb observation He viewed it as asupporting indicator for use with a short-term pitchfork as prices approached a channel line There are 2 charts attached that show how this works

The second technique in this part of lesson 4 deals with a sideways channelthat is building shortly after a P3 has been formed Dr Andrews noted thatwhenever that happened the probabilities were high that prices wouldbreakout in the same direction they were moving prior to the formation ofthe sideways channel The attached P3 to sideways example chart shows thisprocedure

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 205235

Hello Gordon here is my example for the 5 circle sideways count RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Lesson 5Date Montag 27 Maumlrz 2000 060731

At 32400 85200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my example for the 5 circle sideways countgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt gt Hi TradersZone Good example of the 5th circle tendency to predict the direction of a sideways breakout Any luckfinding a chart showing the P3 to sideways rule Im sending the first part of the next lesson This trendline method is a useful tool with all of DrAndrews course lines He used it all the time but especially when looking for confirmation of othercourse method trading signals Regards Gordon The Course Trendline__________________________________________________________ Next well discuss the trendline Seasoned traders agree that the trendline is one of their mostimportant tools No matter what kind of trading program or technique they use the trendline on achart is a must But one of the biggest mistakes made by amateurs and professionals alike isinconsistently drawing or defining the trendline Dr Andrews trendline procedure is simpleconsistent and accurate It works extremely well with the pivot count and with the pitchfork For an uptrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the lowest low up and to thehighest minor low point preceding the highest high The line must not pass through prices inbetween the two low points Extend the line(Attached chart of Brightpoint) For a downtrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the highest high point to thelowest minor high point preceding the lowest low so that it does not pass through prices inbetween the two high points Extend the line (Brightpoint chart) Thats all theres to it Its simple consistent and it works well with other Andrews lines It also

helps eliminate personal bias and haphazard analysis Practice drawing these trendlines on your own charts Send me any questions you might have andthen e-mail a chart of your choosing which shows at least two uptrend and two downtrend linesthat youve drawn_______________________________________________________________________

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Lesson 5Date Dienstag 28 Maumlrz 2000 120224

Hello Gordon here is my chart with trendlinesWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going above the trendline again should I draw a new trendline anddelete the old one Attached is another chart with the P3 to sideways rule I finally found an example for it RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Price failure techniqueDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081412

At 32800 120200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my chart with trendlinesgtWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going abovegtthe trendline again should I draw a new trendline and delete the oldgtone Hi TradersZone Take a look at the chart Im returningI added some lines for you to considerWith the course trendline once its broken a new one should be started Theres a technique thatties in with this coming up soon Meanwhile heres an important technique to work on It deals with those times when prices dontreach the ML Regards Gordon Dr Andrews Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P ofreversaland the ML the probability is that this price reversal will go further thanitdid on its approach toward the ML (Extract of original course material) A price failure very often indicates a sizeable reversal will take placeThepitchforks drawn on the chart of Home Depot illustrate the concept of pricefailure Dr Andrews routinely drew a new pitchfork on his chart after a newsignificant pivot had formed He knew that prices had a high probability ofreaching the new ML before stalling out or reversing If prices reversedbeforereaching the ML thereby forming a new pivot he termed it a price failureTheunderlying idea here is that Dr Andrews fully anticipated his median linewouldact as a price magnet To conclude that a price reversal resulted in a price failure Dr Andrewsused

these primary signalsa subsequent price penetration of a short-termmulti-pivotline andor a return of prices to and penetration of the parallel lineformed atpivot 3 of the pitchfork (The circles on the Home Depot chart denote theparallelline penetration signal To avoid clutter the mpl lines were not drawn) One possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart of ConsecoIncLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me a copy

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject ChartDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081800Attachments image002png

Hi TradersZone Forgot the chart Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Price failure techniqueDate Samstag 1 April 2000 201000

gtOne possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart ofgtConseco IncgtLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me agtcopy Hi Gordon here are my charts with price failures RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Mittwoch 5 April 2000 235624

Hi TradersZone Good price failure examples you sentany comments or questions about it Heres the next partanother old standby Dr Andrews kept handy Regards Gordon In this segment youll learn how to use the Fan line Technique To draw the fan lines youll apply the coursetrendline method which was introduced in an earlier lesson It might be well to emphasize that the practicalapplication of the course trendline method requires practice and experience both of which will serve youwell in this technique Dr Andrews used fan lines as an adjunct to his pitchfork sideways channel andactionreaction methods In the fan line study three trendlines are drawn from the original reversal pivot of the price correction understudy typically a P0 or a P5 Youll notice on the charts included with this study that each fan line is at aflatter angle than its predecessor When the third fan line is broken the rule is that the correction has endedand a new trend is under way Try this technique on some of your own charts and then please send me asample

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Donnerstag 6 April 2000 234315

Hi Gordon No I dont have any specific question about the price failure technique I guess the next likely target after a price failure wouldbe the warning line I have attached two charts with fan linesIs it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the third fan line is broken RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Next segmentDate Freitag 7 April 2000 003312

Hello TradersZone

Tuesday April 06 2000 114315 AM you wrote

TZgt Hi Gordon

TZgt No I dont have any specific question about the price failureTZgt technique I guess the next likely target after a price failureTZgt would be the warning line

TZgt I have attached two charts with fan linesTZgt Is it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the thirdTZgt fan line is broken

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Thats right the warning line is the next price target Additionalwarning lines can be drawn if needed but usually one will do it Ifprices go through the first warning line another can be drawn butmost likely a new pitchfork could be drawn instead which would bepreferable Helps stay current with recently formed pivots

When prices break through the third fan line a buy or sell signal isgiven Not sure what you mean by fourth target fan line Im a littledense today

Your chart work was goodthis is another handy tool for spotting thehigh probability of a price reversal or trend change

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject The Gap TradeDate Freitag 7 April 2000 004858

Hello TradersZone This trading signal doesnt show up very often but past observations have shown that its well worth watching for Dr Andrews placed a lot of emphasis on the importance of price gaps something many traders overlook This is one of his gap uses Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom The Gap Trading Technique Price gaps can be a dilemma for many traders The general rule denoting market strength or weakness after ahigh volume gap often comes up short after the initial reaction is over Many gappers simply run out ofsteam A high volume gap in itself seems to offer precious little evidence that a profitable move is about toget under way Dr Andrews used price gaps somewhat differently than others He counted a gap as 2 pivots Youll see howthat works in the following technique which uses a gap to arrive at a price level for a buy or sell order Using short-term daily price pivots label the pivot immediately preceding the gap as p0 Count the gap as 2pivots labeling it p1 amp p2 After p3 has formed and prices reverse towards a short-term p4 draw a horizontalline 2 price tics or more (individual preference)to the right of p3 Enter the market only if prices reach orpenetrate that line within a few days after reversing from p4 Please look over your own charts to see if you can find places where the gap trade technique could have beenused Send me a sample when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 001925

Hello Gordon this is my chart with a gap trade RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 065538

Hello TradersZone Thursday April 08 2000 121925 PM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt this is my chart with a gap trade TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Good examplethe gap trade technique shines when an issue in at or near a P5 Similar to the one on thechart you sent Heres another trading signal tool Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Dr Andrews used several techniques which helped him determine whether a P5 was near at hand Youllrecall that he observed most price moves ended or had a significant reversal at a P5 This technique uses alternate closing prices after a P4 has been formed As with many of his studies thenumber 5 is used The chart accompanying this segment shows that there were 5 alternate closes to thedownside after P4 was put in Dr Andrews noted that whenever 5 or more alternate closes followed a P4 theprobabilities were high that a P5 was near at hand An added feature to this chart study is the sideways channel Notice how the 2nd target price and the 5thalternate close nearly coincide

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 12 April 2000 200730

Hello Gordon This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 13 April 2000 082418

Monday April 12 2000 80730 AM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hello TradersZone Good chart example of this Andrews toolanother of his very unusual observations that workmore often than not Heres the final part of this lesson Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom In this trendline method Dr Andrews once again used the number 5 as the basis for locating aprobable reversal area He found this technique to be especially useful whenever a clear orobvious pivot count didnt show up onthe price move under study Trendlines are drawn using the course trendline method When the 5th trendline is broken theprobability is high that the trend under study has ended A mini-median line pitchfork andorsliding parallel could be used for pricing a trading order The accompanying chart of Compaq Computer is an example of how the trendline study could beused The pivot count beginning at the October low is difficult to nail down There were severalsmall areas of congestion but no sizeable corrections while prices advanced The count wasunclear By following the price action using the course trendline technique however the traderwould have been alerted to the possibility of a change of trend when the 5th trendline was brokenin early February Try this technique on your own charts When youre ready please send me an example of yourstudy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 19 April 2000 124108

Hello Gordon this is my example with 5 trendlines RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[6] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 20 April 2000 012726

Monday April 19 2000 124108 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt this is my example with 5 trendlines

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Good example of the 5 TL technique Always reminds me of how the fairly simple tools often do a better job than manyof the sophisticated studies out there

That was the last part of lesson 5 Lesson 6 attached is made in one mailing Youll find Dr Andrews trading rules alongwith a wrap-up review which uses several of his rules You might have questions about some of the rules so feel free tosend them as they arise

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Dr Andrews had an abbreviated set of trading rules on several index cards that he carried around with him in his shirtpocket He said every trading day turned up something new on his charts and by having his rules in his pocket he wasreminded of the need for a methodical approach to his analysis Quite a comment coming from the man who wrote therule book

In this the final lesson of the course Dr Andrews original trading rules and observations are presented Lets work witha few of them at this point

Using charts of issues you follow please send me an example that illustrates your interpretation of each of the followingrules

Rule 4 Anticipating major Ps

Rule 7 Penetration rule

Rule 8 Price failure rule

Rule 11 1-ML23 AR Centerline

Rule 12 Sliding Parallel rule

Rule 15 Mini-median line parallel to buy or sell

Feel free to include any other course techniques you choose to apply but please include examples of the above as aminimum Use more than one technique on a chart if your analysis supports it Send as many charts as you like alongwith your questionscomments

Lesson 6 - Dr Andrews Trading Rules

This lesson covers course rules and significant observations as taught by Dr Andrews in his original trading course Therules are those that he used in his own trading and are provided to serve as a checklist for use with the course tradingmethods youve learned

Rule 1 Where prices are always headed Rule You course members are among the fortunate few to be able to draw astraight line and know that prices are headed toward that ML Very few investors have ever applied this ML principle ofstatistics to price fluctuations and weve never seen this in any books on investment You are among the very few who

know that prices are always headed toward the newest ML

Rule 2 The Rule of coming opposites applies all through life In the bible we find Blessed at they that mourn for theyshall be comforted As investors we know that any losses can be recovered by using course methods

Rule 3 Turn your mind about or Rethink for all good is at hand We should mentally prepare ourselves for thecoming reversal in prices and other affairs Heres one way for example that you course members who know the MLrules can use When prices are skyrocketing upward we do this preparation by thinking If prices pivoted here today atthis price Id draw a new ML bisecting the distance between todays price and the price from which the rise started Andwe know now that if this is a Major Pivot prices will fall rapidly to this new ML Profits from such drops are big and quick

Rule 4 Rule for anticipating major Ps If during congestion or after a rally or decline you can count four previous Psthe fifth one is highly probable to be the one from which a new trend starts

Rule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can make a quick big profit is to watch for the EPformations

Rule 6 The other reversal rule is that prices tend to reverse at or near any ML as well as at any extension of each MLAnd also at any MLH or extensions of MLH

Rule 7 The Penetration Rule is that whenever prices gap past or plunge through any ML there is a high probability thatthey will quickly return to it temporarily and then resume the trend they had before they gapped or plunged through

Rule 8 Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P of reversal and the MLthe probability is that this price reversal will go further than it did on its approach toward the ML

Rule 9 The price failure rule is negated when the next price trend is also a failure in reaching the ML This is almostinvariably a signal of a big fast move in the direction indicated by this last space Rule 10 When alternate median lines of comparable length slope in the same direction the trend is firm and rapidprice changes take place

Rule 11 When 1-ML23 is exactly reached at P4 it can be used as a highly reliable centerline for the AR method

Rule 12 Frequently after crossing a lower MLH prices continue to rise along the MLH Since the crossing of the MLHsignals a further drop is likely use a sliding parallel along the bottom of the most recent crossing If prices drop past thatsliding parallel line a sell signal is generated

Rule 13 MLs between P2 and P3 can start from a nearby or a remote P1 since prices tend to reverse at each of theseMLs Try several such P2-P3 MLs to discover the best fit

Rule 14 The distance of each MLH from its ML is the distance of the next warning line Use these warning lineswhenever a SH has signalled a buy or sell

Rule 15 Use the MMLH as a buy or sell signal when you expect a reversal because of a P5 Also when prices are at aWL ML extension line or where course lines converge or intersect

Rule 16 Converging lines that meet prices have shown the highest probability of a trend reversal

Rule 17 Two to four days is usually the maximum between P2 and P3 for a MML P1 can be a day or so back from P2and 3

Rule 18 The most reliable ActionReaction centerlines seem to be MPL 2P line 2 Gap line peak to low or low to peak

Rule 19 When prices pass through R lines look for a pull back and then a continuing move in the direction of the passthrough

Rule 20 Use gaps as Action lines from the centerline

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 003755

Hello Gordonhere is my example for Rule 4 And I have a question What are EP formations gtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 021242

Tuesday May 04 2000 123755 PM you wrote TZgt Hello GordonTZgt here is my example for Rule 4 TZgt And I have a question What are EP formations gtgtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegtgta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hi TradersZone Good use of the warning linesalso the EP material is part of lesson 4 Rather than go backthrough the files to see when (or if) it was sent Im sending it along with this reply Glad youbrought it up Best RegardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Tuesday May 04 2000208 PM Dr Andrews used a fairly common price chart formation that he found useful at probable P5market tops and bottoms The formation generally called a wedge or pennant by chartists isreferred to in Dr Andrews trading course as the Expanding Pivot (EP) One of the few chartformations used in the course he regarded it as among the most dependable indications that amarket top was forming Closely related to the EP is his Inverted Expanding Pivot (IEP) which henoted could often be observed at market bottoms Both are regarded as intermediate and long-term reversal indicators Dr Andrews found that both formations were most reliable when they occurred after a sharprapid price move coinciding with the formation of a probable P5 He said it wasnt unusual for theformation to take several weeks to complete and that conservative traders could best avoid thewhipsaw associated with congestion patterns by trading only in the direction of the probable price

break out of the EP or IEP formation The attached charts illustrate these formations Please look over your own charts for an example ofthe EP and IEP and send me a copy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 232127

Hello Gordon Thank you for the lesson with the EP material I couldnt find it in any previous emailHere is my example for Rule 7 RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Rule 4Date Samstag 6 Mai 2000 080827

Wednesday May 05 2000 112127 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt Thank you for the lesson with the EP materialTZgt I couldnt find it in any previous emailTZgt Here is my example for Rule 7

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hi TradersZone

Glad you mentioned it earlierexcept for the EP IEP and hissideways channel Dr Andrews didnt have much to say about chartpatterns and formations These are good ones to use though

Your study of the penetration rule was good Later

Best Regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Wednesday May 05 2000801 PM

Page 16: Pitchfork primer

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Thanks for the questionDate Mittwoch 9 Februar 2000 231437

At 2900 64800 PM you wrotegtShouldnt the last circle on your Brightpoint chart be left outgtThe price didnt return to the opposite channel line after that day Hello TradersZone The last circle is appropriate but I can see where the wording in the explanation is confusing Ihave changed that paragraph to read Looking at the Brightpoint attachment please note the channel lines starting in January Youll seethat most of the pivots from Jan- May were within this channel Now look at where the circles wereplaced on the channel lines They are in alternate sequenceNote that each circle was drawn only after prices had first been at the opposite channel lineTheBrightpoint chart illustrates this procedure Thanks for pointing this out TradersZone If the wording is still unclear to you Id appreciate yourinput Meanwhile heres the next segment of this lessonRegards Gordon Well continue to use the Brightpoint chart for this portion of the sideways count study To reviewthe pattern were looking for should be a recent rectangular shaped sideways trading range thatcontains most if not all of the congestion price action Take a look at the attached chart and notehow well defined the price channel for Brightpoint is Youll probably notice that it is deeper thanthe channel you studied on the chart in the preceding segment This comparison is made toillustrate that while the first channel example covers a longer period of time the second includesall of the price ranges and is the preferred method Please look at where the circles were placed on the channel lines To review a new circle is drawnonly after prices have first been at the opposite channel line Recall that circles must be inalternate sequence eg upper linelower lineupper linelower line etc one circle at a time Note that the price range within the channel is $4 34 (High 21 12 Low 16 34) There were twocircles drawn on the lower line of our sideways channel before prices broke down Using thatinformation our next step will be to use some simple arithmetic in order to come up with twodownside price targets Well cover that procedure in the next segment Please let me know whenyou are ready to continue

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Sideways countDate Mittwoch 9 Februar 2000 232315Attachments image001png

Hi TradersZone Im returning your chartplease note comments GordonRegards Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Thanks for the questionDate Donnerstag 10 Februar 2000 233059

Hello Gordonthank you Im ready for the next lesson

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next partDate Donnerstag 10 Februar 2000 235613

At 21000 113000 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongtthank you Im ready for the next lessongt gt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt gt gt TradersZoneI sent this yesterday but will re-send It was part of my reply to your questionregarding the circle I dont have a record of your return chartwork for this part If its a duplicatesend sorry Regards Gordon Well continue to use the Brightpoint chart for this portion of the sideways count study To reviewthe pattern were looking for should be a recent rectangular shaped sideways trading range thatcontains most if not all of the congestion price action Take a look at the attached chart and notehow well defined the price channel for Brightpoint is Youll probably notice that it is deeper thanthe channel you studied on the chart in the preceding segment This comparison is made toillustrate that while the first channel example covers a longer period of time the second includesall of the price ranges and is the preferred method Please look at where the circles were placed on the channel lines To review a new circle is drawnonly after prices have first been at the opposite channel line Recall that circles must be inalternate sequence eg upper linelower lineupper linelower line etc one circle at a time Note that the price range within the channel is $4 34 (High 21 12 Low 16 34) There were twocircles drawn on the lower line of our sideways channel before prices broke down Using thatinformation our next step will be to use some simple arithmetic in order to come up with twodownside price targets Well cover that procedure in the next segment Please let me know whenyou are ready to continue

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next partDate Freitag 11 Februar 2000 234113

I think the placement of the circles is clear to me nowI have attached another chart with a sideways count RegardsTradersZone gtTradersZoneI sent this yesterday but will re-send It was part ofgtmy reply to your question regarding the circle I dont have a recordgtof your return chartwork for this part If its a duplicate send sorry

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject SidewaysDate Montag 14 Februar 2000 054227

At 21100 114100 PM you wrotegtI think the placement of the circles is clear to me nowgtI have attached another chart with a sideways countgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone Your chart was on target Looks like youre ready for the next part Here it is Regards Gordon During this segment youll learn how to arrive at two price targets using Dr Andrews sidewayscount Simple arithmetic is all thats required once the sideways channel and circles are in place Well continue to use the Brightpoint chart which is attached Note that Brightpoint fell throughthe bottom channel line at the point where we placed our second circle so figuring out possibledownside targets would have been in order at that time Heres how thats done 1 Determine the price range of the channel In this case the range is $4 34 (21 12 - 16 34) 2 Count the number of circles on the lower channel line The lower line is used in this casebecause thats the line that didnt hold Prices went through it returned to check it out and thencontinued lower 3 Multiply the price range of the channel times the number of circles drawn on the lower channelline (4 34 x 2 = 9 12) 4 Subtract that figure from the upper channel line priceThe result becomes downside price target 1 (21 12 - 9 12 = 12) 5 Next subtract that same figure from the price at the lower channel line Thats price target 2(16 34 - 9 12 = 7 14)

In the case of an upside channel breakout the procedure is reversed Please draw a few channelsand figure out some downside targets on your own charts When youre ready send me two orthree examples of your work As always send your questions as they arise

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re SidewaysDate Montag 14 Februar 2000 134314

Here are my examples I couldnt find enough charts with downside targets so I included some charts with upside targets Do the channel lines always have to be horizontal When I look at my charts I find more channels with an upward slope or adownward slope RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Sideways channelsDate Freitag 18 Februar 2000 005531

At 21400 14300 PM you wrotegtHere are my examples I couldnt find enough charts with downsidegttargets so I included some charts with upside targetsgt gtDo the channel lines always have to be horizontal When I look at mygtcharts I find more channels with an upward slope or a downward slopegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone The sideways method can be used with either up or down Sorry didnt mean to imply that only downsidetargets should be found Ill reword that portion of the lesson Thanks for mentioning it Dr Andrews sideways method works only on horizontal channels Others have mentioned the slopingchannels also and have wondered if there is some method to use with them I know of none Ive askedother course members for their ideas on how to approach this problem but so far no one has come up with amethod I would think that there should be a solution but have not personally taken the time to research itIf some method could be found that works as often as the Andrews sideways count it would be a significantfind The Andrews sideways count doesnt always hit the targets as you saw on your chart of Bausch amp Lomb Itworks more often than not though and it still amazes me at how often prices reach the targets Heres an observation to keep in mind Quite often after the first target is reached prices will reverse andhead back towards the channel At times youll note that they return inside the channel They will thenreverse again and head back towards the second price target These reversals happen frequently and presenttrading opportunities Im including the final segment of this lesson Regards Gordon So far in the course youve learned about Dr Andrews pivot counting procedure pitchfork and sidewayscount Youve noticed by now how often prices change trend at a P5 Youve seen how the 0-34 ML methodcan help locate the probable P5 area Youve seen how often price targets are met using the sideways countmethod The tendency for prices to reverse at a median line should be recognized as a high probability eventas well In coming lessons youll be shown how Dr Andrews used these and other high probability events totrade the stock and commodity markets The tools and techniques he used will help you put the finishingtouches on your market analysis using Andrews lines

Before continuing on to the next lesson lets briefly review what has so far been covered The attached chartprovides an opportunity to illustrate the methods referred to above Please draw these methods on thechart and return to me

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Sideways channelsDate Montag 21 Februar 2000 193743

gtBefore continuing on to the next lesson lets briefly review what hasgtso far been covered The attached chart provides an opportunity togtillustrate the methods referred to above Please draw these methods ongtthe chart and return to me Hello Gordonhere is my chart RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next lesson attachedDate Mittwoch 23 Februar 2000 014539

At 22100 73700 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongthere is my chartgt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Good job on the pivots sideways count and pitchforkLooks like youre ready to move on to the next part It wont be long and things will begin to fall inplace Regards Gordon Lesson 4 continued In one of his course letters Dr Andrews wrote The Law of Physics stated by Newton that Actionand Reaction are equal and opposite was first applied to prices by your Course Directors friendthe late Roger Babson who attributed his earnings of several million dollars to this law Beginning with this segment of lesson four and continuing in lesson five youll learn how to drawand apply the ActionReaction trading method as taught by Dr Andrews in his trading course The AR method requires a centerline or CL from which to start The CL can be any of thefollowing - MPL - ML - MLH - 2P line - 2 Gap line - Peak to low line - Low to peak lineThese are the primary lines that Dr Andrews used He stressed that some pencil work and a goodeyeball was needed in order to find the best fitting CL As with most other chart lines somework better than others The task is to find the best fit as he put it You will be shown examples of

each of the above CLs in this lesson and the next Determining which of the above listed lines to use as the CL is the first step in the ActionReactionmethod The solution often presents itself With a little practice a quick scan of the chart understudy will be all thats needed to spot the most likely CL Well begin with the attached chart Notethe CL drawn In this example a MPL (multi-pivot line) was used as the CL A MPL is a straightline that connects three or more consecutive pivots without passing through prices Theconnecting line is then extended Ive circled the three pivots that form the MPL on the chartThere are several other places on our chart where a MPL CL can be drawn Please bear in mindthat this is just the first step of the process Identification of likely CLs is all were after here Seeif you can locate two more then draw them in and send the chart back to me Well take up fromthere

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next lesson attachedDate Mittwoch 23 Februar 2000 212304

gtLesson 4 continuedgt gtIn one of his course letters Dr Andrews wrote The Law of Physicsgtstated by Newton that Action and Reaction are equal and opposite wasgtfirst applied to prices by your Course Directors friend the lategtRoger Babson who attributed his earnings of several million dollars to this lawgt gtBeginning with this segment of lesson four and continuing in lessongtfive youll learn how to draw and apply the ActionReaction tradinggtmethod as taught by Dr Andrews in his trading coursegt gtThe AR method requires a centerline or CL from which to startgtThe CL can be any of the followinggt - MPLgt - MLgt - MLHgt - 2P linegt - 2 Gap linegt - Peak to low linegt - Low to peak line Hello Gordon2P line 2 Gap line Peak to low line Low to peak line ndash actually I dont know what these lines areAre they discussed in Lesson 3 I believe you havenrsquot sent me this lesson yetAnyway I found two more MPLs on the Novellus Chart and drew them in RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Lesson 3Date Mittwoch 23 Februar 2000 235958

At 22300 92300 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt2P line 2 Gap line Peak to low line Low to peak line - actually I dont knowgtwhat these lines are Are they discussed in Lesson 3 I believe you didntgtsent me this lesson yetgtAnyway I found two more MPLs on the Novellus Chart and drew them ingt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone My apologiesI sent you an outdated version of the lesson Thanks for letting me know Musthave been my bedtime Heres the correct version Regards Gordon Lesson 3 In one of his course letters Dr Andrews wrote The Law of Physics stated by Newton that Actionand Reaction are equal and opposite was first applied to prices by your Course Directors friendthe late Roger Babson who attributed his earnings of several million dollars to this law In this lesson youll be introduced to the ActionReaction trading method as taught by Dr Andrewsin his trading course The AR method requires a centerline or CL from which to start The CL can be any of thefollowing - MPL Multi-pivot line A line drawn across 3 or more pivots - ML Median line The middle line of the pitchfork - MLH Median line parallel Either parallel line of the pitchfork - 2P line A line drawn across 2 pivots - 2 Gap line A line drawn connecting 2 gaps without touching prices in between - Peak to low line A line drawn connecting the high and low of a price leg

- Low to peak line A line drawn connecting the low and high of a price leg These are the primary lines that Dr Andrews used He stressed that some pencil work and a goodeyeball was needed in order to find the best fitting CL As with most other chart lines somework better than others The task is to find the best fit as he put it You will be shown examples ofeach of the above CLs Determining which of the above listed lines to use as the CL is the first step in the ActionReactionmethod With practice a quick view of the chart under study will be all thats needed to spot themost likely CL Youll be shown later how to experiment with possible combinations in order tofind the centerline that is most in tune with the market under study Well begin with the attached chart Note the CL drawn In this example a MPL (multi-pivot line)was used as the CL A MPL is a straight line that connects three or more consecutive pivotswithout passing through prices The connecting line is then extended Ive circled the three pivotsthat form the MPL on the chart There are several other places on our chart where a MPL CL canbe drawn Please bear in mind that this is just the first step of the process Identification of likelyCLs is all were after here See if you can locate two more then draw them in and send the chartback to me

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Donnerstag 24 Februar 2000 025105

At 22300 92300 PM you wroteI found two more MPLs on the Novellus Chart and drew them ingt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your mpls were correct This next segment shows the purpose of the centerline and how it isused Your payment in full arrived today TradersZone Thank you Regards Gordon Lesson 3 continued Please refer to the attached chart of Novellus The line drawn connecting the 3 circled pivots is amulti-pivot line (MPL) and represents the centerline (CL) well be using in this example Recall inthe previous segment that several types of centerlines are possible The choice is determined byexperimenting with the potential combinations on the chart under study Its best to try to locate acenterline somewhere close to the middle of the price chart in order to have sufficient past andforward data to use with the study This will become clear as you work with the method Once the centerline is drawn the next step is to locate a previous low or high pivot point to use fordrawing an action line Dr Andrews observed that the low pivot points often seem to work bestbut that either could be used In our example a line starting at the previous significant low wasdrawn parallel to the CL It is labeled A-1 (Action line 1) because it represents the first actionline Dr Andrews called it an action line because it was drawn as a result of a previous pivot (pricereversal) that had taken place Next a parallel line was drawn to the right of the CL and labeled R-1 Notice that it is the same distance from the CL as the corresponding A-1 line It is labeled R-1because it represents the first reaction line a line where prices are likely to stop or reverseNotice how prices reacted at the R-1 line in early 98 That serves as an indication that thecenterline chosen for this study should be a good one to use Not all reaction lines cause such aclear reversal as the R1 on this chart but many do Thats why its important to experiment withvarious centerline possibilities in order to find action lines that produce reaction lines which createthe greatest number of pivots or price stall-outs This experimentation is often quite time

consuming but experience has shown that it is time well spent When a centerline is found that isin tune with the price action of the issue under study it can be a highly effective tool for use inlocating probable reversal areas When combined with pitchfork lines the AR method can pinpointpotential reversal areas that are generally not recognized as such by others Dr Andrewstechniques for using the pitchfork and AR lines together are covered in later lessons In coming segments well study other lines that Dr Andrews used for his centerlines In themeantime experiment with the multi-pivot centerline on your own charts Then please send mean example of your work along with any questions you may have

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Freitag 25 Februar 2000 211356

gtIn the meantime experiment with the multi-pivot centerline on your owngtcharts Then please send me an example of your work along with anygtquestions you may have Hello Gordon I was wondering how many ActionReaction lines could be drawn on a chart On my attached chart I found at least 6 parallellines which had a significant meaning for the price RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject AR linesDate Montag 28 Februar 2000 080128

gtHello Gordongt gtI was wondering how many ActionReaction lines could be drawn on agtchart On my attached chart I found at least 6 parallel lines which hadgta significant meaning for the pricegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hi TradersZone Theres no set number of lines that can be drawnactually the more you can find the betterFinding a good centerline is the key And once you find lines that work such as you did anynumber of parallel lines can be drawn You are doing exactly what Dr Andrews didtaking thetime and effort to find the best fitting sets of lines Each chart has them and each chart is differentas Im sure youve found Nice work Heres the next part Regards Gordon Lesson 3 continued One of Dr Andrews favorite techniques dealt with gapsan often times perplexing price event formany traders His observations over the years suggested to him that while gaps show upfrequently on many price charts few traders have a method for including them as an integral partof their chart analysis Thats not surprising since not much has been published about how toapproach the use of gaps in a trading method Dr Andrews however found several ways to putprice gaps to good use An ActionReaction centerline which uses gaps as its basis is one suchmethod Please refer to the attached chart of Cendant Youll see that a centerline was drawn which passedthrough the July gap Note that it also came in contact with several pivots thereby qualifying as agapmulti-pivot centerline It is drawn by starting at the April low pivot and extending a line acrossand through the gap in mid-July It subsequently touches two additional high pivots Dr Andrews counted each gap as two pivots He noted that the more pivots a line touched the

stronger the line tended to be in the future Good reason then for using the July gap as the basisfor an ActionReaction study Our CL is labelled a gap-mpl-CL The May 98 high was used for the Action Line starting point A line was then drawn parallel to theCenterline as per ActionReaction procedure The corresponding Reaction Line was then drawn inIf this particular study had been drawn on Cendants chart right after the July gap was put in thepotential for prices to go all the way down to the Reaction Line might have seemed very slim at thetime Notice however that prices reached the Reaction Line in early September Youll see thishappen time and again as you work with the AR method The core of its effectiveness is a strongCL Please send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts of your choice

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re AR linesDate Montag 28 Februar 2000 155937

gtPlease send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts of yourgtchoice Hello Gordonhere are my examples RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject More on the ARDate Donnerstag 2 Maumlrz 2000 071158

At 22800 35900 PM you wrotegtgtPlease send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts ofgtgtyour choicegt gtHello Gordongthere are my examplesgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone You picked some good examples to use for your AR study Both showed the potential power of thismethod Takes time and lots of chart study sometimes to find the best set of lines but the rewardscan be many Heres something else to look at Regards Gordon The ActionReaction technique requires a strong centerline from which to begin The key todeciding which set of pivots to use for the centerline is found through experimenting with thevarious configurations visible on the chart under study The centerline might be a series of gapspivots an existing median line or any of Dr Andrews lines The task is to search for that centerlinewhich shows the greatest potential for projecting price reversal areas Dr Andrews did that byfinding a likely centerline near the middle of his price chart That allowed him to use any of theprevious pivots for his action lines By experimenting he found reaction lines that did the best jobof pegging reversal areas at data points located forward of the centerline Reaction lines are equal and opposite of the action lines and serve to project price levels at whicha reversal can be expected That is why the task of seeking out the best centerline is so importantDr Andrews reasoned that a series of reaction lines which have pegged price reversals in the pastis likely to continue to be in tune with current and future market price action Having severalprevious pivots to use as anchors for drawing action lines is thus essential The attached chart of Lattice illustrates this concept Please bear in mind that the gapmplcenterline is not the only centerline one could use on this chart You might want to study the chartfor other AR possibilities Try a peak-to-peak CL or a multi-pivot CL Send me your studies along

with any questions

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re More on the ARDate Samstag 4 Maumlrz 2000 002521

gtThe attached chart of Lattice illustrates this conceptgtPlease bear in mind that the gapmpl centerline is not the onlygtcenterline one could use on this chartgtYou might want to study the chart for other AR possibilitiesgtTry a peak-to-peak CL or a multi-pivot CL Send me your studiesgtalong with any questions Hello Gordonhere is my chart RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Peak to peak clDate Sonntag 5 Maumlrz 2000 064107

At 3400 122500 AM you wrotegtHello Gordongthere is my chartgt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Looks like you have the concept down Takes time and a lot of chart work to find the bestcenterline When the reaction lines dont seem to peg reversal areas chances are the centerline isnot the one that is best in tune with the price action of the issue under studyDespite the time required for this method it was one of Dr Andrews stand-bysAR lines could befound on most of his charts Im sending a chart with an example of a peak-to-peak CL Regards Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Peak to peak clDate Sonntag 5 Maumlrz 2000 171232

Hello Gordon I think the peak-to-peak CL on the last chart I sent to you was not really drawn from peak to peakIm sending another example RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next LessonDate Mittwoch 8 Maumlrz 2000 072526

At 3500 51200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtI think the peak-to-peak CL on the last chart I sent to you was notgtreally drawn from peak to peakgtIm sending another examplegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your peak to peak cl example was correctly drawn Thats a fairly simple approach but quite oftenthe peak to peak yields better reaction lines Heres the first part of the next lesson Regards Gordon Youll find times when prices dont quite reach the ML but instead drift alongside or away from itThe Schiff ML was designed to be used in place of the regular ML whenever that happens Suchprice action can be found at any place on a chart but most frequently occurs after a sharp sell-offor run-up of prices Dr Andrews also used the Schiff ML whenever his regular ML sloped at an unusually steep angleHe said it helped smooth out irregular price action such as that caused by unexpected earningsnews crop planting delays or poor growing conditions crop production reports etc Youll findnearly vertical price moves over a short period of time on many charts The Schiff ML method helpsput things back in perspective when that happens Well use the chart of Sterling Bancorp as an example of prices drifting away from the regular MLThat ML is drawn in black Prices didnt quite reach the ML but drifted alongside and eventuallyaway from it The Schiff ML and parallel lines are drawn in red Notice how prices were containedwithin the Schiff pitchfork until they finally broke down at the upper parallel line The procedure for drawing the Schiff ML is the same as for the regular ML except the startingpoint is located midway between the first 2 pivots youll be using The Sterling Bancorp chart

illustrates how this is done Dr Andrews also suggested using the Schiff ML whenever the regular ML method doesnt seem tobe in sync with price action Practice this procedure on your own charts and send a couple examples when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next LessonDate Donnerstag 9 Maumlrz 2000 001143

Hello Gordon in my charting software (Dynamic Trader) the Schiff ML is drawn by finding the midpoint of the line between pivot A and pivot Bmoving this point horizontally to directly above or below (depending on whether A is a low or high pivot) the A pivot anddrawing a line from his point through the midpoint of the BC swingAre there different methods of drawing a Schiff MLI was too lazy to draw Schiff MLs by hand with the method you described so Im sending my examples with the Dynamic TraderSchiff MLs -) RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject SchiffDate Samstag 11 Maumlrz 2000 070226

At 3900 121100 AM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtin my charting software (Dynamic Trader) the Schiff ML is drawn bygtfinding the midpoint of the line between pivot A and pivot B movinggtthis point horizontally to directly above or below (depending ongtwhether A is a low or high pivot) the A pivot and drawing a linegtgtfrom his point through the midpoint of the BC swinggtAre there different methods of drawing a Schiff MLgtI was too lazy to draw Schiff MLs by hand with the method yougtdescribed so Im sending my examples with the Dynamic Trader Schiff MLs -)gt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your program Schiff line procedure is fineits actually what Dr Andrews called a modified schiff ml and is onlyslightly different than the one I sent you initially The one you used is preferred by most course members Im sendingthe modified Schiff lesson and a chart along with this email The chart example shows how to use it with 0-34 pivots Regards Gordon

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Sliding Parallel LineDate Montag 13 Maumlrz 2000 005252

Hello TradersZone Heres one of the tools Dr Andrews used most often when entering exiting or reversing marketpositions Not many people know about this technique Regards Gordon The Sliding Parallel (SH) is drawn whenever prices cross an Andrews line and then move along itFor example if the bottom of a daily price bar range drops through a lower parallel line of apitchfork a new parallel line is then drawn from that low and extended to the right If the nextdays price bar drops through that sliding parallel line a sell signal is generated Whenever price action dictates a sliding parallel the next step is to draw a Warning Line Thewarning line is an additional parallel line that is an image extension of the original pitchforkchannels It serves as a warning that if prices penetrate the sliding parallel the next likely target isthe WL The attached chart of Avis illustrates these procedures Please try these on your own charts andsend me an example

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Sliding Parallel LineDate Dienstag 14 Maumlrz 2000 225737

Hello Gordon this is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning line RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 065606

At 31400 105700 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtthis is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning linegt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone Your chart of circuit city was a good example for this study I may have mentioned it earlier but DrAndrews used this technique on a regular basis The next part of this lesson covers another of hisfavorite tools the mini-median line pitchfork Here it is Regards Gordon The Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry and exit tools Though mostoften drawn using alternate closing prices alternate highs and lows can also be usedin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days is usually the maximumbetween pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or more back from P2 Dr Andrews used Mini-Median Line pitchforks for buy and sell signals whenever he expected areversal Some examples include a probable P5 or when prices are at a Warning Line ML MLHmajor ML extension or a sideways channel price target When prices cross the Mini-Median LineParallel (MMLH) a sliding parallel (SH) is used for order entry

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 231537

gtThe Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry andgtexit tools Though most often drawn using alternate closing pricesgtalternate highs and lows can also be usedgtin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days isgtusually the maximum between pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or moregtback from P2

Hello Gordon

wouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timingCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available whenDr Andrews was alive

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject intraday chartsDate Samstag 18 Maumlrz 2000 012400

At 31600 111500 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongtgtwouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsgtinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timinggtCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available when DrgtAndrews was alivegtgtRegardsgtTradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Youre absolutely correctintraday charts were not available when DrAndrews was a trader

Im reading between the lines here but if you plan to day-trade using the course techniques ie thepitchfork then I agree that the regular pitchfork would be more useful on intraday charts Otherwisewhipsaw would be a significant problem Please get back to me if I didnt address your questionbecause this is a very important technique The mini-median line pitchfork and sliding parallel showedup on most of Dr Andrews charts

Regards

Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re intraday chartsDate Dienstag 21 Maumlrz 2000 220322

Hello Gordon

You are right Im planning to daytrade SampP futures using the course techniques among other things

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 003408

Hi TradersZone Here are a couple Andrews techniques that will help anticipate the breakout direction of asideways channelThey work often enough to warrant keep handy Regards Gordon In an earlier lesson you were introduced to Dr Andrews sideways count You saw how frequentlythe sideways count method provided high probability price objectives after the breakout from theestablished channel took place In this segment of lesson 4 youll be shown 2 congestion area techniques that can help youdetermine the probable sideways channel price breakout direction Both rely on the use of pivots The first uses the pivot points that are circled on a sideways channel Dr Andrews observed thatwhenever a sideways channel results in at least 5 circle contacts the eventual price breakoutwould very often be in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle If circle 5 is at thetop of the channel for example the eventual price breakout would likely be to the upside If circle5 is at the bottom of the channel look for a downside breakout Dr Andrews noted that thistechnique can be subject to false breakouts but that such breakouts are usually followed shortlyafter with a confirmed breakout in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle Heemphasized that this study is best considered as a rule of thumb observation He viewed it as asupporting indicator for use with a short-term pitchfork as prices approached a channel line There are 2 charts attached that show how this works

The second technique in this part of lesson 4 deals with a sideways channelthat is building shortly after a P3 has been formed Dr Andrews noted thatwhenever that happened the probabilities were high that prices wouldbreakout in the same direction they were moving prior to the formation ofthe sideways channel The attached P3 to sideways example chart shows thisprocedure

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 205235

Hello Gordon here is my example for the 5 circle sideways count RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Lesson 5Date Montag 27 Maumlrz 2000 060731

At 32400 85200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my example for the 5 circle sideways countgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt gt Hi TradersZone Good example of the 5th circle tendency to predict the direction of a sideways breakout Any luckfinding a chart showing the P3 to sideways rule Im sending the first part of the next lesson This trendline method is a useful tool with all of DrAndrews course lines He used it all the time but especially when looking for confirmation of othercourse method trading signals Regards Gordon The Course Trendline__________________________________________________________ Next well discuss the trendline Seasoned traders agree that the trendline is one of their mostimportant tools No matter what kind of trading program or technique they use the trendline on achart is a must But one of the biggest mistakes made by amateurs and professionals alike isinconsistently drawing or defining the trendline Dr Andrews trendline procedure is simpleconsistent and accurate It works extremely well with the pivot count and with the pitchfork For an uptrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the lowest low up and to thehighest minor low point preceding the highest high The line must not pass through prices inbetween the two low points Extend the line(Attached chart of Brightpoint) For a downtrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the highest high point to thelowest minor high point preceding the lowest low so that it does not pass through prices inbetween the two high points Extend the line (Brightpoint chart) Thats all theres to it Its simple consistent and it works well with other Andrews lines It also

helps eliminate personal bias and haphazard analysis Practice drawing these trendlines on your own charts Send me any questions you might have andthen e-mail a chart of your choosing which shows at least two uptrend and two downtrend linesthat youve drawn_______________________________________________________________________

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Lesson 5Date Dienstag 28 Maumlrz 2000 120224

Hello Gordon here is my chart with trendlinesWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going above the trendline again should I draw a new trendline anddelete the old one Attached is another chart with the P3 to sideways rule I finally found an example for it RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Price failure techniqueDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081412

At 32800 120200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my chart with trendlinesgtWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going abovegtthe trendline again should I draw a new trendline and delete the oldgtone Hi TradersZone Take a look at the chart Im returningI added some lines for you to considerWith the course trendline once its broken a new one should be started Theres a technique thatties in with this coming up soon Meanwhile heres an important technique to work on It deals with those times when prices dontreach the ML Regards Gordon Dr Andrews Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P ofreversaland the ML the probability is that this price reversal will go further thanitdid on its approach toward the ML (Extract of original course material) A price failure very often indicates a sizeable reversal will take placeThepitchforks drawn on the chart of Home Depot illustrate the concept of pricefailure Dr Andrews routinely drew a new pitchfork on his chart after a newsignificant pivot had formed He knew that prices had a high probability ofreaching the new ML before stalling out or reversing If prices reversedbeforereaching the ML thereby forming a new pivot he termed it a price failureTheunderlying idea here is that Dr Andrews fully anticipated his median linewouldact as a price magnet To conclude that a price reversal resulted in a price failure Dr Andrewsused

these primary signalsa subsequent price penetration of a short-termmulti-pivotline andor a return of prices to and penetration of the parallel lineformed atpivot 3 of the pitchfork (The circles on the Home Depot chart denote theparallelline penetration signal To avoid clutter the mpl lines were not drawn) One possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart of ConsecoIncLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me a copy

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject ChartDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081800Attachments image002png

Hi TradersZone Forgot the chart Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Price failure techniqueDate Samstag 1 April 2000 201000

gtOne possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart ofgtConseco IncgtLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me agtcopy Hi Gordon here are my charts with price failures RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Mittwoch 5 April 2000 235624

Hi TradersZone Good price failure examples you sentany comments or questions about it Heres the next partanother old standby Dr Andrews kept handy Regards Gordon In this segment youll learn how to use the Fan line Technique To draw the fan lines youll apply the coursetrendline method which was introduced in an earlier lesson It might be well to emphasize that the practicalapplication of the course trendline method requires practice and experience both of which will serve youwell in this technique Dr Andrews used fan lines as an adjunct to his pitchfork sideways channel andactionreaction methods In the fan line study three trendlines are drawn from the original reversal pivot of the price correction understudy typically a P0 or a P5 Youll notice on the charts included with this study that each fan line is at aflatter angle than its predecessor When the third fan line is broken the rule is that the correction has endedand a new trend is under way Try this technique on some of your own charts and then please send me asample

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Donnerstag 6 April 2000 234315

Hi Gordon No I dont have any specific question about the price failure technique I guess the next likely target after a price failure wouldbe the warning line I have attached two charts with fan linesIs it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the third fan line is broken RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Next segmentDate Freitag 7 April 2000 003312

Hello TradersZone

Tuesday April 06 2000 114315 AM you wrote

TZgt Hi Gordon

TZgt No I dont have any specific question about the price failureTZgt technique I guess the next likely target after a price failureTZgt would be the warning line

TZgt I have attached two charts with fan linesTZgt Is it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the thirdTZgt fan line is broken

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Thats right the warning line is the next price target Additionalwarning lines can be drawn if needed but usually one will do it Ifprices go through the first warning line another can be drawn butmost likely a new pitchfork could be drawn instead which would bepreferable Helps stay current with recently formed pivots

When prices break through the third fan line a buy or sell signal isgiven Not sure what you mean by fourth target fan line Im a littledense today

Your chart work was goodthis is another handy tool for spotting thehigh probability of a price reversal or trend change

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject The Gap TradeDate Freitag 7 April 2000 004858

Hello TradersZone This trading signal doesnt show up very often but past observations have shown that its well worth watching for Dr Andrews placed a lot of emphasis on the importance of price gaps something many traders overlook This is one of his gap uses Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom The Gap Trading Technique Price gaps can be a dilemma for many traders The general rule denoting market strength or weakness after ahigh volume gap often comes up short after the initial reaction is over Many gappers simply run out ofsteam A high volume gap in itself seems to offer precious little evidence that a profitable move is about toget under way Dr Andrews used price gaps somewhat differently than others He counted a gap as 2 pivots Youll see howthat works in the following technique which uses a gap to arrive at a price level for a buy or sell order Using short-term daily price pivots label the pivot immediately preceding the gap as p0 Count the gap as 2pivots labeling it p1 amp p2 After p3 has formed and prices reverse towards a short-term p4 draw a horizontalline 2 price tics or more (individual preference)to the right of p3 Enter the market only if prices reach orpenetrate that line within a few days after reversing from p4 Please look over your own charts to see if you can find places where the gap trade technique could have beenused Send me a sample when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 001925

Hello Gordon this is my chart with a gap trade RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 065538

Hello TradersZone Thursday April 08 2000 121925 PM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt this is my chart with a gap trade TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Good examplethe gap trade technique shines when an issue in at or near a P5 Similar to the one on thechart you sent Heres another trading signal tool Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Dr Andrews used several techniques which helped him determine whether a P5 was near at hand Youllrecall that he observed most price moves ended or had a significant reversal at a P5 This technique uses alternate closing prices after a P4 has been formed As with many of his studies thenumber 5 is used The chart accompanying this segment shows that there were 5 alternate closes to thedownside after P4 was put in Dr Andrews noted that whenever 5 or more alternate closes followed a P4 theprobabilities were high that a P5 was near at hand An added feature to this chart study is the sideways channel Notice how the 2nd target price and the 5thalternate close nearly coincide

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 12 April 2000 200730

Hello Gordon This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 13 April 2000 082418

Monday April 12 2000 80730 AM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hello TradersZone Good chart example of this Andrews toolanother of his very unusual observations that workmore often than not Heres the final part of this lesson Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom In this trendline method Dr Andrews once again used the number 5 as the basis for locating aprobable reversal area He found this technique to be especially useful whenever a clear orobvious pivot count didnt show up onthe price move under study Trendlines are drawn using the course trendline method When the 5th trendline is broken theprobability is high that the trend under study has ended A mini-median line pitchfork andorsliding parallel could be used for pricing a trading order The accompanying chart of Compaq Computer is an example of how the trendline study could beused The pivot count beginning at the October low is difficult to nail down There were severalsmall areas of congestion but no sizeable corrections while prices advanced The count wasunclear By following the price action using the course trendline technique however the traderwould have been alerted to the possibility of a change of trend when the 5th trendline was brokenin early February Try this technique on your own charts When youre ready please send me an example of yourstudy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 19 April 2000 124108

Hello Gordon this is my example with 5 trendlines RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[6] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 20 April 2000 012726

Monday April 19 2000 124108 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt this is my example with 5 trendlines

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Good example of the 5 TL technique Always reminds me of how the fairly simple tools often do a better job than manyof the sophisticated studies out there

That was the last part of lesson 5 Lesson 6 attached is made in one mailing Youll find Dr Andrews trading rules alongwith a wrap-up review which uses several of his rules You might have questions about some of the rules so feel free tosend them as they arise

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Dr Andrews had an abbreviated set of trading rules on several index cards that he carried around with him in his shirtpocket He said every trading day turned up something new on his charts and by having his rules in his pocket he wasreminded of the need for a methodical approach to his analysis Quite a comment coming from the man who wrote therule book

In this the final lesson of the course Dr Andrews original trading rules and observations are presented Lets work witha few of them at this point

Using charts of issues you follow please send me an example that illustrates your interpretation of each of the followingrules

Rule 4 Anticipating major Ps

Rule 7 Penetration rule

Rule 8 Price failure rule

Rule 11 1-ML23 AR Centerline

Rule 12 Sliding Parallel rule

Rule 15 Mini-median line parallel to buy or sell

Feel free to include any other course techniques you choose to apply but please include examples of the above as aminimum Use more than one technique on a chart if your analysis supports it Send as many charts as you like alongwith your questionscomments

Lesson 6 - Dr Andrews Trading Rules

This lesson covers course rules and significant observations as taught by Dr Andrews in his original trading course Therules are those that he used in his own trading and are provided to serve as a checklist for use with the course tradingmethods youve learned

Rule 1 Where prices are always headed Rule You course members are among the fortunate few to be able to draw astraight line and know that prices are headed toward that ML Very few investors have ever applied this ML principle ofstatistics to price fluctuations and weve never seen this in any books on investment You are among the very few who

know that prices are always headed toward the newest ML

Rule 2 The Rule of coming opposites applies all through life In the bible we find Blessed at they that mourn for theyshall be comforted As investors we know that any losses can be recovered by using course methods

Rule 3 Turn your mind about or Rethink for all good is at hand We should mentally prepare ourselves for thecoming reversal in prices and other affairs Heres one way for example that you course members who know the MLrules can use When prices are skyrocketing upward we do this preparation by thinking If prices pivoted here today atthis price Id draw a new ML bisecting the distance between todays price and the price from which the rise started Andwe know now that if this is a Major Pivot prices will fall rapidly to this new ML Profits from such drops are big and quick

Rule 4 Rule for anticipating major Ps If during congestion or after a rally or decline you can count four previous Psthe fifth one is highly probable to be the one from which a new trend starts

Rule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can make a quick big profit is to watch for the EPformations

Rule 6 The other reversal rule is that prices tend to reverse at or near any ML as well as at any extension of each MLAnd also at any MLH or extensions of MLH

Rule 7 The Penetration Rule is that whenever prices gap past or plunge through any ML there is a high probability thatthey will quickly return to it temporarily and then resume the trend they had before they gapped or plunged through

Rule 8 Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P of reversal and the MLthe probability is that this price reversal will go further than it did on its approach toward the ML

Rule 9 The price failure rule is negated when the next price trend is also a failure in reaching the ML This is almostinvariably a signal of a big fast move in the direction indicated by this last space Rule 10 When alternate median lines of comparable length slope in the same direction the trend is firm and rapidprice changes take place

Rule 11 When 1-ML23 is exactly reached at P4 it can be used as a highly reliable centerline for the AR method

Rule 12 Frequently after crossing a lower MLH prices continue to rise along the MLH Since the crossing of the MLHsignals a further drop is likely use a sliding parallel along the bottom of the most recent crossing If prices drop past thatsliding parallel line a sell signal is generated

Rule 13 MLs between P2 and P3 can start from a nearby or a remote P1 since prices tend to reverse at each of theseMLs Try several such P2-P3 MLs to discover the best fit

Rule 14 The distance of each MLH from its ML is the distance of the next warning line Use these warning lineswhenever a SH has signalled a buy or sell

Rule 15 Use the MMLH as a buy or sell signal when you expect a reversal because of a P5 Also when prices are at aWL ML extension line or where course lines converge or intersect

Rule 16 Converging lines that meet prices have shown the highest probability of a trend reversal

Rule 17 Two to four days is usually the maximum between P2 and P3 for a MML P1 can be a day or so back from P2and 3

Rule 18 The most reliable ActionReaction centerlines seem to be MPL 2P line 2 Gap line peak to low or low to peak

Rule 19 When prices pass through R lines look for a pull back and then a continuing move in the direction of the passthrough

Rule 20 Use gaps as Action lines from the centerline

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 003755

Hello Gordonhere is my example for Rule 4 And I have a question What are EP formations gtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 021242

Tuesday May 04 2000 123755 PM you wrote TZgt Hello GordonTZgt here is my example for Rule 4 TZgt And I have a question What are EP formations gtgtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegtgta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hi TradersZone Good use of the warning linesalso the EP material is part of lesson 4 Rather than go backthrough the files to see when (or if) it was sent Im sending it along with this reply Glad youbrought it up Best RegardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Tuesday May 04 2000208 PM Dr Andrews used a fairly common price chart formation that he found useful at probable P5market tops and bottoms The formation generally called a wedge or pennant by chartists isreferred to in Dr Andrews trading course as the Expanding Pivot (EP) One of the few chartformations used in the course he regarded it as among the most dependable indications that amarket top was forming Closely related to the EP is his Inverted Expanding Pivot (IEP) which henoted could often be observed at market bottoms Both are regarded as intermediate and long-term reversal indicators Dr Andrews found that both formations were most reliable when they occurred after a sharprapid price move coinciding with the formation of a probable P5 He said it wasnt unusual for theformation to take several weeks to complete and that conservative traders could best avoid thewhipsaw associated with congestion patterns by trading only in the direction of the probable price

break out of the EP or IEP formation The attached charts illustrate these formations Please look over your own charts for an example ofthe EP and IEP and send me a copy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 232127

Hello Gordon Thank you for the lesson with the EP material I couldnt find it in any previous emailHere is my example for Rule 7 RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Rule 4Date Samstag 6 Mai 2000 080827

Wednesday May 05 2000 112127 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt Thank you for the lesson with the EP materialTZgt I couldnt find it in any previous emailTZgt Here is my example for Rule 7

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hi TradersZone

Glad you mentioned it earlierexcept for the EP IEP and hissideways channel Dr Andrews didnt have much to say about chartpatterns and formations These are good ones to use though

Your study of the penetration rule was good Later

Best Regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Wednesday May 05 2000801 PM

Page 17: Pitchfork primer

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Sideways countDate Mittwoch 9 Februar 2000 232315Attachments image001png

Hi TradersZone Im returning your chartplease note comments GordonRegards Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Thanks for the questionDate Donnerstag 10 Februar 2000 233059

Hello Gordonthank you Im ready for the next lesson

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next partDate Donnerstag 10 Februar 2000 235613

At 21000 113000 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongtthank you Im ready for the next lessongt gt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt gt gt TradersZoneI sent this yesterday but will re-send It was part of my reply to your questionregarding the circle I dont have a record of your return chartwork for this part If its a duplicatesend sorry Regards Gordon Well continue to use the Brightpoint chart for this portion of the sideways count study To reviewthe pattern were looking for should be a recent rectangular shaped sideways trading range thatcontains most if not all of the congestion price action Take a look at the attached chart and notehow well defined the price channel for Brightpoint is Youll probably notice that it is deeper thanthe channel you studied on the chart in the preceding segment This comparison is made toillustrate that while the first channel example covers a longer period of time the second includesall of the price ranges and is the preferred method Please look at where the circles were placed on the channel lines To review a new circle is drawnonly after prices have first been at the opposite channel line Recall that circles must be inalternate sequence eg upper linelower lineupper linelower line etc one circle at a time Note that the price range within the channel is $4 34 (High 21 12 Low 16 34) There were twocircles drawn on the lower line of our sideways channel before prices broke down Using thatinformation our next step will be to use some simple arithmetic in order to come up with twodownside price targets Well cover that procedure in the next segment Please let me know whenyou are ready to continue

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next partDate Freitag 11 Februar 2000 234113

I think the placement of the circles is clear to me nowI have attached another chart with a sideways count RegardsTradersZone gtTradersZoneI sent this yesterday but will re-send It was part ofgtmy reply to your question regarding the circle I dont have a recordgtof your return chartwork for this part If its a duplicate send sorry

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject SidewaysDate Montag 14 Februar 2000 054227

At 21100 114100 PM you wrotegtI think the placement of the circles is clear to me nowgtI have attached another chart with a sideways countgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone Your chart was on target Looks like youre ready for the next part Here it is Regards Gordon During this segment youll learn how to arrive at two price targets using Dr Andrews sidewayscount Simple arithmetic is all thats required once the sideways channel and circles are in place Well continue to use the Brightpoint chart which is attached Note that Brightpoint fell throughthe bottom channel line at the point where we placed our second circle so figuring out possibledownside targets would have been in order at that time Heres how thats done 1 Determine the price range of the channel In this case the range is $4 34 (21 12 - 16 34) 2 Count the number of circles on the lower channel line The lower line is used in this casebecause thats the line that didnt hold Prices went through it returned to check it out and thencontinued lower 3 Multiply the price range of the channel times the number of circles drawn on the lower channelline (4 34 x 2 = 9 12) 4 Subtract that figure from the upper channel line priceThe result becomes downside price target 1 (21 12 - 9 12 = 12) 5 Next subtract that same figure from the price at the lower channel line Thats price target 2(16 34 - 9 12 = 7 14)

In the case of an upside channel breakout the procedure is reversed Please draw a few channelsand figure out some downside targets on your own charts When youre ready send me two orthree examples of your work As always send your questions as they arise

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re SidewaysDate Montag 14 Februar 2000 134314

Here are my examples I couldnt find enough charts with downside targets so I included some charts with upside targets Do the channel lines always have to be horizontal When I look at my charts I find more channels with an upward slope or adownward slope RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Sideways channelsDate Freitag 18 Februar 2000 005531

At 21400 14300 PM you wrotegtHere are my examples I couldnt find enough charts with downsidegttargets so I included some charts with upside targetsgt gtDo the channel lines always have to be horizontal When I look at mygtcharts I find more channels with an upward slope or a downward slopegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone The sideways method can be used with either up or down Sorry didnt mean to imply that only downsidetargets should be found Ill reword that portion of the lesson Thanks for mentioning it Dr Andrews sideways method works only on horizontal channels Others have mentioned the slopingchannels also and have wondered if there is some method to use with them I know of none Ive askedother course members for their ideas on how to approach this problem but so far no one has come up with amethod I would think that there should be a solution but have not personally taken the time to research itIf some method could be found that works as often as the Andrews sideways count it would be a significantfind The Andrews sideways count doesnt always hit the targets as you saw on your chart of Bausch amp Lomb Itworks more often than not though and it still amazes me at how often prices reach the targets Heres an observation to keep in mind Quite often after the first target is reached prices will reverse andhead back towards the channel At times youll note that they return inside the channel They will thenreverse again and head back towards the second price target These reversals happen frequently and presenttrading opportunities Im including the final segment of this lesson Regards Gordon So far in the course youve learned about Dr Andrews pivot counting procedure pitchfork and sidewayscount Youve noticed by now how often prices change trend at a P5 Youve seen how the 0-34 ML methodcan help locate the probable P5 area Youve seen how often price targets are met using the sideways countmethod The tendency for prices to reverse at a median line should be recognized as a high probability eventas well In coming lessons youll be shown how Dr Andrews used these and other high probability events totrade the stock and commodity markets The tools and techniques he used will help you put the finishingtouches on your market analysis using Andrews lines

Before continuing on to the next lesson lets briefly review what has so far been covered The attached chartprovides an opportunity to illustrate the methods referred to above Please draw these methods on thechart and return to me

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Sideways channelsDate Montag 21 Februar 2000 193743

gtBefore continuing on to the next lesson lets briefly review what hasgtso far been covered The attached chart provides an opportunity togtillustrate the methods referred to above Please draw these methods ongtthe chart and return to me Hello Gordonhere is my chart RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next lesson attachedDate Mittwoch 23 Februar 2000 014539

At 22100 73700 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongthere is my chartgt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Good job on the pivots sideways count and pitchforkLooks like youre ready to move on to the next part It wont be long and things will begin to fall inplace Regards Gordon Lesson 4 continued In one of his course letters Dr Andrews wrote The Law of Physics stated by Newton that Actionand Reaction are equal and opposite was first applied to prices by your Course Directors friendthe late Roger Babson who attributed his earnings of several million dollars to this law Beginning with this segment of lesson four and continuing in lesson five youll learn how to drawand apply the ActionReaction trading method as taught by Dr Andrews in his trading course The AR method requires a centerline or CL from which to start The CL can be any of thefollowing - MPL - ML - MLH - 2P line - 2 Gap line - Peak to low line - Low to peak lineThese are the primary lines that Dr Andrews used He stressed that some pencil work and a goodeyeball was needed in order to find the best fitting CL As with most other chart lines somework better than others The task is to find the best fit as he put it You will be shown examples of

each of the above CLs in this lesson and the next Determining which of the above listed lines to use as the CL is the first step in the ActionReactionmethod The solution often presents itself With a little practice a quick scan of the chart understudy will be all thats needed to spot the most likely CL Well begin with the attached chart Notethe CL drawn In this example a MPL (multi-pivot line) was used as the CL A MPL is a straightline that connects three or more consecutive pivots without passing through prices Theconnecting line is then extended Ive circled the three pivots that form the MPL on the chartThere are several other places on our chart where a MPL CL can be drawn Please bear in mindthat this is just the first step of the process Identification of likely CLs is all were after here Seeif you can locate two more then draw them in and send the chart back to me Well take up fromthere

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next lesson attachedDate Mittwoch 23 Februar 2000 212304

gtLesson 4 continuedgt gtIn one of his course letters Dr Andrews wrote The Law of Physicsgtstated by Newton that Action and Reaction are equal and opposite wasgtfirst applied to prices by your Course Directors friend the lategtRoger Babson who attributed his earnings of several million dollars to this lawgt gtBeginning with this segment of lesson four and continuing in lessongtfive youll learn how to draw and apply the ActionReaction tradinggtmethod as taught by Dr Andrews in his trading coursegt gtThe AR method requires a centerline or CL from which to startgtThe CL can be any of the followinggt - MPLgt - MLgt - MLHgt - 2P linegt - 2 Gap linegt - Peak to low linegt - Low to peak line Hello Gordon2P line 2 Gap line Peak to low line Low to peak line ndash actually I dont know what these lines areAre they discussed in Lesson 3 I believe you havenrsquot sent me this lesson yetAnyway I found two more MPLs on the Novellus Chart and drew them in RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Lesson 3Date Mittwoch 23 Februar 2000 235958

At 22300 92300 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt2P line 2 Gap line Peak to low line Low to peak line - actually I dont knowgtwhat these lines are Are they discussed in Lesson 3 I believe you didntgtsent me this lesson yetgtAnyway I found two more MPLs on the Novellus Chart and drew them ingt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone My apologiesI sent you an outdated version of the lesson Thanks for letting me know Musthave been my bedtime Heres the correct version Regards Gordon Lesson 3 In one of his course letters Dr Andrews wrote The Law of Physics stated by Newton that Actionand Reaction are equal and opposite was first applied to prices by your Course Directors friendthe late Roger Babson who attributed his earnings of several million dollars to this law In this lesson youll be introduced to the ActionReaction trading method as taught by Dr Andrewsin his trading course The AR method requires a centerline or CL from which to start The CL can be any of thefollowing - MPL Multi-pivot line A line drawn across 3 or more pivots - ML Median line The middle line of the pitchfork - MLH Median line parallel Either parallel line of the pitchfork - 2P line A line drawn across 2 pivots - 2 Gap line A line drawn connecting 2 gaps without touching prices in between - Peak to low line A line drawn connecting the high and low of a price leg

- Low to peak line A line drawn connecting the low and high of a price leg These are the primary lines that Dr Andrews used He stressed that some pencil work and a goodeyeball was needed in order to find the best fitting CL As with most other chart lines somework better than others The task is to find the best fit as he put it You will be shown examples ofeach of the above CLs Determining which of the above listed lines to use as the CL is the first step in the ActionReactionmethod With practice a quick view of the chart under study will be all thats needed to spot themost likely CL Youll be shown later how to experiment with possible combinations in order tofind the centerline that is most in tune with the market under study Well begin with the attached chart Note the CL drawn In this example a MPL (multi-pivot line)was used as the CL A MPL is a straight line that connects three or more consecutive pivotswithout passing through prices The connecting line is then extended Ive circled the three pivotsthat form the MPL on the chart There are several other places on our chart where a MPL CL canbe drawn Please bear in mind that this is just the first step of the process Identification of likelyCLs is all were after here See if you can locate two more then draw them in and send the chartback to me

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Donnerstag 24 Februar 2000 025105

At 22300 92300 PM you wroteI found two more MPLs on the Novellus Chart and drew them ingt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your mpls were correct This next segment shows the purpose of the centerline and how it isused Your payment in full arrived today TradersZone Thank you Regards Gordon Lesson 3 continued Please refer to the attached chart of Novellus The line drawn connecting the 3 circled pivots is amulti-pivot line (MPL) and represents the centerline (CL) well be using in this example Recall inthe previous segment that several types of centerlines are possible The choice is determined byexperimenting with the potential combinations on the chart under study Its best to try to locate acenterline somewhere close to the middle of the price chart in order to have sufficient past andforward data to use with the study This will become clear as you work with the method Once the centerline is drawn the next step is to locate a previous low or high pivot point to use fordrawing an action line Dr Andrews observed that the low pivot points often seem to work bestbut that either could be used In our example a line starting at the previous significant low wasdrawn parallel to the CL It is labeled A-1 (Action line 1) because it represents the first actionline Dr Andrews called it an action line because it was drawn as a result of a previous pivot (pricereversal) that had taken place Next a parallel line was drawn to the right of the CL and labeled R-1 Notice that it is the same distance from the CL as the corresponding A-1 line It is labeled R-1because it represents the first reaction line a line where prices are likely to stop or reverseNotice how prices reacted at the R-1 line in early 98 That serves as an indication that thecenterline chosen for this study should be a good one to use Not all reaction lines cause such aclear reversal as the R1 on this chart but many do Thats why its important to experiment withvarious centerline possibilities in order to find action lines that produce reaction lines which createthe greatest number of pivots or price stall-outs This experimentation is often quite time

consuming but experience has shown that it is time well spent When a centerline is found that isin tune with the price action of the issue under study it can be a highly effective tool for use inlocating probable reversal areas When combined with pitchfork lines the AR method can pinpointpotential reversal areas that are generally not recognized as such by others Dr Andrewstechniques for using the pitchfork and AR lines together are covered in later lessons In coming segments well study other lines that Dr Andrews used for his centerlines In themeantime experiment with the multi-pivot centerline on your own charts Then please send mean example of your work along with any questions you may have

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Freitag 25 Februar 2000 211356

gtIn the meantime experiment with the multi-pivot centerline on your owngtcharts Then please send me an example of your work along with anygtquestions you may have Hello Gordon I was wondering how many ActionReaction lines could be drawn on a chart On my attached chart I found at least 6 parallellines which had a significant meaning for the price RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject AR linesDate Montag 28 Februar 2000 080128

gtHello Gordongt gtI was wondering how many ActionReaction lines could be drawn on agtchart On my attached chart I found at least 6 parallel lines which hadgta significant meaning for the pricegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hi TradersZone Theres no set number of lines that can be drawnactually the more you can find the betterFinding a good centerline is the key And once you find lines that work such as you did anynumber of parallel lines can be drawn You are doing exactly what Dr Andrews didtaking thetime and effort to find the best fitting sets of lines Each chart has them and each chart is differentas Im sure youve found Nice work Heres the next part Regards Gordon Lesson 3 continued One of Dr Andrews favorite techniques dealt with gapsan often times perplexing price event formany traders His observations over the years suggested to him that while gaps show upfrequently on many price charts few traders have a method for including them as an integral partof their chart analysis Thats not surprising since not much has been published about how toapproach the use of gaps in a trading method Dr Andrews however found several ways to putprice gaps to good use An ActionReaction centerline which uses gaps as its basis is one suchmethod Please refer to the attached chart of Cendant Youll see that a centerline was drawn which passedthrough the July gap Note that it also came in contact with several pivots thereby qualifying as agapmulti-pivot centerline It is drawn by starting at the April low pivot and extending a line acrossand through the gap in mid-July It subsequently touches two additional high pivots Dr Andrews counted each gap as two pivots He noted that the more pivots a line touched the

stronger the line tended to be in the future Good reason then for using the July gap as the basisfor an ActionReaction study Our CL is labelled a gap-mpl-CL The May 98 high was used for the Action Line starting point A line was then drawn parallel to theCenterline as per ActionReaction procedure The corresponding Reaction Line was then drawn inIf this particular study had been drawn on Cendants chart right after the July gap was put in thepotential for prices to go all the way down to the Reaction Line might have seemed very slim at thetime Notice however that prices reached the Reaction Line in early September Youll see thishappen time and again as you work with the AR method The core of its effectiveness is a strongCL Please send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts of your choice

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re AR linesDate Montag 28 Februar 2000 155937

gtPlease send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts of yourgtchoice Hello Gordonhere are my examples RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject More on the ARDate Donnerstag 2 Maumlrz 2000 071158

At 22800 35900 PM you wrotegtgtPlease send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts ofgtgtyour choicegt gtHello Gordongthere are my examplesgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone You picked some good examples to use for your AR study Both showed the potential power of thismethod Takes time and lots of chart study sometimes to find the best set of lines but the rewardscan be many Heres something else to look at Regards Gordon The ActionReaction technique requires a strong centerline from which to begin The key todeciding which set of pivots to use for the centerline is found through experimenting with thevarious configurations visible on the chart under study The centerline might be a series of gapspivots an existing median line or any of Dr Andrews lines The task is to search for that centerlinewhich shows the greatest potential for projecting price reversal areas Dr Andrews did that byfinding a likely centerline near the middle of his price chart That allowed him to use any of theprevious pivots for his action lines By experimenting he found reaction lines that did the best jobof pegging reversal areas at data points located forward of the centerline Reaction lines are equal and opposite of the action lines and serve to project price levels at whicha reversal can be expected That is why the task of seeking out the best centerline is so importantDr Andrews reasoned that a series of reaction lines which have pegged price reversals in the pastis likely to continue to be in tune with current and future market price action Having severalprevious pivots to use as anchors for drawing action lines is thus essential The attached chart of Lattice illustrates this concept Please bear in mind that the gapmplcenterline is not the only centerline one could use on this chart You might want to study the chartfor other AR possibilities Try a peak-to-peak CL or a multi-pivot CL Send me your studies along

with any questions

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re More on the ARDate Samstag 4 Maumlrz 2000 002521

gtThe attached chart of Lattice illustrates this conceptgtPlease bear in mind that the gapmpl centerline is not the onlygtcenterline one could use on this chartgtYou might want to study the chart for other AR possibilitiesgtTry a peak-to-peak CL or a multi-pivot CL Send me your studiesgtalong with any questions Hello Gordonhere is my chart RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Peak to peak clDate Sonntag 5 Maumlrz 2000 064107

At 3400 122500 AM you wrotegtHello Gordongthere is my chartgt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Looks like you have the concept down Takes time and a lot of chart work to find the bestcenterline When the reaction lines dont seem to peg reversal areas chances are the centerline isnot the one that is best in tune with the price action of the issue under studyDespite the time required for this method it was one of Dr Andrews stand-bysAR lines could befound on most of his charts Im sending a chart with an example of a peak-to-peak CL Regards Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Peak to peak clDate Sonntag 5 Maumlrz 2000 171232

Hello Gordon I think the peak-to-peak CL on the last chart I sent to you was not really drawn from peak to peakIm sending another example RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next LessonDate Mittwoch 8 Maumlrz 2000 072526

At 3500 51200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtI think the peak-to-peak CL on the last chart I sent to you was notgtreally drawn from peak to peakgtIm sending another examplegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your peak to peak cl example was correctly drawn Thats a fairly simple approach but quite oftenthe peak to peak yields better reaction lines Heres the first part of the next lesson Regards Gordon Youll find times when prices dont quite reach the ML but instead drift alongside or away from itThe Schiff ML was designed to be used in place of the regular ML whenever that happens Suchprice action can be found at any place on a chart but most frequently occurs after a sharp sell-offor run-up of prices Dr Andrews also used the Schiff ML whenever his regular ML sloped at an unusually steep angleHe said it helped smooth out irregular price action such as that caused by unexpected earningsnews crop planting delays or poor growing conditions crop production reports etc Youll findnearly vertical price moves over a short period of time on many charts The Schiff ML method helpsput things back in perspective when that happens Well use the chart of Sterling Bancorp as an example of prices drifting away from the regular MLThat ML is drawn in black Prices didnt quite reach the ML but drifted alongside and eventuallyaway from it The Schiff ML and parallel lines are drawn in red Notice how prices were containedwithin the Schiff pitchfork until they finally broke down at the upper parallel line The procedure for drawing the Schiff ML is the same as for the regular ML except the startingpoint is located midway between the first 2 pivots youll be using The Sterling Bancorp chart

illustrates how this is done Dr Andrews also suggested using the Schiff ML whenever the regular ML method doesnt seem tobe in sync with price action Practice this procedure on your own charts and send a couple examples when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next LessonDate Donnerstag 9 Maumlrz 2000 001143

Hello Gordon in my charting software (Dynamic Trader) the Schiff ML is drawn by finding the midpoint of the line between pivot A and pivot Bmoving this point horizontally to directly above or below (depending on whether A is a low or high pivot) the A pivot anddrawing a line from his point through the midpoint of the BC swingAre there different methods of drawing a Schiff MLI was too lazy to draw Schiff MLs by hand with the method you described so Im sending my examples with the Dynamic TraderSchiff MLs -) RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject SchiffDate Samstag 11 Maumlrz 2000 070226

At 3900 121100 AM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtin my charting software (Dynamic Trader) the Schiff ML is drawn bygtfinding the midpoint of the line between pivot A and pivot B movinggtthis point horizontally to directly above or below (depending ongtwhether A is a low or high pivot) the A pivot and drawing a linegtgtfrom his point through the midpoint of the BC swinggtAre there different methods of drawing a Schiff MLgtI was too lazy to draw Schiff MLs by hand with the method yougtdescribed so Im sending my examples with the Dynamic Trader Schiff MLs -)gt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your program Schiff line procedure is fineits actually what Dr Andrews called a modified schiff ml and is onlyslightly different than the one I sent you initially The one you used is preferred by most course members Im sendingthe modified Schiff lesson and a chart along with this email The chart example shows how to use it with 0-34 pivots Regards Gordon

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Sliding Parallel LineDate Montag 13 Maumlrz 2000 005252

Hello TradersZone Heres one of the tools Dr Andrews used most often when entering exiting or reversing marketpositions Not many people know about this technique Regards Gordon The Sliding Parallel (SH) is drawn whenever prices cross an Andrews line and then move along itFor example if the bottom of a daily price bar range drops through a lower parallel line of apitchfork a new parallel line is then drawn from that low and extended to the right If the nextdays price bar drops through that sliding parallel line a sell signal is generated Whenever price action dictates a sliding parallel the next step is to draw a Warning Line Thewarning line is an additional parallel line that is an image extension of the original pitchforkchannels It serves as a warning that if prices penetrate the sliding parallel the next likely target isthe WL The attached chart of Avis illustrates these procedures Please try these on your own charts andsend me an example

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Sliding Parallel LineDate Dienstag 14 Maumlrz 2000 225737

Hello Gordon this is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning line RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 065606

At 31400 105700 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtthis is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning linegt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone Your chart of circuit city was a good example for this study I may have mentioned it earlier but DrAndrews used this technique on a regular basis The next part of this lesson covers another of hisfavorite tools the mini-median line pitchfork Here it is Regards Gordon The Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry and exit tools Though mostoften drawn using alternate closing prices alternate highs and lows can also be usedin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days is usually the maximumbetween pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or more back from P2 Dr Andrews used Mini-Median Line pitchforks for buy and sell signals whenever he expected areversal Some examples include a probable P5 or when prices are at a Warning Line ML MLHmajor ML extension or a sideways channel price target When prices cross the Mini-Median LineParallel (MMLH) a sliding parallel (SH) is used for order entry

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 231537

gtThe Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry andgtexit tools Though most often drawn using alternate closing pricesgtalternate highs and lows can also be usedgtin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days isgtusually the maximum between pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or moregtback from P2

Hello Gordon

wouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timingCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available whenDr Andrews was alive

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject intraday chartsDate Samstag 18 Maumlrz 2000 012400

At 31600 111500 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongtgtwouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsgtinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timinggtCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available when DrgtAndrews was alivegtgtRegardsgtTradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Youre absolutely correctintraday charts were not available when DrAndrews was a trader

Im reading between the lines here but if you plan to day-trade using the course techniques ie thepitchfork then I agree that the regular pitchfork would be more useful on intraday charts Otherwisewhipsaw would be a significant problem Please get back to me if I didnt address your questionbecause this is a very important technique The mini-median line pitchfork and sliding parallel showedup on most of Dr Andrews charts

Regards

Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re intraday chartsDate Dienstag 21 Maumlrz 2000 220322

Hello Gordon

You are right Im planning to daytrade SampP futures using the course techniques among other things

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 003408

Hi TradersZone Here are a couple Andrews techniques that will help anticipate the breakout direction of asideways channelThey work often enough to warrant keep handy Regards Gordon In an earlier lesson you were introduced to Dr Andrews sideways count You saw how frequentlythe sideways count method provided high probability price objectives after the breakout from theestablished channel took place In this segment of lesson 4 youll be shown 2 congestion area techniques that can help youdetermine the probable sideways channel price breakout direction Both rely on the use of pivots The first uses the pivot points that are circled on a sideways channel Dr Andrews observed thatwhenever a sideways channel results in at least 5 circle contacts the eventual price breakoutwould very often be in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle If circle 5 is at thetop of the channel for example the eventual price breakout would likely be to the upside If circle5 is at the bottom of the channel look for a downside breakout Dr Andrews noted that thistechnique can be subject to false breakouts but that such breakouts are usually followed shortlyafter with a confirmed breakout in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle Heemphasized that this study is best considered as a rule of thumb observation He viewed it as asupporting indicator for use with a short-term pitchfork as prices approached a channel line There are 2 charts attached that show how this works

The second technique in this part of lesson 4 deals with a sideways channelthat is building shortly after a P3 has been formed Dr Andrews noted thatwhenever that happened the probabilities were high that prices wouldbreakout in the same direction they were moving prior to the formation ofthe sideways channel The attached P3 to sideways example chart shows thisprocedure

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 205235

Hello Gordon here is my example for the 5 circle sideways count RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Lesson 5Date Montag 27 Maumlrz 2000 060731

At 32400 85200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my example for the 5 circle sideways countgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt gt Hi TradersZone Good example of the 5th circle tendency to predict the direction of a sideways breakout Any luckfinding a chart showing the P3 to sideways rule Im sending the first part of the next lesson This trendline method is a useful tool with all of DrAndrews course lines He used it all the time but especially when looking for confirmation of othercourse method trading signals Regards Gordon The Course Trendline__________________________________________________________ Next well discuss the trendline Seasoned traders agree that the trendline is one of their mostimportant tools No matter what kind of trading program or technique they use the trendline on achart is a must But one of the biggest mistakes made by amateurs and professionals alike isinconsistently drawing or defining the trendline Dr Andrews trendline procedure is simpleconsistent and accurate It works extremely well with the pivot count and with the pitchfork For an uptrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the lowest low up and to thehighest minor low point preceding the highest high The line must not pass through prices inbetween the two low points Extend the line(Attached chart of Brightpoint) For a downtrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the highest high point to thelowest minor high point preceding the lowest low so that it does not pass through prices inbetween the two high points Extend the line (Brightpoint chart) Thats all theres to it Its simple consistent and it works well with other Andrews lines It also

helps eliminate personal bias and haphazard analysis Practice drawing these trendlines on your own charts Send me any questions you might have andthen e-mail a chart of your choosing which shows at least two uptrend and two downtrend linesthat youve drawn_______________________________________________________________________

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Lesson 5Date Dienstag 28 Maumlrz 2000 120224

Hello Gordon here is my chart with trendlinesWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going above the trendline again should I draw a new trendline anddelete the old one Attached is another chart with the P3 to sideways rule I finally found an example for it RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Price failure techniqueDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081412

At 32800 120200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my chart with trendlinesgtWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going abovegtthe trendline again should I draw a new trendline and delete the oldgtone Hi TradersZone Take a look at the chart Im returningI added some lines for you to considerWith the course trendline once its broken a new one should be started Theres a technique thatties in with this coming up soon Meanwhile heres an important technique to work on It deals with those times when prices dontreach the ML Regards Gordon Dr Andrews Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P ofreversaland the ML the probability is that this price reversal will go further thanitdid on its approach toward the ML (Extract of original course material) A price failure very often indicates a sizeable reversal will take placeThepitchforks drawn on the chart of Home Depot illustrate the concept of pricefailure Dr Andrews routinely drew a new pitchfork on his chart after a newsignificant pivot had formed He knew that prices had a high probability ofreaching the new ML before stalling out or reversing If prices reversedbeforereaching the ML thereby forming a new pivot he termed it a price failureTheunderlying idea here is that Dr Andrews fully anticipated his median linewouldact as a price magnet To conclude that a price reversal resulted in a price failure Dr Andrewsused

these primary signalsa subsequent price penetration of a short-termmulti-pivotline andor a return of prices to and penetration of the parallel lineformed atpivot 3 of the pitchfork (The circles on the Home Depot chart denote theparallelline penetration signal To avoid clutter the mpl lines were not drawn) One possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart of ConsecoIncLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me a copy

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject ChartDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081800Attachments image002png

Hi TradersZone Forgot the chart Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Price failure techniqueDate Samstag 1 April 2000 201000

gtOne possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart ofgtConseco IncgtLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me agtcopy Hi Gordon here are my charts with price failures RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Mittwoch 5 April 2000 235624

Hi TradersZone Good price failure examples you sentany comments or questions about it Heres the next partanother old standby Dr Andrews kept handy Regards Gordon In this segment youll learn how to use the Fan line Technique To draw the fan lines youll apply the coursetrendline method which was introduced in an earlier lesson It might be well to emphasize that the practicalapplication of the course trendline method requires practice and experience both of which will serve youwell in this technique Dr Andrews used fan lines as an adjunct to his pitchfork sideways channel andactionreaction methods In the fan line study three trendlines are drawn from the original reversal pivot of the price correction understudy typically a P0 or a P5 Youll notice on the charts included with this study that each fan line is at aflatter angle than its predecessor When the third fan line is broken the rule is that the correction has endedand a new trend is under way Try this technique on some of your own charts and then please send me asample

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Donnerstag 6 April 2000 234315

Hi Gordon No I dont have any specific question about the price failure technique I guess the next likely target after a price failure wouldbe the warning line I have attached two charts with fan linesIs it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the third fan line is broken RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Next segmentDate Freitag 7 April 2000 003312

Hello TradersZone

Tuesday April 06 2000 114315 AM you wrote

TZgt Hi Gordon

TZgt No I dont have any specific question about the price failureTZgt technique I guess the next likely target after a price failureTZgt would be the warning line

TZgt I have attached two charts with fan linesTZgt Is it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the thirdTZgt fan line is broken

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Thats right the warning line is the next price target Additionalwarning lines can be drawn if needed but usually one will do it Ifprices go through the first warning line another can be drawn butmost likely a new pitchfork could be drawn instead which would bepreferable Helps stay current with recently formed pivots

When prices break through the third fan line a buy or sell signal isgiven Not sure what you mean by fourth target fan line Im a littledense today

Your chart work was goodthis is another handy tool for spotting thehigh probability of a price reversal or trend change

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject The Gap TradeDate Freitag 7 April 2000 004858

Hello TradersZone This trading signal doesnt show up very often but past observations have shown that its well worth watching for Dr Andrews placed a lot of emphasis on the importance of price gaps something many traders overlook This is one of his gap uses Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom The Gap Trading Technique Price gaps can be a dilemma for many traders The general rule denoting market strength or weakness after ahigh volume gap often comes up short after the initial reaction is over Many gappers simply run out ofsteam A high volume gap in itself seems to offer precious little evidence that a profitable move is about toget under way Dr Andrews used price gaps somewhat differently than others He counted a gap as 2 pivots Youll see howthat works in the following technique which uses a gap to arrive at a price level for a buy or sell order Using short-term daily price pivots label the pivot immediately preceding the gap as p0 Count the gap as 2pivots labeling it p1 amp p2 After p3 has formed and prices reverse towards a short-term p4 draw a horizontalline 2 price tics or more (individual preference)to the right of p3 Enter the market only if prices reach orpenetrate that line within a few days after reversing from p4 Please look over your own charts to see if you can find places where the gap trade technique could have beenused Send me a sample when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 001925

Hello Gordon this is my chart with a gap trade RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 065538

Hello TradersZone Thursday April 08 2000 121925 PM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt this is my chart with a gap trade TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Good examplethe gap trade technique shines when an issue in at or near a P5 Similar to the one on thechart you sent Heres another trading signal tool Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Dr Andrews used several techniques which helped him determine whether a P5 was near at hand Youllrecall that he observed most price moves ended or had a significant reversal at a P5 This technique uses alternate closing prices after a P4 has been formed As with many of his studies thenumber 5 is used The chart accompanying this segment shows that there were 5 alternate closes to thedownside after P4 was put in Dr Andrews noted that whenever 5 or more alternate closes followed a P4 theprobabilities were high that a P5 was near at hand An added feature to this chart study is the sideways channel Notice how the 2nd target price and the 5thalternate close nearly coincide

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 12 April 2000 200730

Hello Gordon This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 13 April 2000 082418

Monday April 12 2000 80730 AM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hello TradersZone Good chart example of this Andrews toolanother of his very unusual observations that workmore often than not Heres the final part of this lesson Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom In this trendline method Dr Andrews once again used the number 5 as the basis for locating aprobable reversal area He found this technique to be especially useful whenever a clear orobvious pivot count didnt show up onthe price move under study Trendlines are drawn using the course trendline method When the 5th trendline is broken theprobability is high that the trend under study has ended A mini-median line pitchfork andorsliding parallel could be used for pricing a trading order The accompanying chart of Compaq Computer is an example of how the trendline study could beused The pivot count beginning at the October low is difficult to nail down There were severalsmall areas of congestion but no sizeable corrections while prices advanced The count wasunclear By following the price action using the course trendline technique however the traderwould have been alerted to the possibility of a change of trend when the 5th trendline was brokenin early February Try this technique on your own charts When youre ready please send me an example of yourstudy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 19 April 2000 124108

Hello Gordon this is my example with 5 trendlines RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[6] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 20 April 2000 012726

Monday April 19 2000 124108 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt this is my example with 5 trendlines

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Good example of the 5 TL technique Always reminds me of how the fairly simple tools often do a better job than manyof the sophisticated studies out there

That was the last part of lesson 5 Lesson 6 attached is made in one mailing Youll find Dr Andrews trading rules alongwith a wrap-up review which uses several of his rules You might have questions about some of the rules so feel free tosend them as they arise

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Dr Andrews had an abbreviated set of trading rules on several index cards that he carried around with him in his shirtpocket He said every trading day turned up something new on his charts and by having his rules in his pocket he wasreminded of the need for a methodical approach to his analysis Quite a comment coming from the man who wrote therule book

In this the final lesson of the course Dr Andrews original trading rules and observations are presented Lets work witha few of them at this point

Using charts of issues you follow please send me an example that illustrates your interpretation of each of the followingrules

Rule 4 Anticipating major Ps

Rule 7 Penetration rule

Rule 8 Price failure rule

Rule 11 1-ML23 AR Centerline

Rule 12 Sliding Parallel rule

Rule 15 Mini-median line parallel to buy or sell

Feel free to include any other course techniques you choose to apply but please include examples of the above as aminimum Use more than one technique on a chart if your analysis supports it Send as many charts as you like alongwith your questionscomments

Lesson 6 - Dr Andrews Trading Rules

This lesson covers course rules and significant observations as taught by Dr Andrews in his original trading course Therules are those that he used in his own trading and are provided to serve as a checklist for use with the course tradingmethods youve learned

Rule 1 Where prices are always headed Rule You course members are among the fortunate few to be able to draw astraight line and know that prices are headed toward that ML Very few investors have ever applied this ML principle ofstatistics to price fluctuations and weve never seen this in any books on investment You are among the very few who

know that prices are always headed toward the newest ML

Rule 2 The Rule of coming opposites applies all through life In the bible we find Blessed at they that mourn for theyshall be comforted As investors we know that any losses can be recovered by using course methods

Rule 3 Turn your mind about or Rethink for all good is at hand We should mentally prepare ourselves for thecoming reversal in prices and other affairs Heres one way for example that you course members who know the MLrules can use When prices are skyrocketing upward we do this preparation by thinking If prices pivoted here today atthis price Id draw a new ML bisecting the distance between todays price and the price from which the rise started Andwe know now that if this is a Major Pivot prices will fall rapidly to this new ML Profits from such drops are big and quick

Rule 4 Rule for anticipating major Ps If during congestion or after a rally or decline you can count four previous Psthe fifth one is highly probable to be the one from which a new trend starts

Rule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can make a quick big profit is to watch for the EPformations

Rule 6 The other reversal rule is that prices tend to reverse at or near any ML as well as at any extension of each MLAnd also at any MLH or extensions of MLH

Rule 7 The Penetration Rule is that whenever prices gap past or plunge through any ML there is a high probability thatthey will quickly return to it temporarily and then resume the trend they had before they gapped or plunged through

Rule 8 Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P of reversal and the MLthe probability is that this price reversal will go further than it did on its approach toward the ML

Rule 9 The price failure rule is negated when the next price trend is also a failure in reaching the ML This is almostinvariably a signal of a big fast move in the direction indicated by this last space Rule 10 When alternate median lines of comparable length slope in the same direction the trend is firm and rapidprice changes take place

Rule 11 When 1-ML23 is exactly reached at P4 it can be used as a highly reliable centerline for the AR method

Rule 12 Frequently after crossing a lower MLH prices continue to rise along the MLH Since the crossing of the MLHsignals a further drop is likely use a sliding parallel along the bottom of the most recent crossing If prices drop past thatsliding parallel line a sell signal is generated

Rule 13 MLs between P2 and P3 can start from a nearby or a remote P1 since prices tend to reverse at each of theseMLs Try several such P2-P3 MLs to discover the best fit

Rule 14 The distance of each MLH from its ML is the distance of the next warning line Use these warning lineswhenever a SH has signalled a buy or sell

Rule 15 Use the MMLH as a buy or sell signal when you expect a reversal because of a P5 Also when prices are at aWL ML extension line or where course lines converge or intersect

Rule 16 Converging lines that meet prices have shown the highest probability of a trend reversal

Rule 17 Two to four days is usually the maximum between P2 and P3 for a MML P1 can be a day or so back from P2and 3

Rule 18 The most reliable ActionReaction centerlines seem to be MPL 2P line 2 Gap line peak to low or low to peak

Rule 19 When prices pass through R lines look for a pull back and then a continuing move in the direction of the passthrough

Rule 20 Use gaps as Action lines from the centerline

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 003755

Hello Gordonhere is my example for Rule 4 And I have a question What are EP formations gtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 021242

Tuesday May 04 2000 123755 PM you wrote TZgt Hello GordonTZgt here is my example for Rule 4 TZgt And I have a question What are EP formations gtgtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegtgta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hi TradersZone Good use of the warning linesalso the EP material is part of lesson 4 Rather than go backthrough the files to see when (or if) it was sent Im sending it along with this reply Glad youbrought it up Best RegardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Tuesday May 04 2000208 PM Dr Andrews used a fairly common price chart formation that he found useful at probable P5market tops and bottoms The formation generally called a wedge or pennant by chartists isreferred to in Dr Andrews trading course as the Expanding Pivot (EP) One of the few chartformations used in the course he regarded it as among the most dependable indications that amarket top was forming Closely related to the EP is his Inverted Expanding Pivot (IEP) which henoted could often be observed at market bottoms Both are regarded as intermediate and long-term reversal indicators Dr Andrews found that both formations were most reliable when they occurred after a sharprapid price move coinciding with the formation of a probable P5 He said it wasnt unusual for theformation to take several weeks to complete and that conservative traders could best avoid thewhipsaw associated with congestion patterns by trading only in the direction of the probable price

break out of the EP or IEP formation The attached charts illustrate these formations Please look over your own charts for an example ofthe EP and IEP and send me a copy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 232127

Hello Gordon Thank you for the lesson with the EP material I couldnt find it in any previous emailHere is my example for Rule 7 RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Rule 4Date Samstag 6 Mai 2000 080827

Wednesday May 05 2000 112127 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt Thank you for the lesson with the EP materialTZgt I couldnt find it in any previous emailTZgt Here is my example for Rule 7

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hi TradersZone

Glad you mentioned it earlierexcept for the EP IEP and hissideways channel Dr Andrews didnt have much to say about chartpatterns and formations These are good ones to use though

Your study of the penetration rule was good Later

Best Regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Wednesday May 05 2000801 PM

Page 18: Pitchfork primer

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Thanks for the questionDate Donnerstag 10 Februar 2000 233059

Hello Gordonthank you Im ready for the next lesson

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next partDate Donnerstag 10 Februar 2000 235613

At 21000 113000 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongtthank you Im ready for the next lessongt gt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt gt gt TradersZoneI sent this yesterday but will re-send It was part of my reply to your questionregarding the circle I dont have a record of your return chartwork for this part If its a duplicatesend sorry Regards Gordon Well continue to use the Brightpoint chart for this portion of the sideways count study To reviewthe pattern were looking for should be a recent rectangular shaped sideways trading range thatcontains most if not all of the congestion price action Take a look at the attached chart and notehow well defined the price channel for Brightpoint is Youll probably notice that it is deeper thanthe channel you studied on the chart in the preceding segment This comparison is made toillustrate that while the first channel example covers a longer period of time the second includesall of the price ranges and is the preferred method Please look at where the circles were placed on the channel lines To review a new circle is drawnonly after prices have first been at the opposite channel line Recall that circles must be inalternate sequence eg upper linelower lineupper linelower line etc one circle at a time Note that the price range within the channel is $4 34 (High 21 12 Low 16 34) There were twocircles drawn on the lower line of our sideways channel before prices broke down Using thatinformation our next step will be to use some simple arithmetic in order to come up with twodownside price targets Well cover that procedure in the next segment Please let me know whenyou are ready to continue

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next partDate Freitag 11 Februar 2000 234113

I think the placement of the circles is clear to me nowI have attached another chart with a sideways count RegardsTradersZone gtTradersZoneI sent this yesterday but will re-send It was part ofgtmy reply to your question regarding the circle I dont have a recordgtof your return chartwork for this part If its a duplicate send sorry

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject SidewaysDate Montag 14 Februar 2000 054227

At 21100 114100 PM you wrotegtI think the placement of the circles is clear to me nowgtI have attached another chart with a sideways countgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone Your chart was on target Looks like youre ready for the next part Here it is Regards Gordon During this segment youll learn how to arrive at two price targets using Dr Andrews sidewayscount Simple arithmetic is all thats required once the sideways channel and circles are in place Well continue to use the Brightpoint chart which is attached Note that Brightpoint fell throughthe bottom channel line at the point where we placed our second circle so figuring out possibledownside targets would have been in order at that time Heres how thats done 1 Determine the price range of the channel In this case the range is $4 34 (21 12 - 16 34) 2 Count the number of circles on the lower channel line The lower line is used in this casebecause thats the line that didnt hold Prices went through it returned to check it out and thencontinued lower 3 Multiply the price range of the channel times the number of circles drawn on the lower channelline (4 34 x 2 = 9 12) 4 Subtract that figure from the upper channel line priceThe result becomes downside price target 1 (21 12 - 9 12 = 12) 5 Next subtract that same figure from the price at the lower channel line Thats price target 2(16 34 - 9 12 = 7 14)

In the case of an upside channel breakout the procedure is reversed Please draw a few channelsand figure out some downside targets on your own charts When youre ready send me two orthree examples of your work As always send your questions as they arise

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re SidewaysDate Montag 14 Februar 2000 134314

Here are my examples I couldnt find enough charts with downside targets so I included some charts with upside targets Do the channel lines always have to be horizontal When I look at my charts I find more channels with an upward slope or adownward slope RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Sideways channelsDate Freitag 18 Februar 2000 005531

At 21400 14300 PM you wrotegtHere are my examples I couldnt find enough charts with downsidegttargets so I included some charts with upside targetsgt gtDo the channel lines always have to be horizontal When I look at mygtcharts I find more channels with an upward slope or a downward slopegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone The sideways method can be used with either up or down Sorry didnt mean to imply that only downsidetargets should be found Ill reword that portion of the lesson Thanks for mentioning it Dr Andrews sideways method works only on horizontal channels Others have mentioned the slopingchannels also and have wondered if there is some method to use with them I know of none Ive askedother course members for their ideas on how to approach this problem but so far no one has come up with amethod I would think that there should be a solution but have not personally taken the time to research itIf some method could be found that works as often as the Andrews sideways count it would be a significantfind The Andrews sideways count doesnt always hit the targets as you saw on your chart of Bausch amp Lomb Itworks more often than not though and it still amazes me at how often prices reach the targets Heres an observation to keep in mind Quite often after the first target is reached prices will reverse andhead back towards the channel At times youll note that they return inside the channel They will thenreverse again and head back towards the second price target These reversals happen frequently and presenttrading opportunities Im including the final segment of this lesson Regards Gordon So far in the course youve learned about Dr Andrews pivot counting procedure pitchfork and sidewayscount Youve noticed by now how often prices change trend at a P5 Youve seen how the 0-34 ML methodcan help locate the probable P5 area Youve seen how often price targets are met using the sideways countmethod The tendency for prices to reverse at a median line should be recognized as a high probability eventas well In coming lessons youll be shown how Dr Andrews used these and other high probability events totrade the stock and commodity markets The tools and techniques he used will help you put the finishingtouches on your market analysis using Andrews lines

Before continuing on to the next lesson lets briefly review what has so far been covered The attached chartprovides an opportunity to illustrate the methods referred to above Please draw these methods on thechart and return to me

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Sideways channelsDate Montag 21 Februar 2000 193743

gtBefore continuing on to the next lesson lets briefly review what hasgtso far been covered The attached chart provides an opportunity togtillustrate the methods referred to above Please draw these methods ongtthe chart and return to me Hello Gordonhere is my chart RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next lesson attachedDate Mittwoch 23 Februar 2000 014539

At 22100 73700 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongthere is my chartgt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Good job on the pivots sideways count and pitchforkLooks like youre ready to move on to the next part It wont be long and things will begin to fall inplace Regards Gordon Lesson 4 continued In one of his course letters Dr Andrews wrote The Law of Physics stated by Newton that Actionand Reaction are equal and opposite was first applied to prices by your Course Directors friendthe late Roger Babson who attributed his earnings of several million dollars to this law Beginning with this segment of lesson four and continuing in lesson five youll learn how to drawand apply the ActionReaction trading method as taught by Dr Andrews in his trading course The AR method requires a centerline or CL from which to start The CL can be any of thefollowing - MPL - ML - MLH - 2P line - 2 Gap line - Peak to low line - Low to peak lineThese are the primary lines that Dr Andrews used He stressed that some pencil work and a goodeyeball was needed in order to find the best fitting CL As with most other chart lines somework better than others The task is to find the best fit as he put it You will be shown examples of

each of the above CLs in this lesson and the next Determining which of the above listed lines to use as the CL is the first step in the ActionReactionmethod The solution often presents itself With a little practice a quick scan of the chart understudy will be all thats needed to spot the most likely CL Well begin with the attached chart Notethe CL drawn In this example a MPL (multi-pivot line) was used as the CL A MPL is a straightline that connects three or more consecutive pivots without passing through prices Theconnecting line is then extended Ive circled the three pivots that form the MPL on the chartThere are several other places on our chart where a MPL CL can be drawn Please bear in mindthat this is just the first step of the process Identification of likely CLs is all were after here Seeif you can locate two more then draw them in and send the chart back to me Well take up fromthere

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next lesson attachedDate Mittwoch 23 Februar 2000 212304

gtLesson 4 continuedgt gtIn one of his course letters Dr Andrews wrote The Law of Physicsgtstated by Newton that Action and Reaction are equal and opposite wasgtfirst applied to prices by your Course Directors friend the lategtRoger Babson who attributed his earnings of several million dollars to this lawgt gtBeginning with this segment of lesson four and continuing in lessongtfive youll learn how to draw and apply the ActionReaction tradinggtmethod as taught by Dr Andrews in his trading coursegt gtThe AR method requires a centerline or CL from which to startgtThe CL can be any of the followinggt - MPLgt - MLgt - MLHgt - 2P linegt - 2 Gap linegt - Peak to low linegt - Low to peak line Hello Gordon2P line 2 Gap line Peak to low line Low to peak line ndash actually I dont know what these lines areAre they discussed in Lesson 3 I believe you havenrsquot sent me this lesson yetAnyway I found two more MPLs on the Novellus Chart and drew them in RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Lesson 3Date Mittwoch 23 Februar 2000 235958

At 22300 92300 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt2P line 2 Gap line Peak to low line Low to peak line - actually I dont knowgtwhat these lines are Are they discussed in Lesson 3 I believe you didntgtsent me this lesson yetgtAnyway I found two more MPLs on the Novellus Chart and drew them ingt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone My apologiesI sent you an outdated version of the lesson Thanks for letting me know Musthave been my bedtime Heres the correct version Regards Gordon Lesson 3 In one of his course letters Dr Andrews wrote The Law of Physics stated by Newton that Actionand Reaction are equal and opposite was first applied to prices by your Course Directors friendthe late Roger Babson who attributed his earnings of several million dollars to this law In this lesson youll be introduced to the ActionReaction trading method as taught by Dr Andrewsin his trading course The AR method requires a centerline or CL from which to start The CL can be any of thefollowing - MPL Multi-pivot line A line drawn across 3 or more pivots - ML Median line The middle line of the pitchfork - MLH Median line parallel Either parallel line of the pitchfork - 2P line A line drawn across 2 pivots - 2 Gap line A line drawn connecting 2 gaps without touching prices in between - Peak to low line A line drawn connecting the high and low of a price leg

- Low to peak line A line drawn connecting the low and high of a price leg These are the primary lines that Dr Andrews used He stressed that some pencil work and a goodeyeball was needed in order to find the best fitting CL As with most other chart lines somework better than others The task is to find the best fit as he put it You will be shown examples ofeach of the above CLs Determining which of the above listed lines to use as the CL is the first step in the ActionReactionmethod With practice a quick view of the chart under study will be all thats needed to spot themost likely CL Youll be shown later how to experiment with possible combinations in order tofind the centerline that is most in tune with the market under study Well begin with the attached chart Note the CL drawn In this example a MPL (multi-pivot line)was used as the CL A MPL is a straight line that connects three or more consecutive pivotswithout passing through prices The connecting line is then extended Ive circled the three pivotsthat form the MPL on the chart There are several other places on our chart where a MPL CL canbe drawn Please bear in mind that this is just the first step of the process Identification of likelyCLs is all were after here See if you can locate two more then draw them in and send the chartback to me

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Donnerstag 24 Februar 2000 025105

At 22300 92300 PM you wroteI found two more MPLs on the Novellus Chart and drew them ingt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your mpls were correct This next segment shows the purpose of the centerline and how it isused Your payment in full arrived today TradersZone Thank you Regards Gordon Lesson 3 continued Please refer to the attached chart of Novellus The line drawn connecting the 3 circled pivots is amulti-pivot line (MPL) and represents the centerline (CL) well be using in this example Recall inthe previous segment that several types of centerlines are possible The choice is determined byexperimenting with the potential combinations on the chart under study Its best to try to locate acenterline somewhere close to the middle of the price chart in order to have sufficient past andforward data to use with the study This will become clear as you work with the method Once the centerline is drawn the next step is to locate a previous low or high pivot point to use fordrawing an action line Dr Andrews observed that the low pivot points often seem to work bestbut that either could be used In our example a line starting at the previous significant low wasdrawn parallel to the CL It is labeled A-1 (Action line 1) because it represents the first actionline Dr Andrews called it an action line because it was drawn as a result of a previous pivot (pricereversal) that had taken place Next a parallel line was drawn to the right of the CL and labeled R-1 Notice that it is the same distance from the CL as the corresponding A-1 line It is labeled R-1because it represents the first reaction line a line where prices are likely to stop or reverseNotice how prices reacted at the R-1 line in early 98 That serves as an indication that thecenterline chosen for this study should be a good one to use Not all reaction lines cause such aclear reversal as the R1 on this chart but many do Thats why its important to experiment withvarious centerline possibilities in order to find action lines that produce reaction lines which createthe greatest number of pivots or price stall-outs This experimentation is often quite time

consuming but experience has shown that it is time well spent When a centerline is found that isin tune with the price action of the issue under study it can be a highly effective tool for use inlocating probable reversal areas When combined with pitchfork lines the AR method can pinpointpotential reversal areas that are generally not recognized as such by others Dr Andrewstechniques for using the pitchfork and AR lines together are covered in later lessons In coming segments well study other lines that Dr Andrews used for his centerlines In themeantime experiment with the multi-pivot centerline on your own charts Then please send mean example of your work along with any questions you may have

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Freitag 25 Februar 2000 211356

gtIn the meantime experiment with the multi-pivot centerline on your owngtcharts Then please send me an example of your work along with anygtquestions you may have Hello Gordon I was wondering how many ActionReaction lines could be drawn on a chart On my attached chart I found at least 6 parallellines which had a significant meaning for the price RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject AR linesDate Montag 28 Februar 2000 080128

gtHello Gordongt gtI was wondering how many ActionReaction lines could be drawn on agtchart On my attached chart I found at least 6 parallel lines which hadgta significant meaning for the pricegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hi TradersZone Theres no set number of lines that can be drawnactually the more you can find the betterFinding a good centerline is the key And once you find lines that work such as you did anynumber of parallel lines can be drawn You are doing exactly what Dr Andrews didtaking thetime and effort to find the best fitting sets of lines Each chart has them and each chart is differentas Im sure youve found Nice work Heres the next part Regards Gordon Lesson 3 continued One of Dr Andrews favorite techniques dealt with gapsan often times perplexing price event formany traders His observations over the years suggested to him that while gaps show upfrequently on many price charts few traders have a method for including them as an integral partof their chart analysis Thats not surprising since not much has been published about how toapproach the use of gaps in a trading method Dr Andrews however found several ways to putprice gaps to good use An ActionReaction centerline which uses gaps as its basis is one suchmethod Please refer to the attached chart of Cendant Youll see that a centerline was drawn which passedthrough the July gap Note that it also came in contact with several pivots thereby qualifying as agapmulti-pivot centerline It is drawn by starting at the April low pivot and extending a line acrossand through the gap in mid-July It subsequently touches two additional high pivots Dr Andrews counted each gap as two pivots He noted that the more pivots a line touched the

stronger the line tended to be in the future Good reason then for using the July gap as the basisfor an ActionReaction study Our CL is labelled a gap-mpl-CL The May 98 high was used for the Action Line starting point A line was then drawn parallel to theCenterline as per ActionReaction procedure The corresponding Reaction Line was then drawn inIf this particular study had been drawn on Cendants chart right after the July gap was put in thepotential for prices to go all the way down to the Reaction Line might have seemed very slim at thetime Notice however that prices reached the Reaction Line in early September Youll see thishappen time and again as you work with the AR method The core of its effectiveness is a strongCL Please send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts of your choice

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re AR linesDate Montag 28 Februar 2000 155937

gtPlease send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts of yourgtchoice Hello Gordonhere are my examples RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject More on the ARDate Donnerstag 2 Maumlrz 2000 071158

At 22800 35900 PM you wrotegtgtPlease send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts ofgtgtyour choicegt gtHello Gordongthere are my examplesgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone You picked some good examples to use for your AR study Both showed the potential power of thismethod Takes time and lots of chart study sometimes to find the best set of lines but the rewardscan be many Heres something else to look at Regards Gordon The ActionReaction technique requires a strong centerline from which to begin The key todeciding which set of pivots to use for the centerline is found through experimenting with thevarious configurations visible on the chart under study The centerline might be a series of gapspivots an existing median line or any of Dr Andrews lines The task is to search for that centerlinewhich shows the greatest potential for projecting price reversal areas Dr Andrews did that byfinding a likely centerline near the middle of his price chart That allowed him to use any of theprevious pivots for his action lines By experimenting he found reaction lines that did the best jobof pegging reversal areas at data points located forward of the centerline Reaction lines are equal and opposite of the action lines and serve to project price levels at whicha reversal can be expected That is why the task of seeking out the best centerline is so importantDr Andrews reasoned that a series of reaction lines which have pegged price reversals in the pastis likely to continue to be in tune with current and future market price action Having severalprevious pivots to use as anchors for drawing action lines is thus essential The attached chart of Lattice illustrates this concept Please bear in mind that the gapmplcenterline is not the only centerline one could use on this chart You might want to study the chartfor other AR possibilities Try a peak-to-peak CL or a multi-pivot CL Send me your studies along

with any questions

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re More on the ARDate Samstag 4 Maumlrz 2000 002521

gtThe attached chart of Lattice illustrates this conceptgtPlease bear in mind that the gapmpl centerline is not the onlygtcenterline one could use on this chartgtYou might want to study the chart for other AR possibilitiesgtTry a peak-to-peak CL or a multi-pivot CL Send me your studiesgtalong with any questions Hello Gordonhere is my chart RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Peak to peak clDate Sonntag 5 Maumlrz 2000 064107

At 3400 122500 AM you wrotegtHello Gordongthere is my chartgt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Looks like you have the concept down Takes time and a lot of chart work to find the bestcenterline When the reaction lines dont seem to peg reversal areas chances are the centerline isnot the one that is best in tune with the price action of the issue under studyDespite the time required for this method it was one of Dr Andrews stand-bysAR lines could befound on most of his charts Im sending a chart with an example of a peak-to-peak CL Regards Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Peak to peak clDate Sonntag 5 Maumlrz 2000 171232

Hello Gordon I think the peak-to-peak CL on the last chart I sent to you was not really drawn from peak to peakIm sending another example RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next LessonDate Mittwoch 8 Maumlrz 2000 072526

At 3500 51200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtI think the peak-to-peak CL on the last chart I sent to you was notgtreally drawn from peak to peakgtIm sending another examplegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your peak to peak cl example was correctly drawn Thats a fairly simple approach but quite oftenthe peak to peak yields better reaction lines Heres the first part of the next lesson Regards Gordon Youll find times when prices dont quite reach the ML but instead drift alongside or away from itThe Schiff ML was designed to be used in place of the regular ML whenever that happens Suchprice action can be found at any place on a chart but most frequently occurs after a sharp sell-offor run-up of prices Dr Andrews also used the Schiff ML whenever his regular ML sloped at an unusually steep angleHe said it helped smooth out irregular price action such as that caused by unexpected earningsnews crop planting delays or poor growing conditions crop production reports etc Youll findnearly vertical price moves over a short period of time on many charts The Schiff ML method helpsput things back in perspective when that happens Well use the chart of Sterling Bancorp as an example of prices drifting away from the regular MLThat ML is drawn in black Prices didnt quite reach the ML but drifted alongside and eventuallyaway from it The Schiff ML and parallel lines are drawn in red Notice how prices were containedwithin the Schiff pitchfork until they finally broke down at the upper parallel line The procedure for drawing the Schiff ML is the same as for the regular ML except the startingpoint is located midway between the first 2 pivots youll be using The Sterling Bancorp chart

illustrates how this is done Dr Andrews also suggested using the Schiff ML whenever the regular ML method doesnt seem tobe in sync with price action Practice this procedure on your own charts and send a couple examples when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next LessonDate Donnerstag 9 Maumlrz 2000 001143

Hello Gordon in my charting software (Dynamic Trader) the Schiff ML is drawn by finding the midpoint of the line between pivot A and pivot Bmoving this point horizontally to directly above or below (depending on whether A is a low or high pivot) the A pivot anddrawing a line from his point through the midpoint of the BC swingAre there different methods of drawing a Schiff MLI was too lazy to draw Schiff MLs by hand with the method you described so Im sending my examples with the Dynamic TraderSchiff MLs -) RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject SchiffDate Samstag 11 Maumlrz 2000 070226

At 3900 121100 AM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtin my charting software (Dynamic Trader) the Schiff ML is drawn bygtfinding the midpoint of the line between pivot A and pivot B movinggtthis point horizontally to directly above or below (depending ongtwhether A is a low or high pivot) the A pivot and drawing a linegtgtfrom his point through the midpoint of the BC swinggtAre there different methods of drawing a Schiff MLgtI was too lazy to draw Schiff MLs by hand with the method yougtdescribed so Im sending my examples with the Dynamic Trader Schiff MLs -)gt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your program Schiff line procedure is fineits actually what Dr Andrews called a modified schiff ml and is onlyslightly different than the one I sent you initially The one you used is preferred by most course members Im sendingthe modified Schiff lesson and a chart along with this email The chart example shows how to use it with 0-34 pivots Regards Gordon

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Sliding Parallel LineDate Montag 13 Maumlrz 2000 005252

Hello TradersZone Heres one of the tools Dr Andrews used most often when entering exiting or reversing marketpositions Not many people know about this technique Regards Gordon The Sliding Parallel (SH) is drawn whenever prices cross an Andrews line and then move along itFor example if the bottom of a daily price bar range drops through a lower parallel line of apitchfork a new parallel line is then drawn from that low and extended to the right If the nextdays price bar drops through that sliding parallel line a sell signal is generated Whenever price action dictates a sliding parallel the next step is to draw a Warning Line Thewarning line is an additional parallel line that is an image extension of the original pitchforkchannels It serves as a warning that if prices penetrate the sliding parallel the next likely target isthe WL The attached chart of Avis illustrates these procedures Please try these on your own charts andsend me an example

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Sliding Parallel LineDate Dienstag 14 Maumlrz 2000 225737

Hello Gordon this is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning line RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 065606

At 31400 105700 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtthis is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning linegt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone Your chart of circuit city was a good example for this study I may have mentioned it earlier but DrAndrews used this technique on a regular basis The next part of this lesson covers another of hisfavorite tools the mini-median line pitchfork Here it is Regards Gordon The Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry and exit tools Though mostoften drawn using alternate closing prices alternate highs and lows can also be usedin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days is usually the maximumbetween pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or more back from P2 Dr Andrews used Mini-Median Line pitchforks for buy and sell signals whenever he expected areversal Some examples include a probable P5 or when prices are at a Warning Line ML MLHmajor ML extension or a sideways channel price target When prices cross the Mini-Median LineParallel (MMLH) a sliding parallel (SH) is used for order entry

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 231537

gtThe Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry andgtexit tools Though most often drawn using alternate closing pricesgtalternate highs and lows can also be usedgtin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days isgtusually the maximum between pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or moregtback from P2

Hello Gordon

wouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timingCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available whenDr Andrews was alive

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject intraday chartsDate Samstag 18 Maumlrz 2000 012400

At 31600 111500 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongtgtwouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsgtinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timinggtCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available when DrgtAndrews was alivegtgtRegardsgtTradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Youre absolutely correctintraday charts were not available when DrAndrews was a trader

Im reading between the lines here but if you plan to day-trade using the course techniques ie thepitchfork then I agree that the regular pitchfork would be more useful on intraday charts Otherwisewhipsaw would be a significant problem Please get back to me if I didnt address your questionbecause this is a very important technique The mini-median line pitchfork and sliding parallel showedup on most of Dr Andrews charts

Regards

Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re intraday chartsDate Dienstag 21 Maumlrz 2000 220322

Hello Gordon

You are right Im planning to daytrade SampP futures using the course techniques among other things

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 003408

Hi TradersZone Here are a couple Andrews techniques that will help anticipate the breakout direction of asideways channelThey work often enough to warrant keep handy Regards Gordon In an earlier lesson you were introduced to Dr Andrews sideways count You saw how frequentlythe sideways count method provided high probability price objectives after the breakout from theestablished channel took place In this segment of lesson 4 youll be shown 2 congestion area techniques that can help youdetermine the probable sideways channel price breakout direction Both rely on the use of pivots The first uses the pivot points that are circled on a sideways channel Dr Andrews observed thatwhenever a sideways channel results in at least 5 circle contacts the eventual price breakoutwould very often be in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle If circle 5 is at thetop of the channel for example the eventual price breakout would likely be to the upside If circle5 is at the bottom of the channel look for a downside breakout Dr Andrews noted that thistechnique can be subject to false breakouts but that such breakouts are usually followed shortlyafter with a confirmed breakout in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle Heemphasized that this study is best considered as a rule of thumb observation He viewed it as asupporting indicator for use with a short-term pitchfork as prices approached a channel line There are 2 charts attached that show how this works

The second technique in this part of lesson 4 deals with a sideways channelthat is building shortly after a P3 has been formed Dr Andrews noted thatwhenever that happened the probabilities were high that prices wouldbreakout in the same direction they were moving prior to the formation ofthe sideways channel The attached P3 to sideways example chart shows thisprocedure

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 205235

Hello Gordon here is my example for the 5 circle sideways count RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Lesson 5Date Montag 27 Maumlrz 2000 060731

At 32400 85200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my example for the 5 circle sideways countgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt gt Hi TradersZone Good example of the 5th circle tendency to predict the direction of a sideways breakout Any luckfinding a chart showing the P3 to sideways rule Im sending the first part of the next lesson This trendline method is a useful tool with all of DrAndrews course lines He used it all the time but especially when looking for confirmation of othercourse method trading signals Regards Gordon The Course Trendline__________________________________________________________ Next well discuss the trendline Seasoned traders agree that the trendline is one of their mostimportant tools No matter what kind of trading program or technique they use the trendline on achart is a must But one of the biggest mistakes made by amateurs and professionals alike isinconsistently drawing or defining the trendline Dr Andrews trendline procedure is simpleconsistent and accurate It works extremely well with the pivot count and with the pitchfork For an uptrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the lowest low up and to thehighest minor low point preceding the highest high The line must not pass through prices inbetween the two low points Extend the line(Attached chart of Brightpoint) For a downtrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the highest high point to thelowest minor high point preceding the lowest low so that it does not pass through prices inbetween the two high points Extend the line (Brightpoint chart) Thats all theres to it Its simple consistent and it works well with other Andrews lines It also

helps eliminate personal bias and haphazard analysis Practice drawing these trendlines on your own charts Send me any questions you might have andthen e-mail a chart of your choosing which shows at least two uptrend and two downtrend linesthat youve drawn_______________________________________________________________________

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Lesson 5Date Dienstag 28 Maumlrz 2000 120224

Hello Gordon here is my chart with trendlinesWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going above the trendline again should I draw a new trendline anddelete the old one Attached is another chart with the P3 to sideways rule I finally found an example for it RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Price failure techniqueDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081412

At 32800 120200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my chart with trendlinesgtWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going abovegtthe trendline again should I draw a new trendline and delete the oldgtone Hi TradersZone Take a look at the chart Im returningI added some lines for you to considerWith the course trendline once its broken a new one should be started Theres a technique thatties in with this coming up soon Meanwhile heres an important technique to work on It deals with those times when prices dontreach the ML Regards Gordon Dr Andrews Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P ofreversaland the ML the probability is that this price reversal will go further thanitdid on its approach toward the ML (Extract of original course material) A price failure very often indicates a sizeable reversal will take placeThepitchforks drawn on the chart of Home Depot illustrate the concept of pricefailure Dr Andrews routinely drew a new pitchfork on his chart after a newsignificant pivot had formed He knew that prices had a high probability ofreaching the new ML before stalling out or reversing If prices reversedbeforereaching the ML thereby forming a new pivot he termed it a price failureTheunderlying idea here is that Dr Andrews fully anticipated his median linewouldact as a price magnet To conclude that a price reversal resulted in a price failure Dr Andrewsused

these primary signalsa subsequent price penetration of a short-termmulti-pivotline andor a return of prices to and penetration of the parallel lineformed atpivot 3 of the pitchfork (The circles on the Home Depot chart denote theparallelline penetration signal To avoid clutter the mpl lines were not drawn) One possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart of ConsecoIncLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me a copy

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject ChartDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081800Attachments image002png

Hi TradersZone Forgot the chart Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Price failure techniqueDate Samstag 1 April 2000 201000

gtOne possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart ofgtConseco IncgtLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me agtcopy Hi Gordon here are my charts with price failures RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Mittwoch 5 April 2000 235624

Hi TradersZone Good price failure examples you sentany comments or questions about it Heres the next partanother old standby Dr Andrews kept handy Regards Gordon In this segment youll learn how to use the Fan line Technique To draw the fan lines youll apply the coursetrendline method which was introduced in an earlier lesson It might be well to emphasize that the practicalapplication of the course trendline method requires practice and experience both of which will serve youwell in this technique Dr Andrews used fan lines as an adjunct to his pitchfork sideways channel andactionreaction methods In the fan line study three trendlines are drawn from the original reversal pivot of the price correction understudy typically a P0 or a P5 Youll notice on the charts included with this study that each fan line is at aflatter angle than its predecessor When the third fan line is broken the rule is that the correction has endedand a new trend is under way Try this technique on some of your own charts and then please send me asample

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Donnerstag 6 April 2000 234315

Hi Gordon No I dont have any specific question about the price failure technique I guess the next likely target after a price failure wouldbe the warning line I have attached two charts with fan linesIs it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the third fan line is broken RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Next segmentDate Freitag 7 April 2000 003312

Hello TradersZone

Tuesday April 06 2000 114315 AM you wrote

TZgt Hi Gordon

TZgt No I dont have any specific question about the price failureTZgt technique I guess the next likely target after a price failureTZgt would be the warning line

TZgt I have attached two charts with fan linesTZgt Is it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the thirdTZgt fan line is broken

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Thats right the warning line is the next price target Additionalwarning lines can be drawn if needed but usually one will do it Ifprices go through the first warning line another can be drawn butmost likely a new pitchfork could be drawn instead which would bepreferable Helps stay current with recently formed pivots

When prices break through the third fan line a buy or sell signal isgiven Not sure what you mean by fourth target fan line Im a littledense today

Your chart work was goodthis is another handy tool for spotting thehigh probability of a price reversal or trend change

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject The Gap TradeDate Freitag 7 April 2000 004858

Hello TradersZone This trading signal doesnt show up very often but past observations have shown that its well worth watching for Dr Andrews placed a lot of emphasis on the importance of price gaps something many traders overlook This is one of his gap uses Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom The Gap Trading Technique Price gaps can be a dilemma for many traders The general rule denoting market strength or weakness after ahigh volume gap often comes up short after the initial reaction is over Many gappers simply run out ofsteam A high volume gap in itself seems to offer precious little evidence that a profitable move is about toget under way Dr Andrews used price gaps somewhat differently than others He counted a gap as 2 pivots Youll see howthat works in the following technique which uses a gap to arrive at a price level for a buy or sell order Using short-term daily price pivots label the pivot immediately preceding the gap as p0 Count the gap as 2pivots labeling it p1 amp p2 After p3 has formed and prices reverse towards a short-term p4 draw a horizontalline 2 price tics or more (individual preference)to the right of p3 Enter the market only if prices reach orpenetrate that line within a few days after reversing from p4 Please look over your own charts to see if you can find places where the gap trade technique could have beenused Send me a sample when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 001925

Hello Gordon this is my chart with a gap trade RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 065538

Hello TradersZone Thursday April 08 2000 121925 PM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt this is my chart with a gap trade TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Good examplethe gap trade technique shines when an issue in at or near a P5 Similar to the one on thechart you sent Heres another trading signal tool Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Dr Andrews used several techniques which helped him determine whether a P5 was near at hand Youllrecall that he observed most price moves ended or had a significant reversal at a P5 This technique uses alternate closing prices after a P4 has been formed As with many of his studies thenumber 5 is used The chart accompanying this segment shows that there were 5 alternate closes to thedownside after P4 was put in Dr Andrews noted that whenever 5 or more alternate closes followed a P4 theprobabilities were high that a P5 was near at hand An added feature to this chart study is the sideways channel Notice how the 2nd target price and the 5thalternate close nearly coincide

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 12 April 2000 200730

Hello Gordon This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 13 April 2000 082418

Monday April 12 2000 80730 AM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hello TradersZone Good chart example of this Andrews toolanother of his very unusual observations that workmore often than not Heres the final part of this lesson Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom In this trendline method Dr Andrews once again used the number 5 as the basis for locating aprobable reversal area He found this technique to be especially useful whenever a clear orobvious pivot count didnt show up onthe price move under study Trendlines are drawn using the course trendline method When the 5th trendline is broken theprobability is high that the trend under study has ended A mini-median line pitchfork andorsliding parallel could be used for pricing a trading order The accompanying chart of Compaq Computer is an example of how the trendline study could beused The pivot count beginning at the October low is difficult to nail down There were severalsmall areas of congestion but no sizeable corrections while prices advanced The count wasunclear By following the price action using the course trendline technique however the traderwould have been alerted to the possibility of a change of trend when the 5th trendline was brokenin early February Try this technique on your own charts When youre ready please send me an example of yourstudy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 19 April 2000 124108

Hello Gordon this is my example with 5 trendlines RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[6] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 20 April 2000 012726

Monday April 19 2000 124108 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt this is my example with 5 trendlines

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Good example of the 5 TL technique Always reminds me of how the fairly simple tools often do a better job than manyof the sophisticated studies out there

That was the last part of lesson 5 Lesson 6 attached is made in one mailing Youll find Dr Andrews trading rules alongwith a wrap-up review which uses several of his rules You might have questions about some of the rules so feel free tosend them as they arise

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Dr Andrews had an abbreviated set of trading rules on several index cards that he carried around with him in his shirtpocket He said every trading day turned up something new on his charts and by having his rules in his pocket he wasreminded of the need for a methodical approach to his analysis Quite a comment coming from the man who wrote therule book

In this the final lesson of the course Dr Andrews original trading rules and observations are presented Lets work witha few of them at this point

Using charts of issues you follow please send me an example that illustrates your interpretation of each of the followingrules

Rule 4 Anticipating major Ps

Rule 7 Penetration rule

Rule 8 Price failure rule

Rule 11 1-ML23 AR Centerline

Rule 12 Sliding Parallel rule

Rule 15 Mini-median line parallel to buy or sell

Feel free to include any other course techniques you choose to apply but please include examples of the above as aminimum Use more than one technique on a chart if your analysis supports it Send as many charts as you like alongwith your questionscomments

Lesson 6 - Dr Andrews Trading Rules

This lesson covers course rules and significant observations as taught by Dr Andrews in his original trading course Therules are those that he used in his own trading and are provided to serve as a checklist for use with the course tradingmethods youve learned

Rule 1 Where prices are always headed Rule You course members are among the fortunate few to be able to draw astraight line and know that prices are headed toward that ML Very few investors have ever applied this ML principle ofstatistics to price fluctuations and weve never seen this in any books on investment You are among the very few who

know that prices are always headed toward the newest ML

Rule 2 The Rule of coming opposites applies all through life In the bible we find Blessed at they that mourn for theyshall be comforted As investors we know that any losses can be recovered by using course methods

Rule 3 Turn your mind about or Rethink for all good is at hand We should mentally prepare ourselves for thecoming reversal in prices and other affairs Heres one way for example that you course members who know the MLrules can use When prices are skyrocketing upward we do this preparation by thinking If prices pivoted here today atthis price Id draw a new ML bisecting the distance between todays price and the price from which the rise started Andwe know now that if this is a Major Pivot prices will fall rapidly to this new ML Profits from such drops are big and quick

Rule 4 Rule for anticipating major Ps If during congestion or after a rally or decline you can count four previous Psthe fifth one is highly probable to be the one from which a new trend starts

Rule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can make a quick big profit is to watch for the EPformations

Rule 6 The other reversal rule is that prices tend to reverse at or near any ML as well as at any extension of each MLAnd also at any MLH or extensions of MLH

Rule 7 The Penetration Rule is that whenever prices gap past or plunge through any ML there is a high probability thatthey will quickly return to it temporarily and then resume the trend they had before they gapped or plunged through

Rule 8 Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P of reversal and the MLthe probability is that this price reversal will go further than it did on its approach toward the ML

Rule 9 The price failure rule is negated when the next price trend is also a failure in reaching the ML This is almostinvariably a signal of a big fast move in the direction indicated by this last space Rule 10 When alternate median lines of comparable length slope in the same direction the trend is firm and rapidprice changes take place

Rule 11 When 1-ML23 is exactly reached at P4 it can be used as a highly reliable centerline for the AR method

Rule 12 Frequently after crossing a lower MLH prices continue to rise along the MLH Since the crossing of the MLHsignals a further drop is likely use a sliding parallel along the bottom of the most recent crossing If prices drop past thatsliding parallel line a sell signal is generated

Rule 13 MLs between P2 and P3 can start from a nearby or a remote P1 since prices tend to reverse at each of theseMLs Try several such P2-P3 MLs to discover the best fit

Rule 14 The distance of each MLH from its ML is the distance of the next warning line Use these warning lineswhenever a SH has signalled a buy or sell

Rule 15 Use the MMLH as a buy or sell signal when you expect a reversal because of a P5 Also when prices are at aWL ML extension line or where course lines converge or intersect

Rule 16 Converging lines that meet prices have shown the highest probability of a trend reversal

Rule 17 Two to four days is usually the maximum between P2 and P3 for a MML P1 can be a day or so back from P2and 3

Rule 18 The most reliable ActionReaction centerlines seem to be MPL 2P line 2 Gap line peak to low or low to peak

Rule 19 When prices pass through R lines look for a pull back and then a continuing move in the direction of the passthrough

Rule 20 Use gaps as Action lines from the centerline

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 003755

Hello Gordonhere is my example for Rule 4 And I have a question What are EP formations gtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 021242

Tuesday May 04 2000 123755 PM you wrote TZgt Hello GordonTZgt here is my example for Rule 4 TZgt And I have a question What are EP formations gtgtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegtgta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hi TradersZone Good use of the warning linesalso the EP material is part of lesson 4 Rather than go backthrough the files to see when (or if) it was sent Im sending it along with this reply Glad youbrought it up Best RegardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Tuesday May 04 2000208 PM Dr Andrews used a fairly common price chart formation that he found useful at probable P5market tops and bottoms The formation generally called a wedge or pennant by chartists isreferred to in Dr Andrews trading course as the Expanding Pivot (EP) One of the few chartformations used in the course he regarded it as among the most dependable indications that amarket top was forming Closely related to the EP is his Inverted Expanding Pivot (IEP) which henoted could often be observed at market bottoms Both are regarded as intermediate and long-term reversal indicators Dr Andrews found that both formations were most reliable when they occurred after a sharprapid price move coinciding with the formation of a probable P5 He said it wasnt unusual for theformation to take several weeks to complete and that conservative traders could best avoid thewhipsaw associated with congestion patterns by trading only in the direction of the probable price

break out of the EP or IEP formation The attached charts illustrate these formations Please look over your own charts for an example ofthe EP and IEP and send me a copy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 232127

Hello Gordon Thank you for the lesson with the EP material I couldnt find it in any previous emailHere is my example for Rule 7 RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Rule 4Date Samstag 6 Mai 2000 080827

Wednesday May 05 2000 112127 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt Thank you for the lesson with the EP materialTZgt I couldnt find it in any previous emailTZgt Here is my example for Rule 7

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hi TradersZone

Glad you mentioned it earlierexcept for the EP IEP and hissideways channel Dr Andrews didnt have much to say about chartpatterns and formations These are good ones to use though

Your study of the penetration rule was good Later

Best Regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Wednesday May 05 2000801 PM

Page 19: Pitchfork primer

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next partDate Donnerstag 10 Februar 2000 235613

At 21000 113000 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongtthank you Im ready for the next lessongt gt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt gt gt TradersZoneI sent this yesterday but will re-send It was part of my reply to your questionregarding the circle I dont have a record of your return chartwork for this part If its a duplicatesend sorry Regards Gordon Well continue to use the Brightpoint chart for this portion of the sideways count study To reviewthe pattern were looking for should be a recent rectangular shaped sideways trading range thatcontains most if not all of the congestion price action Take a look at the attached chart and notehow well defined the price channel for Brightpoint is Youll probably notice that it is deeper thanthe channel you studied on the chart in the preceding segment This comparison is made toillustrate that while the first channel example covers a longer period of time the second includesall of the price ranges and is the preferred method Please look at where the circles were placed on the channel lines To review a new circle is drawnonly after prices have first been at the opposite channel line Recall that circles must be inalternate sequence eg upper linelower lineupper linelower line etc one circle at a time Note that the price range within the channel is $4 34 (High 21 12 Low 16 34) There were twocircles drawn on the lower line of our sideways channel before prices broke down Using thatinformation our next step will be to use some simple arithmetic in order to come up with twodownside price targets Well cover that procedure in the next segment Please let me know whenyou are ready to continue

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next partDate Freitag 11 Februar 2000 234113

I think the placement of the circles is clear to me nowI have attached another chart with a sideways count RegardsTradersZone gtTradersZoneI sent this yesterday but will re-send It was part ofgtmy reply to your question regarding the circle I dont have a recordgtof your return chartwork for this part If its a duplicate send sorry

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject SidewaysDate Montag 14 Februar 2000 054227

At 21100 114100 PM you wrotegtI think the placement of the circles is clear to me nowgtI have attached another chart with a sideways countgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone Your chart was on target Looks like youre ready for the next part Here it is Regards Gordon During this segment youll learn how to arrive at two price targets using Dr Andrews sidewayscount Simple arithmetic is all thats required once the sideways channel and circles are in place Well continue to use the Brightpoint chart which is attached Note that Brightpoint fell throughthe bottom channel line at the point where we placed our second circle so figuring out possibledownside targets would have been in order at that time Heres how thats done 1 Determine the price range of the channel In this case the range is $4 34 (21 12 - 16 34) 2 Count the number of circles on the lower channel line The lower line is used in this casebecause thats the line that didnt hold Prices went through it returned to check it out and thencontinued lower 3 Multiply the price range of the channel times the number of circles drawn on the lower channelline (4 34 x 2 = 9 12) 4 Subtract that figure from the upper channel line priceThe result becomes downside price target 1 (21 12 - 9 12 = 12) 5 Next subtract that same figure from the price at the lower channel line Thats price target 2(16 34 - 9 12 = 7 14)

In the case of an upside channel breakout the procedure is reversed Please draw a few channelsand figure out some downside targets on your own charts When youre ready send me two orthree examples of your work As always send your questions as they arise

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re SidewaysDate Montag 14 Februar 2000 134314

Here are my examples I couldnt find enough charts with downside targets so I included some charts with upside targets Do the channel lines always have to be horizontal When I look at my charts I find more channels with an upward slope or adownward slope RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Sideways channelsDate Freitag 18 Februar 2000 005531

At 21400 14300 PM you wrotegtHere are my examples I couldnt find enough charts with downsidegttargets so I included some charts with upside targetsgt gtDo the channel lines always have to be horizontal When I look at mygtcharts I find more channels with an upward slope or a downward slopegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone The sideways method can be used with either up or down Sorry didnt mean to imply that only downsidetargets should be found Ill reword that portion of the lesson Thanks for mentioning it Dr Andrews sideways method works only on horizontal channels Others have mentioned the slopingchannels also and have wondered if there is some method to use with them I know of none Ive askedother course members for their ideas on how to approach this problem but so far no one has come up with amethod I would think that there should be a solution but have not personally taken the time to research itIf some method could be found that works as often as the Andrews sideways count it would be a significantfind The Andrews sideways count doesnt always hit the targets as you saw on your chart of Bausch amp Lomb Itworks more often than not though and it still amazes me at how often prices reach the targets Heres an observation to keep in mind Quite often after the first target is reached prices will reverse andhead back towards the channel At times youll note that they return inside the channel They will thenreverse again and head back towards the second price target These reversals happen frequently and presenttrading opportunities Im including the final segment of this lesson Regards Gordon So far in the course youve learned about Dr Andrews pivot counting procedure pitchfork and sidewayscount Youve noticed by now how often prices change trend at a P5 Youve seen how the 0-34 ML methodcan help locate the probable P5 area Youve seen how often price targets are met using the sideways countmethod The tendency for prices to reverse at a median line should be recognized as a high probability eventas well In coming lessons youll be shown how Dr Andrews used these and other high probability events totrade the stock and commodity markets The tools and techniques he used will help you put the finishingtouches on your market analysis using Andrews lines

Before continuing on to the next lesson lets briefly review what has so far been covered The attached chartprovides an opportunity to illustrate the methods referred to above Please draw these methods on thechart and return to me

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Sideways channelsDate Montag 21 Februar 2000 193743

gtBefore continuing on to the next lesson lets briefly review what hasgtso far been covered The attached chart provides an opportunity togtillustrate the methods referred to above Please draw these methods ongtthe chart and return to me Hello Gordonhere is my chart RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next lesson attachedDate Mittwoch 23 Februar 2000 014539

At 22100 73700 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongthere is my chartgt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Good job on the pivots sideways count and pitchforkLooks like youre ready to move on to the next part It wont be long and things will begin to fall inplace Regards Gordon Lesson 4 continued In one of his course letters Dr Andrews wrote The Law of Physics stated by Newton that Actionand Reaction are equal and opposite was first applied to prices by your Course Directors friendthe late Roger Babson who attributed his earnings of several million dollars to this law Beginning with this segment of lesson four and continuing in lesson five youll learn how to drawand apply the ActionReaction trading method as taught by Dr Andrews in his trading course The AR method requires a centerline or CL from which to start The CL can be any of thefollowing - MPL - ML - MLH - 2P line - 2 Gap line - Peak to low line - Low to peak lineThese are the primary lines that Dr Andrews used He stressed that some pencil work and a goodeyeball was needed in order to find the best fitting CL As with most other chart lines somework better than others The task is to find the best fit as he put it You will be shown examples of

each of the above CLs in this lesson and the next Determining which of the above listed lines to use as the CL is the first step in the ActionReactionmethod The solution often presents itself With a little practice a quick scan of the chart understudy will be all thats needed to spot the most likely CL Well begin with the attached chart Notethe CL drawn In this example a MPL (multi-pivot line) was used as the CL A MPL is a straightline that connects three or more consecutive pivots without passing through prices Theconnecting line is then extended Ive circled the three pivots that form the MPL on the chartThere are several other places on our chart where a MPL CL can be drawn Please bear in mindthat this is just the first step of the process Identification of likely CLs is all were after here Seeif you can locate two more then draw them in and send the chart back to me Well take up fromthere

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next lesson attachedDate Mittwoch 23 Februar 2000 212304

gtLesson 4 continuedgt gtIn one of his course letters Dr Andrews wrote The Law of Physicsgtstated by Newton that Action and Reaction are equal and opposite wasgtfirst applied to prices by your Course Directors friend the lategtRoger Babson who attributed his earnings of several million dollars to this lawgt gtBeginning with this segment of lesson four and continuing in lessongtfive youll learn how to draw and apply the ActionReaction tradinggtmethod as taught by Dr Andrews in his trading coursegt gtThe AR method requires a centerline or CL from which to startgtThe CL can be any of the followinggt - MPLgt - MLgt - MLHgt - 2P linegt - 2 Gap linegt - Peak to low linegt - Low to peak line Hello Gordon2P line 2 Gap line Peak to low line Low to peak line ndash actually I dont know what these lines areAre they discussed in Lesson 3 I believe you havenrsquot sent me this lesson yetAnyway I found two more MPLs on the Novellus Chart and drew them in RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Lesson 3Date Mittwoch 23 Februar 2000 235958

At 22300 92300 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt2P line 2 Gap line Peak to low line Low to peak line - actually I dont knowgtwhat these lines are Are they discussed in Lesson 3 I believe you didntgtsent me this lesson yetgtAnyway I found two more MPLs on the Novellus Chart and drew them ingt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone My apologiesI sent you an outdated version of the lesson Thanks for letting me know Musthave been my bedtime Heres the correct version Regards Gordon Lesson 3 In one of his course letters Dr Andrews wrote The Law of Physics stated by Newton that Actionand Reaction are equal and opposite was first applied to prices by your Course Directors friendthe late Roger Babson who attributed his earnings of several million dollars to this law In this lesson youll be introduced to the ActionReaction trading method as taught by Dr Andrewsin his trading course The AR method requires a centerline or CL from which to start The CL can be any of thefollowing - MPL Multi-pivot line A line drawn across 3 or more pivots - ML Median line The middle line of the pitchfork - MLH Median line parallel Either parallel line of the pitchfork - 2P line A line drawn across 2 pivots - 2 Gap line A line drawn connecting 2 gaps without touching prices in between - Peak to low line A line drawn connecting the high and low of a price leg

- Low to peak line A line drawn connecting the low and high of a price leg These are the primary lines that Dr Andrews used He stressed that some pencil work and a goodeyeball was needed in order to find the best fitting CL As with most other chart lines somework better than others The task is to find the best fit as he put it You will be shown examples ofeach of the above CLs Determining which of the above listed lines to use as the CL is the first step in the ActionReactionmethod With practice a quick view of the chart under study will be all thats needed to spot themost likely CL Youll be shown later how to experiment with possible combinations in order tofind the centerline that is most in tune with the market under study Well begin with the attached chart Note the CL drawn In this example a MPL (multi-pivot line)was used as the CL A MPL is a straight line that connects three or more consecutive pivotswithout passing through prices The connecting line is then extended Ive circled the three pivotsthat form the MPL on the chart There are several other places on our chart where a MPL CL canbe drawn Please bear in mind that this is just the first step of the process Identification of likelyCLs is all were after here See if you can locate two more then draw them in and send the chartback to me

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Donnerstag 24 Februar 2000 025105

At 22300 92300 PM you wroteI found two more MPLs on the Novellus Chart and drew them ingt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your mpls were correct This next segment shows the purpose of the centerline and how it isused Your payment in full arrived today TradersZone Thank you Regards Gordon Lesson 3 continued Please refer to the attached chart of Novellus The line drawn connecting the 3 circled pivots is amulti-pivot line (MPL) and represents the centerline (CL) well be using in this example Recall inthe previous segment that several types of centerlines are possible The choice is determined byexperimenting with the potential combinations on the chart under study Its best to try to locate acenterline somewhere close to the middle of the price chart in order to have sufficient past andforward data to use with the study This will become clear as you work with the method Once the centerline is drawn the next step is to locate a previous low or high pivot point to use fordrawing an action line Dr Andrews observed that the low pivot points often seem to work bestbut that either could be used In our example a line starting at the previous significant low wasdrawn parallel to the CL It is labeled A-1 (Action line 1) because it represents the first actionline Dr Andrews called it an action line because it was drawn as a result of a previous pivot (pricereversal) that had taken place Next a parallel line was drawn to the right of the CL and labeled R-1 Notice that it is the same distance from the CL as the corresponding A-1 line It is labeled R-1because it represents the first reaction line a line where prices are likely to stop or reverseNotice how prices reacted at the R-1 line in early 98 That serves as an indication that thecenterline chosen for this study should be a good one to use Not all reaction lines cause such aclear reversal as the R1 on this chart but many do Thats why its important to experiment withvarious centerline possibilities in order to find action lines that produce reaction lines which createthe greatest number of pivots or price stall-outs This experimentation is often quite time

consuming but experience has shown that it is time well spent When a centerline is found that isin tune with the price action of the issue under study it can be a highly effective tool for use inlocating probable reversal areas When combined with pitchfork lines the AR method can pinpointpotential reversal areas that are generally not recognized as such by others Dr Andrewstechniques for using the pitchfork and AR lines together are covered in later lessons In coming segments well study other lines that Dr Andrews used for his centerlines In themeantime experiment with the multi-pivot centerline on your own charts Then please send mean example of your work along with any questions you may have

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Freitag 25 Februar 2000 211356

gtIn the meantime experiment with the multi-pivot centerline on your owngtcharts Then please send me an example of your work along with anygtquestions you may have Hello Gordon I was wondering how many ActionReaction lines could be drawn on a chart On my attached chart I found at least 6 parallellines which had a significant meaning for the price RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject AR linesDate Montag 28 Februar 2000 080128

gtHello Gordongt gtI was wondering how many ActionReaction lines could be drawn on agtchart On my attached chart I found at least 6 parallel lines which hadgta significant meaning for the pricegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hi TradersZone Theres no set number of lines that can be drawnactually the more you can find the betterFinding a good centerline is the key And once you find lines that work such as you did anynumber of parallel lines can be drawn You are doing exactly what Dr Andrews didtaking thetime and effort to find the best fitting sets of lines Each chart has them and each chart is differentas Im sure youve found Nice work Heres the next part Regards Gordon Lesson 3 continued One of Dr Andrews favorite techniques dealt with gapsan often times perplexing price event formany traders His observations over the years suggested to him that while gaps show upfrequently on many price charts few traders have a method for including them as an integral partof their chart analysis Thats not surprising since not much has been published about how toapproach the use of gaps in a trading method Dr Andrews however found several ways to putprice gaps to good use An ActionReaction centerline which uses gaps as its basis is one suchmethod Please refer to the attached chart of Cendant Youll see that a centerline was drawn which passedthrough the July gap Note that it also came in contact with several pivots thereby qualifying as agapmulti-pivot centerline It is drawn by starting at the April low pivot and extending a line acrossand through the gap in mid-July It subsequently touches two additional high pivots Dr Andrews counted each gap as two pivots He noted that the more pivots a line touched the

stronger the line tended to be in the future Good reason then for using the July gap as the basisfor an ActionReaction study Our CL is labelled a gap-mpl-CL The May 98 high was used for the Action Line starting point A line was then drawn parallel to theCenterline as per ActionReaction procedure The corresponding Reaction Line was then drawn inIf this particular study had been drawn on Cendants chart right after the July gap was put in thepotential for prices to go all the way down to the Reaction Line might have seemed very slim at thetime Notice however that prices reached the Reaction Line in early September Youll see thishappen time and again as you work with the AR method The core of its effectiveness is a strongCL Please send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts of your choice

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re AR linesDate Montag 28 Februar 2000 155937

gtPlease send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts of yourgtchoice Hello Gordonhere are my examples RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject More on the ARDate Donnerstag 2 Maumlrz 2000 071158

At 22800 35900 PM you wrotegtgtPlease send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts ofgtgtyour choicegt gtHello Gordongthere are my examplesgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone You picked some good examples to use for your AR study Both showed the potential power of thismethod Takes time and lots of chart study sometimes to find the best set of lines but the rewardscan be many Heres something else to look at Regards Gordon The ActionReaction technique requires a strong centerline from which to begin The key todeciding which set of pivots to use for the centerline is found through experimenting with thevarious configurations visible on the chart under study The centerline might be a series of gapspivots an existing median line or any of Dr Andrews lines The task is to search for that centerlinewhich shows the greatest potential for projecting price reversal areas Dr Andrews did that byfinding a likely centerline near the middle of his price chart That allowed him to use any of theprevious pivots for his action lines By experimenting he found reaction lines that did the best jobof pegging reversal areas at data points located forward of the centerline Reaction lines are equal and opposite of the action lines and serve to project price levels at whicha reversal can be expected That is why the task of seeking out the best centerline is so importantDr Andrews reasoned that a series of reaction lines which have pegged price reversals in the pastis likely to continue to be in tune with current and future market price action Having severalprevious pivots to use as anchors for drawing action lines is thus essential The attached chart of Lattice illustrates this concept Please bear in mind that the gapmplcenterline is not the only centerline one could use on this chart You might want to study the chartfor other AR possibilities Try a peak-to-peak CL or a multi-pivot CL Send me your studies along

with any questions

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re More on the ARDate Samstag 4 Maumlrz 2000 002521

gtThe attached chart of Lattice illustrates this conceptgtPlease bear in mind that the gapmpl centerline is not the onlygtcenterline one could use on this chartgtYou might want to study the chart for other AR possibilitiesgtTry a peak-to-peak CL or a multi-pivot CL Send me your studiesgtalong with any questions Hello Gordonhere is my chart RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Peak to peak clDate Sonntag 5 Maumlrz 2000 064107

At 3400 122500 AM you wrotegtHello Gordongthere is my chartgt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Looks like you have the concept down Takes time and a lot of chart work to find the bestcenterline When the reaction lines dont seem to peg reversal areas chances are the centerline isnot the one that is best in tune with the price action of the issue under studyDespite the time required for this method it was one of Dr Andrews stand-bysAR lines could befound on most of his charts Im sending a chart with an example of a peak-to-peak CL Regards Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Peak to peak clDate Sonntag 5 Maumlrz 2000 171232

Hello Gordon I think the peak-to-peak CL on the last chart I sent to you was not really drawn from peak to peakIm sending another example RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next LessonDate Mittwoch 8 Maumlrz 2000 072526

At 3500 51200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtI think the peak-to-peak CL on the last chart I sent to you was notgtreally drawn from peak to peakgtIm sending another examplegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your peak to peak cl example was correctly drawn Thats a fairly simple approach but quite oftenthe peak to peak yields better reaction lines Heres the first part of the next lesson Regards Gordon Youll find times when prices dont quite reach the ML but instead drift alongside or away from itThe Schiff ML was designed to be used in place of the regular ML whenever that happens Suchprice action can be found at any place on a chart but most frequently occurs after a sharp sell-offor run-up of prices Dr Andrews also used the Schiff ML whenever his regular ML sloped at an unusually steep angleHe said it helped smooth out irregular price action such as that caused by unexpected earningsnews crop planting delays or poor growing conditions crop production reports etc Youll findnearly vertical price moves over a short period of time on many charts The Schiff ML method helpsput things back in perspective when that happens Well use the chart of Sterling Bancorp as an example of prices drifting away from the regular MLThat ML is drawn in black Prices didnt quite reach the ML but drifted alongside and eventuallyaway from it The Schiff ML and parallel lines are drawn in red Notice how prices were containedwithin the Schiff pitchfork until they finally broke down at the upper parallel line The procedure for drawing the Schiff ML is the same as for the regular ML except the startingpoint is located midway between the first 2 pivots youll be using The Sterling Bancorp chart

illustrates how this is done Dr Andrews also suggested using the Schiff ML whenever the regular ML method doesnt seem tobe in sync with price action Practice this procedure on your own charts and send a couple examples when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next LessonDate Donnerstag 9 Maumlrz 2000 001143

Hello Gordon in my charting software (Dynamic Trader) the Schiff ML is drawn by finding the midpoint of the line between pivot A and pivot Bmoving this point horizontally to directly above or below (depending on whether A is a low or high pivot) the A pivot anddrawing a line from his point through the midpoint of the BC swingAre there different methods of drawing a Schiff MLI was too lazy to draw Schiff MLs by hand with the method you described so Im sending my examples with the Dynamic TraderSchiff MLs -) RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject SchiffDate Samstag 11 Maumlrz 2000 070226

At 3900 121100 AM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtin my charting software (Dynamic Trader) the Schiff ML is drawn bygtfinding the midpoint of the line between pivot A and pivot B movinggtthis point horizontally to directly above or below (depending ongtwhether A is a low or high pivot) the A pivot and drawing a linegtgtfrom his point through the midpoint of the BC swinggtAre there different methods of drawing a Schiff MLgtI was too lazy to draw Schiff MLs by hand with the method yougtdescribed so Im sending my examples with the Dynamic Trader Schiff MLs -)gt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your program Schiff line procedure is fineits actually what Dr Andrews called a modified schiff ml and is onlyslightly different than the one I sent you initially The one you used is preferred by most course members Im sendingthe modified Schiff lesson and a chart along with this email The chart example shows how to use it with 0-34 pivots Regards Gordon

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Sliding Parallel LineDate Montag 13 Maumlrz 2000 005252

Hello TradersZone Heres one of the tools Dr Andrews used most often when entering exiting or reversing marketpositions Not many people know about this technique Regards Gordon The Sliding Parallel (SH) is drawn whenever prices cross an Andrews line and then move along itFor example if the bottom of a daily price bar range drops through a lower parallel line of apitchfork a new parallel line is then drawn from that low and extended to the right If the nextdays price bar drops through that sliding parallel line a sell signal is generated Whenever price action dictates a sliding parallel the next step is to draw a Warning Line Thewarning line is an additional parallel line that is an image extension of the original pitchforkchannels It serves as a warning that if prices penetrate the sliding parallel the next likely target isthe WL The attached chart of Avis illustrates these procedures Please try these on your own charts andsend me an example

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Sliding Parallel LineDate Dienstag 14 Maumlrz 2000 225737

Hello Gordon this is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning line RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 065606

At 31400 105700 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtthis is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning linegt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone Your chart of circuit city was a good example for this study I may have mentioned it earlier but DrAndrews used this technique on a regular basis The next part of this lesson covers another of hisfavorite tools the mini-median line pitchfork Here it is Regards Gordon The Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry and exit tools Though mostoften drawn using alternate closing prices alternate highs and lows can also be usedin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days is usually the maximumbetween pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or more back from P2 Dr Andrews used Mini-Median Line pitchforks for buy and sell signals whenever he expected areversal Some examples include a probable P5 or when prices are at a Warning Line ML MLHmajor ML extension or a sideways channel price target When prices cross the Mini-Median LineParallel (MMLH) a sliding parallel (SH) is used for order entry

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 231537

gtThe Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry andgtexit tools Though most often drawn using alternate closing pricesgtalternate highs and lows can also be usedgtin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days isgtusually the maximum between pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or moregtback from P2

Hello Gordon

wouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timingCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available whenDr Andrews was alive

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject intraday chartsDate Samstag 18 Maumlrz 2000 012400

At 31600 111500 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongtgtwouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsgtinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timinggtCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available when DrgtAndrews was alivegtgtRegardsgtTradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Youre absolutely correctintraday charts were not available when DrAndrews was a trader

Im reading between the lines here but if you plan to day-trade using the course techniques ie thepitchfork then I agree that the regular pitchfork would be more useful on intraday charts Otherwisewhipsaw would be a significant problem Please get back to me if I didnt address your questionbecause this is a very important technique The mini-median line pitchfork and sliding parallel showedup on most of Dr Andrews charts

Regards

Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re intraday chartsDate Dienstag 21 Maumlrz 2000 220322

Hello Gordon

You are right Im planning to daytrade SampP futures using the course techniques among other things

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 003408

Hi TradersZone Here are a couple Andrews techniques that will help anticipate the breakout direction of asideways channelThey work often enough to warrant keep handy Regards Gordon In an earlier lesson you were introduced to Dr Andrews sideways count You saw how frequentlythe sideways count method provided high probability price objectives after the breakout from theestablished channel took place In this segment of lesson 4 youll be shown 2 congestion area techniques that can help youdetermine the probable sideways channel price breakout direction Both rely on the use of pivots The first uses the pivot points that are circled on a sideways channel Dr Andrews observed thatwhenever a sideways channel results in at least 5 circle contacts the eventual price breakoutwould very often be in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle If circle 5 is at thetop of the channel for example the eventual price breakout would likely be to the upside If circle5 is at the bottom of the channel look for a downside breakout Dr Andrews noted that thistechnique can be subject to false breakouts but that such breakouts are usually followed shortlyafter with a confirmed breakout in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle Heemphasized that this study is best considered as a rule of thumb observation He viewed it as asupporting indicator for use with a short-term pitchfork as prices approached a channel line There are 2 charts attached that show how this works

The second technique in this part of lesson 4 deals with a sideways channelthat is building shortly after a P3 has been formed Dr Andrews noted thatwhenever that happened the probabilities were high that prices wouldbreakout in the same direction they were moving prior to the formation ofthe sideways channel The attached P3 to sideways example chart shows thisprocedure

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 205235

Hello Gordon here is my example for the 5 circle sideways count RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Lesson 5Date Montag 27 Maumlrz 2000 060731

At 32400 85200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my example for the 5 circle sideways countgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt gt Hi TradersZone Good example of the 5th circle tendency to predict the direction of a sideways breakout Any luckfinding a chart showing the P3 to sideways rule Im sending the first part of the next lesson This trendline method is a useful tool with all of DrAndrews course lines He used it all the time but especially when looking for confirmation of othercourse method trading signals Regards Gordon The Course Trendline__________________________________________________________ Next well discuss the trendline Seasoned traders agree that the trendline is one of their mostimportant tools No matter what kind of trading program or technique they use the trendline on achart is a must But one of the biggest mistakes made by amateurs and professionals alike isinconsistently drawing or defining the trendline Dr Andrews trendline procedure is simpleconsistent and accurate It works extremely well with the pivot count and with the pitchfork For an uptrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the lowest low up and to thehighest minor low point preceding the highest high The line must not pass through prices inbetween the two low points Extend the line(Attached chart of Brightpoint) For a downtrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the highest high point to thelowest minor high point preceding the lowest low so that it does not pass through prices inbetween the two high points Extend the line (Brightpoint chart) Thats all theres to it Its simple consistent and it works well with other Andrews lines It also

helps eliminate personal bias and haphazard analysis Practice drawing these trendlines on your own charts Send me any questions you might have andthen e-mail a chart of your choosing which shows at least two uptrend and two downtrend linesthat youve drawn_______________________________________________________________________

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Lesson 5Date Dienstag 28 Maumlrz 2000 120224

Hello Gordon here is my chart with trendlinesWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going above the trendline again should I draw a new trendline anddelete the old one Attached is another chart with the P3 to sideways rule I finally found an example for it RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Price failure techniqueDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081412

At 32800 120200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my chart with trendlinesgtWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going abovegtthe trendline again should I draw a new trendline and delete the oldgtone Hi TradersZone Take a look at the chart Im returningI added some lines for you to considerWith the course trendline once its broken a new one should be started Theres a technique thatties in with this coming up soon Meanwhile heres an important technique to work on It deals with those times when prices dontreach the ML Regards Gordon Dr Andrews Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P ofreversaland the ML the probability is that this price reversal will go further thanitdid on its approach toward the ML (Extract of original course material) A price failure very often indicates a sizeable reversal will take placeThepitchforks drawn on the chart of Home Depot illustrate the concept of pricefailure Dr Andrews routinely drew a new pitchfork on his chart after a newsignificant pivot had formed He knew that prices had a high probability ofreaching the new ML before stalling out or reversing If prices reversedbeforereaching the ML thereby forming a new pivot he termed it a price failureTheunderlying idea here is that Dr Andrews fully anticipated his median linewouldact as a price magnet To conclude that a price reversal resulted in a price failure Dr Andrewsused

these primary signalsa subsequent price penetration of a short-termmulti-pivotline andor a return of prices to and penetration of the parallel lineformed atpivot 3 of the pitchfork (The circles on the Home Depot chart denote theparallelline penetration signal To avoid clutter the mpl lines were not drawn) One possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart of ConsecoIncLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me a copy

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject ChartDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081800Attachments image002png

Hi TradersZone Forgot the chart Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Price failure techniqueDate Samstag 1 April 2000 201000

gtOne possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart ofgtConseco IncgtLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me agtcopy Hi Gordon here are my charts with price failures RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Mittwoch 5 April 2000 235624

Hi TradersZone Good price failure examples you sentany comments or questions about it Heres the next partanother old standby Dr Andrews kept handy Regards Gordon In this segment youll learn how to use the Fan line Technique To draw the fan lines youll apply the coursetrendline method which was introduced in an earlier lesson It might be well to emphasize that the practicalapplication of the course trendline method requires practice and experience both of which will serve youwell in this technique Dr Andrews used fan lines as an adjunct to his pitchfork sideways channel andactionreaction methods In the fan line study three trendlines are drawn from the original reversal pivot of the price correction understudy typically a P0 or a P5 Youll notice on the charts included with this study that each fan line is at aflatter angle than its predecessor When the third fan line is broken the rule is that the correction has endedand a new trend is under way Try this technique on some of your own charts and then please send me asample

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Donnerstag 6 April 2000 234315

Hi Gordon No I dont have any specific question about the price failure technique I guess the next likely target after a price failure wouldbe the warning line I have attached two charts with fan linesIs it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the third fan line is broken RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Next segmentDate Freitag 7 April 2000 003312

Hello TradersZone

Tuesday April 06 2000 114315 AM you wrote

TZgt Hi Gordon

TZgt No I dont have any specific question about the price failureTZgt technique I guess the next likely target after a price failureTZgt would be the warning line

TZgt I have attached two charts with fan linesTZgt Is it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the thirdTZgt fan line is broken

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Thats right the warning line is the next price target Additionalwarning lines can be drawn if needed but usually one will do it Ifprices go through the first warning line another can be drawn butmost likely a new pitchfork could be drawn instead which would bepreferable Helps stay current with recently formed pivots

When prices break through the third fan line a buy or sell signal isgiven Not sure what you mean by fourth target fan line Im a littledense today

Your chart work was goodthis is another handy tool for spotting thehigh probability of a price reversal or trend change

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject The Gap TradeDate Freitag 7 April 2000 004858

Hello TradersZone This trading signal doesnt show up very often but past observations have shown that its well worth watching for Dr Andrews placed a lot of emphasis on the importance of price gaps something many traders overlook This is one of his gap uses Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom The Gap Trading Technique Price gaps can be a dilemma for many traders The general rule denoting market strength or weakness after ahigh volume gap often comes up short after the initial reaction is over Many gappers simply run out ofsteam A high volume gap in itself seems to offer precious little evidence that a profitable move is about toget under way Dr Andrews used price gaps somewhat differently than others He counted a gap as 2 pivots Youll see howthat works in the following technique which uses a gap to arrive at a price level for a buy or sell order Using short-term daily price pivots label the pivot immediately preceding the gap as p0 Count the gap as 2pivots labeling it p1 amp p2 After p3 has formed and prices reverse towards a short-term p4 draw a horizontalline 2 price tics or more (individual preference)to the right of p3 Enter the market only if prices reach orpenetrate that line within a few days after reversing from p4 Please look over your own charts to see if you can find places where the gap trade technique could have beenused Send me a sample when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 001925

Hello Gordon this is my chart with a gap trade RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 065538

Hello TradersZone Thursday April 08 2000 121925 PM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt this is my chart with a gap trade TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Good examplethe gap trade technique shines when an issue in at or near a P5 Similar to the one on thechart you sent Heres another trading signal tool Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Dr Andrews used several techniques which helped him determine whether a P5 was near at hand Youllrecall that he observed most price moves ended or had a significant reversal at a P5 This technique uses alternate closing prices after a P4 has been formed As with many of his studies thenumber 5 is used The chart accompanying this segment shows that there were 5 alternate closes to thedownside after P4 was put in Dr Andrews noted that whenever 5 or more alternate closes followed a P4 theprobabilities were high that a P5 was near at hand An added feature to this chart study is the sideways channel Notice how the 2nd target price and the 5thalternate close nearly coincide

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 12 April 2000 200730

Hello Gordon This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 13 April 2000 082418

Monday April 12 2000 80730 AM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hello TradersZone Good chart example of this Andrews toolanother of his very unusual observations that workmore often than not Heres the final part of this lesson Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom In this trendline method Dr Andrews once again used the number 5 as the basis for locating aprobable reversal area He found this technique to be especially useful whenever a clear orobvious pivot count didnt show up onthe price move under study Trendlines are drawn using the course trendline method When the 5th trendline is broken theprobability is high that the trend under study has ended A mini-median line pitchfork andorsliding parallel could be used for pricing a trading order The accompanying chart of Compaq Computer is an example of how the trendline study could beused The pivot count beginning at the October low is difficult to nail down There were severalsmall areas of congestion but no sizeable corrections while prices advanced The count wasunclear By following the price action using the course trendline technique however the traderwould have been alerted to the possibility of a change of trend when the 5th trendline was brokenin early February Try this technique on your own charts When youre ready please send me an example of yourstudy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 19 April 2000 124108

Hello Gordon this is my example with 5 trendlines RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[6] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 20 April 2000 012726

Monday April 19 2000 124108 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt this is my example with 5 trendlines

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Good example of the 5 TL technique Always reminds me of how the fairly simple tools often do a better job than manyof the sophisticated studies out there

That was the last part of lesson 5 Lesson 6 attached is made in one mailing Youll find Dr Andrews trading rules alongwith a wrap-up review which uses several of his rules You might have questions about some of the rules so feel free tosend them as they arise

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Dr Andrews had an abbreviated set of trading rules on several index cards that he carried around with him in his shirtpocket He said every trading day turned up something new on his charts and by having his rules in his pocket he wasreminded of the need for a methodical approach to his analysis Quite a comment coming from the man who wrote therule book

In this the final lesson of the course Dr Andrews original trading rules and observations are presented Lets work witha few of them at this point

Using charts of issues you follow please send me an example that illustrates your interpretation of each of the followingrules

Rule 4 Anticipating major Ps

Rule 7 Penetration rule

Rule 8 Price failure rule

Rule 11 1-ML23 AR Centerline

Rule 12 Sliding Parallel rule

Rule 15 Mini-median line parallel to buy or sell

Feel free to include any other course techniques you choose to apply but please include examples of the above as aminimum Use more than one technique on a chart if your analysis supports it Send as many charts as you like alongwith your questionscomments

Lesson 6 - Dr Andrews Trading Rules

This lesson covers course rules and significant observations as taught by Dr Andrews in his original trading course Therules are those that he used in his own trading and are provided to serve as a checklist for use with the course tradingmethods youve learned

Rule 1 Where prices are always headed Rule You course members are among the fortunate few to be able to draw astraight line and know that prices are headed toward that ML Very few investors have ever applied this ML principle ofstatistics to price fluctuations and weve never seen this in any books on investment You are among the very few who

know that prices are always headed toward the newest ML

Rule 2 The Rule of coming opposites applies all through life In the bible we find Blessed at they that mourn for theyshall be comforted As investors we know that any losses can be recovered by using course methods

Rule 3 Turn your mind about or Rethink for all good is at hand We should mentally prepare ourselves for thecoming reversal in prices and other affairs Heres one way for example that you course members who know the MLrules can use When prices are skyrocketing upward we do this preparation by thinking If prices pivoted here today atthis price Id draw a new ML bisecting the distance between todays price and the price from which the rise started Andwe know now that if this is a Major Pivot prices will fall rapidly to this new ML Profits from such drops are big and quick

Rule 4 Rule for anticipating major Ps If during congestion or after a rally or decline you can count four previous Psthe fifth one is highly probable to be the one from which a new trend starts

Rule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can make a quick big profit is to watch for the EPformations

Rule 6 The other reversal rule is that prices tend to reverse at or near any ML as well as at any extension of each MLAnd also at any MLH or extensions of MLH

Rule 7 The Penetration Rule is that whenever prices gap past or plunge through any ML there is a high probability thatthey will quickly return to it temporarily and then resume the trend they had before they gapped or plunged through

Rule 8 Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P of reversal and the MLthe probability is that this price reversal will go further than it did on its approach toward the ML

Rule 9 The price failure rule is negated when the next price trend is also a failure in reaching the ML This is almostinvariably a signal of a big fast move in the direction indicated by this last space Rule 10 When alternate median lines of comparable length slope in the same direction the trend is firm and rapidprice changes take place

Rule 11 When 1-ML23 is exactly reached at P4 it can be used as a highly reliable centerline for the AR method

Rule 12 Frequently after crossing a lower MLH prices continue to rise along the MLH Since the crossing of the MLHsignals a further drop is likely use a sliding parallel along the bottom of the most recent crossing If prices drop past thatsliding parallel line a sell signal is generated

Rule 13 MLs between P2 and P3 can start from a nearby or a remote P1 since prices tend to reverse at each of theseMLs Try several such P2-P3 MLs to discover the best fit

Rule 14 The distance of each MLH from its ML is the distance of the next warning line Use these warning lineswhenever a SH has signalled a buy or sell

Rule 15 Use the MMLH as a buy or sell signal when you expect a reversal because of a P5 Also when prices are at aWL ML extension line or where course lines converge or intersect

Rule 16 Converging lines that meet prices have shown the highest probability of a trend reversal

Rule 17 Two to four days is usually the maximum between P2 and P3 for a MML P1 can be a day or so back from P2and 3

Rule 18 The most reliable ActionReaction centerlines seem to be MPL 2P line 2 Gap line peak to low or low to peak

Rule 19 When prices pass through R lines look for a pull back and then a continuing move in the direction of the passthrough

Rule 20 Use gaps as Action lines from the centerline

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 003755

Hello Gordonhere is my example for Rule 4 And I have a question What are EP formations gtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 021242

Tuesday May 04 2000 123755 PM you wrote TZgt Hello GordonTZgt here is my example for Rule 4 TZgt And I have a question What are EP formations gtgtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegtgta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hi TradersZone Good use of the warning linesalso the EP material is part of lesson 4 Rather than go backthrough the files to see when (or if) it was sent Im sending it along with this reply Glad youbrought it up Best RegardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Tuesday May 04 2000208 PM Dr Andrews used a fairly common price chart formation that he found useful at probable P5market tops and bottoms The formation generally called a wedge or pennant by chartists isreferred to in Dr Andrews trading course as the Expanding Pivot (EP) One of the few chartformations used in the course he regarded it as among the most dependable indications that amarket top was forming Closely related to the EP is his Inverted Expanding Pivot (IEP) which henoted could often be observed at market bottoms Both are regarded as intermediate and long-term reversal indicators Dr Andrews found that both formations were most reliable when they occurred after a sharprapid price move coinciding with the formation of a probable P5 He said it wasnt unusual for theformation to take several weeks to complete and that conservative traders could best avoid thewhipsaw associated with congestion patterns by trading only in the direction of the probable price

break out of the EP or IEP formation The attached charts illustrate these formations Please look over your own charts for an example ofthe EP and IEP and send me a copy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 232127

Hello Gordon Thank you for the lesson with the EP material I couldnt find it in any previous emailHere is my example for Rule 7 RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Rule 4Date Samstag 6 Mai 2000 080827

Wednesday May 05 2000 112127 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt Thank you for the lesson with the EP materialTZgt I couldnt find it in any previous emailTZgt Here is my example for Rule 7

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hi TradersZone

Glad you mentioned it earlierexcept for the EP IEP and hissideways channel Dr Andrews didnt have much to say about chartpatterns and formations These are good ones to use though

Your study of the penetration rule was good Later

Best Regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Wednesday May 05 2000801 PM

Page 20: Pitchfork primer

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next partDate Freitag 11 Februar 2000 234113

I think the placement of the circles is clear to me nowI have attached another chart with a sideways count RegardsTradersZone gtTradersZoneI sent this yesterday but will re-send It was part ofgtmy reply to your question regarding the circle I dont have a recordgtof your return chartwork for this part If its a duplicate send sorry

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject SidewaysDate Montag 14 Februar 2000 054227

At 21100 114100 PM you wrotegtI think the placement of the circles is clear to me nowgtI have attached another chart with a sideways countgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone Your chart was on target Looks like youre ready for the next part Here it is Regards Gordon During this segment youll learn how to arrive at two price targets using Dr Andrews sidewayscount Simple arithmetic is all thats required once the sideways channel and circles are in place Well continue to use the Brightpoint chart which is attached Note that Brightpoint fell throughthe bottom channel line at the point where we placed our second circle so figuring out possibledownside targets would have been in order at that time Heres how thats done 1 Determine the price range of the channel In this case the range is $4 34 (21 12 - 16 34) 2 Count the number of circles on the lower channel line The lower line is used in this casebecause thats the line that didnt hold Prices went through it returned to check it out and thencontinued lower 3 Multiply the price range of the channel times the number of circles drawn on the lower channelline (4 34 x 2 = 9 12) 4 Subtract that figure from the upper channel line priceThe result becomes downside price target 1 (21 12 - 9 12 = 12) 5 Next subtract that same figure from the price at the lower channel line Thats price target 2(16 34 - 9 12 = 7 14)

In the case of an upside channel breakout the procedure is reversed Please draw a few channelsand figure out some downside targets on your own charts When youre ready send me two orthree examples of your work As always send your questions as they arise

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re SidewaysDate Montag 14 Februar 2000 134314

Here are my examples I couldnt find enough charts with downside targets so I included some charts with upside targets Do the channel lines always have to be horizontal When I look at my charts I find more channels with an upward slope or adownward slope RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Sideways channelsDate Freitag 18 Februar 2000 005531

At 21400 14300 PM you wrotegtHere are my examples I couldnt find enough charts with downsidegttargets so I included some charts with upside targetsgt gtDo the channel lines always have to be horizontal When I look at mygtcharts I find more channels with an upward slope or a downward slopegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone The sideways method can be used with either up or down Sorry didnt mean to imply that only downsidetargets should be found Ill reword that portion of the lesson Thanks for mentioning it Dr Andrews sideways method works only on horizontal channels Others have mentioned the slopingchannels also and have wondered if there is some method to use with them I know of none Ive askedother course members for their ideas on how to approach this problem but so far no one has come up with amethod I would think that there should be a solution but have not personally taken the time to research itIf some method could be found that works as often as the Andrews sideways count it would be a significantfind The Andrews sideways count doesnt always hit the targets as you saw on your chart of Bausch amp Lomb Itworks more often than not though and it still amazes me at how often prices reach the targets Heres an observation to keep in mind Quite often after the first target is reached prices will reverse andhead back towards the channel At times youll note that they return inside the channel They will thenreverse again and head back towards the second price target These reversals happen frequently and presenttrading opportunities Im including the final segment of this lesson Regards Gordon So far in the course youve learned about Dr Andrews pivot counting procedure pitchfork and sidewayscount Youve noticed by now how often prices change trend at a P5 Youve seen how the 0-34 ML methodcan help locate the probable P5 area Youve seen how often price targets are met using the sideways countmethod The tendency for prices to reverse at a median line should be recognized as a high probability eventas well In coming lessons youll be shown how Dr Andrews used these and other high probability events totrade the stock and commodity markets The tools and techniques he used will help you put the finishingtouches on your market analysis using Andrews lines

Before continuing on to the next lesson lets briefly review what has so far been covered The attached chartprovides an opportunity to illustrate the methods referred to above Please draw these methods on thechart and return to me

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Sideways channelsDate Montag 21 Februar 2000 193743

gtBefore continuing on to the next lesson lets briefly review what hasgtso far been covered The attached chart provides an opportunity togtillustrate the methods referred to above Please draw these methods ongtthe chart and return to me Hello Gordonhere is my chart RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next lesson attachedDate Mittwoch 23 Februar 2000 014539

At 22100 73700 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongthere is my chartgt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Good job on the pivots sideways count and pitchforkLooks like youre ready to move on to the next part It wont be long and things will begin to fall inplace Regards Gordon Lesson 4 continued In one of his course letters Dr Andrews wrote The Law of Physics stated by Newton that Actionand Reaction are equal and opposite was first applied to prices by your Course Directors friendthe late Roger Babson who attributed his earnings of several million dollars to this law Beginning with this segment of lesson four and continuing in lesson five youll learn how to drawand apply the ActionReaction trading method as taught by Dr Andrews in his trading course The AR method requires a centerline or CL from which to start The CL can be any of thefollowing - MPL - ML - MLH - 2P line - 2 Gap line - Peak to low line - Low to peak lineThese are the primary lines that Dr Andrews used He stressed that some pencil work and a goodeyeball was needed in order to find the best fitting CL As with most other chart lines somework better than others The task is to find the best fit as he put it You will be shown examples of

each of the above CLs in this lesson and the next Determining which of the above listed lines to use as the CL is the first step in the ActionReactionmethod The solution often presents itself With a little practice a quick scan of the chart understudy will be all thats needed to spot the most likely CL Well begin with the attached chart Notethe CL drawn In this example a MPL (multi-pivot line) was used as the CL A MPL is a straightline that connects three or more consecutive pivots without passing through prices Theconnecting line is then extended Ive circled the three pivots that form the MPL on the chartThere are several other places on our chart where a MPL CL can be drawn Please bear in mindthat this is just the first step of the process Identification of likely CLs is all were after here Seeif you can locate two more then draw them in and send the chart back to me Well take up fromthere

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next lesson attachedDate Mittwoch 23 Februar 2000 212304

gtLesson 4 continuedgt gtIn one of his course letters Dr Andrews wrote The Law of Physicsgtstated by Newton that Action and Reaction are equal and opposite wasgtfirst applied to prices by your Course Directors friend the lategtRoger Babson who attributed his earnings of several million dollars to this lawgt gtBeginning with this segment of lesson four and continuing in lessongtfive youll learn how to draw and apply the ActionReaction tradinggtmethod as taught by Dr Andrews in his trading coursegt gtThe AR method requires a centerline or CL from which to startgtThe CL can be any of the followinggt - MPLgt - MLgt - MLHgt - 2P linegt - 2 Gap linegt - Peak to low linegt - Low to peak line Hello Gordon2P line 2 Gap line Peak to low line Low to peak line ndash actually I dont know what these lines areAre they discussed in Lesson 3 I believe you havenrsquot sent me this lesson yetAnyway I found two more MPLs on the Novellus Chart and drew them in RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Lesson 3Date Mittwoch 23 Februar 2000 235958

At 22300 92300 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt2P line 2 Gap line Peak to low line Low to peak line - actually I dont knowgtwhat these lines are Are they discussed in Lesson 3 I believe you didntgtsent me this lesson yetgtAnyway I found two more MPLs on the Novellus Chart and drew them ingt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone My apologiesI sent you an outdated version of the lesson Thanks for letting me know Musthave been my bedtime Heres the correct version Regards Gordon Lesson 3 In one of his course letters Dr Andrews wrote The Law of Physics stated by Newton that Actionand Reaction are equal and opposite was first applied to prices by your Course Directors friendthe late Roger Babson who attributed his earnings of several million dollars to this law In this lesson youll be introduced to the ActionReaction trading method as taught by Dr Andrewsin his trading course The AR method requires a centerline or CL from which to start The CL can be any of thefollowing - MPL Multi-pivot line A line drawn across 3 or more pivots - ML Median line The middle line of the pitchfork - MLH Median line parallel Either parallel line of the pitchfork - 2P line A line drawn across 2 pivots - 2 Gap line A line drawn connecting 2 gaps without touching prices in between - Peak to low line A line drawn connecting the high and low of a price leg

- Low to peak line A line drawn connecting the low and high of a price leg These are the primary lines that Dr Andrews used He stressed that some pencil work and a goodeyeball was needed in order to find the best fitting CL As with most other chart lines somework better than others The task is to find the best fit as he put it You will be shown examples ofeach of the above CLs Determining which of the above listed lines to use as the CL is the first step in the ActionReactionmethod With practice a quick view of the chart under study will be all thats needed to spot themost likely CL Youll be shown later how to experiment with possible combinations in order tofind the centerline that is most in tune with the market under study Well begin with the attached chart Note the CL drawn In this example a MPL (multi-pivot line)was used as the CL A MPL is a straight line that connects three or more consecutive pivotswithout passing through prices The connecting line is then extended Ive circled the three pivotsthat form the MPL on the chart There are several other places on our chart where a MPL CL canbe drawn Please bear in mind that this is just the first step of the process Identification of likelyCLs is all were after here See if you can locate two more then draw them in and send the chartback to me

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Donnerstag 24 Februar 2000 025105

At 22300 92300 PM you wroteI found two more MPLs on the Novellus Chart and drew them ingt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your mpls were correct This next segment shows the purpose of the centerline and how it isused Your payment in full arrived today TradersZone Thank you Regards Gordon Lesson 3 continued Please refer to the attached chart of Novellus The line drawn connecting the 3 circled pivots is amulti-pivot line (MPL) and represents the centerline (CL) well be using in this example Recall inthe previous segment that several types of centerlines are possible The choice is determined byexperimenting with the potential combinations on the chart under study Its best to try to locate acenterline somewhere close to the middle of the price chart in order to have sufficient past andforward data to use with the study This will become clear as you work with the method Once the centerline is drawn the next step is to locate a previous low or high pivot point to use fordrawing an action line Dr Andrews observed that the low pivot points often seem to work bestbut that either could be used In our example a line starting at the previous significant low wasdrawn parallel to the CL It is labeled A-1 (Action line 1) because it represents the first actionline Dr Andrews called it an action line because it was drawn as a result of a previous pivot (pricereversal) that had taken place Next a parallel line was drawn to the right of the CL and labeled R-1 Notice that it is the same distance from the CL as the corresponding A-1 line It is labeled R-1because it represents the first reaction line a line where prices are likely to stop or reverseNotice how prices reacted at the R-1 line in early 98 That serves as an indication that thecenterline chosen for this study should be a good one to use Not all reaction lines cause such aclear reversal as the R1 on this chart but many do Thats why its important to experiment withvarious centerline possibilities in order to find action lines that produce reaction lines which createthe greatest number of pivots or price stall-outs This experimentation is often quite time

consuming but experience has shown that it is time well spent When a centerline is found that isin tune with the price action of the issue under study it can be a highly effective tool for use inlocating probable reversal areas When combined with pitchfork lines the AR method can pinpointpotential reversal areas that are generally not recognized as such by others Dr Andrewstechniques for using the pitchfork and AR lines together are covered in later lessons In coming segments well study other lines that Dr Andrews used for his centerlines In themeantime experiment with the multi-pivot centerline on your own charts Then please send mean example of your work along with any questions you may have

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Freitag 25 Februar 2000 211356

gtIn the meantime experiment with the multi-pivot centerline on your owngtcharts Then please send me an example of your work along with anygtquestions you may have Hello Gordon I was wondering how many ActionReaction lines could be drawn on a chart On my attached chart I found at least 6 parallellines which had a significant meaning for the price RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject AR linesDate Montag 28 Februar 2000 080128

gtHello Gordongt gtI was wondering how many ActionReaction lines could be drawn on agtchart On my attached chart I found at least 6 parallel lines which hadgta significant meaning for the pricegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hi TradersZone Theres no set number of lines that can be drawnactually the more you can find the betterFinding a good centerline is the key And once you find lines that work such as you did anynumber of parallel lines can be drawn You are doing exactly what Dr Andrews didtaking thetime and effort to find the best fitting sets of lines Each chart has them and each chart is differentas Im sure youve found Nice work Heres the next part Regards Gordon Lesson 3 continued One of Dr Andrews favorite techniques dealt with gapsan often times perplexing price event formany traders His observations over the years suggested to him that while gaps show upfrequently on many price charts few traders have a method for including them as an integral partof their chart analysis Thats not surprising since not much has been published about how toapproach the use of gaps in a trading method Dr Andrews however found several ways to putprice gaps to good use An ActionReaction centerline which uses gaps as its basis is one suchmethod Please refer to the attached chart of Cendant Youll see that a centerline was drawn which passedthrough the July gap Note that it also came in contact with several pivots thereby qualifying as agapmulti-pivot centerline It is drawn by starting at the April low pivot and extending a line acrossand through the gap in mid-July It subsequently touches two additional high pivots Dr Andrews counted each gap as two pivots He noted that the more pivots a line touched the

stronger the line tended to be in the future Good reason then for using the July gap as the basisfor an ActionReaction study Our CL is labelled a gap-mpl-CL The May 98 high was used for the Action Line starting point A line was then drawn parallel to theCenterline as per ActionReaction procedure The corresponding Reaction Line was then drawn inIf this particular study had been drawn on Cendants chart right after the July gap was put in thepotential for prices to go all the way down to the Reaction Line might have seemed very slim at thetime Notice however that prices reached the Reaction Line in early September Youll see thishappen time and again as you work with the AR method The core of its effectiveness is a strongCL Please send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts of your choice

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re AR linesDate Montag 28 Februar 2000 155937

gtPlease send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts of yourgtchoice Hello Gordonhere are my examples RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject More on the ARDate Donnerstag 2 Maumlrz 2000 071158

At 22800 35900 PM you wrotegtgtPlease send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts ofgtgtyour choicegt gtHello Gordongthere are my examplesgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone You picked some good examples to use for your AR study Both showed the potential power of thismethod Takes time and lots of chart study sometimes to find the best set of lines but the rewardscan be many Heres something else to look at Regards Gordon The ActionReaction technique requires a strong centerline from which to begin The key todeciding which set of pivots to use for the centerline is found through experimenting with thevarious configurations visible on the chart under study The centerline might be a series of gapspivots an existing median line or any of Dr Andrews lines The task is to search for that centerlinewhich shows the greatest potential for projecting price reversal areas Dr Andrews did that byfinding a likely centerline near the middle of his price chart That allowed him to use any of theprevious pivots for his action lines By experimenting he found reaction lines that did the best jobof pegging reversal areas at data points located forward of the centerline Reaction lines are equal and opposite of the action lines and serve to project price levels at whicha reversal can be expected That is why the task of seeking out the best centerline is so importantDr Andrews reasoned that a series of reaction lines which have pegged price reversals in the pastis likely to continue to be in tune with current and future market price action Having severalprevious pivots to use as anchors for drawing action lines is thus essential The attached chart of Lattice illustrates this concept Please bear in mind that the gapmplcenterline is not the only centerline one could use on this chart You might want to study the chartfor other AR possibilities Try a peak-to-peak CL or a multi-pivot CL Send me your studies along

with any questions

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re More on the ARDate Samstag 4 Maumlrz 2000 002521

gtThe attached chart of Lattice illustrates this conceptgtPlease bear in mind that the gapmpl centerline is not the onlygtcenterline one could use on this chartgtYou might want to study the chart for other AR possibilitiesgtTry a peak-to-peak CL or a multi-pivot CL Send me your studiesgtalong with any questions Hello Gordonhere is my chart RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Peak to peak clDate Sonntag 5 Maumlrz 2000 064107

At 3400 122500 AM you wrotegtHello Gordongthere is my chartgt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Looks like you have the concept down Takes time and a lot of chart work to find the bestcenterline When the reaction lines dont seem to peg reversal areas chances are the centerline isnot the one that is best in tune with the price action of the issue under studyDespite the time required for this method it was one of Dr Andrews stand-bysAR lines could befound on most of his charts Im sending a chart with an example of a peak-to-peak CL Regards Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Peak to peak clDate Sonntag 5 Maumlrz 2000 171232

Hello Gordon I think the peak-to-peak CL on the last chart I sent to you was not really drawn from peak to peakIm sending another example RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next LessonDate Mittwoch 8 Maumlrz 2000 072526

At 3500 51200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtI think the peak-to-peak CL on the last chart I sent to you was notgtreally drawn from peak to peakgtIm sending another examplegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your peak to peak cl example was correctly drawn Thats a fairly simple approach but quite oftenthe peak to peak yields better reaction lines Heres the first part of the next lesson Regards Gordon Youll find times when prices dont quite reach the ML but instead drift alongside or away from itThe Schiff ML was designed to be used in place of the regular ML whenever that happens Suchprice action can be found at any place on a chart but most frequently occurs after a sharp sell-offor run-up of prices Dr Andrews also used the Schiff ML whenever his regular ML sloped at an unusually steep angleHe said it helped smooth out irregular price action such as that caused by unexpected earningsnews crop planting delays or poor growing conditions crop production reports etc Youll findnearly vertical price moves over a short period of time on many charts The Schiff ML method helpsput things back in perspective when that happens Well use the chart of Sterling Bancorp as an example of prices drifting away from the regular MLThat ML is drawn in black Prices didnt quite reach the ML but drifted alongside and eventuallyaway from it The Schiff ML and parallel lines are drawn in red Notice how prices were containedwithin the Schiff pitchfork until they finally broke down at the upper parallel line The procedure for drawing the Schiff ML is the same as for the regular ML except the startingpoint is located midway between the first 2 pivots youll be using The Sterling Bancorp chart

illustrates how this is done Dr Andrews also suggested using the Schiff ML whenever the regular ML method doesnt seem tobe in sync with price action Practice this procedure on your own charts and send a couple examples when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next LessonDate Donnerstag 9 Maumlrz 2000 001143

Hello Gordon in my charting software (Dynamic Trader) the Schiff ML is drawn by finding the midpoint of the line between pivot A and pivot Bmoving this point horizontally to directly above or below (depending on whether A is a low or high pivot) the A pivot anddrawing a line from his point through the midpoint of the BC swingAre there different methods of drawing a Schiff MLI was too lazy to draw Schiff MLs by hand with the method you described so Im sending my examples with the Dynamic TraderSchiff MLs -) RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject SchiffDate Samstag 11 Maumlrz 2000 070226

At 3900 121100 AM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtin my charting software (Dynamic Trader) the Schiff ML is drawn bygtfinding the midpoint of the line between pivot A and pivot B movinggtthis point horizontally to directly above or below (depending ongtwhether A is a low or high pivot) the A pivot and drawing a linegtgtfrom his point through the midpoint of the BC swinggtAre there different methods of drawing a Schiff MLgtI was too lazy to draw Schiff MLs by hand with the method yougtdescribed so Im sending my examples with the Dynamic Trader Schiff MLs -)gt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your program Schiff line procedure is fineits actually what Dr Andrews called a modified schiff ml and is onlyslightly different than the one I sent you initially The one you used is preferred by most course members Im sendingthe modified Schiff lesson and a chart along with this email The chart example shows how to use it with 0-34 pivots Regards Gordon

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Sliding Parallel LineDate Montag 13 Maumlrz 2000 005252

Hello TradersZone Heres one of the tools Dr Andrews used most often when entering exiting or reversing marketpositions Not many people know about this technique Regards Gordon The Sliding Parallel (SH) is drawn whenever prices cross an Andrews line and then move along itFor example if the bottom of a daily price bar range drops through a lower parallel line of apitchfork a new parallel line is then drawn from that low and extended to the right If the nextdays price bar drops through that sliding parallel line a sell signal is generated Whenever price action dictates a sliding parallel the next step is to draw a Warning Line Thewarning line is an additional parallel line that is an image extension of the original pitchforkchannels It serves as a warning that if prices penetrate the sliding parallel the next likely target isthe WL The attached chart of Avis illustrates these procedures Please try these on your own charts andsend me an example

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Sliding Parallel LineDate Dienstag 14 Maumlrz 2000 225737

Hello Gordon this is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning line RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 065606

At 31400 105700 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtthis is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning linegt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone Your chart of circuit city was a good example for this study I may have mentioned it earlier but DrAndrews used this technique on a regular basis The next part of this lesson covers another of hisfavorite tools the mini-median line pitchfork Here it is Regards Gordon The Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry and exit tools Though mostoften drawn using alternate closing prices alternate highs and lows can also be usedin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days is usually the maximumbetween pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or more back from P2 Dr Andrews used Mini-Median Line pitchforks for buy and sell signals whenever he expected areversal Some examples include a probable P5 or when prices are at a Warning Line ML MLHmajor ML extension or a sideways channel price target When prices cross the Mini-Median LineParallel (MMLH) a sliding parallel (SH) is used for order entry

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 231537

gtThe Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry andgtexit tools Though most often drawn using alternate closing pricesgtalternate highs and lows can also be usedgtin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days isgtusually the maximum between pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or moregtback from P2

Hello Gordon

wouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timingCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available whenDr Andrews was alive

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject intraday chartsDate Samstag 18 Maumlrz 2000 012400

At 31600 111500 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongtgtwouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsgtinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timinggtCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available when DrgtAndrews was alivegtgtRegardsgtTradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Youre absolutely correctintraday charts were not available when DrAndrews was a trader

Im reading between the lines here but if you plan to day-trade using the course techniques ie thepitchfork then I agree that the regular pitchfork would be more useful on intraday charts Otherwisewhipsaw would be a significant problem Please get back to me if I didnt address your questionbecause this is a very important technique The mini-median line pitchfork and sliding parallel showedup on most of Dr Andrews charts

Regards

Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re intraday chartsDate Dienstag 21 Maumlrz 2000 220322

Hello Gordon

You are right Im planning to daytrade SampP futures using the course techniques among other things

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 003408

Hi TradersZone Here are a couple Andrews techniques that will help anticipate the breakout direction of asideways channelThey work often enough to warrant keep handy Regards Gordon In an earlier lesson you were introduced to Dr Andrews sideways count You saw how frequentlythe sideways count method provided high probability price objectives after the breakout from theestablished channel took place In this segment of lesson 4 youll be shown 2 congestion area techniques that can help youdetermine the probable sideways channel price breakout direction Both rely on the use of pivots The first uses the pivot points that are circled on a sideways channel Dr Andrews observed thatwhenever a sideways channel results in at least 5 circle contacts the eventual price breakoutwould very often be in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle If circle 5 is at thetop of the channel for example the eventual price breakout would likely be to the upside If circle5 is at the bottom of the channel look for a downside breakout Dr Andrews noted that thistechnique can be subject to false breakouts but that such breakouts are usually followed shortlyafter with a confirmed breakout in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle Heemphasized that this study is best considered as a rule of thumb observation He viewed it as asupporting indicator for use with a short-term pitchfork as prices approached a channel line There are 2 charts attached that show how this works

The second technique in this part of lesson 4 deals with a sideways channelthat is building shortly after a P3 has been formed Dr Andrews noted thatwhenever that happened the probabilities were high that prices wouldbreakout in the same direction they were moving prior to the formation ofthe sideways channel The attached P3 to sideways example chart shows thisprocedure

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 205235

Hello Gordon here is my example for the 5 circle sideways count RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Lesson 5Date Montag 27 Maumlrz 2000 060731

At 32400 85200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my example for the 5 circle sideways countgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt gt Hi TradersZone Good example of the 5th circle tendency to predict the direction of a sideways breakout Any luckfinding a chart showing the P3 to sideways rule Im sending the first part of the next lesson This trendline method is a useful tool with all of DrAndrews course lines He used it all the time but especially when looking for confirmation of othercourse method trading signals Regards Gordon The Course Trendline__________________________________________________________ Next well discuss the trendline Seasoned traders agree that the trendline is one of their mostimportant tools No matter what kind of trading program or technique they use the trendline on achart is a must But one of the biggest mistakes made by amateurs and professionals alike isinconsistently drawing or defining the trendline Dr Andrews trendline procedure is simpleconsistent and accurate It works extremely well with the pivot count and with the pitchfork For an uptrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the lowest low up and to thehighest minor low point preceding the highest high The line must not pass through prices inbetween the two low points Extend the line(Attached chart of Brightpoint) For a downtrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the highest high point to thelowest minor high point preceding the lowest low so that it does not pass through prices inbetween the two high points Extend the line (Brightpoint chart) Thats all theres to it Its simple consistent and it works well with other Andrews lines It also

helps eliminate personal bias and haphazard analysis Practice drawing these trendlines on your own charts Send me any questions you might have andthen e-mail a chart of your choosing which shows at least two uptrend and two downtrend linesthat youve drawn_______________________________________________________________________

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Lesson 5Date Dienstag 28 Maumlrz 2000 120224

Hello Gordon here is my chart with trendlinesWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going above the trendline again should I draw a new trendline anddelete the old one Attached is another chart with the P3 to sideways rule I finally found an example for it RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Price failure techniqueDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081412

At 32800 120200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my chart with trendlinesgtWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going abovegtthe trendline again should I draw a new trendline and delete the oldgtone Hi TradersZone Take a look at the chart Im returningI added some lines for you to considerWith the course trendline once its broken a new one should be started Theres a technique thatties in with this coming up soon Meanwhile heres an important technique to work on It deals with those times when prices dontreach the ML Regards Gordon Dr Andrews Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P ofreversaland the ML the probability is that this price reversal will go further thanitdid on its approach toward the ML (Extract of original course material) A price failure very often indicates a sizeable reversal will take placeThepitchforks drawn on the chart of Home Depot illustrate the concept of pricefailure Dr Andrews routinely drew a new pitchfork on his chart after a newsignificant pivot had formed He knew that prices had a high probability ofreaching the new ML before stalling out or reversing If prices reversedbeforereaching the ML thereby forming a new pivot he termed it a price failureTheunderlying idea here is that Dr Andrews fully anticipated his median linewouldact as a price magnet To conclude that a price reversal resulted in a price failure Dr Andrewsused

these primary signalsa subsequent price penetration of a short-termmulti-pivotline andor a return of prices to and penetration of the parallel lineformed atpivot 3 of the pitchfork (The circles on the Home Depot chart denote theparallelline penetration signal To avoid clutter the mpl lines were not drawn) One possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart of ConsecoIncLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me a copy

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject ChartDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081800Attachments image002png

Hi TradersZone Forgot the chart Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Price failure techniqueDate Samstag 1 April 2000 201000

gtOne possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart ofgtConseco IncgtLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me agtcopy Hi Gordon here are my charts with price failures RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Mittwoch 5 April 2000 235624

Hi TradersZone Good price failure examples you sentany comments or questions about it Heres the next partanother old standby Dr Andrews kept handy Regards Gordon In this segment youll learn how to use the Fan line Technique To draw the fan lines youll apply the coursetrendline method which was introduced in an earlier lesson It might be well to emphasize that the practicalapplication of the course trendline method requires practice and experience both of which will serve youwell in this technique Dr Andrews used fan lines as an adjunct to his pitchfork sideways channel andactionreaction methods In the fan line study three trendlines are drawn from the original reversal pivot of the price correction understudy typically a P0 or a P5 Youll notice on the charts included with this study that each fan line is at aflatter angle than its predecessor When the third fan line is broken the rule is that the correction has endedand a new trend is under way Try this technique on some of your own charts and then please send me asample

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Donnerstag 6 April 2000 234315

Hi Gordon No I dont have any specific question about the price failure technique I guess the next likely target after a price failure wouldbe the warning line I have attached two charts with fan linesIs it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the third fan line is broken RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Next segmentDate Freitag 7 April 2000 003312

Hello TradersZone

Tuesday April 06 2000 114315 AM you wrote

TZgt Hi Gordon

TZgt No I dont have any specific question about the price failureTZgt technique I guess the next likely target after a price failureTZgt would be the warning line

TZgt I have attached two charts with fan linesTZgt Is it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the thirdTZgt fan line is broken

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Thats right the warning line is the next price target Additionalwarning lines can be drawn if needed but usually one will do it Ifprices go through the first warning line another can be drawn butmost likely a new pitchfork could be drawn instead which would bepreferable Helps stay current with recently formed pivots

When prices break through the third fan line a buy or sell signal isgiven Not sure what you mean by fourth target fan line Im a littledense today

Your chart work was goodthis is another handy tool for spotting thehigh probability of a price reversal or trend change

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject The Gap TradeDate Freitag 7 April 2000 004858

Hello TradersZone This trading signal doesnt show up very often but past observations have shown that its well worth watching for Dr Andrews placed a lot of emphasis on the importance of price gaps something many traders overlook This is one of his gap uses Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom The Gap Trading Technique Price gaps can be a dilemma for many traders The general rule denoting market strength or weakness after ahigh volume gap often comes up short after the initial reaction is over Many gappers simply run out ofsteam A high volume gap in itself seems to offer precious little evidence that a profitable move is about toget under way Dr Andrews used price gaps somewhat differently than others He counted a gap as 2 pivots Youll see howthat works in the following technique which uses a gap to arrive at a price level for a buy or sell order Using short-term daily price pivots label the pivot immediately preceding the gap as p0 Count the gap as 2pivots labeling it p1 amp p2 After p3 has formed and prices reverse towards a short-term p4 draw a horizontalline 2 price tics or more (individual preference)to the right of p3 Enter the market only if prices reach orpenetrate that line within a few days after reversing from p4 Please look over your own charts to see if you can find places where the gap trade technique could have beenused Send me a sample when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 001925

Hello Gordon this is my chart with a gap trade RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 065538

Hello TradersZone Thursday April 08 2000 121925 PM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt this is my chart with a gap trade TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Good examplethe gap trade technique shines when an issue in at or near a P5 Similar to the one on thechart you sent Heres another trading signal tool Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Dr Andrews used several techniques which helped him determine whether a P5 was near at hand Youllrecall that he observed most price moves ended or had a significant reversal at a P5 This technique uses alternate closing prices after a P4 has been formed As with many of his studies thenumber 5 is used The chart accompanying this segment shows that there were 5 alternate closes to thedownside after P4 was put in Dr Andrews noted that whenever 5 or more alternate closes followed a P4 theprobabilities were high that a P5 was near at hand An added feature to this chart study is the sideways channel Notice how the 2nd target price and the 5thalternate close nearly coincide

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 12 April 2000 200730

Hello Gordon This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 13 April 2000 082418

Monday April 12 2000 80730 AM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hello TradersZone Good chart example of this Andrews toolanother of his very unusual observations that workmore often than not Heres the final part of this lesson Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom In this trendline method Dr Andrews once again used the number 5 as the basis for locating aprobable reversal area He found this technique to be especially useful whenever a clear orobvious pivot count didnt show up onthe price move under study Trendlines are drawn using the course trendline method When the 5th trendline is broken theprobability is high that the trend under study has ended A mini-median line pitchfork andorsliding parallel could be used for pricing a trading order The accompanying chart of Compaq Computer is an example of how the trendline study could beused The pivot count beginning at the October low is difficult to nail down There were severalsmall areas of congestion but no sizeable corrections while prices advanced The count wasunclear By following the price action using the course trendline technique however the traderwould have been alerted to the possibility of a change of trend when the 5th trendline was brokenin early February Try this technique on your own charts When youre ready please send me an example of yourstudy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 19 April 2000 124108

Hello Gordon this is my example with 5 trendlines RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[6] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 20 April 2000 012726

Monday April 19 2000 124108 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt this is my example with 5 trendlines

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Good example of the 5 TL technique Always reminds me of how the fairly simple tools often do a better job than manyof the sophisticated studies out there

That was the last part of lesson 5 Lesson 6 attached is made in one mailing Youll find Dr Andrews trading rules alongwith a wrap-up review which uses several of his rules You might have questions about some of the rules so feel free tosend them as they arise

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Dr Andrews had an abbreviated set of trading rules on several index cards that he carried around with him in his shirtpocket He said every trading day turned up something new on his charts and by having his rules in his pocket he wasreminded of the need for a methodical approach to his analysis Quite a comment coming from the man who wrote therule book

In this the final lesson of the course Dr Andrews original trading rules and observations are presented Lets work witha few of them at this point

Using charts of issues you follow please send me an example that illustrates your interpretation of each of the followingrules

Rule 4 Anticipating major Ps

Rule 7 Penetration rule

Rule 8 Price failure rule

Rule 11 1-ML23 AR Centerline

Rule 12 Sliding Parallel rule

Rule 15 Mini-median line parallel to buy or sell

Feel free to include any other course techniques you choose to apply but please include examples of the above as aminimum Use more than one technique on a chart if your analysis supports it Send as many charts as you like alongwith your questionscomments

Lesson 6 - Dr Andrews Trading Rules

This lesson covers course rules and significant observations as taught by Dr Andrews in his original trading course Therules are those that he used in his own trading and are provided to serve as a checklist for use with the course tradingmethods youve learned

Rule 1 Where prices are always headed Rule You course members are among the fortunate few to be able to draw astraight line and know that prices are headed toward that ML Very few investors have ever applied this ML principle ofstatistics to price fluctuations and weve never seen this in any books on investment You are among the very few who

know that prices are always headed toward the newest ML

Rule 2 The Rule of coming opposites applies all through life In the bible we find Blessed at they that mourn for theyshall be comforted As investors we know that any losses can be recovered by using course methods

Rule 3 Turn your mind about or Rethink for all good is at hand We should mentally prepare ourselves for thecoming reversal in prices and other affairs Heres one way for example that you course members who know the MLrules can use When prices are skyrocketing upward we do this preparation by thinking If prices pivoted here today atthis price Id draw a new ML bisecting the distance between todays price and the price from which the rise started Andwe know now that if this is a Major Pivot prices will fall rapidly to this new ML Profits from such drops are big and quick

Rule 4 Rule for anticipating major Ps If during congestion or after a rally or decline you can count four previous Psthe fifth one is highly probable to be the one from which a new trend starts

Rule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can make a quick big profit is to watch for the EPformations

Rule 6 The other reversal rule is that prices tend to reverse at or near any ML as well as at any extension of each MLAnd also at any MLH or extensions of MLH

Rule 7 The Penetration Rule is that whenever prices gap past or plunge through any ML there is a high probability thatthey will quickly return to it temporarily and then resume the trend they had before they gapped or plunged through

Rule 8 Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P of reversal and the MLthe probability is that this price reversal will go further than it did on its approach toward the ML

Rule 9 The price failure rule is negated when the next price trend is also a failure in reaching the ML This is almostinvariably a signal of a big fast move in the direction indicated by this last space Rule 10 When alternate median lines of comparable length slope in the same direction the trend is firm and rapidprice changes take place

Rule 11 When 1-ML23 is exactly reached at P4 it can be used as a highly reliable centerline for the AR method

Rule 12 Frequently after crossing a lower MLH prices continue to rise along the MLH Since the crossing of the MLHsignals a further drop is likely use a sliding parallel along the bottom of the most recent crossing If prices drop past thatsliding parallel line a sell signal is generated

Rule 13 MLs between P2 and P3 can start from a nearby or a remote P1 since prices tend to reverse at each of theseMLs Try several such P2-P3 MLs to discover the best fit

Rule 14 The distance of each MLH from its ML is the distance of the next warning line Use these warning lineswhenever a SH has signalled a buy or sell

Rule 15 Use the MMLH as a buy or sell signal when you expect a reversal because of a P5 Also when prices are at aWL ML extension line or where course lines converge or intersect

Rule 16 Converging lines that meet prices have shown the highest probability of a trend reversal

Rule 17 Two to four days is usually the maximum between P2 and P3 for a MML P1 can be a day or so back from P2and 3

Rule 18 The most reliable ActionReaction centerlines seem to be MPL 2P line 2 Gap line peak to low or low to peak

Rule 19 When prices pass through R lines look for a pull back and then a continuing move in the direction of the passthrough

Rule 20 Use gaps as Action lines from the centerline

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 003755

Hello Gordonhere is my example for Rule 4 And I have a question What are EP formations gtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 021242

Tuesday May 04 2000 123755 PM you wrote TZgt Hello GordonTZgt here is my example for Rule 4 TZgt And I have a question What are EP formations gtgtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegtgta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hi TradersZone Good use of the warning linesalso the EP material is part of lesson 4 Rather than go backthrough the files to see when (or if) it was sent Im sending it along with this reply Glad youbrought it up Best RegardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Tuesday May 04 2000208 PM Dr Andrews used a fairly common price chart formation that he found useful at probable P5market tops and bottoms The formation generally called a wedge or pennant by chartists isreferred to in Dr Andrews trading course as the Expanding Pivot (EP) One of the few chartformations used in the course he regarded it as among the most dependable indications that amarket top was forming Closely related to the EP is his Inverted Expanding Pivot (IEP) which henoted could often be observed at market bottoms Both are regarded as intermediate and long-term reversal indicators Dr Andrews found that both formations were most reliable when they occurred after a sharprapid price move coinciding with the formation of a probable P5 He said it wasnt unusual for theformation to take several weeks to complete and that conservative traders could best avoid thewhipsaw associated with congestion patterns by trading only in the direction of the probable price

break out of the EP or IEP formation The attached charts illustrate these formations Please look over your own charts for an example ofthe EP and IEP and send me a copy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 232127

Hello Gordon Thank you for the lesson with the EP material I couldnt find it in any previous emailHere is my example for Rule 7 RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Rule 4Date Samstag 6 Mai 2000 080827

Wednesday May 05 2000 112127 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt Thank you for the lesson with the EP materialTZgt I couldnt find it in any previous emailTZgt Here is my example for Rule 7

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hi TradersZone

Glad you mentioned it earlierexcept for the EP IEP and hissideways channel Dr Andrews didnt have much to say about chartpatterns and formations These are good ones to use though

Your study of the penetration rule was good Later

Best Regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Wednesday May 05 2000801 PM

Page 21: Pitchfork primer

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject SidewaysDate Montag 14 Februar 2000 054227

At 21100 114100 PM you wrotegtI think the placement of the circles is clear to me nowgtI have attached another chart with a sideways countgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone Your chart was on target Looks like youre ready for the next part Here it is Regards Gordon During this segment youll learn how to arrive at two price targets using Dr Andrews sidewayscount Simple arithmetic is all thats required once the sideways channel and circles are in place Well continue to use the Brightpoint chart which is attached Note that Brightpoint fell throughthe bottom channel line at the point where we placed our second circle so figuring out possibledownside targets would have been in order at that time Heres how thats done 1 Determine the price range of the channel In this case the range is $4 34 (21 12 - 16 34) 2 Count the number of circles on the lower channel line The lower line is used in this casebecause thats the line that didnt hold Prices went through it returned to check it out and thencontinued lower 3 Multiply the price range of the channel times the number of circles drawn on the lower channelline (4 34 x 2 = 9 12) 4 Subtract that figure from the upper channel line priceThe result becomes downside price target 1 (21 12 - 9 12 = 12) 5 Next subtract that same figure from the price at the lower channel line Thats price target 2(16 34 - 9 12 = 7 14)

In the case of an upside channel breakout the procedure is reversed Please draw a few channelsand figure out some downside targets on your own charts When youre ready send me two orthree examples of your work As always send your questions as they arise

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re SidewaysDate Montag 14 Februar 2000 134314

Here are my examples I couldnt find enough charts with downside targets so I included some charts with upside targets Do the channel lines always have to be horizontal When I look at my charts I find more channels with an upward slope or adownward slope RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Sideways channelsDate Freitag 18 Februar 2000 005531

At 21400 14300 PM you wrotegtHere are my examples I couldnt find enough charts with downsidegttargets so I included some charts with upside targetsgt gtDo the channel lines always have to be horizontal When I look at mygtcharts I find more channels with an upward slope or a downward slopegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone The sideways method can be used with either up or down Sorry didnt mean to imply that only downsidetargets should be found Ill reword that portion of the lesson Thanks for mentioning it Dr Andrews sideways method works only on horizontal channels Others have mentioned the slopingchannels also and have wondered if there is some method to use with them I know of none Ive askedother course members for their ideas on how to approach this problem but so far no one has come up with amethod I would think that there should be a solution but have not personally taken the time to research itIf some method could be found that works as often as the Andrews sideways count it would be a significantfind The Andrews sideways count doesnt always hit the targets as you saw on your chart of Bausch amp Lomb Itworks more often than not though and it still amazes me at how often prices reach the targets Heres an observation to keep in mind Quite often after the first target is reached prices will reverse andhead back towards the channel At times youll note that they return inside the channel They will thenreverse again and head back towards the second price target These reversals happen frequently and presenttrading opportunities Im including the final segment of this lesson Regards Gordon So far in the course youve learned about Dr Andrews pivot counting procedure pitchfork and sidewayscount Youve noticed by now how often prices change trend at a P5 Youve seen how the 0-34 ML methodcan help locate the probable P5 area Youve seen how often price targets are met using the sideways countmethod The tendency for prices to reverse at a median line should be recognized as a high probability eventas well In coming lessons youll be shown how Dr Andrews used these and other high probability events totrade the stock and commodity markets The tools and techniques he used will help you put the finishingtouches on your market analysis using Andrews lines

Before continuing on to the next lesson lets briefly review what has so far been covered The attached chartprovides an opportunity to illustrate the methods referred to above Please draw these methods on thechart and return to me

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Sideways channelsDate Montag 21 Februar 2000 193743

gtBefore continuing on to the next lesson lets briefly review what hasgtso far been covered The attached chart provides an opportunity togtillustrate the methods referred to above Please draw these methods ongtthe chart and return to me Hello Gordonhere is my chart RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next lesson attachedDate Mittwoch 23 Februar 2000 014539

At 22100 73700 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongthere is my chartgt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Good job on the pivots sideways count and pitchforkLooks like youre ready to move on to the next part It wont be long and things will begin to fall inplace Regards Gordon Lesson 4 continued In one of his course letters Dr Andrews wrote The Law of Physics stated by Newton that Actionand Reaction are equal and opposite was first applied to prices by your Course Directors friendthe late Roger Babson who attributed his earnings of several million dollars to this law Beginning with this segment of lesson four and continuing in lesson five youll learn how to drawand apply the ActionReaction trading method as taught by Dr Andrews in his trading course The AR method requires a centerline or CL from which to start The CL can be any of thefollowing - MPL - ML - MLH - 2P line - 2 Gap line - Peak to low line - Low to peak lineThese are the primary lines that Dr Andrews used He stressed that some pencil work and a goodeyeball was needed in order to find the best fitting CL As with most other chart lines somework better than others The task is to find the best fit as he put it You will be shown examples of

each of the above CLs in this lesson and the next Determining which of the above listed lines to use as the CL is the first step in the ActionReactionmethod The solution often presents itself With a little practice a quick scan of the chart understudy will be all thats needed to spot the most likely CL Well begin with the attached chart Notethe CL drawn In this example a MPL (multi-pivot line) was used as the CL A MPL is a straightline that connects three or more consecutive pivots without passing through prices Theconnecting line is then extended Ive circled the three pivots that form the MPL on the chartThere are several other places on our chart where a MPL CL can be drawn Please bear in mindthat this is just the first step of the process Identification of likely CLs is all were after here Seeif you can locate two more then draw them in and send the chart back to me Well take up fromthere

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next lesson attachedDate Mittwoch 23 Februar 2000 212304

gtLesson 4 continuedgt gtIn one of his course letters Dr Andrews wrote The Law of Physicsgtstated by Newton that Action and Reaction are equal and opposite wasgtfirst applied to prices by your Course Directors friend the lategtRoger Babson who attributed his earnings of several million dollars to this lawgt gtBeginning with this segment of lesson four and continuing in lessongtfive youll learn how to draw and apply the ActionReaction tradinggtmethod as taught by Dr Andrews in his trading coursegt gtThe AR method requires a centerline or CL from which to startgtThe CL can be any of the followinggt - MPLgt - MLgt - MLHgt - 2P linegt - 2 Gap linegt - Peak to low linegt - Low to peak line Hello Gordon2P line 2 Gap line Peak to low line Low to peak line ndash actually I dont know what these lines areAre they discussed in Lesson 3 I believe you havenrsquot sent me this lesson yetAnyway I found two more MPLs on the Novellus Chart and drew them in RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Lesson 3Date Mittwoch 23 Februar 2000 235958

At 22300 92300 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt2P line 2 Gap line Peak to low line Low to peak line - actually I dont knowgtwhat these lines are Are they discussed in Lesson 3 I believe you didntgtsent me this lesson yetgtAnyway I found two more MPLs on the Novellus Chart and drew them ingt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone My apologiesI sent you an outdated version of the lesson Thanks for letting me know Musthave been my bedtime Heres the correct version Regards Gordon Lesson 3 In one of his course letters Dr Andrews wrote The Law of Physics stated by Newton that Actionand Reaction are equal and opposite was first applied to prices by your Course Directors friendthe late Roger Babson who attributed his earnings of several million dollars to this law In this lesson youll be introduced to the ActionReaction trading method as taught by Dr Andrewsin his trading course The AR method requires a centerline or CL from which to start The CL can be any of thefollowing - MPL Multi-pivot line A line drawn across 3 or more pivots - ML Median line The middle line of the pitchfork - MLH Median line parallel Either parallel line of the pitchfork - 2P line A line drawn across 2 pivots - 2 Gap line A line drawn connecting 2 gaps without touching prices in between - Peak to low line A line drawn connecting the high and low of a price leg

- Low to peak line A line drawn connecting the low and high of a price leg These are the primary lines that Dr Andrews used He stressed that some pencil work and a goodeyeball was needed in order to find the best fitting CL As with most other chart lines somework better than others The task is to find the best fit as he put it You will be shown examples ofeach of the above CLs Determining which of the above listed lines to use as the CL is the first step in the ActionReactionmethod With practice a quick view of the chart under study will be all thats needed to spot themost likely CL Youll be shown later how to experiment with possible combinations in order tofind the centerline that is most in tune with the market under study Well begin with the attached chart Note the CL drawn In this example a MPL (multi-pivot line)was used as the CL A MPL is a straight line that connects three or more consecutive pivotswithout passing through prices The connecting line is then extended Ive circled the three pivotsthat form the MPL on the chart There are several other places on our chart where a MPL CL canbe drawn Please bear in mind that this is just the first step of the process Identification of likelyCLs is all were after here See if you can locate two more then draw them in and send the chartback to me

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Donnerstag 24 Februar 2000 025105

At 22300 92300 PM you wroteI found two more MPLs on the Novellus Chart and drew them ingt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your mpls were correct This next segment shows the purpose of the centerline and how it isused Your payment in full arrived today TradersZone Thank you Regards Gordon Lesson 3 continued Please refer to the attached chart of Novellus The line drawn connecting the 3 circled pivots is amulti-pivot line (MPL) and represents the centerline (CL) well be using in this example Recall inthe previous segment that several types of centerlines are possible The choice is determined byexperimenting with the potential combinations on the chart under study Its best to try to locate acenterline somewhere close to the middle of the price chart in order to have sufficient past andforward data to use with the study This will become clear as you work with the method Once the centerline is drawn the next step is to locate a previous low or high pivot point to use fordrawing an action line Dr Andrews observed that the low pivot points often seem to work bestbut that either could be used In our example a line starting at the previous significant low wasdrawn parallel to the CL It is labeled A-1 (Action line 1) because it represents the first actionline Dr Andrews called it an action line because it was drawn as a result of a previous pivot (pricereversal) that had taken place Next a parallel line was drawn to the right of the CL and labeled R-1 Notice that it is the same distance from the CL as the corresponding A-1 line It is labeled R-1because it represents the first reaction line a line where prices are likely to stop or reverseNotice how prices reacted at the R-1 line in early 98 That serves as an indication that thecenterline chosen for this study should be a good one to use Not all reaction lines cause such aclear reversal as the R1 on this chart but many do Thats why its important to experiment withvarious centerline possibilities in order to find action lines that produce reaction lines which createthe greatest number of pivots or price stall-outs This experimentation is often quite time

consuming but experience has shown that it is time well spent When a centerline is found that isin tune with the price action of the issue under study it can be a highly effective tool for use inlocating probable reversal areas When combined with pitchfork lines the AR method can pinpointpotential reversal areas that are generally not recognized as such by others Dr Andrewstechniques for using the pitchfork and AR lines together are covered in later lessons In coming segments well study other lines that Dr Andrews used for his centerlines In themeantime experiment with the multi-pivot centerline on your own charts Then please send mean example of your work along with any questions you may have

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Freitag 25 Februar 2000 211356

gtIn the meantime experiment with the multi-pivot centerline on your owngtcharts Then please send me an example of your work along with anygtquestions you may have Hello Gordon I was wondering how many ActionReaction lines could be drawn on a chart On my attached chart I found at least 6 parallellines which had a significant meaning for the price RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject AR linesDate Montag 28 Februar 2000 080128

gtHello Gordongt gtI was wondering how many ActionReaction lines could be drawn on agtchart On my attached chart I found at least 6 parallel lines which hadgta significant meaning for the pricegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hi TradersZone Theres no set number of lines that can be drawnactually the more you can find the betterFinding a good centerline is the key And once you find lines that work such as you did anynumber of parallel lines can be drawn You are doing exactly what Dr Andrews didtaking thetime and effort to find the best fitting sets of lines Each chart has them and each chart is differentas Im sure youve found Nice work Heres the next part Regards Gordon Lesson 3 continued One of Dr Andrews favorite techniques dealt with gapsan often times perplexing price event formany traders His observations over the years suggested to him that while gaps show upfrequently on many price charts few traders have a method for including them as an integral partof their chart analysis Thats not surprising since not much has been published about how toapproach the use of gaps in a trading method Dr Andrews however found several ways to putprice gaps to good use An ActionReaction centerline which uses gaps as its basis is one suchmethod Please refer to the attached chart of Cendant Youll see that a centerline was drawn which passedthrough the July gap Note that it also came in contact with several pivots thereby qualifying as agapmulti-pivot centerline It is drawn by starting at the April low pivot and extending a line acrossand through the gap in mid-July It subsequently touches two additional high pivots Dr Andrews counted each gap as two pivots He noted that the more pivots a line touched the

stronger the line tended to be in the future Good reason then for using the July gap as the basisfor an ActionReaction study Our CL is labelled a gap-mpl-CL The May 98 high was used for the Action Line starting point A line was then drawn parallel to theCenterline as per ActionReaction procedure The corresponding Reaction Line was then drawn inIf this particular study had been drawn on Cendants chart right after the July gap was put in thepotential for prices to go all the way down to the Reaction Line might have seemed very slim at thetime Notice however that prices reached the Reaction Line in early September Youll see thishappen time and again as you work with the AR method The core of its effectiveness is a strongCL Please send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts of your choice

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re AR linesDate Montag 28 Februar 2000 155937

gtPlease send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts of yourgtchoice Hello Gordonhere are my examples RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject More on the ARDate Donnerstag 2 Maumlrz 2000 071158

At 22800 35900 PM you wrotegtgtPlease send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts ofgtgtyour choicegt gtHello Gordongthere are my examplesgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone You picked some good examples to use for your AR study Both showed the potential power of thismethod Takes time and lots of chart study sometimes to find the best set of lines but the rewardscan be many Heres something else to look at Regards Gordon The ActionReaction technique requires a strong centerline from which to begin The key todeciding which set of pivots to use for the centerline is found through experimenting with thevarious configurations visible on the chart under study The centerline might be a series of gapspivots an existing median line or any of Dr Andrews lines The task is to search for that centerlinewhich shows the greatest potential for projecting price reversal areas Dr Andrews did that byfinding a likely centerline near the middle of his price chart That allowed him to use any of theprevious pivots for his action lines By experimenting he found reaction lines that did the best jobof pegging reversal areas at data points located forward of the centerline Reaction lines are equal and opposite of the action lines and serve to project price levels at whicha reversal can be expected That is why the task of seeking out the best centerline is so importantDr Andrews reasoned that a series of reaction lines which have pegged price reversals in the pastis likely to continue to be in tune with current and future market price action Having severalprevious pivots to use as anchors for drawing action lines is thus essential The attached chart of Lattice illustrates this concept Please bear in mind that the gapmplcenterline is not the only centerline one could use on this chart You might want to study the chartfor other AR possibilities Try a peak-to-peak CL or a multi-pivot CL Send me your studies along

with any questions

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re More on the ARDate Samstag 4 Maumlrz 2000 002521

gtThe attached chart of Lattice illustrates this conceptgtPlease bear in mind that the gapmpl centerline is not the onlygtcenterline one could use on this chartgtYou might want to study the chart for other AR possibilitiesgtTry a peak-to-peak CL or a multi-pivot CL Send me your studiesgtalong with any questions Hello Gordonhere is my chart RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Peak to peak clDate Sonntag 5 Maumlrz 2000 064107

At 3400 122500 AM you wrotegtHello Gordongthere is my chartgt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Looks like you have the concept down Takes time and a lot of chart work to find the bestcenterline When the reaction lines dont seem to peg reversal areas chances are the centerline isnot the one that is best in tune with the price action of the issue under studyDespite the time required for this method it was one of Dr Andrews stand-bysAR lines could befound on most of his charts Im sending a chart with an example of a peak-to-peak CL Regards Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Peak to peak clDate Sonntag 5 Maumlrz 2000 171232

Hello Gordon I think the peak-to-peak CL on the last chart I sent to you was not really drawn from peak to peakIm sending another example RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next LessonDate Mittwoch 8 Maumlrz 2000 072526

At 3500 51200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtI think the peak-to-peak CL on the last chart I sent to you was notgtreally drawn from peak to peakgtIm sending another examplegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your peak to peak cl example was correctly drawn Thats a fairly simple approach but quite oftenthe peak to peak yields better reaction lines Heres the first part of the next lesson Regards Gordon Youll find times when prices dont quite reach the ML but instead drift alongside or away from itThe Schiff ML was designed to be used in place of the regular ML whenever that happens Suchprice action can be found at any place on a chart but most frequently occurs after a sharp sell-offor run-up of prices Dr Andrews also used the Schiff ML whenever his regular ML sloped at an unusually steep angleHe said it helped smooth out irregular price action such as that caused by unexpected earningsnews crop planting delays or poor growing conditions crop production reports etc Youll findnearly vertical price moves over a short period of time on many charts The Schiff ML method helpsput things back in perspective when that happens Well use the chart of Sterling Bancorp as an example of prices drifting away from the regular MLThat ML is drawn in black Prices didnt quite reach the ML but drifted alongside and eventuallyaway from it The Schiff ML and parallel lines are drawn in red Notice how prices were containedwithin the Schiff pitchfork until they finally broke down at the upper parallel line The procedure for drawing the Schiff ML is the same as for the regular ML except the startingpoint is located midway between the first 2 pivots youll be using The Sterling Bancorp chart

illustrates how this is done Dr Andrews also suggested using the Schiff ML whenever the regular ML method doesnt seem tobe in sync with price action Practice this procedure on your own charts and send a couple examples when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next LessonDate Donnerstag 9 Maumlrz 2000 001143

Hello Gordon in my charting software (Dynamic Trader) the Schiff ML is drawn by finding the midpoint of the line between pivot A and pivot Bmoving this point horizontally to directly above or below (depending on whether A is a low or high pivot) the A pivot anddrawing a line from his point through the midpoint of the BC swingAre there different methods of drawing a Schiff MLI was too lazy to draw Schiff MLs by hand with the method you described so Im sending my examples with the Dynamic TraderSchiff MLs -) RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject SchiffDate Samstag 11 Maumlrz 2000 070226

At 3900 121100 AM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtin my charting software (Dynamic Trader) the Schiff ML is drawn bygtfinding the midpoint of the line between pivot A and pivot B movinggtthis point horizontally to directly above or below (depending ongtwhether A is a low or high pivot) the A pivot and drawing a linegtgtfrom his point through the midpoint of the BC swinggtAre there different methods of drawing a Schiff MLgtI was too lazy to draw Schiff MLs by hand with the method yougtdescribed so Im sending my examples with the Dynamic Trader Schiff MLs -)gt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your program Schiff line procedure is fineits actually what Dr Andrews called a modified schiff ml and is onlyslightly different than the one I sent you initially The one you used is preferred by most course members Im sendingthe modified Schiff lesson and a chart along with this email The chart example shows how to use it with 0-34 pivots Regards Gordon

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Sliding Parallel LineDate Montag 13 Maumlrz 2000 005252

Hello TradersZone Heres one of the tools Dr Andrews used most often when entering exiting or reversing marketpositions Not many people know about this technique Regards Gordon The Sliding Parallel (SH) is drawn whenever prices cross an Andrews line and then move along itFor example if the bottom of a daily price bar range drops through a lower parallel line of apitchfork a new parallel line is then drawn from that low and extended to the right If the nextdays price bar drops through that sliding parallel line a sell signal is generated Whenever price action dictates a sliding parallel the next step is to draw a Warning Line Thewarning line is an additional parallel line that is an image extension of the original pitchforkchannels It serves as a warning that if prices penetrate the sliding parallel the next likely target isthe WL The attached chart of Avis illustrates these procedures Please try these on your own charts andsend me an example

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Sliding Parallel LineDate Dienstag 14 Maumlrz 2000 225737

Hello Gordon this is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning line RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 065606

At 31400 105700 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtthis is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning linegt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone Your chart of circuit city was a good example for this study I may have mentioned it earlier but DrAndrews used this technique on a regular basis The next part of this lesson covers another of hisfavorite tools the mini-median line pitchfork Here it is Regards Gordon The Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry and exit tools Though mostoften drawn using alternate closing prices alternate highs and lows can also be usedin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days is usually the maximumbetween pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or more back from P2 Dr Andrews used Mini-Median Line pitchforks for buy and sell signals whenever he expected areversal Some examples include a probable P5 or when prices are at a Warning Line ML MLHmajor ML extension or a sideways channel price target When prices cross the Mini-Median LineParallel (MMLH) a sliding parallel (SH) is used for order entry

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 231537

gtThe Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry andgtexit tools Though most often drawn using alternate closing pricesgtalternate highs and lows can also be usedgtin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days isgtusually the maximum between pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or moregtback from P2

Hello Gordon

wouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timingCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available whenDr Andrews was alive

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject intraday chartsDate Samstag 18 Maumlrz 2000 012400

At 31600 111500 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongtgtwouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsgtinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timinggtCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available when DrgtAndrews was alivegtgtRegardsgtTradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Youre absolutely correctintraday charts were not available when DrAndrews was a trader

Im reading between the lines here but if you plan to day-trade using the course techniques ie thepitchfork then I agree that the regular pitchfork would be more useful on intraday charts Otherwisewhipsaw would be a significant problem Please get back to me if I didnt address your questionbecause this is a very important technique The mini-median line pitchfork and sliding parallel showedup on most of Dr Andrews charts

Regards

Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re intraday chartsDate Dienstag 21 Maumlrz 2000 220322

Hello Gordon

You are right Im planning to daytrade SampP futures using the course techniques among other things

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 003408

Hi TradersZone Here are a couple Andrews techniques that will help anticipate the breakout direction of asideways channelThey work often enough to warrant keep handy Regards Gordon In an earlier lesson you were introduced to Dr Andrews sideways count You saw how frequentlythe sideways count method provided high probability price objectives after the breakout from theestablished channel took place In this segment of lesson 4 youll be shown 2 congestion area techniques that can help youdetermine the probable sideways channel price breakout direction Both rely on the use of pivots The first uses the pivot points that are circled on a sideways channel Dr Andrews observed thatwhenever a sideways channel results in at least 5 circle contacts the eventual price breakoutwould very often be in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle If circle 5 is at thetop of the channel for example the eventual price breakout would likely be to the upside If circle5 is at the bottom of the channel look for a downside breakout Dr Andrews noted that thistechnique can be subject to false breakouts but that such breakouts are usually followed shortlyafter with a confirmed breakout in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle Heemphasized that this study is best considered as a rule of thumb observation He viewed it as asupporting indicator for use with a short-term pitchfork as prices approached a channel line There are 2 charts attached that show how this works

The second technique in this part of lesson 4 deals with a sideways channelthat is building shortly after a P3 has been formed Dr Andrews noted thatwhenever that happened the probabilities were high that prices wouldbreakout in the same direction they were moving prior to the formation ofthe sideways channel The attached P3 to sideways example chart shows thisprocedure

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 205235

Hello Gordon here is my example for the 5 circle sideways count RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Lesson 5Date Montag 27 Maumlrz 2000 060731

At 32400 85200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my example for the 5 circle sideways countgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt gt Hi TradersZone Good example of the 5th circle tendency to predict the direction of a sideways breakout Any luckfinding a chart showing the P3 to sideways rule Im sending the first part of the next lesson This trendline method is a useful tool with all of DrAndrews course lines He used it all the time but especially when looking for confirmation of othercourse method trading signals Regards Gordon The Course Trendline__________________________________________________________ Next well discuss the trendline Seasoned traders agree that the trendline is one of their mostimportant tools No matter what kind of trading program or technique they use the trendline on achart is a must But one of the biggest mistakes made by amateurs and professionals alike isinconsistently drawing or defining the trendline Dr Andrews trendline procedure is simpleconsistent and accurate It works extremely well with the pivot count and with the pitchfork For an uptrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the lowest low up and to thehighest minor low point preceding the highest high The line must not pass through prices inbetween the two low points Extend the line(Attached chart of Brightpoint) For a downtrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the highest high point to thelowest minor high point preceding the lowest low so that it does not pass through prices inbetween the two high points Extend the line (Brightpoint chart) Thats all theres to it Its simple consistent and it works well with other Andrews lines It also

helps eliminate personal bias and haphazard analysis Practice drawing these trendlines on your own charts Send me any questions you might have andthen e-mail a chart of your choosing which shows at least two uptrend and two downtrend linesthat youve drawn_______________________________________________________________________

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Lesson 5Date Dienstag 28 Maumlrz 2000 120224

Hello Gordon here is my chart with trendlinesWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going above the trendline again should I draw a new trendline anddelete the old one Attached is another chart with the P3 to sideways rule I finally found an example for it RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Price failure techniqueDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081412

At 32800 120200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my chart with trendlinesgtWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going abovegtthe trendline again should I draw a new trendline and delete the oldgtone Hi TradersZone Take a look at the chart Im returningI added some lines for you to considerWith the course trendline once its broken a new one should be started Theres a technique thatties in with this coming up soon Meanwhile heres an important technique to work on It deals with those times when prices dontreach the ML Regards Gordon Dr Andrews Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P ofreversaland the ML the probability is that this price reversal will go further thanitdid on its approach toward the ML (Extract of original course material) A price failure very often indicates a sizeable reversal will take placeThepitchforks drawn on the chart of Home Depot illustrate the concept of pricefailure Dr Andrews routinely drew a new pitchfork on his chart after a newsignificant pivot had formed He knew that prices had a high probability ofreaching the new ML before stalling out or reversing If prices reversedbeforereaching the ML thereby forming a new pivot he termed it a price failureTheunderlying idea here is that Dr Andrews fully anticipated his median linewouldact as a price magnet To conclude that a price reversal resulted in a price failure Dr Andrewsused

these primary signalsa subsequent price penetration of a short-termmulti-pivotline andor a return of prices to and penetration of the parallel lineformed atpivot 3 of the pitchfork (The circles on the Home Depot chart denote theparallelline penetration signal To avoid clutter the mpl lines were not drawn) One possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart of ConsecoIncLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me a copy

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject ChartDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081800Attachments image002png

Hi TradersZone Forgot the chart Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Price failure techniqueDate Samstag 1 April 2000 201000

gtOne possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart ofgtConseco IncgtLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me agtcopy Hi Gordon here are my charts with price failures RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Mittwoch 5 April 2000 235624

Hi TradersZone Good price failure examples you sentany comments or questions about it Heres the next partanother old standby Dr Andrews kept handy Regards Gordon In this segment youll learn how to use the Fan line Technique To draw the fan lines youll apply the coursetrendline method which was introduced in an earlier lesson It might be well to emphasize that the practicalapplication of the course trendline method requires practice and experience both of which will serve youwell in this technique Dr Andrews used fan lines as an adjunct to his pitchfork sideways channel andactionreaction methods In the fan line study three trendlines are drawn from the original reversal pivot of the price correction understudy typically a P0 or a P5 Youll notice on the charts included with this study that each fan line is at aflatter angle than its predecessor When the third fan line is broken the rule is that the correction has endedand a new trend is under way Try this technique on some of your own charts and then please send me asample

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Donnerstag 6 April 2000 234315

Hi Gordon No I dont have any specific question about the price failure technique I guess the next likely target after a price failure wouldbe the warning line I have attached two charts with fan linesIs it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the third fan line is broken RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Next segmentDate Freitag 7 April 2000 003312

Hello TradersZone

Tuesday April 06 2000 114315 AM you wrote

TZgt Hi Gordon

TZgt No I dont have any specific question about the price failureTZgt technique I guess the next likely target after a price failureTZgt would be the warning line

TZgt I have attached two charts with fan linesTZgt Is it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the thirdTZgt fan line is broken

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Thats right the warning line is the next price target Additionalwarning lines can be drawn if needed but usually one will do it Ifprices go through the first warning line another can be drawn butmost likely a new pitchfork could be drawn instead which would bepreferable Helps stay current with recently formed pivots

When prices break through the third fan line a buy or sell signal isgiven Not sure what you mean by fourth target fan line Im a littledense today

Your chart work was goodthis is another handy tool for spotting thehigh probability of a price reversal or trend change

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject The Gap TradeDate Freitag 7 April 2000 004858

Hello TradersZone This trading signal doesnt show up very often but past observations have shown that its well worth watching for Dr Andrews placed a lot of emphasis on the importance of price gaps something many traders overlook This is one of his gap uses Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom The Gap Trading Technique Price gaps can be a dilemma for many traders The general rule denoting market strength or weakness after ahigh volume gap often comes up short after the initial reaction is over Many gappers simply run out ofsteam A high volume gap in itself seems to offer precious little evidence that a profitable move is about toget under way Dr Andrews used price gaps somewhat differently than others He counted a gap as 2 pivots Youll see howthat works in the following technique which uses a gap to arrive at a price level for a buy or sell order Using short-term daily price pivots label the pivot immediately preceding the gap as p0 Count the gap as 2pivots labeling it p1 amp p2 After p3 has formed and prices reverse towards a short-term p4 draw a horizontalline 2 price tics or more (individual preference)to the right of p3 Enter the market only if prices reach orpenetrate that line within a few days after reversing from p4 Please look over your own charts to see if you can find places where the gap trade technique could have beenused Send me a sample when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 001925

Hello Gordon this is my chart with a gap trade RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 065538

Hello TradersZone Thursday April 08 2000 121925 PM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt this is my chart with a gap trade TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Good examplethe gap trade technique shines when an issue in at or near a P5 Similar to the one on thechart you sent Heres another trading signal tool Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Dr Andrews used several techniques which helped him determine whether a P5 was near at hand Youllrecall that he observed most price moves ended or had a significant reversal at a P5 This technique uses alternate closing prices after a P4 has been formed As with many of his studies thenumber 5 is used The chart accompanying this segment shows that there were 5 alternate closes to thedownside after P4 was put in Dr Andrews noted that whenever 5 or more alternate closes followed a P4 theprobabilities were high that a P5 was near at hand An added feature to this chart study is the sideways channel Notice how the 2nd target price and the 5thalternate close nearly coincide

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 12 April 2000 200730

Hello Gordon This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 13 April 2000 082418

Monday April 12 2000 80730 AM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hello TradersZone Good chart example of this Andrews toolanother of his very unusual observations that workmore often than not Heres the final part of this lesson Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom In this trendline method Dr Andrews once again used the number 5 as the basis for locating aprobable reversal area He found this technique to be especially useful whenever a clear orobvious pivot count didnt show up onthe price move under study Trendlines are drawn using the course trendline method When the 5th trendline is broken theprobability is high that the trend under study has ended A mini-median line pitchfork andorsliding parallel could be used for pricing a trading order The accompanying chart of Compaq Computer is an example of how the trendline study could beused The pivot count beginning at the October low is difficult to nail down There were severalsmall areas of congestion but no sizeable corrections while prices advanced The count wasunclear By following the price action using the course trendline technique however the traderwould have been alerted to the possibility of a change of trend when the 5th trendline was brokenin early February Try this technique on your own charts When youre ready please send me an example of yourstudy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 19 April 2000 124108

Hello Gordon this is my example with 5 trendlines RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[6] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 20 April 2000 012726

Monday April 19 2000 124108 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt this is my example with 5 trendlines

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Good example of the 5 TL technique Always reminds me of how the fairly simple tools often do a better job than manyof the sophisticated studies out there

That was the last part of lesson 5 Lesson 6 attached is made in one mailing Youll find Dr Andrews trading rules alongwith a wrap-up review which uses several of his rules You might have questions about some of the rules so feel free tosend them as they arise

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Dr Andrews had an abbreviated set of trading rules on several index cards that he carried around with him in his shirtpocket He said every trading day turned up something new on his charts and by having his rules in his pocket he wasreminded of the need for a methodical approach to his analysis Quite a comment coming from the man who wrote therule book

In this the final lesson of the course Dr Andrews original trading rules and observations are presented Lets work witha few of them at this point

Using charts of issues you follow please send me an example that illustrates your interpretation of each of the followingrules

Rule 4 Anticipating major Ps

Rule 7 Penetration rule

Rule 8 Price failure rule

Rule 11 1-ML23 AR Centerline

Rule 12 Sliding Parallel rule

Rule 15 Mini-median line parallel to buy or sell

Feel free to include any other course techniques you choose to apply but please include examples of the above as aminimum Use more than one technique on a chart if your analysis supports it Send as many charts as you like alongwith your questionscomments

Lesson 6 - Dr Andrews Trading Rules

This lesson covers course rules and significant observations as taught by Dr Andrews in his original trading course Therules are those that he used in his own trading and are provided to serve as a checklist for use with the course tradingmethods youve learned

Rule 1 Where prices are always headed Rule You course members are among the fortunate few to be able to draw astraight line and know that prices are headed toward that ML Very few investors have ever applied this ML principle ofstatistics to price fluctuations and weve never seen this in any books on investment You are among the very few who

know that prices are always headed toward the newest ML

Rule 2 The Rule of coming opposites applies all through life In the bible we find Blessed at they that mourn for theyshall be comforted As investors we know that any losses can be recovered by using course methods

Rule 3 Turn your mind about or Rethink for all good is at hand We should mentally prepare ourselves for thecoming reversal in prices and other affairs Heres one way for example that you course members who know the MLrules can use When prices are skyrocketing upward we do this preparation by thinking If prices pivoted here today atthis price Id draw a new ML bisecting the distance between todays price and the price from which the rise started Andwe know now that if this is a Major Pivot prices will fall rapidly to this new ML Profits from such drops are big and quick

Rule 4 Rule for anticipating major Ps If during congestion or after a rally or decline you can count four previous Psthe fifth one is highly probable to be the one from which a new trend starts

Rule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can make a quick big profit is to watch for the EPformations

Rule 6 The other reversal rule is that prices tend to reverse at or near any ML as well as at any extension of each MLAnd also at any MLH or extensions of MLH

Rule 7 The Penetration Rule is that whenever prices gap past or plunge through any ML there is a high probability thatthey will quickly return to it temporarily and then resume the trend they had before they gapped or plunged through

Rule 8 Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P of reversal and the MLthe probability is that this price reversal will go further than it did on its approach toward the ML

Rule 9 The price failure rule is negated when the next price trend is also a failure in reaching the ML This is almostinvariably a signal of a big fast move in the direction indicated by this last space Rule 10 When alternate median lines of comparable length slope in the same direction the trend is firm and rapidprice changes take place

Rule 11 When 1-ML23 is exactly reached at P4 it can be used as a highly reliable centerline for the AR method

Rule 12 Frequently after crossing a lower MLH prices continue to rise along the MLH Since the crossing of the MLHsignals a further drop is likely use a sliding parallel along the bottom of the most recent crossing If prices drop past thatsliding parallel line a sell signal is generated

Rule 13 MLs between P2 and P3 can start from a nearby or a remote P1 since prices tend to reverse at each of theseMLs Try several such P2-P3 MLs to discover the best fit

Rule 14 The distance of each MLH from its ML is the distance of the next warning line Use these warning lineswhenever a SH has signalled a buy or sell

Rule 15 Use the MMLH as a buy or sell signal when you expect a reversal because of a P5 Also when prices are at aWL ML extension line or where course lines converge or intersect

Rule 16 Converging lines that meet prices have shown the highest probability of a trend reversal

Rule 17 Two to four days is usually the maximum between P2 and P3 for a MML P1 can be a day or so back from P2and 3

Rule 18 The most reliable ActionReaction centerlines seem to be MPL 2P line 2 Gap line peak to low or low to peak

Rule 19 When prices pass through R lines look for a pull back and then a continuing move in the direction of the passthrough

Rule 20 Use gaps as Action lines from the centerline

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 003755

Hello Gordonhere is my example for Rule 4 And I have a question What are EP formations gtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 021242

Tuesday May 04 2000 123755 PM you wrote TZgt Hello GordonTZgt here is my example for Rule 4 TZgt And I have a question What are EP formations gtgtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegtgta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hi TradersZone Good use of the warning linesalso the EP material is part of lesson 4 Rather than go backthrough the files to see when (or if) it was sent Im sending it along with this reply Glad youbrought it up Best RegardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Tuesday May 04 2000208 PM Dr Andrews used a fairly common price chart formation that he found useful at probable P5market tops and bottoms The formation generally called a wedge or pennant by chartists isreferred to in Dr Andrews trading course as the Expanding Pivot (EP) One of the few chartformations used in the course he regarded it as among the most dependable indications that amarket top was forming Closely related to the EP is his Inverted Expanding Pivot (IEP) which henoted could often be observed at market bottoms Both are regarded as intermediate and long-term reversal indicators Dr Andrews found that both formations were most reliable when they occurred after a sharprapid price move coinciding with the formation of a probable P5 He said it wasnt unusual for theformation to take several weeks to complete and that conservative traders could best avoid thewhipsaw associated with congestion patterns by trading only in the direction of the probable price

break out of the EP or IEP formation The attached charts illustrate these formations Please look over your own charts for an example ofthe EP and IEP and send me a copy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 232127

Hello Gordon Thank you for the lesson with the EP material I couldnt find it in any previous emailHere is my example for Rule 7 RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Rule 4Date Samstag 6 Mai 2000 080827

Wednesday May 05 2000 112127 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt Thank you for the lesson with the EP materialTZgt I couldnt find it in any previous emailTZgt Here is my example for Rule 7

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hi TradersZone

Glad you mentioned it earlierexcept for the EP IEP and hissideways channel Dr Andrews didnt have much to say about chartpatterns and formations These are good ones to use though

Your study of the penetration rule was good Later

Best Regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Wednesday May 05 2000801 PM

Page 22: Pitchfork primer

In the case of an upside channel breakout the procedure is reversed Please draw a few channelsand figure out some downside targets on your own charts When youre ready send me two orthree examples of your work As always send your questions as they arise

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re SidewaysDate Montag 14 Februar 2000 134314

Here are my examples I couldnt find enough charts with downside targets so I included some charts with upside targets Do the channel lines always have to be horizontal When I look at my charts I find more channels with an upward slope or adownward slope RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Sideways channelsDate Freitag 18 Februar 2000 005531

At 21400 14300 PM you wrotegtHere are my examples I couldnt find enough charts with downsidegttargets so I included some charts with upside targetsgt gtDo the channel lines always have to be horizontal When I look at mygtcharts I find more channels with an upward slope or a downward slopegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone The sideways method can be used with either up or down Sorry didnt mean to imply that only downsidetargets should be found Ill reword that portion of the lesson Thanks for mentioning it Dr Andrews sideways method works only on horizontal channels Others have mentioned the slopingchannels also and have wondered if there is some method to use with them I know of none Ive askedother course members for their ideas on how to approach this problem but so far no one has come up with amethod I would think that there should be a solution but have not personally taken the time to research itIf some method could be found that works as often as the Andrews sideways count it would be a significantfind The Andrews sideways count doesnt always hit the targets as you saw on your chart of Bausch amp Lomb Itworks more often than not though and it still amazes me at how often prices reach the targets Heres an observation to keep in mind Quite often after the first target is reached prices will reverse andhead back towards the channel At times youll note that they return inside the channel They will thenreverse again and head back towards the second price target These reversals happen frequently and presenttrading opportunities Im including the final segment of this lesson Regards Gordon So far in the course youve learned about Dr Andrews pivot counting procedure pitchfork and sidewayscount Youve noticed by now how often prices change trend at a P5 Youve seen how the 0-34 ML methodcan help locate the probable P5 area Youve seen how often price targets are met using the sideways countmethod The tendency for prices to reverse at a median line should be recognized as a high probability eventas well In coming lessons youll be shown how Dr Andrews used these and other high probability events totrade the stock and commodity markets The tools and techniques he used will help you put the finishingtouches on your market analysis using Andrews lines

Before continuing on to the next lesson lets briefly review what has so far been covered The attached chartprovides an opportunity to illustrate the methods referred to above Please draw these methods on thechart and return to me

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Sideways channelsDate Montag 21 Februar 2000 193743

gtBefore continuing on to the next lesson lets briefly review what hasgtso far been covered The attached chart provides an opportunity togtillustrate the methods referred to above Please draw these methods ongtthe chart and return to me Hello Gordonhere is my chart RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next lesson attachedDate Mittwoch 23 Februar 2000 014539

At 22100 73700 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongthere is my chartgt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Good job on the pivots sideways count and pitchforkLooks like youre ready to move on to the next part It wont be long and things will begin to fall inplace Regards Gordon Lesson 4 continued In one of his course letters Dr Andrews wrote The Law of Physics stated by Newton that Actionand Reaction are equal and opposite was first applied to prices by your Course Directors friendthe late Roger Babson who attributed his earnings of several million dollars to this law Beginning with this segment of lesson four and continuing in lesson five youll learn how to drawand apply the ActionReaction trading method as taught by Dr Andrews in his trading course The AR method requires a centerline or CL from which to start The CL can be any of thefollowing - MPL - ML - MLH - 2P line - 2 Gap line - Peak to low line - Low to peak lineThese are the primary lines that Dr Andrews used He stressed that some pencil work and a goodeyeball was needed in order to find the best fitting CL As with most other chart lines somework better than others The task is to find the best fit as he put it You will be shown examples of

each of the above CLs in this lesson and the next Determining which of the above listed lines to use as the CL is the first step in the ActionReactionmethod The solution often presents itself With a little practice a quick scan of the chart understudy will be all thats needed to spot the most likely CL Well begin with the attached chart Notethe CL drawn In this example a MPL (multi-pivot line) was used as the CL A MPL is a straightline that connects three or more consecutive pivots without passing through prices Theconnecting line is then extended Ive circled the three pivots that form the MPL on the chartThere are several other places on our chart where a MPL CL can be drawn Please bear in mindthat this is just the first step of the process Identification of likely CLs is all were after here Seeif you can locate two more then draw them in and send the chart back to me Well take up fromthere

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next lesson attachedDate Mittwoch 23 Februar 2000 212304

gtLesson 4 continuedgt gtIn one of his course letters Dr Andrews wrote The Law of Physicsgtstated by Newton that Action and Reaction are equal and opposite wasgtfirst applied to prices by your Course Directors friend the lategtRoger Babson who attributed his earnings of several million dollars to this lawgt gtBeginning with this segment of lesson four and continuing in lessongtfive youll learn how to draw and apply the ActionReaction tradinggtmethod as taught by Dr Andrews in his trading coursegt gtThe AR method requires a centerline or CL from which to startgtThe CL can be any of the followinggt - MPLgt - MLgt - MLHgt - 2P linegt - 2 Gap linegt - Peak to low linegt - Low to peak line Hello Gordon2P line 2 Gap line Peak to low line Low to peak line ndash actually I dont know what these lines areAre they discussed in Lesson 3 I believe you havenrsquot sent me this lesson yetAnyway I found two more MPLs on the Novellus Chart and drew them in RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Lesson 3Date Mittwoch 23 Februar 2000 235958

At 22300 92300 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt2P line 2 Gap line Peak to low line Low to peak line - actually I dont knowgtwhat these lines are Are they discussed in Lesson 3 I believe you didntgtsent me this lesson yetgtAnyway I found two more MPLs on the Novellus Chart and drew them ingt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone My apologiesI sent you an outdated version of the lesson Thanks for letting me know Musthave been my bedtime Heres the correct version Regards Gordon Lesson 3 In one of his course letters Dr Andrews wrote The Law of Physics stated by Newton that Actionand Reaction are equal and opposite was first applied to prices by your Course Directors friendthe late Roger Babson who attributed his earnings of several million dollars to this law In this lesson youll be introduced to the ActionReaction trading method as taught by Dr Andrewsin his trading course The AR method requires a centerline or CL from which to start The CL can be any of thefollowing - MPL Multi-pivot line A line drawn across 3 or more pivots - ML Median line The middle line of the pitchfork - MLH Median line parallel Either parallel line of the pitchfork - 2P line A line drawn across 2 pivots - 2 Gap line A line drawn connecting 2 gaps without touching prices in between - Peak to low line A line drawn connecting the high and low of a price leg

- Low to peak line A line drawn connecting the low and high of a price leg These are the primary lines that Dr Andrews used He stressed that some pencil work and a goodeyeball was needed in order to find the best fitting CL As with most other chart lines somework better than others The task is to find the best fit as he put it You will be shown examples ofeach of the above CLs Determining which of the above listed lines to use as the CL is the first step in the ActionReactionmethod With practice a quick view of the chart under study will be all thats needed to spot themost likely CL Youll be shown later how to experiment with possible combinations in order tofind the centerline that is most in tune with the market under study Well begin with the attached chart Note the CL drawn In this example a MPL (multi-pivot line)was used as the CL A MPL is a straight line that connects three or more consecutive pivotswithout passing through prices The connecting line is then extended Ive circled the three pivotsthat form the MPL on the chart There are several other places on our chart where a MPL CL canbe drawn Please bear in mind that this is just the first step of the process Identification of likelyCLs is all were after here See if you can locate two more then draw them in and send the chartback to me

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Donnerstag 24 Februar 2000 025105

At 22300 92300 PM you wroteI found two more MPLs on the Novellus Chart and drew them ingt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your mpls were correct This next segment shows the purpose of the centerline and how it isused Your payment in full arrived today TradersZone Thank you Regards Gordon Lesson 3 continued Please refer to the attached chart of Novellus The line drawn connecting the 3 circled pivots is amulti-pivot line (MPL) and represents the centerline (CL) well be using in this example Recall inthe previous segment that several types of centerlines are possible The choice is determined byexperimenting with the potential combinations on the chart under study Its best to try to locate acenterline somewhere close to the middle of the price chart in order to have sufficient past andforward data to use with the study This will become clear as you work with the method Once the centerline is drawn the next step is to locate a previous low or high pivot point to use fordrawing an action line Dr Andrews observed that the low pivot points often seem to work bestbut that either could be used In our example a line starting at the previous significant low wasdrawn parallel to the CL It is labeled A-1 (Action line 1) because it represents the first actionline Dr Andrews called it an action line because it was drawn as a result of a previous pivot (pricereversal) that had taken place Next a parallel line was drawn to the right of the CL and labeled R-1 Notice that it is the same distance from the CL as the corresponding A-1 line It is labeled R-1because it represents the first reaction line a line where prices are likely to stop or reverseNotice how prices reacted at the R-1 line in early 98 That serves as an indication that thecenterline chosen for this study should be a good one to use Not all reaction lines cause such aclear reversal as the R1 on this chart but many do Thats why its important to experiment withvarious centerline possibilities in order to find action lines that produce reaction lines which createthe greatest number of pivots or price stall-outs This experimentation is often quite time

consuming but experience has shown that it is time well spent When a centerline is found that isin tune with the price action of the issue under study it can be a highly effective tool for use inlocating probable reversal areas When combined with pitchfork lines the AR method can pinpointpotential reversal areas that are generally not recognized as such by others Dr Andrewstechniques for using the pitchfork and AR lines together are covered in later lessons In coming segments well study other lines that Dr Andrews used for his centerlines In themeantime experiment with the multi-pivot centerline on your own charts Then please send mean example of your work along with any questions you may have

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Freitag 25 Februar 2000 211356

gtIn the meantime experiment with the multi-pivot centerline on your owngtcharts Then please send me an example of your work along with anygtquestions you may have Hello Gordon I was wondering how many ActionReaction lines could be drawn on a chart On my attached chart I found at least 6 parallellines which had a significant meaning for the price RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject AR linesDate Montag 28 Februar 2000 080128

gtHello Gordongt gtI was wondering how many ActionReaction lines could be drawn on agtchart On my attached chart I found at least 6 parallel lines which hadgta significant meaning for the pricegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hi TradersZone Theres no set number of lines that can be drawnactually the more you can find the betterFinding a good centerline is the key And once you find lines that work such as you did anynumber of parallel lines can be drawn You are doing exactly what Dr Andrews didtaking thetime and effort to find the best fitting sets of lines Each chart has them and each chart is differentas Im sure youve found Nice work Heres the next part Regards Gordon Lesson 3 continued One of Dr Andrews favorite techniques dealt with gapsan often times perplexing price event formany traders His observations over the years suggested to him that while gaps show upfrequently on many price charts few traders have a method for including them as an integral partof their chart analysis Thats not surprising since not much has been published about how toapproach the use of gaps in a trading method Dr Andrews however found several ways to putprice gaps to good use An ActionReaction centerline which uses gaps as its basis is one suchmethod Please refer to the attached chart of Cendant Youll see that a centerline was drawn which passedthrough the July gap Note that it also came in contact with several pivots thereby qualifying as agapmulti-pivot centerline It is drawn by starting at the April low pivot and extending a line acrossand through the gap in mid-July It subsequently touches two additional high pivots Dr Andrews counted each gap as two pivots He noted that the more pivots a line touched the

stronger the line tended to be in the future Good reason then for using the July gap as the basisfor an ActionReaction study Our CL is labelled a gap-mpl-CL The May 98 high was used for the Action Line starting point A line was then drawn parallel to theCenterline as per ActionReaction procedure The corresponding Reaction Line was then drawn inIf this particular study had been drawn on Cendants chart right after the July gap was put in thepotential for prices to go all the way down to the Reaction Line might have seemed very slim at thetime Notice however that prices reached the Reaction Line in early September Youll see thishappen time and again as you work with the AR method The core of its effectiveness is a strongCL Please send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts of your choice

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re AR linesDate Montag 28 Februar 2000 155937

gtPlease send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts of yourgtchoice Hello Gordonhere are my examples RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject More on the ARDate Donnerstag 2 Maumlrz 2000 071158

At 22800 35900 PM you wrotegtgtPlease send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts ofgtgtyour choicegt gtHello Gordongthere are my examplesgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone You picked some good examples to use for your AR study Both showed the potential power of thismethod Takes time and lots of chart study sometimes to find the best set of lines but the rewardscan be many Heres something else to look at Regards Gordon The ActionReaction technique requires a strong centerline from which to begin The key todeciding which set of pivots to use for the centerline is found through experimenting with thevarious configurations visible on the chart under study The centerline might be a series of gapspivots an existing median line or any of Dr Andrews lines The task is to search for that centerlinewhich shows the greatest potential for projecting price reversal areas Dr Andrews did that byfinding a likely centerline near the middle of his price chart That allowed him to use any of theprevious pivots for his action lines By experimenting he found reaction lines that did the best jobof pegging reversal areas at data points located forward of the centerline Reaction lines are equal and opposite of the action lines and serve to project price levels at whicha reversal can be expected That is why the task of seeking out the best centerline is so importantDr Andrews reasoned that a series of reaction lines which have pegged price reversals in the pastis likely to continue to be in tune with current and future market price action Having severalprevious pivots to use as anchors for drawing action lines is thus essential The attached chart of Lattice illustrates this concept Please bear in mind that the gapmplcenterline is not the only centerline one could use on this chart You might want to study the chartfor other AR possibilities Try a peak-to-peak CL or a multi-pivot CL Send me your studies along

with any questions

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re More on the ARDate Samstag 4 Maumlrz 2000 002521

gtThe attached chart of Lattice illustrates this conceptgtPlease bear in mind that the gapmpl centerline is not the onlygtcenterline one could use on this chartgtYou might want to study the chart for other AR possibilitiesgtTry a peak-to-peak CL or a multi-pivot CL Send me your studiesgtalong with any questions Hello Gordonhere is my chart RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Peak to peak clDate Sonntag 5 Maumlrz 2000 064107

At 3400 122500 AM you wrotegtHello Gordongthere is my chartgt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Looks like you have the concept down Takes time and a lot of chart work to find the bestcenterline When the reaction lines dont seem to peg reversal areas chances are the centerline isnot the one that is best in tune with the price action of the issue under studyDespite the time required for this method it was one of Dr Andrews stand-bysAR lines could befound on most of his charts Im sending a chart with an example of a peak-to-peak CL Regards Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Peak to peak clDate Sonntag 5 Maumlrz 2000 171232

Hello Gordon I think the peak-to-peak CL on the last chart I sent to you was not really drawn from peak to peakIm sending another example RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next LessonDate Mittwoch 8 Maumlrz 2000 072526

At 3500 51200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtI think the peak-to-peak CL on the last chart I sent to you was notgtreally drawn from peak to peakgtIm sending another examplegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your peak to peak cl example was correctly drawn Thats a fairly simple approach but quite oftenthe peak to peak yields better reaction lines Heres the first part of the next lesson Regards Gordon Youll find times when prices dont quite reach the ML but instead drift alongside or away from itThe Schiff ML was designed to be used in place of the regular ML whenever that happens Suchprice action can be found at any place on a chart but most frequently occurs after a sharp sell-offor run-up of prices Dr Andrews also used the Schiff ML whenever his regular ML sloped at an unusually steep angleHe said it helped smooth out irregular price action such as that caused by unexpected earningsnews crop planting delays or poor growing conditions crop production reports etc Youll findnearly vertical price moves over a short period of time on many charts The Schiff ML method helpsput things back in perspective when that happens Well use the chart of Sterling Bancorp as an example of prices drifting away from the regular MLThat ML is drawn in black Prices didnt quite reach the ML but drifted alongside and eventuallyaway from it The Schiff ML and parallel lines are drawn in red Notice how prices were containedwithin the Schiff pitchfork until they finally broke down at the upper parallel line The procedure for drawing the Schiff ML is the same as for the regular ML except the startingpoint is located midway between the first 2 pivots youll be using The Sterling Bancorp chart

illustrates how this is done Dr Andrews also suggested using the Schiff ML whenever the regular ML method doesnt seem tobe in sync with price action Practice this procedure on your own charts and send a couple examples when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next LessonDate Donnerstag 9 Maumlrz 2000 001143

Hello Gordon in my charting software (Dynamic Trader) the Schiff ML is drawn by finding the midpoint of the line between pivot A and pivot Bmoving this point horizontally to directly above or below (depending on whether A is a low or high pivot) the A pivot anddrawing a line from his point through the midpoint of the BC swingAre there different methods of drawing a Schiff MLI was too lazy to draw Schiff MLs by hand with the method you described so Im sending my examples with the Dynamic TraderSchiff MLs -) RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject SchiffDate Samstag 11 Maumlrz 2000 070226

At 3900 121100 AM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtin my charting software (Dynamic Trader) the Schiff ML is drawn bygtfinding the midpoint of the line between pivot A and pivot B movinggtthis point horizontally to directly above or below (depending ongtwhether A is a low or high pivot) the A pivot and drawing a linegtgtfrom his point through the midpoint of the BC swinggtAre there different methods of drawing a Schiff MLgtI was too lazy to draw Schiff MLs by hand with the method yougtdescribed so Im sending my examples with the Dynamic Trader Schiff MLs -)gt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your program Schiff line procedure is fineits actually what Dr Andrews called a modified schiff ml and is onlyslightly different than the one I sent you initially The one you used is preferred by most course members Im sendingthe modified Schiff lesson and a chart along with this email The chart example shows how to use it with 0-34 pivots Regards Gordon

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Sliding Parallel LineDate Montag 13 Maumlrz 2000 005252

Hello TradersZone Heres one of the tools Dr Andrews used most often when entering exiting or reversing marketpositions Not many people know about this technique Regards Gordon The Sliding Parallel (SH) is drawn whenever prices cross an Andrews line and then move along itFor example if the bottom of a daily price bar range drops through a lower parallel line of apitchfork a new parallel line is then drawn from that low and extended to the right If the nextdays price bar drops through that sliding parallel line a sell signal is generated Whenever price action dictates a sliding parallel the next step is to draw a Warning Line Thewarning line is an additional parallel line that is an image extension of the original pitchforkchannels It serves as a warning that if prices penetrate the sliding parallel the next likely target isthe WL The attached chart of Avis illustrates these procedures Please try these on your own charts andsend me an example

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Sliding Parallel LineDate Dienstag 14 Maumlrz 2000 225737

Hello Gordon this is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning line RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 065606

At 31400 105700 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtthis is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning linegt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone Your chart of circuit city was a good example for this study I may have mentioned it earlier but DrAndrews used this technique on a regular basis The next part of this lesson covers another of hisfavorite tools the mini-median line pitchfork Here it is Regards Gordon The Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry and exit tools Though mostoften drawn using alternate closing prices alternate highs and lows can also be usedin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days is usually the maximumbetween pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or more back from P2 Dr Andrews used Mini-Median Line pitchforks for buy and sell signals whenever he expected areversal Some examples include a probable P5 or when prices are at a Warning Line ML MLHmajor ML extension or a sideways channel price target When prices cross the Mini-Median LineParallel (MMLH) a sliding parallel (SH) is used for order entry

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 231537

gtThe Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry andgtexit tools Though most often drawn using alternate closing pricesgtalternate highs and lows can also be usedgtin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days isgtusually the maximum between pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or moregtback from P2

Hello Gordon

wouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timingCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available whenDr Andrews was alive

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject intraday chartsDate Samstag 18 Maumlrz 2000 012400

At 31600 111500 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongtgtwouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsgtinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timinggtCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available when DrgtAndrews was alivegtgtRegardsgtTradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Youre absolutely correctintraday charts were not available when DrAndrews was a trader

Im reading between the lines here but if you plan to day-trade using the course techniques ie thepitchfork then I agree that the regular pitchfork would be more useful on intraday charts Otherwisewhipsaw would be a significant problem Please get back to me if I didnt address your questionbecause this is a very important technique The mini-median line pitchfork and sliding parallel showedup on most of Dr Andrews charts

Regards

Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re intraday chartsDate Dienstag 21 Maumlrz 2000 220322

Hello Gordon

You are right Im planning to daytrade SampP futures using the course techniques among other things

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 003408

Hi TradersZone Here are a couple Andrews techniques that will help anticipate the breakout direction of asideways channelThey work often enough to warrant keep handy Regards Gordon In an earlier lesson you were introduced to Dr Andrews sideways count You saw how frequentlythe sideways count method provided high probability price objectives after the breakout from theestablished channel took place In this segment of lesson 4 youll be shown 2 congestion area techniques that can help youdetermine the probable sideways channel price breakout direction Both rely on the use of pivots The first uses the pivot points that are circled on a sideways channel Dr Andrews observed thatwhenever a sideways channel results in at least 5 circle contacts the eventual price breakoutwould very often be in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle If circle 5 is at thetop of the channel for example the eventual price breakout would likely be to the upside If circle5 is at the bottom of the channel look for a downside breakout Dr Andrews noted that thistechnique can be subject to false breakouts but that such breakouts are usually followed shortlyafter with a confirmed breakout in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle Heemphasized that this study is best considered as a rule of thumb observation He viewed it as asupporting indicator for use with a short-term pitchfork as prices approached a channel line There are 2 charts attached that show how this works

The second technique in this part of lesson 4 deals with a sideways channelthat is building shortly after a P3 has been formed Dr Andrews noted thatwhenever that happened the probabilities were high that prices wouldbreakout in the same direction they were moving prior to the formation ofthe sideways channel The attached P3 to sideways example chart shows thisprocedure

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 205235

Hello Gordon here is my example for the 5 circle sideways count RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Lesson 5Date Montag 27 Maumlrz 2000 060731

At 32400 85200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my example for the 5 circle sideways countgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt gt Hi TradersZone Good example of the 5th circle tendency to predict the direction of a sideways breakout Any luckfinding a chart showing the P3 to sideways rule Im sending the first part of the next lesson This trendline method is a useful tool with all of DrAndrews course lines He used it all the time but especially when looking for confirmation of othercourse method trading signals Regards Gordon The Course Trendline__________________________________________________________ Next well discuss the trendline Seasoned traders agree that the trendline is one of their mostimportant tools No matter what kind of trading program or technique they use the trendline on achart is a must But one of the biggest mistakes made by amateurs and professionals alike isinconsistently drawing or defining the trendline Dr Andrews trendline procedure is simpleconsistent and accurate It works extremely well with the pivot count and with the pitchfork For an uptrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the lowest low up and to thehighest minor low point preceding the highest high The line must not pass through prices inbetween the two low points Extend the line(Attached chart of Brightpoint) For a downtrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the highest high point to thelowest minor high point preceding the lowest low so that it does not pass through prices inbetween the two high points Extend the line (Brightpoint chart) Thats all theres to it Its simple consistent and it works well with other Andrews lines It also

helps eliminate personal bias and haphazard analysis Practice drawing these trendlines on your own charts Send me any questions you might have andthen e-mail a chart of your choosing which shows at least two uptrend and two downtrend linesthat youve drawn_______________________________________________________________________

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Lesson 5Date Dienstag 28 Maumlrz 2000 120224

Hello Gordon here is my chart with trendlinesWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going above the trendline again should I draw a new trendline anddelete the old one Attached is another chart with the P3 to sideways rule I finally found an example for it RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Price failure techniqueDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081412

At 32800 120200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my chart with trendlinesgtWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going abovegtthe trendline again should I draw a new trendline and delete the oldgtone Hi TradersZone Take a look at the chart Im returningI added some lines for you to considerWith the course trendline once its broken a new one should be started Theres a technique thatties in with this coming up soon Meanwhile heres an important technique to work on It deals with those times when prices dontreach the ML Regards Gordon Dr Andrews Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P ofreversaland the ML the probability is that this price reversal will go further thanitdid on its approach toward the ML (Extract of original course material) A price failure very often indicates a sizeable reversal will take placeThepitchforks drawn on the chart of Home Depot illustrate the concept of pricefailure Dr Andrews routinely drew a new pitchfork on his chart after a newsignificant pivot had formed He knew that prices had a high probability ofreaching the new ML before stalling out or reversing If prices reversedbeforereaching the ML thereby forming a new pivot he termed it a price failureTheunderlying idea here is that Dr Andrews fully anticipated his median linewouldact as a price magnet To conclude that a price reversal resulted in a price failure Dr Andrewsused

these primary signalsa subsequent price penetration of a short-termmulti-pivotline andor a return of prices to and penetration of the parallel lineformed atpivot 3 of the pitchfork (The circles on the Home Depot chart denote theparallelline penetration signal To avoid clutter the mpl lines were not drawn) One possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart of ConsecoIncLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me a copy

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject ChartDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081800Attachments image002png

Hi TradersZone Forgot the chart Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Price failure techniqueDate Samstag 1 April 2000 201000

gtOne possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart ofgtConseco IncgtLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me agtcopy Hi Gordon here are my charts with price failures RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Mittwoch 5 April 2000 235624

Hi TradersZone Good price failure examples you sentany comments or questions about it Heres the next partanother old standby Dr Andrews kept handy Regards Gordon In this segment youll learn how to use the Fan line Technique To draw the fan lines youll apply the coursetrendline method which was introduced in an earlier lesson It might be well to emphasize that the practicalapplication of the course trendline method requires practice and experience both of which will serve youwell in this technique Dr Andrews used fan lines as an adjunct to his pitchfork sideways channel andactionreaction methods In the fan line study three trendlines are drawn from the original reversal pivot of the price correction understudy typically a P0 or a P5 Youll notice on the charts included with this study that each fan line is at aflatter angle than its predecessor When the third fan line is broken the rule is that the correction has endedand a new trend is under way Try this technique on some of your own charts and then please send me asample

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Donnerstag 6 April 2000 234315

Hi Gordon No I dont have any specific question about the price failure technique I guess the next likely target after a price failure wouldbe the warning line I have attached two charts with fan linesIs it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the third fan line is broken RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Next segmentDate Freitag 7 April 2000 003312

Hello TradersZone

Tuesday April 06 2000 114315 AM you wrote

TZgt Hi Gordon

TZgt No I dont have any specific question about the price failureTZgt technique I guess the next likely target after a price failureTZgt would be the warning line

TZgt I have attached two charts with fan linesTZgt Is it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the thirdTZgt fan line is broken

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Thats right the warning line is the next price target Additionalwarning lines can be drawn if needed but usually one will do it Ifprices go through the first warning line another can be drawn butmost likely a new pitchfork could be drawn instead which would bepreferable Helps stay current with recently formed pivots

When prices break through the third fan line a buy or sell signal isgiven Not sure what you mean by fourth target fan line Im a littledense today

Your chart work was goodthis is another handy tool for spotting thehigh probability of a price reversal or trend change

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject The Gap TradeDate Freitag 7 April 2000 004858

Hello TradersZone This trading signal doesnt show up very often but past observations have shown that its well worth watching for Dr Andrews placed a lot of emphasis on the importance of price gaps something many traders overlook This is one of his gap uses Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom The Gap Trading Technique Price gaps can be a dilemma for many traders The general rule denoting market strength or weakness after ahigh volume gap often comes up short after the initial reaction is over Many gappers simply run out ofsteam A high volume gap in itself seems to offer precious little evidence that a profitable move is about toget under way Dr Andrews used price gaps somewhat differently than others He counted a gap as 2 pivots Youll see howthat works in the following technique which uses a gap to arrive at a price level for a buy or sell order Using short-term daily price pivots label the pivot immediately preceding the gap as p0 Count the gap as 2pivots labeling it p1 amp p2 After p3 has formed and prices reverse towards a short-term p4 draw a horizontalline 2 price tics or more (individual preference)to the right of p3 Enter the market only if prices reach orpenetrate that line within a few days after reversing from p4 Please look over your own charts to see if you can find places where the gap trade technique could have beenused Send me a sample when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 001925

Hello Gordon this is my chart with a gap trade RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 065538

Hello TradersZone Thursday April 08 2000 121925 PM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt this is my chart with a gap trade TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Good examplethe gap trade technique shines when an issue in at or near a P5 Similar to the one on thechart you sent Heres another trading signal tool Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Dr Andrews used several techniques which helped him determine whether a P5 was near at hand Youllrecall that he observed most price moves ended or had a significant reversal at a P5 This technique uses alternate closing prices after a P4 has been formed As with many of his studies thenumber 5 is used The chart accompanying this segment shows that there were 5 alternate closes to thedownside after P4 was put in Dr Andrews noted that whenever 5 or more alternate closes followed a P4 theprobabilities were high that a P5 was near at hand An added feature to this chart study is the sideways channel Notice how the 2nd target price and the 5thalternate close nearly coincide

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 12 April 2000 200730

Hello Gordon This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 13 April 2000 082418

Monday April 12 2000 80730 AM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hello TradersZone Good chart example of this Andrews toolanother of his very unusual observations that workmore often than not Heres the final part of this lesson Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom In this trendline method Dr Andrews once again used the number 5 as the basis for locating aprobable reversal area He found this technique to be especially useful whenever a clear orobvious pivot count didnt show up onthe price move under study Trendlines are drawn using the course trendline method When the 5th trendline is broken theprobability is high that the trend under study has ended A mini-median line pitchfork andorsliding parallel could be used for pricing a trading order The accompanying chart of Compaq Computer is an example of how the trendline study could beused The pivot count beginning at the October low is difficult to nail down There were severalsmall areas of congestion but no sizeable corrections while prices advanced The count wasunclear By following the price action using the course trendline technique however the traderwould have been alerted to the possibility of a change of trend when the 5th trendline was brokenin early February Try this technique on your own charts When youre ready please send me an example of yourstudy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 19 April 2000 124108

Hello Gordon this is my example with 5 trendlines RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[6] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 20 April 2000 012726

Monday April 19 2000 124108 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt this is my example with 5 trendlines

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Good example of the 5 TL technique Always reminds me of how the fairly simple tools often do a better job than manyof the sophisticated studies out there

That was the last part of lesson 5 Lesson 6 attached is made in one mailing Youll find Dr Andrews trading rules alongwith a wrap-up review which uses several of his rules You might have questions about some of the rules so feel free tosend them as they arise

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Dr Andrews had an abbreviated set of trading rules on several index cards that he carried around with him in his shirtpocket He said every trading day turned up something new on his charts and by having his rules in his pocket he wasreminded of the need for a methodical approach to his analysis Quite a comment coming from the man who wrote therule book

In this the final lesson of the course Dr Andrews original trading rules and observations are presented Lets work witha few of them at this point

Using charts of issues you follow please send me an example that illustrates your interpretation of each of the followingrules

Rule 4 Anticipating major Ps

Rule 7 Penetration rule

Rule 8 Price failure rule

Rule 11 1-ML23 AR Centerline

Rule 12 Sliding Parallel rule

Rule 15 Mini-median line parallel to buy or sell

Feel free to include any other course techniques you choose to apply but please include examples of the above as aminimum Use more than one technique on a chart if your analysis supports it Send as many charts as you like alongwith your questionscomments

Lesson 6 - Dr Andrews Trading Rules

This lesson covers course rules and significant observations as taught by Dr Andrews in his original trading course Therules are those that he used in his own trading and are provided to serve as a checklist for use with the course tradingmethods youve learned

Rule 1 Where prices are always headed Rule You course members are among the fortunate few to be able to draw astraight line and know that prices are headed toward that ML Very few investors have ever applied this ML principle ofstatistics to price fluctuations and weve never seen this in any books on investment You are among the very few who

know that prices are always headed toward the newest ML

Rule 2 The Rule of coming opposites applies all through life In the bible we find Blessed at they that mourn for theyshall be comforted As investors we know that any losses can be recovered by using course methods

Rule 3 Turn your mind about or Rethink for all good is at hand We should mentally prepare ourselves for thecoming reversal in prices and other affairs Heres one way for example that you course members who know the MLrules can use When prices are skyrocketing upward we do this preparation by thinking If prices pivoted here today atthis price Id draw a new ML bisecting the distance between todays price and the price from which the rise started Andwe know now that if this is a Major Pivot prices will fall rapidly to this new ML Profits from such drops are big and quick

Rule 4 Rule for anticipating major Ps If during congestion or after a rally or decline you can count four previous Psthe fifth one is highly probable to be the one from which a new trend starts

Rule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can make a quick big profit is to watch for the EPformations

Rule 6 The other reversal rule is that prices tend to reverse at or near any ML as well as at any extension of each MLAnd also at any MLH or extensions of MLH

Rule 7 The Penetration Rule is that whenever prices gap past or plunge through any ML there is a high probability thatthey will quickly return to it temporarily and then resume the trend they had before they gapped or plunged through

Rule 8 Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P of reversal and the MLthe probability is that this price reversal will go further than it did on its approach toward the ML

Rule 9 The price failure rule is negated when the next price trend is also a failure in reaching the ML This is almostinvariably a signal of a big fast move in the direction indicated by this last space Rule 10 When alternate median lines of comparable length slope in the same direction the trend is firm and rapidprice changes take place

Rule 11 When 1-ML23 is exactly reached at P4 it can be used as a highly reliable centerline for the AR method

Rule 12 Frequently after crossing a lower MLH prices continue to rise along the MLH Since the crossing of the MLHsignals a further drop is likely use a sliding parallel along the bottom of the most recent crossing If prices drop past thatsliding parallel line a sell signal is generated

Rule 13 MLs between P2 and P3 can start from a nearby or a remote P1 since prices tend to reverse at each of theseMLs Try several such P2-P3 MLs to discover the best fit

Rule 14 The distance of each MLH from its ML is the distance of the next warning line Use these warning lineswhenever a SH has signalled a buy or sell

Rule 15 Use the MMLH as a buy or sell signal when you expect a reversal because of a P5 Also when prices are at aWL ML extension line or where course lines converge or intersect

Rule 16 Converging lines that meet prices have shown the highest probability of a trend reversal

Rule 17 Two to four days is usually the maximum between P2 and P3 for a MML P1 can be a day or so back from P2and 3

Rule 18 The most reliable ActionReaction centerlines seem to be MPL 2P line 2 Gap line peak to low or low to peak

Rule 19 When prices pass through R lines look for a pull back and then a continuing move in the direction of the passthrough

Rule 20 Use gaps as Action lines from the centerline

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 003755

Hello Gordonhere is my example for Rule 4 And I have a question What are EP formations gtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 021242

Tuesday May 04 2000 123755 PM you wrote TZgt Hello GordonTZgt here is my example for Rule 4 TZgt And I have a question What are EP formations gtgtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegtgta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hi TradersZone Good use of the warning linesalso the EP material is part of lesson 4 Rather than go backthrough the files to see when (or if) it was sent Im sending it along with this reply Glad youbrought it up Best RegardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Tuesday May 04 2000208 PM Dr Andrews used a fairly common price chart formation that he found useful at probable P5market tops and bottoms The formation generally called a wedge or pennant by chartists isreferred to in Dr Andrews trading course as the Expanding Pivot (EP) One of the few chartformations used in the course he regarded it as among the most dependable indications that amarket top was forming Closely related to the EP is his Inverted Expanding Pivot (IEP) which henoted could often be observed at market bottoms Both are regarded as intermediate and long-term reversal indicators Dr Andrews found that both formations were most reliable when they occurred after a sharprapid price move coinciding with the formation of a probable P5 He said it wasnt unusual for theformation to take several weeks to complete and that conservative traders could best avoid thewhipsaw associated with congestion patterns by trading only in the direction of the probable price

break out of the EP or IEP formation The attached charts illustrate these formations Please look over your own charts for an example ofthe EP and IEP and send me a copy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 232127

Hello Gordon Thank you for the lesson with the EP material I couldnt find it in any previous emailHere is my example for Rule 7 RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Rule 4Date Samstag 6 Mai 2000 080827

Wednesday May 05 2000 112127 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt Thank you for the lesson with the EP materialTZgt I couldnt find it in any previous emailTZgt Here is my example for Rule 7

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hi TradersZone

Glad you mentioned it earlierexcept for the EP IEP and hissideways channel Dr Andrews didnt have much to say about chartpatterns and formations These are good ones to use though

Your study of the penetration rule was good Later

Best Regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Wednesday May 05 2000801 PM

Page 23: Pitchfork primer

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re SidewaysDate Montag 14 Februar 2000 134314

Here are my examples I couldnt find enough charts with downside targets so I included some charts with upside targets Do the channel lines always have to be horizontal When I look at my charts I find more channels with an upward slope or adownward slope RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Sideways channelsDate Freitag 18 Februar 2000 005531

At 21400 14300 PM you wrotegtHere are my examples I couldnt find enough charts with downsidegttargets so I included some charts with upside targetsgt gtDo the channel lines always have to be horizontal When I look at mygtcharts I find more channels with an upward slope or a downward slopegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone The sideways method can be used with either up or down Sorry didnt mean to imply that only downsidetargets should be found Ill reword that portion of the lesson Thanks for mentioning it Dr Andrews sideways method works only on horizontal channels Others have mentioned the slopingchannels also and have wondered if there is some method to use with them I know of none Ive askedother course members for their ideas on how to approach this problem but so far no one has come up with amethod I would think that there should be a solution but have not personally taken the time to research itIf some method could be found that works as often as the Andrews sideways count it would be a significantfind The Andrews sideways count doesnt always hit the targets as you saw on your chart of Bausch amp Lomb Itworks more often than not though and it still amazes me at how often prices reach the targets Heres an observation to keep in mind Quite often after the first target is reached prices will reverse andhead back towards the channel At times youll note that they return inside the channel They will thenreverse again and head back towards the second price target These reversals happen frequently and presenttrading opportunities Im including the final segment of this lesson Regards Gordon So far in the course youve learned about Dr Andrews pivot counting procedure pitchfork and sidewayscount Youve noticed by now how often prices change trend at a P5 Youve seen how the 0-34 ML methodcan help locate the probable P5 area Youve seen how often price targets are met using the sideways countmethod The tendency for prices to reverse at a median line should be recognized as a high probability eventas well In coming lessons youll be shown how Dr Andrews used these and other high probability events totrade the stock and commodity markets The tools and techniques he used will help you put the finishingtouches on your market analysis using Andrews lines

Before continuing on to the next lesson lets briefly review what has so far been covered The attached chartprovides an opportunity to illustrate the methods referred to above Please draw these methods on thechart and return to me

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Sideways channelsDate Montag 21 Februar 2000 193743

gtBefore continuing on to the next lesson lets briefly review what hasgtso far been covered The attached chart provides an opportunity togtillustrate the methods referred to above Please draw these methods ongtthe chart and return to me Hello Gordonhere is my chart RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next lesson attachedDate Mittwoch 23 Februar 2000 014539

At 22100 73700 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongthere is my chartgt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Good job on the pivots sideways count and pitchforkLooks like youre ready to move on to the next part It wont be long and things will begin to fall inplace Regards Gordon Lesson 4 continued In one of his course letters Dr Andrews wrote The Law of Physics stated by Newton that Actionand Reaction are equal and opposite was first applied to prices by your Course Directors friendthe late Roger Babson who attributed his earnings of several million dollars to this law Beginning with this segment of lesson four and continuing in lesson five youll learn how to drawand apply the ActionReaction trading method as taught by Dr Andrews in his trading course The AR method requires a centerline or CL from which to start The CL can be any of thefollowing - MPL - ML - MLH - 2P line - 2 Gap line - Peak to low line - Low to peak lineThese are the primary lines that Dr Andrews used He stressed that some pencil work and a goodeyeball was needed in order to find the best fitting CL As with most other chart lines somework better than others The task is to find the best fit as he put it You will be shown examples of

each of the above CLs in this lesson and the next Determining which of the above listed lines to use as the CL is the first step in the ActionReactionmethod The solution often presents itself With a little practice a quick scan of the chart understudy will be all thats needed to spot the most likely CL Well begin with the attached chart Notethe CL drawn In this example a MPL (multi-pivot line) was used as the CL A MPL is a straightline that connects three or more consecutive pivots without passing through prices Theconnecting line is then extended Ive circled the three pivots that form the MPL on the chartThere are several other places on our chart where a MPL CL can be drawn Please bear in mindthat this is just the first step of the process Identification of likely CLs is all were after here Seeif you can locate two more then draw them in and send the chart back to me Well take up fromthere

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next lesson attachedDate Mittwoch 23 Februar 2000 212304

gtLesson 4 continuedgt gtIn one of his course letters Dr Andrews wrote The Law of Physicsgtstated by Newton that Action and Reaction are equal and opposite wasgtfirst applied to prices by your Course Directors friend the lategtRoger Babson who attributed his earnings of several million dollars to this lawgt gtBeginning with this segment of lesson four and continuing in lessongtfive youll learn how to draw and apply the ActionReaction tradinggtmethod as taught by Dr Andrews in his trading coursegt gtThe AR method requires a centerline or CL from which to startgtThe CL can be any of the followinggt - MPLgt - MLgt - MLHgt - 2P linegt - 2 Gap linegt - Peak to low linegt - Low to peak line Hello Gordon2P line 2 Gap line Peak to low line Low to peak line ndash actually I dont know what these lines areAre they discussed in Lesson 3 I believe you havenrsquot sent me this lesson yetAnyway I found two more MPLs on the Novellus Chart and drew them in RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Lesson 3Date Mittwoch 23 Februar 2000 235958

At 22300 92300 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt2P line 2 Gap line Peak to low line Low to peak line - actually I dont knowgtwhat these lines are Are they discussed in Lesson 3 I believe you didntgtsent me this lesson yetgtAnyway I found two more MPLs on the Novellus Chart and drew them ingt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone My apologiesI sent you an outdated version of the lesson Thanks for letting me know Musthave been my bedtime Heres the correct version Regards Gordon Lesson 3 In one of his course letters Dr Andrews wrote The Law of Physics stated by Newton that Actionand Reaction are equal and opposite was first applied to prices by your Course Directors friendthe late Roger Babson who attributed his earnings of several million dollars to this law In this lesson youll be introduced to the ActionReaction trading method as taught by Dr Andrewsin his trading course The AR method requires a centerline or CL from which to start The CL can be any of thefollowing - MPL Multi-pivot line A line drawn across 3 or more pivots - ML Median line The middle line of the pitchfork - MLH Median line parallel Either parallel line of the pitchfork - 2P line A line drawn across 2 pivots - 2 Gap line A line drawn connecting 2 gaps without touching prices in between - Peak to low line A line drawn connecting the high and low of a price leg

- Low to peak line A line drawn connecting the low and high of a price leg These are the primary lines that Dr Andrews used He stressed that some pencil work and a goodeyeball was needed in order to find the best fitting CL As with most other chart lines somework better than others The task is to find the best fit as he put it You will be shown examples ofeach of the above CLs Determining which of the above listed lines to use as the CL is the first step in the ActionReactionmethod With practice a quick view of the chart under study will be all thats needed to spot themost likely CL Youll be shown later how to experiment with possible combinations in order tofind the centerline that is most in tune with the market under study Well begin with the attached chart Note the CL drawn In this example a MPL (multi-pivot line)was used as the CL A MPL is a straight line that connects three or more consecutive pivotswithout passing through prices The connecting line is then extended Ive circled the three pivotsthat form the MPL on the chart There are several other places on our chart where a MPL CL canbe drawn Please bear in mind that this is just the first step of the process Identification of likelyCLs is all were after here See if you can locate two more then draw them in and send the chartback to me

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Donnerstag 24 Februar 2000 025105

At 22300 92300 PM you wroteI found two more MPLs on the Novellus Chart and drew them ingt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your mpls were correct This next segment shows the purpose of the centerline and how it isused Your payment in full arrived today TradersZone Thank you Regards Gordon Lesson 3 continued Please refer to the attached chart of Novellus The line drawn connecting the 3 circled pivots is amulti-pivot line (MPL) and represents the centerline (CL) well be using in this example Recall inthe previous segment that several types of centerlines are possible The choice is determined byexperimenting with the potential combinations on the chart under study Its best to try to locate acenterline somewhere close to the middle of the price chart in order to have sufficient past andforward data to use with the study This will become clear as you work with the method Once the centerline is drawn the next step is to locate a previous low or high pivot point to use fordrawing an action line Dr Andrews observed that the low pivot points often seem to work bestbut that either could be used In our example a line starting at the previous significant low wasdrawn parallel to the CL It is labeled A-1 (Action line 1) because it represents the first actionline Dr Andrews called it an action line because it was drawn as a result of a previous pivot (pricereversal) that had taken place Next a parallel line was drawn to the right of the CL and labeled R-1 Notice that it is the same distance from the CL as the corresponding A-1 line It is labeled R-1because it represents the first reaction line a line where prices are likely to stop or reverseNotice how prices reacted at the R-1 line in early 98 That serves as an indication that thecenterline chosen for this study should be a good one to use Not all reaction lines cause such aclear reversal as the R1 on this chart but many do Thats why its important to experiment withvarious centerline possibilities in order to find action lines that produce reaction lines which createthe greatest number of pivots or price stall-outs This experimentation is often quite time

consuming but experience has shown that it is time well spent When a centerline is found that isin tune with the price action of the issue under study it can be a highly effective tool for use inlocating probable reversal areas When combined with pitchfork lines the AR method can pinpointpotential reversal areas that are generally not recognized as such by others Dr Andrewstechniques for using the pitchfork and AR lines together are covered in later lessons In coming segments well study other lines that Dr Andrews used for his centerlines In themeantime experiment with the multi-pivot centerline on your own charts Then please send mean example of your work along with any questions you may have

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Freitag 25 Februar 2000 211356

gtIn the meantime experiment with the multi-pivot centerline on your owngtcharts Then please send me an example of your work along with anygtquestions you may have Hello Gordon I was wondering how many ActionReaction lines could be drawn on a chart On my attached chart I found at least 6 parallellines which had a significant meaning for the price RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject AR linesDate Montag 28 Februar 2000 080128

gtHello Gordongt gtI was wondering how many ActionReaction lines could be drawn on agtchart On my attached chart I found at least 6 parallel lines which hadgta significant meaning for the pricegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hi TradersZone Theres no set number of lines that can be drawnactually the more you can find the betterFinding a good centerline is the key And once you find lines that work such as you did anynumber of parallel lines can be drawn You are doing exactly what Dr Andrews didtaking thetime and effort to find the best fitting sets of lines Each chart has them and each chart is differentas Im sure youve found Nice work Heres the next part Regards Gordon Lesson 3 continued One of Dr Andrews favorite techniques dealt with gapsan often times perplexing price event formany traders His observations over the years suggested to him that while gaps show upfrequently on many price charts few traders have a method for including them as an integral partof their chart analysis Thats not surprising since not much has been published about how toapproach the use of gaps in a trading method Dr Andrews however found several ways to putprice gaps to good use An ActionReaction centerline which uses gaps as its basis is one suchmethod Please refer to the attached chart of Cendant Youll see that a centerline was drawn which passedthrough the July gap Note that it also came in contact with several pivots thereby qualifying as agapmulti-pivot centerline It is drawn by starting at the April low pivot and extending a line acrossand through the gap in mid-July It subsequently touches two additional high pivots Dr Andrews counted each gap as two pivots He noted that the more pivots a line touched the

stronger the line tended to be in the future Good reason then for using the July gap as the basisfor an ActionReaction study Our CL is labelled a gap-mpl-CL The May 98 high was used for the Action Line starting point A line was then drawn parallel to theCenterline as per ActionReaction procedure The corresponding Reaction Line was then drawn inIf this particular study had been drawn on Cendants chart right after the July gap was put in thepotential for prices to go all the way down to the Reaction Line might have seemed very slim at thetime Notice however that prices reached the Reaction Line in early September Youll see thishappen time and again as you work with the AR method The core of its effectiveness is a strongCL Please send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts of your choice

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re AR linesDate Montag 28 Februar 2000 155937

gtPlease send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts of yourgtchoice Hello Gordonhere are my examples RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject More on the ARDate Donnerstag 2 Maumlrz 2000 071158

At 22800 35900 PM you wrotegtgtPlease send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts ofgtgtyour choicegt gtHello Gordongthere are my examplesgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone You picked some good examples to use for your AR study Both showed the potential power of thismethod Takes time and lots of chart study sometimes to find the best set of lines but the rewardscan be many Heres something else to look at Regards Gordon The ActionReaction technique requires a strong centerline from which to begin The key todeciding which set of pivots to use for the centerline is found through experimenting with thevarious configurations visible on the chart under study The centerline might be a series of gapspivots an existing median line or any of Dr Andrews lines The task is to search for that centerlinewhich shows the greatest potential for projecting price reversal areas Dr Andrews did that byfinding a likely centerline near the middle of his price chart That allowed him to use any of theprevious pivots for his action lines By experimenting he found reaction lines that did the best jobof pegging reversal areas at data points located forward of the centerline Reaction lines are equal and opposite of the action lines and serve to project price levels at whicha reversal can be expected That is why the task of seeking out the best centerline is so importantDr Andrews reasoned that a series of reaction lines which have pegged price reversals in the pastis likely to continue to be in tune with current and future market price action Having severalprevious pivots to use as anchors for drawing action lines is thus essential The attached chart of Lattice illustrates this concept Please bear in mind that the gapmplcenterline is not the only centerline one could use on this chart You might want to study the chartfor other AR possibilities Try a peak-to-peak CL or a multi-pivot CL Send me your studies along

with any questions

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re More on the ARDate Samstag 4 Maumlrz 2000 002521

gtThe attached chart of Lattice illustrates this conceptgtPlease bear in mind that the gapmpl centerline is not the onlygtcenterline one could use on this chartgtYou might want to study the chart for other AR possibilitiesgtTry a peak-to-peak CL or a multi-pivot CL Send me your studiesgtalong with any questions Hello Gordonhere is my chart RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Peak to peak clDate Sonntag 5 Maumlrz 2000 064107

At 3400 122500 AM you wrotegtHello Gordongthere is my chartgt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Looks like you have the concept down Takes time and a lot of chart work to find the bestcenterline When the reaction lines dont seem to peg reversal areas chances are the centerline isnot the one that is best in tune with the price action of the issue under studyDespite the time required for this method it was one of Dr Andrews stand-bysAR lines could befound on most of his charts Im sending a chart with an example of a peak-to-peak CL Regards Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Peak to peak clDate Sonntag 5 Maumlrz 2000 171232

Hello Gordon I think the peak-to-peak CL on the last chart I sent to you was not really drawn from peak to peakIm sending another example RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next LessonDate Mittwoch 8 Maumlrz 2000 072526

At 3500 51200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtI think the peak-to-peak CL on the last chart I sent to you was notgtreally drawn from peak to peakgtIm sending another examplegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your peak to peak cl example was correctly drawn Thats a fairly simple approach but quite oftenthe peak to peak yields better reaction lines Heres the first part of the next lesson Regards Gordon Youll find times when prices dont quite reach the ML but instead drift alongside or away from itThe Schiff ML was designed to be used in place of the regular ML whenever that happens Suchprice action can be found at any place on a chart but most frequently occurs after a sharp sell-offor run-up of prices Dr Andrews also used the Schiff ML whenever his regular ML sloped at an unusually steep angleHe said it helped smooth out irregular price action such as that caused by unexpected earningsnews crop planting delays or poor growing conditions crop production reports etc Youll findnearly vertical price moves over a short period of time on many charts The Schiff ML method helpsput things back in perspective when that happens Well use the chart of Sterling Bancorp as an example of prices drifting away from the regular MLThat ML is drawn in black Prices didnt quite reach the ML but drifted alongside and eventuallyaway from it The Schiff ML and parallel lines are drawn in red Notice how prices were containedwithin the Schiff pitchfork until they finally broke down at the upper parallel line The procedure for drawing the Schiff ML is the same as for the regular ML except the startingpoint is located midway between the first 2 pivots youll be using The Sterling Bancorp chart

illustrates how this is done Dr Andrews also suggested using the Schiff ML whenever the regular ML method doesnt seem tobe in sync with price action Practice this procedure on your own charts and send a couple examples when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next LessonDate Donnerstag 9 Maumlrz 2000 001143

Hello Gordon in my charting software (Dynamic Trader) the Schiff ML is drawn by finding the midpoint of the line between pivot A and pivot Bmoving this point horizontally to directly above or below (depending on whether A is a low or high pivot) the A pivot anddrawing a line from his point through the midpoint of the BC swingAre there different methods of drawing a Schiff MLI was too lazy to draw Schiff MLs by hand with the method you described so Im sending my examples with the Dynamic TraderSchiff MLs -) RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject SchiffDate Samstag 11 Maumlrz 2000 070226

At 3900 121100 AM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtin my charting software (Dynamic Trader) the Schiff ML is drawn bygtfinding the midpoint of the line between pivot A and pivot B movinggtthis point horizontally to directly above or below (depending ongtwhether A is a low or high pivot) the A pivot and drawing a linegtgtfrom his point through the midpoint of the BC swinggtAre there different methods of drawing a Schiff MLgtI was too lazy to draw Schiff MLs by hand with the method yougtdescribed so Im sending my examples with the Dynamic Trader Schiff MLs -)gt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your program Schiff line procedure is fineits actually what Dr Andrews called a modified schiff ml and is onlyslightly different than the one I sent you initially The one you used is preferred by most course members Im sendingthe modified Schiff lesson and a chart along with this email The chart example shows how to use it with 0-34 pivots Regards Gordon

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Sliding Parallel LineDate Montag 13 Maumlrz 2000 005252

Hello TradersZone Heres one of the tools Dr Andrews used most often when entering exiting or reversing marketpositions Not many people know about this technique Regards Gordon The Sliding Parallel (SH) is drawn whenever prices cross an Andrews line and then move along itFor example if the bottom of a daily price bar range drops through a lower parallel line of apitchfork a new parallel line is then drawn from that low and extended to the right If the nextdays price bar drops through that sliding parallel line a sell signal is generated Whenever price action dictates a sliding parallel the next step is to draw a Warning Line Thewarning line is an additional parallel line that is an image extension of the original pitchforkchannels It serves as a warning that if prices penetrate the sliding parallel the next likely target isthe WL The attached chart of Avis illustrates these procedures Please try these on your own charts andsend me an example

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Sliding Parallel LineDate Dienstag 14 Maumlrz 2000 225737

Hello Gordon this is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning line RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 065606

At 31400 105700 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtthis is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning linegt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone Your chart of circuit city was a good example for this study I may have mentioned it earlier but DrAndrews used this technique on a regular basis The next part of this lesson covers another of hisfavorite tools the mini-median line pitchfork Here it is Regards Gordon The Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry and exit tools Though mostoften drawn using alternate closing prices alternate highs and lows can also be usedin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days is usually the maximumbetween pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or more back from P2 Dr Andrews used Mini-Median Line pitchforks for buy and sell signals whenever he expected areversal Some examples include a probable P5 or when prices are at a Warning Line ML MLHmajor ML extension or a sideways channel price target When prices cross the Mini-Median LineParallel (MMLH) a sliding parallel (SH) is used for order entry

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 231537

gtThe Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry andgtexit tools Though most often drawn using alternate closing pricesgtalternate highs and lows can also be usedgtin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days isgtusually the maximum between pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or moregtback from P2

Hello Gordon

wouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timingCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available whenDr Andrews was alive

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject intraday chartsDate Samstag 18 Maumlrz 2000 012400

At 31600 111500 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongtgtwouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsgtinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timinggtCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available when DrgtAndrews was alivegtgtRegardsgtTradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Youre absolutely correctintraday charts were not available when DrAndrews was a trader

Im reading between the lines here but if you plan to day-trade using the course techniques ie thepitchfork then I agree that the regular pitchfork would be more useful on intraday charts Otherwisewhipsaw would be a significant problem Please get back to me if I didnt address your questionbecause this is a very important technique The mini-median line pitchfork and sliding parallel showedup on most of Dr Andrews charts

Regards

Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re intraday chartsDate Dienstag 21 Maumlrz 2000 220322

Hello Gordon

You are right Im planning to daytrade SampP futures using the course techniques among other things

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 003408

Hi TradersZone Here are a couple Andrews techniques that will help anticipate the breakout direction of asideways channelThey work often enough to warrant keep handy Regards Gordon In an earlier lesson you were introduced to Dr Andrews sideways count You saw how frequentlythe sideways count method provided high probability price objectives after the breakout from theestablished channel took place In this segment of lesson 4 youll be shown 2 congestion area techniques that can help youdetermine the probable sideways channel price breakout direction Both rely on the use of pivots The first uses the pivot points that are circled on a sideways channel Dr Andrews observed thatwhenever a sideways channel results in at least 5 circle contacts the eventual price breakoutwould very often be in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle If circle 5 is at thetop of the channel for example the eventual price breakout would likely be to the upside If circle5 is at the bottom of the channel look for a downside breakout Dr Andrews noted that thistechnique can be subject to false breakouts but that such breakouts are usually followed shortlyafter with a confirmed breakout in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle Heemphasized that this study is best considered as a rule of thumb observation He viewed it as asupporting indicator for use with a short-term pitchfork as prices approached a channel line There are 2 charts attached that show how this works

The second technique in this part of lesson 4 deals with a sideways channelthat is building shortly after a P3 has been formed Dr Andrews noted thatwhenever that happened the probabilities were high that prices wouldbreakout in the same direction they were moving prior to the formation ofthe sideways channel The attached P3 to sideways example chart shows thisprocedure

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 205235

Hello Gordon here is my example for the 5 circle sideways count RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Lesson 5Date Montag 27 Maumlrz 2000 060731

At 32400 85200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my example for the 5 circle sideways countgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt gt Hi TradersZone Good example of the 5th circle tendency to predict the direction of a sideways breakout Any luckfinding a chart showing the P3 to sideways rule Im sending the first part of the next lesson This trendline method is a useful tool with all of DrAndrews course lines He used it all the time but especially when looking for confirmation of othercourse method trading signals Regards Gordon The Course Trendline__________________________________________________________ Next well discuss the trendline Seasoned traders agree that the trendline is one of their mostimportant tools No matter what kind of trading program or technique they use the trendline on achart is a must But one of the biggest mistakes made by amateurs and professionals alike isinconsistently drawing or defining the trendline Dr Andrews trendline procedure is simpleconsistent and accurate It works extremely well with the pivot count and with the pitchfork For an uptrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the lowest low up and to thehighest minor low point preceding the highest high The line must not pass through prices inbetween the two low points Extend the line(Attached chart of Brightpoint) For a downtrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the highest high point to thelowest minor high point preceding the lowest low so that it does not pass through prices inbetween the two high points Extend the line (Brightpoint chart) Thats all theres to it Its simple consistent and it works well with other Andrews lines It also

helps eliminate personal bias and haphazard analysis Practice drawing these trendlines on your own charts Send me any questions you might have andthen e-mail a chart of your choosing which shows at least two uptrend and two downtrend linesthat youve drawn_______________________________________________________________________

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Lesson 5Date Dienstag 28 Maumlrz 2000 120224

Hello Gordon here is my chart with trendlinesWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going above the trendline again should I draw a new trendline anddelete the old one Attached is another chart with the P3 to sideways rule I finally found an example for it RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Price failure techniqueDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081412

At 32800 120200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my chart with trendlinesgtWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going abovegtthe trendline again should I draw a new trendline and delete the oldgtone Hi TradersZone Take a look at the chart Im returningI added some lines for you to considerWith the course trendline once its broken a new one should be started Theres a technique thatties in with this coming up soon Meanwhile heres an important technique to work on It deals with those times when prices dontreach the ML Regards Gordon Dr Andrews Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P ofreversaland the ML the probability is that this price reversal will go further thanitdid on its approach toward the ML (Extract of original course material) A price failure very often indicates a sizeable reversal will take placeThepitchforks drawn on the chart of Home Depot illustrate the concept of pricefailure Dr Andrews routinely drew a new pitchfork on his chart after a newsignificant pivot had formed He knew that prices had a high probability ofreaching the new ML before stalling out or reversing If prices reversedbeforereaching the ML thereby forming a new pivot he termed it a price failureTheunderlying idea here is that Dr Andrews fully anticipated his median linewouldact as a price magnet To conclude that a price reversal resulted in a price failure Dr Andrewsused

these primary signalsa subsequent price penetration of a short-termmulti-pivotline andor a return of prices to and penetration of the parallel lineformed atpivot 3 of the pitchfork (The circles on the Home Depot chart denote theparallelline penetration signal To avoid clutter the mpl lines were not drawn) One possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart of ConsecoIncLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me a copy

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject ChartDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081800Attachments image002png

Hi TradersZone Forgot the chart Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Price failure techniqueDate Samstag 1 April 2000 201000

gtOne possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart ofgtConseco IncgtLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me agtcopy Hi Gordon here are my charts with price failures RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Mittwoch 5 April 2000 235624

Hi TradersZone Good price failure examples you sentany comments or questions about it Heres the next partanother old standby Dr Andrews kept handy Regards Gordon In this segment youll learn how to use the Fan line Technique To draw the fan lines youll apply the coursetrendline method which was introduced in an earlier lesson It might be well to emphasize that the practicalapplication of the course trendline method requires practice and experience both of which will serve youwell in this technique Dr Andrews used fan lines as an adjunct to his pitchfork sideways channel andactionreaction methods In the fan line study three trendlines are drawn from the original reversal pivot of the price correction understudy typically a P0 or a P5 Youll notice on the charts included with this study that each fan line is at aflatter angle than its predecessor When the third fan line is broken the rule is that the correction has endedand a new trend is under way Try this technique on some of your own charts and then please send me asample

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Donnerstag 6 April 2000 234315

Hi Gordon No I dont have any specific question about the price failure technique I guess the next likely target after a price failure wouldbe the warning line I have attached two charts with fan linesIs it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the third fan line is broken RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Next segmentDate Freitag 7 April 2000 003312

Hello TradersZone

Tuesday April 06 2000 114315 AM you wrote

TZgt Hi Gordon

TZgt No I dont have any specific question about the price failureTZgt technique I guess the next likely target after a price failureTZgt would be the warning line

TZgt I have attached two charts with fan linesTZgt Is it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the thirdTZgt fan line is broken

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Thats right the warning line is the next price target Additionalwarning lines can be drawn if needed but usually one will do it Ifprices go through the first warning line another can be drawn butmost likely a new pitchfork could be drawn instead which would bepreferable Helps stay current with recently formed pivots

When prices break through the third fan line a buy or sell signal isgiven Not sure what you mean by fourth target fan line Im a littledense today

Your chart work was goodthis is another handy tool for spotting thehigh probability of a price reversal or trend change

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject The Gap TradeDate Freitag 7 April 2000 004858

Hello TradersZone This trading signal doesnt show up very often but past observations have shown that its well worth watching for Dr Andrews placed a lot of emphasis on the importance of price gaps something many traders overlook This is one of his gap uses Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom The Gap Trading Technique Price gaps can be a dilemma for many traders The general rule denoting market strength or weakness after ahigh volume gap often comes up short after the initial reaction is over Many gappers simply run out ofsteam A high volume gap in itself seems to offer precious little evidence that a profitable move is about toget under way Dr Andrews used price gaps somewhat differently than others He counted a gap as 2 pivots Youll see howthat works in the following technique which uses a gap to arrive at a price level for a buy or sell order Using short-term daily price pivots label the pivot immediately preceding the gap as p0 Count the gap as 2pivots labeling it p1 amp p2 After p3 has formed and prices reverse towards a short-term p4 draw a horizontalline 2 price tics or more (individual preference)to the right of p3 Enter the market only if prices reach orpenetrate that line within a few days after reversing from p4 Please look over your own charts to see if you can find places where the gap trade technique could have beenused Send me a sample when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 001925

Hello Gordon this is my chart with a gap trade RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 065538

Hello TradersZone Thursday April 08 2000 121925 PM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt this is my chart with a gap trade TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Good examplethe gap trade technique shines when an issue in at or near a P5 Similar to the one on thechart you sent Heres another trading signal tool Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Dr Andrews used several techniques which helped him determine whether a P5 was near at hand Youllrecall that he observed most price moves ended or had a significant reversal at a P5 This technique uses alternate closing prices after a P4 has been formed As with many of his studies thenumber 5 is used The chart accompanying this segment shows that there were 5 alternate closes to thedownside after P4 was put in Dr Andrews noted that whenever 5 or more alternate closes followed a P4 theprobabilities were high that a P5 was near at hand An added feature to this chart study is the sideways channel Notice how the 2nd target price and the 5thalternate close nearly coincide

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 12 April 2000 200730

Hello Gordon This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 13 April 2000 082418

Monday April 12 2000 80730 AM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hello TradersZone Good chart example of this Andrews toolanother of his very unusual observations that workmore often than not Heres the final part of this lesson Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom In this trendline method Dr Andrews once again used the number 5 as the basis for locating aprobable reversal area He found this technique to be especially useful whenever a clear orobvious pivot count didnt show up onthe price move under study Trendlines are drawn using the course trendline method When the 5th trendline is broken theprobability is high that the trend under study has ended A mini-median line pitchfork andorsliding parallel could be used for pricing a trading order The accompanying chart of Compaq Computer is an example of how the trendline study could beused The pivot count beginning at the October low is difficult to nail down There were severalsmall areas of congestion but no sizeable corrections while prices advanced The count wasunclear By following the price action using the course trendline technique however the traderwould have been alerted to the possibility of a change of trend when the 5th trendline was brokenin early February Try this technique on your own charts When youre ready please send me an example of yourstudy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 19 April 2000 124108

Hello Gordon this is my example with 5 trendlines RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[6] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 20 April 2000 012726

Monday April 19 2000 124108 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt this is my example with 5 trendlines

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Good example of the 5 TL technique Always reminds me of how the fairly simple tools often do a better job than manyof the sophisticated studies out there

That was the last part of lesson 5 Lesson 6 attached is made in one mailing Youll find Dr Andrews trading rules alongwith a wrap-up review which uses several of his rules You might have questions about some of the rules so feel free tosend them as they arise

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Dr Andrews had an abbreviated set of trading rules on several index cards that he carried around with him in his shirtpocket He said every trading day turned up something new on his charts and by having his rules in his pocket he wasreminded of the need for a methodical approach to his analysis Quite a comment coming from the man who wrote therule book

In this the final lesson of the course Dr Andrews original trading rules and observations are presented Lets work witha few of them at this point

Using charts of issues you follow please send me an example that illustrates your interpretation of each of the followingrules

Rule 4 Anticipating major Ps

Rule 7 Penetration rule

Rule 8 Price failure rule

Rule 11 1-ML23 AR Centerline

Rule 12 Sliding Parallel rule

Rule 15 Mini-median line parallel to buy or sell

Feel free to include any other course techniques you choose to apply but please include examples of the above as aminimum Use more than one technique on a chart if your analysis supports it Send as many charts as you like alongwith your questionscomments

Lesson 6 - Dr Andrews Trading Rules

This lesson covers course rules and significant observations as taught by Dr Andrews in his original trading course Therules are those that he used in his own trading and are provided to serve as a checklist for use with the course tradingmethods youve learned

Rule 1 Where prices are always headed Rule You course members are among the fortunate few to be able to draw astraight line and know that prices are headed toward that ML Very few investors have ever applied this ML principle ofstatistics to price fluctuations and weve never seen this in any books on investment You are among the very few who

know that prices are always headed toward the newest ML

Rule 2 The Rule of coming opposites applies all through life In the bible we find Blessed at they that mourn for theyshall be comforted As investors we know that any losses can be recovered by using course methods

Rule 3 Turn your mind about or Rethink for all good is at hand We should mentally prepare ourselves for thecoming reversal in prices and other affairs Heres one way for example that you course members who know the MLrules can use When prices are skyrocketing upward we do this preparation by thinking If prices pivoted here today atthis price Id draw a new ML bisecting the distance between todays price and the price from which the rise started Andwe know now that if this is a Major Pivot prices will fall rapidly to this new ML Profits from such drops are big and quick

Rule 4 Rule for anticipating major Ps If during congestion or after a rally or decline you can count four previous Psthe fifth one is highly probable to be the one from which a new trend starts

Rule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can make a quick big profit is to watch for the EPformations

Rule 6 The other reversal rule is that prices tend to reverse at or near any ML as well as at any extension of each MLAnd also at any MLH or extensions of MLH

Rule 7 The Penetration Rule is that whenever prices gap past or plunge through any ML there is a high probability thatthey will quickly return to it temporarily and then resume the trend they had before they gapped or plunged through

Rule 8 Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P of reversal and the MLthe probability is that this price reversal will go further than it did on its approach toward the ML

Rule 9 The price failure rule is negated when the next price trend is also a failure in reaching the ML This is almostinvariably a signal of a big fast move in the direction indicated by this last space Rule 10 When alternate median lines of comparable length slope in the same direction the trend is firm and rapidprice changes take place

Rule 11 When 1-ML23 is exactly reached at P4 it can be used as a highly reliable centerline for the AR method

Rule 12 Frequently after crossing a lower MLH prices continue to rise along the MLH Since the crossing of the MLHsignals a further drop is likely use a sliding parallel along the bottom of the most recent crossing If prices drop past thatsliding parallel line a sell signal is generated

Rule 13 MLs between P2 and P3 can start from a nearby or a remote P1 since prices tend to reverse at each of theseMLs Try several such P2-P3 MLs to discover the best fit

Rule 14 The distance of each MLH from its ML is the distance of the next warning line Use these warning lineswhenever a SH has signalled a buy or sell

Rule 15 Use the MMLH as a buy or sell signal when you expect a reversal because of a P5 Also when prices are at aWL ML extension line or where course lines converge or intersect

Rule 16 Converging lines that meet prices have shown the highest probability of a trend reversal

Rule 17 Two to four days is usually the maximum between P2 and P3 for a MML P1 can be a day or so back from P2and 3

Rule 18 The most reliable ActionReaction centerlines seem to be MPL 2P line 2 Gap line peak to low or low to peak

Rule 19 When prices pass through R lines look for a pull back and then a continuing move in the direction of the passthrough

Rule 20 Use gaps as Action lines from the centerline

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 003755

Hello Gordonhere is my example for Rule 4 And I have a question What are EP formations gtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 021242

Tuesday May 04 2000 123755 PM you wrote TZgt Hello GordonTZgt here is my example for Rule 4 TZgt And I have a question What are EP formations gtgtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegtgta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hi TradersZone Good use of the warning linesalso the EP material is part of lesson 4 Rather than go backthrough the files to see when (or if) it was sent Im sending it along with this reply Glad youbrought it up Best RegardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Tuesday May 04 2000208 PM Dr Andrews used a fairly common price chart formation that he found useful at probable P5market tops and bottoms The formation generally called a wedge or pennant by chartists isreferred to in Dr Andrews trading course as the Expanding Pivot (EP) One of the few chartformations used in the course he regarded it as among the most dependable indications that amarket top was forming Closely related to the EP is his Inverted Expanding Pivot (IEP) which henoted could often be observed at market bottoms Both are regarded as intermediate and long-term reversal indicators Dr Andrews found that both formations were most reliable when they occurred after a sharprapid price move coinciding with the formation of a probable P5 He said it wasnt unusual for theformation to take several weeks to complete and that conservative traders could best avoid thewhipsaw associated with congestion patterns by trading only in the direction of the probable price

break out of the EP or IEP formation The attached charts illustrate these formations Please look over your own charts for an example ofthe EP and IEP and send me a copy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 232127

Hello Gordon Thank you for the lesson with the EP material I couldnt find it in any previous emailHere is my example for Rule 7 RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Rule 4Date Samstag 6 Mai 2000 080827

Wednesday May 05 2000 112127 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt Thank you for the lesson with the EP materialTZgt I couldnt find it in any previous emailTZgt Here is my example for Rule 7

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hi TradersZone

Glad you mentioned it earlierexcept for the EP IEP and hissideways channel Dr Andrews didnt have much to say about chartpatterns and formations These are good ones to use though

Your study of the penetration rule was good Later

Best Regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Wednesday May 05 2000801 PM

Page 24: Pitchfork primer

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Sideways channelsDate Freitag 18 Februar 2000 005531

At 21400 14300 PM you wrotegtHere are my examples I couldnt find enough charts with downsidegttargets so I included some charts with upside targetsgt gtDo the channel lines always have to be horizontal When I look at mygtcharts I find more channels with an upward slope or a downward slopegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone The sideways method can be used with either up or down Sorry didnt mean to imply that only downsidetargets should be found Ill reword that portion of the lesson Thanks for mentioning it Dr Andrews sideways method works only on horizontal channels Others have mentioned the slopingchannels also and have wondered if there is some method to use with them I know of none Ive askedother course members for their ideas on how to approach this problem but so far no one has come up with amethod I would think that there should be a solution but have not personally taken the time to research itIf some method could be found that works as often as the Andrews sideways count it would be a significantfind The Andrews sideways count doesnt always hit the targets as you saw on your chart of Bausch amp Lomb Itworks more often than not though and it still amazes me at how often prices reach the targets Heres an observation to keep in mind Quite often after the first target is reached prices will reverse andhead back towards the channel At times youll note that they return inside the channel They will thenreverse again and head back towards the second price target These reversals happen frequently and presenttrading opportunities Im including the final segment of this lesson Regards Gordon So far in the course youve learned about Dr Andrews pivot counting procedure pitchfork and sidewayscount Youve noticed by now how often prices change trend at a P5 Youve seen how the 0-34 ML methodcan help locate the probable P5 area Youve seen how often price targets are met using the sideways countmethod The tendency for prices to reverse at a median line should be recognized as a high probability eventas well In coming lessons youll be shown how Dr Andrews used these and other high probability events totrade the stock and commodity markets The tools and techniques he used will help you put the finishingtouches on your market analysis using Andrews lines

Before continuing on to the next lesson lets briefly review what has so far been covered The attached chartprovides an opportunity to illustrate the methods referred to above Please draw these methods on thechart and return to me

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Sideways channelsDate Montag 21 Februar 2000 193743

gtBefore continuing on to the next lesson lets briefly review what hasgtso far been covered The attached chart provides an opportunity togtillustrate the methods referred to above Please draw these methods ongtthe chart and return to me Hello Gordonhere is my chart RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next lesson attachedDate Mittwoch 23 Februar 2000 014539

At 22100 73700 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongthere is my chartgt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Good job on the pivots sideways count and pitchforkLooks like youre ready to move on to the next part It wont be long and things will begin to fall inplace Regards Gordon Lesson 4 continued In one of his course letters Dr Andrews wrote The Law of Physics stated by Newton that Actionand Reaction are equal and opposite was first applied to prices by your Course Directors friendthe late Roger Babson who attributed his earnings of several million dollars to this law Beginning with this segment of lesson four and continuing in lesson five youll learn how to drawand apply the ActionReaction trading method as taught by Dr Andrews in his trading course The AR method requires a centerline or CL from which to start The CL can be any of thefollowing - MPL - ML - MLH - 2P line - 2 Gap line - Peak to low line - Low to peak lineThese are the primary lines that Dr Andrews used He stressed that some pencil work and a goodeyeball was needed in order to find the best fitting CL As with most other chart lines somework better than others The task is to find the best fit as he put it You will be shown examples of

each of the above CLs in this lesson and the next Determining which of the above listed lines to use as the CL is the first step in the ActionReactionmethod The solution often presents itself With a little practice a quick scan of the chart understudy will be all thats needed to spot the most likely CL Well begin with the attached chart Notethe CL drawn In this example a MPL (multi-pivot line) was used as the CL A MPL is a straightline that connects three or more consecutive pivots without passing through prices Theconnecting line is then extended Ive circled the three pivots that form the MPL on the chartThere are several other places on our chart where a MPL CL can be drawn Please bear in mindthat this is just the first step of the process Identification of likely CLs is all were after here Seeif you can locate two more then draw them in and send the chart back to me Well take up fromthere

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next lesson attachedDate Mittwoch 23 Februar 2000 212304

gtLesson 4 continuedgt gtIn one of his course letters Dr Andrews wrote The Law of Physicsgtstated by Newton that Action and Reaction are equal and opposite wasgtfirst applied to prices by your Course Directors friend the lategtRoger Babson who attributed his earnings of several million dollars to this lawgt gtBeginning with this segment of lesson four and continuing in lessongtfive youll learn how to draw and apply the ActionReaction tradinggtmethod as taught by Dr Andrews in his trading coursegt gtThe AR method requires a centerline or CL from which to startgtThe CL can be any of the followinggt - MPLgt - MLgt - MLHgt - 2P linegt - 2 Gap linegt - Peak to low linegt - Low to peak line Hello Gordon2P line 2 Gap line Peak to low line Low to peak line ndash actually I dont know what these lines areAre they discussed in Lesson 3 I believe you havenrsquot sent me this lesson yetAnyway I found two more MPLs on the Novellus Chart and drew them in RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Lesson 3Date Mittwoch 23 Februar 2000 235958

At 22300 92300 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt2P line 2 Gap line Peak to low line Low to peak line - actually I dont knowgtwhat these lines are Are they discussed in Lesson 3 I believe you didntgtsent me this lesson yetgtAnyway I found two more MPLs on the Novellus Chart and drew them ingt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone My apologiesI sent you an outdated version of the lesson Thanks for letting me know Musthave been my bedtime Heres the correct version Regards Gordon Lesson 3 In one of his course letters Dr Andrews wrote The Law of Physics stated by Newton that Actionand Reaction are equal and opposite was first applied to prices by your Course Directors friendthe late Roger Babson who attributed his earnings of several million dollars to this law In this lesson youll be introduced to the ActionReaction trading method as taught by Dr Andrewsin his trading course The AR method requires a centerline or CL from which to start The CL can be any of thefollowing - MPL Multi-pivot line A line drawn across 3 or more pivots - ML Median line The middle line of the pitchfork - MLH Median line parallel Either parallel line of the pitchfork - 2P line A line drawn across 2 pivots - 2 Gap line A line drawn connecting 2 gaps without touching prices in between - Peak to low line A line drawn connecting the high and low of a price leg

- Low to peak line A line drawn connecting the low and high of a price leg These are the primary lines that Dr Andrews used He stressed that some pencil work and a goodeyeball was needed in order to find the best fitting CL As with most other chart lines somework better than others The task is to find the best fit as he put it You will be shown examples ofeach of the above CLs Determining which of the above listed lines to use as the CL is the first step in the ActionReactionmethod With practice a quick view of the chart under study will be all thats needed to spot themost likely CL Youll be shown later how to experiment with possible combinations in order tofind the centerline that is most in tune with the market under study Well begin with the attached chart Note the CL drawn In this example a MPL (multi-pivot line)was used as the CL A MPL is a straight line that connects three or more consecutive pivotswithout passing through prices The connecting line is then extended Ive circled the three pivotsthat form the MPL on the chart There are several other places on our chart where a MPL CL canbe drawn Please bear in mind that this is just the first step of the process Identification of likelyCLs is all were after here See if you can locate two more then draw them in and send the chartback to me

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Donnerstag 24 Februar 2000 025105

At 22300 92300 PM you wroteI found two more MPLs on the Novellus Chart and drew them ingt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your mpls were correct This next segment shows the purpose of the centerline and how it isused Your payment in full arrived today TradersZone Thank you Regards Gordon Lesson 3 continued Please refer to the attached chart of Novellus The line drawn connecting the 3 circled pivots is amulti-pivot line (MPL) and represents the centerline (CL) well be using in this example Recall inthe previous segment that several types of centerlines are possible The choice is determined byexperimenting with the potential combinations on the chart under study Its best to try to locate acenterline somewhere close to the middle of the price chart in order to have sufficient past andforward data to use with the study This will become clear as you work with the method Once the centerline is drawn the next step is to locate a previous low or high pivot point to use fordrawing an action line Dr Andrews observed that the low pivot points often seem to work bestbut that either could be used In our example a line starting at the previous significant low wasdrawn parallel to the CL It is labeled A-1 (Action line 1) because it represents the first actionline Dr Andrews called it an action line because it was drawn as a result of a previous pivot (pricereversal) that had taken place Next a parallel line was drawn to the right of the CL and labeled R-1 Notice that it is the same distance from the CL as the corresponding A-1 line It is labeled R-1because it represents the first reaction line a line where prices are likely to stop or reverseNotice how prices reacted at the R-1 line in early 98 That serves as an indication that thecenterline chosen for this study should be a good one to use Not all reaction lines cause such aclear reversal as the R1 on this chart but many do Thats why its important to experiment withvarious centerline possibilities in order to find action lines that produce reaction lines which createthe greatest number of pivots or price stall-outs This experimentation is often quite time

consuming but experience has shown that it is time well spent When a centerline is found that isin tune with the price action of the issue under study it can be a highly effective tool for use inlocating probable reversal areas When combined with pitchfork lines the AR method can pinpointpotential reversal areas that are generally not recognized as such by others Dr Andrewstechniques for using the pitchfork and AR lines together are covered in later lessons In coming segments well study other lines that Dr Andrews used for his centerlines In themeantime experiment with the multi-pivot centerline on your own charts Then please send mean example of your work along with any questions you may have

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Freitag 25 Februar 2000 211356

gtIn the meantime experiment with the multi-pivot centerline on your owngtcharts Then please send me an example of your work along with anygtquestions you may have Hello Gordon I was wondering how many ActionReaction lines could be drawn on a chart On my attached chart I found at least 6 parallellines which had a significant meaning for the price RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject AR linesDate Montag 28 Februar 2000 080128

gtHello Gordongt gtI was wondering how many ActionReaction lines could be drawn on agtchart On my attached chart I found at least 6 parallel lines which hadgta significant meaning for the pricegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hi TradersZone Theres no set number of lines that can be drawnactually the more you can find the betterFinding a good centerline is the key And once you find lines that work such as you did anynumber of parallel lines can be drawn You are doing exactly what Dr Andrews didtaking thetime and effort to find the best fitting sets of lines Each chart has them and each chart is differentas Im sure youve found Nice work Heres the next part Regards Gordon Lesson 3 continued One of Dr Andrews favorite techniques dealt with gapsan often times perplexing price event formany traders His observations over the years suggested to him that while gaps show upfrequently on many price charts few traders have a method for including them as an integral partof their chart analysis Thats not surprising since not much has been published about how toapproach the use of gaps in a trading method Dr Andrews however found several ways to putprice gaps to good use An ActionReaction centerline which uses gaps as its basis is one suchmethod Please refer to the attached chart of Cendant Youll see that a centerline was drawn which passedthrough the July gap Note that it also came in contact with several pivots thereby qualifying as agapmulti-pivot centerline It is drawn by starting at the April low pivot and extending a line acrossand through the gap in mid-July It subsequently touches two additional high pivots Dr Andrews counted each gap as two pivots He noted that the more pivots a line touched the

stronger the line tended to be in the future Good reason then for using the July gap as the basisfor an ActionReaction study Our CL is labelled a gap-mpl-CL The May 98 high was used for the Action Line starting point A line was then drawn parallel to theCenterline as per ActionReaction procedure The corresponding Reaction Line was then drawn inIf this particular study had been drawn on Cendants chart right after the July gap was put in thepotential for prices to go all the way down to the Reaction Line might have seemed very slim at thetime Notice however that prices reached the Reaction Line in early September Youll see thishappen time and again as you work with the AR method The core of its effectiveness is a strongCL Please send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts of your choice

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re AR linesDate Montag 28 Februar 2000 155937

gtPlease send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts of yourgtchoice Hello Gordonhere are my examples RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject More on the ARDate Donnerstag 2 Maumlrz 2000 071158

At 22800 35900 PM you wrotegtgtPlease send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts ofgtgtyour choicegt gtHello Gordongthere are my examplesgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone You picked some good examples to use for your AR study Both showed the potential power of thismethod Takes time and lots of chart study sometimes to find the best set of lines but the rewardscan be many Heres something else to look at Regards Gordon The ActionReaction technique requires a strong centerline from which to begin The key todeciding which set of pivots to use for the centerline is found through experimenting with thevarious configurations visible on the chart under study The centerline might be a series of gapspivots an existing median line or any of Dr Andrews lines The task is to search for that centerlinewhich shows the greatest potential for projecting price reversal areas Dr Andrews did that byfinding a likely centerline near the middle of his price chart That allowed him to use any of theprevious pivots for his action lines By experimenting he found reaction lines that did the best jobof pegging reversal areas at data points located forward of the centerline Reaction lines are equal and opposite of the action lines and serve to project price levels at whicha reversal can be expected That is why the task of seeking out the best centerline is so importantDr Andrews reasoned that a series of reaction lines which have pegged price reversals in the pastis likely to continue to be in tune with current and future market price action Having severalprevious pivots to use as anchors for drawing action lines is thus essential The attached chart of Lattice illustrates this concept Please bear in mind that the gapmplcenterline is not the only centerline one could use on this chart You might want to study the chartfor other AR possibilities Try a peak-to-peak CL or a multi-pivot CL Send me your studies along

with any questions

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re More on the ARDate Samstag 4 Maumlrz 2000 002521

gtThe attached chart of Lattice illustrates this conceptgtPlease bear in mind that the gapmpl centerline is not the onlygtcenterline one could use on this chartgtYou might want to study the chart for other AR possibilitiesgtTry a peak-to-peak CL or a multi-pivot CL Send me your studiesgtalong with any questions Hello Gordonhere is my chart RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Peak to peak clDate Sonntag 5 Maumlrz 2000 064107

At 3400 122500 AM you wrotegtHello Gordongthere is my chartgt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Looks like you have the concept down Takes time and a lot of chart work to find the bestcenterline When the reaction lines dont seem to peg reversal areas chances are the centerline isnot the one that is best in tune with the price action of the issue under studyDespite the time required for this method it was one of Dr Andrews stand-bysAR lines could befound on most of his charts Im sending a chart with an example of a peak-to-peak CL Regards Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Peak to peak clDate Sonntag 5 Maumlrz 2000 171232

Hello Gordon I think the peak-to-peak CL on the last chart I sent to you was not really drawn from peak to peakIm sending another example RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next LessonDate Mittwoch 8 Maumlrz 2000 072526

At 3500 51200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtI think the peak-to-peak CL on the last chart I sent to you was notgtreally drawn from peak to peakgtIm sending another examplegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your peak to peak cl example was correctly drawn Thats a fairly simple approach but quite oftenthe peak to peak yields better reaction lines Heres the first part of the next lesson Regards Gordon Youll find times when prices dont quite reach the ML but instead drift alongside or away from itThe Schiff ML was designed to be used in place of the regular ML whenever that happens Suchprice action can be found at any place on a chart but most frequently occurs after a sharp sell-offor run-up of prices Dr Andrews also used the Schiff ML whenever his regular ML sloped at an unusually steep angleHe said it helped smooth out irregular price action such as that caused by unexpected earningsnews crop planting delays or poor growing conditions crop production reports etc Youll findnearly vertical price moves over a short period of time on many charts The Schiff ML method helpsput things back in perspective when that happens Well use the chart of Sterling Bancorp as an example of prices drifting away from the regular MLThat ML is drawn in black Prices didnt quite reach the ML but drifted alongside and eventuallyaway from it The Schiff ML and parallel lines are drawn in red Notice how prices were containedwithin the Schiff pitchfork until they finally broke down at the upper parallel line The procedure for drawing the Schiff ML is the same as for the regular ML except the startingpoint is located midway between the first 2 pivots youll be using The Sterling Bancorp chart

illustrates how this is done Dr Andrews also suggested using the Schiff ML whenever the regular ML method doesnt seem tobe in sync with price action Practice this procedure on your own charts and send a couple examples when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next LessonDate Donnerstag 9 Maumlrz 2000 001143

Hello Gordon in my charting software (Dynamic Trader) the Schiff ML is drawn by finding the midpoint of the line between pivot A and pivot Bmoving this point horizontally to directly above or below (depending on whether A is a low or high pivot) the A pivot anddrawing a line from his point through the midpoint of the BC swingAre there different methods of drawing a Schiff MLI was too lazy to draw Schiff MLs by hand with the method you described so Im sending my examples with the Dynamic TraderSchiff MLs -) RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject SchiffDate Samstag 11 Maumlrz 2000 070226

At 3900 121100 AM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtin my charting software (Dynamic Trader) the Schiff ML is drawn bygtfinding the midpoint of the line between pivot A and pivot B movinggtthis point horizontally to directly above or below (depending ongtwhether A is a low or high pivot) the A pivot and drawing a linegtgtfrom his point through the midpoint of the BC swinggtAre there different methods of drawing a Schiff MLgtI was too lazy to draw Schiff MLs by hand with the method yougtdescribed so Im sending my examples with the Dynamic Trader Schiff MLs -)gt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your program Schiff line procedure is fineits actually what Dr Andrews called a modified schiff ml and is onlyslightly different than the one I sent you initially The one you used is preferred by most course members Im sendingthe modified Schiff lesson and a chart along with this email The chart example shows how to use it with 0-34 pivots Regards Gordon

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Sliding Parallel LineDate Montag 13 Maumlrz 2000 005252

Hello TradersZone Heres one of the tools Dr Andrews used most often when entering exiting or reversing marketpositions Not many people know about this technique Regards Gordon The Sliding Parallel (SH) is drawn whenever prices cross an Andrews line and then move along itFor example if the bottom of a daily price bar range drops through a lower parallel line of apitchfork a new parallel line is then drawn from that low and extended to the right If the nextdays price bar drops through that sliding parallel line a sell signal is generated Whenever price action dictates a sliding parallel the next step is to draw a Warning Line Thewarning line is an additional parallel line that is an image extension of the original pitchforkchannels It serves as a warning that if prices penetrate the sliding parallel the next likely target isthe WL The attached chart of Avis illustrates these procedures Please try these on your own charts andsend me an example

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Sliding Parallel LineDate Dienstag 14 Maumlrz 2000 225737

Hello Gordon this is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning line RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 065606

At 31400 105700 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtthis is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning linegt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone Your chart of circuit city was a good example for this study I may have mentioned it earlier but DrAndrews used this technique on a regular basis The next part of this lesson covers another of hisfavorite tools the mini-median line pitchfork Here it is Regards Gordon The Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry and exit tools Though mostoften drawn using alternate closing prices alternate highs and lows can also be usedin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days is usually the maximumbetween pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or more back from P2 Dr Andrews used Mini-Median Line pitchforks for buy and sell signals whenever he expected areversal Some examples include a probable P5 or when prices are at a Warning Line ML MLHmajor ML extension or a sideways channel price target When prices cross the Mini-Median LineParallel (MMLH) a sliding parallel (SH) is used for order entry

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 231537

gtThe Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry andgtexit tools Though most often drawn using alternate closing pricesgtalternate highs and lows can also be usedgtin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days isgtusually the maximum between pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or moregtback from P2

Hello Gordon

wouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timingCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available whenDr Andrews was alive

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject intraday chartsDate Samstag 18 Maumlrz 2000 012400

At 31600 111500 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongtgtwouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsgtinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timinggtCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available when DrgtAndrews was alivegtgtRegardsgtTradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Youre absolutely correctintraday charts were not available when DrAndrews was a trader

Im reading between the lines here but if you plan to day-trade using the course techniques ie thepitchfork then I agree that the regular pitchfork would be more useful on intraday charts Otherwisewhipsaw would be a significant problem Please get back to me if I didnt address your questionbecause this is a very important technique The mini-median line pitchfork and sliding parallel showedup on most of Dr Andrews charts

Regards

Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re intraday chartsDate Dienstag 21 Maumlrz 2000 220322

Hello Gordon

You are right Im planning to daytrade SampP futures using the course techniques among other things

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 003408

Hi TradersZone Here are a couple Andrews techniques that will help anticipate the breakout direction of asideways channelThey work often enough to warrant keep handy Regards Gordon In an earlier lesson you were introduced to Dr Andrews sideways count You saw how frequentlythe sideways count method provided high probability price objectives after the breakout from theestablished channel took place In this segment of lesson 4 youll be shown 2 congestion area techniques that can help youdetermine the probable sideways channel price breakout direction Both rely on the use of pivots The first uses the pivot points that are circled on a sideways channel Dr Andrews observed thatwhenever a sideways channel results in at least 5 circle contacts the eventual price breakoutwould very often be in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle If circle 5 is at thetop of the channel for example the eventual price breakout would likely be to the upside If circle5 is at the bottom of the channel look for a downside breakout Dr Andrews noted that thistechnique can be subject to false breakouts but that such breakouts are usually followed shortlyafter with a confirmed breakout in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle Heemphasized that this study is best considered as a rule of thumb observation He viewed it as asupporting indicator for use with a short-term pitchfork as prices approached a channel line There are 2 charts attached that show how this works

The second technique in this part of lesson 4 deals with a sideways channelthat is building shortly after a P3 has been formed Dr Andrews noted thatwhenever that happened the probabilities were high that prices wouldbreakout in the same direction they were moving prior to the formation ofthe sideways channel The attached P3 to sideways example chart shows thisprocedure

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 205235

Hello Gordon here is my example for the 5 circle sideways count RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Lesson 5Date Montag 27 Maumlrz 2000 060731

At 32400 85200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my example for the 5 circle sideways countgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt gt Hi TradersZone Good example of the 5th circle tendency to predict the direction of a sideways breakout Any luckfinding a chart showing the P3 to sideways rule Im sending the first part of the next lesson This trendline method is a useful tool with all of DrAndrews course lines He used it all the time but especially when looking for confirmation of othercourse method trading signals Regards Gordon The Course Trendline__________________________________________________________ Next well discuss the trendline Seasoned traders agree that the trendline is one of their mostimportant tools No matter what kind of trading program or technique they use the trendline on achart is a must But one of the biggest mistakes made by amateurs and professionals alike isinconsistently drawing or defining the trendline Dr Andrews trendline procedure is simpleconsistent and accurate It works extremely well with the pivot count and with the pitchfork For an uptrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the lowest low up and to thehighest minor low point preceding the highest high The line must not pass through prices inbetween the two low points Extend the line(Attached chart of Brightpoint) For a downtrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the highest high point to thelowest minor high point preceding the lowest low so that it does not pass through prices inbetween the two high points Extend the line (Brightpoint chart) Thats all theres to it Its simple consistent and it works well with other Andrews lines It also

helps eliminate personal bias and haphazard analysis Practice drawing these trendlines on your own charts Send me any questions you might have andthen e-mail a chart of your choosing which shows at least two uptrend and two downtrend linesthat youve drawn_______________________________________________________________________

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Lesson 5Date Dienstag 28 Maumlrz 2000 120224

Hello Gordon here is my chart with trendlinesWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going above the trendline again should I draw a new trendline anddelete the old one Attached is another chart with the P3 to sideways rule I finally found an example for it RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Price failure techniqueDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081412

At 32800 120200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my chart with trendlinesgtWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going abovegtthe trendline again should I draw a new trendline and delete the oldgtone Hi TradersZone Take a look at the chart Im returningI added some lines for you to considerWith the course trendline once its broken a new one should be started Theres a technique thatties in with this coming up soon Meanwhile heres an important technique to work on It deals with those times when prices dontreach the ML Regards Gordon Dr Andrews Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P ofreversaland the ML the probability is that this price reversal will go further thanitdid on its approach toward the ML (Extract of original course material) A price failure very often indicates a sizeable reversal will take placeThepitchforks drawn on the chart of Home Depot illustrate the concept of pricefailure Dr Andrews routinely drew a new pitchfork on his chart after a newsignificant pivot had formed He knew that prices had a high probability ofreaching the new ML before stalling out or reversing If prices reversedbeforereaching the ML thereby forming a new pivot he termed it a price failureTheunderlying idea here is that Dr Andrews fully anticipated his median linewouldact as a price magnet To conclude that a price reversal resulted in a price failure Dr Andrewsused

these primary signalsa subsequent price penetration of a short-termmulti-pivotline andor a return of prices to and penetration of the parallel lineformed atpivot 3 of the pitchfork (The circles on the Home Depot chart denote theparallelline penetration signal To avoid clutter the mpl lines were not drawn) One possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart of ConsecoIncLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me a copy

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject ChartDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081800Attachments image002png

Hi TradersZone Forgot the chart Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Price failure techniqueDate Samstag 1 April 2000 201000

gtOne possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart ofgtConseco IncgtLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me agtcopy Hi Gordon here are my charts with price failures RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Mittwoch 5 April 2000 235624

Hi TradersZone Good price failure examples you sentany comments or questions about it Heres the next partanother old standby Dr Andrews kept handy Regards Gordon In this segment youll learn how to use the Fan line Technique To draw the fan lines youll apply the coursetrendline method which was introduced in an earlier lesson It might be well to emphasize that the practicalapplication of the course trendline method requires practice and experience both of which will serve youwell in this technique Dr Andrews used fan lines as an adjunct to his pitchfork sideways channel andactionreaction methods In the fan line study three trendlines are drawn from the original reversal pivot of the price correction understudy typically a P0 or a P5 Youll notice on the charts included with this study that each fan line is at aflatter angle than its predecessor When the third fan line is broken the rule is that the correction has endedand a new trend is under way Try this technique on some of your own charts and then please send me asample

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Donnerstag 6 April 2000 234315

Hi Gordon No I dont have any specific question about the price failure technique I guess the next likely target after a price failure wouldbe the warning line I have attached two charts with fan linesIs it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the third fan line is broken RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Next segmentDate Freitag 7 April 2000 003312

Hello TradersZone

Tuesday April 06 2000 114315 AM you wrote

TZgt Hi Gordon

TZgt No I dont have any specific question about the price failureTZgt technique I guess the next likely target after a price failureTZgt would be the warning line

TZgt I have attached two charts with fan linesTZgt Is it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the thirdTZgt fan line is broken

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Thats right the warning line is the next price target Additionalwarning lines can be drawn if needed but usually one will do it Ifprices go through the first warning line another can be drawn butmost likely a new pitchfork could be drawn instead which would bepreferable Helps stay current with recently formed pivots

When prices break through the third fan line a buy or sell signal isgiven Not sure what you mean by fourth target fan line Im a littledense today

Your chart work was goodthis is another handy tool for spotting thehigh probability of a price reversal or trend change

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject The Gap TradeDate Freitag 7 April 2000 004858

Hello TradersZone This trading signal doesnt show up very often but past observations have shown that its well worth watching for Dr Andrews placed a lot of emphasis on the importance of price gaps something many traders overlook This is one of his gap uses Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom The Gap Trading Technique Price gaps can be a dilemma for many traders The general rule denoting market strength or weakness after ahigh volume gap often comes up short after the initial reaction is over Many gappers simply run out ofsteam A high volume gap in itself seems to offer precious little evidence that a profitable move is about toget under way Dr Andrews used price gaps somewhat differently than others He counted a gap as 2 pivots Youll see howthat works in the following technique which uses a gap to arrive at a price level for a buy or sell order Using short-term daily price pivots label the pivot immediately preceding the gap as p0 Count the gap as 2pivots labeling it p1 amp p2 After p3 has formed and prices reverse towards a short-term p4 draw a horizontalline 2 price tics or more (individual preference)to the right of p3 Enter the market only if prices reach orpenetrate that line within a few days after reversing from p4 Please look over your own charts to see if you can find places where the gap trade technique could have beenused Send me a sample when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 001925

Hello Gordon this is my chart with a gap trade RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 065538

Hello TradersZone Thursday April 08 2000 121925 PM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt this is my chart with a gap trade TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Good examplethe gap trade technique shines when an issue in at or near a P5 Similar to the one on thechart you sent Heres another trading signal tool Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Dr Andrews used several techniques which helped him determine whether a P5 was near at hand Youllrecall that he observed most price moves ended or had a significant reversal at a P5 This technique uses alternate closing prices after a P4 has been formed As with many of his studies thenumber 5 is used The chart accompanying this segment shows that there were 5 alternate closes to thedownside after P4 was put in Dr Andrews noted that whenever 5 or more alternate closes followed a P4 theprobabilities were high that a P5 was near at hand An added feature to this chart study is the sideways channel Notice how the 2nd target price and the 5thalternate close nearly coincide

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 12 April 2000 200730

Hello Gordon This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 13 April 2000 082418

Monday April 12 2000 80730 AM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hello TradersZone Good chart example of this Andrews toolanother of his very unusual observations that workmore often than not Heres the final part of this lesson Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom In this trendline method Dr Andrews once again used the number 5 as the basis for locating aprobable reversal area He found this technique to be especially useful whenever a clear orobvious pivot count didnt show up onthe price move under study Trendlines are drawn using the course trendline method When the 5th trendline is broken theprobability is high that the trend under study has ended A mini-median line pitchfork andorsliding parallel could be used for pricing a trading order The accompanying chart of Compaq Computer is an example of how the trendline study could beused The pivot count beginning at the October low is difficult to nail down There were severalsmall areas of congestion but no sizeable corrections while prices advanced The count wasunclear By following the price action using the course trendline technique however the traderwould have been alerted to the possibility of a change of trend when the 5th trendline was brokenin early February Try this technique on your own charts When youre ready please send me an example of yourstudy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 19 April 2000 124108

Hello Gordon this is my example with 5 trendlines RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[6] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 20 April 2000 012726

Monday April 19 2000 124108 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt this is my example with 5 trendlines

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Good example of the 5 TL technique Always reminds me of how the fairly simple tools often do a better job than manyof the sophisticated studies out there

That was the last part of lesson 5 Lesson 6 attached is made in one mailing Youll find Dr Andrews trading rules alongwith a wrap-up review which uses several of his rules You might have questions about some of the rules so feel free tosend them as they arise

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Dr Andrews had an abbreviated set of trading rules on several index cards that he carried around with him in his shirtpocket He said every trading day turned up something new on his charts and by having his rules in his pocket he wasreminded of the need for a methodical approach to his analysis Quite a comment coming from the man who wrote therule book

In this the final lesson of the course Dr Andrews original trading rules and observations are presented Lets work witha few of them at this point

Using charts of issues you follow please send me an example that illustrates your interpretation of each of the followingrules

Rule 4 Anticipating major Ps

Rule 7 Penetration rule

Rule 8 Price failure rule

Rule 11 1-ML23 AR Centerline

Rule 12 Sliding Parallel rule

Rule 15 Mini-median line parallel to buy or sell

Feel free to include any other course techniques you choose to apply but please include examples of the above as aminimum Use more than one technique on a chart if your analysis supports it Send as many charts as you like alongwith your questionscomments

Lesson 6 - Dr Andrews Trading Rules

This lesson covers course rules and significant observations as taught by Dr Andrews in his original trading course Therules are those that he used in his own trading and are provided to serve as a checklist for use with the course tradingmethods youve learned

Rule 1 Where prices are always headed Rule You course members are among the fortunate few to be able to draw astraight line and know that prices are headed toward that ML Very few investors have ever applied this ML principle ofstatistics to price fluctuations and weve never seen this in any books on investment You are among the very few who

know that prices are always headed toward the newest ML

Rule 2 The Rule of coming opposites applies all through life In the bible we find Blessed at they that mourn for theyshall be comforted As investors we know that any losses can be recovered by using course methods

Rule 3 Turn your mind about or Rethink for all good is at hand We should mentally prepare ourselves for thecoming reversal in prices and other affairs Heres one way for example that you course members who know the MLrules can use When prices are skyrocketing upward we do this preparation by thinking If prices pivoted here today atthis price Id draw a new ML bisecting the distance between todays price and the price from which the rise started Andwe know now that if this is a Major Pivot prices will fall rapidly to this new ML Profits from such drops are big and quick

Rule 4 Rule for anticipating major Ps If during congestion or after a rally or decline you can count four previous Psthe fifth one is highly probable to be the one from which a new trend starts

Rule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can make a quick big profit is to watch for the EPformations

Rule 6 The other reversal rule is that prices tend to reverse at or near any ML as well as at any extension of each MLAnd also at any MLH or extensions of MLH

Rule 7 The Penetration Rule is that whenever prices gap past or plunge through any ML there is a high probability thatthey will quickly return to it temporarily and then resume the trend they had before they gapped or plunged through

Rule 8 Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P of reversal and the MLthe probability is that this price reversal will go further than it did on its approach toward the ML

Rule 9 The price failure rule is negated when the next price trend is also a failure in reaching the ML This is almostinvariably a signal of a big fast move in the direction indicated by this last space Rule 10 When alternate median lines of comparable length slope in the same direction the trend is firm and rapidprice changes take place

Rule 11 When 1-ML23 is exactly reached at P4 it can be used as a highly reliable centerline for the AR method

Rule 12 Frequently after crossing a lower MLH prices continue to rise along the MLH Since the crossing of the MLHsignals a further drop is likely use a sliding parallel along the bottom of the most recent crossing If prices drop past thatsliding parallel line a sell signal is generated

Rule 13 MLs between P2 and P3 can start from a nearby or a remote P1 since prices tend to reverse at each of theseMLs Try several such P2-P3 MLs to discover the best fit

Rule 14 The distance of each MLH from its ML is the distance of the next warning line Use these warning lineswhenever a SH has signalled a buy or sell

Rule 15 Use the MMLH as a buy or sell signal when you expect a reversal because of a P5 Also when prices are at aWL ML extension line or where course lines converge or intersect

Rule 16 Converging lines that meet prices have shown the highest probability of a trend reversal

Rule 17 Two to four days is usually the maximum between P2 and P3 for a MML P1 can be a day or so back from P2and 3

Rule 18 The most reliable ActionReaction centerlines seem to be MPL 2P line 2 Gap line peak to low or low to peak

Rule 19 When prices pass through R lines look for a pull back and then a continuing move in the direction of the passthrough

Rule 20 Use gaps as Action lines from the centerline

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 003755

Hello Gordonhere is my example for Rule 4 And I have a question What are EP formations gtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 021242

Tuesday May 04 2000 123755 PM you wrote TZgt Hello GordonTZgt here is my example for Rule 4 TZgt And I have a question What are EP formations gtgtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegtgta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hi TradersZone Good use of the warning linesalso the EP material is part of lesson 4 Rather than go backthrough the files to see when (or if) it was sent Im sending it along with this reply Glad youbrought it up Best RegardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Tuesday May 04 2000208 PM Dr Andrews used a fairly common price chart formation that he found useful at probable P5market tops and bottoms The formation generally called a wedge or pennant by chartists isreferred to in Dr Andrews trading course as the Expanding Pivot (EP) One of the few chartformations used in the course he regarded it as among the most dependable indications that amarket top was forming Closely related to the EP is his Inverted Expanding Pivot (IEP) which henoted could often be observed at market bottoms Both are regarded as intermediate and long-term reversal indicators Dr Andrews found that both formations were most reliable when they occurred after a sharprapid price move coinciding with the formation of a probable P5 He said it wasnt unusual for theformation to take several weeks to complete and that conservative traders could best avoid thewhipsaw associated with congestion patterns by trading only in the direction of the probable price

break out of the EP or IEP formation The attached charts illustrate these formations Please look over your own charts for an example ofthe EP and IEP and send me a copy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 232127

Hello Gordon Thank you for the lesson with the EP material I couldnt find it in any previous emailHere is my example for Rule 7 RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Rule 4Date Samstag 6 Mai 2000 080827

Wednesday May 05 2000 112127 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt Thank you for the lesson with the EP materialTZgt I couldnt find it in any previous emailTZgt Here is my example for Rule 7

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hi TradersZone

Glad you mentioned it earlierexcept for the EP IEP and hissideways channel Dr Andrews didnt have much to say about chartpatterns and formations These are good ones to use though

Your study of the penetration rule was good Later

Best Regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Wednesday May 05 2000801 PM

Page 25: Pitchfork primer

Before continuing on to the next lesson lets briefly review what has so far been covered The attached chartprovides an opportunity to illustrate the methods referred to above Please draw these methods on thechart and return to me

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Sideways channelsDate Montag 21 Februar 2000 193743

gtBefore continuing on to the next lesson lets briefly review what hasgtso far been covered The attached chart provides an opportunity togtillustrate the methods referred to above Please draw these methods ongtthe chart and return to me Hello Gordonhere is my chart RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next lesson attachedDate Mittwoch 23 Februar 2000 014539

At 22100 73700 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongthere is my chartgt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Good job on the pivots sideways count and pitchforkLooks like youre ready to move on to the next part It wont be long and things will begin to fall inplace Regards Gordon Lesson 4 continued In one of his course letters Dr Andrews wrote The Law of Physics stated by Newton that Actionand Reaction are equal and opposite was first applied to prices by your Course Directors friendthe late Roger Babson who attributed his earnings of several million dollars to this law Beginning with this segment of lesson four and continuing in lesson five youll learn how to drawand apply the ActionReaction trading method as taught by Dr Andrews in his trading course The AR method requires a centerline or CL from which to start The CL can be any of thefollowing - MPL - ML - MLH - 2P line - 2 Gap line - Peak to low line - Low to peak lineThese are the primary lines that Dr Andrews used He stressed that some pencil work and a goodeyeball was needed in order to find the best fitting CL As with most other chart lines somework better than others The task is to find the best fit as he put it You will be shown examples of

each of the above CLs in this lesson and the next Determining which of the above listed lines to use as the CL is the first step in the ActionReactionmethod The solution often presents itself With a little practice a quick scan of the chart understudy will be all thats needed to spot the most likely CL Well begin with the attached chart Notethe CL drawn In this example a MPL (multi-pivot line) was used as the CL A MPL is a straightline that connects three or more consecutive pivots without passing through prices Theconnecting line is then extended Ive circled the three pivots that form the MPL on the chartThere are several other places on our chart where a MPL CL can be drawn Please bear in mindthat this is just the first step of the process Identification of likely CLs is all were after here Seeif you can locate two more then draw them in and send the chart back to me Well take up fromthere

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next lesson attachedDate Mittwoch 23 Februar 2000 212304

gtLesson 4 continuedgt gtIn one of his course letters Dr Andrews wrote The Law of Physicsgtstated by Newton that Action and Reaction are equal and opposite wasgtfirst applied to prices by your Course Directors friend the lategtRoger Babson who attributed his earnings of several million dollars to this lawgt gtBeginning with this segment of lesson four and continuing in lessongtfive youll learn how to draw and apply the ActionReaction tradinggtmethod as taught by Dr Andrews in his trading coursegt gtThe AR method requires a centerline or CL from which to startgtThe CL can be any of the followinggt - MPLgt - MLgt - MLHgt - 2P linegt - 2 Gap linegt - Peak to low linegt - Low to peak line Hello Gordon2P line 2 Gap line Peak to low line Low to peak line ndash actually I dont know what these lines areAre they discussed in Lesson 3 I believe you havenrsquot sent me this lesson yetAnyway I found two more MPLs on the Novellus Chart and drew them in RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Lesson 3Date Mittwoch 23 Februar 2000 235958

At 22300 92300 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt2P line 2 Gap line Peak to low line Low to peak line - actually I dont knowgtwhat these lines are Are they discussed in Lesson 3 I believe you didntgtsent me this lesson yetgtAnyway I found two more MPLs on the Novellus Chart and drew them ingt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone My apologiesI sent you an outdated version of the lesson Thanks for letting me know Musthave been my bedtime Heres the correct version Regards Gordon Lesson 3 In one of his course letters Dr Andrews wrote The Law of Physics stated by Newton that Actionand Reaction are equal and opposite was first applied to prices by your Course Directors friendthe late Roger Babson who attributed his earnings of several million dollars to this law In this lesson youll be introduced to the ActionReaction trading method as taught by Dr Andrewsin his trading course The AR method requires a centerline or CL from which to start The CL can be any of thefollowing - MPL Multi-pivot line A line drawn across 3 or more pivots - ML Median line The middle line of the pitchfork - MLH Median line parallel Either parallel line of the pitchfork - 2P line A line drawn across 2 pivots - 2 Gap line A line drawn connecting 2 gaps without touching prices in between - Peak to low line A line drawn connecting the high and low of a price leg

- Low to peak line A line drawn connecting the low and high of a price leg These are the primary lines that Dr Andrews used He stressed that some pencil work and a goodeyeball was needed in order to find the best fitting CL As with most other chart lines somework better than others The task is to find the best fit as he put it You will be shown examples ofeach of the above CLs Determining which of the above listed lines to use as the CL is the first step in the ActionReactionmethod With practice a quick view of the chart under study will be all thats needed to spot themost likely CL Youll be shown later how to experiment with possible combinations in order tofind the centerline that is most in tune with the market under study Well begin with the attached chart Note the CL drawn In this example a MPL (multi-pivot line)was used as the CL A MPL is a straight line that connects three or more consecutive pivotswithout passing through prices The connecting line is then extended Ive circled the three pivotsthat form the MPL on the chart There are several other places on our chart where a MPL CL canbe drawn Please bear in mind that this is just the first step of the process Identification of likelyCLs is all were after here See if you can locate two more then draw them in and send the chartback to me

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Donnerstag 24 Februar 2000 025105

At 22300 92300 PM you wroteI found two more MPLs on the Novellus Chart and drew them ingt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your mpls were correct This next segment shows the purpose of the centerline and how it isused Your payment in full arrived today TradersZone Thank you Regards Gordon Lesson 3 continued Please refer to the attached chart of Novellus The line drawn connecting the 3 circled pivots is amulti-pivot line (MPL) and represents the centerline (CL) well be using in this example Recall inthe previous segment that several types of centerlines are possible The choice is determined byexperimenting with the potential combinations on the chart under study Its best to try to locate acenterline somewhere close to the middle of the price chart in order to have sufficient past andforward data to use with the study This will become clear as you work with the method Once the centerline is drawn the next step is to locate a previous low or high pivot point to use fordrawing an action line Dr Andrews observed that the low pivot points often seem to work bestbut that either could be used In our example a line starting at the previous significant low wasdrawn parallel to the CL It is labeled A-1 (Action line 1) because it represents the first actionline Dr Andrews called it an action line because it was drawn as a result of a previous pivot (pricereversal) that had taken place Next a parallel line was drawn to the right of the CL and labeled R-1 Notice that it is the same distance from the CL as the corresponding A-1 line It is labeled R-1because it represents the first reaction line a line where prices are likely to stop or reverseNotice how prices reacted at the R-1 line in early 98 That serves as an indication that thecenterline chosen for this study should be a good one to use Not all reaction lines cause such aclear reversal as the R1 on this chart but many do Thats why its important to experiment withvarious centerline possibilities in order to find action lines that produce reaction lines which createthe greatest number of pivots or price stall-outs This experimentation is often quite time

consuming but experience has shown that it is time well spent When a centerline is found that isin tune with the price action of the issue under study it can be a highly effective tool for use inlocating probable reversal areas When combined with pitchfork lines the AR method can pinpointpotential reversal areas that are generally not recognized as such by others Dr Andrewstechniques for using the pitchfork and AR lines together are covered in later lessons In coming segments well study other lines that Dr Andrews used for his centerlines In themeantime experiment with the multi-pivot centerline on your own charts Then please send mean example of your work along with any questions you may have

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Freitag 25 Februar 2000 211356

gtIn the meantime experiment with the multi-pivot centerline on your owngtcharts Then please send me an example of your work along with anygtquestions you may have Hello Gordon I was wondering how many ActionReaction lines could be drawn on a chart On my attached chart I found at least 6 parallellines which had a significant meaning for the price RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject AR linesDate Montag 28 Februar 2000 080128

gtHello Gordongt gtI was wondering how many ActionReaction lines could be drawn on agtchart On my attached chart I found at least 6 parallel lines which hadgta significant meaning for the pricegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hi TradersZone Theres no set number of lines that can be drawnactually the more you can find the betterFinding a good centerline is the key And once you find lines that work such as you did anynumber of parallel lines can be drawn You are doing exactly what Dr Andrews didtaking thetime and effort to find the best fitting sets of lines Each chart has them and each chart is differentas Im sure youve found Nice work Heres the next part Regards Gordon Lesson 3 continued One of Dr Andrews favorite techniques dealt with gapsan often times perplexing price event formany traders His observations over the years suggested to him that while gaps show upfrequently on many price charts few traders have a method for including them as an integral partof their chart analysis Thats not surprising since not much has been published about how toapproach the use of gaps in a trading method Dr Andrews however found several ways to putprice gaps to good use An ActionReaction centerline which uses gaps as its basis is one suchmethod Please refer to the attached chart of Cendant Youll see that a centerline was drawn which passedthrough the July gap Note that it also came in contact with several pivots thereby qualifying as agapmulti-pivot centerline It is drawn by starting at the April low pivot and extending a line acrossand through the gap in mid-July It subsequently touches two additional high pivots Dr Andrews counted each gap as two pivots He noted that the more pivots a line touched the

stronger the line tended to be in the future Good reason then for using the July gap as the basisfor an ActionReaction study Our CL is labelled a gap-mpl-CL The May 98 high was used for the Action Line starting point A line was then drawn parallel to theCenterline as per ActionReaction procedure The corresponding Reaction Line was then drawn inIf this particular study had been drawn on Cendants chart right after the July gap was put in thepotential for prices to go all the way down to the Reaction Line might have seemed very slim at thetime Notice however that prices reached the Reaction Line in early September Youll see thishappen time and again as you work with the AR method The core of its effectiveness is a strongCL Please send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts of your choice

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re AR linesDate Montag 28 Februar 2000 155937

gtPlease send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts of yourgtchoice Hello Gordonhere are my examples RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject More on the ARDate Donnerstag 2 Maumlrz 2000 071158

At 22800 35900 PM you wrotegtgtPlease send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts ofgtgtyour choicegt gtHello Gordongthere are my examplesgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone You picked some good examples to use for your AR study Both showed the potential power of thismethod Takes time and lots of chart study sometimes to find the best set of lines but the rewardscan be many Heres something else to look at Regards Gordon The ActionReaction technique requires a strong centerline from which to begin The key todeciding which set of pivots to use for the centerline is found through experimenting with thevarious configurations visible on the chart under study The centerline might be a series of gapspivots an existing median line or any of Dr Andrews lines The task is to search for that centerlinewhich shows the greatest potential for projecting price reversal areas Dr Andrews did that byfinding a likely centerline near the middle of his price chart That allowed him to use any of theprevious pivots for his action lines By experimenting he found reaction lines that did the best jobof pegging reversal areas at data points located forward of the centerline Reaction lines are equal and opposite of the action lines and serve to project price levels at whicha reversal can be expected That is why the task of seeking out the best centerline is so importantDr Andrews reasoned that a series of reaction lines which have pegged price reversals in the pastis likely to continue to be in tune with current and future market price action Having severalprevious pivots to use as anchors for drawing action lines is thus essential The attached chart of Lattice illustrates this concept Please bear in mind that the gapmplcenterline is not the only centerline one could use on this chart You might want to study the chartfor other AR possibilities Try a peak-to-peak CL or a multi-pivot CL Send me your studies along

with any questions

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re More on the ARDate Samstag 4 Maumlrz 2000 002521

gtThe attached chart of Lattice illustrates this conceptgtPlease bear in mind that the gapmpl centerline is not the onlygtcenterline one could use on this chartgtYou might want to study the chart for other AR possibilitiesgtTry a peak-to-peak CL or a multi-pivot CL Send me your studiesgtalong with any questions Hello Gordonhere is my chart RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Peak to peak clDate Sonntag 5 Maumlrz 2000 064107

At 3400 122500 AM you wrotegtHello Gordongthere is my chartgt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Looks like you have the concept down Takes time and a lot of chart work to find the bestcenterline When the reaction lines dont seem to peg reversal areas chances are the centerline isnot the one that is best in tune with the price action of the issue under studyDespite the time required for this method it was one of Dr Andrews stand-bysAR lines could befound on most of his charts Im sending a chart with an example of a peak-to-peak CL Regards Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Peak to peak clDate Sonntag 5 Maumlrz 2000 171232

Hello Gordon I think the peak-to-peak CL on the last chart I sent to you was not really drawn from peak to peakIm sending another example RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next LessonDate Mittwoch 8 Maumlrz 2000 072526

At 3500 51200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtI think the peak-to-peak CL on the last chart I sent to you was notgtreally drawn from peak to peakgtIm sending another examplegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your peak to peak cl example was correctly drawn Thats a fairly simple approach but quite oftenthe peak to peak yields better reaction lines Heres the first part of the next lesson Regards Gordon Youll find times when prices dont quite reach the ML but instead drift alongside or away from itThe Schiff ML was designed to be used in place of the regular ML whenever that happens Suchprice action can be found at any place on a chart but most frequently occurs after a sharp sell-offor run-up of prices Dr Andrews also used the Schiff ML whenever his regular ML sloped at an unusually steep angleHe said it helped smooth out irregular price action such as that caused by unexpected earningsnews crop planting delays or poor growing conditions crop production reports etc Youll findnearly vertical price moves over a short period of time on many charts The Schiff ML method helpsput things back in perspective when that happens Well use the chart of Sterling Bancorp as an example of prices drifting away from the regular MLThat ML is drawn in black Prices didnt quite reach the ML but drifted alongside and eventuallyaway from it The Schiff ML and parallel lines are drawn in red Notice how prices were containedwithin the Schiff pitchfork until they finally broke down at the upper parallel line The procedure for drawing the Schiff ML is the same as for the regular ML except the startingpoint is located midway between the first 2 pivots youll be using The Sterling Bancorp chart

illustrates how this is done Dr Andrews also suggested using the Schiff ML whenever the regular ML method doesnt seem tobe in sync with price action Practice this procedure on your own charts and send a couple examples when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next LessonDate Donnerstag 9 Maumlrz 2000 001143

Hello Gordon in my charting software (Dynamic Trader) the Schiff ML is drawn by finding the midpoint of the line between pivot A and pivot Bmoving this point horizontally to directly above or below (depending on whether A is a low or high pivot) the A pivot anddrawing a line from his point through the midpoint of the BC swingAre there different methods of drawing a Schiff MLI was too lazy to draw Schiff MLs by hand with the method you described so Im sending my examples with the Dynamic TraderSchiff MLs -) RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject SchiffDate Samstag 11 Maumlrz 2000 070226

At 3900 121100 AM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtin my charting software (Dynamic Trader) the Schiff ML is drawn bygtfinding the midpoint of the line between pivot A and pivot B movinggtthis point horizontally to directly above or below (depending ongtwhether A is a low or high pivot) the A pivot and drawing a linegtgtfrom his point through the midpoint of the BC swinggtAre there different methods of drawing a Schiff MLgtI was too lazy to draw Schiff MLs by hand with the method yougtdescribed so Im sending my examples with the Dynamic Trader Schiff MLs -)gt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your program Schiff line procedure is fineits actually what Dr Andrews called a modified schiff ml and is onlyslightly different than the one I sent you initially The one you used is preferred by most course members Im sendingthe modified Schiff lesson and a chart along with this email The chart example shows how to use it with 0-34 pivots Regards Gordon

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Sliding Parallel LineDate Montag 13 Maumlrz 2000 005252

Hello TradersZone Heres one of the tools Dr Andrews used most often when entering exiting or reversing marketpositions Not many people know about this technique Regards Gordon The Sliding Parallel (SH) is drawn whenever prices cross an Andrews line and then move along itFor example if the bottom of a daily price bar range drops through a lower parallel line of apitchfork a new parallel line is then drawn from that low and extended to the right If the nextdays price bar drops through that sliding parallel line a sell signal is generated Whenever price action dictates a sliding parallel the next step is to draw a Warning Line Thewarning line is an additional parallel line that is an image extension of the original pitchforkchannels It serves as a warning that if prices penetrate the sliding parallel the next likely target isthe WL The attached chart of Avis illustrates these procedures Please try these on your own charts andsend me an example

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Sliding Parallel LineDate Dienstag 14 Maumlrz 2000 225737

Hello Gordon this is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning line RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 065606

At 31400 105700 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtthis is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning linegt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone Your chart of circuit city was a good example for this study I may have mentioned it earlier but DrAndrews used this technique on a regular basis The next part of this lesson covers another of hisfavorite tools the mini-median line pitchfork Here it is Regards Gordon The Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry and exit tools Though mostoften drawn using alternate closing prices alternate highs and lows can also be usedin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days is usually the maximumbetween pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or more back from P2 Dr Andrews used Mini-Median Line pitchforks for buy and sell signals whenever he expected areversal Some examples include a probable P5 or when prices are at a Warning Line ML MLHmajor ML extension or a sideways channel price target When prices cross the Mini-Median LineParallel (MMLH) a sliding parallel (SH) is used for order entry

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 231537

gtThe Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry andgtexit tools Though most often drawn using alternate closing pricesgtalternate highs and lows can also be usedgtin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days isgtusually the maximum between pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or moregtback from P2

Hello Gordon

wouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timingCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available whenDr Andrews was alive

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject intraday chartsDate Samstag 18 Maumlrz 2000 012400

At 31600 111500 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongtgtwouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsgtinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timinggtCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available when DrgtAndrews was alivegtgtRegardsgtTradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Youre absolutely correctintraday charts were not available when DrAndrews was a trader

Im reading between the lines here but if you plan to day-trade using the course techniques ie thepitchfork then I agree that the regular pitchfork would be more useful on intraday charts Otherwisewhipsaw would be a significant problem Please get back to me if I didnt address your questionbecause this is a very important technique The mini-median line pitchfork and sliding parallel showedup on most of Dr Andrews charts

Regards

Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re intraday chartsDate Dienstag 21 Maumlrz 2000 220322

Hello Gordon

You are right Im planning to daytrade SampP futures using the course techniques among other things

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 003408

Hi TradersZone Here are a couple Andrews techniques that will help anticipate the breakout direction of asideways channelThey work often enough to warrant keep handy Regards Gordon In an earlier lesson you were introduced to Dr Andrews sideways count You saw how frequentlythe sideways count method provided high probability price objectives after the breakout from theestablished channel took place In this segment of lesson 4 youll be shown 2 congestion area techniques that can help youdetermine the probable sideways channel price breakout direction Both rely on the use of pivots The first uses the pivot points that are circled on a sideways channel Dr Andrews observed thatwhenever a sideways channel results in at least 5 circle contacts the eventual price breakoutwould very often be in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle If circle 5 is at thetop of the channel for example the eventual price breakout would likely be to the upside If circle5 is at the bottom of the channel look for a downside breakout Dr Andrews noted that thistechnique can be subject to false breakouts but that such breakouts are usually followed shortlyafter with a confirmed breakout in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle Heemphasized that this study is best considered as a rule of thumb observation He viewed it as asupporting indicator for use with a short-term pitchfork as prices approached a channel line There are 2 charts attached that show how this works

The second technique in this part of lesson 4 deals with a sideways channelthat is building shortly after a P3 has been formed Dr Andrews noted thatwhenever that happened the probabilities were high that prices wouldbreakout in the same direction they were moving prior to the formation ofthe sideways channel The attached P3 to sideways example chart shows thisprocedure

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 205235

Hello Gordon here is my example for the 5 circle sideways count RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Lesson 5Date Montag 27 Maumlrz 2000 060731

At 32400 85200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my example for the 5 circle sideways countgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt gt Hi TradersZone Good example of the 5th circle tendency to predict the direction of a sideways breakout Any luckfinding a chart showing the P3 to sideways rule Im sending the first part of the next lesson This trendline method is a useful tool with all of DrAndrews course lines He used it all the time but especially when looking for confirmation of othercourse method trading signals Regards Gordon The Course Trendline__________________________________________________________ Next well discuss the trendline Seasoned traders agree that the trendline is one of their mostimportant tools No matter what kind of trading program or technique they use the trendline on achart is a must But one of the biggest mistakes made by amateurs and professionals alike isinconsistently drawing or defining the trendline Dr Andrews trendline procedure is simpleconsistent and accurate It works extremely well with the pivot count and with the pitchfork For an uptrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the lowest low up and to thehighest minor low point preceding the highest high The line must not pass through prices inbetween the two low points Extend the line(Attached chart of Brightpoint) For a downtrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the highest high point to thelowest minor high point preceding the lowest low so that it does not pass through prices inbetween the two high points Extend the line (Brightpoint chart) Thats all theres to it Its simple consistent and it works well with other Andrews lines It also

helps eliminate personal bias and haphazard analysis Practice drawing these trendlines on your own charts Send me any questions you might have andthen e-mail a chart of your choosing which shows at least two uptrend and two downtrend linesthat youve drawn_______________________________________________________________________

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Lesson 5Date Dienstag 28 Maumlrz 2000 120224

Hello Gordon here is my chart with trendlinesWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going above the trendline again should I draw a new trendline anddelete the old one Attached is another chart with the P3 to sideways rule I finally found an example for it RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Price failure techniqueDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081412

At 32800 120200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my chart with trendlinesgtWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going abovegtthe trendline again should I draw a new trendline and delete the oldgtone Hi TradersZone Take a look at the chart Im returningI added some lines for you to considerWith the course trendline once its broken a new one should be started Theres a technique thatties in with this coming up soon Meanwhile heres an important technique to work on It deals with those times when prices dontreach the ML Regards Gordon Dr Andrews Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P ofreversaland the ML the probability is that this price reversal will go further thanitdid on its approach toward the ML (Extract of original course material) A price failure very often indicates a sizeable reversal will take placeThepitchforks drawn on the chart of Home Depot illustrate the concept of pricefailure Dr Andrews routinely drew a new pitchfork on his chart after a newsignificant pivot had formed He knew that prices had a high probability ofreaching the new ML before stalling out or reversing If prices reversedbeforereaching the ML thereby forming a new pivot he termed it a price failureTheunderlying idea here is that Dr Andrews fully anticipated his median linewouldact as a price magnet To conclude that a price reversal resulted in a price failure Dr Andrewsused

these primary signalsa subsequent price penetration of a short-termmulti-pivotline andor a return of prices to and penetration of the parallel lineformed atpivot 3 of the pitchfork (The circles on the Home Depot chart denote theparallelline penetration signal To avoid clutter the mpl lines were not drawn) One possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart of ConsecoIncLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me a copy

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject ChartDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081800Attachments image002png

Hi TradersZone Forgot the chart Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Price failure techniqueDate Samstag 1 April 2000 201000

gtOne possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart ofgtConseco IncgtLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me agtcopy Hi Gordon here are my charts with price failures RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Mittwoch 5 April 2000 235624

Hi TradersZone Good price failure examples you sentany comments or questions about it Heres the next partanother old standby Dr Andrews kept handy Regards Gordon In this segment youll learn how to use the Fan line Technique To draw the fan lines youll apply the coursetrendline method which was introduced in an earlier lesson It might be well to emphasize that the practicalapplication of the course trendline method requires practice and experience both of which will serve youwell in this technique Dr Andrews used fan lines as an adjunct to his pitchfork sideways channel andactionreaction methods In the fan line study three trendlines are drawn from the original reversal pivot of the price correction understudy typically a P0 or a P5 Youll notice on the charts included with this study that each fan line is at aflatter angle than its predecessor When the third fan line is broken the rule is that the correction has endedand a new trend is under way Try this technique on some of your own charts and then please send me asample

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Donnerstag 6 April 2000 234315

Hi Gordon No I dont have any specific question about the price failure technique I guess the next likely target after a price failure wouldbe the warning line I have attached two charts with fan linesIs it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the third fan line is broken RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Next segmentDate Freitag 7 April 2000 003312

Hello TradersZone

Tuesday April 06 2000 114315 AM you wrote

TZgt Hi Gordon

TZgt No I dont have any specific question about the price failureTZgt technique I guess the next likely target after a price failureTZgt would be the warning line

TZgt I have attached two charts with fan linesTZgt Is it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the thirdTZgt fan line is broken

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Thats right the warning line is the next price target Additionalwarning lines can be drawn if needed but usually one will do it Ifprices go through the first warning line another can be drawn butmost likely a new pitchfork could be drawn instead which would bepreferable Helps stay current with recently formed pivots

When prices break through the third fan line a buy or sell signal isgiven Not sure what you mean by fourth target fan line Im a littledense today

Your chart work was goodthis is another handy tool for spotting thehigh probability of a price reversal or trend change

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject The Gap TradeDate Freitag 7 April 2000 004858

Hello TradersZone This trading signal doesnt show up very often but past observations have shown that its well worth watching for Dr Andrews placed a lot of emphasis on the importance of price gaps something many traders overlook This is one of his gap uses Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom The Gap Trading Technique Price gaps can be a dilemma for many traders The general rule denoting market strength or weakness after ahigh volume gap often comes up short after the initial reaction is over Many gappers simply run out ofsteam A high volume gap in itself seems to offer precious little evidence that a profitable move is about toget under way Dr Andrews used price gaps somewhat differently than others He counted a gap as 2 pivots Youll see howthat works in the following technique which uses a gap to arrive at a price level for a buy or sell order Using short-term daily price pivots label the pivot immediately preceding the gap as p0 Count the gap as 2pivots labeling it p1 amp p2 After p3 has formed and prices reverse towards a short-term p4 draw a horizontalline 2 price tics or more (individual preference)to the right of p3 Enter the market only if prices reach orpenetrate that line within a few days after reversing from p4 Please look over your own charts to see if you can find places where the gap trade technique could have beenused Send me a sample when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 001925

Hello Gordon this is my chart with a gap trade RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 065538

Hello TradersZone Thursday April 08 2000 121925 PM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt this is my chart with a gap trade TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Good examplethe gap trade technique shines when an issue in at or near a P5 Similar to the one on thechart you sent Heres another trading signal tool Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Dr Andrews used several techniques which helped him determine whether a P5 was near at hand Youllrecall that he observed most price moves ended or had a significant reversal at a P5 This technique uses alternate closing prices after a P4 has been formed As with many of his studies thenumber 5 is used The chart accompanying this segment shows that there were 5 alternate closes to thedownside after P4 was put in Dr Andrews noted that whenever 5 or more alternate closes followed a P4 theprobabilities were high that a P5 was near at hand An added feature to this chart study is the sideways channel Notice how the 2nd target price and the 5thalternate close nearly coincide

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 12 April 2000 200730

Hello Gordon This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 13 April 2000 082418

Monday April 12 2000 80730 AM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hello TradersZone Good chart example of this Andrews toolanother of his very unusual observations that workmore often than not Heres the final part of this lesson Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom In this trendline method Dr Andrews once again used the number 5 as the basis for locating aprobable reversal area He found this technique to be especially useful whenever a clear orobvious pivot count didnt show up onthe price move under study Trendlines are drawn using the course trendline method When the 5th trendline is broken theprobability is high that the trend under study has ended A mini-median line pitchfork andorsliding parallel could be used for pricing a trading order The accompanying chart of Compaq Computer is an example of how the trendline study could beused The pivot count beginning at the October low is difficult to nail down There were severalsmall areas of congestion but no sizeable corrections while prices advanced The count wasunclear By following the price action using the course trendline technique however the traderwould have been alerted to the possibility of a change of trend when the 5th trendline was brokenin early February Try this technique on your own charts When youre ready please send me an example of yourstudy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 19 April 2000 124108

Hello Gordon this is my example with 5 trendlines RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[6] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 20 April 2000 012726

Monday April 19 2000 124108 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt this is my example with 5 trendlines

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Good example of the 5 TL technique Always reminds me of how the fairly simple tools often do a better job than manyof the sophisticated studies out there

That was the last part of lesson 5 Lesson 6 attached is made in one mailing Youll find Dr Andrews trading rules alongwith a wrap-up review which uses several of his rules You might have questions about some of the rules so feel free tosend them as they arise

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Dr Andrews had an abbreviated set of trading rules on several index cards that he carried around with him in his shirtpocket He said every trading day turned up something new on his charts and by having his rules in his pocket he wasreminded of the need for a methodical approach to his analysis Quite a comment coming from the man who wrote therule book

In this the final lesson of the course Dr Andrews original trading rules and observations are presented Lets work witha few of them at this point

Using charts of issues you follow please send me an example that illustrates your interpretation of each of the followingrules

Rule 4 Anticipating major Ps

Rule 7 Penetration rule

Rule 8 Price failure rule

Rule 11 1-ML23 AR Centerline

Rule 12 Sliding Parallel rule

Rule 15 Mini-median line parallel to buy or sell

Feel free to include any other course techniques you choose to apply but please include examples of the above as aminimum Use more than one technique on a chart if your analysis supports it Send as many charts as you like alongwith your questionscomments

Lesson 6 - Dr Andrews Trading Rules

This lesson covers course rules and significant observations as taught by Dr Andrews in his original trading course Therules are those that he used in his own trading and are provided to serve as a checklist for use with the course tradingmethods youve learned

Rule 1 Where prices are always headed Rule You course members are among the fortunate few to be able to draw astraight line and know that prices are headed toward that ML Very few investors have ever applied this ML principle ofstatistics to price fluctuations and weve never seen this in any books on investment You are among the very few who

know that prices are always headed toward the newest ML

Rule 2 The Rule of coming opposites applies all through life In the bible we find Blessed at they that mourn for theyshall be comforted As investors we know that any losses can be recovered by using course methods

Rule 3 Turn your mind about or Rethink for all good is at hand We should mentally prepare ourselves for thecoming reversal in prices and other affairs Heres one way for example that you course members who know the MLrules can use When prices are skyrocketing upward we do this preparation by thinking If prices pivoted here today atthis price Id draw a new ML bisecting the distance between todays price and the price from which the rise started Andwe know now that if this is a Major Pivot prices will fall rapidly to this new ML Profits from such drops are big and quick

Rule 4 Rule for anticipating major Ps If during congestion or after a rally or decline you can count four previous Psthe fifth one is highly probable to be the one from which a new trend starts

Rule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can make a quick big profit is to watch for the EPformations

Rule 6 The other reversal rule is that prices tend to reverse at or near any ML as well as at any extension of each MLAnd also at any MLH or extensions of MLH

Rule 7 The Penetration Rule is that whenever prices gap past or plunge through any ML there is a high probability thatthey will quickly return to it temporarily and then resume the trend they had before they gapped or plunged through

Rule 8 Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P of reversal and the MLthe probability is that this price reversal will go further than it did on its approach toward the ML

Rule 9 The price failure rule is negated when the next price trend is also a failure in reaching the ML This is almostinvariably a signal of a big fast move in the direction indicated by this last space Rule 10 When alternate median lines of comparable length slope in the same direction the trend is firm and rapidprice changes take place

Rule 11 When 1-ML23 is exactly reached at P4 it can be used as a highly reliable centerline for the AR method

Rule 12 Frequently after crossing a lower MLH prices continue to rise along the MLH Since the crossing of the MLHsignals a further drop is likely use a sliding parallel along the bottom of the most recent crossing If prices drop past thatsliding parallel line a sell signal is generated

Rule 13 MLs between P2 and P3 can start from a nearby or a remote P1 since prices tend to reverse at each of theseMLs Try several such P2-P3 MLs to discover the best fit

Rule 14 The distance of each MLH from its ML is the distance of the next warning line Use these warning lineswhenever a SH has signalled a buy or sell

Rule 15 Use the MMLH as a buy or sell signal when you expect a reversal because of a P5 Also when prices are at aWL ML extension line or where course lines converge or intersect

Rule 16 Converging lines that meet prices have shown the highest probability of a trend reversal

Rule 17 Two to four days is usually the maximum between P2 and P3 for a MML P1 can be a day or so back from P2and 3

Rule 18 The most reliable ActionReaction centerlines seem to be MPL 2P line 2 Gap line peak to low or low to peak

Rule 19 When prices pass through R lines look for a pull back and then a continuing move in the direction of the passthrough

Rule 20 Use gaps as Action lines from the centerline

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 003755

Hello Gordonhere is my example for Rule 4 And I have a question What are EP formations gtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 021242

Tuesday May 04 2000 123755 PM you wrote TZgt Hello GordonTZgt here is my example for Rule 4 TZgt And I have a question What are EP formations gtgtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegtgta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hi TradersZone Good use of the warning linesalso the EP material is part of lesson 4 Rather than go backthrough the files to see when (or if) it was sent Im sending it along with this reply Glad youbrought it up Best RegardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Tuesday May 04 2000208 PM Dr Andrews used a fairly common price chart formation that he found useful at probable P5market tops and bottoms The formation generally called a wedge or pennant by chartists isreferred to in Dr Andrews trading course as the Expanding Pivot (EP) One of the few chartformations used in the course he regarded it as among the most dependable indications that amarket top was forming Closely related to the EP is his Inverted Expanding Pivot (IEP) which henoted could often be observed at market bottoms Both are regarded as intermediate and long-term reversal indicators Dr Andrews found that both formations were most reliable when they occurred after a sharprapid price move coinciding with the formation of a probable P5 He said it wasnt unusual for theformation to take several weeks to complete and that conservative traders could best avoid thewhipsaw associated with congestion patterns by trading only in the direction of the probable price

break out of the EP or IEP formation The attached charts illustrate these formations Please look over your own charts for an example ofthe EP and IEP and send me a copy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 232127

Hello Gordon Thank you for the lesson with the EP material I couldnt find it in any previous emailHere is my example for Rule 7 RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Rule 4Date Samstag 6 Mai 2000 080827

Wednesday May 05 2000 112127 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt Thank you for the lesson with the EP materialTZgt I couldnt find it in any previous emailTZgt Here is my example for Rule 7

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hi TradersZone

Glad you mentioned it earlierexcept for the EP IEP and hissideways channel Dr Andrews didnt have much to say about chartpatterns and formations These are good ones to use though

Your study of the penetration rule was good Later

Best Regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Wednesday May 05 2000801 PM

Page 26: Pitchfork primer

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Sideways channelsDate Montag 21 Februar 2000 193743

gtBefore continuing on to the next lesson lets briefly review what hasgtso far been covered The attached chart provides an opportunity togtillustrate the methods referred to above Please draw these methods ongtthe chart and return to me Hello Gordonhere is my chart RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next lesson attachedDate Mittwoch 23 Februar 2000 014539

At 22100 73700 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongthere is my chartgt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Good job on the pivots sideways count and pitchforkLooks like youre ready to move on to the next part It wont be long and things will begin to fall inplace Regards Gordon Lesson 4 continued In one of his course letters Dr Andrews wrote The Law of Physics stated by Newton that Actionand Reaction are equal and opposite was first applied to prices by your Course Directors friendthe late Roger Babson who attributed his earnings of several million dollars to this law Beginning with this segment of lesson four and continuing in lesson five youll learn how to drawand apply the ActionReaction trading method as taught by Dr Andrews in his trading course The AR method requires a centerline or CL from which to start The CL can be any of thefollowing - MPL - ML - MLH - 2P line - 2 Gap line - Peak to low line - Low to peak lineThese are the primary lines that Dr Andrews used He stressed that some pencil work and a goodeyeball was needed in order to find the best fitting CL As with most other chart lines somework better than others The task is to find the best fit as he put it You will be shown examples of

each of the above CLs in this lesson and the next Determining which of the above listed lines to use as the CL is the first step in the ActionReactionmethod The solution often presents itself With a little practice a quick scan of the chart understudy will be all thats needed to spot the most likely CL Well begin with the attached chart Notethe CL drawn In this example a MPL (multi-pivot line) was used as the CL A MPL is a straightline that connects three or more consecutive pivots without passing through prices Theconnecting line is then extended Ive circled the three pivots that form the MPL on the chartThere are several other places on our chart where a MPL CL can be drawn Please bear in mindthat this is just the first step of the process Identification of likely CLs is all were after here Seeif you can locate two more then draw them in and send the chart back to me Well take up fromthere

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next lesson attachedDate Mittwoch 23 Februar 2000 212304

gtLesson 4 continuedgt gtIn one of his course letters Dr Andrews wrote The Law of Physicsgtstated by Newton that Action and Reaction are equal and opposite wasgtfirst applied to prices by your Course Directors friend the lategtRoger Babson who attributed his earnings of several million dollars to this lawgt gtBeginning with this segment of lesson four and continuing in lessongtfive youll learn how to draw and apply the ActionReaction tradinggtmethod as taught by Dr Andrews in his trading coursegt gtThe AR method requires a centerline or CL from which to startgtThe CL can be any of the followinggt - MPLgt - MLgt - MLHgt - 2P linegt - 2 Gap linegt - Peak to low linegt - Low to peak line Hello Gordon2P line 2 Gap line Peak to low line Low to peak line ndash actually I dont know what these lines areAre they discussed in Lesson 3 I believe you havenrsquot sent me this lesson yetAnyway I found two more MPLs on the Novellus Chart and drew them in RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Lesson 3Date Mittwoch 23 Februar 2000 235958

At 22300 92300 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt2P line 2 Gap line Peak to low line Low to peak line - actually I dont knowgtwhat these lines are Are they discussed in Lesson 3 I believe you didntgtsent me this lesson yetgtAnyway I found two more MPLs on the Novellus Chart and drew them ingt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone My apologiesI sent you an outdated version of the lesson Thanks for letting me know Musthave been my bedtime Heres the correct version Regards Gordon Lesson 3 In one of his course letters Dr Andrews wrote The Law of Physics stated by Newton that Actionand Reaction are equal and opposite was first applied to prices by your Course Directors friendthe late Roger Babson who attributed his earnings of several million dollars to this law In this lesson youll be introduced to the ActionReaction trading method as taught by Dr Andrewsin his trading course The AR method requires a centerline or CL from which to start The CL can be any of thefollowing - MPL Multi-pivot line A line drawn across 3 or more pivots - ML Median line The middle line of the pitchfork - MLH Median line parallel Either parallel line of the pitchfork - 2P line A line drawn across 2 pivots - 2 Gap line A line drawn connecting 2 gaps without touching prices in between - Peak to low line A line drawn connecting the high and low of a price leg

- Low to peak line A line drawn connecting the low and high of a price leg These are the primary lines that Dr Andrews used He stressed that some pencil work and a goodeyeball was needed in order to find the best fitting CL As with most other chart lines somework better than others The task is to find the best fit as he put it You will be shown examples ofeach of the above CLs Determining which of the above listed lines to use as the CL is the first step in the ActionReactionmethod With practice a quick view of the chart under study will be all thats needed to spot themost likely CL Youll be shown later how to experiment with possible combinations in order tofind the centerline that is most in tune with the market under study Well begin with the attached chart Note the CL drawn In this example a MPL (multi-pivot line)was used as the CL A MPL is a straight line that connects three or more consecutive pivotswithout passing through prices The connecting line is then extended Ive circled the three pivotsthat form the MPL on the chart There are several other places on our chart where a MPL CL canbe drawn Please bear in mind that this is just the first step of the process Identification of likelyCLs is all were after here See if you can locate two more then draw them in and send the chartback to me

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Donnerstag 24 Februar 2000 025105

At 22300 92300 PM you wroteI found two more MPLs on the Novellus Chart and drew them ingt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your mpls were correct This next segment shows the purpose of the centerline and how it isused Your payment in full arrived today TradersZone Thank you Regards Gordon Lesson 3 continued Please refer to the attached chart of Novellus The line drawn connecting the 3 circled pivots is amulti-pivot line (MPL) and represents the centerline (CL) well be using in this example Recall inthe previous segment that several types of centerlines are possible The choice is determined byexperimenting with the potential combinations on the chart under study Its best to try to locate acenterline somewhere close to the middle of the price chart in order to have sufficient past andforward data to use with the study This will become clear as you work with the method Once the centerline is drawn the next step is to locate a previous low or high pivot point to use fordrawing an action line Dr Andrews observed that the low pivot points often seem to work bestbut that either could be used In our example a line starting at the previous significant low wasdrawn parallel to the CL It is labeled A-1 (Action line 1) because it represents the first actionline Dr Andrews called it an action line because it was drawn as a result of a previous pivot (pricereversal) that had taken place Next a parallel line was drawn to the right of the CL and labeled R-1 Notice that it is the same distance from the CL as the corresponding A-1 line It is labeled R-1because it represents the first reaction line a line where prices are likely to stop or reverseNotice how prices reacted at the R-1 line in early 98 That serves as an indication that thecenterline chosen for this study should be a good one to use Not all reaction lines cause such aclear reversal as the R1 on this chart but many do Thats why its important to experiment withvarious centerline possibilities in order to find action lines that produce reaction lines which createthe greatest number of pivots or price stall-outs This experimentation is often quite time

consuming but experience has shown that it is time well spent When a centerline is found that isin tune with the price action of the issue under study it can be a highly effective tool for use inlocating probable reversal areas When combined with pitchfork lines the AR method can pinpointpotential reversal areas that are generally not recognized as such by others Dr Andrewstechniques for using the pitchfork and AR lines together are covered in later lessons In coming segments well study other lines that Dr Andrews used for his centerlines In themeantime experiment with the multi-pivot centerline on your own charts Then please send mean example of your work along with any questions you may have

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Freitag 25 Februar 2000 211356

gtIn the meantime experiment with the multi-pivot centerline on your owngtcharts Then please send me an example of your work along with anygtquestions you may have Hello Gordon I was wondering how many ActionReaction lines could be drawn on a chart On my attached chart I found at least 6 parallellines which had a significant meaning for the price RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject AR linesDate Montag 28 Februar 2000 080128

gtHello Gordongt gtI was wondering how many ActionReaction lines could be drawn on agtchart On my attached chart I found at least 6 parallel lines which hadgta significant meaning for the pricegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hi TradersZone Theres no set number of lines that can be drawnactually the more you can find the betterFinding a good centerline is the key And once you find lines that work such as you did anynumber of parallel lines can be drawn You are doing exactly what Dr Andrews didtaking thetime and effort to find the best fitting sets of lines Each chart has them and each chart is differentas Im sure youve found Nice work Heres the next part Regards Gordon Lesson 3 continued One of Dr Andrews favorite techniques dealt with gapsan often times perplexing price event formany traders His observations over the years suggested to him that while gaps show upfrequently on many price charts few traders have a method for including them as an integral partof their chart analysis Thats not surprising since not much has been published about how toapproach the use of gaps in a trading method Dr Andrews however found several ways to putprice gaps to good use An ActionReaction centerline which uses gaps as its basis is one suchmethod Please refer to the attached chart of Cendant Youll see that a centerline was drawn which passedthrough the July gap Note that it also came in contact with several pivots thereby qualifying as agapmulti-pivot centerline It is drawn by starting at the April low pivot and extending a line acrossand through the gap in mid-July It subsequently touches two additional high pivots Dr Andrews counted each gap as two pivots He noted that the more pivots a line touched the

stronger the line tended to be in the future Good reason then for using the July gap as the basisfor an ActionReaction study Our CL is labelled a gap-mpl-CL The May 98 high was used for the Action Line starting point A line was then drawn parallel to theCenterline as per ActionReaction procedure The corresponding Reaction Line was then drawn inIf this particular study had been drawn on Cendants chart right after the July gap was put in thepotential for prices to go all the way down to the Reaction Line might have seemed very slim at thetime Notice however that prices reached the Reaction Line in early September Youll see thishappen time and again as you work with the AR method The core of its effectiveness is a strongCL Please send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts of your choice

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re AR linesDate Montag 28 Februar 2000 155937

gtPlease send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts of yourgtchoice Hello Gordonhere are my examples RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject More on the ARDate Donnerstag 2 Maumlrz 2000 071158

At 22800 35900 PM you wrotegtgtPlease send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts ofgtgtyour choicegt gtHello Gordongthere are my examplesgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone You picked some good examples to use for your AR study Both showed the potential power of thismethod Takes time and lots of chart study sometimes to find the best set of lines but the rewardscan be many Heres something else to look at Regards Gordon The ActionReaction technique requires a strong centerline from which to begin The key todeciding which set of pivots to use for the centerline is found through experimenting with thevarious configurations visible on the chart under study The centerline might be a series of gapspivots an existing median line or any of Dr Andrews lines The task is to search for that centerlinewhich shows the greatest potential for projecting price reversal areas Dr Andrews did that byfinding a likely centerline near the middle of his price chart That allowed him to use any of theprevious pivots for his action lines By experimenting he found reaction lines that did the best jobof pegging reversal areas at data points located forward of the centerline Reaction lines are equal and opposite of the action lines and serve to project price levels at whicha reversal can be expected That is why the task of seeking out the best centerline is so importantDr Andrews reasoned that a series of reaction lines which have pegged price reversals in the pastis likely to continue to be in tune with current and future market price action Having severalprevious pivots to use as anchors for drawing action lines is thus essential The attached chart of Lattice illustrates this concept Please bear in mind that the gapmplcenterline is not the only centerline one could use on this chart You might want to study the chartfor other AR possibilities Try a peak-to-peak CL or a multi-pivot CL Send me your studies along

with any questions

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re More on the ARDate Samstag 4 Maumlrz 2000 002521

gtThe attached chart of Lattice illustrates this conceptgtPlease bear in mind that the gapmpl centerline is not the onlygtcenterline one could use on this chartgtYou might want to study the chart for other AR possibilitiesgtTry a peak-to-peak CL or a multi-pivot CL Send me your studiesgtalong with any questions Hello Gordonhere is my chart RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Peak to peak clDate Sonntag 5 Maumlrz 2000 064107

At 3400 122500 AM you wrotegtHello Gordongthere is my chartgt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Looks like you have the concept down Takes time and a lot of chart work to find the bestcenterline When the reaction lines dont seem to peg reversal areas chances are the centerline isnot the one that is best in tune with the price action of the issue under studyDespite the time required for this method it was one of Dr Andrews stand-bysAR lines could befound on most of his charts Im sending a chart with an example of a peak-to-peak CL Regards Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Peak to peak clDate Sonntag 5 Maumlrz 2000 171232

Hello Gordon I think the peak-to-peak CL on the last chart I sent to you was not really drawn from peak to peakIm sending another example RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next LessonDate Mittwoch 8 Maumlrz 2000 072526

At 3500 51200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtI think the peak-to-peak CL on the last chart I sent to you was notgtreally drawn from peak to peakgtIm sending another examplegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your peak to peak cl example was correctly drawn Thats a fairly simple approach but quite oftenthe peak to peak yields better reaction lines Heres the first part of the next lesson Regards Gordon Youll find times when prices dont quite reach the ML but instead drift alongside or away from itThe Schiff ML was designed to be used in place of the regular ML whenever that happens Suchprice action can be found at any place on a chart but most frequently occurs after a sharp sell-offor run-up of prices Dr Andrews also used the Schiff ML whenever his regular ML sloped at an unusually steep angleHe said it helped smooth out irregular price action such as that caused by unexpected earningsnews crop planting delays or poor growing conditions crop production reports etc Youll findnearly vertical price moves over a short period of time on many charts The Schiff ML method helpsput things back in perspective when that happens Well use the chart of Sterling Bancorp as an example of prices drifting away from the regular MLThat ML is drawn in black Prices didnt quite reach the ML but drifted alongside and eventuallyaway from it The Schiff ML and parallel lines are drawn in red Notice how prices were containedwithin the Schiff pitchfork until they finally broke down at the upper parallel line The procedure for drawing the Schiff ML is the same as for the regular ML except the startingpoint is located midway between the first 2 pivots youll be using The Sterling Bancorp chart

illustrates how this is done Dr Andrews also suggested using the Schiff ML whenever the regular ML method doesnt seem tobe in sync with price action Practice this procedure on your own charts and send a couple examples when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next LessonDate Donnerstag 9 Maumlrz 2000 001143

Hello Gordon in my charting software (Dynamic Trader) the Schiff ML is drawn by finding the midpoint of the line between pivot A and pivot Bmoving this point horizontally to directly above or below (depending on whether A is a low or high pivot) the A pivot anddrawing a line from his point through the midpoint of the BC swingAre there different methods of drawing a Schiff MLI was too lazy to draw Schiff MLs by hand with the method you described so Im sending my examples with the Dynamic TraderSchiff MLs -) RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject SchiffDate Samstag 11 Maumlrz 2000 070226

At 3900 121100 AM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtin my charting software (Dynamic Trader) the Schiff ML is drawn bygtfinding the midpoint of the line between pivot A and pivot B movinggtthis point horizontally to directly above or below (depending ongtwhether A is a low or high pivot) the A pivot and drawing a linegtgtfrom his point through the midpoint of the BC swinggtAre there different methods of drawing a Schiff MLgtI was too lazy to draw Schiff MLs by hand with the method yougtdescribed so Im sending my examples with the Dynamic Trader Schiff MLs -)gt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your program Schiff line procedure is fineits actually what Dr Andrews called a modified schiff ml and is onlyslightly different than the one I sent you initially The one you used is preferred by most course members Im sendingthe modified Schiff lesson and a chart along with this email The chart example shows how to use it with 0-34 pivots Regards Gordon

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Sliding Parallel LineDate Montag 13 Maumlrz 2000 005252

Hello TradersZone Heres one of the tools Dr Andrews used most often when entering exiting or reversing marketpositions Not many people know about this technique Regards Gordon The Sliding Parallel (SH) is drawn whenever prices cross an Andrews line and then move along itFor example if the bottom of a daily price bar range drops through a lower parallel line of apitchfork a new parallel line is then drawn from that low and extended to the right If the nextdays price bar drops through that sliding parallel line a sell signal is generated Whenever price action dictates a sliding parallel the next step is to draw a Warning Line Thewarning line is an additional parallel line that is an image extension of the original pitchforkchannels It serves as a warning that if prices penetrate the sliding parallel the next likely target isthe WL The attached chart of Avis illustrates these procedures Please try these on your own charts andsend me an example

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Sliding Parallel LineDate Dienstag 14 Maumlrz 2000 225737

Hello Gordon this is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning line RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 065606

At 31400 105700 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtthis is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning linegt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone Your chart of circuit city was a good example for this study I may have mentioned it earlier but DrAndrews used this technique on a regular basis The next part of this lesson covers another of hisfavorite tools the mini-median line pitchfork Here it is Regards Gordon The Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry and exit tools Though mostoften drawn using alternate closing prices alternate highs and lows can also be usedin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days is usually the maximumbetween pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or more back from P2 Dr Andrews used Mini-Median Line pitchforks for buy and sell signals whenever he expected areversal Some examples include a probable P5 or when prices are at a Warning Line ML MLHmajor ML extension or a sideways channel price target When prices cross the Mini-Median LineParallel (MMLH) a sliding parallel (SH) is used for order entry

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 231537

gtThe Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry andgtexit tools Though most often drawn using alternate closing pricesgtalternate highs and lows can also be usedgtin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days isgtusually the maximum between pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or moregtback from P2

Hello Gordon

wouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timingCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available whenDr Andrews was alive

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject intraday chartsDate Samstag 18 Maumlrz 2000 012400

At 31600 111500 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongtgtwouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsgtinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timinggtCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available when DrgtAndrews was alivegtgtRegardsgtTradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Youre absolutely correctintraday charts were not available when DrAndrews was a trader

Im reading between the lines here but if you plan to day-trade using the course techniques ie thepitchfork then I agree that the regular pitchfork would be more useful on intraday charts Otherwisewhipsaw would be a significant problem Please get back to me if I didnt address your questionbecause this is a very important technique The mini-median line pitchfork and sliding parallel showedup on most of Dr Andrews charts

Regards

Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re intraday chartsDate Dienstag 21 Maumlrz 2000 220322

Hello Gordon

You are right Im planning to daytrade SampP futures using the course techniques among other things

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 003408

Hi TradersZone Here are a couple Andrews techniques that will help anticipate the breakout direction of asideways channelThey work often enough to warrant keep handy Regards Gordon In an earlier lesson you were introduced to Dr Andrews sideways count You saw how frequentlythe sideways count method provided high probability price objectives after the breakout from theestablished channel took place In this segment of lesson 4 youll be shown 2 congestion area techniques that can help youdetermine the probable sideways channel price breakout direction Both rely on the use of pivots The first uses the pivot points that are circled on a sideways channel Dr Andrews observed thatwhenever a sideways channel results in at least 5 circle contacts the eventual price breakoutwould very often be in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle If circle 5 is at thetop of the channel for example the eventual price breakout would likely be to the upside If circle5 is at the bottom of the channel look for a downside breakout Dr Andrews noted that thistechnique can be subject to false breakouts but that such breakouts are usually followed shortlyafter with a confirmed breakout in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle Heemphasized that this study is best considered as a rule of thumb observation He viewed it as asupporting indicator for use with a short-term pitchfork as prices approached a channel line There are 2 charts attached that show how this works

The second technique in this part of lesson 4 deals with a sideways channelthat is building shortly after a P3 has been formed Dr Andrews noted thatwhenever that happened the probabilities were high that prices wouldbreakout in the same direction they were moving prior to the formation ofthe sideways channel The attached P3 to sideways example chart shows thisprocedure

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 205235

Hello Gordon here is my example for the 5 circle sideways count RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Lesson 5Date Montag 27 Maumlrz 2000 060731

At 32400 85200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my example for the 5 circle sideways countgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt gt Hi TradersZone Good example of the 5th circle tendency to predict the direction of a sideways breakout Any luckfinding a chart showing the P3 to sideways rule Im sending the first part of the next lesson This trendline method is a useful tool with all of DrAndrews course lines He used it all the time but especially when looking for confirmation of othercourse method trading signals Regards Gordon The Course Trendline__________________________________________________________ Next well discuss the trendline Seasoned traders agree that the trendline is one of their mostimportant tools No matter what kind of trading program or technique they use the trendline on achart is a must But one of the biggest mistakes made by amateurs and professionals alike isinconsistently drawing or defining the trendline Dr Andrews trendline procedure is simpleconsistent and accurate It works extremely well with the pivot count and with the pitchfork For an uptrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the lowest low up and to thehighest minor low point preceding the highest high The line must not pass through prices inbetween the two low points Extend the line(Attached chart of Brightpoint) For a downtrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the highest high point to thelowest minor high point preceding the lowest low so that it does not pass through prices inbetween the two high points Extend the line (Brightpoint chart) Thats all theres to it Its simple consistent and it works well with other Andrews lines It also

helps eliminate personal bias and haphazard analysis Practice drawing these trendlines on your own charts Send me any questions you might have andthen e-mail a chart of your choosing which shows at least two uptrend and two downtrend linesthat youve drawn_______________________________________________________________________

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Lesson 5Date Dienstag 28 Maumlrz 2000 120224

Hello Gordon here is my chart with trendlinesWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going above the trendline again should I draw a new trendline anddelete the old one Attached is another chart with the P3 to sideways rule I finally found an example for it RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Price failure techniqueDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081412

At 32800 120200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my chart with trendlinesgtWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going abovegtthe trendline again should I draw a new trendline and delete the oldgtone Hi TradersZone Take a look at the chart Im returningI added some lines for you to considerWith the course trendline once its broken a new one should be started Theres a technique thatties in with this coming up soon Meanwhile heres an important technique to work on It deals with those times when prices dontreach the ML Regards Gordon Dr Andrews Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P ofreversaland the ML the probability is that this price reversal will go further thanitdid on its approach toward the ML (Extract of original course material) A price failure very often indicates a sizeable reversal will take placeThepitchforks drawn on the chart of Home Depot illustrate the concept of pricefailure Dr Andrews routinely drew a new pitchfork on his chart after a newsignificant pivot had formed He knew that prices had a high probability ofreaching the new ML before stalling out or reversing If prices reversedbeforereaching the ML thereby forming a new pivot he termed it a price failureTheunderlying idea here is that Dr Andrews fully anticipated his median linewouldact as a price magnet To conclude that a price reversal resulted in a price failure Dr Andrewsused

these primary signalsa subsequent price penetration of a short-termmulti-pivotline andor a return of prices to and penetration of the parallel lineformed atpivot 3 of the pitchfork (The circles on the Home Depot chart denote theparallelline penetration signal To avoid clutter the mpl lines were not drawn) One possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart of ConsecoIncLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me a copy

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject ChartDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081800Attachments image002png

Hi TradersZone Forgot the chart Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Price failure techniqueDate Samstag 1 April 2000 201000

gtOne possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart ofgtConseco IncgtLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me agtcopy Hi Gordon here are my charts with price failures RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Mittwoch 5 April 2000 235624

Hi TradersZone Good price failure examples you sentany comments or questions about it Heres the next partanother old standby Dr Andrews kept handy Regards Gordon In this segment youll learn how to use the Fan line Technique To draw the fan lines youll apply the coursetrendline method which was introduced in an earlier lesson It might be well to emphasize that the practicalapplication of the course trendline method requires practice and experience both of which will serve youwell in this technique Dr Andrews used fan lines as an adjunct to his pitchfork sideways channel andactionreaction methods In the fan line study three trendlines are drawn from the original reversal pivot of the price correction understudy typically a P0 or a P5 Youll notice on the charts included with this study that each fan line is at aflatter angle than its predecessor When the third fan line is broken the rule is that the correction has endedand a new trend is under way Try this technique on some of your own charts and then please send me asample

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Donnerstag 6 April 2000 234315

Hi Gordon No I dont have any specific question about the price failure technique I guess the next likely target after a price failure wouldbe the warning line I have attached two charts with fan linesIs it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the third fan line is broken RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Next segmentDate Freitag 7 April 2000 003312

Hello TradersZone

Tuesday April 06 2000 114315 AM you wrote

TZgt Hi Gordon

TZgt No I dont have any specific question about the price failureTZgt technique I guess the next likely target after a price failureTZgt would be the warning line

TZgt I have attached two charts with fan linesTZgt Is it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the thirdTZgt fan line is broken

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Thats right the warning line is the next price target Additionalwarning lines can be drawn if needed but usually one will do it Ifprices go through the first warning line another can be drawn butmost likely a new pitchfork could be drawn instead which would bepreferable Helps stay current with recently formed pivots

When prices break through the third fan line a buy or sell signal isgiven Not sure what you mean by fourth target fan line Im a littledense today

Your chart work was goodthis is another handy tool for spotting thehigh probability of a price reversal or trend change

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject The Gap TradeDate Freitag 7 April 2000 004858

Hello TradersZone This trading signal doesnt show up very often but past observations have shown that its well worth watching for Dr Andrews placed a lot of emphasis on the importance of price gaps something many traders overlook This is one of his gap uses Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom The Gap Trading Technique Price gaps can be a dilemma for many traders The general rule denoting market strength or weakness after ahigh volume gap often comes up short after the initial reaction is over Many gappers simply run out ofsteam A high volume gap in itself seems to offer precious little evidence that a profitable move is about toget under way Dr Andrews used price gaps somewhat differently than others He counted a gap as 2 pivots Youll see howthat works in the following technique which uses a gap to arrive at a price level for a buy or sell order Using short-term daily price pivots label the pivot immediately preceding the gap as p0 Count the gap as 2pivots labeling it p1 amp p2 After p3 has formed and prices reverse towards a short-term p4 draw a horizontalline 2 price tics or more (individual preference)to the right of p3 Enter the market only if prices reach orpenetrate that line within a few days after reversing from p4 Please look over your own charts to see if you can find places where the gap trade technique could have beenused Send me a sample when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 001925

Hello Gordon this is my chart with a gap trade RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 065538

Hello TradersZone Thursday April 08 2000 121925 PM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt this is my chart with a gap trade TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Good examplethe gap trade technique shines when an issue in at or near a P5 Similar to the one on thechart you sent Heres another trading signal tool Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Dr Andrews used several techniques which helped him determine whether a P5 was near at hand Youllrecall that he observed most price moves ended or had a significant reversal at a P5 This technique uses alternate closing prices after a P4 has been formed As with many of his studies thenumber 5 is used The chart accompanying this segment shows that there were 5 alternate closes to thedownside after P4 was put in Dr Andrews noted that whenever 5 or more alternate closes followed a P4 theprobabilities were high that a P5 was near at hand An added feature to this chart study is the sideways channel Notice how the 2nd target price and the 5thalternate close nearly coincide

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 12 April 2000 200730

Hello Gordon This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 13 April 2000 082418

Monday April 12 2000 80730 AM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hello TradersZone Good chart example of this Andrews toolanother of his very unusual observations that workmore often than not Heres the final part of this lesson Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom In this trendline method Dr Andrews once again used the number 5 as the basis for locating aprobable reversal area He found this technique to be especially useful whenever a clear orobvious pivot count didnt show up onthe price move under study Trendlines are drawn using the course trendline method When the 5th trendline is broken theprobability is high that the trend under study has ended A mini-median line pitchfork andorsliding parallel could be used for pricing a trading order The accompanying chart of Compaq Computer is an example of how the trendline study could beused The pivot count beginning at the October low is difficult to nail down There were severalsmall areas of congestion but no sizeable corrections while prices advanced The count wasunclear By following the price action using the course trendline technique however the traderwould have been alerted to the possibility of a change of trend when the 5th trendline was brokenin early February Try this technique on your own charts When youre ready please send me an example of yourstudy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 19 April 2000 124108

Hello Gordon this is my example with 5 trendlines RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[6] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 20 April 2000 012726

Monday April 19 2000 124108 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt this is my example with 5 trendlines

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Good example of the 5 TL technique Always reminds me of how the fairly simple tools often do a better job than manyof the sophisticated studies out there

That was the last part of lesson 5 Lesson 6 attached is made in one mailing Youll find Dr Andrews trading rules alongwith a wrap-up review which uses several of his rules You might have questions about some of the rules so feel free tosend them as they arise

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Dr Andrews had an abbreviated set of trading rules on several index cards that he carried around with him in his shirtpocket He said every trading day turned up something new on his charts and by having his rules in his pocket he wasreminded of the need for a methodical approach to his analysis Quite a comment coming from the man who wrote therule book

In this the final lesson of the course Dr Andrews original trading rules and observations are presented Lets work witha few of them at this point

Using charts of issues you follow please send me an example that illustrates your interpretation of each of the followingrules

Rule 4 Anticipating major Ps

Rule 7 Penetration rule

Rule 8 Price failure rule

Rule 11 1-ML23 AR Centerline

Rule 12 Sliding Parallel rule

Rule 15 Mini-median line parallel to buy or sell

Feel free to include any other course techniques you choose to apply but please include examples of the above as aminimum Use more than one technique on a chart if your analysis supports it Send as many charts as you like alongwith your questionscomments

Lesson 6 - Dr Andrews Trading Rules

This lesson covers course rules and significant observations as taught by Dr Andrews in his original trading course Therules are those that he used in his own trading and are provided to serve as a checklist for use with the course tradingmethods youve learned

Rule 1 Where prices are always headed Rule You course members are among the fortunate few to be able to draw astraight line and know that prices are headed toward that ML Very few investors have ever applied this ML principle ofstatistics to price fluctuations and weve never seen this in any books on investment You are among the very few who

know that prices are always headed toward the newest ML

Rule 2 The Rule of coming opposites applies all through life In the bible we find Blessed at they that mourn for theyshall be comforted As investors we know that any losses can be recovered by using course methods

Rule 3 Turn your mind about or Rethink for all good is at hand We should mentally prepare ourselves for thecoming reversal in prices and other affairs Heres one way for example that you course members who know the MLrules can use When prices are skyrocketing upward we do this preparation by thinking If prices pivoted here today atthis price Id draw a new ML bisecting the distance between todays price and the price from which the rise started Andwe know now that if this is a Major Pivot prices will fall rapidly to this new ML Profits from such drops are big and quick

Rule 4 Rule for anticipating major Ps If during congestion or after a rally or decline you can count four previous Psthe fifth one is highly probable to be the one from which a new trend starts

Rule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can make a quick big profit is to watch for the EPformations

Rule 6 The other reversal rule is that prices tend to reverse at or near any ML as well as at any extension of each MLAnd also at any MLH or extensions of MLH

Rule 7 The Penetration Rule is that whenever prices gap past or plunge through any ML there is a high probability thatthey will quickly return to it temporarily and then resume the trend they had before they gapped or plunged through

Rule 8 Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P of reversal and the MLthe probability is that this price reversal will go further than it did on its approach toward the ML

Rule 9 The price failure rule is negated when the next price trend is also a failure in reaching the ML This is almostinvariably a signal of a big fast move in the direction indicated by this last space Rule 10 When alternate median lines of comparable length slope in the same direction the trend is firm and rapidprice changes take place

Rule 11 When 1-ML23 is exactly reached at P4 it can be used as a highly reliable centerline for the AR method

Rule 12 Frequently after crossing a lower MLH prices continue to rise along the MLH Since the crossing of the MLHsignals a further drop is likely use a sliding parallel along the bottom of the most recent crossing If prices drop past thatsliding parallel line a sell signal is generated

Rule 13 MLs between P2 and P3 can start from a nearby or a remote P1 since prices tend to reverse at each of theseMLs Try several such P2-P3 MLs to discover the best fit

Rule 14 The distance of each MLH from its ML is the distance of the next warning line Use these warning lineswhenever a SH has signalled a buy or sell

Rule 15 Use the MMLH as a buy or sell signal when you expect a reversal because of a P5 Also when prices are at aWL ML extension line or where course lines converge or intersect

Rule 16 Converging lines that meet prices have shown the highest probability of a trend reversal

Rule 17 Two to four days is usually the maximum between P2 and P3 for a MML P1 can be a day or so back from P2and 3

Rule 18 The most reliable ActionReaction centerlines seem to be MPL 2P line 2 Gap line peak to low or low to peak

Rule 19 When prices pass through R lines look for a pull back and then a continuing move in the direction of the passthrough

Rule 20 Use gaps as Action lines from the centerline

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 003755

Hello Gordonhere is my example for Rule 4 And I have a question What are EP formations gtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 021242

Tuesday May 04 2000 123755 PM you wrote TZgt Hello GordonTZgt here is my example for Rule 4 TZgt And I have a question What are EP formations gtgtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegtgta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hi TradersZone Good use of the warning linesalso the EP material is part of lesson 4 Rather than go backthrough the files to see when (or if) it was sent Im sending it along with this reply Glad youbrought it up Best RegardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Tuesday May 04 2000208 PM Dr Andrews used a fairly common price chart formation that he found useful at probable P5market tops and bottoms The formation generally called a wedge or pennant by chartists isreferred to in Dr Andrews trading course as the Expanding Pivot (EP) One of the few chartformations used in the course he regarded it as among the most dependable indications that amarket top was forming Closely related to the EP is his Inverted Expanding Pivot (IEP) which henoted could often be observed at market bottoms Both are regarded as intermediate and long-term reversal indicators Dr Andrews found that both formations were most reliable when they occurred after a sharprapid price move coinciding with the formation of a probable P5 He said it wasnt unusual for theformation to take several weeks to complete and that conservative traders could best avoid thewhipsaw associated with congestion patterns by trading only in the direction of the probable price

break out of the EP or IEP formation The attached charts illustrate these formations Please look over your own charts for an example ofthe EP and IEP and send me a copy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 232127

Hello Gordon Thank you for the lesson with the EP material I couldnt find it in any previous emailHere is my example for Rule 7 RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Rule 4Date Samstag 6 Mai 2000 080827

Wednesday May 05 2000 112127 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt Thank you for the lesson with the EP materialTZgt I couldnt find it in any previous emailTZgt Here is my example for Rule 7

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hi TradersZone

Glad you mentioned it earlierexcept for the EP IEP and hissideways channel Dr Andrews didnt have much to say about chartpatterns and formations These are good ones to use though

Your study of the penetration rule was good Later

Best Regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Wednesday May 05 2000801 PM

Page 27: Pitchfork primer

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next lesson attachedDate Mittwoch 23 Februar 2000 014539

At 22100 73700 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongthere is my chartgt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Good job on the pivots sideways count and pitchforkLooks like youre ready to move on to the next part It wont be long and things will begin to fall inplace Regards Gordon Lesson 4 continued In one of his course letters Dr Andrews wrote The Law of Physics stated by Newton that Actionand Reaction are equal and opposite was first applied to prices by your Course Directors friendthe late Roger Babson who attributed his earnings of several million dollars to this law Beginning with this segment of lesson four and continuing in lesson five youll learn how to drawand apply the ActionReaction trading method as taught by Dr Andrews in his trading course The AR method requires a centerline or CL from which to start The CL can be any of thefollowing - MPL - ML - MLH - 2P line - 2 Gap line - Peak to low line - Low to peak lineThese are the primary lines that Dr Andrews used He stressed that some pencil work and a goodeyeball was needed in order to find the best fitting CL As with most other chart lines somework better than others The task is to find the best fit as he put it You will be shown examples of

each of the above CLs in this lesson and the next Determining which of the above listed lines to use as the CL is the first step in the ActionReactionmethod The solution often presents itself With a little practice a quick scan of the chart understudy will be all thats needed to spot the most likely CL Well begin with the attached chart Notethe CL drawn In this example a MPL (multi-pivot line) was used as the CL A MPL is a straightline that connects three or more consecutive pivots without passing through prices Theconnecting line is then extended Ive circled the three pivots that form the MPL on the chartThere are several other places on our chart where a MPL CL can be drawn Please bear in mindthat this is just the first step of the process Identification of likely CLs is all were after here Seeif you can locate two more then draw them in and send the chart back to me Well take up fromthere

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next lesson attachedDate Mittwoch 23 Februar 2000 212304

gtLesson 4 continuedgt gtIn one of his course letters Dr Andrews wrote The Law of Physicsgtstated by Newton that Action and Reaction are equal and opposite wasgtfirst applied to prices by your Course Directors friend the lategtRoger Babson who attributed his earnings of several million dollars to this lawgt gtBeginning with this segment of lesson four and continuing in lessongtfive youll learn how to draw and apply the ActionReaction tradinggtmethod as taught by Dr Andrews in his trading coursegt gtThe AR method requires a centerline or CL from which to startgtThe CL can be any of the followinggt - MPLgt - MLgt - MLHgt - 2P linegt - 2 Gap linegt - Peak to low linegt - Low to peak line Hello Gordon2P line 2 Gap line Peak to low line Low to peak line ndash actually I dont know what these lines areAre they discussed in Lesson 3 I believe you havenrsquot sent me this lesson yetAnyway I found two more MPLs on the Novellus Chart and drew them in RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Lesson 3Date Mittwoch 23 Februar 2000 235958

At 22300 92300 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt2P line 2 Gap line Peak to low line Low to peak line - actually I dont knowgtwhat these lines are Are they discussed in Lesson 3 I believe you didntgtsent me this lesson yetgtAnyway I found two more MPLs on the Novellus Chart and drew them ingt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone My apologiesI sent you an outdated version of the lesson Thanks for letting me know Musthave been my bedtime Heres the correct version Regards Gordon Lesson 3 In one of his course letters Dr Andrews wrote The Law of Physics stated by Newton that Actionand Reaction are equal and opposite was first applied to prices by your Course Directors friendthe late Roger Babson who attributed his earnings of several million dollars to this law In this lesson youll be introduced to the ActionReaction trading method as taught by Dr Andrewsin his trading course The AR method requires a centerline or CL from which to start The CL can be any of thefollowing - MPL Multi-pivot line A line drawn across 3 or more pivots - ML Median line The middle line of the pitchfork - MLH Median line parallel Either parallel line of the pitchfork - 2P line A line drawn across 2 pivots - 2 Gap line A line drawn connecting 2 gaps without touching prices in between - Peak to low line A line drawn connecting the high and low of a price leg

- Low to peak line A line drawn connecting the low and high of a price leg These are the primary lines that Dr Andrews used He stressed that some pencil work and a goodeyeball was needed in order to find the best fitting CL As with most other chart lines somework better than others The task is to find the best fit as he put it You will be shown examples ofeach of the above CLs Determining which of the above listed lines to use as the CL is the first step in the ActionReactionmethod With practice a quick view of the chart under study will be all thats needed to spot themost likely CL Youll be shown later how to experiment with possible combinations in order tofind the centerline that is most in tune with the market under study Well begin with the attached chart Note the CL drawn In this example a MPL (multi-pivot line)was used as the CL A MPL is a straight line that connects three or more consecutive pivotswithout passing through prices The connecting line is then extended Ive circled the three pivotsthat form the MPL on the chart There are several other places on our chart where a MPL CL canbe drawn Please bear in mind that this is just the first step of the process Identification of likelyCLs is all were after here See if you can locate two more then draw them in and send the chartback to me

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Donnerstag 24 Februar 2000 025105

At 22300 92300 PM you wroteI found two more MPLs on the Novellus Chart and drew them ingt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your mpls were correct This next segment shows the purpose of the centerline and how it isused Your payment in full arrived today TradersZone Thank you Regards Gordon Lesson 3 continued Please refer to the attached chart of Novellus The line drawn connecting the 3 circled pivots is amulti-pivot line (MPL) and represents the centerline (CL) well be using in this example Recall inthe previous segment that several types of centerlines are possible The choice is determined byexperimenting with the potential combinations on the chart under study Its best to try to locate acenterline somewhere close to the middle of the price chart in order to have sufficient past andforward data to use with the study This will become clear as you work with the method Once the centerline is drawn the next step is to locate a previous low or high pivot point to use fordrawing an action line Dr Andrews observed that the low pivot points often seem to work bestbut that either could be used In our example a line starting at the previous significant low wasdrawn parallel to the CL It is labeled A-1 (Action line 1) because it represents the first actionline Dr Andrews called it an action line because it was drawn as a result of a previous pivot (pricereversal) that had taken place Next a parallel line was drawn to the right of the CL and labeled R-1 Notice that it is the same distance from the CL as the corresponding A-1 line It is labeled R-1because it represents the first reaction line a line where prices are likely to stop or reverseNotice how prices reacted at the R-1 line in early 98 That serves as an indication that thecenterline chosen for this study should be a good one to use Not all reaction lines cause such aclear reversal as the R1 on this chart but many do Thats why its important to experiment withvarious centerline possibilities in order to find action lines that produce reaction lines which createthe greatest number of pivots or price stall-outs This experimentation is often quite time

consuming but experience has shown that it is time well spent When a centerline is found that isin tune with the price action of the issue under study it can be a highly effective tool for use inlocating probable reversal areas When combined with pitchfork lines the AR method can pinpointpotential reversal areas that are generally not recognized as such by others Dr Andrewstechniques for using the pitchfork and AR lines together are covered in later lessons In coming segments well study other lines that Dr Andrews used for his centerlines In themeantime experiment with the multi-pivot centerline on your own charts Then please send mean example of your work along with any questions you may have

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Freitag 25 Februar 2000 211356

gtIn the meantime experiment with the multi-pivot centerline on your owngtcharts Then please send me an example of your work along with anygtquestions you may have Hello Gordon I was wondering how many ActionReaction lines could be drawn on a chart On my attached chart I found at least 6 parallellines which had a significant meaning for the price RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject AR linesDate Montag 28 Februar 2000 080128

gtHello Gordongt gtI was wondering how many ActionReaction lines could be drawn on agtchart On my attached chart I found at least 6 parallel lines which hadgta significant meaning for the pricegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hi TradersZone Theres no set number of lines that can be drawnactually the more you can find the betterFinding a good centerline is the key And once you find lines that work such as you did anynumber of parallel lines can be drawn You are doing exactly what Dr Andrews didtaking thetime and effort to find the best fitting sets of lines Each chart has them and each chart is differentas Im sure youve found Nice work Heres the next part Regards Gordon Lesson 3 continued One of Dr Andrews favorite techniques dealt with gapsan often times perplexing price event formany traders His observations over the years suggested to him that while gaps show upfrequently on many price charts few traders have a method for including them as an integral partof their chart analysis Thats not surprising since not much has been published about how toapproach the use of gaps in a trading method Dr Andrews however found several ways to putprice gaps to good use An ActionReaction centerline which uses gaps as its basis is one suchmethod Please refer to the attached chart of Cendant Youll see that a centerline was drawn which passedthrough the July gap Note that it also came in contact with several pivots thereby qualifying as agapmulti-pivot centerline It is drawn by starting at the April low pivot and extending a line acrossand through the gap in mid-July It subsequently touches two additional high pivots Dr Andrews counted each gap as two pivots He noted that the more pivots a line touched the

stronger the line tended to be in the future Good reason then for using the July gap as the basisfor an ActionReaction study Our CL is labelled a gap-mpl-CL The May 98 high was used for the Action Line starting point A line was then drawn parallel to theCenterline as per ActionReaction procedure The corresponding Reaction Line was then drawn inIf this particular study had been drawn on Cendants chart right after the July gap was put in thepotential for prices to go all the way down to the Reaction Line might have seemed very slim at thetime Notice however that prices reached the Reaction Line in early September Youll see thishappen time and again as you work with the AR method The core of its effectiveness is a strongCL Please send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts of your choice

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re AR linesDate Montag 28 Februar 2000 155937

gtPlease send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts of yourgtchoice Hello Gordonhere are my examples RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject More on the ARDate Donnerstag 2 Maumlrz 2000 071158

At 22800 35900 PM you wrotegtgtPlease send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts ofgtgtyour choicegt gtHello Gordongthere are my examplesgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone You picked some good examples to use for your AR study Both showed the potential power of thismethod Takes time and lots of chart study sometimes to find the best set of lines but the rewardscan be many Heres something else to look at Regards Gordon The ActionReaction technique requires a strong centerline from which to begin The key todeciding which set of pivots to use for the centerline is found through experimenting with thevarious configurations visible on the chart under study The centerline might be a series of gapspivots an existing median line or any of Dr Andrews lines The task is to search for that centerlinewhich shows the greatest potential for projecting price reversal areas Dr Andrews did that byfinding a likely centerline near the middle of his price chart That allowed him to use any of theprevious pivots for his action lines By experimenting he found reaction lines that did the best jobof pegging reversal areas at data points located forward of the centerline Reaction lines are equal and opposite of the action lines and serve to project price levels at whicha reversal can be expected That is why the task of seeking out the best centerline is so importantDr Andrews reasoned that a series of reaction lines which have pegged price reversals in the pastis likely to continue to be in tune with current and future market price action Having severalprevious pivots to use as anchors for drawing action lines is thus essential The attached chart of Lattice illustrates this concept Please bear in mind that the gapmplcenterline is not the only centerline one could use on this chart You might want to study the chartfor other AR possibilities Try a peak-to-peak CL or a multi-pivot CL Send me your studies along

with any questions

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re More on the ARDate Samstag 4 Maumlrz 2000 002521

gtThe attached chart of Lattice illustrates this conceptgtPlease bear in mind that the gapmpl centerline is not the onlygtcenterline one could use on this chartgtYou might want to study the chart for other AR possibilitiesgtTry a peak-to-peak CL or a multi-pivot CL Send me your studiesgtalong with any questions Hello Gordonhere is my chart RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Peak to peak clDate Sonntag 5 Maumlrz 2000 064107

At 3400 122500 AM you wrotegtHello Gordongthere is my chartgt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Looks like you have the concept down Takes time and a lot of chart work to find the bestcenterline When the reaction lines dont seem to peg reversal areas chances are the centerline isnot the one that is best in tune with the price action of the issue under studyDespite the time required for this method it was one of Dr Andrews stand-bysAR lines could befound on most of his charts Im sending a chart with an example of a peak-to-peak CL Regards Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Peak to peak clDate Sonntag 5 Maumlrz 2000 171232

Hello Gordon I think the peak-to-peak CL on the last chart I sent to you was not really drawn from peak to peakIm sending another example RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next LessonDate Mittwoch 8 Maumlrz 2000 072526

At 3500 51200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtI think the peak-to-peak CL on the last chart I sent to you was notgtreally drawn from peak to peakgtIm sending another examplegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your peak to peak cl example was correctly drawn Thats a fairly simple approach but quite oftenthe peak to peak yields better reaction lines Heres the first part of the next lesson Regards Gordon Youll find times when prices dont quite reach the ML but instead drift alongside or away from itThe Schiff ML was designed to be used in place of the regular ML whenever that happens Suchprice action can be found at any place on a chart but most frequently occurs after a sharp sell-offor run-up of prices Dr Andrews also used the Schiff ML whenever his regular ML sloped at an unusually steep angleHe said it helped smooth out irregular price action such as that caused by unexpected earningsnews crop planting delays or poor growing conditions crop production reports etc Youll findnearly vertical price moves over a short period of time on many charts The Schiff ML method helpsput things back in perspective when that happens Well use the chart of Sterling Bancorp as an example of prices drifting away from the regular MLThat ML is drawn in black Prices didnt quite reach the ML but drifted alongside and eventuallyaway from it The Schiff ML and parallel lines are drawn in red Notice how prices were containedwithin the Schiff pitchfork until they finally broke down at the upper parallel line The procedure for drawing the Schiff ML is the same as for the regular ML except the startingpoint is located midway between the first 2 pivots youll be using The Sterling Bancorp chart

illustrates how this is done Dr Andrews also suggested using the Schiff ML whenever the regular ML method doesnt seem tobe in sync with price action Practice this procedure on your own charts and send a couple examples when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next LessonDate Donnerstag 9 Maumlrz 2000 001143

Hello Gordon in my charting software (Dynamic Trader) the Schiff ML is drawn by finding the midpoint of the line between pivot A and pivot Bmoving this point horizontally to directly above or below (depending on whether A is a low or high pivot) the A pivot anddrawing a line from his point through the midpoint of the BC swingAre there different methods of drawing a Schiff MLI was too lazy to draw Schiff MLs by hand with the method you described so Im sending my examples with the Dynamic TraderSchiff MLs -) RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject SchiffDate Samstag 11 Maumlrz 2000 070226

At 3900 121100 AM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtin my charting software (Dynamic Trader) the Schiff ML is drawn bygtfinding the midpoint of the line between pivot A and pivot B movinggtthis point horizontally to directly above or below (depending ongtwhether A is a low or high pivot) the A pivot and drawing a linegtgtfrom his point through the midpoint of the BC swinggtAre there different methods of drawing a Schiff MLgtI was too lazy to draw Schiff MLs by hand with the method yougtdescribed so Im sending my examples with the Dynamic Trader Schiff MLs -)gt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your program Schiff line procedure is fineits actually what Dr Andrews called a modified schiff ml and is onlyslightly different than the one I sent you initially The one you used is preferred by most course members Im sendingthe modified Schiff lesson and a chart along with this email The chart example shows how to use it with 0-34 pivots Regards Gordon

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Sliding Parallel LineDate Montag 13 Maumlrz 2000 005252

Hello TradersZone Heres one of the tools Dr Andrews used most often when entering exiting or reversing marketpositions Not many people know about this technique Regards Gordon The Sliding Parallel (SH) is drawn whenever prices cross an Andrews line and then move along itFor example if the bottom of a daily price bar range drops through a lower parallel line of apitchfork a new parallel line is then drawn from that low and extended to the right If the nextdays price bar drops through that sliding parallel line a sell signal is generated Whenever price action dictates a sliding parallel the next step is to draw a Warning Line Thewarning line is an additional parallel line that is an image extension of the original pitchforkchannels It serves as a warning that if prices penetrate the sliding parallel the next likely target isthe WL The attached chart of Avis illustrates these procedures Please try these on your own charts andsend me an example

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Sliding Parallel LineDate Dienstag 14 Maumlrz 2000 225737

Hello Gordon this is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning line RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 065606

At 31400 105700 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtthis is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning linegt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone Your chart of circuit city was a good example for this study I may have mentioned it earlier but DrAndrews used this technique on a regular basis The next part of this lesson covers another of hisfavorite tools the mini-median line pitchfork Here it is Regards Gordon The Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry and exit tools Though mostoften drawn using alternate closing prices alternate highs and lows can also be usedin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days is usually the maximumbetween pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or more back from P2 Dr Andrews used Mini-Median Line pitchforks for buy and sell signals whenever he expected areversal Some examples include a probable P5 or when prices are at a Warning Line ML MLHmajor ML extension or a sideways channel price target When prices cross the Mini-Median LineParallel (MMLH) a sliding parallel (SH) is used for order entry

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 231537

gtThe Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry andgtexit tools Though most often drawn using alternate closing pricesgtalternate highs and lows can also be usedgtin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days isgtusually the maximum between pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or moregtback from P2

Hello Gordon

wouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timingCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available whenDr Andrews was alive

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject intraday chartsDate Samstag 18 Maumlrz 2000 012400

At 31600 111500 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongtgtwouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsgtinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timinggtCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available when DrgtAndrews was alivegtgtRegardsgtTradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Youre absolutely correctintraday charts were not available when DrAndrews was a trader

Im reading between the lines here but if you plan to day-trade using the course techniques ie thepitchfork then I agree that the regular pitchfork would be more useful on intraday charts Otherwisewhipsaw would be a significant problem Please get back to me if I didnt address your questionbecause this is a very important technique The mini-median line pitchfork and sliding parallel showedup on most of Dr Andrews charts

Regards

Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re intraday chartsDate Dienstag 21 Maumlrz 2000 220322

Hello Gordon

You are right Im planning to daytrade SampP futures using the course techniques among other things

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 003408

Hi TradersZone Here are a couple Andrews techniques that will help anticipate the breakout direction of asideways channelThey work often enough to warrant keep handy Regards Gordon In an earlier lesson you were introduced to Dr Andrews sideways count You saw how frequentlythe sideways count method provided high probability price objectives after the breakout from theestablished channel took place In this segment of lesson 4 youll be shown 2 congestion area techniques that can help youdetermine the probable sideways channel price breakout direction Both rely on the use of pivots The first uses the pivot points that are circled on a sideways channel Dr Andrews observed thatwhenever a sideways channel results in at least 5 circle contacts the eventual price breakoutwould very often be in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle If circle 5 is at thetop of the channel for example the eventual price breakout would likely be to the upside If circle5 is at the bottom of the channel look for a downside breakout Dr Andrews noted that thistechnique can be subject to false breakouts but that such breakouts are usually followed shortlyafter with a confirmed breakout in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle Heemphasized that this study is best considered as a rule of thumb observation He viewed it as asupporting indicator for use with a short-term pitchfork as prices approached a channel line There are 2 charts attached that show how this works

The second technique in this part of lesson 4 deals with a sideways channelthat is building shortly after a P3 has been formed Dr Andrews noted thatwhenever that happened the probabilities were high that prices wouldbreakout in the same direction they were moving prior to the formation ofthe sideways channel The attached P3 to sideways example chart shows thisprocedure

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 205235

Hello Gordon here is my example for the 5 circle sideways count RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Lesson 5Date Montag 27 Maumlrz 2000 060731

At 32400 85200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my example for the 5 circle sideways countgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt gt Hi TradersZone Good example of the 5th circle tendency to predict the direction of a sideways breakout Any luckfinding a chart showing the P3 to sideways rule Im sending the first part of the next lesson This trendline method is a useful tool with all of DrAndrews course lines He used it all the time but especially when looking for confirmation of othercourse method trading signals Regards Gordon The Course Trendline__________________________________________________________ Next well discuss the trendline Seasoned traders agree that the trendline is one of their mostimportant tools No matter what kind of trading program or technique they use the trendline on achart is a must But one of the biggest mistakes made by amateurs and professionals alike isinconsistently drawing or defining the trendline Dr Andrews trendline procedure is simpleconsistent and accurate It works extremely well with the pivot count and with the pitchfork For an uptrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the lowest low up and to thehighest minor low point preceding the highest high The line must not pass through prices inbetween the two low points Extend the line(Attached chart of Brightpoint) For a downtrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the highest high point to thelowest minor high point preceding the lowest low so that it does not pass through prices inbetween the two high points Extend the line (Brightpoint chart) Thats all theres to it Its simple consistent and it works well with other Andrews lines It also

helps eliminate personal bias and haphazard analysis Practice drawing these trendlines on your own charts Send me any questions you might have andthen e-mail a chart of your choosing which shows at least two uptrend and two downtrend linesthat youve drawn_______________________________________________________________________

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Lesson 5Date Dienstag 28 Maumlrz 2000 120224

Hello Gordon here is my chart with trendlinesWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going above the trendline again should I draw a new trendline anddelete the old one Attached is another chart with the P3 to sideways rule I finally found an example for it RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Price failure techniqueDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081412

At 32800 120200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my chart with trendlinesgtWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going abovegtthe trendline again should I draw a new trendline and delete the oldgtone Hi TradersZone Take a look at the chart Im returningI added some lines for you to considerWith the course trendline once its broken a new one should be started Theres a technique thatties in with this coming up soon Meanwhile heres an important technique to work on It deals with those times when prices dontreach the ML Regards Gordon Dr Andrews Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P ofreversaland the ML the probability is that this price reversal will go further thanitdid on its approach toward the ML (Extract of original course material) A price failure very often indicates a sizeable reversal will take placeThepitchforks drawn on the chart of Home Depot illustrate the concept of pricefailure Dr Andrews routinely drew a new pitchfork on his chart after a newsignificant pivot had formed He knew that prices had a high probability ofreaching the new ML before stalling out or reversing If prices reversedbeforereaching the ML thereby forming a new pivot he termed it a price failureTheunderlying idea here is that Dr Andrews fully anticipated his median linewouldact as a price magnet To conclude that a price reversal resulted in a price failure Dr Andrewsused

these primary signalsa subsequent price penetration of a short-termmulti-pivotline andor a return of prices to and penetration of the parallel lineformed atpivot 3 of the pitchfork (The circles on the Home Depot chart denote theparallelline penetration signal To avoid clutter the mpl lines were not drawn) One possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart of ConsecoIncLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me a copy

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject ChartDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081800Attachments image002png

Hi TradersZone Forgot the chart Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Price failure techniqueDate Samstag 1 April 2000 201000

gtOne possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart ofgtConseco IncgtLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me agtcopy Hi Gordon here are my charts with price failures RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Mittwoch 5 April 2000 235624

Hi TradersZone Good price failure examples you sentany comments or questions about it Heres the next partanother old standby Dr Andrews kept handy Regards Gordon In this segment youll learn how to use the Fan line Technique To draw the fan lines youll apply the coursetrendline method which was introduced in an earlier lesson It might be well to emphasize that the practicalapplication of the course trendline method requires practice and experience both of which will serve youwell in this technique Dr Andrews used fan lines as an adjunct to his pitchfork sideways channel andactionreaction methods In the fan line study three trendlines are drawn from the original reversal pivot of the price correction understudy typically a P0 or a P5 Youll notice on the charts included with this study that each fan line is at aflatter angle than its predecessor When the third fan line is broken the rule is that the correction has endedand a new trend is under way Try this technique on some of your own charts and then please send me asample

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Donnerstag 6 April 2000 234315

Hi Gordon No I dont have any specific question about the price failure technique I guess the next likely target after a price failure wouldbe the warning line I have attached two charts with fan linesIs it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the third fan line is broken RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Next segmentDate Freitag 7 April 2000 003312

Hello TradersZone

Tuesday April 06 2000 114315 AM you wrote

TZgt Hi Gordon

TZgt No I dont have any specific question about the price failureTZgt technique I guess the next likely target after a price failureTZgt would be the warning line

TZgt I have attached two charts with fan linesTZgt Is it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the thirdTZgt fan line is broken

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Thats right the warning line is the next price target Additionalwarning lines can be drawn if needed but usually one will do it Ifprices go through the first warning line another can be drawn butmost likely a new pitchfork could be drawn instead which would bepreferable Helps stay current with recently formed pivots

When prices break through the third fan line a buy or sell signal isgiven Not sure what you mean by fourth target fan line Im a littledense today

Your chart work was goodthis is another handy tool for spotting thehigh probability of a price reversal or trend change

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject The Gap TradeDate Freitag 7 April 2000 004858

Hello TradersZone This trading signal doesnt show up very often but past observations have shown that its well worth watching for Dr Andrews placed a lot of emphasis on the importance of price gaps something many traders overlook This is one of his gap uses Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom The Gap Trading Technique Price gaps can be a dilemma for many traders The general rule denoting market strength or weakness after ahigh volume gap often comes up short after the initial reaction is over Many gappers simply run out ofsteam A high volume gap in itself seems to offer precious little evidence that a profitable move is about toget under way Dr Andrews used price gaps somewhat differently than others He counted a gap as 2 pivots Youll see howthat works in the following technique which uses a gap to arrive at a price level for a buy or sell order Using short-term daily price pivots label the pivot immediately preceding the gap as p0 Count the gap as 2pivots labeling it p1 amp p2 After p3 has formed and prices reverse towards a short-term p4 draw a horizontalline 2 price tics or more (individual preference)to the right of p3 Enter the market only if prices reach orpenetrate that line within a few days after reversing from p4 Please look over your own charts to see if you can find places where the gap trade technique could have beenused Send me a sample when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 001925

Hello Gordon this is my chart with a gap trade RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 065538

Hello TradersZone Thursday April 08 2000 121925 PM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt this is my chart with a gap trade TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Good examplethe gap trade technique shines when an issue in at or near a P5 Similar to the one on thechart you sent Heres another trading signal tool Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Dr Andrews used several techniques which helped him determine whether a P5 was near at hand Youllrecall that he observed most price moves ended or had a significant reversal at a P5 This technique uses alternate closing prices after a P4 has been formed As with many of his studies thenumber 5 is used The chart accompanying this segment shows that there were 5 alternate closes to thedownside after P4 was put in Dr Andrews noted that whenever 5 or more alternate closes followed a P4 theprobabilities were high that a P5 was near at hand An added feature to this chart study is the sideways channel Notice how the 2nd target price and the 5thalternate close nearly coincide

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 12 April 2000 200730

Hello Gordon This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 13 April 2000 082418

Monday April 12 2000 80730 AM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hello TradersZone Good chart example of this Andrews toolanother of his very unusual observations that workmore often than not Heres the final part of this lesson Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom In this trendline method Dr Andrews once again used the number 5 as the basis for locating aprobable reversal area He found this technique to be especially useful whenever a clear orobvious pivot count didnt show up onthe price move under study Trendlines are drawn using the course trendline method When the 5th trendline is broken theprobability is high that the trend under study has ended A mini-median line pitchfork andorsliding parallel could be used for pricing a trading order The accompanying chart of Compaq Computer is an example of how the trendline study could beused The pivot count beginning at the October low is difficult to nail down There were severalsmall areas of congestion but no sizeable corrections while prices advanced The count wasunclear By following the price action using the course trendline technique however the traderwould have been alerted to the possibility of a change of trend when the 5th trendline was brokenin early February Try this technique on your own charts When youre ready please send me an example of yourstudy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 19 April 2000 124108

Hello Gordon this is my example with 5 trendlines RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[6] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 20 April 2000 012726

Monday April 19 2000 124108 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt this is my example with 5 trendlines

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Good example of the 5 TL technique Always reminds me of how the fairly simple tools often do a better job than manyof the sophisticated studies out there

That was the last part of lesson 5 Lesson 6 attached is made in one mailing Youll find Dr Andrews trading rules alongwith a wrap-up review which uses several of his rules You might have questions about some of the rules so feel free tosend them as they arise

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Dr Andrews had an abbreviated set of trading rules on several index cards that he carried around with him in his shirtpocket He said every trading day turned up something new on his charts and by having his rules in his pocket he wasreminded of the need for a methodical approach to his analysis Quite a comment coming from the man who wrote therule book

In this the final lesson of the course Dr Andrews original trading rules and observations are presented Lets work witha few of them at this point

Using charts of issues you follow please send me an example that illustrates your interpretation of each of the followingrules

Rule 4 Anticipating major Ps

Rule 7 Penetration rule

Rule 8 Price failure rule

Rule 11 1-ML23 AR Centerline

Rule 12 Sliding Parallel rule

Rule 15 Mini-median line parallel to buy or sell

Feel free to include any other course techniques you choose to apply but please include examples of the above as aminimum Use more than one technique on a chart if your analysis supports it Send as many charts as you like alongwith your questionscomments

Lesson 6 - Dr Andrews Trading Rules

This lesson covers course rules and significant observations as taught by Dr Andrews in his original trading course Therules are those that he used in his own trading and are provided to serve as a checklist for use with the course tradingmethods youve learned

Rule 1 Where prices are always headed Rule You course members are among the fortunate few to be able to draw astraight line and know that prices are headed toward that ML Very few investors have ever applied this ML principle ofstatistics to price fluctuations and weve never seen this in any books on investment You are among the very few who

know that prices are always headed toward the newest ML

Rule 2 The Rule of coming opposites applies all through life In the bible we find Blessed at they that mourn for theyshall be comforted As investors we know that any losses can be recovered by using course methods

Rule 3 Turn your mind about or Rethink for all good is at hand We should mentally prepare ourselves for thecoming reversal in prices and other affairs Heres one way for example that you course members who know the MLrules can use When prices are skyrocketing upward we do this preparation by thinking If prices pivoted here today atthis price Id draw a new ML bisecting the distance between todays price and the price from which the rise started Andwe know now that if this is a Major Pivot prices will fall rapidly to this new ML Profits from such drops are big and quick

Rule 4 Rule for anticipating major Ps If during congestion or after a rally or decline you can count four previous Psthe fifth one is highly probable to be the one from which a new trend starts

Rule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can make a quick big profit is to watch for the EPformations

Rule 6 The other reversal rule is that prices tend to reverse at or near any ML as well as at any extension of each MLAnd also at any MLH or extensions of MLH

Rule 7 The Penetration Rule is that whenever prices gap past or plunge through any ML there is a high probability thatthey will quickly return to it temporarily and then resume the trend they had before they gapped or plunged through

Rule 8 Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P of reversal and the MLthe probability is that this price reversal will go further than it did on its approach toward the ML

Rule 9 The price failure rule is negated when the next price trend is also a failure in reaching the ML This is almostinvariably a signal of a big fast move in the direction indicated by this last space Rule 10 When alternate median lines of comparable length slope in the same direction the trend is firm and rapidprice changes take place

Rule 11 When 1-ML23 is exactly reached at P4 it can be used as a highly reliable centerline for the AR method

Rule 12 Frequently after crossing a lower MLH prices continue to rise along the MLH Since the crossing of the MLHsignals a further drop is likely use a sliding parallel along the bottom of the most recent crossing If prices drop past thatsliding parallel line a sell signal is generated

Rule 13 MLs between P2 and P3 can start from a nearby or a remote P1 since prices tend to reverse at each of theseMLs Try several such P2-P3 MLs to discover the best fit

Rule 14 The distance of each MLH from its ML is the distance of the next warning line Use these warning lineswhenever a SH has signalled a buy or sell

Rule 15 Use the MMLH as a buy or sell signal when you expect a reversal because of a P5 Also when prices are at aWL ML extension line or where course lines converge or intersect

Rule 16 Converging lines that meet prices have shown the highest probability of a trend reversal

Rule 17 Two to four days is usually the maximum between P2 and P3 for a MML P1 can be a day or so back from P2and 3

Rule 18 The most reliable ActionReaction centerlines seem to be MPL 2P line 2 Gap line peak to low or low to peak

Rule 19 When prices pass through R lines look for a pull back and then a continuing move in the direction of the passthrough

Rule 20 Use gaps as Action lines from the centerline

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 003755

Hello Gordonhere is my example for Rule 4 And I have a question What are EP formations gtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 021242

Tuesday May 04 2000 123755 PM you wrote TZgt Hello GordonTZgt here is my example for Rule 4 TZgt And I have a question What are EP formations gtgtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegtgta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hi TradersZone Good use of the warning linesalso the EP material is part of lesson 4 Rather than go backthrough the files to see when (or if) it was sent Im sending it along with this reply Glad youbrought it up Best RegardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Tuesday May 04 2000208 PM Dr Andrews used a fairly common price chart formation that he found useful at probable P5market tops and bottoms The formation generally called a wedge or pennant by chartists isreferred to in Dr Andrews trading course as the Expanding Pivot (EP) One of the few chartformations used in the course he regarded it as among the most dependable indications that amarket top was forming Closely related to the EP is his Inverted Expanding Pivot (IEP) which henoted could often be observed at market bottoms Both are regarded as intermediate and long-term reversal indicators Dr Andrews found that both formations were most reliable when they occurred after a sharprapid price move coinciding with the formation of a probable P5 He said it wasnt unusual for theformation to take several weeks to complete and that conservative traders could best avoid thewhipsaw associated with congestion patterns by trading only in the direction of the probable price

break out of the EP or IEP formation The attached charts illustrate these formations Please look over your own charts for an example ofthe EP and IEP and send me a copy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 232127

Hello Gordon Thank you for the lesson with the EP material I couldnt find it in any previous emailHere is my example for Rule 7 RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Rule 4Date Samstag 6 Mai 2000 080827

Wednesday May 05 2000 112127 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt Thank you for the lesson with the EP materialTZgt I couldnt find it in any previous emailTZgt Here is my example for Rule 7

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hi TradersZone

Glad you mentioned it earlierexcept for the EP IEP and hissideways channel Dr Andrews didnt have much to say about chartpatterns and formations These are good ones to use though

Your study of the penetration rule was good Later

Best Regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Wednesday May 05 2000801 PM

Page 28: Pitchfork primer

each of the above CLs in this lesson and the next Determining which of the above listed lines to use as the CL is the first step in the ActionReactionmethod The solution often presents itself With a little practice a quick scan of the chart understudy will be all thats needed to spot the most likely CL Well begin with the attached chart Notethe CL drawn In this example a MPL (multi-pivot line) was used as the CL A MPL is a straightline that connects three or more consecutive pivots without passing through prices Theconnecting line is then extended Ive circled the three pivots that form the MPL on the chartThere are several other places on our chart where a MPL CL can be drawn Please bear in mindthat this is just the first step of the process Identification of likely CLs is all were after here Seeif you can locate two more then draw them in and send the chart back to me Well take up fromthere

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next lesson attachedDate Mittwoch 23 Februar 2000 212304

gtLesson 4 continuedgt gtIn one of his course letters Dr Andrews wrote The Law of Physicsgtstated by Newton that Action and Reaction are equal and opposite wasgtfirst applied to prices by your Course Directors friend the lategtRoger Babson who attributed his earnings of several million dollars to this lawgt gtBeginning with this segment of lesson four and continuing in lessongtfive youll learn how to draw and apply the ActionReaction tradinggtmethod as taught by Dr Andrews in his trading coursegt gtThe AR method requires a centerline or CL from which to startgtThe CL can be any of the followinggt - MPLgt - MLgt - MLHgt - 2P linegt - 2 Gap linegt - Peak to low linegt - Low to peak line Hello Gordon2P line 2 Gap line Peak to low line Low to peak line ndash actually I dont know what these lines areAre they discussed in Lesson 3 I believe you havenrsquot sent me this lesson yetAnyway I found two more MPLs on the Novellus Chart and drew them in RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Lesson 3Date Mittwoch 23 Februar 2000 235958

At 22300 92300 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt2P line 2 Gap line Peak to low line Low to peak line - actually I dont knowgtwhat these lines are Are they discussed in Lesson 3 I believe you didntgtsent me this lesson yetgtAnyway I found two more MPLs on the Novellus Chart and drew them ingt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone My apologiesI sent you an outdated version of the lesson Thanks for letting me know Musthave been my bedtime Heres the correct version Regards Gordon Lesson 3 In one of his course letters Dr Andrews wrote The Law of Physics stated by Newton that Actionand Reaction are equal and opposite was first applied to prices by your Course Directors friendthe late Roger Babson who attributed his earnings of several million dollars to this law In this lesson youll be introduced to the ActionReaction trading method as taught by Dr Andrewsin his trading course The AR method requires a centerline or CL from which to start The CL can be any of thefollowing - MPL Multi-pivot line A line drawn across 3 or more pivots - ML Median line The middle line of the pitchfork - MLH Median line parallel Either parallel line of the pitchfork - 2P line A line drawn across 2 pivots - 2 Gap line A line drawn connecting 2 gaps without touching prices in between - Peak to low line A line drawn connecting the high and low of a price leg

- Low to peak line A line drawn connecting the low and high of a price leg These are the primary lines that Dr Andrews used He stressed that some pencil work and a goodeyeball was needed in order to find the best fitting CL As with most other chart lines somework better than others The task is to find the best fit as he put it You will be shown examples ofeach of the above CLs Determining which of the above listed lines to use as the CL is the first step in the ActionReactionmethod With practice a quick view of the chart under study will be all thats needed to spot themost likely CL Youll be shown later how to experiment with possible combinations in order tofind the centerline that is most in tune with the market under study Well begin with the attached chart Note the CL drawn In this example a MPL (multi-pivot line)was used as the CL A MPL is a straight line that connects three or more consecutive pivotswithout passing through prices The connecting line is then extended Ive circled the three pivotsthat form the MPL on the chart There are several other places on our chart where a MPL CL canbe drawn Please bear in mind that this is just the first step of the process Identification of likelyCLs is all were after here See if you can locate two more then draw them in and send the chartback to me

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Donnerstag 24 Februar 2000 025105

At 22300 92300 PM you wroteI found two more MPLs on the Novellus Chart and drew them ingt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your mpls were correct This next segment shows the purpose of the centerline and how it isused Your payment in full arrived today TradersZone Thank you Regards Gordon Lesson 3 continued Please refer to the attached chart of Novellus The line drawn connecting the 3 circled pivots is amulti-pivot line (MPL) and represents the centerline (CL) well be using in this example Recall inthe previous segment that several types of centerlines are possible The choice is determined byexperimenting with the potential combinations on the chart under study Its best to try to locate acenterline somewhere close to the middle of the price chart in order to have sufficient past andforward data to use with the study This will become clear as you work with the method Once the centerline is drawn the next step is to locate a previous low or high pivot point to use fordrawing an action line Dr Andrews observed that the low pivot points often seem to work bestbut that either could be used In our example a line starting at the previous significant low wasdrawn parallel to the CL It is labeled A-1 (Action line 1) because it represents the first actionline Dr Andrews called it an action line because it was drawn as a result of a previous pivot (pricereversal) that had taken place Next a parallel line was drawn to the right of the CL and labeled R-1 Notice that it is the same distance from the CL as the corresponding A-1 line It is labeled R-1because it represents the first reaction line a line where prices are likely to stop or reverseNotice how prices reacted at the R-1 line in early 98 That serves as an indication that thecenterline chosen for this study should be a good one to use Not all reaction lines cause such aclear reversal as the R1 on this chart but many do Thats why its important to experiment withvarious centerline possibilities in order to find action lines that produce reaction lines which createthe greatest number of pivots or price stall-outs This experimentation is often quite time

consuming but experience has shown that it is time well spent When a centerline is found that isin tune with the price action of the issue under study it can be a highly effective tool for use inlocating probable reversal areas When combined with pitchfork lines the AR method can pinpointpotential reversal areas that are generally not recognized as such by others Dr Andrewstechniques for using the pitchfork and AR lines together are covered in later lessons In coming segments well study other lines that Dr Andrews used for his centerlines In themeantime experiment with the multi-pivot centerline on your own charts Then please send mean example of your work along with any questions you may have

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Freitag 25 Februar 2000 211356

gtIn the meantime experiment with the multi-pivot centerline on your owngtcharts Then please send me an example of your work along with anygtquestions you may have Hello Gordon I was wondering how many ActionReaction lines could be drawn on a chart On my attached chart I found at least 6 parallellines which had a significant meaning for the price RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject AR linesDate Montag 28 Februar 2000 080128

gtHello Gordongt gtI was wondering how many ActionReaction lines could be drawn on agtchart On my attached chart I found at least 6 parallel lines which hadgta significant meaning for the pricegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hi TradersZone Theres no set number of lines that can be drawnactually the more you can find the betterFinding a good centerline is the key And once you find lines that work such as you did anynumber of parallel lines can be drawn You are doing exactly what Dr Andrews didtaking thetime and effort to find the best fitting sets of lines Each chart has them and each chart is differentas Im sure youve found Nice work Heres the next part Regards Gordon Lesson 3 continued One of Dr Andrews favorite techniques dealt with gapsan often times perplexing price event formany traders His observations over the years suggested to him that while gaps show upfrequently on many price charts few traders have a method for including them as an integral partof their chart analysis Thats not surprising since not much has been published about how toapproach the use of gaps in a trading method Dr Andrews however found several ways to putprice gaps to good use An ActionReaction centerline which uses gaps as its basis is one suchmethod Please refer to the attached chart of Cendant Youll see that a centerline was drawn which passedthrough the July gap Note that it also came in contact with several pivots thereby qualifying as agapmulti-pivot centerline It is drawn by starting at the April low pivot and extending a line acrossand through the gap in mid-July It subsequently touches two additional high pivots Dr Andrews counted each gap as two pivots He noted that the more pivots a line touched the

stronger the line tended to be in the future Good reason then for using the July gap as the basisfor an ActionReaction study Our CL is labelled a gap-mpl-CL The May 98 high was used for the Action Line starting point A line was then drawn parallel to theCenterline as per ActionReaction procedure The corresponding Reaction Line was then drawn inIf this particular study had been drawn on Cendants chart right after the July gap was put in thepotential for prices to go all the way down to the Reaction Line might have seemed very slim at thetime Notice however that prices reached the Reaction Line in early September Youll see thishappen time and again as you work with the AR method The core of its effectiveness is a strongCL Please send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts of your choice

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re AR linesDate Montag 28 Februar 2000 155937

gtPlease send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts of yourgtchoice Hello Gordonhere are my examples RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject More on the ARDate Donnerstag 2 Maumlrz 2000 071158

At 22800 35900 PM you wrotegtgtPlease send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts ofgtgtyour choicegt gtHello Gordongthere are my examplesgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone You picked some good examples to use for your AR study Both showed the potential power of thismethod Takes time and lots of chart study sometimes to find the best set of lines but the rewardscan be many Heres something else to look at Regards Gordon The ActionReaction technique requires a strong centerline from which to begin The key todeciding which set of pivots to use for the centerline is found through experimenting with thevarious configurations visible on the chart under study The centerline might be a series of gapspivots an existing median line or any of Dr Andrews lines The task is to search for that centerlinewhich shows the greatest potential for projecting price reversal areas Dr Andrews did that byfinding a likely centerline near the middle of his price chart That allowed him to use any of theprevious pivots for his action lines By experimenting he found reaction lines that did the best jobof pegging reversal areas at data points located forward of the centerline Reaction lines are equal and opposite of the action lines and serve to project price levels at whicha reversal can be expected That is why the task of seeking out the best centerline is so importantDr Andrews reasoned that a series of reaction lines which have pegged price reversals in the pastis likely to continue to be in tune with current and future market price action Having severalprevious pivots to use as anchors for drawing action lines is thus essential The attached chart of Lattice illustrates this concept Please bear in mind that the gapmplcenterline is not the only centerline one could use on this chart You might want to study the chartfor other AR possibilities Try a peak-to-peak CL or a multi-pivot CL Send me your studies along

with any questions

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re More on the ARDate Samstag 4 Maumlrz 2000 002521

gtThe attached chart of Lattice illustrates this conceptgtPlease bear in mind that the gapmpl centerline is not the onlygtcenterline one could use on this chartgtYou might want to study the chart for other AR possibilitiesgtTry a peak-to-peak CL or a multi-pivot CL Send me your studiesgtalong with any questions Hello Gordonhere is my chart RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Peak to peak clDate Sonntag 5 Maumlrz 2000 064107

At 3400 122500 AM you wrotegtHello Gordongthere is my chartgt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Looks like you have the concept down Takes time and a lot of chart work to find the bestcenterline When the reaction lines dont seem to peg reversal areas chances are the centerline isnot the one that is best in tune with the price action of the issue under studyDespite the time required for this method it was one of Dr Andrews stand-bysAR lines could befound on most of his charts Im sending a chart with an example of a peak-to-peak CL Regards Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Peak to peak clDate Sonntag 5 Maumlrz 2000 171232

Hello Gordon I think the peak-to-peak CL on the last chart I sent to you was not really drawn from peak to peakIm sending another example RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next LessonDate Mittwoch 8 Maumlrz 2000 072526

At 3500 51200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtI think the peak-to-peak CL on the last chart I sent to you was notgtreally drawn from peak to peakgtIm sending another examplegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your peak to peak cl example was correctly drawn Thats a fairly simple approach but quite oftenthe peak to peak yields better reaction lines Heres the first part of the next lesson Regards Gordon Youll find times when prices dont quite reach the ML but instead drift alongside or away from itThe Schiff ML was designed to be used in place of the regular ML whenever that happens Suchprice action can be found at any place on a chart but most frequently occurs after a sharp sell-offor run-up of prices Dr Andrews also used the Schiff ML whenever his regular ML sloped at an unusually steep angleHe said it helped smooth out irregular price action such as that caused by unexpected earningsnews crop planting delays or poor growing conditions crop production reports etc Youll findnearly vertical price moves over a short period of time on many charts The Schiff ML method helpsput things back in perspective when that happens Well use the chart of Sterling Bancorp as an example of prices drifting away from the regular MLThat ML is drawn in black Prices didnt quite reach the ML but drifted alongside and eventuallyaway from it The Schiff ML and parallel lines are drawn in red Notice how prices were containedwithin the Schiff pitchfork until they finally broke down at the upper parallel line The procedure for drawing the Schiff ML is the same as for the regular ML except the startingpoint is located midway between the first 2 pivots youll be using The Sterling Bancorp chart

illustrates how this is done Dr Andrews also suggested using the Schiff ML whenever the regular ML method doesnt seem tobe in sync with price action Practice this procedure on your own charts and send a couple examples when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next LessonDate Donnerstag 9 Maumlrz 2000 001143

Hello Gordon in my charting software (Dynamic Trader) the Schiff ML is drawn by finding the midpoint of the line between pivot A and pivot Bmoving this point horizontally to directly above or below (depending on whether A is a low or high pivot) the A pivot anddrawing a line from his point through the midpoint of the BC swingAre there different methods of drawing a Schiff MLI was too lazy to draw Schiff MLs by hand with the method you described so Im sending my examples with the Dynamic TraderSchiff MLs -) RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject SchiffDate Samstag 11 Maumlrz 2000 070226

At 3900 121100 AM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtin my charting software (Dynamic Trader) the Schiff ML is drawn bygtfinding the midpoint of the line between pivot A and pivot B movinggtthis point horizontally to directly above or below (depending ongtwhether A is a low or high pivot) the A pivot and drawing a linegtgtfrom his point through the midpoint of the BC swinggtAre there different methods of drawing a Schiff MLgtI was too lazy to draw Schiff MLs by hand with the method yougtdescribed so Im sending my examples with the Dynamic Trader Schiff MLs -)gt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your program Schiff line procedure is fineits actually what Dr Andrews called a modified schiff ml and is onlyslightly different than the one I sent you initially The one you used is preferred by most course members Im sendingthe modified Schiff lesson and a chart along with this email The chart example shows how to use it with 0-34 pivots Regards Gordon

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Sliding Parallel LineDate Montag 13 Maumlrz 2000 005252

Hello TradersZone Heres one of the tools Dr Andrews used most often when entering exiting or reversing marketpositions Not many people know about this technique Regards Gordon The Sliding Parallel (SH) is drawn whenever prices cross an Andrews line and then move along itFor example if the bottom of a daily price bar range drops through a lower parallel line of apitchfork a new parallel line is then drawn from that low and extended to the right If the nextdays price bar drops through that sliding parallel line a sell signal is generated Whenever price action dictates a sliding parallel the next step is to draw a Warning Line Thewarning line is an additional parallel line that is an image extension of the original pitchforkchannels It serves as a warning that if prices penetrate the sliding parallel the next likely target isthe WL The attached chart of Avis illustrates these procedures Please try these on your own charts andsend me an example

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Sliding Parallel LineDate Dienstag 14 Maumlrz 2000 225737

Hello Gordon this is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning line RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 065606

At 31400 105700 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtthis is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning linegt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone Your chart of circuit city was a good example for this study I may have mentioned it earlier but DrAndrews used this technique on a regular basis The next part of this lesson covers another of hisfavorite tools the mini-median line pitchfork Here it is Regards Gordon The Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry and exit tools Though mostoften drawn using alternate closing prices alternate highs and lows can also be usedin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days is usually the maximumbetween pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or more back from P2 Dr Andrews used Mini-Median Line pitchforks for buy and sell signals whenever he expected areversal Some examples include a probable P5 or when prices are at a Warning Line ML MLHmajor ML extension or a sideways channel price target When prices cross the Mini-Median LineParallel (MMLH) a sliding parallel (SH) is used for order entry

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 231537

gtThe Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry andgtexit tools Though most often drawn using alternate closing pricesgtalternate highs and lows can also be usedgtin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days isgtusually the maximum between pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or moregtback from P2

Hello Gordon

wouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timingCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available whenDr Andrews was alive

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject intraday chartsDate Samstag 18 Maumlrz 2000 012400

At 31600 111500 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongtgtwouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsgtinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timinggtCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available when DrgtAndrews was alivegtgtRegardsgtTradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Youre absolutely correctintraday charts were not available when DrAndrews was a trader

Im reading between the lines here but if you plan to day-trade using the course techniques ie thepitchfork then I agree that the regular pitchfork would be more useful on intraday charts Otherwisewhipsaw would be a significant problem Please get back to me if I didnt address your questionbecause this is a very important technique The mini-median line pitchfork and sliding parallel showedup on most of Dr Andrews charts

Regards

Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re intraday chartsDate Dienstag 21 Maumlrz 2000 220322

Hello Gordon

You are right Im planning to daytrade SampP futures using the course techniques among other things

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 003408

Hi TradersZone Here are a couple Andrews techniques that will help anticipate the breakout direction of asideways channelThey work often enough to warrant keep handy Regards Gordon In an earlier lesson you were introduced to Dr Andrews sideways count You saw how frequentlythe sideways count method provided high probability price objectives after the breakout from theestablished channel took place In this segment of lesson 4 youll be shown 2 congestion area techniques that can help youdetermine the probable sideways channel price breakout direction Both rely on the use of pivots The first uses the pivot points that are circled on a sideways channel Dr Andrews observed thatwhenever a sideways channel results in at least 5 circle contacts the eventual price breakoutwould very often be in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle If circle 5 is at thetop of the channel for example the eventual price breakout would likely be to the upside If circle5 is at the bottom of the channel look for a downside breakout Dr Andrews noted that thistechnique can be subject to false breakouts but that such breakouts are usually followed shortlyafter with a confirmed breakout in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle Heemphasized that this study is best considered as a rule of thumb observation He viewed it as asupporting indicator for use with a short-term pitchfork as prices approached a channel line There are 2 charts attached that show how this works

The second technique in this part of lesson 4 deals with a sideways channelthat is building shortly after a P3 has been formed Dr Andrews noted thatwhenever that happened the probabilities were high that prices wouldbreakout in the same direction they were moving prior to the formation ofthe sideways channel The attached P3 to sideways example chart shows thisprocedure

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 205235

Hello Gordon here is my example for the 5 circle sideways count RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Lesson 5Date Montag 27 Maumlrz 2000 060731

At 32400 85200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my example for the 5 circle sideways countgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt gt Hi TradersZone Good example of the 5th circle tendency to predict the direction of a sideways breakout Any luckfinding a chart showing the P3 to sideways rule Im sending the first part of the next lesson This trendline method is a useful tool with all of DrAndrews course lines He used it all the time but especially when looking for confirmation of othercourse method trading signals Regards Gordon The Course Trendline__________________________________________________________ Next well discuss the trendline Seasoned traders agree that the trendline is one of their mostimportant tools No matter what kind of trading program or technique they use the trendline on achart is a must But one of the biggest mistakes made by amateurs and professionals alike isinconsistently drawing or defining the trendline Dr Andrews trendline procedure is simpleconsistent and accurate It works extremely well with the pivot count and with the pitchfork For an uptrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the lowest low up and to thehighest minor low point preceding the highest high The line must not pass through prices inbetween the two low points Extend the line(Attached chart of Brightpoint) For a downtrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the highest high point to thelowest minor high point preceding the lowest low so that it does not pass through prices inbetween the two high points Extend the line (Brightpoint chart) Thats all theres to it Its simple consistent and it works well with other Andrews lines It also

helps eliminate personal bias and haphazard analysis Practice drawing these trendlines on your own charts Send me any questions you might have andthen e-mail a chart of your choosing which shows at least two uptrend and two downtrend linesthat youve drawn_______________________________________________________________________

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Lesson 5Date Dienstag 28 Maumlrz 2000 120224

Hello Gordon here is my chart with trendlinesWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going above the trendline again should I draw a new trendline anddelete the old one Attached is another chart with the P3 to sideways rule I finally found an example for it RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Price failure techniqueDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081412

At 32800 120200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my chart with trendlinesgtWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going abovegtthe trendline again should I draw a new trendline and delete the oldgtone Hi TradersZone Take a look at the chart Im returningI added some lines for you to considerWith the course trendline once its broken a new one should be started Theres a technique thatties in with this coming up soon Meanwhile heres an important technique to work on It deals with those times when prices dontreach the ML Regards Gordon Dr Andrews Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P ofreversaland the ML the probability is that this price reversal will go further thanitdid on its approach toward the ML (Extract of original course material) A price failure very often indicates a sizeable reversal will take placeThepitchforks drawn on the chart of Home Depot illustrate the concept of pricefailure Dr Andrews routinely drew a new pitchfork on his chart after a newsignificant pivot had formed He knew that prices had a high probability ofreaching the new ML before stalling out or reversing If prices reversedbeforereaching the ML thereby forming a new pivot he termed it a price failureTheunderlying idea here is that Dr Andrews fully anticipated his median linewouldact as a price magnet To conclude that a price reversal resulted in a price failure Dr Andrewsused

these primary signalsa subsequent price penetration of a short-termmulti-pivotline andor a return of prices to and penetration of the parallel lineformed atpivot 3 of the pitchfork (The circles on the Home Depot chart denote theparallelline penetration signal To avoid clutter the mpl lines were not drawn) One possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart of ConsecoIncLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me a copy

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject ChartDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081800Attachments image002png

Hi TradersZone Forgot the chart Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Price failure techniqueDate Samstag 1 April 2000 201000

gtOne possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart ofgtConseco IncgtLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me agtcopy Hi Gordon here are my charts with price failures RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Mittwoch 5 April 2000 235624

Hi TradersZone Good price failure examples you sentany comments or questions about it Heres the next partanother old standby Dr Andrews kept handy Regards Gordon In this segment youll learn how to use the Fan line Technique To draw the fan lines youll apply the coursetrendline method which was introduced in an earlier lesson It might be well to emphasize that the practicalapplication of the course trendline method requires practice and experience both of which will serve youwell in this technique Dr Andrews used fan lines as an adjunct to his pitchfork sideways channel andactionreaction methods In the fan line study three trendlines are drawn from the original reversal pivot of the price correction understudy typically a P0 or a P5 Youll notice on the charts included with this study that each fan line is at aflatter angle than its predecessor When the third fan line is broken the rule is that the correction has endedand a new trend is under way Try this technique on some of your own charts and then please send me asample

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Donnerstag 6 April 2000 234315

Hi Gordon No I dont have any specific question about the price failure technique I guess the next likely target after a price failure wouldbe the warning line I have attached two charts with fan linesIs it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the third fan line is broken RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Next segmentDate Freitag 7 April 2000 003312

Hello TradersZone

Tuesday April 06 2000 114315 AM you wrote

TZgt Hi Gordon

TZgt No I dont have any specific question about the price failureTZgt technique I guess the next likely target after a price failureTZgt would be the warning line

TZgt I have attached two charts with fan linesTZgt Is it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the thirdTZgt fan line is broken

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Thats right the warning line is the next price target Additionalwarning lines can be drawn if needed but usually one will do it Ifprices go through the first warning line another can be drawn butmost likely a new pitchfork could be drawn instead which would bepreferable Helps stay current with recently formed pivots

When prices break through the third fan line a buy or sell signal isgiven Not sure what you mean by fourth target fan line Im a littledense today

Your chart work was goodthis is another handy tool for spotting thehigh probability of a price reversal or trend change

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject The Gap TradeDate Freitag 7 April 2000 004858

Hello TradersZone This trading signal doesnt show up very often but past observations have shown that its well worth watching for Dr Andrews placed a lot of emphasis on the importance of price gaps something many traders overlook This is one of his gap uses Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom The Gap Trading Technique Price gaps can be a dilemma for many traders The general rule denoting market strength or weakness after ahigh volume gap often comes up short after the initial reaction is over Many gappers simply run out ofsteam A high volume gap in itself seems to offer precious little evidence that a profitable move is about toget under way Dr Andrews used price gaps somewhat differently than others He counted a gap as 2 pivots Youll see howthat works in the following technique which uses a gap to arrive at a price level for a buy or sell order Using short-term daily price pivots label the pivot immediately preceding the gap as p0 Count the gap as 2pivots labeling it p1 amp p2 After p3 has formed and prices reverse towards a short-term p4 draw a horizontalline 2 price tics or more (individual preference)to the right of p3 Enter the market only if prices reach orpenetrate that line within a few days after reversing from p4 Please look over your own charts to see if you can find places where the gap trade technique could have beenused Send me a sample when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 001925

Hello Gordon this is my chart with a gap trade RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 065538

Hello TradersZone Thursday April 08 2000 121925 PM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt this is my chart with a gap trade TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Good examplethe gap trade technique shines when an issue in at or near a P5 Similar to the one on thechart you sent Heres another trading signal tool Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Dr Andrews used several techniques which helped him determine whether a P5 was near at hand Youllrecall that he observed most price moves ended or had a significant reversal at a P5 This technique uses alternate closing prices after a P4 has been formed As with many of his studies thenumber 5 is used The chart accompanying this segment shows that there were 5 alternate closes to thedownside after P4 was put in Dr Andrews noted that whenever 5 or more alternate closes followed a P4 theprobabilities were high that a P5 was near at hand An added feature to this chart study is the sideways channel Notice how the 2nd target price and the 5thalternate close nearly coincide

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 12 April 2000 200730

Hello Gordon This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 13 April 2000 082418

Monday April 12 2000 80730 AM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hello TradersZone Good chart example of this Andrews toolanother of his very unusual observations that workmore often than not Heres the final part of this lesson Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom In this trendline method Dr Andrews once again used the number 5 as the basis for locating aprobable reversal area He found this technique to be especially useful whenever a clear orobvious pivot count didnt show up onthe price move under study Trendlines are drawn using the course trendline method When the 5th trendline is broken theprobability is high that the trend under study has ended A mini-median line pitchfork andorsliding parallel could be used for pricing a trading order The accompanying chart of Compaq Computer is an example of how the trendline study could beused The pivot count beginning at the October low is difficult to nail down There were severalsmall areas of congestion but no sizeable corrections while prices advanced The count wasunclear By following the price action using the course trendline technique however the traderwould have been alerted to the possibility of a change of trend when the 5th trendline was brokenin early February Try this technique on your own charts When youre ready please send me an example of yourstudy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 19 April 2000 124108

Hello Gordon this is my example with 5 trendlines RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[6] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 20 April 2000 012726

Monday April 19 2000 124108 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt this is my example with 5 trendlines

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Good example of the 5 TL technique Always reminds me of how the fairly simple tools often do a better job than manyof the sophisticated studies out there

That was the last part of lesson 5 Lesson 6 attached is made in one mailing Youll find Dr Andrews trading rules alongwith a wrap-up review which uses several of his rules You might have questions about some of the rules so feel free tosend them as they arise

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Dr Andrews had an abbreviated set of trading rules on several index cards that he carried around with him in his shirtpocket He said every trading day turned up something new on his charts and by having his rules in his pocket he wasreminded of the need for a methodical approach to his analysis Quite a comment coming from the man who wrote therule book

In this the final lesson of the course Dr Andrews original trading rules and observations are presented Lets work witha few of them at this point

Using charts of issues you follow please send me an example that illustrates your interpretation of each of the followingrules

Rule 4 Anticipating major Ps

Rule 7 Penetration rule

Rule 8 Price failure rule

Rule 11 1-ML23 AR Centerline

Rule 12 Sliding Parallel rule

Rule 15 Mini-median line parallel to buy or sell

Feel free to include any other course techniques you choose to apply but please include examples of the above as aminimum Use more than one technique on a chart if your analysis supports it Send as many charts as you like alongwith your questionscomments

Lesson 6 - Dr Andrews Trading Rules

This lesson covers course rules and significant observations as taught by Dr Andrews in his original trading course Therules are those that he used in his own trading and are provided to serve as a checklist for use with the course tradingmethods youve learned

Rule 1 Where prices are always headed Rule You course members are among the fortunate few to be able to draw astraight line and know that prices are headed toward that ML Very few investors have ever applied this ML principle ofstatistics to price fluctuations and weve never seen this in any books on investment You are among the very few who

know that prices are always headed toward the newest ML

Rule 2 The Rule of coming opposites applies all through life In the bible we find Blessed at they that mourn for theyshall be comforted As investors we know that any losses can be recovered by using course methods

Rule 3 Turn your mind about or Rethink for all good is at hand We should mentally prepare ourselves for thecoming reversal in prices and other affairs Heres one way for example that you course members who know the MLrules can use When prices are skyrocketing upward we do this preparation by thinking If prices pivoted here today atthis price Id draw a new ML bisecting the distance between todays price and the price from which the rise started Andwe know now that if this is a Major Pivot prices will fall rapidly to this new ML Profits from such drops are big and quick

Rule 4 Rule for anticipating major Ps If during congestion or after a rally or decline you can count four previous Psthe fifth one is highly probable to be the one from which a new trend starts

Rule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can make a quick big profit is to watch for the EPformations

Rule 6 The other reversal rule is that prices tend to reverse at or near any ML as well as at any extension of each MLAnd also at any MLH or extensions of MLH

Rule 7 The Penetration Rule is that whenever prices gap past or plunge through any ML there is a high probability thatthey will quickly return to it temporarily and then resume the trend they had before they gapped or plunged through

Rule 8 Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P of reversal and the MLthe probability is that this price reversal will go further than it did on its approach toward the ML

Rule 9 The price failure rule is negated when the next price trend is also a failure in reaching the ML This is almostinvariably a signal of a big fast move in the direction indicated by this last space Rule 10 When alternate median lines of comparable length slope in the same direction the trend is firm and rapidprice changes take place

Rule 11 When 1-ML23 is exactly reached at P4 it can be used as a highly reliable centerline for the AR method

Rule 12 Frequently after crossing a lower MLH prices continue to rise along the MLH Since the crossing of the MLHsignals a further drop is likely use a sliding parallel along the bottom of the most recent crossing If prices drop past thatsliding parallel line a sell signal is generated

Rule 13 MLs between P2 and P3 can start from a nearby or a remote P1 since prices tend to reverse at each of theseMLs Try several such P2-P3 MLs to discover the best fit

Rule 14 The distance of each MLH from its ML is the distance of the next warning line Use these warning lineswhenever a SH has signalled a buy or sell

Rule 15 Use the MMLH as a buy or sell signal when you expect a reversal because of a P5 Also when prices are at aWL ML extension line or where course lines converge or intersect

Rule 16 Converging lines that meet prices have shown the highest probability of a trend reversal

Rule 17 Two to four days is usually the maximum between P2 and P3 for a MML P1 can be a day or so back from P2and 3

Rule 18 The most reliable ActionReaction centerlines seem to be MPL 2P line 2 Gap line peak to low or low to peak

Rule 19 When prices pass through R lines look for a pull back and then a continuing move in the direction of the passthrough

Rule 20 Use gaps as Action lines from the centerline

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 003755

Hello Gordonhere is my example for Rule 4 And I have a question What are EP formations gtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 021242

Tuesday May 04 2000 123755 PM you wrote TZgt Hello GordonTZgt here is my example for Rule 4 TZgt And I have a question What are EP formations gtgtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegtgta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hi TradersZone Good use of the warning linesalso the EP material is part of lesson 4 Rather than go backthrough the files to see when (or if) it was sent Im sending it along with this reply Glad youbrought it up Best RegardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Tuesday May 04 2000208 PM Dr Andrews used a fairly common price chart formation that he found useful at probable P5market tops and bottoms The formation generally called a wedge or pennant by chartists isreferred to in Dr Andrews trading course as the Expanding Pivot (EP) One of the few chartformations used in the course he regarded it as among the most dependable indications that amarket top was forming Closely related to the EP is his Inverted Expanding Pivot (IEP) which henoted could often be observed at market bottoms Both are regarded as intermediate and long-term reversal indicators Dr Andrews found that both formations were most reliable when they occurred after a sharprapid price move coinciding with the formation of a probable P5 He said it wasnt unusual for theformation to take several weeks to complete and that conservative traders could best avoid thewhipsaw associated with congestion patterns by trading only in the direction of the probable price

break out of the EP or IEP formation The attached charts illustrate these formations Please look over your own charts for an example ofthe EP and IEP and send me a copy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 232127

Hello Gordon Thank you for the lesson with the EP material I couldnt find it in any previous emailHere is my example for Rule 7 RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Rule 4Date Samstag 6 Mai 2000 080827

Wednesday May 05 2000 112127 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt Thank you for the lesson with the EP materialTZgt I couldnt find it in any previous emailTZgt Here is my example for Rule 7

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hi TradersZone

Glad you mentioned it earlierexcept for the EP IEP and hissideways channel Dr Andrews didnt have much to say about chartpatterns and formations These are good ones to use though

Your study of the penetration rule was good Later

Best Regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Wednesday May 05 2000801 PM

Page 29: Pitchfork primer

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next lesson attachedDate Mittwoch 23 Februar 2000 212304

gtLesson 4 continuedgt gtIn one of his course letters Dr Andrews wrote The Law of Physicsgtstated by Newton that Action and Reaction are equal and opposite wasgtfirst applied to prices by your Course Directors friend the lategtRoger Babson who attributed his earnings of several million dollars to this lawgt gtBeginning with this segment of lesson four and continuing in lessongtfive youll learn how to draw and apply the ActionReaction tradinggtmethod as taught by Dr Andrews in his trading coursegt gtThe AR method requires a centerline or CL from which to startgtThe CL can be any of the followinggt - MPLgt - MLgt - MLHgt - 2P linegt - 2 Gap linegt - Peak to low linegt - Low to peak line Hello Gordon2P line 2 Gap line Peak to low line Low to peak line ndash actually I dont know what these lines areAre they discussed in Lesson 3 I believe you havenrsquot sent me this lesson yetAnyway I found two more MPLs on the Novellus Chart and drew them in RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Lesson 3Date Mittwoch 23 Februar 2000 235958

At 22300 92300 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt2P line 2 Gap line Peak to low line Low to peak line - actually I dont knowgtwhat these lines are Are they discussed in Lesson 3 I believe you didntgtsent me this lesson yetgtAnyway I found two more MPLs on the Novellus Chart and drew them ingt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone My apologiesI sent you an outdated version of the lesson Thanks for letting me know Musthave been my bedtime Heres the correct version Regards Gordon Lesson 3 In one of his course letters Dr Andrews wrote The Law of Physics stated by Newton that Actionand Reaction are equal and opposite was first applied to prices by your Course Directors friendthe late Roger Babson who attributed his earnings of several million dollars to this law In this lesson youll be introduced to the ActionReaction trading method as taught by Dr Andrewsin his trading course The AR method requires a centerline or CL from which to start The CL can be any of thefollowing - MPL Multi-pivot line A line drawn across 3 or more pivots - ML Median line The middle line of the pitchfork - MLH Median line parallel Either parallel line of the pitchfork - 2P line A line drawn across 2 pivots - 2 Gap line A line drawn connecting 2 gaps without touching prices in between - Peak to low line A line drawn connecting the high and low of a price leg

- Low to peak line A line drawn connecting the low and high of a price leg These are the primary lines that Dr Andrews used He stressed that some pencil work and a goodeyeball was needed in order to find the best fitting CL As with most other chart lines somework better than others The task is to find the best fit as he put it You will be shown examples ofeach of the above CLs Determining which of the above listed lines to use as the CL is the first step in the ActionReactionmethod With practice a quick view of the chart under study will be all thats needed to spot themost likely CL Youll be shown later how to experiment with possible combinations in order tofind the centerline that is most in tune with the market under study Well begin with the attached chart Note the CL drawn In this example a MPL (multi-pivot line)was used as the CL A MPL is a straight line that connects three or more consecutive pivotswithout passing through prices The connecting line is then extended Ive circled the three pivotsthat form the MPL on the chart There are several other places on our chart where a MPL CL canbe drawn Please bear in mind that this is just the first step of the process Identification of likelyCLs is all were after here See if you can locate two more then draw them in and send the chartback to me

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Donnerstag 24 Februar 2000 025105

At 22300 92300 PM you wroteI found two more MPLs on the Novellus Chart and drew them ingt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your mpls were correct This next segment shows the purpose of the centerline and how it isused Your payment in full arrived today TradersZone Thank you Regards Gordon Lesson 3 continued Please refer to the attached chart of Novellus The line drawn connecting the 3 circled pivots is amulti-pivot line (MPL) and represents the centerline (CL) well be using in this example Recall inthe previous segment that several types of centerlines are possible The choice is determined byexperimenting with the potential combinations on the chart under study Its best to try to locate acenterline somewhere close to the middle of the price chart in order to have sufficient past andforward data to use with the study This will become clear as you work with the method Once the centerline is drawn the next step is to locate a previous low or high pivot point to use fordrawing an action line Dr Andrews observed that the low pivot points often seem to work bestbut that either could be used In our example a line starting at the previous significant low wasdrawn parallel to the CL It is labeled A-1 (Action line 1) because it represents the first actionline Dr Andrews called it an action line because it was drawn as a result of a previous pivot (pricereversal) that had taken place Next a parallel line was drawn to the right of the CL and labeled R-1 Notice that it is the same distance from the CL as the corresponding A-1 line It is labeled R-1because it represents the first reaction line a line where prices are likely to stop or reverseNotice how prices reacted at the R-1 line in early 98 That serves as an indication that thecenterline chosen for this study should be a good one to use Not all reaction lines cause such aclear reversal as the R1 on this chart but many do Thats why its important to experiment withvarious centerline possibilities in order to find action lines that produce reaction lines which createthe greatest number of pivots or price stall-outs This experimentation is often quite time

consuming but experience has shown that it is time well spent When a centerline is found that isin tune with the price action of the issue under study it can be a highly effective tool for use inlocating probable reversal areas When combined with pitchfork lines the AR method can pinpointpotential reversal areas that are generally not recognized as such by others Dr Andrewstechniques for using the pitchfork and AR lines together are covered in later lessons In coming segments well study other lines that Dr Andrews used for his centerlines In themeantime experiment with the multi-pivot centerline on your own charts Then please send mean example of your work along with any questions you may have

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Freitag 25 Februar 2000 211356

gtIn the meantime experiment with the multi-pivot centerline on your owngtcharts Then please send me an example of your work along with anygtquestions you may have Hello Gordon I was wondering how many ActionReaction lines could be drawn on a chart On my attached chart I found at least 6 parallellines which had a significant meaning for the price RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject AR linesDate Montag 28 Februar 2000 080128

gtHello Gordongt gtI was wondering how many ActionReaction lines could be drawn on agtchart On my attached chart I found at least 6 parallel lines which hadgta significant meaning for the pricegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hi TradersZone Theres no set number of lines that can be drawnactually the more you can find the betterFinding a good centerline is the key And once you find lines that work such as you did anynumber of parallel lines can be drawn You are doing exactly what Dr Andrews didtaking thetime and effort to find the best fitting sets of lines Each chart has them and each chart is differentas Im sure youve found Nice work Heres the next part Regards Gordon Lesson 3 continued One of Dr Andrews favorite techniques dealt with gapsan often times perplexing price event formany traders His observations over the years suggested to him that while gaps show upfrequently on many price charts few traders have a method for including them as an integral partof their chart analysis Thats not surprising since not much has been published about how toapproach the use of gaps in a trading method Dr Andrews however found several ways to putprice gaps to good use An ActionReaction centerline which uses gaps as its basis is one suchmethod Please refer to the attached chart of Cendant Youll see that a centerline was drawn which passedthrough the July gap Note that it also came in contact with several pivots thereby qualifying as agapmulti-pivot centerline It is drawn by starting at the April low pivot and extending a line acrossand through the gap in mid-July It subsequently touches two additional high pivots Dr Andrews counted each gap as two pivots He noted that the more pivots a line touched the

stronger the line tended to be in the future Good reason then for using the July gap as the basisfor an ActionReaction study Our CL is labelled a gap-mpl-CL The May 98 high was used for the Action Line starting point A line was then drawn parallel to theCenterline as per ActionReaction procedure The corresponding Reaction Line was then drawn inIf this particular study had been drawn on Cendants chart right after the July gap was put in thepotential for prices to go all the way down to the Reaction Line might have seemed very slim at thetime Notice however that prices reached the Reaction Line in early September Youll see thishappen time and again as you work with the AR method The core of its effectiveness is a strongCL Please send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts of your choice

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re AR linesDate Montag 28 Februar 2000 155937

gtPlease send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts of yourgtchoice Hello Gordonhere are my examples RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject More on the ARDate Donnerstag 2 Maumlrz 2000 071158

At 22800 35900 PM you wrotegtgtPlease send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts ofgtgtyour choicegt gtHello Gordongthere are my examplesgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone You picked some good examples to use for your AR study Both showed the potential power of thismethod Takes time and lots of chart study sometimes to find the best set of lines but the rewardscan be many Heres something else to look at Regards Gordon The ActionReaction technique requires a strong centerline from which to begin The key todeciding which set of pivots to use for the centerline is found through experimenting with thevarious configurations visible on the chart under study The centerline might be a series of gapspivots an existing median line or any of Dr Andrews lines The task is to search for that centerlinewhich shows the greatest potential for projecting price reversal areas Dr Andrews did that byfinding a likely centerline near the middle of his price chart That allowed him to use any of theprevious pivots for his action lines By experimenting he found reaction lines that did the best jobof pegging reversal areas at data points located forward of the centerline Reaction lines are equal and opposite of the action lines and serve to project price levels at whicha reversal can be expected That is why the task of seeking out the best centerline is so importantDr Andrews reasoned that a series of reaction lines which have pegged price reversals in the pastis likely to continue to be in tune with current and future market price action Having severalprevious pivots to use as anchors for drawing action lines is thus essential The attached chart of Lattice illustrates this concept Please bear in mind that the gapmplcenterline is not the only centerline one could use on this chart You might want to study the chartfor other AR possibilities Try a peak-to-peak CL or a multi-pivot CL Send me your studies along

with any questions

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re More on the ARDate Samstag 4 Maumlrz 2000 002521

gtThe attached chart of Lattice illustrates this conceptgtPlease bear in mind that the gapmpl centerline is not the onlygtcenterline one could use on this chartgtYou might want to study the chart for other AR possibilitiesgtTry a peak-to-peak CL or a multi-pivot CL Send me your studiesgtalong with any questions Hello Gordonhere is my chart RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Peak to peak clDate Sonntag 5 Maumlrz 2000 064107

At 3400 122500 AM you wrotegtHello Gordongthere is my chartgt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Looks like you have the concept down Takes time and a lot of chart work to find the bestcenterline When the reaction lines dont seem to peg reversal areas chances are the centerline isnot the one that is best in tune with the price action of the issue under studyDespite the time required for this method it was one of Dr Andrews stand-bysAR lines could befound on most of his charts Im sending a chart with an example of a peak-to-peak CL Regards Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Peak to peak clDate Sonntag 5 Maumlrz 2000 171232

Hello Gordon I think the peak-to-peak CL on the last chart I sent to you was not really drawn from peak to peakIm sending another example RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next LessonDate Mittwoch 8 Maumlrz 2000 072526

At 3500 51200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtI think the peak-to-peak CL on the last chart I sent to you was notgtreally drawn from peak to peakgtIm sending another examplegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your peak to peak cl example was correctly drawn Thats a fairly simple approach but quite oftenthe peak to peak yields better reaction lines Heres the first part of the next lesson Regards Gordon Youll find times when prices dont quite reach the ML but instead drift alongside or away from itThe Schiff ML was designed to be used in place of the regular ML whenever that happens Suchprice action can be found at any place on a chart but most frequently occurs after a sharp sell-offor run-up of prices Dr Andrews also used the Schiff ML whenever his regular ML sloped at an unusually steep angleHe said it helped smooth out irregular price action such as that caused by unexpected earningsnews crop planting delays or poor growing conditions crop production reports etc Youll findnearly vertical price moves over a short period of time on many charts The Schiff ML method helpsput things back in perspective when that happens Well use the chart of Sterling Bancorp as an example of prices drifting away from the regular MLThat ML is drawn in black Prices didnt quite reach the ML but drifted alongside and eventuallyaway from it The Schiff ML and parallel lines are drawn in red Notice how prices were containedwithin the Schiff pitchfork until they finally broke down at the upper parallel line The procedure for drawing the Schiff ML is the same as for the regular ML except the startingpoint is located midway between the first 2 pivots youll be using The Sterling Bancorp chart

illustrates how this is done Dr Andrews also suggested using the Schiff ML whenever the regular ML method doesnt seem tobe in sync with price action Practice this procedure on your own charts and send a couple examples when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next LessonDate Donnerstag 9 Maumlrz 2000 001143

Hello Gordon in my charting software (Dynamic Trader) the Schiff ML is drawn by finding the midpoint of the line between pivot A and pivot Bmoving this point horizontally to directly above or below (depending on whether A is a low or high pivot) the A pivot anddrawing a line from his point through the midpoint of the BC swingAre there different methods of drawing a Schiff MLI was too lazy to draw Schiff MLs by hand with the method you described so Im sending my examples with the Dynamic TraderSchiff MLs -) RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject SchiffDate Samstag 11 Maumlrz 2000 070226

At 3900 121100 AM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtin my charting software (Dynamic Trader) the Schiff ML is drawn bygtfinding the midpoint of the line between pivot A and pivot B movinggtthis point horizontally to directly above or below (depending ongtwhether A is a low or high pivot) the A pivot and drawing a linegtgtfrom his point through the midpoint of the BC swinggtAre there different methods of drawing a Schiff MLgtI was too lazy to draw Schiff MLs by hand with the method yougtdescribed so Im sending my examples with the Dynamic Trader Schiff MLs -)gt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your program Schiff line procedure is fineits actually what Dr Andrews called a modified schiff ml and is onlyslightly different than the one I sent you initially The one you used is preferred by most course members Im sendingthe modified Schiff lesson and a chart along with this email The chart example shows how to use it with 0-34 pivots Regards Gordon

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Sliding Parallel LineDate Montag 13 Maumlrz 2000 005252

Hello TradersZone Heres one of the tools Dr Andrews used most often when entering exiting or reversing marketpositions Not many people know about this technique Regards Gordon The Sliding Parallel (SH) is drawn whenever prices cross an Andrews line and then move along itFor example if the bottom of a daily price bar range drops through a lower parallel line of apitchfork a new parallel line is then drawn from that low and extended to the right If the nextdays price bar drops through that sliding parallel line a sell signal is generated Whenever price action dictates a sliding parallel the next step is to draw a Warning Line Thewarning line is an additional parallel line that is an image extension of the original pitchforkchannels It serves as a warning that if prices penetrate the sliding parallel the next likely target isthe WL The attached chart of Avis illustrates these procedures Please try these on your own charts andsend me an example

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Sliding Parallel LineDate Dienstag 14 Maumlrz 2000 225737

Hello Gordon this is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning line RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 065606

At 31400 105700 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtthis is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning linegt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone Your chart of circuit city was a good example for this study I may have mentioned it earlier but DrAndrews used this technique on a regular basis The next part of this lesson covers another of hisfavorite tools the mini-median line pitchfork Here it is Regards Gordon The Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry and exit tools Though mostoften drawn using alternate closing prices alternate highs and lows can also be usedin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days is usually the maximumbetween pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or more back from P2 Dr Andrews used Mini-Median Line pitchforks for buy and sell signals whenever he expected areversal Some examples include a probable P5 or when prices are at a Warning Line ML MLHmajor ML extension or a sideways channel price target When prices cross the Mini-Median LineParallel (MMLH) a sliding parallel (SH) is used for order entry

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 231537

gtThe Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry andgtexit tools Though most often drawn using alternate closing pricesgtalternate highs and lows can also be usedgtin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days isgtusually the maximum between pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or moregtback from P2

Hello Gordon

wouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timingCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available whenDr Andrews was alive

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject intraday chartsDate Samstag 18 Maumlrz 2000 012400

At 31600 111500 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongtgtwouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsgtinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timinggtCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available when DrgtAndrews was alivegtgtRegardsgtTradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Youre absolutely correctintraday charts were not available when DrAndrews was a trader

Im reading between the lines here but if you plan to day-trade using the course techniques ie thepitchfork then I agree that the regular pitchfork would be more useful on intraday charts Otherwisewhipsaw would be a significant problem Please get back to me if I didnt address your questionbecause this is a very important technique The mini-median line pitchfork and sliding parallel showedup on most of Dr Andrews charts

Regards

Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re intraday chartsDate Dienstag 21 Maumlrz 2000 220322

Hello Gordon

You are right Im planning to daytrade SampP futures using the course techniques among other things

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 003408

Hi TradersZone Here are a couple Andrews techniques that will help anticipate the breakout direction of asideways channelThey work often enough to warrant keep handy Regards Gordon In an earlier lesson you were introduced to Dr Andrews sideways count You saw how frequentlythe sideways count method provided high probability price objectives after the breakout from theestablished channel took place In this segment of lesson 4 youll be shown 2 congestion area techniques that can help youdetermine the probable sideways channel price breakout direction Both rely on the use of pivots The first uses the pivot points that are circled on a sideways channel Dr Andrews observed thatwhenever a sideways channel results in at least 5 circle contacts the eventual price breakoutwould very often be in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle If circle 5 is at thetop of the channel for example the eventual price breakout would likely be to the upside If circle5 is at the bottom of the channel look for a downside breakout Dr Andrews noted that thistechnique can be subject to false breakouts but that such breakouts are usually followed shortlyafter with a confirmed breakout in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle Heemphasized that this study is best considered as a rule of thumb observation He viewed it as asupporting indicator for use with a short-term pitchfork as prices approached a channel line There are 2 charts attached that show how this works

The second technique in this part of lesson 4 deals with a sideways channelthat is building shortly after a P3 has been formed Dr Andrews noted thatwhenever that happened the probabilities were high that prices wouldbreakout in the same direction they were moving prior to the formation ofthe sideways channel The attached P3 to sideways example chart shows thisprocedure

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 205235

Hello Gordon here is my example for the 5 circle sideways count RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Lesson 5Date Montag 27 Maumlrz 2000 060731

At 32400 85200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my example for the 5 circle sideways countgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt gt Hi TradersZone Good example of the 5th circle tendency to predict the direction of a sideways breakout Any luckfinding a chart showing the P3 to sideways rule Im sending the first part of the next lesson This trendline method is a useful tool with all of DrAndrews course lines He used it all the time but especially when looking for confirmation of othercourse method trading signals Regards Gordon The Course Trendline__________________________________________________________ Next well discuss the trendline Seasoned traders agree that the trendline is one of their mostimportant tools No matter what kind of trading program or technique they use the trendline on achart is a must But one of the biggest mistakes made by amateurs and professionals alike isinconsistently drawing or defining the trendline Dr Andrews trendline procedure is simpleconsistent and accurate It works extremely well with the pivot count and with the pitchfork For an uptrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the lowest low up and to thehighest minor low point preceding the highest high The line must not pass through prices inbetween the two low points Extend the line(Attached chart of Brightpoint) For a downtrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the highest high point to thelowest minor high point preceding the lowest low so that it does not pass through prices inbetween the two high points Extend the line (Brightpoint chart) Thats all theres to it Its simple consistent and it works well with other Andrews lines It also

helps eliminate personal bias and haphazard analysis Practice drawing these trendlines on your own charts Send me any questions you might have andthen e-mail a chart of your choosing which shows at least two uptrend and two downtrend linesthat youve drawn_______________________________________________________________________

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Lesson 5Date Dienstag 28 Maumlrz 2000 120224

Hello Gordon here is my chart with trendlinesWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going above the trendline again should I draw a new trendline anddelete the old one Attached is another chart with the P3 to sideways rule I finally found an example for it RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Price failure techniqueDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081412

At 32800 120200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my chart with trendlinesgtWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going abovegtthe trendline again should I draw a new trendline and delete the oldgtone Hi TradersZone Take a look at the chart Im returningI added some lines for you to considerWith the course trendline once its broken a new one should be started Theres a technique thatties in with this coming up soon Meanwhile heres an important technique to work on It deals with those times when prices dontreach the ML Regards Gordon Dr Andrews Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P ofreversaland the ML the probability is that this price reversal will go further thanitdid on its approach toward the ML (Extract of original course material) A price failure very often indicates a sizeable reversal will take placeThepitchforks drawn on the chart of Home Depot illustrate the concept of pricefailure Dr Andrews routinely drew a new pitchfork on his chart after a newsignificant pivot had formed He knew that prices had a high probability ofreaching the new ML before stalling out or reversing If prices reversedbeforereaching the ML thereby forming a new pivot he termed it a price failureTheunderlying idea here is that Dr Andrews fully anticipated his median linewouldact as a price magnet To conclude that a price reversal resulted in a price failure Dr Andrewsused

these primary signalsa subsequent price penetration of a short-termmulti-pivotline andor a return of prices to and penetration of the parallel lineformed atpivot 3 of the pitchfork (The circles on the Home Depot chart denote theparallelline penetration signal To avoid clutter the mpl lines were not drawn) One possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart of ConsecoIncLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me a copy

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject ChartDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081800Attachments image002png

Hi TradersZone Forgot the chart Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Price failure techniqueDate Samstag 1 April 2000 201000

gtOne possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart ofgtConseco IncgtLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me agtcopy Hi Gordon here are my charts with price failures RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Mittwoch 5 April 2000 235624

Hi TradersZone Good price failure examples you sentany comments or questions about it Heres the next partanother old standby Dr Andrews kept handy Regards Gordon In this segment youll learn how to use the Fan line Technique To draw the fan lines youll apply the coursetrendline method which was introduced in an earlier lesson It might be well to emphasize that the practicalapplication of the course trendline method requires practice and experience both of which will serve youwell in this technique Dr Andrews used fan lines as an adjunct to his pitchfork sideways channel andactionreaction methods In the fan line study three trendlines are drawn from the original reversal pivot of the price correction understudy typically a P0 or a P5 Youll notice on the charts included with this study that each fan line is at aflatter angle than its predecessor When the third fan line is broken the rule is that the correction has endedand a new trend is under way Try this technique on some of your own charts and then please send me asample

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Donnerstag 6 April 2000 234315

Hi Gordon No I dont have any specific question about the price failure technique I guess the next likely target after a price failure wouldbe the warning line I have attached two charts with fan linesIs it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the third fan line is broken RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Next segmentDate Freitag 7 April 2000 003312

Hello TradersZone

Tuesday April 06 2000 114315 AM you wrote

TZgt Hi Gordon

TZgt No I dont have any specific question about the price failureTZgt technique I guess the next likely target after a price failureTZgt would be the warning line

TZgt I have attached two charts with fan linesTZgt Is it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the thirdTZgt fan line is broken

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Thats right the warning line is the next price target Additionalwarning lines can be drawn if needed but usually one will do it Ifprices go through the first warning line another can be drawn butmost likely a new pitchfork could be drawn instead which would bepreferable Helps stay current with recently formed pivots

When prices break through the third fan line a buy or sell signal isgiven Not sure what you mean by fourth target fan line Im a littledense today

Your chart work was goodthis is another handy tool for spotting thehigh probability of a price reversal or trend change

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject The Gap TradeDate Freitag 7 April 2000 004858

Hello TradersZone This trading signal doesnt show up very often but past observations have shown that its well worth watching for Dr Andrews placed a lot of emphasis on the importance of price gaps something many traders overlook This is one of his gap uses Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom The Gap Trading Technique Price gaps can be a dilemma for many traders The general rule denoting market strength or weakness after ahigh volume gap often comes up short after the initial reaction is over Many gappers simply run out ofsteam A high volume gap in itself seems to offer precious little evidence that a profitable move is about toget under way Dr Andrews used price gaps somewhat differently than others He counted a gap as 2 pivots Youll see howthat works in the following technique which uses a gap to arrive at a price level for a buy or sell order Using short-term daily price pivots label the pivot immediately preceding the gap as p0 Count the gap as 2pivots labeling it p1 amp p2 After p3 has formed and prices reverse towards a short-term p4 draw a horizontalline 2 price tics or more (individual preference)to the right of p3 Enter the market only if prices reach orpenetrate that line within a few days after reversing from p4 Please look over your own charts to see if you can find places where the gap trade technique could have beenused Send me a sample when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 001925

Hello Gordon this is my chart with a gap trade RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 065538

Hello TradersZone Thursday April 08 2000 121925 PM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt this is my chart with a gap trade TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Good examplethe gap trade technique shines when an issue in at or near a P5 Similar to the one on thechart you sent Heres another trading signal tool Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Dr Andrews used several techniques which helped him determine whether a P5 was near at hand Youllrecall that he observed most price moves ended or had a significant reversal at a P5 This technique uses alternate closing prices after a P4 has been formed As with many of his studies thenumber 5 is used The chart accompanying this segment shows that there were 5 alternate closes to thedownside after P4 was put in Dr Andrews noted that whenever 5 or more alternate closes followed a P4 theprobabilities were high that a P5 was near at hand An added feature to this chart study is the sideways channel Notice how the 2nd target price and the 5thalternate close nearly coincide

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 12 April 2000 200730

Hello Gordon This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 13 April 2000 082418

Monday April 12 2000 80730 AM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hello TradersZone Good chart example of this Andrews toolanother of his very unusual observations that workmore often than not Heres the final part of this lesson Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom In this trendline method Dr Andrews once again used the number 5 as the basis for locating aprobable reversal area He found this technique to be especially useful whenever a clear orobvious pivot count didnt show up onthe price move under study Trendlines are drawn using the course trendline method When the 5th trendline is broken theprobability is high that the trend under study has ended A mini-median line pitchfork andorsliding parallel could be used for pricing a trading order The accompanying chart of Compaq Computer is an example of how the trendline study could beused The pivot count beginning at the October low is difficult to nail down There were severalsmall areas of congestion but no sizeable corrections while prices advanced The count wasunclear By following the price action using the course trendline technique however the traderwould have been alerted to the possibility of a change of trend when the 5th trendline was brokenin early February Try this technique on your own charts When youre ready please send me an example of yourstudy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 19 April 2000 124108

Hello Gordon this is my example with 5 trendlines RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[6] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 20 April 2000 012726

Monday April 19 2000 124108 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt this is my example with 5 trendlines

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Good example of the 5 TL technique Always reminds me of how the fairly simple tools often do a better job than manyof the sophisticated studies out there

That was the last part of lesson 5 Lesson 6 attached is made in one mailing Youll find Dr Andrews trading rules alongwith a wrap-up review which uses several of his rules You might have questions about some of the rules so feel free tosend them as they arise

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Dr Andrews had an abbreviated set of trading rules on several index cards that he carried around with him in his shirtpocket He said every trading day turned up something new on his charts and by having his rules in his pocket he wasreminded of the need for a methodical approach to his analysis Quite a comment coming from the man who wrote therule book

In this the final lesson of the course Dr Andrews original trading rules and observations are presented Lets work witha few of them at this point

Using charts of issues you follow please send me an example that illustrates your interpretation of each of the followingrules

Rule 4 Anticipating major Ps

Rule 7 Penetration rule

Rule 8 Price failure rule

Rule 11 1-ML23 AR Centerline

Rule 12 Sliding Parallel rule

Rule 15 Mini-median line parallel to buy or sell

Feel free to include any other course techniques you choose to apply but please include examples of the above as aminimum Use more than one technique on a chart if your analysis supports it Send as many charts as you like alongwith your questionscomments

Lesson 6 - Dr Andrews Trading Rules

This lesson covers course rules and significant observations as taught by Dr Andrews in his original trading course Therules are those that he used in his own trading and are provided to serve as a checklist for use with the course tradingmethods youve learned

Rule 1 Where prices are always headed Rule You course members are among the fortunate few to be able to draw astraight line and know that prices are headed toward that ML Very few investors have ever applied this ML principle ofstatistics to price fluctuations and weve never seen this in any books on investment You are among the very few who

know that prices are always headed toward the newest ML

Rule 2 The Rule of coming opposites applies all through life In the bible we find Blessed at they that mourn for theyshall be comforted As investors we know that any losses can be recovered by using course methods

Rule 3 Turn your mind about or Rethink for all good is at hand We should mentally prepare ourselves for thecoming reversal in prices and other affairs Heres one way for example that you course members who know the MLrules can use When prices are skyrocketing upward we do this preparation by thinking If prices pivoted here today atthis price Id draw a new ML bisecting the distance between todays price and the price from which the rise started Andwe know now that if this is a Major Pivot prices will fall rapidly to this new ML Profits from such drops are big and quick

Rule 4 Rule for anticipating major Ps If during congestion or after a rally or decline you can count four previous Psthe fifth one is highly probable to be the one from which a new trend starts

Rule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can make a quick big profit is to watch for the EPformations

Rule 6 The other reversal rule is that prices tend to reverse at or near any ML as well as at any extension of each MLAnd also at any MLH or extensions of MLH

Rule 7 The Penetration Rule is that whenever prices gap past or plunge through any ML there is a high probability thatthey will quickly return to it temporarily and then resume the trend they had before they gapped or plunged through

Rule 8 Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P of reversal and the MLthe probability is that this price reversal will go further than it did on its approach toward the ML

Rule 9 The price failure rule is negated when the next price trend is also a failure in reaching the ML This is almostinvariably a signal of a big fast move in the direction indicated by this last space Rule 10 When alternate median lines of comparable length slope in the same direction the trend is firm and rapidprice changes take place

Rule 11 When 1-ML23 is exactly reached at P4 it can be used as a highly reliable centerline for the AR method

Rule 12 Frequently after crossing a lower MLH prices continue to rise along the MLH Since the crossing of the MLHsignals a further drop is likely use a sliding parallel along the bottom of the most recent crossing If prices drop past thatsliding parallel line a sell signal is generated

Rule 13 MLs between P2 and P3 can start from a nearby or a remote P1 since prices tend to reverse at each of theseMLs Try several such P2-P3 MLs to discover the best fit

Rule 14 The distance of each MLH from its ML is the distance of the next warning line Use these warning lineswhenever a SH has signalled a buy or sell

Rule 15 Use the MMLH as a buy or sell signal when you expect a reversal because of a P5 Also when prices are at aWL ML extension line or where course lines converge or intersect

Rule 16 Converging lines that meet prices have shown the highest probability of a trend reversal

Rule 17 Two to four days is usually the maximum between P2 and P3 for a MML P1 can be a day or so back from P2and 3

Rule 18 The most reliable ActionReaction centerlines seem to be MPL 2P line 2 Gap line peak to low or low to peak

Rule 19 When prices pass through R lines look for a pull back and then a continuing move in the direction of the passthrough

Rule 20 Use gaps as Action lines from the centerline

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 003755

Hello Gordonhere is my example for Rule 4 And I have a question What are EP formations gtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 021242

Tuesday May 04 2000 123755 PM you wrote TZgt Hello GordonTZgt here is my example for Rule 4 TZgt And I have a question What are EP formations gtgtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegtgta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hi TradersZone Good use of the warning linesalso the EP material is part of lesson 4 Rather than go backthrough the files to see when (or if) it was sent Im sending it along with this reply Glad youbrought it up Best RegardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Tuesday May 04 2000208 PM Dr Andrews used a fairly common price chart formation that he found useful at probable P5market tops and bottoms The formation generally called a wedge or pennant by chartists isreferred to in Dr Andrews trading course as the Expanding Pivot (EP) One of the few chartformations used in the course he regarded it as among the most dependable indications that amarket top was forming Closely related to the EP is his Inverted Expanding Pivot (IEP) which henoted could often be observed at market bottoms Both are regarded as intermediate and long-term reversal indicators Dr Andrews found that both formations were most reliable when they occurred after a sharprapid price move coinciding with the formation of a probable P5 He said it wasnt unusual for theformation to take several weeks to complete and that conservative traders could best avoid thewhipsaw associated with congestion patterns by trading only in the direction of the probable price

break out of the EP or IEP formation The attached charts illustrate these formations Please look over your own charts for an example ofthe EP and IEP and send me a copy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 232127

Hello Gordon Thank you for the lesson with the EP material I couldnt find it in any previous emailHere is my example for Rule 7 RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Rule 4Date Samstag 6 Mai 2000 080827

Wednesday May 05 2000 112127 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt Thank you for the lesson with the EP materialTZgt I couldnt find it in any previous emailTZgt Here is my example for Rule 7

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hi TradersZone

Glad you mentioned it earlierexcept for the EP IEP and hissideways channel Dr Andrews didnt have much to say about chartpatterns and formations These are good ones to use though

Your study of the penetration rule was good Later

Best Regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Wednesday May 05 2000801 PM

Page 30: Pitchfork primer

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Lesson 3Date Mittwoch 23 Februar 2000 235958

At 22300 92300 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt2P line 2 Gap line Peak to low line Low to peak line - actually I dont knowgtwhat these lines are Are they discussed in Lesson 3 I believe you didntgtsent me this lesson yetgtAnyway I found two more MPLs on the Novellus Chart and drew them ingt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone My apologiesI sent you an outdated version of the lesson Thanks for letting me know Musthave been my bedtime Heres the correct version Regards Gordon Lesson 3 In one of his course letters Dr Andrews wrote The Law of Physics stated by Newton that Actionand Reaction are equal and opposite was first applied to prices by your Course Directors friendthe late Roger Babson who attributed his earnings of several million dollars to this law In this lesson youll be introduced to the ActionReaction trading method as taught by Dr Andrewsin his trading course The AR method requires a centerline or CL from which to start The CL can be any of thefollowing - MPL Multi-pivot line A line drawn across 3 or more pivots - ML Median line The middle line of the pitchfork - MLH Median line parallel Either parallel line of the pitchfork - 2P line A line drawn across 2 pivots - 2 Gap line A line drawn connecting 2 gaps without touching prices in between - Peak to low line A line drawn connecting the high and low of a price leg

- Low to peak line A line drawn connecting the low and high of a price leg These are the primary lines that Dr Andrews used He stressed that some pencil work and a goodeyeball was needed in order to find the best fitting CL As with most other chart lines somework better than others The task is to find the best fit as he put it You will be shown examples ofeach of the above CLs Determining which of the above listed lines to use as the CL is the first step in the ActionReactionmethod With practice a quick view of the chart under study will be all thats needed to spot themost likely CL Youll be shown later how to experiment with possible combinations in order tofind the centerline that is most in tune with the market under study Well begin with the attached chart Note the CL drawn In this example a MPL (multi-pivot line)was used as the CL A MPL is a straight line that connects three or more consecutive pivotswithout passing through prices The connecting line is then extended Ive circled the three pivotsthat form the MPL on the chart There are several other places on our chart where a MPL CL canbe drawn Please bear in mind that this is just the first step of the process Identification of likelyCLs is all were after here See if you can locate two more then draw them in and send the chartback to me

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Donnerstag 24 Februar 2000 025105

At 22300 92300 PM you wroteI found two more MPLs on the Novellus Chart and drew them ingt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your mpls were correct This next segment shows the purpose of the centerline and how it isused Your payment in full arrived today TradersZone Thank you Regards Gordon Lesson 3 continued Please refer to the attached chart of Novellus The line drawn connecting the 3 circled pivots is amulti-pivot line (MPL) and represents the centerline (CL) well be using in this example Recall inthe previous segment that several types of centerlines are possible The choice is determined byexperimenting with the potential combinations on the chart under study Its best to try to locate acenterline somewhere close to the middle of the price chart in order to have sufficient past andforward data to use with the study This will become clear as you work with the method Once the centerline is drawn the next step is to locate a previous low or high pivot point to use fordrawing an action line Dr Andrews observed that the low pivot points often seem to work bestbut that either could be used In our example a line starting at the previous significant low wasdrawn parallel to the CL It is labeled A-1 (Action line 1) because it represents the first actionline Dr Andrews called it an action line because it was drawn as a result of a previous pivot (pricereversal) that had taken place Next a parallel line was drawn to the right of the CL and labeled R-1 Notice that it is the same distance from the CL as the corresponding A-1 line It is labeled R-1because it represents the first reaction line a line where prices are likely to stop or reverseNotice how prices reacted at the R-1 line in early 98 That serves as an indication that thecenterline chosen for this study should be a good one to use Not all reaction lines cause such aclear reversal as the R1 on this chart but many do Thats why its important to experiment withvarious centerline possibilities in order to find action lines that produce reaction lines which createthe greatest number of pivots or price stall-outs This experimentation is often quite time

consuming but experience has shown that it is time well spent When a centerline is found that isin tune with the price action of the issue under study it can be a highly effective tool for use inlocating probable reversal areas When combined with pitchfork lines the AR method can pinpointpotential reversal areas that are generally not recognized as such by others Dr Andrewstechniques for using the pitchfork and AR lines together are covered in later lessons In coming segments well study other lines that Dr Andrews used for his centerlines In themeantime experiment with the multi-pivot centerline on your own charts Then please send mean example of your work along with any questions you may have

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Freitag 25 Februar 2000 211356

gtIn the meantime experiment with the multi-pivot centerline on your owngtcharts Then please send me an example of your work along with anygtquestions you may have Hello Gordon I was wondering how many ActionReaction lines could be drawn on a chart On my attached chart I found at least 6 parallellines which had a significant meaning for the price RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject AR linesDate Montag 28 Februar 2000 080128

gtHello Gordongt gtI was wondering how many ActionReaction lines could be drawn on agtchart On my attached chart I found at least 6 parallel lines which hadgta significant meaning for the pricegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hi TradersZone Theres no set number of lines that can be drawnactually the more you can find the betterFinding a good centerline is the key And once you find lines that work such as you did anynumber of parallel lines can be drawn You are doing exactly what Dr Andrews didtaking thetime and effort to find the best fitting sets of lines Each chart has them and each chart is differentas Im sure youve found Nice work Heres the next part Regards Gordon Lesson 3 continued One of Dr Andrews favorite techniques dealt with gapsan often times perplexing price event formany traders His observations over the years suggested to him that while gaps show upfrequently on many price charts few traders have a method for including them as an integral partof their chart analysis Thats not surprising since not much has been published about how toapproach the use of gaps in a trading method Dr Andrews however found several ways to putprice gaps to good use An ActionReaction centerline which uses gaps as its basis is one suchmethod Please refer to the attached chart of Cendant Youll see that a centerline was drawn which passedthrough the July gap Note that it also came in contact with several pivots thereby qualifying as agapmulti-pivot centerline It is drawn by starting at the April low pivot and extending a line acrossand through the gap in mid-July It subsequently touches two additional high pivots Dr Andrews counted each gap as two pivots He noted that the more pivots a line touched the

stronger the line tended to be in the future Good reason then for using the July gap as the basisfor an ActionReaction study Our CL is labelled a gap-mpl-CL The May 98 high was used for the Action Line starting point A line was then drawn parallel to theCenterline as per ActionReaction procedure The corresponding Reaction Line was then drawn inIf this particular study had been drawn on Cendants chart right after the July gap was put in thepotential for prices to go all the way down to the Reaction Line might have seemed very slim at thetime Notice however that prices reached the Reaction Line in early September Youll see thishappen time and again as you work with the AR method The core of its effectiveness is a strongCL Please send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts of your choice

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re AR linesDate Montag 28 Februar 2000 155937

gtPlease send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts of yourgtchoice Hello Gordonhere are my examples RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject More on the ARDate Donnerstag 2 Maumlrz 2000 071158

At 22800 35900 PM you wrotegtgtPlease send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts ofgtgtyour choicegt gtHello Gordongthere are my examplesgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone You picked some good examples to use for your AR study Both showed the potential power of thismethod Takes time and lots of chart study sometimes to find the best set of lines but the rewardscan be many Heres something else to look at Regards Gordon The ActionReaction technique requires a strong centerline from which to begin The key todeciding which set of pivots to use for the centerline is found through experimenting with thevarious configurations visible on the chart under study The centerline might be a series of gapspivots an existing median line or any of Dr Andrews lines The task is to search for that centerlinewhich shows the greatest potential for projecting price reversal areas Dr Andrews did that byfinding a likely centerline near the middle of his price chart That allowed him to use any of theprevious pivots for his action lines By experimenting he found reaction lines that did the best jobof pegging reversal areas at data points located forward of the centerline Reaction lines are equal and opposite of the action lines and serve to project price levels at whicha reversal can be expected That is why the task of seeking out the best centerline is so importantDr Andrews reasoned that a series of reaction lines which have pegged price reversals in the pastis likely to continue to be in tune with current and future market price action Having severalprevious pivots to use as anchors for drawing action lines is thus essential The attached chart of Lattice illustrates this concept Please bear in mind that the gapmplcenterline is not the only centerline one could use on this chart You might want to study the chartfor other AR possibilities Try a peak-to-peak CL or a multi-pivot CL Send me your studies along

with any questions

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re More on the ARDate Samstag 4 Maumlrz 2000 002521

gtThe attached chart of Lattice illustrates this conceptgtPlease bear in mind that the gapmpl centerline is not the onlygtcenterline one could use on this chartgtYou might want to study the chart for other AR possibilitiesgtTry a peak-to-peak CL or a multi-pivot CL Send me your studiesgtalong with any questions Hello Gordonhere is my chart RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Peak to peak clDate Sonntag 5 Maumlrz 2000 064107

At 3400 122500 AM you wrotegtHello Gordongthere is my chartgt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Looks like you have the concept down Takes time and a lot of chart work to find the bestcenterline When the reaction lines dont seem to peg reversal areas chances are the centerline isnot the one that is best in tune with the price action of the issue under studyDespite the time required for this method it was one of Dr Andrews stand-bysAR lines could befound on most of his charts Im sending a chart with an example of a peak-to-peak CL Regards Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Peak to peak clDate Sonntag 5 Maumlrz 2000 171232

Hello Gordon I think the peak-to-peak CL on the last chart I sent to you was not really drawn from peak to peakIm sending another example RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next LessonDate Mittwoch 8 Maumlrz 2000 072526

At 3500 51200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtI think the peak-to-peak CL on the last chart I sent to you was notgtreally drawn from peak to peakgtIm sending another examplegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your peak to peak cl example was correctly drawn Thats a fairly simple approach but quite oftenthe peak to peak yields better reaction lines Heres the first part of the next lesson Regards Gordon Youll find times when prices dont quite reach the ML but instead drift alongside or away from itThe Schiff ML was designed to be used in place of the regular ML whenever that happens Suchprice action can be found at any place on a chart but most frequently occurs after a sharp sell-offor run-up of prices Dr Andrews also used the Schiff ML whenever his regular ML sloped at an unusually steep angleHe said it helped smooth out irregular price action such as that caused by unexpected earningsnews crop planting delays or poor growing conditions crop production reports etc Youll findnearly vertical price moves over a short period of time on many charts The Schiff ML method helpsput things back in perspective when that happens Well use the chart of Sterling Bancorp as an example of prices drifting away from the regular MLThat ML is drawn in black Prices didnt quite reach the ML but drifted alongside and eventuallyaway from it The Schiff ML and parallel lines are drawn in red Notice how prices were containedwithin the Schiff pitchfork until they finally broke down at the upper parallel line The procedure for drawing the Schiff ML is the same as for the regular ML except the startingpoint is located midway between the first 2 pivots youll be using The Sterling Bancorp chart

illustrates how this is done Dr Andrews also suggested using the Schiff ML whenever the regular ML method doesnt seem tobe in sync with price action Practice this procedure on your own charts and send a couple examples when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next LessonDate Donnerstag 9 Maumlrz 2000 001143

Hello Gordon in my charting software (Dynamic Trader) the Schiff ML is drawn by finding the midpoint of the line between pivot A and pivot Bmoving this point horizontally to directly above or below (depending on whether A is a low or high pivot) the A pivot anddrawing a line from his point through the midpoint of the BC swingAre there different methods of drawing a Schiff MLI was too lazy to draw Schiff MLs by hand with the method you described so Im sending my examples with the Dynamic TraderSchiff MLs -) RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject SchiffDate Samstag 11 Maumlrz 2000 070226

At 3900 121100 AM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtin my charting software (Dynamic Trader) the Schiff ML is drawn bygtfinding the midpoint of the line between pivot A and pivot B movinggtthis point horizontally to directly above or below (depending ongtwhether A is a low or high pivot) the A pivot and drawing a linegtgtfrom his point through the midpoint of the BC swinggtAre there different methods of drawing a Schiff MLgtI was too lazy to draw Schiff MLs by hand with the method yougtdescribed so Im sending my examples with the Dynamic Trader Schiff MLs -)gt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your program Schiff line procedure is fineits actually what Dr Andrews called a modified schiff ml and is onlyslightly different than the one I sent you initially The one you used is preferred by most course members Im sendingthe modified Schiff lesson and a chart along with this email The chart example shows how to use it with 0-34 pivots Regards Gordon

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Sliding Parallel LineDate Montag 13 Maumlrz 2000 005252

Hello TradersZone Heres one of the tools Dr Andrews used most often when entering exiting or reversing marketpositions Not many people know about this technique Regards Gordon The Sliding Parallel (SH) is drawn whenever prices cross an Andrews line and then move along itFor example if the bottom of a daily price bar range drops through a lower parallel line of apitchfork a new parallel line is then drawn from that low and extended to the right If the nextdays price bar drops through that sliding parallel line a sell signal is generated Whenever price action dictates a sliding parallel the next step is to draw a Warning Line Thewarning line is an additional parallel line that is an image extension of the original pitchforkchannels It serves as a warning that if prices penetrate the sliding parallel the next likely target isthe WL The attached chart of Avis illustrates these procedures Please try these on your own charts andsend me an example

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Sliding Parallel LineDate Dienstag 14 Maumlrz 2000 225737

Hello Gordon this is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning line RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 065606

At 31400 105700 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtthis is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning linegt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone Your chart of circuit city was a good example for this study I may have mentioned it earlier but DrAndrews used this technique on a regular basis The next part of this lesson covers another of hisfavorite tools the mini-median line pitchfork Here it is Regards Gordon The Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry and exit tools Though mostoften drawn using alternate closing prices alternate highs and lows can also be usedin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days is usually the maximumbetween pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or more back from P2 Dr Andrews used Mini-Median Line pitchforks for buy and sell signals whenever he expected areversal Some examples include a probable P5 or when prices are at a Warning Line ML MLHmajor ML extension or a sideways channel price target When prices cross the Mini-Median LineParallel (MMLH) a sliding parallel (SH) is used for order entry

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 231537

gtThe Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry andgtexit tools Though most often drawn using alternate closing pricesgtalternate highs and lows can also be usedgtin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days isgtusually the maximum between pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or moregtback from P2

Hello Gordon

wouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timingCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available whenDr Andrews was alive

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject intraday chartsDate Samstag 18 Maumlrz 2000 012400

At 31600 111500 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongtgtwouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsgtinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timinggtCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available when DrgtAndrews was alivegtgtRegardsgtTradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Youre absolutely correctintraday charts were not available when DrAndrews was a trader

Im reading between the lines here but if you plan to day-trade using the course techniques ie thepitchfork then I agree that the regular pitchfork would be more useful on intraday charts Otherwisewhipsaw would be a significant problem Please get back to me if I didnt address your questionbecause this is a very important technique The mini-median line pitchfork and sliding parallel showedup on most of Dr Andrews charts

Regards

Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re intraday chartsDate Dienstag 21 Maumlrz 2000 220322

Hello Gordon

You are right Im planning to daytrade SampP futures using the course techniques among other things

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 003408

Hi TradersZone Here are a couple Andrews techniques that will help anticipate the breakout direction of asideways channelThey work often enough to warrant keep handy Regards Gordon In an earlier lesson you were introduced to Dr Andrews sideways count You saw how frequentlythe sideways count method provided high probability price objectives after the breakout from theestablished channel took place In this segment of lesson 4 youll be shown 2 congestion area techniques that can help youdetermine the probable sideways channel price breakout direction Both rely on the use of pivots The first uses the pivot points that are circled on a sideways channel Dr Andrews observed thatwhenever a sideways channel results in at least 5 circle contacts the eventual price breakoutwould very often be in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle If circle 5 is at thetop of the channel for example the eventual price breakout would likely be to the upside If circle5 is at the bottom of the channel look for a downside breakout Dr Andrews noted that thistechnique can be subject to false breakouts but that such breakouts are usually followed shortlyafter with a confirmed breakout in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle Heemphasized that this study is best considered as a rule of thumb observation He viewed it as asupporting indicator for use with a short-term pitchfork as prices approached a channel line There are 2 charts attached that show how this works

The second technique in this part of lesson 4 deals with a sideways channelthat is building shortly after a P3 has been formed Dr Andrews noted thatwhenever that happened the probabilities were high that prices wouldbreakout in the same direction they were moving prior to the formation ofthe sideways channel The attached P3 to sideways example chart shows thisprocedure

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 205235

Hello Gordon here is my example for the 5 circle sideways count RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Lesson 5Date Montag 27 Maumlrz 2000 060731

At 32400 85200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my example for the 5 circle sideways countgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt gt Hi TradersZone Good example of the 5th circle tendency to predict the direction of a sideways breakout Any luckfinding a chart showing the P3 to sideways rule Im sending the first part of the next lesson This trendline method is a useful tool with all of DrAndrews course lines He used it all the time but especially when looking for confirmation of othercourse method trading signals Regards Gordon The Course Trendline__________________________________________________________ Next well discuss the trendline Seasoned traders agree that the trendline is one of their mostimportant tools No matter what kind of trading program or technique they use the trendline on achart is a must But one of the biggest mistakes made by amateurs and professionals alike isinconsistently drawing or defining the trendline Dr Andrews trendline procedure is simpleconsistent and accurate It works extremely well with the pivot count and with the pitchfork For an uptrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the lowest low up and to thehighest minor low point preceding the highest high The line must not pass through prices inbetween the two low points Extend the line(Attached chart of Brightpoint) For a downtrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the highest high point to thelowest minor high point preceding the lowest low so that it does not pass through prices inbetween the two high points Extend the line (Brightpoint chart) Thats all theres to it Its simple consistent and it works well with other Andrews lines It also

helps eliminate personal bias and haphazard analysis Practice drawing these trendlines on your own charts Send me any questions you might have andthen e-mail a chart of your choosing which shows at least two uptrend and two downtrend linesthat youve drawn_______________________________________________________________________

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Lesson 5Date Dienstag 28 Maumlrz 2000 120224

Hello Gordon here is my chart with trendlinesWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going above the trendline again should I draw a new trendline anddelete the old one Attached is another chart with the P3 to sideways rule I finally found an example for it RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Price failure techniqueDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081412

At 32800 120200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my chart with trendlinesgtWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going abovegtthe trendline again should I draw a new trendline and delete the oldgtone Hi TradersZone Take a look at the chart Im returningI added some lines for you to considerWith the course trendline once its broken a new one should be started Theres a technique thatties in with this coming up soon Meanwhile heres an important technique to work on It deals with those times when prices dontreach the ML Regards Gordon Dr Andrews Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P ofreversaland the ML the probability is that this price reversal will go further thanitdid on its approach toward the ML (Extract of original course material) A price failure very often indicates a sizeable reversal will take placeThepitchforks drawn on the chart of Home Depot illustrate the concept of pricefailure Dr Andrews routinely drew a new pitchfork on his chart after a newsignificant pivot had formed He knew that prices had a high probability ofreaching the new ML before stalling out or reversing If prices reversedbeforereaching the ML thereby forming a new pivot he termed it a price failureTheunderlying idea here is that Dr Andrews fully anticipated his median linewouldact as a price magnet To conclude that a price reversal resulted in a price failure Dr Andrewsused

these primary signalsa subsequent price penetration of a short-termmulti-pivotline andor a return of prices to and penetration of the parallel lineformed atpivot 3 of the pitchfork (The circles on the Home Depot chart denote theparallelline penetration signal To avoid clutter the mpl lines were not drawn) One possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart of ConsecoIncLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me a copy

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject ChartDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081800Attachments image002png

Hi TradersZone Forgot the chart Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Price failure techniqueDate Samstag 1 April 2000 201000

gtOne possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart ofgtConseco IncgtLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me agtcopy Hi Gordon here are my charts with price failures RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Mittwoch 5 April 2000 235624

Hi TradersZone Good price failure examples you sentany comments or questions about it Heres the next partanother old standby Dr Andrews kept handy Regards Gordon In this segment youll learn how to use the Fan line Technique To draw the fan lines youll apply the coursetrendline method which was introduced in an earlier lesson It might be well to emphasize that the practicalapplication of the course trendline method requires practice and experience both of which will serve youwell in this technique Dr Andrews used fan lines as an adjunct to his pitchfork sideways channel andactionreaction methods In the fan line study three trendlines are drawn from the original reversal pivot of the price correction understudy typically a P0 or a P5 Youll notice on the charts included with this study that each fan line is at aflatter angle than its predecessor When the third fan line is broken the rule is that the correction has endedand a new trend is under way Try this technique on some of your own charts and then please send me asample

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Donnerstag 6 April 2000 234315

Hi Gordon No I dont have any specific question about the price failure technique I guess the next likely target after a price failure wouldbe the warning line I have attached two charts with fan linesIs it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the third fan line is broken RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Next segmentDate Freitag 7 April 2000 003312

Hello TradersZone

Tuesday April 06 2000 114315 AM you wrote

TZgt Hi Gordon

TZgt No I dont have any specific question about the price failureTZgt technique I guess the next likely target after a price failureTZgt would be the warning line

TZgt I have attached two charts with fan linesTZgt Is it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the thirdTZgt fan line is broken

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Thats right the warning line is the next price target Additionalwarning lines can be drawn if needed but usually one will do it Ifprices go through the first warning line another can be drawn butmost likely a new pitchfork could be drawn instead which would bepreferable Helps stay current with recently formed pivots

When prices break through the third fan line a buy or sell signal isgiven Not sure what you mean by fourth target fan line Im a littledense today

Your chart work was goodthis is another handy tool for spotting thehigh probability of a price reversal or trend change

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject The Gap TradeDate Freitag 7 April 2000 004858

Hello TradersZone This trading signal doesnt show up very often but past observations have shown that its well worth watching for Dr Andrews placed a lot of emphasis on the importance of price gaps something many traders overlook This is one of his gap uses Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom The Gap Trading Technique Price gaps can be a dilemma for many traders The general rule denoting market strength or weakness after ahigh volume gap often comes up short after the initial reaction is over Many gappers simply run out ofsteam A high volume gap in itself seems to offer precious little evidence that a profitable move is about toget under way Dr Andrews used price gaps somewhat differently than others He counted a gap as 2 pivots Youll see howthat works in the following technique which uses a gap to arrive at a price level for a buy or sell order Using short-term daily price pivots label the pivot immediately preceding the gap as p0 Count the gap as 2pivots labeling it p1 amp p2 After p3 has formed and prices reverse towards a short-term p4 draw a horizontalline 2 price tics or more (individual preference)to the right of p3 Enter the market only if prices reach orpenetrate that line within a few days after reversing from p4 Please look over your own charts to see if you can find places where the gap trade technique could have beenused Send me a sample when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 001925

Hello Gordon this is my chart with a gap trade RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 065538

Hello TradersZone Thursday April 08 2000 121925 PM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt this is my chart with a gap trade TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Good examplethe gap trade technique shines when an issue in at or near a P5 Similar to the one on thechart you sent Heres another trading signal tool Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Dr Andrews used several techniques which helped him determine whether a P5 was near at hand Youllrecall that he observed most price moves ended or had a significant reversal at a P5 This technique uses alternate closing prices after a P4 has been formed As with many of his studies thenumber 5 is used The chart accompanying this segment shows that there were 5 alternate closes to thedownside after P4 was put in Dr Andrews noted that whenever 5 or more alternate closes followed a P4 theprobabilities were high that a P5 was near at hand An added feature to this chart study is the sideways channel Notice how the 2nd target price and the 5thalternate close nearly coincide

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 12 April 2000 200730

Hello Gordon This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 13 April 2000 082418

Monday April 12 2000 80730 AM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hello TradersZone Good chart example of this Andrews toolanother of his very unusual observations that workmore often than not Heres the final part of this lesson Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom In this trendline method Dr Andrews once again used the number 5 as the basis for locating aprobable reversal area He found this technique to be especially useful whenever a clear orobvious pivot count didnt show up onthe price move under study Trendlines are drawn using the course trendline method When the 5th trendline is broken theprobability is high that the trend under study has ended A mini-median line pitchfork andorsliding parallel could be used for pricing a trading order The accompanying chart of Compaq Computer is an example of how the trendline study could beused The pivot count beginning at the October low is difficult to nail down There were severalsmall areas of congestion but no sizeable corrections while prices advanced The count wasunclear By following the price action using the course trendline technique however the traderwould have been alerted to the possibility of a change of trend when the 5th trendline was brokenin early February Try this technique on your own charts When youre ready please send me an example of yourstudy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 19 April 2000 124108

Hello Gordon this is my example with 5 trendlines RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[6] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 20 April 2000 012726

Monday April 19 2000 124108 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt this is my example with 5 trendlines

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Good example of the 5 TL technique Always reminds me of how the fairly simple tools often do a better job than manyof the sophisticated studies out there

That was the last part of lesson 5 Lesson 6 attached is made in one mailing Youll find Dr Andrews trading rules alongwith a wrap-up review which uses several of his rules You might have questions about some of the rules so feel free tosend them as they arise

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Dr Andrews had an abbreviated set of trading rules on several index cards that he carried around with him in his shirtpocket He said every trading day turned up something new on his charts and by having his rules in his pocket he wasreminded of the need for a methodical approach to his analysis Quite a comment coming from the man who wrote therule book

In this the final lesson of the course Dr Andrews original trading rules and observations are presented Lets work witha few of them at this point

Using charts of issues you follow please send me an example that illustrates your interpretation of each of the followingrules

Rule 4 Anticipating major Ps

Rule 7 Penetration rule

Rule 8 Price failure rule

Rule 11 1-ML23 AR Centerline

Rule 12 Sliding Parallel rule

Rule 15 Mini-median line parallel to buy or sell

Feel free to include any other course techniques you choose to apply but please include examples of the above as aminimum Use more than one technique on a chart if your analysis supports it Send as many charts as you like alongwith your questionscomments

Lesson 6 - Dr Andrews Trading Rules

This lesson covers course rules and significant observations as taught by Dr Andrews in his original trading course Therules are those that he used in his own trading and are provided to serve as a checklist for use with the course tradingmethods youve learned

Rule 1 Where prices are always headed Rule You course members are among the fortunate few to be able to draw astraight line and know that prices are headed toward that ML Very few investors have ever applied this ML principle ofstatistics to price fluctuations and weve never seen this in any books on investment You are among the very few who

know that prices are always headed toward the newest ML

Rule 2 The Rule of coming opposites applies all through life In the bible we find Blessed at they that mourn for theyshall be comforted As investors we know that any losses can be recovered by using course methods

Rule 3 Turn your mind about or Rethink for all good is at hand We should mentally prepare ourselves for thecoming reversal in prices and other affairs Heres one way for example that you course members who know the MLrules can use When prices are skyrocketing upward we do this preparation by thinking If prices pivoted here today atthis price Id draw a new ML bisecting the distance between todays price and the price from which the rise started Andwe know now that if this is a Major Pivot prices will fall rapidly to this new ML Profits from such drops are big and quick

Rule 4 Rule for anticipating major Ps If during congestion or after a rally or decline you can count four previous Psthe fifth one is highly probable to be the one from which a new trend starts

Rule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can make a quick big profit is to watch for the EPformations

Rule 6 The other reversal rule is that prices tend to reverse at or near any ML as well as at any extension of each MLAnd also at any MLH or extensions of MLH

Rule 7 The Penetration Rule is that whenever prices gap past or plunge through any ML there is a high probability thatthey will quickly return to it temporarily and then resume the trend they had before they gapped or plunged through

Rule 8 Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P of reversal and the MLthe probability is that this price reversal will go further than it did on its approach toward the ML

Rule 9 The price failure rule is negated when the next price trend is also a failure in reaching the ML This is almostinvariably a signal of a big fast move in the direction indicated by this last space Rule 10 When alternate median lines of comparable length slope in the same direction the trend is firm and rapidprice changes take place

Rule 11 When 1-ML23 is exactly reached at P4 it can be used as a highly reliable centerline for the AR method

Rule 12 Frequently after crossing a lower MLH prices continue to rise along the MLH Since the crossing of the MLHsignals a further drop is likely use a sliding parallel along the bottom of the most recent crossing If prices drop past thatsliding parallel line a sell signal is generated

Rule 13 MLs between P2 and P3 can start from a nearby or a remote P1 since prices tend to reverse at each of theseMLs Try several such P2-P3 MLs to discover the best fit

Rule 14 The distance of each MLH from its ML is the distance of the next warning line Use these warning lineswhenever a SH has signalled a buy or sell

Rule 15 Use the MMLH as a buy or sell signal when you expect a reversal because of a P5 Also when prices are at aWL ML extension line or where course lines converge or intersect

Rule 16 Converging lines that meet prices have shown the highest probability of a trend reversal

Rule 17 Two to four days is usually the maximum between P2 and P3 for a MML P1 can be a day or so back from P2and 3

Rule 18 The most reliable ActionReaction centerlines seem to be MPL 2P line 2 Gap line peak to low or low to peak

Rule 19 When prices pass through R lines look for a pull back and then a continuing move in the direction of the passthrough

Rule 20 Use gaps as Action lines from the centerline

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 003755

Hello Gordonhere is my example for Rule 4 And I have a question What are EP formations gtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 021242

Tuesday May 04 2000 123755 PM you wrote TZgt Hello GordonTZgt here is my example for Rule 4 TZgt And I have a question What are EP formations gtgtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegtgta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hi TradersZone Good use of the warning linesalso the EP material is part of lesson 4 Rather than go backthrough the files to see when (or if) it was sent Im sending it along with this reply Glad youbrought it up Best RegardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Tuesday May 04 2000208 PM Dr Andrews used a fairly common price chart formation that he found useful at probable P5market tops and bottoms The formation generally called a wedge or pennant by chartists isreferred to in Dr Andrews trading course as the Expanding Pivot (EP) One of the few chartformations used in the course he regarded it as among the most dependable indications that amarket top was forming Closely related to the EP is his Inverted Expanding Pivot (IEP) which henoted could often be observed at market bottoms Both are regarded as intermediate and long-term reversal indicators Dr Andrews found that both formations were most reliable when they occurred after a sharprapid price move coinciding with the formation of a probable P5 He said it wasnt unusual for theformation to take several weeks to complete and that conservative traders could best avoid thewhipsaw associated with congestion patterns by trading only in the direction of the probable price

break out of the EP or IEP formation The attached charts illustrate these formations Please look over your own charts for an example ofthe EP and IEP and send me a copy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 232127

Hello Gordon Thank you for the lesson with the EP material I couldnt find it in any previous emailHere is my example for Rule 7 RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Rule 4Date Samstag 6 Mai 2000 080827

Wednesday May 05 2000 112127 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt Thank you for the lesson with the EP materialTZgt I couldnt find it in any previous emailTZgt Here is my example for Rule 7

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hi TradersZone

Glad you mentioned it earlierexcept for the EP IEP and hissideways channel Dr Andrews didnt have much to say about chartpatterns and formations These are good ones to use though

Your study of the penetration rule was good Later

Best Regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Wednesday May 05 2000801 PM

Page 31: Pitchfork primer

- Low to peak line A line drawn connecting the low and high of a price leg These are the primary lines that Dr Andrews used He stressed that some pencil work and a goodeyeball was needed in order to find the best fitting CL As with most other chart lines somework better than others The task is to find the best fit as he put it You will be shown examples ofeach of the above CLs Determining which of the above listed lines to use as the CL is the first step in the ActionReactionmethod With practice a quick view of the chart under study will be all thats needed to spot themost likely CL Youll be shown later how to experiment with possible combinations in order tofind the centerline that is most in tune with the market under study Well begin with the attached chart Note the CL drawn In this example a MPL (multi-pivot line)was used as the CL A MPL is a straight line that connects three or more consecutive pivotswithout passing through prices The connecting line is then extended Ive circled the three pivotsthat form the MPL on the chart There are several other places on our chart where a MPL CL canbe drawn Please bear in mind that this is just the first step of the process Identification of likelyCLs is all were after here See if you can locate two more then draw them in and send the chartback to me

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Donnerstag 24 Februar 2000 025105

At 22300 92300 PM you wroteI found two more MPLs on the Novellus Chart and drew them ingt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your mpls were correct This next segment shows the purpose of the centerline and how it isused Your payment in full arrived today TradersZone Thank you Regards Gordon Lesson 3 continued Please refer to the attached chart of Novellus The line drawn connecting the 3 circled pivots is amulti-pivot line (MPL) and represents the centerline (CL) well be using in this example Recall inthe previous segment that several types of centerlines are possible The choice is determined byexperimenting with the potential combinations on the chart under study Its best to try to locate acenterline somewhere close to the middle of the price chart in order to have sufficient past andforward data to use with the study This will become clear as you work with the method Once the centerline is drawn the next step is to locate a previous low or high pivot point to use fordrawing an action line Dr Andrews observed that the low pivot points often seem to work bestbut that either could be used In our example a line starting at the previous significant low wasdrawn parallel to the CL It is labeled A-1 (Action line 1) because it represents the first actionline Dr Andrews called it an action line because it was drawn as a result of a previous pivot (pricereversal) that had taken place Next a parallel line was drawn to the right of the CL and labeled R-1 Notice that it is the same distance from the CL as the corresponding A-1 line It is labeled R-1because it represents the first reaction line a line where prices are likely to stop or reverseNotice how prices reacted at the R-1 line in early 98 That serves as an indication that thecenterline chosen for this study should be a good one to use Not all reaction lines cause such aclear reversal as the R1 on this chart but many do Thats why its important to experiment withvarious centerline possibilities in order to find action lines that produce reaction lines which createthe greatest number of pivots or price stall-outs This experimentation is often quite time

consuming but experience has shown that it is time well spent When a centerline is found that isin tune with the price action of the issue under study it can be a highly effective tool for use inlocating probable reversal areas When combined with pitchfork lines the AR method can pinpointpotential reversal areas that are generally not recognized as such by others Dr Andrewstechniques for using the pitchfork and AR lines together are covered in later lessons In coming segments well study other lines that Dr Andrews used for his centerlines In themeantime experiment with the multi-pivot centerline on your own charts Then please send mean example of your work along with any questions you may have

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Freitag 25 Februar 2000 211356

gtIn the meantime experiment with the multi-pivot centerline on your owngtcharts Then please send me an example of your work along with anygtquestions you may have Hello Gordon I was wondering how many ActionReaction lines could be drawn on a chart On my attached chart I found at least 6 parallellines which had a significant meaning for the price RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject AR linesDate Montag 28 Februar 2000 080128

gtHello Gordongt gtI was wondering how many ActionReaction lines could be drawn on agtchart On my attached chart I found at least 6 parallel lines which hadgta significant meaning for the pricegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hi TradersZone Theres no set number of lines that can be drawnactually the more you can find the betterFinding a good centerline is the key And once you find lines that work such as you did anynumber of parallel lines can be drawn You are doing exactly what Dr Andrews didtaking thetime and effort to find the best fitting sets of lines Each chart has them and each chart is differentas Im sure youve found Nice work Heres the next part Regards Gordon Lesson 3 continued One of Dr Andrews favorite techniques dealt with gapsan often times perplexing price event formany traders His observations over the years suggested to him that while gaps show upfrequently on many price charts few traders have a method for including them as an integral partof their chart analysis Thats not surprising since not much has been published about how toapproach the use of gaps in a trading method Dr Andrews however found several ways to putprice gaps to good use An ActionReaction centerline which uses gaps as its basis is one suchmethod Please refer to the attached chart of Cendant Youll see that a centerline was drawn which passedthrough the July gap Note that it also came in contact with several pivots thereby qualifying as agapmulti-pivot centerline It is drawn by starting at the April low pivot and extending a line acrossand through the gap in mid-July It subsequently touches two additional high pivots Dr Andrews counted each gap as two pivots He noted that the more pivots a line touched the

stronger the line tended to be in the future Good reason then for using the July gap as the basisfor an ActionReaction study Our CL is labelled a gap-mpl-CL The May 98 high was used for the Action Line starting point A line was then drawn parallel to theCenterline as per ActionReaction procedure The corresponding Reaction Line was then drawn inIf this particular study had been drawn on Cendants chart right after the July gap was put in thepotential for prices to go all the way down to the Reaction Line might have seemed very slim at thetime Notice however that prices reached the Reaction Line in early September Youll see thishappen time and again as you work with the AR method The core of its effectiveness is a strongCL Please send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts of your choice

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re AR linesDate Montag 28 Februar 2000 155937

gtPlease send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts of yourgtchoice Hello Gordonhere are my examples RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject More on the ARDate Donnerstag 2 Maumlrz 2000 071158

At 22800 35900 PM you wrotegtgtPlease send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts ofgtgtyour choicegt gtHello Gordongthere are my examplesgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone You picked some good examples to use for your AR study Both showed the potential power of thismethod Takes time and lots of chart study sometimes to find the best set of lines but the rewardscan be many Heres something else to look at Regards Gordon The ActionReaction technique requires a strong centerline from which to begin The key todeciding which set of pivots to use for the centerline is found through experimenting with thevarious configurations visible on the chart under study The centerline might be a series of gapspivots an existing median line or any of Dr Andrews lines The task is to search for that centerlinewhich shows the greatest potential for projecting price reversal areas Dr Andrews did that byfinding a likely centerline near the middle of his price chart That allowed him to use any of theprevious pivots for his action lines By experimenting he found reaction lines that did the best jobof pegging reversal areas at data points located forward of the centerline Reaction lines are equal and opposite of the action lines and serve to project price levels at whicha reversal can be expected That is why the task of seeking out the best centerline is so importantDr Andrews reasoned that a series of reaction lines which have pegged price reversals in the pastis likely to continue to be in tune with current and future market price action Having severalprevious pivots to use as anchors for drawing action lines is thus essential The attached chart of Lattice illustrates this concept Please bear in mind that the gapmplcenterline is not the only centerline one could use on this chart You might want to study the chartfor other AR possibilities Try a peak-to-peak CL or a multi-pivot CL Send me your studies along

with any questions

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re More on the ARDate Samstag 4 Maumlrz 2000 002521

gtThe attached chart of Lattice illustrates this conceptgtPlease bear in mind that the gapmpl centerline is not the onlygtcenterline one could use on this chartgtYou might want to study the chart for other AR possibilitiesgtTry a peak-to-peak CL or a multi-pivot CL Send me your studiesgtalong with any questions Hello Gordonhere is my chart RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Peak to peak clDate Sonntag 5 Maumlrz 2000 064107

At 3400 122500 AM you wrotegtHello Gordongthere is my chartgt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Looks like you have the concept down Takes time and a lot of chart work to find the bestcenterline When the reaction lines dont seem to peg reversal areas chances are the centerline isnot the one that is best in tune with the price action of the issue under studyDespite the time required for this method it was one of Dr Andrews stand-bysAR lines could befound on most of his charts Im sending a chart with an example of a peak-to-peak CL Regards Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Peak to peak clDate Sonntag 5 Maumlrz 2000 171232

Hello Gordon I think the peak-to-peak CL on the last chart I sent to you was not really drawn from peak to peakIm sending another example RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next LessonDate Mittwoch 8 Maumlrz 2000 072526

At 3500 51200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtI think the peak-to-peak CL on the last chart I sent to you was notgtreally drawn from peak to peakgtIm sending another examplegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your peak to peak cl example was correctly drawn Thats a fairly simple approach but quite oftenthe peak to peak yields better reaction lines Heres the first part of the next lesson Regards Gordon Youll find times when prices dont quite reach the ML but instead drift alongside or away from itThe Schiff ML was designed to be used in place of the regular ML whenever that happens Suchprice action can be found at any place on a chart but most frequently occurs after a sharp sell-offor run-up of prices Dr Andrews also used the Schiff ML whenever his regular ML sloped at an unusually steep angleHe said it helped smooth out irregular price action such as that caused by unexpected earningsnews crop planting delays or poor growing conditions crop production reports etc Youll findnearly vertical price moves over a short period of time on many charts The Schiff ML method helpsput things back in perspective when that happens Well use the chart of Sterling Bancorp as an example of prices drifting away from the regular MLThat ML is drawn in black Prices didnt quite reach the ML but drifted alongside and eventuallyaway from it The Schiff ML and parallel lines are drawn in red Notice how prices were containedwithin the Schiff pitchfork until they finally broke down at the upper parallel line The procedure for drawing the Schiff ML is the same as for the regular ML except the startingpoint is located midway between the first 2 pivots youll be using The Sterling Bancorp chart

illustrates how this is done Dr Andrews also suggested using the Schiff ML whenever the regular ML method doesnt seem tobe in sync with price action Practice this procedure on your own charts and send a couple examples when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next LessonDate Donnerstag 9 Maumlrz 2000 001143

Hello Gordon in my charting software (Dynamic Trader) the Schiff ML is drawn by finding the midpoint of the line between pivot A and pivot Bmoving this point horizontally to directly above or below (depending on whether A is a low or high pivot) the A pivot anddrawing a line from his point through the midpoint of the BC swingAre there different methods of drawing a Schiff MLI was too lazy to draw Schiff MLs by hand with the method you described so Im sending my examples with the Dynamic TraderSchiff MLs -) RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject SchiffDate Samstag 11 Maumlrz 2000 070226

At 3900 121100 AM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtin my charting software (Dynamic Trader) the Schiff ML is drawn bygtfinding the midpoint of the line between pivot A and pivot B movinggtthis point horizontally to directly above or below (depending ongtwhether A is a low or high pivot) the A pivot and drawing a linegtgtfrom his point through the midpoint of the BC swinggtAre there different methods of drawing a Schiff MLgtI was too lazy to draw Schiff MLs by hand with the method yougtdescribed so Im sending my examples with the Dynamic Trader Schiff MLs -)gt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your program Schiff line procedure is fineits actually what Dr Andrews called a modified schiff ml and is onlyslightly different than the one I sent you initially The one you used is preferred by most course members Im sendingthe modified Schiff lesson and a chart along with this email The chart example shows how to use it with 0-34 pivots Regards Gordon

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Sliding Parallel LineDate Montag 13 Maumlrz 2000 005252

Hello TradersZone Heres one of the tools Dr Andrews used most often when entering exiting or reversing marketpositions Not many people know about this technique Regards Gordon The Sliding Parallel (SH) is drawn whenever prices cross an Andrews line and then move along itFor example if the bottom of a daily price bar range drops through a lower parallel line of apitchfork a new parallel line is then drawn from that low and extended to the right If the nextdays price bar drops through that sliding parallel line a sell signal is generated Whenever price action dictates a sliding parallel the next step is to draw a Warning Line Thewarning line is an additional parallel line that is an image extension of the original pitchforkchannels It serves as a warning that if prices penetrate the sliding parallel the next likely target isthe WL The attached chart of Avis illustrates these procedures Please try these on your own charts andsend me an example

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Sliding Parallel LineDate Dienstag 14 Maumlrz 2000 225737

Hello Gordon this is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning line RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 065606

At 31400 105700 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtthis is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning linegt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone Your chart of circuit city was a good example for this study I may have mentioned it earlier but DrAndrews used this technique on a regular basis The next part of this lesson covers another of hisfavorite tools the mini-median line pitchfork Here it is Regards Gordon The Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry and exit tools Though mostoften drawn using alternate closing prices alternate highs and lows can also be usedin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days is usually the maximumbetween pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or more back from P2 Dr Andrews used Mini-Median Line pitchforks for buy and sell signals whenever he expected areversal Some examples include a probable P5 or when prices are at a Warning Line ML MLHmajor ML extension or a sideways channel price target When prices cross the Mini-Median LineParallel (MMLH) a sliding parallel (SH) is used for order entry

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 231537

gtThe Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry andgtexit tools Though most often drawn using alternate closing pricesgtalternate highs and lows can also be usedgtin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days isgtusually the maximum between pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or moregtback from P2

Hello Gordon

wouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timingCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available whenDr Andrews was alive

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject intraday chartsDate Samstag 18 Maumlrz 2000 012400

At 31600 111500 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongtgtwouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsgtinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timinggtCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available when DrgtAndrews was alivegtgtRegardsgtTradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Youre absolutely correctintraday charts were not available when DrAndrews was a trader

Im reading between the lines here but if you plan to day-trade using the course techniques ie thepitchfork then I agree that the regular pitchfork would be more useful on intraday charts Otherwisewhipsaw would be a significant problem Please get back to me if I didnt address your questionbecause this is a very important technique The mini-median line pitchfork and sliding parallel showedup on most of Dr Andrews charts

Regards

Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re intraday chartsDate Dienstag 21 Maumlrz 2000 220322

Hello Gordon

You are right Im planning to daytrade SampP futures using the course techniques among other things

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 003408

Hi TradersZone Here are a couple Andrews techniques that will help anticipate the breakout direction of asideways channelThey work often enough to warrant keep handy Regards Gordon In an earlier lesson you were introduced to Dr Andrews sideways count You saw how frequentlythe sideways count method provided high probability price objectives after the breakout from theestablished channel took place In this segment of lesson 4 youll be shown 2 congestion area techniques that can help youdetermine the probable sideways channel price breakout direction Both rely on the use of pivots The first uses the pivot points that are circled on a sideways channel Dr Andrews observed thatwhenever a sideways channel results in at least 5 circle contacts the eventual price breakoutwould very often be in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle If circle 5 is at thetop of the channel for example the eventual price breakout would likely be to the upside If circle5 is at the bottom of the channel look for a downside breakout Dr Andrews noted that thistechnique can be subject to false breakouts but that such breakouts are usually followed shortlyafter with a confirmed breakout in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle Heemphasized that this study is best considered as a rule of thumb observation He viewed it as asupporting indicator for use with a short-term pitchfork as prices approached a channel line There are 2 charts attached that show how this works

The second technique in this part of lesson 4 deals with a sideways channelthat is building shortly after a P3 has been formed Dr Andrews noted thatwhenever that happened the probabilities were high that prices wouldbreakout in the same direction they were moving prior to the formation ofthe sideways channel The attached P3 to sideways example chart shows thisprocedure

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 205235

Hello Gordon here is my example for the 5 circle sideways count RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Lesson 5Date Montag 27 Maumlrz 2000 060731

At 32400 85200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my example for the 5 circle sideways countgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt gt Hi TradersZone Good example of the 5th circle tendency to predict the direction of a sideways breakout Any luckfinding a chart showing the P3 to sideways rule Im sending the first part of the next lesson This trendline method is a useful tool with all of DrAndrews course lines He used it all the time but especially when looking for confirmation of othercourse method trading signals Regards Gordon The Course Trendline__________________________________________________________ Next well discuss the trendline Seasoned traders agree that the trendline is one of their mostimportant tools No matter what kind of trading program or technique they use the trendline on achart is a must But one of the biggest mistakes made by amateurs and professionals alike isinconsistently drawing or defining the trendline Dr Andrews trendline procedure is simpleconsistent and accurate It works extremely well with the pivot count and with the pitchfork For an uptrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the lowest low up and to thehighest minor low point preceding the highest high The line must not pass through prices inbetween the two low points Extend the line(Attached chart of Brightpoint) For a downtrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the highest high point to thelowest minor high point preceding the lowest low so that it does not pass through prices inbetween the two high points Extend the line (Brightpoint chart) Thats all theres to it Its simple consistent and it works well with other Andrews lines It also

helps eliminate personal bias and haphazard analysis Practice drawing these trendlines on your own charts Send me any questions you might have andthen e-mail a chart of your choosing which shows at least two uptrend and two downtrend linesthat youve drawn_______________________________________________________________________

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Lesson 5Date Dienstag 28 Maumlrz 2000 120224

Hello Gordon here is my chart with trendlinesWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going above the trendline again should I draw a new trendline anddelete the old one Attached is another chart with the P3 to sideways rule I finally found an example for it RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Price failure techniqueDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081412

At 32800 120200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my chart with trendlinesgtWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going abovegtthe trendline again should I draw a new trendline and delete the oldgtone Hi TradersZone Take a look at the chart Im returningI added some lines for you to considerWith the course trendline once its broken a new one should be started Theres a technique thatties in with this coming up soon Meanwhile heres an important technique to work on It deals with those times when prices dontreach the ML Regards Gordon Dr Andrews Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P ofreversaland the ML the probability is that this price reversal will go further thanitdid on its approach toward the ML (Extract of original course material) A price failure very often indicates a sizeable reversal will take placeThepitchforks drawn on the chart of Home Depot illustrate the concept of pricefailure Dr Andrews routinely drew a new pitchfork on his chart after a newsignificant pivot had formed He knew that prices had a high probability ofreaching the new ML before stalling out or reversing If prices reversedbeforereaching the ML thereby forming a new pivot he termed it a price failureTheunderlying idea here is that Dr Andrews fully anticipated his median linewouldact as a price magnet To conclude that a price reversal resulted in a price failure Dr Andrewsused

these primary signalsa subsequent price penetration of a short-termmulti-pivotline andor a return of prices to and penetration of the parallel lineformed atpivot 3 of the pitchfork (The circles on the Home Depot chart denote theparallelline penetration signal To avoid clutter the mpl lines were not drawn) One possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart of ConsecoIncLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me a copy

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject ChartDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081800Attachments image002png

Hi TradersZone Forgot the chart Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Price failure techniqueDate Samstag 1 April 2000 201000

gtOne possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart ofgtConseco IncgtLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me agtcopy Hi Gordon here are my charts with price failures RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Mittwoch 5 April 2000 235624

Hi TradersZone Good price failure examples you sentany comments or questions about it Heres the next partanother old standby Dr Andrews kept handy Regards Gordon In this segment youll learn how to use the Fan line Technique To draw the fan lines youll apply the coursetrendline method which was introduced in an earlier lesson It might be well to emphasize that the practicalapplication of the course trendline method requires practice and experience both of which will serve youwell in this technique Dr Andrews used fan lines as an adjunct to his pitchfork sideways channel andactionreaction methods In the fan line study three trendlines are drawn from the original reversal pivot of the price correction understudy typically a P0 or a P5 Youll notice on the charts included with this study that each fan line is at aflatter angle than its predecessor When the third fan line is broken the rule is that the correction has endedand a new trend is under way Try this technique on some of your own charts and then please send me asample

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Donnerstag 6 April 2000 234315

Hi Gordon No I dont have any specific question about the price failure technique I guess the next likely target after a price failure wouldbe the warning line I have attached two charts with fan linesIs it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the third fan line is broken RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Next segmentDate Freitag 7 April 2000 003312

Hello TradersZone

Tuesday April 06 2000 114315 AM you wrote

TZgt Hi Gordon

TZgt No I dont have any specific question about the price failureTZgt technique I guess the next likely target after a price failureTZgt would be the warning line

TZgt I have attached two charts with fan linesTZgt Is it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the thirdTZgt fan line is broken

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Thats right the warning line is the next price target Additionalwarning lines can be drawn if needed but usually one will do it Ifprices go through the first warning line another can be drawn butmost likely a new pitchfork could be drawn instead which would bepreferable Helps stay current with recently formed pivots

When prices break through the third fan line a buy or sell signal isgiven Not sure what you mean by fourth target fan line Im a littledense today

Your chart work was goodthis is another handy tool for spotting thehigh probability of a price reversal or trend change

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject The Gap TradeDate Freitag 7 April 2000 004858

Hello TradersZone This trading signal doesnt show up very often but past observations have shown that its well worth watching for Dr Andrews placed a lot of emphasis on the importance of price gaps something many traders overlook This is one of his gap uses Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom The Gap Trading Technique Price gaps can be a dilemma for many traders The general rule denoting market strength or weakness after ahigh volume gap often comes up short after the initial reaction is over Many gappers simply run out ofsteam A high volume gap in itself seems to offer precious little evidence that a profitable move is about toget under way Dr Andrews used price gaps somewhat differently than others He counted a gap as 2 pivots Youll see howthat works in the following technique which uses a gap to arrive at a price level for a buy or sell order Using short-term daily price pivots label the pivot immediately preceding the gap as p0 Count the gap as 2pivots labeling it p1 amp p2 After p3 has formed and prices reverse towards a short-term p4 draw a horizontalline 2 price tics or more (individual preference)to the right of p3 Enter the market only if prices reach orpenetrate that line within a few days after reversing from p4 Please look over your own charts to see if you can find places where the gap trade technique could have beenused Send me a sample when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 001925

Hello Gordon this is my chart with a gap trade RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 065538

Hello TradersZone Thursday April 08 2000 121925 PM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt this is my chart with a gap trade TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Good examplethe gap trade technique shines when an issue in at or near a P5 Similar to the one on thechart you sent Heres another trading signal tool Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Dr Andrews used several techniques which helped him determine whether a P5 was near at hand Youllrecall that he observed most price moves ended or had a significant reversal at a P5 This technique uses alternate closing prices after a P4 has been formed As with many of his studies thenumber 5 is used The chart accompanying this segment shows that there were 5 alternate closes to thedownside after P4 was put in Dr Andrews noted that whenever 5 or more alternate closes followed a P4 theprobabilities were high that a P5 was near at hand An added feature to this chart study is the sideways channel Notice how the 2nd target price and the 5thalternate close nearly coincide

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 12 April 2000 200730

Hello Gordon This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 13 April 2000 082418

Monday April 12 2000 80730 AM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hello TradersZone Good chart example of this Andrews toolanother of his very unusual observations that workmore often than not Heres the final part of this lesson Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom In this trendline method Dr Andrews once again used the number 5 as the basis for locating aprobable reversal area He found this technique to be especially useful whenever a clear orobvious pivot count didnt show up onthe price move under study Trendlines are drawn using the course trendline method When the 5th trendline is broken theprobability is high that the trend under study has ended A mini-median line pitchfork andorsliding parallel could be used for pricing a trading order The accompanying chart of Compaq Computer is an example of how the trendline study could beused The pivot count beginning at the October low is difficult to nail down There were severalsmall areas of congestion but no sizeable corrections while prices advanced The count wasunclear By following the price action using the course trendline technique however the traderwould have been alerted to the possibility of a change of trend when the 5th trendline was brokenin early February Try this technique on your own charts When youre ready please send me an example of yourstudy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 19 April 2000 124108

Hello Gordon this is my example with 5 trendlines RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[6] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 20 April 2000 012726

Monday April 19 2000 124108 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt this is my example with 5 trendlines

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Good example of the 5 TL technique Always reminds me of how the fairly simple tools often do a better job than manyof the sophisticated studies out there

That was the last part of lesson 5 Lesson 6 attached is made in one mailing Youll find Dr Andrews trading rules alongwith a wrap-up review which uses several of his rules You might have questions about some of the rules so feel free tosend them as they arise

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Dr Andrews had an abbreviated set of trading rules on several index cards that he carried around with him in his shirtpocket He said every trading day turned up something new on his charts and by having his rules in his pocket he wasreminded of the need for a methodical approach to his analysis Quite a comment coming from the man who wrote therule book

In this the final lesson of the course Dr Andrews original trading rules and observations are presented Lets work witha few of them at this point

Using charts of issues you follow please send me an example that illustrates your interpretation of each of the followingrules

Rule 4 Anticipating major Ps

Rule 7 Penetration rule

Rule 8 Price failure rule

Rule 11 1-ML23 AR Centerline

Rule 12 Sliding Parallel rule

Rule 15 Mini-median line parallel to buy or sell

Feel free to include any other course techniques you choose to apply but please include examples of the above as aminimum Use more than one technique on a chart if your analysis supports it Send as many charts as you like alongwith your questionscomments

Lesson 6 - Dr Andrews Trading Rules

This lesson covers course rules and significant observations as taught by Dr Andrews in his original trading course Therules are those that he used in his own trading and are provided to serve as a checklist for use with the course tradingmethods youve learned

Rule 1 Where prices are always headed Rule You course members are among the fortunate few to be able to draw astraight line and know that prices are headed toward that ML Very few investors have ever applied this ML principle ofstatistics to price fluctuations and weve never seen this in any books on investment You are among the very few who

know that prices are always headed toward the newest ML

Rule 2 The Rule of coming opposites applies all through life In the bible we find Blessed at they that mourn for theyshall be comforted As investors we know that any losses can be recovered by using course methods

Rule 3 Turn your mind about or Rethink for all good is at hand We should mentally prepare ourselves for thecoming reversal in prices and other affairs Heres one way for example that you course members who know the MLrules can use When prices are skyrocketing upward we do this preparation by thinking If prices pivoted here today atthis price Id draw a new ML bisecting the distance between todays price and the price from which the rise started Andwe know now that if this is a Major Pivot prices will fall rapidly to this new ML Profits from such drops are big and quick

Rule 4 Rule for anticipating major Ps If during congestion or after a rally or decline you can count four previous Psthe fifth one is highly probable to be the one from which a new trend starts

Rule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can make a quick big profit is to watch for the EPformations

Rule 6 The other reversal rule is that prices tend to reverse at or near any ML as well as at any extension of each MLAnd also at any MLH or extensions of MLH

Rule 7 The Penetration Rule is that whenever prices gap past or plunge through any ML there is a high probability thatthey will quickly return to it temporarily and then resume the trend they had before they gapped or plunged through

Rule 8 Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P of reversal and the MLthe probability is that this price reversal will go further than it did on its approach toward the ML

Rule 9 The price failure rule is negated when the next price trend is also a failure in reaching the ML This is almostinvariably a signal of a big fast move in the direction indicated by this last space Rule 10 When alternate median lines of comparable length slope in the same direction the trend is firm and rapidprice changes take place

Rule 11 When 1-ML23 is exactly reached at P4 it can be used as a highly reliable centerline for the AR method

Rule 12 Frequently after crossing a lower MLH prices continue to rise along the MLH Since the crossing of the MLHsignals a further drop is likely use a sliding parallel along the bottom of the most recent crossing If prices drop past thatsliding parallel line a sell signal is generated

Rule 13 MLs between P2 and P3 can start from a nearby or a remote P1 since prices tend to reverse at each of theseMLs Try several such P2-P3 MLs to discover the best fit

Rule 14 The distance of each MLH from its ML is the distance of the next warning line Use these warning lineswhenever a SH has signalled a buy or sell

Rule 15 Use the MMLH as a buy or sell signal when you expect a reversal because of a P5 Also when prices are at aWL ML extension line or where course lines converge or intersect

Rule 16 Converging lines that meet prices have shown the highest probability of a trend reversal

Rule 17 Two to four days is usually the maximum between P2 and P3 for a MML P1 can be a day or so back from P2and 3

Rule 18 The most reliable ActionReaction centerlines seem to be MPL 2P line 2 Gap line peak to low or low to peak

Rule 19 When prices pass through R lines look for a pull back and then a continuing move in the direction of the passthrough

Rule 20 Use gaps as Action lines from the centerline

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 003755

Hello Gordonhere is my example for Rule 4 And I have a question What are EP formations gtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 021242

Tuesday May 04 2000 123755 PM you wrote TZgt Hello GordonTZgt here is my example for Rule 4 TZgt And I have a question What are EP formations gtgtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegtgta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hi TradersZone Good use of the warning linesalso the EP material is part of lesson 4 Rather than go backthrough the files to see when (or if) it was sent Im sending it along with this reply Glad youbrought it up Best RegardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Tuesday May 04 2000208 PM Dr Andrews used a fairly common price chart formation that he found useful at probable P5market tops and bottoms The formation generally called a wedge or pennant by chartists isreferred to in Dr Andrews trading course as the Expanding Pivot (EP) One of the few chartformations used in the course he regarded it as among the most dependable indications that amarket top was forming Closely related to the EP is his Inverted Expanding Pivot (IEP) which henoted could often be observed at market bottoms Both are regarded as intermediate and long-term reversal indicators Dr Andrews found that both formations were most reliable when they occurred after a sharprapid price move coinciding with the formation of a probable P5 He said it wasnt unusual for theformation to take several weeks to complete and that conservative traders could best avoid thewhipsaw associated with congestion patterns by trading only in the direction of the probable price

break out of the EP or IEP formation The attached charts illustrate these formations Please look over your own charts for an example ofthe EP and IEP and send me a copy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 232127

Hello Gordon Thank you for the lesson with the EP material I couldnt find it in any previous emailHere is my example for Rule 7 RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Rule 4Date Samstag 6 Mai 2000 080827

Wednesday May 05 2000 112127 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt Thank you for the lesson with the EP materialTZgt I couldnt find it in any previous emailTZgt Here is my example for Rule 7

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hi TradersZone

Glad you mentioned it earlierexcept for the EP IEP and hissideways channel Dr Andrews didnt have much to say about chartpatterns and formations These are good ones to use though

Your study of the penetration rule was good Later

Best Regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Wednesday May 05 2000801 PM

Page 32: Pitchfork primer

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Donnerstag 24 Februar 2000 025105

At 22300 92300 PM you wroteI found two more MPLs on the Novellus Chart and drew them ingt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your mpls were correct This next segment shows the purpose of the centerline and how it isused Your payment in full arrived today TradersZone Thank you Regards Gordon Lesson 3 continued Please refer to the attached chart of Novellus The line drawn connecting the 3 circled pivots is amulti-pivot line (MPL) and represents the centerline (CL) well be using in this example Recall inthe previous segment that several types of centerlines are possible The choice is determined byexperimenting with the potential combinations on the chart under study Its best to try to locate acenterline somewhere close to the middle of the price chart in order to have sufficient past andforward data to use with the study This will become clear as you work with the method Once the centerline is drawn the next step is to locate a previous low or high pivot point to use fordrawing an action line Dr Andrews observed that the low pivot points often seem to work bestbut that either could be used In our example a line starting at the previous significant low wasdrawn parallel to the CL It is labeled A-1 (Action line 1) because it represents the first actionline Dr Andrews called it an action line because it was drawn as a result of a previous pivot (pricereversal) that had taken place Next a parallel line was drawn to the right of the CL and labeled R-1 Notice that it is the same distance from the CL as the corresponding A-1 line It is labeled R-1because it represents the first reaction line a line where prices are likely to stop or reverseNotice how prices reacted at the R-1 line in early 98 That serves as an indication that thecenterline chosen for this study should be a good one to use Not all reaction lines cause such aclear reversal as the R1 on this chart but many do Thats why its important to experiment withvarious centerline possibilities in order to find action lines that produce reaction lines which createthe greatest number of pivots or price stall-outs This experimentation is often quite time

consuming but experience has shown that it is time well spent When a centerline is found that isin tune with the price action of the issue under study it can be a highly effective tool for use inlocating probable reversal areas When combined with pitchfork lines the AR method can pinpointpotential reversal areas that are generally not recognized as such by others Dr Andrewstechniques for using the pitchfork and AR lines together are covered in later lessons In coming segments well study other lines that Dr Andrews used for his centerlines In themeantime experiment with the multi-pivot centerline on your own charts Then please send mean example of your work along with any questions you may have

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Freitag 25 Februar 2000 211356

gtIn the meantime experiment with the multi-pivot centerline on your owngtcharts Then please send me an example of your work along with anygtquestions you may have Hello Gordon I was wondering how many ActionReaction lines could be drawn on a chart On my attached chart I found at least 6 parallellines which had a significant meaning for the price RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject AR linesDate Montag 28 Februar 2000 080128

gtHello Gordongt gtI was wondering how many ActionReaction lines could be drawn on agtchart On my attached chart I found at least 6 parallel lines which hadgta significant meaning for the pricegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hi TradersZone Theres no set number of lines that can be drawnactually the more you can find the betterFinding a good centerline is the key And once you find lines that work such as you did anynumber of parallel lines can be drawn You are doing exactly what Dr Andrews didtaking thetime and effort to find the best fitting sets of lines Each chart has them and each chart is differentas Im sure youve found Nice work Heres the next part Regards Gordon Lesson 3 continued One of Dr Andrews favorite techniques dealt with gapsan often times perplexing price event formany traders His observations over the years suggested to him that while gaps show upfrequently on many price charts few traders have a method for including them as an integral partof their chart analysis Thats not surprising since not much has been published about how toapproach the use of gaps in a trading method Dr Andrews however found several ways to putprice gaps to good use An ActionReaction centerline which uses gaps as its basis is one suchmethod Please refer to the attached chart of Cendant Youll see that a centerline was drawn which passedthrough the July gap Note that it also came in contact with several pivots thereby qualifying as agapmulti-pivot centerline It is drawn by starting at the April low pivot and extending a line acrossand through the gap in mid-July It subsequently touches two additional high pivots Dr Andrews counted each gap as two pivots He noted that the more pivots a line touched the

stronger the line tended to be in the future Good reason then for using the July gap as the basisfor an ActionReaction study Our CL is labelled a gap-mpl-CL The May 98 high was used for the Action Line starting point A line was then drawn parallel to theCenterline as per ActionReaction procedure The corresponding Reaction Line was then drawn inIf this particular study had been drawn on Cendants chart right after the July gap was put in thepotential for prices to go all the way down to the Reaction Line might have seemed very slim at thetime Notice however that prices reached the Reaction Line in early September Youll see thishappen time and again as you work with the AR method The core of its effectiveness is a strongCL Please send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts of your choice

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re AR linesDate Montag 28 Februar 2000 155937

gtPlease send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts of yourgtchoice Hello Gordonhere are my examples RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject More on the ARDate Donnerstag 2 Maumlrz 2000 071158

At 22800 35900 PM you wrotegtgtPlease send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts ofgtgtyour choicegt gtHello Gordongthere are my examplesgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone You picked some good examples to use for your AR study Both showed the potential power of thismethod Takes time and lots of chart study sometimes to find the best set of lines but the rewardscan be many Heres something else to look at Regards Gordon The ActionReaction technique requires a strong centerline from which to begin The key todeciding which set of pivots to use for the centerline is found through experimenting with thevarious configurations visible on the chart under study The centerline might be a series of gapspivots an existing median line or any of Dr Andrews lines The task is to search for that centerlinewhich shows the greatest potential for projecting price reversal areas Dr Andrews did that byfinding a likely centerline near the middle of his price chart That allowed him to use any of theprevious pivots for his action lines By experimenting he found reaction lines that did the best jobof pegging reversal areas at data points located forward of the centerline Reaction lines are equal and opposite of the action lines and serve to project price levels at whicha reversal can be expected That is why the task of seeking out the best centerline is so importantDr Andrews reasoned that a series of reaction lines which have pegged price reversals in the pastis likely to continue to be in tune with current and future market price action Having severalprevious pivots to use as anchors for drawing action lines is thus essential The attached chart of Lattice illustrates this concept Please bear in mind that the gapmplcenterline is not the only centerline one could use on this chart You might want to study the chartfor other AR possibilities Try a peak-to-peak CL or a multi-pivot CL Send me your studies along

with any questions

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re More on the ARDate Samstag 4 Maumlrz 2000 002521

gtThe attached chart of Lattice illustrates this conceptgtPlease bear in mind that the gapmpl centerline is not the onlygtcenterline one could use on this chartgtYou might want to study the chart for other AR possibilitiesgtTry a peak-to-peak CL or a multi-pivot CL Send me your studiesgtalong with any questions Hello Gordonhere is my chart RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Peak to peak clDate Sonntag 5 Maumlrz 2000 064107

At 3400 122500 AM you wrotegtHello Gordongthere is my chartgt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Looks like you have the concept down Takes time and a lot of chart work to find the bestcenterline When the reaction lines dont seem to peg reversal areas chances are the centerline isnot the one that is best in tune with the price action of the issue under studyDespite the time required for this method it was one of Dr Andrews stand-bysAR lines could befound on most of his charts Im sending a chart with an example of a peak-to-peak CL Regards Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Peak to peak clDate Sonntag 5 Maumlrz 2000 171232

Hello Gordon I think the peak-to-peak CL on the last chart I sent to you was not really drawn from peak to peakIm sending another example RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next LessonDate Mittwoch 8 Maumlrz 2000 072526

At 3500 51200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtI think the peak-to-peak CL on the last chart I sent to you was notgtreally drawn from peak to peakgtIm sending another examplegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your peak to peak cl example was correctly drawn Thats a fairly simple approach but quite oftenthe peak to peak yields better reaction lines Heres the first part of the next lesson Regards Gordon Youll find times when prices dont quite reach the ML but instead drift alongside or away from itThe Schiff ML was designed to be used in place of the regular ML whenever that happens Suchprice action can be found at any place on a chart but most frequently occurs after a sharp sell-offor run-up of prices Dr Andrews also used the Schiff ML whenever his regular ML sloped at an unusually steep angleHe said it helped smooth out irregular price action such as that caused by unexpected earningsnews crop planting delays or poor growing conditions crop production reports etc Youll findnearly vertical price moves over a short period of time on many charts The Schiff ML method helpsput things back in perspective when that happens Well use the chart of Sterling Bancorp as an example of prices drifting away from the regular MLThat ML is drawn in black Prices didnt quite reach the ML but drifted alongside and eventuallyaway from it The Schiff ML and parallel lines are drawn in red Notice how prices were containedwithin the Schiff pitchfork until they finally broke down at the upper parallel line The procedure for drawing the Schiff ML is the same as for the regular ML except the startingpoint is located midway between the first 2 pivots youll be using The Sterling Bancorp chart

illustrates how this is done Dr Andrews also suggested using the Schiff ML whenever the regular ML method doesnt seem tobe in sync with price action Practice this procedure on your own charts and send a couple examples when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next LessonDate Donnerstag 9 Maumlrz 2000 001143

Hello Gordon in my charting software (Dynamic Trader) the Schiff ML is drawn by finding the midpoint of the line between pivot A and pivot Bmoving this point horizontally to directly above or below (depending on whether A is a low or high pivot) the A pivot anddrawing a line from his point through the midpoint of the BC swingAre there different methods of drawing a Schiff MLI was too lazy to draw Schiff MLs by hand with the method you described so Im sending my examples with the Dynamic TraderSchiff MLs -) RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject SchiffDate Samstag 11 Maumlrz 2000 070226

At 3900 121100 AM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtin my charting software (Dynamic Trader) the Schiff ML is drawn bygtfinding the midpoint of the line between pivot A and pivot B movinggtthis point horizontally to directly above or below (depending ongtwhether A is a low or high pivot) the A pivot and drawing a linegtgtfrom his point through the midpoint of the BC swinggtAre there different methods of drawing a Schiff MLgtI was too lazy to draw Schiff MLs by hand with the method yougtdescribed so Im sending my examples with the Dynamic Trader Schiff MLs -)gt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your program Schiff line procedure is fineits actually what Dr Andrews called a modified schiff ml and is onlyslightly different than the one I sent you initially The one you used is preferred by most course members Im sendingthe modified Schiff lesson and a chart along with this email The chart example shows how to use it with 0-34 pivots Regards Gordon

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Sliding Parallel LineDate Montag 13 Maumlrz 2000 005252

Hello TradersZone Heres one of the tools Dr Andrews used most often when entering exiting or reversing marketpositions Not many people know about this technique Regards Gordon The Sliding Parallel (SH) is drawn whenever prices cross an Andrews line and then move along itFor example if the bottom of a daily price bar range drops through a lower parallel line of apitchfork a new parallel line is then drawn from that low and extended to the right If the nextdays price bar drops through that sliding parallel line a sell signal is generated Whenever price action dictates a sliding parallel the next step is to draw a Warning Line Thewarning line is an additional parallel line that is an image extension of the original pitchforkchannels It serves as a warning that if prices penetrate the sliding parallel the next likely target isthe WL The attached chart of Avis illustrates these procedures Please try these on your own charts andsend me an example

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Sliding Parallel LineDate Dienstag 14 Maumlrz 2000 225737

Hello Gordon this is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning line RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 065606

At 31400 105700 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtthis is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning linegt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone Your chart of circuit city was a good example for this study I may have mentioned it earlier but DrAndrews used this technique on a regular basis The next part of this lesson covers another of hisfavorite tools the mini-median line pitchfork Here it is Regards Gordon The Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry and exit tools Though mostoften drawn using alternate closing prices alternate highs and lows can also be usedin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days is usually the maximumbetween pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or more back from P2 Dr Andrews used Mini-Median Line pitchforks for buy and sell signals whenever he expected areversal Some examples include a probable P5 or when prices are at a Warning Line ML MLHmajor ML extension or a sideways channel price target When prices cross the Mini-Median LineParallel (MMLH) a sliding parallel (SH) is used for order entry

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 231537

gtThe Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry andgtexit tools Though most often drawn using alternate closing pricesgtalternate highs and lows can also be usedgtin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days isgtusually the maximum between pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or moregtback from P2

Hello Gordon

wouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timingCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available whenDr Andrews was alive

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject intraday chartsDate Samstag 18 Maumlrz 2000 012400

At 31600 111500 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongtgtwouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsgtinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timinggtCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available when DrgtAndrews was alivegtgtRegardsgtTradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Youre absolutely correctintraday charts were not available when DrAndrews was a trader

Im reading between the lines here but if you plan to day-trade using the course techniques ie thepitchfork then I agree that the regular pitchfork would be more useful on intraday charts Otherwisewhipsaw would be a significant problem Please get back to me if I didnt address your questionbecause this is a very important technique The mini-median line pitchfork and sliding parallel showedup on most of Dr Andrews charts

Regards

Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re intraday chartsDate Dienstag 21 Maumlrz 2000 220322

Hello Gordon

You are right Im planning to daytrade SampP futures using the course techniques among other things

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 003408

Hi TradersZone Here are a couple Andrews techniques that will help anticipate the breakout direction of asideways channelThey work often enough to warrant keep handy Regards Gordon In an earlier lesson you were introduced to Dr Andrews sideways count You saw how frequentlythe sideways count method provided high probability price objectives after the breakout from theestablished channel took place In this segment of lesson 4 youll be shown 2 congestion area techniques that can help youdetermine the probable sideways channel price breakout direction Both rely on the use of pivots The first uses the pivot points that are circled on a sideways channel Dr Andrews observed thatwhenever a sideways channel results in at least 5 circle contacts the eventual price breakoutwould very often be in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle If circle 5 is at thetop of the channel for example the eventual price breakout would likely be to the upside If circle5 is at the bottom of the channel look for a downside breakout Dr Andrews noted that thistechnique can be subject to false breakouts but that such breakouts are usually followed shortlyafter with a confirmed breakout in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle Heemphasized that this study is best considered as a rule of thumb observation He viewed it as asupporting indicator for use with a short-term pitchfork as prices approached a channel line There are 2 charts attached that show how this works

The second technique in this part of lesson 4 deals with a sideways channelthat is building shortly after a P3 has been formed Dr Andrews noted thatwhenever that happened the probabilities were high that prices wouldbreakout in the same direction they were moving prior to the formation ofthe sideways channel The attached P3 to sideways example chart shows thisprocedure

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 205235

Hello Gordon here is my example for the 5 circle sideways count RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Lesson 5Date Montag 27 Maumlrz 2000 060731

At 32400 85200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my example for the 5 circle sideways countgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt gt Hi TradersZone Good example of the 5th circle tendency to predict the direction of a sideways breakout Any luckfinding a chart showing the P3 to sideways rule Im sending the first part of the next lesson This trendline method is a useful tool with all of DrAndrews course lines He used it all the time but especially when looking for confirmation of othercourse method trading signals Regards Gordon The Course Trendline__________________________________________________________ Next well discuss the trendline Seasoned traders agree that the trendline is one of their mostimportant tools No matter what kind of trading program or technique they use the trendline on achart is a must But one of the biggest mistakes made by amateurs and professionals alike isinconsistently drawing or defining the trendline Dr Andrews trendline procedure is simpleconsistent and accurate It works extremely well with the pivot count and with the pitchfork For an uptrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the lowest low up and to thehighest minor low point preceding the highest high The line must not pass through prices inbetween the two low points Extend the line(Attached chart of Brightpoint) For a downtrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the highest high point to thelowest minor high point preceding the lowest low so that it does not pass through prices inbetween the two high points Extend the line (Brightpoint chart) Thats all theres to it Its simple consistent and it works well with other Andrews lines It also

helps eliminate personal bias and haphazard analysis Practice drawing these trendlines on your own charts Send me any questions you might have andthen e-mail a chart of your choosing which shows at least two uptrend and two downtrend linesthat youve drawn_______________________________________________________________________

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Lesson 5Date Dienstag 28 Maumlrz 2000 120224

Hello Gordon here is my chart with trendlinesWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going above the trendline again should I draw a new trendline anddelete the old one Attached is another chart with the P3 to sideways rule I finally found an example for it RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Price failure techniqueDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081412

At 32800 120200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my chart with trendlinesgtWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going abovegtthe trendline again should I draw a new trendline and delete the oldgtone Hi TradersZone Take a look at the chart Im returningI added some lines for you to considerWith the course trendline once its broken a new one should be started Theres a technique thatties in with this coming up soon Meanwhile heres an important technique to work on It deals with those times when prices dontreach the ML Regards Gordon Dr Andrews Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P ofreversaland the ML the probability is that this price reversal will go further thanitdid on its approach toward the ML (Extract of original course material) A price failure very often indicates a sizeable reversal will take placeThepitchforks drawn on the chart of Home Depot illustrate the concept of pricefailure Dr Andrews routinely drew a new pitchfork on his chart after a newsignificant pivot had formed He knew that prices had a high probability ofreaching the new ML before stalling out or reversing If prices reversedbeforereaching the ML thereby forming a new pivot he termed it a price failureTheunderlying idea here is that Dr Andrews fully anticipated his median linewouldact as a price magnet To conclude that a price reversal resulted in a price failure Dr Andrewsused

these primary signalsa subsequent price penetration of a short-termmulti-pivotline andor a return of prices to and penetration of the parallel lineformed atpivot 3 of the pitchfork (The circles on the Home Depot chart denote theparallelline penetration signal To avoid clutter the mpl lines were not drawn) One possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart of ConsecoIncLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me a copy

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject ChartDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081800Attachments image002png

Hi TradersZone Forgot the chart Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Price failure techniqueDate Samstag 1 April 2000 201000

gtOne possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart ofgtConseco IncgtLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me agtcopy Hi Gordon here are my charts with price failures RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Mittwoch 5 April 2000 235624

Hi TradersZone Good price failure examples you sentany comments or questions about it Heres the next partanother old standby Dr Andrews kept handy Regards Gordon In this segment youll learn how to use the Fan line Technique To draw the fan lines youll apply the coursetrendline method which was introduced in an earlier lesson It might be well to emphasize that the practicalapplication of the course trendline method requires practice and experience both of which will serve youwell in this technique Dr Andrews used fan lines as an adjunct to his pitchfork sideways channel andactionreaction methods In the fan line study three trendlines are drawn from the original reversal pivot of the price correction understudy typically a P0 or a P5 Youll notice on the charts included with this study that each fan line is at aflatter angle than its predecessor When the third fan line is broken the rule is that the correction has endedand a new trend is under way Try this technique on some of your own charts and then please send me asample

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Donnerstag 6 April 2000 234315

Hi Gordon No I dont have any specific question about the price failure technique I guess the next likely target after a price failure wouldbe the warning line I have attached two charts with fan linesIs it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the third fan line is broken RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Next segmentDate Freitag 7 April 2000 003312

Hello TradersZone

Tuesday April 06 2000 114315 AM you wrote

TZgt Hi Gordon

TZgt No I dont have any specific question about the price failureTZgt technique I guess the next likely target after a price failureTZgt would be the warning line

TZgt I have attached two charts with fan linesTZgt Is it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the thirdTZgt fan line is broken

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Thats right the warning line is the next price target Additionalwarning lines can be drawn if needed but usually one will do it Ifprices go through the first warning line another can be drawn butmost likely a new pitchfork could be drawn instead which would bepreferable Helps stay current with recently formed pivots

When prices break through the third fan line a buy or sell signal isgiven Not sure what you mean by fourth target fan line Im a littledense today

Your chart work was goodthis is another handy tool for spotting thehigh probability of a price reversal or trend change

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject The Gap TradeDate Freitag 7 April 2000 004858

Hello TradersZone This trading signal doesnt show up very often but past observations have shown that its well worth watching for Dr Andrews placed a lot of emphasis on the importance of price gaps something many traders overlook This is one of his gap uses Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom The Gap Trading Technique Price gaps can be a dilemma for many traders The general rule denoting market strength or weakness after ahigh volume gap often comes up short after the initial reaction is over Many gappers simply run out ofsteam A high volume gap in itself seems to offer precious little evidence that a profitable move is about toget under way Dr Andrews used price gaps somewhat differently than others He counted a gap as 2 pivots Youll see howthat works in the following technique which uses a gap to arrive at a price level for a buy or sell order Using short-term daily price pivots label the pivot immediately preceding the gap as p0 Count the gap as 2pivots labeling it p1 amp p2 After p3 has formed and prices reverse towards a short-term p4 draw a horizontalline 2 price tics or more (individual preference)to the right of p3 Enter the market only if prices reach orpenetrate that line within a few days after reversing from p4 Please look over your own charts to see if you can find places where the gap trade technique could have beenused Send me a sample when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 001925

Hello Gordon this is my chart with a gap trade RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 065538

Hello TradersZone Thursday April 08 2000 121925 PM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt this is my chart with a gap trade TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Good examplethe gap trade technique shines when an issue in at or near a P5 Similar to the one on thechart you sent Heres another trading signal tool Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Dr Andrews used several techniques which helped him determine whether a P5 was near at hand Youllrecall that he observed most price moves ended or had a significant reversal at a P5 This technique uses alternate closing prices after a P4 has been formed As with many of his studies thenumber 5 is used The chart accompanying this segment shows that there were 5 alternate closes to thedownside after P4 was put in Dr Andrews noted that whenever 5 or more alternate closes followed a P4 theprobabilities were high that a P5 was near at hand An added feature to this chart study is the sideways channel Notice how the 2nd target price and the 5thalternate close nearly coincide

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 12 April 2000 200730

Hello Gordon This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 13 April 2000 082418

Monday April 12 2000 80730 AM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hello TradersZone Good chart example of this Andrews toolanother of his very unusual observations that workmore often than not Heres the final part of this lesson Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom In this trendline method Dr Andrews once again used the number 5 as the basis for locating aprobable reversal area He found this technique to be especially useful whenever a clear orobvious pivot count didnt show up onthe price move under study Trendlines are drawn using the course trendline method When the 5th trendline is broken theprobability is high that the trend under study has ended A mini-median line pitchfork andorsliding parallel could be used for pricing a trading order The accompanying chart of Compaq Computer is an example of how the trendline study could beused The pivot count beginning at the October low is difficult to nail down There were severalsmall areas of congestion but no sizeable corrections while prices advanced The count wasunclear By following the price action using the course trendline technique however the traderwould have been alerted to the possibility of a change of trend when the 5th trendline was brokenin early February Try this technique on your own charts When youre ready please send me an example of yourstudy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 19 April 2000 124108

Hello Gordon this is my example with 5 trendlines RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[6] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 20 April 2000 012726

Monday April 19 2000 124108 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt this is my example with 5 trendlines

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Good example of the 5 TL technique Always reminds me of how the fairly simple tools often do a better job than manyof the sophisticated studies out there

That was the last part of lesson 5 Lesson 6 attached is made in one mailing Youll find Dr Andrews trading rules alongwith a wrap-up review which uses several of his rules You might have questions about some of the rules so feel free tosend them as they arise

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Dr Andrews had an abbreviated set of trading rules on several index cards that he carried around with him in his shirtpocket He said every trading day turned up something new on his charts and by having his rules in his pocket he wasreminded of the need for a methodical approach to his analysis Quite a comment coming from the man who wrote therule book

In this the final lesson of the course Dr Andrews original trading rules and observations are presented Lets work witha few of them at this point

Using charts of issues you follow please send me an example that illustrates your interpretation of each of the followingrules

Rule 4 Anticipating major Ps

Rule 7 Penetration rule

Rule 8 Price failure rule

Rule 11 1-ML23 AR Centerline

Rule 12 Sliding Parallel rule

Rule 15 Mini-median line parallel to buy or sell

Feel free to include any other course techniques you choose to apply but please include examples of the above as aminimum Use more than one technique on a chart if your analysis supports it Send as many charts as you like alongwith your questionscomments

Lesson 6 - Dr Andrews Trading Rules

This lesson covers course rules and significant observations as taught by Dr Andrews in his original trading course Therules are those that he used in his own trading and are provided to serve as a checklist for use with the course tradingmethods youve learned

Rule 1 Where prices are always headed Rule You course members are among the fortunate few to be able to draw astraight line and know that prices are headed toward that ML Very few investors have ever applied this ML principle ofstatistics to price fluctuations and weve never seen this in any books on investment You are among the very few who

know that prices are always headed toward the newest ML

Rule 2 The Rule of coming opposites applies all through life In the bible we find Blessed at they that mourn for theyshall be comforted As investors we know that any losses can be recovered by using course methods

Rule 3 Turn your mind about or Rethink for all good is at hand We should mentally prepare ourselves for thecoming reversal in prices and other affairs Heres one way for example that you course members who know the MLrules can use When prices are skyrocketing upward we do this preparation by thinking If prices pivoted here today atthis price Id draw a new ML bisecting the distance between todays price and the price from which the rise started Andwe know now that if this is a Major Pivot prices will fall rapidly to this new ML Profits from such drops are big and quick

Rule 4 Rule for anticipating major Ps If during congestion or after a rally or decline you can count four previous Psthe fifth one is highly probable to be the one from which a new trend starts

Rule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can make a quick big profit is to watch for the EPformations

Rule 6 The other reversal rule is that prices tend to reverse at or near any ML as well as at any extension of each MLAnd also at any MLH or extensions of MLH

Rule 7 The Penetration Rule is that whenever prices gap past or plunge through any ML there is a high probability thatthey will quickly return to it temporarily and then resume the trend they had before they gapped or plunged through

Rule 8 Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P of reversal and the MLthe probability is that this price reversal will go further than it did on its approach toward the ML

Rule 9 The price failure rule is negated when the next price trend is also a failure in reaching the ML This is almostinvariably a signal of a big fast move in the direction indicated by this last space Rule 10 When alternate median lines of comparable length slope in the same direction the trend is firm and rapidprice changes take place

Rule 11 When 1-ML23 is exactly reached at P4 it can be used as a highly reliable centerline for the AR method

Rule 12 Frequently after crossing a lower MLH prices continue to rise along the MLH Since the crossing of the MLHsignals a further drop is likely use a sliding parallel along the bottom of the most recent crossing If prices drop past thatsliding parallel line a sell signal is generated

Rule 13 MLs between P2 and P3 can start from a nearby or a remote P1 since prices tend to reverse at each of theseMLs Try several such P2-P3 MLs to discover the best fit

Rule 14 The distance of each MLH from its ML is the distance of the next warning line Use these warning lineswhenever a SH has signalled a buy or sell

Rule 15 Use the MMLH as a buy or sell signal when you expect a reversal because of a P5 Also when prices are at aWL ML extension line or where course lines converge or intersect

Rule 16 Converging lines that meet prices have shown the highest probability of a trend reversal

Rule 17 Two to four days is usually the maximum between P2 and P3 for a MML P1 can be a day or so back from P2and 3

Rule 18 The most reliable ActionReaction centerlines seem to be MPL 2P line 2 Gap line peak to low or low to peak

Rule 19 When prices pass through R lines look for a pull back and then a continuing move in the direction of the passthrough

Rule 20 Use gaps as Action lines from the centerline

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 003755

Hello Gordonhere is my example for Rule 4 And I have a question What are EP formations gtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 021242

Tuesday May 04 2000 123755 PM you wrote TZgt Hello GordonTZgt here is my example for Rule 4 TZgt And I have a question What are EP formations gtgtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegtgta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hi TradersZone Good use of the warning linesalso the EP material is part of lesson 4 Rather than go backthrough the files to see when (or if) it was sent Im sending it along with this reply Glad youbrought it up Best RegardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Tuesday May 04 2000208 PM Dr Andrews used a fairly common price chart formation that he found useful at probable P5market tops and bottoms The formation generally called a wedge or pennant by chartists isreferred to in Dr Andrews trading course as the Expanding Pivot (EP) One of the few chartformations used in the course he regarded it as among the most dependable indications that amarket top was forming Closely related to the EP is his Inverted Expanding Pivot (IEP) which henoted could often be observed at market bottoms Both are regarded as intermediate and long-term reversal indicators Dr Andrews found that both formations were most reliable when they occurred after a sharprapid price move coinciding with the formation of a probable P5 He said it wasnt unusual for theformation to take several weeks to complete and that conservative traders could best avoid thewhipsaw associated with congestion patterns by trading only in the direction of the probable price

break out of the EP or IEP formation The attached charts illustrate these formations Please look over your own charts for an example ofthe EP and IEP and send me a copy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 232127

Hello Gordon Thank you for the lesson with the EP material I couldnt find it in any previous emailHere is my example for Rule 7 RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Rule 4Date Samstag 6 Mai 2000 080827

Wednesday May 05 2000 112127 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt Thank you for the lesson with the EP materialTZgt I couldnt find it in any previous emailTZgt Here is my example for Rule 7

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hi TradersZone

Glad you mentioned it earlierexcept for the EP IEP and hissideways channel Dr Andrews didnt have much to say about chartpatterns and formations These are good ones to use though

Your study of the penetration rule was good Later

Best Regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Wednesday May 05 2000801 PM

Page 33: Pitchfork primer

consuming but experience has shown that it is time well spent When a centerline is found that isin tune with the price action of the issue under study it can be a highly effective tool for use inlocating probable reversal areas When combined with pitchfork lines the AR method can pinpointpotential reversal areas that are generally not recognized as such by others Dr Andrewstechniques for using the pitchfork and AR lines together are covered in later lessons In coming segments well study other lines that Dr Andrews used for his centerlines In themeantime experiment with the multi-pivot centerline on your own charts Then please send mean example of your work along with any questions you may have

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Freitag 25 Februar 2000 211356

gtIn the meantime experiment with the multi-pivot centerline on your owngtcharts Then please send me an example of your work along with anygtquestions you may have Hello Gordon I was wondering how many ActionReaction lines could be drawn on a chart On my attached chart I found at least 6 parallellines which had a significant meaning for the price RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject AR linesDate Montag 28 Februar 2000 080128

gtHello Gordongt gtI was wondering how many ActionReaction lines could be drawn on agtchart On my attached chart I found at least 6 parallel lines which hadgta significant meaning for the pricegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hi TradersZone Theres no set number of lines that can be drawnactually the more you can find the betterFinding a good centerline is the key And once you find lines that work such as you did anynumber of parallel lines can be drawn You are doing exactly what Dr Andrews didtaking thetime and effort to find the best fitting sets of lines Each chart has them and each chart is differentas Im sure youve found Nice work Heres the next part Regards Gordon Lesson 3 continued One of Dr Andrews favorite techniques dealt with gapsan often times perplexing price event formany traders His observations over the years suggested to him that while gaps show upfrequently on many price charts few traders have a method for including them as an integral partof their chart analysis Thats not surprising since not much has been published about how toapproach the use of gaps in a trading method Dr Andrews however found several ways to putprice gaps to good use An ActionReaction centerline which uses gaps as its basis is one suchmethod Please refer to the attached chart of Cendant Youll see that a centerline was drawn which passedthrough the July gap Note that it also came in contact with several pivots thereby qualifying as agapmulti-pivot centerline It is drawn by starting at the April low pivot and extending a line acrossand through the gap in mid-July It subsequently touches two additional high pivots Dr Andrews counted each gap as two pivots He noted that the more pivots a line touched the

stronger the line tended to be in the future Good reason then for using the July gap as the basisfor an ActionReaction study Our CL is labelled a gap-mpl-CL The May 98 high was used for the Action Line starting point A line was then drawn parallel to theCenterline as per ActionReaction procedure The corresponding Reaction Line was then drawn inIf this particular study had been drawn on Cendants chart right after the July gap was put in thepotential for prices to go all the way down to the Reaction Line might have seemed very slim at thetime Notice however that prices reached the Reaction Line in early September Youll see thishappen time and again as you work with the AR method The core of its effectiveness is a strongCL Please send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts of your choice

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re AR linesDate Montag 28 Februar 2000 155937

gtPlease send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts of yourgtchoice Hello Gordonhere are my examples RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject More on the ARDate Donnerstag 2 Maumlrz 2000 071158

At 22800 35900 PM you wrotegtgtPlease send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts ofgtgtyour choicegt gtHello Gordongthere are my examplesgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone You picked some good examples to use for your AR study Both showed the potential power of thismethod Takes time and lots of chart study sometimes to find the best set of lines but the rewardscan be many Heres something else to look at Regards Gordon The ActionReaction technique requires a strong centerline from which to begin The key todeciding which set of pivots to use for the centerline is found through experimenting with thevarious configurations visible on the chart under study The centerline might be a series of gapspivots an existing median line or any of Dr Andrews lines The task is to search for that centerlinewhich shows the greatest potential for projecting price reversal areas Dr Andrews did that byfinding a likely centerline near the middle of his price chart That allowed him to use any of theprevious pivots for his action lines By experimenting he found reaction lines that did the best jobof pegging reversal areas at data points located forward of the centerline Reaction lines are equal and opposite of the action lines and serve to project price levels at whicha reversal can be expected That is why the task of seeking out the best centerline is so importantDr Andrews reasoned that a series of reaction lines which have pegged price reversals in the pastis likely to continue to be in tune with current and future market price action Having severalprevious pivots to use as anchors for drawing action lines is thus essential The attached chart of Lattice illustrates this concept Please bear in mind that the gapmplcenterline is not the only centerline one could use on this chart You might want to study the chartfor other AR possibilities Try a peak-to-peak CL or a multi-pivot CL Send me your studies along

with any questions

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re More on the ARDate Samstag 4 Maumlrz 2000 002521

gtThe attached chart of Lattice illustrates this conceptgtPlease bear in mind that the gapmpl centerline is not the onlygtcenterline one could use on this chartgtYou might want to study the chart for other AR possibilitiesgtTry a peak-to-peak CL or a multi-pivot CL Send me your studiesgtalong with any questions Hello Gordonhere is my chart RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Peak to peak clDate Sonntag 5 Maumlrz 2000 064107

At 3400 122500 AM you wrotegtHello Gordongthere is my chartgt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Looks like you have the concept down Takes time and a lot of chart work to find the bestcenterline When the reaction lines dont seem to peg reversal areas chances are the centerline isnot the one that is best in tune with the price action of the issue under studyDespite the time required for this method it was one of Dr Andrews stand-bysAR lines could befound on most of his charts Im sending a chart with an example of a peak-to-peak CL Regards Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Peak to peak clDate Sonntag 5 Maumlrz 2000 171232

Hello Gordon I think the peak-to-peak CL on the last chart I sent to you was not really drawn from peak to peakIm sending another example RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next LessonDate Mittwoch 8 Maumlrz 2000 072526

At 3500 51200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtI think the peak-to-peak CL on the last chart I sent to you was notgtreally drawn from peak to peakgtIm sending another examplegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your peak to peak cl example was correctly drawn Thats a fairly simple approach but quite oftenthe peak to peak yields better reaction lines Heres the first part of the next lesson Regards Gordon Youll find times when prices dont quite reach the ML but instead drift alongside or away from itThe Schiff ML was designed to be used in place of the regular ML whenever that happens Suchprice action can be found at any place on a chart but most frequently occurs after a sharp sell-offor run-up of prices Dr Andrews also used the Schiff ML whenever his regular ML sloped at an unusually steep angleHe said it helped smooth out irregular price action such as that caused by unexpected earningsnews crop planting delays or poor growing conditions crop production reports etc Youll findnearly vertical price moves over a short period of time on many charts The Schiff ML method helpsput things back in perspective when that happens Well use the chart of Sterling Bancorp as an example of prices drifting away from the regular MLThat ML is drawn in black Prices didnt quite reach the ML but drifted alongside and eventuallyaway from it The Schiff ML and parallel lines are drawn in red Notice how prices were containedwithin the Schiff pitchfork until they finally broke down at the upper parallel line The procedure for drawing the Schiff ML is the same as for the regular ML except the startingpoint is located midway between the first 2 pivots youll be using The Sterling Bancorp chart

illustrates how this is done Dr Andrews also suggested using the Schiff ML whenever the regular ML method doesnt seem tobe in sync with price action Practice this procedure on your own charts and send a couple examples when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next LessonDate Donnerstag 9 Maumlrz 2000 001143

Hello Gordon in my charting software (Dynamic Trader) the Schiff ML is drawn by finding the midpoint of the line between pivot A and pivot Bmoving this point horizontally to directly above or below (depending on whether A is a low or high pivot) the A pivot anddrawing a line from his point through the midpoint of the BC swingAre there different methods of drawing a Schiff MLI was too lazy to draw Schiff MLs by hand with the method you described so Im sending my examples with the Dynamic TraderSchiff MLs -) RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject SchiffDate Samstag 11 Maumlrz 2000 070226

At 3900 121100 AM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtin my charting software (Dynamic Trader) the Schiff ML is drawn bygtfinding the midpoint of the line between pivot A and pivot B movinggtthis point horizontally to directly above or below (depending ongtwhether A is a low or high pivot) the A pivot and drawing a linegtgtfrom his point through the midpoint of the BC swinggtAre there different methods of drawing a Schiff MLgtI was too lazy to draw Schiff MLs by hand with the method yougtdescribed so Im sending my examples with the Dynamic Trader Schiff MLs -)gt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your program Schiff line procedure is fineits actually what Dr Andrews called a modified schiff ml and is onlyslightly different than the one I sent you initially The one you used is preferred by most course members Im sendingthe modified Schiff lesson and a chart along with this email The chart example shows how to use it with 0-34 pivots Regards Gordon

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Sliding Parallel LineDate Montag 13 Maumlrz 2000 005252

Hello TradersZone Heres one of the tools Dr Andrews used most often when entering exiting or reversing marketpositions Not many people know about this technique Regards Gordon The Sliding Parallel (SH) is drawn whenever prices cross an Andrews line and then move along itFor example if the bottom of a daily price bar range drops through a lower parallel line of apitchfork a new parallel line is then drawn from that low and extended to the right If the nextdays price bar drops through that sliding parallel line a sell signal is generated Whenever price action dictates a sliding parallel the next step is to draw a Warning Line Thewarning line is an additional parallel line that is an image extension of the original pitchforkchannels It serves as a warning that if prices penetrate the sliding parallel the next likely target isthe WL The attached chart of Avis illustrates these procedures Please try these on your own charts andsend me an example

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Sliding Parallel LineDate Dienstag 14 Maumlrz 2000 225737

Hello Gordon this is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning line RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 065606

At 31400 105700 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtthis is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning linegt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone Your chart of circuit city was a good example for this study I may have mentioned it earlier but DrAndrews used this technique on a regular basis The next part of this lesson covers another of hisfavorite tools the mini-median line pitchfork Here it is Regards Gordon The Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry and exit tools Though mostoften drawn using alternate closing prices alternate highs and lows can also be usedin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days is usually the maximumbetween pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or more back from P2 Dr Andrews used Mini-Median Line pitchforks for buy and sell signals whenever he expected areversal Some examples include a probable P5 or when prices are at a Warning Line ML MLHmajor ML extension or a sideways channel price target When prices cross the Mini-Median LineParallel (MMLH) a sliding parallel (SH) is used for order entry

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 231537

gtThe Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry andgtexit tools Though most often drawn using alternate closing pricesgtalternate highs and lows can also be usedgtin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days isgtusually the maximum between pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or moregtback from P2

Hello Gordon

wouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timingCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available whenDr Andrews was alive

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject intraday chartsDate Samstag 18 Maumlrz 2000 012400

At 31600 111500 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongtgtwouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsgtinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timinggtCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available when DrgtAndrews was alivegtgtRegardsgtTradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Youre absolutely correctintraday charts were not available when DrAndrews was a trader

Im reading between the lines here but if you plan to day-trade using the course techniques ie thepitchfork then I agree that the regular pitchfork would be more useful on intraday charts Otherwisewhipsaw would be a significant problem Please get back to me if I didnt address your questionbecause this is a very important technique The mini-median line pitchfork and sliding parallel showedup on most of Dr Andrews charts

Regards

Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re intraday chartsDate Dienstag 21 Maumlrz 2000 220322

Hello Gordon

You are right Im planning to daytrade SampP futures using the course techniques among other things

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 003408

Hi TradersZone Here are a couple Andrews techniques that will help anticipate the breakout direction of asideways channelThey work often enough to warrant keep handy Regards Gordon In an earlier lesson you were introduced to Dr Andrews sideways count You saw how frequentlythe sideways count method provided high probability price objectives after the breakout from theestablished channel took place In this segment of lesson 4 youll be shown 2 congestion area techniques that can help youdetermine the probable sideways channel price breakout direction Both rely on the use of pivots The first uses the pivot points that are circled on a sideways channel Dr Andrews observed thatwhenever a sideways channel results in at least 5 circle contacts the eventual price breakoutwould very often be in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle If circle 5 is at thetop of the channel for example the eventual price breakout would likely be to the upside If circle5 is at the bottom of the channel look for a downside breakout Dr Andrews noted that thistechnique can be subject to false breakouts but that such breakouts are usually followed shortlyafter with a confirmed breakout in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle Heemphasized that this study is best considered as a rule of thumb observation He viewed it as asupporting indicator for use with a short-term pitchfork as prices approached a channel line There are 2 charts attached that show how this works

The second technique in this part of lesson 4 deals with a sideways channelthat is building shortly after a P3 has been formed Dr Andrews noted thatwhenever that happened the probabilities were high that prices wouldbreakout in the same direction they were moving prior to the formation ofthe sideways channel The attached P3 to sideways example chart shows thisprocedure

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 205235

Hello Gordon here is my example for the 5 circle sideways count RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Lesson 5Date Montag 27 Maumlrz 2000 060731

At 32400 85200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my example for the 5 circle sideways countgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt gt Hi TradersZone Good example of the 5th circle tendency to predict the direction of a sideways breakout Any luckfinding a chart showing the P3 to sideways rule Im sending the first part of the next lesson This trendline method is a useful tool with all of DrAndrews course lines He used it all the time but especially when looking for confirmation of othercourse method trading signals Regards Gordon The Course Trendline__________________________________________________________ Next well discuss the trendline Seasoned traders agree that the trendline is one of their mostimportant tools No matter what kind of trading program or technique they use the trendline on achart is a must But one of the biggest mistakes made by amateurs and professionals alike isinconsistently drawing or defining the trendline Dr Andrews trendline procedure is simpleconsistent and accurate It works extremely well with the pivot count and with the pitchfork For an uptrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the lowest low up and to thehighest minor low point preceding the highest high The line must not pass through prices inbetween the two low points Extend the line(Attached chart of Brightpoint) For a downtrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the highest high point to thelowest minor high point preceding the lowest low so that it does not pass through prices inbetween the two high points Extend the line (Brightpoint chart) Thats all theres to it Its simple consistent and it works well with other Andrews lines It also

helps eliminate personal bias and haphazard analysis Practice drawing these trendlines on your own charts Send me any questions you might have andthen e-mail a chart of your choosing which shows at least two uptrend and two downtrend linesthat youve drawn_______________________________________________________________________

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Lesson 5Date Dienstag 28 Maumlrz 2000 120224

Hello Gordon here is my chart with trendlinesWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going above the trendline again should I draw a new trendline anddelete the old one Attached is another chart with the P3 to sideways rule I finally found an example for it RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Price failure techniqueDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081412

At 32800 120200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my chart with trendlinesgtWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going abovegtthe trendline again should I draw a new trendline and delete the oldgtone Hi TradersZone Take a look at the chart Im returningI added some lines for you to considerWith the course trendline once its broken a new one should be started Theres a technique thatties in with this coming up soon Meanwhile heres an important technique to work on It deals with those times when prices dontreach the ML Regards Gordon Dr Andrews Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P ofreversaland the ML the probability is that this price reversal will go further thanitdid on its approach toward the ML (Extract of original course material) A price failure very often indicates a sizeable reversal will take placeThepitchforks drawn on the chart of Home Depot illustrate the concept of pricefailure Dr Andrews routinely drew a new pitchfork on his chart after a newsignificant pivot had formed He knew that prices had a high probability ofreaching the new ML before stalling out or reversing If prices reversedbeforereaching the ML thereby forming a new pivot he termed it a price failureTheunderlying idea here is that Dr Andrews fully anticipated his median linewouldact as a price magnet To conclude that a price reversal resulted in a price failure Dr Andrewsused

these primary signalsa subsequent price penetration of a short-termmulti-pivotline andor a return of prices to and penetration of the parallel lineformed atpivot 3 of the pitchfork (The circles on the Home Depot chart denote theparallelline penetration signal To avoid clutter the mpl lines were not drawn) One possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart of ConsecoIncLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me a copy

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject ChartDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081800Attachments image002png

Hi TradersZone Forgot the chart Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Price failure techniqueDate Samstag 1 April 2000 201000

gtOne possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart ofgtConseco IncgtLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me agtcopy Hi Gordon here are my charts with price failures RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Mittwoch 5 April 2000 235624

Hi TradersZone Good price failure examples you sentany comments or questions about it Heres the next partanother old standby Dr Andrews kept handy Regards Gordon In this segment youll learn how to use the Fan line Technique To draw the fan lines youll apply the coursetrendline method which was introduced in an earlier lesson It might be well to emphasize that the practicalapplication of the course trendline method requires practice and experience both of which will serve youwell in this technique Dr Andrews used fan lines as an adjunct to his pitchfork sideways channel andactionreaction methods In the fan line study three trendlines are drawn from the original reversal pivot of the price correction understudy typically a P0 or a P5 Youll notice on the charts included with this study that each fan line is at aflatter angle than its predecessor When the third fan line is broken the rule is that the correction has endedand a new trend is under way Try this technique on some of your own charts and then please send me asample

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Donnerstag 6 April 2000 234315

Hi Gordon No I dont have any specific question about the price failure technique I guess the next likely target after a price failure wouldbe the warning line I have attached two charts with fan linesIs it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the third fan line is broken RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Next segmentDate Freitag 7 April 2000 003312

Hello TradersZone

Tuesday April 06 2000 114315 AM you wrote

TZgt Hi Gordon

TZgt No I dont have any specific question about the price failureTZgt technique I guess the next likely target after a price failureTZgt would be the warning line

TZgt I have attached two charts with fan linesTZgt Is it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the thirdTZgt fan line is broken

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Thats right the warning line is the next price target Additionalwarning lines can be drawn if needed but usually one will do it Ifprices go through the first warning line another can be drawn butmost likely a new pitchfork could be drawn instead which would bepreferable Helps stay current with recently formed pivots

When prices break through the third fan line a buy or sell signal isgiven Not sure what you mean by fourth target fan line Im a littledense today

Your chart work was goodthis is another handy tool for spotting thehigh probability of a price reversal or trend change

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject The Gap TradeDate Freitag 7 April 2000 004858

Hello TradersZone This trading signal doesnt show up very often but past observations have shown that its well worth watching for Dr Andrews placed a lot of emphasis on the importance of price gaps something many traders overlook This is one of his gap uses Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom The Gap Trading Technique Price gaps can be a dilemma for many traders The general rule denoting market strength or weakness after ahigh volume gap often comes up short after the initial reaction is over Many gappers simply run out ofsteam A high volume gap in itself seems to offer precious little evidence that a profitable move is about toget under way Dr Andrews used price gaps somewhat differently than others He counted a gap as 2 pivots Youll see howthat works in the following technique which uses a gap to arrive at a price level for a buy or sell order Using short-term daily price pivots label the pivot immediately preceding the gap as p0 Count the gap as 2pivots labeling it p1 amp p2 After p3 has formed and prices reverse towards a short-term p4 draw a horizontalline 2 price tics or more (individual preference)to the right of p3 Enter the market only if prices reach orpenetrate that line within a few days after reversing from p4 Please look over your own charts to see if you can find places where the gap trade technique could have beenused Send me a sample when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 001925

Hello Gordon this is my chart with a gap trade RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 065538

Hello TradersZone Thursday April 08 2000 121925 PM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt this is my chart with a gap trade TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Good examplethe gap trade technique shines when an issue in at or near a P5 Similar to the one on thechart you sent Heres another trading signal tool Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Dr Andrews used several techniques which helped him determine whether a P5 was near at hand Youllrecall that he observed most price moves ended or had a significant reversal at a P5 This technique uses alternate closing prices after a P4 has been formed As with many of his studies thenumber 5 is used The chart accompanying this segment shows that there were 5 alternate closes to thedownside after P4 was put in Dr Andrews noted that whenever 5 or more alternate closes followed a P4 theprobabilities were high that a P5 was near at hand An added feature to this chart study is the sideways channel Notice how the 2nd target price and the 5thalternate close nearly coincide

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 12 April 2000 200730

Hello Gordon This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 13 April 2000 082418

Monday April 12 2000 80730 AM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hello TradersZone Good chart example of this Andrews toolanother of his very unusual observations that workmore often than not Heres the final part of this lesson Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom In this trendline method Dr Andrews once again used the number 5 as the basis for locating aprobable reversal area He found this technique to be especially useful whenever a clear orobvious pivot count didnt show up onthe price move under study Trendlines are drawn using the course trendline method When the 5th trendline is broken theprobability is high that the trend under study has ended A mini-median line pitchfork andorsliding parallel could be used for pricing a trading order The accompanying chart of Compaq Computer is an example of how the trendline study could beused The pivot count beginning at the October low is difficult to nail down There were severalsmall areas of congestion but no sizeable corrections while prices advanced The count wasunclear By following the price action using the course trendline technique however the traderwould have been alerted to the possibility of a change of trend when the 5th trendline was brokenin early February Try this technique on your own charts When youre ready please send me an example of yourstudy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 19 April 2000 124108

Hello Gordon this is my example with 5 trendlines RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[6] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 20 April 2000 012726

Monday April 19 2000 124108 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt this is my example with 5 trendlines

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Good example of the 5 TL technique Always reminds me of how the fairly simple tools often do a better job than manyof the sophisticated studies out there

That was the last part of lesson 5 Lesson 6 attached is made in one mailing Youll find Dr Andrews trading rules alongwith a wrap-up review which uses several of his rules You might have questions about some of the rules so feel free tosend them as they arise

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Dr Andrews had an abbreviated set of trading rules on several index cards that he carried around with him in his shirtpocket He said every trading day turned up something new on his charts and by having his rules in his pocket he wasreminded of the need for a methodical approach to his analysis Quite a comment coming from the man who wrote therule book

In this the final lesson of the course Dr Andrews original trading rules and observations are presented Lets work witha few of them at this point

Using charts of issues you follow please send me an example that illustrates your interpretation of each of the followingrules

Rule 4 Anticipating major Ps

Rule 7 Penetration rule

Rule 8 Price failure rule

Rule 11 1-ML23 AR Centerline

Rule 12 Sliding Parallel rule

Rule 15 Mini-median line parallel to buy or sell

Feel free to include any other course techniques you choose to apply but please include examples of the above as aminimum Use more than one technique on a chart if your analysis supports it Send as many charts as you like alongwith your questionscomments

Lesson 6 - Dr Andrews Trading Rules

This lesson covers course rules and significant observations as taught by Dr Andrews in his original trading course Therules are those that he used in his own trading and are provided to serve as a checklist for use with the course tradingmethods youve learned

Rule 1 Where prices are always headed Rule You course members are among the fortunate few to be able to draw astraight line and know that prices are headed toward that ML Very few investors have ever applied this ML principle ofstatistics to price fluctuations and weve never seen this in any books on investment You are among the very few who

know that prices are always headed toward the newest ML

Rule 2 The Rule of coming opposites applies all through life In the bible we find Blessed at they that mourn for theyshall be comforted As investors we know that any losses can be recovered by using course methods

Rule 3 Turn your mind about or Rethink for all good is at hand We should mentally prepare ourselves for thecoming reversal in prices and other affairs Heres one way for example that you course members who know the MLrules can use When prices are skyrocketing upward we do this preparation by thinking If prices pivoted here today atthis price Id draw a new ML bisecting the distance between todays price and the price from which the rise started Andwe know now that if this is a Major Pivot prices will fall rapidly to this new ML Profits from such drops are big and quick

Rule 4 Rule for anticipating major Ps If during congestion or after a rally or decline you can count four previous Psthe fifth one is highly probable to be the one from which a new trend starts

Rule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can make a quick big profit is to watch for the EPformations

Rule 6 The other reversal rule is that prices tend to reverse at or near any ML as well as at any extension of each MLAnd also at any MLH or extensions of MLH

Rule 7 The Penetration Rule is that whenever prices gap past or plunge through any ML there is a high probability thatthey will quickly return to it temporarily and then resume the trend they had before they gapped or plunged through

Rule 8 Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P of reversal and the MLthe probability is that this price reversal will go further than it did on its approach toward the ML

Rule 9 The price failure rule is negated when the next price trend is also a failure in reaching the ML This is almostinvariably a signal of a big fast move in the direction indicated by this last space Rule 10 When alternate median lines of comparable length slope in the same direction the trend is firm and rapidprice changes take place

Rule 11 When 1-ML23 is exactly reached at P4 it can be used as a highly reliable centerline for the AR method

Rule 12 Frequently after crossing a lower MLH prices continue to rise along the MLH Since the crossing of the MLHsignals a further drop is likely use a sliding parallel along the bottom of the most recent crossing If prices drop past thatsliding parallel line a sell signal is generated

Rule 13 MLs between P2 and P3 can start from a nearby or a remote P1 since prices tend to reverse at each of theseMLs Try several such P2-P3 MLs to discover the best fit

Rule 14 The distance of each MLH from its ML is the distance of the next warning line Use these warning lineswhenever a SH has signalled a buy or sell

Rule 15 Use the MMLH as a buy or sell signal when you expect a reversal because of a P5 Also when prices are at aWL ML extension line or where course lines converge or intersect

Rule 16 Converging lines that meet prices have shown the highest probability of a trend reversal

Rule 17 Two to four days is usually the maximum between P2 and P3 for a MML P1 can be a day or so back from P2and 3

Rule 18 The most reliable ActionReaction centerlines seem to be MPL 2P line 2 Gap line peak to low or low to peak

Rule 19 When prices pass through R lines look for a pull back and then a continuing move in the direction of the passthrough

Rule 20 Use gaps as Action lines from the centerline

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 003755

Hello Gordonhere is my example for Rule 4 And I have a question What are EP formations gtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 021242

Tuesday May 04 2000 123755 PM you wrote TZgt Hello GordonTZgt here is my example for Rule 4 TZgt And I have a question What are EP formations gtgtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegtgta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hi TradersZone Good use of the warning linesalso the EP material is part of lesson 4 Rather than go backthrough the files to see when (or if) it was sent Im sending it along with this reply Glad youbrought it up Best RegardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Tuesday May 04 2000208 PM Dr Andrews used a fairly common price chart formation that he found useful at probable P5market tops and bottoms The formation generally called a wedge or pennant by chartists isreferred to in Dr Andrews trading course as the Expanding Pivot (EP) One of the few chartformations used in the course he regarded it as among the most dependable indications that amarket top was forming Closely related to the EP is his Inverted Expanding Pivot (IEP) which henoted could often be observed at market bottoms Both are regarded as intermediate and long-term reversal indicators Dr Andrews found that both formations were most reliable when they occurred after a sharprapid price move coinciding with the formation of a probable P5 He said it wasnt unusual for theformation to take several weeks to complete and that conservative traders could best avoid thewhipsaw associated with congestion patterns by trading only in the direction of the probable price

break out of the EP or IEP formation The attached charts illustrate these formations Please look over your own charts for an example ofthe EP and IEP and send me a copy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 232127

Hello Gordon Thank you for the lesson with the EP material I couldnt find it in any previous emailHere is my example for Rule 7 RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Rule 4Date Samstag 6 Mai 2000 080827

Wednesday May 05 2000 112127 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt Thank you for the lesson with the EP materialTZgt I couldnt find it in any previous emailTZgt Here is my example for Rule 7

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hi TradersZone

Glad you mentioned it earlierexcept for the EP IEP and hissideways channel Dr Andrews didnt have much to say about chartpatterns and formations These are good ones to use though

Your study of the penetration rule was good Later

Best Regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Wednesday May 05 2000801 PM

Page 34: Pitchfork primer

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Freitag 25 Februar 2000 211356

gtIn the meantime experiment with the multi-pivot centerline on your owngtcharts Then please send me an example of your work along with anygtquestions you may have Hello Gordon I was wondering how many ActionReaction lines could be drawn on a chart On my attached chart I found at least 6 parallellines which had a significant meaning for the price RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject AR linesDate Montag 28 Februar 2000 080128

gtHello Gordongt gtI was wondering how many ActionReaction lines could be drawn on agtchart On my attached chart I found at least 6 parallel lines which hadgta significant meaning for the pricegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hi TradersZone Theres no set number of lines that can be drawnactually the more you can find the betterFinding a good centerline is the key And once you find lines that work such as you did anynumber of parallel lines can be drawn You are doing exactly what Dr Andrews didtaking thetime and effort to find the best fitting sets of lines Each chart has them and each chart is differentas Im sure youve found Nice work Heres the next part Regards Gordon Lesson 3 continued One of Dr Andrews favorite techniques dealt with gapsan often times perplexing price event formany traders His observations over the years suggested to him that while gaps show upfrequently on many price charts few traders have a method for including them as an integral partof their chart analysis Thats not surprising since not much has been published about how toapproach the use of gaps in a trading method Dr Andrews however found several ways to putprice gaps to good use An ActionReaction centerline which uses gaps as its basis is one suchmethod Please refer to the attached chart of Cendant Youll see that a centerline was drawn which passedthrough the July gap Note that it also came in contact with several pivots thereby qualifying as agapmulti-pivot centerline It is drawn by starting at the April low pivot and extending a line acrossand through the gap in mid-July It subsequently touches two additional high pivots Dr Andrews counted each gap as two pivots He noted that the more pivots a line touched the

stronger the line tended to be in the future Good reason then for using the July gap as the basisfor an ActionReaction study Our CL is labelled a gap-mpl-CL The May 98 high was used for the Action Line starting point A line was then drawn parallel to theCenterline as per ActionReaction procedure The corresponding Reaction Line was then drawn inIf this particular study had been drawn on Cendants chart right after the July gap was put in thepotential for prices to go all the way down to the Reaction Line might have seemed very slim at thetime Notice however that prices reached the Reaction Line in early September Youll see thishappen time and again as you work with the AR method The core of its effectiveness is a strongCL Please send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts of your choice

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re AR linesDate Montag 28 Februar 2000 155937

gtPlease send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts of yourgtchoice Hello Gordonhere are my examples RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject More on the ARDate Donnerstag 2 Maumlrz 2000 071158

At 22800 35900 PM you wrotegtgtPlease send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts ofgtgtyour choicegt gtHello Gordongthere are my examplesgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone You picked some good examples to use for your AR study Both showed the potential power of thismethod Takes time and lots of chart study sometimes to find the best set of lines but the rewardscan be many Heres something else to look at Regards Gordon The ActionReaction technique requires a strong centerline from which to begin The key todeciding which set of pivots to use for the centerline is found through experimenting with thevarious configurations visible on the chart under study The centerline might be a series of gapspivots an existing median line or any of Dr Andrews lines The task is to search for that centerlinewhich shows the greatest potential for projecting price reversal areas Dr Andrews did that byfinding a likely centerline near the middle of his price chart That allowed him to use any of theprevious pivots for his action lines By experimenting he found reaction lines that did the best jobof pegging reversal areas at data points located forward of the centerline Reaction lines are equal and opposite of the action lines and serve to project price levels at whicha reversal can be expected That is why the task of seeking out the best centerline is so importantDr Andrews reasoned that a series of reaction lines which have pegged price reversals in the pastis likely to continue to be in tune with current and future market price action Having severalprevious pivots to use as anchors for drawing action lines is thus essential The attached chart of Lattice illustrates this concept Please bear in mind that the gapmplcenterline is not the only centerline one could use on this chart You might want to study the chartfor other AR possibilities Try a peak-to-peak CL or a multi-pivot CL Send me your studies along

with any questions

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re More on the ARDate Samstag 4 Maumlrz 2000 002521

gtThe attached chart of Lattice illustrates this conceptgtPlease bear in mind that the gapmpl centerline is not the onlygtcenterline one could use on this chartgtYou might want to study the chart for other AR possibilitiesgtTry a peak-to-peak CL or a multi-pivot CL Send me your studiesgtalong with any questions Hello Gordonhere is my chart RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Peak to peak clDate Sonntag 5 Maumlrz 2000 064107

At 3400 122500 AM you wrotegtHello Gordongthere is my chartgt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Looks like you have the concept down Takes time and a lot of chart work to find the bestcenterline When the reaction lines dont seem to peg reversal areas chances are the centerline isnot the one that is best in tune with the price action of the issue under studyDespite the time required for this method it was one of Dr Andrews stand-bysAR lines could befound on most of his charts Im sending a chart with an example of a peak-to-peak CL Regards Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Peak to peak clDate Sonntag 5 Maumlrz 2000 171232

Hello Gordon I think the peak-to-peak CL on the last chart I sent to you was not really drawn from peak to peakIm sending another example RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next LessonDate Mittwoch 8 Maumlrz 2000 072526

At 3500 51200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtI think the peak-to-peak CL on the last chart I sent to you was notgtreally drawn from peak to peakgtIm sending another examplegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your peak to peak cl example was correctly drawn Thats a fairly simple approach but quite oftenthe peak to peak yields better reaction lines Heres the first part of the next lesson Regards Gordon Youll find times when prices dont quite reach the ML but instead drift alongside or away from itThe Schiff ML was designed to be used in place of the regular ML whenever that happens Suchprice action can be found at any place on a chart but most frequently occurs after a sharp sell-offor run-up of prices Dr Andrews also used the Schiff ML whenever his regular ML sloped at an unusually steep angleHe said it helped smooth out irregular price action such as that caused by unexpected earningsnews crop planting delays or poor growing conditions crop production reports etc Youll findnearly vertical price moves over a short period of time on many charts The Schiff ML method helpsput things back in perspective when that happens Well use the chart of Sterling Bancorp as an example of prices drifting away from the regular MLThat ML is drawn in black Prices didnt quite reach the ML but drifted alongside and eventuallyaway from it The Schiff ML and parallel lines are drawn in red Notice how prices were containedwithin the Schiff pitchfork until they finally broke down at the upper parallel line The procedure for drawing the Schiff ML is the same as for the regular ML except the startingpoint is located midway between the first 2 pivots youll be using The Sterling Bancorp chart

illustrates how this is done Dr Andrews also suggested using the Schiff ML whenever the regular ML method doesnt seem tobe in sync with price action Practice this procedure on your own charts and send a couple examples when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next LessonDate Donnerstag 9 Maumlrz 2000 001143

Hello Gordon in my charting software (Dynamic Trader) the Schiff ML is drawn by finding the midpoint of the line between pivot A and pivot Bmoving this point horizontally to directly above or below (depending on whether A is a low or high pivot) the A pivot anddrawing a line from his point through the midpoint of the BC swingAre there different methods of drawing a Schiff MLI was too lazy to draw Schiff MLs by hand with the method you described so Im sending my examples with the Dynamic TraderSchiff MLs -) RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject SchiffDate Samstag 11 Maumlrz 2000 070226

At 3900 121100 AM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtin my charting software (Dynamic Trader) the Schiff ML is drawn bygtfinding the midpoint of the line between pivot A and pivot B movinggtthis point horizontally to directly above or below (depending ongtwhether A is a low or high pivot) the A pivot and drawing a linegtgtfrom his point through the midpoint of the BC swinggtAre there different methods of drawing a Schiff MLgtI was too lazy to draw Schiff MLs by hand with the method yougtdescribed so Im sending my examples with the Dynamic Trader Schiff MLs -)gt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your program Schiff line procedure is fineits actually what Dr Andrews called a modified schiff ml and is onlyslightly different than the one I sent you initially The one you used is preferred by most course members Im sendingthe modified Schiff lesson and a chart along with this email The chart example shows how to use it with 0-34 pivots Regards Gordon

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Sliding Parallel LineDate Montag 13 Maumlrz 2000 005252

Hello TradersZone Heres one of the tools Dr Andrews used most often when entering exiting or reversing marketpositions Not many people know about this technique Regards Gordon The Sliding Parallel (SH) is drawn whenever prices cross an Andrews line and then move along itFor example if the bottom of a daily price bar range drops through a lower parallel line of apitchfork a new parallel line is then drawn from that low and extended to the right If the nextdays price bar drops through that sliding parallel line a sell signal is generated Whenever price action dictates a sliding parallel the next step is to draw a Warning Line Thewarning line is an additional parallel line that is an image extension of the original pitchforkchannels It serves as a warning that if prices penetrate the sliding parallel the next likely target isthe WL The attached chart of Avis illustrates these procedures Please try these on your own charts andsend me an example

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Sliding Parallel LineDate Dienstag 14 Maumlrz 2000 225737

Hello Gordon this is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning line RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 065606

At 31400 105700 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtthis is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning linegt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone Your chart of circuit city was a good example for this study I may have mentioned it earlier but DrAndrews used this technique on a regular basis The next part of this lesson covers another of hisfavorite tools the mini-median line pitchfork Here it is Regards Gordon The Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry and exit tools Though mostoften drawn using alternate closing prices alternate highs and lows can also be usedin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days is usually the maximumbetween pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or more back from P2 Dr Andrews used Mini-Median Line pitchforks for buy and sell signals whenever he expected areversal Some examples include a probable P5 or when prices are at a Warning Line ML MLHmajor ML extension or a sideways channel price target When prices cross the Mini-Median LineParallel (MMLH) a sliding parallel (SH) is used for order entry

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 231537

gtThe Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry andgtexit tools Though most often drawn using alternate closing pricesgtalternate highs and lows can also be usedgtin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days isgtusually the maximum between pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or moregtback from P2

Hello Gordon

wouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timingCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available whenDr Andrews was alive

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject intraday chartsDate Samstag 18 Maumlrz 2000 012400

At 31600 111500 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongtgtwouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsgtinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timinggtCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available when DrgtAndrews was alivegtgtRegardsgtTradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Youre absolutely correctintraday charts were not available when DrAndrews was a trader

Im reading between the lines here but if you plan to day-trade using the course techniques ie thepitchfork then I agree that the regular pitchfork would be more useful on intraday charts Otherwisewhipsaw would be a significant problem Please get back to me if I didnt address your questionbecause this is a very important technique The mini-median line pitchfork and sliding parallel showedup on most of Dr Andrews charts

Regards

Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re intraday chartsDate Dienstag 21 Maumlrz 2000 220322

Hello Gordon

You are right Im planning to daytrade SampP futures using the course techniques among other things

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 003408

Hi TradersZone Here are a couple Andrews techniques that will help anticipate the breakout direction of asideways channelThey work often enough to warrant keep handy Regards Gordon In an earlier lesson you were introduced to Dr Andrews sideways count You saw how frequentlythe sideways count method provided high probability price objectives after the breakout from theestablished channel took place In this segment of lesson 4 youll be shown 2 congestion area techniques that can help youdetermine the probable sideways channel price breakout direction Both rely on the use of pivots The first uses the pivot points that are circled on a sideways channel Dr Andrews observed thatwhenever a sideways channel results in at least 5 circle contacts the eventual price breakoutwould very often be in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle If circle 5 is at thetop of the channel for example the eventual price breakout would likely be to the upside If circle5 is at the bottom of the channel look for a downside breakout Dr Andrews noted that thistechnique can be subject to false breakouts but that such breakouts are usually followed shortlyafter with a confirmed breakout in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle Heemphasized that this study is best considered as a rule of thumb observation He viewed it as asupporting indicator for use with a short-term pitchfork as prices approached a channel line There are 2 charts attached that show how this works

The second technique in this part of lesson 4 deals with a sideways channelthat is building shortly after a P3 has been formed Dr Andrews noted thatwhenever that happened the probabilities were high that prices wouldbreakout in the same direction they were moving prior to the formation ofthe sideways channel The attached P3 to sideways example chart shows thisprocedure

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 205235

Hello Gordon here is my example for the 5 circle sideways count RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Lesson 5Date Montag 27 Maumlrz 2000 060731

At 32400 85200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my example for the 5 circle sideways countgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt gt Hi TradersZone Good example of the 5th circle tendency to predict the direction of a sideways breakout Any luckfinding a chart showing the P3 to sideways rule Im sending the first part of the next lesson This trendline method is a useful tool with all of DrAndrews course lines He used it all the time but especially when looking for confirmation of othercourse method trading signals Regards Gordon The Course Trendline__________________________________________________________ Next well discuss the trendline Seasoned traders agree that the trendline is one of their mostimportant tools No matter what kind of trading program or technique they use the trendline on achart is a must But one of the biggest mistakes made by amateurs and professionals alike isinconsistently drawing or defining the trendline Dr Andrews trendline procedure is simpleconsistent and accurate It works extremely well with the pivot count and with the pitchfork For an uptrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the lowest low up and to thehighest minor low point preceding the highest high The line must not pass through prices inbetween the two low points Extend the line(Attached chart of Brightpoint) For a downtrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the highest high point to thelowest minor high point preceding the lowest low so that it does not pass through prices inbetween the two high points Extend the line (Brightpoint chart) Thats all theres to it Its simple consistent and it works well with other Andrews lines It also

helps eliminate personal bias and haphazard analysis Practice drawing these trendlines on your own charts Send me any questions you might have andthen e-mail a chart of your choosing which shows at least two uptrend and two downtrend linesthat youve drawn_______________________________________________________________________

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Lesson 5Date Dienstag 28 Maumlrz 2000 120224

Hello Gordon here is my chart with trendlinesWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going above the trendline again should I draw a new trendline anddelete the old one Attached is another chart with the P3 to sideways rule I finally found an example for it RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Price failure techniqueDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081412

At 32800 120200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my chart with trendlinesgtWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going abovegtthe trendline again should I draw a new trendline and delete the oldgtone Hi TradersZone Take a look at the chart Im returningI added some lines for you to considerWith the course trendline once its broken a new one should be started Theres a technique thatties in with this coming up soon Meanwhile heres an important technique to work on It deals with those times when prices dontreach the ML Regards Gordon Dr Andrews Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P ofreversaland the ML the probability is that this price reversal will go further thanitdid on its approach toward the ML (Extract of original course material) A price failure very often indicates a sizeable reversal will take placeThepitchforks drawn on the chart of Home Depot illustrate the concept of pricefailure Dr Andrews routinely drew a new pitchfork on his chart after a newsignificant pivot had formed He knew that prices had a high probability ofreaching the new ML before stalling out or reversing If prices reversedbeforereaching the ML thereby forming a new pivot he termed it a price failureTheunderlying idea here is that Dr Andrews fully anticipated his median linewouldact as a price magnet To conclude that a price reversal resulted in a price failure Dr Andrewsused

these primary signalsa subsequent price penetration of a short-termmulti-pivotline andor a return of prices to and penetration of the parallel lineformed atpivot 3 of the pitchfork (The circles on the Home Depot chart denote theparallelline penetration signal To avoid clutter the mpl lines were not drawn) One possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart of ConsecoIncLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me a copy

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject ChartDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081800Attachments image002png

Hi TradersZone Forgot the chart Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Price failure techniqueDate Samstag 1 April 2000 201000

gtOne possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart ofgtConseco IncgtLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me agtcopy Hi Gordon here are my charts with price failures RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Mittwoch 5 April 2000 235624

Hi TradersZone Good price failure examples you sentany comments or questions about it Heres the next partanother old standby Dr Andrews kept handy Regards Gordon In this segment youll learn how to use the Fan line Technique To draw the fan lines youll apply the coursetrendline method which was introduced in an earlier lesson It might be well to emphasize that the practicalapplication of the course trendline method requires practice and experience both of which will serve youwell in this technique Dr Andrews used fan lines as an adjunct to his pitchfork sideways channel andactionreaction methods In the fan line study three trendlines are drawn from the original reversal pivot of the price correction understudy typically a P0 or a P5 Youll notice on the charts included with this study that each fan line is at aflatter angle than its predecessor When the third fan line is broken the rule is that the correction has endedand a new trend is under way Try this technique on some of your own charts and then please send me asample

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Donnerstag 6 April 2000 234315

Hi Gordon No I dont have any specific question about the price failure technique I guess the next likely target after a price failure wouldbe the warning line I have attached two charts with fan linesIs it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the third fan line is broken RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Next segmentDate Freitag 7 April 2000 003312

Hello TradersZone

Tuesday April 06 2000 114315 AM you wrote

TZgt Hi Gordon

TZgt No I dont have any specific question about the price failureTZgt technique I guess the next likely target after a price failureTZgt would be the warning line

TZgt I have attached two charts with fan linesTZgt Is it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the thirdTZgt fan line is broken

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Thats right the warning line is the next price target Additionalwarning lines can be drawn if needed but usually one will do it Ifprices go through the first warning line another can be drawn butmost likely a new pitchfork could be drawn instead which would bepreferable Helps stay current with recently formed pivots

When prices break through the third fan line a buy or sell signal isgiven Not sure what you mean by fourth target fan line Im a littledense today

Your chart work was goodthis is another handy tool for spotting thehigh probability of a price reversal or trend change

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject The Gap TradeDate Freitag 7 April 2000 004858

Hello TradersZone This trading signal doesnt show up very often but past observations have shown that its well worth watching for Dr Andrews placed a lot of emphasis on the importance of price gaps something many traders overlook This is one of his gap uses Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom The Gap Trading Technique Price gaps can be a dilemma for many traders The general rule denoting market strength or weakness after ahigh volume gap often comes up short after the initial reaction is over Many gappers simply run out ofsteam A high volume gap in itself seems to offer precious little evidence that a profitable move is about toget under way Dr Andrews used price gaps somewhat differently than others He counted a gap as 2 pivots Youll see howthat works in the following technique which uses a gap to arrive at a price level for a buy or sell order Using short-term daily price pivots label the pivot immediately preceding the gap as p0 Count the gap as 2pivots labeling it p1 amp p2 After p3 has formed and prices reverse towards a short-term p4 draw a horizontalline 2 price tics or more (individual preference)to the right of p3 Enter the market only if prices reach orpenetrate that line within a few days after reversing from p4 Please look over your own charts to see if you can find places where the gap trade technique could have beenused Send me a sample when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 001925

Hello Gordon this is my chart with a gap trade RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 065538

Hello TradersZone Thursday April 08 2000 121925 PM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt this is my chart with a gap trade TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Good examplethe gap trade technique shines when an issue in at or near a P5 Similar to the one on thechart you sent Heres another trading signal tool Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Dr Andrews used several techniques which helped him determine whether a P5 was near at hand Youllrecall that he observed most price moves ended or had a significant reversal at a P5 This technique uses alternate closing prices after a P4 has been formed As with many of his studies thenumber 5 is used The chart accompanying this segment shows that there were 5 alternate closes to thedownside after P4 was put in Dr Andrews noted that whenever 5 or more alternate closes followed a P4 theprobabilities were high that a P5 was near at hand An added feature to this chart study is the sideways channel Notice how the 2nd target price and the 5thalternate close nearly coincide

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 12 April 2000 200730

Hello Gordon This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 13 April 2000 082418

Monday April 12 2000 80730 AM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hello TradersZone Good chart example of this Andrews toolanother of his very unusual observations that workmore often than not Heres the final part of this lesson Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom In this trendline method Dr Andrews once again used the number 5 as the basis for locating aprobable reversal area He found this technique to be especially useful whenever a clear orobvious pivot count didnt show up onthe price move under study Trendlines are drawn using the course trendline method When the 5th trendline is broken theprobability is high that the trend under study has ended A mini-median line pitchfork andorsliding parallel could be used for pricing a trading order The accompanying chart of Compaq Computer is an example of how the trendline study could beused The pivot count beginning at the October low is difficult to nail down There were severalsmall areas of congestion but no sizeable corrections while prices advanced The count wasunclear By following the price action using the course trendline technique however the traderwould have been alerted to the possibility of a change of trend when the 5th trendline was brokenin early February Try this technique on your own charts When youre ready please send me an example of yourstudy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 19 April 2000 124108

Hello Gordon this is my example with 5 trendlines RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[6] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 20 April 2000 012726

Monday April 19 2000 124108 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt this is my example with 5 trendlines

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Good example of the 5 TL technique Always reminds me of how the fairly simple tools often do a better job than manyof the sophisticated studies out there

That was the last part of lesson 5 Lesson 6 attached is made in one mailing Youll find Dr Andrews trading rules alongwith a wrap-up review which uses several of his rules You might have questions about some of the rules so feel free tosend them as they arise

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Dr Andrews had an abbreviated set of trading rules on several index cards that he carried around with him in his shirtpocket He said every trading day turned up something new on his charts and by having his rules in his pocket he wasreminded of the need for a methodical approach to his analysis Quite a comment coming from the man who wrote therule book

In this the final lesson of the course Dr Andrews original trading rules and observations are presented Lets work witha few of them at this point

Using charts of issues you follow please send me an example that illustrates your interpretation of each of the followingrules

Rule 4 Anticipating major Ps

Rule 7 Penetration rule

Rule 8 Price failure rule

Rule 11 1-ML23 AR Centerline

Rule 12 Sliding Parallel rule

Rule 15 Mini-median line parallel to buy or sell

Feel free to include any other course techniques you choose to apply but please include examples of the above as aminimum Use more than one technique on a chart if your analysis supports it Send as many charts as you like alongwith your questionscomments

Lesson 6 - Dr Andrews Trading Rules

This lesson covers course rules and significant observations as taught by Dr Andrews in his original trading course Therules are those that he used in his own trading and are provided to serve as a checklist for use with the course tradingmethods youve learned

Rule 1 Where prices are always headed Rule You course members are among the fortunate few to be able to draw astraight line and know that prices are headed toward that ML Very few investors have ever applied this ML principle ofstatistics to price fluctuations and weve never seen this in any books on investment You are among the very few who

know that prices are always headed toward the newest ML

Rule 2 The Rule of coming opposites applies all through life In the bible we find Blessed at they that mourn for theyshall be comforted As investors we know that any losses can be recovered by using course methods

Rule 3 Turn your mind about or Rethink for all good is at hand We should mentally prepare ourselves for thecoming reversal in prices and other affairs Heres one way for example that you course members who know the MLrules can use When prices are skyrocketing upward we do this preparation by thinking If prices pivoted here today atthis price Id draw a new ML bisecting the distance between todays price and the price from which the rise started Andwe know now that if this is a Major Pivot prices will fall rapidly to this new ML Profits from such drops are big and quick

Rule 4 Rule for anticipating major Ps If during congestion or after a rally or decline you can count four previous Psthe fifth one is highly probable to be the one from which a new trend starts

Rule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can make a quick big profit is to watch for the EPformations

Rule 6 The other reversal rule is that prices tend to reverse at or near any ML as well as at any extension of each MLAnd also at any MLH or extensions of MLH

Rule 7 The Penetration Rule is that whenever prices gap past or plunge through any ML there is a high probability thatthey will quickly return to it temporarily and then resume the trend they had before they gapped or plunged through

Rule 8 Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P of reversal and the MLthe probability is that this price reversal will go further than it did on its approach toward the ML

Rule 9 The price failure rule is negated when the next price trend is also a failure in reaching the ML This is almostinvariably a signal of a big fast move in the direction indicated by this last space Rule 10 When alternate median lines of comparable length slope in the same direction the trend is firm and rapidprice changes take place

Rule 11 When 1-ML23 is exactly reached at P4 it can be used as a highly reliable centerline for the AR method

Rule 12 Frequently after crossing a lower MLH prices continue to rise along the MLH Since the crossing of the MLHsignals a further drop is likely use a sliding parallel along the bottom of the most recent crossing If prices drop past thatsliding parallel line a sell signal is generated

Rule 13 MLs between P2 and P3 can start from a nearby or a remote P1 since prices tend to reverse at each of theseMLs Try several such P2-P3 MLs to discover the best fit

Rule 14 The distance of each MLH from its ML is the distance of the next warning line Use these warning lineswhenever a SH has signalled a buy or sell

Rule 15 Use the MMLH as a buy or sell signal when you expect a reversal because of a P5 Also when prices are at aWL ML extension line or where course lines converge or intersect

Rule 16 Converging lines that meet prices have shown the highest probability of a trend reversal

Rule 17 Two to four days is usually the maximum between P2 and P3 for a MML P1 can be a day or so back from P2and 3

Rule 18 The most reliable ActionReaction centerlines seem to be MPL 2P line 2 Gap line peak to low or low to peak

Rule 19 When prices pass through R lines look for a pull back and then a continuing move in the direction of the passthrough

Rule 20 Use gaps as Action lines from the centerline

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 003755

Hello Gordonhere is my example for Rule 4 And I have a question What are EP formations gtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 021242

Tuesday May 04 2000 123755 PM you wrote TZgt Hello GordonTZgt here is my example for Rule 4 TZgt And I have a question What are EP formations gtgtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegtgta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hi TradersZone Good use of the warning linesalso the EP material is part of lesson 4 Rather than go backthrough the files to see when (or if) it was sent Im sending it along with this reply Glad youbrought it up Best RegardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Tuesday May 04 2000208 PM Dr Andrews used a fairly common price chart formation that he found useful at probable P5market tops and bottoms The formation generally called a wedge or pennant by chartists isreferred to in Dr Andrews trading course as the Expanding Pivot (EP) One of the few chartformations used in the course he regarded it as among the most dependable indications that amarket top was forming Closely related to the EP is his Inverted Expanding Pivot (IEP) which henoted could often be observed at market bottoms Both are regarded as intermediate and long-term reversal indicators Dr Andrews found that both formations were most reliable when they occurred after a sharprapid price move coinciding with the formation of a probable P5 He said it wasnt unusual for theformation to take several weeks to complete and that conservative traders could best avoid thewhipsaw associated with congestion patterns by trading only in the direction of the probable price

break out of the EP or IEP formation The attached charts illustrate these formations Please look over your own charts for an example ofthe EP and IEP and send me a copy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 232127

Hello Gordon Thank you for the lesson with the EP material I couldnt find it in any previous emailHere is my example for Rule 7 RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Rule 4Date Samstag 6 Mai 2000 080827

Wednesday May 05 2000 112127 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt Thank you for the lesson with the EP materialTZgt I couldnt find it in any previous emailTZgt Here is my example for Rule 7

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hi TradersZone

Glad you mentioned it earlierexcept for the EP IEP and hissideways channel Dr Andrews didnt have much to say about chartpatterns and formations These are good ones to use though

Your study of the penetration rule was good Later

Best Regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Wednesday May 05 2000801 PM

Page 35: Pitchfork primer

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject AR linesDate Montag 28 Februar 2000 080128

gtHello Gordongt gtI was wondering how many ActionReaction lines could be drawn on agtchart On my attached chart I found at least 6 parallel lines which hadgta significant meaning for the pricegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hi TradersZone Theres no set number of lines that can be drawnactually the more you can find the betterFinding a good centerline is the key And once you find lines that work such as you did anynumber of parallel lines can be drawn You are doing exactly what Dr Andrews didtaking thetime and effort to find the best fitting sets of lines Each chart has them and each chart is differentas Im sure youve found Nice work Heres the next part Regards Gordon Lesson 3 continued One of Dr Andrews favorite techniques dealt with gapsan often times perplexing price event formany traders His observations over the years suggested to him that while gaps show upfrequently on many price charts few traders have a method for including them as an integral partof their chart analysis Thats not surprising since not much has been published about how toapproach the use of gaps in a trading method Dr Andrews however found several ways to putprice gaps to good use An ActionReaction centerline which uses gaps as its basis is one suchmethod Please refer to the attached chart of Cendant Youll see that a centerline was drawn which passedthrough the July gap Note that it also came in contact with several pivots thereby qualifying as agapmulti-pivot centerline It is drawn by starting at the April low pivot and extending a line acrossand through the gap in mid-July It subsequently touches two additional high pivots Dr Andrews counted each gap as two pivots He noted that the more pivots a line touched the

stronger the line tended to be in the future Good reason then for using the July gap as the basisfor an ActionReaction study Our CL is labelled a gap-mpl-CL The May 98 high was used for the Action Line starting point A line was then drawn parallel to theCenterline as per ActionReaction procedure The corresponding Reaction Line was then drawn inIf this particular study had been drawn on Cendants chart right after the July gap was put in thepotential for prices to go all the way down to the Reaction Line might have seemed very slim at thetime Notice however that prices reached the Reaction Line in early September Youll see thishappen time and again as you work with the AR method The core of its effectiveness is a strongCL Please send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts of your choice

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re AR linesDate Montag 28 Februar 2000 155937

gtPlease send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts of yourgtchoice Hello Gordonhere are my examples RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject More on the ARDate Donnerstag 2 Maumlrz 2000 071158

At 22800 35900 PM you wrotegtgtPlease send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts ofgtgtyour choicegt gtHello Gordongthere are my examplesgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone You picked some good examples to use for your AR study Both showed the potential power of thismethod Takes time and lots of chart study sometimes to find the best set of lines but the rewardscan be many Heres something else to look at Regards Gordon The ActionReaction technique requires a strong centerline from which to begin The key todeciding which set of pivots to use for the centerline is found through experimenting with thevarious configurations visible on the chart under study The centerline might be a series of gapspivots an existing median line or any of Dr Andrews lines The task is to search for that centerlinewhich shows the greatest potential for projecting price reversal areas Dr Andrews did that byfinding a likely centerline near the middle of his price chart That allowed him to use any of theprevious pivots for his action lines By experimenting he found reaction lines that did the best jobof pegging reversal areas at data points located forward of the centerline Reaction lines are equal and opposite of the action lines and serve to project price levels at whicha reversal can be expected That is why the task of seeking out the best centerline is so importantDr Andrews reasoned that a series of reaction lines which have pegged price reversals in the pastis likely to continue to be in tune with current and future market price action Having severalprevious pivots to use as anchors for drawing action lines is thus essential The attached chart of Lattice illustrates this concept Please bear in mind that the gapmplcenterline is not the only centerline one could use on this chart You might want to study the chartfor other AR possibilities Try a peak-to-peak CL or a multi-pivot CL Send me your studies along

with any questions

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re More on the ARDate Samstag 4 Maumlrz 2000 002521

gtThe attached chart of Lattice illustrates this conceptgtPlease bear in mind that the gapmpl centerline is not the onlygtcenterline one could use on this chartgtYou might want to study the chart for other AR possibilitiesgtTry a peak-to-peak CL or a multi-pivot CL Send me your studiesgtalong with any questions Hello Gordonhere is my chart RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Peak to peak clDate Sonntag 5 Maumlrz 2000 064107

At 3400 122500 AM you wrotegtHello Gordongthere is my chartgt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Looks like you have the concept down Takes time and a lot of chart work to find the bestcenterline When the reaction lines dont seem to peg reversal areas chances are the centerline isnot the one that is best in tune with the price action of the issue under studyDespite the time required for this method it was one of Dr Andrews stand-bysAR lines could befound on most of his charts Im sending a chart with an example of a peak-to-peak CL Regards Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Peak to peak clDate Sonntag 5 Maumlrz 2000 171232

Hello Gordon I think the peak-to-peak CL on the last chart I sent to you was not really drawn from peak to peakIm sending another example RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next LessonDate Mittwoch 8 Maumlrz 2000 072526

At 3500 51200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtI think the peak-to-peak CL on the last chart I sent to you was notgtreally drawn from peak to peakgtIm sending another examplegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your peak to peak cl example was correctly drawn Thats a fairly simple approach but quite oftenthe peak to peak yields better reaction lines Heres the first part of the next lesson Regards Gordon Youll find times when prices dont quite reach the ML but instead drift alongside or away from itThe Schiff ML was designed to be used in place of the regular ML whenever that happens Suchprice action can be found at any place on a chart but most frequently occurs after a sharp sell-offor run-up of prices Dr Andrews also used the Schiff ML whenever his regular ML sloped at an unusually steep angleHe said it helped smooth out irregular price action such as that caused by unexpected earningsnews crop planting delays or poor growing conditions crop production reports etc Youll findnearly vertical price moves over a short period of time on many charts The Schiff ML method helpsput things back in perspective when that happens Well use the chart of Sterling Bancorp as an example of prices drifting away from the regular MLThat ML is drawn in black Prices didnt quite reach the ML but drifted alongside and eventuallyaway from it The Schiff ML and parallel lines are drawn in red Notice how prices were containedwithin the Schiff pitchfork until they finally broke down at the upper parallel line The procedure for drawing the Schiff ML is the same as for the regular ML except the startingpoint is located midway between the first 2 pivots youll be using The Sterling Bancorp chart

illustrates how this is done Dr Andrews also suggested using the Schiff ML whenever the regular ML method doesnt seem tobe in sync with price action Practice this procedure on your own charts and send a couple examples when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next LessonDate Donnerstag 9 Maumlrz 2000 001143

Hello Gordon in my charting software (Dynamic Trader) the Schiff ML is drawn by finding the midpoint of the line between pivot A and pivot Bmoving this point horizontally to directly above or below (depending on whether A is a low or high pivot) the A pivot anddrawing a line from his point through the midpoint of the BC swingAre there different methods of drawing a Schiff MLI was too lazy to draw Schiff MLs by hand with the method you described so Im sending my examples with the Dynamic TraderSchiff MLs -) RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject SchiffDate Samstag 11 Maumlrz 2000 070226

At 3900 121100 AM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtin my charting software (Dynamic Trader) the Schiff ML is drawn bygtfinding the midpoint of the line between pivot A and pivot B movinggtthis point horizontally to directly above or below (depending ongtwhether A is a low or high pivot) the A pivot and drawing a linegtgtfrom his point through the midpoint of the BC swinggtAre there different methods of drawing a Schiff MLgtI was too lazy to draw Schiff MLs by hand with the method yougtdescribed so Im sending my examples with the Dynamic Trader Schiff MLs -)gt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your program Schiff line procedure is fineits actually what Dr Andrews called a modified schiff ml and is onlyslightly different than the one I sent you initially The one you used is preferred by most course members Im sendingthe modified Schiff lesson and a chart along with this email The chart example shows how to use it with 0-34 pivots Regards Gordon

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Sliding Parallel LineDate Montag 13 Maumlrz 2000 005252

Hello TradersZone Heres one of the tools Dr Andrews used most often when entering exiting or reversing marketpositions Not many people know about this technique Regards Gordon The Sliding Parallel (SH) is drawn whenever prices cross an Andrews line and then move along itFor example if the bottom of a daily price bar range drops through a lower parallel line of apitchfork a new parallel line is then drawn from that low and extended to the right If the nextdays price bar drops through that sliding parallel line a sell signal is generated Whenever price action dictates a sliding parallel the next step is to draw a Warning Line Thewarning line is an additional parallel line that is an image extension of the original pitchforkchannels It serves as a warning that if prices penetrate the sliding parallel the next likely target isthe WL The attached chart of Avis illustrates these procedures Please try these on your own charts andsend me an example

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Sliding Parallel LineDate Dienstag 14 Maumlrz 2000 225737

Hello Gordon this is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning line RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 065606

At 31400 105700 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtthis is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning linegt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone Your chart of circuit city was a good example for this study I may have mentioned it earlier but DrAndrews used this technique on a regular basis The next part of this lesson covers another of hisfavorite tools the mini-median line pitchfork Here it is Regards Gordon The Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry and exit tools Though mostoften drawn using alternate closing prices alternate highs and lows can also be usedin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days is usually the maximumbetween pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or more back from P2 Dr Andrews used Mini-Median Line pitchforks for buy and sell signals whenever he expected areversal Some examples include a probable P5 or when prices are at a Warning Line ML MLHmajor ML extension or a sideways channel price target When prices cross the Mini-Median LineParallel (MMLH) a sliding parallel (SH) is used for order entry

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 231537

gtThe Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry andgtexit tools Though most often drawn using alternate closing pricesgtalternate highs and lows can also be usedgtin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days isgtusually the maximum between pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or moregtback from P2

Hello Gordon

wouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timingCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available whenDr Andrews was alive

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject intraday chartsDate Samstag 18 Maumlrz 2000 012400

At 31600 111500 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongtgtwouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsgtinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timinggtCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available when DrgtAndrews was alivegtgtRegardsgtTradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Youre absolutely correctintraday charts were not available when DrAndrews was a trader

Im reading between the lines here but if you plan to day-trade using the course techniques ie thepitchfork then I agree that the regular pitchfork would be more useful on intraday charts Otherwisewhipsaw would be a significant problem Please get back to me if I didnt address your questionbecause this is a very important technique The mini-median line pitchfork and sliding parallel showedup on most of Dr Andrews charts

Regards

Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re intraday chartsDate Dienstag 21 Maumlrz 2000 220322

Hello Gordon

You are right Im planning to daytrade SampP futures using the course techniques among other things

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 003408

Hi TradersZone Here are a couple Andrews techniques that will help anticipate the breakout direction of asideways channelThey work often enough to warrant keep handy Regards Gordon In an earlier lesson you were introduced to Dr Andrews sideways count You saw how frequentlythe sideways count method provided high probability price objectives after the breakout from theestablished channel took place In this segment of lesson 4 youll be shown 2 congestion area techniques that can help youdetermine the probable sideways channel price breakout direction Both rely on the use of pivots The first uses the pivot points that are circled on a sideways channel Dr Andrews observed thatwhenever a sideways channel results in at least 5 circle contacts the eventual price breakoutwould very often be in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle If circle 5 is at thetop of the channel for example the eventual price breakout would likely be to the upside If circle5 is at the bottom of the channel look for a downside breakout Dr Andrews noted that thistechnique can be subject to false breakouts but that such breakouts are usually followed shortlyafter with a confirmed breakout in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle Heemphasized that this study is best considered as a rule of thumb observation He viewed it as asupporting indicator for use with a short-term pitchfork as prices approached a channel line There are 2 charts attached that show how this works

The second technique in this part of lesson 4 deals with a sideways channelthat is building shortly after a P3 has been formed Dr Andrews noted thatwhenever that happened the probabilities were high that prices wouldbreakout in the same direction they were moving prior to the formation ofthe sideways channel The attached P3 to sideways example chart shows thisprocedure

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 205235

Hello Gordon here is my example for the 5 circle sideways count RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Lesson 5Date Montag 27 Maumlrz 2000 060731

At 32400 85200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my example for the 5 circle sideways countgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt gt Hi TradersZone Good example of the 5th circle tendency to predict the direction of a sideways breakout Any luckfinding a chart showing the P3 to sideways rule Im sending the first part of the next lesson This trendline method is a useful tool with all of DrAndrews course lines He used it all the time but especially when looking for confirmation of othercourse method trading signals Regards Gordon The Course Trendline__________________________________________________________ Next well discuss the trendline Seasoned traders agree that the trendline is one of their mostimportant tools No matter what kind of trading program or technique they use the trendline on achart is a must But one of the biggest mistakes made by amateurs and professionals alike isinconsistently drawing or defining the trendline Dr Andrews trendline procedure is simpleconsistent and accurate It works extremely well with the pivot count and with the pitchfork For an uptrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the lowest low up and to thehighest minor low point preceding the highest high The line must not pass through prices inbetween the two low points Extend the line(Attached chart of Brightpoint) For a downtrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the highest high point to thelowest minor high point preceding the lowest low so that it does not pass through prices inbetween the two high points Extend the line (Brightpoint chart) Thats all theres to it Its simple consistent and it works well with other Andrews lines It also

helps eliminate personal bias and haphazard analysis Practice drawing these trendlines on your own charts Send me any questions you might have andthen e-mail a chart of your choosing which shows at least two uptrend and two downtrend linesthat youve drawn_______________________________________________________________________

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Lesson 5Date Dienstag 28 Maumlrz 2000 120224

Hello Gordon here is my chart with trendlinesWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going above the trendline again should I draw a new trendline anddelete the old one Attached is another chart with the P3 to sideways rule I finally found an example for it RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Price failure techniqueDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081412

At 32800 120200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my chart with trendlinesgtWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going abovegtthe trendline again should I draw a new trendline and delete the oldgtone Hi TradersZone Take a look at the chart Im returningI added some lines for you to considerWith the course trendline once its broken a new one should be started Theres a technique thatties in with this coming up soon Meanwhile heres an important technique to work on It deals with those times when prices dontreach the ML Regards Gordon Dr Andrews Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P ofreversaland the ML the probability is that this price reversal will go further thanitdid on its approach toward the ML (Extract of original course material) A price failure very often indicates a sizeable reversal will take placeThepitchforks drawn on the chart of Home Depot illustrate the concept of pricefailure Dr Andrews routinely drew a new pitchfork on his chart after a newsignificant pivot had formed He knew that prices had a high probability ofreaching the new ML before stalling out or reversing If prices reversedbeforereaching the ML thereby forming a new pivot he termed it a price failureTheunderlying idea here is that Dr Andrews fully anticipated his median linewouldact as a price magnet To conclude that a price reversal resulted in a price failure Dr Andrewsused

these primary signalsa subsequent price penetration of a short-termmulti-pivotline andor a return of prices to and penetration of the parallel lineformed atpivot 3 of the pitchfork (The circles on the Home Depot chart denote theparallelline penetration signal To avoid clutter the mpl lines were not drawn) One possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart of ConsecoIncLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me a copy

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject ChartDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081800Attachments image002png

Hi TradersZone Forgot the chart Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Price failure techniqueDate Samstag 1 April 2000 201000

gtOne possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart ofgtConseco IncgtLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me agtcopy Hi Gordon here are my charts with price failures RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Mittwoch 5 April 2000 235624

Hi TradersZone Good price failure examples you sentany comments or questions about it Heres the next partanother old standby Dr Andrews kept handy Regards Gordon In this segment youll learn how to use the Fan line Technique To draw the fan lines youll apply the coursetrendline method which was introduced in an earlier lesson It might be well to emphasize that the practicalapplication of the course trendline method requires practice and experience both of which will serve youwell in this technique Dr Andrews used fan lines as an adjunct to his pitchfork sideways channel andactionreaction methods In the fan line study three trendlines are drawn from the original reversal pivot of the price correction understudy typically a P0 or a P5 Youll notice on the charts included with this study that each fan line is at aflatter angle than its predecessor When the third fan line is broken the rule is that the correction has endedand a new trend is under way Try this technique on some of your own charts and then please send me asample

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Donnerstag 6 April 2000 234315

Hi Gordon No I dont have any specific question about the price failure technique I guess the next likely target after a price failure wouldbe the warning line I have attached two charts with fan linesIs it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the third fan line is broken RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Next segmentDate Freitag 7 April 2000 003312

Hello TradersZone

Tuesday April 06 2000 114315 AM you wrote

TZgt Hi Gordon

TZgt No I dont have any specific question about the price failureTZgt technique I guess the next likely target after a price failureTZgt would be the warning line

TZgt I have attached two charts with fan linesTZgt Is it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the thirdTZgt fan line is broken

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Thats right the warning line is the next price target Additionalwarning lines can be drawn if needed but usually one will do it Ifprices go through the first warning line another can be drawn butmost likely a new pitchfork could be drawn instead which would bepreferable Helps stay current with recently formed pivots

When prices break through the third fan line a buy or sell signal isgiven Not sure what you mean by fourth target fan line Im a littledense today

Your chart work was goodthis is another handy tool for spotting thehigh probability of a price reversal or trend change

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject The Gap TradeDate Freitag 7 April 2000 004858

Hello TradersZone This trading signal doesnt show up very often but past observations have shown that its well worth watching for Dr Andrews placed a lot of emphasis on the importance of price gaps something many traders overlook This is one of his gap uses Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom The Gap Trading Technique Price gaps can be a dilemma for many traders The general rule denoting market strength or weakness after ahigh volume gap often comes up short after the initial reaction is over Many gappers simply run out ofsteam A high volume gap in itself seems to offer precious little evidence that a profitable move is about toget under way Dr Andrews used price gaps somewhat differently than others He counted a gap as 2 pivots Youll see howthat works in the following technique which uses a gap to arrive at a price level for a buy or sell order Using short-term daily price pivots label the pivot immediately preceding the gap as p0 Count the gap as 2pivots labeling it p1 amp p2 After p3 has formed and prices reverse towards a short-term p4 draw a horizontalline 2 price tics or more (individual preference)to the right of p3 Enter the market only if prices reach orpenetrate that line within a few days after reversing from p4 Please look over your own charts to see if you can find places where the gap trade technique could have beenused Send me a sample when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 001925

Hello Gordon this is my chart with a gap trade RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 065538

Hello TradersZone Thursday April 08 2000 121925 PM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt this is my chart with a gap trade TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Good examplethe gap trade technique shines when an issue in at or near a P5 Similar to the one on thechart you sent Heres another trading signal tool Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Dr Andrews used several techniques which helped him determine whether a P5 was near at hand Youllrecall that he observed most price moves ended or had a significant reversal at a P5 This technique uses alternate closing prices after a P4 has been formed As with many of his studies thenumber 5 is used The chart accompanying this segment shows that there were 5 alternate closes to thedownside after P4 was put in Dr Andrews noted that whenever 5 or more alternate closes followed a P4 theprobabilities were high that a P5 was near at hand An added feature to this chart study is the sideways channel Notice how the 2nd target price and the 5thalternate close nearly coincide

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 12 April 2000 200730

Hello Gordon This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 13 April 2000 082418

Monday April 12 2000 80730 AM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hello TradersZone Good chart example of this Andrews toolanother of his very unusual observations that workmore often than not Heres the final part of this lesson Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom In this trendline method Dr Andrews once again used the number 5 as the basis for locating aprobable reversal area He found this technique to be especially useful whenever a clear orobvious pivot count didnt show up onthe price move under study Trendlines are drawn using the course trendline method When the 5th trendline is broken theprobability is high that the trend under study has ended A mini-median line pitchfork andorsliding parallel could be used for pricing a trading order The accompanying chart of Compaq Computer is an example of how the trendline study could beused The pivot count beginning at the October low is difficult to nail down There were severalsmall areas of congestion but no sizeable corrections while prices advanced The count wasunclear By following the price action using the course trendline technique however the traderwould have been alerted to the possibility of a change of trend when the 5th trendline was brokenin early February Try this technique on your own charts When youre ready please send me an example of yourstudy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 19 April 2000 124108

Hello Gordon this is my example with 5 trendlines RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[6] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 20 April 2000 012726

Monday April 19 2000 124108 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt this is my example with 5 trendlines

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Good example of the 5 TL technique Always reminds me of how the fairly simple tools often do a better job than manyof the sophisticated studies out there

That was the last part of lesson 5 Lesson 6 attached is made in one mailing Youll find Dr Andrews trading rules alongwith a wrap-up review which uses several of his rules You might have questions about some of the rules so feel free tosend them as they arise

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Dr Andrews had an abbreviated set of trading rules on several index cards that he carried around with him in his shirtpocket He said every trading day turned up something new on his charts and by having his rules in his pocket he wasreminded of the need for a methodical approach to his analysis Quite a comment coming from the man who wrote therule book

In this the final lesson of the course Dr Andrews original trading rules and observations are presented Lets work witha few of them at this point

Using charts of issues you follow please send me an example that illustrates your interpretation of each of the followingrules

Rule 4 Anticipating major Ps

Rule 7 Penetration rule

Rule 8 Price failure rule

Rule 11 1-ML23 AR Centerline

Rule 12 Sliding Parallel rule

Rule 15 Mini-median line parallel to buy or sell

Feel free to include any other course techniques you choose to apply but please include examples of the above as aminimum Use more than one technique on a chart if your analysis supports it Send as many charts as you like alongwith your questionscomments

Lesson 6 - Dr Andrews Trading Rules

This lesson covers course rules and significant observations as taught by Dr Andrews in his original trading course Therules are those that he used in his own trading and are provided to serve as a checklist for use with the course tradingmethods youve learned

Rule 1 Where prices are always headed Rule You course members are among the fortunate few to be able to draw astraight line and know that prices are headed toward that ML Very few investors have ever applied this ML principle ofstatistics to price fluctuations and weve never seen this in any books on investment You are among the very few who

know that prices are always headed toward the newest ML

Rule 2 The Rule of coming opposites applies all through life In the bible we find Blessed at they that mourn for theyshall be comforted As investors we know that any losses can be recovered by using course methods

Rule 3 Turn your mind about or Rethink for all good is at hand We should mentally prepare ourselves for thecoming reversal in prices and other affairs Heres one way for example that you course members who know the MLrules can use When prices are skyrocketing upward we do this preparation by thinking If prices pivoted here today atthis price Id draw a new ML bisecting the distance between todays price and the price from which the rise started Andwe know now that if this is a Major Pivot prices will fall rapidly to this new ML Profits from such drops are big and quick

Rule 4 Rule for anticipating major Ps If during congestion or after a rally or decline you can count four previous Psthe fifth one is highly probable to be the one from which a new trend starts

Rule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can make a quick big profit is to watch for the EPformations

Rule 6 The other reversal rule is that prices tend to reverse at or near any ML as well as at any extension of each MLAnd also at any MLH or extensions of MLH

Rule 7 The Penetration Rule is that whenever prices gap past or plunge through any ML there is a high probability thatthey will quickly return to it temporarily and then resume the trend they had before they gapped or plunged through

Rule 8 Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P of reversal and the MLthe probability is that this price reversal will go further than it did on its approach toward the ML

Rule 9 The price failure rule is negated when the next price trend is also a failure in reaching the ML This is almostinvariably a signal of a big fast move in the direction indicated by this last space Rule 10 When alternate median lines of comparable length slope in the same direction the trend is firm and rapidprice changes take place

Rule 11 When 1-ML23 is exactly reached at P4 it can be used as a highly reliable centerline for the AR method

Rule 12 Frequently after crossing a lower MLH prices continue to rise along the MLH Since the crossing of the MLHsignals a further drop is likely use a sliding parallel along the bottom of the most recent crossing If prices drop past thatsliding parallel line a sell signal is generated

Rule 13 MLs between P2 and P3 can start from a nearby or a remote P1 since prices tend to reverse at each of theseMLs Try several such P2-P3 MLs to discover the best fit

Rule 14 The distance of each MLH from its ML is the distance of the next warning line Use these warning lineswhenever a SH has signalled a buy or sell

Rule 15 Use the MMLH as a buy or sell signal when you expect a reversal because of a P5 Also when prices are at aWL ML extension line or where course lines converge or intersect

Rule 16 Converging lines that meet prices have shown the highest probability of a trend reversal

Rule 17 Two to four days is usually the maximum between P2 and P3 for a MML P1 can be a day or so back from P2and 3

Rule 18 The most reliable ActionReaction centerlines seem to be MPL 2P line 2 Gap line peak to low or low to peak

Rule 19 When prices pass through R lines look for a pull back and then a continuing move in the direction of the passthrough

Rule 20 Use gaps as Action lines from the centerline

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 003755

Hello Gordonhere is my example for Rule 4 And I have a question What are EP formations gtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 021242

Tuesday May 04 2000 123755 PM you wrote TZgt Hello GordonTZgt here is my example for Rule 4 TZgt And I have a question What are EP formations gtgtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegtgta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hi TradersZone Good use of the warning linesalso the EP material is part of lesson 4 Rather than go backthrough the files to see when (or if) it was sent Im sending it along with this reply Glad youbrought it up Best RegardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Tuesday May 04 2000208 PM Dr Andrews used a fairly common price chart formation that he found useful at probable P5market tops and bottoms The formation generally called a wedge or pennant by chartists isreferred to in Dr Andrews trading course as the Expanding Pivot (EP) One of the few chartformations used in the course he regarded it as among the most dependable indications that amarket top was forming Closely related to the EP is his Inverted Expanding Pivot (IEP) which henoted could often be observed at market bottoms Both are regarded as intermediate and long-term reversal indicators Dr Andrews found that both formations were most reliable when they occurred after a sharprapid price move coinciding with the formation of a probable P5 He said it wasnt unusual for theformation to take several weeks to complete and that conservative traders could best avoid thewhipsaw associated with congestion patterns by trading only in the direction of the probable price

break out of the EP or IEP formation The attached charts illustrate these formations Please look over your own charts for an example ofthe EP and IEP and send me a copy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 232127

Hello Gordon Thank you for the lesson with the EP material I couldnt find it in any previous emailHere is my example for Rule 7 RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Rule 4Date Samstag 6 Mai 2000 080827

Wednesday May 05 2000 112127 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt Thank you for the lesson with the EP materialTZgt I couldnt find it in any previous emailTZgt Here is my example for Rule 7

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hi TradersZone

Glad you mentioned it earlierexcept for the EP IEP and hissideways channel Dr Andrews didnt have much to say about chartpatterns and formations These are good ones to use though

Your study of the penetration rule was good Later

Best Regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Wednesday May 05 2000801 PM

Page 36: Pitchfork primer

stronger the line tended to be in the future Good reason then for using the July gap as the basisfor an ActionReaction study Our CL is labelled a gap-mpl-CL The May 98 high was used for the Action Line starting point A line was then drawn parallel to theCenterline as per ActionReaction procedure The corresponding Reaction Line was then drawn inIf this particular study had been drawn on Cendants chart right after the July gap was put in thepotential for prices to go all the way down to the Reaction Line might have seemed very slim at thetime Notice however that prices reached the Reaction Line in early September Youll see thishappen time and again as you work with the AR method The core of its effectiveness is a strongCL Please send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts of your choice

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re AR linesDate Montag 28 Februar 2000 155937

gtPlease send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts of yourgtchoice Hello Gordonhere are my examples RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject More on the ARDate Donnerstag 2 Maumlrz 2000 071158

At 22800 35900 PM you wrotegtgtPlease send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts ofgtgtyour choicegt gtHello Gordongthere are my examplesgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone You picked some good examples to use for your AR study Both showed the potential power of thismethod Takes time and lots of chart study sometimes to find the best set of lines but the rewardscan be many Heres something else to look at Regards Gordon The ActionReaction technique requires a strong centerline from which to begin The key todeciding which set of pivots to use for the centerline is found through experimenting with thevarious configurations visible on the chart under study The centerline might be a series of gapspivots an existing median line or any of Dr Andrews lines The task is to search for that centerlinewhich shows the greatest potential for projecting price reversal areas Dr Andrews did that byfinding a likely centerline near the middle of his price chart That allowed him to use any of theprevious pivots for his action lines By experimenting he found reaction lines that did the best jobof pegging reversal areas at data points located forward of the centerline Reaction lines are equal and opposite of the action lines and serve to project price levels at whicha reversal can be expected That is why the task of seeking out the best centerline is so importantDr Andrews reasoned that a series of reaction lines which have pegged price reversals in the pastis likely to continue to be in tune with current and future market price action Having severalprevious pivots to use as anchors for drawing action lines is thus essential The attached chart of Lattice illustrates this concept Please bear in mind that the gapmplcenterline is not the only centerline one could use on this chart You might want to study the chartfor other AR possibilities Try a peak-to-peak CL or a multi-pivot CL Send me your studies along

with any questions

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re More on the ARDate Samstag 4 Maumlrz 2000 002521

gtThe attached chart of Lattice illustrates this conceptgtPlease bear in mind that the gapmpl centerline is not the onlygtcenterline one could use on this chartgtYou might want to study the chart for other AR possibilitiesgtTry a peak-to-peak CL or a multi-pivot CL Send me your studiesgtalong with any questions Hello Gordonhere is my chart RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Peak to peak clDate Sonntag 5 Maumlrz 2000 064107

At 3400 122500 AM you wrotegtHello Gordongthere is my chartgt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Looks like you have the concept down Takes time and a lot of chart work to find the bestcenterline When the reaction lines dont seem to peg reversal areas chances are the centerline isnot the one that is best in tune with the price action of the issue under studyDespite the time required for this method it was one of Dr Andrews stand-bysAR lines could befound on most of his charts Im sending a chart with an example of a peak-to-peak CL Regards Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Peak to peak clDate Sonntag 5 Maumlrz 2000 171232

Hello Gordon I think the peak-to-peak CL on the last chart I sent to you was not really drawn from peak to peakIm sending another example RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next LessonDate Mittwoch 8 Maumlrz 2000 072526

At 3500 51200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtI think the peak-to-peak CL on the last chart I sent to you was notgtreally drawn from peak to peakgtIm sending another examplegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your peak to peak cl example was correctly drawn Thats a fairly simple approach but quite oftenthe peak to peak yields better reaction lines Heres the first part of the next lesson Regards Gordon Youll find times when prices dont quite reach the ML but instead drift alongside or away from itThe Schiff ML was designed to be used in place of the regular ML whenever that happens Suchprice action can be found at any place on a chart but most frequently occurs after a sharp sell-offor run-up of prices Dr Andrews also used the Schiff ML whenever his regular ML sloped at an unusually steep angleHe said it helped smooth out irregular price action such as that caused by unexpected earningsnews crop planting delays or poor growing conditions crop production reports etc Youll findnearly vertical price moves over a short period of time on many charts The Schiff ML method helpsput things back in perspective when that happens Well use the chart of Sterling Bancorp as an example of prices drifting away from the regular MLThat ML is drawn in black Prices didnt quite reach the ML but drifted alongside and eventuallyaway from it The Schiff ML and parallel lines are drawn in red Notice how prices were containedwithin the Schiff pitchfork until they finally broke down at the upper parallel line The procedure for drawing the Schiff ML is the same as for the regular ML except the startingpoint is located midway between the first 2 pivots youll be using The Sterling Bancorp chart

illustrates how this is done Dr Andrews also suggested using the Schiff ML whenever the regular ML method doesnt seem tobe in sync with price action Practice this procedure on your own charts and send a couple examples when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next LessonDate Donnerstag 9 Maumlrz 2000 001143

Hello Gordon in my charting software (Dynamic Trader) the Schiff ML is drawn by finding the midpoint of the line between pivot A and pivot Bmoving this point horizontally to directly above or below (depending on whether A is a low or high pivot) the A pivot anddrawing a line from his point through the midpoint of the BC swingAre there different methods of drawing a Schiff MLI was too lazy to draw Schiff MLs by hand with the method you described so Im sending my examples with the Dynamic TraderSchiff MLs -) RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject SchiffDate Samstag 11 Maumlrz 2000 070226

At 3900 121100 AM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtin my charting software (Dynamic Trader) the Schiff ML is drawn bygtfinding the midpoint of the line between pivot A and pivot B movinggtthis point horizontally to directly above or below (depending ongtwhether A is a low or high pivot) the A pivot and drawing a linegtgtfrom his point through the midpoint of the BC swinggtAre there different methods of drawing a Schiff MLgtI was too lazy to draw Schiff MLs by hand with the method yougtdescribed so Im sending my examples with the Dynamic Trader Schiff MLs -)gt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your program Schiff line procedure is fineits actually what Dr Andrews called a modified schiff ml and is onlyslightly different than the one I sent you initially The one you used is preferred by most course members Im sendingthe modified Schiff lesson and a chart along with this email The chart example shows how to use it with 0-34 pivots Regards Gordon

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Sliding Parallel LineDate Montag 13 Maumlrz 2000 005252

Hello TradersZone Heres one of the tools Dr Andrews used most often when entering exiting or reversing marketpositions Not many people know about this technique Regards Gordon The Sliding Parallel (SH) is drawn whenever prices cross an Andrews line and then move along itFor example if the bottom of a daily price bar range drops through a lower parallel line of apitchfork a new parallel line is then drawn from that low and extended to the right If the nextdays price bar drops through that sliding parallel line a sell signal is generated Whenever price action dictates a sliding parallel the next step is to draw a Warning Line Thewarning line is an additional parallel line that is an image extension of the original pitchforkchannels It serves as a warning that if prices penetrate the sliding parallel the next likely target isthe WL The attached chart of Avis illustrates these procedures Please try these on your own charts andsend me an example

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Sliding Parallel LineDate Dienstag 14 Maumlrz 2000 225737

Hello Gordon this is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning line RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 065606

At 31400 105700 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtthis is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning linegt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone Your chart of circuit city was a good example for this study I may have mentioned it earlier but DrAndrews used this technique on a regular basis The next part of this lesson covers another of hisfavorite tools the mini-median line pitchfork Here it is Regards Gordon The Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry and exit tools Though mostoften drawn using alternate closing prices alternate highs and lows can also be usedin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days is usually the maximumbetween pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or more back from P2 Dr Andrews used Mini-Median Line pitchforks for buy and sell signals whenever he expected areversal Some examples include a probable P5 or when prices are at a Warning Line ML MLHmajor ML extension or a sideways channel price target When prices cross the Mini-Median LineParallel (MMLH) a sliding parallel (SH) is used for order entry

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 231537

gtThe Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry andgtexit tools Though most often drawn using alternate closing pricesgtalternate highs and lows can also be usedgtin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days isgtusually the maximum between pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or moregtback from P2

Hello Gordon

wouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timingCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available whenDr Andrews was alive

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject intraday chartsDate Samstag 18 Maumlrz 2000 012400

At 31600 111500 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongtgtwouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsgtinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timinggtCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available when DrgtAndrews was alivegtgtRegardsgtTradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Youre absolutely correctintraday charts were not available when DrAndrews was a trader

Im reading between the lines here but if you plan to day-trade using the course techniques ie thepitchfork then I agree that the regular pitchfork would be more useful on intraday charts Otherwisewhipsaw would be a significant problem Please get back to me if I didnt address your questionbecause this is a very important technique The mini-median line pitchfork and sliding parallel showedup on most of Dr Andrews charts

Regards

Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re intraday chartsDate Dienstag 21 Maumlrz 2000 220322

Hello Gordon

You are right Im planning to daytrade SampP futures using the course techniques among other things

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 003408

Hi TradersZone Here are a couple Andrews techniques that will help anticipate the breakout direction of asideways channelThey work often enough to warrant keep handy Regards Gordon In an earlier lesson you were introduced to Dr Andrews sideways count You saw how frequentlythe sideways count method provided high probability price objectives after the breakout from theestablished channel took place In this segment of lesson 4 youll be shown 2 congestion area techniques that can help youdetermine the probable sideways channel price breakout direction Both rely on the use of pivots The first uses the pivot points that are circled on a sideways channel Dr Andrews observed thatwhenever a sideways channel results in at least 5 circle contacts the eventual price breakoutwould very often be in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle If circle 5 is at thetop of the channel for example the eventual price breakout would likely be to the upside If circle5 is at the bottom of the channel look for a downside breakout Dr Andrews noted that thistechnique can be subject to false breakouts but that such breakouts are usually followed shortlyafter with a confirmed breakout in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle Heemphasized that this study is best considered as a rule of thumb observation He viewed it as asupporting indicator for use with a short-term pitchfork as prices approached a channel line There are 2 charts attached that show how this works

The second technique in this part of lesson 4 deals with a sideways channelthat is building shortly after a P3 has been formed Dr Andrews noted thatwhenever that happened the probabilities were high that prices wouldbreakout in the same direction they were moving prior to the formation ofthe sideways channel The attached P3 to sideways example chart shows thisprocedure

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 205235

Hello Gordon here is my example for the 5 circle sideways count RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Lesson 5Date Montag 27 Maumlrz 2000 060731

At 32400 85200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my example for the 5 circle sideways countgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt gt Hi TradersZone Good example of the 5th circle tendency to predict the direction of a sideways breakout Any luckfinding a chart showing the P3 to sideways rule Im sending the first part of the next lesson This trendline method is a useful tool with all of DrAndrews course lines He used it all the time but especially when looking for confirmation of othercourse method trading signals Regards Gordon The Course Trendline__________________________________________________________ Next well discuss the trendline Seasoned traders agree that the trendline is one of their mostimportant tools No matter what kind of trading program or technique they use the trendline on achart is a must But one of the biggest mistakes made by amateurs and professionals alike isinconsistently drawing or defining the trendline Dr Andrews trendline procedure is simpleconsistent and accurate It works extremely well with the pivot count and with the pitchfork For an uptrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the lowest low up and to thehighest minor low point preceding the highest high The line must not pass through prices inbetween the two low points Extend the line(Attached chart of Brightpoint) For a downtrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the highest high point to thelowest minor high point preceding the lowest low so that it does not pass through prices inbetween the two high points Extend the line (Brightpoint chart) Thats all theres to it Its simple consistent and it works well with other Andrews lines It also

helps eliminate personal bias and haphazard analysis Practice drawing these trendlines on your own charts Send me any questions you might have andthen e-mail a chart of your choosing which shows at least two uptrend and two downtrend linesthat youve drawn_______________________________________________________________________

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Lesson 5Date Dienstag 28 Maumlrz 2000 120224

Hello Gordon here is my chart with trendlinesWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going above the trendline again should I draw a new trendline anddelete the old one Attached is another chart with the P3 to sideways rule I finally found an example for it RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Price failure techniqueDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081412

At 32800 120200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my chart with trendlinesgtWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going abovegtthe trendline again should I draw a new trendline and delete the oldgtone Hi TradersZone Take a look at the chart Im returningI added some lines for you to considerWith the course trendline once its broken a new one should be started Theres a technique thatties in with this coming up soon Meanwhile heres an important technique to work on It deals with those times when prices dontreach the ML Regards Gordon Dr Andrews Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P ofreversaland the ML the probability is that this price reversal will go further thanitdid on its approach toward the ML (Extract of original course material) A price failure very often indicates a sizeable reversal will take placeThepitchforks drawn on the chart of Home Depot illustrate the concept of pricefailure Dr Andrews routinely drew a new pitchfork on his chart after a newsignificant pivot had formed He knew that prices had a high probability ofreaching the new ML before stalling out or reversing If prices reversedbeforereaching the ML thereby forming a new pivot he termed it a price failureTheunderlying idea here is that Dr Andrews fully anticipated his median linewouldact as a price magnet To conclude that a price reversal resulted in a price failure Dr Andrewsused

these primary signalsa subsequent price penetration of a short-termmulti-pivotline andor a return of prices to and penetration of the parallel lineformed atpivot 3 of the pitchfork (The circles on the Home Depot chart denote theparallelline penetration signal To avoid clutter the mpl lines were not drawn) One possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart of ConsecoIncLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me a copy

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject ChartDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081800Attachments image002png

Hi TradersZone Forgot the chart Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Price failure techniqueDate Samstag 1 April 2000 201000

gtOne possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart ofgtConseco IncgtLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me agtcopy Hi Gordon here are my charts with price failures RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Mittwoch 5 April 2000 235624

Hi TradersZone Good price failure examples you sentany comments or questions about it Heres the next partanother old standby Dr Andrews kept handy Regards Gordon In this segment youll learn how to use the Fan line Technique To draw the fan lines youll apply the coursetrendline method which was introduced in an earlier lesson It might be well to emphasize that the practicalapplication of the course trendline method requires practice and experience both of which will serve youwell in this technique Dr Andrews used fan lines as an adjunct to his pitchfork sideways channel andactionreaction methods In the fan line study three trendlines are drawn from the original reversal pivot of the price correction understudy typically a P0 or a P5 Youll notice on the charts included with this study that each fan line is at aflatter angle than its predecessor When the third fan line is broken the rule is that the correction has endedand a new trend is under way Try this technique on some of your own charts and then please send me asample

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Donnerstag 6 April 2000 234315

Hi Gordon No I dont have any specific question about the price failure technique I guess the next likely target after a price failure wouldbe the warning line I have attached two charts with fan linesIs it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the third fan line is broken RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Next segmentDate Freitag 7 April 2000 003312

Hello TradersZone

Tuesday April 06 2000 114315 AM you wrote

TZgt Hi Gordon

TZgt No I dont have any specific question about the price failureTZgt technique I guess the next likely target after a price failureTZgt would be the warning line

TZgt I have attached two charts with fan linesTZgt Is it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the thirdTZgt fan line is broken

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Thats right the warning line is the next price target Additionalwarning lines can be drawn if needed but usually one will do it Ifprices go through the first warning line another can be drawn butmost likely a new pitchfork could be drawn instead which would bepreferable Helps stay current with recently formed pivots

When prices break through the third fan line a buy or sell signal isgiven Not sure what you mean by fourth target fan line Im a littledense today

Your chart work was goodthis is another handy tool for spotting thehigh probability of a price reversal or trend change

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject The Gap TradeDate Freitag 7 April 2000 004858

Hello TradersZone This trading signal doesnt show up very often but past observations have shown that its well worth watching for Dr Andrews placed a lot of emphasis on the importance of price gaps something many traders overlook This is one of his gap uses Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom The Gap Trading Technique Price gaps can be a dilemma for many traders The general rule denoting market strength or weakness after ahigh volume gap often comes up short after the initial reaction is over Many gappers simply run out ofsteam A high volume gap in itself seems to offer precious little evidence that a profitable move is about toget under way Dr Andrews used price gaps somewhat differently than others He counted a gap as 2 pivots Youll see howthat works in the following technique which uses a gap to arrive at a price level for a buy or sell order Using short-term daily price pivots label the pivot immediately preceding the gap as p0 Count the gap as 2pivots labeling it p1 amp p2 After p3 has formed and prices reverse towards a short-term p4 draw a horizontalline 2 price tics or more (individual preference)to the right of p3 Enter the market only if prices reach orpenetrate that line within a few days after reversing from p4 Please look over your own charts to see if you can find places where the gap trade technique could have beenused Send me a sample when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 001925

Hello Gordon this is my chart with a gap trade RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 065538

Hello TradersZone Thursday April 08 2000 121925 PM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt this is my chart with a gap trade TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Good examplethe gap trade technique shines when an issue in at or near a P5 Similar to the one on thechart you sent Heres another trading signal tool Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Dr Andrews used several techniques which helped him determine whether a P5 was near at hand Youllrecall that he observed most price moves ended or had a significant reversal at a P5 This technique uses alternate closing prices after a P4 has been formed As with many of his studies thenumber 5 is used The chart accompanying this segment shows that there were 5 alternate closes to thedownside after P4 was put in Dr Andrews noted that whenever 5 or more alternate closes followed a P4 theprobabilities were high that a P5 was near at hand An added feature to this chart study is the sideways channel Notice how the 2nd target price and the 5thalternate close nearly coincide

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 12 April 2000 200730

Hello Gordon This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 13 April 2000 082418

Monday April 12 2000 80730 AM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hello TradersZone Good chart example of this Andrews toolanother of his very unusual observations that workmore often than not Heres the final part of this lesson Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom In this trendline method Dr Andrews once again used the number 5 as the basis for locating aprobable reversal area He found this technique to be especially useful whenever a clear orobvious pivot count didnt show up onthe price move under study Trendlines are drawn using the course trendline method When the 5th trendline is broken theprobability is high that the trend under study has ended A mini-median line pitchfork andorsliding parallel could be used for pricing a trading order The accompanying chart of Compaq Computer is an example of how the trendline study could beused The pivot count beginning at the October low is difficult to nail down There were severalsmall areas of congestion but no sizeable corrections while prices advanced The count wasunclear By following the price action using the course trendline technique however the traderwould have been alerted to the possibility of a change of trend when the 5th trendline was brokenin early February Try this technique on your own charts When youre ready please send me an example of yourstudy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 19 April 2000 124108

Hello Gordon this is my example with 5 trendlines RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[6] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 20 April 2000 012726

Monday April 19 2000 124108 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt this is my example with 5 trendlines

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Good example of the 5 TL technique Always reminds me of how the fairly simple tools often do a better job than manyof the sophisticated studies out there

That was the last part of lesson 5 Lesson 6 attached is made in one mailing Youll find Dr Andrews trading rules alongwith a wrap-up review which uses several of his rules You might have questions about some of the rules so feel free tosend them as they arise

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Dr Andrews had an abbreviated set of trading rules on several index cards that he carried around with him in his shirtpocket He said every trading day turned up something new on his charts and by having his rules in his pocket he wasreminded of the need for a methodical approach to his analysis Quite a comment coming from the man who wrote therule book

In this the final lesson of the course Dr Andrews original trading rules and observations are presented Lets work witha few of them at this point

Using charts of issues you follow please send me an example that illustrates your interpretation of each of the followingrules

Rule 4 Anticipating major Ps

Rule 7 Penetration rule

Rule 8 Price failure rule

Rule 11 1-ML23 AR Centerline

Rule 12 Sliding Parallel rule

Rule 15 Mini-median line parallel to buy or sell

Feel free to include any other course techniques you choose to apply but please include examples of the above as aminimum Use more than one technique on a chart if your analysis supports it Send as many charts as you like alongwith your questionscomments

Lesson 6 - Dr Andrews Trading Rules

This lesson covers course rules and significant observations as taught by Dr Andrews in his original trading course Therules are those that he used in his own trading and are provided to serve as a checklist for use with the course tradingmethods youve learned

Rule 1 Where prices are always headed Rule You course members are among the fortunate few to be able to draw astraight line and know that prices are headed toward that ML Very few investors have ever applied this ML principle ofstatistics to price fluctuations and weve never seen this in any books on investment You are among the very few who

know that prices are always headed toward the newest ML

Rule 2 The Rule of coming opposites applies all through life In the bible we find Blessed at they that mourn for theyshall be comforted As investors we know that any losses can be recovered by using course methods

Rule 3 Turn your mind about or Rethink for all good is at hand We should mentally prepare ourselves for thecoming reversal in prices and other affairs Heres one way for example that you course members who know the MLrules can use When prices are skyrocketing upward we do this preparation by thinking If prices pivoted here today atthis price Id draw a new ML bisecting the distance between todays price and the price from which the rise started Andwe know now that if this is a Major Pivot prices will fall rapidly to this new ML Profits from such drops are big and quick

Rule 4 Rule for anticipating major Ps If during congestion or after a rally or decline you can count four previous Psthe fifth one is highly probable to be the one from which a new trend starts

Rule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can make a quick big profit is to watch for the EPformations

Rule 6 The other reversal rule is that prices tend to reverse at or near any ML as well as at any extension of each MLAnd also at any MLH or extensions of MLH

Rule 7 The Penetration Rule is that whenever prices gap past or plunge through any ML there is a high probability thatthey will quickly return to it temporarily and then resume the trend they had before they gapped or plunged through

Rule 8 Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P of reversal and the MLthe probability is that this price reversal will go further than it did on its approach toward the ML

Rule 9 The price failure rule is negated when the next price trend is also a failure in reaching the ML This is almostinvariably a signal of a big fast move in the direction indicated by this last space Rule 10 When alternate median lines of comparable length slope in the same direction the trend is firm and rapidprice changes take place

Rule 11 When 1-ML23 is exactly reached at P4 it can be used as a highly reliable centerline for the AR method

Rule 12 Frequently after crossing a lower MLH prices continue to rise along the MLH Since the crossing of the MLHsignals a further drop is likely use a sliding parallel along the bottom of the most recent crossing If prices drop past thatsliding parallel line a sell signal is generated

Rule 13 MLs between P2 and P3 can start from a nearby or a remote P1 since prices tend to reverse at each of theseMLs Try several such P2-P3 MLs to discover the best fit

Rule 14 The distance of each MLH from its ML is the distance of the next warning line Use these warning lineswhenever a SH has signalled a buy or sell

Rule 15 Use the MMLH as a buy or sell signal when you expect a reversal because of a P5 Also when prices are at aWL ML extension line or where course lines converge or intersect

Rule 16 Converging lines that meet prices have shown the highest probability of a trend reversal

Rule 17 Two to four days is usually the maximum between P2 and P3 for a MML P1 can be a day or so back from P2and 3

Rule 18 The most reliable ActionReaction centerlines seem to be MPL 2P line 2 Gap line peak to low or low to peak

Rule 19 When prices pass through R lines look for a pull back and then a continuing move in the direction of the passthrough

Rule 20 Use gaps as Action lines from the centerline

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 003755

Hello Gordonhere is my example for Rule 4 And I have a question What are EP formations gtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 021242

Tuesday May 04 2000 123755 PM you wrote TZgt Hello GordonTZgt here is my example for Rule 4 TZgt And I have a question What are EP formations gtgtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegtgta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hi TradersZone Good use of the warning linesalso the EP material is part of lesson 4 Rather than go backthrough the files to see when (or if) it was sent Im sending it along with this reply Glad youbrought it up Best RegardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Tuesday May 04 2000208 PM Dr Andrews used a fairly common price chart formation that he found useful at probable P5market tops and bottoms The formation generally called a wedge or pennant by chartists isreferred to in Dr Andrews trading course as the Expanding Pivot (EP) One of the few chartformations used in the course he regarded it as among the most dependable indications that amarket top was forming Closely related to the EP is his Inverted Expanding Pivot (IEP) which henoted could often be observed at market bottoms Both are regarded as intermediate and long-term reversal indicators Dr Andrews found that both formations were most reliable when they occurred after a sharprapid price move coinciding with the formation of a probable P5 He said it wasnt unusual for theformation to take several weeks to complete and that conservative traders could best avoid thewhipsaw associated with congestion patterns by trading only in the direction of the probable price

break out of the EP or IEP formation The attached charts illustrate these formations Please look over your own charts for an example ofthe EP and IEP and send me a copy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 232127

Hello Gordon Thank you for the lesson with the EP material I couldnt find it in any previous emailHere is my example for Rule 7 RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Rule 4Date Samstag 6 Mai 2000 080827

Wednesday May 05 2000 112127 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt Thank you for the lesson with the EP materialTZgt I couldnt find it in any previous emailTZgt Here is my example for Rule 7

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hi TradersZone

Glad you mentioned it earlierexcept for the EP IEP and hissideways channel Dr Andrews didnt have much to say about chartpatterns and formations These are good ones to use though

Your study of the penetration rule was good Later

Best Regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Wednesday May 05 2000801 PM

Page 37: Pitchfork primer

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re AR linesDate Montag 28 Februar 2000 155937

gtPlease send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts of yourgtchoice Hello Gordonhere are my examples RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject More on the ARDate Donnerstag 2 Maumlrz 2000 071158

At 22800 35900 PM you wrotegtgtPlease send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts ofgtgtyour choicegt gtHello Gordongthere are my examplesgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone You picked some good examples to use for your AR study Both showed the potential power of thismethod Takes time and lots of chart study sometimes to find the best set of lines but the rewardscan be many Heres something else to look at Regards Gordon The ActionReaction technique requires a strong centerline from which to begin The key todeciding which set of pivots to use for the centerline is found through experimenting with thevarious configurations visible on the chart under study The centerline might be a series of gapspivots an existing median line or any of Dr Andrews lines The task is to search for that centerlinewhich shows the greatest potential for projecting price reversal areas Dr Andrews did that byfinding a likely centerline near the middle of his price chart That allowed him to use any of theprevious pivots for his action lines By experimenting he found reaction lines that did the best jobof pegging reversal areas at data points located forward of the centerline Reaction lines are equal and opposite of the action lines and serve to project price levels at whicha reversal can be expected That is why the task of seeking out the best centerline is so importantDr Andrews reasoned that a series of reaction lines which have pegged price reversals in the pastis likely to continue to be in tune with current and future market price action Having severalprevious pivots to use as anchors for drawing action lines is thus essential The attached chart of Lattice illustrates this concept Please bear in mind that the gapmplcenterline is not the only centerline one could use on this chart You might want to study the chartfor other AR possibilities Try a peak-to-peak CL or a multi-pivot CL Send me your studies along

with any questions

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re More on the ARDate Samstag 4 Maumlrz 2000 002521

gtThe attached chart of Lattice illustrates this conceptgtPlease bear in mind that the gapmpl centerline is not the onlygtcenterline one could use on this chartgtYou might want to study the chart for other AR possibilitiesgtTry a peak-to-peak CL or a multi-pivot CL Send me your studiesgtalong with any questions Hello Gordonhere is my chart RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Peak to peak clDate Sonntag 5 Maumlrz 2000 064107

At 3400 122500 AM you wrotegtHello Gordongthere is my chartgt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Looks like you have the concept down Takes time and a lot of chart work to find the bestcenterline When the reaction lines dont seem to peg reversal areas chances are the centerline isnot the one that is best in tune with the price action of the issue under studyDespite the time required for this method it was one of Dr Andrews stand-bysAR lines could befound on most of his charts Im sending a chart with an example of a peak-to-peak CL Regards Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Peak to peak clDate Sonntag 5 Maumlrz 2000 171232

Hello Gordon I think the peak-to-peak CL on the last chart I sent to you was not really drawn from peak to peakIm sending another example RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next LessonDate Mittwoch 8 Maumlrz 2000 072526

At 3500 51200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtI think the peak-to-peak CL on the last chart I sent to you was notgtreally drawn from peak to peakgtIm sending another examplegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your peak to peak cl example was correctly drawn Thats a fairly simple approach but quite oftenthe peak to peak yields better reaction lines Heres the first part of the next lesson Regards Gordon Youll find times when prices dont quite reach the ML but instead drift alongside or away from itThe Schiff ML was designed to be used in place of the regular ML whenever that happens Suchprice action can be found at any place on a chart but most frequently occurs after a sharp sell-offor run-up of prices Dr Andrews also used the Schiff ML whenever his regular ML sloped at an unusually steep angleHe said it helped smooth out irregular price action such as that caused by unexpected earningsnews crop planting delays or poor growing conditions crop production reports etc Youll findnearly vertical price moves over a short period of time on many charts The Schiff ML method helpsput things back in perspective when that happens Well use the chart of Sterling Bancorp as an example of prices drifting away from the regular MLThat ML is drawn in black Prices didnt quite reach the ML but drifted alongside and eventuallyaway from it The Schiff ML and parallel lines are drawn in red Notice how prices were containedwithin the Schiff pitchfork until they finally broke down at the upper parallel line The procedure for drawing the Schiff ML is the same as for the regular ML except the startingpoint is located midway between the first 2 pivots youll be using The Sterling Bancorp chart

illustrates how this is done Dr Andrews also suggested using the Schiff ML whenever the regular ML method doesnt seem tobe in sync with price action Practice this procedure on your own charts and send a couple examples when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next LessonDate Donnerstag 9 Maumlrz 2000 001143

Hello Gordon in my charting software (Dynamic Trader) the Schiff ML is drawn by finding the midpoint of the line between pivot A and pivot Bmoving this point horizontally to directly above or below (depending on whether A is a low or high pivot) the A pivot anddrawing a line from his point through the midpoint of the BC swingAre there different methods of drawing a Schiff MLI was too lazy to draw Schiff MLs by hand with the method you described so Im sending my examples with the Dynamic TraderSchiff MLs -) RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject SchiffDate Samstag 11 Maumlrz 2000 070226

At 3900 121100 AM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtin my charting software (Dynamic Trader) the Schiff ML is drawn bygtfinding the midpoint of the line between pivot A and pivot B movinggtthis point horizontally to directly above or below (depending ongtwhether A is a low or high pivot) the A pivot and drawing a linegtgtfrom his point through the midpoint of the BC swinggtAre there different methods of drawing a Schiff MLgtI was too lazy to draw Schiff MLs by hand with the method yougtdescribed so Im sending my examples with the Dynamic Trader Schiff MLs -)gt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your program Schiff line procedure is fineits actually what Dr Andrews called a modified schiff ml and is onlyslightly different than the one I sent you initially The one you used is preferred by most course members Im sendingthe modified Schiff lesson and a chart along with this email The chart example shows how to use it with 0-34 pivots Regards Gordon

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Sliding Parallel LineDate Montag 13 Maumlrz 2000 005252

Hello TradersZone Heres one of the tools Dr Andrews used most often when entering exiting or reversing marketpositions Not many people know about this technique Regards Gordon The Sliding Parallel (SH) is drawn whenever prices cross an Andrews line and then move along itFor example if the bottom of a daily price bar range drops through a lower parallel line of apitchfork a new parallel line is then drawn from that low and extended to the right If the nextdays price bar drops through that sliding parallel line a sell signal is generated Whenever price action dictates a sliding parallel the next step is to draw a Warning Line Thewarning line is an additional parallel line that is an image extension of the original pitchforkchannels It serves as a warning that if prices penetrate the sliding parallel the next likely target isthe WL The attached chart of Avis illustrates these procedures Please try these on your own charts andsend me an example

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Sliding Parallel LineDate Dienstag 14 Maumlrz 2000 225737

Hello Gordon this is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning line RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 065606

At 31400 105700 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtthis is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning linegt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone Your chart of circuit city was a good example for this study I may have mentioned it earlier but DrAndrews used this technique on a regular basis The next part of this lesson covers another of hisfavorite tools the mini-median line pitchfork Here it is Regards Gordon The Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry and exit tools Though mostoften drawn using alternate closing prices alternate highs and lows can also be usedin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days is usually the maximumbetween pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or more back from P2 Dr Andrews used Mini-Median Line pitchforks for buy and sell signals whenever he expected areversal Some examples include a probable P5 or when prices are at a Warning Line ML MLHmajor ML extension or a sideways channel price target When prices cross the Mini-Median LineParallel (MMLH) a sliding parallel (SH) is used for order entry

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 231537

gtThe Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry andgtexit tools Though most often drawn using alternate closing pricesgtalternate highs and lows can also be usedgtin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days isgtusually the maximum between pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or moregtback from P2

Hello Gordon

wouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timingCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available whenDr Andrews was alive

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject intraday chartsDate Samstag 18 Maumlrz 2000 012400

At 31600 111500 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongtgtwouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsgtinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timinggtCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available when DrgtAndrews was alivegtgtRegardsgtTradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Youre absolutely correctintraday charts were not available when DrAndrews was a trader

Im reading between the lines here but if you plan to day-trade using the course techniques ie thepitchfork then I agree that the regular pitchfork would be more useful on intraday charts Otherwisewhipsaw would be a significant problem Please get back to me if I didnt address your questionbecause this is a very important technique The mini-median line pitchfork and sliding parallel showedup on most of Dr Andrews charts

Regards

Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re intraday chartsDate Dienstag 21 Maumlrz 2000 220322

Hello Gordon

You are right Im planning to daytrade SampP futures using the course techniques among other things

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 003408

Hi TradersZone Here are a couple Andrews techniques that will help anticipate the breakout direction of asideways channelThey work often enough to warrant keep handy Regards Gordon In an earlier lesson you were introduced to Dr Andrews sideways count You saw how frequentlythe sideways count method provided high probability price objectives after the breakout from theestablished channel took place In this segment of lesson 4 youll be shown 2 congestion area techniques that can help youdetermine the probable sideways channel price breakout direction Both rely on the use of pivots The first uses the pivot points that are circled on a sideways channel Dr Andrews observed thatwhenever a sideways channel results in at least 5 circle contacts the eventual price breakoutwould very often be in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle If circle 5 is at thetop of the channel for example the eventual price breakout would likely be to the upside If circle5 is at the bottom of the channel look for a downside breakout Dr Andrews noted that thistechnique can be subject to false breakouts but that such breakouts are usually followed shortlyafter with a confirmed breakout in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle Heemphasized that this study is best considered as a rule of thumb observation He viewed it as asupporting indicator for use with a short-term pitchfork as prices approached a channel line There are 2 charts attached that show how this works

The second technique in this part of lesson 4 deals with a sideways channelthat is building shortly after a P3 has been formed Dr Andrews noted thatwhenever that happened the probabilities were high that prices wouldbreakout in the same direction they were moving prior to the formation ofthe sideways channel The attached P3 to sideways example chart shows thisprocedure

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 205235

Hello Gordon here is my example for the 5 circle sideways count RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Lesson 5Date Montag 27 Maumlrz 2000 060731

At 32400 85200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my example for the 5 circle sideways countgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt gt Hi TradersZone Good example of the 5th circle tendency to predict the direction of a sideways breakout Any luckfinding a chart showing the P3 to sideways rule Im sending the first part of the next lesson This trendline method is a useful tool with all of DrAndrews course lines He used it all the time but especially when looking for confirmation of othercourse method trading signals Regards Gordon The Course Trendline__________________________________________________________ Next well discuss the trendline Seasoned traders agree that the trendline is one of their mostimportant tools No matter what kind of trading program or technique they use the trendline on achart is a must But one of the biggest mistakes made by amateurs and professionals alike isinconsistently drawing or defining the trendline Dr Andrews trendline procedure is simpleconsistent and accurate It works extremely well with the pivot count and with the pitchfork For an uptrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the lowest low up and to thehighest minor low point preceding the highest high The line must not pass through prices inbetween the two low points Extend the line(Attached chart of Brightpoint) For a downtrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the highest high point to thelowest minor high point preceding the lowest low so that it does not pass through prices inbetween the two high points Extend the line (Brightpoint chart) Thats all theres to it Its simple consistent and it works well with other Andrews lines It also

helps eliminate personal bias and haphazard analysis Practice drawing these trendlines on your own charts Send me any questions you might have andthen e-mail a chart of your choosing which shows at least two uptrend and two downtrend linesthat youve drawn_______________________________________________________________________

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Lesson 5Date Dienstag 28 Maumlrz 2000 120224

Hello Gordon here is my chart with trendlinesWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going above the trendline again should I draw a new trendline anddelete the old one Attached is another chart with the P3 to sideways rule I finally found an example for it RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Price failure techniqueDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081412

At 32800 120200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my chart with trendlinesgtWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going abovegtthe trendline again should I draw a new trendline and delete the oldgtone Hi TradersZone Take a look at the chart Im returningI added some lines for you to considerWith the course trendline once its broken a new one should be started Theres a technique thatties in with this coming up soon Meanwhile heres an important technique to work on It deals with those times when prices dontreach the ML Regards Gordon Dr Andrews Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P ofreversaland the ML the probability is that this price reversal will go further thanitdid on its approach toward the ML (Extract of original course material) A price failure very often indicates a sizeable reversal will take placeThepitchforks drawn on the chart of Home Depot illustrate the concept of pricefailure Dr Andrews routinely drew a new pitchfork on his chart after a newsignificant pivot had formed He knew that prices had a high probability ofreaching the new ML before stalling out or reversing If prices reversedbeforereaching the ML thereby forming a new pivot he termed it a price failureTheunderlying idea here is that Dr Andrews fully anticipated his median linewouldact as a price magnet To conclude that a price reversal resulted in a price failure Dr Andrewsused

these primary signalsa subsequent price penetration of a short-termmulti-pivotline andor a return of prices to and penetration of the parallel lineformed atpivot 3 of the pitchfork (The circles on the Home Depot chart denote theparallelline penetration signal To avoid clutter the mpl lines were not drawn) One possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart of ConsecoIncLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me a copy

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject ChartDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081800Attachments image002png

Hi TradersZone Forgot the chart Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Price failure techniqueDate Samstag 1 April 2000 201000

gtOne possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart ofgtConseco IncgtLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me agtcopy Hi Gordon here are my charts with price failures RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Mittwoch 5 April 2000 235624

Hi TradersZone Good price failure examples you sentany comments or questions about it Heres the next partanother old standby Dr Andrews kept handy Regards Gordon In this segment youll learn how to use the Fan line Technique To draw the fan lines youll apply the coursetrendline method which was introduced in an earlier lesson It might be well to emphasize that the practicalapplication of the course trendline method requires practice and experience both of which will serve youwell in this technique Dr Andrews used fan lines as an adjunct to his pitchfork sideways channel andactionreaction methods In the fan line study three trendlines are drawn from the original reversal pivot of the price correction understudy typically a P0 or a P5 Youll notice on the charts included with this study that each fan line is at aflatter angle than its predecessor When the third fan line is broken the rule is that the correction has endedand a new trend is under way Try this technique on some of your own charts and then please send me asample

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Donnerstag 6 April 2000 234315

Hi Gordon No I dont have any specific question about the price failure technique I guess the next likely target after a price failure wouldbe the warning line I have attached two charts with fan linesIs it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the third fan line is broken RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Next segmentDate Freitag 7 April 2000 003312

Hello TradersZone

Tuesday April 06 2000 114315 AM you wrote

TZgt Hi Gordon

TZgt No I dont have any specific question about the price failureTZgt technique I guess the next likely target after a price failureTZgt would be the warning line

TZgt I have attached two charts with fan linesTZgt Is it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the thirdTZgt fan line is broken

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Thats right the warning line is the next price target Additionalwarning lines can be drawn if needed but usually one will do it Ifprices go through the first warning line another can be drawn butmost likely a new pitchfork could be drawn instead which would bepreferable Helps stay current with recently formed pivots

When prices break through the third fan line a buy or sell signal isgiven Not sure what you mean by fourth target fan line Im a littledense today

Your chart work was goodthis is another handy tool for spotting thehigh probability of a price reversal or trend change

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject The Gap TradeDate Freitag 7 April 2000 004858

Hello TradersZone This trading signal doesnt show up very often but past observations have shown that its well worth watching for Dr Andrews placed a lot of emphasis on the importance of price gaps something many traders overlook This is one of his gap uses Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom The Gap Trading Technique Price gaps can be a dilemma for many traders The general rule denoting market strength or weakness after ahigh volume gap often comes up short after the initial reaction is over Many gappers simply run out ofsteam A high volume gap in itself seems to offer precious little evidence that a profitable move is about toget under way Dr Andrews used price gaps somewhat differently than others He counted a gap as 2 pivots Youll see howthat works in the following technique which uses a gap to arrive at a price level for a buy or sell order Using short-term daily price pivots label the pivot immediately preceding the gap as p0 Count the gap as 2pivots labeling it p1 amp p2 After p3 has formed and prices reverse towards a short-term p4 draw a horizontalline 2 price tics or more (individual preference)to the right of p3 Enter the market only if prices reach orpenetrate that line within a few days after reversing from p4 Please look over your own charts to see if you can find places where the gap trade technique could have beenused Send me a sample when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 001925

Hello Gordon this is my chart with a gap trade RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 065538

Hello TradersZone Thursday April 08 2000 121925 PM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt this is my chart with a gap trade TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Good examplethe gap trade technique shines when an issue in at or near a P5 Similar to the one on thechart you sent Heres another trading signal tool Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Dr Andrews used several techniques which helped him determine whether a P5 was near at hand Youllrecall that he observed most price moves ended or had a significant reversal at a P5 This technique uses alternate closing prices after a P4 has been formed As with many of his studies thenumber 5 is used The chart accompanying this segment shows that there were 5 alternate closes to thedownside after P4 was put in Dr Andrews noted that whenever 5 or more alternate closes followed a P4 theprobabilities were high that a P5 was near at hand An added feature to this chart study is the sideways channel Notice how the 2nd target price and the 5thalternate close nearly coincide

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 12 April 2000 200730

Hello Gordon This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 13 April 2000 082418

Monday April 12 2000 80730 AM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hello TradersZone Good chart example of this Andrews toolanother of his very unusual observations that workmore often than not Heres the final part of this lesson Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom In this trendline method Dr Andrews once again used the number 5 as the basis for locating aprobable reversal area He found this technique to be especially useful whenever a clear orobvious pivot count didnt show up onthe price move under study Trendlines are drawn using the course trendline method When the 5th trendline is broken theprobability is high that the trend under study has ended A mini-median line pitchfork andorsliding parallel could be used for pricing a trading order The accompanying chart of Compaq Computer is an example of how the trendline study could beused The pivot count beginning at the October low is difficult to nail down There were severalsmall areas of congestion but no sizeable corrections while prices advanced The count wasunclear By following the price action using the course trendline technique however the traderwould have been alerted to the possibility of a change of trend when the 5th trendline was brokenin early February Try this technique on your own charts When youre ready please send me an example of yourstudy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 19 April 2000 124108

Hello Gordon this is my example with 5 trendlines RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[6] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 20 April 2000 012726

Monday April 19 2000 124108 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt this is my example with 5 trendlines

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Good example of the 5 TL technique Always reminds me of how the fairly simple tools often do a better job than manyof the sophisticated studies out there

That was the last part of lesson 5 Lesson 6 attached is made in one mailing Youll find Dr Andrews trading rules alongwith a wrap-up review which uses several of his rules You might have questions about some of the rules so feel free tosend them as they arise

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Dr Andrews had an abbreviated set of trading rules on several index cards that he carried around with him in his shirtpocket He said every trading day turned up something new on his charts and by having his rules in his pocket he wasreminded of the need for a methodical approach to his analysis Quite a comment coming from the man who wrote therule book

In this the final lesson of the course Dr Andrews original trading rules and observations are presented Lets work witha few of them at this point

Using charts of issues you follow please send me an example that illustrates your interpretation of each of the followingrules

Rule 4 Anticipating major Ps

Rule 7 Penetration rule

Rule 8 Price failure rule

Rule 11 1-ML23 AR Centerline

Rule 12 Sliding Parallel rule

Rule 15 Mini-median line parallel to buy or sell

Feel free to include any other course techniques you choose to apply but please include examples of the above as aminimum Use more than one technique on a chart if your analysis supports it Send as many charts as you like alongwith your questionscomments

Lesson 6 - Dr Andrews Trading Rules

This lesson covers course rules and significant observations as taught by Dr Andrews in his original trading course Therules are those that he used in his own trading and are provided to serve as a checklist for use with the course tradingmethods youve learned

Rule 1 Where prices are always headed Rule You course members are among the fortunate few to be able to draw astraight line and know that prices are headed toward that ML Very few investors have ever applied this ML principle ofstatistics to price fluctuations and weve never seen this in any books on investment You are among the very few who

know that prices are always headed toward the newest ML

Rule 2 The Rule of coming opposites applies all through life In the bible we find Blessed at they that mourn for theyshall be comforted As investors we know that any losses can be recovered by using course methods

Rule 3 Turn your mind about or Rethink for all good is at hand We should mentally prepare ourselves for thecoming reversal in prices and other affairs Heres one way for example that you course members who know the MLrules can use When prices are skyrocketing upward we do this preparation by thinking If prices pivoted here today atthis price Id draw a new ML bisecting the distance between todays price and the price from which the rise started Andwe know now that if this is a Major Pivot prices will fall rapidly to this new ML Profits from such drops are big and quick

Rule 4 Rule for anticipating major Ps If during congestion or after a rally or decline you can count four previous Psthe fifth one is highly probable to be the one from which a new trend starts

Rule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can make a quick big profit is to watch for the EPformations

Rule 6 The other reversal rule is that prices tend to reverse at or near any ML as well as at any extension of each MLAnd also at any MLH or extensions of MLH

Rule 7 The Penetration Rule is that whenever prices gap past or plunge through any ML there is a high probability thatthey will quickly return to it temporarily and then resume the trend they had before they gapped or plunged through

Rule 8 Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P of reversal and the MLthe probability is that this price reversal will go further than it did on its approach toward the ML

Rule 9 The price failure rule is negated when the next price trend is also a failure in reaching the ML This is almostinvariably a signal of a big fast move in the direction indicated by this last space Rule 10 When alternate median lines of comparable length slope in the same direction the trend is firm and rapidprice changes take place

Rule 11 When 1-ML23 is exactly reached at P4 it can be used as a highly reliable centerline for the AR method

Rule 12 Frequently after crossing a lower MLH prices continue to rise along the MLH Since the crossing of the MLHsignals a further drop is likely use a sliding parallel along the bottom of the most recent crossing If prices drop past thatsliding parallel line a sell signal is generated

Rule 13 MLs between P2 and P3 can start from a nearby or a remote P1 since prices tend to reverse at each of theseMLs Try several such P2-P3 MLs to discover the best fit

Rule 14 The distance of each MLH from its ML is the distance of the next warning line Use these warning lineswhenever a SH has signalled a buy or sell

Rule 15 Use the MMLH as a buy or sell signal when you expect a reversal because of a P5 Also when prices are at aWL ML extension line or where course lines converge or intersect

Rule 16 Converging lines that meet prices have shown the highest probability of a trend reversal

Rule 17 Two to four days is usually the maximum between P2 and P3 for a MML P1 can be a day or so back from P2and 3

Rule 18 The most reliable ActionReaction centerlines seem to be MPL 2P line 2 Gap line peak to low or low to peak

Rule 19 When prices pass through R lines look for a pull back and then a continuing move in the direction of the passthrough

Rule 20 Use gaps as Action lines from the centerline

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 003755

Hello Gordonhere is my example for Rule 4 And I have a question What are EP formations gtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 021242

Tuesday May 04 2000 123755 PM you wrote TZgt Hello GordonTZgt here is my example for Rule 4 TZgt And I have a question What are EP formations gtgtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegtgta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hi TradersZone Good use of the warning linesalso the EP material is part of lesson 4 Rather than go backthrough the files to see when (or if) it was sent Im sending it along with this reply Glad youbrought it up Best RegardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Tuesday May 04 2000208 PM Dr Andrews used a fairly common price chart formation that he found useful at probable P5market tops and bottoms The formation generally called a wedge or pennant by chartists isreferred to in Dr Andrews trading course as the Expanding Pivot (EP) One of the few chartformations used in the course he regarded it as among the most dependable indications that amarket top was forming Closely related to the EP is his Inverted Expanding Pivot (IEP) which henoted could often be observed at market bottoms Both are regarded as intermediate and long-term reversal indicators Dr Andrews found that both formations were most reliable when they occurred after a sharprapid price move coinciding with the formation of a probable P5 He said it wasnt unusual for theformation to take several weeks to complete and that conservative traders could best avoid thewhipsaw associated with congestion patterns by trading only in the direction of the probable price

break out of the EP or IEP formation The attached charts illustrate these formations Please look over your own charts for an example ofthe EP and IEP and send me a copy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 232127

Hello Gordon Thank you for the lesson with the EP material I couldnt find it in any previous emailHere is my example for Rule 7 RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Rule 4Date Samstag 6 Mai 2000 080827

Wednesday May 05 2000 112127 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt Thank you for the lesson with the EP materialTZgt I couldnt find it in any previous emailTZgt Here is my example for Rule 7

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hi TradersZone

Glad you mentioned it earlierexcept for the EP IEP and hissideways channel Dr Andrews didnt have much to say about chartpatterns and formations These are good ones to use though

Your study of the penetration rule was good Later

Best Regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Wednesday May 05 2000801 PM

Page 38: Pitchfork primer

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject More on the ARDate Donnerstag 2 Maumlrz 2000 071158

At 22800 35900 PM you wrotegtgtPlease send me two examples of a gapmpl AR study using charts ofgtgtyour choicegt gtHello Gordongthere are my examplesgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone You picked some good examples to use for your AR study Both showed the potential power of thismethod Takes time and lots of chart study sometimes to find the best set of lines but the rewardscan be many Heres something else to look at Regards Gordon The ActionReaction technique requires a strong centerline from which to begin The key todeciding which set of pivots to use for the centerline is found through experimenting with thevarious configurations visible on the chart under study The centerline might be a series of gapspivots an existing median line or any of Dr Andrews lines The task is to search for that centerlinewhich shows the greatest potential for projecting price reversal areas Dr Andrews did that byfinding a likely centerline near the middle of his price chart That allowed him to use any of theprevious pivots for his action lines By experimenting he found reaction lines that did the best jobof pegging reversal areas at data points located forward of the centerline Reaction lines are equal and opposite of the action lines and serve to project price levels at whicha reversal can be expected That is why the task of seeking out the best centerline is so importantDr Andrews reasoned that a series of reaction lines which have pegged price reversals in the pastis likely to continue to be in tune with current and future market price action Having severalprevious pivots to use as anchors for drawing action lines is thus essential The attached chart of Lattice illustrates this concept Please bear in mind that the gapmplcenterline is not the only centerline one could use on this chart You might want to study the chartfor other AR possibilities Try a peak-to-peak CL or a multi-pivot CL Send me your studies along

with any questions

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re More on the ARDate Samstag 4 Maumlrz 2000 002521

gtThe attached chart of Lattice illustrates this conceptgtPlease bear in mind that the gapmpl centerline is not the onlygtcenterline one could use on this chartgtYou might want to study the chart for other AR possibilitiesgtTry a peak-to-peak CL or a multi-pivot CL Send me your studiesgtalong with any questions Hello Gordonhere is my chart RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Peak to peak clDate Sonntag 5 Maumlrz 2000 064107

At 3400 122500 AM you wrotegtHello Gordongthere is my chartgt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Looks like you have the concept down Takes time and a lot of chart work to find the bestcenterline When the reaction lines dont seem to peg reversal areas chances are the centerline isnot the one that is best in tune with the price action of the issue under studyDespite the time required for this method it was one of Dr Andrews stand-bysAR lines could befound on most of his charts Im sending a chart with an example of a peak-to-peak CL Regards Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Peak to peak clDate Sonntag 5 Maumlrz 2000 171232

Hello Gordon I think the peak-to-peak CL on the last chart I sent to you was not really drawn from peak to peakIm sending another example RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next LessonDate Mittwoch 8 Maumlrz 2000 072526

At 3500 51200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtI think the peak-to-peak CL on the last chart I sent to you was notgtreally drawn from peak to peakgtIm sending another examplegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your peak to peak cl example was correctly drawn Thats a fairly simple approach but quite oftenthe peak to peak yields better reaction lines Heres the first part of the next lesson Regards Gordon Youll find times when prices dont quite reach the ML but instead drift alongside or away from itThe Schiff ML was designed to be used in place of the regular ML whenever that happens Suchprice action can be found at any place on a chart but most frequently occurs after a sharp sell-offor run-up of prices Dr Andrews also used the Schiff ML whenever his regular ML sloped at an unusually steep angleHe said it helped smooth out irregular price action such as that caused by unexpected earningsnews crop planting delays or poor growing conditions crop production reports etc Youll findnearly vertical price moves over a short period of time on many charts The Schiff ML method helpsput things back in perspective when that happens Well use the chart of Sterling Bancorp as an example of prices drifting away from the regular MLThat ML is drawn in black Prices didnt quite reach the ML but drifted alongside and eventuallyaway from it The Schiff ML and parallel lines are drawn in red Notice how prices were containedwithin the Schiff pitchfork until they finally broke down at the upper parallel line The procedure for drawing the Schiff ML is the same as for the regular ML except the startingpoint is located midway between the first 2 pivots youll be using The Sterling Bancorp chart

illustrates how this is done Dr Andrews also suggested using the Schiff ML whenever the regular ML method doesnt seem tobe in sync with price action Practice this procedure on your own charts and send a couple examples when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next LessonDate Donnerstag 9 Maumlrz 2000 001143

Hello Gordon in my charting software (Dynamic Trader) the Schiff ML is drawn by finding the midpoint of the line between pivot A and pivot Bmoving this point horizontally to directly above or below (depending on whether A is a low or high pivot) the A pivot anddrawing a line from his point through the midpoint of the BC swingAre there different methods of drawing a Schiff MLI was too lazy to draw Schiff MLs by hand with the method you described so Im sending my examples with the Dynamic TraderSchiff MLs -) RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject SchiffDate Samstag 11 Maumlrz 2000 070226

At 3900 121100 AM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtin my charting software (Dynamic Trader) the Schiff ML is drawn bygtfinding the midpoint of the line between pivot A and pivot B movinggtthis point horizontally to directly above or below (depending ongtwhether A is a low or high pivot) the A pivot and drawing a linegtgtfrom his point through the midpoint of the BC swinggtAre there different methods of drawing a Schiff MLgtI was too lazy to draw Schiff MLs by hand with the method yougtdescribed so Im sending my examples with the Dynamic Trader Schiff MLs -)gt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your program Schiff line procedure is fineits actually what Dr Andrews called a modified schiff ml and is onlyslightly different than the one I sent you initially The one you used is preferred by most course members Im sendingthe modified Schiff lesson and a chart along with this email The chart example shows how to use it with 0-34 pivots Regards Gordon

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Sliding Parallel LineDate Montag 13 Maumlrz 2000 005252

Hello TradersZone Heres one of the tools Dr Andrews used most often when entering exiting or reversing marketpositions Not many people know about this technique Regards Gordon The Sliding Parallel (SH) is drawn whenever prices cross an Andrews line and then move along itFor example if the bottom of a daily price bar range drops through a lower parallel line of apitchfork a new parallel line is then drawn from that low and extended to the right If the nextdays price bar drops through that sliding parallel line a sell signal is generated Whenever price action dictates a sliding parallel the next step is to draw a Warning Line Thewarning line is an additional parallel line that is an image extension of the original pitchforkchannels It serves as a warning that if prices penetrate the sliding parallel the next likely target isthe WL The attached chart of Avis illustrates these procedures Please try these on your own charts andsend me an example

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Sliding Parallel LineDate Dienstag 14 Maumlrz 2000 225737

Hello Gordon this is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning line RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 065606

At 31400 105700 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtthis is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning linegt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone Your chart of circuit city was a good example for this study I may have mentioned it earlier but DrAndrews used this technique on a regular basis The next part of this lesson covers another of hisfavorite tools the mini-median line pitchfork Here it is Regards Gordon The Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry and exit tools Though mostoften drawn using alternate closing prices alternate highs and lows can also be usedin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days is usually the maximumbetween pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or more back from P2 Dr Andrews used Mini-Median Line pitchforks for buy and sell signals whenever he expected areversal Some examples include a probable P5 or when prices are at a Warning Line ML MLHmajor ML extension or a sideways channel price target When prices cross the Mini-Median LineParallel (MMLH) a sliding parallel (SH) is used for order entry

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 231537

gtThe Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry andgtexit tools Though most often drawn using alternate closing pricesgtalternate highs and lows can also be usedgtin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days isgtusually the maximum between pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or moregtback from P2

Hello Gordon

wouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timingCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available whenDr Andrews was alive

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject intraday chartsDate Samstag 18 Maumlrz 2000 012400

At 31600 111500 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongtgtwouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsgtinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timinggtCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available when DrgtAndrews was alivegtgtRegardsgtTradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Youre absolutely correctintraday charts were not available when DrAndrews was a trader

Im reading between the lines here but if you plan to day-trade using the course techniques ie thepitchfork then I agree that the regular pitchfork would be more useful on intraday charts Otherwisewhipsaw would be a significant problem Please get back to me if I didnt address your questionbecause this is a very important technique The mini-median line pitchfork and sliding parallel showedup on most of Dr Andrews charts

Regards

Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re intraday chartsDate Dienstag 21 Maumlrz 2000 220322

Hello Gordon

You are right Im planning to daytrade SampP futures using the course techniques among other things

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 003408

Hi TradersZone Here are a couple Andrews techniques that will help anticipate the breakout direction of asideways channelThey work often enough to warrant keep handy Regards Gordon In an earlier lesson you were introduced to Dr Andrews sideways count You saw how frequentlythe sideways count method provided high probability price objectives after the breakout from theestablished channel took place In this segment of lesson 4 youll be shown 2 congestion area techniques that can help youdetermine the probable sideways channel price breakout direction Both rely on the use of pivots The first uses the pivot points that are circled on a sideways channel Dr Andrews observed thatwhenever a sideways channel results in at least 5 circle contacts the eventual price breakoutwould very often be in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle If circle 5 is at thetop of the channel for example the eventual price breakout would likely be to the upside If circle5 is at the bottom of the channel look for a downside breakout Dr Andrews noted that thistechnique can be subject to false breakouts but that such breakouts are usually followed shortlyafter with a confirmed breakout in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle Heemphasized that this study is best considered as a rule of thumb observation He viewed it as asupporting indicator for use with a short-term pitchfork as prices approached a channel line There are 2 charts attached that show how this works

The second technique in this part of lesson 4 deals with a sideways channelthat is building shortly after a P3 has been formed Dr Andrews noted thatwhenever that happened the probabilities were high that prices wouldbreakout in the same direction they were moving prior to the formation ofthe sideways channel The attached P3 to sideways example chart shows thisprocedure

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 205235

Hello Gordon here is my example for the 5 circle sideways count RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Lesson 5Date Montag 27 Maumlrz 2000 060731

At 32400 85200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my example for the 5 circle sideways countgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt gt Hi TradersZone Good example of the 5th circle tendency to predict the direction of a sideways breakout Any luckfinding a chart showing the P3 to sideways rule Im sending the first part of the next lesson This trendline method is a useful tool with all of DrAndrews course lines He used it all the time but especially when looking for confirmation of othercourse method trading signals Regards Gordon The Course Trendline__________________________________________________________ Next well discuss the trendline Seasoned traders agree that the trendline is one of their mostimportant tools No matter what kind of trading program or technique they use the trendline on achart is a must But one of the biggest mistakes made by amateurs and professionals alike isinconsistently drawing or defining the trendline Dr Andrews trendline procedure is simpleconsistent and accurate It works extremely well with the pivot count and with the pitchfork For an uptrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the lowest low up and to thehighest minor low point preceding the highest high The line must not pass through prices inbetween the two low points Extend the line(Attached chart of Brightpoint) For a downtrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the highest high point to thelowest minor high point preceding the lowest low so that it does not pass through prices inbetween the two high points Extend the line (Brightpoint chart) Thats all theres to it Its simple consistent and it works well with other Andrews lines It also

helps eliminate personal bias and haphazard analysis Practice drawing these trendlines on your own charts Send me any questions you might have andthen e-mail a chart of your choosing which shows at least two uptrend and two downtrend linesthat youve drawn_______________________________________________________________________

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Lesson 5Date Dienstag 28 Maumlrz 2000 120224

Hello Gordon here is my chart with trendlinesWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going above the trendline again should I draw a new trendline anddelete the old one Attached is another chart with the P3 to sideways rule I finally found an example for it RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Price failure techniqueDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081412

At 32800 120200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my chart with trendlinesgtWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going abovegtthe trendline again should I draw a new trendline and delete the oldgtone Hi TradersZone Take a look at the chart Im returningI added some lines for you to considerWith the course trendline once its broken a new one should be started Theres a technique thatties in with this coming up soon Meanwhile heres an important technique to work on It deals with those times when prices dontreach the ML Regards Gordon Dr Andrews Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P ofreversaland the ML the probability is that this price reversal will go further thanitdid on its approach toward the ML (Extract of original course material) A price failure very often indicates a sizeable reversal will take placeThepitchforks drawn on the chart of Home Depot illustrate the concept of pricefailure Dr Andrews routinely drew a new pitchfork on his chart after a newsignificant pivot had formed He knew that prices had a high probability ofreaching the new ML before stalling out or reversing If prices reversedbeforereaching the ML thereby forming a new pivot he termed it a price failureTheunderlying idea here is that Dr Andrews fully anticipated his median linewouldact as a price magnet To conclude that a price reversal resulted in a price failure Dr Andrewsused

these primary signalsa subsequent price penetration of a short-termmulti-pivotline andor a return of prices to and penetration of the parallel lineformed atpivot 3 of the pitchfork (The circles on the Home Depot chart denote theparallelline penetration signal To avoid clutter the mpl lines were not drawn) One possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart of ConsecoIncLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me a copy

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject ChartDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081800Attachments image002png

Hi TradersZone Forgot the chart Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Price failure techniqueDate Samstag 1 April 2000 201000

gtOne possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart ofgtConseco IncgtLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me agtcopy Hi Gordon here are my charts with price failures RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Mittwoch 5 April 2000 235624

Hi TradersZone Good price failure examples you sentany comments or questions about it Heres the next partanother old standby Dr Andrews kept handy Regards Gordon In this segment youll learn how to use the Fan line Technique To draw the fan lines youll apply the coursetrendline method which was introduced in an earlier lesson It might be well to emphasize that the practicalapplication of the course trendline method requires practice and experience both of which will serve youwell in this technique Dr Andrews used fan lines as an adjunct to his pitchfork sideways channel andactionreaction methods In the fan line study three trendlines are drawn from the original reversal pivot of the price correction understudy typically a P0 or a P5 Youll notice on the charts included with this study that each fan line is at aflatter angle than its predecessor When the third fan line is broken the rule is that the correction has endedand a new trend is under way Try this technique on some of your own charts and then please send me asample

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Donnerstag 6 April 2000 234315

Hi Gordon No I dont have any specific question about the price failure technique I guess the next likely target after a price failure wouldbe the warning line I have attached two charts with fan linesIs it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the third fan line is broken RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Next segmentDate Freitag 7 April 2000 003312

Hello TradersZone

Tuesday April 06 2000 114315 AM you wrote

TZgt Hi Gordon

TZgt No I dont have any specific question about the price failureTZgt technique I guess the next likely target after a price failureTZgt would be the warning line

TZgt I have attached two charts with fan linesTZgt Is it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the thirdTZgt fan line is broken

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Thats right the warning line is the next price target Additionalwarning lines can be drawn if needed but usually one will do it Ifprices go through the first warning line another can be drawn butmost likely a new pitchfork could be drawn instead which would bepreferable Helps stay current with recently formed pivots

When prices break through the third fan line a buy or sell signal isgiven Not sure what you mean by fourth target fan line Im a littledense today

Your chart work was goodthis is another handy tool for spotting thehigh probability of a price reversal or trend change

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject The Gap TradeDate Freitag 7 April 2000 004858

Hello TradersZone This trading signal doesnt show up very often but past observations have shown that its well worth watching for Dr Andrews placed a lot of emphasis on the importance of price gaps something many traders overlook This is one of his gap uses Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom The Gap Trading Technique Price gaps can be a dilemma for many traders The general rule denoting market strength or weakness after ahigh volume gap often comes up short after the initial reaction is over Many gappers simply run out ofsteam A high volume gap in itself seems to offer precious little evidence that a profitable move is about toget under way Dr Andrews used price gaps somewhat differently than others He counted a gap as 2 pivots Youll see howthat works in the following technique which uses a gap to arrive at a price level for a buy or sell order Using short-term daily price pivots label the pivot immediately preceding the gap as p0 Count the gap as 2pivots labeling it p1 amp p2 After p3 has formed and prices reverse towards a short-term p4 draw a horizontalline 2 price tics or more (individual preference)to the right of p3 Enter the market only if prices reach orpenetrate that line within a few days after reversing from p4 Please look over your own charts to see if you can find places where the gap trade technique could have beenused Send me a sample when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 001925

Hello Gordon this is my chart with a gap trade RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 065538

Hello TradersZone Thursday April 08 2000 121925 PM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt this is my chart with a gap trade TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Good examplethe gap trade technique shines when an issue in at or near a P5 Similar to the one on thechart you sent Heres another trading signal tool Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Dr Andrews used several techniques which helped him determine whether a P5 was near at hand Youllrecall that he observed most price moves ended or had a significant reversal at a P5 This technique uses alternate closing prices after a P4 has been formed As with many of his studies thenumber 5 is used The chart accompanying this segment shows that there were 5 alternate closes to thedownside after P4 was put in Dr Andrews noted that whenever 5 or more alternate closes followed a P4 theprobabilities were high that a P5 was near at hand An added feature to this chart study is the sideways channel Notice how the 2nd target price and the 5thalternate close nearly coincide

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 12 April 2000 200730

Hello Gordon This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 13 April 2000 082418

Monday April 12 2000 80730 AM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hello TradersZone Good chart example of this Andrews toolanother of his very unusual observations that workmore often than not Heres the final part of this lesson Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom In this trendline method Dr Andrews once again used the number 5 as the basis for locating aprobable reversal area He found this technique to be especially useful whenever a clear orobvious pivot count didnt show up onthe price move under study Trendlines are drawn using the course trendline method When the 5th trendline is broken theprobability is high that the trend under study has ended A mini-median line pitchfork andorsliding parallel could be used for pricing a trading order The accompanying chart of Compaq Computer is an example of how the trendline study could beused The pivot count beginning at the October low is difficult to nail down There were severalsmall areas of congestion but no sizeable corrections while prices advanced The count wasunclear By following the price action using the course trendline technique however the traderwould have been alerted to the possibility of a change of trend when the 5th trendline was brokenin early February Try this technique on your own charts When youre ready please send me an example of yourstudy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 19 April 2000 124108

Hello Gordon this is my example with 5 trendlines RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[6] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 20 April 2000 012726

Monday April 19 2000 124108 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt this is my example with 5 trendlines

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Good example of the 5 TL technique Always reminds me of how the fairly simple tools often do a better job than manyof the sophisticated studies out there

That was the last part of lesson 5 Lesson 6 attached is made in one mailing Youll find Dr Andrews trading rules alongwith a wrap-up review which uses several of his rules You might have questions about some of the rules so feel free tosend them as they arise

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Dr Andrews had an abbreviated set of trading rules on several index cards that he carried around with him in his shirtpocket He said every trading day turned up something new on his charts and by having his rules in his pocket he wasreminded of the need for a methodical approach to his analysis Quite a comment coming from the man who wrote therule book

In this the final lesson of the course Dr Andrews original trading rules and observations are presented Lets work witha few of them at this point

Using charts of issues you follow please send me an example that illustrates your interpretation of each of the followingrules

Rule 4 Anticipating major Ps

Rule 7 Penetration rule

Rule 8 Price failure rule

Rule 11 1-ML23 AR Centerline

Rule 12 Sliding Parallel rule

Rule 15 Mini-median line parallel to buy or sell

Feel free to include any other course techniques you choose to apply but please include examples of the above as aminimum Use more than one technique on a chart if your analysis supports it Send as many charts as you like alongwith your questionscomments

Lesson 6 - Dr Andrews Trading Rules

This lesson covers course rules and significant observations as taught by Dr Andrews in his original trading course Therules are those that he used in his own trading and are provided to serve as a checklist for use with the course tradingmethods youve learned

Rule 1 Where prices are always headed Rule You course members are among the fortunate few to be able to draw astraight line and know that prices are headed toward that ML Very few investors have ever applied this ML principle ofstatistics to price fluctuations and weve never seen this in any books on investment You are among the very few who

know that prices are always headed toward the newest ML

Rule 2 The Rule of coming opposites applies all through life In the bible we find Blessed at they that mourn for theyshall be comforted As investors we know that any losses can be recovered by using course methods

Rule 3 Turn your mind about or Rethink for all good is at hand We should mentally prepare ourselves for thecoming reversal in prices and other affairs Heres one way for example that you course members who know the MLrules can use When prices are skyrocketing upward we do this preparation by thinking If prices pivoted here today atthis price Id draw a new ML bisecting the distance between todays price and the price from which the rise started Andwe know now that if this is a Major Pivot prices will fall rapidly to this new ML Profits from such drops are big and quick

Rule 4 Rule for anticipating major Ps If during congestion or after a rally or decline you can count four previous Psthe fifth one is highly probable to be the one from which a new trend starts

Rule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can make a quick big profit is to watch for the EPformations

Rule 6 The other reversal rule is that prices tend to reverse at or near any ML as well as at any extension of each MLAnd also at any MLH or extensions of MLH

Rule 7 The Penetration Rule is that whenever prices gap past or plunge through any ML there is a high probability thatthey will quickly return to it temporarily and then resume the trend they had before they gapped or plunged through

Rule 8 Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P of reversal and the MLthe probability is that this price reversal will go further than it did on its approach toward the ML

Rule 9 The price failure rule is negated when the next price trend is also a failure in reaching the ML This is almostinvariably a signal of a big fast move in the direction indicated by this last space Rule 10 When alternate median lines of comparable length slope in the same direction the trend is firm and rapidprice changes take place

Rule 11 When 1-ML23 is exactly reached at P4 it can be used as a highly reliable centerline for the AR method

Rule 12 Frequently after crossing a lower MLH prices continue to rise along the MLH Since the crossing of the MLHsignals a further drop is likely use a sliding parallel along the bottom of the most recent crossing If prices drop past thatsliding parallel line a sell signal is generated

Rule 13 MLs between P2 and P3 can start from a nearby or a remote P1 since prices tend to reverse at each of theseMLs Try several such P2-P3 MLs to discover the best fit

Rule 14 The distance of each MLH from its ML is the distance of the next warning line Use these warning lineswhenever a SH has signalled a buy or sell

Rule 15 Use the MMLH as a buy or sell signal when you expect a reversal because of a P5 Also when prices are at aWL ML extension line or where course lines converge or intersect

Rule 16 Converging lines that meet prices have shown the highest probability of a trend reversal

Rule 17 Two to four days is usually the maximum between P2 and P3 for a MML P1 can be a day or so back from P2and 3

Rule 18 The most reliable ActionReaction centerlines seem to be MPL 2P line 2 Gap line peak to low or low to peak

Rule 19 When prices pass through R lines look for a pull back and then a continuing move in the direction of the passthrough

Rule 20 Use gaps as Action lines from the centerline

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 003755

Hello Gordonhere is my example for Rule 4 And I have a question What are EP formations gtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 021242

Tuesday May 04 2000 123755 PM you wrote TZgt Hello GordonTZgt here is my example for Rule 4 TZgt And I have a question What are EP formations gtgtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegtgta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hi TradersZone Good use of the warning linesalso the EP material is part of lesson 4 Rather than go backthrough the files to see when (or if) it was sent Im sending it along with this reply Glad youbrought it up Best RegardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Tuesday May 04 2000208 PM Dr Andrews used a fairly common price chart formation that he found useful at probable P5market tops and bottoms The formation generally called a wedge or pennant by chartists isreferred to in Dr Andrews trading course as the Expanding Pivot (EP) One of the few chartformations used in the course he regarded it as among the most dependable indications that amarket top was forming Closely related to the EP is his Inverted Expanding Pivot (IEP) which henoted could often be observed at market bottoms Both are regarded as intermediate and long-term reversal indicators Dr Andrews found that both formations were most reliable when they occurred after a sharprapid price move coinciding with the formation of a probable P5 He said it wasnt unusual for theformation to take several weeks to complete and that conservative traders could best avoid thewhipsaw associated with congestion patterns by trading only in the direction of the probable price

break out of the EP or IEP formation The attached charts illustrate these formations Please look over your own charts for an example ofthe EP and IEP and send me a copy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 232127

Hello Gordon Thank you for the lesson with the EP material I couldnt find it in any previous emailHere is my example for Rule 7 RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Rule 4Date Samstag 6 Mai 2000 080827

Wednesday May 05 2000 112127 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt Thank you for the lesson with the EP materialTZgt I couldnt find it in any previous emailTZgt Here is my example for Rule 7

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hi TradersZone

Glad you mentioned it earlierexcept for the EP IEP and hissideways channel Dr Andrews didnt have much to say about chartpatterns and formations These are good ones to use though

Your study of the penetration rule was good Later

Best Regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Wednesday May 05 2000801 PM

Page 39: Pitchfork primer

with any questions

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re More on the ARDate Samstag 4 Maumlrz 2000 002521

gtThe attached chart of Lattice illustrates this conceptgtPlease bear in mind that the gapmpl centerline is not the onlygtcenterline one could use on this chartgtYou might want to study the chart for other AR possibilitiesgtTry a peak-to-peak CL or a multi-pivot CL Send me your studiesgtalong with any questions Hello Gordonhere is my chart RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Peak to peak clDate Sonntag 5 Maumlrz 2000 064107

At 3400 122500 AM you wrotegtHello Gordongthere is my chartgt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Looks like you have the concept down Takes time and a lot of chart work to find the bestcenterline When the reaction lines dont seem to peg reversal areas chances are the centerline isnot the one that is best in tune with the price action of the issue under studyDespite the time required for this method it was one of Dr Andrews stand-bysAR lines could befound on most of his charts Im sending a chart with an example of a peak-to-peak CL Regards Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Peak to peak clDate Sonntag 5 Maumlrz 2000 171232

Hello Gordon I think the peak-to-peak CL on the last chart I sent to you was not really drawn from peak to peakIm sending another example RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next LessonDate Mittwoch 8 Maumlrz 2000 072526

At 3500 51200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtI think the peak-to-peak CL on the last chart I sent to you was notgtreally drawn from peak to peakgtIm sending another examplegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your peak to peak cl example was correctly drawn Thats a fairly simple approach but quite oftenthe peak to peak yields better reaction lines Heres the first part of the next lesson Regards Gordon Youll find times when prices dont quite reach the ML but instead drift alongside or away from itThe Schiff ML was designed to be used in place of the regular ML whenever that happens Suchprice action can be found at any place on a chart but most frequently occurs after a sharp sell-offor run-up of prices Dr Andrews also used the Schiff ML whenever his regular ML sloped at an unusually steep angleHe said it helped smooth out irregular price action such as that caused by unexpected earningsnews crop planting delays or poor growing conditions crop production reports etc Youll findnearly vertical price moves over a short period of time on many charts The Schiff ML method helpsput things back in perspective when that happens Well use the chart of Sterling Bancorp as an example of prices drifting away from the regular MLThat ML is drawn in black Prices didnt quite reach the ML but drifted alongside and eventuallyaway from it The Schiff ML and parallel lines are drawn in red Notice how prices were containedwithin the Schiff pitchfork until they finally broke down at the upper parallel line The procedure for drawing the Schiff ML is the same as for the regular ML except the startingpoint is located midway between the first 2 pivots youll be using The Sterling Bancorp chart

illustrates how this is done Dr Andrews also suggested using the Schiff ML whenever the regular ML method doesnt seem tobe in sync with price action Practice this procedure on your own charts and send a couple examples when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next LessonDate Donnerstag 9 Maumlrz 2000 001143

Hello Gordon in my charting software (Dynamic Trader) the Schiff ML is drawn by finding the midpoint of the line between pivot A and pivot Bmoving this point horizontally to directly above or below (depending on whether A is a low or high pivot) the A pivot anddrawing a line from his point through the midpoint of the BC swingAre there different methods of drawing a Schiff MLI was too lazy to draw Schiff MLs by hand with the method you described so Im sending my examples with the Dynamic TraderSchiff MLs -) RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject SchiffDate Samstag 11 Maumlrz 2000 070226

At 3900 121100 AM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtin my charting software (Dynamic Trader) the Schiff ML is drawn bygtfinding the midpoint of the line between pivot A and pivot B movinggtthis point horizontally to directly above or below (depending ongtwhether A is a low or high pivot) the A pivot and drawing a linegtgtfrom his point through the midpoint of the BC swinggtAre there different methods of drawing a Schiff MLgtI was too lazy to draw Schiff MLs by hand with the method yougtdescribed so Im sending my examples with the Dynamic Trader Schiff MLs -)gt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your program Schiff line procedure is fineits actually what Dr Andrews called a modified schiff ml and is onlyslightly different than the one I sent you initially The one you used is preferred by most course members Im sendingthe modified Schiff lesson and a chart along with this email The chart example shows how to use it with 0-34 pivots Regards Gordon

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Sliding Parallel LineDate Montag 13 Maumlrz 2000 005252

Hello TradersZone Heres one of the tools Dr Andrews used most often when entering exiting or reversing marketpositions Not many people know about this technique Regards Gordon The Sliding Parallel (SH) is drawn whenever prices cross an Andrews line and then move along itFor example if the bottom of a daily price bar range drops through a lower parallel line of apitchfork a new parallel line is then drawn from that low and extended to the right If the nextdays price bar drops through that sliding parallel line a sell signal is generated Whenever price action dictates a sliding parallel the next step is to draw a Warning Line Thewarning line is an additional parallel line that is an image extension of the original pitchforkchannels It serves as a warning that if prices penetrate the sliding parallel the next likely target isthe WL The attached chart of Avis illustrates these procedures Please try these on your own charts andsend me an example

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Sliding Parallel LineDate Dienstag 14 Maumlrz 2000 225737

Hello Gordon this is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning line RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 065606

At 31400 105700 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtthis is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning linegt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone Your chart of circuit city was a good example for this study I may have mentioned it earlier but DrAndrews used this technique on a regular basis The next part of this lesson covers another of hisfavorite tools the mini-median line pitchfork Here it is Regards Gordon The Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry and exit tools Though mostoften drawn using alternate closing prices alternate highs and lows can also be usedin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days is usually the maximumbetween pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or more back from P2 Dr Andrews used Mini-Median Line pitchforks for buy and sell signals whenever he expected areversal Some examples include a probable P5 or when prices are at a Warning Line ML MLHmajor ML extension or a sideways channel price target When prices cross the Mini-Median LineParallel (MMLH) a sliding parallel (SH) is used for order entry

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 231537

gtThe Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry andgtexit tools Though most often drawn using alternate closing pricesgtalternate highs and lows can also be usedgtin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days isgtusually the maximum between pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or moregtback from P2

Hello Gordon

wouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timingCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available whenDr Andrews was alive

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject intraday chartsDate Samstag 18 Maumlrz 2000 012400

At 31600 111500 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongtgtwouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsgtinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timinggtCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available when DrgtAndrews was alivegtgtRegardsgtTradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Youre absolutely correctintraday charts were not available when DrAndrews was a trader

Im reading between the lines here but if you plan to day-trade using the course techniques ie thepitchfork then I agree that the regular pitchfork would be more useful on intraday charts Otherwisewhipsaw would be a significant problem Please get back to me if I didnt address your questionbecause this is a very important technique The mini-median line pitchfork and sliding parallel showedup on most of Dr Andrews charts

Regards

Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re intraday chartsDate Dienstag 21 Maumlrz 2000 220322

Hello Gordon

You are right Im planning to daytrade SampP futures using the course techniques among other things

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 003408

Hi TradersZone Here are a couple Andrews techniques that will help anticipate the breakout direction of asideways channelThey work often enough to warrant keep handy Regards Gordon In an earlier lesson you were introduced to Dr Andrews sideways count You saw how frequentlythe sideways count method provided high probability price objectives after the breakout from theestablished channel took place In this segment of lesson 4 youll be shown 2 congestion area techniques that can help youdetermine the probable sideways channel price breakout direction Both rely on the use of pivots The first uses the pivot points that are circled on a sideways channel Dr Andrews observed thatwhenever a sideways channel results in at least 5 circle contacts the eventual price breakoutwould very often be in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle If circle 5 is at thetop of the channel for example the eventual price breakout would likely be to the upside If circle5 is at the bottom of the channel look for a downside breakout Dr Andrews noted that thistechnique can be subject to false breakouts but that such breakouts are usually followed shortlyafter with a confirmed breakout in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle Heemphasized that this study is best considered as a rule of thumb observation He viewed it as asupporting indicator for use with a short-term pitchfork as prices approached a channel line There are 2 charts attached that show how this works

The second technique in this part of lesson 4 deals with a sideways channelthat is building shortly after a P3 has been formed Dr Andrews noted thatwhenever that happened the probabilities were high that prices wouldbreakout in the same direction they were moving prior to the formation ofthe sideways channel The attached P3 to sideways example chart shows thisprocedure

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 205235

Hello Gordon here is my example for the 5 circle sideways count RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Lesson 5Date Montag 27 Maumlrz 2000 060731

At 32400 85200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my example for the 5 circle sideways countgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt gt Hi TradersZone Good example of the 5th circle tendency to predict the direction of a sideways breakout Any luckfinding a chart showing the P3 to sideways rule Im sending the first part of the next lesson This trendline method is a useful tool with all of DrAndrews course lines He used it all the time but especially when looking for confirmation of othercourse method trading signals Regards Gordon The Course Trendline__________________________________________________________ Next well discuss the trendline Seasoned traders agree that the trendline is one of their mostimportant tools No matter what kind of trading program or technique they use the trendline on achart is a must But one of the biggest mistakes made by amateurs and professionals alike isinconsistently drawing or defining the trendline Dr Andrews trendline procedure is simpleconsistent and accurate It works extremely well with the pivot count and with the pitchfork For an uptrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the lowest low up and to thehighest minor low point preceding the highest high The line must not pass through prices inbetween the two low points Extend the line(Attached chart of Brightpoint) For a downtrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the highest high point to thelowest minor high point preceding the lowest low so that it does not pass through prices inbetween the two high points Extend the line (Brightpoint chart) Thats all theres to it Its simple consistent and it works well with other Andrews lines It also

helps eliminate personal bias and haphazard analysis Practice drawing these trendlines on your own charts Send me any questions you might have andthen e-mail a chart of your choosing which shows at least two uptrend and two downtrend linesthat youve drawn_______________________________________________________________________

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Lesson 5Date Dienstag 28 Maumlrz 2000 120224

Hello Gordon here is my chart with trendlinesWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going above the trendline again should I draw a new trendline anddelete the old one Attached is another chart with the P3 to sideways rule I finally found an example for it RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Price failure techniqueDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081412

At 32800 120200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my chart with trendlinesgtWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going abovegtthe trendline again should I draw a new trendline and delete the oldgtone Hi TradersZone Take a look at the chart Im returningI added some lines for you to considerWith the course trendline once its broken a new one should be started Theres a technique thatties in with this coming up soon Meanwhile heres an important technique to work on It deals with those times when prices dontreach the ML Regards Gordon Dr Andrews Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P ofreversaland the ML the probability is that this price reversal will go further thanitdid on its approach toward the ML (Extract of original course material) A price failure very often indicates a sizeable reversal will take placeThepitchforks drawn on the chart of Home Depot illustrate the concept of pricefailure Dr Andrews routinely drew a new pitchfork on his chart after a newsignificant pivot had formed He knew that prices had a high probability ofreaching the new ML before stalling out or reversing If prices reversedbeforereaching the ML thereby forming a new pivot he termed it a price failureTheunderlying idea here is that Dr Andrews fully anticipated his median linewouldact as a price magnet To conclude that a price reversal resulted in a price failure Dr Andrewsused

these primary signalsa subsequent price penetration of a short-termmulti-pivotline andor a return of prices to and penetration of the parallel lineformed atpivot 3 of the pitchfork (The circles on the Home Depot chart denote theparallelline penetration signal To avoid clutter the mpl lines were not drawn) One possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart of ConsecoIncLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me a copy

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject ChartDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081800Attachments image002png

Hi TradersZone Forgot the chart Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Price failure techniqueDate Samstag 1 April 2000 201000

gtOne possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart ofgtConseco IncgtLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me agtcopy Hi Gordon here are my charts with price failures RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Mittwoch 5 April 2000 235624

Hi TradersZone Good price failure examples you sentany comments or questions about it Heres the next partanother old standby Dr Andrews kept handy Regards Gordon In this segment youll learn how to use the Fan line Technique To draw the fan lines youll apply the coursetrendline method which was introduced in an earlier lesson It might be well to emphasize that the practicalapplication of the course trendline method requires practice and experience both of which will serve youwell in this technique Dr Andrews used fan lines as an adjunct to his pitchfork sideways channel andactionreaction methods In the fan line study three trendlines are drawn from the original reversal pivot of the price correction understudy typically a P0 or a P5 Youll notice on the charts included with this study that each fan line is at aflatter angle than its predecessor When the third fan line is broken the rule is that the correction has endedand a new trend is under way Try this technique on some of your own charts and then please send me asample

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Donnerstag 6 April 2000 234315

Hi Gordon No I dont have any specific question about the price failure technique I guess the next likely target after a price failure wouldbe the warning line I have attached two charts with fan linesIs it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the third fan line is broken RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Next segmentDate Freitag 7 April 2000 003312

Hello TradersZone

Tuesday April 06 2000 114315 AM you wrote

TZgt Hi Gordon

TZgt No I dont have any specific question about the price failureTZgt technique I guess the next likely target after a price failureTZgt would be the warning line

TZgt I have attached two charts with fan linesTZgt Is it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the thirdTZgt fan line is broken

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Thats right the warning line is the next price target Additionalwarning lines can be drawn if needed but usually one will do it Ifprices go through the first warning line another can be drawn butmost likely a new pitchfork could be drawn instead which would bepreferable Helps stay current with recently formed pivots

When prices break through the third fan line a buy or sell signal isgiven Not sure what you mean by fourth target fan line Im a littledense today

Your chart work was goodthis is another handy tool for spotting thehigh probability of a price reversal or trend change

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject The Gap TradeDate Freitag 7 April 2000 004858

Hello TradersZone This trading signal doesnt show up very often but past observations have shown that its well worth watching for Dr Andrews placed a lot of emphasis on the importance of price gaps something many traders overlook This is one of his gap uses Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom The Gap Trading Technique Price gaps can be a dilemma for many traders The general rule denoting market strength or weakness after ahigh volume gap often comes up short after the initial reaction is over Many gappers simply run out ofsteam A high volume gap in itself seems to offer precious little evidence that a profitable move is about toget under way Dr Andrews used price gaps somewhat differently than others He counted a gap as 2 pivots Youll see howthat works in the following technique which uses a gap to arrive at a price level for a buy or sell order Using short-term daily price pivots label the pivot immediately preceding the gap as p0 Count the gap as 2pivots labeling it p1 amp p2 After p3 has formed and prices reverse towards a short-term p4 draw a horizontalline 2 price tics or more (individual preference)to the right of p3 Enter the market only if prices reach orpenetrate that line within a few days after reversing from p4 Please look over your own charts to see if you can find places where the gap trade technique could have beenused Send me a sample when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 001925

Hello Gordon this is my chart with a gap trade RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 065538

Hello TradersZone Thursday April 08 2000 121925 PM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt this is my chart with a gap trade TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Good examplethe gap trade technique shines when an issue in at or near a P5 Similar to the one on thechart you sent Heres another trading signal tool Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Dr Andrews used several techniques which helped him determine whether a P5 was near at hand Youllrecall that he observed most price moves ended or had a significant reversal at a P5 This technique uses alternate closing prices after a P4 has been formed As with many of his studies thenumber 5 is used The chart accompanying this segment shows that there were 5 alternate closes to thedownside after P4 was put in Dr Andrews noted that whenever 5 or more alternate closes followed a P4 theprobabilities were high that a P5 was near at hand An added feature to this chart study is the sideways channel Notice how the 2nd target price and the 5thalternate close nearly coincide

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 12 April 2000 200730

Hello Gordon This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 13 April 2000 082418

Monday April 12 2000 80730 AM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hello TradersZone Good chart example of this Andrews toolanother of his very unusual observations that workmore often than not Heres the final part of this lesson Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom In this trendline method Dr Andrews once again used the number 5 as the basis for locating aprobable reversal area He found this technique to be especially useful whenever a clear orobvious pivot count didnt show up onthe price move under study Trendlines are drawn using the course trendline method When the 5th trendline is broken theprobability is high that the trend under study has ended A mini-median line pitchfork andorsliding parallel could be used for pricing a trading order The accompanying chart of Compaq Computer is an example of how the trendline study could beused The pivot count beginning at the October low is difficult to nail down There were severalsmall areas of congestion but no sizeable corrections while prices advanced The count wasunclear By following the price action using the course trendline technique however the traderwould have been alerted to the possibility of a change of trend when the 5th trendline was brokenin early February Try this technique on your own charts When youre ready please send me an example of yourstudy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 19 April 2000 124108

Hello Gordon this is my example with 5 trendlines RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[6] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 20 April 2000 012726

Monday April 19 2000 124108 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt this is my example with 5 trendlines

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Good example of the 5 TL technique Always reminds me of how the fairly simple tools often do a better job than manyof the sophisticated studies out there

That was the last part of lesson 5 Lesson 6 attached is made in one mailing Youll find Dr Andrews trading rules alongwith a wrap-up review which uses several of his rules You might have questions about some of the rules so feel free tosend them as they arise

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Dr Andrews had an abbreviated set of trading rules on several index cards that he carried around with him in his shirtpocket He said every trading day turned up something new on his charts and by having his rules in his pocket he wasreminded of the need for a methodical approach to his analysis Quite a comment coming from the man who wrote therule book

In this the final lesson of the course Dr Andrews original trading rules and observations are presented Lets work witha few of them at this point

Using charts of issues you follow please send me an example that illustrates your interpretation of each of the followingrules

Rule 4 Anticipating major Ps

Rule 7 Penetration rule

Rule 8 Price failure rule

Rule 11 1-ML23 AR Centerline

Rule 12 Sliding Parallel rule

Rule 15 Mini-median line parallel to buy or sell

Feel free to include any other course techniques you choose to apply but please include examples of the above as aminimum Use more than one technique on a chart if your analysis supports it Send as many charts as you like alongwith your questionscomments

Lesson 6 - Dr Andrews Trading Rules

This lesson covers course rules and significant observations as taught by Dr Andrews in his original trading course Therules are those that he used in his own trading and are provided to serve as a checklist for use with the course tradingmethods youve learned

Rule 1 Where prices are always headed Rule You course members are among the fortunate few to be able to draw astraight line and know that prices are headed toward that ML Very few investors have ever applied this ML principle ofstatistics to price fluctuations and weve never seen this in any books on investment You are among the very few who

know that prices are always headed toward the newest ML

Rule 2 The Rule of coming opposites applies all through life In the bible we find Blessed at they that mourn for theyshall be comforted As investors we know that any losses can be recovered by using course methods

Rule 3 Turn your mind about or Rethink for all good is at hand We should mentally prepare ourselves for thecoming reversal in prices and other affairs Heres one way for example that you course members who know the MLrules can use When prices are skyrocketing upward we do this preparation by thinking If prices pivoted here today atthis price Id draw a new ML bisecting the distance between todays price and the price from which the rise started Andwe know now that if this is a Major Pivot prices will fall rapidly to this new ML Profits from such drops are big and quick

Rule 4 Rule for anticipating major Ps If during congestion or after a rally or decline you can count four previous Psthe fifth one is highly probable to be the one from which a new trend starts

Rule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can make a quick big profit is to watch for the EPformations

Rule 6 The other reversal rule is that prices tend to reverse at or near any ML as well as at any extension of each MLAnd also at any MLH or extensions of MLH

Rule 7 The Penetration Rule is that whenever prices gap past or plunge through any ML there is a high probability thatthey will quickly return to it temporarily and then resume the trend they had before they gapped or plunged through

Rule 8 Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P of reversal and the MLthe probability is that this price reversal will go further than it did on its approach toward the ML

Rule 9 The price failure rule is negated when the next price trend is also a failure in reaching the ML This is almostinvariably a signal of a big fast move in the direction indicated by this last space Rule 10 When alternate median lines of comparable length slope in the same direction the trend is firm and rapidprice changes take place

Rule 11 When 1-ML23 is exactly reached at P4 it can be used as a highly reliable centerline for the AR method

Rule 12 Frequently after crossing a lower MLH prices continue to rise along the MLH Since the crossing of the MLHsignals a further drop is likely use a sliding parallel along the bottom of the most recent crossing If prices drop past thatsliding parallel line a sell signal is generated

Rule 13 MLs between P2 and P3 can start from a nearby or a remote P1 since prices tend to reverse at each of theseMLs Try several such P2-P3 MLs to discover the best fit

Rule 14 The distance of each MLH from its ML is the distance of the next warning line Use these warning lineswhenever a SH has signalled a buy or sell

Rule 15 Use the MMLH as a buy or sell signal when you expect a reversal because of a P5 Also when prices are at aWL ML extension line or where course lines converge or intersect

Rule 16 Converging lines that meet prices have shown the highest probability of a trend reversal

Rule 17 Two to four days is usually the maximum between P2 and P3 for a MML P1 can be a day or so back from P2and 3

Rule 18 The most reliable ActionReaction centerlines seem to be MPL 2P line 2 Gap line peak to low or low to peak

Rule 19 When prices pass through R lines look for a pull back and then a continuing move in the direction of the passthrough

Rule 20 Use gaps as Action lines from the centerline

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 003755

Hello Gordonhere is my example for Rule 4 And I have a question What are EP formations gtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 021242

Tuesday May 04 2000 123755 PM you wrote TZgt Hello GordonTZgt here is my example for Rule 4 TZgt And I have a question What are EP formations gtgtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegtgta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hi TradersZone Good use of the warning linesalso the EP material is part of lesson 4 Rather than go backthrough the files to see when (or if) it was sent Im sending it along with this reply Glad youbrought it up Best RegardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Tuesday May 04 2000208 PM Dr Andrews used a fairly common price chart formation that he found useful at probable P5market tops and bottoms The formation generally called a wedge or pennant by chartists isreferred to in Dr Andrews trading course as the Expanding Pivot (EP) One of the few chartformations used in the course he regarded it as among the most dependable indications that amarket top was forming Closely related to the EP is his Inverted Expanding Pivot (IEP) which henoted could often be observed at market bottoms Both are regarded as intermediate and long-term reversal indicators Dr Andrews found that both formations were most reliable when they occurred after a sharprapid price move coinciding with the formation of a probable P5 He said it wasnt unusual for theformation to take several weeks to complete and that conservative traders could best avoid thewhipsaw associated with congestion patterns by trading only in the direction of the probable price

break out of the EP or IEP formation The attached charts illustrate these formations Please look over your own charts for an example ofthe EP and IEP and send me a copy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 232127

Hello Gordon Thank you for the lesson with the EP material I couldnt find it in any previous emailHere is my example for Rule 7 RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Rule 4Date Samstag 6 Mai 2000 080827

Wednesday May 05 2000 112127 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt Thank you for the lesson with the EP materialTZgt I couldnt find it in any previous emailTZgt Here is my example for Rule 7

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hi TradersZone

Glad you mentioned it earlierexcept for the EP IEP and hissideways channel Dr Andrews didnt have much to say about chartpatterns and formations These are good ones to use though

Your study of the penetration rule was good Later

Best Regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Wednesday May 05 2000801 PM

Page 40: Pitchfork primer

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re More on the ARDate Samstag 4 Maumlrz 2000 002521

gtThe attached chart of Lattice illustrates this conceptgtPlease bear in mind that the gapmpl centerline is not the onlygtcenterline one could use on this chartgtYou might want to study the chart for other AR possibilitiesgtTry a peak-to-peak CL or a multi-pivot CL Send me your studiesgtalong with any questions Hello Gordonhere is my chart RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Peak to peak clDate Sonntag 5 Maumlrz 2000 064107

At 3400 122500 AM you wrotegtHello Gordongthere is my chartgt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Looks like you have the concept down Takes time and a lot of chart work to find the bestcenterline When the reaction lines dont seem to peg reversal areas chances are the centerline isnot the one that is best in tune with the price action of the issue under studyDespite the time required for this method it was one of Dr Andrews stand-bysAR lines could befound on most of his charts Im sending a chart with an example of a peak-to-peak CL Regards Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Peak to peak clDate Sonntag 5 Maumlrz 2000 171232

Hello Gordon I think the peak-to-peak CL on the last chart I sent to you was not really drawn from peak to peakIm sending another example RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next LessonDate Mittwoch 8 Maumlrz 2000 072526

At 3500 51200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtI think the peak-to-peak CL on the last chart I sent to you was notgtreally drawn from peak to peakgtIm sending another examplegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your peak to peak cl example was correctly drawn Thats a fairly simple approach but quite oftenthe peak to peak yields better reaction lines Heres the first part of the next lesson Regards Gordon Youll find times when prices dont quite reach the ML but instead drift alongside or away from itThe Schiff ML was designed to be used in place of the regular ML whenever that happens Suchprice action can be found at any place on a chart but most frequently occurs after a sharp sell-offor run-up of prices Dr Andrews also used the Schiff ML whenever his regular ML sloped at an unusually steep angleHe said it helped smooth out irregular price action such as that caused by unexpected earningsnews crop planting delays or poor growing conditions crop production reports etc Youll findnearly vertical price moves over a short period of time on many charts The Schiff ML method helpsput things back in perspective when that happens Well use the chart of Sterling Bancorp as an example of prices drifting away from the regular MLThat ML is drawn in black Prices didnt quite reach the ML but drifted alongside and eventuallyaway from it The Schiff ML and parallel lines are drawn in red Notice how prices were containedwithin the Schiff pitchfork until they finally broke down at the upper parallel line The procedure for drawing the Schiff ML is the same as for the regular ML except the startingpoint is located midway between the first 2 pivots youll be using The Sterling Bancorp chart

illustrates how this is done Dr Andrews also suggested using the Schiff ML whenever the regular ML method doesnt seem tobe in sync with price action Practice this procedure on your own charts and send a couple examples when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next LessonDate Donnerstag 9 Maumlrz 2000 001143

Hello Gordon in my charting software (Dynamic Trader) the Schiff ML is drawn by finding the midpoint of the line between pivot A and pivot Bmoving this point horizontally to directly above or below (depending on whether A is a low or high pivot) the A pivot anddrawing a line from his point through the midpoint of the BC swingAre there different methods of drawing a Schiff MLI was too lazy to draw Schiff MLs by hand with the method you described so Im sending my examples with the Dynamic TraderSchiff MLs -) RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject SchiffDate Samstag 11 Maumlrz 2000 070226

At 3900 121100 AM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtin my charting software (Dynamic Trader) the Schiff ML is drawn bygtfinding the midpoint of the line between pivot A and pivot B movinggtthis point horizontally to directly above or below (depending ongtwhether A is a low or high pivot) the A pivot and drawing a linegtgtfrom his point through the midpoint of the BC swinggtAre there different methods of drawing a Schiff MLgtI was too lazy to draw Schiff MLs by hand with the method yougtdescribed so Im sending my examples with the Dynamic Trader Schiff MLs -)gt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your program Schiff line procedure is fineits actually what Dr Andrews called a modified schiff ml and is onlyslightly different than the one I sent you initially The one you used is preferred by most course members Im sendingthe modified Schiff lesson and a chart along with this email The chart example shows how to use it with 0-34 pivots Regards Gordon

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Sliding Parallel LineDate Montag 13 Maumlrz 2000 005252

Hello TradersZone Heres one of the tools Dr Andrews used most often when entering exiting or reversing marketpositions Not many people know about this technique Regards Gordon The Sliding Parallel (SH) is drawn whenever prices cross an Andrews line and then move along itFor example if the bottom of a daily price bar range drops through a lower parallel line of apitchfork a new parallel line is then drawn from that low and extended to the right If the nextdays price bar drops through that sliding parallel line a sell signal is generated Whenever price action dictates a sliding parallel the next step is to draw a Warning Line Thewarning line is an additional parallel line that is an image extension of the original pitchforkchannels It serves as a warning that if prices penetrate the sliding parallel the next likely target isthe WL The attached chart of Avis illustrates these procedures Please try these on your own charts andsend me an example

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Sliding Parallel LineDate Dienstag 14 Maumlrz 2000 225737

Hello Gordon this is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning line RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 065606

At 31400 105700 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtthis is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning linegt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone Your chart of circuit city was a good example for this study I may have mentioned it earlier but DrAndrews used this technique on a regular basis The next part of this lesson covers another of hisfavorite tools the mini-median line pitchfork Here it is Regards Gordon The Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry and exit tools Though mostoften drawn using alternate closing prices alternate highs and lows can also be usedin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days is usually the maximumbetween pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or more back from P2 Dr Andrews used Mini-Median Line pitchforks for buy and sell signals whenever he expected areversal Some examples include a probable P5 or when prices are at a Warning Line ML MLHmajor ML extension or a sideways channel price target When prices cross the Mini-Median LineParallel (MMLH) a sliding parallel (SH) is used for order entry

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 231537

gtThe Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry andgtexit tools Though most often drawn using alternate closing pricesgtalternate highs and lows can also be usedgtin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days isgtusually the maximum between pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or moregtback from P2

Hello Gordon

wouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timingCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available whenDr Andrews was alive

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject intraday chartsDate Samstag 18 Maumlrz 2000 012400

At 31600 111500 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongtgtwouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsgtinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timinggtCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available when DrgtAndrews was alivegtgtRegardsgtTradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Youre absolutely correctintraday charts were not available when DrAndrews was a trader

Im reading between the lines here but if you plan to day-trade using the course techniques ie thepitchfork then I agree that the regular pitchfork would be more useful on intraday charts Otherwisewhipsaw would be a significant problem Please get back to me if I didnt address your questionbecause this is a very important technique The mini-median line pitchfork and sliding parallel showedup on most of Dr Andrews charts

Regards

Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re intraday chartsDate Dienstag 21 Maumlrz 2000 220322

Hello Gordon

You are right Im planning to daytrade SampP futures using the course techniques among other things

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 003408

Hi TradersZone Here are a couple Andrews techniques that will help anticipate the breakout direction of asideways channelThey work often enough to warrant keep handy Regards Gordon In an earlier lesson you were introduced to Dr Andrews sideways count You saw how frequentlythe sideways count method provided high probability price objectives after the breakout from theestablished channel took place In this segment of lesson 4 youll be shown 2 congestion area techniques that can help youdetermine the probable sideways channel price breakout direction Both rely on the use of pivots The first uses the pivot points that are circled on a sideways channel Dr Andrews observed thatwhenever a sideways channel results in at least 5 circle contacts the eventual price breakoutwould very often be in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle If circle 5 is at thetop of the channel for example the eventual price breakout would likely be to the upside If circle5 is at the bottom of the channel look for a downside breakout Dr Andrews noted that thistechnique can be subject to false breakouts but that such breakouts are usually followed shortlyafter with a confirmed breakout in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle Heemphasized that this study is best considered as a rule of thumb observation He viewed it as asupporting indicator for use with a short-term pitchfork as prices approached a channel line There are 2 charts attached that show how this works

The second technique in this part of lesson 4 deals with a sideways channelthat is building shortly after a P3 has been formed Dr Andrews noted thatwhenever that happened the probabilities were high that prices wouldbreakout in the same direction they were moving prior to the formation ofthe sideways channel The attached P3 to sideways example chart shows thisprocedure

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 205235

Hello Gordon here is my example for the 5 circle sideways count RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Lesson 5Date Montag 27 Maumlrz 2000 060731

At 32400 85200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my example for the 5 circle sideways countgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt gt Hi TradersZone Good example of the 5th circle tendency to predict the direction of a sideways breakout Any luckfinding a chart showing the P3 to sideways rule Im sending the first part of the next lesson This trendline method is a useful tool with all of DrAndrews course lines He used it all the time but especially when looking for confirmation of othercourse method trading signals Regards Gordon The Course Trendline__________________________________________________________ Next well discuss the trendline Seasoned traders agree that the trendline is one of their mostimportant tools No matter what kind of trading program or technique they use the trendline on achart is a must But one of the biggest mistakes made by amateurs and professionals alike isinconsistently drawing or defining the trendline Dr Andrews trendline procedure is simpleconsistent and accurate It works extremely well with the pivot count and with the pitchfork For an uptrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the lowest low up and to thehighest minor low point preceding the highest high The line must not pass through prices inbetween the two low points Extend the line(Attached chart of Brightpoint) For a downtrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the highest high point to thelowest minor high point preceding the lowest low so that it does not pass through prices inbetween the two high points Extend the line (Brightpoint chart) Thats all theres to it Its simple consistent and it works well with other Andrews lines It also

helps eliminate personal bias and haphazard analysis Practice drawing these trendlines on your own charts Send me any questions you might have andthen e-mail a chart of your choosing which shows at least two uptrend and two downtrend linesthat youve drawn_______________________________________________________________________

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Lesson 5Date Dienstag 28 Maumlrz 2000 120224

Hello Gordon here is my chart with trendlinesWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going above the trendline again should I draw a new trendline anddelete the old one Attached is another chart with the P3 to sideways rule I finally found an example for it RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Price failure techniqueDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081412

At 32800 120200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my chart with trendlinesgtWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going abovegtthe trendline again should I draw a new trendline and delete the oldgtone Hi TradersZone Take a look at the chart Im returningI added some lines for you to considerWith the course trendline once its broken a new one should be started Theres a technique thatties in with this coming up soon Meanwhile heres an important technique to work on It deals with those times when prices dontreach the ML Regards Gordon Dr Andrews Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P ofreversaland the ML the probability is that this price reversal will go further thanitdid on its approach toward the ML (Extract of original course material) A price failure very often indicates a sizeable reversal will take placeThepitchforks drawn on the chart of Home Depot illustrate the concept of pricefailure Dr Andrews routinely drew a new pitchfork on his chart after a newsignificant pivot had formed He knew that prices had a high probability ofreaching the new ML before stalling out or reversing If prices reversedbeforereaching the ML thereby forming a new pivot he termed it a price failureTheunderlying idea here is that Dr Andrews fully anticipated his median linewouldact as a price magnet To conclude that a price reversal resulted in a price failure Dr Andrewsused

these primary signalsa subsequent price penetration of a short-termmulti-pivotline andor a return of prices to and penetration of the parallel lineformed atpivot 3 of the pitchfork (The circles on the Home Depot chart denote theparallelline penetration signal To avoid clutter the mpl lines were not drawn) One possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart of ConsecoIncLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me a copy

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject ChartDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081800Attachments image002png

Hi TradersZone Forgot the chart Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Price failure techniqueDate Samstag 1 April 2000 201000

gtOne possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart ofgtConseco IncgtLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me agtcopy Hi Gordon here are my charts with price failures RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Mittwoch 5 April 2000 235624

Hi TradersZone Good price failure examples you sentany comments or questions about it Heres the next partanother old standby Dr Andrews kept handy Regards Gordon In this segment youll learn how to use the Fan line Technique To draw the fan lines youll apply the coursetrendline method which was introduced in an earlier lesson It might be well to emphasize that the practicalapplication of the course trendline method requires practice and experience both of which will serve youwell in this technique Dr Andrews used fan lines as an adjunct to his pitchfork sideways channel andactionreaction methods In the fan line study three trendlines are drawn from the original reversal pivot of the price correction understudy typically a P0 or a P5 Youll notice on the charts included with this study that each fan line is at aflatter angle than its predecessor When the third fan line is broken the rule is that the correction has endedand a new trend is under way Try this technique on some of your own charts and then please send me asample

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Donnerstag 6 April 2000 234315

Hi Gordon No I dont have any specific question about the price failure technique I guess the next likely target after a price failure wouldbe the warning line I have attached two charts with fan linesIs it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the third fan line is broken RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Next segmentDate Freitag 7 April 2000 003312

Hello TradersZone

Tuesday April 06 2000 114315 AM you wrote

TZgt Hi Gordon

TZgt No I dont have any specific question about the price failureTZgt technique I guess the next likely target after a price failureTZgt would be the warning line

TZgt I have attached two charts with fan linesTZgt Is it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the thirdTZgt fan line is broken

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Thats right the warning line is the next price target Additionalwarning lines can be drawn if needed but usually one will do it Ifprices go through the first warning line another can be drawn butmost likely a new pitchfork could be drawn instead which would bepreferable Helps stay current with recently formed pivots

When prices break through the third fan line a buy or sell signal isgiven Not sure what you mean by fourth target fan line Im a littledense today

Your chart work was goodthis is another handy tool for spotting thehigh probability of a price reversal or trend change

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject The Gap TradeDate Freitag 7 April 2000 004858

Hello TradersZone This trading signal doesnt show up very often but past observations have shown that its well worth watching for Dr Andrews placed a lot of emphasis on the importance of price gaps something many traders overlook This is one of his gap uses Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom The Gap Trading Technique Price gaps can be a dilemma for many traders The general rule denoting market strength or weakness after ahigh volume gap often comes up short after the initial reaction is over Many gappers simply run out ofsteam A high volume gap in itself seems to offer precious little evidence that a profitable move is about toget under way Dr Andrews used price gaps somewhat differently than others He counted a gap as 2 pivots Youll see howthat works in the following technique which uses a gap to arrive at a price level for a buy or sell order Using short-term daily price pivots label the pivot immediately preceding the gap as p0 Count the gap as 2pivots labeling it p1 amp p2 After p3 has formed and prices reverse towards a short-term p4 draw a horizontalline 2 price tics or more (individual preference)to the right of p3 Enter the market only if prices reach orpenetrate that line within a few days after reversing from p4 Please look over your own charts to see if you can find places where the gap trade technique could have beenused Send me a sample when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 001925

Hello Gordon this is my chart with a gap trade RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 065538

Hello TradersZone Thursday April 08 2000 121925 PM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt this is my chart with a gap trade TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Good examplethe gap trade technique shines when an issue in at or near a P5 Similar to the one on thechart you sent Heres another trading signal tool Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Dr Andrews used several techniques which helped him determine whether a P5 was near at hand Youllrecall that he observed most price moves ended or had a significant reversal at a P5 This technique uses alternate closing prices after a P4 has been formed As with many of his studies thenumber 5 is used The chart accompanying this segment shows that there were 5 alternate closes to thedownside after P4 was put in Dr Andrews noted that whenever 5 or more alternate closes followed a P4 theprobabilities were high that a P5 was near at hand An added feature to this chart study is the sideways channel Notice how the 2nd target price and the 5thalternate close nearly coincide

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 12 April 2000 200730

Hello Gordon This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 13 April 2000 082418

Monday April 12 2000 80730 AM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hello TradersZone Good chart example of this Andrews toolanother of his very unusual observations that workmore often than not Heres the final part of this lesson Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom In this trendline method Dr Andrews once again used the number 5 as the basis for locating aprobable reversal area He found this technique to be especially useful whenever a clear orobvious pivot count didnt show up onthe price move under study Trendlines are drawn using the course trendline method When the 5th trendline is broken theprobability is high that the trend under study has ended A mini-median line pitchfork andorsliding parallel could be used for pricing a trading order The accompanying chart of Compaq Computer is an example of how the trendline study could beused The pivot count beginning at the October low is difficult to nail down There were severalsmall areas of congestion but no sizeable corrections while prices advanced The count wasunclear By following the price action using the course trendline technique however the traderwould have been alerted to the possibility of a change of trend when the 5th trendline was brokenin early February Try this technique on your own charts When youre ready please send me an example of yourstudy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 19 April 2000 124108

Hello Gordon this is my example with 5 trendlines RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[6] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 20 April 2000 012726

Monday April 19 2000 124108 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt this is my example with 5 trendlines

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Good example of the 5 TL technique Always reminds me of how the fairly simple tools often do a better job than manyof the sophisticated studies out there

That was the last part of lesson 5 Lesson 6 attached is made in one mailing Youll find Dr Andrews trading rules alongwith a wrap-up review which uses several of his rules You might have questions about some of the rules so feel free tosend them as they arise

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Dr Andrews had an abbreviated set of trading rules on several index cards that he carried around with him in his shirtpocket He said every trading day turned up something new on his charts and by having his rules in his pocket he wasreminded of the need for a methodical approach to his analysis Quite a comment coming from the man who wrote therule book

In this the final lesson of the course Dr Andrews original trading rules and observations are presented Lets work witha few of them at this point

Using charts of issues you follow please send me an example that illustrates your interpretation of each of the followingrules

Rule 4 Anticipating major Ps

Rule 7 Penetration rule

Rule 8 Price failure rule

Rule 11 1-ML23 AR Centerline

Rule 12 Sliding Parallel rule

Rule 15 Mini-median line parallel to buy or sell

Feel free to include any other course techniques you choose to apply but please include examples of the above as aminimum Use more than one technique on a chart if your analysis supports it Send as many charts as you like alongwith your questionscomments

Lesson 6 - Dr Andrews Trading Rules

This lesson covers course rules and significant observations as taught by Dr Andrews in his original trading course Therules are those that he used in his own trading and are provided to serve as a checklist for use with the course tradingmethods youve learned

Rule 1 Where prices are always headed Rule You course members are among the fortunate few to be able to draw astraight line and know that prices are headed toward that ML Very few investors have ever applied this ML principle ofstatistics to price fluctuations and weve never seen this in any books on investment You are among the very few who

know that prices are always headed toward the newest ML

Rule 2 The Rule of coming opposites applies all through life In the bible we find Blessed at they that mourn for theyshall be comforted As investors we know that any losses can be recovered by using course methods

Rule 3 Turn your mind about or Rethink for all good is at hand We should mentally prepare ourselves for thecoming reversal in prices and other affairs Heres one way for example that you course members who know the MLrules can use When prices are skyrocketing upward we do this preparation by thinking If prices pivoted here today atthis price Id draw a new ML bisecting the distance between todays price and the price from which the rise started Andwe know now that if this is a Major Pivot prices will fall rapidly to this new ML Profits from such drops are big and quick

Rule 4 Rule for anticipating major Ps If during congestion or after a rally or decline you can count four previous Psthe fifth one is highly probable to be the one from which a new trend starts

Rule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can make a quick big profit is to watch for the EPformations

Rule 6 The other reversal rule is that prices tend to reverse at or near any ML as well as at any extension of each MLAnd also at any MLH or extensions of MLH

Rule 7 The Penetration Rule is that whenever prices gap past or plunge through any ML there is a high probability thatthey will quickly return to it temporarily and then resume the trend they had before they gapped or plunged through

Rule 8 Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P of reversal and the MLthe probability is that this price reversal will go further than it did on its approach toward the ML

Rule 9 The price failure rule is negated when the next price trend is also a failure in reaching the ML This is almostinvariably a signal of a big fast move in the direction indicated by this last space Rule 10 When alternate median lines of comparable length slope in the same direction the trend is firm and rapidprice changes take place

Rule 11 When 1-ML23 is exactly reached at P4 it can be used as a highly reliable centerline for the AR method

Rule 12 Frequently after crossing a lower MLH prices continue to rise along the MLH Since the crossing of the MLHsignals a further drop is likely use a sliding parallel along the bottom of the most recent crossing If prices drop past thatsliding parallel line a sell signal is generated

Rule 13 MLs between P2 and P3 can start from a nearby or a remote P1 since prices tend to reverse at each of theseMLs Try several such P2-P3 MLs to discover the best fit

Rule 14 The distance of each MLH from its ML is the distance of the next warning line Use these warning lineswhenever a SH has signalled a buy or sell

Rule 15 Use the MMLH as a buy or sell signal when you expect a reversal because of a P5 Also when prices are at aWL ML extension line or where course lines converge or intersect

Rule 16 Converging lines that meet prices have shown the highest probability of a trend reversal

Rule 17 Two to four days is usually the maximum between P2 and P3 for a MML P1 can be a day or so back from P2and 3

Rule 18 The most reliable ActionReaction centerlines seem to be MPL 2P line 2 Gap line peak to low or low to peak

Rule 19 When prices pass through R lines look for a pull back and then a continuing move in the direction of the passthrough

Rule 20 Use gaps as Action lines from the centerline

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 003755

Hello Gordonhere is my example for Rule 4 And I have a question What are EP formations gtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 021242

Tuesday May 04 2000 123755 PM you wrote TZgt Hello GordonTZgt here is my example for Rule 4 TZgt And I have a question What are EP formations gtgtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegtgta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hi TradersZone Good use of the warning linesalso the EP material is part of lesson 4 Rather than go backthrough the files to see when (or if) it was sent Im sending it along with this reply Glad youbrought it up Best RegardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Tuesday May 04 2000208 PM Dr Andrews used a fairly common price chart formation that he found useful at probable P5market tops and bottoms The formation generally called a wedge or pennant by chartists isreferred to in Dr Andrews trading course as the Expanding Pivot (EP) One of the few chartformations used in the course he regarded it as among the most dependable indications that amarket top was forming Closely related to the EP is his Inverted Expanding Pivot (IEP) which henoted could often be observed at market bottoms Both are regarded as intermediate and long-term reversal indicators Dr Andrews found that both formations were most reliable when they occurred after a sharprapid price move coinciding with the formation of a probable P5 He said it wasnt unusual for theformation to take several weeks to complete and that conservative traders could best avoid thewhipsaw associated with congestion patterns by trading only in the direction of the probable price

break out of the EP or IEP formation The attached charts illustrate these formations Please look over your own charts for an example ofthe EP and IEP and send me a copy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 232127

Hello Gordon Thank you for the lesson with the EP material I couldnt find it in any previous emailHere is my example for Rule 7 RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Rule 4Date Samstag 6 Mai 2000 080827

Wednesday May 05 2000 112127 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt Thank you for the lesson with the EP materialTZgt I couldnt find it in any previous emailTZgt Here is my example for Rule 7

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hi TradersZone

Glad you mentioned it earlierexcept for the EP IEP and hissideways channel Dr Andrews didnt have much to say about chartpatterns and formations These are good ones to use though

Your study of the penetration rule was good Later

Best Regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Wednesday May 05 2000801 PM

Page 41: Pitchfork primer

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Peak to peak clDate Sonntag 5 Maumlrz 2000 064107

At 3400 122500 AM you wrotegtHello Gordongthere is my chartgt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Looks like you have the concept down Takes time and a lot of chart work to find the bestcenterline When the reaction lines dont seem to peg reversal areas chances are the centerline isnot the one that is best in tune with the price action of the issue under studyDespite the time required for this method it was one of Dr Andrews stand-bysAR lines could befound on most of his charts Im sending a chart with an example of a peak-to-peak CL Regards Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Peak to peak clDate Sonntag 5 Maumlrz 2000 171232

Hello Gordon I think the peak-to-peak CL on the last chart I sent to you was not really drawn from peak to peakIm sending another example RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next LessonDate Mittwoch 8 Maumlrz 2000 072526

At 3500 51200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtI think the peak-to-peak CL on the last chart I sent to you was notgtreally drawn from peak to peakgtIm sending another examplegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your peak to peak cl example was correctly drawn Thats a fairly simple approach but quite oftenthe peak to peak yields better reaction lines Heres the first part of the next lesson Regards Gordon Youll find times when prices dont quite reach the ML but instead drift alongside or away from itThe Schiff ML was designed to be used in place of the regular ML whenever that happens Suchprice action can be found at any place on a chart but most frequently occurs after a sharp sell-offor run-up of prices Dr Andrews also used the Schiff ML whenever his regular ML sloped at an unusually steep angleHe said it helped smooth out irregular price action such as that caused by unexpected earningsnews crop planting delays or poor growing conditions crop production reports etc Youll findnearly vertical price moves over a short period of time on many charts The Schiff ML method helpsput things back in perspective when that happens Well use the chart of Sterling Bancorp as an example of prices drifting away from the regular MLThat ML is drawn in black Prices didnt quite reach the ML but drifted alongside and eventuallyaway from it The Schiff ML and parallel lines are drawn in red Notice how prices were containedwithin the Schiff pitchfork until they finally broke down at the upper parallel line The procedure for drawing the Schiff ML is the same as for the regular ML except the startingpoint is located midway between the first 2 pivots youll be using The Sterling Bancorp chart

illustrates how this is done Dr Andrews also suggested using the Schiff ML whenever the regular ML method doesnt seem tobe in sync with price action Practice this procedure on your own charts and send a couple examples when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next LessonDate Donnerstag 9 Maumlrz 2000 001143

Hello Gordon in my charting software (Dynamic Trader) the Schiff ML is drawn by finding the midpoint of the line between pivot A and pivot Bmoving this point horizontally to directly above or below (depending on whether A is a low or high pivot) the A pivot anddrawing a line from his point through the midpoint of the BC swingAre there different methods of drawing a Schiff MLI was too lazy to draw Schiff MLs by hand with the method you described so Im sending my examples with the Dynamic TraderSchiff MLs -) RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject SchiffDate Samstag 11 Maumlrz 2000 070226

At 3900 121100 AM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtin my charting software (Dynamic Trader) the Schiff ML is drawn bygtfinding the midpoint of the line between pivot A and pivot B movinggtthis point horizontally to directly above or below (depending ongtwhether A is a low or high pivot) the A pivot and drawing a linegtgtfrom his point through the midpoint of the BC swinggtAre there different methods of drawing a Schiff MLgtI was too lazy to draw Schiff MLs by hand with the method yougtdescribed so Im sending my examples with the Dynamic Trader Schiff MLs -)gt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your program Schiff line procedure is fineits actually what Dr Andrews called a modified schiff ml and is onlyslightly different than the one I sent you initially The one you used is preferred by most course members Im sendingthe modified Schiff lesson and a chart along with this email The chart example shows how to use it with 0-34 pivots Regards Gordon

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Sliding Parallel LineDate Montag 13 Maumlrz 2000 005252

Hello TradersZone Heres one of the tools Dr Andrews used most often when entering exiting or reversing marketpositions Not many people know about this technique Regards Gordon The Sliding Parallel (SH) is drawn whenever prices cross an Andrews line and then move along itFor example if the bottom of a daily price bar range drops through a lower parallel line of apitchfork a new parallel line is then drawn from that low and extended to the right If the nextdays price bar drops through that sliding parallel line a sell signal is generated Whenever price action dictates a sliding parallel the next step is to draw a Warning Line Thewarning line is an additional parallel line that is an image extension of the original pitchforkchannels It serves as a warning that if prices penetrate the sliding parallel the next likely target isthe WL The attached chart of Avis illustrates these procedures Please try these on your own charts andsend me an example

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Sliding Parallel LineDate Dienstag 14 Maumlrz 2000 225737

Hello Gordon this is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning line RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 065606

At 31400 105700 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtthis is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning linegt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone Your chart of circuit city was a good example for this study I may have mentioned it earlier but DrAndrews used this technique on a regular basis The next part of this lesson covers another of hisfavorite tools the mini-median line pitchfork Here it is Regards Gordon The Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry and exit tools Though mostoften drawn using alternate closing prices alternate highs and lows can also be usedin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days is usually the maximumbetween pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or more back from P2 Dr Andrews used Mini-Median Line pitchforks for buy and sell signals whenever he expected areversal Some examples include a probable P5 or when prices are at a Warning Line ML MLHmajor ML extension or a sideways channel price target When prices cross the Mini-Median LineParallel (MMLH) a sliding parallel (SH) is used for order entry

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 231537

gtThe Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry andgtexit tools Though most often drawn using alternate closing pricesgtalternate highs and lows can also be usedgtin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days isgtusually the maximum between pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or moregtback from P2

Hello Gordon

wouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timingCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available whenDr Andrews was alive

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject intraday chartsDate Samstag 18 Maumlrz 2000 012400

At 31600 111500 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongtgtwouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsgtinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timinggtCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available when DrgtAndrews was alivegtgtRegardsgtTradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Youre absolutely correctintraday charts were not available when DrAndrews was a trader

Im reading between the lines here but if you plan to day-trade using the course techniques ie thepitchfork then I agree that the regular pitchfork would be more useful on intraday charts Otherwisewhipsaw would be a significant problem Please get back to me if I didnt address your questionbecause this is a very important technique The mini-median line pitchfork and sliding parallel showedup on most of Dr Andrews charts

Regards

Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re intraday chartsDate Dienstag 21 Maumlrz 2000 220322

Hello Gordon

You are right Im planning to daytrade SampP futures using the course techniques among other things

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 003408

Hi TradersZone Here are a couple Andrews techniques that will help anticipate the breakout direction of asideways channelThey work often enough to warrant keep handy Regards Gordon In an earlier lesson you were introduced to Dr Andrews sideways count You saw how frequentlythe sideways count method provided high probability price objectives after the breakout from theestablished channel took place In this segment of lesson 4 youll be shown 2 congestion area techniques that can help youdetermine the probable sideways channel price breakout direction Both rely on the use of pivots The first uses the pivot points that are circled on a sideways channel Dr Andrews observed thatwhenever a sideways channel results in at least 5 circle contacts the eventual price breakoutwould very often be in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle If circle 5 is at thetop of the channel for example the eventual price breakout would likely be to the upside If circle5 is at the bottom of the channel look for a downside breakout Dr Andrews noted that thistechnique can be subject to false breakouts but that such breakouts are usually followed shortlyafter with a confirmed breakout in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle Heemphasized that this study is best considered as a rule of thumb observation He viewed it as asupporting indicator for use with a short-term pitchfork as prices approached a channel line There are 2 charts attached that show how this works

The second technique in this part of lesson 4 deals with a sideways channelthat is building shortly after a P3 has been formed Dr Andrews noted thatwhenever that happened the probabilities were high that prices wouldbreakout in the same direction they were moving prior to the formation ofthe sideways channel The attached P3 to sideways example chart shows thisprocedure

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 205235

Hello Gordon here is my example for the 5 circle sideways count RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Lesson 5Date Montag 27 Maumlrz 2000 060731

At 32400 85200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my example for the 5 circle sideways countgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt gt Hi TradersZone Good example of the 5th circle tendency to predict the direction of a sideways breakout Any luckfinding a chart showing the P3 to sideways rule Im sending the first part of the next lesson This trendline method is a useful tool with all of DrAndrews course lines He used it all the time but especially when looking for confirmation of othercourse method trading signals Regards Gordon The Course Trendline__________________________________________________________ Next well discuss the trendline Seasoned traders agree that the trendline is one of their mostimportant tools No matter what kind of trading program or technique they use the trendline on achart is a must But one of the biggest mistakes made by amateurs and professionals alike isinconsistently drawing or defining the trendline Dr Andrews trendline procedure is simpleconsistent and accurate It works extremely well with the pivot count and with the pitchfork For an uptrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the lowest low up and to thehighest minor low point preceding the highest high The line must not pass through prices inbetween the two low points Extend the line(Attached chart of Brightpoint) For a downtrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the highest high point to thelowest minor high point preceding the lowest low so that it does not pass through prices inbetween the two high points Extend the line (Brightpoint chart) Thats all theres to it Its simple consistent and it works well with other Andrews lines It also

helps eliminate personal bias and haphazard analysis Practice drawing these trendlines on your own charts Send me any questions you might have andthen e-mail a chart of your choosing which shows at least two uptrend and two downtrend linesthat youve drawn_______________________________________________________________________

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Lesson 5Date Dienstag 28 Maumlrz 2000 120224

Hello Gordon here is my chart with trendlinesWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going above the trendline again should I draw a new trendline anddelete the old one Attached is another chart with the P3 to sideways rule I finally found an example for it RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Price failure techniqueDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081412

At 32800 120200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my chart with trendlinesgtWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going abovegtthe trendline again should I draw a new trendline and delete the oldgtone Hi TradersZone Take a look at the chart Im returningI added some lines for you to considerWith the course trendline once its broken a new one should be started Theres a technique thatties in with this coming up soon Meanwhile heres an important technique to work on It deals with those times when prices dontreach the ML Regards Gordon Dr Andrews Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P ofreversaland the ML the probability is that this price reversal will go further thanitdid on its approach toward the ML (Extract of original course material) A price failure very often indicates a sizeable reversal will take placeThepitchforks drawn on the chart of Home Depot illustrate the concept of pricefailure Dr Andrews routinely drew a new pitchfork on his chart after a newsignificant pivot had formed He knew that prices had a high probability ofreaching the new ML before stalling out or reversing If prices reversedbeforereaching the ML thereby forming a new pivot he termed it a price failureTheunderlying idea here is that Dr Andrews fully anticipated his median linewouldact as a price magnet To conclude that a price reversal resulted in a price failure Dr Andrewsused

these primary signalsa subsequent price penetration of a short-termmulti-pivotline andor a return of prices to and penetration of the parallel lineformed atpivot 3 of the pitchfork (The circles on the Home Depot chart denote theparallelline penetration signal To avoid clutter the mpl lines were not drawn) One possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart of ConsecoIncLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me a copy

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject ChartDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081800Attachments image002png

Hi TradersZone Forgot the chart Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Price failure techniqueDate Samstag 1 April 2000 201000

gtOne possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart ofgtConseco IncgtLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me agtcopy Hi Gordon here are my charts with price failures RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Mittwoch 5 April 2000 235624

Hi TradersZone Good price failure examples you sentany comments or questions about it Heres the next partanother old standby Dr Andrews kept handy Regards Gordon In this segment youll learn how to use the Fan line Technique To draw the fan lines youll apply the coursetrendline method which was introduced in an earlier lesson It might be well to emphasize that the practicalapplication of the course trendline method requires practice and experience both of which will serve youwell in this technique Dr Andrews used fan lines as an adjunct to his pitchfork sideways channel andactionreaction methods In the fan line study three trendlines are drawn from the original reversal pivot of the price correction understudy typically a P0 or a P5 Youll notice on the charts included with this study that each fan line is at aflatter angle than its predecessor When the third fan line is broken the rule is that the correction has endedand a new trend is under way Try this technique on some of your own charts and then please send me asample

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Donnerstag 6 April 2000 234315

Hi Gordon No I dont have any specific question about the price failure technique I guess the next likely target after a price failure wouldbe the warning line I have attached two charts with fan linesIs it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the third fan line is broken RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Next segmentDate Freitag 7 April 2000 003312

Hello TradersZone

Tuesday April 06 2000 114315 AM you wrote

TZgt Hi Gordon

TZgt No I dont have any specific question about the price failureTZgt technique I guess the next likely target after a price failureTZgt would be the warning line

TZgt I have attached two charts with fan linesTZgt Is it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the thirdTZgt fan line is broken

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Thats right the warning line is the next price target Additionalwarning lines can be drawn if needed but usually one will do it Ifprices go through the first warning line another can be drawn butmost likely a new pitchfork could be drawn instead which would bepreferable Helps stay current with recently formed pivots

When prices break through the third fan line a buy or sell signal isgiven Not sure what you mean by fourth target fan line Im a littledense today

Your chart work was goodthis is another handy tool for spotting thehigh probability of a price reversal or trend change

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject The Gap TradeDate Freitag 7 April 2000 004858

Hello TradersZone This trading signal doesnt show up very often but past observations have shown that its well worth watching for Dr Andrews placed a lot of emphasis on the importance of price gaps something many traders overlook This is one of his gap uses Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom The Gap Trading Technique Price gaps can be a dilemma for many traders The general rule denoting market strength or weakness after ahigh volume gap often comes up short after the initial reaction is over Many gappers simply run out ofsteam A high volume gap in itself seems to offer precious little evidence that a profitable move is about toget under way Dr Andrews used price gaps somewhat differently than others He counted a gap as 2 pivots Youll see howthat works in the following technique which uses a gap to arrive at a price level for a buy or sell order Using short-term daily price pivots label the pivot immediately preceding the gap as p0 Count the gap as 2pivots labeling it p1 amp p2 After p3 has formed and prices reverse towards a short-term p4 draw a horizontalline 2 price tics or more (individual preference)to the right of p3 Enter the market only if prices reach orpenetrate that line within a few days after reversing from p4 Please look over your own charts to see if you can find places where the gap trade technique could have beenused Send me a sample when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 001925

Hello Gordon this is my chart with a gap trade RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 065538

Hello TradersZone Thursday April 08 2000 121925 PM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt this is my chart with a gap trade TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Good examplethe gap trade technique shines when an issue in at or near a P5 Similar to the one on thechart you sent Heres another trading signal tool Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Dr Andrews used several techniques which helped him determine whether a P5 was near at hand Youllrecall that he observed most price moves ended or had a significant reversal at a P5 This technique uses alternate closing prices after a P4 has been formed As with many of his studies thenumber 5 is used The chart accompanying this segment shows that there were 5 alternate closes to thedownside after P4 was put in Dr Andrews noted that whenever 5 or more alternate closes followed a P4 theprobabilities were high that a P5 was near at hand An added feature to this chart study is the sideways channel Notice how the 2nd target price and the 5thalternate close nearly coincide

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 12 April 2000 200730

Hello Gordon This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 13 April 2000 082418

Monday April 12 2000 80730 AM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hello TradersZone Good chart example of this Andrews toolanother of his very unusual observations that workmore often than not Heres the final part of this lesson Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom In this trendline method Dr Andrews once again used the number 5 as the basis for locating aprobable reversal area He found this technique to be especially useful whenever a clear orobvious pivot count didnt show up onthe price move under study Trendlines are drawn using the course trendline method When the 5th trendline is broken theprobability is high that the trend under study has ended A mini-median line pitchfork andorsliding parallel could be used for pricing a trading order The accompanying chart of Compaq Computer is an example of how the trendline study could beused The pivot count beginning at the October low is difficult to nail down There were severalsmall areas of congestion but no sizeable corrections while prices advanced The count wasunclear By following the price action using the course trendline technique however the traderwould have been alerted to the possibility of a change of trend when the 5th trendline was brokenin early February Try this technique on your own charts When youre ready please send me an example of yourstudy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 19 April 2000 124108

Hello Gordon this is my example with 5 trendlines RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[6] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 20 April 2000 012726

Monday April 19 2000 124108 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt this is my example with 5 trendlines

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Good example of the 5 TL technique Always reminds me of how the fairly simple tools often do a better job than manyof the sophisticated studies out there

That was the last part of lesson 5 Lesson 6 attached is made in one mailing Youll find Dr Andrews trading rules alongwith a wrap-up review which uses several of his rules You might have questions about some of the rules so feel free tosend them as they arise

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Dr Andrews had an abbreviated set of trading rules on several index cards that he carried around with him in his shirtpocket He said every trading day turned up something new on his charts and by having his rules in his pocket he wasreminded of the need for a methodical approach to his analysis Quite a comment coming from the man who wrote therule book

In this the final lesson of the course Dr Andrews original trading rules and observations are presented Lets work witha few of them at this point

Using charts of issues you follow please send me an example that illustrates your interpretation of each of the followingrules

Rule 4 Anticipating major Ps

Rule 7 Penetration rule

Rule 8 Price failure rule

Rule 11 1-ML23 AR Centerline

Rule 12 Sliding Parallel rule

Rule 15 Mini-median line parallel to buy or sell

Feel free to include any other course techniques you choose to apply but please include examples of the above as aminimum Use more than one technique on a chart if your analysis supports it Send as many charts as you like alongwith your questionscomments

Lesson 6 - Dr Andrews Trading Rules

This lesson covers course rules and significant observations as taught by Dr Andrews in his original trading course Therules are those that he used in his own trading and are provided to serve as a checklist for use with the course tradingmethods youve learned

Rule 1 Where prices are always headed Rule You course members are among the fortunate few to be able to draw astraight line and know that prices are headed toward that ML Very few investors have ever applied this ML principle ofstatistics to price fluctuations and weve never seen this in any books on investment You are among the very few who

know that prices are always headed toward the newest ML

Rule 2 The Rule of coming opposites applies all through life In the bible we find Blessed at they that mourn for theyshall be comforted As investors we know that any losses can be recovered by using course methods

Rule 3 Turn your mind about or Rethink for all good is at hand We should mentally prepare ourselves for thecoming reversal in prices and other affairs Heres one way for example that you course members who know the MLrules can use When prices are skyrocketing upward we do this preparation by thinking If prices pivoted here today atthis price Id draw a new ML bisecting the distance between todays price and the price from which the rise started Andwe know now that if this is a Major Pivot prices will fall rapidly to this new ML Profits from such drops are big and quick

Rule 4 Rule for anticipating major Ps If during congestion or after a rally or decline you can count four previous Psthe fifth one is highly probable to be the one from which a new trend starts

Rule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can make a quick big profit is to watch for the EPformations

Rule 6 The other reversal rule is that prices tend to reverse at or near any ML as well as at any extension of each MLAnd also at any MLH or extensions of MLH

Rule 7 The Penetration Rule is that whenever prices gap past or plunge through any ML there is a high probability thatthey will quickly return to it temporarily and then resume the trend they had before they gapped or plunged through

Rule 8 Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P of reversal and the MLthe probability is that this price reversal will go further than it did on its approach toward the ML

Rule 9 The price failure rule is negated when the next price trend is also a failure in reaching the ML This is almostinvariably a signal of a big fast move in the direction indicated by this last space Rule 10 When alternate median lines of comparable length slope in the same direction the trend is firm and rapidprice changes take place

Rule 11 When 1-ML23 is exactly reached at P4 it can be used as a highly reliable centerline for the AR method

Rule 12 Frequently after crossing a lower MLH prices continue to rise along the MLH Since the crossing of the MLHsignals a further drop is likely use a sliding parallel along the bottom of the most recent crossing If prices drop past thatsliding parallel line a sell signal is generated

Rule 13 MLs between P2 and P3 can start from a nearby or a remote P1 since prices tend to reverse at each of theseMLs Try several such P2-P3 MLs to discover the best fit

Rule 14 The distance of each MLH from its ML is the distance of the next warning line Use these warning lineswhenever a SH has signalled a buy or sell

Rule 15 Use the MMLH as a buy or sell signal when you expect a reversal because of a P5 Also when prices are at aWL ML extension line or where course lines converge or intersect

Rule 16 Converging lines that meet prices have shown the highest probability of a trend reversal

Rule 17 Two to four days is usually the maximum between P2 and P3 for a MML P1 can be a day or so back from P2and 3

Rule 18 The most reliable ActionReaction centerlines seem to be MPL 2P line 2 Gap line peak to low or low to peak

Rule 19 When prices pass through R lines look for a pull back and then a continuing move in the direction of the passthrough

Rule 20 Use gaps as Action lines from the centerline

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 003755

Hello Gordonhere is my example for Rule 4 And I have a question What are EP formations gtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 021242

Tuesday May 04 2000 123755 PM you wrote TZgt Hello GordonTZgt here is my example for Rule 4 TZgt And I have a question What are EP formations gtgtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegtgta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hi TradersZone Good use of the warning linesalso the EP material is part of lesson 4 Rather than go backthrough the files to see when (or if) it was sent Im sending it along with this reply Glad youbrought it up Best RegardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Tuesday May 04 2000208 PM Dr Andrews used a fairly common price chart formation that he found useful at probable P5market tops and bottoms The formation generally called a wedge or pennant by chartists isreferred to in Dr Andrews trading course as the Expanding Pivot (EP) One of the few chartformations used in the course he regarded it as among the most dependable indications that amarket top was forming Closely related to the EP is his Inverted Expanding Pivot (IEP) which henoted could often be observed at market bottoms Both are regarded as intermediate and long-term reversal indicators Dr Andrews found that both formations were most reliable when they occurred after a sharprapid price move coinciding with the formation of a probable P5 He said it wasnt unusual for theformation to take several weeks to complete and that conservative traders could best avoid thewhipsaw associated with congestion patterns by trading only in the direction of the probable price

break out of the EP or IEP formation The attached charts illustrate these formations Please look over your own charts for an example ofthe EP and IEP and send me a copy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 232127

Hello Gordon Thank you for the lesson with the EP material I couldnt find it in any previous emailHere is my example for Rule 7 RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Rule 4Date Samstag 6 Mai 2000 080827

Wednesday May 05 2000 112127 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt Thank you for the lesson with the EP materialTZgt I couldnt find it in any previous emailTZgt Here is my example for Rule 7

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hi TradersZone

Glad you mentioned it earlierexcept for the EP IEP and hissideways channel Dr Andrews didnt have much to say about chartpatterns and formations These are good ones to use though

Your study of the penetration rule was good Later

Best Regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Wednesday May 05 2000801 PM

Page 42: Pitchfork primer

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Peak to peak clDate Sonntag 5 Maumlrz 2000 171232

Hello Gordon I think the peak-to-peak CL on the last chart I sent to you was not really drawn from peak to peakIm sending another example RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next LessonDate Mittwoch 8 Maumlrz 2000 072526

At 3500 51200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtI think the peak-to-peak CL on the last chart I sent to you was notgtreally drawn from peak to peakgtIm sending another examplegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your peak to peak cl example was correctly drawn Thats a fairly simple approach but quite oftenthe peak to peak yields better reaction lines Heres the first part of the next lesson Regards Gordon Youll find times when prices dont quite reach the ML but instead drift alongside or away from itThe Schiff ML was designed to be used in place of the regular ML whenever that happens Suchprice action can be found at any place on a chart but most frequently occurs after a sharp sell-offor run-up of prices Dr Andrews also used the Schiff ML whenever his regular ML sloped at an unusually steep angleHe said it helped smooth out irregular price action such as that caused by unexpected earningsnews crop planting delays or poor growing conditions crop production reports etc Youll findnearly vertical price moves over a short period of time on many charts The Schiff ML method helpsput things back in perspective when that happens Well use the chart of Sterling Bancorp as an example of prices drifting away from the regular MLThat ML is drawn in black Prices didnt quite reach the ML but drifted alongside and eventuallyaway from it The Schiff ML and parallel lines are drawn in red Notice how prices were containedwithin the Schiff pitchfork until they finally broke down at the upper parallel line The procedure for drawing the Schiff ML is the same as for the regular ML except the startingpoint is located midway between the first 2 pivots youll be using The Sterling Bancorp chart

illustrates how this is done Dr Andrews also suggested using the Schiff ML whenever the regular ML method doesnt seem tobe in sync with price action Practice this procedure on your own charts and send a couple examples when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next LessonDate Donnerstag 9 Maumlrz 2000 001143

Hello Gordon in my charting software (Dynamic Trader) the Schiff ML is drawn by finding the midpoint of the line between pivot A and pivot Bmoving this point horizontally to directly above or below (depending on whether A is a low or high pivot) the A pivot anddrawing a line from his point through the midpoint of the BC swingAre there different methods of drawing a Schiff MLI was too lazy to draw Schiff MLs by hand with the method you described so Im sending my examples with the Dynamic TraderSchiff MLs -) RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject SchiffDate Samstag 11 Maumlrz 2000 070226

At 3900 121100 AM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtin my charting software (Dynamic Trader) the Schiff ML is drawn bygtfinding the midpoint of the line between pivot A and pivot B movinggtthis point horizontally to directly above or below (depending ongtwhether A is a low or high pivot) the A pivot and drawing a linegtgtfrom his point through the midpoint of the BC swinggtAre there different methods of drawing a Schiff MLgtI was too lazy to draw Schiff MLs by hand with the method yougtdescribed so Im sending my examples with the Dynamic Trader Schiff MLs -)gt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your program Schiff line procedure is fineits actually what Dr Andrews called a modified schiff ml and is onlyslightly different than the one I sent you initially The one you used is preferred by most course members Im sendingthe modified Schiff lesson and a chart along with this email The chart example shows how to use it with 0-34 pivots Regards Gordon

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Sliding Parallel LineDate Montag 13 Maumlrz 2000 005252

Hello TradersZone Heres one of the tools Dr Andrews used most often when entering exiting or reversing marketpositions Not many people know about this technique Regards Gordon The Sliding Parallel (SH) is drawn whenever prices cross an Andrews line and then move along itFor example if the bottom of a daily price bar range drops through a lower parallel line of apitchfork a new parallel line is then drawn from that low and extended to the right If the nextdays price bar drops through that sliding parallel line a sell signal is generated Whenever price action dictates a sliding parallel the next step is to draw a Warning Line Thewarning line is an additional parallel line that is an image extension of the original pitchforkchannels It serves as a warning that if prices penetrate the sliding parallel the next likely target isthe WL The attached chart of Avis illustrates these procedures Please try these on your own charts andsend me an example

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Sliding Parallel LineDate Dienstag 14 Maumlrz 2000 225737

Hello Gordon this is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning line RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 065606

At 31400 105700 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtthis is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning linegt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone Your chart of circuit city was a good example for this study I may have mentioned it earlier but DrAndrews used this technique on a regular basis The next part of this lesson covers another of hisfavorite tools the mini-median line pitchfork Here it is Regards Gordon The Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry and exit tools Though mostoften drawn using alternate closing prices alternate highs and lows can also be usedin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days is usually the maximumbetween pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or more back from P2 Dr Andrews used Mini-Median Line pitchforks for buy and sell signals whenever he expected areversal Some examples include a probable P5 or when prices are at a Warning Line ML MLHmajor ML extension or a sideways channel price target When prices cross the Mini-Median LineParallel (MMLH) a sliding parallel (SH) is used for order entry

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 231537

gtThe Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry andgtexit tools Though most often drawn using alternate closing pricesgtalternate highs and lows can also be usedgtin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days isgtusually the maximum between pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or moregtback from P2

Hello Gordon

wouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timingCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available whenDr Andrews was alive

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject intraday chartsDate Samstag 18 Maumlrz 2000 012400

At 31600 111500 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongtgtwouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsgtinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timinggtCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available when DrgtAndrews was alivegtgtRegardsgtTradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Youre absolutely correctintraday charts were not available when DrAndrews was a trader

Im reading between the lines here but if you plan to day-trade using the course techniques ie thepitchfork then I agree that the regular pitchfork would be more useful on intraday charts Otherwisewhipsaw would be a significant problem Please get back to me if I didnt address your questionbecause this is a very important technique The mini-median line pitchfork and sliding parallel showedup on most of Dr Andrews charts

Regards

Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re intraday chartsDate Dienstag 21 Maumlrz 2000 220322

Hello Gordon

You are right Im planning to daytrade SampP futures using the course techniques among other things

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 003408

Hi TradersZone Here are a couple Andrews techniques that will help anticipate the breakout direction of asideways channelThey work often enough to warrant keep handy Regards Gordon In an earlier lesson you were introduced to Dr Andrews sideways count You saw how frequentlythe sideways count method provided high probability price objectives after the breakout from theestablished channel took place In this segment of lesson 4 youll be shown 2 congestion area techniques that can help youdetermine the probable sideways channel price breakout direction Both rely on the use of pivots The first uses the pivot points that are circled on a sideways channel Dr Andrews observed thatwhenever a sideways channel results in at least 5 circle contacts the eventual price breakoutwould very often be in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle If circle 5 is at thetop of the channel for example the eventual price breakout would likely be to the upside If circle5 is at the bottom of the channel look for a downside breakout Dr Andrews noted that thistechnique can be subject to false breakouts but that such breakouts are usually followed shortlyafter with a confirmed breakout in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle Heemphasized that this study is best considered as a rule of thumb observation He viewed it as asupporting indicator for use with a short-term pitchfork as prices approached a channel line There are 2 charts attached that show how this works

The second technique in this part of lesson 4 deals with a sideways channelthat is building shortly after a P3 has been formed Dr Andrews noted thatwhenever that happened the probabilities were high that prices wouldbreakout in the same direction they were moving prior to the formation ofthe sideways channel The attached P3 to sideways example chart shows thisprocedure

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 205235

Hello Gordon here is my example for the 5 circle sideways count RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Lesson 5Date Montag 27 Maumlrz 2000 060731

At 32400 85200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my example for the 5 circle sideways countgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt gt Hi TradersZone Good example of the 5th circle tendency to predict the direction of a sideways breakout Any luckfinding a chart showing the P3 to sideways rule Im sending the first part of the next lesson This trendline method is a useful tool with all of DrAndrews course lines He used it all the time but especially when looking for confirmation of othercourse method trading signals Regards Gordon The Course Trendline__________________________________________________________ Next well discuss the trendline Seasoned traders agree that the trendline is one of their mostimportant tools No matter what kind of trading program or technique they use the trendline on achart is a must But one of the biggest mistakes made by amateurs and professionals alike isinconsistently drawing or defining the trendline Dr Andrews trendline procedure is simpleconsistent and accurate It works extremely well with the pivot count and with the pitchfork For an uptrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the lowest low up and to thehighest minor low point preceding the highest high The line must not pass through prices inbetween the two low points Extend the line(Attached chart of Brightpoint) For a downtrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the highest high point to thelowest minor high point preceding the lowest low so that it does not pass through prices inbetween the two high points Extend the line (Brightpoint chart) Thats all theres to it Its simple consistent and it works well with other Andrews lines It also

helps eliminate personal bias and haphazard analysis Practice drawing these trendlines on your own charts Send me any questions you might have andthen e-mail a chart of your choosing which shows at least two uptrend and two downtrend linesthat youve drawn_______________________________________________________________________

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Lesson 5Date Dienstag 28 Maumlrz 2000 120224

Hello Gordon here is my chart with trendlinesWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going above the trendline again should I draw a new trendline anddelete the old one Attached is another chart with the P3 to sideways rule I finally found an example for it RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Price failure techniqueDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081412

At 32800 120200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my chart with trendlinesgtWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going abovegtthe trendline again should I draw a new trendline and delete the oldgtone Hi TradersZone Take a look at the chart Im returningI added some lines for you to considerWith the course trendline once its broken a new one should be started Theres a technique thatties in with this coming up soon Meanwhile heres an important technique to work on It deals with those times when prices dontreach the ML Regards Gordon Dr Andrews Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P ofreversaland the ML the probability is that this price reversal will go further thanitdid on its approach toward the ML (Extract of original course material) A price failure very often indicates a sizeable reversal will take placeThepitchforks drawn on the chart of Home Depot illustrate the concept of pricefailure Dr Andrews routinely drew a new pitchfork on his chart after a newsignificant pivot had formed He knew that prices had a high probability ofreaching the new ML before stalling out or reversing If prices reversedbeforereaching the ML thereby forming a new pivot he termed it a price failureTheunderlying idea here is that Dr Andrews fully anticipated his median linewouldact as a price magnet To conclude that a price reversal resulted in a price failure Dr Andrewsused

these primary signalsa subsequent price penetration of a short-termmulti-pivotline andor a return of prices to and penetration of the parallel lineformed atpivot 3 of the pitchfork (The circles on the Home Depot chart denote theparallelline penetration signal To avoid clutter the mpl lines were not drawn) One possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart of ConsecoIncLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me a copy

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject ChartDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081800Attachments image002png

Hi TradersZone Forgot the chart Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Price failure techniqueDate Samstag 1 April 2000 201000

gtOne possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart ofgtConseco IncgtLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me agtcopy Hi Gordon here are my charts with price failures RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Mittwoch 5 April 2000 235624

Hi TradersZone Good price failure examples you sentany comments or questions about it Heres the next partanother old standby Dr Andrews kept handy Regards Gordon In this segment youll learn how to use the Fan line Technique To draw the fan lines youll apply the coursetrendline method which was introduced in an earlier lesson It might be well to emphasize that the practicalapplication of the course trendline method requires practice and experience both of which will serve youwell in this technique Dr Andrews used fan lines as an adjunct to his pitchfork sideways channel andactionreaction methods In the fan line study three trendlines are drawn from the original reversal pivot of the price correction understudy typically a P0 or a P5 Youll notice on the charts included with this study that each fan line is at aflatter angle than its predecessor When the third fan line is broken the rule is that the correction has endedand a new trend is under way Try this technique on some of your own charts and then please send me asample

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Donnerstag 6 April 2000 234315

Hi Gordon No I dont have any specific question about the price failure technique I guess the next likely target after a price failure wouldbe the warning line I have attached two charts with fan linesIs it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the third fan line is broken RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Next segmentDate Freitag 7 April 2000 003312

Hello TradersZone

Tuesday April 06 2000 114315 AM you wrote

TZgt Hi Gordon

TZgt No I dont have any specific question about the price failureTZgt technique I guess the next likely target after a price failureTZgt would be the warning line

TZgt I have attached two charts with fan linesTZgt Is it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the thirdTZgt fan line is broken

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Thats right the warning line is the next price target Additionalwarning lines can be drawn if needed but usually one will do it Ifprices go through the first warning line another can be drawn butmost likely a new pitchfork could be drawn instead which would bepreferable Helps stay current with recently formed pivots

When prices break through the third fan line a buy or sell signal isgiven Not sure what you mean by fourth target fan line Im a littledense today

Your chart work was goodthis is another handy tool for spotting thehigh probability of a price reversal or trend change

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject The Gap TradeDate Freitag 7 April 2000 004858

Hello TradersZone This trading signal doesnt show up very often but past observations have shown that its well worth watching for Dr Andrews placed a lot of emphasis on the importance of price gaps something many traders overlook This is one of his gap uses Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom The Gap Trading Technique Price gaps can be a dilemma for many traders The general rule denoting market strength or weakness after ahigh volume gap often comes up short after the initial reaction is over Many gappers simply run out ofsteam A high volume gap in itself seems to offer precious little evidence that a profitable move is about toget under way Dr Andrews used price gaps somewhat differently than others He counted a gap as 2 pivots Youll see howthat works in the following technique which uses a gap to arrive at a price level for a buy or sell order Using short-term daily price pivots label the pivot immediately preceding the gap as p0 Count the gap as 2pivots labeling it p1 amp p2 After p3 has formed and prices reverse towards a short-term p4 draw a horizontalline 2 price tics or more (individual preference)to the right of p3 Enter the market only if prices reach orpenetrate that line within a few days after reversing from p4 Please look over your own charts to see if you can find places where the gap trade technique could have beenused Send me a sample when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 001925

Hello Gordon this is my chart with a gap trade RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 065538

Hello TradersZone Thursday April 08 2000 121925 PM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt this is my chart with a gap trade TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Good examplethe gap trade technique shines when an issue in at or near a P5 Similar to the one on thechart you sent Heres another trading signal tool Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Dr Andrews used several techniques which helped him determine whether a P5 was near at hand Youllrecall that he observed most price moves ended or had a significant reversal at a P5 This technique uses alternate closing prices after a P4 has been formed As with many of his studies thenumber 5 is used The chart accompanying this segment shows that there were 5 alternate closes to thedownside after P4 was put in Dr Andrews noted that whenever 5 or more alternate closes followed a P4 theprobabilities were high that a P5 was near at hand An added feature to this chart study is the sideways channel Notice how the 2nd target price and the 5thalternate close nearly coincide

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 12 April 2000 200730

Hello Gordon This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 13 April 2000 082418

Monday April 12 2000 80730 AM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hello TradersZone Good chart example of this Andrews toolanother of his very unusual observations that workmore often than not Heres the final part of this lesson Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom In this trendline method Dr Andrews once again used the number 5 as the basis for locating aprobable reversal area He found this technique to be especially useful whenever a clear orobvious pivot count didnt show up onthe price move under study Trendlines are drawn using the course trendline method When the 5th trendline is broken theprobability is high that the trend under study has ended A mini-median line pitchfork andorsliding parallel could be used for pricing a trading order The accompanying chart of Compaq Computer is an example of how the trendline study could beused The pivot count beginning at the October low is difficult to nail down There were severalsmall areas of congestion but no sizeable corrections while prices advanced The count wasunclear By following the price action using the course trendline technique however the traderwould have been alerted to the possibility of a change of trend when the 5th trendline was brokenin early February Try this technique on your own charts When youre ready please send me an example of yourstudy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 19 April 2000 124108

Hello Gordon this is my example with 5 trendlines RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[6] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 20 April 2000 012726

Monday April 19 2000 124108 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt this is my example with 5 trendlines

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Good example of the 5 TL technique Always reminds me of how the fairly simple tools often do a better job than manyof the sophisticated studies out there

That was the last part of lesson 5 Lesson 6 attached is made in one mailing Youll find Dr Andrews trading rules alongwith a wrap-up review which uses several of his rules You might have questions about some of the rules so feel free tosend them as they arise

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Dr Andrews had an abbreviated set of trading rules on several index cards that he carried around with him in his shirtpocket He said every trading day turned up something new on his charts and by having his rules in his pocket he wasreminded of the need for a methodical approach to his analysis Quite a comment coming from the man who wrote therule book

In this the final lesson of the course Dr Andrews original trading rules and observations are presented Lets work witha few of them at this point

Using charts of issues you follow please send me an example that illustrates your interpretation of each of the followingrules

Rule 4 Anticipating major Ps

Rule 7 Penetration rule

Rule 8 Price failure rule

Rule 11 1-ML23 AR Centerline

Rule 12 Sliding Parallel rule

Rule 15 Mini-median line parallel to buy or sell

Feel free to include any other course techniques you choose to apply but please include examples of the above as aminimum Use more than one technique on a chart if your analysis supports it Send as many charts as you like alongwith your questionscomments

Lesson 6 - Dr Andrews Trading Rules

This lesson covers course rules and significant observations as taught by Dr Andrews in his original trading course Therules are those that he used in his own trading and are provided to serve as a checklist for use with the course tradingmethods youve learned

Rule 1 Where prices are always headed Rule You course members are among the fortunate few to be able to draw astraight line and know that prices are headed toward that ML Very few investors have ever applied this ML principle ofstatistics to price fluctuations and weve never seen this in any books on investment You are among the very few who

know that prices are always headed toward the newest ML

Rule 2 The Rule of coming opposites applies all through life In the bible we find Blessed at they that mourn for theyshall be comforted As investors we know that any losses can be recovered by using course methods

Rule 3 Turn your mind about or Rethink for all good is at hand We should mentally prepare ourselves for thecoming reversal in prices and other affairs Heres one way for example that you course members who know the MLrules can use When prices are skyrocketing upward we do this preparation by thinking If prices pivoted here today atthis price Id draw a new ML bisecting the distance between todays price and the price from which the rise started Andwe know now that if this is a Major Pivot prices will fall rapidly to this new ML Profits from such drops are big and quick

Rule 4 Rule for anticipating major Ps If during congestion or after a rally or decline you can count four previous Psthe fifth one is highly probable to be the one from which a new trend starts

Rule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can make a quick big profit is to watch for the EPformations

Rule 6 The other reversal rule is that prices tend to reverse at or near any ML as well as at any extension of each MLAnd also at any MLH or extensions of MLH

Rule 7 The Penetration Rule is that whenever prices gap past or plunge through any ML there is a high probability thatthey will quickly return to it temporarily and then resume the trend they had before they gapped or plunged through

Rule 8 Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P of reversal and the MLthe probability is that this price reversal will go further than it did on its approach toward the ML

Rule 9 The price failure rule is negated when the next price trend is also a failure in reaching the ML This is almostinvariably a signal of a big fast move in the direction indicated by this last space Rule 10 When alternate median lines of comparable length slope in the same direction the trend is firm and rapidprice changes take place

Rule 11 When 1-ML23 is exactly reached at P4 it can be used as a highly reliable centerline for the AR method

Rule 12 Frequently after crossing a lower MLH prices continue to rise along the MLH Since the crossing of the MLHsignals a further drop is likely use a sliding parallel along the bottom of the most recent crossing If prices drop past thatsliding parallel line a sell signal is generated

Rule 13 MLs between P2 and P3 can start from a nearby or a remote P1 since prices tend to reverse at each of theseMLs Try several such P2-P3 MLs to discover the best fit

Rule 14 The distance of each MLH from its ML is the distance of the next warning line Use these warning lineswhenever a SH has signalled a buy or sell

Rule 15 Use the MMLH as a buy or sell signal when you expect a reversal because of a P5 Also when prices are at aWL ML extension line or where course lines converge or intersect

Rule 16 Converging lines that meet prices have shown the highest probability of a trend reversal

Rule 17 Two to four days is usually the maximum between P2 and P3 for a MML P1 can be a day or so back from P2and 3

Rule 18 The most reliable ActionReaction centerlines seem to be MPL 2P line 2 Gap line peak to low or low to peak

Rule 19 When prices pass through R lines look for a pull back and then a continuing move in the direction of the passthrough

Rule 20 Use gaps as Action lines from the centerline

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 003755

Hello Gordonhere is my example for Rule 4 And I have a question What are EP formations gtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 021242

Tuesday May 04 2000 123755 PM you wrote TZgt Hello GordonTZgt here is my example for Rule 4 TZgt And I have a question What are EP formations gtgtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegtgta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hi TradersZone Good use of the warning linesalso the EP material is part of lesson 4 Rather than go backthrough the files to see when (or if) it was sent Im sending it along with this reply Glad youbrought it up Best RegardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Tuesday May 04 2000208 PM Dr Andrews used a fairly common price chart formation that he found useful at probable P5market tops and bottoms The formation generally called a wedge or pennant by chartists isreferred to in Dr Andrews trading course as the Expanding Pivot (EP) One of the few chartformations used in the course he regarded it as among the most dependable indications that amarket top was forming Closely related to the EP is his Inverted Expanding Pivot (IEP) which henoted could often be observed at market bottoms Both are regarded as intermediate and long-term reversal indicators Dr Andrews found that both formations were most reliable when they occurred after a sharprapid price move coinciding with the formation of a probable P5 He said it wasnt unusual for theformation to take several weeks to complete and that conservative traders could best avoid thewhipsaw associated with congestion patterns by trading only in the direction of the probable price

break out of the EP or IEP formation The attached charts illustrate these formations Please look over your own charts for an example ofthe EP and IEP and send me a copy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 232127

Hello Gordon Thank you for the lesson with the EP material I couldnt find it in any previous emailHere is my example for Rule 7 RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Rule 4Date Samstag 6 Mai 2000 080827

Wednesday May 05 2000 112127 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt Thank you for the lesson with the EP materialTZgt I couldnt find it in any previous emailTZgt Here is my example for Rule 7

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hi TradersZone

Glad you mentioned it earlierexcept for the EP IEP and hissideways channel Dr Andrews didnt have much to say about chartpatterns and formations These are good ones to use though

Your study of the penetration rule was good Later

Best Regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Wednesday May 05 2000801 PM

Page 43: Pitchfork primer

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next LessonDate Mittwoch 8 Maumlrz 2000 072526

At 3500 51200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtI think the peak-to-peak CL on the last chart I sent to you was notgtreally drawn from peak to peakgtIm sending another examplegt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your peak to peak cl example was correctly drawn Thats a fairly simple approach but quite oftenthe peak to peak yields better reaction lines Heres the first part of the next lesson Regards Gordon Youll find times when prices dont quite reach the ML but instead drift alongside or away from itThe Schiff ML was designed to be used in place of the regular ML whenever that happens Suchprice action can be found at any place on a chart but most frequently occurs after a sharp sell-offor run-up of prices Dr Andrews also used the Schiff ML whenever his regular ML sloped at an unusually steep angleHe said it helped smooth out irregular price action such as that caused by unexpected earningsnews crop planting delays or poor growing conditions crop production reports etc Youll findnearly vertical price moves over a short period of time on many charts The Schiff ML method helpsput things back in perspective when that happens Well use the chart of Sterling Bancorp as an example of prices drifting away from the regular MLThat ML is drawn in black Prices didnt quite reach the ML but drifted alongside and eventuallyaway from it The Schiff ML and parallel lines are drawn in red Notice how prices were containedwithin the Schiff pitchfork until they finally broke down at the upper parallel line The procedure for drawing the Schiff ML is the same as for the regular ML except the startingpoint is located midway between the first 2 pivots youll be using The Sterling Bancorp chart

illustrates how this is done Dr Andrews also suggested using the Schiff ML whenever the regular ML method doesnt seem tobe in sync with price action Practice this procedure on your own charts and send a couple examples when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next LessonDate Donnerstag 9 Maumlrz 2000 001143

Hello Gordon in my charting software (Dynamic Trader) the Schiff ML is drawn by finding the midpoint of the line between pivot A and pivot Bmoving this point horizontally to directly above or below (depending on whether A is a low or high pivot) the A pivot anddrawing a line from his point through the midpoint of the BC swingAre there different methods of drawing a Schiff MLI was too lazy to draw Schiff MLs by hand with the method you described so Im sending my examples with the Dynamic TraderSchiff MLs -) RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject SchiffDate Samstag 11 Maumlrz 2000 070226

At 3900 121100 AM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtin my charting software (Dynamic Trader) the Schiff ML is drawn bygtfinding the midpoint of the line between pivot A and pivot B movinggtthis point horizontally to directly above or below (depending ongtwhether A is a low or high pivot) the A pivot and drawing a linegtgtfrom his point through the midpoint of the BC swinggtAre there different methods of drawing a Schiff MLgtI was too lazy to draw Schiff MLs by hand with the method yougtdescribed so Im sending my examples with the Dynamic Trader Schiff MLs -)gt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your program Schiff line procedure is fineits actually what Dr Andrews called a modified schiff ml and is onlyslightly different than the one I sent you initially The one you used is preferred by most course members Im sendingthe modified Schiff lesson and a chart along with this email The chart example shows how to use it with 0-34 pivots Regards Gordon

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Sliding Parallel LineDate Montag 13 Maumlrz 2000 005252

Hello TradersZone Heres one of the tools Dr Andrews used most often when entering exiting or reversing marketpositions Not many people know about this technique Regards Gordon The Sliding Parallel (SH) is drawn whenever prices cross an Andrews line and then move along itFor example if the bottom of a daily price bar range drops through a lower parallel line of apitchfork a new parallel line is then drawn from that low and extended to the right If the nextdays price bar drops through that sliding parallel line a sell signal is generated Whenever price action dictates a sliding parallel the next step is to draw a Warning Line Thewarning line is an additional parallel line that is an image extension of the original pitchforkchannels It serves as a warning that if prices penetrate the sliding parallel the next likely target isthe WL The attached chart of Avis illustrates these procedures Please try these on your own charts andsend me an example

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Sliding Parallel LineDate Dienstag 14 Maumlrz 2000 225737

Hello Gordon this is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning line RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 065606

At 31400 105700 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtthis is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning linegt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone Your chart of circuit city was a good example for this study I may have mentioned it earlier but DrAndrews used this technique on a regular basis The next part of this lesson covers another of hisfavorite tools the mini-median line pitchfork Here it is Regards Gordon The Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry and exit tools Though mostoften drawn using alternate closing prices alternate highs and lows can also be usedin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days is usually the maximumbetween pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or more back from P2 Dr Andrews used Mini-Median Line pitchforks for buy and sell signals whenever he expected areversal Some examples include a probable P5 or when prices are at a Warning Line ML MLHmajor ML extension or a sideways channel price target When prices cross the Mini-Median LineParallel (MMLH) a sliding parallel (SH) is used for order entry

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 231537

gtThe Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry andgtexit tools Though most often drawn using alternate closing pricesgtalternate highs and lows can also be usedgtin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days isgtusually the maximum between pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or moregtback from P2

Hello Gordon

wouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timingCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available whenDr Andrews was alive

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject intraday chartsDate Samstag 18 Maumlrz 2000 012400

At 31600 111500 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongtgtwouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsgtinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timinggtCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available when DrgtAndrews was alivegtgtRegardsgtTradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Youre absolutely correctintraday charts were not available when DrAndrews was a trader

Im reading between the lines here but if you plan to day-trade using the course techniques ie thepitchfork then I agree that the regular pitchfork would be more useful on intraday charts Otherwisewhipsaw would be a significant problem Please get back to me if I didnt address your questionbecause this is a very important technique The mini-median line pitchfork and sliding parallel showedup on most of Dr Andrews charts

Regards

Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re intraday chartsDate Dienstag 21 Maumlrz 2000 220322

Hello Gordon

You are right Im planning to daytrade SampP futures using the course techniques among other things

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 003408

Hi TradersZone Here are a couple Andrews techniques that will help anticipate the breakout direction of asideways channelThey work often enough to warrant keep handy Regards Gordon In an earlier lesson you were introduced to Dr Andrews sideways count You saw how frequentlythe sideways count method provided high probability price objectives after the breakout from theestablished channel took place In this segment of lesson 4 youll be shown 2 congestion area techniques that can help youdetermine the probable sideways channel price breakout direction Both rely on the use of pivots The first uses the pivot points that are circled on a sideways channel Dr Andrews observed thatwhenever a sideways channel results in at least 5 circle contacts the eventual price breakoutwould very often be in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle If circle 5 is at thetop of the channel for example the eventual price breakout would likely be to the upside If circle5 is at the bottom of the channel look for a downside breakout Dr Andrews noted that thistechnique can be subject to false breakouts but that such breakouts are usually followed shortlyafter with a confirmed breakout in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle Heemphasized that this study is best considered as a rule of thumb observation He viewed it as asupporting indicator for use with a short-term pitchfork as prices approached a channel line There are 2 charts attached that show how this works

The second technique in this part of lesson 4 deals with a sideways channelthat is building shortly after a P3 has been formed Dr Andrews noted thatwhenever that happened the probabilities were high that prices wouldbreakout in the same direction they were moving prior to the formation ofthe sideways channel The attached P3 to sideways example chart shows thisprocedure

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 205235

Hello Gordon here is my example for the 5 circle sideways count RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Lesson 5Date Montag 27 Maumlrz 2000 060731

At 32400 85200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my example for the 5 circle sideways countgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt gt Hi TradersZone Good example of the 5th circle tendency to predict the direction of a sideways breakout Any luckfinding a chart showing the P3 to sideways rule Im sending the first part of the next lesson This trendline method is a useful tool with all of DrAndrews course lines He used it all the time but especially when looking for confirmation of othercourse method trading signals Regards Gordon The Course Trendline__________________________________________________________ Next well discuss the trendline Seasoned traders agree that the trendline is one of their mostimportant tools No matter what kind of trading program or technique they use the trendline on achart is a must But one of the biggest mistakes made by amateurs and professionals alike isinconsistently drawing or defining the trendline Dr Andrews trendline procedure is simpleconsistent and accurate It works extremely well with the pivot count and with the pitchfork For an uptrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the lowest low up and to thehighest minor low point preceding the highest high The line must not pass through prices inbetween the two low points Extend the line(Attached chart of Brightpoint) For a downtrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the highest high point to thelowest minor high point preceding the lowest low so that it does not pass through prices inbetween the two high points Extend the line (Brightpoint chart) Thats all theres to it Its simple consistent and it works well with other Andrews lines It also

helps eliminate personal bias and haphazard analysis Practice drawing these trendlines on your own charts Send me any questions you might have andthen e-mail a chart of your choosing which shows at least two uptrend and two downtrend linesthat youve drawn_______________________________________________________________________

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Lesson 5Date Dienstag 28 Maumlrz 2000 120224

Hello Gordon here is my chart with trendlinesWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going above the trendline again should I draw a new trendline anddelete the old one Attached is another chart with the P3 to sideways rule I finally found an example for it RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Price failure techniqueDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081412

At 32800 120200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my chart with trendlinesgtWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going abovegtthe trendline again should I draw a new trendline and delete the oldgtone Hi TradersZone Take a look at the chart Im returningI added some lines for you to considerWith the course trendline once its broken a new one should be started Theres a technique thatties in with this coming up soon Meanwhile heres an important technique to work on It deals with those times when prices dontreach the ML Regards Gordon Dr Andrews Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P ofreversaland the ML the probability is that this price reversal will go further thanitdid on its approach toward the ML (Extract of original course material) A price failure very often indicates a sizeable reversal will take placeThepitchforks drawn on the chart of Home Depot illustrate the concept of pricefailure Dr Andrews routinely drew a new pitchfork on his chart after a newsignificant pivot had formed He knew that prices had a high probability ofreaching the new ML before stalling out or reversing If prices reversedbeforereaching the ML thereby forming a new pivot he termed it a price failureTheunderlying idea here is that Dr Andrews fully anticipated his median linewouldact as a price magnet To conclude that a price reversal resulted in a price failure Dr Andrewsused

these primary signalsa subsequent price penetration of a short-termmulti-pivotline andor a return of prices to and penetration of the parallel lineformed atpivot 3 of the pitchfork (The circles on the Home Depot chart denote theparallelline penetration signal To avoid clutter the mpl lines were not drawn) One possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart of ConsecoIncLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me a copy

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject ChartDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081800Attachments image002png

Hi TradersZone Forgot the chart Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Price failure techniqueDate Samstag 1 April 2000 201000

gtOne possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart ofgtConseco IncgtLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me agtcopy Hi Gordon here are my charts with price failures RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Mittwoch 5 April 2000 235624

Hi TradersZone Good price failure examples you sentany comments or questions about it Heres the next partanother old standby Dr Andrews kept handy Regards Gordon In this segment youll learn how to use the Fan line Technique To draw the fan lines youll apply the coursetrendline method which was introduced in an earlier lesson It might be well to emphasize that the practicalapplication of the course trendline method requires practice and experience both of which will serve youwell in this technique Dr Andrews used fan lines as an adjunct to his pitchfork sideways channel andactionreaction methods In the fan line study three trendlines are drawn from the original reversal pivot of the price correction understudy typically a P0 or a P5 Youll notice on the charts included with this study that each fan line is at aflatter angle than its predecessor When the third fan line is broken the rule is that the correction has endedand a new trend is under way Try this technique on some of your own charts and then please send me asample

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Donnerstag 6 April 2000 234315

Hi Gordon No I dont have any specific question about the price failure technique I guess the next likely target after a price failure wouldbe the warning line I have attached two charts with fan linesIs it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the third fan line is broken RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Next segmentDate Freitag 7 April 2000 003312

Hello TradersZone

Tuesday April 06 2000 114315 AM you wrote

TZgt Hi Gordon

TZgt No I dont have any specific question about the price failureTZgt technique I guess the next likely target after a price failureTZgt would be the warning line

TZgt I have attached two charts with fan linesTZgt Is it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the thirdTZgt fan line is broken

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Thats right the warning line is the next price target Additionalwarning lines can be drawn if needed but usually one will do it Ifprices go through the first warning line another can be drawn butmost likely a new pitchfork could be drawn instead which would bepreferable Helps stay current with recently formed pivots

When prices break through the third fan line a buy or sell signal isgiven Not sure what you mean by fourth target fan line Im a littledense today

Your chart work was goodthis is another handy tool for spotting thehigh probability of a price reversal or trend change

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject The Gap TradeDate Freitag 7 April 2000 004858

Hello TradersZone This trading signal doesnt show up very often but past observations have shown that its well worth watching for Dr Andrews placed a lot of emphasis on the importance of price gaps something many traders overlook This is one of his gap uses Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom The Gap Trading Technique Price gaps can be a dilemma for many traders The general rule denoting market strength or weakness after ahigh volume gap often comes up short after the initial reaction is over Many gappers simply run out ofsteam A high volume gap in itself seems to offer precious little evidence that a profitable move is about toget under way Dr Andrews used price gaps somewhat differently than others He counted a gap as 2 pivots Youll see howthat works in the following technique which uses a gap to arrive at a price level for a buy or sell order Using short-term daily price pivots label the pivot immediately preceding the gap as p0 Count the gap as 2pivots labeling it p1 amp p2 After p3 has formed and prices reverse towards a short-term p4 draw a horizontalline 2 price tics or more (individual preference)to the right of p3 Enter the market only if prices reach orpenetrate that line within a few days after reversing from p4 Please look over your own charts to see if you can find places where the gap trade technique could have beenused Send me a sample when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 001925

Hello Gordon this is my chart with a gap trade RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 065538

Hello TradersZone Thursday April 08 2000 121925 PM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt this is my chart with a gap trade TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Good examplethe gap trade technique shines when an issue in at or near a P5 Similar to the one on thechart you sent Heres another trading signal tool Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Dr Andrews used several techniques which helped him determine whether a P5 was near at hand Youllrecall that he observed most price moves ended or had a significant reversal at a P5 This technique uses alternate closing prices after a P4 has been formed As with many of his studies thenumber 5 is used The chart accompanying this segment shows that there were 5 alternate closes to thedownside after P4 was put in Dr Andrews noted that whenever 5 or more alternate closes followed a P4 theprobabilities were high that a P5 was near at hand An added feature to this chart study is the sideways channel Notice how the 2nd target price and the 5thalternate close nearly coincide

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 12 April 2000 200730

Hello Gordon This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 13 April 2000 082418

Monday April 12 2000 80730 AM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hello TradersZone Good chart example of this Andrews toolanother of his very unusual observations that workmore often than not Heres the final part of this lesson Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom In this trendline method Dr Andrews once again used the number 5 as the basis for locating aprobable reversal area He found this technique to be especially useful whenever a clear orobvious pivot count didnt show up onthe price move under study Trendlines are drawn using the course trendline method When the 5th trendline is broken theprobability is high that the trend under study has ended A mini-median line pitchfork andorsliding parallel could be used for pricing a trading order The accompanying chart of Compaq Computer is an example of how the trendline study could beused The pivot count beginning at the October low is difficult to nail down There were severalsmall areas of congestion but no sizeable corrections while prices advanced The count wasunclear By following the price action using the course trendline technique however the traderwould have been alerted to the possibility of a change of trend when the 5th trendline was brokenin early February Try this technique on your own charts When youre ready please send me an example of yourstudy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 19 April 2000 124108

Hello Gordon this is my example with 5 trendlines RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[6] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 20 April 2000 012726

Monday April 19 2000 124108 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt this is my example with 5 trendlines

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Good example of the 5 TL technique Always reminds me of how the fairly simple tools often do a better job than manyof the sophisticated studies out there

That was the last part of lesson 5 Lesson 6 attached is made in one mailing Youll find Dr Andrews trading rules alongwith a wrap-up review which uses several of his rules You might have questions about some of the rules so feel free tosend them as they arise

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Dr Andrews had an abbreviated set of trading rules on several index cards that he carried around with him in his shirtpocket He said every trading day turned up something new on his charts and by having his rules in his pocket he wasreminded of the need for a methodical approach to his analysis Quite a comment coming from the man who wrote therule book

In this the final lesson of the course Dr Andrews original trading rules and observations are presented Lets work witha few of them at this point

Using charts of issues you follow please send me an example that illustrates your interpretation of each of the followingrules

Rule 4 Anticipating major Ps

Rule 7 Penetration rule

Rule 8 Price failure rule

Rule 11 1-ML23 AR Centerline

Rule 12 Sliding Parallel rule

Rule 15 Mini-median line parallel to buy or sell

Feel free to include any other course techniques you choose to apply but please include examples of the above as aminimum Use more than one technique on a chart if your analysis supports it Send as many charts as you like alongwith your questionscomments

Lesson 6 - Dr Andrews Trading Rules

This lesson covers course rules and significant observations as taught by Dr Andrews in his original trading course Therules are those that he used in his own trading and are provided to serve as a checklist for use with the course tradingmethods youve learned

Rule 1 Where prices are always headed Rule You course members are among the fortunate few to be able to draw astraight line and know that prices are headed toward that ML Very few investors have ever applied this ML principle ofstatistics to price fluctuations and weve never seen this in any books on investment You are among the very few who

know that prices are always headed toward the newest ML

Rule 2 The Rule of coming opposites applies all through life In the bible we find Blessed at they that mourn for theyshall be comforted As investors we know that any losses can be recovered by using course methods

Rule 3 Turn your mind about or Rethink for all good is at hand We should mentally prepare ourselves for thecoming reversal in prices and other affairs Heres one way for example that you course members who know the MLrules can use When prices are skyrocketing upward we do this preparation by thinking If prices pivoted here today atthis price Id draw a new ML bisecting the distance between todays price and the price from which the rise started Andwe know now that if this is a Major Pivot prices will fall rapidly to this new ML Profits from such drops are big and quick

Rule 4 Rule for anticipating major Ps If during congestion or after a rally or decline you can count four previous Psthe fifth one is highly probable to be the one from which a new trend starts

Rule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can make a quick big profit is to watch for the EPformations

Rule 6 The other reversal rule is that prices tend to reverse at or near any ML as well as at any extension of each MLAnd also at any MLH or extensions of MLH

Rule 7 The Penetration Rule is that whenever prices gap past or plunge through any ML there is a high probability thatthey will quickly return to it temporarily and then resume the trend they had before they gapped or plunged through

Rule 8 Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P of reversal and the MLthe probability is that this price reversal will go further than it did on its approach toward the ML

Rule 9 The price failure rule is negated when the next price trend is also a failure in reaching the ML This is almostinvariably a signal of a big fast move in the direction indicated by this last space Rule 10 When alternate median lines of comparable length slope in the same direction the trend is firm and rapidprice changes take place

Rule 11 When 1-ML23 is exactly reached at P4 it can be used as a highly reliable centerline for the AR method

Rule 12 Frequently after crossing a lower MLH prices continue to rise along the MLH Since the crossing of the MLHsignals a further drop is likely use a sliding parallel along the bottom of the most recent crossing If prices drop past thatsliding parallel line a sell signal is generated

Rule 13 MLs between P2 and P3 can start from a nearby or a remote P1 since prices tend to reverse at each of theseMLs Try several such P2-P3 MLs to discover the best fit

Rule 14 The distance of each MLH from its ML is the distance of the next warning line Use these warning lineswhenever a SH has signalled a buy or sell

Rule 15 Use the MMLH as a buy or sell signal when you expect a reversal because of a P5 Also when prices are at aWL ML extension line or where course lines converge or intersect

Rule 16 Converging lines that meet prices have shown the highest probability of a trend reversal

Rule 17 Two to four days is usually the maximum between P2 and P3 for a MML P1 can be a day or so back from P2and 3

Rule 18 The most reliable ActionReaction centerlines seem to be MPL 2P line 2 Gap line peak to low or low to peak

Rule 19 When prices pass through R lines look for a pull back and then a continuing move in the direction of the passthrough

Rule 20 Use gaps as Action lines from the centerline

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 003755

Hello Gordonhere is my example for Rule 4 And I have a question What are EP formations gtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 021242

Tuesday May 04 2000 123755 PM you wrote TZgt Hello GordonTZgt here is my example for Rule 4 TZgt And I have a question What are EP formations gtgtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegtgta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hi TradersZone Good use of the warning linesalso the EP material is part of lesson 4 Rather than go backthrough the files to see when (or if) it was sent Im sending it along with this reply Glad youbrought it up Best RegardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Tuesday May 04 2000208 PM Dr Andrews used a fairly common price chart formation that he found useful at probable P5market tops and bottoms The formation generally called a wedge or pennant by chartists isreferred to in Dr Andrews trading course as the Expanding Pivot (EP) One of the few chartformations used in the course he regarded it as among the most dependable indications that amarket top was forming Closely related to the EP is his Inverted Expanding Pivot (IEP) which henoted could often be observed at market bottoms Both are regarded as intermediate and long-term reversal indicators Dr Andrews found that both formations were most reliable when they occurred after a sharprapid price move coinciding with the formation of a probable P5 He said it wasnt unusual for theformation to take several weeks to complete and that conservative traders could best avoid thewhipsaw associated with congestion patterns by trading only in the direction of the probable price

break out of the EP or IEP formation The attached charts illustrate these formations Please look over your own charts for an example ofthe EP and IEP and send me a copy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 232127

Hello Gordon Thank you for the lesson with the EP material I couldnt find it in any previous emailHere is my example for Rule 7 RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Rule 4Date Samstag 6 Mai 2000 080827

Wednesday May 05 2000 112127 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt Thank you for the lesson with the EP materialTZgt I couldnt find it in any previous emailTZgt Here is my example for Rule 7

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hi TradersZone

Glad you mentioned it earlierexcept for the EP IEP and hissideways channel Dr Andrews didnt have much to say about chartpatterns and formations These are good ones to use though

Your study of the penetration rule was good Later

Best Regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Wednesday May 05 2000801 PM

Page 44: Pitchfork primer

illustrates how this is done Dr Andrews also suggested using the Schiff ML whenever the regular ML method doesnt seem tobe in sync with price action Practice this procedure on your own charts and send a couple examples when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next LessonDate Donnerstag 9 Maumlrz 2000 001143

Hello Gordon in my charting software (Dynamic Trader) the Schiff ML is drawn by finding the midpoint of the line between pivot A and pivot Bmoving this point horizontally to directly above or below (depending on whether A is a low or high pivot) the A pivot anddrawing a line from his point through the midpoint of the BC swingAre there different methods of drawing a Schiff MLI was too lazy to draw Schiff MLs by hand with the method you described so Im sending my examples with the Dynamic TraderSchiff MLs -) RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject SchiffDate Samstag 11 Maumlrz 2000 070226

At 3900 121100 AM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtin my charting software (Dynamic Trader) the Schiff ML is drawn bygtfinding the midpoint of the line between pivot A and pivot B movinggtthis point horizontally to directly above or below (depending ongtwhether A is a low or high pivot) the A pivot and drawing a linegtgtfrom his point through the midpoint of the BC swinggtAre there different methods of drawing a Schiff MLgtI was too lazy to draw Schiff MLs by hand with the method yougtdescribed so Im sending my examples with the Dynamic Trader Schiff MLs -)gt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your program Schiff line procedure is fineits actually what Dr Andrews called a modified schiff ml and is onlyslightly different than the one I sent you initially The one you used is preferred by most course members Im sendingthe modified Schiff lesson and a chart along with this email The chart example shows how to use it with 0-34 pivots Regards Gordon

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Sliding Parallel LineDate Montag 13 Maumlrz 2000 005252

Hello TradersZone Heres one of the tools Dr Andrews used most often when entering exiting or reversing marketpositions Not many people know about this technique Regards Gordon The Sliding Parallel (SH) is drawn whenever prices cross an Andrews line and then move along itFor example if the bottom of a daily price bar range drops through a lower parallel line of apitchfork a new parallel line is then drawn from that low and extended to the right If the nextdays price bar drops through that sliding parallel line a sell signal is generated Whenever price action dictates a sliding parallel the next step is to draw a Warning Line Thewarning line is an additional parallel line that is an image extension of the original pitchforkchannels It serves as a warning that if prices penetrate the sliding parallel the next likely target isthe WL The attached chart of Avis illustrates these procedures Please try these on your own charts andsend me an example

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Sliding Parallel LineDate Dienstag 14 Maumlrz 2000 225737

Hello Gordon this is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning line RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 065606

At 31400 105700 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtthis is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning linegt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone Your chart of circuit city was a good example for this study I may have mentioned it earlier but DrAndrews used this technique on a regular basis The next part of this lesson covers another of hisfavorite tools the mini-median line pitchfork Here it is Regards Gordon The Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry and exit tools Though mostoften drawn using alternate closing prices alternate highs and lows can also be usedin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days is usually the maximumbetween pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or more back from P2 Dr Andrews used Mini-Median Line pitchforks for buy and sell signals whenever he expected areversal Some examples include a probable P5 or when prices are at a Warning Line ML MLHmajor ML extension or a sideways channel price target When prices cross the Mini-Median LineParallel (MMLH) a sliding parallel (SH) is used for order entry

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 231537

gtThe Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry andgtexit tools Though most often drawn using alternate closing pricesgtalternate highs and lows can also be usedgtin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days isgtusually the maximum between pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or moregtback from P2

Hello Gordon

wouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timingCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available whenDr Andrews was alive

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject intraday chartsDate Samstag 18 Maumlrz 2000 012400

At 31600 111500 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongtgtwouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsgtinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timinggtCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available when DrgtAndrews was alivegtgtRegardsgtTradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Youre absolutely correctintraday charts were not available when DrAndrews was a trader

Im reading between the lines here but if you plan to day-trade using the course techniques ie thepitchfork then I agree that the regular pitchfork would be more useful on intraday charts Otherwisewhipsaw would be a significant problem Please get back to me if I didnt address your questionbecause this is a very important technique The mini-median line pitchfork and sliding parallel showedup on most of Dr Andrews charts

Regards

Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re intraday chartsDate Dienstag 21 Maumlrz 2000 220322

Hello Gordon

You are right Im planning to daytrade SampP futures using the course techniques among other things

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 003408

Hi TradersZone Here are a couple Andrews techniques that will help anticipate the breakout direction of asideways channelThey work often enough to warrant keep handy Regards Gordon In an earlier lesson you were introduced to Dr Andrews sideways count You saw how frequentlythe sideways count method provided high probability price objectives after the breakout from theestablished channel took place In this segment of lesson 4 youll be shown 2 congestion area techniques that can help youdetermine the probable sideways channel price breakout direction Both rely on the use of pivots The first uses the pivot points that are circled on a sideways channel Dr Andrews observed thatwhenever a sideways channel results in at least 5 circle contacts the eventual price breakoutwould very often be in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle If circle 5 is at thetop of the channel for example the eventual price breakout would likely be to the upside If circle5 is at the bottom of the channel look for a downside breakout Dr Andrews noted that thistechnique can be subject to false breakouts but that such breakouts are usually followed shortlyafter with a confirmed breakout in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle Heemphasized that this study is best considered as a rule of thumb observation He viewed it as asupporting indicator for use with a short-term pitchfork as prices approached a channel line There are 2 charts attached that show how this works

The second technique in this part of lesson 4 deals with a sideways channelthat is building shortly after a P3 has been formed Dr Andrews noted thatwhenever that happened the probabilities were high that prices wouldbreakout in the same direction they were moving prior to the formation ofthe sideways channel The attached P3 to sideways example chart shows thisprocedure

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 205235

Hello Gordon here is my example for the 5 circle sideways count RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Lesson 5Date Montag 27 Maumlrz 2000 060731

At 32400 85200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my example for the 5 circle sideways countgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt gt Hi TradersZone Good example of the 5th circle tendency to predict the direction of a sideways breakout Any luckfinding a chart showing the P3 to sideways rule Im sending the first part of the next lesson This trendline method is a useful tool with all of DrAndrews course lines He used it all the time but especially when looking for confirmation of othercourse method trading signals Regards Gordon The Course Trendline__________________________________________________________ Next well discuss the trendline Seasoned traders agree that the trendline is one of their mostimportant tools No matter what kind of trading program or technique they use the trendline on achart is a must But one of the biggest mistakes made by amateurs and professionals alike isinconsistently drawing or defining the trendline Dr Andrews trendline procedure is simpleconsistent and accurate It works extremely well with the pivot count and with the pitchfork For an uptrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the lowest low up and to thehighest minor low point preceding the highest high The line must not pass through prices inbetween the two low points Extend the line(Attached chart of Brightpoint) For a downtrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the highest high point to thelowest minor high point preceding the lowest low so that it does not pass through prices inbetween the two high points Extend the line (Brightpoint chart) Thats all theres to it Its simple consistent and it works well with other Andrews lines It also

helps eliminate personal bias and haphazard analysis Practice drawing these trendlines on your own charts Send me any questions you might have andthen e-mail a chart of your choosing which shows at least two uptrend and two downtrend linesthat youve drawn_______________________________________________________________________

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Lesson 5Date Dienstag 28 Maumlrz 2000 120224

Hello Gordon here is my chart with trendlinesWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going above the trendline again should I draw a new trendline anddelete the old one Attached is another chart with the P3 to sideways rule I finally found an example for it RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Price failure techniqueDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081412

At 32800 120200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my chart with trendlinesgtWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going abovegtthe trendline again should I draw a new trendline and delete the oldgtone Hi TradersZone Take a look at the chart Im returningI added some lines for you to considerWith the course trendline once its broken a new one should be started Theres a technique thatties in with this coming up soon Meanwhile heres an important technique to work on It deals with those times when prices dontreach the ML Regards Gordon Dr Andrews Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P ofreversaland the ML the probability is that this price reversal will go further thanitdid on its approach toward the ML (Extract of original course material) A price failure very often indicates a sizeable reversal will take placeThepitchforks drawn on the chart of Home Depot illustrate the concept of pricefailure Dr Andrews routinely drew a new pitchfork on his chart after a newsignificant pivot had formed He knew that prices had a high probability ofreaching the new ML before stalling out or reversing If prices reversedbeforereaching the ML thereby forming a new pivot he termed it a price failureTheunderlying idea here is that Dr Andrews fully anticipated his median linewouldact as a price magnet To conclude that a price reversal resulted in a price failure Dr Andrewsused

these primary signalsa subsequent price penetration of a short-termmulti-pivotline andor a return of prices to and penetration of the parallel lineformed atpivot 3 of the pitchfork (The circles on the Home Depot chart denote theparallelline penetration signal To avoid clutter the mpl lines were not drawn) One possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart of ConsecoIncLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me a copy

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject ChartDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081800Attachments image002png

Hi TradersZone Forgot the chart Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Price failure techniqueDate Samstag 1 April 2000 201000

gtOne possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart ofgtConseco IncgtLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me agtcopy Hi Gordon here are my charts with price failures RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Mittwoch 5 April 2000 235624

Hi TradersZone Good price failure examples you sentany comments or questions about it Heres the next partanother old standby Dr Andrews kept handy Regards Gordon In this segment youll learn how to use the Fan line Technique To draw the fan lines youll apply the coursetrendline method which was introduced in an earlier lesson It might be well to emphasize that the practicalapplication of the course trendline method requires practice and experience both of which will serve youwell in this technique Dr Andrews used fan lines as an adjunct to his pitchfork sideways channel andactionreaction methods In the fan line study three trendlines are drawn from the original reversal pivot of the price correction understudy typically a P0 or a P5 Youll notice on the charts included with this study that each fan line is at aflatter angle than its predecessor When the third fan line is broken the rule is that the correction has endedand a new trend is under way Try this technique on some of your own charts and then please send me asample

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Donnerstag 6 April 2000 234315

Hi Gordon No I dont have any specific question about the price failure technique I guess the next likely target after a price failure wouldbe the warning line I have attached two charts with fan linesIs it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the third fan line is broken RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Next segmentDate Freitag 7 April 2000 003312

Hello TradersZone

Tuesday April 06 2000 114315 AM you wrote

TZgt Hi Gordon

TZgt No I dont have any specific question about the price failureTZgt technique I guess the next likely target after a price failureTZgt would be the warning line

TZgt I have attached two charts with fan linesTZgt Is it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the thirdTZgt fan line is broken

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Thats right the warning line is the next price target Additionalwarning lines can be drawn if needed but usually one will do it Ifprices go through the first warning line another can be drawn butmost likely a new pitchfork could be drawn instead which would bepreferable Helps stay current with recently formed pivots

When prices break through the third fan line a buy or sell signal isgiven Not sure what you mean by fourth target fan line Im a littledense today

Your chart work was goodthis is another handy tool for spotting thehigh probability of a price reversal or trend change

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject The Gap TradeDate Freitag 7 April 2000 004858

Hello TradersZone This trading signal doesnt show up very often but past observations have shown that its well worth watching for Dr Andrews placed a lot of emphasis on the importance of price gaps something many traders overlook This is one of his gap uses Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom The Gap Trading Technique Price gaps can be a dilemma for many traders The general rule denoting market strength or weakness after ahigh volume gap often comes up short after the initial reaction is over Many gappers simply run out ofsteam A high volume gap in itself seems to offer precious little evidence that a profitable move is about toget under way Dr Andrews used price gaps somewhat differently than others He counted a gap as 2 pivots Youll see howthat works in the following technique which uses a gap to arrive at a price level for a buy or sell order Using short-term daily price pivots label the pivot immediately preceding the gap as p0 Count the gap as 2pivots labeling it p1 amp p2 After p3 has formed and prices reverse towards a short-term p4 draw a horizontalline 2 price tics or more (individual preference)to the right of p3 Enter the market only if prices reach orpenetrate that line within a few days after reversing from p4 Please look over your own charts to see if you can find places where the gap trade technique could have beenused Send me a sample when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 001925

Hello Gordon this is my chart with a gap trade RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 065538

Hello TradersZone Thursday April 08 2000 121925 PM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt this is my chart with a gap trade TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Good examplethe gap trade technique shines when an issue in at or near a P5 Similar to the one on thechart you sent Heres another trading signal tool Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Dr Andrews used several techniques which helped him determine whether a P5 was near at hand Youllrecall that he observed most price moves ended or had a significant reversal at a P5 This technique uses alternate closing prices after a P4 has been formed As with many of his studies thenumber 5 is used The chart accompanying this segment shows that there were 5 alternate closes to thedownside after P4 was put in Dr Andrews noted that whenever 5 or more alternate closes followed a P4 theprobabilities were high that a P5 was near at hand An added feature to this chart study is the sideways channel Notice how the 2nd target price and the 5thalternate close nearly coincide

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 12 April 2000 200730

Hello Gordon This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 13 April 2000 082418

Monday April 12 2000 80730 AM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hello TradersZone Good chart example of this Andrews toolanother of his very unusual observations that workmore often than not Heres the final part of this lesson Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom In this trendline method Dr Andrews once again used the number 5 as the basis for locating aprobable reversal area He found this technique to be especially useful whenever a clear orobvious pivot count didnt show up onthe price move under study Trendlines are drawn using the course trendline method When the 5th trendline is broken theprobability is high that the trend under study has ended A mini-median line pitchfork andorsliding parallel could be used for pricing a trading order The accompanying chart of Compaq Computer is an example of how the trendline study could beused The pivot count beginning at the October low is difficult to nail down There were severalsmall areas of congestion but no sizeable corrections while prices advanced The count wasunclear By following the price action using the course trendline technique however the traderwould have been alerted to the possibility of a change of trend when the 5th trendline was brokenin early February Try this technique on your own charts When youre ready please send me an example of yourstudy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 19 April 2000 124108

Hello Gordon this is my example with 5 trendlines RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[6] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 20 April 2000 012726

Monday April 19 2000 124108 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt this is my example with 5 trendlines

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Good example of the 5 TL technique Always reminds me of how the fairly simple tools often do a better job than manyof the sophisticated studies out there

That was the last part of lesson 5 Lesson 6 attached is made in one mailing Youll find Dr Andrews trading rules alongwith a wrap-up review which uses several of his rules You might have questions about some of the rules so feel free tosend them as they arise

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Dr Andrews had an abbreviated set of trading rules on several index cards that he carried around with him in his shirtpocket He said every trading day turned up something new on his charts and by having his rules in his pocket he wasreminded of the need for a methodical approach to his analysis Quite a comment coming from the man who wrote therule book

In this the final lesson of the course Dr Andrews original trading rules and observations are presented Lets work witha few of them at this point

Using charts of issues you follow please send me an example that illustrates your interpretation of each of the followingrules

Rule 4 Anticipating major Ps

Rule 7 Penetration rule

Rule 8 Price failure rule

Rule 11 1-ML23 AR Centerline

Rule 12 Sliding Parallel rule

Rule 15 Mini-median line parallel to buy or sell

Feel free to include any other course techniques you choose to apply but please include examples of the above as aminimum Use more than one technique on a chart if your analysis supports it Send as many charts as you like alongwith your questionscomments

Lesson 6 - Dr Andrews Trading Rules

This lesson covers course rules and significant observations as taught by Dr Andrews in his original trading course Therules are those that he used in his own trading and are provided to serve as a checklist for use with the course tradingmethods youve learned

Rule 1 Where prices are always headed Rule You course members are among the fortunate few to be able to draw astraight line and know that prices are headed toward that ML Very few investors have ever applied this ML principle ofstatistics to price fluctuations and weve never seen this in any books on investment You are among the very few who

know that prices are always headed toward the newest ML

Rule 2 The Rule of coming opposites applies all through life In the bible we find Blessed at they that mourn for theyshall be comforted As investors we know that any losses can be recovered by using course methods

Rule 3 Turn your mind about or Rethink for all good is at hand We should mentally prepare ourselves for thecoming reversal in prices and other affairs Heres one way for example that you course members who know the MLrules can use When prices are skyrocketing upward we do this preparation by thinking If prices pivoted here today atthis price Id draw a new ML bisecting the distance between todays price and the price from which the rise started Andwe know now that if this is a Major Pivot prices will fall rapidly to this new ML Profits from such drops are big and quick

Rule 4 Rule for anticipating major Ps If during congestion or after a rally or decline you can count four previous Psthe fifth one is highly probable to be the one from which a new trend starts

Rule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can make a quick big profit is to watch for the EPformations

Rule 6 The other reversal rule is that prices tend to reverse at or near any ML as well as at any extension of each MLAnd also at any MLH or extensions of MLH

Rule 7 The Penetration Rule is that whenever prices gap past or plunge through any ML there is a high probability thatthey will quickly return to it temporarily and then resume the trend they had before they gapped or plunged through

Rule 8 Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P of reversal and the MLthe probability is that this price reversal will go further than it did on its approach toward the ML

Rule 9 The price failure rule is negated when the next price trend is also a failure in reaching the ML This is almostinvariably a signal of a big fast move in the direction indicated by this last space Rule 10 When alternate median lines of comparable length slope in the same direction the trend is firm and rapidprice changes take place

Rule 11 When 1-ML23 is exactly reached at P4 it can be used as a highly reliable centerline for the AR method

Rule 12 Frequently after crossing a lower MLH prices continue to rise along the MLH Since the crossing of the MLHsignals a further drop is likely use a sliding parallel along the bottom of the most recent crossing If prices drop past thatsliding parallel line a sell signal is generated

Rule 13 MLs between P2 and P3 can start from a nearby or a remote P1 since prices tend to reverse at each of theseMLs Try several such P2-P3 MLs to discover the best fit

Rule 14 The distance of each MLH from its ML is the distance of the next warning line Use these warning lineswhenever a SH has signalled a buy or sell

Rule 15 Use the MMLH as a buy or sell signal when you expect a reversal because of a P5 Also when prices are at aWL ML extension line or where course lines converge or intersect

Rule 16 Converging lines that meet prices have shown the highest probability of a trend reversal

Rule 17 Two to four days is usually the maximum between P2 and P3 for a MML P1 can be a day or so back from P2and 3

Rule 18 The most reliable ActionReaction centerlines seem to be MPL 2P line 2 Gap line peak to low or low to peak

Rule 19 When prices pass through R lines look for a pull back and then a continuing move in the direction of the passthrough

Rule 20 Use gaps as Action lines from the centerline

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 003755

Hello Gordonhere is my example for Rule 4 And I have a question What are EP formations gtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 021242

Tuesday May 04 2000 123755 PM you wrote TZgt Hello GordonTZgt here is my example for Rule 4 TZgt And I have a question What are EP formations gtgtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegtgta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hi TradersZone Good use of the warning linesalso the EP material is part of lesson 4 Rather than go backthrough the files to see when (or if) it was sent Im sending it along with this reply Glad youbrought it up Best RegardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Tuesday May 04 2000208 PM Dr Andrews used a fairly common price chart formation that he found useful at probable P5market tops and bottoms The formation generally called a wedge or pennant by chartists isreferred to in Dr Andrews trading course as the Expanding Pivot (EP) One of the few chartformations used in the course he regarded it as among the most dependable indications that amarket top was forming Closely related to the EP is his Inverted Expanding Pivot (IEP) which henoted could often be observed at market bottoms Both are regarded as intermediate and long-term reversal indicators Dr Andrews found that both formations were most reliable when they occurred after a sharprapid price move coinciding with the formation of a probable P5 He said it wasnt unusual for theformation to take several weeks to complete and that conservative traders could best avoid thewhipsaw associated with congestion patterns by trading only in the direction of the probable price

break out of the EP or IEP formation The attached charts illustrate these formations Please look over your own charts for an example ofthe EP and IEP and send me a copy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 232127

Hello Gordon Thank you for the lesson with the EP material I couldnt find it in any previous emailHere is my example for Rule 7 RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Rule 4Date Samstag 6 Mai 2000 080827

Wednesday May 05 2000 112127 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt Thank you for the lesson with the EP materialTZgt I couldnt find it in any previous emailTZgt Here is my example for Rule 7

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hi TradersZone

Glad you mentioned it earlierexcept for the EP IEP and hissideways channel Dr Andrews didnt have much to say about chartpatterns and formations These are good ones to use though

Your study of the penetration rule was good Later

Best Regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Wednesday May 05 2000801 PM

Page 45: Pitchfork primer

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next LessonDate Donnerstag 9 Maumlrz 2000 001143

Hello Gordon in my charting software (Dynamic Trader) the Schiff ML is drawn by finding the midpoint of the line between pivot A and pivot Bmoving this point horizontally to directly above or below (depending on whether A is a low or high pivot) the A pivot anddrawing a line from his point through the midpoint of the BC swingAre there different methods of drawing a Schiff MLI was too lazy to draw Schiff MLs by hand with the method you described so Im sending my examples with the Dynamic TraderSchiff MLs -) RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject SchiffDate Samstag 11 Maumlrz 2000 070226

At 3900 121100 AM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtin my charting software (Dynamic Trader) the Schiff ML is drawn bygtfinding the midpoint of the line between pivot A and pivot B movinggtthis point horizontally to directly above or below (depending ongtwhether A is a low or high pivot) the A pivot and drawing a linegtgtfrom his point through the midpoint of the BC swinggtAre there different methods of drawing a Schiff MLgtI was too lazy to draw Schiff MLs by hand with the method yougtdescribed so Im sending my examples with the Dynamic Trader Schiff MLs -)gt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your program Schiff line procedure is fineits actually what Dr Andrews called a modified schiff ml and is onlyslightly different than the one I sent you initially The one you used is preferred by most course members Im sendingthe modified Schiff lesson and a chart along with this email The chart example shows how to use it with 0-34 pivots Regards Gordon

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Sliding Parallel LineDate Montag 13 Maumlrz 2000 005252

Hello TradersZone Heres one of the tools Dr Andrews used most often when entering exiting or reversing marketpositions Not many people know about this technique Regards Gordon The Sliding Parallel (SH) is drawn whenever prices cross an Andrews line and then move along itFor example if the bottom of a daily price bar range drops through a lower parallel line of apitchfork a new parallel line is then drawn from that low and extended to the right If the nextdays price bar drops through that sliding parallel line a sell signal is generated Whenever price action dictates a sliding parallel the next step is to draw a Warning Line Thewarning line is an additional parallel line that is an image extension of the original pitchforkchannels It serves as a warning that if prices penetrate the sliding parallel the next likely target isthe WL The attached chart of Avis illustrates these procedures Please try these on your own charts andsend me an example

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Sliding Parallel LineDate Dienstag 14 Maumlrz 2000 225737

Hello Gordon this is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning line RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 065606

At 31400 105700 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtthis is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning linegt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone Your chart of circuit city was a good example for this study I may have mentioned it earlier but DrAndrews used this technique on a regular basis The next part of this lesson covers another of hisfavorite tools the mini-median line pitchfork Here it is Regards Gordon The Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry and exit tools Though mostoften drawn using alternate closing prices alternate highs and lows can also be usedin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days is usually the maximumbetween pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or more back from P2 Dr Andrews used Mini-Median Line pitchforks for buy and sell signals whenever he expected areversal Some examples include a probable P5 or when prices are at a Warning Line ML MLHmajor ML extension or a sideways channel price target When prices cross the Mini-Median LineParallel (MMLH) a sliding parallel (SH) is used for order entry

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 231537

gtThe Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry andgtexit tools Though most often drawn using alternate closing pricesgtalternate highs and lows can also be usedgtin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days isgtusually the maximum between pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or moregtback from P2

Hello Gordon

wouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timingCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available whenDr Andrews was alive

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject intraday chartsDate Samstag 18 Maumlrz 2000 012400

At 31600 111500 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongtgtwouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsgtinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timinggtCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available when DrgtAndrews was alivegtgtRegardsgtTradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Youre absolutely correctintraday charts were not available when DrAndrews was a trader

Im reading between the lines here but if you plan to day-trade using the course techniques ie thepitchfork then I agree that the regular pitchfork would be more useful on intraday charts Otherwisewhipsaw would be a significant problem Please get back to me if I didnt address your questionbecause this is a very important technique The mini-median line pitchfork and sliding parallel showedup on most of Dr Andrews charts

Regards

Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re intraday chartsDate Dienstag 21 Maumlrz 2000 220322

Hello Gordon

You are right Im planning to daytrade SampP futures using the course techniques among other things

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 003408

Hi TradersZone Here are a couple Andrews techniques that will help anticipate the breakout direction of asideways channelThey work often enough to warrant keep handy Regards Gordon In an earlier lesson you were introduced to Dr Andrews sideways count You saw how frequentlythe sideways count method provided high probability price objectives after the breakout from theestablished channel took place In this segment of lesson 4 youll be shown 2 congestion area techniques that can help youdetermine the probable sideways channel price breakout direction Both rely on the use of pivots The first uses the pivot points that are circled on a sideways channel Dr Andrews observed thatwhenever a sideways channel results in at least 5 circle contacts the eventual price breakoutwould very often be in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle If circle 5 is at thetop of the channel for example the eventual price breakout would likely be to the upside If circle5 is at the bottom of the channel look for a downside breakout Dr Andrews noted that thistechnique can be subject to false breakouts but that such breakouts are usually followed shortlyafter with a confirmed breakout in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle Heemphasized that this study is best considered as a rule of thumb observation He viewed it as asupporting indicator for use with a short-term pitchfork as prices approached a channel line There are 2 charts attached that show how this works

The second technique in this part of lesson 4 deals with a sideways channelthat is building shortly after a P3 has been formed Dr Andrews noted thatwhenever that happened the probabilities were high that prices wouldbreakout in the same direction they were moving prior to the formation ofthe sideways channel The attached P3 to sideways example chart shows thisprocedure

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 205235

Hello Gordon here is my example for the 5 circle sideways count RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Lesson 5Date Montag 27 Maumlrz 2000 060731

At 32400 85200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my example for the 5 circle sideways countgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt gt Hi TradersZone Good example of the 5th circle tendency to predict the direction of a sideways breakout Any luckfinding a chart showing the P3 to sideways rule Im sending the first part of the next lesson This trendline method is a useful tool with all of DrAndrews course lines He used it all the time but especially when looking for confirmation of othercourse method trading signals Regards Gordon The Course Trendline__________________________________________________________ Next well discuss the trendline Seasoned traders agree that the trendline is one of their mostimportant tools No matter what kind of trading program or technique they use the trendline on achart is a must But one of the biggest mistakes made by amateurs and professionals alike isinconsistently drawing or defining the trendline Dr Andrews trendline procedure is simpleconsistent and accurate It works extremely well with the pivot count and with the pitchfork For an uptrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the lowest low up and to thehighest minor low point preceding the highest high The line must not pass through prices inbetween the two low points Extend the line(Attached chart of Brightpoint) For a downtrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the highest high point to thelowest minor high point preceding the lowest low so that it does not pass through prices inbetween the two high points Extend the line (Brightpoint chart) Thats all theres to it Its simple consistent and it works well with other Andrews lines It also

helps eliminate personal bias and haphazard analysis Practice drawing these trendlines on your own charts Send me any questions you might have andthen e-mail a chart of your choosing which shows at least two uptrend and two downtrend linesthat youve drawn_______________________________________________________________________

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Lesson 5Date Dienstag 28 Maumlrz 2000 120224

Hello Gordon here is my chart with trendlinesWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going above the trendline again should I draw a new trendline anddelete the old one Attached is another chart with the P3 to sideways rule I finally found an example for it RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Price failure techniqueDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081412

At 32800 120200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my chart with trendlinesgtWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going abovegtthe trendline again should I draw a new trendline and delete the oldgtone Hi TradersZone Take a look at the chart Im returningI added some lines for you to considerWith the course trendline once its broken a new one should be started Theres a technique thatties in with this coming up soon Meanwhile heres an important technique to work on It deals with those times when prices dontreach the ML Regards Gordon Dr Andrews Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P ofreversaland the ML the probability is that this price reversal will go further thanitdid on its approach toward the ML (Extract of original course material) A price failure very often indicates a sizeable reversal will take placeThepitchforks drawn on the chart of Home Depot illustrate the concept of pricefailure Dr Andrews routinely drew a new pitchfork on his chart after a newsignificant pivot had formed He knew that prices had a high probability ofreaching the new ML before stalling out or reversing If prices reversedbeforereaching the ML thereby forming a new pivot he termed it a price failureTheunderlying idea here is that Dr Andrews fully anticipated his median linewouldact as a price magnet To conclude that a price reversal resulted in a price failure Dr Andrewsused

these primary signalsa subsequent price penetration of a short-termmulti-pivotline andor a return of prices to and penetration of the parallel lineformed atpivot 3 of the pitchfork (The circles on the Home Depot chart denote theparallelline penetration signal To avoid clutter the mpl lines were not drawn) One possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart of ConsecoIncLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me a copy

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject ChartDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081800Attachments image002png

Hi TradersZone Forgot the chart Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Price failure techniqueDate Samstag 1 April 2000 201000

gtOne possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart ofgtConseco IncgtLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me agtcopy Hi Gordon here are my charts with price failures RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Mittwoch 5 April 2000 235624

Hi TradersZone Good price failure examples you sentany comments or questions about it Heres the next partanother old standby Dr Andrews kept handy Regards Gordon In this segment youll learn how to use the Fan line Technique To draw the fan lines youll apply the coursetrendline method which was introduced in an earlier lesson It might be well to emphasize that the practicalapplication of the course trendline method requires practice and experience both of which will serve youwell in this technique Dr Andrews used fan lines as an adjunct to his pitchfork sideways channel andactionreaction methods In the fan line study three trendlines are drawn from the original reversal pivot of the price correction understudy typically a P0 or a P5 Youll notice on the charts included with this study that each fan line is at aflatter angle than its predecessor When the third fan line is broken the rule is that the correction has endedand a new trend is under way Try this technique on some of your own charts and then please send me asample

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Donnerstag 6 April 2000 234315

Hi Gordon No I dont have any specific question about the price failure technique I guess the next likely target after a price failure wouldbe the warning line I have attached two charts with fan linesIs it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the third fan line is broken RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Next segmentDate Freitag 7 April 2000 003312

Hello TradersZone

Tuesday April 06 2000 114315 AM you wrote

TZgt Hi Gordon

TZgt No I dont have any specific question about the price failureTZgt technique I guess the next likely target after a price failureTZgt would be the warning line

TZgt I have attached two charts with fan linesTZgt Is it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the thirdTZgt fan line is broken

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Thats right the warning line is the next price target Additionalwarning lines can be drawn if needed but usually one will do it Ifprices go through the first warning line another can be drawn butmost likely a new pitchfork could be drawn instead which would bepreferable Helps stay current with recently formed pivots

When prices break through the third fan line a buy or sell signal isgiven Not sure what you mean by fourth target fan line Im a littledense today

Your chart work was goodthis is another handy tool for spotting thehigh probability of a price reversal or trend change

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject The Gap TradeDate Freitag 7 April 2000 004858

Hello TradersZone This trading signal doesnt show up very often but past observations have shown that its well worth watching for Dr Andrews placed a lot of emphasis on the importance of price gaps something many traders overlook This is one of his gap uses Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom The Gap Trading Technique Price gaps can be a dilemma for many traders The general rule denoting market strength or weakness after ahigh volume gap often comes up short after the initial reaction is over Many gappers simply run out ofsteam A high volume gap in itself seems to offer precious little evidence that a profitable move is about toget under way Dr Andrews used price gaps somewhat differently than others He counted a gap as 2 pivots Youll see howthat works in the following technique which uses a gap to arrive at a price level for a buy or sell order Using short-term daily price pivots label the pivot immediately preceding the gap as p0 Count the gap as 2pivots labeling it p1 amp p2 After p3 has formed and prices reverse towards a short-term p4 draw a horizontalline 2 price tics or more (individual preference)to the right of p3 Enter the market only if prices reach orpenetrate that line within a few days after reversing from p4 Please look over your own charts to see if you can find places where the gap trade technique could have beenused Send me a sample when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 001925

Hello Gordon this is my chart with a gap trade RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 065538

Hello TradersZone Thursday April 08 2000 121925 PM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt this is my chart with a gap trade TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Good examplethe gap trade technique shines when an issue in at or near a P5 Similar to the one on thechart you sent Heres another trading signal tool Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Dr Andrews used several techniques which helped him determine whether a P5 was near at hand Youllrecall that he observed most price moves ended or had a significant reversal at a P5 This technique uses alternate closing prices after a P4 has been formed As with many of his studies thenumber 5 is used The chart accompanying this segment shows that there were 5 alternate closes to thedownside after P4 was put in Dr Andrews noted that whenever 5 or more alternate closes followed a P4 theprobabilities were high that a P5 was near at hand An added feature to this chart study is the sideways channel Notice how the 2nd target price and the 5thalternate close nearly coincide

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 12 April 2000 200730

Hello Gordon This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 13 April 2000 082418

Monday April 12 2000 80730 AM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hello TradersZone Good chart example of this Andrews toolanother of his very unusual observations that workmore often than not Heres the final part of this lesson Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom In this trendline method Dr Andrews once again used the number 5 as the basis for locating aprobable reversal area He found this technique to be especially useful whenever a clear orobvious pivot count didnt show up onthe price move under study Trendlines are drawn using the course trendline method When the 5th trendline is broken theprobability is high that the trend under study has ended A mini-median line pitchfork andorsliding parallel could be used for pricing a trading order The accompanying chart of Compaq Computer is an example of how the trendline study could beused The pivot count beginning at the October low is difficult to nail down There were severalsmall areas of congestion but no sizeable corrections while prices advanced The count wasunclear By following the price action using the course trendline technique however the traderwould have been alerted to the possibility of a change of trend when the 5th trendline was brokenin early February Try this technique on your own charts When youre ready please send me an example of yourstudy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 19 April 2000 124108

Hello Gordon this is my example with 5 trendlines RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[6] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 20 April 2000 012726

Monday April 19 2000 124108 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt this is my example with 5 trendlines

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Good example of the 5 TL technique Always reminds me of how the fairly simple tools often do a better job than manyof the sophisticated studies out there

That was the last part of lesson 5 Lesson 6 attached is made in one mailing Youll find Dr Andrews trading rules alongwith a wrap-up review which uses several of his rules You might have questions about some of the rules so feel free tosend them as they arise

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Dr Andrews had an abbreviated set of trading rules on several index cards that he carried around with him in his shirtpocket He said every trading day turned up something new on his charts and by having his rules in his pocket he wasreminded of the need for a methodical approach to his analysis Quite a comment coming from the man who wrote therule book

In this the final lesson of the course Dr Andrews original trading rules and observations are presented Lets work witha few of them at this point

Using charts of issues you follow please send me an example that illustrates your interpretation of each of the followingrules

Rule 4 Anticipating major Ps

Rule 7 Penetration rule

Rule 8 Price failure rule

Rule 11 1-ML23 AR Centerline

Rule 12 Sliding Parallel rule

Rule 15 Mini-median line parallel to buy or sell

Feel free to include any other course techniques you choose to apply but please include examples of the above as aminimum Use more than one technique on a chart if your analysis supports it Send as many charts as you like alongwith your questionscomments

Lesson 6 - Dr Andrews Trading Rules

This lesson covers course rules and significant observations as taught by Dr Andrews in his original trading course Therules are those that he used in his own trading and are provided to serve as a checklist for use with the course tradingmethods youve learned

Rule 1 Where prices are always headed Rule You course members are among the fortunate few to be able to draw astraight line and know that prices are headed toward that ML Very few investors have ever applied this ML principle ofstatistics to price fluctuations and weve never seen this in any books on investment You are among the very few who

know that prices are always headed toward the newest ML

Rule 2 The Rule of coming opposites applies all through life In the bible we find Blessed at they that mourn for theyshall be comforted As investors we know that any losses can be recovered by using course methods

Rule 3 Turn your mind about or Rethink for all good is at hand We should mentally prepare ourselves for thecoming reversal in prices and other affairs Heres one way for example that you course members who know the MLrules can use When prices are skyrocketing upward we do this preparation by thinking If prices pivoted here today atthis price Id draw a new ML bisecting the distance between todays price and the price from which the rise started Andwe know now that if this is a Major Pivot prices will fall rapidly to this new ML Profits from such drops are big and quick

Rule 4 Rule for anticipating major Ps If during congestion or after a rally or decline you can count four previous Psthe fifth one is highly probable to be the one from which a new trend starts

Rule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can make a quick big profit is to watch for the EPformations

Rule 6 The other reversal rule is that prices tend to reverse at or near any ML as well as at any extension of each MLAnd also at any MLH or extensions of MLH

Rule 7 The Penetration Rule is that whenever prices gap past or plunge through any ML there is a high probability thatthey will quickly return to it temporarily and then resume the trend they had before they gapped or plunged through

Rule 8 Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P of reversal and the MLthe probability is that this price reversal will go further than it did on its approach toward the ML

Rule 9 The price failure rule is negated when the next price trend is also a failure in reaching the ML This is almostinvariably a signal of a big fast move in the direction indicated by this last space Rule 10 When alternate median lines of comparable length slope in the same direction the trend is firm and rapidprice changes take place

Rule 11 When 1-ML23 is exactly reached at P4 it can be used as a highly reliable centerline for the AR method

Rule 12 Frequently after crossing a lower MLH prices continue to rise along the MLH Since the crossing of the MLHsignals a further drop is likely use a sliding parallel along the bottom of the most recent crossing If prices drop past thatsliding parallel line a sell signal is generated

Rule 13 MLs between P2 and P3 can start from a nearby or a remote P1 since prices tend to reverse at each of theseMLs Try several such P2-P3 MLs to discover the best fit

Rule 14 The distance of each MLH from its ML is the distance of the next warning line Use these warning lineswhenever a SH has signalled a buy or sell

Rule 15 Use the MMLH as a buy or sell signal when you expect a reversal because of a P5 Also when prices are at aWL ML extension line or where course lines converge or intersect

Rule 16 Converging lines that meet prices have shown the highest probability of a trend reversal

Rule 17 Two to four days is usually the maximum between P2 and P3 for a MML P1 can be a day or so back from P2and 3

Rule 18 The most reliable ActionReaction centerlines seem to be MPL 2P line 2 Gap line peak to low or low to peak

Rule 19 When prices pass through R lines look for a pull back and then a continuing move in the direction of the passthrough

Rule 20 Use gaps as Action lines from the centerline

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 003755

Hello Gordonhere is my example for Rule 4 And I have a question What are EP formations gtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 021242

Tuesday May 04 2000 123755 PM you wrote TZgt Hello GordonTZgt here is my example for Rule 4 TZgt And I have a question What are EP formations gtgtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegtgta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hi TradersZone Good use of the warning linesalso the EP material is part of lesson 4 Rather than go backthrough the files to see when (or if) it was sent Im sending it along with this reply Glad youbrought it up Best RegardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Tuesday May 04 2000208 PM Dr Andrews used a fairly common price chart formation that he found useful at probable P5market tops and bottoms The formation generally called a wedge or pennant by chartists isreferred to in Dr Andrews trading course as the Expanding Pivot (EP) One of the few chartformations used in the course he regarded it as among the most dependable indications that amarket top was forming Closely related to the EP is his Inverted Expanding Pivot (IEP) which henoted could often be observed at market bottoms Both are regarded as intermediate and long-term reversal indicators Dr Andrews found that both formations were most reliable when they occurred after a sharprapid price move coinciding with the formation of a probable P5 He said it wasnt unusual for theformation to take several weeks to complete and that conservative traders could best avoid thewhipsaw associated with congestion patterns by trading only in the direction of the probable price

break out of the EP or IEP formation The attached charts illustrate these formations Please look over your own charts for an example ofthe EP and IEP and send me a copy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 232127

Hello Gordon Thank you for the lesson with the EP material I couldnt find it in any previous emailHere is my example for Rule 7 RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Rule 4Date Samstag 6 Mai 2000 080827

Wednesday May 05 2000 112127 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt Thank you for the lesson with the EP materialTZgt I couldnt find it in any previous emailTZgt Here is my example for Rule 7

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hi TradersZone

Glad you mentioned it earlierexcept for the EP IEP and hissideways channel Dr Andrews didnt have much to say about chartpatterns and formations These are good ones to use though

Your study of the penetration rule was good Later

Best Regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Wednesday May 05 2000801 PM

Page 46: Pitchfork primer

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject SchiffDate Samstag 11 Maumlrz 2000 070226

At 3900 121100 AM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtin my charting software (Dynamic Trader) the Schiff ML is drawn bygtfinding the midpoint of the line between pivot A and pivot B movinggtthis point horizontally to directly above or below (depending ongtwhether A is a low or high pivot) the A pivot and drawing a linegtgtfrom his point through the midpoint of the BC swinggtAre there different methods of drawing a Schiff MLgtI was too lazy to draw Schiff MLs by hand with the method yougtdescribed so Im sending my examples with the Dynamic Trader Schiff MLs -)gt gtRegardsgtTradersZone Hello TradersZone Your program Schiff line procedure is fineits actually what Dr Andrews called a modified schiff ml and is onlyslightly different than the one I sent you initially The one you used is preferred by most course members Im sendingthe modified Schiff lesson and a chart along with this email The chart example shows how to use it with 0-34 pivots Regards Gordon

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Sliding Parallel LineDate Montag 13 Maumlrz 2000 005252

Hello TradersZone Heres one of the tools Dr Andrews used most often when entering exiting or reversing marketpositions Not many people know about this technique Regards Gordon The Sliding Parallel (SH) is drawn whenever prices cross an Andrews line and then move along itFor example if the bottom of a daily price bar range drops through a lower parallel line of apitchfork a new parallel line is then drawn from that low and extended to the right If the nextdays price bar drops through that sliding parallel line a sell signal is generated Whenever price action dictates a sliding parallel the next step is to draw a Warning Line Thewarning line is an additional parallel line that is an image extension of the original pitchforkchannels It serves as a warning that if prices penetrate the sliding parallel the next likely target isthe WL The attached chart of Avis illustrates these procedures Please try these on your own charts andsend me an example

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Sliding Parallel LineDate Dienstag 14 Maumlrz 2000 225737

Hello Gordon this is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning line RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 065606

At 31400 105700 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtthis is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning linegt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone Your chart of circuit city was a good example for this study I may have mentioned it earlier but DrAndrews used this technique on a regular basis The next part of this lesson covers another of hisfavorite tools the mini-median line pitchfork Here it is Regards Gordon The Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry and exit tools Though mostoften drawn using alternate closing prices alternate highs and lows can also be usedin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days is usually the maximumbetween pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or more back from P2 Dr Andrews used Mini-Median Line pitchforks for buy and sell signals whenever he expected areversal Some examples include a probable P5 or when prices are at a Warning Line ML MLHmajor ML extension or a sideways channel price target When prices cross the Mini-Median LineParallel (MMLH) a sliding parallel (SH) is used for order entry

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 231537

gtThe Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry andgtexit tools Though most often drawn using alternate closing pricesgtalternate highs and lows can also be usedgtin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days isgtusually the maximum between pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or moregtback from P2

Hello Gordon

wouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timingCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available whenDr Andrews was alive

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject intraday chartsDate Samstag 18 Maumlrz 2000 012400

At 31600 111500 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongtgtwouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsgtinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timinggtCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available when DrgtAndrews was alivegtgtRegardsgtTradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Youre absolutely correctintraday charts were not available when DrAndrews was a trader

Im reading between the lines here but if you plan to day-trade using the course techniques ie thepitchfork then I agree that the regular pitchfork would be more useful on intraday charts Otherwisewhipsaw would be a significant problem Please get back to me if I didnt address your questionbecause this is a very important technique The mini-median line pitchfork and sliding parallel showedup on most of Dr Andrews charts

Regards

Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re intraday chartsDate Dienstag 21 Maumlrz 2000 220322

Hello Gordon

You are right Im planning to daytrade SampP futures using the course techniques among other things

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 003408

Hi TradersZone Here are a couple Andrews techniques that will help anticipate the breakout direction of asideways channelThey work often enough to warrant keep handy Regards Gordon In an earlier lesson you were introduced to Dr Andrews sideways count You saw how frequentlythe sideways count method provided high probability price objectives after the breakout from theestablished channel took place In this segment of lesson 4 youll be shown 2 congestion area techniques that can help youdetermine the probable sideways channel price breakout direction Both rely on the use of pivots The first uses the pivot points that are circled on a sideways channel Dr Andrews observed thatwhenever a sideways channel results in at least 5 circle contacts the eventual price breakoutwould very often be in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle If circle 5 is at thetop of the channel for example the eventual price breakout would likely be to the upside If circle5 is at the bottom of the channel look for a downside breakout Dr Andrews noted that thistechnique can be subject to false breakouts but that such breakouts are usually followed shortlyafter with a confirmed breakout in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle Heemphasized that this study is best considered as a rule of thumb observation He viewed it as asupporting indicator for use with a short-term pitchfork as prices approached a channel line There are 2 charts attached that show how this works

The second technique in this part of lesson 4 deals with a sideways channelthat is building shortly after a P3 has been formed Dr Andrews noted thatwhenever that happened the probabilities were high that prices wouldbreakout in the same direction they were moving prior to the formation ofthe sideways channel The attached P3 to sideways example chart shows thisprocedure

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 205235

Hello Gordon here is my example for the 5 circle sideways count RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Lesson 5Date Montag 27 Maumlrz 2000 060731

At 32400 85200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my example for the 5 circle sideways countgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt gt Hi TradersZone Good example of the 5th circle tendency to predict the direction of a sideways breakout Any luckfinding a chart showing the P3 to sideways rule Im sending the first part of the next lesson This trendline method is a useful tool with all of DrAndrews course lines He used it all the time but especially when looking for confirmation of othercourse method trading signals Regards Gordon The Course Trendline__________________________________________________________ Next well discuss the trendline Seasoned traders agree that the trendline is one of their mostimportant tools No matter what kind of trading program or technique they use the trendline on achart is a must But one of the biggest mistakes made by amateurs and professionals alike isinconsistently drawing or defining the trendline Dr Andrews trendline procedure is simpleconsistent and accurate It works extremely well with the pivot count and with the pitchfork For an uptrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the lowest low up and to thehighest minor low point preceding the highest high The line must not pass through prices inbetween the two low points Extend the line(Attached chart of Brightpoint) For a downtrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the highest high point to thelowest minor high point preceding the lowest low so that it does not pass through prices inbetween the two high points Extend the line (Brightpoint chart) Thats all theres to it Its simple consistent and it works well with other Andrews lines It also

helps eliminate personal bias and haphazard analysis Practice drawing these trendlines on your own charts Send me any questions you might have andthen e-mail a chart of your choosing which shows at least two uptrend and two downtrend linesthat youve drawn_______________________________________________________________________

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Lesson 5Date Dienstag 28 Maumlrz 2000 120224

Hello Gordon here is my chart with trendlinesWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going above the trendline again should I draw a new trendline anddelete the old one Attached is another chart with the P3 to sideways rule I finally found an example for it RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Price failure techniqueDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081412

At 32800 120200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my chart with trendlinesgtWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going abovegtthe trendline again should I draw a new trendline and delete the oldgtone Hi TradersZone Take a look at the chart Im returningI added some lines for you to considerWith the course trendline once its broken a new one should be started Theres a technique thatties in with this coming up soon Meanwhile heres an important technique to work on It deals with those times when prices dontreach the ML Regards Gordon Dr Andrews Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P ofreversaland the ML the probability is that this price reversal will go further thanitdid on its approach toward the ML (Extract of original course material) A price failure very often indicates a sizeable reversal will take placeThepitchforks drawn on the chart of Home Depot illustrate the concept of pricefailure Dr Andrews routinely drew a new pitchfork on his chart after a newsignificant pivot had formed He knew that prices had a high probability ofreaching the new ML before stalling out or reversing If prices reversedbeforereaching the ML thereby forming a new pivot he termed it a price failureTheunderlying idea here is that Dr Andrews fully anticipated his median linewouldact as a price magnet To conclude that a price reversal resulted in a price failure Dr Andrewsused

these primary signalsa subsequent price penetration of a short-termmulti-pivotline andor a return of prices to and penetration of the parallel lineformed atpivot 3 of the pitchfork (The circles on the Home Depot chart denote theparallelline penetration signal To avoid clutter the mpl lines were not drawn) One possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart of ConsecoIncLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me a copy

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject ChartDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081800Attachments image002png

Hi TradersZone Forgot the chart Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Price failure techniqueDate Samstag 1 April 2000 201000

gtOne possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart ofgtConseco IncgtLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me agtcopy Hi Gordon here are my charts with price failures RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Mittwoch 5 April 2000 235624

Hi TradersZone Good price failure examples you sentany comments or questions about it Heres the next partanother old standby Dr Andrews kept handy Regards Gordon In this segment youll learn how to use the Fan line Technique To draw the fan lines youll apply the coursetrendline method which was introduced in an earlier lesson It might be well to emphasize that the practicalapplication of the course trendline method requires practice and experience both of which will serve youwell in this technique Dr Andrews used fan lines as an adjunct to his pitchfork sideways channel andactionreaction methods In the fan line study three trendlines are drawn from the original reversal pivot of the price correction understudy typically a P0 or a P5 Youll notice on the charts included with this study that each fan line is at aflatter angle than its predecessor When the third fan line is broken the rule is that the correction has endedand a new trend is under way Try this technique on some of your own charts and then please send me asample

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Donnerstag 6 April 2000 234315

Hi Gordon No I dont have any specific question about the price failure technique I guess the next likely target after a price failure wouldbe the warning line I have attached two charts with fan linesIs it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the third fan line is broken RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Next segmentDate Freitag 7 April 2000 003312

Hello TradersZone

Tuesday April 06 2000 114315 AM you wrote

TZgt Hi Gordon

TZgt No I dont have any specific question about the price failureTZgt technique I guess the next likely target after a price failureTZgt would be the warning line

TZgt I have attached two charts with fan linesTZgt Is it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the thirdTZgt fan line is broken

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Thats right the warning line is the next price target Additionalwarning lines can be drawn if needed but usually one will do it Ifprices go through the first warning line another can be drawn butmost likely a new pitchfork could be drawn instead which would bepreferable Helps stay current with recently formed pivots

When prices break through the third fan line a buy or sell signal isgiven Not sure what you mean by fourth target fan line Im a littledense today

Your chart work was goodthis is another handy tool for spotting thehigh probability of a price reversal or trend change

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject The Gap TradeDate Freitag 7 April 2000 004858

Hello TradersZone This trading signal doesnt show up very often but past observations have shown that its well worth watching for Dr Andrews placed a lot of emphasis on the importance of price gaps something many traders overlook This is one of his gap uses Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom The Gap Trading Technique Price gaps can be a dilemma for many traders The general rule denoting market strength or weakness after ahigh volume gap often comes up short after the initial reaction is over Many gappers simply run out ofsteam A high volume gap in itself seems to offer precious little evidence that a profitable move is about toget under way Dr Andrews used price gaps somewhat differently than others He counted a gap as 2 pivots Youll see howthat works in the following technique which uses a gap to arrive at a price level for a buy or sell order Using short-term daily price pivots label the pivot immediately preceding the gap as p0 Count the gap as 2pivots labeling it p1 amp p2 After p3 has formed and prices reverse towards a short-term p4 draw a horizontalline 2 price tics or more (individual preference)to the right of p3 Enter the market only if prices reach orpenetrate that line within a few days after reversing from p4 Please look over your own charts to see if you can find places where the gap trade technique could have beenused Send me a sample when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 001925

Hello Gordon this is my chart with a gap trade RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 065538

Hello TradersZone Thursday April 08 2000 121925 PM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt this is my chart with a gap trade TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Good examplethe gap trade technique shines when an issue in at or near a P5 Similar to the one on thechart you sent Heres another trading signal tool Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Dr Andrews used several techniques which helped him determine whether a P5 was near at hand Youllrecall that he observed most price moves ended or had a significant reversal at a P5 This technique uses alternate closing prices after a P4 has been formed As with many of his studies thenumber 5 is used The chart accompanying this segment shows that there were 5 alternate closes to thedownside after P4 was put in Dr Andrews noted that whenever 5 or more alternate closes followed a P4 theprobabilities were high that a P5 was near at hand An added feature to this chart study is the sideways channel Notice how the 2nd target price and the 5thalternate close nearly coincide

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 12 April 2000 200730

Hello Gordon This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 13 April 2000 082418

Monday April 12 2000 80730 AM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hello TradersZone Good chart example of this Andrews toolanother of his very unusual observations that workmore often than not Heres the final part of this lesson Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom In this trendline method Dr Andrews once again used the number 5 as the basis for locating aprobable reversal area He found this technique to be especially useful whenever a clear orobvious pivot count didnt show up onthe price move under study Trendlines are drawn using the course trendline method When the 5th trendline is broken theprobability is high that the trend under study has ended A mini-median line pitchfork andorsliding parallel could be used for pricing a trading order The accompanying chart of Compaq Computer is an example of how the trendline study could beused The pivot count beginning at the October low is difficult to nail down There were severalsmall areas of congestion but no sizeable corrections while prices advanced The count wasunclear By following the price action using the course trendline technique however the traderwould have been alerted to the possibility of a change of trend when the 5th trendline was brokenin early February Try this technique on your own charts When youre ready please send me an example of yourstudy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 19 April 2000 124108

Hello Gordon this is my example with 5 trendlines RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[6] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 20 April 2000 012726

Monday April 19 2000 124108 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt this is my example with 5 trendlines

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Good example of the 5 TL technique Always reminds me of how the fairly simple tools often do a better job than manyof the sophisticated studies out there

That was the last part of lesson 5 Lesson 6 attached is made in one mailing Youll find Dr Andrews trading rules alongwith a wrap-up review which uses several of his rules You might have questions about some of the rules so feel free tosend them as they arise

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Dr Andrews had an abbreviated set of trading rules on several index cards that he carried around with him in his shirtpocket He said every trading day turned up something new on his charts and by having his rules in his pocket he wasreminded of the need for a methodical approach to his analysis Quite a comment coming from the man who wrote therule book

In this the final lesson of the course Dr Andrews original trading rules and observations are presented Lets work witha few of them at this point

Using charts of issues you follow please send me an example that illustrates your interpretation of each of the followingrules

Rule 4 Anticipating major Ps

Rule 7 Penetration rule

Rule 8 Price failure rule

Rule 11 1-ML23 AR Centerline

Rule 12 Sliding Parallel rule

Rule 15 Mini-median line parallel to buy or sell

Feel free to include any other course techniques you choose to apply but please include examples of the above as aminimum Use more than one technique on a chart if your analysis supports it Send as many charts as you like alongwith your questionscomments

Lesson 6 - Dr Andrews Trading Rules

This lesson covers course rules and significant observations as taught by Dr Andrews in his original trading course Therules are those that he used in his own trading and are provided to serve as a checklist for use with the course tradingmethods youve learned

Rule 1 Where prices are always headed Rule You course members are among the fortunate few to be able to draw astraight line and know that prices are headed toward that ML Very few investors have ever applied this ML principle ofstatistics to price fluctuations and weve never seen this in any books on investment You are among the very few who

know that prices are always headed toward the newest ML

Rule 2 The Rule of coming opposites applies all through life In the bible we find Blessed at they that mourn for theyshall be comforted As investors we know that any losses can be recovered by using course methods

Rule 3 Turn your mind about or Rethink for all good is at hand We should mentally prepare ourselves for thecoming reversal in prices and other affairs Heres one way for example that you course members who know the MLrules can use When prices are skyrocketing upward we do this preparation by thinking If prices pivoted here today atthis price Id draw a new ML bisecting the distance between todays price and the price from which the rise started Andwe know now that if this is a Major Pivot prices will fall rapidly to this new ML Profits from such drops are big and quick

Rule 4 Rule for anticipating major Ps If during congestion or after a rally or decline you can count four previous Psthe fifth one is highly probable to be the one from which a new trend starts

Rule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can make a quick big profit is to watch for the EPformations

Rule 6 The other reversal rule is that prices tend to reverse at or near any ML as well as at any extension of each MLAnd also at any MLH or extensions of MLH

Rule 7 The Penetration Rule is that whenever prices gap past or plunge through any ML there is a high probability thatthey will quickly return to it temporarily and then resume the trend they had before they gapped or plunged through

Rule 8 Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P of reversal and the MLthe probability is that this price reversal will go further than it did on its approach toward the ML

Rule 9 The price failure rule is negated when the next price trend is also a failure in reaching the ML This is almostinvariably a signal of a big fast move in the direction indicated by this last space Rule 10 When alternate median lines of comparable length slope in the same direction the trend is firm and rapidprice changes take place

Rule 11 When 1-ML23 is exactly reached at P4 it can be used as a highly reliable centerline for the AR method

Rule 12 Frequently after crossing a lower MLH prices continue to rise along the MLH Since the crossing of the MLHsignals a further drop is likely use a sliding parallel along the bottom of the most recent crossing If prices drop past thatsliding parallel line a sell signal is generated

Rule 13 MLs between P2 and P3 can start from a nearby or a remote P1 since prices tend to reverse at each of theseMLs Try several such P2-P3 MLs to discover the best fit

Rule 14 The distance of each MLH from its ML is the distance of the next warning line Use these warning lineswhenever a SH has signalled a buy or sell

Rule 15 Use the MMLH as a buy or sell signal when you expect a reversal because of a P5 Also when prices are at aWL ML extension line or where course lines converge or intersect

Rule 16 Converging lines that meet prices have shown the highest probability of a trend reversal

Rule 17 Two to four days is usually the maximum between P2 and P3 for a MML P1 can be a day or so back from P2and 3

Rule 18 The most reliable ActionReaction centerlines seem to be MPL 2P line 2 Gap line peak to low or low to peak

Rule 19 When prices pass through R lines look for a pull back and then a continuing move in the direction of the passthrough

Rule 20 Use gaps as Action lines from the centerline

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 003755

Hello Gordonhere is my example for Rule 4 And I have a question What are EP formations gtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 021242

Tuesday May 04 2000 123755 PM you wrote TZgt Hello GordonTZgt here is my example for Rule 4 TZgt And I have a question What are EP formations gtgtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegtgta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hi TradersZone Good use of the warning linesalso the EP material is part of lesson 4 Rather than go backthrough the files to see when (or if) it was sent Im sending it along with this reply Glad youbrought it up Best RegardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Tuesday May 04 2000208 PM Dr Andrews used a fairly common price chart formation that he found useful at probable P5market tops and bottoms The formation generally called a wedge or pennant by chartists isreferred to in Dr Andrews trading course as the Expanding Pivot (EP) One of the few chartformations used in the course he regarded it as among the most dependable indications that amarket top was forming Closely related to the EP is his Inverted Expanding Pivot (IEP) which henoted could often be observed at market bottoms Both are regarded as intermediate and long-term reversal indicators Dr Andrews found that both formations were most reliable when they occurred after a sharprapid price move coinciding with the formation of a probable P5 He said it wasnt unusual for theformation to take several weeks to complete and that conservative traders could best avoid thewhipsaw associated with congestion patterns by trading only in the direction of the probable price

break out of the EP or IEP formation The attached charts illustrate these formations Please look over your own charts for an example ofthe EP and IEP and send me a copy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 232127

Hello Gordon Thank you for the lesson with the EP material I couldnt find it in any previous emailHere is my example for Rule 7 RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Rule 4Date Samstag 6 Mai 2000 080827

Wednesday May 05 2000 112127 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt Thank you for the lesson with the EP materialTZgt I couldnt find it in any previous emailTZgt Here is my example for Rule 7

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hi TradersZone

Glad you mentioned it earlierexcept for the EP IEP and hissideways channel Dr Andrews didnt have much to say about chartpatterns and formations These are good ones to use though

Your study of the penetration rule was good Later

Best Regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Wednesday May 05 2000801 PM

Page 47: Pitchfork primer

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Sliding Parallel LineDate Montag 13 Maumlrz 2000 005252

Hello TradersZone Heres one of the tools Dr Andrews used most often when entering exiting or reversing marketpositions Not many people know about this technique Regards Gordon The Sliding Parallel (SH) is drawn whenever prices cross an Andrews line and then move along itFor example if the bottom of a daily price bar range drops through a lower parallel line of apitchfork a new parallel line is then drawn from that low and extended to the right If the nextdays price bar drops through that sliding parallel line a sell signal is generated Whenever price action dictates a sliding parallel the next step is to draw a Warning Line Thewarning line is an additional parallel line that is an image extension of the original pitchforkchannels It serves as a warning that if prices penetrate the sliding parallel the next likely target isthe WL The attached chart of Avis illustrates these procedures Please try these on your own charts andsend me an example

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Sliding Parallel LineDate Dienstag 14 Maumlrz 2000 225737

Hello Gordon this is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning line RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 065606

At 31400 105700 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtthis is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning linegt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone Your chart of circuit city was a good example for this study I may have mentioned it earlier but DrAndrews used this technique on a regular basis The next part of this lesson covers another of hisfavorite tools the mini-median line pitchfork Here it is Regards Gordon The Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry and exit tools Though mostoften drawn using alternate closing prices alternate highs and lows can also be usedin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days is usually the maximumbetween pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or more back from P2 Dr Andrews used Mini-Median Line pitchforks for buy and sell signals whenever he expected areversal Some examples include a probable P5 or when prices are at a Warning Line ML MLHmajor ML extension or a sideways channel price target When prices cross the Mini-Median LineParallel (MMLH) a sliding parallel (SH) is used for order entry

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 231537

gtThe Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry andgtexit tools Though most often drawn using alternate closing pricesgtalternate highs and lows can also be usedgtin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days isgtusually the maximum between pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or moregtback from P2

Hello Gordon

wouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timingCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available whenDr Andrews was alive

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject intraday chartsDate Samstag 18 Maumlrz 2000 012400

At 31600 111500 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongtgtwouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsgtinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timinggtCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available when DrgtAndrews was alivegtgtRegardsgtTradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Youre absolutely correctintraday charts were not available when DrAndrews was a trader

Im reading between the lines here but if you plan to day-trade using the course techniques ie thepitchfork then I agree that the regular pitchfork would be more useful on intraday charts Otherwisewhipsaw would be a significant problem Please get back to me if I didnt address your questionbecause this is a very important technique The mini-median line pitchfork and sliding parallel showedup on most of Dr Andrews charts

Regards

Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re intraday chartsDate Dienstag 21 Maumlrz 2000 220322

Hello Gordon

You are right Im planning to daytrade SampP futures using the course techniques among other things

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 003408

Hi TradersZone Here are a couple Andrews techniques that will help anticipate the breakout direction of asideways channelThey work often enough to warrant keep handy Regards Gordon In an earlier lesson you were introduced to Dr Andrews sideways count You saw how frequentlythe sideways count method provided high probability price objectives after the breakout from theestablished channel took place In this segment of lesson 4 youll be shown 2 congestion area techniques that can help youdetermine the probable sideways channel price breakout direction Both rely on the use of pivots The first uses the pivot points that are circled on a sideways channel Dr Andrews observed thatwhenever a sideways channel results in at least 5 circle contacts the eventual price breakoutwould very often be in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle If circle 5 is at thetop of the channel for example the eventual price breakout would likely be to the upside If circle5 is at the bottom of the channel look for a downside breakout Dr Andrews noted that thistechnique can be subject to false breakouts but that such breakouts are usually followed shortlyafter with a confirmed breakout in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle Heemphasized that this study is best considered as a rule of thumb observation He viewed it as asupporting indicator for use with a short-term pitchfork as prices approached a channel line There are 2 charts attached that show how this works

The second technique in this part of lesson 4 deals with a sideways channelthat is building shortly after a P3 has been formed Dr Andrews noted thatwhenever that happened the probabilities were high that prices wouldbreakout in the same direction they were moving prior to the formation ofthe sideways channel The attached P3 to sideways example chart shows thisprocedure

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 205235

Hello Gordon here is my example for the 5 circle sideways count RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Lesson 5Date Montag 27 Maumlrz 2000 060731

At 32400 85200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my example for the 5 circle sideways countgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt gt Hi TradersZone Good example of the 5th circle tendency to predict the direction of a sideways breakout Any luckfinding a chart showing the P3 to sideways rule Im sending the first part of the next lesson This trendline method is a useful tool with all of DrAndrews course lines He used it all the time but especially when looking for confirmation of othercourse method trading signals Regards Gordon The Course Trendline__________________________________________________________ Next well discuss the trendline Seasoned traders agree that the trendline is one of their mostimportant tools No matter what kind of trading program or technique they use the trendline on achart is a must But one of the biggest mistakes made by amateurs and professionals alike isinconsistently drawing or defining the trendline Dr Andrews trendline procedure is simpleconsistent and accurate It works extremely well with the pivot count and with the pitchfork For an uptrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the lowest low up and to thehighest minor low point preceding the highest high The line must not pass through prices inbetween the two low points Extend the line(Attached chart of Brightpoint) For a downtrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the highest high point to thelowest minor high point preceding the lowest low so that it does not pass through prices inbetween the two high points Extend the line (Brightpoint chart) Thats all theres to it Its simple consistent and it works well with other Andrews lines It also

helps eliminate personal bias and haphazard analysis Practice drawing these trendlines on your own charts Send me any questions you might have andthen e-mail a chart of your choosing which shows at least two uptrend and two downtrend linesthat youve drawn_______________________________________________________________________

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Lesson 5Date Dienstag 28 Maumlrz 2000 120224

Hello Gordon here is my chart with trendlinesWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going above the trendline again should I draw a new trendline anddelete the old one Attached is another chart with the P3 to sideways rule I finally found an example for it RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Price failure techniqueDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081412

At 32800 120200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my chart with trendlinesgtWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going abovegtthe trendline again should I draw a new trendline and delete the oldgtone Hi TradersZone Take a look at the chart Im returningI added some lines for you to considerWith the course trendline once its broken a new one should be started Theres a technique thatties in with this coming up soon Meanwhile heres an important technique to work on It deals with those times when prices dontreach the ML Regards Gordon Dr Andrews Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P ofreversaland the ML the probability is that this price reversal will go further thanitdid on its approach toward the ML (Extract of original course material) A price failure very often indicates a sizeable reversal will take placeThepitchforks drawn on the chart of Home Depot illustrate the concept of pricefailure Dr Andrews routinely drew a new pitchfork on his chart after a newsignificant pivot had formed He knew that prices had a high probability ofreaching the new ML before stalling out or reversing If prices reversedbeforereaching the ML thereby forming a new pivot he termed it a price failureTheunderlying idea here is that Dr Andrews fully anticipated his median linewouldact as a price magnet To conclude that a price reversal resulted in a price failure Dr Andrewsused

these primary signalsa subsequent price penetration of a short-termmulti-pivotline andor a return of prices to and penetration of the parallel lineformed atpivot 3 of the pitchfork (The circles on the Home Depot chart denote theparallelline penetration signal To avoid clutter the mpl lines were not drawn) One possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart of ConsecoIncLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me a copy

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject ChartDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081800Attachments image002png

Hi TradersZone Forgot the chart Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Price failure techniqueDate Samstag 1 April 2000 201000

gtOne possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart ofgtConseco IncgtLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me agtcopy Hi Gordon here are my charts with price failures RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Mittwoch 5 April 2000 235624

Hi TradersZone Good price failure examples you sentany comments or questions about it Heres the next partanother old standby Dr Andrews kept handy Regards Gordon In this segment youll learn how to use the Fan line Technique To draw the fan lines youll apply the coursetrendline method which was introduced in an earlier lesson It might be well to emphasize that the practicalapplication of the course trendline method requires practice and experience both of which will serve youwell in this technique Dr Andrews used fan lines as an adjunct to his pitchfork sideways channel andactionreaction methods In the fan line study three trendlines are drawn from the original reversal pivot of the price correction understudy typically a P0 or a P5 Youll notice on the charts included with this study that each fan line is at aflatter angle than its predecessor When the third fan line is broken the rule is that the correction has endedand a new trend is under way Try this technique on some of your own charts and then please send me asample

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Donnerstag 6 April 2000 234315

Hi Gordon No I dont have any specific question about the price failure technique I guess the next likely target after a price failure wouldbe the warning line I have attached two charts with fan linesIs it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the third fan line is broken RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Next segmentDate Freitag 7 April 2000 003312

Hello TradersZone

Tuesday April 06 2000 114315 AM you wrote

TZgt Hi Gordon

TZgt No I dont have any specific question about the price failureTZgt technique I guess the next likely target after a price failureTZgt would be the warning line

TZgt I have attached two charts with fan linesTZgt Is it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the thirdTZgt fan line is broken

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Thats right the warning line is the next price target Additionalwarning lines can be drawn if needed but usually one will do it Ifprices go through the first warning line another can be drawn butmost likely a new pitchfork could be drawn instead which would bepreferable Helps stay current with recently formed pivots

When prices break through the third fan line a buy or sell signal isgiven Not sure what you mean by fourth target fan line Im a littledense today

Your chart work was goodthis is another handy tool for spotting thehigh probability of a price reversal or trend change

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject The Gap TradeDate Freitag 7 April 2000 004858

Hello TradersZone This trading signal doesnt show up very often but past observations have shown that its well worth watching for Dr Andrews placed a lot of emphasis on the importance of price gaps something many traders overlook This is one of his gap uses Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom The Gap Trading Technique Price gaps can be a dilemma for many traders The general rule denoting market strength or weakness after ahigh volume gap often comes up short after the initial reaction is over Many gappers simply run out ofsteam A high volume gap in itself seems to offer precious little evidence that a profitable move is about toget under way Dr Andrews used price gaps somewhat differently than others He counted a gap as 2 pivots Youll see howthat works in the following technique which uses a gap to arrive at a price level for a buy or sell order Using short-term daily price pivots label the pivot immediately preceding the gap as p0 Count the gap as 2pivots labeling it p1 amp p2 After p3 has formed and prices reverse towards a short-term p4 draw a horizontalline 2 price tics or more (individual preference)to the right of p3 Enter the market only if prices reach orpenetrate that line within a few days after reversing from p4 Please look over your own charts to see if you can find places where the gap trade technique could have beenused Send me a sample when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 001925

Hello Gordon this is my chart with a gap trade RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 065538

Hello TradersZone Thursday April 08 2000 121925 PM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt this is my chart with a gap trade TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Good examplethe gap trade technique shines when an issue in at or near a P5 Similar to the one on thechart you sent Heres another trading signal tool Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Dr Andrews used several techniques which helped him determine whether a P5 was near at hand Youllrecall that he observed most price moves ended or had a significant reversal at a P5 This technique uses alternate closing prices after a P4 has been formed As with many of his studies thenumber 5 is used The chart accompanying this segment shows that there were 5 alternate closes to thedownside after P4 was put in Dr Andrews noted that whenever 5 or more alternate closes followed a P4 theprobabilities were high that a P5 was near at hand An added feature to this chart study is the sideways channel Notice how the 2nd target price and the 5thalternate close nearly coincide

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 12 April 2000 200730

Hello Gordon This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 13 April 2000 082418

Monday April 12 2000 80730 AM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hello TradersZone Good chart example of this Andrews toolanother of his very unusual observations that workmore often than not Heres the final part of this lesson Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom In this trendline method Dr Andrews once again used the number 5 as the basis for locating aprobable reversal area He found this technique to be especially useful whenever a clear orobvious pivot count didnt show up onthe price move under study Trendlines are drawn using the course trendline method When the 5th trendline is broken theprobability is high that the trend under study has ended A mini-median line pitchfork andorsliding parallel could be used for pricing a trading order The accompanying chart of Compaq Computer is an example of how the trendline study could beused The pivot count beginning at the October low is difficult to nail down There were severalsmall areas of congestion but no sizeable corrections while prices advanced The count wasunclear By following the price action using the course trendline technique however the traderwould have been alerted to the possibility of a change of trend when the 5th trendline was brokenin early February Try this technique on your own charts When youre ready please send me an example of yourstudy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 19 April 2000 124108

Hello Gordon this is my example with 5 trendlines RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[6] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 20 April 2000 012726

Monday April 19 2000 124108 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt this is my example with 5 trendlines

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Good example of the 5 TL technique Always reminds me of how the fairly simple tools often do a better job than manyof the sophisticated studies out there

That was the last part of lesson 5 Lesson 6 attached is made in one mailing Youll find Dr Andrews trading rules alongwith a wrap-up review which uses several of his rules You might have questions about some of the rules so feel free tosend them as they arise

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Dr Andrews had an abbreviated set of trading rules on several index cards that he carried around with him in his shirtpocket He said every trading day turned up something new on his charts and by having his rules in his pocket he wasreminded of the need for a methodical approach to his analysis Quite a comment coming from the man who wrote therule book

In this the final lesson of the course Dr Andrews original trading rules and observations are presented Lets work witha few of them at this point

Using charts of issues you follow please send me an example that illustrates your interpretation of each of the followingrules

Rule 4 Anticipating major Ps

Rule 7 Penetration rule

Rule 8 Price failure rule

Rule 11 1-ML23 AR Centerline

Rule 12 Sliding Parallel rule

Rule 15 Mini-median line parallel to buy or sell

Feel free to include any other course techniques you choose to apply but please include examples of the above as aminimum Use more than one technique on a chart if your analysis supports it Send as many charts as you like alongwith your questionscomments

Lesson 6 - Dr Andrews Trading Rules

This lesson covers course rules and significant observations as taught by Dr Andrews in his original trading course Therules are those that he used in his own trading and are provided to serve as a checklist for use with the course tradingmethods youve learned

Rule 1 Where prices are always headed Rule You course members are among the fortunate few to be able to draw astraight line and know that prices are headed toward that ML Very few investors have ever applied this ML principle ofstatistics to price fluctuations and weve never seen this in any books on investment You are among the very few who

know that prices are always headed toward the newest ML

Rule 2 The Rule of coming opposites applies all through life In the bible we find Blessed at they that mourn for theyshall be comforted As investors we know that any losses can be recovered by using course methods

Rule 3 Turn your mind about or Rethink for all good is at hand We should mentally prepare ourselves for thecoming reversal in prices and other affairs Heres one way for example that you course members who know the MLrules can use When prices are skyrocketing upward we do this preparation by thinking If prices pivoted here today atthis price Id draw a new ML bisecting the distance between todays price and the price from which the rise started Andwe know now that if this is a Major Pivot prices will fall rapidly to this new ML Profits from such drops are big and quick

Rule 4 Rule for anticipating major Ps If during congestion or after a rally or decline you can count four previous Psthe fifth one is highly probable to be the one from which a new trend starts

Rule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can make a quick big profit is to watch for the EPformations

Rule 6 The other reversal rule is that prices tend to reverse at or near any ML as well as at any extension of each MLAnd also at any MLH or extensions of MLH

Rule 7 The Penetration Rule is that whenever prices gap past or plunge through any ML there is a high probability thatthey will quickly return to it temporarily and then resume the trend they had before they gapped or plunged through

Rule 8 Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P of reversal and the MLthe probability is that this price reversal will go further than it did on its approach toward the ML

Rule 9 The price failure rule is negated when the next price trend is also a failure in reaching the ML This is almostinvariably a signal of a big fast move in the direction indicated by this last space Rule 10 When alternate median lines of comparable length slope in the same direction the trend is firm and rapidprice changes take place

Rule 11 When 1-ML23 is exactly reached at P4 it can be used as a highly reliable centerline for the AR method

Rule 12 Frequently after crossing a lower MLH prices continue to rise along the MLH Since the crossing of the MLHsignals a further drop is likely use a sliding parallel along the bottom of the most recent crossing If prices drop past thatsliding parallel line a sell signal is generated

Rule 13 MLs between P2 and P3 can start from a nearby or a remote P1 since prices tend to reverse at each of theseMLs Try several such P2-P3 MLs to discover the best fit

Rule 14 The distance of each MLH from its ML is the distance of the next warning line Use these warning lineswhenever a SH has signalled a buy or sell

Rule 15 Use the MMLH as a buy or sell signal when you expect a reversal because of a P5 Also when prices are at aWL ML extension line or where course lines converge or intersect

Rule 16 Converging lines that meet prices have shown the highest probability of a trend reversal

Rule 17 Two to four days is usually the maximum between P2 and P3 for a MML P1 can be a day or so back from P2and 3

Rule 18 The most reliable ActionReaction centerlines seem to be MPL 2P line 2 Gap line peak to low or low to peak

Rule 19 When prices pass through R lines look for a pull back and then a continuing move in the direction of the passthrough

Rule 20 Use gaps as Action lines from the centerline

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 003755

Hello Gordonhere is my example for Rule 4 And I have a question What are EP formations gtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 021242

Tuesday May 04 2000 123755 PM you wrote TZgt Hello GordonTZgt here is my example for Rule 4 TZgt And I have a question What are EP formations gtgtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegtgta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hi TradersZone Good use of the warning linesalso the EP material is part of lesson 4 Rather than go backthrough the files to see when (or if) it was sent Im sending it along with this reply Glad youbrought it up Best RegardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Tuesday May 04 2000208 PM Dr Andrews used a fairly common price chart formation that he found useful at probable P5market tops and bottoms The formation generally called a wedge or pennant by chartists isreferred to in Dr Andrews trading course as the Expanding Pivot (EP) One of the few chartformations used in the course he regarded it as among the most dependable indications that amarket top was forming Closely related to the EP is his Inverted Expanding Pivot (IEP) which henoted could often be observed at market bottoms Both are regarded as intermediate and long-term reversal indicators Dr Andrews found that both formations were most reliable when they occurred after a sharprapid price move coinciding with the formation of a probable P5 He said it wasnt unusual for theformation to take several weeks to complete and that conservative traders could best avoid thewhipsaw associated with congestion patterns by trading only in the direction of the probable price

break out of the EP or IEP formation The attached charts illustrate these formations Please look over your own charts for an example ofthe EP and IEP and send me a copy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 232127

Hello Gordon Thank you for the lesson with the EP material I couldnt find it in any previous emailHere is my example for Rule 7 RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Rule 4Date Samstag 6 Mai 2000 080827

Wednesday May 05 2000 112127 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt Thank you for the lesson with the EP materialTZgt I couldnt find it in any previous emailTZgt Here is my example for Rule 7

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hi TradersZone

Glad you mentioned it earlierexcept for the EP IEP and hissideways channel Dr Andrews didnt have much to say about chartpatterns and formations These are good ones to use though

Your study of the penetration rule was good Later

Best Regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Wednesday May 05 2000801 PM

Page 48: Pitchfork primer

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Sliding Parallel LineDate Dienstag 14 Maumlrz 2000 225737

Hello Gordon this is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning line RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 065606

At 31400 105700 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtthis is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning linegt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone Your chart of circuit city was a good example for this study I may have mentioned it earlier but DrAndrews used this technique on a regular basis The next part of this lesson covers another of hisfavorite tools the mini-median line pitchfork Here it is Regards Gordon The Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry and exit tools Though mostoften drawn using alternate closing prices alternate highs and lows can also be usedin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days is usually the maximumbetween pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or more back from P2 Dr Andrews used Mini-Median Line pitchforks for buy and sell signals whenever he expected areversal Some examples include a probable P5 or when prices are at a Warning Line ML MLHmajor ML extension or a sideways channel price target When prices cross the Mini-Median LineParallel (MMLH) a sliding parallel (SH) is used for order entry

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 231537

gtThe Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry andgtexit tools Though most often drawn using alternate closing pricesgtalternate highs and lows can also be usedgtin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days isgtusually the maximum between pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or moregtback from P2

Hello Gordon

wouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timingCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available whenDr Andrews was alive

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject intraday chartsDate Samstag 18 Maumlrz 2000 012400

At 31600 111500 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongtgtwouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsgtinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timinggtCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available when DrgtAndrews was alivegtgtRegardsgtTradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Youre absolutely correctintraday charts were not available when DrAndrews was a trader

Im reading between the lines here but if you plan to day-trade using the course techniques ie thepitchfork then I agree that the regular pitchfork would be more useful on intraday charts Otherwisewhipsaw would be a significant problem Please get back to me if I didnt address your questionbecause this is a very important technique The mini-median line pitchfork and sliding parallel showedup on most of Dr Andrews charts

Regards

Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re intraday chartsDate Dienstag 21 Maumlrz 2000 220322

Hello Gordon

You are right Im planning to daytrade SampP futures using the course techniques among other things

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 003408

Hi TradersZone Here are a couple Andrews techniques that will help anticipate the breakout direction of asideways channelThey work often enough to warrant keep handy Regards Gordon In an earlier lesson you were introduced to Dr Andrews sideways count You saw how frequentlythe sideways count method provided high probability price objectives after the breakout from theestablished channel took place In this segment of lesson 4 youll be shown 2 congestion area techniques that can help youdetermine the probable sideways channel price breakout direction Both rely on the use of pivots The first uses the pivot points that are circled on a sideways channel Dr Andrews observed thatwhenever a sideways channel results in at least 5 circle contacts the eventual price breakoutwould very often be in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle If circle 5 is at thetop of the channel for example the eventual price breakout would likely be to the upside If circle5 is at the bottom of the channel look for a downside breakout Dr Andrews noted that thistechnique can be subject to false breakouts but that such breakouts are usually followed shortlyafter with a confirmed breakout in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle Heemphasized that this study is best considered as a rule of thumb observation He viewed it as asupporting indicator for use with a short-term pitchfork as prices approached a channel line There are 2 charts attached that show how this works

The second technique in this part of lesson 4 deals with a sideways channelthat is building shortly after a P3 has been formed Dr Andrews noted thatwhenever that happened the probabilities were high that prices wouldbreakout in the same direction they were moving prior to the formation ofthe sideways channel The attached P3 to sideways example chart shows thisprocedure

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 205235

Hello Gordon here is my example for the 5 circle sideways count RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Lesson 5Date Montag 27 Maumlrz 2000 060731

At 32400 85200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my example for the 5 circle sideways countgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt gt Hi TradersZone Good example of the 5th circle tendency to predict the direction of a sideways breakout Any luckfinding a chart showing the P3 to sideways rule Im sending the first part of the next lesson This trendline method is a useful tool with all of DrAndrews course lines He used it all the time but especially when looking for confirmation of othercourse method trading signals Regards Gordon The Course Trendline__________________________________________________________ Next well discuss the trendline Seasoned traders agree that the trendline is one of their mostimportant tools No matter what kind of trading program or technique they use the trendline on achart is a must But one of the biggest mistakes made by amateurs and professionals alike isinconsistently drawing or defining the trendline Dr Andrews trendline procedure is simpleconsistent and accurate It works extremely well with the pivot count and with the pitchfork For an uptrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the lowest low up and to thehighest minor low point preceding the highest high The line must not pass through prices inbetween the two low points Extend the line(Attached chart of Brightpoint) For a downtrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the highest high point to thelowest minor high point preceding the lowest low so that it does not pass through prices inbetween the two high points Extend the line (Brightpoint chart) Thats all theres to it Its simple consistent and it works well with other Andrews lines It also

helps eliminate personal bias and haphazard analysis Practice drawing these trendlines on your own charts Send me any questions you might have andthen e-mail a chart of your choosing which shows at least two uptrend and two downtrend linesthat youve drawn_______________________________________________________________________

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Lesson 5Date Dienstag 28 Maumlrz 2000 120224

Hello Gordon here is my chart with trendlinesWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going above the trendline again should I draw a new trendline anddelete the old one Attached is another chart with the P3 to sideways rule I finally found an example for it RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Price failure techniqueDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081412

At 32800 120200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my chart with trendlinesgtWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going abovegtthe trendline again should I draw a new trendline and delete the oldgtone Hi TradersZone Take a look at the chart Im returningI added some lines for you to considerWith the course trendline once its broken a new one should be started Theres a technique thatties in with this coming up soon Meanwhile heres an important technique to work on It deals with those times when prices dontreach the ML Regards Gordon Dr Andrews Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P ofreversaland the ML the probability is that this price reversal will go further thanitdid on its approach toward the ML (Extract of original course material) A price failure very often indicates a sizeable reversal will take placeThepitchforks drawn on the chart of Home Depot illustrate the concept of pricefailure Dr Andrews routinely drew a new pitchfork on his chart after a newsignificant pivot had formed He knew that prices had a high probability ofreaching the new ML before stalling out or reversing If prices reversedbeforereaching the ML thereby forming a new pivot he termed it a price failureTheunderlying idea here is that Dr Andrews fully anticipated his median linewouldact as a price magnet To conclude that a price reversal resulted in a price failure Dr Andrewsused

these primary signalsa subsequent price penetration of a short-termmulti-pivotline andor a return of prices to and penetration of the parallel lineformed atpivot 3 of the pitchfork (The circles on the Home Depot chart denote theparallelline penetration signal To avoid clutter the mpl lines were not drawn) One possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart of ConsecoIncLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me a copy

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject ChartDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081800Attachments image002png

Hi TradersZone Forgot the chart Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Price failure techniqueDate Samstag 1 April 2000 201000

gtOne possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart ofgtConseco IncgtLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me agtcopy Hi Gordon here are my charts with price failures RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Mittwoch 5 April 2000 235624

Hi TradersZone Good price failure examples you sentany comments or questions about it Heres the next partanother old standby Dr Andrews kept handy Regards Gordon In this segment youll learn how to use the Fan line Technique To draw the fan lines youll apply the coursetrendline method which was introduced in an earlier lesson It might be well to emphasize that the practicalapplication of the course trendline method requires practice and experience both of which will serve youwell in this technique Dr Andrews used fan lines as an adjunct to his pitchfork sideways channel andactionreaction methods In the fan line study three trendlines are drawn from the original reversal pivot of the price correction understudy typically a P0 or a P5 Youll notice on the charts included with this study that each fan line is at aflatter angle than its predecessor When the third fan line is broken the rule is that the correction has endedand a new trend is under way Try this technique on some of your own charts and then please send me asample

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Donnerstag 6 April 2000 234315

Hi Gordon No I dont have any specific question about the price failure technique I guess the next likely target after a price failure wouldbe the warning line I have attached two charts with fan linesIs it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the third fan line is broken RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Next segmentDate Freitag 7 April 2000 003312

Hello TradersZone

Tuesday April 06 2000 114315 AM you wrote

TZgt Hi Gordon

TZgt No I dont have any specific question about the price failureTZgt technique I guess the next likely target after a price failureTZgt would be the warning line

TZgt I have attached two charts with fan linesTZgt Is it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the thirdTZgt fan line is broken

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Thats right the warning line is the next price target Additionalwarning lines can be drawn if needed but usually one will do it Ifprices go through the first warning line another can be drawn butmost likely a new pitchfork could be drawn instead which would bepreferable Helps stay current with recently formed pivots

When prices break through the third fan line a buy or sell signal isgiven Not sure what you mean by fourth target fan line Im a littledense today

Your chart work was goodthis is another handy tool for spotting thehigh probability of a price reversal or trend change

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject The Gap TradeDate Freitag 7 April 2000 004858

Hello TradersZone This trading signal doesnt show up very often but past observations have shown that its well worth watching for Dr Andrews placed a lot of emphasis on the importance of price gaps something many traders overlook This is one of his gap uses Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom The Gap Trading Technique Price gaps can be a dilemma for many traders The general rule denoting market strength or weakness after ahigh volume gap often comes up short after the initial reaction is over Many gappers simply run out ofsteam A high volume gap in itself seems to offer precious little evidence that a profitable move is about toget under way Dr Andrews used price gaps somewhat differently than others He counted a gap as 2 pivots Youll see howthat works in the following technique which uses a gap to arrive at a price level for a buy or sell order Using short-term daily price pivots label the pivot immediately preceding the gap as p0 Count the gap as 2pivots labeling it p1 amp p2 After p3 has formed and prices reverse towards a short-term p4 draw a horizontalline 2 price tics or more (individual preference)to the right of p3 Enter the market only if prices reach orpenetrate that line within a few days after reversing from p4 Please look over your own charts to see if you can find places where the gap trade technique could have beenused Send me a sample when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 001925

Hello Gordon this is my chart with a gap trade RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 065538

Hello TradersZone Thursday April 08 2000 121925 PM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt this is my chart with a gap trade TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Good examplethe gap trade technique shines when an issue in at or near a P5 Similar to the one on thechart you sent Heres another trading signal tool Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Dr Andrews used several techniques which helped him determine whether a P5 was near at hand Youllrecall that he observed most price moves ended or had a significant reversal at a P5 This technique uses alternate closing prices after a P4 has been formed As with many of his studies thenumber 5 is used The chart accompanying this segment shows that there were 5 alternate closes to thedownside after P4 was put in Dr Andrews noted that whenever 5 or more alternate closes followed a P4 theprobabilities were high that a P5 was near at hand An added feature to this chart study is the sideways channel Notice how the 2nd target price and the 5thalternate close nearly coincide

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 12 April 2000 200730

Hello Gordon This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 13 April 2000 082418

Monday April 12 2000 80730 AM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hello TradersZone Good chart example of this Andrews toolanother of his very unusual observations that workmore often than not Heres the final part of this lesson Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom In this trendline method Dr Andrews once again used the number 5 as the basis for locating aprobable reversal area He found this technique to be especially useful whenever a clear orobvious pivot count didnt show up onthe price move under study Trendlines are drawn using the course trendline method When the 5th trendline is broken theprobability is high that the trend under study has ended A mini-median line pitchfork andorsliding parallel could be used for pricing a trading order The accompanying chart of Compaq Computer is an example of how the trendline study could beused The pivot count beginning at the October low is difficult to nail down There were severalsmall areas of congestion but no sizeable corrections while prices advanced The count wasunclear By following the price action using the course trendline technique however the traderwould have been alerted to the possibility of a change of trend when the 5th trendline was brokenin early February Try this technique on your own charts When youre ready please send me an example of yourstudy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 19 April 2000 124108

Hello Gordon this is my example with 5 trendlines RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[6] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 20 April 2000 012726

Monday April 19 2000 124108 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt this is my example with 5 trendlines

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Good example of the 5 TL technique Always reminds me of how the fairly simple tools often do a better job than manyof the sophisticated studies out there

That was the last part of lesson 5 Lesson 6 attached is made in one mailing Youll find Dr Andrews trading rules alongwith a wrap-up review which uses several of his rules You might have questions about some of the rules so feel free tosend them as they arise

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Dr Andrews had an abbreviated set of trading rules on several index cards that he carried around with him in his shirtpocket He said every trading day turned up something new on his charts and by having his rules in his pocket he wasreminded of the need for a methodical approach to his analysis Quite a comment coming from the man who wrote therule book

In this the final lesson of the course Dr Andrews original trading rules and observations are presented Lets work witha few of them at this point

Using charts of issues you follow please send me an example that illustrates your interpretation of each of the followingrules

Rule 4 Anticipating major Ps

Rule 7 Penetration rule

Rule 8 Price failure rule

Rule 11 1-ML23 AR Centerline

Rule 12 Sliding Parallel rule

Rule 15 Mini-median line parallel to buy or sell

Feel free to include any other course techniques you choose to apply but please include examples of the above as aminimum Use more than one technique on a chart if your analysis supports it Send as many charts as you like alongwith your questionscomments

Lesson 6 - Dr Andrews Trading Rules

This lesson covers course rules and significant observations as taught by Dr Andrews in his original trading course Therules are those that he used in his own trading and are provided to serve as a checklist for use with the course tradingmethods youve learned

Rule 1 Where prices are always headed Rule You course members are among the fortunate few to be able to draw astraight line and know that prices are headed toward that ML Very few investors have ever applied this ML principle ofstatistics to price fluctuations and weve never seen this in any books on investment You are among the very few who

know that prices are always headed toward the newest ML

Rule 2 The Rule of coming opposites applies all through life In the bible we find Blessed at they that mourn for theyshall be comforted As investors we know that any losses can be recovered by using course methods

Rule 3 Turn your mind about or Rethink for all good is at hand We should mentally prepare ourselves for thecoming reversal in prices and other affairs Heres one way for example that you course members who know the MLrules can use When prices are skyrocketing upward we do this preparation by thinking If prices pivoted here today atthis price Id draw a new ML bisecting the distance between todays price and the price from which the rise started Andwe know now that if this is a Major Pivot prices will fall rapidly to this new ML Profits from such drops are big and quick

Rule 4 Rule for anticipating major Ps If during congestion or after a rally or decline you can count four previous Psthe fifth one is highly probable to be the one from which a new trend starts

Rule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can make a quick big profit is to watch for the EPformations

Rule 6 The other reversal rule is that prices tend to reverse at or near any ML as well as at any extension of each MLAnd also at any MLH or extensions of MLH

Rule 7 The Penetration Rule is that whenever prices gap past or plunge through any ML there is a high probability thatthey will quickly return to it temporarily and then resume the trend they had before they gapped or plunged through

Rule 8 Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P of reversal and the MLthe probability is that this price reversal will go further than it did on its approach toward the ML

Rule 9 The price failure rule is negated when the next price trend is also a failure in reaching the ML This is almostinvariably a signal of a big fast move in the direction indicated by this last space Rule 10 When alternate median lines of comparable length slope in the same direction the trend is firm and rapidprice changes take place

Rule 11 When 1-ML23 is exactly reached at P4 it can be used as a highly reliable centerline for the AR method

Rule 12 Frequently after crossing a lower MLH prices continue to rise along the MLH Since the crossing of the MLHsignals a further drop is likely use a sliding parallel along the bottom of the most recent crossing If prices drop past thatsliding parallel line a sell signal is generated

Rule 13 MLs between P2 and P3 can start from a nearby or a remote P1 since prices tend to reverse at each of theseMLs Try several such P2-P3 MLs to discover the best fit

Rule 14 The distance of each MLH from its ML is the distance of the next warning line Use these warning lineswhenever a SH has signalled a buy or sell

Rule 15 Use the MMLH as a buy or sell signal when you expect a reversal because of a P5 Also when prices are at aWL ML extension line or where course lines converge or intersect

Rule 16 Converging lines that meet prices have shown the highest probability of a trend reversal

Rule 17 Two to four days is usually the maximum between P2 and P3 for a MML P1 can be a day or so back from P2and 3

Rule 18 The most reliable ActionReaction centerlines seem to be MPL 2P line 2 Gap line peak to low or low to peak

Rule 19 When prices pass through R lines look for a pull back and then a continuing move in the direction of the passthrough

Rule 20 Use gaps as Action lines from the centerline

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 003755

Hello Gordonhere is my example for Rule 4 And I have a question What are EP formations gtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 021242

Tuesday May 04 2000 123755 PM you wrote TZgt Hello GordonTZgt here is my example for Rule 4 TZgt And I have a question What are EP formations gtgtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegtgta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hi TradersZone Good use of the warning linesalso the EP material is part of lesson 4 Rather than go backthrough the files to see when (or if) it was sent Im sending it along with this reply Glad youbrought it up Best RegardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Tuesday May 04 2000208 PM Dr Andrews used a fairly common price chart formation that he found useful at probable P5market tops and bottoms The formation generally called a wedge or pennant by chartists isreferred to in Dr Andrews trading course as the Expanding Pivot (EP) One of the few chartformations used in the course he regarded it as among the most dependable indications that amarket top was forming Closely related to the EP is his Inverted Expanding Pivot (IEP) which henoted could often be observed at market bottoms Both are regarded as intermediate and long-term reversal indicators Dr Andrews found that both formations were most reliable when they occurred after a sharprapid price move coinciding with the formation of a probable P5 He said it wasnt unusual for theformation to take several weeks to complete and that conservative traders could best avoid thewhipsaw associated with congestion patterns by trading only in the direction of the probable price

break out of the EP or IEP formation The attached charts illustrate these formations Please look over your own charts for an example ofthe EP and IEP and send me a copy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 232127

Hello Gordon Thank you for the lesson with the EP material I couldnt find it in any previous emailHere is my example for Rule 7 RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Rule 4Date Samstag 6 Mai 2000 080827

Wednesday May 05 2000 112127 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt Thank you for the lesson with the EP materialTZgt I couldnt find it in any previous emailTZgt Here is my example for Rule 7

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hi TradersZone

Glad you mentioned it earlierexcept for the EP IEP and hissideways channel Dr Andrews didnt have much to say about chartpatterns and formations These are good ones to use though

Your study of the penetration rule was good Later

Best Regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Wednesday May 05 2000801 PM

Page 49: Pitchfork primer

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 065606

At 31400 105700 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gtthis is my chart with the sliding parallel line and the warning linegt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt Hello TradersZone Your chart of circuit city was a good example for this study I may have mentioned it earlier but DrAndrews used this technique on a regular basis The next part of this lesson covers another of hisfavorite tools the mini-median line pitchfork Here it is Regards Gordon The Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry and exit tools Though mostoften drawn using alternate closing prices alternate highs and lows can also be usedin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days is usually the maximumbetween pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or more back from P2 Dr Andrews used Mini-Median Line pitchforks for buy and sell signals whenever he expected areversal Some examples include a probable P5 or when prices are at a Warning Line ML MLHmajor ML extension or a sideways channel price target When prices cross the Mini-Median LineParallel (MMLH) a sliding parallel (SH) is used for order entry

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 231537

gtThe Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry andgtexit tools Though most often drawn using alternate closing pricesgtalternate highs and lows can also be usedgtin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days isgtusually the maximum between pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or moregtback from P2

Hello Gordon

wouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timingCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available whenDr Andrews was alive

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject intraday chartsDate Samstag 18 Maumlrz 2000 012400

At 31600 111500 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongtgtwouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsgtinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timinggtCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available when DrgtAndrews was alivegtgtRegardsgtTradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Youre absolutely correctintraday charts were not available when DrAndrews was a trader

Im reading between the lines here but if you plan to day-trade using the course techniques ie thepitchfork then I agree that the regular pitchfork would be more useful on intraday charts Otherwisewhipsaw would be a significant problem Please get back to me if I didnt address your questionbecause this is a very important technique The mini-median line pitchfork and sliding parallel showedup on most of Dr Andrews charts

Regards

Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re intraday chartsDate Dienstag 21 Maumlrz 2000 220322

Hello Gordon

You are right Im planning to daytrade SampP futures using the course techniques among other things

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 003408

Hi TradersZone Here are a couple Andrews techniques that will help anticipate the breakout direction of asideways channelThey work often enough to warrant keep handy Regards Gordon In an earlier lesson you were introduced to Dr Andrews sideways count You saw how frequentlythe sideways count method provided high probability price objectives after the breakout from theestablished channel took place In this segment of lesson 4 youll be shown 2 congestion area techniques that can help youdetermine the probable sideways channel price breakout direction Both rely on the use of pivots The first uses the pivot points that are circled on a sideways channel Dr Andrews observed thatwhenever a sideways channel results in at least 5 circle contacts the eventual price breakoutwould very often be in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle If circle 5 is at thetop of the channel for example the eventual price breakout would likely be to the upside If circle5 is at the bottom of the channel look for a downside breakout Dr Andrews noted that thistechnique can be subject to false breakouts but that such breakouts are usually followed shortlyafter with a confirmed breakout in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle Heemphasized that this study is best considered as a rule of thumb observation He viewed it as asupporting indicator for use with a short-term pitchfork as prices approached a channel line There are 2 charts attached that show how this works

The second technique in this part of lesson 4 deals with a sideways channelthat is building shortly after a P3 has been formed Dr Andrews noted thatwhenever that happened the probabilities were high that prices wouldbreakout in the same direction they were moving prior to the formation ofthe sideways channel The attached P3 to sideways example chart shows thisprocedure

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 205235

Hello Gordon here is my example for the 5 circle sideways count RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Lesson 5Date Montag 27 Maumlrz 2000 060731

At 32400 85200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my example for the 5 circle sideways countgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt gt Hi TradersZone Good example of the 5th circle tendency to predict the direction of a sideways breakout Any luckfinding a chart showing the P3 to sideways rule Im sending the first part of the next lesson This trendline method is a useful tool with all of DrAndrews course lines He used it all the time but especially when looking for confirmation of othercourse method trading signals Regards Gordon The Course Trendline__________________________________________________________ Next well discuss the trendline Seasoned traders agree that the trendline is one of their mostimportant tools No matter what kind of trading program or technique they use the trendline on achart is a must But one of the biggest mistakes made by amateurs and professionals alike isinconsistently drawing or defining the trendline Dr Andrews trendline procedure is simpleconsistent and accurate It works extremely well with the pivot count and with the pitchfork For an uptrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the lowest low up and to thehighest minor low point preceding the highest high The line must not pass through prices inbetween the two low points Extend the line(Attached chart of Brightpoint) For a downtrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the highest high point to thelowest minor high point preceding the lowest low so that it does not pass through prices inbetween the two high points Extend the line (Brightpoint chart) Thats all theres to it Its simple consistent and it works well with other Andrews lines It also

helps eliminate personal bias and haphazard analysis Practice drawing these trendlines on your own charts Send me any questions you might have andthen e-mail a chart of your choosing which shows at least two uptrend and two downtrend linesthat youve drawn_______________________________________________________________________

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Lesson 5Date Dienstag 28 Maumlrz 2000 120224

Hello Gordon here is my chart with trendlinesWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going above the trendline again should I draw a new trendline anddelete the old one Attached is another chart with the P3 to sideways rule I finally found an example for it RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Price failure techniqueDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081412

At 32800 120200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my chart with trendlinesgtWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going abovegtthe trendline again should I draw a new trendline and delete the oldgtone Hi TradersZone Take a look at the chart Im returningI added some lines for you to considerWith the course trendline once its broken a new one should be started Theres a technique thatties in with this coming up soon Meanwhile heres an important technique to work on It deals with those times when prices dontreach the ML Regards Gordon Dr Andrews Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P ofreversaland the ML the probability is that this price reversal will go further thanitdid on its approach toward the ML (Extract of original course material) A price failure very often indicates a sizeable reversal will take placeThepitchforks drawn on the chart of Home Depot illustrate the concept of pricefailure Dr Andrews routinely drew a new pitchfork on his chart after a newsignificant pivot had formed He knew that prices had a high probability ofreaching the new ML before stalling out or reversing If prices reversedbeforereaching the ML thereby forming a new pivot he termed it a price failureTheunderlying idea here is that Dr Andrews fully anticipated his median linewouldact as a price magnet To conclude that a price reversal resulted in a price failure Dr Andrewsused

these primary signalsa subsequent price penetration of a short-termmulti-pivotline andor a return of prices to and penetration of the parallel lineformed atpivot 3 of the pitchfork (The circles on the Home Depot chart denote theparallelline penetration signal To avoid clutter the mpl lines were not drawn) One possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart of ConsecoIncLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me a copy

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject ChartDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081800Attachments image002png

Hi TradersZone Forgot the chart Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Price failure techniqueDate Samstag 1 April 2000 201000

gtOne possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart ofgtConseco IncgtLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me agtcopy Hi Gordon here are my charts with price failures RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Mittwoch 5 April 2000 235624

Hi TradersZone Good price failure examples you sentany comments or questions about it Heres the next partanother old standby Dr Andrews kept handy Regards Gordon In this segment youll learn how to use the Fan line Technique To draw the fan lines youll apply the coursetrendline method which was introduced in an earlier lesson It might be well to emphasize that the practicalapplication of the course trendline method requires practice and experience both of which will serve youwell in this technique Dr Andrews used fan lines as an adjunct to his pitchfork sideways channel andactionreaction methods In the fan line study three trendlines are drawn from the original reversal pivot of the price correction understudy typically a P0 or a P5 Youll notice on the charts included with this study that each fan line is at aflatter angle than its predecessor When the third fan line is broken the rule is that the correction has endedand a new trend is under way Try this technique on some of your own charts and then please send me asample

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Donnerstag 6 April 2000 234315

Hi Gordon No I dont have any specific question about the price failure technique I guess the next likely target after a price failure wouldbe the warning line I have attached two charts with fan linesIs it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the third fan line is broken RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Next segmentDate Freitag 7 April 2000 003312

Hello TradersZone

Tuesday April 06 2000 114315 AM you wrote

TZgt Hi Gordon

TZgt No I dont have any specific question about the price failureTZgt technique I guess the next likely target after a price failureTZgt would be the warning line

TZgt I have attached two charts with fan linesTZgt Is it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the thirdTZgt fan line is broken

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Thats right the warning line is the next price target Additionalwarning lines can be drawn if needed but usually one will do it Ifprices go through the first warning line another can be drawn butmost likely a new pitchfork could be drawn instead which would bepreferable Helps stay current with recently formed pivots

When prices break through the third fan line a buy or sell signal isgiven Not sure what you mean by fourth target fan line Im a littledense today

Your chart work was goodthis is another handy tool for spotting thehigh probability of a price reversal or trend change

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject The Gap TradeDate Freitag 7 April 2000 004858

Hello TradersZone This trading signal doesnt show up very often but past observations have shown that its well worth watching for Dr Andrews placed a lot of emphasis on the importance of price gaps something many traders overlook This is one of his gap uses Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom The Gap Trading Technique Price gaps can be a dilemma for many traders The general rule denoting market strength or weakness after ahigh volume gap often comes up short after the initial reaction is over Many gappers simply run out ofsteam A high volume gap in itself seems to offer precious little evidence that a profitable move is about toget under way Dr Andrews used price gaps somewhat differently than others He counted a gap as 2 pivots Youll see howthat works in the following technique which uses a gap to arrive at a price level for a buy or sell order Using short-term daily price pivots label the pivot immediately preceding the gap as p0 Count the gap as 2pivots labeling it p1 amp p2 After p3 has formed and prices reverse towards a short-term p4 draw a horizontalline 2 price tics or more (individual preference)to the right of p3 Enter the market only if prices reach orpenetrate that line within a few days after reversing from p4 Please look over your own charts to see if you can find places where the gap trade technique could have beenused Send me a sample when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 001925

Hello Gordon this is my chart with a gap trade RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 065538

Hello TradersZone Thursday April 08 2000 121925 PM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt this is my chart with a gap trade TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Good examplethe gap trade technique shines when an issue in at or near a P5 Similar to the one on thechart you sent Heres another trading signal tool Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Dr Andrews used several techniques which helped him determine whether a P5 was near at hand Youllrecall that he observed most price moves ended or had a significant reversal at a P5 This technique uses alternate closing prices after a P4 has been formed As with many of his studies thenumber 5 is used The chart accompanying this segment shows that there were 5 alternate closes to thedownside after P4 was put in Dr Andrews noted that whenever 5 or more alternate closes followed a P4 theprobabilities were high that a P5 was near at hand An added feature to this chart study is the sideways channel Notice how the 2nd target price and the 5thalternate close nearly coincide

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 12 April 2000 200730

Hello Gordon This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 13 April 2000 082418

Monday April 12 2000 80730 AM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hello TradersZone Good chart example of this Andrews toolanother of his very unusual observations that workmore often than not Heres the final part of this lesson Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom In this trendline method Dr Andrews once again used the number 5 as the basis for locating aprobable reversal area He found this technique to be especially useful whenever a clear orobvious pivot count didnt show up onthe price move under study Trendlines are drawn using the course trendline method When the 5th trendline is broken theprobability is high that the trend under study has ended A mini-median line pitchfork andorsliding parallel could be used for pricing a trading order The accompanying chart of Compaq Computer is an example of how the trendline study could beused The pivot count beginning at the October low is difficult to nail down There were severalsmall areas of congestion but no sizeable corrections while prices advanced The count wasunclear By following the price action using the course trendline technique however the traderwould have been alerted to the possibility of a change of trend when the 5th trendline was brokenin early February Try this technique on your own charts When youre ready please send me an example of yourstudy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 19 April 2000 124108

Hello Gordon this is my example with 5 trendlines RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[6] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 20 April 2000 012726

Monday April 19 2000 124108 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt this is my example with 5 trendlines

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Good example of the 5 TL technique Always reminds me of how the fairly simple tools often do a better job than manyof the sophisticated studies out there

That was the last part of lesson 5 Lesson 6 attached is made in one mailing Youll find Dr Andrews trading rules alongwith a wrap-up review which uses several of his rules You might have questions about some of the rules so feel free tosend them as they arise

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Dr Andrews had an abbreviated set of trading rules on several index cards that he carried around with him in his shirtpocket He said every trading day turned up something new on his charts and by having his rules in his pocket he wasreminded of the need for a methodical approach to his analysis Quite a comment coming from the man who wrote therule book

In this the final lesson of the course Dr Andrews original trading rules and observations are presented Lets work witha few of them at this point

Using charts of issues you follow please send me an example that illustrates your interpretation of each of the followingrules

Rule 4 Anticipating major Ps

Rule 7 Penetration rule

Rule 8 Price failure rule

Rule 11 1-ML23 AR Centerline

Rule 12 Sliding Parallel rule

Rule 15 Mini-median line parallel to buy or sell

Feel free to include any other course techniques you choose to apply but please include examples of the above as aminimum Use more than one technique on a chart if your analysis supports it Send as many charts as you like alongwith your questionscomments

Lesson 6 - Dr Andrews Trading Rules

This lesson covers course rules and significant observations as taught by Dr Andrews in his original trading course Therules are those that he used in his own trading and are provided to serve as a checklist for use with the course tradingmethods youve learned

Rule 1 Where prices are always headed Rule You course members are among the fortunate few to be able to draw astraight line and know that prices are headed toward that ML Very few investors have ever applied this ML principle ofstatistics to price fluctuations and weve never seen this in any books on investment You are among the very few who

know that prices are always headed toward the newest ML

Rule 2 The Rule of coming opposites applies all through life In the bible we find Blessed at they that mourn for theyshall be comforted As investors we know that any losses can be recovered by using course methods

Rule 3 Turn your mind about or Rethink for all good is at hand We should mentally prepare ourselves for thecoming reversal in prices and other affairs Heres one way for example that you course members who know the MLrules can use When prices are skyrocketing upward we do this preparation by thinking If prices pivoted here today atthis price Id draw a new ML bisecting the distance between todays price and the price from which the rise started Andwe know now that if this is a Major Pivot prices will fall rapidly to this new ML Profits from such drops are big and quick

Rule 4 Rule for anticipating major Ps If during congestion or after a rally or decline you can count four previous Psthe fifth one is highly probable to be the one from which a new trend starts

Rule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can make a quick big profit is to watch for the EPformations

Rule 6 The other reversal rule is that prices tend to reverse at or near any ML as well as at any extension of each MLAnd also at any MLH or extensions of MLH

Rule 7 The Penetration Rule is that whenever prices gap past or plunge through any ML there is a high probability thatthey will quickly return to it temporarily and then resume the trend they had before they gapped or plunged through

Rule 8 Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P of reversal and the MLthe probability is that this price reversal will go further than it did on its approach toward the ML

Rule 9 The price failure rule is negated when the next price trend is also a failure in reaching the ML This is almostinvariably a signal of a big fast move in the direction indicated by this last space Rule 10 When alternate median lines of comparable length slope in the same direction the trend is firm and rapidprice changes take place

Rule 11 When 1-ML23 is exactly reached at P4 it can be used as a highly reliable centerline for the AR method

Rule 12 Frequently after crossing a lower MLH prices continue to rise along the MLH Since the crossing of the MLHsignals a further drop is likely use a sliding parallel along the bottom of the most recent crossing If prices drop past thatsliding parallel line a sell signal is generated

Rule 13 MLs between P2 and P3 can start from a nearby or a remote P1 since prices tend to reverse at each of theseMLs Try several such P2-P3 MLs to discover the best fit

Rule 14 The distance of each MLH from its ML is the distance of the next warning line Use these warning lineswhenever a SH has signalled a buy or sell

Rule 15 Use the MMLH as a buy or sell signal when you expect a reversal because of a P5 Also when prices are at aWL ML extension line or where course lines converge or intersect

Rule 16 Converging lines that meet prices have shown the highest probability of a trend reversal

Rule 17 Two to four days is usually the maximum between P2 and P3 for a MML P1 can be a day or so back from P2and 3

Rule 18 The most reliable ActionReaction centerlines seem to be MPL 2P line 2 Gap line peak to low or low to peak

Rule 19 When prices pass through R lines look for a pull back and then a continuing move in the direction of the passthrough

Rule 20 Use gaps as Action lines from the centerline

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 003755

Hello Gordonhere is my example for Rule 4 And I have a question What are EP formations gtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 021242

Tuesday May 04 2000 123755 PM you wrote TZgt Hello GordonTZgt here is my example for Rule 4 TZgt And I have a question What are EP formations gtgtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegtgta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hi TradersZone Good use of the warning linesalso the EP material is part of lesson 4 Rather than go backthrough the files to see when (or if) it was sent Im sending it along with this reply Glad youbrought it up Best RegardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Tuesday May 04 2000208 PM Dr Andrews used a fairly common price chart formation that he found useful at probable P5market tops and bottoms The formation generally called a wedge or pennant by chartists isreferred to in Dr Andrews trading course as the Expanding Pivot (EP) One of the few chartformations used in the course he regarded it as among the most dependable indications that amarket top was forming Closely related to the EP is his Inverted Expanding Pivot (IEP) which henoted could often be observed at market bottoms Both are regarded as intermediate and long-term reversal indicators Dr Andrews found that both formations were most reliable when they occurred after a sharprapid price move coinciding with the formation of a probable P5 He said it wasnt unusual for theformation to take several weeks to complete and that conservative traders could best avoid thewhipsaw associated with congestion patterns by trading only in the direction of the probable price

break out of the EP or IEP formation The attached charts illustrate these formations Please look over your own charts for an example ofthe EP and IEP and send me a copy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 232127

Hello Gordon Thank you for the lesson with the EP material I couldnt find it in any previous emailHere is my example for Rule 7 RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Rule 4Date Samstag 6 Mai 2000 080827

Wednesday May 05 2000 112127 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt Thank you for the lesson with the EP materialTZgt I couldnt find it in any previous emailTZgt Here is my example for Rule 7

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hi TradersZone

Glad you mentioned it earlierexcept for the EP IEP and hissideways channel Dr Andrews didnt have much to say about chartpatterns and formations These are good ones to use though

Your study of the penetration rule was good Later

Best Regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Wednesday May 05 2000801 PM

Page 50: Pitchfork primer

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Circuit City SHDate Donnerstag 16 Maumlrz 2000 231537

gtThe Mini-Median Line was one of Dr Andrews favorite market entry andgtexit tools Though most often drawn using alternate closing pricesgtalternate highs and lows can also be usedgtin order to avoid whipsaws in narrow trading range markets 2 to 4 days isgtusually the maximum between pivots 2 and 3 and P1 can be a day or moregtback from P2

Hello Gordon

wouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timingCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available whenDr Andrews was alive

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject intraday chartsDate Samstag 18 Maumlrz 2000 012400

At 31600 111500 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongtgtwouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsgtinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timinggtCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available when DrgtAndrews was alivegtgtRegardsgtTradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Youre absolutely correctintraday charts were not available when DrAndrews was a trader

Im reading between the lines here but if you plan to day-trade using the course techniques ie thepitchfork then I agree that the regular pitchfork would be more useful on intraday charts Otherwisewhipsaw would be a significant problem Please get back to me if I didnt address your questionbecause this is a very important technique The mini-median line pitchfork and sliding parallel showedup on most of Dr Andrews charts

Regards

Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re intraday chartsDate Dienstag 21 Maumlrz 2000 220322

Hello Gordon

You are right Im planning to daytrade SampP futures using the course techniques among other things

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 003408

Hi TradersZone Here are a couple Andrews techniques that will help anticipate the breakout direction of asideways channelThey work often enough to warrant keep handy Regards Gordon In an earlier lesson you were introduced to Dr Andrews sideways count You saw how frequentlythe sideways count method provided high probability price objectives after the breakout from theestablished channel took place In this segment of lesson 4 youll be shown 2 congestion area techniques that can help youdetermine the probable sideways channel price breakout direction Both rely on the use of pivots The first uses the pivot points that are circled on a sideways channel Dr Andrews observed thatwhenever a sideways channel results in at least 5 circle contacts the eventual price breakoutwould very often be in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle If circle 5 is at thetop of the channel for example the eventual price breakout would likely be to the upside If circle5 is at the bottom of the channel look for a downside breakout Dr Andrews noted that thistechnique can be subject to false breakouts but that such breakouts are usually followed shortlyafter with a confirmed breakout in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle Heemphasized that this study is best considered as a rule of thumb observation He viewed it as asupporting indicator for use with a short-term pitchfork as prices approached a channel line There are 2 charts attached that show how this works

The second technique in this part of lesson 4 deals with a sideways channelthat is building shortly after a P3 has been formed Dr Andrews noted thatwhenever that happened the probabilities were high that prices wouldbreakout in the same direction they were moving prior to the formation ofthe sideways channel The attached P3 to sideways example chart shows thisprocedure

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 205235

Hello Gordon here is my example for the 5 circle sideways count RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Lesson 5Date Montag 27 Maumlrz 2000 060731

At 32400 85200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my example for the 5 circle sideways countgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt gt Hi TradersZone Good example of the 5th circle tendency to predict the direction of a sideways breakout Any luckfinding a chart showing the P3 to sideways rule Im sending the first part of the next lesson This trendline method is a useful tool with all of DrAndrews course lines He used it all the time but especially when looking for confirmation of othercourse method trading signals Regards Gordon The Course Trendline__________________________________________________________ Next well discuss the trendline Seasoned traders agree that the trendline is one of their mostimportant tools No matter what kind of trading program or technique they use the trendline on achart is a must But one of the biggest mistakes made by amateurs and professionals alike isinconsistently drawing or defining the trendline Dr Andrews trendline procedure is simpleconsistent and accurate It works extremely well with the pivot count and with the pitchfork For an uptrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the lowest low up and to thehighest minor low point preceding the highest high The line must not pass through prices inbetween the two low points Extend the line(Attached chart of Brightpoint) For a downtrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the highest high point to thelowest minor high point preceding the lowest low so that it does not pass through prices inbetween the two high points Extend the line (Brightpoint chart) Thats all theres to it Its simple consistent and it works well with other Andrews lines It also

helps eliminate personal bias and haphazard analysis Practice drawing these trendlines on your own charts Send me any questions you might have andthen e-mail a chart of your choosing which shows at least two uptrend and two downtrend linesthat youve drawn_______________________________________________________________________

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Lesson 5Date Dienstag 28 Maumlrz 2000 120224

Hello Gordon here is my chart with trendlinesWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going above the trendline again should I draw a new trendline anddelete the old one Attached is another chart with the P3 to sideways rule I finally found an example for it RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Price failure techniqueDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081412

At 32800 120200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my chart with trendlinesgtWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going abovegtthe trendline again should I draw a new trendline and delete the oldgtone Hi TradersZone Take a look at the chart Im returningI added some lines for you to considerWith the course trendline once its broken a new one should be started Theres a technique thatties in with this coming up soon Meanwhile heres an important technique to work on It deals with those times when prices dontreach the ML Regards Gordon Dr Andrews Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P ofreversaland the ML the probability is that this price reversal will go further thanitdid on its approach toward the ML (Extract of original course material) A price failure very often indicates a sizeable reversal will take placeThepitchforks drawn on the chart of Home Depot illustrate the concept of pricefailure Dr Andrews routinely drew a new pitchfork on his chart after a newsignificant pivot had formed He knew that prices had a high probability ofreaching the new ML before stalling out or reversing If prices reversedbeforereaching the ML thereby forming a new pivot he termed it a price failureTheunderlying idea here is that Dr Andrews fully anticipated his median linewouldact as a price magnet To conclude that a price reversal resulted in a price failure Dr Andrewsused

these primary signalsa subsequent price penetration of a short-termmulti-pivotline andor a return of prices to and penetration of the parallel lineformed atpivot 3 of the pitchfork (The circles on the Home Depot chart denote theparallelline penetration signal To avoid clutter the mpl lines were not drawn) One possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart of ConsecoIncLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me a copy

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject ChartDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081800Attachments image002png

Hi TradersZone Forgot the chart Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Price failure techniqueDate Samstag 1 April 2000 201000

gtOne possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart ofgtConseco IncgtLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me agtcopy Hi Gordon here are my charts with price failures RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Mittwoch 5 April 2000 235624

Hi TradersZone Good price failure examples you sentany comments or questions about it Heres the next partanother old standby Dr Andrews kept handy Regards Gordon In this segment youll learn how to use the Fan line Technique To draw the fan lines youll apply the coursetrendline method which was introduced in an earlier lesson It might be well to emphasize that the practicalapplication of the course trendline method requires practice and experience both of which will serve youwell in this technique Dr Andrews used fan lines as an adjunct to his pitchfork sideways channel andactionreaction methods In the fan line study three trendlines are drawn from the original reversal pivot of the price correction understudy typically a P0 or a P5 Youll notice on the charts included with this study that each fan line is at aflatter angle than its predecessor When the third fan line is broken the rule is that the correction has endedand a new trend is under way Try this technique on some of your own charts and then please send me asample

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Donnerstag 6 April 2000 234315

Hi Gordon No I dont have any specific question about the price failure technique I guess the next likely target after a price failure wouldbe the warning line I have attached two charts with fan linesIs it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the third fan line is broken RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Next segmentDate Freitag 7 April 2000 003312

Hello TradersZone

Tuesday April 06 2000 114315 AM you wrote

TZgt Hi Gordon

TZgt No I dont have any specific question about the price failureTZgt technique I guess the next likely target after a price failureTZgt would be the warning line

TZgt I have attached two charts with fan linesTZgt Is it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the thirdTZgt fan line is broken

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Thats right the warning line is the next price target Additionalwarning lines can be drawn if needed but usually one will do it Ifprices go through the first warning line another can be drawn butmost likely a new pitchfork could be drawn instead which would bepreferable Helps stay current with recently formed pivots

When prices break through the third fan line a buy or sell signal isgiven Not sure what you mean by fourth target fan line Im a littledense today

Your chart work was goodthis is another handy tool for spotting thehigh probability of a price reversal or trend change

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject The Gap TradeDate Freitag 7 April 2000 004858

Hello TradersZone This trading signal doesnt show up very often but past observations have shown that its well worth watching for Dr Andrews placed a lot of emphasis on the importance of price gaps something many traders overlook This is one of his gap uses Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom The Gap Trading Technique Price gaps can be a dilemma for many traders The general rule denoting market strength or weakness after ahigh volume gap often comes up short after the initial reaction is over Many gappers simply run out ofsteam A high volume gap in itself seems to offer precious little evidence that a profitable move is about toget under way Dr Andrews used price gaps somewhat differently than others He counted a gap as 2 pivots Youll see howthat works in the following technique which uses a gap to arrive at a price level for a buy or sell order Using short-term daily price pivots label the pivot immediately preceding the gap as p0 Count the gap as 2pivots labeling it p1 amp p2 After p3 has formed and prices reverse towards a short-term p4 draw a horizontalline 2 price tics or more (individual preference)to the right of p3 Enter the market only if prices reach orpenetrate that line within a few days after reversing from p4 Please look over your own charts to see if you can find places where the gap trade technique could have beenused Send me a sample when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 001925

Hello Gordon this is my chart with a gap trade RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 065538

Hello TradersZone Thursday April 08 2000 121925 PM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt this is my chart with a gap trade TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Good examplethe gap trade technique shines when an issue in at or near a P5 Similar to the one on thechart you sent Heres another trading signal tool Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Dr Andrews used several techniques which helped him determine whether a P5 was near at hand Youllrecall that he observed most price moves ended or had a significant reversal at a P5 This technique uses alternate closing prices after a P4 has been formed As with many of his studies thenumber 5 is used The chart accompanying this segment shows that there were 5 alternate closes to thedownside after P4 was put in Dr Andrews noted that whenever 5 or more alternate closes followed a P4 theprobabilities were high that a P5 was near at hand An added feature to this chart study is the sideways channel Notice how the 2nd target price and the 5thalternate close nearly coincide

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 12 April 2000 200730

Hello Gordon This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 13 April 2000 082418

Monday April 12 2000 80730 AM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hello TradersZone Good chart example of this Andrews toolanother of his very unusual observations that workmore often than not Heres the final part of this lesson Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom In this trendline method Dr Andrews once again used the number 5 as the basis for locating aprobable reversal area He found this technique to be especially useful whenever a clear orobvious pivot count didnt show up onthe price move under study Trendlines are drawn using the course trendline method When the 5th trendline is broken theprobability is high that the trend under study has ended A mini-median line pitchfork andorsliding parallel could be used for pricing a trading order The accompanying chart of Compaq Computer is an example of how the trendline study could beused The pivot count beginning at the October low is difficult to nail down There were severalsmall areas of congestion but no sizeable corrections while prices advanced The count wasunclear By following the price action using the course trendline technique however the traderwould have been alerted to the possibility of a change of trend when the 5th trendline was brokenin early February Try this technique on your own charts When youre ready please send me an example of yourstudy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 19 April 2000 124108

Hello Gordon this is my example with 5 trendlines RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[6] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 20 April 2000 012726

Monday April 19 2000 124108 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt this is my example with 5 trendlines

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Good example of the 5 TL technique Always reminds me of how the fairly simple tools often do a better job than manyof the sophisticated studies out there

That was the last part of lesson 5 Lesson 6 attached is made in one mailing Youll find Dr Andrews trading rules alongwith a wrap-up review which uses several of his rules You might have questions about some of the rules so feel free tosend them as they arise

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Dr Andrews had an abbreviated set of trading rules on several index cards that he carried around with him in his shirtpocket He said every trading day turned up something new on his charts and by having his rules in his pocket he wasreminded of the need for a methodical approach to his analysis Quite a comment coming from the man who wrote therule book

In this the final lesson of the course Dr Andrews original trading rules and observations are presented Lets work witha few of them at this point

Using charts of issues you follow please send me an example that illustrates your interpretation of each of the followingrules

Rule 4 Anticipating major Ps

Rule 7 Penetration rule

Rule 8 Price failure rule

Rule 11 1-ML23 AR Centerline

Rule 12 Sliding Parallel rule

Rule 15 Mini-median line parallel to buy or sell

Feel free to include any other course techniques you choose to apply but please include examples of the above as aminimum Use more than one technique on a chart if your analysis supports it Send as many charts as you like alongwith your questionscomments

Lesson 6 - Dr Andrews Trading Rules

This lesson covers course rules and significant observations as taught by Dr Andrews in his original trading course Therules are those that he used in his own trading and are provided to serve as a checklist for use with the course tradingmethods youve learned

Rule 1 Where prices are always headed Rule You course members are among the fortunate few to be able to draw astraight line and know that prices are headed toward that ML Very few investors have ever applied this ML principle ofstatistics to price fluctuations and weve never seen this in any books on investment You are among the very few who

know that prices are always headed toward the newest ML

Rule 2 The Rule of coming opposites applies all through life In the bible we find Blessed at they that mourn for theyshall be comforted As investors we know that any losses can be recovered by using course methods

Rule 3 Turn your mind about or Rethink for all good is at hand We should mentally prepare ourselves for thecoming reversal in prices and other affairs Heres one way for example that you course members who know the MLrules can use When prices are skyrocketing upward we do this preparation by thinking If prices pivoted here today atthis price Id draw a new ML bisecting the distance between todays price and the price from which the rise started Andwe know now that if this is a Major Pivot prices will fall rapidly to this new ML Profits from such drops are big and quick

Rule 4 Rule for anticipating major Ps If during congestion or after a rally or decline you can count four previous Psthe fifth one is highly probable to be the one from which a new trend starts

Rule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can make a quick big profit is to watch for the EPformations

Rule 6 The other reversal rule is that prices tend to reverse at or near any ML as well as at any extension of each MLAnd also at any MLH or extensions of MLH

Rule 7 The Penetration Rule is that whenever prices gap past or plunge through any ML there is a high probability thatthey will quickly return to it temporarily and then resume the trend they had before they gapped or plunged through

Rule 8 Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P of reversal and the MLthe probability is that this price reversal will go further than it did on its approach toward the ML

Rule 9 The price failure rule is negated when the next price trend is also a failure in reaching the ML This is almostinvariably a signal of a big fast move in the direction indicated by this last space Rule 10 When alternate median lines of comparable length slope in the same direction the trend is firm and rapidprice changes take place

Rule 11 When 1-ML23 is exactly reached at P4 it can be used as a highly reliable centerline for the AR method

Rule 12 Frequently after crossing a lower MLH prices continue to rise along the MLH Since the crossing of the MLHsignals a further drop is likely use a sliding parallel along the bottom of the most recent crossing If prices drop past thatsliding parallel line a sell signal is generated

Rule 13 MLs between P2 and P3 can start from a nearby or a remote P1 since prices tend to reverse at each of theseMLs Try several such P2-P3 MLs to discover the best fit

Rule 14 The distance of each MLH from its ML is the distance of the next warning line Use these warning lineswhenever a SH has signalled a buy or sell

Rule 15 Use the MMLH as a buy or sell signal when you expect a reversal because of a P5 Also when prices are at aWL ML extension line or where course lines converge or intersect

Rule 16 Converging lines that meet prices have shown the highest probability of a trend reversal

Rule 17 Two to four days is usually the maximum between P2 and P3 for a MML P1 can be a day or so back from P2and 3

Rule 18 The most reliable ActionReaction centerlines seem to be MPL 2P line 2 Gap line peak to low or low to peak

Rule 19 When prices pass through R lines look for a pull back and then a continuing move in the direction of the passthrough

Rule 20 Use gaps as Action lines from the centerline

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 003755

Hello Gordonhere is my example for Rule 4 And I have a question What are EP formations gtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 021242

Tuesday May 04 2000 123755 PM you wrote TZgt Hello GordonTZgt here is my example for Rule 4 TZgt And I have a question What are EP formations gtgtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegtgta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hi TradersZone Good use of the warning linesalso the EP material is part of lesson 4 Rather than go backthrough the files to see when (or if) it was sent Im sending it along with this reply Glad youbrought it up Best RegardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Tuesday May 04 2000208 PM Dr Andrews used a fairly common price chart formation that he found useful at probable P5market tops and bottoms The formation generally called a wedge or pennant by chartists isreferred to in Dr Andrews trading course as the Expanding Pivot (EP) One of the few chartformations used in the course he regarded it as among the most dependable indications that amarket top was forming Closely related to the EP is his Inverted Expanding Pivot (IEP) which henoted could often be observed at market bottoms Both are regarded as intermediate and long-term reversal indicators Dr Andrews found that both formations were most reliable when they occurred after a sharprapid price move coinciding with the formation of a probable P5 He said it wasnt unusual for theformation to take several weeks to complete and that conservative traders could best avoid thewhipsaw associated with congestion patterns by trading only in the direction of the probable price

break out of the EP or IEP formation The attached charts illustrate these formations Please look over your own charts for an example ofthe EP and IEP and send me a copy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 232127

Hello Gordon Thank you for the lesson with the EP material I couldnt find it in any previous emailHere is my example for Rule 7 RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Rule 4Date Samstag 6 Mai 2000 080827

Wednesday May 05 2000 112127 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt Thank you for the lesson with the EP materialTZgt I couldnt find it in any previous emailTZgt Here is my example for Rule 7

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hi TradersZone

Glad you mentioned it earlierexcept for the EP IEP and hissideways channel Dr Andrews didnt have much to say about chartpatterns and formations These are good ones to use though

Your study of the penetration rule was good Later

Best Regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Wednesday May 05 2000801 PM

Page 51: Pitchfork primer

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject intraday chartsDate Samstag 18 Maumlrz 2000 012400

At 31600 111500 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongtgtwouldnt it be better to use real median lines on intraday chartsgtinstead of drawing Mini-Median Lines on daily charts for better timinggtCould it be that intraday charts were simply not available when DrgtAndrews was alivegtgtRegardsgtTradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Youre absolutely correctintraday charts were not available when DrAndrews was a trader

Im reading between the lines here but if you plan to day-trade using the course techniques ie thepitchfork then I agree that the regular pitchfork would be more useful on intraday charts Otherwisewhipsaw would be a significant problem Please get back to me if I didnt address your questionbecause this is a very important technique The mini-median line pitchfork and sliding parallel showedup on most of Dr Andrews charts

Regards

Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re intraday chartsDate Dienstag 21 Maumlrz 2000 220322

Hello Gordon

You are right Im planning to daytrade SampP futures using the course techniques among other things

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 003408

Hi TradersZone Here are a couple Andrews techniques that will help anticipate the breakout direction of asideways channelThey work often enough to warrant keep handy Regards Gordon In an earlier lesson you were introduced to Dr Andrews sideways count You saw how frequentlythe sideways count method provided high probability price objectives after the breakout from theestablished channel took place In this segment of lesson 4 youll be shown 2 congestion area techniques that can help youdetermine the probable sideways channel price breakout direction Both rely on the use of pivots The first uses the pivot points that are circled on a sideways channel Dr Andrews observed thatwhenever a sideways channel results in at least 5 circle contacts the eventual price breakoutwould very often be in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle If circle 5 is at thetop of the channel for example the eventual price breakout would likely be to the upside If circle5 is at the bottom of the channel look for a downside breakout Dr Andrews noted that thistechnique can be subject to false breakouts but that such breakouts are usually followed shortlyafter with a confirmed breakout in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle Heemphasized that this study is best considered as a rule of thumb observation He viewed it as asupporting indicator for use with a short-term pitchfork as prices approached a channel line There are 2 charts attached that show how this works

The second technique in this part of lesson 4 deals with a sideways channelthat is building shortly after a P3 has been formed Dr Andrews noted thatwhenever that happened the probabilities were high that prices wouldbreakout in the same direction they were moving prior to the formation ofthe sideways channel The attached P3 to sideways example chart shows thisprocedure

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 205235

Hello Gordon here is my example for the 5 circle sideways count RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Lesson 5Date Montag 27 Maumlrz 2000 060731

At 32400 85200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my example for the 5 circle sideways countgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt gt Hi TradersZone Good example of the 5th circle tendency to predict the direction of a sideways breakout Any luckfinding a chart showing the P3 to sideways rule Im sending the first part of the next lesson This trendline method is a useful tool with all of DrAndrews course lines He used it all the time but especially when looking for confirmation of othercourse method trading signals Regards Gordon The Course Trendline__________________________________________________________ Next well discuss the trendline Seasoned traders agree that the trendline is one of their mostimportant tools No matter what kind of trading program or technique they use the trendline on achart is a must But one of the biggest mistakes made by amateurs and professionals alike isinconsistently drawing or defining the trendline Dr Andrews trendline procedure is simpleconsistent and accurate It works extremely well with the pivot count and with the pitchfork For an uptrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the lowest low up and to thehighest minor low point preceding the highest high The line must not pass through prices inbetween the two low points Extend the line(Attached chart of Brightpoint) For a downtrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the highest high point to thelowest minor high point preceding the lowest low so that it does not pass through prices inbetween the two high points Extend the line (Brightpoint chart) Thats all theres to it Its simple consistent and it works well with other Andrews lines It also

helps eliminate personal bias and haphazard analysis Practice drawing these trendlines on your own charts Send me any questions you might have andthen e-mail a chart of your choosing which shows at least two uptrend and two downtrend linesthat youve drawn_______________________________________________________________________

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Lesson 5Date Dienstag 28 Maumlrz 2000 120224

Hello Gordon here is my chart with trendlinesWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going above the trendline again should I draw a new trendline anddelete the old one Attached is another chart with the P3 to sideways rule I finally found an example for it RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Price failure techniqueDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081412

At 32800 120200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my chart with trendlinesgtWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going abovegtthe trendline again should I draw a new trendline and delete the oldgtone Hi TradersZone Take a look at the chart Im returningI added some lines for you to considerWith the course trendline once its broken a new one should be started Theres a technique thatties in with this coming up soon Meanwhile heres an important technique to work on It deals with those times when prices dontreach the ML Regards Gordon Dr Andrews Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P ofreversaland the ML the probability is that this price reversal will go further thanitdid on its approach toward the ML (Extract of original course material) A price failure very often indicates a sizeable reversal will take placeThepitchforks drawn on the chart of Home Depot illustrate the concept of pricefailure Dr Andrews routinely drew a new pitchfork on his chart after a newsignificant pivot had formed He knew that prices had a high probability ofreaching the new ML before stalling out or reversing If prices reversedbeforereaching the ML thereby forming a new pivot he termed it a price failureTheunderlying idea here is that Dr Andrews fully anticipated his median linewouldact as a price magnet To conclude that a price reversal resulted in a price failure Dr Andrewsused

these primary signalsa subsequent price penetration of a short-termmulti-pivotline andor a return of prices to and penetration of the parallel lineformed atpivot 3 of the pitchfork (The circles on the Home Depot chart denote theparallelline penetration signal To avoid clutter the mpl lines were not drawn) One possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart of ConsecoIncLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me a copy

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject ChartDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081800Attachments image002png

Hi TradersZone Forgot the chart Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Price failure techniqueDate Samstag 1 April 2000 201000

gtOne possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart ofgtConseco IncgtLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me agtcopy Hi Gordon here are my charts with price failures RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Mittwoch 5 April 2000 235624

Hi TradersZone Good price failure examples you sentany comments or questions about it Heres the next partanother old standby Dr Andrews kept handy Regards Gordon In this segment youll learn how to use the Fan line Technique To draw the fan lines youll apply the coursetrendline method which was introduced in an earlier lesson It might be well to emphasize that the practicalapplication of the course trendline method requires practice and experience both of which will serve youwell in this technique Dr Andrews used fan lines as an adjunct to his pitchfork sideways channel andactionreaction methods In the fan line study three trendlines are drawn from the original reversal pivot of the price correction understudy typically a P0 or a P5 Youll notice on the charts included with this study that each fan line is at aflatter angle than its predecessor When the third fan line is broken the rule is that the correction has endedand a new trend is under way Try this technique on some of your own charts and then please send me asample

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Donnerstag 6 April 2000 234315

Hi Gordon No I dont have any specific question about the price failure technique I guess the next likely target after a price failure wouldbe the warning line I have attached two charts with fan linesIs it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the third fan line is broken RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Next segmentDate Freitag 7 April 2000 003312

Hello TradersZone

Tuesday April 06 2000 114315 AM you wrote

TZgt Hi Gordon

TZgt No I dont have any specific question about the price failureTZgt technique I guess the next likely target after a price failureTZgt would be the warning line

TZgt I have attached two charts with fan linesTZgt Is it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the thirdTZgt fan line is broken

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Thats right the warning line is the next price target Additionalwarning lines can be drawn if needed but usually one will do it Ifprices go through the first warning line another can be drawn butmost likely a new pitchfork could be drawn instead which would bepreferable Helps stay current with recently formed pivots

When prices break through the third fan line a buy or sell signal isgiven Not sure what you mean by fourth target fan line Im a littledense today

Your chart work was goodthis is another handy tool for spotting thehigh probability of a price reversal or trend change

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject The Gap TradeDate Freitag 7 April 2000 004858

Hello TradersZone This trading signal doesnt show up very often but past observations have shown that its well worth watching for Dr Andrews placed a lot of emphasis on the importance of price gaps something many traders overlook This is one of his gap uses Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom The Gap Trading Technique Price gaps can be a dilemma for many traders The general rule denoting market strength or weakness after ahigh volume gap often comes up short after the initial reaction is over Many gappers simply run out ofsteam A high volume gap in itself seems to offer precious little evidence that a profitable move is about toget under way Dr Andrews used price gaps somewhat differently than others He counted a gap as 2 pivots Youll see howthat works in the following technique which uses a gap to arrive at a price level for a buy or sell order Using short-term daily price pivots label the pivot immediately preceding the gap as p0 Count the gap as 2pivots labeling it p1 amp p2 After p3 has formed and prices reverse towards a short-term p4 draw a horizontalline 2 price tics or more (individual preference)to the right of p3 Enter the market only if prices reach orpenetrate that line within a few days after reversing from p4 Please look over your own charts to see if you can find places where the gap trade technique could have beenused Send me a sample when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 001925

Hello Gordon this is my chart with a gap trade RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 065538

Hello TradersZone Thursday April 08 2000 121925 PM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt this is my chart with a gap trade TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Good examplethe gap trade technique shines when an issue in at or near a P5 Similar to the one on thechart you sent Heres another trading signal tool Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Dr Andrews used several techniques which helped him determine whether a P5 was near at hand Youllrecall that he observed most price moves ended or had a significant reversal at a P5 This technique uses alternate closing prices after a P4 has been formed As with many of his studies thenumber 5 is used The chart accompanying this segment shows that there were 5 alternate closes to thedownside after P4 was put in Dr Andrews noted that whenever 5 or more alternate closes followed a P4 theprobabilities were high that a P5 was near at hand An added feature to this chart study is the sideways channel Notice how the 2nd target price and the 5thalternate close nearly coincide

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 12 April 2000 200730

Hello Gordon This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 13 April 2000 082418

Monday April 12 2000 80730 AM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hello TradersZone Good chart example of this Andrews toolanother of his very unusual observations that workmore often than not Heres the final part of this lesson Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom In this trendline method Dr Andrews once again used the number 5 as the basis for locating aprobable reversal area He found this technique to be especially useful whenever a clear orobvious pivot count didnt show up onthe price move under study Trendlines are drawn using the course trendline method When the 5th trendline is broken theprobability is high that the trend under study has ended A mini-median line pitchfork andorsliding parallel could be used for pricing a trading order The accompanying chart of Compaq Computer is an example of how the trendline study could beused The pivot count beginning at the October low is difficult to nail down There were severalsmall areas of congestion but no sizeable corrections while prices advanced The count wasunclear By following the price action using the course trendline technique however the traderwould have been alerted to the possibility of a change of trend when the 5th trendline was brokenin early February Try this technique on your own charts When youre ready please send me an example of yourstudy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 19 April 2000 124108

Hello Gordon this is my example with 5 trendlines RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[6] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 20 April 2000 012726

Monday April 19 2000 124108 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt this is my example with 5 trendlines

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Good example of the 5 TL technique Always reminds me of how the fairly simple tools often do a better job than manyof the sophisticated studies out there

That was the last part of lesson 5 Lesson 6 attached is made in one mailing Youll find Dr Andrews trading rules alongwith a wrap-up review which uses several of his rules You might have questions about some of the rules so feel free tosend them as they arise

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Dr Andrews had an abbreviated set of trading rules on several index cards that he carried around with him in his shirtpocket He said every trading day turned up something new on his charts and by having his rules in his pocket he wasreminded of the need for a methodical approach to his analysis Quite a comment coming from the man who wrote therule book

In this the final lesson of the course Dr Andrews original trading rules and observations are presented Lets work witha few of them at this point

Using charts of issues you follow please send me an example that illustrates your interpretation of each of the followingrules

Rule 4 Anticipating major Ps

Rule 7 Penetration rule

Rule 8 Price failure rule

Rule 11 1-ML23 AR Centerline

Rule 12 Sliding Parallel rule

Rule 15 Mini-median line parallel to buy or sell

Feel free to include any other course techniques you choose to apply but please include examples of the above as aminimum Use more than one technique on a chart if your analysis supports it Send as many charts as you like alongwith your questionscomments

Lesson 6 - Dr Andrews Trading Rules

This lesson covers course rules and significant observations as taught by Dr Andrews in his original trading course Therules are those that he used in his own trading and are provided to serve as a checklist for use with the course tradingmethods youve learned

Rule 1 Where prices are always headed Rule You course members are among the fortunate few to be able to draw astraight line and know that prices are headed toward that ML Very few investors have ever applied this ML principle ofstatistics to price fluctuations and weve never seen this in any books on investment You are among the very few who

know that prices are always headed toward the newest ML

Rule 2 The Rule of coming opposites applies all through life In the bible we find Blessed at they that mourn for theyshall be comforted As investors we know that any losses can be recovered by using course methods

Rule 3 Turn your mind about or Rethink for all good is at hand We should mentally prepare ourselves for thecoming reversal in prices and other affairs Heres one way for example that you course members who know the MLrules can use When prices are skyrocketing upward we do this preparation by thinking If prices pivoted here today atthis price Id draw a new ML bisecting the distance between todays price and the price from which the rise started Andwe know now that if this is a Major Pivot prices will fall rapidly to this new ML Profits from such drops are big and quick

Rule 4 Rule for anticipating major Ps If during congestion or after a rally or decline you can count four previous Psthe fifth one is highly probable to be the one from which a new trend starts

Rule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can make a quick big profit is to watch for the EPformations

Rule 6 The other reversal rule is that prices tend to reverse at or near any ML as well as at any extension of each MLAnd also at any MLH or extensions of MLH

Rule 7 The Penetration Rule is that whenever prices gap past or plunge through any ML there is a high probability thatthey will quickly return to it temporarily and then resume the trend they had before they gapped or plunged through

Rule 8 Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P of reversal and the MLthe probability is that this price reversal will go further than it did on its approach toward the ML

Rule 9 The price failure rule is negated when the next price trend is also a failure in reaching the ML This is almostinvariably a signal of a big fast move in the direction indicated by this last space Rule 10 When alternate median lines of comparable length slope in the same direction the trend is firm and rapidprice changes take place

Rule 11 When 1-ML23 is exactly reached at P4 it can be used as a highly reliable centerline for the AR method

Rule 12 Frequently after crossing a lower MLH prices continue to rise along the MLH Since the crossing of the MLHsignals a further drop is likely use a sliding parallel along the bottom of the most recent crossing If prices drop past thatsliding parallel line a sell signal is generated

Rule 13 MLs between P2 and P3 can start from a nearby or a remote P1 since prices tend to reverse at each of theseMLs Try several such P2-P3 MLs to discover the best fit

Rule 14 The distance of each MLH from its ML is the distance of the next warning line Use these warning lineswhenever a SH has signalled a buy or sell

Rule 15 Use the MMLH as a buy or sell signal when you expect a reversal because of a P5 Also when prices are at aWL ML extension line or where course lines converge or intersect

Rule 16 Converging lines that meet prices have shown the highest probability of a trend reversal

Rule 17 Two to four days is usually the maximum between P2 and P3 for a MML P1 can be a day or so back from P2and 3

Rule 18 The most reliable ActionReaction centerlines seem to be MPL 2P line 2 Gap line peak to low or low to peak

Rule 19 When prices pass through R lines look for a pull back and then a continuing move in the direction of the passthrough

Rule 20 Use gaps as Action lines from the centerline

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 003755

Hello Gordonhere is my example for Rule 4 And I have a question What are EP formations gtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 021242

Tuesday May 04 2000 123755 PM you wrote TZgt Hello GordonTZgt here is my example for Rule 4 TZgt And I have a question What are EP formations gtgtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegtgta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hi TradersZone Good use of the warning linesalso the EP material is part of lesson 4 Rather than go backthrough the files to see when (or if) it was sent Im sending it along with this reply Glad youbrought it up Best RegardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Tuesday May 04 2000208 PM Dr Andrews used a fairly common price chart formation that he found useful at probable P5market tops and bottoms The formation generally called a wedge or pennant by chartists isreferred to in Dr Andrews trading course as the Expanding Pivot (EP) One of the few chartformations used in the course he regarded it as among the most dependable indications that amarket top was forming Closely related to the EP is his Inverted Expanding Pivot (IEP) which henoted could often be observed at market bottoms Both are regarded as intermediate and long-term reversal indicators Dr Andrews found that both formations were most reliable when they occurred after a sharprapid price move coinciding with the formation of a probable P5 He said it wasnt unusual for theformation to take several weeks to complete and that conservative traders could best avoid thewhipsaw associated with congestion patterns by trading only in the direction of the probable price

break out of the EP or IEP formation The attached charts illustrate these formations Please look over your own charts for an example ofthe EP and IEP and send me a copy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 232127

Hello Gordon Thank you for the lesson with the EP material I couldnt find it in any previous emailHere is my example for Rule 7 RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Rule 4Date Samstag 6 Mai 2000 080827

Wednesday May 05 2000 112127 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt Thank you for the lesson with the EP materialTZgt I couldnt find it in any previous emailTZgt Here is my example for Rule 7

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hi TradersZone

Glad you mentioned it earlierexcept for the EP IEP and hissideways channel Dr Andrews didnt have much to say about chartpatterns and formations These are good ones to use though

Your study of the penetration rule was good Later

Best Regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Wednesday May 05 2000801 PM

Page 52: Pitchfork primer

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re intraday chartsDate Dienstag 21 Maumlrz 2000 220322

Hello Gordon

You are right Im planning to daytrade SampP futures using the course techniques among other things

RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 003408

Hi TradersZone Here are a couple Andrews techniques that will help anticipate the breakout direction of asideways channelThey work often enough to warrant keep handy Regards Gordon In an earlier lesson you were introduced to Dr Andrews sideways count You saw how frequentlythe sideways count method provided high probability price objectives after the breakout from theestablished channel took place In this segment of lesson 4 youll be shown 2 congestion area techniques that can help youdetermine the probable sideways channel price breakout direction Both rely on the use of pivots The first uses the pivot points that are circled on a sideways channel Dr Andrews observed thatwhenever a sideways channel results in at least 5 circle contacts the eventual price breakoutwould very often be in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle If circle 5 is at thetop of the channel for example the eventual price breakout would likely be to the upside If circle5 is at the bottom of the channel look for a downside breakout Dr Andrews noted that thistechnique can be subject to false breakouts but that such breakouts are usually followed shortlyafter with a confirmed breakout in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle Heemphasized that this study is best considered as a rule of thumb observation He viewed it as asupporting indicator for use with a short-term pitchfork as prices approached a channel line There are 2 charts attached that show how this works

The second technique in this part of lesson 4 deals with a sideways channelthat is building shortly after a P3 has been formed Dr Andrews noted thatwhenever that happened the probabilities were high that prices wouldbreakout in the same direction they were moving prior to the formation ofthe sideways channel The attached P3 to sideways example chart shows thisprocedure

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 205235

Hello Gordon here is my example for the 5 circle sideways count RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Lesson 5Date Montag 27 Maumlrz 2000 060731

At 32400 85200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my example for the 5 circle sideways countgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt gt Hi TradersZone Good example of the 5th circle tendency to predict the direction of a sideways breakout Any luckfinding a chart showing the P3 to sideways rule Im sending the first part of the next lesson This trendline method is a useful tool with all of DrAndrews course lines He used it all the time but especially when looking for confirmation of othercourse method trading signals Regards Gordon The Course Trendline__________________________________________________________ Next well discuss the trendline Seasoned traders agree that the trendline is one of their mostimportant tools No matter what kind of trading program or technique they use the trendline on achart is a must But one of the biggest mistakes made by amateurs and professionals alike isinconsistently drawing or defining the trendline Dr Andrews trendline procedure is simpleconsistent and accurate It works extremely well with the pivot count and with the pitchfork For an uptrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the lowest low up and to thehighest minor low point preceding the highest high The line must not pass through prices inbetween the two low points Extend the line(Attached chart of Brightpoint) For a downtrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the highest high point to thelowest minor high point preceding the lowest low so that it does not pass through prices inbetween the two high points Extend the line (Brightpoint chart) Thats all theres to it Its simple consistent and it works well with other Andrews lines It also

helps eliminate personal bias and haphazard analysis Practice drawing these trendlines on your own charts Send me any questions you might have andthen e-mail a chart of your choosing which shows at least two uptrend and two downtrend linesthat youve drawn_______________________________________________________________________

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Lesson 5Date Dienstag 28 Maumlrz 2000 120224

Hello Gordon here is my chart with trendlinesWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going above the trendline again should I draw a new trendline anddelete the old one Attached is another chart with the P3 to sideways rule I finally found an example for it RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Price failure techniqueDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081412

At 32800 120200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my chart with trendlinesgtWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going abovegtthe trendline again should I draw a new trendline and delete the oldgtone Hi TradersZone Take a look at the chart Im returningI added some lines for you to considerWith the course trendline once its broken a new one should be started Theres a technique thatties in with this coming up soon Meanwhile heres an important technique to work on It deals with those times when prices dontreach the ML Regards Gordon Dr Andrews Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P ofreversaland the ML the probability is that this price reversal will go further thanitdid on its approach toward the ML (Extract of original course material) A price failure very often indicates a sizeable reversal will take placeThepitchforks drawn on the chart of Home Depot illustrate the concept of pricefailure Dr Andrews routinely drew a new pitchfork on his chart after a newsignificant pivot had formed He knew that prices had a high probability ofreaching the new ML before stalling out or reversing If prices reversedbeforereaching the ML thereby forming a new pivot he termed it a price failureTheunderlying idea here is that Dr Andrews fully anticipated his median linewouldact as a price magnet To conclude that a price reversal resulted in a price failure Dr Andrewsused

these primary signalsa subsequent price penetration of a short-termmulti-pivotline andor a return of prices to and penetration of the parallel lineformed atpivot 3 of the pitchfork (The circles on the Home Depot chart denote theparallelline penetration signal To avoid clutter the mpl lines were not drawn) One possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart of ConsecoIncLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me a copy

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject ChartDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081800Attachments image002png

Hi TradersZone Forgot the chart Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Price failure techniqueDate Samstag 1 April 2000 201000

gtOne possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart ofgtConseco IncgtLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me agtcopy Hi Gordon here are my charts with price failures RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Mittwoch 5 April 2000 235624

Hi TradersZone Good price failure examples you sentany comments or questions about it Heres the next partanother old standby Dr Andrews kept handy Regards Gordon In this segment youll learn how to use the Fan line Technique To draw the fan lines youll apply the coursetrendline method which was introduced in an earlier lesson It might be well to emphasize that the practicalapplication of the course trendline method requires practice and experience both of which will serve youwell in this technique Dr Andrews used fan lines as an adjunct to his pitchfork sideways channel andactionreaction methods In the fan line study three trendlines are drawn from the original reversal pivot of the price correction understudy typically a P0 or a P5 Youll notice on the charts included with this study that each fan line is at aflatter angle than its predecessor When the third fan line is broken the rule is that the correction has endedand a new trend is under way Try this technique on some of your own charts and then please send me asample

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Donnerstag 6 April 2000 234315

Hi Gordon No I dont have any specific question about the price failure technique I guess the next likely target after a price failure wouldbe the warning line I have attached two charts with fan linesIs it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the third fan line is broken RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Next segmentDate Freitag 7 April 2000 003312

Hello TradersZone

Tuesday April 06 2000 114315 AM you wrote

TZgt Hi Gordon

TZgt No I dont have any specific question about the price failureTZgt technique I guess the next likely target after a price failureTZgt would be the warning line

TZgt I have attached two charts with fan linesTZgt Is it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the thirdTZgt fan line is broken

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Thats right the warning line is the next price target Additionalwarning lines can be drawn if needed but usually one will do it Ifprices go through the first warning line another can be drawn butmost likely a new pitchfork could be drawn instead which would bepreferable Helps stay current with recently formed pivots

When prices break through the third fan line a buy or sell signal isgiven Not sure what you mean by fourth target fan line Im a littledense today

Your chart work was goodthis is another handy tool for spotting thehigh probability of a price reversal or trend change

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject The Gap TradeDate Freitag 7 April 2000 004858

Hello TradersZone This trading signal doesnt show up very often but past observations have shown that its well worth watching for Dr Andrews placed a lot of emphasis on the importance of price gaps something many traders overlook This is one of his gap uses Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom The Gap Trading Technique Price gaps can be a dilemma for many traders The general rule denoting market strength or weakness after ahigh volume gap often comes up short after the initial reaction is over Many gappers simply run out ofsteam A high volume gap in itself seems to offer precious little evidence that a profitable move is about toget under way Dr Andrews used price gaps somewhat differently than others He counted a gap as 2 pivots Youll see howthat works in the following technique which uses a gap to arrive at a price level for a buy or sell order Using short-term daily price pivots label the pivot immediately preceding the gap as p0 Count the gap as 2pivots labeling it p1 amp p2 After p3 has formed and prices reverse towards a short-term p4 draw a horizontalline 2 price tics or more (individual preference)to the right of p3 Enter the market only if prices reach orpenetrate that line within a few days after reversing from p4 Please look over your own charts to see if you can find places where the gap trade technique could have beenused Send me a sample when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 001925

Hello Gordon this is my chart with a gap trade RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 065538

Hello TradersZone Thursday April 08 2000 121925 PM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt this is my chart with a gap trade TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Good examplethe gap trade technique shines when an issue in at or near a P5 Similar to the one on thechart you sent Heres another trading signal tool Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Dr Andrews used several techniques which helped him determine whether a P5 was near at hand Youllrecall that he observed most price moves ended or had a significant reversal at a P5 This technique uses alternate closing prices after a P4 has been formed As with many of his studies thenumber 5 is used The chart accompanying this segment shows that there were 5 alternate closes to thedownside after P4 was put in Dr Andrews noted that whenever 5 or more alternate closes followed a P4 theprobabilities were high that a P5 was near at hand An added feature to this chart study is the sideways channel Notice how the 2nd target price and the 5thalternate close nearly coincide

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 12 April 2000 200730

Hello Gordon This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 13 April 2000 082418

Monday April 12 2000 80730 AM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hello TradersZone Good chart example of this Andrews toolanother of his very unusual observations that workmore often than not Heres the final part of this lesson Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom In this trendline method Dr Andrews once again used the number 5 as the basis for locating aprobable reversal area He found this technique to be especially useful whenever a clear orobvious pivot count didnt show up onthe price move under study Trendlines are drawn using the course trendline method When the 5th trendline is broken theprobability is high that the trend under study has ended A mini-median line pitchfork andorsliding parallel could be used for pricing a trading order The accompanying chart of Compaq Computer is an example of how the trendline study could beused The pivot count beginning at the October low is difficult to nail down There were severalsmall areas of congestion but no sizeable corrections while prices advanced The count wasunclear By following the price action using the course trendline technique however the traderwould have been alerted to the possibility of a change of trend when the 5th trendline was brokenin early February Try this technique on your own charts When youre ready please send me an example of yourstudy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 19 April 2000 124108

Hello Gordon this is my example with 5 trendlines RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[6] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 20 April 2000 012726

Monday April 19 2000 124108 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt this is my example with 5 trendlines

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Good example of the 5 TL technique Always reminds me of how the fairly simple tools often do a better job than manyof the sophisticated studies out there

That was the last part of lesson 5 Lesson 6 attached is made in one mailing Youll find Dr Andrews trading rules alongwith a wrap-up review which uses several of his rules You might have questions about some of the rules so feel free tosend them as they arise

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Dr Andrews had an abbreviated set of trading rules on several index cards that he carried around with him in his shirtpocket He said every trading day turned up something new on his charts and by having his rules in his pocket he wasreminded of the need for a methodical approach to his analysis Quite a comment coming from the man who wrote therule book

In this the final lesson of the course Dr Andrews original trading rules and observations are presented Lets work witha few of them at this point

Using charts of issues you follow please send me an example that illustrates your interpretation of each of the followingrules

Rule 4 Anticipating major Ps

Rule 7 Penetration rule

Rule 8 Price failure rule

Rule 11 1-ML23 AR Centerline

Rule 12 Sliding Parallel rule

Rule 15 Mini-median line parallel to buy or sell

Feel free to include any other course techniques you choose to apply but please include examples of the above as aminimum Use more than one technique on a chart if your analysis supports it Send as many charts as you like alongwith your questionscomments

Lesson 6 - Dr Andrews Trading Rules

This lesson covers course rules and significant observations as taught by Dr Andrews in his original trading course Therules are those that he used in his own trading and are provided to serve as a checklist for use with the course tradingmethods youve learned

Rule 1 Where prices are always headed Rule You course members are among the fortunate few to be able to draw astraight line and know that prices are headed toward that ML Very few investors have ever applied this ML principle ofstatistics to price fluctuations and weve never seen this in any books on investment You are among the very few who

know that prices are always headed toward the newest ML

Rule 2 The Rule of coming opposites applies all through life In the bible we find Blessed at they that mourn for theyshall be comforted As investors we know that any losses can be recovered by using course methods

Rule 3 Turn your mind about or Rethink for all good is at hand We should mentally prepare ourselves for thecoming reversal in prices and other affairs Heres one way for example that you course members who know the MLrules can use When prices are skyrocketing upward we do this preparation by thinking If prices pivoted here today atthis price Id draw a new ML bisecting the distance between todays price and the price from which the rise started Andwe know now that if this is a Major Pivot prices will fall rapidly to this new ML Profits from such drops are big and quick

Rule 4 Rule for anticipating major Ps If during congestion or after a rally or decline you can count four previous Psthe fifth one is highly probable to be the one from which a new trend starts

Rule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can make a quick big profit is to watch for the EPformations

Rule 6 The other reversal rule is that prices tend to reverse at or near any ML as well as at any extension of each MLAnd also at any MLH or extensions of MLH

Rule 7 The Penetration Rule is that whenever prices gap past or plunge through any ML there is a high probability thatthey will quickly return to it temporarily and then resume the trend they had before they gapped or plunged through

Rule 8 Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P of reversal and the MLthe probability is that this price reversal will go further than it did on its approach toward the ML

Rule 9 The price failure rule is negated when the next price trend is also a failure in reaching the ML This is almostinvariably a signal of a big fast move in the direction indicated by this last space Rule 10 When alternate median lines of comparable length slope in the same direction the trend is firm and rapidprice changes take place

Rule 11 When 1-ML23 is exactly reached at P4 it can be used as a highly reliable centerline for the AR method

Rule 12 Frequently after crossing a lower MLH prices continue to rise along the MLH Since the crossing of the MLHsignals a further drop is likely use a sliding parallel along the bottom of the most recent crossing If prices drop past thatsliding parallel line a sell signal is generated

Rule 13 MLs between P2 and P3 can start from a nearby or a remote P1 since prices tend to reverse at each of theseMLs Try several such P2-P3 MLs to discover the best fit

Rule 14 The distance of each MLH from its ML is the distance of the next warning line Use these warning lineswhenever a SH has signalled a buy or sell

Rule 15 Use the MMLH as a buy or sell signal when you expect a reversal because of a P5 Also when prices are at aWL ML extension line or where course lines converge or intersect

Rule 16 Converging lines that meet prices have shown the highest probability of a trend reversal

Rule 17 Two to four days is usually the maximum between P2 and P3 for a MML P1 can be a day or so back from P2and 3

Rule 18 The most reliable ActionReaction centerlines seem to be MPL 2P line 2 Gap line peak to low or low to peak

Rule 19 When prices pass through R lines look for a pull back and then a continuing move in the direction of the passthrough

Rule 20 Use gaps as Action lines from the centerline

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 003755

Hello Gordonhere is my example for Rule 4 And I have a question What are EP formations gtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 021242

Tuesday May 04 2000 123755 PM you wrote TZgt Hello GordonTZgt here is my example for Rule 4 TZgt And I have a question What are EP formations gtgtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegtgta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hi TradersZone Good use of the warning linesalso the EP material is part of lesson 4 Rather than go backthrough the files to see when (or if) it was sent Im sending it along with this reply Glad youbrought it up Best RegardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Tuesday May 04 2000208 PM Dr Andrews used a fairly common price chart formation that he found useful at probable P5market tops and bottoms The formation generally called a wedge or pennant by chartists isreferred to in Dr Andrews trading course as the Expanding Pivot (EP) One of the few chartformations used in the course he regarded it as among the most dependable indications that amarket top was forming Closely related to the EP is his Inverted Expanding Pivot (IEP) which henoted could often be observed at market bottoms Both are regarded as intermediate and long-term reversal indicators Dr Andrews found that both formations were most reliable when they occurred after a sharprapid price move coinciding with the formation of a probable P5 He said it wasnt unusual for theformation to take several weeks to complete and that conservative traders could best avoid thewhipsaw associated with congestion patterns by trading only in the direction of the probable price

break out of the EP or IEP formation The attached charts illustrate these formations Please look over your own charts for an example ofthe EP and IEP and send me a copy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 232127

Hello Gordon Thank you for the lesson with the EP material I couldnt find it in any previous emailHere is my example for Rule 7 RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Rule 4Date Samstag 6 Mai 2000 080827

Wednesday May 05 2000 112127 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt Thank you for the lesson with the EP materialTZgt I couldnt find it in any previous emailTZgt Here is my example for Rule 7

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hi TradersZone

Glad you mentioned it earlierexcept for the EP IEP and hissideways channel Dr Andrews didnt have much to say about chartpatterns and formations These are good ones to use though

Your study of the penetration rule was good Later

Best Regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Wednesday May 05 2000801 PM

Page 53: Pitchfork primer

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 003408

Hi TradersZone Here are a couple Andrews techniques that will help anticipate the breakout direction of asideways channelThey work often enough to warrant keep handy Regards Gordon In an earlier lesson you were introduced to Dr Andrews sideways count You saw how frequentlythe sideways count method provided high probability price objectives after the breakout from theestablished channel took place In this segment of lesson 4 youll be shown 2 congestion area techniques that can help youdetermine the probable sideways channel price breakout direction Both rely on the use of pivots The first uses the pivot points that are circled on a sideways channel Dr Andrews observed thatwhenever a sideways channel results in at least 5 circle contacts the eventual price breakoutwould very often be in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle If circle 5 is at thetop of the channel for example the eventual price breakout would likely be to the upside If circle5 is at the bottom of the channel look for a downside breakout Dr Andrews noted that thistechnique can be subject to false breakouts but that such breakouts are usually followed shortlyafter with a confirmed breakout in the direction indicated by the location of the 5th circle Heemphasized that this study is best considered as a rule of thumb observation He viewed it as asupporting indicator for use with a short-term pitchfork as prices approached a channel line There are 2 charts attached that show how this works

The second technique in this part of lesson 4 deals with a sideways channelthat is building shortly after a P3 has been formed Dr Andrews noted thatwhenever that happened the probabilities were high that prices wouldbreakout in the same direction they were moving prior to the formation ofthe sideways channel The attached P3 to sideways example chart shows thisprocedure

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 205235

Hello Gordon here is my example for the 5 circle sideways count RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Lesson 5Date Montag 27 Maumlrz 2000 060731

At 32400 85200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my example for the 5 circle sideways countgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt gt Hi TradersZone Good example of the 5th circle tendency to predict the direction of a sideways breakout Any luckfinding a chart showing the P3 to sideways rule Im sending the first part of the next lesson This trendline method is a useful tool with all of DrAndrews course lines He used it all the time but especially when looking for confirmation of othercourse method trading signals Regards Gordon The Course Trendline__________________________________________________________ Next well discuss the trendline Seasoned traders agree that the trendline is one of their mostimportant tools No matter what kind of trading program or technique they use the trendline on achart is a must But one of the biggest mistakes made by amateurs and professionals alike isinconsistently drawing or defining the trendline Dr Andrews trendline procedure is simpleconsistent and accurate It works extremely well with the pivot count and with the pitchfork For an uptrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the lowest low up and to thehighest minor low point preceding the highest high The line must not pass through prices inbetween the two low points Extend the line(Attached chart of Brightpoint) For a downtrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the highest high point to thelowest minor high point preceding the lowest low so that it does not pass through prices inbetween the two high points Extend the line (Brightpoint chart) Thats all theres to it Its simple consistent and it works well with other Andrews lines It also

helps eliminate personal bias and haphazard analysis Practice drawing these trendlines on your own charts Send me any questions you might have andthen e-mail a chart of your choosing which shows at least two uptrend and two downtrend linesthat youve drawn_______________________________________________________________________

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Lesson 5Date Dienstag 28 Maumlrz 2000 120224

Hello Gordon here is my chart with trendlinesWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going above the trendline again should I draw a new trendline anddelete the old one Attached is another chart with the P3 to sideways rule I finally found an example for it RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Price failure techniqueDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081412

At 32800 120200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my chart with trendlinesgtWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going abovegtthe trendline again should I draw a new trendline and delete the oldgtone Hi TradersZone Take a look at the chart Im returningI added some lines for you to considerWith the course trendline once its broken a new one should be started Theres a technique thatties in with this coming up soon Meanwhile heres an important technique to work on It deals with those times when prices dontreach the ML Regards Gordon Dr Andrews Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P ofreversaland the ML the probability is that this price reversal will go further thanitdid on its approach toward the ML (Extract of original course material) A price failure very often indicates a sizeable reversal will take placeThepitchforks drawn on the chart of Home Depot illustrate the concept of pricefailure Dr Andrews routinely drew a new pitchfork on his chart after a newsignificant pivot had formed He knew that prices had a high probability ofreaching the new ML before stalling out or reversing If prices reversedbeforereaching the ML thereby forming a new pivot he termed it a price failureTheunderlying idea here is that Dr Andrews fully anticipated his median linewouldact as a price magnet To conclude that a price reversal resulted in a price failure Dr Andrewsused

these primary signalsa subsequent price penetration of a short-termmulti-pivotline andor a return of prices to and penetration of the parallel lineformed atpivot 3 of the pitchfork (The circles on the Home Depot chart denote theparallelline penetration signal To avoid clutter the mpl lines were not drawn) One possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart of ConsecoIncLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me a copy

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject ChartDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081800Attachments image002png

Hi TradersZone Forgot the chart Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Price failure techniqueDate Samstag 1 April 2000 201000

gtOne possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart ofgtConseco IncgtLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me agtcopy Hi Gordon here are my charts with price failures RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Mittwoch 5 April 2000 235624

Hi TradersZone Good price failure examples you sentany comments or questions about it Heres the next partanother old standby Dr Andrews kept handy Regards Gordon In this segment youll learn how to use the Fan line Technique To draw the fan lines youll apply the coursetrendline method which was introduced in an earlier lesson It might be well to emphasize that the practicalapplication of the course trendline method requires practice and experience both of which will serve youwell in this technique Dr Andrews used fan lines as an adjunct to his pitchfork sideways channel andactionreaction methods In the fan line study three trendlines are drawn from the original reversal pivot of the price correction understudy typically a P0 or a P5 Youll notice on the charts included with this study that each fan line is at aflatter angle than its predecessor When the third fan line is broken the rule is that the correction has endedand a new trend is under way Try this technique on some of your own charts and then please send me asample

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Donnerstag 6 April 2000 234315

Hi Gordon No I dont have any specific question about the price failure technique I guess the next likely target after a price failure wouldbe the warning line I have attached two charts with fan linesIs it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the third fan line is broken RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Next segmentDate Freitag 7 April 2000 003312

Hello TradersZone

Tuesday April 06 2000 114315 AM you wrote

TZgt Hi Gordon

TZgt No I dont have any specific question about the price failureTZgt technique I guess the next likely target after a price failureTZgt would be the warning line

TZgt I have attached two charts with fan linesTZgt Is it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the thirdTZgt fan line is broken

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Thats right the warning line is the next price target Additionalwarning lines can be drawn if needed but usually one will do it Ifprices go through the first warning line another can be drawn butmost likely a new pitchfork could be drawn instead which would bepreferable Helps stay current with recently formed pivots

When prices break through the third fan line a buy or sell signal isgiven Not sure what you mean by fourth target fan line Im a littledense today

Your chart work was goodthis is another handy tool for spotting thehigh probability of a price reversal or trend change

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject The Gap TradeDate Freitag 7 April 2000 004858

Hello TradersZone This trading signal doesnt show up very often but past observations have shown that its well worth watching for Dr Andrews placed a lot of emphasis on the importance of price gaps something many traders overlook This is one of his gap uses Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom The Gap Trading Technique Price gaps can be a dilemma for many traders The general rule denoting market strength or weakness after ahigh volume gap often comes up short after the initial reaction is over Many gappers simply run out ofsteam A high volume gap in itself seems to offer precious little evidence that a profitable move is about toget under way Dr Andrews used price gaps somewhat differently than others He counted a gap as 2 pivots Youll see howthat works in the following technique which uses a gap to arrive at a price level for a buy or sell order Using short-term daily price pivots label the pivot immediately preceding the gap as p0 Count the gap as 2pivots labeling it p1 amp p2 After p3 has formed and prices reverse towards a short-term p4 draw a horizontalline 2 price tics or more (individual preference)to the right of p3 Enter the market only if prices reach orpenetrate that line within a few days after reversing from p4 Please look over your own charts to see if you can find places where the gap trade technique could have beenused Send me a sample when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 001925

Hello Gordon this is my chart with a gap trade RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 065538

Hello TradersZone Thursday April 08 2000 121925 PM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt this is my chart with a gap trade TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Good examplethe gap trade technique shines when an issue in at or near a P5 Similar to the one on thechart you sent Heres another trading signal tool Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Dr Andrews used several techniques which helped him determine whether a P5 was near at hand Youllrecall that he observed most price moves ended or had a significant reversal at a P5 This technique uses alternate closing prices after a P4 has been formed As with many of his studies thenumber 5 is used The chart accompanying this segment shows that there were 5 alternate closes to thedownside after P4 was put in Dr Andrews noted that whenever 5 or more alternate closes followed a P4 theprobabilities were high that a P5 was near at hand An added feature to this chart study is the sideways channel Notice how the 2nd target price and the 5thalternate close nearly coincide

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 12 April 2000 200730

Hello Gordon This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 13 April 2000 082418

Monday April 12 2000 80730 AM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hello TradersZone Good chart example of this Andrews toolanother of his very unusual observations that workmore often than not Heres the final part of this lesson Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom In this trendline method Dr Andrews once again used the number 5 as the basis for locating aprobable reversal area He found this technique to be especially useful whenever a clear orobvious pivot count didnt show up onthe price move under study Trendlines are drawn using the course trendline method When the 5th trendline is broken theprobability is high that the trend under study has ended A mini-median line pitchfork andorsliding parallel could be used for pricing a trading order The accompanying chart of Compaq Computer is an example of how the trendline study could beused The pivot count beginning at the October low is difficult to nail down There were severalsmall areas of congestion but no sizeable corrections while prices advanced The count wasunclear By following the price action using the course trendline technique however the traderwould have been alerted to the possibility of a change of trend when the 5th trendline was brokenin early February Try this technique on your own charts When youre ready please send me an example of yourstudy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 19 April 2000 124108

Hello Gordon this is my example with 5 trendlines RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[6] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 20 April 2000 012726

Monday April 19 2000 124108 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt this is my example with 5 trendlines

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Good example of the 5 TL technique Always reminds me of how the fairly simple tools often do a better job than manyof the sophisticated studies out there

That was the last part of lesson 5 Lesson 6 attached is made in one mailing Youll find Dr Andrews trading rules alongwith a wrap-up review which uses several of his rules You might have questions about some of the rules so feel free tosend them as they arise

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Dr Andrews had an abbreviated set of trading rules on several index cards that he carried around with him in his shirtpocket He said every trading day turned up something new on his charts and by having his rules in his pocket he wasreminded of the need for a methodical approach to his analysis Quite a comment coming from the man who wrote therule book

In this the final lesson of the course Dr Andrews original trading rules and observations are presented Lets work witha few of them at this point

Using charts of issues you follow please send me an example that illustrates your interpretation of each of the followingrules

Rule 4 Anticipating major Ps

Rule 7 Penetration rule

Rule 8 Price failure rule

Rule 11 1-ML23 AR Centerline

Rule 12 Sliding Parallel rule

Rule 15 Mini-median line parallel to buy or sell

Feel free to include any other course techniques you choose to apply but please include examples of the above as aminimum Use more than one technique on a chart if your analysis supports it Send as many charts as you like alongwith your questionscomments

Lesson 6 - Dr Andrews Trading Rules

This lesson covers course rules and significant observations as taught by Dr Andrews in his original trading course Therules are those that he used in his own trading and are provided to serve as a checklist for use with the course tradingmethods youve learned

Rule 1 Where prices are always headed Rule You course members are among the fortunate few to be able to draw astraight line and know that prices are headed toward that ML Very few investors have ever applied this ML principle ofstatistics to price fluctuations and weve never seen this in any books on investment You are among the very few who

know that prices are always headed toward the newest ML

Rule 2 The Rule of coming opposites applies all through life In the bible we find Blessed at they that mourn for theyshall be comforted As investors we know that any losses can be recovered by using course methods

Rule 3 Turn your mind about or Rethink for all good is at hand We should mentally prepare ourselves for thecoming reversal in prices and other affairs Heres one way for example that you course members who know the MLrules can use When prices are skyrocketing upward we do this preparation by thinking If prices pivoted here today atthis price Id draw a new ML bisecting the distance between todays price and the price from which the rise started Andwe know now that if this is a Major Pivot prices will fall rapidly to this new ML Profits from such drops are big and quick

Rule 4 Rule for anticipating major Ps If during congestion or after a rally or decline you can count four previous Psthe fifth one is highly probable to be the one from which a new trend starts

Rule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can make a quick big profit is to watch for the EPformations

Rule 6 The other reversal rule is that prices tend to reverse at or near any ML as well as at any extension of each MLAnd also at any MLH or extensions of MLH

Rule 7 The Penetration Rule is that whenever prices gap past or plunge through any ML there is a high probability thatthey will quickly return to it temporarily and then resume the trend they had before they gapped or plunged through

Rule 8 Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P of reversal and the MLthe probability is that this price reversal will go further than it did on its approach toward the ML

Rule 9 The price failure rule is negated when the next price trend is also a failure in reaching the ML This is almostinvariably a signal of a big fast move in the direction indicated by this last space Rule 10 When alternate median lines of comparable length slope in the same direction the trend is firm and rapidprice changes take place

Rule 11 When 1-ML23 is exactly reached at P4 it can be used as a highly reliable centerline for the AR method

Rule 12 Frequently after crossing a lower MLH prices continue to rise along the MLH Since the crossing of the MLHsignals a further drop is likely use a sliding parallel along the bottom of the most recent crossing If prices drop past thatsliding parallel line a sell signal is generated

Rule 13 MLs between P2 and P3 can start from a nearby or a remote P1 since prices tend to reverse at each of theseMLs Try several such P2-P3 MLs to discover the best fit

Rule 14 The distance of each MLH from its ML is the distance of the next warning line Use these warning lineswhenever a SH has signalled a buy or sell

Rule 15 Use the MMLH as a buy or sell signal when you expect a reversal because of a P5 Also when prices are at aWL ML extension line or where course lines converge or intersect

Rule 16 Converging lines that meet prices have shown the highest probability of a trend reversal

Rule 17 Two to four days is usually the maximum between P2 and P3 for a MML P1 can be a day or so back from P2and 3

Rule 18 The most reliable ActionReaction centerlines seem to be MPL 2P line 2 Gap line peak to low or low to peak

Rule 19 When prices pass through R lines look for a pull back and then a continuing move in the direction of the passthrough

Rule 20 Use gaps as Action lines from the centerline

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 003755

Hello Gordonhere is my example for Rule 4 And I have a question What are EP formations gtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 021242

Tuesday May 04 2000 123755 PM you wrote TZgt Hello GordonTZgt here is my example for Rule 4 TZgt And I have a question What are EP formations gtgtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegtgta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hi TradersZone Good use of the warning linesalso the EP material is part of lesson 4 Rather than go backthrough the files to see when (or if) it was sent Im sending it along with this reply Glad youbrought it up Best RegardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Tuesday May 04 2000208 PM Dr Andrews used a fairly common price chart formation that he found useful at probable P5market tops and bottoms The formation generally called a wedge or pennant by chartists isreferred to in Dr Andrews trading course as the Expanding Pivot (EP) One of the few chartformations used in the course he regarded it as among the most dependable indications that amarket top was forming Closely related to the EP is his Inverted Expanding Pivot (IEP) which henoted could often be observed at market bottoms Both are regarded as intermediate and long-term reversal indicators Dr Andrews found that both formations were most reliable when they occurred after a sharprapid price move coinciding with the formation of a probable P5 He said it wasnt unusual for theformation to take several weeks to complete and that conservative traders could best avoid thewhipsaw associated with congestion patterns by trading only in the direction of the probable price

break out of the EP or IEP formation The attached charts illustrate these formations Please look over your own charts for an example ofthe EP and IEP and send me a copy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 232127

Hello Gordon Thank you for the lesson with the EP material I couldnt find it in any previous emailHere is my example for Rule 7 RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Rule 4Date Samstag 6 Mai 2000 080827

Wednesday May 05 2000 112127 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt Thank you for the lesson with the EP materialTZgt I couldnt find it in any previous emailTZgt Here is my example for Rule 7

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hi TradersZone

Glad you mentioned it earlierexcept for the EP IEP and hissideways channel Dr Andrews didnt have much to say about chartpatterns and formations These are good ones to use though

Your study of the penetration rule was good Later

Best Regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Wednesday May 05 2000801 PM

Page 54: Pitchfork primer

The second technique in this part of lesson 4 deals with a sideways channelthat is building shortly after a P3 has been formed Dr Andrews noted thatwhenever that happened the probabilities were high that prices wouldbreakout in the same direction they were moving prior to the formation ofthe sideways channel The attached P3 to sideways example chart shows thisprocedure

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 205235

Hello Gordon here is my example for the 5 circle sideways count RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Lesson 5Date Montag 27 Maumlrz 2000 060731

At 32400 85200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my example for the 5 circle sideways countgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt gt Hi TradersZone Good example of the 5th circle tendency to predict the direction of a sideways breakout Any luckfinding a chart showing the P3 to sideways rule Im sending the first part of the next lesson This trendline method is a useful tool with all of DrAndrews course lines He used it all the time but especially when looking for confirmation of othercourse method trading signals Regards Gordon The Course Trendline__________________________________________________________ Next well discuss the trendline Seasoned traders agree that the trendline is one of their mostimportant tools No matter what kind of trading program or technique they use the trendline on achart is a must But one of the biggest mistakes made by amateurs and professionals alike isinconsistently drawing or defining the trendline Dr Andrews trendline procedure is simpleconsistent and accurate It works extremely well with the pivot count and with the pitchfork For an uptrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the lowest low up and to thehighest minor low point preceding the highest high The line must not pass through prices inbetween the two low points Extend the line(Attached chart of Brightpoint) For a downtrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the highest high point to thelowest minor high point preceding the lowest low so that it does not pass through prices inbetween the two high points Extend the line (Brightpoint chart) Thats all theres to it Its simple consistent and it works well with other Andrews lines It also

helps eliminate personal bias and haphazard analysis Practice drawing these trendlines on your own charts Send me any questions you might have andthen e-mail a chart of your choosing which shows at least two uptrend and two downtrend linesthat youve drawn_______________________________________________________________________

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Lesson 5Date Dienstag 28 Maumlrz 2000 120224

Hello Gordon here is my chart with trendlinesWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going above the trendline again should I draw a new trendline anddelete the old one Attached is another chart with the P3 to sideways rule I finally found an example for it RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Price failure techniqueDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081412

At 32800 120200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my chart with trendlinesgtWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going abovegtthe trendline again should I draw a new trendline and delete the oldgtone Hi TradersZone Take a look at the chart Im returningI added some lines for you to considerWith the course trendline once its broken a new one should be started Theres a technique thatties in with this coming up soon Meanwhile heres an important technique to work on It deals with those times when prices dontreach the ML Regards Gordon Dr Andrews Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P ofreversaland the ML the probability is that this price reversal will go further thanitdid on its approach toward the ML (Extract of original course material) A price failure very often indicates a sizeable reversal will take placeThepitchforks drawn on the chart of Home Depot illustrate the concept of pricefailure Dr Andrews routinely drew a new pitchfork on his chart after a newsignificant pivot had formed He knew that prices had a high probability ofreaching the new ML before stalling out or reversing If prices reversedbeforereaching the ML thereby forming a new pivot he termed it a price failureTheunderlying idea here is that Dr Andrews fully anticipated his median linewouldact as a price magnet To conclude that a price reversal resulted in a price failure Dr Andrewsused

these primary signalsa subsequent price penetration of a short-termmulti-pivotline andor a return of prices to and penetration of the parallel lineformed atpivot 3 of the pitchfork (The circles on the Home Depot chart denote theparallelline penetration signal To avoid clutter the mpl lines were not drawn) One possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart of ConsecoIncLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me a copy

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject ChartDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081800Attachments image002png

Hi TradersZone Forgot the chart Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Price failure techniqueDate Samstag 1 April 2000 201000

gtOne possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart ofgtConseco IncgtLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me agtcopy Hi Gordon here are my charts with price failures RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Mittwoch 5 April 2000 235624

Hi TradersZone Good price failure examples you sentany comments or questions about it Heres the next partanother old standby Dr Andrews kept handy Regards Gordon In this segment youll learn how to use the Fan line Technique To draw the fan lines youll apply the coursetrendline method which was introduced in an earlier lesson It might be well to emphasize that the practicalapplication of the course trendline method requires practice and experience both of which will serve youwell in this technique Dr Andrews used fan lines as an adjunct to his pitchfork sideways channel andactionreaction methods In the fan line study three trendlines are drawn from the original reversal pivot of the price correction understudy typically a P0 or a P5 Youll notice on the charts included with this study that each fan line is at aflatter angle than its predecessor When the third fan line is broken the rule is that the correction has endedand a new trend is under way Try this technique on some of your own charts and then please send me asample

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Donnerstag 6 April 2000 234315

Hi Gordon No I dont have any specific question about the price failure technique I guess the next likely target after a price failure wouldbe the warning line I have attached two charts with fan linesIs it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the third fan line is broken RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Next segmentDate Freitag 7 April 2000 003312

Hello TradersZone

Tuesday April 06 2000 114315 AM you wrote

TZgt Hi Gordon

TZgt No I dont have any specific question about the price failureTZgt technique I guess the next likely target after a price failureTZgt would be the warning line

TZgt I have attached two charts with fan linesTZgt Is it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the thirdTZgt fan line is broken

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Thats right the warning line is the next price target Additionalwarning lines can be drawn if needed but usually one will do it Ifprices go through the first warning line another can be drawn butmost likely a new pitchfork could be drawn instead which would bepreferable Helps stay current with recently formed pivots

When prices break through the third fan line a buy or sell signal isgiven Not sure what you mean by fourth target fan line Im a littledense today

Your chart work was goodthis is another handy tool for spotting thehigh probability of a price reversal or trend change

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject The Gap TradeDate Freitag 7 April 2000 004858

Hello TradersZone This trading signal doesnt show up very often but past observations have shown that its well worth watching for Dr Andrews placed a lot of emphasis on the importance of price gaps something many traders overlook This is one of his gap uses Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom The Gap Trading Technique Price gaps can be a dilemma for many traders The general rule denoting market strength or weakness after ahigh volume gap often comes up short after the initial reaction is over Many gappers simply run out ofsteam A high volume gap in itself seems to offer precious little evidence that a profitable move is about toget under way Dr Andrews used price gaps somewhat differently than others He counted a gap as 2 pivots Youll see howthat works in the following technique which uses a gap to arrive at a price level for a buy or sell order Using short-term daily price pivots label the pivot immediately preceding the gap as p0 Count the gap as 2pivots labeling it p1 amp p2 After p3 has formed and prices reverse towards a short-term p4 draw a horizontalline 2 price tics or more (individual preference)to the right of p3 Enter the market only if prices reach orpenetrate that line within a few days after reversing from p4 Please look over your own charts to see if you can find places where the gap trade technique could have beenused Send me a sample when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 001925

Hello Gordon this is my chart with a gap trade RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 065538

Hello TradersZone Thursday April 08 2000 121925 PM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt this is my chart with a gap trade TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Good examplethe gap trade technique shines when an issue in at or near a P5 Similar to the one on thechart you sent Heres another trading signal tool Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Dr Andrews used several techniques which helped him determine whether a P5 was near at hand Youllrecall that he observed most price moves ended or had a significant reversal at a P5 This technique uses alternate closing prices after a P4 has been formed As with many of his studies thenumber 5 is used The chart accompanying this segment shows that there were 5 alternate closes to thedownside after P4 was put in Dr Andrews noted that whenever 5 or more alternate closes followed a P4 theprobabilities were high that a P5 was near at hand An added feature to this chart study is the sideways channel Notice how the 2nd target price and the 5thalternate close nearly coincide

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 12 April 2000 200730

Hello Gordon This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 13 April 2000 082418

Monday April 12 2000 80730 AM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hello TradersZone Good chart example of this Andrews toolanother of his very unusual observations that workmore often than not Heres the final part of this lesson Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom In this trendline method Dr Andrews once again used the number 5 as the basis for locating aprobable reversal area He found this technique to be especially useful whenever a clear orobvious pivot count didnt show up onthe price move under study Trendlines are drawn using the course trendline method When the 5th trendline is broken theprobability is high that the trend under study has ended A mini-median line pitchfork andorsliding parallel could be used for pricing a trading order The accompanying chart of Compaq Computer is an example of how the trendline study could beused The pivot count beginning at the October low is difficult to nail down There were severalsmall areas of congestion but no sizeable corrections while prices advanced The count wasunclear By following the price action using the course trendline technique however the traderwould have been alerted to the possibility of a change of trend when the 5th trendline was brokenin early February Try this technique on your own charts When youre ready please send me an example of yourstudy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 19 April 2000 124108

Hello Gordon this is my example with 5 trendlines RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[6] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 20 April 2000 012726

Monday April 19 2000 124108 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt this is my example with 5 trendlines

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Good example of the 5 TL technique Always reminds me of how the fairly simple tools often do a better job than manyof the sophisticated studies out there

That was the last part of lesson 5 Lesson 6 attached is made in one mailing Youll find Dr Andrews trading rules alongwith a wrap-up review which uses several of his rules You might have questions about some of the rules so feel free tosend them as they arise

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Dr Andrews had an abbreviated set of trading rules on several index cards that he carried around with him in his shirtpocket He said every trading day turned up something new on his charts and by having his rules in his pocket he wasreminded of the need for a methodical approach to his analysis Quite a comment coming from the man who wrote therule book

In this the final lesson of the course Dr Andrews original trading rules and observations are presented Lets work witha few of them at this point

Using charts of issues you follow please send me an example that illustrates your interpretation of each of the followingrules

Rule 4 Anticipating major Ps

Rule 7 Penetration rule

Rule 8 Price failure rule

Rule 11 1-ML23 AR Centerline

Rule 12 Sliding Parallel rule

Rule 15 Mini-median line parallel to buy or sell

Feel free to include any other course techniques you choose to apply but please include examples of the above as aminimum Use more than one technique on a chart if your analysis supports it Send as many charts as you like alongwith your questionscomments

Lesson 6 - Dr Andrews Trading Rules

This lesson covers course rules and significant observations as taught by Dr Andrews in his original trading course Therules are those that he used in his own trading and are provided to serve as a checklist for use with the course tradingmethods youve learned

Rule 1 Where prices are always headed Rule You course members are among the fortunate few to be able to draw astraight line and know that prices are headed toward that ML Very few investors have ever applied this ML principle ofstatistics to price fluctuations and weve never seen this in any books on investment You are among the very few who

know that prices are always headed toward the newest ML

Rule 2 The Rule of coming opposites applies all through life In the bible we find Blessed at they that mourn for theyshall be comforted As investors we know that any losses can be recovered by using course methods

Rule 3 Turn your mind about or Rethink for all good is at hand We should mentally prepare ourselves for thecoming reversal in prices and other affairs Heres one way for example that you course members who know the MLrules can use When prices are skyrocketing upward we do this preparation by thinking If prices pivoted here today atthis price Id draw a new ML bisecting the distance between todays price and the price from which the rise started Andwe know now that if this is a Major Pivot prices will fall rapidly to this new ML Profits from such drops are big and quick

Rule 4 Rule for anticipating major Ps If during congestion or after a rally or decline you can count four previous Psthe fifth one is highly probable to be the one from which a new trend starts

Rule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can make a quick big profit is to watch for the EPformations

Rule 6 The other reversal rule is that prices tend to reverse at or near any ML as well as at any extension of each MLAnd also at any MLH or extensions of MLH

Rule 7 The Penetration Rule is that whenever prices gap past or plunge through any ML there is a high probability thatthey will quickly return to it temporarily and then resume the trend they had before they gapped or plunged through

Rule 8 Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P of reversal and the MLthe probability is that this price reversal will go further than it did on its approach toward the ML

Rule 9 The price failure rule is negated when the next price trend is also a failure in reaching the ML This is almostinvariably a signal of a big fast move in the direction indicated by this last space Rule 10 When alternate median lines of comparable length slope in the same direction the trend is firm and rapidprice changes take place

Rule 11 When 1-ML23 is exactly reached at P4 it can be used as a highly reliable centerline for the AR method

Rule 12 Frequently after crossing a lower MLH prices continue to rise along the MLH Since the crossing of the MLHsignals a further drop is likely use a sliding parallel along the bottom of the most recent crossing If prices drop past thatsliding parallel line a sell signal is generated

Rule 13 MLs between P2 and P3 can start from a nearby or a remote P1 since prices tend to reverse at each of theseMLs Try several such P2-P3 MLs to discover the best fit

Rule 14 The distance of each MLH from its ML is the distance of the next warning line Use these warning lineswhenever a SH has signalled a buy or sell

Rule 15 Use the MMLH as a buy or sell signal when you expect a reversal because of a P5 Also when prices are at aWL ML extension line or where course lines converge or intersect

Rule 16 Converging lines that meet prices have shown the highest probability of a trend reversal

Rule 17 Two to four days is usually the maximum between P2 and P3 for a MML P1 can be a day or so back from P2and 3

Rule 18 The most reliable ActionReaction centerlines seem to be MPL 2P line 2 Gap line peak to low or low to peak

Rule 19 When prices pass through R lines look for a pull back and then a continuing move in the direction of the passthrough

Rule 20 Use gaps as Action lines from the centerline

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 003755

Hello Gordonhere is my example for Rule 4 And I have a question What are EP formations gtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 021242

Tuesday May 04 2000 123755 PM you wrote TZgt Hello GordonTZgt here is my example for Rule 4 TZgt And I have a question What are EP formations gtgtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegtgta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hi TradersZone Good use of the warning linesalso the EP material is part of lesson 4 Rather than go backthrough the files to see when (or if) it was sent Im sending it along with this reply Glad youbrought it up Best RegardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Tuesday May 04 2000208 PM Dr Andrews used a fairly common price chart formation that he found useful at probable P5market tops and bottoms The formation generally called a wedge or pennant by chartists isreferred to in Dr Andrews trading course as the Expanding Pivot (EP) One of the few chartformations used in the course he regarded it as among the most dependable indications that amarket top was forming Closely related to the EP is his Inverted Expanding Pivot (IEP) which henoted could often be observed at market bottoms Both are regarded as intermediate and long-term reversal indicators Dr Andrews found that both formations were most reliable when they occurred after a sharprapid price move coinciding with the formation of a probable P5 He said it wasnt unusual for theformation to take several weeks to complete and that conservative traders could best avoid thewhipsaw associated with congestion patterns by trading only in the direction of the probable price

break out of the EP or IEP formation The attached charts illustrate these formations Please look over your own charts for an example ofthe EP and IEP and send me a copy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 232127

Hello Gordon Thank you for the lesson with the EP material I couldnt find it in any previous emailHere is my example for Rule 7 RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Rule 4Date Samstag 6 Mai 2000 080827

Wednesday May 05 2000 112127 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt Thank you for the lesson with the EP materialTZgt I couldnt find it in any previous emailTZgt Here is my example for Rule 7

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hi TradersZone

Glad you mentioned it earlierexcept for the EP IEP and hissideways channel Dr Andrews didnt have much to say about chartpatterns and formations These are good ones to use though

Your study of the penetration rule was good Later

Best Regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Wednesday May 05 2000801 PM

Page 55: Pitchfork primer

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Freitag 24 Maumlrz 2000 205235

Hello Gordon here is my example for the 5 circle sideways count RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Lesson 5Date Montag 27 Maumlrz 2000 060731

At 32400 85200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my example for the 5 circle sideways countgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt gt Hi TradersZone Good example of the 5th circle tendency to predict the direction of a sideways breakout Any luckfinding a chart showing the P3 to sideways rule Im sending the first part of the next lesson This trendline method is a useful tool with all of DrAndrews course lines He used it all the time but especially when looking for confirmation of othercourse method trading signals Regards Gordon The Course Trendline__________________________________________________________ Next well discuss the trendline Seasoned traders agree that the trendline is one of their mostimportant tools No matter what kind of trading program or technique they use the trendline on achart is a must But one of the biggest mistakes made by amateurs and professionals alike isinconsistently drawing or defining the trendline Dr Andrews trendline procedure is simpleconsistent and accurate It works extremely well with the pivot count and with the pitchfork For an uptrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the lowest low up and to thehighest minor low point preceding the highest high The line must not pass through prices inbetween the two low points Extend the line(Attached chart of Brightpoint) For a downtrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the highest high point to thelowest minor high point preceding the lowest low so that it does not pass through prices inbetween the two high points Extend the line (Brightpoint chart) Thats all theres to it Its simple consistent and it works well with other Andrews lines It also

helps eliminate personal bias and haphazard analysis Practice drawing these trendlines on your own charts Send me any questions you might have andthen e-mail a chart of your choosing which shows at least two uptrend and two downtrend linesthat youve drawn_______________________________________________________________________

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Lesson 5Date Dienstag 28 Maumlrz 2000 120224

Hello Gordon here is my chart with trendlinesWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going above the trendline again should I draw a new trendline anddelete the old one Attached is another chart with the P3 to sideways rule I finally found an example for it RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Price failure techniqueDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081412

At 32800 120200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my chart with trendlinesgtWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going abovegtthe trendline again should I draw a new trendline and delete the oldgtone Hi TradersZone Take a look at the chart Im returningI added some lines for you to considerWith the course trendline once its broken a new one should be started Theres a technique thatties in with this coming up soon Meanwhile heres an important technique to work on It deals with those times when prices dontreach the ML Regards Gordon Dr Andrews Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P ofreversaland the ML the probability is that this price reversal will go further thanitdid on its approach toward the ML (Extract of original course material) A price failure very often indicates a sizeable reversal will take placeThepitchforks drawn on the chart of Home Depot illustrate the concept of pricefailure Dr Andrews routinely drew a new pitchfork on his chart after a newsignificant pivot had formed He knew that prices had a high probability ofreaching the new ML before stalling out or reversing If prices reversedbeforereaching the ML thereby forming a new pivot he termed it a price failureTheunderlying idea here is that Dr Andrews fully anticipated his median linewouldact as a price magnet To conclude that a price reversal resulted in a price failure Dr Andrewsused

these primary signalsa subsequent price penetration of a short-termmulti-pivotline andor a return of prices to and penetration of the parallel lineformed atpivot 3 of the pitchfork (The circles on the Home Depot chart denote theparallelline penetration signal To avoid clutter the mpl lines were not drawn) One possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart of ConsecoIncLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me a copy

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject ChartDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081800Attachments image002png

Hi TradersZone Forgot the chart Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Price failure techniqueDate Samstag 1 April 2000 201000

gtOne possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart ofgtConseco IncgtLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me agtcopy Hi Gordon here are my charts with price failures RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Mittwoch 5 April 2000 235624

Hi TradersZone Good price failure examples you sentany comments or questions about it Heres the next partanother old standby Dr Andrews kept handy Regards Gordon In this segment youll learn how to use the Fan line Technique To draw the fan lines youll apply the coursetrendline method which was introduced in an earlier lesson It might be well to emphasize that the practicalapplication of the course trendline method requires practice and experience both of which will serve youwell in this technique Dr Andrews used fan lines as an adjunct to his pitchfork sideways channel andactionreaction methods In the fan line study three trendlines are drawn from the original reversal pivot of the price correction understudy typically a P0 or a P5 Youll notice on the charts included with this study that each fan line is at aflatter angle than its predecessor When the third fan line is broken the rule is that the correction has endedand a new trend is under way Try this technique on some of your own charts and then please send me asample

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Donnerstag 6 April 2000 234315

Hi Gordon No I dont have any specific question about the price failure technique I guess the next likely target after a price failure wouldbe the warning line I have attached two charts with fan linesIs it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the third fan line is broken RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Next segmentDate Freitag 7 April 2000 003312

Hello TradersZone

Tuesday April 06 2000 114315 AM you wrote

TZgt Hi Gordon

TZgt No I dont have any specific question about the price failureTZgt technique I guess the next likely target after a price failureTZgt would be the warning line

TZgt I have attached two charts with fan linesTZgt Is it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the thirdTZgt fan line is broken

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Thats right the warning line is the next price target Additionalwarning lines can be drawn if needed but usually one will do it Ifprices go through the first warning line another can be drawn butmost likely a new pitchfork could be drawn instead which would bepreferable Helps stay current with recently formed pivots

When prices break through the third fan line a buy or sell signal isgiven Not sure what you mean by fourth target fan line Im a littledense today

Your chart work was goodthis is another handy tool for spotting thehigh probability of a price reversal or trend change

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject The Gap TradeDate Freitag 7 April 2000 004858

Hello TradersZone This trading signal doesnt show up very often but past observations have shown that its well worth watching for Dr Andrews placed a lot of emphasis on the importance of price gaps something many traders overlook This is one of his gap uses Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom The Gap Trading Technique Price gaps can be a dilemma for many traders The general rule denoting market strength or weakness after ahigh volume gap often comes up short after the initial reaction is over Many gappers simply run out ofsteam A high volume gap in itself seems to offer precious little evidence that a profitable move is about toget under way Dr Andrews used price gaps somewhat differently than others He counted a gap as 2 pivots Youll see howthat works in the following technique which uses a gap to arrive at a price level for a buy or sell order Using short-term daily price pivots label the pivot immediately preceding the gap as p0 Count the gap as 2pivots labeling it p1 amp p2 After p3 has formed and prices reverse towards a short-term p4 draw a horizontalline 2 price tics or more (individual preference)to the right of p3 Enter the market only if prices reach orpenetrate that line within a few days after reversing from p4 Please look over your own charts to see if you can find places where the gap trade technique could have beenused Send me a sample when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 001925

Hello Gordon this is my chart with a gap trade RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 065538

Hello TradersZone Thursday April 08 2000 121925 PM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt this is my chart with a gap trade TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Good examplethe gap trade technique shines when an issue in at or near a P5 Similar to the one on thechart you sent Heres another trading signal tool Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Dr Andrews used several techniques which helped him determine whether a P5 was near at hand Youllrecall that he observed most price moves ended or had a significant reversal at a P5 This technique uses alternate closing prices after a P4 has been formed As with many of his studies thenumber 5 is used The chart accompanying this segment shows that there were 5 alternate closes to thedownside after P4 was put in Dr Andrews noted that whenever 5 or more alternate closes followed a P4 theprobabilities were high that a P5 was near at hand An added feature to this chart study is the sideways channel Notice how the 2nd target price and the 5thalternate close nearly coincide

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 12 April 2000 200730

Hello Gordon This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 13 April 2000 082418

Monday April 12 2000 80730 AM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hello TradersZone Good chart example of this Andrews toolanother of his very unusual observations that workmore often than not Heres the final part of this lesson Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom In this trendline method Dr Andrews once again used the number 5 as the basis for locating aprobable reversal area He found this technique to be especially useful whenever a clear orobvious pivot count didnt show up onthe price move under study Trendlines are drawn using the course trendline method When the 5th trendline is broken theprobability is high that the trend under study has ended A mini-median line pitchfork andorsliding parallel could be used for pricing a trading order The accompanying chart of Compaq Computer is an example of how the trendline study could beused The pivot count beginning at the October low is difficult to nail down There were severalsmall areas of congestion but no sizeable corrections while prices advanced The count wasunclear By following the price action using the course trendline technique however the traderwould have been alerted to the possibility of a change of trend when the 5th trendline was brokenin early February Try this technique on your own charts When youre ready please send me an example of yourstudy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 19 April 2000 124108

Hello Gordon this is my example with 5 trendlines RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[6] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 20 April 2000 012726

Monday April 19 2000 124108 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt this is my example with 5 trendlines

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Good example of the 5 TL technique Always reminds me of how the fairly simple tools often do a better job than manyof the sophisticated studies out there

That was the last part of lesson 5 Lesson 6 attached is made in one mailing Youll find Dr Andrews trading rules alongwith a wrap-up review which uses several of his rules You might have questions about some of the rules so feel free tosend them as they arise

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Dr Andrews had an abbreviated set of trading rules on several index cards that he carried around with him in his shirtpocket He said every trading day turned up something new on his charts and by having his rules in his pocket he wasreminded of the need for a methodical approach to his analysis Quite a comment coming from the man who wrote therule book

In this the final lesson of the course Dr Andrews original trading rules and observations are presented Lets work witha few of them at this point

Using charts of issues you follow please send me an example that illustrates your interpretation of each of the followingrules

Rule 4 Anticipating major Ps

Rule 7 Penetration rule

Rule 8 Price failure rule

Rule 11 1-ML23 AR Centerline

Rule 12 Sliding Parallel rule

Rule 15 Mini-median line parallel to buy or sell

Feel free to include any other course techniques you choose to apply but please include examples of the above as aminimum Use more than one technique on a chart if your analysis supports it Send as many charts as you like alongwith your questionscomments

Lesson 6 - Dr Andrews Trading Rules

This lesson covers course rules and significant observations as taught by Dr Andrews in his original trading course Therules are those that he used in his own trading and are provided to serve as a checklist for use with the course tradingmethods youve learned

Rule 1 Where prices are always headed Rule You course members are among the fortunate few to be able to draw astraight line and know that prices are headed toward that ML Very few investors have ever applied this ML principle ofstatistics to price fluctuations and weve never seen this in any books on investment You are among the very few who

know that prices are always headed toward the newest ML

Rule 2 The Rule of coming opposites applies all through life In the bible we find Blessed at they that mourn for theyshall be comforted As investors we know that any losses can be recovered by using course methods

Rule 3 Turn your mind about or Rethink for all good is at hand We should mentally prepare ourselves for thecoming reversal in prices and other affairs Heres one way for example that you course members who know the MLrules can use When prices are skyrocketing upward we do this preparation by thinking If prices pivoted here today atthis price Id draw a new ML bisecting the distance between todays price and the price from which the rise started Andwe know now that if this is a Major Pivot prices will fall rapidly to this new ML Profits from such drops are big and quick

Rule 4 Rule for anticipating major Ps If during congestion or after a rally or decline you can count four previous Psthe fifth one is highly probable to be the one from which a new trend starts

Rule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can make a quick big profit is to watch for the EPformations

Rule 6 The other reversal rule is that prices tend to reverse at or near any ML as well as at any extension of each MLAnd also at any MLH or extensions of MLH

Rule 7 The Penetration Rule is that whenever prices gap past or plunge through any ML there is a high probability thatthey will quickly return to it temporarily and then resume the trend they had before they gapped or plunged through

Rule 8 Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P of reversal and the MLthe probability is that this price reversal will go further than it did on its approach toward the ML

Rule 9 The price failure rule is negated when the next price trend is also a failure in reaching the ML This is almostinvariably a signal of a big fast move in the direction indicated by this last space Rule 10 When alternate median lines of comparable length slope in the same direction the trend is firm and rapidprice changes take place

Rule 11 When 1-ML23 is exactly reached at P4 it can be used as a highly reliable centerline for the AR method

Rule 12 Frequently after crossing a lower MLH prices continue to rise along the MLH Since the crossing of the MLHsignals a further drop is likely use a sliding parallel along the bottom of the most recent crossing If prices drop past thatsliding parallel line a sell signal is generated

Rule 13 MLs between P2 and P3 can start from a nearby or a remote P1 since prices tend to reverse at each of theseMLs Try several such P2-P3 MLs to discover the best fit

Rule 14 The distance of each MLH from its ML is the distance of the next warning line Use these warning lineswhenever a SH has signalled a buy or sell

Rule 15 Use the MMLH as a buy or sell signal when you expect a reversal because of a P5 Also when prices are at aWL ML extension line or where course lines converge or intersect

Rule 16 Converging lines that meet prices have shown the highest probability of a trend reversal

Rule 17 Two to four days is usually the maximum between P2 and P3 for a MML P1 can be a day or so back from P2and 3

Rule 18 The most reliable ActionReaction centerlines seem to be MPL 2P line 2 Gap line peak to low or low to peak

Rule 19 When prices pass through R lines look for a pull back and then a continuing move in the direction of the passthrough

Rule 20 Use gaps as Action lines from the centerline

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 003755

Hello Gordonhere is my example for Rule 4 And I have a question What are EP formations gtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 021242

Tuesday May 04 2000 123755 PM you wrote TZgt Hello GordonTZgt here is my example for Rule 4 TZgt And I have a question What are EP formations gtgtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegtgta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hi TradersZone Good use of the warning linesalso the EP material is part of lesson 4 Rather than go backthrough the files to see when (or if) it was sent Im sending it along with this reply Glad youbrought it up Best RegardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Tuesday May 04 2000208 PM Dr Andrews used a fairly common price chart formation that he found useful at probable P5market tops and bottoms The formation generally called a wedge or pennant by chartists isreferred to in Dr Andrews trading course as the Expanding Pivot (EP) One of the few chartformations used in the course he regarded it as among the most dependable indications that amarket top was forming Closely related to the EP is his Inverted Expanding Pivot (IEP) which henoted could often be observed at market bottoms Both are regarded as intermediate and long-term reversal indicators Dr Andrews found that both formations were most reliable when they occurred after a sharprapid price move coinciding with the formation of a probable P5 He said it wasnt unusual for theformation to take several weeks to complete and that conservative traders could best avoid thewhipsaw associated with congestion patterns by trading only in the direction of the probable price

break out of the EP or IEP formation The attached charts illustrate these formations Please look over your own charts for an example ofthe EP and IEP and send me a copy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 232127

Hello Gordon Thank you for the lesson with the EP material I couldnt find it in any previous emailHere is my example for Rule 7 RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Rule 4Date Samstag 6 Mai 2000 080827

Wednesday May 05 2000 112127 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt Thank you for the lesson with the EP materialTZgt I couldnt find it in any previous emailTZgt Here is my example for Rule 7

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hi TradersZone

Glad you mentioned it earlierexcept for the EP IEP and hissideways channel Dr Andrews didnt have much to say about chartpatterns and formations These are good ones to use though

Your study of the penetration rule was good Later

Best Regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Wednesday May 05 2000801 PM

Page 56: Pitchfork primer

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Lesson 5Date Montag 27 Maumlrz 2000 060731

At 32400 85200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my example for the 5 circle sideways countgt gtRegardsgtTradersZonegt gt Hi TradersZone Good example of the 5th circle tendency to predict the direction of a sideways breakout Any luckfinding a chart showing the P3 to sideways rule Im sending the first part of the next lesson This trendline method is a useful tool with all of DrAndrews course lines He used it all the time but especially when looking for confirmation of othercourse method trading signals Regards Gordon The Course Trendline__________________________________________________________ Next well discuss the trendline Seasoned traders agree that the trendline is one of their mostimportant tools No matter what kind of trading program or technique they use the trendline on achart is a must But one of the biggest mistakes made by amateurs and professionals alike isinconsistently drawing or defining the trendline Dr Andrews trendline procedure is simpleconsistent and accurate It works extremely well with the pivot count and with the pitchfork For an uptrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the lowest low up and to thehighest minor low point preceding the highest high The line must not pass through prices inbetween the two low points Extend the line(Attached chart of Brightpoint) For a downtrend within the period of consideration draw a line from the highest high point to thelowest minor high point preceding the lowest low so that it does not pass through prices inbetween the two high points Extend the line (Brightpoint chart) Thats all theres to it Its simple consistent and it works well with other Andrews lines It also

helps eliminate personal bias and haphazard analysis Practice drawing these trendlines on your own charts Send me any questions you might have andthen e-mail a chart of your choosing which shows at least two uptrend and two downtrend linesthat youve drawn_______________________________________________________________________

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Lesson 5Date Dienstag 28 Maumlrz 2000 120224

Hello Gordon here is my chart with trendlinesWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going above the trendline again should I draw a new trendline anddelete the old one Attached is another chart with the P3 to sideways rule I finally found an example for it RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Price failure techniqueDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081412

At 32800 120200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my chart with trendlinesgtWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going abovegtthe trendline again should I draw a new trendline and delete the oldgtone Hi TradersZone Take a look at the chart Im returningI added some lines for you to considerWith the course trendline once its broken a new one should be started Theres a technique thatties in with this coming up soon Meanwhile heres an important technique to work on It deals with those times when prices dontreach the ML Regards Gordon Dr Andrews Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P ofreversaland the ML the probability is that this price reversal will go further thanitdid on its approach toward the ML (Extract of original course material) A price failure very often indicates a sizeable reversal will take placeThepitchforks drawn on the chart of Home Depot illustrate the concept of pricefailure Dr Andrews routinely drew a new pitchfork on his chart after a newsignificant pivot had formed He knew that prices had a high probability ofreaching the new ML before stalling out or reversing If prices reversedbeforereaching the ML thereby forming a new pivot he termed it a price failureTheunderlying idea here is that Dr Andrews fully anticipated his median linewouldact as a price magnet To conclude that a price reversal resulted in a price failure Dr Andrewsused

these primary signalsa subsequent price penetration of a short-termmulti-pivotline andor a return of prices to and penetration of the parallel lineformed atpivot 3 of the pitchfork (The circles on the Home Depot chart denote theparallelline penetration signal To avoid clutter the mpl lines were not drawn) One possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart of ConsecoIncLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me a copy

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject ChartDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081800Attachments image002png

Hi TradersZone Forgot the chart Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Price failure techniqueDate Samstag 1 April 2000 201000

gtOne possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart ofgtConseco IncgtLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me agtcopy Hi Gordon here are my charts with price failures RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Mittwoch 5 April 2000 235624

Hi TradersZone Good price failure examples you sentany comments or questions about it Heres the next partanother old standby Dr Andrews kept handy Regards Gordon In this segment youll learn how to use the Fan line Technique To draw the fan lines youll apply the coursetrendline method which was introduced in an earlier lesson It might be well to emphasize that the practicalapplication of the course trendline method requires practice and experience both of which will serve youwell in this technique Dr Andrews used fan lines as an adjunct to his pitchfork sideways channel andactionreaction methods In the fan line study three trendlines are drawn from the original reversal pivot of the price correction understudy typically a P0 or a P5 Youll notice on the charts included with this study that each fan line is at aflatter angle than its predecessor When the third fan line is broken the rule is that the correction has endedand a new trend is under way Try this technique on some of your own charts and then please send me asample

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Donnerstag 6 April 2000 234315

Hi Gordon No I dont have any specific question about the price failure technique I guess the next likely target after a price failure wouldbe the warning line I have attached two charts with fan linesIs it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the third fan line is broken RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Next segmentDate Freitag 7 April 2000 003312

Hello TradersZone

Tuesday April 06 2000 114315 AM you wrote

TZgt Hi Gordon

TZgt No I dont have any specific question about the price failureTZgt technique I guess the next likely target after a price failureTZgt would be the warning line

TZgt I have attached two charts with fan linesTZgt Is it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the thirdTZgt fan line is broken

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Thats right the warning line is the next price target Additionalwarning lines can be drawn if needed but usually one will do it Ifprices go through the first warning line another can be drawn butmost likely a new pitchfork could be drawn instead which would bepreferable Helps stay current with recently formed pivots

When prices break through the third fan line a buy or sell signal isgiven Not sure what you mean by fourth target fan line Im a littledense today

Your chart work was goodthis is another handy tool for spotting thehigh probability of a price reversal or trend change

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject The Gap TradeDate Freitag 7 April 2000 004858

Hello TradersZone This trading signal doesnt show up very often but past observations have shown that its well worth watching for Dr Andrews placed a lot of emphasis on the importance of price gaps something many traders overlook This is one of his gap uses Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom The Gap Trading Technique Price gaps can be a dilemma for many traders The general rule denoting market strength or weakness after ahigh volume gap often comes up short after the initial reaction is over Many gappers simply run out ofsteam A high volume gap in itself seems to offer precious little evidence that a profitable move is about toget under way Dr Andrews used price gaps somewhat differently than others He counted a gap as 2 pivots Youll see howthat works in the following technique which uses a gap to arrive at a price level for a buy or sell order Using short-term daily price pivots label the pivot immediately preceding the gap as p0 Count the gap as 2pivots labeling it p1 amp p2 After p3 has formed and prices reverse towards a short-term p4 draw a horizontalline 2 price tics or more (individual preference)to the right of p3 Enter the market only if prices reach orpenetrate that line within a few days after reversing from p4 Please look over your own charts to see if you can find places where the gap trade technique could have beenused Send me a sample when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 001925

Hello Gordon this is my chart with a gap trade RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 065538

Hello TradersZone Thursday April 08 2000 121925 PM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt this is my chart with a gap trade TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Good examplethe gap trade technique shines when an issue in at or near a P5 Similar to the one on thechart you sent Heres another trading signal tool Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Dr Andrews used several techniques which helped him determine whether a P5 was near at hand Youllrecall that he observed most price moves ended or had a significant reversal at a P5 This technique uses alternate closing prices after a P4 has been formed As with many of his studies thenumber 5 is used The chart accompanying this segment shows that there were 5 alternate closes to thedownside after P4 was put in Dr Andrews noted that whenever 5 or more alternate closes followed a P4 theprobabilities were high that a P5 was near at hand An added feature to this chart study is the sideways channel Notice how the 2nd target price and the 5thalternate close nearly coincide

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 12 April 2000 200730

Hello Gordon This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 13 April 2000 082418

Monday April 12 2000 80730 AM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hello TradersZone Good chart example of this Andrews toolanother of his very unusual observations that workmore often than not Heres the final part of this lesson Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom In this trendline method Dr Andrews once again used the number 5 as the basis for locating aprobable reversal area He found this technique to be especially useful whenever a clear orobvious pivot count didnt show up onthe price move under study Trendlines are drawn using the course trendline method When the 5th trendline is broken theprobability is high that the trend under study has ended A mini-median line pitchfork andorsliding parallel could be used for pricing a trading order The accompanying chart of Compaq Computer is an example of how the trendline study could beused The pivot count beginning at the October low is difficult to nail down There were severalsmall areas of congestion but no sizeable corrections while prices advanced The count wasunclear By following the price action using the course trendline technique however the traderwould have been alerted to the possibility of a change of trend when the 5th trendline was brokenin early February Try this technique on your own charts When youre ready please send me an example of yourstudy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 19 April 2000 124108

Hello Gordon this is my example with 5 trendlines RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[6] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 20 April 2000 012726

Monday April 19 2000 124108 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt this is my example with 5 trendlines

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Good example of the 5 TL technique Always reminds me of how the fairly simple tools often do a better job than manyof the sophisticated studies out there

That was the last part of lesson 5 Lesson 6 attached is made in one mailing Youll find Dr Andrews trading rules alongwith a wrap-up review which uses several of his rules You might have questions about some of the rules so feel free tosend them as they arise

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Dr Andrews had an abbreviated set of trading rules on several index cards that he carried around with him in his shirtpocket He said every trading day turned up something new on his charts and by having his rules in his pocket he wasreminded of the need for a methodical approach to his analysis Quite a comment coming from the man who wrote therule book

In this the final lesson of the course Dr Andrews original trading rules and observations are presented Lets work witha few of them at this point

Using charts of issues you follow please send me an example that illustrates your interpretation of each of the followingrules

Rule 4 Anticipating major Ps

Rule 7 Penetration rule

Rule 8 Price failure rule

Rule 11 1-ML23 AR Centerline

Rule 12 Sliding Parallel rule

Rule 15 Mini-median line parallel to buy or sell

Feel free to include any other course techniques you choose to apply but please include examples of the above as aminimum Use more than one technique on a chart if your analysis supports it Send as many charts as you like alongwith your questionscomments

Lesson 6 - Dr Andrews Trading Rules

This lesson covers course rules and significant observations as taught by Dr Andrews in his original trading course Therules are those that he used in his own trading and are provided to serve as a checklist for use with the course tradingmethods youve learned

Rule 1 Where prices are always headed Rule You course members are among the fortunate few to be able to draw astraight line and know that prices are headed toward that ML Very few investors have ever applied this ML principle ofstatistics to price fluctuations and weve never seen this in any books on investment You are among the very few who

know that prices are always headed toward the newest ML

Rule 2 The Rule of coming opposites applies all through life In the bible we find Blessed at they that mourn for theyshall be comforted As investors we know that any losses can be recovered by using course methods

Rule 3 Turn your mind about or Rethink for all good is at hand We should mentally prepare ourselves for thecoming reversal in prices and other affairs Heres one way for example that you course members who know the MLrules can use When prices are skyrocketing upward we do this preparation by thinking If prices pivoted here today atthis price Id draw a new ML bisecting the distance between todays price and the price from which the rise started Andwe know now that if this is a Major Pivot prices will fall rapidly to this new ML Profits from such drops are big and quick

Rule 4 Rule for anticipating major Ps If during congestion or after a rally or decline you can count four previous Psthe fifth one is highly probable to be the one from which a new trend starts

Rule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can make a quick big profit is to watch for the EPformations

Rule 6 The other reversal rule is that prices tend to reverse at or near any ML as well as at any extension of each MLAnd also at any MLH or extensions of MLH

Rule 7 The Penetration Rule is that whenever prices gap past or plunge through any ML there is a high probability thatthey will quickly return to it temporarily and then resume the trend they had before they gapped or plunged through

Rule 8 Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P of reversal and the MLthe probability is that this price reversal will go further than it did on its approach toward the ML

Rule 9 The price failure rule is negated when the next price trend is also a failure in reaching the ML This is almostinvariably a signal of a big fast move in the direction indicated by this last space Rule 10 When alternate median lines of comparable length slope in the same direction the trend is firm and rapidprice changes take place

Rule 11 When 1-ML23 is exactly reached at P4 it can be used as a highly reliable centerline for the AR method

Rule 12 Frequently after crossing a lower MLH prices continue to rise along the MLH Since the crossing of the MLHsignals a further drop is likely use a sliding parallel along the bottom of the most recent crossing If prices drop past thatsliding parallel line a sell signal is generated

Rule 13 MLs between P2 and P3 can start from a nearby or a remote P1 since prices tend to reverse at each of theseMLs Try several such P2-P3 MLs to discover the best fit

Rule 14 The distance of each MLH from its ML is the distance of the next warning line Use these warning lineswhenever a SH has signalled a buy or sell

Rule 15 Use the MMLH as a buy or sell signal when you expect a reversal because of a P5 Also when prices are at aWL ML extension line or where course lines converge or intersect

Rule 16 Converging lines that meet prices have shown the highest probability of a trend reversal

Rule 17 Two to four days is usually the maximum between P2 and P3 for a MML P1 can be a day or so back from P2and 3

Rule 18 The most reliable ActionReaction centerlines seem to be MPL 2P line 2 Gap line peak to low or low to peak

Rule 19 When prices pass through R lines look for a pull back and then a continuing move in the direction of the passthrough

Rule 20 Use gaps as Action lines from the centerline

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 003755

Hello Gordonhere is my example for Rule 4 And I have a question What are EP formations gtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 021242

Tuesday May 04 2000 123755 PM you wrote TZgt Hello GordonTZgt here is my example for Rule 4 TZgt And I have a question What are EP formations gtgtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegtgta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hi TradersZone Good use of the warning linesalso the EP material is part of lesson 4 Rather than go backthrough the files to see when (or if) it was sent Im sending it along with this reply Glad youbrought it up Best RegardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Tuesday May 04 2000208 PM Dr Andrews used a fairly common price chart formation that he found useful at probable P5market tops and bottoms The formation generally called a wedge or pennant by chartists isreferred to in Dr Andrews trading course as the Expanding Pivot (EP) One of the few chartformations used in the course he regarded it as among the most dependable indications that amarket top was forming Closely related to the EP is his Inverted Expanding Pivot (IEP) which henoted could often be observed at market bottoms Both are regarded as intermediate and long-term reversal indicators Dr Andrews found that both formations were most reliable when they occurred after a sharprapid price move coinciding with the formation of a probable P5 He said it wasnt unusual for theformation to take several weeks to complete and that conservative traders could best avoid thewhipsaw associated with congestion patterns by trading only in the direction of the probable price

break out of the EP or IEP formation The attached charts illustrate these formations Please look over your own charts for an example ofthe EP and IEP and send me a copy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 232127

Hello Gordon Thank you for the lesson with the EP material I couldnt find it in any previous emailHere is my example for Rule 7 RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Rule 4Date Samstag 6 Mai 2000 080827

Wednesday May 05 2000 112127 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt Thank you for the lesson with the EP materialTZgt I couldnt find it in any previous emailTZgt Here is my example for Rule 7

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hi TradersZone

Glad you mentioned it earlierexcept for the EP IEP and hissideways channel Dr Andrews didnt have much to say about chartpatterns and formations These are good ones to use though

Your study of the penetration rule was good Later

Best Regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Wednesday May 05 2000801 PM

Page 57: Pitchfork primer

helps eliminate personal bias and haphazard analysis Practice drawing these trendlines on your own charts Send me any questions you might have andthen e-mail a chart of your choosing which shows at least two uptrend and two downtrend linesthat youve drawn_______________________________________________________________________

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Lesson 5Date Dienstag 28 Maumlrz 2000 120224

Hello Gordon here is my chart with trendlinesWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going above the trendline again should I draw a new trendline anddelete the old one Attached is another chart with the P3 to sideways rule I finally found an example for it RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Price failure techniqueDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081412

At 32800 120200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my chart with trendlinesgtWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going abovegtthe trendline again should I draw a new trendline and delete the oldgtone Hi TradersZone Take a look at the chart Im returningI added some lines for you to considerWith the course trendline once its broken a new one should be started Theres a technique thatties in with this coming up soon Meanwhile heres an important technique to work on It deals with those times when prices dontreach the ML Regards Gordon Dr Andrews Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P ofreversaland the ML the probability is that this price reversal will go further thanitdid on its approach toward the ML (Extract of original course material) A price failure very often indicates a sizeable reversal will take placeThepitchforks drawn on the chart of Home Depot illustrate the concept of pricefailure Dr Andrews routinely drew a new pitchfork on his chart after a newsignificant pivot had formed He knew that prices had a high probability ofreaching the new ML before stalling out or reversing If prices reversedbeforereaching the ML thereby forming a new pivot he termed it a price failureTheunderlying idea here is that Dr Andrews fully anticipated his median linewouldact as a price magnet To conclude that a price reversal resulted in a price failure Dr Andrewsused

these primary signalsa subsequent price penetration of a short-termmulti-pivotline andor a return of prices to and penetration of the parallel lineformed atpivot 3 of the pitchfork (The circles on the Home Depot chart denote theparallelline penetration signal To avoid clutter the mpl lines were not drawn) One possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart of ConsecoIncLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me a copy

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject ChartDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081800Attachments image002png

Hi TradersZone Forgot the chart Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Price failure techniqueDate Samstag 1 April 2000 201000

gtOne possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart ofgtConseco IncgtLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me agtcopy Hi Gordon here are my charts with price failures RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Mittwoch 5 April 2000 235624

Hi TradersZone Good price failure examples you sentany comments or questions about it Heres the next partanother old standby Dr Andrews kept handy Regards Gordon In this segment youll learn how to use the Fan line Technique To draw the fan lines youll apply the coursetrendline method which was introduced in an earlier lesson It might be well to emphasize that the practicalapplication of the course trendline method requires practice and experience both of which will serve youwell in this technique Dr Andrews used fan lines as an adjunct to his pitchfork sideways channel andactionreaction methods In the fan line study three trendlines are drawn from the original reversal pivot of the price correction understudy typically a P0 or a P5 Youll notice on the charts included with this study that each fan line is at aflatter angle than its predecessor When the third fan line is broken the rule is that the correction has endedand a new trend is under way Try this technique on some of your own charts and then please send me asample

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Donnerstag 6 April 2000 234315

Hi Gordon No I dont have any specific question about the price failure technique I guess the next likely target after a price failure wouldbe the warning line I have attached two charts with fan linesIs it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the third fan line is broken RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Next segmentDate Freitag 7 April 2000 003312

Hello TradersZone

Tuesday April 06 2000 114315 AM you wrote

TZgt Hi Gordon

TZgt No I dont have any specific question about the price failureTZgt technique I guess the next likely target after a price failureTZgt would be the warning line

TZgt I have attached two charts with fan linesTZgt Is it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the thirdTZgt fan line is broken

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Thats right the warning line is the next price target Additionalwarning lines can be drawn if needed but usually one will do it Ifprices go through the first warning line another can be drawn butmost likely a new pitchfork could be drawn instead which would bepreferable Helps stay current with recently formed pivots

When prices break through the third fan line a buy or sell signal isgiven Not sure what you mean by fourth target fan line Im a littledense today

Your chart work was goodthis is another handy tool for spotting thehigh probability of a price reversal or trend change

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject The Gap TradeDate Freitag 7 April 2000 004858

Hello TradersZone This trading signal doesnt show up very often but past observations have shown that its well worth watching for Dr Andrews placed a lot of emphasis on the importance of price gaps something many traders overlook This is one of his gap uses Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom The Gap Trading Technique Price gaps can be a dilemma for many traders The general rule denoting market strength or weakness after ahigh volume gap often comes up short after the initial reaction is over Many gappers simply run out ofsteam A high volume gap in itself seems to offer precious little evidence that a profitable move is about toget under way Dr Andrews used price gaps somewhat differently than others He counted a gap as 2 pivots Youll see howthat works in the following technique which uses a gap to arrive at a price level for a buy or sell order Using short-term daily price pivots label the pivot immediately preceding the gap as p0 Count the gap as 2pivots labeling it p1 amp p2 After p3 has formed and prices reverse towards a short-term p4 draw a horizontalline 2 price tics or more (individual preference)to the right of p3 Enter the market only if prices reach orpenetrate that line within a few days after reversing from p4 Please look over your own charts to see if you can find places where the gap trade technique could have beenused Send me a sample when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 001925

Hello Gordon this is my chart with a gap trade RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 065538

Hello TradersZone Thursday April 08 2000 121925 PM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt this is my chart with a gap trade TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Good examplethe gap trade technique shines when an issue in at or near a P5 Similar to the one on thechart you sent Heres another trading signal tool Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Dr Andrews used several techniques which helped him determine whether a P5 was near at hand Youllrecall that he observed most price moves ended or had a significant reversal at a P5 This technique uses alternate closing prices after a P4 has been formed As with many of his studies thenumber 5 is used The chart accompanying this segment shows that there were 5 alternate closes to thedownside after P4 was put in Dr Andrews noted that whenever 5 or more alternate closes followed a P4 theprobabilities were high that a P5 was near at hand An added feature to this chart study is the sideways channel Notice how the 2nd target price and the 5thalternate close nearly coincide

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 12 April 2000 200730

Hello Gordon This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 13 April 2000 082418

Monday April 12 2000 80730 AM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hello TradersZone Good chart example of this Andrews toolanother of his very unusual observations that workmore often than not Heres the final part of this lesson Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom In this trendline method Dr Andrews once again used the number 5 as the basis for locating aprobable reversal area He found this technique to be especially useful whenever a clear orobvious pivot count didnt show up onthe price move under study Trendlines are drawn using the course trendline method When the 5th trendline is broken theprobability is high that the trend under study has ended A mini-median line pitchfork andorsliding parallel could be used for pricing a trading order The accompanying chart of Compaq Computer is an example of how the trendline study could beused The pivot count beginning at the October low is difficult to nail down There were severalsmall areas of congestion but no sizeable corrections while prices advanced The count wasunclear By following the price action using the course trendline technique however the traderwould have been alerted to the possibility of a change of trend when the 5th trendline was brokenin early February Try this technique on your own charts When youre ready please send me an example of yourstudy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 19 April 2000 124108

Hello Gordon this is my example with 5 trendlines RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[6] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 20 April 2000 012726

Monday April 19 2000 124108 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt this is my example with 5 trendlines

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Good example of the 5 TL technique Always reminds me of how the fairly simple tools often do a better job than manyof the sophisticated studies out there

That was the last part of lesson 5 Lesson 6 attached is made in one mailing Youll find Dr Andrews trading rules alongwith a wrap-up review which uses several of his rules You might have questions about some of the rules so feel free tosend them as they arise

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Dr Andrews had an abbreviated set of trading rules on several index cards that he carried around with him in his shirtpocket He said every trading day turned up something new on his charts and by having his rules in his pocket he wasreminded of the need for a methodical approach to his analysis Quite a comment coming from the man who wrote therule book

In this the final lesson of the course Dr Andrews original trading rules and observations are presented Lets work witha few of them at this point

Using charts of issues you follow please send me an example that illustrates your interpretation of each of the followingrules

Rule 4 Anticipating major Ps

Rule 7 Penetration rule

Rule 8 Price failure rule

Rule 11 1-ML23 AR Centerline

Rule 12 Sliding Parallel rule

Rule 15 Mini-median line parallel to buy or sell

Feel free to include any other course techniques you choose to apply but please include examples of the above as aminimum Use more than one technique on a chart if your analysis supports it Send as many charts as you like alongwith your questionscomments

Lesson 6 - Dr Andrews Trading Rules

This lesson covers course rules and significant observations as taught by Dr Andrews in his original trading course Therules are those that he used in his own trading and are provided to serve as a checklist for use with the course tradingmethods youve learned

Rule 1 Where prices are always headed Rule You course members are among the fortunate few to be able to draw astraight line and know that prices are headed toward that ML Very few investors have ever applied this ML principle ofstatistics to price fluctuations and weve never seen this in any books on investment You are among the very few who

know that prices are always headed toward the newest ML

Rule 2 The Rule of coming opposites applies all through life In the bible we find Blessed at they that mourn for theyshall be comforted As investors we know that any losses can be recovered by using course methods

Rule 3 Turn your mind about or Rethink for all good is at hand We should mentally prepare ourselves for thecoming reversal in prices and other affairs Heres one way for example that you course members who know the MLrules can use When prices are skyrocketing upward we do this preparation by thinking If prices pivoted here today atthis price Id draw a new ML bisecting the distance between todays price and the price from which the rise started Andwe know now that if this is a Major Pivot prices will fall rapidly to this new ML Profits from such drops are big and quick

Rule 4 Rule for anticipating major Ps If during congestion or after a rally or decline you can count four previous Psthe fifth one is highly probable to be the one from which a new trend starts

Rule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can make a quick big profit is to watch for the EPformations

Rule 6 The other reversal rule is that prices tend to reverse at or near any ML as well as at any extension of each MLAnd also at any MLH or extensions of MLH

Rule 7 The Penetration Rule is that whenever prices gap past or plunge through any ML there is a high probability thatthey will quickly return to it temporarily and then resume the trend they had before they gapped or plunged through

Rule 8 Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P of reversal and the MLthe probability is that this price reversal will go further than it did on its approach toward the ML

Rule 9 The price failure rule is negated when the next price trend is also a failure in reaching the ML This is almostinvariably a signal of a big fast move in the direction indicated by this last space Rule 10 When alternate median lines of comparable length slope in the same direction the trend is firm and rapidprice changes take place

Rule 11 When 1-ML23 is exactly reached at P4 it can be used as a highly reliable centerline for the AR method

Rule 12 Frequently after crossing a lower MLH prices continue to rise along the MLH Since the crossing of the MLHsignals a further drop is likely use a sliding parallel along the bottom of the most recent crossing If prices drop past thatsliding parallel line a sell signal is generated

Rule 13 MLs between P2 and P3 can start from a nearby or a remote P1 since prices tend to reverse at each of theseMLs Try several such P2-P3 MLs to discover the best fit

Rule 14 The distance of each MLH from its ML is the distance of the next warning line Use these warning lineswhenever a SH has signalled a buy or sell

Rule 15 Use the MMLH as a buy or sell signal when you expect a reversal because of a P5 Also when prices are at aWL ML extension line or where course lines converge or intersect

Rule 16 Converging lines that meet prices have shown the highest probability of a trend reversal

Rule 17 Two to four days is usually the maximum between P2 and P3 for a MML P1 can be a day or so back from P2and 3

Rule 18 The most reliable ActionReaction centerlines seem to be MPL 2P line 2 Gap line peak to low or low to peak

Rule 19 When prices pass through R lines look for a pull back and then a continuing move in the direction of the passthrough

Rule 20 Use gaps as Action lines from the centerline

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 003755

Hello Gordonhere is my example for Rule 4 And I have a question What are EP formations gtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 021242

Tuesday May 04 2000 123755 PM you wrote TZgt Hello GordonTZgt here is my example for Rule 4 TZgt And I have a question What are EP formations gtgtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegtgta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hi TradersZone Good use of the warning linesalso the EP material is part of lesson 4 Rather than go backthrough the files to see when (or if) it was sent Im sending it along with this reply Glad youbrought it up Best RegardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Tuesday May 04 2000208 PM Dr Andrews used a fairly common price chart formation that he found useful at probable P5market tops and bottoms The formation generally called a wedge or pennant by chartists isreferred to in Dr Andrews trading course as the Expanding Pivot (EP) One of the few chartformations used in the course he regarded it as among the most dependable indications that amarket top was forming Closely related to the EP is his Inverted Expanding Pivot (IEP) which henoted could often be observed at market bottoms Both are regarded as intermediate and long-term reversal indicators Dr Andrews found that both formations were most reliable when they occurred after a sharprapid price move coinciding with the formation of a probable P5 He said it wasnt unusual for theformation to take several weeks to complete and that conservative traders could best avoid thewhipsaw associated with congestion patterns by trading only in the direction of the probable price

break out of the EP or IEP formation The attached charts illustrate these formations Please look over your own charts for an example ofthe EP and IEP and send me a copy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 232127

Hello Gordon Thank you for the lesson with the EP material I couldnt find it in any previous emailHere is my example for Rule 7 RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Rule 4Date Samstag 6 Mai 2000 080827

Wednesday May 05 2000 112127 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt Thank you for the lesson with the EP materialTZgt I couldnt find it in any previous emailTZgt Here is my example for Rule 7

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hi TradersZone

Glad you mentioned it earlierexcept for the EP IEP and hissideways channel Dr Andrews didnt have much to say about chartpatterns and formations These are good ones to use though

Your study of the penetration rule was good Later

Best Regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Wednesday May 05 2000801 PM

Page 58: Pitchfork primer

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Lesson 5Date Dienstag 28 Maumlrz 2000 120224

Hello Gordon here is my chart with trendlinesWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going above the trendline again should I draw a new trendline anddelete the old one Attached is another chart with the P3 to sideways rule I finally found an example for it RegardsTradersZone

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Price failure techniqueDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081412

At 32800 120200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my chart with trendlinesgtWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going abovegtthe trendline again should I draw a new trendline and delete the oldgtone Hi TradersZone Take a look at the chart Im returningI added some lines for you to considerWith the course trendline once its broken a new one should be started Theres a technique thatties in with this coming up soon Meanwhile heres an important technique to work on It deals with those times when prices dontreach the ML Regards Gordon Dr Andrews Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P ofreversaland the ML the probability is that this price reversal will go further thanitdid on its approach toward the ML (Extract of original course material) A price failure very often indicates a sizeable reversal will take placeThepitchforks drawn on the chart of Home Depot illustrate the concept of pricefailure Dr Andrews routinely drew a new pitchfork on his chart after a newsignificant pivot had formed He knew that prices had a high probability ofreaching the new ML before stalling out or reversing If prices reversedbeforereaching the ML thereby forming a new pivot he termed it a price failureTheunderlying idea here is that Dr Andrews fully anticipated his median linewouldact as a price magnet To conclude that a price reversal resulted in a price failure Dr Andrewsused

these primary signalsa subsequent price penetration of a short-termmulti-pivotline andor a return of prices to and penetration of the parallel lineformed atpivot 3 of the pitchfork (The circles on the Home Depot chart denote theparallelline penetration signal To avoid clutter the mpl lines were not drawn) One possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart of ConsecoIncLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me a copy

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject ChartDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081800Attachments image002png

Hi TradersZone Forgot the chart Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Price failure techniqueDate Samstag 1 April 2000 201000

gtOne possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart ofgtConseco IncgtLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me agtcopy Hi Gordon here are my charts with price failures RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Mittwoch 5 April 2000 235624

Hi TradersZone Good price failure examples you sentany comments or questions about it Heres the next partanother old standby Dr Andrews kept handy Regards Gordon In this segment youll learn how to use the Fan line Technique To draw the fan lines youll apply the coursetrendline method which was introduced in an earlier lesson It might be well to emphasize that the practicalapplication of the course trendline method requires practice and experience both of which will serve youwell in this technique Dr Andrews used fan lines as an adjunct to his pitchfork sideways channel andactionreaction methods In the fan line study three trendlines are drawn from the original reversal pivot of the price correction understudy typically a P0 or a P5 Youll notice on the charts included with this study that each fan line is at aflatter angle than its predecessor When the third fan line is broken the rule is that the correction has endedand a new trend is under way Try this technique on some of your own charts and then please send me asample

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Donnerstag 6 April 2000 234315

Hi Gordon No I dont have any specific question about the price failure technique I guess the next likely target after a price failure wouldbe the warning line I have attached two charts with fan linesIs it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the third fan line is broken RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Next segmentDate Freitag 7 April 2000 003312

Hello TradersZone

Tuesday April 06 2000 114315 AM you wrote

TZgt Hi Gordon

TZgt No I dont have any specific question about the price failureTZgt technique I guess the next likely target after a price failureTZgt would be the warning line

TZgt I have attached two charts with fan linesTZgt Is it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the thirdTZgt fan line is broken

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Thats right the warning line is the next price target Additionalwarning lines can be drawn if needed but usually one will do it Ifprices go through the first warning line another can be drawn butmost likely a new pitchfork could be drawn instead which would bepreferable Helps stay current with recently formed pivots

When prices break through the third fan line a buy or sell signal isgiven Not sure what you mean by fourth target fan line Im a littledense today

Your chart work was goodthis is another handy tool for spotting thehigh probability of a price reversal or trend change

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject The Gap TradeDate Freitag 7 April 2000 004858

Hello TradersZone This trading signal doesnt show up very often but past observations have shown that its well worth watching for Dr Andrews placed a lot of emphasis on the importance of price gaps something many traders overlook This is one of his gap uses Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom The Gap Trading Technique Price gaps can be a dilemma for many traders The general rule denoting market strength or weakness after ahigh volume gap often comes up short after the initial reaction is over Many gappers simply run out ofsteam A high volume gap in itself seems to offer precious little evidence that a profitable move is about toget under way Dr Andrews used price gaps somewhat differently than others He counted a gap as 2 pivots Youll see howthat works in the following technique which uses a gap to arrive at a price level for a buy or sell order Using short-term daily price pivots label the pivot immediately preceding the gap as p0 Count the gap as 2pivots labeling it p1 amp p2 After p3 has formed and prices reverse towards a short-term p4 draw a horizontalline 2 price tics or more (individual preference)to the right of p3 Enter the market only if prices reach orpenetrate that line within a few days after reversing from p4 Please look over your own charts to see if you can find places where the gap trade technique could have beenused Send me a sample when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 001925

Hello Gordon this is my chart with a gap trade RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 065538

Hello TradersZone Thursday April 08 2000 121925 PM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt this is my chart with a gap trade TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Good examplethe gap trade technique shines when an issue in at or near a P5 Similar to the one on thechart you sent Heres another trading signal tool Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Dr Andrews used several techniques which helped him determine whether a P5 was near at hand Youllrecall that he observed most price moves ended or had a significant reversal at a P5 This technique uses alternate closing prices after a P4 has been formed As with many of his studies thenumber 5 is used The chart accompanying this segment shows that there were 5 alternate closes to thedownside after P4 was put in Dr Andrews noted that whenever 5 or more alternate closes followed a P4 theprobabilities were high that a P5 was near at hand An added feature to this chart study is the sideways channel Notice how the 2nd target price and the 5thalternate close nearly coincide

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 12 April 2000 200730

Hello Gordon This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 13 April 2000 082418

Monday April 12 2000 80730 AM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hello TradersZone Good chart example of this Andrews toolanother of his very unusual observations that workmore often than not Heres the final part of this lesson Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom In this trendline method Dr Andrews once again used the number 5 as the basis for locating aprobable reversal area He found this technique to be especially useful whenever a clear orobvious pivot count didnt show up onthe price move under study Trendlines are drawn using the course trendline method When the 5th trendline is broken theprobability is high that the trend under study has ended A mini-median line pitchfork andorsliding parallel could be used for pricing a trading order The accompanying chart of Compaq Computer is an example of how the trendline study could beused The pivot count beginning at the October low is difficult to nail down There were severalsmall areas of congestion but no sizeable corrections while prices advanced The count wasunclear By following the price action using the course trendline technique however the traderwould have been alerted to the possibility of a change of trend when the 5th trendline was brokenin early February Try this technique on your own charts When youre ready please send me an example of yourstudy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 19 April 2000 124108

Hello Gordon this is my example with 5 trendlines RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[6] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 20 April 2000 012726

Monday April 19 2000 124108 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt this is my example with 5 trendlines

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Good example of the 5 TL technique Always reminds me of how the fairly simple tools often do a better job than manyof the sophisticated studies out there

That was the last part of lesson 5 Lesson 6 attached is made in one mailing Youll find Dr Andrews trading rules alongwith a wrap-up review which uses several of his rules You might have questions about some of the rules so feel free tosend them as they arise

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Dr Andrews had an abbreviated set of trading rules on several index cards that he carried around with him in his shirtpocket He said every trading day turned up something new on his charts and by having his rules in his pocket he wasreminded of the need for a methodical approach to his analysis Quite a comment coming from the man who wrote therule book

In this the final lesson of the course Dr Andrews original trading rules and observations are presented Lets work witha few of them at this point

Using charts of issues you follow please send me an example that illustrates your interpretation of each of the followingrules

Rule 4 Anticipating major Ps

Rule 7 Penetration rule

Rule 8 Price failure rule

Rule 11 1-ML23 AR Centerline

Rule 12 Sliding Parallel rule

Rule 15 Mini-median line parallel to buy or sell

Feel free to include any other course techniques you choose to apply but please include examples of the above as aminimum Use more than one technique on a chart if your analysis supports it Send as many charts as you like alongwith your questionscomments

Lesson 6 - Dr Andrews Trading Rules

This lesson covers course rules and significant observations as taught by Dr Andrews in his original trading course Therules are those that he used in his own trading and are provided to serve as a checklist for use with the course tradingmethods youve learned

Rule 1 Where prices are always headed Rule You course members are among the fortunate few to be able to draw astraight line and know that prices are headed toward that ML Very few investors have ever applied this ML principle ofstatistics to price fluctuations and weve never seen this in any books on investment You are among the very few who

know that prices are always headed toward the newest ML

Rule 2 The Rule of coming opposites applies all through life In the bible we find Blessed at they that mourn for theyshall be comforted As investors we know that any losses can be recovered by using course methods

Rule 3 Turn your mind about or Rethink for all good is at hand We should mentally prepare ourselves for thecoming reversal in prices and other affairs Heres one way for example that you course members who know the MLrules can use When prices are skyrocketing upward we do this preparation by thinking If prices pivoted here today atthis price Id draw a new ML bisecting the distance between todays price and the price from which the rise started Andwe know now that if this is a Major Pivot prices will fall rapidly to this new ML Profits from such drops are big and quick

Rule 4 Rule for anticipating major Ps If during congestion or after a rally or decline you can count four previous Psthe fifth one is highly probable to be the one from which a new trend starts

Rule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can make a quick big profit is to watch for the EPformations

Rule 6 The other reversal rule is that prices tend to reverse at or near any ML as well as at any extension of each MLAnd also at any MLH or extensions of MLH

Rule 7 The Penetration Rule is that whenever prices gap past or plunge through any ML there is a high probability thatthey will quickly return to it temporarily and then resume the trend they had before they gapped or plunged through

Rule 8 Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P of reversal and the MLthe probability is that this price reversal will go further than it did on its approach toward the ML

Rule 9 The price failure rule is negated when the next price trend is also a failure in reaching the ML This is almostinvariably a signal of a big fast move in the direction indicated by this last space Rule 10 When alternate median lines of comparable length slope in the same direction the trend is firm and rapidprice changes take place

Rule 11 When 1-ML23 is exactly reached at P4 it can be used as a highly reliable centerline for the AR method

Rule 12 Frequently after crossing a lower MLH prices continue to rise along the MLH Since the crossing of the MLHsignals a further drop is likely use a sliding parallel along the bottom of the most recent crossing If prices drop past thatsliding parallel line a sell signal is generated

Rule 13 MLs between P2 and P3 can start from a nearby or a remote P1 since prices tend to reverse at each of theseMLs Try several such P2-P3 MLs to discover the best fit

Rule 14 The distance of each MLH from its ML is the distance of the next warning line Use these warning lineswhenever a SH has signalled a buy or sell

Rule 15 Use the MMLH as a buy or sell signal when you expect a reversal because of a P5 Also when prices are at aWL ML extension line or where course lines converge or intersect

Rule 16 Converging lines that meet prices have shown the highest probability of a trend reversal

Rule 17 Two to four days is usually the maximum between P2 and P3 for a MML P1 can be a day or so back from P2and 3

Rule 18 The most reliable ActionReaction centerlines seem to be MPL 2P line 2 Gap line peak to low or low to peak

Rule 19 When prices pass through R lines look for a pull back and then a continuing move in the direction of the passthrough

Rule 20 Use gaps as Action lines from the centerline

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 003755

Hello Gordonhere is my example for Rule 4 And I have a question What are EP formations gtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 021242

Tuesday May 04 2000 123755 PM you wrote TZgt Hello GordonTZgt here is my example for Rule 4 TZgt And I have a question What are EP formations gtgtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegtgta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hi TradersZone Good use of the warning linesalso the EP material is part of lesson 4 Rather than go backthrough the files to see when (or if) it was sent Im sending it along with this reply Glad youbrought it up Best RegardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Tuesday May 04 2000208 PM Dr Andrews used a fairly common price chart formation that he found useful at probable P5market tops and bottoms The formation generally called a wedge or pennant by chartists isreferred to in Dr Andrews trading course as the Expanding Pivot (EP) One of the few chartformations used in the course he regarded it as among the most dependable indications that amarket top was forming Closely related to the EP is his Inverted Expanding Pivot (IEP) which henoted could often be observed at market bottoms Both are regarded as intermediate and long-term reversal indicators Dr Andrews found that both formations were most reliable when they occurred after a sharprapid price move coinciding with the formation of a probable P5 He said it wasnt unusual for theformation to take several weeks to complete and that conservative traders could best avoid thewhipsaw associated with congestion patterns by trading only in the direction of the probable price

break out of the EP or IEP formation The attached charts illustrate these formations Please look over your own charts for an example ofthe EP and IEP and send me a copy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 232127

Hello Gordon Thank you for the lesson with the EP material I couldnt find it in any previous emailHere is my example for Rule 7 RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Rule 4Date Samstag 6 Mai 2000 080827

Wednesday May 05 2000 112127 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt Thank you for the lesson with the EP materialTZgt I couldnt find it in any previous emailTZgt Here is my example for Rule 7

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hi TradersZone

Glad you mentioned it earlierexcept for the EP IEP and hissideways channel Dr Andrews didnt have much to say about chartpatterns and formations These are good ones to use though

Your study of the penetration rule was good Later

Best Regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Wednesday May 05 2000801 PM

Page 59: Pitchfork primer

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject Price failure techniqueDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081412

At 32800 120200 PM you wrotegtHello Gordongt gthere is my chart with trendlinesgtWhen a trendline is broken in an uptrend and the price is going abovegtthe trendline again should I draw a new trendline and delete the oldgtone Hi TradersZone Take a look at the chart Im returningI added some lines for you to considerWith the course trendline once its broken a new one should be started Theres a technique thatties in with this coming up soon Meanwhile heres an important technique to work on It deals with those times when prices dontreach the ML Regards Gordon Dr Andrews Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P ofreversaland the ML the probability is that this price reversal will go further thanitdid on its approach toward the ML (Extract of original course material) A price failure very often indicates a sizeable reversal will take placeThepitchforks drawn on the chart of Home Depot illustrate the concept of pricefailure Dr Andrews routinely drew a new pitchfork on his chart after a newsignificant pivot had formed He knew that prices had a high probability ofreaching the new ML before stalling out or reversing If prices reversedbeforereaching the ML thereby forming a new pivot he termed it a price failureTheunderlying idea here is that Dr Andrews fully anticipated his median linewouldact as a price magnet To conclude that a price reversal resulted in a price failure Dr Andrewsused

these primary signalsa subsequent price penetration of a short-termmulti-pivotline andor a return of prices to and penetration of the parallel lineformed atpivot 3 of the pitchfork (The circles on the Home Depot chart denote theparallelline penetration signal To avoid clutter the mpl lines were not drawn) One possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart of ConsecoIncLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me a copy

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject ChartDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081800Attachments image002png

Hi TradersZone Forgot the chart Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Price failure techniqueDate Samstag 1 April 2000 201000

gtOne possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart ofgtConseco IncgtLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me agtcopy Hi Gordon here are my charts with price failures RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Mittwoch 5 April 2000 235624

Hi TradersZone Good price failure examples you sentany comments or questions about it Heres the next partanother old standby Dr Andrews kept handy Regards Gordon In this segment youll learn how to use the Fan line Technique To draw the fan lines youll apply the coursetrendline method which was introduced in an earlier lesson It might be well to emphasize that the practicalapplication of the course trendline method requires practice and experience both of which will serve youwell in this technique Dr Andrews used fan lines as an adjunct to his pitchfork sideways channel andactionreaction methods In the fan line study three trendlines are drawn from the original reversal pivot of the price correction understudy typically a P0 or a P5 Youll notice on the charts included with this study that each fan line is at aflatter angle than its predecessor When the third fan line is broken the rule is that the correction has endedand a new trend is under way Try this technique on some of your own charts and then please send me asample

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Donnerstag 6 April 2000 234315

Hi Gordon No I dont have any specific question about the price failure technique I guess the next likely target after a price failure wouldbe the warning line I have attached two charts with fan linesIs it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the third fan line is broken RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Next segmentDate Freitag 7 April 2000 003312

Hello TradersZone

Tuesday April 06 2000 114315 AM you wrote

TZgt Hi Gordon

TZgt No I dont have any specific question about the price failureTZgt technique I guess the next likely target after a price failureTZgt would be the warning line

TZgt I have attached two charts with fan linesTZgt Is it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the thirdTZgt fan line is broken

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Thats right the warning line is the next price target Additionalwarning lines can be drawn if needed but usually one will do it Ifprices go through the first warning line another can be drawn butmost likely a new pitchfork could be drawn instead which would bepreferable Helps stay current with recently formed pivots

When prices break through the third fan line a buy or sell signal isgiven Not sure what you mean by fourth target fan line Im a littledense today

Your chart work was goodthis is another handy tool for spotting thehigh probability of a price reversal or trend change

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject The Gap TradeDate Freitag 7 April 2000 004858

Hello TradersZone This trading signal doesnt show up very often but past observations have shown that its well worth watching for Dr Andrews placed a lot of emphasis on the importance of price gaps something many traders overlook This is one of his gap uses Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom The Gap Trading Technique Price gaps can be a dilemma for many traders The general rule denoting market strength or weakness after ahigh volume gap often comes up short after the initial reaction is over Many gappers simply run out ofsteam A high volume gap in itself seems to offer precious little evidence that a profitable move is about toget under way Dr Andrews used price gaps somewhat differently than others He counted a gap as 2 pivots Youll see howthat works in the following technique which uses a gap to arrive at a price level for a buy or sell order Using short-term daily price pivots label the pivot immediately preceding the gap as p0 Count the gap as 2pivots labeling it p1 amp p2 After p3 has formed and prices reverse towards a short-term p4 draw a horizontalline 2 price tics or more (individual preference)to the right of p3 Enter the market only if prices reach orpenetrate that line within a few days after reversing from p4 Please look over your own charts to see if you can find places where the gap trade technique could have beenused Send me a sample when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 001925

Hello Gordon this is my chart with a gap trade RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 065538

Hello TradersZone Thursday April 08 2000 121925 PM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt this is my chart with a gap trade TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Good examplethe gap trade technique shines when an issue in at or near a P5 Similar to the one on thechart you sent Heres another trading signal tool Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Dr Andrews used several techniques which helped him determine whether a P5 was near at hand Youllrecall that he observed most price moves ended or had a significant reversal at a P5 This technique uses alternate closing prices after a P4 has been formed As with many of his studies thenumber 5 is used The chart accompanying this segment shows that there were 5 alternate closes to thedownside after P4 was put in Dr Andrews noted that whenever 5 or more alternate closes followed a P4 theprobabilities were high that a P5 was near at hand An added feature to this chart study is the sideways channel Notice how the 2nd target price and the 5thalternate close nearly coincide

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 12 April 2000 200730

Hello Gordon This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 13 April 2000 082418

Monday April 12 2000 80730 AM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hello TradersZone Good chart example of this Andrews toolanother of his very unusual observations that workmore often than not Heres the final part of this lesson Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom In this trendline method Dr Andrews once again used the number 5 as the basis for locating aprobable reversal area He found this technique to be especially useful whenever a clear orobvious pivot count didnt show up onthe price move under study Trendlines are drawn using the course trendline method When the 5th trendline is broken theprobability is high that the trend under study has ended A mini-median line pitchfork andorsliding parallel could be used for pricing a trading order The accompanying chart of Compaq Computer is an example of how the trendline study could beused The pivot count beginning at the October low is difficult to nail down There were severalsmall areas of congestion but no sizeable corrections while prices advanced The count wasunclear By following the price action using the course trendline technique however the traderwould have been alerted to the possibility of a change of trend when the 5th trendline was brokenin early February Try this technique on your own charts When youre ready please send me an example of yourstudy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 19 April 2000 124108

Hello Gordon this is my example with 5 trendlines RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[6] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 20 April 2000 012726

Monday April 19 2000 124108 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt this is my example with 5 trendlines

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Good example of the 5 TL technique Always reminds me of how the fairly simple tools often do a better job than manyof the sophisticated studies out there

That was the last part of lesson 5 Lesson 6 attached is made in one mailing Youll find Dr Andrews trading rules alongwith a wrap-up review which uses several of his rules You might have questions about some of the rules so feel free tosend them as they arise

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Dr Andrews had an abbreviated set of trading rules on several index cards that he carried around with him in his shirtpocket He said every trading day turned up something new on his charts and by having his rules in his pocket he wasreminded of the need for a methodical approach to his analysis Quite a comment coming from the man who wrote therule book

In this the final lesson of the course Dr Andrews original trading rules and observations are presented Lets work witha few of them at this point

Using charts of issues you follow please send me an example that illustrates your interpretation of each of the followingrules

Rule 4 Anticipating major Ps

Rule 7 Penetration rule

Rule 8 Price failure rule

Rule 11 1-ML23 AR Centerline

Rule 12 Sliding Parallel rule

Rule 15 Mini-median line parallel to buy or sell

Feel free to include any other course techniques you choose to apply but please include examples of the above as aminimum Use more than one technique on a chart if your analysis supports it Send as many charts as you like alongwith your questionscomments

Lesson 6 - Dr Andrews Trading Rules

This lesson covers course rules and significant observations as taught by Dr Andrews in his original trading course Therules are those that he used in his own trading and are provided to serve as a checklist for use with the course tradingmethods youve learned

Rule 1 Where prices are always headed Rule You course members are among the fortunate few to be able to draw astraight line and know that prices are headed toward that ML Very few investors have ever applied this ML principle ofstatistics to price fluctuations and weve never seen this in any books on investment You are among the very few who

know that prices are always headed toward the newest ML

Rule 2 The Rule of coming opposites applies all through life In the bible we find Blessed at they that mourn for theyshall be comforted As investors we know that any losses can be recovered by using course methods

Rule 3 Turn your mind about or Rethink for all good is at hand We should mentally prepare ourselves for thecoming reversal in prices and other affairs Heres one way for example that you course members who know the MLrules can use When prices are skyrocketing upward we do this preparation by thinking If prices pivoted here today atthis price Id draw a new ML bisecting the distance between todays price and the price from which the rise started Andwe know now that if this is a Major Pivot prices will fall rapidly to this new ML Profits from such drops are big and quick

Rule 4 Rule for anticipating major Ps If during congestion or after a rally or decline you can count four previous Psthe fifth one is highly probable to be the one from which a new trend starts

Rule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can make a quick big profit is to watch for the EPformations

Rule 6 The other reversal rule is that prices tend to reverse at or near any ML as well as at any extension of each MLAnd also at any MLH or extensions of MLH

Rule 7 The Penetration Rule is that whenever prices gap past or plunge through any ML there is a high probability thatthey will quickly return to it temporarily and then resume the trend they had before they gapped or plunged through

Rule 8 Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P of reversal and the MLthe probability is that this price reversal will go further than it did on its approach toward the ML

Rule 9 The price failure rule is negated when the next price trend is also a failure in reaching the ML This is almostinvariably a signal of a big fast move in the direction indicated by this last space Rule 10 When alternate median lines of comparable length slope in the same direction the trend is firm and rapidprice changes take place

Rule 11 When 1-ML23 is exactly reached at P4 it can be used as a highly reliable centerline for the AR method

Rule 12 Frequently after crossing a lower MLH prices continue to rise along the MLH Since the crossing of the MLHsignals a further drop is likely use a sliding parallel along the bottom of the most recent crossing If prices drop past thatsliding parallel line a sell signal is generated

Rule 13 MLs between P2 and P3 can start from a nearby or a remote P1 since prices tend to reverse at each of theseMLs Try several such P2-P3 MLs to discover the best fit

Rule 14 The distance of each MLH from its ML is the distance of the next warning line Use these warning lineswhenever a SH has signalled a buy or sell

Rule 15 Use the MMLH as a buy or sell signal when you expect a reversal because of a P5 Also when prices are at aWL ML extension line or where course lines converge or intersect

Rule 16 Converging lines that meet prices have shown the highest probability of a trend reversal

Rule 17 Two to four days is usually the maximum between P2 and P3 for a MML P1 can be a day or so back from P2and 3

Rule 18 The most reliable ActionReaction centerlines seem to be MPL 2P line 2 Gap line peak to low or low to peak

Rule 19 When prices pass through R lines look for a pull back and then a continuing move in the direction of the passthrough

Rule 20 Use gaps as Action lines from the centerline

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 003755

Hello Gordonhere is my example for Rule 4 And I have a question What are EP formations gtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 021242

Tuesday May 04 2000 123755 PM you wrote TZgt Hello GordonTZgt here is my example for Rule 4 TZgt And I have a question What are EP formations gtgtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegtgta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hi TradersZone Good use of the warning linesalso the EP material is part of lesson 4 Rather than go backthrough the files to see when (or if) it was sent Im sending it along with this reply Glad youbrought it up Best RegardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Tuesday May 04 2000208 PM Dr Andrews used a fairly common price chart formation that he found useful at probable P5market tops and bottoms The formation generally called a wedge or pennant by chartists isreferred to in Dr Andrews trading course as the Expanding Pivot (EP) One of the few chartformations used in the course he regarded it as among the most dependable indications that amarket top was forming Closely related to the EP is his Inverted Expanding Pivot (IEP) which henoted could often be observed at market bottoms Both are regarded as intermediate and long-term reversal indicators Dr Andrews found that both formations were most reliable when they occurred after a sharprapid price move coinciding with the formation of a probable P5 He said it wasnt unusual for theformation to take several weeks to complete and that conservative traders could best avoid thewhipsaw associated with congestion patterns by trading only in the direction of the probable price

break out of the EP or IEP formation The attached charts illustrate these formations Please look over your own charts for an example ofthe EP and IEP and send me a copy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 232127

Hello Gordon Thank you for the lesson with the EP material I couldnt find it in any previous emailHere is my example for Rule 7 RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Rule 4Date Samstag 6 Mai 2000 080827

Wednesday May 05 2000 112127 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt Thank you for the lesson with the EP materialTZgt I couldnt find it in any previous emailTZgt Here is my example for Rule 7

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hi TradersZone

Glad you mentioned it earlierexcept for the EP IEP and hissideways channel Dr Andrews didnt have much to say about chartpatterns and formations These are good ones to use though

Your study of the penetration rule was good Later

Best Regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Wednesday May 05 2000801 PM

Page 60: Pitchfork primer

these primary signalsa subsequent price penetration of a short-termmulti-pivotline andor a return of prices to and penetration of the parallel lineformed atpivot 3 of the pitchfork (The circles on the Home Depot chart denote theparallelline penetration signal To avoid clutter the mpl lines were not drawn) One possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart of ConsecoIncLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me a copy

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject ChartDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081800Attachments image002png

Hi TradersZone Forgot the chart Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Price failure techniqueDate Samstag 1 April 2000 201000

gtOne possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart ofgtConseco IncgtLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me agtcopy Hi Gordon here are my charts with price failures RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Mittwoch 5 April 2000 235624

Hi TradersZone Good price failure examples you sentany comments or questions about it Heres the next partanother old standby Dr Andrews kept handy Regards Gordon In this segment youll learn how to use the Fan line Technique To draw the fan lines youll apply the coursetrendline method which was introduced in an earlier lesson It might be well to emphasize that the practicalapplication of the course trendline method requires practice and experience both of which will serve youwell in this technique Dr Andrews used fan lines as an adjunct to his pitchfork sideways channel andactionreaction methods In the fan line study three trendlines are drawn from the original reversal pivot of the price correction understudy typically a P0 or a P5 Youll notice on the charts included with this study that each fan line is at aflatter angle than its predecessor When the third fan line is broken the rule is that the correction has endedand a new trend is under way Try this technique on some of your own charts and then please send me asample

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Donnerstag 6 April 2000 234315

Hi Gordon No I dont have any specific question about the price failure technique I guess the next likely target after a price failure wouldbe the warning line I have attached two charts with fan linesIs it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the third fan line is broken RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Next segmentDate Freitag 7 April 2000 003312

Hello TradersZone

Tuesday April 06 2000 114315 AM you wrote

TZgt Hi Gordon

TZgt No I dont have any specific question about the price failureTZgt technique I guess the next likely target after a price failureTZgt would be the warning line

TZgt I have attached two charts with fan linesTZgt Is it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the thirdTZgt fan line is broken

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Thats right the warning line is the next price target Additionalwarning lines can be drawn if needed but usually one will do it Ifprices go through the first warning line another can be drawn butmost likely a new pitchfork could be drawn instead which would bepreferable Helps stay current with recently formed pivots

When prices break through the third fan line a buy or sell signal isgiven Not sure what you mean by fourth target fan line Im a littledense today

Your chart work was goodthis is another handy tool for spotting thehigh probability of a price reversal or trend change

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject The Gap TradeDate Freitag 7 April 2000 004858

Hello TradersZone This trading signal doesnt show up very often but past observations have shown that its well worth watching for Dr Andrews placed a lot of emphasis on the importance of price gaps something many traders overlook This is one of his gap uses Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom The Gap Trading Technique Price gaps can be a dilemma for many traders The general rule denoting market strength or weakness after ahigh volume gap often comes up short after the initial reaction is over Many gappers simply run out ofsteam A high volume gap in itself seems to offer precious little evidence that a profitable move is about toget under way Dr Andrews used price gaps somewhat differently than others He counted a gap as 2 pivots Youll see howthat works in the following technique which uses a gap to arrive at a price level for a buy or sell order Using short-term daily price pivots label the pivot immediately preceding the gap as p0 Count the gap as 2pivots labeling it p1 amp p2 After p3 has formed and prices reverse towards a short-term p4 draw a horizontalline 2 price tics or more (individual preference)to the right of p3 Enter the market only if prices reach orpenetrate that line within a few days after reversing from p4 Please look over your own charts to see if you can find places where the gap trade technique could have beenused Send me a sample when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 001925

Hello Gordon this is my chart with a gap trade RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 065538

Hello TradersZone Thursday April 08 2000 121925 PM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt this is my chart with a gap trade TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Good examplethe gap trade technique shines when an issue in at or near a P5 Similar to the one on thechart you sent Heres another trading signal tool Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Dr Andrews used several techniques which helped him determine whether a P5 was near at hand Youllrecall that he observed most price moves ended or had a significant reversal at a P5 This technique uses alternate closing prices after a P4 has been formed As with many of his studies thenumber 5 is used The chart accompanying this segment shows that there were 5 alternate closes to thedownside after P4 was put in Dr Andrews noted that whenever 5 or more alternate closes followed a P4 theprobabilities were high that a P5 was near at hand An added feature to this chart study is the sideways channel Notice how the 2nd target price and the 5thalternate close nearly coincide

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 12 April 2000 200730

Hello Gordon This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 13 April 2000 082418

Monday April 12 2000 80730 AM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hello TradersZone Good chart example of this Andrews toolanother of his very unusual observations that workmore often than not Heres the final part of this lesson Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom In this trendline method Dr Andrews once again used the number 5 as the basis for locating aprobable reversal area He found this technique to be especially useful whenever a clear orobvious pivot count didnt show up onthe price move under study Trendlines are drawn using the course trendline method When the 5th trendline is broken theprobability is high that the trend under study has ended A mini-median line pitchfork andorsliding parallel could be used for pricing a trading order The accompanying chart of Compaq Computer is an example of how the trendline study could beused The pivot count beginning at the October low is difficult to nail down There were severalsmall areas of congestion but no sizeable corrections while prices advanced The count wasunclear By following the price action using the course trendline technique however the traderwould have been alerted to the possibility of a change of trend when the 5th trendline was brokenin early February Try this technique on your own charts When youre ready please send me an example of yourstudy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 19 April 2000 124108

Hello Gordon this is my example with 5 trendlines RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[6] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 20 April 2000 012726

Monday April 19 2000 124108 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt this is my example with 5 trendlines

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Good example of the 5 TL technique Always reminds me of how the fairly simple tools often do a better job than manyof the sophisticated studies out there

That was the last part of lesson 5 Lesson 6 attached is made in one mailing Youll find Dr Andrews trading rules alongwith a wrap-up review which uses several of his rules You might have questions about some of the rules so feel free tosend them as they arise

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Dr Andrews had an abbreviated set of trading rules on several index cards that he carried around with him in his shirtpocket He said every trading day turned up something new on his charts and by having his rules in his pocket he wasreminded of the need for a methodical approach to his analysis Quite a comment coming from the man who wrote therule book

In this the final lesson of the course Dr Andrews original trading rules and observations are presented Lets work witha few of them at this point

Using charts of issues you follow please send me an example that illustrates your interpretation of each of the followingrules

Rule 4 Anticipating major Ps

Rule 7 Penetration rule

Rule 8 Price failure rule

Rule 11 1-ML23 AR Centerline

Rule 12 Sliding Parallel rule

Rule 15 Mini-median line parallel to buy or sell

Feel free to include any other course techniques you choose to apply but please include examples of the above as aminimum Use more than one technique on a chart if your analysis supports it Send as many charts as you like alongwith your questionscomments

Lesson 6 - Dr Andrews Trading Rules

This lesson covers course rules and significant observations as taught by Dr Andrews in his original trading course Therules are those that he used in his own trading and are provided to serve as a checklist for use with the course tradingmethods youve learned

Rule 1 Where prices are always headed Rule You course members are among the fortunate few to be able to draw astraight line and know that prices are headed toward that ML Very few investors have ever applied this ML principle ofstatistics to price fluctuations and weve never seen this in any books on investment You are among the very few who

know that prices are always headed toward the newest ML

Rule 2 The Rule of coming opposites applies all through life In the bible we find Blessed at they that mourn for theyshall be comforted As investors we know that any losses can be recovered by using course methods

Rule 3 Turn your mind about or Rethink for all good is at hand We should mentally prepare ourselves for thecoming reversal in prices and other affairs Heres one way for example that you course members who know the MLrules can use When prices are skyrocketing upward we do this preparation by thinking If prices pivoted here today atthis price Id draw a new ML bisecting the distance between todays price and the price from which the rise started Andwe know now that if this is a Major Pivot prices will fall rapidly to this new ML Profits from such drops are big and quick

Rule 4 Rule for anticipating major Ps If during congestion or after a rally or decline you can count four previous Psthe fifth one is highly probable to be the one from which a new trend starts

Rule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can make a quick big profit is to watch for the EPformations

Rule 6 The other reversal rule is that prices tend to reverse at or near any ML as well as at any extension of each MLAnd also at any MLH or extensions of MLH

Rule 7 The Penetration Rule is that whenever prices gap past or plunge through any ML there is a high probability thatthey will quickly return to it temporarily and then resume the trend they had before they gapped or plunged through

Rule 8 Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P of reversal and the MLthe probability is that this price reversal will go further than it did on its approach toward the ML

Rule 9 The price failure rule is negated when the next price trend is also a failure in reaching the ML This is almostinvariably a signal of a big fast move in the direction indicated by this last space Rule 10 When alternate median lines of comparable length slope in the same direction the trend is firm and rapidprice changes take place

Rule 11 When 1-ML23 is exactly reached at P4 it can be used as a highly reliable centerline for the AR method

Rule 12 Frequently after crossing a lower MLH prices continue to rise along the MLH Since the crossing of the MLHsignals a further drop is likely use a sliding parallel along the bottom of the most recent crossing If prices drop past thatsliding parallel line a sell signal is generated

Rule 13 MLs between P2 and P3 can start from a nearby or a remote P1 since prices tend to reverse at each of theseMLs Try several such P2-P3 MLs to discover the best fit

Rule 14 The distance of each MLH from its ML is the distance of the next warning line Use these warning lineswhenever a SH has signalled a buy or sell

Rule 15 Use the MMLH as a buy or sell signal when you expect a reversal because of a P5 Also when prices are at aWL ML extension line or where course lines converge or intersect

Rule 16 Converging lines that meet prices have shown the highest probability of a trend reversal

Rule 17 Two to four days is usually the maximum between P2 and P3 for a MML P1 can be a day or so back from P2and 3

Rule 18 The most reliable ActionReaction centerlines seem to be MPL 2P line 2 Gap line peak to low or low to peak

Rule 19 When prices pass through R lines look for a pull back and then a continuing move in the direction of the passthrough

Rule 20 Use gaps as Action lines from the centerline

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 003755

Hello Gordonhere is my example for Rule 4 And I have a question What are EP formations gtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 021242

Tuesday May 04 2000 123755 PM you wrote TZgt Hello GordonTZgt here is my example for Rule 4 TZgt And I have a question What are EP formations gtgtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegtgta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hi TradersZone Good use of the warning linesalso the EP material is part of lesson 4 Rather than go backthrough the files to see when (or if) it was sent Im sending it along with this reply Glad youbrought it up Best RegardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Tuesday May 04 2000208 PM Dr Andrews used a fairly common price chart formation that he found useful at probable P5market tops and bottoms The formation generally called a wedge or pennant by chartists isreferred to in Dr Andrews trading course as the Expanding Pivot (EP) One of the few chartformations used in the course he regarded it as among the most dependable indications that amarket top was forming Closely related to the EP is his Inverted Expanding Pivot (IEP) which henoted could often be observed at market bottoms Both are regarded as intermediate and long-term reversal indicators Dr Andrews found that both formations were most reliable when they occurred after a sharprapid price move coinciding with the formation of a probable P5 He said it wasnt unusual for theformation to take several weeks to complete and that conservative traders could best avoid thewhipsaw associated with congestion patterns by trading only in the direction of the probable price

break out of the EP or IEP formation The attached charts illustrate these formations Please look over your own charts for an example ofthe EP and IEP and send me a copy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 232127

Hello Gordon Thank you for the lesson with the EP material I couldnt find it in any previous emailHere is my example for Rule 7 RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Rule 4Date Samstag 6 Mai 2000 080827

Wednesday May 05 2000 112127 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt Thank you for the lesson with the EP materialTZgt I couldnt find it in any previous emailTZgt Here is my example for Rule 7

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hi TradersZone

Glad you mentioned it earlierexcept for the EP IEP and hissideways channel Dr Andrews didnt have much to say about chartpatterns and formations These are good ones to use though

Your study of the penetration rule was good Later

Best Regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Wednesday May 05 2000801 PM

Page 61: Pitchfork primer

From PitchforkPrimerTo TradersZoneSubject ChartDate Freitag 31 Maumlrz 2000 081800Attachments image002png

Hi TradersZone Forgot the chart Gordon

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Price failure techniqueDate Samstag 1 April 2000 201000

gtOne possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart ofgtConseco IncgtLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me agtcopy Hi Gordon here are my charts with price failures RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Mittwoch 5 April 2000 235624

Hi TradersZone Good price failure examples you sentany comments or questions about it Heres the next partanother old standby Dr Andrews kept handy Regards Gordon In this segment youll learn how to use the Fan line Technique To draw the fan lines youll apply the coursetrendline method which was introduced in an earlier lesson It might be well to emphasize that the practicalapplication of the course trendline method requires practice and experience both of which will serve youwell in this technique Dr Andrews used fan lines as an adjunct to his pitchfork sideways channel andactionreaction methods In the fan line study three trendlines are drawn from the original reversal pivot of the price correction understudy typically a P0 or a P5 Youll notice on the charts included with this study that each fan line is at aflatter angle than its predecessor When the third fan line is broken the rule is that the correction has endedand a new trend is under way Try this technique on some of your own charts and then please send me asample

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Donnerstag 6 April 2000 234315

Hi Gordon No I dont have any specific question about the price failure technique I guess the next likely target after a price failure wouldbe the warning line I have attached two charts with fan linesIs it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the third fan line is broken RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Next segmentDate Freitag 7 April 2000 003312

Hello TradersZone

Tuesday April 06 2000 114315 AM you wrote

TZgt Hi Gordon

TZgt No I dont have any specific question about the price failureTZgt technique I guess the next likely target after a price failureTZgt would be the warning line

TZgt I have attached two charts with fan linesTZgt Is it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the thirdTZgt fan line is broken

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Thats right the warning line is the next price target Additionalwarning lines can be drawn if needed but usually one will do it Ifprices go through the first warning line another can be drawn butmost likely a new pitchfork could be drawn instead which would bepreferable Helps stay current with recently formed pivots

When prices break through the third fan line a buy or sell signal isgiven Not sure what you mean by fourth target fan line Im a littledense today

Your chart work was goodthis is another handy tool for spotting thehigh probability of a price reversal or trend change

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject The Gap TradeDate Freitag 7 April 2000 004858

Hello TradersZone This trading signal doesnt show up very often but past observations have shown that its well worth watching for Dr Andrews placed a lot of emphasis on the importance of price gaps something many traders overlook This is one of his gap uses Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom The Gap Trading Technique Price gaps can be a dilemma for many traders The general rule denoting market strength or weakness after ahigh volume gap often comes up short after the initial reaction is over Many gappers simply run out ofsteam A high volume gap in itself seems to offer precious little evidence that a profitable move is about toget under way Dr Andrews used price gaps somewhat differently than others He counted a gap as 2 pivots Youll see howthat works in the following technique which uses a gap to arrive at a price level for a buy or sell order Using short-term daily price pivots label the pivot immediately preceding the gap as p0 Count the gap as 2pivots labeling it p1 amp p2 After p3 has formed and prices reverse towards a short-term p4 draw a horizontalline 2 price tics or more (individual preference)to the right of p3 Enter the market only if prices reach orpenetrate that line within a few days after reversing from p4 Please look over your own charts to see if you can find places where the gap trade technique could have beenused Send me a sample when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 001925

Hello Gordon this is my chart with a gap trade RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 065538

Hello TradersZone Thursday April 08 2000 121925 PM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt this is my chart with a gap trade TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Good examplethe gap trade technique shines when an issue in at or near a P5 Similar to the one on thechart you sent Heres another trading signal tool Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Dr Andrews used several techniques which helped him determine whether a P5 was near at hand Youllrecall that he observed most price moves ended or had a significant reversal at a P5 This technique uses alternate closing prices after a P4 has been formed As with many of his studies thenumber 5 is used The chart accompanying this segment shows that there were 5 alternate closes to thedownside after P4 was put in Dr Andrews noted that whenever 5 or more alternate closes followed a P4 theprobabilities were high that a P5 was near at hand An added feature to this chart study is the sideways channel Notice how the 2nd target price and the 5thalternate close nearly coincide

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 12 April 2000 200730

Hello Gordon This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 13 April 2000 082418

Monday April 12 2000 80730 AM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hello TradersZone Good chart example of this Andrews toolanother of his very unusual observations that workmore often than not Heres the final part of this lesson Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom In this trendline method Dr Andrews once again used the number 5 as the basis for locating aprobable reversal area He found this technique to be especially useful whenever a clear orobvious pivot count didnt show up onthe price move under study Trendlines are drawn using the course trendline method When the 5th trendline is broken theprobability is high that the trend under study has ended A mini-median line pitchfork andorsliding parallel could be used for pricing a trading order The accompanying chart of Compaq Computer is an example of how the trendline study could beused The pivot count beginning at the October low is difficult to nail down There were severalsmall areas of congestion but no sizeable corrections while prices advanced The count wasunclear By following the price action using the course trendline technique however the traderwould have been alerted to the possibility of a change of trend when the 5th trendline was brokenin early February Try this technique on your own charts When youre ready please send me an example of yourstudy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 19 April 2000 124108

Hello Gordon this is my example with 5 trendlines RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[6] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 20 April 2000 012726

Monday April 19 2000 124108 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt this is my example with 5 trendlines

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Good example of the 5 TL technique Always reminds me of how the fairly simple tools often do a better job than manyof the sophisticated studies out there

That was the last part of lesson 5 Lesson 6 attached is made in one mailing Youll find Dr Andrews trading rules alongwith a wrap-up review which uses several of his rules You might have questions about some of the rules so feel free tosend them as they arise

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Dr Andrews had an abbreviated set of trading rules on several index cards that he carried around with him in his shirtpocket He said every trading day turned up something new on his charts and by having his rules in his pocket he wasreminded of the need for a methodical approach to his analysis Quite a comment coming from the man who wrote therule book

In this the final lesson of the course Dr Andrews original trading rules and observations are presented Lets work witha few of them at this point

Using charts of issues you follow please send me an example that illustrates your interpretation of each of the followingrules

Rule 4 Anticipating major Ps

Rule 7 Penetration rule

Rule 8 Price failure rule

Rule 11 1-ML23 AR Centerline

Rule 12 Sliding Parallel rule

Rule 15 Mini-median line parallel to buy or sell

Feel free to include any other course techniques you choose to apply but please include examples of the above as aminimum Use more than one technique on a chart if your analysis supports it Send as many charts as you like alongwith your questionscomments

Lesson 6 - Dr Andrews Trading Rules

This lesson covers course rules and significant observations as taught by Dr Andrews in his original trading course Therules are those that he used in his own trading and are provided to serve as a checklist for use with the course tradingmethods youve learned

Rule 1 Where prices are always headed Rule You course members are among the fortunate few to be able to draw astraight line and know that prices are headed toward that ML Very few investors have ever applied this ML principle ofstatistics to price fluctuations and weve never seen this in any books on investment You are among the very few who

know that prices are always headed toward the newest ML

Rule 2 The Rule of coming opposites applies all through life In the bible we find Blessed at they that mourn for theyshall be comforted As investors we know that any losses can be recovered by using course methods

Rule 3 Turn your mind about or Rethink for all good is at hand We should mentally prepare ourselves for thecoming reversal in prices and other affairs Heres one way for example that you course members who know the MLrules can use When prices are skyrocketing upward we do this preparation by thinking If prices pivoted here today atthis price Id draw a new ML bisecting the distance between todays price and the price from which the rise started Andwe know now that if this is a Major Pivot prices will fall rapidly to this new ML Profits from such drops are big and quick

Rule 4 Rule for anticipating major Ps If during congestion or after a rally or decline you can count four previous Psthe fifth one is highly probable to be the one from which a new trend starts

Rule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can make a quick big profit is to watch for the EPformations

Rule 6 The other reversal rule is that prices tend to reverse at or near any ML as well as at any extension of each MLAnd also at any MLH or extensions of MLH

Rule 7 The Penetration Rule is that whenever prices gap past or plunge through any ML there is a high probability thatthey will quickly return to it temporarily and then resume the trend they had before they gapped or plunged through

Rule 8 Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P of reversal and the MLthe probability is that this price reversal will go further than it did on its approach toward the ML

Rule 9 The price failure rule is negated when the next price trend is also a failure in reaching the ML This is almostinvariably a signal of a big fast move in the direction indicated by this last space Rule 10 When alternate median lines of comparable length slope in the same direction the trend is firm and rapidprice changes take place

Rule 11 When 1-ML23 is exactly reached at P4 it can be used as a highly reliable centerline for the AR method

Rule 12 Frequently after crossing a lower MLH prices continue to rise along the MLH Since the crossing of the MLHsignals a further drop is likely use a sliding parallel along the bottom of the most recent crossing If prices drop past thatsliding parallel line a sell signal is generated

Rule 13 MLs between P2 and P3 can start from a nearby or a remote P1 since prices tend to reverse at each of theseMLs Try several such P2-P3 MLs to discover the best fit

Rule 14 The distance of each MLH from its ML is the distance of the next warning line Use these warning lineswhenever a SH has signalled a buy or sell

Rule 15 Use the MMLH as a buy or sell signal when you expect a reversal because of a P5 Also when prices are at aWL ML extension line or where course lines converge or intersect

Rule 16 Converging lines that meet prices have shown the highest probability of a trend reversal

Rule 17 Two to four days is usually the maximum between P2 and P3 for a MML P1 can be a day or so back from P2and 3

Rule 18 The most reliable ActionReaction centerlines seem to be MPL 2P line 2 Gap line peak to low or low to peak

Rule 19 When prices pass through R lines look for a pull back and then a continuing move in the direction of the passthrough

Rule 20 Use gaps as Action lines from the centerline

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 003755

Hello Gordonhere is my example for Rule 4 And I have a question What are EP formations gtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 021242

Tuesday May 04 2000 123755 PM you wrote TZgt Hello GordonTZgt here is my example for Rule 4 TZgt And I have a question What are EP formations gtgtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegtgta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hi TradersZone Good use of the warning linesalso the EP material is part of lesson 4 Rather than go backthrough the files to see when (or if) it was sent Im sending it along with this reply Glad youbrought it up Best RegardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Tuesday May 04 2000208 PM Dr Andrews used a fairly common price chart formation that he found useful at probable P5market tops and bottoms The formation generally called a wedge or pennant by chartists isreferred to in Dr Andrews trading course as the Expanding Pivot (EP) One of the few chartformations used in the course he regarded it as among the most dependable indications that amarket top was forming Closely related to the EP is his Inverted Expanding Pivot (IEP) which henoted could often be observed at market bottoms Both are regarded as intermediate and long-term reversal indicators Dr Andrews found that both formations were most reliable when they occurred after a sharprapid price move coinciding with the formation of a probable P5 He said it wasnt unusual for theformation to take several weeks to complete and that conservative traders could best avoid thewhipsaw associated with congestion patterns by trading only in the direction of the probable price

break out of the EP or IEP formation The attached charts illustrate these formations Please look over your own charts for an example ofthe EP and IEP and send me a copy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 232127

Hello Gordon Thank you for the lesson with the EP material I couldnt find it in any previous emailHere is my example for Rule 7 RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Rule 4Date Samstag 6 Mai 2000 080827

Wednesday May 05 2000 112127 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt Thank you for the lesson with the EP materialTZgt I couldnt find it in any previous emailTZgt Here is my example for Rule 7

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hi TradersZone

Glad you mentioned it earlierexcept for the EP IEP and hissideways channel Dr Andrews didnt have much to say about chartpatterns and formations These are good ones to use though

Your study of the penetration rule was good Later

Best Regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Wednesday May 05 2000801 PM

Page 62: Pitchfork primer

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Price failure techniqueDate Samstag 1 April 2000 201000

gtOne possible use of this method is shown on the attached chart ofgtConseco IncgtLook for similar examples on your own charts and please send me agtcopy Hi Gordon here are my charts with price failures RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Mittwoch 5 April 2000 235624

Hi TradersZone Good price failure examples you sentany comments or questions about it Heres the next partanother old standby Dr Andrews kept handy Regards Gordon In this segment youll learn how to use the Fan line Technique To draw the fan lines youll apply the coursetrendline method which was introduced in an earlier lesson It might be well to emphasize that the practicalapplication of the course trendline method requires practice and experience both of which will serve youwell in this technique Dr Andrews used fan lines as an adjunct to his pitchfork sideways channel andactionreaction methods In the fan line study three trendlines are drawn from the original reversal pivot of the price correction understudy typically a P0 or a P5 Youll notice on the charts included with this study that each fan line is at aflatter angle than its predecessor When the third fan line is broken the rule is that the correction has endedand a new trend is under way Try this technique on some of your own charts and then please send me asample

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Donnerstag 6 April 2000 234315

Hi Gordon No I dont have any specific question about the price failure technique I guess the next likely target after a price failure wouldbe the warning line I have attached two charts with fan linesIs it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the third fan line is broken RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Next segmentDate Freitag 7 April 2000 003312

Hello TradersZone

Tuesday April 06 2000 114315 AM you wrote

TZgt Hi Gordon

TZgt No I dont have any specific question about the price failureTZgt technique I guess the next likely target after a price failureTZgt would be the warning line

TZgt I have attached two charts with fan linesTZgt Is it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the thirdTZgt fan line is broken

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Thats right the warning line is the next price target Additionalwarning lines can be drawn if needed but usually one will do it Ifprices go through the first warning line another can be drawn butmost likely a new pitchfork could be drawn instead which would bepreferable Helps stay current with recently formed pivots

When prices break through the third fan line a buy or sell signal isgiven Not sure what you mean by fourth target fan line Im a littledense today

Your chart work was goodthis is another handy tool for spotting thehigh probability of a price reversal or trend change

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject The Gap TradeDate Freitag 7 April 2000 004858

Hello TradersZone This trading signal doesnt show up very often but past observations have shown that its well worth watching for Dr Andrews placed a lot of emphasis on the importance of price gaps something many traders overlook This is one of his gap uses Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom The Gap Trading Technique Price gaps can be a dilemma for many traders The general rule denoting market strength or weakness after ahigh volume gap often comes up short after the initial reaction is over Many gappers simply run out ofsteam A high volume gap in itself seems to offer precious little evidence that a profitable move is about toget under way Dr Andrews used price gaps somewhat differently than others He counted a gap as 2 pivots Youll see howthat works in the following technique which uses a gap to arrive at a price level for a buy or sell order Using short-term daily price pivots label the pivot immediately preceding the gap as p0 Count the gap as 2pivots labeling it p1 amp p2 After p3 has formed and prices reverse towards a short-term p4 draw a horizontalline 2 price tics or more (individual preference)to the right of p3 Enter the market only if prices reach orpenetrate that line within a few days after reversing from p4 Please look over your own charts to see if you can find places where the gap trade technique could have beenused Send me a sample when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 001925

Hello Gordon this is my chart with a gap trade RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 065538

Hello TradersZone Thursday April 08 2000 121925 PM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt this is my chart with a gap trade TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Good examplethe gap trade technique shines when an issue in at or near a P5 Similar to the one on thechart you sent Heres another trading signal tool Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Dr Andrews used several techniques which helped him determine whether a P5 was near at hand Youllrecall that he observed most price moves ended or had a significant reversal at a P5 This technique uses alternate closing prices after a P4 has been formed As with many of his studies thenumber 5 is used The chart accompanying this segment shows that there were 5 alternate closes to thedownside after P4 was put in Dr Andrews noted that whenever 5 or more alternate closes followed a P4 theprobabilities were high that a P5 was near at hand An added feature to this chart study is the sideways channel Notice how the 2nd target price and the 5thalternate close nearly coincide

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 12 April 2000 200730

Hello Gordon This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 13 April 2000 082418

Monday April 12 2000 80730 AM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hello TradersZone Good chart example of this Andrews toolanother of his very unusual observations that workmore often than not Heres the final part of this lesson Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom In this trendline method Dr Andrews once again used the number 5 as the basis for locating aprobable reversal area He found this technique to be especially useful whenever a clear orobvious pivot count didnt show up onthe price move under study Trendlines are drawn using the course trendline method When the 5th trendline is broken theprobability is high that the trend under study has ended A mini-median line pitchfork andorsliding parallel could be used for pricing a trading order The accompanying chart of Compaq Computer is an example of how the trendline study could beused The pivot count beginning at the October low is difficult to nail down There were severalsmall areas of congestion but no sizeable corrections while prices advanced The count wasunclear By following the price action using the course trendline technique however the traderwould have been alerted to the possibility of a change of trend when the 5th trendline was brokenin early February Try this technique on your own charts When youre ready please send me an example of yourstudy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 19 April 2000 124108

Hello Gordon this is my example with 5 trendlines RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[6] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 20 April 2000 012726

Monday April 19 2000 124108 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt this is my example with 5 trendlines

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Good example of the 5 TL technique Always reminds me of how the fairly simple tools often do a better job than manyof the sophisticated studies out there

That was the last part of lesson 5 Lesson 6 attached is made in one mailing Youll find Dr Andrews trading rules alongwith a wrap-up review which uses several of his rules You might have questions about some of the rules so feel free tosend them as they arise

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Dr Andrews had an abbreviated set of trading rules on several index cards that he carried around with him in his shirtpocket He said every trading day turned up something new on his charts and by having his rules in his pocket he wasreminded of the need for a methodical approach to his analysis Quite a comment coming from the man who wrote therule book

In this the final lesson of the course Dr Andrews original trading rules and observations are presented Lets work witha few of them at this point

Using charts of issues you follow please send me an example that illustrates your interpretation of each of the followingrules

Rule 4 Anticipating major Ps

Rule 7 Penetration rule

Rule 8 Price failure rule

Rule 11 1-ML23 AR Centerline

Rule 12 Sliding Parallel rule

Rule 15 Mini-median line parallel to buy or sell

Feel free to include any other course techniques you choose to apply but please include examples of the above as aminimum Use more than one technique on a chart if your analysis supports it Send as many charts as you like alongwith your questionscomments

Lesson 6 - Dr Andrews Trading Rules

This lesson covers course rules and significant observations as taught by Dr Andrews in his original trading course Therules are those that he used in his own trading and are provided to serve as a checklist for use with the course tradingmethods youve learned

Rule 1 Where prices are always headed Rule You course members are among the fortunate few to be able to draw astraight line and know that prices are headed toward that ML Very few investors have ever applied this ML principle ofstatistics to price fluctuations and weve never seen this in any books on investment You are among the very few who

know that prices are always headed toward the newest ML

Rule 2 The Rule of coming opposites applies all through life In the bible we find Blessed at they that mourn for theyshall be comforted As investors we know that any losses can be recovered by using course methods

Rule 3 Turn your mind about or Rethink for all good is at hand We should mentally prepare ourselves for thecoming reversal in prices and other affairs Heres one way for example that you course members who know the MLrules can use When prices are skyrocketing upward we do this preparation by thinking If prices pivoted here today atthis price Id draw a new ML bisecting the distance between todays price and the price from which the rise started Andwe know now that if this is a Major Pivot prices will fall rapidly to this new ML Profits from such drops are big and quick

Rule 4 Rule for anticipating major Ps If during congestion or after a rally or decline you can count four previous Psthe fifth one is highly probable to be the one from which a new trend starts

Rule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can make a quick big profit is to watch for the EPformations

Rule 6 The other reversal rule is that prices tend to reverse at or near any ML as well as at any extension of each MLAnd also at any MLH or extensions of MLH

Rule 7 The Penetration Rule is that whenever prices gap past or plunge through any ML there is a high probability thatthey will quickly return to it temporarily and then resume the trend they had before they gapped or plunged through

Rule 8 Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P of reversal and the MLthe probability is that this price reversal will go further than it did on its approach toward the ML

Rule 9 The price failure rule is negated when the next price trend is also a failure in reaching the ML This is almostinvariably a signal of a big fast move in the direction indicated by this last space Rule 10 When alternate median lines of comparable length slope in the same direction the trend is firm and rapidprice changes take place

Rule 11 When 1-ML23 is exactly reached at P4 it can be used as a highly reliable centerline for the AR method

Rule 12 Frequently after crossing a lower MLH prices continue to rise along the MLH Since the crossing of the MLHsignals a further drop is likely use a sliding parallel along the bottom of the most recent crossing If prices drop past thatsliding parallel line a sell signal is generated

Rule 13 MLs between P2 and P3 can start from a nearby or a remote P1 since prices tend to reverse at each of theseMLs Try several such P2-P3 MLs to discover the best fit

Rule 14 The distance of each MLH from its ML is the distance of the next warning line Use these warning lineswhenever a SH has signalled a buy or sell

Rule 15 Use the MMLH as a buy or sell signal when you expect a reversal because of a P5 Also when prices are at aWL ML extension line or where course lines converge or intersect

Rule 16 Converging lines that meet prices have shown the highest probability of a trend reversal

Rule 17 Two to four days is usually the maximum between P2 and P3 for a MML P1 can be a day or so back from P2and 3

Rule 18 The most reliable ActionReaction centerlines seem to be MPL 2P line 2 Gap line peak to low or low to peak

Rule 19 When prices pass through R lines look for a pull back and then a continuing move in the direction of the passthrough

Rule 20 Use gaps as Action lines from the centerline

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 003755

Hello Gordonhere is my example for Rule 4 And I have a question What are EP formations gtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 021242

Tuesday May 04 2000 123755 PM you wrote TZgt Hello GordonTZgt here is my example for Rule 4 TZgt And I have a question What are EP formations gtgtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegtgta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hi TradersZone Good use of the warning linesalso the EP material is part of lesson 4 Rather than go backthrough the files to see when (or if) it was sent Im sending it along with this reply Glad youbrought it up Best RegardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Tuesday May 04 2000208 PM Dr Andrews used a fairly common price chart formation that he found useful at probable P5market tops and bottoms The formation generally called a wedge or pennant by chartists isreferred to in Dr Andrews trading course as the Expanding Pivot (EP) One of the few chartformations used in the course he regarded it as among the most dependable indications that amarket top was forming Closely related to the EP is his Inverted Expanding Pivot (IEP) which henoted could often be observed at market bottoms Both are regarded as intermediate and long-term reversal indicators Dr Andrews found that both formations were most reliable when they occurred after a sharprapid price move coinciding with the formation of a probable P5 He said it wasnt unusual for theformation to take several weeks to complete and that conservative traders could best avoid thewhipsaw associated with congestion patterns by trading only in the direction of the probable price

break out of the EP or IEP formation The attached charts illustrate these formations Please look over your own charts for an example ofthe EP and IEP and send me a copy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 232127

Hello Gordon Thank you for the lesson with the EP material I couldnt find it in any previous emailHere is my example for Rule 7 RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Rule 4Date Samstag 6 Mai 2000 080827

Wednesday May 05 2000 112127 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt Thank you for the lesson with the EP materialTZgt I couldnt find it in any previous emailTZgt Here is my example for Rule 7

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hi TradersZone

Glad you mentioned it earlierexcept for the EP IEP and hissideways channel Dr Andrews didnt have much to say about chartpatterns and formations These are good ones to use though

Your study of the penetration rule was good Later

Best Regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Wednesday May 05 2000801 PM

Page 63: Pitchfork primer

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Next segmentDate Mittwoch 5 April 2000 235624

Hi TradersZone Good price failure examples you sentany comments or questions about it Heres the next partanother old standby Dr Andrews kept handy Regards Gordon In this segment youll learn how to use the Fan line Technique To draw the fan lines youll apply the coursetrendline method which was introduced in an earlier lesson It might be well to emphasize that the practicalapplication of the course trendline method requires practice and experience both of which will serve youwell in this technique Dr Andrews used fan lines as an adjunct to his pitchfork sideways channel andactionreaction methods In the fan line study three trendlines are drawn from the original reversal pivot of the price correction understudy typically a P0 or a P5 Youll notice on the charts included with this study that each fan line is at aflatter angle than its predecessor When the third fan line is broken the rule is that the correction has endedand a new trend is under way Try this technique on some of your own charts and then please send me asample

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Donnerstag 6 April 2000 234315

Hi Gordon No I dont have any specific question about the price failure technique I guess the next likely target after a price failure wouldbe the warning line I have attached two charts with fan linesIs it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the third fan line is broken RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Next segmentDate Freitag 7 April 2000 003312

Hello TradersZone

Tuesday April 06 2000 114315 AM you wrote

TZgt Hi Gordon

TZgt No I dont have any specific question about the price failureTZgt technique I guess the next likely target after a price failureTZgt would be the warning line

TZgt I have attached two charts with fan linesTZgt Is it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the thirdTZgt fan line is broken

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Thats right the warning line is the next price target Additionalwarning lines can be drawn if needed but usually one will do it Ifprices go through the first warning line another can be drawn butmost likely a new pitchfork could be drawn instead which would bepreferable Helps stay current with recently formed pivots

When prices break through the third fan line a buy or sell signal isgiven Not sure what you mean by fourth target fan line Im a littledense today

Your chart work was goodthis is another handy tool for spotting thehigh probability of a price reversal or trend change

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject The Gap TradeDate Freitag 7 April 2000 004858

Hello TradersZone This trading signal doesnt show up very often but past observations have shown that its well worth watching for Dr Andrews placed a lot of emphasis on the importance of price gaps something many traders overlook This is one of his gap uses Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom The Gap Trading Technique Price gaps can be a dilemma for many traders The general rule denoting market strength or weakness after ahigh volume gap often comes up short after the initial reaction is over Many gappers simply run out ofsteam A high volume gap in itself seems to offer precious little evidence that a profitable move is about toget under way Dr Andrews used price gaps somewhat differently than others He counted a gap as 2 pivots Youll see howthat works in the following technique which uses a gap to arrive at a price level for a buy or sell order Using short-term daily price pivots label the pivot immediately preceding the gap as p0 Count the gap as 2pivots labeling it p1 amp p2 After p3 has formed and prices reverse towards a short-term p4 draw a horizontalline 2 price tics or more (individual preference)to the right of p3 Enter the market only if prices reach orpenetrate that line within a few days after reversing from p4 Please look over your own charts to see if you can find places where the gap trade technique could have beenused Send me a sample when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 001925

Hello Gordon this is my chart with a gap trade RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 065538

Hello TradersZone Thursday April 08 2000 121925 PM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt this is my chart with a gap trade TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Good examplethe gap trade technique shines when an issue in at or near a P5 Similar to the one on thechart you sent Heres another trading signal tool Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Dr Andrews used several techniques which helped him determine whether a P5 was near at hand Youllrecall that he observed most price moves ended or had a significant reversal at a P5 This technique uses alternate closing prices after a P4 has been formed As with many of his studies thenumber 5 is used The chart accompanying this segment shows that there were 5 alternate closes to thedownside after P4 was put in Dr Andrews noted that whenever 5 or more alternate closes followed a P4 theprobabilities were high that a P5 was near at hand An added feature to this chart study is the sideways channel Notice how the 2nd target price and the 5thalternate close nearly coincide

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 12 April 2000 200730

Hello Gordon This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 13 April 2000 082418

Monday April 12 2000 80730 AM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hello TradersZone Good chart example of this Andrews toolanother of his very unusual observations that workmore often than not Heres the final part of this lesson Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom In this trendline method Dr Andrews once again used the number 5 as the basis for locating aprobable reversal area He found this technique to be especially useful whenever a clear orobvious pivot count didnt show up onthe price move under study Trendlines are drawn using the course trendline method When the 5th trendline is broken theprobability is high that the trend under study has ended A mini-median line pitchfork andorsliding parallel could be used for pricing a trading order The accompanying chart of Compaq Computer is an example of how the trendline study could beused The pivot count beginning at the October low is difficult to nail down There were severalsmall areas of congestion but no sizeable corrections while prices advanced The count wasunclear By following the price action using the course trendline technique however the traderwould have been alerted to the possibility of a change of trend when the 5th trendline was brokenin early February Try this technique on your own charts When youre ready please send me an example of yourstudy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 19 April 2000 124108

Hello Gordon this is my example with 5 trendlines RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[6] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 20 April 2000 012726

Monday April 19 2000 124108 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt this is my example with 5 trendlines

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Good example of the 5 TL technique Always reminds me of how the fairly simple tools often do a better job than manyof the sophisticated studies out there

That was the last part of lesson 5 Lesson 6 attached is made in one mailing Youll find Dr Andrews trading rules alongwith a wrap-up review which uses several of his rules You might have questions about some of the rules so feel free tosend them as they arise

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Dr Andrews had an abbreviated set of trading rules on several index cards that he carried around with him in his shirtpocket He said every trading day turned up something new on his charts and by having his rules in his pocket he wasreminded of the need for a methodical approach to his analysis Quite a comment coming from the man who wrote therule book

In this the final lesson of the course Dr Andrews original trading rules and observations are presented Lets work witha few of them at this point

Using charts of issues you follow please send me an example that illustrates your interpretation of each of the followingrules

Rule 4 Anticipating major Ps

Rule 7 Penetration rule

Rule 8 Price failure rule

Rule 11 1-ML23 AR Centerline

Rule 12 Sliding Parallel rule

Rule 15 Mini-median line parallel to buy or sell

Feel free to include any other course techniques you choose to apply but please include examples of the above as aminimum Use more than one technique on a chart if your analysis supports it Send as many charts as you like alongwith your questionscomments

Lesson 6 - Dr Andrews Trading Rules

This lesson covers course rules and significant observations as taught by Dr Andrews in his original trading course Therules are those that he used in his own trading and are provided to serve as a checklist for use with the course tradingmethods youve learned

Rule 1 Where prices are always headed Rule You course members are among the fortunate few to be able to draw astraight line and know that prices are headed toward that ML Very few investors have ever applied this ML principle ofstatistics to price fluctuations and weve never seen this in any books on investment You are among the very few who

know that prices are always headed toward the newest ML

Rule 2 The Rule of coming opposites applies all through life In the bible we find Blessed at they that mourn for theyshall be comforted As investors we know that any losses can be recovered by using course methods

Rule 3 Turn your mind about or Rethink for all good is at hand We should mentally prepare ourselves for thecoming reversal in prices and other affairs Heres one way for example that you course members who know the MLrules can use When prices are skyrocketing upward we do this preparation by thinking If prices pivoted here today atthis price Id draw a new ML bisecting the distance between todays price and the price from which the rise started Andwe know now that if this is a Major Pivot prices will fall rapidly to this new ML Profits from such drops are big and quick

Rule 4 Rule for anticipating major Ps If during congestion or after a rally or decline you can count four previous Psthe fifth one is highly probable to be the one from which a new trend starts

Rule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can make a quick big profit is to watch for the EPformations

Rule 6 The other reversal rule is that prices tend to reverse at or near any ML as well as at any extension of each MLAnd also at any MLH or extensions of MLH

Rule 7 The Penetration Rule is that whenever prices gap past or plunge through any ML there is a high probability thatthey will quickly return to it temporarily and then resume the trend they had before they gapped or plunged through

Rule 8 Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P of reversal and the MLthe probability is that this price reversal will go further than it did on its approach toward the ML

Rule 9 The price failure rule is negated when the next price trend is also a failure in reaching the ML This is almostinvariably a signal of a big fast move in the direction indicated by this last space Rule 10 When alternate median lines of comparable length slope in the same direction the trend is firm and rapidprice changes take place

Rule 11 When 1-ML23 is exactly reached at P4 it can be used as a highly reliable centerline for the AR method

Rule 12 Frequently after crossing a lower MLH prices continue to rise along the MLH Since the crossing of the MLHsignals a further drop is likely use a sliding parallel along the bottom of the most recent crossing If prices drop past thatsliding parallel line a sell signal is generated

Rule 13 MLs between P2 and P3 can start from a nearby or a remote P1 since prices tend to reverse at each of theseMLs Try several such P2-P3 MLs to discover the best fit

Rule 14 The distance of each MLH from its ML is the distance of the next warning line Use these warning lineswhenever a SH has signalled a buy or sell

Rule 15 Use the MMLH as a buy or sell signal when you expect a reversal because of a P5 Also when prices are at aWL ML extension line or where course lines converge or intersect

Rule 16 Converging lines that meet prices have shown the highest probability of a trend reversal

Rule 17 Two to four days is usually the maximum between P2 and P3 for a MML P1 can be a day or so back from P2and 3

Rule 18 The most reliable ActionReaction centerlines seem to be MPL 2P line 2 Gap line peak to low or low to peak

Rule 19 When prices pass through R lines look for a pull back and then a continuing move in the direction of the passthrough

Rule 20 Use gaps as Action lines from the centerline

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 003755

Hello Gordonhere is my example for Rule 4 And I have a question What are EP formations gtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 021242

Tuesday May 04 2000 123755 PM you wrote TZgt Hello GordonTZgt here is my example for Rule 4 TZgt And I have a question What are EP formations gtgtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegtgta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hi TradersZone Good use of the warning linesalso the EP material is part of lesson 4 Rather than go backthrough the files to see when (or if) it was sent Im sending it along with this reply Glad youbrought it up Best RegardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Tuesday May 04 2000208 PM Dr Andrews used a fairly common price chart formation that he found useful at probable P5market tops and bottoms The formation generally called a wedge or pennant by chartists isreferred to in Dr Andrews trading course as the Expanding Pivot (EP) One of the few chartformations used in the course he regarded it as among the most dependable indications that amarket top was forming Closely related to the EP is his Inverted Expanding Pivot (IEP) which henoted could often be observed at market bottoms Both are regarded as intermediate and long-term reversal indicators Dr Andrews found that both formations were most reliable when they occurred after a sharprapid price move coinciding with the formation of a probable P5 He said it wasnt unusual for theformation to take several weeks to complete and that conservative traders could best avoid thewhipsaw associated with congestion patterns by trading only in the direction of the probable price

break out of the EP or IEP formation The attached charts illustrate these formations Please look over your own charts for an example ofthe EP and IEP and send me a copy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 232127

Hello Gordon Thank you for the lesson with the EP material I couldnt find it in any previous emailHere is my example for Rule 7 RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Rule 4Date Samstag 6 Mai 2000 080827

Wednesday May 05 2000 112127 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt Thank you for the lesson with the EP materialTZgt I couldnt find it in any previous emailTZgt Here is my example for Rule 7

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hi TradersZone

Glad you mentioned it earlierexcept for the EP IEP and hissideways channel Dr Andrews didnt have much to say about chartpatterns and formations These are good ones to use though

Your study of the penetration rule was good Later

Best Regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Wednesday May 05 2000801 PM

Page 64: Pitchfork primer

From TradersZoneTo gordonpitchforkprimercomSubject Re Next segmentDate Donnerstag 6 April 2000 234315

Hi Gordon No I dont have any specific question about the price failure technique I guess the next likely target after a price failure wouldbe the warning line I have attached two charts with fan linesIs it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the third fan line is broken RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Next segmentDate Freitag 7 April 2000 003312

Hello TradersZone

Tuesday April 06 2000 114315 AM you wrote

TZgt Hi Gordon

TZgt No I dont have any specific question about the price failureTZgt technique I guess the next likely target after a price failureTZgt would be the warning line

TZgt I have attached two charts with fan linesTZgt Is it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the thirdTZgt fan line is broken

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Thats right the warning line is the next price target Additionalwarning lines can be drawn if needed but usually one will do it Ifprices go through the first warning line another can be drawn butmost likely a new pitchfork could be drawn instead which would bepreferable Helps stay current with recently formed pivots

When prices break through the third fan line a buy or sell signal isgiven Not sure what you mean by fourth target fan line Im a littledense today

Your chart work was goodthis is another handy tool for spotting thehigh probability of a price reversal or trend change

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject The Gap TradeDate Freitag 7 April 2000 004858

Hello TradersZone This trading signal doesnt show up very often but past observations have shown that its well worth watching for Dr Andrews placed a lot of emphasis on the importance of price gaps something many traders overlook This is one of his gap uses Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom The Gap Trading Technique Price gaps can be a dilemma for many traders The general rule denoting market strength or weakness after ahigh volume gap often comes up short after the initial reaction is over Many gappers simply run out ofsteam A high volume gap in itself seems to offer precious little evidence that a profitable move is about toget under way Dr Andrews used price gaps somewhat differently than others He counted a gap as 2 pivots Youll see howthat works in the following technique which uses a gap to arrive at a price level for a buy or sell order Using short-term daily price pivots label the pivot immediately preceding the gap as p0 Count the gap as 2pivots labeling it p1 amp p2 After p3 has formed and prices reverse towards a short-term p4 draw a horizontalline 2 price tics or more (individual preference)to the right of p3 Enter the market only if prices reach orpenetrate that line within a few days after reversing from p4 Please look over your own charts to see if you can find places where the gap trade technique could have beenused Send me a sample when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 001925

Hello Gordon this is my chart with a gap trade RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 065538

Hello TradersZone Thursday April 08 2000 121925 PM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt this is my chart with a gap trade TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Good examplethe gap trade technique shines when an issue in at or near a P5 Similar to the one on thechart you sent Heres another trading signal tool Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Dr Andrews used several techniques which helped him determine whether a P5 was near at hand Youllrecall that he observed most price moves ended or had a significant reversal at a P5 This technique uses alternate closing prices after a P4 has been formed As with many of his studies thenumber 5 is used The chart accompanying this segment shows that there were 5 alternate closes to thedownside after P4 was put in Dr Andrews noted that whenever 5 or more alternate closes followed a P4 theprobabilities were high that a P5 was near at hand An added feature to this chart study is the sideways channel Notice how the 2nd target price and the 5thalternate close nearly coincide

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 12 April 2000 200730

Hello Gordon This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 13 April 2000 082418

Monday April 12 2000 80730 AM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hello TradersZone Good chart example of this Andrews toolanother of his very unusual observations that workmore often than not Heres the final part of this lesson Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom In this trendline method Dr Andrews once again used the number 5 as the basis for locating aprobable reversal area He found this technique to be especially useful whenever a clear orobvious pivot count didnt show up onthe price move under study Trendlines are drawn using the course trendline method When the 5th trendline is broken theprobability is high that the trend under study has ended A mini-median line pitchfork andorsliding parallel could be used for pricing a trading order The accompanying chart of Compaq Computer is an example of how the trendline study could beused The pivot count beginning at the October low is difficult to nail down There were severalsmall areas of congestion but no sizeable corrections while prices advanced The count wasunclear By following the price action using the course trendline technique however the traderwould have been alerted to the possibility of a change of trend when the 5th trendline was brokenin early February Try this technique on your own charts When youre ready please send me an example of yourstudy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 19 April 2000 124108

Hello Gordon this is my example with 5 trendlines RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[6] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 20 April 2000 012726

Monday April 19 2000 124108 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt this is my example with 5 trendlines

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Good example of the 5 TL technique Always reminds me of how the fairly simple tools often do a better job than manyof the sophisticated studies out there

That was the last part of lesson 5 Lesson 6 attached is made in one mailing Youll find Dr Andrews trading rules alongwith a wrap-up review which uses several of his rules You might have questions about some of the rules so feel free tosend them as they arise

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Dr Andrews had an abbreviated set of trading rules on several index cards that he carried around with him in his shirtpocket He said every trading day turned up something new on his charts and by having his rules in his pocket he wasreminded of the need for a methodical approach to his analysis Quite a comment coming from the man who wrote therule book

In this the final lesson of the course Dr Andrews original trading rules and observations are presented Lets work witha few of them at this point

Using charts of issues you follow please send me an example that illustrates your interpretation of each of the followingrules

Rule 4 Anticipating major Ps

Rule 7 Penetration rule

Rule 8 Price failure rule

Rule 11 1-ML23 AR Centerline

Rule 12 Sliding Parallel rule

Rule 15 Mini-median line parallel to buy or sell

Feel free to include any other course techniques you choose to apply but please include examples of the above as aminimum Use more than one technique on a chart if your analysis supports it Send as many charts as you like alongwith your questionscomments

Lesson 6 - Dr Andrews Trading Rules

This lesson covers course rules and significant observations as taught by Dr Andrews in his original trading course Therules are those that he used in his own trading and are provided to serve as a checklist for use with the course tradingmethods youve learned

Rule 1 Where prices are always headed Rule You course members are among the fortunate few to be able to draw astraight line and know that prices are headed toward that ML Very few investors have ever applied this ML principle ofstatistics to price fluctuations and weve never seen this in any books on investment You are among the very few who

know that prices are always headed toward the newest ML

Rule 2 The Rule of coming opposites applies all through life In the bible we find Blessed at they that mourn for theyshall be comforted As investors we know that any losses can be recovered by using course methods

Rule 3 Turn your mind about or Rethink for all good is at hand We should mentally prepare ourselves for thecoming reversal in prices and other affairs Heres one way for example that you course members who know the MLrules can use When prices are skyrocketing upward we do this preparation by thinking If prices pivoted here today atthis price Id draw a new ML bisecting the distance between todays price and the price from which the rise started Andwe know now that if this is a Major Pivot prices will fall rapidly to this new ML Profits from such drops are big and quick

Rule 4 Rule for anticipating major Ps If during congestion or after a rally or decline you can count four previous Psthe fifth one is highly probable to be the one from which a new trend starts

Rule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can make a quick big profit is to watch for the EPformations

Rule 6 The other reversal rule is that prices tend to reverse at or near any ML as well as at any extension of each MLAnd also at any MLH or extensions of MLH

Rule 7 The Penetration Rule is that whenever prices gap past or plunge through any ML there is a high probability thatthey will quickly return to it temporarily and then resume the trend they had before they gapped or plunged through

Rule 8 Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P of reversal and the MLthe probability is that this price reversal will go further than it did on its approach toward the ML

Rule 9 The price failure rule is negated when the next price trend is also a failure in reaching the ML This is almostinvariably a signal of a big fast move in the direction indicated by this last space Rule 10 When alternate median lines of comparable length slope in the same direction the trend is firm and rapidprice changes take place

Rule 11 When 1-ML23 is exactly reached at P4 it can be used as a highly reliable centerline for the AR method

Rule 12 Frequently after crossing a lower MLH prices continue to rise along the MLH Since the crossing of the MLHsignals a further drop is likely use a sliding parallel along the bottom of the most recent crossing If prices drop past thatsliding parallel line a sell signal is generated

Rule 13 MLs between P2 and P3 can start from a nearby or a remote P1 since prices tend to reverse at each of theseMLs Try several such P2-P3 MLs to discover the best fit

Rule 14 The distance of each MLH from its ML is the distance of the next warning line Use these warning lineswhenever a SH has signalled a buy or sell

Rule 15 Use the MMLH as a buy or sell signal when you expect a reversal because of a P5 Also when prices are at aWL ML extension line or where course lines converge or intersect

Rule 16 Converging lines that meet prices have shown the highest probability of a trend reversal

Rule 17 Two to four days is usually the maximum between P2 and P3 for a MML P1 can be a day or so back from P2and 3

Rule 18 The most reliable ActionReaction centerlines seem to be MPL 2P line 2 Gap line peak to low or low to peak

Rule 19 When prices pass through R lines look for a pull back and then a continuing move in the direction of the passthrough

Rule 20 Use gaps as Action lines from the centerline

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 003755

Hello Gordonhere is my example for Rule 4 And I have a question What are EP formations gtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 021242

Tuesday May 04 2000 123755 PM you wrote TZgt Hello GordonTZgt here is my example for Rule 4 TZgt And I have a question What are EP formations gtgtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegtgta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hi TradersZone Good use of the warning linesalso the EP material is part of lesson 4 Rather than go backthrough the files to see when (or if) it was sent Im sending it along with this reply Glad youbrought it up Best RegardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Tuesday May 04 2000208 PM Dr Andrews used a fairly common price chart formation that he found useful at probable P5market tops and bottoms The formation generally called a wedge or pennant by chartists isreferred to in Dr Andrews trading course as the Expanding Pivot (EP) One of the few chartformations used in the course he regarded it as among the most dependable indications that amarket top was forming Closely related to the EP is his Inverted Expanding Pivot (IEP) which henoted could often be observed at market bottoms Both are regarded as intermediate and long-term reversal indicators Dr Andrews found that both formations were most reliable when they occurred after a sharprapid price move coinciding with the formation of a probable P5 He said it wasnt unusual for theformation to take several weeks to complete and that conservative traders could best avoid thewhipsaw associated with congestion patterns by trading only in the direction of the probable price

break out of the EP or IEP formation The attached charts illustrate these formations Please look over your own charts for an example ofthe EP and IEP and send me a copy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 232127

Hello Gordon Thank you for the lesson with the EP material I couldnt find it in any previous emailHere is my example for Rule 7 RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Rule 4Date Samstag 6 Mai 2000 080827

Wednesday May 05 2000 112127 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt Thank you for the lesson with the EP materialTZgt I couldnt find it in any previous emailTZgt Here is my example for Rule 7

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hi TradersZone

Glad you mentioned it earlierexcept for the EP IEP and hissideways channel Dr Andrews didnt have much to say about chartpatterns and formations These are good ones to use though

Your study of the penetration rule was good Later

Best Regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Wednesday May 05 2000801 PM

Page 65: Pitchfork primer

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Next segmentDate Freitag 7 April 2000 003312

Hello TradersZone

Tuesday April 06 2000 114315 AM you wrote

TZgt Hi Gordon

TZgt No I dont have any specific question about the price failureTZgt technique I guess the next likely target after a price failureTZgt would be the warning line

TZgt I have attached two charts with fan linesTZgt Is it possible to calculate a fourth target fan line if the thirdTZgt fan line is broken

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Thats right the warning line is the next price target Additionalwarning lines can be drawn if needed but usually one will do it Ifprices go through the first warning line another can be drawn butmost likely a new pitchfork could be drawn instead which would bepreferable Helps stay current with recently formed pivots

When prices break through the third fan line a buy or sell signal isgiven Not sure what you mean by fourth target fan line Im a littledense today

Your chart work was goodthis is another handy tool for spotting thehigh probability of a price reversal or trend change

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject The Gap TradeDate Freitag 7 April 2000 004858

Hello TradersZone This trading signal doesnt show up very often but past observations have shown that its well worth watching for Dr Andrews placed a lot of emphasis on the importance of price gaps something many traders overlook This is one of his gap uses Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom The Gap Trading Technique Price gaps can be a dilemma for many traders The general rule denoting market strength or weakness after ahigh volume gap often comes up short after the initial reaction is over Many gappers simply run out ofsteam A high volume gap in itself seems to offer precious little evidence that a profitable move is about toget under way Dr Andrews used price gaps somewhat differently than others He counted a gap as 2 pivots Youll see howthat works in the following technique which uses a gap to arrive at a price level for a buy or sell order Using short-term daily price pivots label the pivot immediately preceding the gap as p0 Count the gap as 2pivots labeling it p1 amp p2 After p3 has formed and prices reverse towards a short-term p4 draw a horizontalline 2 price tics or more (individual preference)to the right of p3 Enter the market only if prices reach orpenetrate that line within a few days after reversing from p4 Please look over your own charts to see if you can find places where the gap trade technique could have beenused Send me a sample when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 001925

Hello Gordon this is my chart with a gap trade RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 065538

Hello TradersZone Thursday April 08 2000 121925 PM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt this is my chart with a gap trade TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Good examplethe gap trade technique shines when an issue in at or near a P5 Similar to the one on thechart you sent Heres another trading signal tool Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Dr Andrews used several techniques which helped him determine whether a P5 was near at hand Youllrecall that he observed most price moves ended or had a significant reversal at a P5 This technique uses alternate closing prices after a P4 has been formed As with many of his studies thenumber 5 is used The chart accompanying this segment shows that there were 5 alternate closes to thedownside after P4 was put in Dr Andrews noted that whenever 5 or more alternate closes followed a P4 theprobabilities were high that a P5 was near at hand An added feature to this chart study is the sideways channel Notice how the 2nd target price and the 5thalternate close nearly coincide

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 12 April 2000 200730

Hello Gordon This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 13 April 2000 082418

Monday April 12 2000 80730 AM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hello TradersZone Good chart example of this Andrews toolanother of his very unusual observations that workmore often than not Heres the final part of this lesson Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom In this trendline method Dr Andrews once again used the number 5 as the basis for locating aprobable reversal area He found this technique to be especially useful whenever a clear orobvious pivot count didnt show up onthe price move under study Trendlines are drawn using the course trendline method When the 5th trendline is broken theprobability is high that the trend under study has ended A mini-median line pitchfork andorsliding parallel could be used for pricing a trading order The accompanying chart of Compaq Computer is an example of how the trendline study could beused The pivot count beginning at the October low is difficult to nail down There were severalsmall areas of congestion but no sizeable corrections while prices advanced The count wasunclear By following the price action using the course trendline technique however the traderwould have been alerted to the possibility of a change of trend when the 5th trendline was brokenin early February Try this technique on your own charts When youre ready please send me an example of yourstudy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 19 April 2000 124108

Hello Gordon this is my example with 5 trendlines RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[6] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 20 April 2000 012726

Monday April 19 2000 124108 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt this is my example with 5 trendlines

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Good example of the 5 TL technique Always reminds me of how the fairly simple tools often do a better job than manyof the sophisticated studies out there

That was the last part of lesson 5 Lesson 6 attached is made in one mailing Youll find Dr Andrews trading rules alongwith a wrap-up review which uses several of his rules You might have questions about some of the rules so feel free tosend them as they arise

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Dr Andrews had an abbreviated set of trading rules on several index cards that he carried around with him in his shirtpocket He said every trading day turned up something new on his charts and by having his rules in his pocket he wasreminded of the need for a methodical approach to his analysis Quite a comment coming from the man who wrote therule book

In this the final lesson of the course Dr Andrews original trading rules and observations are presented Lets work witha few of them at this point

Using charts of issues you follow please send me an example that illustrates your interpretation of each of the followingrules

Rule 4 Anticipating major Ps

Rule 7 Penetration rule

Rule 8 Price failure rule

Rule 11 1-ML23 AR Centerline

Rule 12 Sliding Parallel rule

Rule 15 Mini-median line parallel to buy or sell

Feel free to include any other course techniques you choose to apply but please include examples of the above as aminimum Use more than one technique on a chart if your analysis supports it Send as many charts as you like alongwith your questionscomments

Lesson 6 - Dr Andrews Trading Rules

This lesson covers course rules and significant observations as taught by Dr Andrews in his original trading course Therules are those that he used in his own trading and are provided to serve as a checklist for use with the course tradingmethods youve learned

Rule 1 Where prices are always headed Rule You course members are among the fortunate few to be able to draw astraight line and know that prices are headed toward that ML Very few investors have ever applied this ML principle ofstatistics to price fluctuations and weve never seen this in any books on investment You are among the very few who

know that prices are always headed toward the newest ML

Rule 2 The Rule of coming opposites applies all through life In the bible we find Blessed at they that mourn for theyshall be comforted As investors we know that any losses can be recovered by using course methods

Rule 3 Turn your mind about or Rethink for all good is at hand We should mentally prepare ourselves for thecoming reversal in prices and other affairs Heres one way for example that you course members who know the MLrules can use When prices are skyrocketing upward we do this preparation by thinking If prices pivoted here today atthis price Id draw a new ML bisecting the distance between todays price and the price from which the rise started Andwe know now that if this is a Major Pivot prices will fall rapidly to this new ML Profits from such drops are big and quick

Rule 4 Rule for anticipating major Ps If during congestion or after a rally or decline you can count four previous Psthe fifth one is highly probable to be the one from which a new trend starts

Rule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can make a quick big profit is to watch for the EPformations

Rule 6 The other reversal rule is that prices tend to reverse at or near any ML as well as at any extension of each MLAnd also at any MLH or extensions of MLH

Rule 7 The Penetration Rule is that whenever prices gap past or plunge through any ML there is a high probability thatthey will quickly return to it temporarily and then resume the trend they had before they gapped or plunged through

Rule 8 Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P of reversal and the MLthe probability is that this price reversal will go further than it did on its approach toward the ML

Rule 9 The price failure rule is negated when the next price trend is also a failure in reaching the ML This is almostinvariably a signal of a big fast move in the direction indicated by this last space Rule 10 When alternate median lines of comparable length slope in the same direction the trend is firm and rapidprice changes take place

Rule 11 When 1-ML23 is exactly reached at P4 it can be used as a highly reliable centerline for the AR method

Rule 12 Frequently after crossing a lower MLH prices continue to rise along the MLH Since the crossing of the MLHsignals a further drop is likely use a sliding parallel along the bottom of the most recent crossing If prices drop past thatsliding parallel line a sell signal is generated

Rule 13 MLs between P2 and P3 can start from a nearby or a remote P1 since prices tend to reverse at each of theseMLs Try several such P2-P3 MLs to discover the best fit

Rule 14 The distance of each MLH from its ML is the distance of the next warning line Use these warning lineswhenever a SH has signalled a buy or sell

Rule 15 Use the MMLH as a buy or sell signal when you expect a reversal because of a P5 Also when prices are at aWL ML extension line or where course lines converge or intersect

Rule 16 Converging lines that meet prices have shown the highest probability of a trend reversal

Rule 17 Two to four days is usually the maximum between P2 and P3 for a MML P1 can be a day or so back from P2and 3

Rule 18 The most reliable ActionReaction centerlines seem to be MPL 2P line 2 Gap line peak to low or low to peak

Rule 19 When prices pass through R lines look for a pull back and then a continuing move in the direction of the passthrough

Rule 20 Use gaps as Action lines from the centerline

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 003755

Hello Gordonhere is my example for Rule 4 And I have a question What are EP formations gtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 021242

Tuesday May 04 2000 123755 PM you wrote TZgt Hello GordonTZgt here is my example for Rule 4 TZgt And I have a question What are EP formations gtgtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegtgta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hi TradersZone Good use of the warning linesalso the EP material is part of lesson 4 Rather than go backthrough the files to see when (or if) it was sent Im sending it along with this reply Glad youbrought it up Best RegardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Tuesday May 04 2000208 PM Dr Andrews used a fairly common price chart formation that he found useful at probable P5market tops and bottoms The formation generally called a wedge or pennant by chartists isreferred to in Dr Andrews trading course as the Expanding Pivot (EP) One of the few chartformations used in the course he regarded it as among the most dependable indications that amarket top was forming Closely related to the EP is his Inverted Expanding Pivot (IEP) which henoted could often be observed at market bottoms Both are regarded as intermediate and long-term reversal indicators Dr Andrews found that both formations were most reliable when they occurred after a sharprapid price move coinciding with the formation of a probable P5 He said it wasnt unusual for theformation to take several weeks to complete and that conservative traders could best avoid thewhipsaw associated with congestion patterns by trading only in the direction of the probable price

break out of the EP or IEP formation The attached charts illustrate these formations Please look over your own charts for an example ofthe EP and IEP and send me a copy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 232127

Hello Gordon Thank you for the lesson with the EP material I couldnt find it in any previous emailHere is my example for Rule 7 RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Rule 4Date Samstag 6 Mai 2000 080827

Wednesday May 05 2000 112127 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt Thank you for the lesson with the EP materialTZgt I couldnt find it in any previous emailTZgt Here is my example for Rule 7

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hi TradersZone

Glad you mentioned it earlierexcept for the EP IEP and hissideways channel Dr Andrews didnt have much to say about chartpatterns and formations These are good ones to use though

Your study of the penetration rule was good Later

Best Regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Wednesday May 05 2000801 PM

Page 66: Pitchfork primer

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject The Gap TradeDate Freitag 7 April 2000 004858

Hello TradersZone This trading signal doesnt show up very often but past observations have shown that its well worth watching for Dr Andrews placed a lot of emphasis on the importance of price gaps something many traders overlook This is one of his gap uses Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom The Gap Trading Technique Price gaps can be a dilemma for many traders The general rule denoting market strength or weakness after ahigh volume gap often comes up short after the initial reaction is over Many gappers simply run out ofsteam A high volume gap in itself seems to offer precious little evidence that a profitable move is about toget under way Dr Andrews used price gaps somewhat differently than others He counted a gap as 2 pivots Youll see howthat works in the following technique which uses a gap to arrive at a price level for a buy or sell order Using short-term daily price pivots label the pivot immediately preceding the gap as p0 Count the gap as 2pivots labeling it p1 amp p2 After p3 has formed and prices reverse towards a short-term p4 draw a horizontalline 2 price tics or more (individual preference)to the right of p3 Enter the market only if prices reach orpenetrate that line within a few days after reversing from p4 Please look over your own charts to see if you can find places where the gap trade technique could have beenused Send me a sample when youre ready

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 001925

Hello Gordon this is my chart with a gap trade RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 065538

Hello TradersZone Thursday April 08 2000 121925 PM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt this is my chart with a gap trade TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Good examplethe gap trade technique shines when an issue in at or near a P5 Similar to the one on thechart you sent Heres another trading signal tool Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Dr Andrews used several techniques which helped him determine whether a P5 was near at hand Youllrecall that he observed most price moves ended or had a significant reversal at a P5 This technique uses alternate closing prices after a P4 has been formed As with many of his studies thenumber 5 is used The chart accompanying this segment shows that there were 5 alternate closes to thedownside after P4 was put in Dr Andrews noted that whenever 5 or more alternate closes followed a P4 theprobabilities were high that a P5 was near at hand An added feature to this chart study is the sideways channel Notice how the 2nd target price and the 5thalternate close nearly coincide

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 12 April 2000 200730

Hello Gordon This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 13 April 2000 082418

Monday April 12 2000 80730 AM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hello TradersZone Good chart example of this Andrews toolanother of his very unusual observations that workmore often than not Heres the final part of this lesson Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom In this trendline method Dr Andrews once again used the number 5 as the basis for locating aprobable reversal area He found this technique to be especially useful whenever a clear orobvious pivot count didnt show up onthe price move under study Trendlines are drawn using the course trendline method When the 5th trendline is broken theprobability is high that the trend under study has ended A mini-median line pitchfork andorsliding parallel could be used for pricing a trading order The accompanying chart of Compaq Computer is an example of how the trendline study could beused The pivot count beginning at the October low is difficult to nail down There were severalsmall areas of congestion but no sizeable corrections while prices advanced The count wasunclear By following the price action using the course trendline technique however the traderwould have been alerted to the possibility of a change of trend when the 5th trendline was brokenin early February Try this technique on your own charts When youre ready please send me an example of yourstudy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 19 April 2000 124108

Hello Gordon this is my example with 5 trendlines RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[6] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 20 April 2000 012726

Monday April 19 2000 124108 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt this is my example with 5 trendlines

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Good example of the 5 TL technique Always reminds me of how the fairly simple tools often do a better job than manyof the sophisticated studies out there

That was the last part of lesson 5 Lesson 6 attached is made in one mailing Youll find Dr Andrews trading rules alongwith a wrap-up review which uses several of his rules You might have questions about some of the rules so feel free tosend them as they arise

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Dr Andrews had an abbreviated set of trading rules on several index cards that he carried around with him in his shirtpocket He said every trading day turned up something new on his charts and by having his rules in his pocket he wasreminded of the need for a methodical approach to his analysis Quite a comment coming from the man who wrote therule book

In this the final lesson of the course Dr Andrews original trading rules and observations are presented Lets work witha few of them at this point

Using charts of issues you follow please send me an example that illustrates your interpretation of each of the followingrules

Rule 4 Anticipating major Ps

Rule 7 Penetration rule

Rule 8 Price failure rule

Rule 11 1-ML23 AR Centerline

Rule 12 Sliding Parallel rule

Rule 15 Mini-median line parallel to buy or sell

Feel free to include any other course techniques you choose to apply but please include examples of the above as aminimum Use more than one technique on a chart if your analysis supports it Send as many charts as you like alongwith your questionscomments

Lesson 6 - Dr Andrews Trading Rules

This lesson covers course rules and significant observations as taught by Dr Andrews in his original trading course Therules are those that he used in his own trading and are provided to serve as a checklist for use with the course tradingmethods youve learned

Rule 1 Where prices are always headed Rule You course members are among the fortunate few to be able to draw astraight line and know that prices are headed toward that ML Very few investors have ever applied this ML principle ofstatistics to price fluctuations and weve never seen this in any books on investment You are among the very few who

know that prices are always headed toward the newest ML

Rule 2 The Rule of coming opposites applies all through life In the bible we find Blessed at they that mourn for theyshall be comforted As investors we know that any losses can be recovered by using course methods

Rule 3 Turn your mind about or Rethink for all good is at hand We should mentally prepare ourselves for thecoming reversal in prices and other affairs Heres one way for example that you course members who know the MLrules can use When prices are skyrocketing upward we do this preparation by thinking If prices pivoted here today atthis price Id draw a new ML bisecting the distance between todays price and the price from which the rise started Andwe know now that if this is a Major Pivot prices will fall rapidly to this new ML Profits from such drops are big and quick

Rule 4 Rule for anticipating major Ps If during congestion or after a rally or decline you can count four previous Psthe fifth one is highly probable to be the one from which a new trend starts

Rule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can make a quick big profit is to watch for the EPformations

Rule 6 The other reversal rule is that prices tend to reverse at or near any ML as well as at any extension of each MLAnd also at any MLH or extensions of MLH

Rule 7 The Penetration Rule is that whenever prices gap past or plunge through any ML there is a high probability thatthey will quickly return to it temporarily and then resume the trend they had before they gapped or plunged through

Rule 8 Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P of reversal and the MLthe probability is that this price reversal will go further than it did on its approach toward the ML

Rule 9 The price failure rule is negated when the next price trend is also a failure in reaching the ML This is almostinvariably a signal of a big fast move in the direction indicated by this last space Rule 10 When alternate median lines of comparable length slope in the same direction the trend is firm and rapidprice changes take place

Rule 11 When 1-ML23 is exactly reached at P4 it can be used as a highly reliable centerline for the AR method

Rule 12 Frequently after crossing a lower MLH prices continue to rise along the MLH Since the crossing of the MLHsignals a further drop is likely use a sliding parallel along the bottom of the most recent crossing If prices drop past thatsliding parallel line a sell signal is generated

Rule 13 MLs between P2 and P3 can start from a nearby or a remote P1 since prices tend to reverse at each of theseMLs Try several such P2-P3 MLs to discover the best fit

Rule 14 The distance of each MLH from its ML is the distance of the next warning line Use these warning lineswhenever a SH has signalled a buy or sell

Rule 15 Use the MMLH as a buy or sell signal when you expect a reversal because of a P5 Also when prices are at aWL ML extension line or where course lines converge or intersect

Rule 16 Converging lines that meet prices have shown the highest probability of a trend reversal

Rule 17 Two to four days is usually the maximum between P2 and P3 for a MML P1 can be a day or so back from P2and 3

Rule 18 The most reliable ActionReaction centerlines seem to be MPL 2P line 2 Gap line peak to low or low to peak

Rule 19 When prices pass through R lines look for a pull back and then a continuing move in the direction of the passthrough

Rule 20 Use gaps as Action lines from the centerline

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 003755

Hello Gordonhere is my example for Rule 4 And I have a question What are EP formations gtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 021242

Tuesday May 04 2000 123755 PM you wrote TZgt Hello GordonTZgt here is my example for Rule 4 TZgt And I have a question What are EP formations gtgtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegtgta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hi TradersZone Good use of the warning linesalso the EP material is part of lesson 4 Rather than go backthrough the files to see when (or if) it was sent Im sending it along with this reply Glad youbrought it up Best RegardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Tuesday May 04 2000208 PM Dr Andrews used a fairly common price chart formation that he found useful at probable P5market tops and bottoms The formation generally called a wedge or pennant by chartists isreferred to in Dr Andrews trading course as the Expanding Pivot (EP) One of the few chartformations used in the course he regarded it as among the most dependable indications that amarket top was forming Closely related to the EP is his Inverted Expanding Pivot (IEP) which henoted could often be observed at market bottoms Both are regarded as intermediate and long-term reversal indicators Dr Andrews found that both formations were most reliable when they occurred after a sharprapid price move coinciding with the formation of a probable P5 He said it wasnt unusual for theformation to take several weeks to complete and that conservative traders could best avoid thewhipsaw associated with congestion patterns by trading only in the direction of the probable price

break out of the EP or IEP formation The attached charts illustrate these formations Please look over your own charts for an example ofthe EP and IEP and send me a copy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 232127

Hello Gordon Thank you for the lesson with the EP material I couldnt find it in any previous emailHere is my example for Rule 7 RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Rule 4Date Samstag 6 Mai 2000 080827

Wednesday May 05 2000 112127 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt Thank you for the lesson with the EP materialTZgt I couldnt find it in any previous emailTZgt Here is my example for Rule 7

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hi TradersZone

Glad you mentioned it earlierexcept for the EP IEP and hissideways channel Dr Andrews didnt have much to say about chartpatterns and formations These are good ones to use though

Your study of the penetration rule was good Later

Best Regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Wednesday May 05 2000801 PM

Page 67: Pitchfork primer

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 001925

Hello Gordon this is my chart with a gap trade RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 065538

Hello TradersZone Thursday April 08 2000 121925 PM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt this is my chart with a gap trade TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Good examplethe gap trade technique shines when an issue in at or near a P5 Similar to the one on thechart you sent Heres another trading signal tool Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Dr Andrews used several techniques which helped him determine whether a P5 was near at hand Youllrecall that he observed most price moves ended or had a significant reversal at a P5 This technique uses alternate closing prices after a P4 has been formed As with many of his studies thenumber 5 is used The chart accompanying this segment shows that there were 5 alternate closes to thedownside after P4 was put in Dr Andrews noted that whenever 5 or more alternate closes followed a P4 theprobabilities were high that a P5 was near at hand An added feature to this chart study is the sideways channel Notice how the 2nd target price and the 5thalternate close nearly coincide

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 12 April 2000 200730

Hello Gordon This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 13 April 2000 082418

Monday April 12 2000 80730 AM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hello TradersZone Good chart example of this Andrews toolanother of his very unusual observations that workmore often than not Heres the final part of this lesson Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom In this trendline method Dr Andrews once again used the number 5 as the basis for locating aprobable reversal area He found this technique to be especially useful whenever a clear orobvious pivot count didnt show up onthe price move under study Trendlines are drawn using the course trendline method When the 5th trendline is broken theprobability is high that the trend under study has ended A mini-median line pitchfork andorsliding parallel could be used for pricing a trading order The accompanying chart of Compaq Computer is an example of how the trendline study could beused The pivot count beginning at the October low is difficult to nail down There were severalsmall areas of congestion but no sizeable corrections while prices advanced The count wasunclear By following the price action using the course trendline technique however the traderwould have been alerted to the possibility of a change of trend when the 5th trendline was brokenin early February Try this technique on your own charts When youre ready please send me an example of yourstudy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 19 April 2000 124108

Hello Gordon this is my example with 5 trendlines RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[6] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 20 April 2000 012726

Monday April 19 2000 124108 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt this is my example with 5 trendlines

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Good example of the 5 TL technique Always reminds me of how the fairly simple tools often do a better job than manyof the sophisticated studies out there

That was the last part of lesson 5 Lesson 6 attached is made in one mailing Youll find Dr Andrews trading rules alongwith a wrap-up review which uses several of his rules You might have questions about some of the rules so feel free tosend them as they arise

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Dr Andrews had an abbreviated set of trading rules on several index cards that he carried around with him in his shirtpocket He said every trading day turned up something new on his charts and by having his rules in his pocket he wasreminded of the need for a methodical approach to his analysis Quite a comment coming from the man who wrote therule book

In this the final lesson of the course Dr Andrews original trading rules and observations are presented Lets work witha few of them at this point

Using charts of issues you follow please send me an example that illustrates your interpretation of each of the followingrules

Rule 4 Anticipating major Ps

Rule 7 Penetration rule

Rule 8 Price failure rule

Rule 11 1-ML23 AR Centerline

Rule 12 Sliding Parallel rule

Rule 15 Mini-median line parallel to buy or sell

Feel free to include any other course techniques you choose to apply but please include examples of the above as aminimum Use more than one technique on a chart if your analysis supports it Send as many charts as you like alongwith your questionscomments

Lesson 6 - Dr Andrews Trading Rules

This lesson covers course rules and significant observations as taught by Dr Andrews in his original trading course Therules are those that he used in his own trading and are provided to serve as a checklist for use with the course tradingmethods youve learned

Rule 1 Where prices are always headed Rule You course members are among the fortunate few to be able to draw astraight line and know that prices are headed toward that ML Very few investors have ever applied this ML principle ofstatistics to price fluctuations and weve never seen this in any books on investment You are among the very few who

know that prices are always headed toward the newest ML

Rule 2 The Rule of coming opposites applies all through life In the bible we find Blessed at they that mourn for theyshall be comforted As investors we know that any losses can be recovered by using course methods

Rule 3 Turn your mind about or Rethink for all good is at hand We should mentally prepare ourselves for thecoming reversal in prices and other affairs Heres one way for example that you course members who know the MLrules can use When prices are skyrocketing upward we do this preparation by thinking If prices pivoted here today atthis price Id draw a new ML bisecting the distance between todays price and the price from which the rise started Andwe know now that if this is a Major Pivot prices will fall rapidly to this new ML Profits from such drops are big and quick

Rule 4 Rule for anticipating major Ps If during congestion or after a rally or decline you can count four previous Psthe fifth one is highly probable to be the one from which a new trend starts

Rule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can make a quick big profit is to watch for the EPformations

Rule 6 The other reversal rule is that prices tend to reverse at or near any ML as well as at any extension of each MLAnd also at any MLH or extensions of MLH

Rule 7 The Penetration Rule is that whenever prices gap past or plunge through any ML there is a high probability thatthey will quickly return to it temporarily and then resume the trend they had before they gapped or plunged through

Rule 8 Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P of reversal and the MLthe probability is that this price reversal will go further than it did on its approach toward the ML

Rule 9 The price failure rule is negated when the next price trend is also a failure in reaching the ML This is almostinvariably a signal of a big fast move in the direction indicated by this last space Rule 10 When alternate median lines of comparable length slope in the same direction the trend is firm and rapidprice changes take place

Rule 11 When 1-ML23 is exactly reached at P4 it can be used as a highly reliable centerline for the AR method

Rule 12 Frequently after crossing a lower MLH prices continue to rise along the MLH Since the crossing of the MLHsignals a further drop is likely use a sliding parallel along the bottom of the most recent crossing If prices drop past thatsliding parallel line a sell signal is generated

Rule 13 MLs between P2 and P3 can start from a nearby or a remote P1 since prices tend to reverse at each of theseMLs Try several such P2-P3 MLs to discover the best fit

Rule 14 The distance of each MLH from its ML is the distance of the next warning line Use these warning lineswhenever a SH has signalled a buy or sell

Rule 15 Use the MMLH as a buy or sell signal when you expect a reversal because of a P5 Also when prices are at aWL ML extension line or where course lines converge or intersect

Rule 16 Converging lines that meet prices have shown the highest probability of a trend reversal

Rule 17 Two to four days is usually the maximum between P2 and P3 for a MML P1 can be a day or so back from P2and 3

Rule 18 The most reliable ActionReaction centerlines seem to be MPL 2P line 2 Gap line peak to low or low to peak

Rule 19 When prices pass through R lines look for a pull back and then a continuing move in the direction of the passthrough

Rule 20 Use gaps as Action lines from the centerline

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 003755

Hello Gordonhere is my example for Rule 4 And I have a question What are EP formations gtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 021242

Tuesday May 04 2000 123755 PM you wrote TZgt Hello GordonTZgt here is my example for Rule 4 TZgt And I have a question What are EP formations gtgtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegtgta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hi TradersZone Good use of the warning linesalso the EP material is part of lesson 4 Rather than go backthrough the files to see when (or if) it was sent Im sending it along with this reply Glad youbrought it up Best RegardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Tuesday May 04 2000208 PM Dr Andrews used a fairly common price chart formation that he found useful at probable P5market tops and bottoms The formation generally called a wedge or pennant by chartists isreferred to in Dr Andrews trading course as the Expanding Pivot (EP) One of the few chartformations used in the course he regarded it as among the most dependable indications that amarket top was forming Closely related to the EP is his Inverted Expanding Pivot (IEP) which henoted could often be observed at market bottoms Both are regarded as intermediate and long-term reversal indicators Dr Andrews found that both formations were most reliable when they occurred after a sharprapid price move coinciding with the formation of a probable P5 He said it wasnt unusual for theformation to take several weeks to complete and that conservative traders could best avoid thewhipsaw associated with congestion patterns by trading only in the direction of the probable price

break out of the EP or IEP formation The attached charts illustrate these formations Please look over your own charts for an example ofthe EP and IEP and send me a copy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 232127

Hello Gordon Thank you for the lesson with the EP material I couldnt find it in any previous emailHere is my example for Rule 7 RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Rule 4Date Samstag 6 Mai 2000 080827

Wednesday May 05 2000 112127 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt Thank you for the lesson with the EP materialTZgt I couldnt find it in any previous emailTZgt Here is my example for Rule 7

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hi TradersZone

Glad you mentioned it earlierexcept for the EP IEP and hissideways channel Dr Andrews didnt have much to say about chartpatterns and formations These are good ones to use though

Your study of the penetration rule was good Later

Best Regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Wednesday May 05 2000801 PM

Page 68: Pitchfork primer

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Sonntag 9 April 2000 065538

Hello TradersZone Thursday April 08 2000 121925 PM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt this is my chart with a gap trade TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Good examplethe gap trade technique shines when an issue in at or near a P5 Similar to the one on thechart you sent Heres another trading signal tool Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Dr Andrews used several techniques which helped him determine whether a P5 was near at hand Youllrecall that he observed most price moves ended or had a significant reversal at a P5 This technique uses alternate closing prices after a P4 has been formed As with many of his studies thenumber 5 is used The chart accompanying this segment shows that there were 5 alternate closes to thedownside after P4 was put in Dr Andrews noted that whenever 5 or more alternate closes followed a P4 theprobabilities were high that a P5 was near at hand An added feature to this chart study is the sideways channel Notice how the 2nd target price and the 5thalternate close nearly coincide

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 12 April 2000 200730

Hello Gordon This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 13 April 2000 082418

Monday April 12 2000 80730 AM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hello TradersZone Good chart example of this Andrews toolanother of his very unusual observations that workmore often than not Heres the final part of this lesson Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom In this trendline method Dr Andrews once again used the number 5 as the basis for locating aprobable reversal area He found this technique to be especially useful whenever a clear orobvious pivot count didnt show up onthe price move under study Trendlines are drawn using the course trendline method When the 5th trendline is broken theprobability is high that the trend under study has ended A mini-median line pitchfork andorsliding parallel could be used for pricing a trading order The accompanying chart of Compaq Computer is an example of how the trendline study could beused The pivot count beginning at the October low is difficult to nail down There were severalsmall areas of congestion but no sizeable corrections while prices advanced The count wasunclear By following the price action using the course trendline technique however the traderwould have been alerted to the possibility of a change of trend when the 5th trendline was brokenin early February Try this technique on your own charts When youre ready please send me an example of yourstudy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 19 April 2000 124108

Hello Gordon this is my example with 5 trendlines RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[6] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 20 April 2000 012726

Monday April 19 2000 124108 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt this is my example with 5 trendlines

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Good example of the 5 TL technique Always reminds me of how the fairly simple tools often do a better job than manyof the sophisticated studies out there

That was the last part of lesson 5 Lesson 6 attached is made in one mailing Youll find Dr Andrews trading rules alongwith a wrap-up review which uses several of his rules You might have questions about some of the rules so feel free tosend them as they arise

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Dr Andrews had an abbreviated set of trading rules on several index cards that he carried around with him in his shirtpocket He said every trading day turned up something new on his charts and by having his rules in his pocket he wasreminded of the need for a methodical approach to his analysis Quite a comment coming from the man who wrote therule book

In this the final lesson of the course Dr Andrews original trading rules and observations are presented Lets work witha few of them at this point

Using charts of issues you follow please send me an example that illustrates your interpretation of each of the followingrules

Rule 4 Anticipating major Ps

Rule 7 Penetration rule

Rule 8 Price failure rule

Rule 11 1-ML23 AR Centerline

Rule 12 Sliding Parallel rule

Rule 15 Mini-median line parallel to buy or sell

Feel free to include any other course techniques you choose to apply but please include examples of the above as aminimum Use more than one technique on a chart if your analysis supports it Send as many charts as you like alongwith your questionscomments

Lesson 6 - Dr Andrews Trading Rules

This lesson covers course rules and significant observations as taught by Dr Andrews in his original trading course Therules are those that he used in his own trading and are provided to serve as a checklist for use with the course tradingmethods youve learned

Rule 1 Where prices are always headed Rule You course members are among the fortunate few to be able to draw astraight line and know that prices are headed toward that ML Very few investors have ever applied this ML principle ofstatistics to price fluctuations and weve never seen this in any books on investment You are among the very few who

know that prices are always headed toward the newest ML

Rule 2 The Rule of coming opposites applies all through life In the bible we find Blessed at they that mourn for theyshall be comforted As investors we know that any losses can be recovered by using course methods

Rule 3 Turn your mind about or Rethink for all good is at hand We should mentally prepare ourselves for thecoming reversal in prices and other affairs Heres one way for example that you course members who know the MLrules can use When prices are skyrocketing upward we do this preparation by thinking If prices pivoted here today atthis price Id draw a new ML bisecting the distance between todays price and the price from which the rise started Andwe know now that if this is a Major Pivot prices will fall rapidly to this new ML Profits from such drops are big and quick

Rule 4 Rule for anticipating major Ps If during congestion or after a rally or decline you can count four previous Psthe fifth one is highly probable to be the one from which a new trend starts

Rule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can make a quick big profit is to watch for the EPformations

Rule 6 The other reversal rule is that prices tend to reverse at or near any ML as well as at any extension of each MLAnd also at any MLH or extensions of MLH

Rule 7 The Penetration Rule is that whenever prices gap past or plunge through any ML there is a high probability thatthey will quickly return to it temporarily and then resume the trend they had before they gapped or plunged through

Rule 8 Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P of reversal and the MLthe probability is that this price reversal will go further than it did on its approach toward the ML

Rule 9 The price failure rule is negated when the next price trend is also a failure in reaching the ML This is almostinvariably a signal of a big fast move in the direction indicated by this last space Rule 10 When alternate median lines of comparable length slope in the same direction the trend is firm and rapidprice changes take place

Rule 11 When 1-ML23 is exactly reached at P4 it can be used as a highly reliable centerline for the AR method

Rule 12 Frequently after crossing a lower MLH prices continue to rise along the MLH Since the crossing of the MLHsignals a further drop is likely use a sliding parallel along the bottom of the most recent crossing If prices drop past thatsliding parallel line a sell signal is generated

Rule 13 MLs between P2 and P3 can start from a nearby or a remote P1 since prices tend to reverse at each of theseMLs Try several such P2-P3 MLs to discover the best fit

Rule 14 The distance of each MLH from its ML is the distance of the next warning line Use these warning lineswhenever a SH has signalled a buy or sell

Rule 15 Use the MMLH as a buy or sell signal when you expect a reversal because of a P5 Also when prices are at aWL ML extension line or where course lines converge or intersect

Rule 16 Converging lines that meet prices have shown the highest probability of a trend reversal

Rule 17 Two to four days is usually the maximum between P2 and P3 for a MML P1 can be a day or so back from P2and 3

Rule 18 The most reliable ActionReaction centerlines seem to be MPL 2P line 2 Gap line peak to low or low to peak

Rule 19 When prices pass through R lines look for a pull back and then a continuing move in the direction of the passthrough

Rule 20 Use gaps as Action lines from the centerline

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 003755

Hello Gordonhere is my example for Rule 4 And I have a question What are EP formations gtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 021242

Tuesday May 04 2000 123755 PM you wrote TZgt Hello GordonTZgt here is my example for Rule 4 TZgt And I have a question What are EP formations gtgtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegtgta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hi TradersZone Good use of the warning linesalso the EP material is part of lesson 4 Rather than go backthrough the files to see when (or if) it was sent Im sending it along with this reply Glad youbrought it up Best RegardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Tuesday May 04 2000208 PM Dr Andrews used a fairly common price chart formation that he found useful at probable P5market tops and bottoms The formation generally called a wedge or pennant by chartists isreferred to in Dr Andrews trading course as the Expanding Pivot (EP) One of the few chartformations used in the course he regarded it as among the most dependable indications that amarket top was forming Closely related to the EP is his Inverted Expanding Pivot (IEP) which henoted could often be observed at market bottoms Both are regarded as intermediate and long-term reversal indicators Dr Andrews found that both formations were most reliable when they occurred after a sharprapid price move coinciding with the formation of a probable P5 He said it wasnt unusual for theformation to take several weeks to complete and that conservative traders could best avoid thewhipsaw associated with congestion patterns by trading only in the direction of the probable price

break out of the EP or IEP formation The attached charts illustrate these formations Please look over your own charts for an example ofthe EP and IEP and send me a copy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 232127

Hello Gordon Thank you for the lesson with the EP material I couldnt find it in any previous emailHere is my example for Rule 7 RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Rule 4Date Samstag 6 Mai 2000 080827

Wednesday May 05 2000 112127 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt Thank you for the lesson with the EP materialTZgt I couldnt find it in any previous emailTZgt Here is my example for Rule 7

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hi TradersZone

Glad you mentioned it earlierexcept for the EP IEP and hissideways channel Dr Andrews didnt have much to say about chartpatterns and formations These are good ones to use though

Your study of the penetration rule was good Later

Best Regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Wednesday May 05 2000801 PM

Page 69: Pitchfork primer

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[2] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 12 April 2000 200730

Hello Gordon This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 13 April 2000 082418

Monday April 12 2000 80730 AM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hello TradersZone Good chart example of this Andrews toolanother of his very unusual observations that workmore often than not Heres the final part of this lesson Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom In this trendline method Dr Andrews once again used the number 5 as the basis for locating aprobable reversal area He found this technique to be especially useful whenever a clear orobvious pivot count didnt show up onthe price move under study Trendlines are drawn using the course trendline method When the 5th trendline is broken theprobability is high that the trend under study has ended A mini-median line pitchfork andorsliding parallel could be used for pricing a trading order The accompanying chart of Compaq Computer is an example of how the trendline study could beused The pivot count beginning at the October low is difficult to nail down There were severalsmall areas of congestion but no sizeable corrections while prices advanced The count wasunclear By following the price action using the course trendline technique however the traderwould have been alerted to the possibility of a change of trend when the 5th trendline was brokenin early February Try this technique on your own charts When youre ready please send me an example of yourstudy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 19 April 2000 124108

Hello Gordon this is my example with 5 trendlines RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[6] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 20 April 2000 012726

Monday April 19 2000 124108 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt this is my example with 5 trendlines

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Good example of the 5 TL technique Always reminds me of how the fairly simple tools often do a better job than manyof the sophisticated studies out there

That was the last part of lesson 5 Lesson 6 attached is made in one mailing Youll find Dr Andrews trading rules alongwith a wrap-up review which uses several of his rules You might have questions about some of the rules so feel free tosend them as they arise

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Dr Andrews had an abbreviated set of trading rules on several index cards that he carried around with him in his shirtpocket He said every trading day turned up something new on his charts and by having his rules in his pocket he wasreminded of the need for a methodical approach to his analysis Quite a comment coming from the man who wrote therule book

In this the final lesson of the course Dr Andrews original trading rules and observations are presented Lets work witha few of them at this point

Using charts of issues you follow please send me an example that illustrates your interpretation of each of the followingrules

Rule 4 Anticipating major Ps

Rule 7 Penetration rule

Rule 8 Price failure rule

Rule 11 1-ML23 AR Centerline

Rule 12 Sliding Parallel rule

Rule 15 Mini-median line parallel to buy or sell

Feel free to include any other course techniques you choose to apply but please include examples of the above as aminimum Use more than one technique on a chart if your analysis supports it Send as many charts as you like alongwith your questionscomments

Lesson 6 - Dr Andrews Trading Rules

This lesson covers course rules and significant observations as taught by Dr Andrews in his original trading course Therules are those that he used in his own trading and are provided to serve as a checklist for use with the course tradingmethods youve learned

Rule 1 Where prices are always headed Rule You course members are among the fortunate few to be able to draw astraight line and know that prices are headed toward that ML Very few investors have ever applied this ML principle ofstatistics to price fluctuations and weve never seen this in any books on investment You are among the very few who

know that prices are always headed toward the newest ML

Rule 2 The Rule of coming opposites applies all through life In the bible we find Blessed at they that mourn for theyshall be comforted As investors we know that any losses can be recovered by using course methods

Rule 3 Turn your mind about or Rethink for all good is at hand We should mentally prepare ourselves for thecoming reversal in prices and other affairs Heres one way for example that you course members who know the MLrules can use When prices are skyrocketing upward we do this preparation by thinking If prices pivoted here today atthis price Id draw a new ML bisecting the distance between todays price and the price from which the rise started Andwe know now that if this is a Major Pivot prices will fall rapidly to this new ML Profits from such drops are big and quick

Rule 4 Rule for anticipating major Ps If during congestion or after a rally or decline you can count four previous Psthe fifth one is highly probable to be the one from which a new trend starts

Rule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can make a quick big profit is to watch for the EPformations

Rule 6 The other reversal rule is that prices tend to reverse at or near any ML as well as at any extension of each MLAnd also at any MLH or extensions of MLH

Rule 7 The Penetration Rule is that whenever prices gap past or plunge through any ML there is a high probability thatthey will quickly return to it temporarily and then resume the trend they had before they gapped or plunged through

Rule 8 Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P of reversal and the MLthe probability is that this price reversal will go further than it did on its approach toward the ML

Rule 9 The price failure rule is negated when the next price trend is also a failure in reaching the ML This is almostinvariably a signal of a big fast move in the direction indicated by this last space Rule 10 When alternate median lines of comparable length slope in the same direction the trend is firm and rapidprice changes take place

Rule 11 When 1-ML23 is exactly reached at P4 it can be used as a highly reliable centerline for the AR method

Rule 12 Frequently after crossing a lower MLH prices continue to rise along the MLH Since the crossing of the MLHsignals a further drop is likely use a sliding parallel along the bottom of the most recent crossing If prices drop past thatsliding parallel line a sell signal is generated

Rule 13 MLs between P2 and P3 can start from a nearby or a remote P1 since prices tend to reverse at each of theseMLs Try several such P2-P3 MLs to discover the best fit

Rule 14 The distance of each MLH from its ML is the distance of the next warning line Use these warning lineswhenever a SH has signalled a buy or sell

Rule 15 Use the MMLH as a buy or sell signal when you expect a reversal because of a P5 Also when prices are at aWL ML extension line or where course lines converge or intersect

Rule 16 Converging lines that meet prices have shown the highest probability of a trend reversal

Rule 17 Two to four days is usually the maximum between P2 and P3 for a MML P1 can be a day or so back from P2and 3

Rule 18 The most reliable ActionReaction centerlines seem to be MPL 2P line 2 Gap line peak to low or low to peak

Rule 19 When prices pass through R lines look for a pull back and then a continuing move in the direction of the passthrough

Rule 20 Use gaps as Action lines from the centerline

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 003755

Hello Gordonhere is my example for Rule 4 And I have a question What are EP formations gtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 021242

Tuesday May 04 2000 123755 PM you wrote TZgt Hello GordonTZgt here is my example for Rule 4 TZgt And I have a question What are EP formations gtgtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegtgta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hi TradersZone Good use of the warning linesalso the EP material is part of lesson 4 Rather than go backthrough the files to see when (or if) it was sent Im sending it along with this reply Glad youbrought it up Best RegardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Tuesday May 04 2000208 PM Dr Andrews used a fairly common price chart formation that he found useful at probable P5market tops and bottoms The formation generally called a wedge or pennant by chartists isreferred to in Dr Andrews trading course as the Expanding Pivot (EP) One of the few chartformations used in the course he regarded it as among the most dependable indications that amarket top was forming Closely related to the EP is his Inverted Expanding Pivot (IEP) which henoted could often be observed at market bottoms Both are regarded as intermediate and long-term reversal indicators Dr Andrews found that both formations were most reliable when they occurred after a sharprapid price move coinciding with the formation of a probable P5 He said it wasnt unusual for theformation to take several weeks to complete and that conservative traders could best avoid thewhipsaw associated with congestion patterns by trading only in the direction of the probable price

break out of the EP or IEP formation The attached charts illustrate these formations Please look over your own charts for an example ofthe EP and IEP and send me a copy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 232127

Hello Gordon Thank you for the lesson with the EP material I couldnt find it in any previous emailHere is my example for Rule 7 RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Rule 4Date Samstag 6 Mai 2000 080827

Wednesday May 05 2000 112127 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt Thank you for the lesson with the EP materialTZgt I couldnt find it in any previous emailTZgt Here is my example for Rule 7

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hi TradersZone

Glad you mentioned it earlierexcept for the EP IEP and hissideways channel Dr Andrews didnt have much to say about chartpatterns and formations These are good ones to use though

Your study of the penetration rule was good Later

Best Regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Wednesday May 05 2000801 PM

Page 70: Pitchfork primer

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 13 April 2000 082418

Monday April 12 2000 80730 AM you wrote TZgt Hello Gordon TZgt This is a chart with an example for the 5 alternate closes TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hello TradersZone Good chart example of this Andrews toolanother of his very unusual observations that workmore often than not Heres the final part of this lesson Best regardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom In this trendline method Dr Andrews once again used the number 5 as the basis for locating aprobable reversal area He found this technique to be especially useful whenever a clear orobvious pivot count didnt show up onthe price move under study Trendlines are drawn using the course trendline method When the 5th trendline is broken theprobability is high that the trend under study has ended A mini-median line pitchfork andorsliding parallel could be used for pricing a trading order The accompanying chart of Compaq Computer is an example of how the trendline study could beused The pivot count beginning at the October low is difficult to nail down There were severalsmall areas of congestion but no sizeable corrections while prices advanced The count wasunclear By following the price action using the course trendline technique however the traderwould have been alerted to the possibility of a change of trend when the 5th trendline was brokenin early February Try this technique on your own charts When youre ready please send me an example of yourstudy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 19 April 2000 124108

Hello Gordon this is my example with 5 trendlines RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[6] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 20 April 2000 012726

Monday April 19 2000 124108 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt this is my example with 5 trendlines

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Good example of the 5 TL technique Always reminds me of how the fairly simple tools often do a better job than manyof the sophisticated studies out there

That was the last part of lesson 5 Lesson 6 attached is made in one mailing Youll find Dr Andrews trading rules alongwith a wrap-up review which uses several of his rules You might have questions about some of the rules so feel free tosend them as they arise

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Dr Andrews had an abbreviated set of trading rules on several index cards that he carried around with him in his shirtpocket He said every trading day turned up something new on his charts and by having his rules in his pocket he wasreminded of the need for a methodical approach to his analysis Quite a comment coming from the man who wrote therule book

In this the final lesson of the course Dr Andrews original trading rules and observations are presented Lets work witha few of them at this point

Using charts of issues you follow please send me an example that illustrates your interpretation of each of the followingrules

Rule 4 Anticipating major Ps

Rule 7 Penetration rule

Rule 8 Price failure rule

Rule 11 1-ML23 AR Centerline

Rule 12 Sliding Parallel rule

Rule 15 Mini-median line parallel to buy or sell

Feel free to include any other course techniques you choose to apply but please include examples of the above as aminimum Use more than one technique on a chart if your analysis supports it Send as many charts as you like alongwith your questionscomments

Lesson 6 - Dr Andrews Trading Rules

This lesson covers course rules and significant observations as taught by Dr Andrews in his original trading course Therules are those that he used in his own trading and are provided to serve as a checklist for use with the course tradingmethods youve learned

Rule 1 Where prices are always headed Rule You course members are among the fortunate few to be able to draw astraight line and know that prices are headed toward that ML Very few investors have ever applied this ML principle ofstatistics to price fluctuations and weve never seen this in any books on investment You are among the very few who

know that prices are always headed toward the newest ML

Rule 2 The Rule of coming opposites applies all through life In the bible we find Blessed at they that mourn for theyshall be comforted As investors we know that any losses can be recovered by using course methods

Rule 3 Turn your mind about or Rethink for all good is at hand We should mentally prepare ourselves for thecoming reversal in prices and other affairs Heres one way for example that you course members who know the MLrules can use When prices are skyrocketing upward we do this preparation by thinking If prices pivoted here today atthis price Id draw a new ML bisecting the distance between todays price and the price from which the rise started Andwe know now that if this is a Major Pivot prices will fall rapidly to this new ML Profits from such drops are big and quick

Rule 4 Rule for anticipating major Ps If during congestion or after a rally or decline you can count four previous Psthe fifth one is highly probable to be the one from which a new trend starts

Rule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can make a quick big profit is to watch for the EPformations

Rule 6 The other reversal rule is that prices tend to reverse at or near any ML as well as at any extension of each MLAnd also at any MLH or extensions of MLH

Rule 7 The Penetration Rule is that whenever prices gap past or plunge through any ML there is a high probability thatthey will quickly return to it temporarily and then resume the trend they had before they gapped or plunged through

Rule 8 Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P of reversal and the MLthe probability is that this price reversal will go further than it did on its approach toward the ML

Rule 9 The price failure rule is negated when the next price trend is also a failure in reaching the ML This is almostinvariably a signal of a big fast move in the direction indicated by this last space Rule 10 When alternate median lines of comparable length slope in the same direction the trend is firm and rapidprice changes take place

Rule 11 When 1-ML23 is exactly reached at P4 it can be used as a highly reliable centerline for the AR method

Rule 12 Frequently after crossing a lower MLH prices continue to rise along the MLH Since the crossing of the MLHsignals a further drop is likely use a sliding parallel along the bottom of the most recent crossing If prices drop past thatsliding parallel line a sell signal is generated

Rule 13 MLs between P2 and P3 can start from a nearby or a remote P1 since prices tend to reverse at each of theseMLs Try several such P2-P3 MLs to discover the best fit

Rule 14 The distance of each MLH from its ML is the distance of the next warning line Use these warning lineswhenever a SH has signalled a buy or sell

Rule 15 Use the MMLH as a buy or sell signal when you expect a reversal because of a P5 Also when prices are at aWL ML extension line or where course lines converge or intersect

Rule 16 Converging lines that meet prices have shown the highest probability of a trend reversal

Rule 17 Two to four days is usually the maximum between P2 and P3 for a MML P1 can be a day or so back from P2and 3

Rule 18 The most reliable ActionReaction centerlines seem to be MPL 2P line 2 Gap line peak to low or low to peak

Rule 19 When prices pass through R lines look for a pull back and then a continuing move in the direction of the passthrough

Rule 20 Use gaps as Action lines from the centerline

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 003755

Hello Gordonhere is my example for Rule 4 And I have a question What are EP formations gtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 021242

Tuesday May 04 2000 123755 PM you wrote TZgt Hello GordonTZgt here is my example for Rule 4 TZgt And I have a question What are EP formations gtgtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegtgta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hi TradersZone Good use of the warning linesalso the EP material is part of lesson 4 Rather than go backthrough the files to see when (or if) it was sent Im sending it along with this reply Glad youbrought it up Best RegardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Tuesday May 04 2000208 PM Dr Andrews used a fairly common price chart formation that he found useful at probable P5market tops and bottoms The formation generally called a wedge or pennant by chartists isreferred to in Dr Andrews trading course as the Expanding Pivot (EP) One of the few chartformations used in the course he regarded it as among the most dependable indications that amarket top was forming Closely related to the EP is his Inverted Expanding Pivot (IEP) which henoted could often be observed at market bottoms Both are regarded as intermediate and long-term reversal indicators Dr Andrews found that both formations were most reliable when they occurred after a sharprapid price move coinciding with the formation of a probable P5 He said it wasnt unusual for theformation to take several weeks to complete and that conservative traders could best avoid thewhipsaw associated with congestion patterns by trading only in the direction of the probable price

break out of the EP or IEP formation The attached charts illustrate these formations Please look over your own charts for an example ofthe EP and IEP and send me a copy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 232127

Hello Gordon Thank you for the lesson with the EP material I couldnt find it in any previous emailHere is my example for Rule 7 RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Rule 4Date Samstag 6 Mai 2000 080827

Wednesday May 05 2000 112127 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt Thank you for the lesson with the EP materialTZgt I couldnt find it in any previous emailTZgt Here is my example for Rule 7

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hi TradersZone

Glad you mentioned it earlierexcept for the EP IEP and hissideways channel Dr Andrews didnt have much to say about chartpatterns and formations These are good ones to use though

Your study of the penetration rule was good Later

Best Regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Wednesday May 05 2000801 PM

Page 71: Pitchfork primer

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Re[4] The Gap TradeDate Mittwoch 19 April 2000 124108

Hello Gordon this is my example with 5 trendlines RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[6] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 20 April 2000 012726

Monday April 19 2000 124108 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt this is my example with 5 trendlines

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Good example of the 5 TL technique Always reminds me of how the fairly simple tools often do a better job than manyof the sophisticated studies out there

That was the last part of lesson 5 Lesson 6 attached is made in one mailing Youll find Dr Andrews trading rules alongwith a wrap-up review which uses several of his rules You might have questions about some of the rules so feel free tosend them as they arise

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Dr Andrews had an abbreviated set of trading rules on several index cards that he carried around with him in his shirtpocket He said every trading day turned up something new on his charts and by having his rules in his pocket he wasreminded of the need for a methodical approach to his analysis Quite a comment coming from the man who wrote therule book

In this the final lesson of the course Dr Andrews original trading rules and observations are presented Lets work witha few of them at this point

Using charts of issues you follow please send me an example that illustrates your interpretation of each of the followingrules

Rule 4 Anticipating major Ps

Rule 7 Penetration rule

Rule 8 Price failure rule

Rule 11 1-ML23 AR Centerline

Rule 12 Sliding Parallel rule

Rule 15 Mini-median line parallel to buy or sell

Feel free to include any other course techniques you choose to apply but please include examples of the above as aminimum Use more than one technique on a chart if your analysis supports it Send as many charts as you like alongwith your questionscomments

Lesson 6 - Dr Andrews Trading Rules

This lesson covers course rules and significant observations as taught by Dr Andrews in his original trading course Therules are those that he used in his own trading and are provided to serve as a checklist for use with the course tradingmethods youve learned

Rule 1 Where prices are always headed Rule You course members are among the fortunate few to be able to draw astraight line and know that prices are headed toward that ML Very few investors have ever applied this ML principle ofstatistics to price fluctuations and weve never seen this in any books on investment You are among the very few who

know that prices are always headed toward the newest ML

Rule 2 The Rule of coming opposites applies all through life In the bible we find Blessed at they that mourn for theyshall be comforted As investors we know that any losses can be recovered by using course methods

Rule 3 Turn your mind about or Rethink for all good is at hand We should mentally prepare ourselves for thecoming reversal in prices and other affairs Heres one way for example that you course members who know the MLrules can use When prices are skyrocketing upward we do this preparation by thinking If prices pivoted here today atthis price Id draw a new ML bisecting the distance between todays price and the price from which the rise started Andwe know now that if this is a Major Pivot prices will fall rapidly to this new ML Profits from such drops are big and quick

Rule 4 Rule for anticipating major Ps If during congestion or after a rally or decline you can count four previous Psthe fifth one is highly probable to be the one from which a new trend starts

Rule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can make a quick big profit is to watch for the EPformations

Rule 6 The other reversal rule is that prices tend to reverse at or near any ML as well as at any extension of each MLAnd also at any MLH or extensions of MLH

Rule 7 The Penetration Rule is that whenever prices gap past or plunge through any ML there is a high probability thatthey will quickly return to it temporarily and then resume the trend they had before they gapped or plunged through

Rule 8 Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P of reversal and the MLthe probability is that this price reversal will go further than it did on its approach toward the ML

Rule 9 The price failure rule is negated when the next price trend is also a failure in reaching the ML This is almostinvariably a signal of a big fast move in the direction indicated by this last space Rule 10 When alternate median lines of comparable length slope in the same direction the trend is firm and rapidprice changes take place

Rule 11 When 1-ML23 is exactly reached at P4 it can be used as a highly reliable centerline for the AR method

Rule 12 Frequently after crossing a lower MLH prices continue to rise along the MLH Since the crossing of the MLHsignals a further drop is likely use a sliding parallel along the bottom of the most recent crossing If prices drop past thatsliding parallel line a sell signal is generated

Rule 13 MLs between P2 and P3 can start from a nearby or a remote P1 since prices tend to reverse at each of theseMLs Try several such P2-P3 MLs to discover the best fit

Rule 14 The distance of each MLH from its ML is the distance of the next warning line Use these warning lineswhenever a SH has signalled a buy or sell

Rule 15 Use the MMLH as a buy or sell signal when you expect a reversal because of a P5 Also when prices are at aWL ML extension line or where course lines converge or intersect

Rule 16 Converging lines that meet prices have shown the highest probability of a trend reversal

Rule 17 Two to four days is usually the maximum between P2 and P3 for a MML P1 can be a day or so back from P2and 3

Rule 18 The most reliable ActionReaction centerlines seem to be MPL 2P line 2 Gap line peak to low or low to peak

Rule 19 When prices pass through R lines look for a pull back and then a continuing move in the direction of the passthrough

Rule 20 Use gaps as Action lines from the centerline

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 003755

Hello Gordonhere is my example for Rule 4 And I have a question What are EP formations gtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 021242

Tuesday May 04 2000 123755 PM you wrote TZgt Hello GordonTZgt here is my example for Rule 4 TZgt And I have a question What are EP formations gtgtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegtgta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hi TradersZone Good use of the warning linesalso the EP material is part of lesson 4 Rather than go backthrough the files to see when (or if) it was sent Im sending it along with this reply Glad youbrought it up Best RegardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Tuesday May 04 2000208 PM Dr Andrews used a fairly common price chart formation that he found useful at probable P5market tops and bottoms The formation generally called a wedge or pennant by chartists isreferred to in Dr Andrews trading course as the Expanding Pivot (EP) One of the few chartformations used in the course he regarded it as among the most dependable indications that amarket top was forming Closely related to the EP is his Inverted Expanding Pivot (IEP) which henoted could often be observed at market bottoms Both are regarded as intermediate and long-term reversal indicators Dr Andrews found that both formations were most reliable when they occurred after a sharprapid price move coinciding with the formation of a probable P5 He said it wasnt unusual for theformation to take several weeks to complete and that conservative traders could best avoid thewhipsaw associated with congestion patterns by trading only in the direction of the probable price

break out of the EP or IEP formation The attached charts illustrate these formations Please look over your own charts for an example ofthe EP and IEP and send me a copy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 232127

Hello Gordon Thank you for the lesson with the EP material I couldnt find it in any previous emailHere is my example for Rule 7 RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Rule 4Date Samstag 6 Mai 2000 080827

Wednesday May 05 2000 112127 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt Thank you for the lesson with the EP materialTZgt I couldnt find it in any previous emailTZgt Here is my example for Rule 7

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hi TradersZone

Glad you mentioned it earlierexcept for the EP IEP and hissideways channel Dr Andrews didnt have much to say about chartpatterns and formations These are good ones to use though

Your study of the penetration rule was good Later

Best Regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Wednesday May 05 2000801 PM

Page 72: Pitchfork primer

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[6] The Gap TradeDate Donnerstag 20 April 2000 012726

Monday April 19 2000 124108 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt this is my example with 5 trendlines

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hello TradersZone

Good example of the 5 TL technique Always reminds me of how the fairly simple tools often do a better job than manyof the sophisticated studies out there

That was the last part of lesson 5 Lesson 6 attached is made in one mailing Youll find Dr Andrews trading rules alongwith a wrap-up review which uses several of his rules You might have questions about some of the rules so feel free tosend them as they arise

Best regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Dr Andrews had an abbreviated set of trading rules on several index cards that he carried around with him in his shirtpocket He said every trading day turned up something new on his charts and by having his rules in his pocket he wasreminded of the need for a methodical approach to his analysis Quite a comment coming from the man who wrote therule book

In this the final lesson of the course Dr Andrews original trading rules and observations are presented Lets work witha few of them at this point

Using charts of issues you follow please send me an example that illustrates your interpretation of each of the followingrules

Rule 4 Anticipating major Ps

Rule 7 Penetration rule

Rule 8 Price failure rule

Rule 11 1-ML23 AR Centerline

Rule 12 Sliding Parallel rule

Rule 15 Mini-median line parallel to buy or sell

Feel free to include any other course techniques you choose to apply but please include examples of the above as aminimum Use more than one technique on a chart if your analysis supports it Send as many charts as you like alongwith your questionscomments

Lesson 6 - Dr Andrews Trading Rules

This lesson covers course rules and significant observations as taught by Dr Andrews in his original trading course Therules are those that he used in his own trading and are provided to serve as a checklist for use with the course tradingmethods youve learned

Rule 1 Where prices are always headed Rule You course members are among the fortunate few to be able to draw astraight line and know that prices are headed toward that ML Very few investors have ever applied this ML principle ofstatistics to price fluctuations and weve never seen this in any books on investment You are among the very few who

know that prices are always headed toward the newest ML

Rule 2 The Rule of coming opposites applies all through life In the bible we find Blessed at they that mourn for theyshall be comforted As investors we know that any losses can be recovered by using course methods

Rule 3 Turn your mind about or Rethink for all good is at hand We should mentally prepare ourselves for thecoming reversal in prices and other affairs Heres one way for example that you course members who know the MLrules can use When prices are skyrocketing upward we do this preparation by thinking If prices pivoted here today atthis price Id draw a new ML bisecting the distance between todays price and the price from which the rise started Andwe know now that if this is a Major Pivot prices will fall rapidly to this new ML Profits from such drops are big and quick

Rule 4 Rule for anticipating major Ps If during congestion or after a rally or decline you can count four previous Psthe fifth one is highly probable to be the one from which a new trend starts

Rule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can make a quick big profit is to watch for the EPformations

Rule 6 The other reversal rule is that prices tend to reverse at or near any ML as well as at any extension of each MLAnd also at any MLH or extensions of MLH

Rule 7 The Penetration Rule is that whenever prices gap past or plunge through any ML there is a high probability thatthey will quickly return to it temporarily and then resume the trend they had before they gapped or plunged through

Rule 8 Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P of reversal and the MLthe probability is that this price reversal will go further than it did on its approach toward the ML

Rule 9 The price failure rule is negated when the next price trend is also a failure in reaching the ML This is almostinvariably a signal of a big fast move in the direction indicated by this last space Rule 10 When alternate median lines of comparable length slope in the same direction the trend is firm and rapidprice changes take place

Rule 11 When 1-ML23 is exactly reached at P4 it can be used as a highly reliable centerline for the AR method

Rule 12 Frequently after crossing a lower MLH prices continue to rise along the MLH Since the crossing of the MLHsignals a further drop is likely use a sliding parallel along the bottom of the most recent crossing If prices drop past thatsliding parallel line a sell signal is generated

Rule 13 MLs between P2 and P3 can start from a nearby or a remote P1 since prices tend to reverse at each of theseMLs Try several such P2-P3 MLs to discover the best fit

Rule 14 The distance of each MLH from its ML is the distance of the next warning line Use these warning lineswhenever a SH has signalled a buy or sell

Rule 15 Use the MMLH as a buy or sell signal when you expect a reversal because of a P5 Also when prices are at aWL ML extension line or where course lines converge or intersect

Rule 16 Converging lines that meet prices have shown the highest probability of a trend reversal

Rule 17 Two to four days is usually the maximum between P2 and P3 for a MML P1 can be a day or so back from P2and 3

Rule 18 The most reliable ActionReaction centerlines seem to be MPL 2P line 2 Gap line peak to low or low to peak

Rule 19 When prices pass through R lines look for a pull back and then a continuing move in the direction of the passthrough

Rule 20 Use gaps as Action lines from the centerline

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 003755

Hello Gordonhere is my example for Rule 4 And I have a question What are EP formations gtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 021242

Tuesday May 04 2000 123755 PM you wrote TZgt Hello GordonTZgt here is my example for Rule 4 TZgt And I have a question What are EP formations gtgtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegtgta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hi TradersZone Good use of the warning linesalso the EP material is part of lesson 4 Rather than go backthrough the files to see when (or if) it was sent Im sending it along with this reply Glad youbrought it up Best RegardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Tuesday May 04 2000208 PM Dr Andrews used a fairly common price chart formation that he found useful at probable P5market tops and bottoms The formation generally called a wedge or pennant by chartists isreferred to in Dr Andrews trading course as the Expanding Pivot (EP) One of the few chartformations used in the course he regarded it as among the most dependable indications that amarket top was forming Closely related to the EP is his Inverted Expanding Pivot (IEP) which henoted could often be observed at market bottoms Both are regarded as intermediate and long-term reversal indicators Dr Andrews found that both formations were most reliable when they occurred after a sharprapid price move coinciding with the formation of a probable P5 He said it wasnt unusual for theformation to take several weeks to complete and that conservative traders could best avoid thewhipsaw associated with congestion patterns by trading only in the direction of the probable price

break out of the EP or IEP formation The attached charts illustrate these formations Please look over your own charts for an example ofthe EP and IEP and send me a copy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 232127

Hello Gordon Thank you for the lesson with the EP material I couldnt find it in any previous emailHere is my example for Rule 7 RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Rule 4Date Samstag 6 Mai 2000 080827

Wednesday May 05 2000 112127 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt Thank you for the lesson with the EP materialTZgt I couldnt find it in any previous emailTZgt Here is my example for Rule 7

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hi TradersZone

Glad you mentioned it earlierexcept for the EP IEP and hissideways channel Dr Andrews didnt have much to say about chartpatterns and formations These are good ones to use though

Your study of the penetration rule was good Later

Best Regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Wednesday May 05 2000801 PM

Page 73: Pitchfork primer

know that prices are always headed toward the newest ML

Rule 2 The Rule of coming opposites applies all through life In the bible we find Blessed at they that mourn for theyshall be comforted As investors we know that any losses can be recovered by using course methods

Rule 3 Turn your mind about or Rethink for all good is at hand We should mentally prepare ourselves for thecoming reversal in prices and other affairs Heres one way for example that you course members who know the MLrules can use When prices are skyrocketing upward we do this preparation by thinking If prices pivoted here today atthis price Id draw a new ML bisecting the distance between todays price and the price from which the rise started Andwe know now that if this is a Major Pivot prices will fall rapidly to this new ML Profits from such drops are big and quick

Rule 4 Rule for anticipating major Ps If during congestion or after a rally or decline you can count four previous Psthe fifth one is highly probable to be the one from which a new trend starts

Rule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can make a quick big profit is to watch for the EPformations

Rule 6 The other reversal rule is that prices tend to reverse at or near any ML as well as at any extension of each MLAnd also at any MLH or extensions of MLH

Rule 7 The Penetration Rule is that whenever prices gap past or plunge through any ML there is a high probability thatthey will quickly return to it temporarily and then resume the trend they had before they gapped or plunged through

Rule 8 Price Failure Rule When prices fail to reach the ML as shown by a space between the P of reversal and the MLthe probability is that this price reversal will go further than it did on its approach toward the ML

Rule 9 The price failure rule is negated when the next price trend is also a failure in reaching the ML This is almostinvariably a signal of a big fast move in the direction indicated by this last space Rule 10 When alternate median lines of comparable length slope in the same direction the trend is firm and rapidprice changes take place

Rule 11 When 1-ML23 is exactly reached at P4 it can be used as a highly reliable centerline for the AR method

Rule 12 Frequently after crossing a lower MLH prices continue to rise along the MLH Since the crossing of the MLHsignals a further drop is likely use a sliding parallel along the bottom of the most recent crossing If prices drop past thatsliding parallel line a sell signal is generated

Rule 13 MLs between P2 and P3 can start from a nearby or a remote P1 since prices tend to reverse at each of theseMLs Try several such P2-P3 MLs to discover the best fit

Rule 14 The distance of each MLH from its ML is the distance of the next warning line Use these warning lineswhenever a SH has signalled a buy or sell

Rule 15 Use the MMLH as a buy or sell signal when you expect a reversal because of a P5 Also when prices are at aWL ML extension line or where course lines converge or intersect

Rule 16 Converging lines that meet prices have shown the highest probability of a trend reversal

Rule 17 Two to four days is usually the maximum between P2 and P3 for a MML P1 can be a day or so back from P2and 3

Rule 18 The most reliable ActionReaction centerlines seem to be MPL 2P line 2 Gap line peak to low or low to peak

Rule 19 When prices pass through R lines look for a pull back and then a continuing move in the direction of the passthrough

Rule 20 Use gaps as Action lines from the centerline

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 003755

Hello Gordonhere is my example for Rule 4 And I have a question What are EP formations gtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 021242

Tuesday May 04 2000 123755 PM you wrote TZgt Hello GordonTZgt here is my example for Rule 4 TZgt And I have a question What are EP formations gtgtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegtgta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hi TradersZone Good use of the warning linesalso the EP material is part of lesson 4 Rather than go backthrough the files to see when (or if) it was sent Im sending it along with this reply Glad youbrought it up Best RegardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Tuesday May 04 2000208 PM Dr Andrews used a fairly common price chart formation that he found useful at probable P5market tops and bottoms The formation generally called a wedge or pennant by chartists isreferred to in Dr Andrews trading course as the Expanding Pivot (EP) One of the few chartformations used in the course he regarded it as among the most dependable indications that amarket top was forming Closely related to the EP is his Inverted Expanding Pivot (IEP) which henoted could often be observed at market bottoms Both are regarded as intermediate and long-term reversal indicators Dr Andrews found that both formations were most reliable when they occurred after a sharprapid price move coinciding with the formation of a probable P5 He said it wasnt unusual for theformation to take several weeks to complete and that conservative traders could best avoid thewhipsaw associated with congestion patterns by trading only in the direction of the probable price

break out of the EP or IEP formation The attached charts illustrate these formations Please look over your own charts for an example ofthe EP and IEP and send me a copy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 232127

Hello Gordon Thank you for the lesson with the EP material I couldnt find it in any previous emailHere is my example for Rule 7 RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Rule 4Date Samstag 6 Mai 2000 080827

Wednesday May 05 2000 112127 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt Thank you for the lesson with the EP materialTZgt I couldnt find it in any previous emailTZgt Here is my example for Rule 7

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hi TradersZone

Glad you mentioned it earlierexcept for the EP IEP and hissideways channel Dr Andrews didnt have much to say about chartpatterns and formations These are good ones to use though

Your study of the penetration rule was good Later

Best Regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Wednesday May 05 2000801 PM

Page 74: Pitchfork primer

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 003755

Hello Gordonhere is my example for Rule 4 And I have a question What are EP formations gtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 021242

Tuesday May 04 2000 123755 PM you wrote TZgt Hello GordonTZgt here is my example for Rule 4 TZgt And I have a question What are EP formations gtgtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegtgta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hi TradersZone Good use of the warning linesalso the EP material is part of lesson 4 Rather than go backthrough the files to see when (or if) it was sent Im sending it along with this reply Glad youbrought it up Best RegardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Tuesday May 04 2000208 PM Dr Andrews used a fairly common price chart formation that he found useful at probable P5market tops and bottoms The formation generally called a wedge or pennant by chartists isreferred to in Dr Andrews trading course as the Expanding Pivot (EP) One of the few chartformations used in the course he regarded it as among the most dependable indications that amarket top was forming Closely related to the EP is his Inverted Expanding Pivot (IEP) which henoted could often be observed at market bottoms Both are regarded as intermediate and long-term reversal indicators Dr Andrews found that both formations were most reliable when they occurred after a sharprapid price move coinciding with the formation of a probable P5 He said it wasnt unusual for theformation to take several weeks to complete and that conservative traders could best avoid thewhipsaw associated with congestion patterns by trading only in the direction of the probable price

break out of the EP or IEP formation The attached charts illustrate these formations Please look over your own charts for an example ofthe EP and IEP and send me a copy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 232127

Hello Gordon Thank you for the lesson with the EP material I couldnt find it in any previous emailHere is my example for Rule 7 RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Rule 4Date Samstag 6 Mai 2000 080827

Wednesday May 05 2000 112127 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt Thank you for the lesson with the EP materialTZgt I couldnt find it in any previous emailTZgt Here is my example for Rule 7

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hi TradersZone

Glad you mentioned it earlierexcept for the EP IEP and hissideways channel Dr Andrews didnt have much to say about chartpatterns and formations These are good ones to use though

Your study of the penetration rule was good Later

Best Regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Wednesday May 05 2000801 PM

Page 75: Pitchfork primer

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 021242

Tuesday May 04 2000 123755 PM you wrote TZgt Hello GordonTZgt here is my example for Rule 4 TZgt And I have a question What are EP formations gtgtRule 5 Rule for easily detecting the major P from which you can makegtgta quick big profit is to watch for the EP formations TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone Hi TradersZone Good use of the warning linesalso the EP material is part of lesson 4 Rather than go backthrough the files to see when (or if) it was sent Im sending it along with this reply Glad youbrought it up Best RegardsGordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom Tuesday May 04 2000208 PM Dr Andrews used a fairly common price chart formation that he found useful at probable P5market tops and bottoms The formation generally called a wedge or pennant by chartists isreferred to in Dr Andrews trading course as the Expanding Pivot (EP) One of the few chartformations used in the course he regarded it as among the most dependable indications that amarket top was forming Closely related to the EP is his Inverted Expanding Pivot (IEP) which henoted could often be observed at market bottoms Both are regarded as intermediate and long-term reversal indicators Dr Andrews found that both formations were most reliable when they occurred after a sharprapid price move coinciding with the formation of a probable P5 He said it wasnt unusual for theformation to take several weeks to complete and that conservative traders could best avoid thewhipsaw associated with congestion patterns by trading only in the direction of the probable price

break out of the EP or IEP formation The attached charts illustrate these formations Please look over your own charts for an example ofthe EP and IEP and send me a copy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 232127

Hello Gordon Thank you for the lesson with the EP material I couldnt find it in any previous emailHere is my example for Rule 7 RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Rule 4Date Samstag 6 Mai 2000 080827

Wednesday May 05 2000 112127 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt Thank you for the lesson with the EP materialTZgt I couldnt find it in any previous emailTZgt Here is my example for Rule 7

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hi TradersZone

Glad you mentioned it earlierexcept for the EP IEP and hissideways channel Dr Andrews didnt have much to say about chartpatterns and formations These are good ones to use though

Your study of the penetration rule was good Later

Best Regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Wednesday May 05 2000801 PM

Page 76: Pitchfork primer

break out of the EP or IEP formation The attached charts illustrate these formations Please look over your own charts for an example ofthe EP and IEP and send me a copy

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 232127

Hello Gordon Thank you for the lesson with the EP material I couldnt find it in any previous emailHere is my example for Rule 7 RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Rule 4Date Samstag 6 Mai 2000 080827

Wednesday May 05 2000 112127 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt Thank you for the lesson with the EP materialTZgt I couldnt find it in any previous emailTZgt Here is my example for Rule 7

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hi TradersZone

Glad you mentioned it earlierexcept for the EP IEP and hissideways channel Dr Andrews didnt have much to say about chartpatterns and formations These are good ones to use though

Your study of the penetration rule was good Later

Best Regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Wednesday May 05 2000801 PM

Page 77: Pitchfork primer

From TradersZoneTo GordonSubject Re Rule 4Date Freitag 5 Mai 2000 232127

Hello Gordon Thank you for the lesson with the EP material I couldnt find it in any previous emailHere is my example for Rule 7 RegardsTradersZone

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Rule 4Date Samstag 6 Mai 2000 080827

Wednesday May 05 2000 112127 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt Thank you for the lesson with the EP materialTZgt I couldnt find it in any previous emailTZgt Here is my example for Rule 7

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hi TradersZone

Glad you mentioned it earlierexcept for the EP IEP and hissideways channel Dr Andrews didnt have much to say about chartpatterns and formations These are good ones to use though

Your study of the penetration rule was good Later

Best Regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Wednesday May 05 2000801 PM

Page 78: Pitchfork primer

From GordonTo TradersZoneSubject Re[2] Rule 4Date Samstag 6 Mai 2000 080827

Wednesday May 05 2000 112127 AM you wrote

TZgt Hello Gordon

TZgt Thank you for the lesson with the EP materialTZgt I couldnt find it in any previous emailTZgt Here is my example for Rule 7

TZgt RegardsTZgt TradersZone

Hi TradersZone

Glad you mentioned it earlierexcept for the EP IEP and hissideways channel Dr Andrews didnt have much to say about chartpatterns and formations These are good ones to use though

Your study of the penetration rule was good Later

Best Regards Gordon mailtogordonpitchforkprimercom

Wednesday May 05 2000801 PM